Catalog SIP E7 Complete

www.siemens.
com/protection
SIPROTEC 4, SIPROTEC easy,

SIPROTEC 600 Series, Communication, Accessories
Catalog SIP Edition No. 7
Answers for infrastructure and cities.

Overview of Siemens Protection Catalogs
Overview of Siemens protection catalogs
SIPROTEC 4, SIPROTEC Series 600, SIPROTEC easy, SIPROTEC Compact catalog:

Communication and Accessories: The SIPROTEC Compact catalog describes the features of the
This catalog describes the features of the device series SIPROTEC Compact series and presents the available devices
SIPROTEC 4, SIPROTEC series 600 and SIPROTEC easy, as well and their application possibilities.
as their devices. In further chapters, the accessories of the
complete SIPROTEC family for communication, auxiliary relays SIPROTEC 5 catalogs:
and test equipment are described. The system catalog describes the features of the SIPROTEC 5
system. The SIPROTEC 5 device catalogs describe device-
Protection Selection Guide: specic features such as scope of functions, hardware and
The selection guide offers an overview of the device series of application.
the Siemens protection devices, and a device selection table.
Contents
SIPROTEC 4, 1. Product Selection
1/1 to 1/6 11
SIPROTEC easy,
SIPROTEC 600 Series, 2. Overview / Applications
2/1 to 2/50 22
Communication,
3. Operating Programs
Accessories 3/1 to 3/12 33
Energy Automation
4. Communication
Catalog SIP Edition No. 7 4/1 to 4/12 44

Invalid: Catalog SIP Edition No. 6 5. Overcurrent Protection
5/1 to 5/204 55
6. Distance Protection
6/1 to 6/82 66
7. Line Differential Protection
7/1 to 7/80 77
8. Transformer Differential Protection
8/1 to 8/48 88
9. Busbar Differential Protection
9/1 to 9/34 99
10. Relays for Various Protection Applications
10/1 to 10/36 10
10
11. Generator Protection
11/1 to 11/124 11
11
12. Substation Automation
12/1 to 12/34 12
12
13. Accessories
13/1 to 13/174 13
13
14. Appendix
The products and systems described in this catalog
are manufactured and sold according to a certied
management system (acc. to ISO 9001, ISO 14001
14/1 to 14/30 14
14
and BS OHSAS 18001).
DNV Certicate No.: 92113-2011-AHSO-GER-TGA
and Certicate No.: 87028-2010-AHSO-GER-TGA.
Siemens SIP Edition No. 7 1

Product Index
Type Description Page
DIGSI 4 Operating software for SIPROTEC devices 3/3
SIGRA 4 Evaluation software for fault records 3/9
3RV16 Voltage transformer mini circuit-breaker 13/3

2 4AM Auxiliary current transformer 13/7
6MD61 IO-box 12/3
6MD63 Bay control unit 12/11
6MD66 High-voltage bay control unit 12/13
7PA22/23 Auxiliary relay 13/11
7PA26/27/30 Auxiliary relay 13/15
7RW600 Voltage, frequency and overexcitation relay 11/71
7SA522 Distance protection relay for transmission lines 6/45
7SA6 Distance protection relay for all voltage levels 6/3
7SC80 SNTP-Master/Server with GPS module 13/159
7SD52/53 Multi-end differential and distance protection in one relay 7/43
7SD60 Pilot-wire current differential protection relay 7/3
7SD61 Differential protection relay for 2 line ends 7/17
7SJ45 easy Overcurrent protection relay powered by CT 5/3
7SJ46 easy Overcurrent protection relay 5/11
7SJ600 Overcurrent, motor and overload protection relay 5/19
7SJ602 Overcurrent, motor and overload protection relay 5/31
7SJ61 Multifunction protection relay 5/55
7SJ64 Multifunction protection relay with synchronization 5/161
7SN60 Transient earth-fault protection relay 10/31
7SS52 Distributed busbar and breaker failure protection 9/19
7SS60 Centralized busbar protection 9/3
7SV600 Numerical circuit-breaker failure protection relay 10/21
7TS16 Annunciation relay 13/21
7UM61 Multifunction generator and motor protection relay 11/3
7UM62 Multifunction generator, motor and transformer protection relay 11/33
7UT6 Differential protection relay for transformers, generators, motors and busbars 8/3
7UW50 Tripping matrix 11/69
7VE6 Multifunction paralleling device 11/81
7VK61 Breaker management relay 10/3
7VU683 High Speed Busbar Transfer 11/103
7XR95 Isolating transformer 13/7
7XV5101 RS232 FO connector modules 13/43
2 Siemens SIP Edition No. 7

Product Index
Type Description Page
7XV5103 RS485 Bus system 13/45 1

7XV5104 Bus cables for time synchronization 13/161
7XV5105 Bus cables for time synchronization for 7SD5 13/163
7XV5450 Mini star-coupler 13/53 2

7XV5461 Two-channel serial optical repeater for duplex-mono-mode FO cable 13/61
7XV5461
7XV5461
Two-channel serial optical repeater for 1 mono-mode FO cable
Two-channel serial optical repeater for duplex-multi-mode FO cables

13/57
13/65
3
7XV5550 Active mini star-coupler 13/69
7XV5650/5651 RS485 FO converter 13/73 4

7XV5652 RS232 FO converter 13/77
7XV5653 Two-channel binary transducer 13/81
7XV5654 GPS/DCF77 Time synchronization unit 13/165 5

7XV5655 Ethernet modem 13/85
7XV5655
7XV5662
Ethernet serial hub for substations
Communication converter for X.21/RS422 and G.703.1

13/89
13/93
6
7XV5662 Communication converter for pilot wires 13/97
7XV5662 Two-channel serial communication converter 13/101 7

7XV5662 Resistance temperature detector (RTD) box 13/145, 13/153
7XV5662 Universal relay, RTD-/20 mA-Box 13/149
7XV5664 GPS/DCF77 Time signal receiver 13/165 8

7XV5664-1 GPS Time Synchronization Unit 13/169
7XV5673
7XV5674
I/O-Unit with 6 binary in-/outputs
SICAM AI Unit
13/23
13/31
9
7XV5700 RS232 RS485 converter 13/105
7XV5710 USB RS485 converter cable 13/109 10

7XV5820 Industrial modem and modem-router with switch 13/113
7XV5850/51 Ethernet modems for ofce applications 13/121
7XV75 Test switch 13/157 11

SCALANCE X204RNA HSR Industrial Ethernet network access device with HSR functionality 13/125
SCALANCE X204RNA PRP
SCALANCE S
Industrial Ethernet network access device with PRP functionality
Security Module
13/127
13/131
12
SCALANCE M EDGE/HSPARouter 13/133
Softnet-IE RNA Software for PRP networks 13/129 13

RUGGEDCOM RS900 9-Port Managed Ethernet Switch with Fiber Optical Uplinks 13/135
RUGGEDCOM RSG2100 19" Ethernet-Switch 13/137
RUGGEDCOM RSG2488 Managed 28 Gigabit Port Ethernet Rack switch 13/139 14

SITOP Power Supply 13/143
15
Siemens SIP Edition No. 7 3
2
4 Siemens SIP Edition No. 7

Product Selection
Page
1
Relay Functions 1/2
Product Selection
Function overview SIPROTEC 4, SIPROTEC easy and SIPROTEC 600 Series
Device application Distance Line

protection differential
1 protection
SIPROTEC 600 Series

2
SIPROTEC easy
Device family
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 4
3
7SD610
7SA522
7SD60
7SA61
7SA63
7SA64
7SJ45
7SJ46
7SD5
Type
4 ANSI Functions
Protection functions for 3-pole tripping
Abbr.
3-pole C C C C C C C C C
Protection functions for 1-pole tripping 1-pole V V V V V V
14 Locked rotor protection I> + V<
5 21 Distance protection Z< C C C C V
24 Overexcitation protection V/f
25 Synchrocheck, synchronizing function Sync V V V V V
V V V V V V
6 27 Undervoltage protection
27TN/59TN Stator ground fault 3rd harmonics
V<
V0<,>(3.Harm.)

27/Q Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection Q>/V<
32 Directional power supervision P<>, Q<> C C C C V C
7 37
38
Undercurrent, underpower
Temperature supervision
I<, P<
>

40 Underexcitation protection 1/XD
46 Unbalanced-load protection I2>
8 46 Negative-sequence system overcurrent protection I2>, I2/I1>
47 Phase-sequence-voltage supervision LA, LB, LC C C C C C C
48 Starting-time supervision I2start
C C C C C
9 49
50/50N
Thermal overload protection
Denite time-overcurrent protection
, I2t
I> C C C C V C C

C

C
50Ns Sensitive ground-current protection INs> V V V V V
Intermittent ground fault protection Iie>
10 50L Load-jam protection I>L

50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection CBFP V V V V V V C
51/51N Inverse time-overcurrent protection IP, INp C C C C C C C C
51C Cold load pickup
11 51V Voltage dependent overcurrent protection t=f(I)+V<
55 Power factor cos C C C C C C
59 Overvoltage protection V> V V V V V V
12 59R, 27R
60FL
Rate-of-voltage-change protection
Fuse-Failure-Monitor
dV/dt
C C C C

V C

64 Sensitive ground-fault protection (machine)
66 Restart inhibit I2t
13 67 Directional time-overcurrent protection, phase I>,IP (V,I) C C C C V
C = basic V = optional (additional price) = not available
1) in preparation
14 2) via CFC
More functions on page 1/4
You will nd the whole function overview of the SIPROTEC devices in the Selection Guide at:
www.siemens.com/protection or in the catalog: IC1000-K4456-A101-AX-7600
15
1/2 Siemens SIP Edition No. 7
Product Selection
Device application Generator Transformer Busbar Bay controller Breaker Synchro- High Voltage
and motor protection protection manage- nizing Speed and fre-
protection ment Busbar
Transfer
quency
pro-
1
tection
SIPROTEC 600 Series
SIPROTEC 600 Series
SIPROTEC 600 Series

2
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 4
3
7VU683
7UT612
7UT613
7UM61
7UM62
6MD61
6MD63
6MD66
7SJ600
7SJ602
7RW60
7UT63
7VK61
7SS60
7SS52
7SJ61
7SJ62
7SJ63
7SJ64
7VE6
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C V C
4
C C
V V V V V V
V 5
C C V V V
V V V V C
V V V C C V V V V C

V

6
C C
V V C C V V
C
V
C
V
C
V
C2)
V
C
V
V
V
V
V

V

V

V

7
V V
C C C C C C V V V V V
C C C C C C C C V V V 8
C C C C C C C C C C
V V V V V V
C C C C C C C C C C C

V

V

C

9
V V V V V C C
V V V
V V V V 10
C C C C C C V C V V V C V C
C C C C C C C C C C C V V
C C C C
C C C C 11
V C2) V V V C C C
V V V V C C V V V V C

V
C

C
V
C V

C

C

12
C C
V V V V V V V
V V V C C 13
Table continued on next page
14
15
Siemens SIP Edition No. 7 1/3
Product Selection
Device application Distance Line

protection differential
1 protection
SIPROTEC 600 Series

2
SIPROTEC easy
Device family
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 4
3
7SD610
7SA522
7SD60
7SA61
7SA63
7SA64
7SJ45
7SJ46
7SD5
Type
4 ANSI
67N
Functions
Directional time-overcurrent protection for ground-faults
Abbr.
IN>, INP (V,I) V V V V V V V
67Ns Sensitive ground-fault detection for systems with resonant INs>,
or isolated neutral INsP (V,I)
V V V V V
5 67Ns
68
Directional intermittent ground fault protection
Power-swing blocking
IIE dir>
Z/t

V V

V

V

V

74TC Trip-circuit supervision TCS C C C C C C
78 Out-of-step protection Z/t V V V V V
6 79 Automatic reclosing AR V V V V V V
81 Frequency protection f<, f> V V V V V V
81R Rate-of-frequency-change protection df/dt
7 85
Vector-jump protection
Teleprotection
U>
C C C C C C

C

86 Lockout C C C C C C
87 Differential protection I C C C
8 87N Differential ground-fault protection

Broken-wire detection for differential protection
IN

C
C
V
C

FL Fault locator FL C C C C C C
Further Functions
9 Measured values C C C C C C C
Switching-statistic counters C C C C C C
Logic editor C C C C C C
10 CFC switching sequences for control applications

Inrush-current detection
V C C
C C C C C C C

External trip initiation C C C C C C
High Speed busbar transfer function
11 Fault recording of analog and binary signals C C C C C C C
Monitoring and supervision C C C C C C C
Protection interface, serial V V V V C C
No. Setting groups 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 1
12 Changeover of setting group C C C C C C
C = basic V = optional (additional price) = not available
13 1) in preparation
2) via CFC
You will nd the whole function overview of the SIPROTEC devices in the Selection Guide at:
www.siemens.com/protection or in the catalog: IC1000-K4456-A101-AX-7600
14
15
Product Selection
Device application Generator Transformer Busbar Bay controller Breaker Synchro- High Voltage
and motor protection protection manage- nizing Speed and fre-
protection ment Busbar
Transfer
quency
pro-
1
tection
SIPROTEC 600 Series
SIPROTEC 600 Series
SIPROTEC 600 Series

2
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 4
3
7VU683
7UT612
7UT613
7UM61
7UM62
6MD61
6MD63
6MD66
7SJ600
7SJ602
7RW60
7UT63
7VK61
7SS60
7SS52
7SJ61
7SJ62
7SJ63
7SJ64
7VE6
V V V C C
4
V V V V C C

C

C

V

5
C C C C C C C C V C C C C C
V
V V V V V V V C 6
V V V C C V V V C
V V V V V C
V V V

7
C C C C C C
V

V

V

V

V

V

V

V
C
V
C
V
C

8
V V V
C C C C C C C C C C C C C V C C C C C C 9
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C
C C C C V C C C
C

C C C C2) C C

C C C C

C

C

V

V

10
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C
C
C C C C C C C C C C C C C V C C C C 11
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C

1 1 4 4 4 4 2 2 4 4 4 1 1 4 4 4 4 4 4 1
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C 12
13
14
15
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Overview / Applications
Page
SIPROTEC relay families 2/3
Typical protection schemes 2/17

2
Protection coordination 2/39
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Overview
SIPROTEC relay families
Solutions for todays and future power supply systems

for more than 100 years
SIPROTEC has established itself on the energy market for 1
decades as a powerful and complete system family of numerical
protection relays and bay controllers from Siemens.
SIPROTEC protection relays from Siemens can be consistently
used throughout all applications in medium and high voltage.
2
With SIPROTEC, operators have their systems rmly and safely
under control, and have the basis to implement cost-efcient
solutions for all duties in modern, intelligent and smart grids.
Users can combine the units of the different SIPROTEC device 3
series at will for solving manifold duties because SIPROTEC
stands for continuity, openness and future-proof design.
As the innovation driver and trendsetter in the eld of protec-
tion systems for more than 100 years, Siemens helps system 4
operators to design their grids in an intelligent, ecological,
reliable and efcient way, and to operate them economically.
As a pioneer, Siemens has decisively inuenced the develop-
ment of numerical protection systems (Fig. 2/2). The rst
Fig. 2/1
5
application went into operation in Wrzburg, Germany, in 1977.
Consistent integration of protection and control functions for How can system operators benet from this experience?
all SIPROTEC devices was the innovation step in the 90ies. After Proven and complete applications
release of the communication standard IEC 61850 in the year
2004, Siemens was the rst manufacturer worldwide to put a
Easy integration into your system 6
system with this communication standard into operation. In the Highest quality of hardware and software
meantime we have delivered more than 250,000 devices with Excellent operator friendliness of devices and tools
IEC 61850 included. Easy data exchange between applications 7
Extraordinary consistency between product- and system-
engineering
Reduced complexity by easy operation
Siemens as a reliable, worldwide operating partner. 8
10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 2/2 SIPROTEC Pioneer over generations

15
Overview
SIPROTEC easy
1 SIPROTEC easy are CT power supplied or auxiliary power sup-

plied, numerical overcurrent-time protection relays, which can
be used as line and transformer protection (back-up protection)
in electrical power supply systems with single-ended supply.
They offer denite-time and inverse-time overcurrent protection
2 functions according to IEC and ANSI. The comfortable operation
via DIP switch is self-explanatory and simple.
Two-stage overcurrent-time protection
Saving the auxiliary power supply by operation via integrated
3 current transformer supply
Cost-efcient due to the use of instrument transformers with
low ratings
4 Tripping via pulse output (DC 24 V / 0.1 Ws) or tripping relay

output
Simple, self-explanatory parameterization and operation via
DIP switch directly at the device
5 Easy installation due to compact assembly on DIN rail. Fig. 2/3 SIPROTEC easy
SIPROTEC Compact (series 600)

The devices of the SIPROTEC Compact series (series 600)
6 are compact, numerical protection devices for application in
medium-voltage or industrial power supply systems. The corre-
sponding device types are available for the different applications
such as overcurrent-time protection, line differential protection,
7 transient ground-fault relay or busbar protection.

Space-saving due to compact design
Reliable process connections by means of solid terminal blocks
Effective fault evaluation by means of integrated fault record-
8 ing and SIGRA 4
Communication interface
Operable and evaluable via DIGSI 4
9 Different device types available for directional and non-

directional applications.
10
Fig. 2/4 SIPROTEC Compact (series 600)
11
12
13
14
15
Overview
SIPROTEC Compact Maximum protection-minimum space

Perfect protection, smallest space reliable and exible protection
for energy distribution and industrial systems with minimum 1
space requirements. The devices of the SIPROTEC Compact
family offer an extensive variety of functions in a compact and
thus space-saving x 19" housing. The devices can be used as
main protection in medium-voltage applications or as back-up
protection in high-voltage systems.
2
SIPROTEC Compact provides suitable devices for many applica-
tions in energy distribution, such as the protection of feeders,
lines or motors. Moreover, it also performs tasks such as system 3
decoupling, load shedding, load restoration, as well as voltage
and frequency protection.
The SIPROTEC Compact series is based on millions of operational
experience with SIPROTEC 4 and a further-developed, compact 4
hardware, in which many customer suggestions were integrated.
This offers maximum reliability combined with excellent func-
tionality and exibility.
Simple installation by means of pluggable current and voltage
Fig. 2/5 SIPROTEC Compact 5
terminal blocks
Thresholds adjustable via software (3 stages guarantee a safe
and reliable recording of input signals)
Easy adjustment of secondary current transformer values
6
(1 A/5 A) to primary transformers via DIGSI 4
Quick operations at the device by means of 9 freely program-
mable function keys
Clear overview with six-line display
7
Easy service due to buffer battery replaceable at the front side
Use of standard cables via USB port at the front
Integration in the communication network by means of two 8
further communication interfaces
Integrated switch for low-cost and redundant optical and
electrical Ethernet rings
Ethernet redundancy protocols RSTP, PRP and HSR for highest
9
availability
Reduction of wiring between devices by means of cross-
communication via Ethernet (IEC 61850 GOOSE)
Time synchronization to the millisecond via Ethernet with Fig. 2/6 SIPROTEC Compact rear view 10
SNTP for targeted fault evaluation
Adjustable to the protection requirements by means of
exible protection functions
Comfortable engineering and evaluation via DIGSI 4.
11
12
13
14
Fig. 2/7 Feeder protection relay 7SC80

15
Overview
SIPROTEC 5 the new benchmark for protection,

automation and monitoring
1 The SIPROTEC 5 series is based on the long eld experience of
the SIPROTEC device series, and has been especially designed
for the new requirements of modern high-voltage systems.
For this purpose, SIPROTEC 5 is equipped with extensive func-
2 tionalities and device types. With the holistic and consistent
engineering tool DIGSI 5, a solution has also been provided for
the increasingly complex processes, from the design via the
engineering phase up to the test and operation phase.
3 Thanks to the high modularity of hardware and software, the
functionality and hardware of the devices can be tailored to
the requested application and adjusted to the continuously
changing requirements throughout the entire life cycle.
4 Besides the reliable and selective protection and the complete
automation function, SIPROTEC 5 offers an extensive database
for operation and monitoring of modern power supply sys-
tems. Synchrophasors (PMU), power quality data and extensive
5 operational equipment data are part of the scope of supply.
Fig. 2/8 SIPROTEC 5 modular hardware
Powerful protection functions guarantee the safety of the
system operator's equipment and employees
6 Individually congurable devices save money on initial

investment as well as storage of spare parts, maintenance,
expansion and adjustment of your equipment
Clear and easy-to-use of devices and software thanks to
7 user-friendly design
Increase of reliability and quality of the engineering process
High reliability due to consequent implementation of safety
and security
8 Powerful communication components guarantee safe and
effective solutions
Full compatibility between IEC 61850 Editions 1 and 2
Integrated switch for low-cost and redundant optical and
9 electrical Ethernet rings
availability
Efcient operating concepts by exible engineering of
10 IEC 61850 Edition 2
Fig. 2/9 SIPROTEC 5 rear view
Comprehensive database for monitoring of modern power
grids
11 Optimal smart automation platform for transmission grids

based on integrated synchrophasor measurement units
(PMU) and power quality functions.
12
13
14
15 Fig. 2/10 Application in the high-voltage system

Overview
SIPROTEC 4 the proven, reliable and future-proof

protection for all applications
SIPROTEC 4 represents a worldwide successful and proven device 1
series with more than 1 million devices in eld use.
Due to the homogenous system platform, the unique engineer-
ing program DIGSI 4 and the great eld experience, the
SIPROTEC 4 device family has gained the highest appreciation
2
of users all over the world. Today, SIPROTEC 4 is considered
the standard for numerical protection systems in all elds of
application.
SIPROTEC 4 provides suitable devices for all applications from
3
power generation and transmission up to distribution and
industrial systems.
SIPROTEC 4 is a milestone in protection systems. The SIPROTEC 4
device series implements the integration of protection, control,
4
measuring and automation functions optimally in one device. In
many elds of application, all tasks of the secondary systems can
be performed with one single device. The open and future-proof
concept of SIPROTEC 4 has been ensured for the entire device Fig. 2/11 SIPROTEC 4
5
series with the implementation of IEC 61850.
Proven protection functions guarantee the safety of the
systems operator's equipment and employees
Comfortable engineering and evaluation via DIGSI 4
6
Simple creation of automation solutions by means of the
integrated CFC
Targeted and easy operation of devices and software thanks to 7
user-friendly design
Powerful communication components guarantee safe and
effective solutions
Maximum experience worldwide in the use of SIPROTEC 4 and 8
in the implementation of IEC 61850 projects
Future-proof due to exchangeable communication interfaces
and integrated CFC.
Integrated switch for low-cost and redundant optical Ethernet
9
rings
availability.
Fig. 2/12 SIPROTEC 4 rear view
10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 2/13 SIPROTEC 4 in power plant application
15
Overview
To fulll vital protection redundancy requirements, only those Measuring included

functions that are interdependent and directly associated with
1 each other are integrated into the same unit. For backup protec-
tion, one or more additional units should be provided.
For many applications, the accuracy of the protection current
transformer is sufcient for operational measuring. The addi-
tional measuring current transformer was required to protect
All relays can stand fully alone. Thus, the traditional protection the measuring instruments under short-circuit conditions. Due
principle of separate main and backup protection as well as the to the low thermal withstand capability of the measuring instru-
2 external connection to the switchyard remain unchanged. ments, they could not be connected to the protection current
transformer. Consequently, additional measuring core current
One feeder, one relay concept transformers and measuring instruments are now only necessary
Analog protection schemes have been engineered and where high accuracy is required, e.g., for revenue metering.
3 assembled from individual relays. Interwiring between these
Corrective rather than preventive maintenance
relays and scheme testing has been carried out manually in the
workshop. Numerical relays monitor their own hardware and software.
Exhaustive self-monitoring and failure diagnostic routines are
4 Data sharing now allows for the integration of several protection
and protection-related tasks into one single numerical relay.
not restricted to the protection relay itself but are methodically
carried through from current transformer circuits to tripping
Only a few external devices may be required for completion of
relay coils.
the total scheme. This has signicantly lowered the costs of
engineering, assembly, panel wiring, testing and commissioning. Equipment failures and faults in the current transformer circuits
5 Scheme failure probability has also been lowered. are immediately reported and the protection relay is blocked.
Engineering has moved from schematic diagrams toward a Thus, service personnel are now able to correct the failure upon
parameter denition procedure. The powerful user-denable occurrence, resulting in a signicantly upgraded availability of
logic of SIPROTEC 4 allows exible customized design for protec- the protection system.
6 tion, control and measurement.
8
52
9
21 67N FL 79 25 SM ER FR BM
10
85
SIPROTEC Line protection
11 Serial link to station or personal computer
kA, ER
to remote line end kV,
12 Hz,
MW,
FR
SM
21 Distance protection MVAr,
67N Directional ground-fault protection MVA BM
Load monitor
FL Distance-to-fault locator
13 79
25
Auto-reclosure
Synchrocheck
Fault report
Fault record
85 Carrier interface (teleprotection)
SM Self-monitoring Relay monitor
ER Event recording
14 FR
BM
Fault recording
Breaker monitor
Breaker monitor
Supervisory control
15 Fig. 2/14 Numerical relays offer increased information availability

Overview
Adaptive relaying
1000 Parameter
Numerical relays now offer reliable, convenient and comprehen-
sive matching to changing conditions. Matching may be initiated 1000
1100
.
Parameter
.
Line data D
1
either by the relays own intelligence or from other systems via 1100 Line
1200 data O/C C Phase settings
1000 .
Parameter .
contacts or serial telegrams. Modern numerical relays contain a . . B
1100 Line data
1200 O/C Phase settings
number of parameter sets that can be pretested during commis- . . 1500 O/C Earth settings
sioning of the scheme. One set is normally operative. Transfer to
the other sets can be controlled via binary inputs or a serial data
1000
1100
.
.
Parameter
.
Line
.
data
1200
. A
O/C
.
Phase
1500
.
.
settings
O/C
2800Earth settings
Fault recording
2
. . .
1200 O/C Phase settings .
link (Fig. 2/15). . 1500 O/C Earth settings
2800 Fault
3900recording
. . . Breaker failure
. .
There are a number of applications for which multiple setting 1500 O/C Earth settings
groups can upgrade the scheme performance, for example:
.
.
2800
2800
.
.
Fault
Fault
recording
3900recording
Breaker failure
3
. 3900 Breaker failure
For use as a voltage-dependent control of overcurrent-time .
relay pickup values to overcome alternator fault current 3900 Breaker failure
decrement to below normal load current when the automatic
voltage regulator (AVR) is not in automatic operation
Fig. 2/15 Alternate parameter groups
4
For maintaining short operation times with lower fault
currents, e.g., automatic change of settings if one supply
transformer is taken out of service
For switch-onto-fault protection to provide shorter time 5
settings when energizing a circuit after maintenance so that
normal settings can be restored automatically after a time
delay
For auto-reclosure programs, that is, instantaneous operation 6
for rst trip and delayed operation after unsuccessful reclosure
For cold load pickup problems where high starting currents
may cause relay operation
For ring open or ring closed operation.
7
Implemented functions
SIPROTEC relays are available with a variety of protective
functions (please refer to Fig. 2/17). The high processing power
8
of modern numerical units allows further integration of non-
protective add-on functions.
The question as to whether separate or combined relays should
be used for protection and control cannot be unambiguously
9
answered. In transmission-type substations, separation into
independent hardware units is still preferred, whereas a trend Fig. 2/16 Left: switchgear with numerical relay (7SJ62) and traditional
control; right: switchgear with combined protection and
toward higher function integration can be observed on the
distribution level. Here, the use of combined feeder / line relays
control relay (7SJ64) 10
for protection, monitoring and control is becoming more com-
mon (Fig. 2/16).
Relays with protection functions only and relays with combined
protection and control functions are being offered. SIPROTEC 4
11
relays offer combined protection and control functions.
SIPROTEC 4 relays support the one relay one feeder principle,
and thus contribute to a considerable reduction in space and
wiring requirements. 12
With the well-proven SIPROTEC 4 family, Siemens supports both
stand-alone and combined solutions on the basis of a single
hardware and software platform. The user can decide within
wide limits on the conguration of the control and protection,
13
and the reliability of the protection functions (Fig. 2/17).
The following solutions are available within one relay family:
Separate control and protection relays 14
Feeder protection and remote control of the line circuit-breaker
via the serial communication link
Combined relays for protection, monitoring and control.
15
Overview
1 52
Busbar
7SJ61/62/63/64 7SJ62/63/64 2)
Local/remote control CFC logic Metering values

Command/feedback 25 Synchronization
Set points,
I, V, Watts,
2 Trip circuit
supervision
74TC Lockout 86
mean values,
Min/Max-Log Vars, p.f., f V, f, P
P<>
Q<> p.f. df/dt
Motor 33 Communication RTD1) box Energy meter: 32 55 81R
control modules interface calculated and/or by impulses
f<> V> V<
3 HMI RS232/485/FO/
Ethernet
Fault
recording
Motor protection
Bearing Starting Fault
81O/U 59 27
temp. I< time locator Directional

IEC60870-5-103
IEC61850 38 37 48 21FL phase-sequence
47 monitoring
Probus-FMS/-DP
4 DNP 3.0
MODBUS RTU
14 Locked
rotor
66/86
Restart
inhibit
I dir.>> I E dir.>>
I dir.> I E dir.>
Ipdir. I Epdir.
67 67N
I E >,
I>> I>, Ip I E >> I Ep I2 > >
5 50 51 50N 51N 46 49
Inrush
restraint
Interm.
earth t. 50BF
Dir. sensitive
Breaker failure ground-fault detection
protection
I EE>>
I E >, High-impedance Auto- I EE> VE>
I E >>
6 50N
I Ep
51N
restricted ground-fault 79 reclosure
87N 67Ns
I EEp
64
1) RTD = resistance temperature detector 2) VT connection for 7SJ62/63/64 only
7 Fig. 2/17 SIPROTEC 4 relays 7SJ61 / 62 / 63, 64 implemented functions
8 Terminals: Standard relay version with screw-type terminals Mechanical Design

Current terminals SIPROTEC 4 relays are available in to of 19 wide housings
Connection Wmax =12 mm with a standard height of 243 mm. Their size is compatible with
Ring cable lugs d1 = 5 mm that of other relay families. Therefore, compatible exchange is
9 Wire size 2.7 4 mm2 (AWG 13 11)
always possible (Fig. 2/18 to Fig. 2/20).
Direct connection Solid conductor, exible lead, All wires (cables) are connected at the rear side of the relay
connector sleeve with or without ring cable lugs. A special relay version with a
Wire size 2.7 4 mm2 (AWG 13 11) detached cable-connected operator panel (Fig. 2/21) is also
10 Voltage terminals
available. It allows, for example, the installation of the relay
itself in the low-voltage compartment, and of the operator panel
Connection Wmax =10 mm separately in the door of the switchgear.
Ring cable lugs d1 = 4 mm
11 Wire size
Direct connection
1.0 2.6 mm2 (AWG 17 13)
Solid conductor, exible lead,
connector sleeve
Wire size 0.5 2.5 mm2 (AWG 20 13)
12 Some relays are alternatively available with plug-in voltage terminals
Current terminals
Screw type (see standard version)
13 Voltage terminals
2-pin or 3-pin connectors
Wire size 0.5 1.0 mm2
14 0.75 1.5 mm2

1.0 2.5 mm2
15
Overview
2

3

Fig. 2/18 of 19 housing
4

On the backlit LCD display, process and device information can

5
be displayed as text.
Freely assignable LEDs are used to display process or device
information. The LEDs can be labeled according to user
requirements. An LED reset key resets the LEDs and can be used
for LED testing. 6
Keys for navigation
RS232 operator interface (for DIGSI)
4 congurable function keys permit the user to execute

frequently used actions simply and fast.
Numerical keys
7
Fig. 2/19 of 19 housing Fig. 2/20 of 19 housing
Fig. 2/22 Local operation: All operator actions can be executed and
information displayed via an integrated user interface. Two
alternatives for this interface are available.
8
9
10
11

Fig. 2/21 SIPROTEC 4 combined protection, control and monitoring
relay with detached operator panel

12
13
Process and relay information can be displayed on the large
illuminated LC display either graphically in the form of a mimic
diagram or as text in various lists.
The keys mainly used for control of the switchgear are located
on the control axis directly below the display. 14
Two key-operated switches ensure rapid and reliable changeover
between local and remote control, and between interlocked
and non-interlocked operation.
Fig. 2/23 Additional features of the interface with graphic display

15
Overview
Apart from the relay-specic protection functions, the

SIPROTEC 4 units have a multitude of additional functions that
1 provide the user with information for the evaluation of faults
facilitate adaptation to customer-specic application
facilitate monitoring and control of customer installations.
2 Operational measured values

The large scope of measured and limit values permits improved
power system management as well as simplied commissioning.
3 The r.m.s. values are calculated from the acquired current and
voltage along with the power factor, frequency, active and
reactive power. The following functions are available depending
on the relay type
4 Currents IL1, IL2, IL3, IN, IEE (67Ns)
Voltages VL1,VL2, VL3, VL1-L2,VL2-L3, VL3-L1
Symmetrical components I1, I2, 3I0; V1, V2, 3V0
5 Power Watts, Vars, VA / P, Q, S

Power factor p.f. (cos )
Frequency
Energy kWh kVarh, forward and reverse power ow Fig. 2/24 Operational measured values
6 Mean as well as minimum and maximum current and voltage
values
Operating hours counter
7 Mean operating temperature of overload function

Limit value monitoring
Limit values are monitored using programmable logic in the
CFC. Commands can be derived from this limit value indication.
8 Zero suppression
In a certain range of very low measured values, the value is set
to zero to suppress interference.
Metered values (some types)

9 For internal metering, the unit can calculate energy metered
values from the measured current and voltage values. If an
external meter with a metering pulse output is available, some
SIPROTEC 4 types can obtain and process metering pulses via an
10 indication input.
The metered values can be displayed and passed on to a control
center as an accumulation with reset. A distinction is made
11 between forward, reverse, active and reactive energy.
Operational indications and fault indications with time

stamp
12 The SIPROTEC 4 units provide extensive data for fault analysis as

well as control. All indications listed here are stored, even if the
power supply is disconnected.
Fault event log
13 The last eight network faults are stored in the unit. All fault
recordings are time-stamped with a resolution of 1 ms.
Operational indications
All indications that are not directly associated with a fault
14 (e.g., operating or switching actions) are stored in the status

indication buffer. The time resolution is 1 ms (Fig. 2/24,
Fig. 2/25). Fig. 2/25 Fault event log on graphical display of the device
15
Overview
Display editor Reliable battery monitoring

A display editor is available to design the display on SIPROTEC 4
units with graphic display. The predened symbol sets can be
The battery provided is used to back up the clock, the switching
statistics, the status and fault indications, and the fault record- 1
expanded to suit the user. The drawing of a single-line diagram ing in the event of a power supply failure. Its function is checked
is extremely simple. Load monitoring values (analog values) by the processor at regular intervals. If the capacity of the
and any texts or symbols can be placed on the display where battery is found to be declining, an alarm is generated. Regular
required. replacement is therefore not necessary. 2
Four predened setting groups for adapting relay settings All setting parameters are stored in the Flash EPROM and are
not lost if the power supply or battery fails. The SIPROTEC 4 unit
The settings of the relays can be adapted quickly to suit changing remains fully functional.
network congurations. The relays include four setting groups 3
that can be predened during commissioning or even changed Commissioning support
remotely via a DIGSI 4 modem link. The setting groups can be
Special attention has been paid to commissioning. All binary
activated via binary inputs, via DIGSI 4 (local or remote), via the
integrated keypad or via the serial substation control interface.
inputs and output contacts can be displayed and activated
directly. This can signicantly simplify the wiring check for the 4
Fault recording up to ve or more seconds user. Test telegrams to a substation control system can be initi-
ated by the user as well.
The sampled values for phase currents, earth (ground) currents,
line and zero-sequence currents are registered in a fault record.
The record can be started using a binary input, on pickup or
CFC: Programming logic 5
With the help of the CFC (Continuous Function Chart) graphic
when a trip command occurs. Up to eight fault records may be
tool, interlocking schemes and switching sequences can be
stored. For test purposes, it is possible to start fault recording
congured simply via drag and drop of logic symbols; no special
via DIGSI 4. If the storage capacity is exceeded, the oldest fault
record in each case is overwritten.
knowledge of programming is required. Logical elements, such
as AND, OR, ip-ops and timer elements are available. The
6
For protection functions with long delay times in generator pro- user can also generate user-dened annunciations and logical
tection, the RMS value recording is available. Storage of relevant combinations of internal or external signals.
calculated variables (V1, VE, I1, I2, IEE, P, Q, f-fn) takes place at
increments of one cycle. The total time is 80 s. Communication interfaces 7
With respect to communication, particular emphasis has been
Time synchronization
placed on high levels of exibility, data integrity and utilization
A battery-backed clock is a standard component and can be
synchronized via a synchronization signal (DCF77, IRIG B via
of standards commonly used in energy automation. The design
of the communication modules permits interchangeability on
8
satellite receiver), binary input, system interface or SCADA the one hand, and on the other hand provides openness for
(e.g., SICAM). A date and time is assigned to every indication. future standards.
Selectable function keys Local PC interface 9

Four function keys can be assigned to permit the user to perform The PC interface accessible from the front of the unit permits
frequently recurring actions very quickly and simply. quick access to all parameters and fault event data. Of particular
Typical applications are, for example, to display the list of
operating indications or to perform automatic functions such
advantage is the use of the DIGSI 4 operating program during
commissioning. 10
as switching of circuit-breaker.
Continuous self-monitoring
The hardware and software are continuously monitored. If
11
abnormal conditions are detected, the unit immediately signals.
In this way, a great degree of safety, reliability and availability is
achieved.
12
13
14
15
Overview
Retrotting: Communication modules
1 It is possible to supply the relays directly with two communica-

tion modules for the service and substation control interfaces,
or to retrot the communication modules at a later stage.
The modules are mounted on the rear side of the relay.
As a standard, the time synchronization interface is always
2 supplied.
The communication modules are available for the entire
SIPROTEC 4 relay range. Depending on the relay type, the
following protocols are available: IEC 60870-5-103,
3 PROFIBUS DP, MODBUS RTU, DNP 3.0 and Ethernet with

IEC 61850. No external protocol converter is required.
With respect to communication, particular emphasis is placed
4 on the requirements in energy automation:
Every data item is time-stamped at the source, that is, where
it originates.
The communication system automatically handles the
5 transfer of large data blocks (e.g., fault records or parameter
data les). The user can apply these features without any

additional programming effort.
For reliable execution of a command, the relevant signal is
6 rst acknowledged in the unit involved. When the command
has been enabled and executed, a check-back indication The following interfaces can be applied:
is issued. The actual conditions are checked at every
command-handling step. Whenever they are not satisfactory, Service interface (optional)
7 controlled interruption is possible. Several protection relays can be centrally operated with
DIGSI 4, e.g., via a star coupler or RS485 bus. On connection of
a modem, remote control is possible. This provides advantages
in fault clearance, particularly in unmanned power stations.
(Alternatively, the external temperature monitoring box can be
8 connected to this interface.)
System interface (optional)

This is used to carry out communication with a control system
9 and supports, depending on the module connected, a variety
of communication protocols and interface designs.
Time synchronization interface
10 A synchronization signal (DCF 77, IRIG B via satellite receiver)

may be connected to this input if no time synchronization is
executed on the system interface. This offers a high-precision
Fig. 2/26 Protection relay Fig. 2/27 Communication
time tagging.
module, optical
11 Fig. 2/30 Rear view with wiring, terminal safety cover and serial
interfaces
12
13 Fig. 2/28 Communication Fig. 2/29 Communication

module RS232,RS485 module, optical ring
14
15
Overview
Safe bus architecture Substation automation system

Fiber-optic double ring circuit via Ethernet
The ber-optic double ring circuit is immune to electro- Option: Control 1
magnetic interference. Upon failure of a section between DIGSI SICAM center
two units, the communication system continues to operate PAS
without interruption. If a unit were to fail, there is no
effect on the communication with the rest of the system
(Fig. 2/31).
2
RS485 bus switch
With this data transmission via copper wires, electro-
magnetic interference is largely eliminated by the use
of twisted-pair conductors. Upon failure of a unit, the
3
remaining system continues to operate without any faults
(Fig. 2/32).
Star structure
The relays are connected with a ber-optic cable with a star
4
structure to the control unit. The failure of one relay / con-
nection does not affect the others (Fig. 2/33).
Depending on the relay type, the following protocols are
available:
5
IEC 61850 protocol Fig. 2/31 Ring bus structure for station bus with Ethernet and
Since 2004, the Ethernet-based IEC 61850 protocol is the IEC 61850
worldwide standard for protection and control systems used
by power supply corporations. Siemens is the rst manu-
6
facturer to support this standard. By means of this protocol, Substation
information can also be exchanged directly between control system
feeder units so as to set up simple masterless systems for
feeder and system interlocking. Access to the units via the
7
Ethernet bus will also be possible with DIGSI.
IEC 60870-5-103
IEC 60870-5-103 is an internationally standardized protocol
for efcient communication between the protection relays 8
and a substation control system. Specic extensions that
are published by Siemens can be used.
PROFIBUS DP
For connection to a SIMATIC PLC, the PROFIBUS DP protocol 9
is recommended. With the PROFIBUS DP, the protection
relay can be directly connected to a SIMATIC S5 / S7. The
transferred data are fault data, measured values and control
commands. Fig. 2/32 PROFIBUS: Electrical RS485 bus wiring 10
Substation
control system
11
12
13
14
Fig. 2/33 IEC 60870-5-103: Star structure with ber-optic cables
15
Overview
MODBUS RTU
1 MODBUS is also a widely utilized communication standard and is

used in numerous automation solutions.
DNP 3.0
2 DNP 3.0 (Distributed Network Protocol, version 3) is a

messaging-based communication protocol. The SIPROTEC 4 units
are fully Level 1 and Level 2-compliant with DNP 3.0, which is
supported by a number of protection unit manufacturers.
3 Control
In addition to the protection functions, the SIPROTEC 4 units also
support all control and monitoring functions required for operat-
ing medium-voltage or high-voltage substations. The main
4 application is reliable control of switching and other processes.
The status of primary equipment or auxiliary devices can be
obtained from auxiliary contacts and communicated to the relay
via binary inputs. Fig. 2/34 Protection engineer at work
5 Therefore, it is possible to detect and indicate both the OPEN and
CLOSED positions or a faulty or intermediate breaker position. Command processing
The switchgear can be controlled via:
The SIPROTEC 4 protection relays offer all functions required for
Integrated operator panel
6 Binary inputs
command processing, including the processing of single and
double commands, with or without feedback, and sophisticated
Substation control system monitoring. Control actions using functions, such as runtime
DIGSI 4. monitoring and automatic command termination after output
7 Automation
check of the external process, are also provided by the relays.
Typical applications are:
With the integrated logic, the user can set specic functions for Single and double commands using 1, 1 plus 1 common
the automation of the switchgear or substation by means of a or 2 trip contacts
8 graphic interface (CFC). Functions are activated by means of

function keys, binary inputs or via the communication interface.
User-denable feeder interlocking
Operating sequences combining several switching operations,
such as control of circuit-breakers, disconnectors (isolators)
Switching authority and grounding switches
9 The following hierarchy of switching authority is applicable:
LOCAL, DIGSI 4 PC program, REMOTE. The switching authority is
Triggering of switching operations, indications or alarms by
logical combination of existing information (Fig. 2/34).
determined according to parameters or by DIGSI 4. If the LOCAL
mode is selected, only local switching operations are possible. The positions of the circuit-breaker or switching devices are
monitored by feedback signals. These indication inputs are
10 Every switching operation and change of breaker position is
stored in the status indication memory with detailed information logically assigned to the corresponding command outputs.
and time tag. The unit can therefore distinguish whether the indication
changes as a consequence of a switching operation or due
to a spontaneous change of state.
11 Indication derivation
A further indication (or a command) can be derived from an
existing indication. Group indications can also be formed.
12 The volume of information to the system interface can thus
be reduced and restricted to the most important signals.
13
14
15
Overview
Typical protection schemes

Infeed
1. Cables and overhead lines Transformer 1

protection
Radial systems see g. 2/49
Notes: A
2
1) Auto-reclosure (ANSI 79) only with overhead lines. I>, t I E >, t I2 >, t ARC
B
2) Negative sequence overcurrent protection 46 as sensitive Further 51 51N 46 79
feeders
backup protection against asymmetrical faults.
General notes:
7SJ80 *) 2) 1) 3
The relay at the far end (D) is set with the shortest operating C I>, t I E >, t I2 >, t
time. Relays further upstream have to be time-graded against 51 51N 46
the next downstream relay in steps of about 0.3 s.
7SJ80 *)
4
Inverse time or denite time can be selected according to the
following criteria: Load
Denite time:
Source impedance is large compared to the line impedance,
that is, there is small current variation between near and far
D I>, t I E >, t I2 >, t
51 51N 46
5
end faults. 7SJ80 *)
Inverse time:
Longer lines, where the fault current is much less at the far
end of the line than at the local end.
Load Load
6
*) Alternatives: 7SJ45/46, 7SJ60/61
Strong or extreme inverse-time:
Lines where the line impedance is large compared to the
source impedance (high difference for close-in and remote
faults), or lines where coordination with fuses or reclosers is
Fig. 2/35 Radial systems
7
necessary. Steeper characteristics also provide higher stabil-
ity on service restoration (cold load pickup and transformer
inrush currents).
8
Ring-main circuit
General notes: Infeed
Transformer
9
Operating time of overcurrent relays to be coordinated with protection
downstream fuses of load transformers (preferably with strong see g. 2/52
52 52
inverse-time characteristic with about 0.2 s grading-time
delay) 10
Thermal overload protection for the cables (option) 52 52
Negative sequence overcurrent protection (46) as sensitive 7SJ80 *) 7SJ80 *)
protection against asymmetrical faults (option). I>, t I E >, t I2 >, t > I>, t I E >, t I2 >, t >
51 51N 46 49 51 51N 46 49 11
12
13
*) Alternatives:
7SJ45/46, 7SJ60/61 14
Fig. 2/36 Ring-main circuit
15
Overview
Switch-onto-fault protection
1 If switched onto a fault, instantaneous tripping can be effected.

If the internal control function is used (local, via binary input 52
or via serial interface), the manual closing function is available Busbar
without any additional wiring. If the control switch is connected
TRIP (high-speed dead fault clearance) (511)
to a circuit-breaker bypassing the internal control function,
2 manual detection using a binary input is implemented. 52 52 52
I>>, I>>>
Feeder earthed 50
&
3 Typical feeder
Manual close
(356 > m close) 7SJx, 7SAx
Fig. 2/37 Switch-onto-fault protection
4
Directional comparison protection (cross-coupling)
Substation A Substation B Substation C Substation D
Cross-coupling is used for selective protection of sections fed Bus 52 52 Bus 52 52 Bus 52 52 Bus
5 from two sources with instantaneous tripping, that is, without

the disadvantage of time coordination. The directional compari-
7SJ62/ 7SJ62/ 7SJ62/ 7SJ62/ 7SJ62/ 7SJ62/
son protection is suitable if the distances between the protection 63/64 63/64 63/64 63/64 63/64 63/64
stations are not signicant and pilot wires are available for signal 50 50 50 50 50 50
transmission. In addition to the directional comparison protec-
6 tion, the directional coordinated overcurrent-time protection is 52
Blocking bus
used for complete selective backup protection. If operated in a
closed-circuit connection, an interruption of the transmission 50 7SJ80 *)
line is detected. Pick- *) Alternatives:
7 up
52
7SJ60
Blocking signal
Non-directional
50 7SJ80 *) 50 fault detection
Pick- Direction
8 up of fault (67)
Fig. 2/38 Directional comparison protection
9 Distribution feeder with reclosers

General notes:
Infeed
The feeder relay operating characteristics, delay times and

auto-reclosure cycles must be carefully coordinated with
10 downstream reclosers, sectionalizers and fuses.
The 50 / 50N instantaneous zone is normally set to reach out to
the rst main feeder sectionalizing point. It has to ensure fast 52 52
clearing of close-in faults and prevent blowing of fuses in this I>>, I E >>, I2 >, t 7SJ60
11 area (fuse saving). Fast auto-reclosure is initiated in this case.
Further time-delayed tripping and reclosure steps (normally
I>, t
50/51 50N/51N
I E >, t
46
7SJ61
7SJ80
two or three) have to be graded against the recloser.
The overcurrent relay should automatically switch over to less
12 sensitive characteristics after long breaker interruption times
in order to enable overriding of subsequent cold load pickup
79 Auto-
reclose
and transformer inrush currents. Recloser Further

feeders
13 Sectionalizers
14 Fuses
Fig. 2/39 Distribution feeder with reclosers
15
Overview
3-pole multishot auto-reclosure (AR, ANSI 79)

52 Elements can Elements Performs
Auto-reclosure (AR) enables 3-phase auto-reclosing of a feeder
that has previously been disconnected by overcurrent protection.
be blocked are slower
than the
reclosure
of feeder
1
fuse
SIPROTEC 7SJ61 allows up to nine reclosing shots. The rst four CLOSE
dead times can be set individually. Reclosing can be blocked or 52 52 (2851)
initiated by a binary input or internally. After the rst trip in a
reclosing sequence, the high-set instantaneous elements (I>>>, TRIP
2
I>>, IE>>) can be blocked. This is used for fuse-saving applications (511)
and other similar transient schemes using simple overcurrent 7SJ61*)
50 51
relays instead of fuses. The low-set denite-time (I>, IE>) and the
inverse-time (Ip, IEp) overcurrent elements remain operative during
50N 51N
AR
79
3
the entire sequence.
4
52 Fuse opens on
sucessful reclosure
5
Circuit-breaker opens on
unsucessful reclosure
51
*) Alternatives: 6
7SJ60, 7SJ62/63/64, 7SJ80
Fig. 2/40 3-pole multishot auto-reclosure (AR, ANSI 79)

7
Parallel feeder circuit
52
Infeed
General notes:
The preferred application of this circuit is in the reliable supply 52 52 8
of important consumers without signicant infeed from the I>, t I E >, t > I2 >, t 7SJ60
load side.
51 51N 49 46
The 67 / 67N directional overcurrent protection trips instan-
taneously for faults on the protected line. This saves one O H line or O H line or Protection 9
time-grading interval for the overcurrent relays at the infeed. cable 1 cable 2 same as
line or cable 1
The 51 / 51N overcurrent relay functions must be time-graded 7SJ62
67 67N 51 51N
against the relays located upstream. 7SJ80
52 52
10
52
52 52
11
Load Load
12
Fig. 2/41 Parallel feeder circuit
13
14
15
Overview
Reverse-power monitoring at double infeed

Infeed A Infeed B
1 If a busbar is fed from two parallel infeeds and a fault occurs
on one of them, only the faulty infeed should be tripped selec-
tively in order to enable supply to the busbar to continue from
the remaining supply. Unidirectional devices that can detect
a short-circuit current or energy ow from the busbar toward
2 the incoming feeder should be used. Directional overcurrent
protection is usually set via the load current. However, it
52 52
cannot clear weak-current faults. The reverse-power protection

67 67N 67 67N
can be set much lower than the rated power, thus also detect-
3 ing the reverse-power ow of weak-current faults with fault
currents signicantly below the load current.
32R 32R
7SJ64 *) 7SJ64 *)
52
4
52 52
6
Feeders *) Alternatives: 7SJ62, 7SJ80 Feeders
7 Fig. 2/42 Reverse-power monitoring at double infeed
Synchronization function
8 Note:
52 U2
Busbar
Also available in relays 7SA6, 7SD5, 7SA522, 7VK61. CLOSE command
General notes: 1
9 When two subsystems must be interconnected, the synchroni-

zation function monitors whether the subsystems are synchro-
Transformer
Local/remote
3 control
nous and can be connected without risk of losing stability. 1)
25 SYN
This synchronization function can be applied in conjunction
10 with the auto-reclosure function as well as with the control
function CLOSE commands (local / remote). Infeed
U1
79 AR
7SJ641)
Fig. 2/43 Synchronization function

11
12
13
14
15
Overview
Cables or short overhead lines with infeed from both ends

Infeed
Notes:
1) Auto-reclosure only with overhead lines
52
52
1
2) Differential protection options: 52 52
Type 7SD5 or 7SD610 with direct ber-optic connection up

to about 100 km or via a 64 kbit / s channel (optical ber,
7SJ80 79 1)
7SD61,
7SD80 or
2
51N/51N 87L 49 Same
microwave) Line 7SD5
or protection
Type 7SD52 or 7SD610 with 7XV5662 (CC-CC) cable 7SJ80 2) for parallel line,
with 2 and 3 pilot wires up to about 30 km
Type 7SD80 with pilot wire and/or bre optic protection data
51N/51N 87L 49
7SD61,
7SD80 or
if applicable
3
79 52
interface. 52 1) 7SD5
52
52 52 52 52 4
Load Backfeed
Fig. 2/44 Cables or short overhead lines with infeed from both ends 5
Overhead lines or longer cables with infeed from both ends
Infeed
Notes: 52
6
1) Teleprotection logic (85) for transfer trip or blocking schemes. 52
Signal transmission via pilot wire, power line carrier, digital 52 52
network or optical ber (to be provided separately). The tele-
protection supplement is only necessary if fast fault clearance
on 100 % line length is required, that is, second zone tripping 21N/21N 67N
2)
2) 7
3)
(about 0.3 s delay) cannot be accepted for far end faults. For 85 79
7SA6 or Same
Line 7SA522 protection
further application notes on teleprotection schemes, refer to or 1) for parallel
the table on the following page. cable
85 79
3)
line, if
applicable
8
2) Directional ground-fault protection 67N with inverse-time 2) 7SA6 or
delay against high-resistance faults 21N/21N 67N
7SA522
3) Single or multishot auto-reclosure (79) only with overhead

lines. 52
52
9
52 52 52 52
Load Backfeed
10
Fig. 2/45 Overhead lines or longer cables with infeed from both ends
Subtransmission line 11
Note:
Connection to open delta winding if available. Relays 7SA6 / 522
and 7SJ62 can, however, also be set to calculate the zero-
sequence voltage internally. 12
General notes:
Distance teleprotection is proposed as main protection and 25 79 21N/21N 67/67N
time-graded directional overcurrent as backup protection.
68/78 67N 51/51N
13
The 67N function of 7SA6 / 522 provides additional high-
resistance ground-fault protection. It can be used in parallel 7SJ62
BF
7SJ80
with the 21 / 21N function.
Recommended teleprotection schemes: PUTT on medium and 85
S
R
CH To remote
line end
14
long lines with phase shift carrier or other secure communica-
7SA6 or 7SA522
tion channel POTT on short lines. BLOCKING with On / Off Signal transmission equipment
carrier (all line lengths).
Fig. 2/46 Subtransmission line 15
Overview
Permissive underreach Permissive overreach Blocking Unblocking

transfer trip (PUTT) transfer trip (POTT)
1 Preferred Signal Dependable and secure communication channel: Reliable communication Dedicated channel with
application transmission Power line carrier with frequency shift modulation. channel (only required continuous signal transfer
system HF signal coupled to 2 phases of the protected line, or during external faults) Power line carrier with
even better, to a parallel circuit to avoid transmission of Power line carrier with frequency shift keying.
2 the HF signal through the fault location.

Microwave radio, especially digital (PCM)
amplitude modulation
(ON / OFF). The same
Continuous signal trans-
mission must be permitted.
Fiber-optic cables frequency may be used
on all terminals)
Characteristic Best suited for longer lines Excellent coverage on All line types preferred Same as POTT
3 of line where the underreach
zone provides sufcient
short lines in the presence
of fault resistance.
practice in the US
resistance coverage Suitable for the protection

of multi-terminal lines
with intermediate infeed
4 Advantages Simple technique Can be applied without Same as POTT Same as POTT but:
No coordination of zones underreaching zone 1 If no signal is received
and times with the op- stage (e.g., overcompen- (no block and no uncompen-
posite end required. The sated series uncompensa- sated block) then tripping by
5 combination of different
relay types therefore
ted lines)
Can be applied on extre-
the overreach zone is
released after 20 ms
presents no problems mely short lines (impe-
dance less than minimum
relay setting)
6 Better for parallel lines

as mutual coupling is not
critical for the overreach
zone
Weak infeed terminals
7 are no problem (Echo

and Weak Infeed logic is
included)
Drawbacks Overlapping of the Zone reach and signal Same as POTT Same as POTT
zone 1 reaches must be timing coordination with Slow tripping all
8 ensured. On parallel
lines, teed feeders and
the remote end is
necessary (current
teleprotection trips
must be delayed to wait
tapped lines, the reversal) for the eventual
inuence of zero blocking signal
sequence coupling and Continuous channel
9 intermediate infeeds
must be carefully
monitoring is not
possible
considered to make sure
a minimum overlapping
of the zone 1 reach is
10 always present.
Not suitable for weak
infeed terminals
Table 2/1 Application criteria for frequently used teleprotection schemes

11
12
13
14
15
Overview
Transmission line with reactor (Fig. 2/47) Teleprotection schemes based on distance relays therefore
have operating times on the order of 25 to 30 ms with digital
Notes:
1) 51N only applicable with grounded reactor neutral.
PCM coded communication. With state-of-the-art two-cycle
circuit-breakers, fault clearing times well below 100 ms
1
(4 to 5 cycles) can normally be achieved.
2) If phase CTs at the low-voltage reactor side are not available,
the high-voltage phase CTs and the CT in the neutral can be Dissimilar carrier schemes are recommended for main 1
connected to a restricted ground-fault protection using one and main 2 protection, for example, PUTT, and POTT or
Blocking / Unblocking.
2
7VH60 high-impedance relay.
Both 7SA522 and 7SA6 provide selective 1-pole and / or 3-pole
General notes: tripping and auto-reclosure.
Distance relays are proposed as main 1 and main 2 protection.
Duplicated 7SA6 is recommended for series-compensated
The ground-current directional comparison protection (67N)
of the 7SA6 relay uses phase selectors based on symmetrical
3
lines. components. Thus, 1-pole auto-reclosure can also be executed
Operating time of the distance relays is in the range of 15 to with high-resistance faults.
25 ms depending on the particular fault condition.
These tripping times are valid for faults in the underreaching
The 67N function of the 7SA522 relay can also be used as
time-delayed directional overcurrent backup. 4
distance zone (80 to 85 % of the line length). Remote end The 67N functions are provided as high-impedance fault
faults must be cleared by the superimposed teleprotection protection. 67N is often used with an additional channel as
scheme. Its overall operating time depends on the signal
transmission time of the channel, typically 15 to 20 ms for
a separate carrier scheme. Use of a common channel with
distance protection is only possible if the mode is compatible 5
frequency shift audio-tone PLC or microwave channels, and (e.g., POTT with directional comparison). The 67N may be
lower than 10 ms for ON / OFF PLC or digital PCM signaling via blocked when function 21 / 21N picks up. Alternatively, it can
optical bers. be used as time-delayed backup protection.
6
CC
52L
7
52R
TC1 TC2
CVT
50/50N 51/51N BF 8
7SJ600
9
Reactor 87R
25 59 21/21N 25 21/21N
7VH60
2)
79 67N 79 67N
10
51N
7SJ600
68/79 BF 68/79 87
BF, 59
BF
S Direct trip
1)
11
85 Trip
52L R channel
7SA6 7SA522
S
R
Channel
2
To remote
line end
12
S Channel
R 3
13
Fig. 2/47 Transmission line with reactor
14
15
Overview
Transmission line or cable

(with wide-band communication) CC
1 General notes: 52L
TC1 TC2
Digital PCM-coded communication (with n 64 kbit / s
channels) between line ends is becoming more and more
2 frequently available, either directly by optical or microwave

point-to-point links, or via a general-purpose digital com-
munication network.
79 87L 25 59 21/21N
In both cases, the relay-type current differential protection
7SD52 / 61 can be applied. It provides absolute phase and
3 zone selectivity by phase-segregated measurement, and is not
affected by power swing or parallel line zero-sequence cou-
BF 79 67N
pling effects. It is, furthermore, a current-only protection that

does not need a VT connection. For this reason, the adverse 7SD522 68/79 85 BF 7SA522 or
4 effects of CVT transients are not applicable.

This makes it particularly suitable for double and multi-circuit
7SD6 7SA6
lines where complex fault situations can occur. S Channel

R 1
The 7SD5 / 61 can be applied to lines up to about 120 km in
Optical ber To remote
5 direct relay-to-relay connections via dedicated optical ber
cores (see also application Cables or short overhead lines
FO
Wire
X.21
S
R
PCM line end
with infeed from both ends, page 2/21), and also to much Direct connection with dedicated
longer distances of up to about 120 km by using separate PCM bers up to about 120 km
devices for optical ber or microwave transmission.
6 The 7SD5 / 61 then uses only a small part (64 to 512 kbit / s) of
the total transmission capacity (on the order of Mbits / s).
Fig. 2/48 Redundant transmission line protection
The 7SD52 / 61 protection relays can be combined with the

distance relay 7SA52 or 7SA6 to form a redundant protection
7 system with dissimilar measuring principles complementing
each other (Fig. 2/48). This provides the highest degree of 52L
CC
availability. Also, separate signal transmission ways should be TC1 TC2

used for main 1 and main 2 line protection, e.g., optical ber
8 or microwave, and power line carrier (PLC).
The current comparison protection has a typical operating time
of 15 ms for faults on 100 % line length, including signaling
25
time.
79 87L 59 21/21N
9 General notes for Fig. 2/49:
67N
SIPROTEC 7SD5 offers fully redundant differential and distance BF
relays accommodated in one single bay control unit, and
provides both high-speed operation of relays and excellent
10 fault coverage, even under complicated conditions. Precise
distance-to-fault location avoids time-consuming line patrol- 7SD5 85 68/79
ling, and reduces the downtime of the line to a minimum.

S Channel
The high-speed distance relay operates fully independently 1
R
11 from the differential relay. Backup zones provide remote
backup for upstream and downstream lines and other power Optical ber FO
X.21
S
PCM
To remote
line end
system components Wire R
Direct connection with dedicated
bers up to about 120 km
12
Fig. 2/49 Transmission line protection with redundant algorithm
in one device
13
14
15
Overview
Transmission line,
one-breaker-and-a-half terminal 87/BB1 7SS52, 7SS60
Notes:
BB1
1
7VK61 7SA522 or
1) When the line is switched off and the BF 85
7SA6
line line disconnector (isolator) is UBB1
1) 1) 2)
open, high through-fault currents in
the diameter may cause maloperation
52
79
25
21/21N 67N 50/50N 51/51N 59
2
of the distance relay due to unequal
UBB1 UL1 or
CT errors (saturation). UL1
UL2 or
Normal practice is therefore to block
the distance protection (21 / 21N) and
UBB2
Line 1
3
the directional ground-fault protection 7VK61 7SD5
(67N) under this condition via an 87L
BF
auxiliary contact of the line line discon-
nector (isolator). A standby overcurrent
function (50 / 51N, 51 / 51N) is released
52 79
4
25
instead to protect the remaining stub
between the breakers (stub protec- UL2
tion). Line 2 5
2) Overvoltage protection only with Main 1 Protection of line 2
7SA6 / 52. (or transformer,
Main 2
if applicable)
General notes:
The protection functions of one
52 BF
79
7VK61
6
diameter of a breaker-and-a-half
arrangement are shown. UBB2 25
UL2 or
The currents of two CTs have each to
be summed up to get the relevant line
UL1 or UBB1 UBB2 BB2 7
currents as input for main 1 and 2 line 87/BB2 7SS52, 7SS60
protection.
The location of the CTs on both sides of
the circuit-breakers is typical for substa-
Fig. 2/50 Transmission line, one-breaker-and-a-half terminal,
using 3 breaker management relays 7VK61
8
tions with dead-tank circuit-breakers.
Live-tank circuit-breakers may have
CTs only on one side to reduce cost. A fault between circuit-
breakers and CT (end fault) may then still be fed from one side 9
even when the circuit-breaker has opened. Consequently, nal
fault clearing by cascaded tripping has to be accepted in this
case.
The 7VK61 relay provides the necessary end fault protection 10
function and trips the circuit-breakers of the remaining infeed-
ing circuits.
11
12
13
14
15
Overview
General notes for Fig. 2/50 and 2/51:

For the selection of the main 1 and 87/BB1 7SS52, 7SS60
1 main 2 line protection schemes, the BB1
comments of application examples 7SA522 or
Transmission with reactor, page 2/23 7SA6
BF 85
and Transmission line or cable, page UBB1
2 2/24 apply.
Auto-reclosure (79) and synchrocheck
52
1) 1) 2)
21/21N 67N 50/50N 51/51N 59
25
function (25) are each assigned directly
to the circuit-breakers and controlled by UBB1 UL1 or
3 main 1 and 2 line protection in parallel.
In the event of a line fault, both adja-
UL2 or
UBB2 UL1
cent circuit-breakers have to be tripped Line 1
by the line protection. The sequence of 7VK61 7SD5
4 auto-reclosure of both circuit-breakers

or, alternatively, the auto-reclosure of
BF 87L
only one circuit-breaker and the manual 52 79

closure of the other circuit-breaker, may
25
be made selectable by a control switch.
5 A coordinated scheme of control UL1 or UL2 or
circuits is necessary to ensure selective UBB1 UBB2
tripping interlocking and reclosing of
Line 2
the two circuit-breakers of one line (or
6 transformer feeder). UL2
The voltages for synchrocheck have to
52 Main 1 Protection of Line 2
be selected according to the circuit- (or transformer,
breaker and disconnector (isolator) Main 2 if applicable)
7 position by a voltage replica circuit.
UBB2
General notes for Fig. 2/51:
In this optimized application, the 7VK61 BB2
8 is only used for the center breaker. In

the line feeders, functions 25, 79 and 87/BB2 7SS52, 7SS60
BF are also performed by transmission
line protection 7SA522 or 7SA6. Fig. 2/51 Transmission line, breaker-and-a-half terminal,
9 using 1 breaker management relay 7VK61
10
11
12
13
14
15
Overview
2. Transformers
HV infeed
Small transformer infeed
General notes:
52 1
Ground faults on the secondary side are detected by current I>> I>, t IE > > I2 >, t
relay 51N. However, it has to be time-graded against down-
stream feeder protection relays. 50 51 50N 49 46
7SJ60
or 7SJ80
2
The restricted ground-fault relay 87N can optionally be applied
to achieve fast clearance of ground faults in the transformer
secondary winding. 63 Optional resistor
or reactor
Relay 7VH60 is of the high-impedance type and requires class
CTs with equal transformation ratios.
RN
3
Primary circuit-breaker and relay may be replaced by fuses.
I >>
87N 4
52 7VH60 51N
IE > 7SJ60
or 7SJ80
Distribution bus
5
52
O/C Fuse 6
relay
Load Load
Fig. 2/52 Small transformer infeed 7

Large or important transformer infeed
General note:
HV infeed
52
8
Relay 7UT612 provides numerical ratio and vector group
adaptation. Matching transformers as used with traditional
I>> I>, t IE > > I2 >, t
relays are therefore no longer applicable. 7SJ60
Notes:
50 51 51N 49 46 7SJ61 or
7SJ80
9
1) If an independent high-impedance-type ground-fault function
is required, the 7VH60 ground-fault relay can be used instead
of the 87N inside the 7UT612. However, class CT cores
would also be necessary in this case (see small transformer 63 10
protection). 1)
2) 51 and 51N may be provided in a separate 7SJ60 if required. 51N 87N 87T
2) 2)
11
51 51N
I>, t I E >, t 7UT612
52
12
Load bus
52 52
13
Load Load
Fig. 2/53 Large or important transformer infeed 14
15
Overview
Dual infeed with single transformer

Protection line 1 Protection line 2
1 General notes:
Line CTs are to be connected to separate stabilizing inputs of
same as line 2
52
21/21N or 87L + 51 + optionally 67/67N
52
the differential relay 87T in order to ensure stability in the
event of line through-fault currents. I>> I>, t I E >, t > I2 >
2 Relay 7UT613 provides numerical ratio and vector group

adaptation. Matching transformers, as used with traditional
50 51 51N 49
7SJ60, 7SJ61 or 7SJ80
46
relays, are therefore no longer applicable. 63

87N 87T
3 51N 7SJ60
or 7SJ80
7UT613
I>> I E >
7SJ60
51 51N
or 7SJ80
4 52
Load
52 52 52 bus
5 Load Load Load
Fig. 2/54 Dual infeed with single transformer
6 Parallel incoming transformer feeders

HV infeed 1 HV infeed 2
Note: 52 52
The directional functions 67 and 67N do not apply for cases I>> I>, t I E >, t > I2 >, t
7 where the transformers are equipped with the transformer

differential relays 87T.
50 51 51N 49
7SJ60, 7SJ61 or 7SJ80
46
Protection
63 same as
infeed 1
I>, t I E >, t I> IE >
8 51
51N
51N
I E >, t
67 67N
7SJ62
7SJ80
52 52
1)
9 52 52 52
Load
bus
Load Load Load
10 Fig. 2/55 Parallel incoming transformer feeders
Parallel incoming transformer feeders with bus tie

Infeed 1 I>> I>, t I E > t > I2 >, t Infeed 2
11 General notes:
Overcurrent relay 51, 51N each connected as a partial differ-
50 51 51N 49 46
Protection
7SJ60
ential scheme. This provides simple and fast busbar protection same as
and saves one time-grading step. 63 63 infeed 1
12 I>, t I E >, t IE >, t I2>, t

51 51N 51N 51
51N
7SJ60 7SJ60
7SJ60
13 52
52
52
52 52
14 Load Load
Fig. 2/56 Parallel incoming transformer feeders with bus tie
15
Overview
Three-winding transformer
HV Infeed
Notes:
1) The zero-sequence current must be blocked before entering
52
1
I>>, I >, t > I2 >, t
the differential relay with a delta winding in the CT connec-
50 51 49 46
tion on the transformer side with grounded starpoint. This
is to avoid false operation during external ground faults
(numerical relays provide this function by calculation). About
7SJ60, 7SJ61 or 7SJ80
2
30 % sensitivity, however, is then lost in the event of internal
faults. Optionally, the zero-sequence current can be regained 51N 7SJ60 63 51N 7SJ60
by introducing the winding neutral current in the differential
relay (87T). Relay type 7UT613 provides two current inputs
1) 87T 7UT613
3
for this purpose. By using this feature, the ground-fault 87N 7VH602)
sensitivity can be upgraded again to its original value.
Restricted ground-fault protection (87T) is optional. It
provides backup protection for ground faults and increased
ground-fault sensitivity (about 10 % IN, compared to about 20
I>, t I E >, t I>, t I E >, t 4
51 51N 51 51N
to 30 % IN of the transformer differential relay).
Separate class CT-cores with equal transmission ratio are 87N 7SJ61
or 7SJ80 7SJ602)
also required for this protection.
M.V.
52 52 52 52
M.V. 5
2) High impedance and overcurrent in one 7SJ61.
General notes:
In this example, the transformer feeds two different distribu-
tion systems with cogeneration. Restraining differential relay Load Backfeed Load Backfeed
6
inputs are therefore provided at each transformer side.
If both distribution systems only consume load and no Fig. 2/57 Three-winding transformer
through-feed is possible from one MV system to the other,
parallel connection of the CTs of the two MV transformer
7
windings is admissible, which allows the use of a two-winding
differential relay (7UT612)
Autotransformer
8
52
Notes:
1) 87N high-impedance protection requires special class
current transformer cores with equal transformation ratios. 51N 50/BF 46 50/51 2) 87N 7VH60 9
7SJ60, 7SJ61 or 7SJ80
2) The 7SJ60 relay can alternatively be connected in series with 1)
the 7UT613 relay to save this CT core.
General note:
87T 49
52
10
Two different protection schemes are provided: 87T is chosen 63
as the low-impedance three-winding version (7UT613). 7UT613
87N is a 1-phase high-impedance relay (7VH60) connected 52
as restricted ground-fault protection. (In this example, it is
1)
50/51
11
assumed that the phase ends of the transformer winding are 46
not accessible on the neutral side, that is, there exists a CT
51
only in the neutral grounding connection.). 50/BF
50/BF 51N
12
59N 1)
7RW600 7SJ60*) 7SJ60*)
or 7RW80 *) Alternatives: 7SJ80
13
Fig. 2/58 Autotransformer
14
15
Overview
Large autotransformer bank
1 General notes:
The transformer bank is connected in a breaker-and-a-half 7SV600
21 21N 68/78
7SA52/6 7SV600
arrangement. 50/BF 50/BF

52 52
Duplicated differential protection is proposed: EHV
2 Main 1: Low-impedance differential protection 87TL (7UT613)

connected to the transformer bushing CTs.
Main 2: High-impedance differential overall protection 87TL 3x 87/TH 50/BF 7SV600
(7VH60). Separate class cores and equal CT ratios are 7VH60 52
3 required for this type of protection.

Backup protection is provided by distance protection relay 87/TL 49 7SA52/6
21
(7SA52 and 7SA6), each looking with an instantaneous rst 7UT613 63
zone about 80 % into the transformer and with a time-delayed 52 21N
4 zone beyond the transformer.

The tertiary winding is assumed to feed a small station supply
68/78
system with isolated neutral. 51

52
5 59N
7RW600
50/BF
7SJ60*)
51N
7SJ60*)
50/BF 7SV600
or 7RW80 *) Alternatives: 7SJ80
6 Fig. 2/59 Large autotransformer bank
3. Motors
7 Small and medium-sized motors < about 1 MW 52
a) With effective or low-resistance grounded infeed (IE IN Motor)

I>> IE > > I2 >
General note:
8 Applicable to low-voltage motors and high-voltage motors 50 51N 49 48 46
with low-resistance grounded infeed (IE IN Motor)
b) With high-resistance grounded infeed (IE IN Motor) 7SJ60/7SK80
9 Notes:
1) Core-balance CT.
2) Sensitive directional ground-fault protection (67N) only Fig. 2/60 Motor protection with effective or low-resistance grounded
10 applicable with infeed from isolated or Petersen coil grounded
system (for dimensioning of the sensitive directional ground-
infeed
fault protection, see also application circuit page 2/33 and

Fig. 2/68) 52
11 3) The 7SJ602 relay can be applied for isolated and compensated

systems.
I >> > I2 > I<
50 49 48 46 37 51U
IE > 2)
12 7XR96
1)
60/1A
51N 67N
3)
7SJ62/7SK80
13
Fig. 2/61 Motor protection with high-resistance grounded infeed
14
15
Overview
Large HV motors > about 1 MW

Notes:
1) Core-balance CT.
52 1
I >> > I2 > U<
2) Sensitive directional ground-fault protection (67N) only
applicable with infeed from isolated or Petersen coil grounded
system.
50 49 48 46 27
Optional
2
IE > 2) I < 37
3) This function is only needed for motors where the startup 7XR96
time is longer than the safe stall time tE. According to 1) 51N 67N
60/1A
IEC 60079-7, the tE time is the time needed to heat up AC
windings, when carrying the starting current IA, from the Startup
super- 49T 87M
3
temperature reached in rated service and at maximum ambi- visor 3) 5) 7UM62
ent air temperature to the limiting temperature. A separate
speed switch is used to supervise actual starting of the motor. 3)
The motor circuit-breaker is tripped if the motor does not
Speed
switch
RTDs 4)
optional 4
reach speed in the preset time. The speed switch is part of
the motor supply itself.
4) Pt100, Ni100, Ni120
5) 49T only available with external temperature detector device
5
(RTD-box 7XV5662) Fig. 2/62 Protection of large HV motors > about 1 MW
Cold load pickup

6
52
By means of a binary input that can be wired from a manual Trip
close contact, it is possible to switch the overcurrent pickup
settings to less sensitive settings for a programmable amount
of time. After the set time has expired, the pickup settings auto-
I >> t
51.1
I> t
51.2
7
matically return to their original setting. This can compensate for
Binary input 51.1
initial inrush when energizing a circuit without compromising 82
(1727 > c/o) Trip
the sensitivity of the overcurrent elements during steady-state
conditions.
Desensitized
during inrush
51.2
7SJ60x, 7SJ61 or 7SJ80

8
52
Busbar
Trip
52 52 52 52 9
M 10
I >> t I > t
51.1 51.2 Typical feeder
Binary input 51.1 (1727 > C/O = cold

load pickup of over-
11
(1727 > C/O)
51.2 current pickup)
7SJ60x, 7SJ61 or 7SK80
12
Fig. 2/63 Cold load pickup
13
14
15
Overview
4. Generators
LV
1 Generators < 500 kW (Fig. 2/64 and Fig.2/65)
Note:
If a core-balance CT is provided for sensitive ground-fault
protection, relay 7SJ602 with separate ground-current input can
2 be used.
I >, I E >, t
51/51N
I2 >
46
>
49
Generators, typically 1 3 MW
7SJ60 or 7SJ80
(Fig. 2/66)
3 Note: Fig. 2/64 Generator with solidly grounded neutral
Two VTs in V connection are also sufcient.
4 Generators > 1 3 MW
MV
(Fig. 2/67)
Notes:
5 1) Functions 81 and 59 are required only where prime mover
can assume excess speed and the voltage regulator may
Generator 2
I >, I E >, t I2 > >
51/51N 46 49
permit rise of output voltage above upper limit. 1)
7SJ60 or 7SJ80
2) Differential relaying options:
6 Low-impedance differential protection 87.
RN
UN
Restricted ground-fault protection with low-resistance 0.5 to 1 rated
grounded neutral (Fig. 2/66).
7 Fig. 2/65 Generator with resistance-grounded neutral
8 52
52
MV
1)
I >/U <
9 50/27
59 U <
1)
Field
10 f 1)
81 f
87
81 RG Field <
64R
11
51 49 46 32 59 I2 > > I >, t U < L. O. F. P>
I >, t > I2 > P> U> 46 49 51V 40 32

12 I E >, t IG >, t
51N 2)
51N 87N
13 7UM61
7UM62
14 Fig. 2/66 Protection for generators 1 3 MW Fig. 2/67 Protection for generators >1 3 MW
15
Overview
Generators > 5 10 MW feeding into a system For the most sensitive setting of 2 mA, we therefore need 20 mA
with isolated neutral secondary ground current, corresponding to (60 / 1) 20 mA =
(Fig. 2/68)
1.2 A primary. 1
If sufcient capacitive ground current is not available, an
General notes:
grounding transformer with resistive zero-sequence load can
The setting range of the directional ground-fault protection be installed as ground-current source at the station busbar. The
(67N) in the 7UM6 relay is 2 1,000 mA. Depending on the
current transformer accuracy, a certain minimum setting is
smallest standard grounding transformer TGAG 3541 has a 20 s
short-time rating of input connected to: SG = 27 kVA
2
required to avoid false operation on load or transient currents.
In a 5 kV system, it would deliver:
In practice, efforts are generally made to protect about 90 % of
the machine winding, measured from the machine terminals.
The full ground current for a terminal fault must then be ten
3 SG 3 27,000 VA
IG 20 s = = = 9.4 A
3
UN 5,000 V
times the setting value, which corresponds to the fault current
of a fault at 10 % distance from the machine neutral. corresponding to a relay input current of 9.4 A 1 / 60 A =
156 mA. This would provide a 90 % protection range with a
Relay ground-current input Minimum relay

setting of about 15 mA, allowing the use of 4 parallel connected 4
Comments: core-balance CTs. The resistance at the 500 V open-delta
connected to: setting:
winding of the grounding transformer would then have to be
Core-balance CT 60 / 1 A: designed for
1 single CT
2 parallel CTs
2 mA
5 mA RB = U2SEC / SG = 500 U2 / 27,000 VA = 9.26 (27 kW, 20 s) 5
3 parallel CTs 8 mA
4 parallel CTs 12 mA For a 5 MVA machine and 600 / 5 A CTs with special calibration
for minimum residual false current, we would get a secondary
Three-phase CTs in residual
(Holmgreen) connection
1 A CT: 50 mA
5 A CT: 200 mA
In general not
suitable for sensi-
tive ground-fault
current of IG SEC = 9.4 A / (600 / 5) = 78 mA. 6
With a relay setting of 12 mA, the protection range would in
protection
12
2 3 of 1 A CTs are not this case be 100 1 = 85 %.
Three-phase CTs in 78
residual (Holmgreen)
connection with special
secondary rated
CT current In SEC
recommended in
this case
7
10 15 mA with
factory calibration 5 A CTs
to minimum residual false
currents ( 2 mA)
8
52 3) 9
Earthing transformer 59N
1) UN
52
RB
62 10
I>/U<
Redundant 50/27
IG 67N IG
protection
U<
67N
11
27
27 U < 59N 87 6 I
59 U >
46 I2 > 81 f >
<
64R 59 U >
4) U >
O
12
81 f
32
P
40
L. O. F.
51V
I > t, U t, U <
51V
L. O. F.
40 32
P >
49
I2 >
46
13
7UM61 or 7UM62 2) 7UM62
14
Fig. 2/68 Protection for generators > 5 10 MW
15
Overview
Notes (Fig. 2/68):
1 1) The standard core-balance CT 7XR96 has a transformation

ratio of 60 / 1 A. 52
2) Instead of an open-delta winding at the terminal VT, Transf. fault press
Unit 63 3)
a 1-phase VT at the machine neutral could be used as zero- trans.
2 sequence polarizing voltage.
87T
71 Oil low
3) The grounding transformer is designed for a short-time rating

of 20 s. To prevent overloading, the load resistor is automati-
51N
cally switched off by a time-delayed zero-sequence voltage
3 relay (59N + 62) and a contactor (52). Transf. neut. OC
Unit aux.
4) During the startup time of the generator with the open 87T
backup
circuit-breaker, the grounding source is not available. To Unit diff.
51
ensure ground-fault protection during this time interval, an Oil low
4 auxiliary contact of the circuit-breaker can be used to change
over the directional ground-fault relay function (67N) to a
Transf.
fault press 3) 71
63
zero-sequence voltage detection function via binary input.
5 Overvolt. 59
Unit
aux.
81 51N
Overfreq. Trans.
78
6 Loss of
sync. 24
neut.
OC
40 Volt/Hz
87T
A
Stator Loss of Trans.
eld
7 O.L.
49S 32
diff.
E Reverse
87G power
8 64R
2)
64R
Gen.
diff.
Field Field 46 21
grd. grd.
Neg. Sys.
9 seq. backup
Generators > 50 100 MW in generator transformer

unit connection 59/GN
10 (Fig. 2/69)
1)
Gen.
neut. OV
Notes: 51/GN
1) 100 % stator ground-fault protection based on 20 Hz voltage

11 injection Fig. 2/69 Protections for generators > 50 MW
2) Sensitive rotor ground-fault protection based on 1 3 Hz

voltage injection
12 3) Non-electrical signals can be incoupled in the protection via

binary inputs (BI) Relay
type Functions 4)
Number
of relays
required
4) Only used functions shown; further integrated functions 21 24 32 40 46 49
7UM62
available in each relay type; for more information, please refer 1) 2)
13 to part 1 of this catalog. 51GN

81
59GN
87G
59
via BI:
64R
71
64R
63
78 2
7UM61 or 51 51N optionally 21 59 81 via BI: 71 63 1

7UM62
14 7UT612 87T 51N optionally 1

2
7UT613 87T 1
15 Fig. 2/70 Assignment for functions to relay type

Overview
Synchronization of a generator
Bus
Fig. 2/71 shows a typical connection for synchronizing a genera-
tor. Paralleling device 7VE6 acquires the line and generator
U1
1
voltage, and calculates the differential voltage, frequency and 52
phase angle. If these values are within a permitted range, a
CLOSE command is issued after a specied circuit-breaker make
time. If these variables are out of range, the paralleling device
automatically sends a command to the voltage and speed
U2
7VE6
2
25 U f
controller. For example, if the frequency is outside the range, an
actuation command is sent to the speed controller. If the voltage
is outside the range, the voltage controller is activated. 3
G
Fig. 2/71 Synchronization of a generator

5
5. Busbars
Busbar protection by overcurrent relays with reverse
Infeed
6
interlocking Reverse interlocking
General note: I >, t0 I >, t

Applicable to distribution busbars without substantial
(< 0.25 IN) backfeed from the outgoing feeders. 52
50/50N 51/51N
7SJ60
7
t0 = 50 ms
52 52 52 8
I> I >, t I> I >, t I> I >, t
50/50N 51/51N
7SJ60
50/50N 51/51N
7SJ60
50/50N 51/51N
7SJ60
9
Fig. 2/72 Busbar protection by O / C relays with reverse interlocking

10
11
12
13
14
15
Overview
High-impedance busbar protection
1 General notes:
Normally used with single busbar, and one-breaker-and-a-half
Transformer
protection
schemes.
Requires separate class X current transformer cores. All CTs 7VH60
2 must have the same transformation ratio.
51/51N 7VH60
7VH60
Note:
87BB 87S.V.
A varistor is normally applied across the relay input terminals to
1)
3 limit the voltage to a value safely below the insulation voltage of
the secondary circuits. 52 52 52 86
Alarm
5
Fig. 2/73 High-impedance busbar protection
6 Low-impedance busbar protection 7SS60

General notes:
Normally used with single busbar, one-breaker-and-a-half, and
87BB
double busbar schemes, different transformation ratios can be
7 adapted by matching transformers.
52
86
Unlimited number of feeders.
Feeder protection can be connected to the same CT core. 52 52 52 7SS601
8 50BF
7SV60
50BF
7SV60
9 50BF
7SV60 G
7TM70
7SS60
Load
10 Fig. 2/74 Low-impedance busbar protection 7SS60
Distributed busbar protection 7SS52

General notes:
11 Suitable for all types of busbar schemes.
Preferably used for multiple busbar schemes where a discon-
nector (isolator) replica is necessary. 52 52 52 52
12 The numerical busbar protection 7SS52 provides additional

breaker failure protection.
50BF 50BF 50BF 50BF
50 50 50 50
Different CT transformation ratios can be adapted numerically.
51 51 51 51
The protection system and the disconnector (isolator) replica Bay
13 are continuously self-monitored by the 7SS52.
Feeder protection can be connected to the same CT core.
units 50N 50N 50N 50N
51N 51N 51N 51N
7SS523 FO 7SS523 FO 7SS523 FO 7SS523 FO
14
87BB 50BF
Central unit 7SS522
15 Fig. 2/75 Distributed busbar protection 7SS52

Overview
6. Power systems
Overexcitation protection
Load shedding
In unstable power systems (e.g., isolated systems, emergency
U >, t; U >>, t U/f >, t; U/f >>, t; U/f=f(t)
59 24
1
7RW600 or 7RW80
power supply in hospitals), it may be necessary to isolate
selected loads from the power system to prevent overload of the
overall system. The overcurrent-time protection functions are
effective only in the case of a short-circuit.
Motor protection with reclosing lockout
f >,t; f <, t U <, t U >, t; U >>, t 2
81 27 59
Overloading of the generator can be measured as a frequency or 7RW600 or 7RW80
voltage drop.
(Protection functions 27 and 81 available in 7RW600, 7SJ6 and
Further
grid 3
7SJ8.)
f >,t; f <, t; U <, t U >, t; U >>, t f >,t; f <, t; U <, t U >, t; U >>, t
81 27
7RW600, 7RW80, 7SJ62 or 7SJ80
59 81 27 59
7RW600, 7RW80 or 7SJ62 M 4
Decoupling Load shedding
Fig. 2/76 Load shedding

5
Load shedding with rate-of-frequency-change protection
50
The rate-of-frequency-change protection calculates, from the
measured frequency, the gradient or frequency change df / dt.
It is thus possible to detect and record any major active power
f
Hz
6
loss in the power system, to disconnect certain consumers fm
accordingly and to restore the system to stability. Unlike fre- t
quency protection, rate-of-frequency-change protection reacts
before the frequency threshold is undershot. To ensure effective
49
fa 7
protection settings, it is recommended to consider requirements fb
throughout the power system as a whole. The rate-of-frequency- fc
change protection function can also be used for the purposes of
system decoupling. 48 8
0 1 2 3 4 5
Rate-of-frequency-change protection can also be enabled by an t
underfrequency state.
Fig. 2/77 Load shedding with rate-of-frequency-change protection
9
Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74TC)
VCV
One or two binary inputs can be used for the trip circuit
supervision.
L+
10
7SJx, 7SAx, 7SDx 7SJx, 7SAx, 7SDx
or any other or any other Trip
protective TCo BI 1 protective circuit
relay relay faulty
11
CLOSE TRIP R TCo Trip contact of the relay
BI Binary input of the relay
AUX 1 AUX 1 TC Trip coil
52a
TC
52
52b Aux
R
Circuit-breaker auxiliary
contact
Equivalent resistor instead
12
CB
of BI 2
L Ucv Control voltage
CB Circuit-breaker
13
Fig. 2/78 Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74TC)
14
15
Overview
Disconnecting facility with exible protection function

52
1 General note:
The SIPROTEC protection relay 7SJ64 disconnects the
CB 1
Connection to power utility
switchgear from the utility power system if the generator Customer switchgear with autonomous supply
Switch-
feeds energy back into the power system (protection function disconnector
2 Preverse>). This functionality is achieved by using exible protec-
tion. Disconnection also takes place in the event of frequency 7UT612
1)
or voltage uctuations in the utility power system (protection

functions f<, f>, U<, U>, Idir>, IEdir> / 81, 27, 59, 67, 67N). G
3 Notes:
1) The transformer is protected by differential protection and
inverse or denite-time overcurrent protection functions
for the phase currents. In the event of a fault, the circuit- 52 52
4 breaker CB1 on the utility side is tripped by a remote link.
Circuit-breaker CB2 is also tripped.
CB 2 CB 3
2) Overcurrent-time protection functions protect feeders 1 and

2 against short-circuits and overload caused by the con-
5 nected loads. Both the phase currents and the zero currents
7SJ64 f < f> U Sync. I >dir I E >dir
Preserve >
of the feeders can be protected by inverse and denite-time 32 81 81 27 59 25 67 67N
overcurrent stages. The circuit-breakers CB4 and CB5 are
tripped in the event of a fault. Busbar
6 7SJ61/ 2) 7SJ61/ 2)
7SJ80 7SJ80
52 52
7 CB 4 CB 5
8 Feeder 1 Feeder 2
Fig. 2/79 Example of a switchgear with autonomous generator supply
10
11
12
13
14
15
Overview
Protection coordination
12.0
Typical applications and functions Rush

11.0 1
10.0
Relay operating characteristics and their settings must be N
9.0
carefully coordinated in order to achieve selectivity. The aim is
basically to switch off only the faulty component and to leave
the rest of the power system in service in order to minimize
8.0
7.0 2
supply interruptions and to ensure stability. 6.0
5.0
Sensitivity
Protection should be as sensitive as possible in order to detect
4.0
3.0
3
faults at the lowest possible current level. At the same time, 2.0
however, it should remain stable under all permissible load,
1.0
overload and through-fault conditions. For more information:
http: / / www.siemens.com / systemplanning. The Siemens engi-
2 10 100
Rated transformer power (MVA)
400
4
neering programs SINCAL and SIGRADE are especially designed
for selective protection grading of protection relay systems. They
provide short-circuit calculations, international standard charac-
teristics of relays, fuses and circuit-breakers for easy protection
Time constant of inrush current
Nominal power (MVA) 0.5 1.0 1.0 10 > 10
5
grading with respect to motor starting, inrush phenomena, and
equipment damage curves. Time constant (s) 0.16 0.2 0.2 1.2 1.2 720
Phase-fault overcurrent relays Fig. 2/80 Peak value of inrush current

6
The pickup values of phase overcurrent relays are normally set
30 % above the maximum load current, provided that sufcient Ground-fault protection relays
short-circuit current is available. This practice is recommended
particularly for mechanical relays with reset ratios of 0.8 to
0.85. Numerical relays have high reset ratios near 0.95 and
Ground-current relays enable a much more sensitive setting,
because load currents do not have to be considered (except
7
allow, therefore, about a 10 % lower setting. Feeders with high 4-wire circuits with 1-phase load). In solidly and low-resistance
transformer and / or motor load require special consideration. grounded systems, a setting of 10 to 20 % rated load current
Transformer feeders
can generally be applied. High-resistance grounding requires
a much more sensitive setting, on the order of some amperes 8
primary. The ground-fault current of motors and generators,
The energizing of transformers causes inrush currents that may
for example, should be limited to values below 10 A in order
last for seconds, depending on their size (Fig. 2/79). Selection
to avoid iron burning. In this case, residual-current relays in
of the pickup current and assigned time delay have to be
coordinated so that the inrush current decreases below the
the start point connection of CTs cannot be used; in particular, 9
with rated CT primary currents higher than 200 A. The pickup
relay overcurrent reset value before the set operating time has
value of the zero-sequence relay would be on the order of the
elapsed. The inrush current typically contains only about a 50 %
error currents of the CTs. A special core-balance CT is therefore
fundamental frequency component. Numerical relays that lter
out harmonics and the DC component of the inrush current can
used as the ground-current sensor. The core-balance CT 7XR96
is designed for a ratio of 60 /1 A. The detection of 6 A primary
10
therefore be set to be more sensitive. The inrush current peak
would then require a relay pickup setting of 0.1 A secondary. An
values of Fig. 2/80 will be reduced to more than one half in this
even more sensitive setting is applied in isolated or Petersen coil
case. Some digital relay types have an inrush detection function
that may block the trip of the overcurrent protection resulting
from inrush currents.
grounded systems where very low ground currents occur with
1-phase-to-ground faults. Settings of 20 mA and lower may then 11
be required depending on the minimum ground-fault current.
Sensitive directional ground-fault relays (integrated into the
relays 7SJ62, 63, 64, 7SJ80, 7SK80, 7SA6) allow settings as
low as 5 mA. 12
13
14
15
Overview
Motor feeders
10,000
1 The energization of motors causes a starting current of initially

5 to 6 times the rated current (locked rotor current).
Time in
1,000
seconds 100
A typical time-current curve for an induction motor is shown in
Fig. 2/81. 10
2 In the rst 100 ms, a fast-decaying asymmetrical inrush current 1
also appears. With conventional relays, it was common practice 0.1

to set the instantaneous overcurrent stage of the short-circuit
0.01
protection 20 to 30 % above the locked rotor current with a
3 short-time delay of 50 to 100 ms to override the asymmetrical
inrush period.
0.001
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Current in multiplies of full-load amps
Numerical relays are able to lter out the asymmetrical current
component very rapidly so that the setting of an additional time Motor starting current High set instantaneous O/C stage
4 delay is no longer applicable. Locked-rotor current

Overload protection characteristic
Motor thermal limit curve
Permissible locked-rotor time
The overload protection characteristic should follow the thermal
motor characteristic as closely as possible. The adaptation is Fig. 2/81 Typical motor current-time characteristics
made by setting the pickup value and the thermal time constant,
5 using the data supplied by the motor manufacturer. Further-
more, the locked-rotor protection timer has to be set according
to the characteristic motor value.
6 Time grading of overcurrent relays (51) Time 51
The selectivity of overcurrent protection is based on time grad-

ing of the relay operating characteristics. The relay closer to the 51 51
infeed (upstream relay) is time-delayed against the relay further
7 away from the infeed (downstream relay). The calculation of
necessary grading times is shown in Fig. 2/83 by an example for 0.2-0.4 seconds
denite-time overcurrent relays. Main
Feeder
The overshoot times take into account the fact that the measur-
8 ing relay continues to operate due to its inertia, even if when
Maximum feeder fault level
Current
the fault current is interrupted. This may be high for mechanical

Fig. 2/82 Coordination of inverse-time relays
relays (about 0.1 s) and negligible for numerical relays (20 ms).
9 Inverse-time relays (51)

For the time grading of inverse-time relays, in principle the same lnstantaneous overcurrent protection (50)
rules apply as for the denite-time relays. The time grading is
This is typically applied on the nal supply load or on any
rst calculated for the maximum fault level and then checked for
10 lower current levels (Fig. 2/82).
protection relay with sufcient circuit impedance between
itself and the next downstream protection relay. The setting at
If the same characteristic is used for all relays, or if when the transformers, for example, must be chosen about 20 to 30 %
upstream relay has a steeper characteristic (e.g., very much higher than the maximum through-fault current. The relay must
over normal inverse), then selectivity is automatically fullled at remain stable during energization of the transformer.
11 lower currents.
Differential relay (87)

Transformer differential relays are normally set to pickup values
12 between 20 and 30 % of the rated current. The higher value has
to be chosen when the transformer is tted with a tap changer.
Restricted ground-fault relays and high-resistance motor / gen-
13 erator differential relays are, as a rule, set to about 10 % of the

rated current.
14
15
Overview
Calculation example
52M Operating time
The feeder conguration of Fig. 2/84 and the associated load
and short-circuit currents are given. Numerical overcurrent relays 1
7SJ60 with normal inverse-time characteristics are applied. 51M
The relay operating times, depending on the current, can be 52F 52F
derived from the diagram or calculated with the formula given in
Fig. 2/85.
51F 51F
2
The Ip / IN settings shown in Fig. 2/84 have been chosen to get 0.2-0.4
pickup values safely above maximum load current. Time grading
This current setting should be lowest for the relay farthest

Fault Fault
inception detection
Interruption of
fault current
3
downstream. The relays further upstream should each have t 51F t 52F
equal or higher current settings. Circuit-breaker
Set time delay interruption time
The time multiplier settings can now be calculated as follows:
Overshoot* 4
Station C: t OS Margin tM
For coordination with the fuses, we consider the fault in loca- t 51M
tion F1.
The short-circuit current Iscc. max. related to 13.8 kV is 523 A.
*also called overtravel or coasting time 5
This results in 7.47 for I / Ip at the overcurrent relay in
location C. Time grading
With this value and Tp = 0.05, an operating time of tA = 0.17 s
can be derived from Fig. 2/85.
trs = t51M t51F = t52F + tOS + tM
Example 1 tTG =0.10 s + 0.15 s + 0.15 s = 0.40 s
6
This setting was selected for the overcurrent relay to get a safe
grading time over the fuse on the transformer low-voltage Oil circuit-breaker t52F = 0.10 s
side. Safety margin for the setting values for the relay at sta-
tion C are therefore:
Mechanical relays
Safety margin for
tOS = 0.15 s
7
Pickup current: Ip / IN = 0.7 measuring errors, etc. tM = 0.15 s
Time multiplier: Tp = 0.05. Example 2 tTG = 0.08 + 0.02 + 0.10 = 0.20 s
Station B:
Vacuum circuit-breaker t52F = 0.08 s 8
Numerical relays tOS = 0.02 s
The relay in B has a primary protection function for line B-C and
Safety margin tM = 0.10 s
a backup function for the relay in C. The maximum through-fault
current of 1.395 A becomes effective for a fault in location F2.
For the relay in C, an operating time time of 0.11 s (I / Ip = 19.93)
Fig. 2/83 Time grading of overcurrent-time relays 9
is obtained.
It is assumed that no special requirements for short operating
times exist and therefore an average time grading interval of
0.3 s can be chosen. The operating time of the relay in B can A F4 B F3 C
13.8 kV/ Fuse:
F2 0.4 kV
160 A
D
Load
F1
10
then be calculated. Load
13.8 kV
625 kVA L.V. 75
t = 0.11 + 0.3 = 0.41 s

B
51
7SJ60
51
7SJ60
51
7SJ60
5.0 % Load
11
1,395 A
Value of I / I =
p N
220 A
= 6.34 (Fig. 2/84)
Station Max. ISCC. CT Ip / IN** Iprim*** Iscc. max
With the operating time 0.41 s and Ip / IN = 6.34,
Tp = 0.11 can be derived from Fig. 2/85.
load
A
max*
A
ratio
A
I / Ip =
Iprim 12
A 300 4,500 400 / 5 1.0 400 11.25
B 170 2,690 200 / 5 1.1 220 12.23
C 50 1,395 100 / 5 0.7 70 19.93 13
D 523
*) ISCC. max = Maximum short-circuit current
**)
***)
Ip / IN
Iprim
= Relay current multiplier setting
= Primary setting current corresponding to Ip / IN 14
Fig. 2/84 Time grading of inverse-time relays for a radial feeder
15
Overview
The setting values for the relay at station B are:

Pickup current: Ip / IN = 1.1 100
1 Time multiplier Tp = 0.11
t 50
Given these settings, the operating time of the relay in B for a
40
close fault in F3 can also be checked: The short-circuit current
30
2 increases to 2,690 A in this case (Fig. 2/84). The corresponding
I / Ip value is 12.23. 20
With this value and the set value of Tp = 0.11, an operating Tp [s]
time of 0.3 s is obtained again (Fig. 2/85).
10
3 Station A: 3.2
Adding the time grading interval of 0.3 s, the desired operat- 5
ing itme is tA = 0.3 + 0.3 = 0.6 s. 4 1.6
4 Following the same procedure as for the relay in station B,

the following values are obtained for the relay in station A:
3
2 0.8
Pickup current: Ip / IN = 1.0
Time multiplier Tp = 0.17
5 For the close-in fault at location F4, an operating time of
1
0.4
0.48 s is obtained.
0.50
0.2
The normal way 0.4
6 To prove the selectivity over the whole range of possible short-
0.3
circuit currents, it is normal practice to draw the set of operating 0.1
0.2
curves in a common diagram with double log scales. These
diagrams can be calculated manually and drawn point-by-point
7 or constructed by using templates. 0.1
0.05
Today, computer programs are also available for this purpose.

Fig. 2/86 shows the relay coordination diagram for the selected 0.05
example, as calculated by the Siemens program SIGRADE 2 4 6 8 10 20
8 (Siemens Grading Program).
[A]
p
Note:
To simplify calculations, only inverse-time characteristics have Fig. 2/85 Normal inverse-time characteristic of the 7SJ60 relay
9 been used for this example. About 0.1 s shorter operating times
could have been reached for high-current faults by additionally
applying the instantaneous zones I>> of the 7SJ60 relays.
10 Coordination of overcurrent relays with fuses and

low-voltage trip devices
The procedure is similar to the above-described grading of
overcurrent relays. A time interval of between 0.1 and 0.2 s is Normal inverse
11 usually sufcient for a safe time coordination.
t =
0.14
(I / Ip)0.02 1
Tp(s)
Strong and extremely inverse characteristics are often more
suitable than normal inverse characteristics in this case.
Fig. 2/87 shows typical examples. Strong inverse characteristics may be used with expulsion-type
12 Simple distribution substations use a power fuse on the
fuses (fuse cutouts), while extremely inverse versions adapt
better to current limiting fuses.
secondary side of the supply transformers (Fig. 2/87a).
In any case, the nal decision should be made by plotting the
In this case, the operating characteristic of the overcurrent relay curves in the log-log coordination diagram.
13 at the infeed has to be coordinated with the fuse curve.
Electronic trip devices of LV breakers have long-delay, short-
delay and instantaneous zones. Numerical overcurrent relays
with one inverse-time and two denite-time zones can closely
be adapted to this (Fig. 2/87b).
14
15
Overview
Setting range
N
Bus-A Ip = 0.10 4.00 IN
Tp = 0.05 3.2 s
Ip = 1.0 IN
Tp = 0.17 s
1
/5 A I>> = 0.1 25 IN I>> =
52 Ip = 1.0 IN
7SJ600
Tp = 0.11 s
I>> =
2
Bus-B
Ip = 0.10 4.00 IN
Tp = 0.05 3.2 s
/5 A
I>> = 0.1 25 IN
52 7SJ600
3
Ip = 0.7 IN
Bus-C Tp = 0.05 s
I>> =
/5 A Ip = 0.10 4.00 IN
Tp = 0.05 3.2 s
4
7SJ600 I>> = 0.1 25 IN
52
13.8/0.4 kV
5
TR 625 kVA
5.0%
fuse VDE 160

HRC fuse 160 A 6
Fig. 2/86 Overcurrent-time grading diagram
7
MV bus
Time Inverse-time relay

51
8
Other Fuse
consumers
n
9
a
LV bus
Fuse 0.2 s
10
Current
a) Maximum fault available at HV bus
Fig. 2/87 Coordination of an overcurrent relay with an MV fuse and low-voltage breaker trip device
11
Coordination of distance relays Where measured line or cable impedances are available, the pro-
tected zone setting may be extended to 90 %. The second and
12
The distance relay setting must take into account the limited
third zones have to keep a safety margin of about 15 to 20 %
relay accuracy, including transient overreach (5 %, according
to the corresponding zones of the following lines. The shortest
to IEC 60255-6), the CT error (1 % for class 5P and 3 % for class
10P) and a security margin of about 5 %. Furthermore, the line
parameters are often only calculated, not measured. This is a
following line always has to be considered (Fig. 2/88).
As a general rule, the second zone should at least reach 20 %
13
further source of errors. A setting of 80 to 85 % is therefore over the next station to ensure backup for busbar faults, and the
common practice; 80 % is used for mechanical relays, while 85 % third zone should cover the longest following line as backup for
can be used for the more accurate numerical relays. the line protection.
14
15
Overview
Grading of zone times
1 The rst zone normally operates undelayed. For the grading

of the time delays of the second and third zones, the same Ope-
t
rating 3
Z3A
rules as for overcurrent relays apply (Fig. 2/83, page 2/41). For time t 2 Z2A Z2B
the quadrilateral characteristics (relays 7SA6 and 7SA5), only Z1A Z1B Z1C
t1
the reactance values (X values) have to be considered for the
2 protected zone setting. The setting of the R values should cover
the line resistance and possible arc or fault resistances. The arc
ZL A-B ZL B-C ZLC-D
A B C D
resistance can be roughly estimated as follows: Load Load Load
Z1A = 0.85 ZLAB

3 RARC =
2.5 larc
I SSC Min
[] Z2A = 0.85 (ZLAB + Z1B)
Z2A = 0.85 (ZLAB + Z2B)
larc = Arc length in mm
4 ISCC Min = Minimum short-circuit current in kA Fig. 2/88 Grading of distance zones
Typical settings of the ratio R / X are:

Short lines and cables ( 10 km): R / X =2 to 6
Medium line lengths < 25 km: R / X =2 D
5 Longer lines 25 to 50 km: R / X =1 X
X 3A
Shortest feeder protectable by distance relays C
The shortest feeder that can be protected by underreaching
6 distance zones without the need for signaling links depends on
the shortest settable relay reactance.
X 2A
B
X1A
VTratio
XPrim Min = XRelay Min
CTratio
7 lmin =
XPrim Min
XLine

R1A R 2A R 3A
8 The shortest setting of the numerical Siemens relays is 0.05
for 1 A relays, corresponding to 0.01 for 5 A relays. This allows A R
distance protection of distribution cables down to the range of
some 500 meters.
9 Breaker failure protection setting

Most numerical relays in this guide provide breaker failure (BF)
protection as an integral function. The initiation of the BF pro- Fig. 2/89 Operating characteristics of Siemens distance relays
tection by the internal protection functions then takes place via
10 software logic. However, the BF protection function may also be
initiated externally via binary inputs by an alternate protection. The reset time is 1 cycle for EHV relays (7SA6 / 52, 7VK61) and
In this case, the operating time of intermediate relays (BFI time) 1.5 to 2 cycles for distribution type relays (7SJ**).
may have to be considered. Finally, the tripping of the infeeding
11 breakers requires auxiliary relays, which add a small time delay
(BFI) to the overall fault clearing time. This is particularly the
Fig. 2/91 (next page) shows the time chart for a typical breaker
failure protection scheme. The stated times in parentheses apply
case with one-breaker-and-a-half or ring bus arrangements for transmission system protection and the times in square
where a separate breaker failure relay (7SV600 or 7VK61) is used brackets for distribution system protection.
12 per breaker (Fig. 2/83, Fig. 2/84).

The decisive criterion of BF protection time coordination is the
reset time of the current detector (50BF), which must not be
exceeded under any condition during normal current interrup-
13 tion. The reset times specied in the Siemens numerical relay
manuals are valid for the worst-case condition: interruption of a
fully offset short-circuit current and low current pickup setting
(0.1 to 0.2 times rated CT current).
14
15
Overview
High-impedance differential protection;

verication of design 50BF
The following design data must be established:

1
CT data
The prerequisite for high-impedance scheme is that all CTs 50BF
used for that scheme must have the same ratio. They should
also be of low leakage ux design according to Class PX of IEC P1
A
N
D
2
60044-1 (former Class X of BS 3938) or TPS of IEC 60044-6, O
when used for high-impedance busbar protection scheme. When R
P1: primary P 2: alternate P2
used for restricted ground-fault differential protection of e.g. a
transformer winding especially in solidly grounded networks,
protection protection
3
CTs of Class 5P according to IEC 60044-1 can be used as well.
Fig. 2/90 Breaker failure protection, logic circuit
In each case the excitation characteristic and the secondary
winding resistance are to be provided by the manufacturer. The
knee-point voltage of the CT must be at least twice the relay
Fault incidence BFI =
4
pickup voltage to ensure operation on internal faults.
breaker failure
Normal interrupting time initiation time
The relay Current (intermediate
The relay can be either: Protect. Breaker inter.

detector
(50 BF)
reset time Margin
relays, if any)
BFT =
5
a) dedicated design high-impedance relay, e.g., designed as breaker failure
time time tripping time
a sensitive current relay 7VH60 or 7SG12 (DAD-N) with external (1~) (2~) (1~) (2,5~) (auxilary relays,
series resistor Rstab. If the series resistor is integrated into the [2~] [4~] [2~] [2,5~] if any)
relay, the setting values may be directly applied in volts, as with
the relay 7VH60 (6 to 60V or 24 to 240 V); or 0,5~
(5~)
[8~]
0,5~
(2~)
[4~]
6
b) digital overcurrent protection relay with sensitive current BFI BF timer (F) (62BF) BFT Adjacent
input, like 7SJ6 or 7SR1 (Argus-C). To the input of the relay breaker
a series stabilizing resistor Rstab will be then connected as a rule
in order to obtain enough stabilization for the high-impedance
Total breaker failure interrupting time
(9~) [15~]
int. time
7
scheme. Typically, a non-linear resistor V (varistor) will be also
connected to protect the relay and wiring against overvoltages. Fig. 2/91 Time coordination of BF time setting
Sensitivity of the scheme 8

For the relay to operate in the event of an internal fault, the
primary current must reach a minimum value to supply the relay
pickup current (Iset), the varistor leakage current (Ivar) and the
magnetizing currents of all parallel-connected CTs at the set 9
pickup voltage. A low relay voltage setting and CTs with low
magnetizing current therefore increase the protection sensitivity
Stability during external faults

mR m 10
This check is made by assuming an external fault with maximum
through-fault current and full saturation of the CT in the faulty
feeder. The saturated CT is then substituted with its secondary
winding resistance RCT, and the appearing relay voltage VR
corresponds to the voltage drop of the in-feeding currents
UK = CT knee-point voltage
UR = RR IR
11
(through-fault current) across RCT and Rlead. The current (volt- UK = 2 UR
age) at the relay must, under this condition, stay reliably below
the relay pickup value. Fig. 2/92 Principle connection diagram for high-impedance restricted
ground-fault protection of a winding of the transformer using
12
In practice, the wiring resistances Rlead may not be equal. SIPROTEC digital overcurrent relay (e.g. 7SJ61)
In this case, the worst condition with the highest relay voltage
(corresponding to the highest through-fault current) must be
sought by considering all possible external feeder faults. Relay setting Urms C Varistor type 13
Setting 125 450 0.25 600 A / S1 / S256
125 240 900 0.25 600 A / S1 / S1088
The setting is always a trade-off between sensitivity and
stability. A higher voltage setting leads not only to enhanced
through-fault stability but also to higher CT magnetizing and
14
varistor leakage currents, resulting consequently in a higher
primary pickup current.
15
Overview
Calculation example: Moreover, Rstab must have a short time rating large enough to withstand
the fault current levels before the fault is cleared. The time duration of
1 Restricted ground fault protection for the 400 kV winding of 400 MVA
power transformer with Ir, 400 kV = 577 A installed in a switchgear with
0.5 seconds can be typically considered (Pstab, 0.5s) to take into account
longer fault clearance times of back-up protection.
rated withstand short-circuit current of 40 kA.
The rms voltage developed across the stabilizing resistor is decisive for
Given:
the thermal stress of the stabilizing resistor. It is calculated according to
N = 4 CTs connected in parallel; Ipn / Isn = 800 A / 1 A CT ratio;
formula:
2 Uk = 400 V CT Knee-point voltage;
Im = 20 mA CT magnetizing current at Uk;
Urms,relay = 1.3 4 Uk3 Rstab I k,max,int
I sn
= 1.3 4 400 3 1000 50 = 1738.7 V
RCT = 3 CT internal resistance; I pn
Rlead = 2 secondary wiring (lead) resistance
Relay: 7SJ612; Time overcurrent 1Phase input used with setting range The resulting short-time rating Pstab, 0.5 s equals to:
3 Iset = 0.003 A to 1.5 A in steps of 0.001 A; relay internal burden
Rrelay = 50 m Pstab,0.5s =
Urms,relay 2
=
17392
= 3023 W
Stability calculation Rstab 1000
Isn 1 Check whether the voltage limitation by a varistor is required
Us ,min = Ik, max, thr (RCT + Rlead) = 10,000 (3+2) = 62.6 V
4 Ipn 800
with Ik, max, thr taken as 16 . Ir, 400 kV = 16 . 577 A = 9,232 A, rounded up to 10 kA.
The relay should normally be applied with an external varistor which should
be connected across the relay and stabilizing resistor input terminals. The
varistor limits the voltage across the terminals under maximum internal
The actual stability voltage for the scheme Us can be taken with enough fault conditions. The theoretical voltage which may occur at the terminals
safety margin as Us = 130 V (remembering that 2Us < Uk). can be determined according to following equation:
5 Fault setting calculation

For the desired primary fault sensitivity of 125 A, which is approx. 22 %
Isn
Ipn
1
Uk, max, int = Ik, max, int (Rrelay + Rstab) = 40,000 (0.05+1000) = 50003 V
800
of the rated current of the protected winding Ir, 400 kV (i.e. Ip, des = 125 A) with Ik,max,int taken as the rated short-circuit current of the switchgear = 40 kA.
the following current setting can be calculated:
The resulting maximum peak voltage across the panel terminals
6 Isn Us 1 130
Iset = Ip,des N . Im = 125 4 . 0.02 = 0.13 A
Ipn Uk 800 400
(i.e. tie with relay and Rstab connected in series):
Stabilizing resistor calculation

( )
max,relay = 2 2Uk Uk,max,int = 2 2 400(50003 400) = 12600 V
From the Us and Iset values calculated above the value of the stabilizing Since Umax, relay > 1.5 kV the varistor is necessary.
7 resistor Rstab can be calculated:
Us 130 Exemplarily, a METROSIL of type 600A / S1 / Spec.1088 can be used
Rstab = Rrelay = 0.05 = 1,000 ( = 0.25, C = 900).
Iset 0.13 This Metrosil leakage current at voltage setting Us =130 V equals to
. 1/
8 where the relay resistance can be neglected.

The stabilizing resistor Rstab can be chosen with a necessary minimum
Irms = 0.52 ( U
set, rms 2
C
) = 0.91 mA
continuous power rating Pstab,cont of:
and can be neglected by the calculations, since its inuence on the
U s2 1302
Pstab,cont = = 16.9 W proposed fault-setting is negligible.
Rstab 1000
9
A higher voltage setting also requires a higher knee-point voltage CT requirements for protection relays
10 of the CTs and therefore greater size of the CTs. A sensitivity of 10
to 20 % of Ir (rated current) is typical for restricted ground-fault Instrument transformers
protection. With busbar protection, a pickup value Ir is normally Instrument transformers must comply with the applicable
applied. In networks with neutral grounding via impedance the IEC recommendations IEC 60044 and 60186 (PT),
fault setting shall be revised against the minimum ground fault
11 conditions.
ANSI / IEEE C57.13 or other comparable standards.
Voltage transformers (VT)

Non-linear resistor (varistor)
Voltage transformers (VT) in single-pole design for all primary
Voltage limitation by a varistor is needed if peak voltages near
12 or above the insulation voltage (2 kV 3 kV) are expected. A
voltages have typical single or dual secondary windings of
100, 110 or 115 V / 3 with output ratings between 10 and
limitation to Urms = 1,500 V is then recommended. This can be 50 VA suitable from most application with digital metering and
checked for the maximum internal fault current by applying the protection equipment, and accuracies of 0.1 % to 6 % to suit the
formula shown for Umax relav. A restricted ground-fault protection particular application. Primary BIL values are selected to match
13 may sometimes not require a varistor, but a busbar protection in
general does. However, it is considered a good practice to equip
those of the associated switchgear.
with a varistor all high impedance protection installations. The Current transformers
electrical varistor characteristic of a varistor can be expressed as
Current transformers (CT) are usually of the single-ratio type
14 U = C I where C and are the varistor constants.
with wound or bar-type primaries of adequate thermal rating.
Single, double or triple secondary windings of 1 or 5 A are stan-
dard. 1 A rating should, however, be preferred, particularly in HV
and EHV stations, to reduce the burden of the connected lines.
15 Output power (rated burden in VA), accuracy and saturation
characteristics (rated symmetrical short-circuit current limiting

Overview
factor) of the cores and secondary windings must meet the The requirements for protective current transformers for
requirements of the particular application.The CT classication transient performance are specied in IEC 60044-6. In many
code of IEC is used in the following: practical cases, iron-core CTs cannot be designed to avoid satura-
tion under all circumstances because of cost and space reasons,
1
Measuring cores
These are normally specied 0.2 % or 0.5 % accuracy (class 0.2 particularly with metal-enclosed switchgear.
or class 0.5), and an rated symmetrical short-circuit current The Siemens relays are therefore designed to tolerate CT satura-
limiting factor FS of 5 or 10.
The required output power (rated burden) should be higher
tion to a large extent. The numerical relays proposed in this
guide are particularly stable in this case due to their integrated
2
than the actually connected burden. Typical values are 2.5, 5 saturation detection function.
or 10 VA. Higher values are normally not necessary when only
electronic meters and recorders are connected.
A typical specication could be: 0.5 FS 10, 5 VA.
CT dimensioning formulae
3
Rct + Rb
Cores for billing values metering Kssc = Kssc (effective)
Rct + Rb
In this case, class 0.25 FS is normally required.
Protection cores
The size of the protection core depends mainly on the maxi-
Iscc max
with Kssc Ktd
Ipn
(required) 4
mum short-circuit current and the total burden (internal CT
burden, plus burden of connected lines plus relay burden) The effective symmetrical short-circuit current factor K'SSC can be
Furthermore, a transient dimensioning factor has to be
considered to cover the inuence of the DC component in the
calculated as shown in the table above. 5
short-circuit current. The rated transient dimensioning factor Ktd depends on the type
of relay and the primary DC time constant. For relays with a
Glossary of used abbreviations required saturation free time from 0.4 cycle, the primary (DC)
(according to IEC 60044-6, as dened)
Kssc = Rated symmetrical short-circuit current factor
time constant TP has little inuence. 6
(example: CT cl. 5P20 Kssc = 20) CT design according to BS 3938 / IEC 60044-1 (2000)
Kssc = Effective symmetrical short-circuit current factor IEC Class P can be approximately transfered into the IEC Class PX
Ktd = Transient dimensioning factor

(BS Class X) standard denition by following formula:
(Rb + Rct) In Kssc
7
Issc max = Maximum symmetrical short-circuit current Uk =
1.3
Ipn = CT rated primary current
Example:
Isn = CT rated secondary current IEC 60044: 600 / 1, 5P10, 15 VA, Rct = 4 8
Rct = Secondary winding d.c. resistance at 75 C / 167 F (15 + 4) 1 10
(or other specied temperature) IEC PX or BS: UK = = 146 V
1.3
Rb = Rated resistive burden Rct = 4
Rb = Rlead + Rrelay = connected resistive burden For CT design according to ANSI / IEEE C 57.13 please refer to page 2/50 9
TP = Primary time constant (net time constant) The CT requirements mentioned in Table 2/2 are simplied
UK = Kneepoint voltage (r.m.s.) in order to allow fast CT calculations on the safe side. More
Rrelay = Relay burden
accurate dimensioning can be done by more intensive calcula-
tion with Siemenss CTDIM (www.siemens.com / ctdim) program.
10
2l Results of CTDIM are released by the relay manufacturer.
Rlead =
A
Adaption factor for 7UT6, 7UM62 relays
with
l = Single conductor length from CT to relay in m
(limited resolution of measurement) 11
= Specic resistance = 0.0175 mm2 / m (copper wires)
Ipn INrelay Ipn 3 UnO INrelay
at 20 C / 68 F (or other specied temperature)
FAdap = = Request: 8
InO Isn SNmax Isn
A = Conductor cross-section in mm2
7SD52, 53, 610, when transformer inside protected zone 12
In general, an accuracy of 1 % in the range of 1 to 2 times In-pri-CTmax 1
nominal current (class 5 P) is specied. The rated symmetrical 8
short-circuit current factor KSSC should normally be selected so In-pri-CTmin Transformer Ratio*
that at least the maximum short-circuit current can be transmit-
ted without saturation (DC component is not considered).
* If transformer in protection zone, else 1 13
In-pri-CT-Transf-Site 2 In-Obj-Transf-Site AND
This results, as a rule, in rated symmetrical short-circuit current
factors of 10 or 20 depending on the rated burden of the CT in In-pri-CT-Transf-Site In-Obj-Transf-Site with
relation to the connected burden. A typical specication for pro- InO = Rated current of the protected object 14
tection cores for distribution feeders is 5P10, 10 VA or 5P20, 5 VA. UnO = Rated voltage of the protected object
INrelay = Rated current of the relay
SNmax = Maximun load of the protected object
(for transformers: winding with max. load) 15
Overview
Relay type Transient dimensioning Min. required sym. short- Min. required knee-point
factor Ktd circuit current factor Kssc voltage Uk
1 Overcurrent-time IHigh set point
and motor protection IHigh set point Uk (Rct + Rb) Isn
Kssc 1.3 Ipn
7SJ511, 512, 531 Ipn

7SJ45, 46, 60
2 7SJ61, 62, 63, 64
7SJ80, 7SK80
at least: 20
20
at least: (Rct + Rb) Isn
1.3
Iscc max (ext. fault) Iscc max (ext. fault)

Kssc Uk (Rct + Rb) Isn
Ipn 1.3 Ipn
3 Line differential protection
(pilot wire) and: and:
7SD600 3 (Kssc Ipn)end1 4 3 (Uk / (Rct + Rb) Ipn / Isn)end1 4

4 (Kssc Ipn)end2 3 4 (Uk / (Rct + Rb) Ipn / Isn)end2 3
4 Line differential protection

(without distance function) Transformer
Busbar /
Line
Gen. /
Motor
Kssc
Iscc max (ext. fault)
UK
7SD52x, 53x, 610 (50 / 60 Hz) 1.2 1.2 1.2 Ktd (Rct + Rb) Isn
Ktd 1.3 Ipn
Ipn
Transformer / generator Busbar / Gen. / and (only for 7SS):
5 differential protection
7UT612, 7UT612 V4.0 4
Transformer Line
4
Motor
5
and (only for 7SS):
Iscc max (ext. fault) 100
7UT613, 633, 635, 7UT612 V4.6 3 3 5 100 Ipn
7UM62 4 5 Ipn
(measuring range)
6 Busbar protection
7SS52, 7SS60
for stabilizing factors k 0.5
0.5
(measuring range)
Distance protection primary DC time constant Tp [ms] Kssc UK

7SA522, 7SA6, 7SD5xx 30 50 100 200 Iscc max (close in fault) Iscc max (close in fault)
7 (with distance function) Ktd (a) 1 2 4 4
Ktd (a)
Ipn
Ktd (a)
1.3 Ipn
(Rct + Rb) Isn
Ktd (b) 4 5 5 5 and: and:

Iscc max (zone 1 end fault) Iscc max (zone 1 end fault)
Ktd (b) Ktd (b) (Rct + Rb) Isn
8 Ipn Ipn
Table 2/2 CT requirements
9
132 kV, 50 Hz
10 -T (G S2)
6,000/1 A
5P20
-G1
120 MVA
13.8 kV,
-T (T LV1))
6,000/1 A
5P20
-T1
240/120/120 MVA
132/13.8/13.8 kV -T (T HV) -T (L end 1) -T (L end 2)
20 VA 50 Hz 20 VA 50 Hz 1,200/5 A 1,000/5 A 1,500/1 A
Rct = 18 xd = 0.16 Rct = 18 uk 1-2 = 14 % 5P20 BS cl.X
50 VA Uk = 200 V
2
11 G
3~ 1) 1 7.5 kA
Rct = 0.96 Rct = 0.8
3
35.8 kA 34.5 kA 1 = HV
2 = LV1 17 kA
3 = LV2 (given)
12 I = 60 m
A = 4 mm2
I = 40 m
A = 4 mm2
-G2
l = 100 m
A = 4 mm2
l = 60 m
A = 4 mm2
7UM62 7UT633 7SD52*) 7SD52
*) without
13 CB
xd
arrangement inside power station is not shown
= Generator direct axis subtransient reactance in p.u.
distance function
uk 1-2 = Transformer impedance voltage HV side LV side in %
Rrelay = Assumed with 0.1 , (power consumption for above relays is below 0.1 VA)
1) Current from side 3 is due to uk 2-3 and xd of G2 in most cases negligible
14
Fig. 2/93 Example 1 CT verication for 7UM62, 7UT6, 7SD52 (7SD53, 7SD610)
15
Overview
-T (G S2), 7UM62 -T (T LV1), 7UT633 -T (T HV), 7UT633 -T (L end 1), 7SD52
c SNG
Iscc max (ext. fault) =
3 UNG xd
SNT
3 UNT uk
SNT
3 UNT uk
Iscc max (ext. fault) = 17 kA (given) 1
1.1 120,000 kVA 120,000 kVA 240,000 kVA
= = 34,516 A = = 35,860 A = = 7,498 A
3 13.8 kV 0.16 3 13.8 kV 0.14 3 132 kV 0.14
2
Ktd = 5 (from Table 2/2) Ktd = 3 (from Table 2/2) Ktd = 3 (from Table 2/2) Ktd = 1.2 (from Table 2/2)
Iscc max (ext. fault) Iscc max (ext. fault) Iscc max (ext. fault)
3
Kssc Ktd Kssc Ktd Kssc Ktd
Ipn Ipn Ipn
31,378 A
= 5 = 28.8
6,000 A
35,860 A
= 3 = 17.9
6,000 A
7,498 A
= 3 = 18,7
1,200 A
4
Sn 20 VA Sn 20 VA Sn 50 VA
Rb =
I2sn
= = 20
1 A2
Rb =
I2sn
= = 20
1 A2
Rb = = = 2
I2sn (5 A)2 5
Rb = Rlead + Rrelay Rb = Rlead + Rrelay Rb = Rlead + Rrelay Rb = Rlead + Rrelay
2pl 2pl 2pl 2pl

Rb = + 0.1
A
Rb = + 0.1
A
Rb = + 0.1
A
Rb = + 0.1
A 6
mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2
2 0.0175 60 m 2 0.0175 640 m 2 0.0175 100 m 2 0.0175 60 m
m m m m
=
4 mm2
=
4 mm2
=
4 mm2
=
4 mm2 7
+ 0.1 + 0.1 + 0.1 + 0.1
= 0.625 = 0.450 = 0.975 = 0.625

8
Rct + Rb Rct + Rb Rct + Rb UK Ktd (Rct + Rb) Isn
Kssc = Kssc Kssc = Kssc Kssc = Kssc 1.3 Ipn
Rct + Rb Rct + Rb Rct + Rb
18 + 20
= 20 = 40.8
18 + 20
= 20 = 41.2
0.96 + 2
= 20 = 30.6
17,000 A
= 1.2 (0.8 + 0.625 ) 5 A
1.3 1,000 A 9
18 + 0.625 18 + 0.450 0.96 + 0.975
= 111.8 V
Kssc required = 28.8, Kssc required = 17.9, Kssc required = 18.7, UK required = 111.8 V,
Kssc effective = 40.8 Kssc effective = 41.2 Kssc effective = 30.6 UK effective = 200 V 10
28.8 < 40.8 17.9 < 41.2 18.7 < 30.6 111.8 V < 200 V
CT dimensioning is ok CT dimensioning is ok CT dimensioning is ok CT dimensioning is ok
Ipn 3 UnO INrelay

FAdap =
Ipn 3 UnO INrelay
FAdap =
Ipn 3 UnO INrelay
FAdap =
Ipn max
8
11
SNmax Isn SNmax Isn SNmax Isn Ipn min
6,000 A 3 13.8 kV 1A 6,000 A 3 13.8 kV 1A 1,200 A 3 132 kV 5A 1,500 A

=
120,000 kVA 1A
=
240,000 kVA 1A
=
240,000 kVA 5A
= 1.5 8
1,000 A
ok!
12
= 1.195 = 0.598 = 1.143
1.195 8 ok! 0.598 8 ok! 1.143 8 ok!
Table 2/3 Example 1 (continued) verication of the numerical differential protection

13
Attention (only for 7UT6 V4.0): When low-impedance REF is Further condition for 7SD52x, 53x, 610 relays (when used as
used, the request for the REF side (3-phase) is:
FAdap 4, (for the neutral CT: FAdap 8)
line differential protection without transformer inside protected
zone): Maximum ratio between primary currents of CTs at the 14
end of the protected line:
Ipn max
8
Ipn min 15
Overview
Given case:
Analog static relays in general have burdens below about 1 VA.
1 Mechanical relays, however, have a much higher burden, up to

the order of 10 VA. This has to be considered when older relays
are connected to the same CT circuit.
l = 50 m
2 A = 6 mm2
In any case, the relevant relay manuals should always be
consulted for the actual burden values.
7SS52
Burden of the connection leads

3 600/1
5 P 10,
scc.max. = 30 kA The resistance of the current loop from the CT to the relay has to
15 VA, be considered:
Rct = 4
2l
Rlead =
4 Fig. 2/94 Example 2
A
l = Single conductor length from the CT to the relay in m

Specic resistance:
Iscc max 30,000 A
mm2
5
Ipn
= = 50
600 A = 0.0175 (copper wires) at 20 C / 68 F
m
According to Table 2/2, page 2/48 Ktd = A = Conductor cross-section in mm2
6 Kssc
1
50 = 25
2 CT design according to ANSI / IEEE C 57.13
15 VA Class C of this standard denes the CT by ist secondary terminal

7 Rb =
1 A2
= 15
voltage at 20 times rated current, for which the ratio error shall
not exceed 10 %. Standard classes are C100, C200, C400 and
Rrelay = 0.1 C800 for 5 A rated secondary current.
8 Rlead
2 0.0175 50
= = 0.3
6
This terminal voltage can be approximately calculated from the
IEC data as follows:
Rb = Rlead + Rrelay = 0.3 + 0.1 = 0.4 ANSI CT denition

9 Kssc
Rct + Rb
=
4 + 15
Kssc = 10 = 43.2
Us.t.max
Kssc
= 20 5 A Rb
20
Rct + Rb 4 + 0.4
with
Pb
10 Result: Rb =
Isn2
and INsn = 5 A, the result is
The effective Kssc is 43.2, the required Kssc is 25. Therefore the
Pb Kssc
stability criterion is fullled. Us.t.max =
5A
11 Relay burden Example:

IEC 600 / 5, 5P20, 25 VA,
The CT burdens of the numerical relays of Siemens are below
60044
0.1 VA and can therefore be neglected for a practical estimation.
Exceptions are the busbar protection 7SS60 and the pilot-wire ANSI (25 VA 20)
12 relays 7SD600.
C57.13: Us.t.max = = 100 V, acc. to class C100
5A
Intermediate CTs are normally no longer necessary, because the

ratio adaptation for busbar protection 7SS52 and transformer
13 protection is numerically performed in the relay.
14
15
Operating Programs
Page
DIGSI 4 an operating software

for all SIPROTEC protection relays 3/3
SIGRA 4 powerful analysis

of all protection fault records 3/9
3
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Operating Program / DIGSI 4
Siemens IEC 61850 system congurator
Description
The PC operating program DIGSI 4 is the user interface to the 1

SIPROTEC devices, regardless of their version. It is designed
with a modern, intuitive user interface. With DIGSI 4, SIPROTEC
devices are congured and evaluated it is the tailored program
for industrial and energy distribution systems. 2
10
11
12
13
Fig. 3/1 DIGSI 4 operating program
14
15
Functions
Functions
1 Simple protection setting

From the numerous protection functions
it is possible to easily select only those
2 which are really required (see Fig. 3/2).
This increases the clearness of the other
menus.
Device setting with primary or

3 secondary values
The settings can be entered and
displayed as primary or secondary
LSP3.01-0017en.eps
4 values. Switching over between primary
and secondary values is done with one
mouse click in the tool bar (see Fig. 3/2).
Assignment matrix
5 The DIGSI 4 matrix shows the user the
Fig. 3/2 Main menu, selection of protection functions
complete conguration of the device
at a glance (Fig. 3/3). For example, the
assignment of the LEDs, the binary
6 inputs and the output relays are
displayed in one image. With one click,
the assignment can be changed.
LSP3.01-0018en.eps
7 CFC: Projecting the logic instead of
programming
With the CFC (continuous function
chart), it is possible to link and
8 derive information without software
knowledge by simply drawing technical Fig. 3/3 DIGSI 4, assignment matrix
processes, interlocks and operating
sequences.
9 Logical elements such as AND, OR,
timers, etc., as well as limit value
requests of measured values are avail-
able (Fig. 3/4).
10 Commissioning
Special attention has been paid to

commissioning. All binary inputs and
11 outputs can be set and read out in
targeted way. Thus, a very simple wiring
test is possible. Messages can be sent to
the serial interface deliberately for test
12 purposes.
LSP2324-afpen.tif
13
Fig. 3/4 CFC plan
14
15
Functions
LSP2330.tif
7
Fig. 3/5 Typical time-signal representation
8
IEC 61850 system congurator
The IEC 61850 system congurator,
which is started out of the system
9
manager, is used to determine the
IEC 61850 network structure as well as
the extent of data exchange between
the participants of an IEC 61850 station.
10
To do this, subnets are added in the
network working area if required,
available participants are assigned to
the subnets, and addressing is dened. 11
The assignment working area is used
to link data objects between the partici-
pants, e.g., the starting message of the
V/inverse-time overcurrent protection
I> -function of feeder 1, which is trans-
12
ferred to the incoming supply in order
to prompt the reverse interlocking of the
V/inverse-time overcurrent protection
13
DIGSI 4_IEC 61850.tif
I>> function there (see Fig. 3/6).
14
Fig. 3/6 IEC 61850 system congurator
15
Selection and ordering data
Variants Order No.
1
DIGSI 4
Software for projecting and usage of all Siemens protection devices is running under MS Windows XP Prof. /
MS Windows Server 2008 R2, MS Windows 7 Professional and Ultimate/Enterprise.
2 See product information for supported Service packs of operating systems.
Incl. device templates, online manual and DIGSI cable for all device types.
Start Up manual (paper)
Incl. service (upgrade, update, hotline)
Operator language: German, English, French, Spanish, Italian, Chinese, Russian, Turkish are included.
3 Delivery on DVD-ROM
Basic
Basic version with license for 10 computers (authorisation by serial number) 7XS5400-0AA00
4 Professional
Basic version and additionally SIGRA (Fault record analysis), CFC Editor (Logic editor),
Display Editor (Editor for control displays) and DIGSI 4 Remote (Remote operation)
with license for 10 computers (authorisation by serial number) 7XS5402-0AA00
5 DIGSI 4 Professional + IEC 61850
Professional version and IEC 61850
System Congurator with license for 10 computers (authorisation by serial number) 7XS5403-0AA00
6 Upgrade from DIGSI 4 Basis to DIGSI 4 Professional 7XS5407-0AA00
Upgrade from DIGSI 4 Basis to DIGSI 4 Professional + IEC61850 7XS5408-0AA00
7 SIPROTEC 4 Tutorial
Multimedia information and training for:
SIPROTEC 4, DIGSI 4, SIGRA 4 and IEC 61850
Incl. trial software, manuals and catalogs E50001-U310-D21-X-7100
8 DIGSI 4 Trial
like DIGSI 4 Professional + IEC 61850,
but only valid for 30 days (test version)
(no authorisation required) 7XS5401-1AA00
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Variants Order No.
1
DIGSI 4 Scientic
like DIGSI 4 Professional + IEC 61850, only for university-level institutions
with license for 10 PCs (authorisation by serial number) 7XS5402-2AA00
DIGSI 4 DVD Update

2
Latest version of DIGSI 4
DVD includes DIGSI 4 and
IEC 61850 System Congurator and SIGRA
Incl. the latest Service packs. 3
Current content of DIGSI 4 Update
DVD can be found at www.siemens.com/siprotec 7XS5490-0AA00
IEC 61850 System Congurator

Software for conguration of substations via IEC 61850-communication
4
is running MS Windows XP Prof./
MS Windows Server 2008 R2, MS Windows 7 Professional and Ultimate/Enterprise.
See product information for supported
Service packs of operating systems
Incl. electronic help
5
Incl. service (update, hotline)
Operator language:
German, English, French, Spanish, Italian, Chinese, Russian, Turkish are included.
IEC 61850 System Congurator for DIGSI 4 Professional

6
Upgrade from DIGSI 4 Prof. to DIGSI 4 Prof. + IEC 61850
version with license for 10 computers (authorisation by serial number)
For ordering the specication of a DIGSI 4 license number is required. 7XS5460-0AA00
7
IEC 61850 System Congurator for Reyrolle devices
with license for 10 PCs.
Installation without DIGSI 4
(authorization by serial number)
8
Delivery on DVD-ROM 7XS5461-0AA00
GOOSE Inspector for IEC 61850 Ethernet station bus with license for 1 PC
PC-tool for online-monitoring of IEC 61850 GOOSE-telegrams
Checking of all GOOSE connections on the station bus and validation with
9
the congured connections in the system congurator (SCD)
Contains installation CD with USB-dongle
Recommended system requirements:
Windows XP, 32 Bit, SP2 or SP3
Duo CPU at least 1.6 GHz; RAM 2 GB
10
Network interface (Ethernet LAN, TCP/IP)
Supported languages: English, German 7XS5900-0AA00
11
12
13
14
15
10
11
12
13
14
15
Operating Program / SIGRA 4
SIGRA 4, powerful analysis of all protection fault records
Function overview
6 types of diagrams: time signal representation (usual), circle

diagram (e.g. for R/X), vector diagram (reading of angles), bar
1
charts (e.g. for visualization of harmonics), table (lists values
of several signals at the same instant) and fault locator (shows
the location of a fault)
Calculate additional values such as positive impedances, r.m.s.
2
values, symmetric components, vectors, etc.
SIPV6_105.tif
Two measurement cursors, synchronized in each view
Powerful zoom function 3
User-friendly conguration via drag & drop
Fig. 3/7 Typical time-signal representation
Innovative signal conguration in a clearly-structured matrix
Description
Time-saving user proles, which can be assigned to individual
relay types or series
4
Addition of other fault records to the existing fault record
lt is of crucial importance after a line fault that the fault is
quickly and fully analyzed so that the proper measures can be Synchronization of several fault records to a common time
immediately derived from the evaluation of the cause. As a basis 5
result, the original line condition can be quickly restored and Easy documentation by copying diagrams to documents of
the downtime reduced to an absolute minimum. lt is possible other MS Windows programs
with SIGRA 4 to display records from digital protection units and Ofine fault localization
fault recorders in various views and measure them, as required,
depending on the relevant task. Hardware requirements
6
In addition to the usual time-signal display of the measured Pentium 4 with 1-GHz processor or similar
variables record, it is also designed to display vector diagrams, 1 GB of RAM (2 GB recommended)
circle diagrams, bar charts for indicating the harmonics and data
tables. From the measured values which have been recorded
Graphic display with a resolution of 1024 x 768 (1280 x 1024 7
recommended)
in the fault records, SIGRA 4 calculates further values, such as:
absent quantities in the three-wire system, impedances, outputs, 50 MB free storage space on the hard disk
symmetrical components, etc. By means of two measuring
cursors, it is possible to evaluate the fault trace simply and
DVD-ROM drive
Keyboard and mouse
8
conveniently. With SIGRA, however, you can add additional
fault records. The signals of another fault record (e.g. from Software requirements
the opposite end of the line) are added to the current signal
pattern by means of Drag & Drop. SIGRA 4 offers the possibility
MS Windows XP Professional
MS Windows Server 2008 R2 used as a Workstation computer
9
to display signals from various fault records in one diagram and
fully automatically synchronize these signals to a common time MS Windows 7 Professional and Enterprise Ultimate
base. In addition to nding out the details of the line fault, the
localization of the fault is of special interest. 10
A precise determination of the fault location will save time that
can be used for the on-site inspection of the fault. This aspect is
also supported by SIGRA 4 with its "ofine fault localization"
feature. 11
SIGRA 4 can be used for all fault records using the COMTRADE
le format.
The functional features and advantages of SIGRA 4 can,
however, only be optimally shown on the product itself. For this
12
reason, it is possible to test SIGRA 4 for 30 days with the trial
version.
13
14
15
Functions
Functions
1 Different views of a fault record

In addition to the standard time signal
representation, SIGRA 4 also supports
2 the display of circle diagrams (e.g.
R/X diagrams), vectors, which enable
reading of angles, and bar charts (e.g.
for visualization of harmonics). To do
3 this, SIGRA uses the values recorded in

the fault record to calculate additional
values such as positive impedances,
r.m.s. values, symmetric components,
vectors, etc.
4 Measurement of a fault record
Two measurement cursors enable fast
and convenient measurement of the
5
SIGRA_4_51_TimeSignals.tif
fault record. The measured values of the
cursor positions and their differences
are presented in tables. The cursors
operate interactively and across all
6 views, whereby all cursor movement is
synchronized in each view: In this man-
ner, the cursor line enables simultane-
ous intersection of a fault occurrence
7 in both a time signal characteristic

and circle diagram characteristic. And
Fig. 3/8 Typical time signal representation
of course a powerful zoom function

ensures that you do not lose track of
even the tiniest detail. The views of
8 SIGRA 4 can accommodate any number
of diagrams and in each diagram any
number of signals.
9 Operational features
SIGRA_4_51_VectorDiagram.tif
The main aim of the developers

of SIGRA 4, who were assisted by
ergonomic and design experts, was
10 to produce a system that was simple,
intuitive and user-friendly:
The colours of all the lines have been
dened so that they are clear and
11 easily distinguishable. However, the
colour, as well as the line style, the Fig. 3/9 Vector diagrams
scale and other surface features, can
be adjusted to suit individual require-
12 ments.
Pop-up menus for each situation
offer customized functionality thus
eliminating the need to browse
13 through numerous menu levels (total

SIGRA_4_51_CircleDiagram.tif
operational efciency).
Conguration of the individual
diagrams is simple and intuitive:
14 object-oriented, measured variables

can be simply dragged and dropped
from one diagram to another (also
diagrams of different types).
15 Fig. 3/10 Circle diagram

Functions
Snap-to-grid and snap-to-object

movement of the cursor lines for easy
and accurate placement. 1
Redundancy: Most user tasks can
be achieved via up to ve different
operational methods, thus ensuring
quick and easy familiarization with the
analysis software.
2
Utilization of the available screen
space is automatically optimized by
an intelligent function that, like the
synchronous mouse cursors, has
3
since been patented.
User friendly tools support you in your
daily work: 4
Storage of user dened views (e.g
zoom, size), in so-called user proles
and to assign them to individual relay
types or series. Then simply select
from the toolbar and you can display
5
each fault record quickly and easily
as required. No need to waste time
scrolling, zooming or resizing and
moving windows.
6
Additional fault records, e.g. from the
other end of a line, can be added to
existing records.
A special function allows several
7
fault records to be synchronized on a
LSP2333-afpen.tif
mutual time basis, thus considerably
improving the quality of fault analysis.
Fault localization with data from one
8
line end the fault record data (current
and voltage measurement) values are
Fig. 3/11 Concise matrix for assigning signals to diagrams
imported from the numerical protec-
tion unit into SIGRA 4. The fault local- 9
isator in SIGRA 4 is then started by the
user and the result represented in % or
in km of the line length, depending on
the parameters assigned. 10
Fault localization with data from
both line ends. The algorithm of the
implemented fault location does not
need a zero-phase sequence system. 11
Thus, measuring errors due to ground
LSP2334-afpen.tif
impedance or interference with the

zero current of the parallel line are
ruled out. Errors with contact resis-
tance on lines with infeed from both
12
ends are also correctly recorded.
The above inuences are eliminated Fig. 3/12 Table with values at a denite time
due to the import of fault record
data from both line ends into SIGRA. 13
For this purpose, the imported data So-called marks, which users can insert Scope of delivery
are synchronized in SIGRA and the at various instants as required, enable
The software product is quick and easy to
calculation of the fault location is then suitable commentary of the fault record.
started. Consequently, fault localiza- Each individual diagram can be copied
to a document of another MS Windows
install from a CD-ROM. It has a compre-
hensive help system. An user-friendly
14
tion is independent from the zero-
and practical manual offers easy step-by-
phase sequence system and the line program via the clipboard: document-
step instructions on how to use SIGRA.
infeed conditions and produces precise ing fault records really could not be
results to allow as fast an inspection of
the fault location as possible.
easier.
15
Variants Order No.
1
SIGRA 4
Software for graphic visualisation, analysis and evaluation of fault and measurement records is
running under MS Windows XP Prof./MS Windows Server 2008 R2, MS Windows 7 Professional and Ultimate/Enterprise.
2 See product information for supported Service packs of operating systems.
Incl. templates, online manual
Incl. service (upgrade, update, hotline)
Operator language:
German, English, French, Spanish, Italian, Chinese, Russian, Turkish are included.
3 Incl. multimedia tutorial on separate CD.
Delivery on DVD-ROM
SIGRA 4 for DIGSI
4 with license for 10 PCs (authorisation by serial number)

For ordering the specication of a DIGSI 4 serial number is required. 7XS5410-0AA00
SIGRA 4 Stand Alone

with license for 10 PCs. Installation without DIGSI 4
5 (authorisation by serial number) 7XS5416-0AA00
SIGRA 4 Scientic
Installation without DIGSI 4 only for university-level institutions
6 with license for 10 PCs (authorisation by serial number) 7XS5416-1AA00
SIGRA 4 Trial
like SIGRA 4 Stand Alone, but only valid for 30 days (test version)
(no authorisation required) 7XS5411-1AA00
7 Upgrade SIGRA 4 Trial to SIGRA 4 Stand Alone
like SIGRA 4 Stand Alone.
For customers who want to unlock their trail version.
8 With license for 10 PC 7XS5416-2AA00
10
11
12
13
14
15
Communication
Page
Description 4/3
Function overview 4/3
Typical applications 4/5
Integration into substation control systems 4/7
Integration into the SICAM power automation system 4/9
Integration into the substation automation system 4/10 4

Integration into the SICAM PAS power automation system 4/11
Solution without substation control system 4/12

1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Communication
Description, function overview
Function overview
Description 1
Remote communication with DIGSI
Remote communication with SIPROTEC
4 units
Remote communication with SIPROTEC
2
3 units and SIPROTEC 600 units
Typical applications
SIPROTEC 4 units on an RS485 bus
3
SIPROTEC 4 units with FO/RS485
Mixed system SIPROTEC 4,
SIPROTEC 3 units, 4
SIPROTEC 600 units
Conguration with active star-coupler
Integration into substation control 5

systems
Integration into the SICAM power

Fig. 4/1 Communication structure
automation system 6
Integration into other systems
Description
Communication interfaces on protection relays are becoming 7

increasingly important for the efcient and economical opera-
tion of substations and networks. The interfaces can be used for:
Accessing the protection relays from a PC using the DIGSI oper-
ating program. Remote access via modem, Ethernet modem 8
is possible with a serial service port at the relay. This allows
remote access to all data of the protection relay.
Integrating the relays into control systems with IEC 60870-5-
103 protocol, PROFIBUS-FMS protocol, PROFIBUS-DP protocol, 9
DNP 3.0 protocol, MODBUS protocol, DNP3 TCP, PROFINET and
Redundancy protocols for Ethernet (RSTP; PRP and HSR).
The standardized IEC 61850 protocol is available since Oct.
2004 and with its SIPROTEC units Siemens has provided this 10
standard as the rst manufacturer worldwide.
Peer-to-peer communication of differential relays and distance
relays to exchange real-time protection data via ber-optic
cables, communication network, telephone networks or
analog pilot wires.
11
12
13
14
15
Communication
Description
Description
1 Remote communication with DIGSI

By using the remote communication
functions of DIGSI it is possible to access
2 relays from your ofce via the telephone

network. So you do not have to drive
to the substation at all and, if you need
to carry out a quick fault analysis, for
example, you can transfer the fault data
3 into your ofce in just a few minutes so
that you can use DIGSI to evaluate it.
Another alternative is the ability to access
4 all the units of a substation from a central

point within that station. This saves you
having to connect your PC individually to
all the relays in the station.
5 In both cases you need a few simple

communication units and a PC with DIGSI
and a remote communication component
installed. The data trafc with DIGSI uses
a secure protocol based on the IEC stand-
6 ard similar to IEC 60870-5-103 so that, Fig. 4/2 Remote relay communication
amongst other things, the relays have
unique addresses for accessing purposes. Since Oct. 2004, a relay can be accessed remotely with DIGSI via
an Ethernet interface in the relay and with the IEC 61850 pro-
7 A high level of data integrity is achieved through the check sum
incorporated in the telegram. Any telegrams that might become tocol. This allows access to the relays via an Ethernet network.
distorted during transmission are repeated. A comparison of Some relays include a Web server, so an Internet browser can
parameters between relay and PC to ensure that they match also also be used for remote access via Ethernet.
improves the integrity. There are other security functions too
8 such as passwords and a substation modem callback function
Remote communication with SIPROTEC 3 and series 600
relays
which can also be triggered from events.
These relays are ideal for applications involving remote commu-
Remote communication with SIPROTEC 4 units nication. When conguring the actual communication system,
9 SIPROTEC 4 units are well equipped for remote communication. however, it is important to take into account the smaller number
of relay interfaces compared with SIPROTEC 4 units.
A separate serial service interface for the protection engineer,
independent of the system interface, allows the units to be In the case of SIPROTEC 3 units, communication is normally
easily integrated into any communication conguration. The effected via the system interface at the back of the unit. If this
10 front interface then remains free for local operation. Together
with a exibility in the choice of interface, i.e. optical with an
interface is already being used for communication with the
substation control system, the front interface can be used for
ST connector for multi-mode FO cables or electrical for RS232 or the DIGSI communication instead. A suitable connector module
RS485 hard-wired connections, it is easy to create the optimum is available to convert from electrical to optical interface.
11 solution for any particular application.
Series 600 relays normally have one RS485 interface which can
With SIPROTEC 4 units you can also use PROFIBUS-FMS to be used for communication either with the substation control
provide a central link with DIGSI via the control system interface. system or with DIGSI.
For this you will need a PC with a special PROFIBUS card that
12 must be connected to the PROFIBUS system. This solution is
intended exclusively for SIPROTEC 4 units with PROFIBUS-FMS.
SIPROTEC series 80 relays offer the same features regarding
communication possibilities as SIPROTEC 4 devices.
13
14
15
Communication
An extensive range of communication 1

components, such as modems, star
couplers, optoelectric converters,
prefabricated FO connection cables and
electric connection cables (see part 13 of
this catalog) allows you to create a variety
2
of different solutions: FO connections
immune to interference or cost-effective
solutions using the two-wire RS485
electric bus.
3
The following examples give some indica-
tion of what congurations are possible,
which items are needed for the purpose
and what baud rates are possible.
4
Example 1: SIPROTEC 4 units on an
RS485 bus
Remote communication is effected via
5
a private or public telephone network
with both analog or digital telephone
lines being possible. An Ethernet network
can also be used together with Ethernet Fig. 4/3 SIPROTEC 4 units on an RS485 bus (Example 1) 6
modems. The 8N1 data format and an
analog baud rate of 57.6/64 kbit/s have
become established as the standard
for serial modem links. The connection 7
between modem and units is initially
optical. An FO/RS485 converter 7XV5650
that can be installed close to the units
then converts the signals for the RS485
bus. Up to 31 relays can be connected to
8
the RS485 bus. Particularly in the case of
modems, we recommend the use of the
types of units listed in part 13.
9
Example 2: SIPROTEC 4 units with
FO/RS485
In the case of larger substations with
longer distances we recommend the use
10
of FO connection cables. The following
example shows a mixed system of optical
and electrical connections. Typically, all
relays in a cubicle can be linked together 11
via RS485 and the cubicles themselves
can be connected to the star coupler via
FO cables (see Fig. 4/4).
Fig. 4/4 Two groups of SIPROTEC 4 units on an RS485bus (Example 2) 12
13
14
15
Communication
Example 3: Mixed system SIPROTEC 4,

SIPROTEC 3, series 600
1 Relays from different families can be
integrated into a remote communication
system, as illustrated in Example 3 (see
Fig. 4/5). This example also shows how
2 relays can be integrated by means of FO
links and star couplers. With this kind of
arrangement the baud rate for all links
must be set at 19.2 kbaud because the
3 SIPROTEC 3 units and the series 600
relays cannot support a higher baud rate.
In this case we recommend to use the
7XV5550 active mini star-coupler (see
4 Fig. 4/6).
Communication will then generally be
at 57.6/64 kbit/s on the modem link. For
any units that cannot operate at this baud
5 rate the active star-coupler will convert
the rate accordingly.
Example 4: Conguration with active

star- coupler
6 With this conguration it is also possible
to integrate relays that can only be con- Fig. 4/5 Mixed system, FO/RS485 with units from different families (Example 3)
nected via the front interface and whose
7 maximum baud rates are less than

19.2 kbaud (see Fig. 4/6). The solutions for central and/or remote communication with
SIPROTEC units have easy upgrade compatibility. Different ver-
The following points must be noted with this type of congura-
sions of relays can be integrated into a remote communication
tion:
concept. This is supported by the substation and device manage-
8 One output of the active mini star-coupler is used to service
several SIPROTEC 4 units through further star couplers or
ment in the DIGSI software. A substation can be retrotted with
add-on remote communication components provided it has
RS485 converters. On that output, a mixed system containing the communication connection available. And changing of the
SIPROTEC 3 and series 600 relays should be avoided so that telephone line from, say, analog to digital does not necessitate
9 57600 baud operation is possible for SIPROTEC 4 relays.
Several SIPROTEC 3 units and series 600 relays can also be
the replacement of all components. Also, Ethernet networks
can be used. The telephone modem is then replaced by an
connected to another output of the active mini star-coupler Ethernet modem. The infrastructure in the substation remains
(via mini star-couplers or RS485 converters). The baud rate for unchanged.
10 this output must be set less or equal to 19200 baud.

Relays that are not available with communication functions
according to IEC 60870-5-103 protocol (e.g. 7VE51, 7VK51,
7SV51 and older rmware versions of some relays) can also be
11 connected via the active star-coupler as illustrated in Fig. 4/6.

In this case one output must be assigned to each relay. The
baud rate must be set according to the unit.
12
13
14
15
Communication
Typical applications, integration into substation control systems
7
Fig. 4/6 Mixed system with relays from different families, with active star-coupler (Example 4)
8
Integration into substation control An overview which communication protocols are available in
systems the various SIPROTEC relays can be found in the Internet at
Almost all SIPROTEC units can be integrated into substation

www. siemen.com/siprotec or in the catalog "Selection Guide for
SIPROTEC and Reyrolle" order no. IC1000-K4456-A101-Ax-7600 9
control systems via communication interfaces.
The relays can be supplied as part of an integrated Siemens
system offering all substation control and protection. In addi-
tion, the relays can also be integrated into other control systems
10
via standard protocols. An integrated system offers type-tested
functions, consistent con-guration and optimally coordinated
communication protocols. SICAM PAS and SICAM RTUs are
proven systems available from Siemens. These systems, also
11
offer Ethernet communication with IEC 61850.
For situations where you would like to integrate SIPROTEC units
into other control systems we can offer open communication
interfaces. In addition to the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol that is
12
available in almost all relays we can also offer other communica-
tion protocols for SIPROTEC 4 units like PROFIBUS-DP, MODBUS,
DNP 3.0, DNP3 TCP, PROFINET and Redundancy protocols for
Ethernet (RSTP;PRP and HSR).
13
14
15
Communication
Integration into substation control systems
IEC 61850 protocol PROFINET
1 Since Oct. 2004, the Ethernet-based IEC 61850 protocol is the

worldwide standard for protection and control systems used by
PROFINET is the ethernet-based successor of Pro bus DP and
is supported in the variant PROFINET IO. The protocol which
power supply corporations, Siemens was the rst manufacturer is used in industry together with the SIMATIC systems control
to support the protocol in its devices. By means of this protocol, is realized on the optical and electrical Plus ethernet modules
information can also be exchanged directly between bay units which are delivered since November 2012. All network redun-
2 so as to enable the creation of simple masterless systems for bay
and system interlocking. Access to the units via the Ethernet bus
dancy procedures which are available for the ethernet modules,
such as RSTP, PRP or HSR, are also available for PROFINET. The
is also possible with DIGSI. time synchronization is made via SNTP. The network monitor-
ing is possible via SNMP V2 where special MIB les exist for
It will also be possible to retrieve operating and fault messages
3 and fault recordings via a browser. This Web monitor will also
PROFINET. The LLDP protocol of the device also supports the
monitoring of the network topology. Single-point indications,
provide a few items of unit specic information in browser
double-point indications, measured and metered values can be
windows.
transmitted cyclically in the monitoring direction via the protocol
4 IEC 60870-5-103 protocol and can be selected by the user with DIGSI 4. Important events
are also transmitted spontaneously via con gurable process
The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is an international standard for alarms. Switching commands can be executed by the system
the transmission of protective data and fault recordings. All control via the device in the controlling direction. The PROFINET
messages from the unit (and also control commands) can be implementation is certied. The device also supports the IEC
5 transferred via published, Siemens-specic extensions. 61850 protocol as a server on the same ethernet module in
addition to the PROFINET protocol. Client server connections are
PROFIBUS-DP protocol
possible for the intercommunication between devices, e.g. for
PROFIBUS-DP is the most widespread protocol in industrial auto- transmitting fault records and GOOSE messages.
6 mation. Via PROFIBUS-DP, SIPROTEC units make their information
available to a SIMATIC controller or, in the control direction, Redundancy protocols for Ethernet (RSTP; PRP and HSR)
receive commands from a central SIMATIC. Measured values can The redundancy protocols RSTP, PRP and HSR can be loaded and
also be transferred. The information is assignable to a mapping activated easily via software on the existing optical Ethernet
7 le with DIGSI. modules. PRP and HSR guarantee a redundant, uninterruptible
and seamless data transfer in Ethernet networks without exten-
MODBUS RTU protocol
sive parameter settings in the switches.
This uncomplicated, serial protocol is mainly used in industry
8 and by power supply corporations, and is supported by a num-

ber of unit vendors. SIPROTEC units behave as MODBUS slaves,
making their information available to a master or receiving
information from it. Information is assignable to a mapping le
with DIGSI.
9 DNP 3.0 protocol
Power utilities use the serial DNP 3.0 (Distributed Network
Protocol) for the station and network control levels. SIPROTEC
10 units function as DNP slaves, supplying their information to a
master system or receiving information from it.
DNP3 TCP
11 The ethernet-based TCP variant of the DNP3 protocol is sup-
ported with the electrical and optical ethernet module. Two
DNP3 TCP clients are supported. Redundant ring structures can
be realized for DNP3 TCP with the help of the integrated switch
12 in the module. For instance, a redundant optical ethernet ring
can be constructed. Single-point indications, double-point indi-
cations, measured and metered values can be con gured with
DIGSI 4 and are transmitted to the DNPi client. Switching com-
13 mands can be executed in the controlling direction. Fault records
of the device are stored in the binary Comtrade format and can
be retrieved via the DNP 3 le transfer. The time synchroniza-
tion is performed via the DNPi client or SNTP. The device can also
be integrated into a network monitoring system via the SNMP
14 V2 protocol. Parallel to the DNP3 TCP protocol the IEC 61850
protocol (the device works as a server) and the GOOSE messages
of the IEC 61850 are available for the intercommunication
between devices.
15
Communication
Integration into the SICAM power automation system
Substation control port B Port C
Alarms
IEC 61850
q with
IEC 60870-5-103 PROFIBUS-DP
q with q with
MODBUS
q with
DNP 3.0
q with
DNP3
q with
TCP 4) PROFINET 4)
q with
DIGSI
q with
1
(relay central unit) time stamp time stamp time stamp time stamp time stamp time stamp time stamp time stamp
Commands q q q q q q q q
(BC/central unit relay)
Measured values q q q q q q q q
2
Time q q q q q q q 1)
synchronization
Fault records q q Separate port Separate port Separate port q Separate port 3
(sampled values) (with DIGSI)2) (with DIGSI)2) (with DIGSI)2) (with DIGSI)3)
Protection settings q (with DIGSI) Separate port Separate port Separate port Separate port Separate port Separate port q
(with DIGSI)3) (with DIGSI)3) (with DIGSI)3) (with DIGSI)3) (with DIGSI)3) (with DIGSI)3)
Parameter group q q q q q q q q 4
switchover
RSTP/PRP/HSR q q q
1) There is no time synchronization via this protocol. For time

5
synchronization purposes it is possible to use a separate time
synchronization interface (Port A in SIPROTEC 4 relays).
2) The transmission of fault records is not part of the protocol. They can
be read out with DIGSI via the service interface Port C or the front 6
operating interface.
3) This protocol does not support the transmission of protection
settings. Only setting groups can be changed. For this purpose you
should use the service interface or the front operating interface
together with DIGSI.
7
4) Only 7SJ61/62/64; 7SJ80/7SK80; 7SC80
8
Integration into the SICAM power automation system
SIPROTEC 4 is tailor-made for use with the SIMATIC-based SICAM

power automation system. The SICAM family comprises the
9
following components:
SICAM RTUs, the modern telecontrol systems with automation
and programmable logic functions
SICAM PAS, the substation automation system based on
10
dedicated hardware
Data management and communication is one of the strong
points of the SICAM / SIPROTEC 4 system. Powerful engineering 11
tools make working with SICAM convenient and easy. SIPROTEC 4
units are optimally matched for use in SICAM PAS. With SICAM
and SIPROTEC 4 continuity exists at three crucial points:
Data management 12
Software architecture
Communication
The ability to link SICAM/ SIPROTEC to other substation control,
protection and automation components is assured, thanks
13
to open interfaces such as IEC 60870-5-103 protocol and
the Ethernet-based IEC 61850 protocol. Other protocols like
PROFIBUS-DP, DNP 3.0, MODBUS, RTU, DNP3 TCP, PROFINET and
Redundancy protocols for Ethernet (RSTP;PRP and HSR) are also
14
supported.
15
Communication
Integration into substation automation system
SIPROTEC 4 is tailor-made for use with

the SICAM substation automation system.
1 Over the low-cost electrical RS485 bus,
the units exchange information with
the control system. Units featuring
IEC 60870-5-103 interfaces can be
2 connected to SICAM interference free and
radially by ber-optic link. Through this
interface, the system is open for the con-
nection of units of other manufacturers.
4
Fig. 4/7 Communication structure with substation automation system
5
10
11
12
13
14
15
Communication
Integration into the SICAM PAS power automation system
Integration into the SICAM PAS power

automation system
1
SIPROTEC 4 is tailor-made for use with
the SICAM power automation system
together with IEC 61850 protocol. Via
the 100 Mbit/s Ethernet bus, the units
are linked electrically or optically to the
2
station PC with PAS. Connection may be
simple or redundant. The interface is
standardized, thus also enabling direct
connection of units of other manufactur-
3
ers to the Ethernet bus. Units featuring an
IEC 60870-5-103 interface or other serial
protocols are connected via the Ethernet
station bus to SICAM PAS by means of 4
serial/Ethernet converters (see Fig. 4/8).
DIGSI and the Web monitor can also be
used over the same station bus.
Together with Ethernet/IEC 61850, an 5
interference-free optical solution is also
provided (see Fig. 4/9). The Ethernet
interface in the relay includes an Ethernet
switch. Thus, the installation of expensive 6
external Ethernet switches can be
avoided. The relays are linked in an
optical ring structure.
Integrated SNMP (Simple Network Fig. 4/8 Ethernet-based system with SICAM PAS with electrical Ethernet interface 7
Management Protocol) facility allows
the supervision of the network from the
station controller.
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
Communication
Integration into a substation automation system, solution without substation control system
Integration into a substation auto-

mation system of other makes
1
Thanks to the standardized interfaces,
IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103, DNP3.0,
MODBUS, PROFIBUS-DP, SIPROTEC units
2 can also be integrated into non-Siemens
systems or in SIMATIC S5/S7. Electrical
RS485 or optical interfaces are available.
The optimum physical data transfer
3 medium can be chosen thanks to opto-
electrical converters. Thus, the RS485 bus
allows low-cost wiring in the cubicles and
an interference-free optical connection to
the master can be established.
4
6 Fig. 4/9 Ethernet-based system with SICAM PAS with optical Ethernet interface
Solution without substation control

7 system
Ethernet-based communication with opti-

cal Ethernet interface between SIPROTEC
8 protection relays without substation
control offers many advantages:
Fast remote access via DIGSI 4
High-speed setting and parameteriza-
9 tion with DIGSI 4
Interlocking between different eld
devices and exchange of binary signals
via GOOSE messages of IEC 61850
10 Common time synchronization of all
relays from central time synchronization
server (eg. SICLOCK)
For automation of new substations (or
11 plants) and modernization of existing
substations you get future investment
security, without additional investment.
12 Fig. 4/10 Ethernet-based system with optical Ethernet interface

and migration of relays with serial protocol
13
14
15
Overcurrent Protection
Page
SIPROTEC easy 7SJ45

numerical overcurrent protection relay powered by CTs 5/3
SIPROTEC easy 7SJ46

numerical overcurrent protection relay 5/11
SIPROTEC 7SJ600 numerical overcurrent,

motor and overload protection relay 5/19
SIPROTEC 7SJ602 multifunction overcurrent

and motor protection relay 5/31
SIPROTEC 4 7SJ61 multifunction protection relay 5/55
SIPROTEC 4 7SJ62 multifunction protection relay 5/83 5

SIPROTEC 4 7SJ63 multifunction protection relay 5/121
SIPROTEC 4 7SJ64 multifunction protection relay

with synchronization 5/161
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Overcurrent Protection / 7SJ45
SIPROTEC easy 7SJ45 numerical overcurrent protection relay powered by CTs
Function overview
Operation without auxiliary voltage via integrated CT power

supply
1
Standard current transformers (1 A / 5 A)
Low power consumption: 1.4 VA at IN (of the relay)
Easy mounting due to compact housing 2
LSP2339-afp.tif
Easy connection via screw-type terminals
Protection functions
2-stage overcurrent protection 3
Denite-time and inverse-time characteristics (IEC/ANSI)
High-current stage I>> or calculated ground-current stage
IE> or IEp> selectable
Trip with pulse output (DC 24 V / 0.1 Ws) or relay output
4
(changeover contact)
Fig. 5/1 SIPROTEC easy 7SJ45 numerical overcurrent protection relay
powered by current transformers (CT) Repetition of trip during circuit-breaker failure (relays with
pulse output) 5
Combination with electromechanical relays is possible due to
Description the emulation algorithm
The SIPROTEC easy 7SJ45 is a numerical overcurrent protection

relay which is primarily intended as a radial feeder or trans-
Monitoring functions
Hardware and software are continuously monitored during
6
former protection (backup) in electrical networks. It provides operation
denite-time and inverse-time overcurrent protection according
to IEC and ANSI standards. The 7SJ45 relay does not require
auxiliary voltage supply. It imports its power supply from the
Front design
Simple setting via DIP switches (self-explaining)
7
current transformers. Settings can be executed without auxiliary voltage no PC
Integrated mechanical trip indication optionally
Additional features
8
Optional version available for most adverse environmental
conditions (condensation permissible)
Flush mounting or surface (rail) mounting 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Application, construction
Application
1 The SIPROTEC easy 7SJ45 is a numerical

overcurrent protection relay which is
primarily intended as a radial feeder or
transformer protection (backup) in electri-
2 cal networks. It provides denite-time
and inverse-time overcurrent protection
according to IEC and ANSI standards. The
convenient setting with DIP switches is
3 self-explanatory and simple.
The 7SJ45 relay does not require auxiliary
voltage supply. It imports its power supply
(1.4 VA at IN, sum of all phases) from the
4 current transformers.
Impulse output for low-energy trip release
or contact output for additional auxiliary
transformer are available. An optional
5 integrated trip indication shows that a trip
occurred.
Fig. 5/2 Typical application
ANSI IEC Protection functions
6 50 I>> Instantaneous over-

current protection
50, 51 I>t, Ip Overcurrent protection
(phase)
7 50N, 51N IE>t, IEp Overcurrent protection

(ground)
8 Construction
Within its compact housing the protection

relay contains all required components LSP2391-afp.tif
9 for:
Measuring and processing
Alarm and command output
Operation and indication (without a PC)
10 Optional mechanical trip indication
Auxiliary supply from current trans- Fig. 5/3 Application in distribution switchgear
formers
11 Maintenance not necessary

The housing dimensions of the units are
such that the 7SJ45 relays can in general
be installed into the existing cutouts in
12 cubicles. Alternative constructions are
available (surface mounting and ush
mounting). The compact housing permits
easy mounting, and a version for the most
LSP2340-afp.tif
13 adverse environmental conditions, even

with extreme humidity, is also available.
14
Fig. 5/4 Screw-type terminals
15
The overcurrent function is based on 1

phase-selective measurement of the three
phase currents.
The earth (ground) current IE (Gnd) is
calculated from the three line currents 2
IL1 (A), IL2 (B), and IL3 (C).
The relay has always a normal stage for
phase currents I> (50/51). For the second
stage, the user can choose between a
3
high-current stage for phase currents
I>> (50) or a normal stage for calculated
ground currents IE> (50N/51N).
The inverse-time overcurrent protection
4
with integrating measurement method
(disk emulation) emulates the behaviour
of electromechanical relays.
5
The inuence of high-frequency tran-
sients and transient DC components is
largely suppressed by the implementation
of numerical measured-value processing.
Fig. 5/5 Denite-time overcurrent characteristic
6
10
11
Fig. 5/6 Inverse-time overcurrent characteristic
12
Available inverse-time characteristics
Characteristics acc. to ANSI/IEEE IEC 60255-3
Moderately inverse/normal inverse
Very inverse

13
Extremely inverse
14
15
Connection diagrams
Connection diagrams
1 Pulse output or relay output are optionally

available.
Pulse output
2 These relays require a low-energy trip
release (DC 24 V / 0.1 Ws) in the circuit-
breaker, and are intended for modern
switchgear. In case of circuit-breaker
3 failure, a repetition of the tripping signal
is initiated.
4
Fig. 5/7 Connection of 3 CTs with pulse output
6
Fig. 5/8 Connection diagram
7 7SJ45 with impulse output
8
Relay output
These relays can be applied with all
9 conventional switchgear. A transformer

that provides the trip circuit energy, must
be connected in the current transformer
circuit.
10
11
12 Fig. 5/9 Connection of 3 CTs with trigger transformer and relay output
13
14
7SJ45 with relay output
15
Technical data
General unit data EMC tests for interference immunity; type tests
Analog input
System frequency fN 50 or 60 Hz (selectable)
Standards IEC 60255-6, IEC 60255-22,
EN 50263 (product standards)
EN 50082-2 (generic standard)
1
Current transformer inputs EN 61000-6-2
Rated current, normal ground 1 or 5 A IEC 61000-4 (basic standards)
current IN
Power consumption
High-frequency test
IEC 60255-22-1, class III
2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz; = 15 ms;
Ri = 200 ; 400 surges/s; 2
At IN = 1 / 5 A Approx. 1.4 VA at IN (relay) duration 2 s
Rating of current transformer Electrostatic discharge 4 kV/6 kV contact discharge;
circuit IEC 60255-22-2, class III 8 kV air discharge; both polarities;
Thermal (r.m.s.) 50 IN for 1 s
15 IN for 10 s
EN 61000-4-2, class III 150 pF; = 330 3
Irradiation with radio-frequency 10 V/m; 80 to 1000 MHz;
2 IN continuous eld, amplitude-modulated 80 %; 1 kHz; AM
Dynamic (peak) 100 IN for half a cycle IEC 60255-22-3 and
Recommended primary current
transformers
10 P 10, 2.5 VA
or according to the requirements and
Irradiation with radio-frequency 10 V/m; 900 MHz; repetition
4
required tripping power eld, pulse-modulated frequency 200 Hz; duty cycle 50 %
IEC 61000-4-3/ENV 50204, 30 V/M; 1890 MHz;
Output relays
class III repetition frequency
Pulse output (7SJ45XX-0*)
Number 1 pulse output Fast transient interference/bursts
200 Hz; duty cycle 50 %
4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; burst duration
5
DC 24 V / 0.1 Ws IEC 60255-22-4 and = 15 ms; repetition rate 300 ms; both
Relay output (7SJ45XX-1*) IEC 61000-4-4, class IV polarities; Ri = 50 ; duration 1 min
Number
Contact rating
1 changeover contact
Make 1000 W/VA
High-energy surge voltage, Impulse: 1.2/50 s
IEC 61000-4-5 installation, class III Circuit groups to ground: 6
Measuring inputs, binary outputs 2 kV; 42 W, 0.5 F
Break 30 VA Across circuit groups:
40 W resistive 1 kV; 42 W, 0.5 F
25 VA at L/R 50 ms
Rated contact voltage DC 250 V or AC 240 V
Line-conducted HF,
amplitude-modulated,
10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 %;
1 kHz; Ri = 150
7
Permissible current per contact 5 A continuous IEC 60255-22-6 and
30 A for 0.5 s (inrush current) IEC 61000-4-6, class III
Power frequency magnetic eld 30 A/m continuous;
Unit design
Housing Flush mounting DIN 43700/
IEC 61000-4-8, class IV
IEC 60255-6
300 A/m for 5 s; 50 Hz
0.5 mT; 50 Hz
8
IEC 61554
Adaptable for rail mounting (recom- Damped wave 2.5 kV (peak, polarity alternating)
mended for local mounting only) IEC 60694, IEC 61000-4-12, 100 kHz, 1 MHz, 10 MHz and
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm 78.5 x 147 x 205.8 (incl. transparent

cover and terminal blocks)
class III
Oscillatory surge withstand
50 MHz , Ri = 200 , duration 2 s
2.5 to 3 kV (peak); 1 to 1.5 MHz
9
capability ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 damped wave; 50 shots per s;
Weight (mass) approx. 1.5 kg Not across open contacts duration 2 s; Ri = 150 to 200
Degree of protection according to IEC 60529
Housing
Front IP 51
Fast transient surge withstand
capability ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1
not across open contacts
4 to 5 kV; 10/150 ns;
50 and 120 surges per 2 s;
both polarities; duration 2 s;
10
Rear IP 20 Ri = 80
Protection of personnel IP1X Radiated electromagnetic 35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz
UL-listing
interference ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 amplitude and pulse-modulated
EMC tests for interference emission; type test
11
Listed under 69CA.
Standard EN 50081* (generic)
Interference eld strength 30 to 1000 MHz,
Electrical tests
Specications
IEC CISPR 22 class B
12
Standards IEC 60255 (product standards)
ANSI C37.90.0/.1/.2; UL508
See also standards for individual tests
Insulation tests 13
Standards IEC 60255-5
Voltage test (routine test) 2.5 kV (r.m.s.), 50 Hz, 1 min
All circuits except for pulse output-ground
Voltage test (type test)
14
across open command contacts 1.0 kV (r.m.s.), 50 Hz, 1 min
Impulse voltage test (type test) 5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 s; 0.5 J;
all circuits, class III 3 positive and 3 negative impulses in
intervals of 1 s 15
Technical data
Mechanical stress tests Functions
1 Vibration, shock stress and seismic vibration

During operation
Overcurrent protection
Denite time (DT O/C ANSI 50/51)
Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2 Setting range / steps
Vibration Sinusoidal Current pickup I>> (phases) 2 IN to 20 IN or deactivated,
2 IEC 60255-21-1, class II

IEC 60068-2-6
10 to 60 Hz
0.075 mm amplitude: Current pickup I> (phases)
step 0.5 IN
0.5 IN to 6.2 IN
60 to 150 Hz; 3-phase supply: see note* or deactivated, step 0.1 IN
1 g acceleration
Frequency sweep 1 octave/min Current pickup IE> 0.5 IN to 6.2 IN
3-phase supply: see note* or deactivated, step 0.1 IN
3 Shock IEC 60225-21-2; class I
20 cycles in 3 perpendicular axes
Semi-sinusoidal Delay times TI>> 0 to 1575 ms, step 25 ms
5 g acceleration, duration 11 ms, Delay times TI> 0 to 6300 ms, step 100 ms
each 3 shocks in both directions
of the 3 axes The set time delays are pure
4 Seismic vibration
IEC 60255-21-3; class I
Sinusoidal
1 to 8 Hz: 4.0 mm amplitude
delay times.
Inverse time (IEC or ANSI 51)
IEC 60068-3-3 (horizontal vector) Setting range / steps
Current pickup Ip (phases) 0.5 IN to 4 IN
(vertical vector)
5 8 to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration
(horizontal vector)
3-phase supply: see note*
Current pickup IEp>
or deactivated, step 0.1 IN
0.5 IN to 4 IN
8 to 35 Hz: 0.5 g acceleration (ground calculated) or deactivated, step 0.1 IN
(vertical vector) 3-phase supply: see note*
Frequency sweep 1 octave/min
6 1 cycle in 3 perpendicular axes
Delay times TIp (IEC)
Delay times D (ANSI)
0.05 to 3.15 s, step 0.05 s
0.5 to 15.00 s, step 0.25 s
During transport (ush mounting)
Trip times
Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2
Total time delay impulse output Approx. 32 ms
7 Vibration
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2
IEC 60068-2-6
Sinusoidal
5 Hz to 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude;
8 Hz to 150 Hz:
Total time delay relay output
Reset ratio
Approx. 38 ms
Approx. 0.95 (with denite time)
2 g acceleration Approx. 0.91 (with inverse time)
frequency sweep 1 octave/min
Tolerances
8 Shock Semi-sinusoidal
Denite time (DT O/C 50/51)
Current pickup I>>, I>, IE> 5 % of the set value or
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 15 g acceleration, duration 11 ms,
5 % of IN (at threshold < IN)
IEC 60068-2-27 each 3 shocks in both directions
of the 3 axes Delay times T 1 % or 30 ms
9 Continuous shock
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
Semi-sinusoidal
10 g acceleration, duration 16 ms,
Pickup thresholds 5 % of the set value or
IEC 60068-2-29 each 1000 shocks in both directions 5 % of IN (at threshold < IN)
of the 3 axes Time behavior for 2 I/Ip 20 5 % or 50 ms
10 Climatic stress tests

Deviation of the measured values
as a result of various interferences
Temperatures Frequency in the range of < 2.5 %
0.95 < f/fN < 1.05
Temperatures during service 20 C to +70 C / 4 F to +158 F
11 With continuous current 2IN:

20 C to +55 C / 4 F to +131 F
Frequency in the range of
0.9 <f/fN < 1.1
< 10 %
Permissible temperature during 25 C to +55 C / 13 F to +131 F Harmonics <1%

storage up to 10 % 3rd and 5th harmonic
DC components <5%
12 Permissible temperature during
transport
25 C to +85 C / 13 F to +185 F
Temperature in the range of < 0.5 %/10 K
Humidity 5 C to 70 C / 23 F to 158 F
Permissible humidity class Annual mean value 75 % relative
(standard) humidity; on 30 days per year up to
13 95 % relative humidity; condensation
not permissible.
Permissible humidity class Condensation is permissible according
(condensation proof) to IEC 60654-1, class III
14
* Note: The device allows minimum setting values of 0.5 IN (3-phase).
With single supply, operation is ensured from 0.8 IN (7SJ45XX-0*;
15 pulse output) or 1.3 IN (7SJ45XX-1*; relay output) onwards (printed

on the front).

CE conformity This conformity is the result of a test that was performed by Siemens AG
in accordance with Article 10 of the Council Directive complying with
This product is in conformity with the Directives of the European
Communities on the harmonization of the laws of the Member States
relating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Council Directive
the generic standards EN 50081-2 and EN 50082-2. 1
2004/108/EG. previous 89/336/EEC).
This unit conforms to the international standard IEC 60255.
The unit has been developed and manufactured for application in an
industrial environment according to the EMC standards.
2
3
Description Order No. 4

SIPROTEC easy 7SJ45
numerical overcurrent protection relay powered by CTs 7SJ450 - 00 - AA
Current transformer IN
5
1A 1
5A 5
Trip 6
Pulse output (for further details refer to Accessories) 0
Relay output (for further details refer to Accessories) 1
Unit design 7
For rail mounting B
For panel ush mounting E
Region-specic functions 8
Region World, 50/60 Hz; standard A
Region World, 50/60 Hz; condensation-proof B
IEC / ANSI 9
IEC 0
ANSI 1
Indication (ag)
Without
10
0
With 1
11
Accessories Order No.
Protection relay with pulse output

Low energy trip release 3AX1104-2B
12
Protection relay with relay output
Auxiliary transformers for the trip circuit (30 VA CTs recommended)
1A 4AM5065-2CB00-0AN2
13
5A 4AM5070-8AB00-0AN2
Current transformer-operated trip release

0.5 A (rated operating current) 3AX1102-2A
14
1 A (rated operating current) 3AX1102-2B
15
10
11
12
13
14
15
SIPROTEC easy 7SJ46 numerical overcurrent protection relay
Function overview
Universal application due to integrated wide range AC/DC

power supply.
1
Standard current transformers (1 A/5 A)
Easy mounting due to compact housing
Easy connection via screw-type terminals 2
LSP2339-afp.tif
2-stage overcurrent protection
Denite-time and inverse-time characteristics (IEC/ANSI) 3
High-current stage I>> or calculated ground-current stage
IE> or IEp> selectable
Two command outputs for trip or pickup
Combination with electromechanical relays is possible due to
4
the emulation algorithm
Fig. 5/11 SIPROTEC easy 7SJ46
numerical overcurrent protection relay
One live contact for monitoring
5
Description Hardware and software are continuously monitored during
operation
The SIPROTEC easy 7SJ46 is a numerical overcurrent protection
relay which is primarily intended as a radial feeder or trans- Front design 6
former protection (backup) in electrical networks. It provides Simple setting via DIP switches (self-explaining)
denite-time and inverse-time overcurrent protection according Settings can be executed without auxiliary voltage no PC
to IEC and ANSI standards. The 7SJ46 relay has an AC and DC
auxiliary power supply with a wide range allowing a high degree
Individual phase pickup indication with stored or not stored
LEDs
7
of exibility in its application.
Trip indication with separate LED
Additional features
Optional version available for most adverse environmental
8
conditions (condensation permissible)
Flush mounting or surface (rail) mounting
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Application
1 The SIPROTEC easy 7SJ46 is a numerical

overcurrent protection relay which is
primarily intended as a radial feeder or
transformer protection (backup) in electri-
2 cal networks.
It provides denite-time and inverse-time
overcurrent protection according to IEC
and ANSI standards. The convenient set-
3 ting with DIP switches is self-explanatory
and simple.
The 7SJ46 relay has an AC and DC
4 auxiliary power supply with a wide range

allowing a high degree of exibility in its
application. Phase-selective indication of
protection pickup is indicated with LEDs.
5 ANSI IEC Protection functions

50 I>> Instantaneous over- Fig. 5/12 Typical application
current protection
50, 51 I>t, Ip Overcurrent protection
6 (phase)
50N, 51N IE>t, IEp Overcurrent protection
(ground)
7
Construction
Within its compact housing the protection

8 relay contains all required components
for:
Measuring and processing
Pickup and command output LSP2390-afp.tif
9 Operation and indication (without a PC)
Wide range AC/DC power supply
Maintenance not necessary (no battery)
10 The housing dimensions of the units are
such that the 7SJ46 relays can in general
be installed into the existing panel Fig. 5/13 Application in distribution switchgear
cutouts. Alternative constructions are
11 available (rail mounting and ush mount-
ing). The compact housing permits easy
mounting, and a version for the most
adverse environmental conditions, even
12 with extreme humidity, is also available.
13
LSP2354-afp.tif
14
15 Fig. 5/14 Screw-type terminals

The overcurrent function is based on 1

phase-selective measurement of the three
phase currents.
The earth (ground) current IE (Gnd) is
calculated from the three line currents 2
IL1 (A), IL2 (B), and IL3 (C).
The relay has always a normal stage for
phase currents I> (50/51).
3
For the second stage, the user can choose
between a high-current stage for phase
currents I>> (50) or a normal stage for
calculated ground currents IE> (50N/51N). 4
The inverse-time overcurrent protection
with integrating measurement method
(disk emulation) emulates the behavior of
electromechanical relays. 5
The inuence of high frequency transients
and transient DC components is largely
suppressed by the implementation of
numerical measured-value processing.
6
10
11
12
Moderately inverse/normal inverse
Very inverse

13
Extremely inverse
14
15
Connection diagrams
Connection diagrams
1 The 7SJ46 has a trip contact, a contact

which is adjustable for trip or pickup,
and a live contact for the self-monitoring
function.
2
4
Fig. 5/17 Connection of 3 CTs
8 Fig. 5/18 Connection diagram 7SJ46
10
11
12
13
14
15
Technical data
General unit data Impulse voltage test (type test) 5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 s; 0.5 J;
all circuits, class III 3 positive and 3 negative impulses
Analog input
System frequency fN 50 or 60 Hz (selectable)
in intervals of 1 s
EMC tests for interference immunity; type tests
1
Current transformer inputs
Standards IEC 60255-6, IEC 60255-22,
Rated current, normal ground 1 or 5 A EN 50263 (product standards)
current IN
Power consumption
EN 61000-6-2 2
Per phase at IN = 1 A Approx. 0.01 VA at IN IEC 61000-4 (basic standards)
Per phase at IN = 5 A Approx. 0.2 VA at IN (relay) High-frequency test 2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz; = 15 ms;
Rating of current transformer IEC 60255-22-1, class III Ri = 200 ; 400 surges/s;
circuit
duration 2 s 3
Electrostatic discharge 4 kV/6 kV contact discharge;
30 IN for 10 s IEC 60255-22-2, class III 8 kV air discharge; both polarities;
4 IN continuous EN 61000-4-2, class III 150 pF; = 330
Dynamic (peak) 250 IN for half a cycle
Auxiliary voltage AC/DC powered
Irradiation with radio-frequency
eld, amplitude-modulated
10 V/m; 80 to 1000 MHz;
80 %; 1 kHz; AM
4
Input voltage range DC 24 to 250 V ( 20 %) IEC 60255-22-3 and
AC 60 to 230 V (20 %, +15 %) IEC 61000-4-3, class III
Power consumption DC power supply: Approx. 1.5 W Irradiation with radio-frequency 10 V/m; 900 MHz; repetition
AC power supply: Approx. 3 VA
at 110 V approx.
eld, pulse-modulated
IEC 61000-4-3/ENV 50204,
frequency 200 Hz; duty cycle 50 %
30 V/M; 1810 MHz;
5
5.5 VA at 230 V class III repetition frequency
Output relays 200 Hz; duty cycle 50 %
Number
Contact rating
2 (normally open), 1 live contact
Make 1000 W/VA
Fast transient interference/bursts
IEC 60255-22-4 and
4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; burst duration
= 15 ms; repetition rate 300 ms; both 6
IEC 61000-4-4, class IV polarities; Ri = 50 ; duration 1 min
Break 30 VA
40 W resistive High-energy surge voltage, Impulse: 1.2/50 s
25 VA at L/R 50 ms IEC 61000-4-5 installation, class III
Rated contact voltage DC 250 V or AC 240 V Auxiliary voltage circuit groups to ground:
2 kV; 12 , 9 F
7
Permissible current per contact 5 A continuous
between circuit groups:
30 A for 0.5 s (inrush current)
1 kV; 2 , 18 F
Unit design
Housing Flush mounting DIN 43700/
Measuring inputs, binary outputs circuit groups to ground:
2 kV; 42 , 0.5 F 8
IEC 61554 between circuit groups:
Adaptable for rail mounting recom- 1 kV; 42 , 0.5 F
mended for local mounting only Line-conducted HF, amplitude- 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 %;
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm 78.5 x 147 x 205.8 (incl. transparent
cover and terminal blocks)
modulated.
IEC 60255-22-6 and
1 kHz; AM; Ri = 150 9
Weight (mass) approx. 1 kg
Power frequency magnetic eld 30 A/m continuous;
Degree of protection according to IEC 60529
Housing
Front IP 51
IEC 60255-6
300 A/m for 5 s; 50 Hz
0.5 mT; 50 Hz 10
Damped wave 2.5 kV (peak, polarity alternating)
Rear IP 20
IEC 60694, IEC 61000-4-12, 100 kHz, 1 MHz, 10 MHz and
Protection of personnel IP1X class III 50 MHz , Ri = 200 , duration 2 s
UL-listing Oscillatory surge withstand
damped wave; 50 shots per s;
11
Listed under 69CA.
not across open contacts duration 2 s; Ri = 150 to 200
Fast transient surge withstand 4 kV to 5 kV; 10/150 ns; 50 and 120
Electrical tests
Specications
not across open contacts
surges per s; both polarities;
duration 2 s; Ri = 80 12
Standards IEC 60255 (product standards) Radiated electromagnetic interfe- 35 V/m 25 MHz to 1000 MHz
ANSI C37.90.0/.1/.2; UL508 rence ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 amplitude and pulse-modulated
See also standards for individual tests EMC tests for interference emission; type test
Insulation tests Standard EN 50081* (generic) 13
Standards IEC 60255-5 Conducted interference voltage, 150 kHz to 30 MHz,
Voltage test (routine test) all 2.5 kV (r.m.s.), 50 Hz, 1 min auxiliary voltage IEC CISPR 22, class B
circuits except auxiliary supply EN 55022, DIN EN VDE 0878
Voltage test (routine test)
Part 22
Interference eld strength 30 MHz to 1000 MHz,
14
auxiliary supply 3.5 kVDC; 30 s; both polarities
IEC CISPR 22 class B
Voltage test (type test)
Across open contacts 1.5 kV (r.m.s.), 50 Hz; 1 min
Across open live contact 1.0 kV (r.m.s.), 50 Hz; 1 min
15
Technical data
Mechanical stress test Function
1 Vibration, shock and seismic vibration

During operation
Denite time (DT O/C ANSI 50/51)
Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2 Setting range / steps
Vibration Sinusoidal Current pickup I>> (phases) 2 IN to 20 IN or deactivated,
2 IEC 60255-21-1, class II

IEC 60068-2-6
10 to 60 Hz:
0.075 mm amplitude; Current pickup I> (phases)
step 0.5 IN
0.5 IN to 6.2 IN or deactivated,
60 to 150 Hz; step 0.1 IN
1 g acceleration
Current pickup IE> 0.5 IN to 6.2 IN or deactivated,
(ground calculated) step 0.1 IN
3 Shock IEC 60225-21-2; class I
Semi-sinusoidal
Delay times TI>> 0 to 1575 ms, step 25 ms
5 g acceleration, duration 11 ms, Delay times TI> 0 to 6300 ms, step 100 ms
each 3 shocks in both directions The set time delays are pure delay times.
of the 3 axes
4 Seismic vibration
IEC 60255-21-3; class I
Sinusoidal
Current pickup Ip (phases) 0.5 IN to 4 IN or deactivated,
step 0.1 IN
IEC 60068-3-3 (horizontal vector)
1 to 8 Hz: 2.0 mm amplitude Current pickup IEp> 0.5 IN to 4 IN or deactivated,
(vertical vector) step 0.1 IN
5 8 to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration
(horizontal vector)
(ground calculated)
Delay times TIp (IEC) 0.05 to 3.15 s, step 0.05 s
Delay times D (ANSI) 0.5 to 15.00 s, step 0.25 s
8 to 35 Hz: 0.5 g acceleration
(vertical vector) Trip times
Frequeny sweep 1 octave/min
6 1 cycle in 3 perpendicular axes Switch on to fault, relay output
Reset ratio
Approx. 38 ms
Approx. 0.95 (with denite time)
During transport (ush mounting)
Approx. 0.91 (with inverse time)
Tolerances
7 Vibration
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2
IEC 60068-2-6
Sinusoidal
5 Hz to 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude;
8 Hz to 150 Hz:
Denite time (DT O/C 50/51)
Current pickup I>>, I>, IE> 5 % of the set value or
2 g acceleration 5 % of IN (at threshold < IN)
frequency sweep 1 octave/min Delay times T 1 % or 30 ms
8 Shock Semi-sinusoidal
Pickup thresholds
5 % of the set value or
5 % of IN (at threshold < IN)
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 15 g acceleration, duration 11 ms, Time behaviour for 2 I/Ip20 5 % or 50 ms
IEC 60068-2-27 each 3 shocks in both directions
of the 3 axes Deviation of the measured values as a result of various interferences
9 Continuous shock
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
Semi-sinusoidal
10 g acceleration, duration 16 ms,
Frequency in the range of
0.95 <f/fN < 1.05
< 2.5 %
IEC 60068-2-29 each 1000 shocks in both directions Frequency in the range of < 10 %
of the 3 axes 0.9 <f/fN < 1.1
Harmonics <1%
10 Climatic stress tests
up to 10 % 3rd and 5th harmonic
DC components <5%
Temperatures
Auxiliary supply voltage DC in the < 1 %
Temperatures during service 20 C to +70 C / 4 F to +158 F range of 0.8 Vaux/Vaux N 1.2
11 with continuous current 4 IN:
20 C to +55 C / 4 F to +131 F Auxiliary supply voltage AC in the < 1 %
range of 0.8 Vaux/Vaux N 1.15
Maximum temperature during 25 C to +55 C / 13 F to +131 F
Temperature in the range of < 0.5 %/10 K
storage
5 C to 70 C / 23 F to 158 F
12 Maximum temperature during

transport
25 C to +85 C / 13 F to +185 F
CE conformity
Humidity
Permissible humidity class Annual mean value 75 % relative
(standard) humidity; on 30 days per year up to
13 95 % relative humidity; condensation
not permissible.
2004/108/EG previous 89/336/EEC).
This unit conforms to the international standard IEC 60255.
Permissible humidity class Condensation is permissible according
(condensation proof) to IEC 60654-1, class III The unit has been developed and manufactured for application in an
14 This conformity is the result of a test that was
performed by Siemens AG in accordance with
Article 10 of the Council Directive complying
with the eneric standards EN 50081-2 and
15 EN 50082-2.

Description Order No.

SIPROTEC easy 7SJ46
numerical overcurrent protection relay 7SJ460 -1 00 - AA0
1
1A
5A
1
5
2
Unit design
For rail mounting
For panel ush mounting
B
E
3
Region-specic functions
Region World, 50/60 Hz; standard
Region World, 50/60 Hz; condensation-proof
A
B 4
IEC / ANSI
IEC
ANSI
0
1 5
10
11
12
13
14
15
10
11
12
13
14
15
SIPROTEC 7SJ600 numerical overcurrent, motor and overload protection relay
Function overview
Feeder protection 1
Overcurrent-time protection
Ground-fault protection
Overload protection
Negative-sequence protection
2
Cold load pickup
Auto-reclosure
Trip circuit supervision 3
LSP2001-afpen.tif
Motor protection
Starting time supervision
Locked rotor
4
Control functions
Commands for control of a circuit-breaker
Control via keyboard, DIGSI 4 or SCADA system
5
Measuring functions
Fig. 5/19 SIPROTEC 7SJ600

Operational measured values I
6
numerical overcurrent, motor and overload protection relay Monitoring functions
Fault event logging with time stamp (buffered)
Description
8 oscillographic fault records
7
The SIPROTEC 7SJ600 is a numerical overcurrent relay which, in Communication
addition to its primary use in radial distribution networks and
motor protection, can also be employed as backup for feeder,
transformer and generator differential protection.
Via personal computer and DIGSI 3 or DIGSI 4 ( 4.3)
Via RS232 RS485 converter
8
Via modem
The SIPROTEC 7SJ600 provides denite-time and inverse-time
overcurrent protection along with overload and negative- IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, 2 kV-isolated
sequence protection for a very comprehensive relay package.
In this way, equipment such as motors can be protected against
RS485 interface 9
asymmetric and excessive loading. Asymmetric short-circuits
with currents that can be smaller than the largest possible load
Hardware
currents or phase interruptions are reliably detected.
3 current transformers
10
3 binary inputs
3 output relays
1 live status contact 11
12
13
14
15
Application
Wide range of applications
1 The SIPROTEC 7SJ600 is a numerical

overcurrent relay which, in addition to
its primary use in radial distribution
networks and motor protection, can
also be employed as backup for feeder,
2 transformer and generator differential
protection.
The SIPROTEC 7SJ600 provides denite-
time and inverse-time overcurrent
3 protection along with overload and
negative-sequence protection for a very
comprehensive relay package. In this
way, equipment such as motors can be
4 protected against asymmetric and exces-
sive loading. Asymmetric short-circuits
with currents that can be smaller than the
largest possible load currents or phase
5 interruptions are reliably detected.
The integrated control function allows
simple control of a circuit-breaker or
disconnector (electrically operated/
6 motorized switch) via the integrated HMI,
DIGSI 3 or DIGSI 4 ( 4.3) or SCADA (IEC
Fig. 5/20 Typical application
60870-5-103 protocol).
7 50, 50N I>, I>>, I>>>
IE>, IE>>
Instantaneous overcurrent protection
50, 51N Ip, IEp Inverse overcurrent protection (phase/neutral)
8 79 Auto-reclosure
46 I2 Phase-balance current protection

(negative-sequence protection)
9 49 > Thermal overload protection
48 Starting time supervision
10 74TC Trip circuit supervision breaker control
11
12
13
14
15
Construction, protection functions
LSP2002-afpen.tif
2
4
numerical overcurrent, motor and overload protection relay
5
Construction Inverse-time characteristics
The relay contains all the components needed for

In addition, invese-time overcurrent protection characteristics
(IDMTL) can be activated.
6
Acquisition and evaluation of measured values
Operation and display
Output of signals and trip commands 7
Input and evaluation of binary signals
SCADA interface (RS485)
Power supply. 8
The rated CT currents applied to the SIPROTEC 7SJ600 can be
1 or 5 A. This is selectable via a jumper inside the relay.
Two different housings are available. The ush-mounting/
cubicle-mounting version has terminals accessible from the rear.
9
The surface-mounting version has terminals accessible from the
front.
10
Denite-time characteristics
The denite-time overcurrent function is based on phase- Available inverse-time characteristics
11
selective measurement of the three phase currents and/or Characteristics acc. to ANSI/IEEE IEC 60255-3
ground current.
Optionally, the earth (ground) current IE (Gnd) is calculated or
Inverse
Short inverse

12
measured from the three line currents IL1(IA), IL2(IB) and IL3(IC).
Long inverse
The denite-time overcurrent protection for the 3 phase currents
Moderately inverse
has a low-set overcurrent element (I>), a high-set overcurrent
element (I>>) and a high-set instantaneous-tripping element Very inverse 13
(I>>>). Intentional trip delays can be parameterized from 0.00 Extremely inverse
to 60.00 seconds for the low-set and high-set overcurrent
Denite inverse
elements. The instantaneous zone I>>> trips without any inten-
tional delay. The denite-time overcurrent protection for the I squared T 14
earth (ground) current has a low-set overcurrent element (IE>)
and a high-set overcurrent element (IE>>). Intentional trip delays
can be parameterized from 0.00 to 60.00 seconds.
15
Thermal overload protection (ANSI 49)
1 The thermal overload protection function

provides tripping or alarming based on
a thermal model calculated from phase
currents.
2 Thermal overload protection without

preload
For thermal overload protection without
consideration of the preload current, the
3 following tripping characteristic applies
only when
I 1.1 IL Fig. 5/24 Tripping characteristic of the negative-sequence protection function
4 For different thermal time constants TL,

the tripping time t is calculated in accordance with the following This function is especially useful for motors since negative
equation: sequence currents cause impermissible overheating of the rotor.
35 In order to detect the unbalanced load, the ratio of negative
5 t=
I 2
1
TL
phase-sequence current to rated current is evaluated.
IL I2 = Negative-sequence current
TI2 = Tripping time
I = Load current
6 IL
TL
= Pickup current
= Time multiplier
Transformer protection
The high-set element permits current coordination where the
The reset threshold is above 1.03125 I/IN overcurrent element functions as a backup for the lower-level
protection relays, and the overload function protects the trans-
7 Thermal overload protection with preload former from thermal overload. Low-current single-phase faults
The thermal overload protection with consideration of preload on the low voltage side that result in negative phase-sequence
current constantly updates the thermal model calculation current on the high-voltage side can be detected with the
regardless of the magnitude of the phase currents. The tripping negative-sequence protection.
8 time t is calculated in accordance with the following tripping
characteristic (complete memory in accordance with Cold load pickup
IEC 60255-8). By means of a binary input which can be wired from a manual
9 I 2 I pre 2

settings to less sensitive settings for a programmable duration
of time. After the set time has expired, the pickup settings auto-
k I N k I N matically return to their original setting. This can compensate for
t = t ln 2
I initial inrush when energizing a circuit without compromising
1
10 k I N the sensitivity of the overcurrent elements during steady state
conditions.
t = Tripping time after beginning of the thermal overload
= 35.5 TL 3-pole multishot auto-reclosure (AR, ANSI 79)
Ipre = Pre-load current
11 TL =Time multiplier
Auto-reclosure (AR) enables 3-phase auto-reclosing of a feeder
which has previously been disconnected by overcurrent protec-
I = Load current
tion.
k = k factor (in accordance with IEC 60255-8)
ln = Natural logarithm Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74TC)
12 IN = Rated (nominal) current
One or two binary inputs can be used for the trip circuit
Negative-sequence protection (I2>>, I2>/ANSI 46 Unbalanced- monitoring.
load protection)
Control
13 The negative-sequence protection (see Fig. 5/24) detects a
phase failure or load unbalance due to network asymmetry. The relay permits circuit-breakers to be opened and closed
Interruptions, short-circuits or crossed connections to the without command feedback. The circuit-breaker/disconnector
current transformers are detected. may be controlled by DIGSI, or by the integrated HMI, or by the
14 Furthermore, low level single-phase and two-phase short-circuits

(such as faults beyond a transformer) as well as phase interrup-
LSA/SCADA equipment connected to the interface.
tions can be detected.
15
For further details please refer to part 2 Overview.

Protection functions, motor protection, features
If switched onto a fault, instantaneous
tripping can be effected. If the internal 1
control function is used (local or via serial
interface), the manual closing function is
available without any additional wiring.
If the control switch is connected to a
circuit-breaker bypassing the internal
2
control function, manual detection using
a binary input is implemented.
Busbar protection
3
(Reverse interlocking)
Binary inputs can be used to block any
of the six current stages. Parameters are
assigned to decide whether the input
4
circuit is to operate in open-circuit or
closed-circuit mode. In this case, reverse
interlocking provides high-speed busbar
protection in radial or ring power systems 5
that are opened at one point. The reverse
interlocking principle is used, for example,
in medium-voltage power systems and
in switchgear for power plants, where a 6
high-voltage system transformer feeds
a busbar section with several medium- Fig. 5/25 Reverse interlocking
voltage outgoing feeders.
7
Motor protection
For short-circuit protection, e.g. elements 8

I>> (50) and IE (50N) are available. The
stator is protected against thermal over-
load by s> (49), the rotor by I2> (46),
starting time supervision (48). 9
Motor starting time supervision
(ANSI 48)
The start-up monitor protects the motor
against excessively long starting. This can
Fig. 5/26 Wiring communication 10
For convenient wiring of the RS485 bus, use bus cable system 7XV5103
occur, for example, if the rotor is blocked, (see part 14 of this catalog).
if excessive voltage drops occur when the
motor is switched on or if excessive load
torques occur. The tripping time depends
Features
11
on the current.
I 2
tTRIP = start t startmax Serial data transmission
I rms
A PC can be connected to ease setup of the relay using the
12
Windows-based program DIGSI which runs under MS-Windows.
IN
for I rms > I start , reset ratio
I start It can also be used to evaluate up to 8 oscillographic fault
records, 8 fault logs and 1 event log containing up to 30
operational indications. The SIPROTEC 7SJ600 transmits a subset
13
approx. 0.94 of data via IEC 60870-5-103 protocol:
tTRIP = Tripping time General fault detection
Istart = Start-up current of the motor General trip 14

Phase current IL2
tstart max = Maximum permissible starting time
User-dened message
Irms = Actual current owing Breaker control
Oscillographic fault recording
15
Connection diagrams
4
Fig. 5/27 Connection of 3 CTs with measurement Fig. 5/28 Connection of 3 CTs with measurement of
of the phase currents the earth (ground) current
9 Fig. 5/29 Connection of 2 CTs only for isolated or

resonant-earthed (grounded) power systems
Fig. 5/30 Sensitive ground-fault protection
(3-times increased sensitivity)
10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 5/31 Example of typical wiring
15
Technical data
General unit data Heavy-duty (command) contacts

CT circuits
Rated current IN 1 or 5 A
Trip relays, number
Contacts per relay
2 (marshallable)
2 NO 1
Rated frequency fN 50/60 Hz (selectable) Switching capacity
Overload capability current path Make 1000 W / VA
Break 30 W / VA
Thermal (r.m.s.) 100 x IN for 1 s
30 x IN for 10 s
4 x IN continuous
Switching voltage 250 V 2
Permissible current
Dynamic (pulse current) 250 x IN one half cycle Continuous 5A
Power consumption For 0.5 s 30 A
Current input at IN = 1 A
at IN = 5 A
< 0.1 VA
< 0.2 VA
Design
Housing 7XP20 Refer to part 14 for
3
Power supply via integrated DC/DC converter dimension drawings
Rated auxiliary voltage Vaux / DC 24, 48 V/ 20 % Weight
permissible variations DC 60, 110/125 V/ 20 %
DC 220, 250 V/ 20 %
AC 115 V/20 % +15 %
Flush mounting /cubicle
mounting
Approx. 4 kg
4
Surface mounting Approx. 4.5 kg
AC 230 V/20 % +15 %
Degree of protection acc. to
Superimposed AC voltage, EN 60529
peak-to-peak
at rated voltage 12 %
Housing
Terminals
IP51
IP21
5
at limits of admissible voltage 6%
Power consumption
Quiescent Approx. 2 W Serial interface
Energized
Bridging time during failure/
Approx. 4 W
50 ms at Vaux DC 110 V
Interface, serial; isolated
Standard RS485
6
short-circuit of auxiliary voltage 20 ms at Vaux DC 24 V
Test voltage DC 2.8 kV for 1 min
Binary inputs
Connection Data cable at housing terminals, two
Number
Operating voltage
3 (marshallable)
DC 24 to 250 V
data wires, one frame reference, for
connection of a personal computer or
7
similar; core pairs with individual and
Current consumption, independent Approx. 2.5 mA common screening, screen must be
of operating voltage earthed (grounded), communication
Pickup threshold, reconnectable by
solder bridges Transmission speed
possible via modem
As delivered 9600 baud
8
Rated aux. voltage min. 1200 baud,
DC 24/48/60 V Vpickup DC 17 V max. 19200 baud
Vdrop-out < DC 8 V
DC 110/125/220/250 V
Vpickup DC 74 V Electrical tests
9
Vdrop-out < DC 45 V Specications
Signal contacts Standards IEC 60255-5; ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0
Signal/alarm relays
Contacts per relay
2 (marshallable)
1 CO
Insulation test 10
Standards IEC 60255-5, ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0
Switching capacity High-voltage test (routine test)
Make 1000 W / VA Except DC voltage supply input 2 kV (r.m.s.), 50 Hz
Break
Switching voltage
30 W / VA
250 V
and RS485
Only DC voltage supply input DC 2.8 kV
11
Permissible current 5A and RS485
High-voltage test (type test) 1.5 kV (r.m.s.), 50 Hz
Between open contacts of trip
relays
Between open contacts of 1 kV (r.m.s.), 50 Hz
12
alarm relays
Impulse voltage test (type test) 5 kV (peak), 1.2/50 s,
all circuits, class III 0.5 J, 3 positive and 3 negative
impulses at intervals of 5 s 13
14
15
Technical data
EMC tests for interference immunity; type tests Mechanical stress tests
1 Standards IEC 60255-6; IEC 60255-22

(product standard)
EN 50082-2 (generic standard),
Vibration, shock and seismic vibration
During operation
DIN VDE 0435 Part 303 Standards Acc. to IEC 60255-2-1 and
IEC 60068-2
High-frequency test 2.5 kV (peak), 1 MHz, = 15 ms,
2 IEC 60255-22-1, class III

Electrostatic discharge
400 surges/s, duration 2 s
4 kV/6 kV contact discharge,
Vibration
IEC 60255-21-1, class1
IEC 60068-2-6
Sinusoidal 10 to 60 Hz: 0.035 mm
amplitude, 60 to 150 Hz: 0.5 g
acceleration
IEC 60255-22-2, class III 8 kV air discharge, both polarities,
Sweep rate 1 octave/min
and IEC 61000-4-2, class III 150 pF, Ri=330
20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes
3 eld
Non-modulated, 10 V/m, 27 to 500 MHz
Shock
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
Half-sine, acceleration 5 g, duration
11 ms, 3 shocks in each direction
of 3 orthogonal axes
IEC 60255-22-3 (report) class III
Amplitude modulated, 10 V/m, 80 to 1000 MHz, Seismic vibration Sinusoidal
IEC 61000-4-3, class III 80 % AM, 1 kHz IEC 60255-21-3, class 1, 1 to 8 Hz: 3.5 mm amplitude
4 Pulse modulated,
10 V/m, 900 MHz, repetition
frequency, 200 Hz, duty cycle 50 %
IEC 60068-3-3 (horizontal axis)
(vertical axis)
Fast transient interference/bursts 2 kV, 5/50 ns, 5 kHz, burst length
8 to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration
IEC 60255-22-4 and 15 ms, repetition rate 300 ms, both
(horizontal axis)
Conducted disturbances induced
polarities, Ri = 50 , duration 1 min
10 V, 150 kHz to 80 MHz,
(vertical axis)
by radio-frequency elds, 80 % AM, 1 kHz Sweep rate 1 octave/min
amplitude modulated 1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes
During transport
6 Power frequency magnetic eld
30 A/m continuous, 50 Hz
300 A/m for 3 s, 50 Hz Vibration Sinusoidal
IEC 60255-6 0.5 mT; 50 Hz IEC 60255-21-1, class 2 5 to 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude;
IEC 60068-2-6 8 to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration
Oscillatory surge withstand 2.5 to 3 kV (peak), 1 MHz to Sweep rate 1 octave/min
7 capability ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1

(common mode)
1.5 MHz, decaying oscillation,
50 shots per s, duration 2 s,
Ri = 150 to 200 Shock
Half-sine, acceleration 15 g,
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 duration 11 ms, 3 shocks in each
Fast transient surge withstand 4 to 5 kV, 10/150 ns, 50 surges IEC 60068-2-27 direction of 3 orthogonal axes
capability ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 per s, both polarities, duration 2 s,
Continuous shock Half-sine, acceleration 10 g
8 (commom mode)
Radiated electromagnetic inter-
Ri = 80
10 to 20 V/m, 25 to 1000 MHz,
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
IEC 60068-2-29
duration 16 ms, 1000 shocks in each
direction of 3 orthogonal axes
ference, ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 amplitude and pulse-modulated
High-frequency test 2.5 kV (peak, alternating polarity),
Document 17C (SEC) 102 100 kHz, 1 MHz, 10 MHz and Climatic stress tests
9 50 MHz, decaying oscillation,
Ri = 50 W
Temperatures
Recommended temperature
EMC tests for interference emission; type tests during operation 5 C to +55 C / +23 F to +131 F
Standard EN 50081-* (generic standard) > 55 C decreased display contrast
10 Conducted interference voltage, 150 kHz to 30 MHz
aux. voltage CISPR 22, EN 55022,
Permissible temperature
during operation 20 C to +70 C / 4 F to +158 F
DIN VDE 0878 Part 22, during storage 25 C to +55 C / 13 F to +131 F
limit value class B during transport 25 C to +70 C / 13 F to +158 F
(Storage and transport with
11 Interference eld strength
CISPR 11, EN 55011, DIN VDE
30 to 1000 MHz
standard works packaging)
Humidity
0875 Part 11, limit value class A
Mean value per year 75 % relative
humidity, on 30 days per year
12 95 % relative humidity,
condensation not permissible
13
14
15
Technical data
Functions Tolerances
Pickup values 5%
Denite-time overcurrent protection (ANSI 50, 50N)
Setting range/steps
Delay time for 2 I/Ip 20
and 0.5 I/IN 24
5 % of theoretical value 2 %
current tolerance, at least 30 ms
1
Overcurrent pickup phase I I/IN = 0.1 to 25 (steps 0.1), or Inuencing variables
ground IE> = 0.05 to 25 (steps 0.01), or Auxiliary voltage, range: 1%
phase I>> I/IN = 0.1 to 25 (steps 0.1), or 0.8 Vaux/VauxN 1.2
ground IE>>
phase I>>> I/IN
= 0.05 to 25 (steps 0.01), or
= 0.3 to 12.5 (steps 0.1), or
Temperature, range:
-5 C amb 40 C
0.5 %/10 K 2
Delay times T for I>, IE>, I>> 0 s to 60 s (steps 0.01 s) +23 F amb 104 F
and IE>> Frequency, range: 8 % referred to theoretical time
0.95 f/fN 1.05 value
The set times are pure delay times
Pickup times I>, I>>, IE>, IE>> Negative-sequence overcurrent protection (ANSI 46) 3
At 2 x setting value, without Approx. 35 ms Setting range/steps
meas. repetition Tripping stage
At 2 x setting value, with meas. Approx. 50 ms I2> in steps of 1 % 8 % to 80 % of IN
repetition
Pickup times for I>>> at 2 x Approx. 20 ms
I2>> in steps of 1 %
Time delays T(I2>), T(I2>>)
8 % to 80 % of IN 4
setting value in steps of 0.01s 0.00 s to 60.00 s
Reset times I>, I>>, IE>, IE> Approx. 35 ms Lower function limit At least one phase current 0.1 x IN
I>>> Approx. 65 ms Pickup times At fN = 50 Hz 60 Hz
Reset ratios Approx. 0.95 Tripping stage I2>, tripping
stage I2>>
Approx. 60 ms 75 ms 5
Overshot time Approx. 25 ms But with currents I/IN >1.5 Approx. 200 ms 310 ms
Tolerances (overcurrent case) or
Pickup values I>, I>>, I>>>, 5 % of setting value negative-sequence current
IE>, IE>>
Delay times T 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
< (set value +0.1 x IN) 6
Reset times At fN = 50 Hz 60 Hz
Inuencing variables Tripping stage I2>, Approx. 35 ms 42 ms
Auxiliary voltage, range: 1% tripping stage I2>>
0.8 Vaux /VauxN 1.2
Temperature, range:
0 C amb 40 C
0.5 %/10 K
Reset ratios
Tripping stage I2>, Approx. 0.95 to 0.01 x IN 7
tripping stage I2>>
Frequency, range: 1.5 %
0.98 f/fN 1.02 Tolerances
Frequency, range: 2.5 % Pickup values I2>, I2>>
0.95 f/fN 1.05
Harmonics
with current I/IN 1.5
with current I/IN > 1.5
1 % of IN 5 % of set value
5 % of IN 5 % of set value
8
Up to 10 % of 3rd harmonic 1% Stage delay times 1 % or 10 ms
Up to 10 % of 5th harmonic 1% Inuence variables
Auxiliary DC voltage, range: 1%
Inverse-time overcurrent protection (ANSI 51/51N)
Setting range/steps
0.8 Vaux /VauxN 1.2
Temperature, range: 0.5 %/10 K
9
Overcurrent pickup phase Ip I/IN = 0.1 to 4 (steps 0.1) 5 C amb +40 C
ground IEp = 0.05 to 4 (steps 0.01) +23 F amb +104 F
Frequency,
Time multiplier for Ip, IEp
Tp
(IEC charac.) 0.05 to 3.2 s
(steps 0.01 s)
(ANSI charac.) 0.5 to 15 s
range: 0.98 f/fN 1.02
range: 0.95 f/fN 1.05
2 % of IN
5 % of IN
10
(steps 0.1 s) Auto-reclosure (option) (ANSI 79)
Overcurrent pickup phase I>> I/IN = 0.1 to 25 (steps 0.1), or Number of possible shots 1 up to 9
phase I>>>
ground IE>>
= 0.3 to 12.5 (steps 0.1), or
= 0.05 to 25 Auto-reclose modes 3-pole 11
(steps 0.01), or Dead times for 1st to 3rd shot 0.05 s to 1800 s (steps 0.01 s)
Delay time T for I>>, IE>> 0 s to 60 s (steps 0.01 s) for 4th and any 0.05 s to 1800 s (steps 0.01 s)
further shot
Tripping time characteristics acc. to IEC
Pickup threshold Approx. 1.1 x Ip
Reclaim time after successful AR
Lock-out time after
0.05 s to 320 s (steps 0.01 s)
0.05 s to 320 s (steps 0.01 s)
12
Drop-out threshold Approx. 1.03 x Ip
unsuccessful AR
Drop-out time Approx. 35 ms
Reclaim time after manual close 0.50 s to 320 s (steps 0.01 s)
Tripping time characteristics acc. to ANSI / IEEE
Duration of RECLOSE command
Control
0.01s to 60 s (steps 0.01 s)
13
Drop-out threshold, Approx. 1.03 x Ip
alternatively: disk emulation Number of devices 1
Evaluation of breaker control None
14
15
Technical data
Thermal overload protection with memory (ANSI 49) Fault recording

(total memory according to IEC 60255-8)
1 Setting ranges
Factor k acc. to IEC 60255-8 0.40 to 2 (steps 0.01)
Measured values
Start signal
IL1, IL2, IL3
Trip, start release, binary input
Thermal time constant th 1 to 999.9 min (steps 0.1 min) Fault storage Max. 8 fault records
Thermal alarm stage alarm/trip 50 to 99 % referred to trip tempera- Total storage time (fault detec- Max. 5 s, incl. 35 power-fail safe
ture rise (steps 1 %) tion or trip command = 0 ms) selectable pre-trigger and
2 Prolongation factor at motor 1 to 10 (steps 0.01)
Max. storage period per fault
post-fault time
0.30 to 5.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
stand-still k
event Tmax
Reset ratios Pre-trigger time Tpre 0.05 to 0.50 s (steps 0.01s)
/trip Reset below alarm Post-fault time Tpost 0.05 to 0.50 s (steps 0.01 s)
3 /alarm
Tolerances
Approx. 0.99 Sampling rate 1 instantaneous value per ms at 50 Hz
1 instantaneous value per 0.83 ms at
Referring to k IN 5 % (class 5 % acc. to 60 Hz
IEC 60255-8)
Referring to trip time 5 % 2 s (class 5 % acc. to
4 IEC 60255-8) Additional functions
Operational measured values
Inuence variables referred to k IN
Auxiliary DC voltage in the 1% Operating currents IL1, IL2, IL3
rangeof 0.8 Vaux/VauxN 1.2 Measuring range 0 % to 240 % IN
5 Temperature, range:
5 C amb +40 C 0.5 % / 10 K
Tolerance
Thermal overload values
3 % of rated value
+23 F amb +104 F

Frequency, range: 1% Calculated temperature rise /trip
0.95 f/fN 1.05 Measuring range 0 % to 300 %
6 Without pickup value IL/IN

Memory time multiplier TL
0.4 to 4 (steps 0.1)
1 to 120 s (steps 0,1 s)
Tolerance
Fault event logging
5 % referred to trip
(= t6 -time) Storage of indications of the last

Reset ratio I/IL Approx. 0.94 8 faults
7 Tolerances
Referring to pickup threshold 5%
Time assignment
Resolution for operational
1.1 IL indications 1s
Referring to trip time 5% 2 s Resolution for fault event
Inuence variables indications 1ms
8 Auxiliary DC voltage in the
range of 0.8 Vaux/VauxN 1.2
1% Max. time deviation
Trip circuit supervision
0.01 %
Temperature, range: 0.5%/10 K

5 C amb +40 C With one or two binary inputs
+23 F amb +104 F Circuit-breaker trip test
9 Frequency, range:
0.95 f/fN 1.05
1% With live trip or trip/reclose cycle
(version with auto-reclosure)
Starting time supervision (motor protection)
Setting ranges
10 Permissible starting current
IStart/IN
0.4 to 20 (steps 0.1)
CE conformity
Permissible starting time tStart 1 to 360 s (steps 0.1 s)
I Start 2 2004/108/EG previous 89/336/EEC) and electrical equipment designed
11 Tripping characteristic t =
I rms
t for I rms > I Start for use within certain voltage limits (Council Directive 2006/95/EG
previous 73/23/EEC).
Reset ratio Irms/IStart Approx. 0.94 This unit conforms to the international standard IEC 60255, and the
Tolerances German standard DIN 57435/Part 303 (corresponding to VDE 0435/
Part 303).
12 Pickup value
Delay time
5%
5 % of setting value or 330 ms The unit has been developed and manufactured for application in an
This conformity is the result of a test that was performed by Siemens AG
13 the generic standards EN 50081-2 and EN 50082-2 for the EMC Directive
and standard EN 60255-6 for the low-voltage Directive.
14
15

7SJ600 numerical overcurrent, motor and overload protection relay
Binary input voltage 24 to 250 V DC with isolated RS485 port
7SJ600 - A 0- D
1
Rated current at 50/60 Hz
1 A1) 1
5 A1) 5 2
Rated auxiliary voltage
24, 48 V DC 2
60, 110, 125 V DC2)
220, 250 V DC, 115 V AC2)
4
5
3
230 V AC3) 6
Unit design
For panel surface mounting, terminals on the side B B 4
Terminal connection on top and bottom D D
For panel ush mounting / cubicle mounting E
Languages
English, German, Spanish, French, Russian 0
5
Auto-reclosure (option)
Without
With
0
1
6
Control
Without A
With B 7
UL-Listing
Without UL-listing 0
With UL-listing 1
8
Accessories Description Order No.
Converter RS232 (V.24) - RS485* 9

LSP2289-afp.eps
With communication cable for the 7SJ600 numerical

overcurrent, motor and overload protection relay
Length 1 m
PC adapter
With power supply unit AC 230 V 7XV5700- 0 004)
10
Mounting rail
With power supply unit AC 110 V 7XV5700- 1 004)
Converter, full-duplex,
ber-optic cable RS485 with built-in power supply unit 11
Auxiliary voltage 24 to DC 250 V and AC 110/230 V 7XV5650- 0BA00
Mounting rail for 19 rack C73165-A63-C200-1
Manual for 7SJ600 12

German C53000-G1100-C106-9
English C53000-G1176-C106-7
Spanish C53000-G1178-C106-1
1) Rated current can be selected by means
of jumpers. French C53000-G1177-C106-3 13
2) Transition between the two auxiliary
Sample order
voltage ranges can be selected by means
of jumpers. 7SJ600, 1 A, 60 125 V, ush mounting, ARC 7SJ6001-4EA00-1DA0
3) Only when position 16 is not 1
(with UL-listing).
Converter V.24 -RS485, AC 230 V
Manual, English
7XV5700-0AA00
C53000-G1176-C106-7
14
4) Possible versions see part 13. or visit www.siemens.com/siprotec
* RS485 bus system up to 115 kbaud
RS485 bus cable and adaptor
7XV5103- AA ; see part 13. 15
Connection diagram
7 Fig. 5/32 Connection diagram according to IEC standard
10
11
12
13
14
15
SIPROTEC 7SJ602 multifunction overcurrent and motor protection relay
Function overview
Feeder protection 1
Sensitive ground-fault detection
Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
Displacement voltage
2
Disk emulation
Overload protection
Breaker failure protection 3
LSP2136-afpen.tif
Cold load pickup
Auto-reclosure 4
Motor protection
Starting time supervision 5
Locked rotor
Restart inhibit

Undercurrent monitoring
Temperature monitoring
6
multifunction protection relay
Control functions
Description Commands for control of a circuit-breaker
Control via keyboard, DIGSI 4 or SCADA system
7
The SIPROTEC 7SJ602 is a numerical overcurrent relay which,
in addition to its primary use in radial distribution networks Measuring functions
and motor protection, can also be employed as backup for line,
transformer and generator differential protection. The SIPROTEC
Operational measured values I, V
Power measurement P, Q, S, Wp, Wq
8
7SJ602 provides denite-time and inverse-time overcurrent
Slavepointer
protection along with overload and unbalanced-load (negative-
sequence) protection for a very comprehensive relay package. Mean values
For applications with ground-current detection two versions are Monitoring functions
9
available: One version with four current transformer inputs for Fault event logging with time stamp (buffered)
non-directional earth (ground) fault detection and a second ver-
sion with three current inputs (2 phase, 1 earth/ground) and one
voltage input for directional earth (ground) fault detection. Continuous self-monitoring 10
The exible communication interfaces are open for modern Communication interfaces
communication architectures with control systems.
System interface
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol 11
PROFIBUS-DP
MODBUS RTU/ASCII
Front interface for DIGSI 4
12
Hardware
4 current transformers or 13
3 current + 1 voltage transformers
3 binary inputs
4 output relays
1 live status contact
14
15
Application
Wide range of applications
1 The SIPROTEC 7SJ602 is a numerical

overcurrent relay which, in addition to
its primary use in radial distribution
networks and motor protection, can
also be employed as backup for feeder,
2 transformer and generator differential
protection.
The SIPROTEC 7SJ602 provides denite-
time and inverse-time overcurrent
3 protection along with overload and
negative sequence protection for a very
comprehensive relay package. In this
way, equipment such as motors can be
4 protected against asymmetric and exces-
sive loading. Asymmetric short-circuits
with currents that can be smaller than the
largest possible load currents or phase
5 interruptions are reliably detected.
The integrated control function allows
simple control of a circuit-breaker or
1) alternatively; see Selection and ordering data for details
disconnector (electrically operated/
6 motorized switch) via the integrated HMI,
DIGSI or SCADA.
Fig. 5/34 Function diagram

7 50, 50N I>, I>>, I>>>
IE>, IE>>
Denite-time overcurrent protection (phase/neutral)
50, 51N Ip, IEp Inverse-time overcurrent protection (phase/neutral)
8 67Ns, 50Ns IEE>, IEE>>, IEEp Directional/non-directional sensitive ground-fault detection
64 I2 Displacement voltage
9 50BF Breaker failure protection
79 Auto-reclosure
46 I2> Phase-balance current protection

10 >
49
11 66/86 Restart inhibit
37 I< Undercurrent monitoring
12 38 Temperature monitoring via external device,

e.g. bearing temperature monitoring
74TC Trip circuit supervision breaker control
13
14
15
Construction
The relay contains all the components 1

needed for
Acquisition and evaluation of measured
values
Operation and display 2
LSP2137-afpen.tif
Output of signals and trip commands
LSP2138-afpen.tif
SCADA interface
(RS485, RS232, ber-optic)
3
Power supply.
The rated CT currents applied to the
SIPROTEC 7SJ602 can be 1 A or 5 A. This 4
is selectable via a jumper inside the relay. Fig. 5/35 Rear view of ush-mounting Fig. 5/36 View from below showing
Two different housings are available. The housing system interface (SCADA) with
ush-mounting version has terminals
accessible from the rear. The surface-
FO connection (for remote
communications) 5
mounting version has terminals accessible
from the front. Retrotting of a com-
munication module, or replacement of an
existing communication module with a 6
new one are both possible.
Protection functions 7
Denite-time characteristics
The denite-time overcurrent function
is based on phase-selective evaluation
8
of the three phase currents and ground
current.
The denite-time overcurrent protection
for the 3 phase currents has a low-set Fig. 5/37 Denite-time overcurrent
9
Fig. 5/38 Inverse-time overcurrent
overcurrent element (I>), a high-set characteristic characteristic
overcurrent element (I>>) and a high-set
instantaneous element (I>>>). Intentional trip delays can be set
from 0 to 60 seconds for all three overcurrent elements. Available inverse-time characteristics 10
The denite-time overcurrent protection for the earth (ground)
current has a low-set overcurrent element (IE>) and a high-set Inverse
overcurrent element (IE>>). Intentional trip delays can be
parameterized from 0 to 60 seconds.
Short inverse 11
Long inverse
Inverse-time characteristics Moderately inverse
In addition, inverse-time overcurrent protection characteristics

Very inverse
Extremely inverse

12
Denite inverse
Reset characteristics
For easier time coordination with electromechanical relays, reset
characteristics according to ANSI C37.112 and IEC 60255-3 /
I squared T
RI/RD-type

13
BS 142 standards are applied. When using the reset character-
istic (disk emulation), a reset process is initiated after the fault
current has disappeared.
14
This reset process corresponds to the reverse movement of the
Ferraris disk of an electromechanical relay (thus: disk emula-
tion).
15
(Sensitive) directional ground-fault detection (ANSI 64, 67Ns)
1 The direction of power ow in the zero sequence is calculated

from the zero-sequence current I0 and zero-sequence voltage
V0. For networks with an isolated neutral, the reactive current
component is evaluated; for compensated networks the active
current component or residual resistive current is evaluated.
2 For special network conditions, e.g. high-resistance grounded
networks with ohmic-capacitive ground-fault current or low-
resistance grounded networks with ohmic-inductive current,
the tripping characteristics can be rotated approximately 45
3 degrees (cosine/sinus).
Two modes of ground-fault direction detection can be imple-
mented: tripping or in signalling only mode.
4 It has the following functions:

TRIP via the displacement voltage VE.
Two instantaneous elements or one instantaneous plus one
inverse characteristic.
5 Each element can be set in forward, reverse, or non-
directional.
(Sensitive) ground-fault detection (ANSI 50Ns, 51Ns/50N, 51N)
6 For high-resistance grounded networks, a sensitive input

transformer is connected to a phase-balance neutral current
Fig. 5/39 Directional determination using cosine measurements
transformer (also called core-balance CT). Thermal overload protection with preload
7 Thermal overload protection (ANSI 49)

The thermal overload protection function provides tripping
The thermal overload protection with consideration of preload
current constantly updates the thermal model calculation
regardless of the magnitude of the phase currents. The tripping
or alarming based on a thermal model calculated from phase time t is calculated in accordance with the following tripping
currents. characteristic (complete memory in accordance with
8 The ambient temperature or the temperature of the coolant can IEC 60255-8).
be detected serially via an external temperature monitoring box I 2 I pre 2
(also called thermo-box). If there is no thermo-box it is assumed
that the ambient temperatures are constant. k I N k I N
t = t ln
9 Thermal overload protection without preload:
I

2
1
k I N
For thermal overload protection without consideration of the
preload current, the following tripping characteristic applies only t = Tripping time after beginning of the thermal overload
10 when
t = 35.5 TL
I 1.1 IL
Ipre = Preload current
For different thermal time constants TL, the tripping time t is
I = Load current
11 calculated in accordance with the following equation:
35 k = k factor (in accordance with IEC 60255-8)
t= TL
I 2 In = Natural logarithm
1
IL
12 I = Load current
TL = Time multiplier
IN = Rated (nominal) current
IL = Pickup current
13 TL = Time multiplier
The reset threshold is above 1.03125 I/IN
14
15
Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF)

If a faulted portion of the electrical circuit
is not disconnected upon issuance of a 1
trip command, another command can be
initiated using the breaker failure protec-
tion which operates the circuit-breaker,
e.g. of an upstream (higher-level) protec-
tion relay. Breaker failure is detected if
2
after a trip command, current is still ow-
ing in the faulted circuit. As an option it is
possible to make use of the circuit-breaker
position indication.
3
Negative-sequence protection Fig. 5/40 Tripping characteristics of the negative-sequence protection function
(I2>>, I2>/ANSI 46 Unbalanced-load
protection) 4
The negative-sequence protection (see Fig. 5/40) detects a Cold load pickup
phase failure or load unbalance due to network asymmetry.
By means of a binary input which can be wired from a manual
Interruptions, short-circuits or crossed connections to the cur-
rent transformers are detected.
settings to less sensitive settings for a programmable duration
5
Furthermore, low level single-phase and two-phase short-circuits of time. After the set time has expired, the pickup settings auto-
(such as faults beyond a transformer) as well as phase interrup- matically return to their original setting. This can compensate for
tions can be detected. initial inrush when energizing a circuit without compromising
the sensitivity of the overcurrent elements during steady state
6
This function is especially useful for motors since negative-
conditions.
sequence currents cause impermissible overheating of the rotor.
3-pole multishot auto-reclosure (AR, ANSI 79)
In order to detect the unbalanced load, the ratio of negative
phase-sequence current to rated current is evaluated. Auto-reclosure (AR) enables 3-phase auto-reclosing of a feeder
7
I2 = negative-sequence current which has previously been disconnected by overcurrent protec-
tion.
TI2 = tripping time
Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74TC) 8
One or two binary inputs can be used for trip circuit monitoring.
The high-set element permits current coordination where the
overcurrent element functions as a backup for the lower-level Control
protection relays, and the overload function protects the trans-
The relay permits circuit-breakers to be opened and closed
9
former from thermal overload. Low-current single-phase faults
without command feedback. The circuit-breaker/disconnector
on the low voltage side that result in negative phase-sequence
may be controlled by DIGSI, or by the integrated HMI, or by the
current on the high-voltage side can be detected with the
negative-sequence protection.
LSA/SCADA equipment connected to the interface.
10
11
12
13
14
15
1 If switched onto a fault, instantaneous

tripping can be effected. If the internal
control function is used (local or via serial
interface), the manual closing function is
available without any additional wiring.
2 If the control switch is connected to a
circuit-breaker by-passing the internal
control function, manual detection using
a binary input is implemented.
3 Busbar protection (Reverse interlock-
ing)
Binary inputs can be used to block any
4 of the six current stages. Parameters are
assigned to decide whether the input
circuit is to operate in open-circuit or
closed-circuit mode. In this case, reverse
5 interlocking provides highspeed busbar

protection in radial or ring power systems
that are opened at one point. The reverse
interlocking principle is used, for example,
in medium-voltage power systems and
6 in switchgear for power plants, where a
high-voltage system transformer feeds
a busbar section with several medium-
voltage outgoing feeders.
7
8 Fig. 5/41 Reserve interlocking
10
11
12
13
14
15
Motor protection, additional functions
Motor protection
Starting time supervision (ANSI 48) 1

Starting time supervision protects the
motor against long unwanted start-ups
that might occur when excessive load
torque occurs, excessive voltage drops 2
occur within the motor or if the rotor is
locked. Rotor temperature is calculated
from measured stator current. The trip-
ping time is calculated according to the 3
following equation:
I 2
t TRIP = START t start max
I rms
4
IN Fig. 5/42 Starting time supervision
for I rms > I start , reset ratio approx. 0.94
I START
tTRIP = tripping time 5

Istart = start-up current of the motor
tstart max = maximum permissible starting
time 6
Irms = actual current owing
Restart inhibit (ANSI 66/86)

If a motor is started up too many times
7
in succession, the rotor can be subject to
thermal overload, especially the upper
edges of the bars. The rotor temperature
is calculated from the stator current and 8
the temperature characteristic is shown
in a schematic diagram. The reclosing
lockout only permits startup of the motor
if the rotor has sufcient thermal reserves
for a complete start-up.
9
Undercurrent monitoring (ANSI 37)
With this function, a sudden drop in cur-
rent, which may occur due to a reduced
Fig. 5/43 Restart inhibit
10
motor load, is detected. This can cause
Additional functions
shaft breakage, no-load operation of pumps or fan failure.
Temperature monitoring (ANSI 38) Measured values 11

A temperature monitoring box with a total of 6 measuring The r.m.s. values are calculated from the acquired current
sensors can be used for temperature monitoring and detection and voltage along with the power factor, active and reactive
by the protection relay. The thermal status of motors, generators
and transformers can be monitored with this device. Addition-
power. The following functions are available for measured value
processing: 12
ally, the temperature of the bearings of rotating machines Currents IL1, IL2, IL3, IE, IEE (67Ns)
are monitored for limit value violation. The temperatures are Voltages VL1, VE (67Ns if existing
measured with the help of temperature detectors at various
locations of the device to be protected. This data is transmitted Power Watts, Vars, VA/P, Q, S 13
to the protection relay via a temperature monitoring box (also Power factor (cos ),
called thermo-box or RTD-box) (see Accessories). Energy kWh, kVarh, forward and reverse power ow
Mean as well as minimum and maximum current, voltage and
power values 14
15
Communication
Communication
1 With respect to communication, particular
LSP2163-afp.eps
emphasis has been placed on high levels
of exibility, data integrity and utilization
of standards common in energy automa-
2 tion. The design of the communication
modules permits interchangeability.
Local PC interface
3 The SIPROTEC 7SJ602 is tted with an

RS232 PC front port. A PC can be con-
nected to ease set-up of the relay using
Fig. 5/44 RS232/RS485 electrical communication module
the Windows-based program DIGSI which
4 runs under MS-Windows. It can also be
used to evaluate up to 8 oscillographic
fault records, 8 fault logs and 1 event log
containing up to 30 events.
5 System interface on bottom of the unit

A communication module located on
LSP2164-afp.eps
the bottom part of the unit incorporates
6 optional equipment complements and

readily permits retrotting. It guarantees
the ability to comply with the require-
ments of different communication
interfaces.
7 This interface is used to carry out com-
Fig. 5/45 PROFIBUS ber-optic double ring communication module
munication with a control or a protection

system and supports a variety of commu-
nication protocols and interface designs,
8 depending on the module connected.
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol

IEC 60870-5-103 is an internationally
9 standardized protocol for the efcient
communication in the protected area.
IEC 60870-5-103 is supported by a num-
ber of protection device manufacturers
10 and is used worldwide.
PROFIBUS-DP
PROFIBUS-DP is an industry-recognized
11 standard for communications and is sup-
ported by a number of PLC and protection
device manufacturers.
12 MODBUS RTU
MODBUS RTU is an industry-recognized
standard for communications and is sup-
Fig. 5/46 System solution/communication
13 device manufacturers.
14
15
Typical connections
Typical connections
CT connections 1
Fig. 5/47 Standard
Phase current measured
Ground current measured
(e. g. core balance CT) 2
Fig. 5/48 Standard connection
Connection of 3 CTs with
residual connection for
neutral fault
3
Fig. 5/49 Isolated networks only
5
Fig. 5/47 Connection of 4 CTs with measurement of the earth (ground) current
Fig. 5/48 Connection of 3 CTs with residual connection for neutral fault 10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 5/49 Connection of 2 CTs only for isolated or resonant-earthed (grounded) power systems
15
Typical connections
7SJ6022/7SJ6026
4 Fig. 5/50
Connection of 3 CTs with measurement
of the sensitive earth (ground) current
10 Fig. 5/51
Connection of 3 CTs with directional
Fig. 5/52
Connection of 3 CTs and 1 VT with
earth (ground)-fault detection measurement of the earth (ground)
current and one phase voltage
11
12
13
14
15 Fig. 5/53 Example of typical wiring

Technical data
General unit data Alarm relays 1

Contacts per relay 1 NO/NC (form A/B)
CT circuits
Rated current IN 1 or 5 A (settable)
Switching capacity
Make
1
1000 W/VA
Option: sensitive ground-fault CT IEE < 1.6 A or < 8 A (settable) Break 30 VA, 40 W resistive
Rated frequency fN 50/60 Hz (selectable) 25 VA with L/R 50 ms
Power consumption
Current input at IN = 1 A < 0.1 VA
Switching voltage
Permissible current
250 V
5 A continuous
2
at IN = 5 A < 0.3 VA
For sensitive ground-fault Approx. 0.05 VA Binary inputs
detection at 1 A Number 3 (congurable)
Overload capability
Thermal (r.m.s)
100 x IN for 1 s
30 x IN for 10 s
Operating voltage DC 24 to 250 V 3
4 x IN continuous Current consumption, indepen- Approx. 1.8 mA
Dynamic (pulse current) 250 x IN one half cycle dent of operating voltage
Overload capability if equipped Pickup threshold, selectable via

with sensitive ground-fault
current transformer
bridges
Rated aux. voltage
4
Thermal (r.m.s.) 300 A for 1 s DC 24/48/60/110 V Vpickup DC 19 V
100 A for 10 s DC 110/125/220/250 V Vpickup DC 88 V
15 A continuous Permissible maximum voltage DC 300 V
Dynamic (impulse current) 750 A (half cycle) Connection (with screws) 5
Voltage transformer Current terminals
Rated voltage VN 100 to 125 V Connection ring cable lugs Wmax = 11 mm, d1 = 5 mm
Power consumption at VN = 100 V < 0.3 VA per phase Wire size 2.0 5.3 mm2 (AWG 14-10)
Overload capability in voltage Direct connection Solid conductor, exible lead, 6
path (phase-neutral voltage) connector sleeve
Thermal (r.m.s.) 230 V continuous Wire size 2.0 5.3 mm2 (AWG 14-10)
Power supply Voltage terminals
Power supply via integrated
DC/DC converter
Connection ring cable lugs
Wire size
Wmax = 10 mm, d1 = 4 mm
0.5 3.3 mm2 (AWG 20-12)
7
Rated auxiliary voltage Vaux / DC 24/48 V/ 20 % Direct connection Solid conductor, exible lead,
permissible variations DC 60/110 V/ 20 % connector sleeve
0.5 3.3 mm2 (AWG 20-12)
DC 110/125/220/250 V/ 20 %
AC 115 V/- 20 %, + 15 %
Wire size
Unit design
8
AC 230 V/- 20 %, + 15 %
Housing 7XP20 For dimensions please refer
Superimposed AC voltage, peak- to dimension drawings, part 14
to-peak
At rated voltage
At limits of admissible voltage
12 %
6%
Degree of protection
acc. to EN 60529 9
For the device
Power consumption Approx. 3 to 6 W, depending on in surface-mounting housing IP 51
operational status and selected in ush-mounting housing
auxiliary voltage
Bridging time during failure/ 50 ms at Vaux AC/DC 110 V
front
rear
IP 51
IP 20 10
short-circuit of auxiliary voltage 20 ms at Vaux DC 24 V For personal safety IP 2x with closed protection cover
Binary outputs Weight
Trip relays 4 (congurable) Flush mounting/ Approx. 4 kg
Contacts per relay 1 NO/form A
cubicle mounting
11
(Two contacts changeable to
NC/form B, via jumpers)
Switching capacity Serial interfaces
Make
Break
1000 W/VA
30 VA, 40 W resistive
Operating interface 12
25 VA with L/R 50 ms Connection At front side, non-isolated, RS232,
9-pin subminiature connector
Switching voltage 250 V
Operation With DIGSI 4.3 or higher
Permissible current
Continuous
For 0.5 s
5A
30 A
Transmission speed As delivered 19200 baud, parity: 8E1
Min. 1200 baud
13
Max. 19200 baud
Permissible total current
For common potential: Distance 15 m
Continuous
For 0.5 s
5A
30 A 14
15
Technical data
System interface (bottom of unit) System interface (bottom of unit), contd
1 IEC60870-5- 103 protocol

Connection Isolated interface for data trans-
MODBUS RTU/ASCII
Isolated interface for data transfer
mission to a control center
Transmission rate Min. 1200 baud, max. 19200 baud Transmission rate Up to 19200 baud
As delivered 9600 baud
2 RS232/RS485 acc. to ordered version
Transmission reliability
RS485
Hamming distance d = 4
Connection 9-pin subminiature connector on the Connection 9-pin subminiature connector

bottom part of the housing
Distance Max. 1 km/3300 ft max. 32 units
Test voltage AC 500 V
3 RS232 maximum distance 15 m Test voltage
recommended
AC 500 V against ground
RS485 maximum distance 1000 m Fiber-optic
Fiber-optic Connection ber-optic cable Integrated ST connector for ber
4 Connector type ST connector on the bottom part of

the housing Optical wavelength
optic connection
820 nm
Optical wavelength = 820 nm Laser class 1 acc. to EN 60825-1-2 For glass ber 50/125 m
Laser class 1 acc. to For glass ber 50/125 m or 62.5/125 m
EN 60825-1/-2 or 62.5/125 m
5 Permissible path attenuation Max. 8 dB, for glass ber 62.5/125 m
Permissible path attenuation
Distance
Max. 8 dB, for glass ber 62.5/125 m
Max. 1.5 km/0.9 miles
Bridgeable distance Max. 1.5 km Idle state of interface Light off
No character position Selectable, setting as supplied
light off
6 PROFIBUS-DP
Electrical tests
Specications
Isolated interface for data transfer
to a control center Standards IEC 60255-5; ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0
Transmission rate Up to 1.5 Mbaud Insulation tests
7 Transmission reliability Hamming distance d = 4 High-voltage tests (routine test)
all circuits except for auxiliary
2.5 kV (r.m.s. value), 50 Hz
RS485
voltage, binary inputs and
Connection 9-pin subminiature connector communication interfaces
8 Distance 1000 m/3300 ft 93.75 kbaud;

500 m/1500 ft 187.5 kbaud;
High-voltage tests (routine test)
Auxiliary voltage and binary
DC 3.5 kV
200 m/600 ft 1.5 Mbaud inputs

Test voltage AC 500 V against ground High-voltage tests (routine test) 500 V (r.m.s. value); 50 Hz
Fiber optic only isolated communication
9 Connection ber-optic cable Integrated ST connector for ber
interfaces
Impulse voltage tests (type test) 5 kV (peak value), 1.2/50 ps, 0.5 J,
optic connection
all circuits, except 3 positive and 3 negative impulses
Optical wavelength = 820 nm communication interfaces at intervals of 5 s
Laser class 1 acc. to EN 60825-1-2 For glass ber 50/125 m
10 Permissible path attenuation
or 62.5/125 m
EMC tests for interference immunity ; type tests
Standards IEC 60255-6; IEC 60255-22,
(product standard)
Distance 500 kB/s 1.6 km/0.99 miles EN 50082-2 (generic standard)
1500 kB/s 530 m/0.33 miles DIN 57435 Part 303
11 Idle state of interface Settable, setting as supplied light off High-frequency test
2.5 kV (peak value); 1 MHz,
= 15 ms; 400 surges per s;
and VDE 0435 Part 303, class III test duration 2 s; Ri = 200
Electrostatic discharge 8 kV contact discharge,
12 IEC 60255-22-2 class IV

EN 61000-4-2, class IV
15 kV air gap discharge,
both polarities, 150 pF; Ri = 330
Irradiation with radio-frequency 10 V/m, 27 to 500 MHz
eld, non-modulated
IEC 60255-22-3 (Report), class III
13 Irradiation with radio-frequency
10 V/m, 80 to 1000 MHz,
AM 80 %; 1 kHz
IEC 61000-4-3, class III duration > 10 s
Irradiation with radio-frequency 10 V/m, 900 MHz,
14 eld, pulse-modulated repetition frequency 200 Hz

IEC 61000-4-3/ENV 50204, class III duty cycle 50 % PM
15
Technical data
EMC tests for interference immunity; type tests, (contd) Mechanical stress tests
Fast transients interference/bursts 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz;
IEC 60255-22-4 and
burst length = 15 ms;
repetition rate 300 ms;
Vibration, shock and seismic vibration
During operation 1
both polarities; Ri = 50 ; Standards Acc. to IEC 60255-21
test duration 1 min and IEC 60068-2
Surge voltage IEC 61000-4-5,
class III
Pulse: 1.2/50 s
From circuit to circuit (common
Vibration
IEC 60255-21-1, class I
IEC 60068-2-6
Sinusoidal
10 to 60 Hz: 0.035 mm amplitude;
2
Auxiliary voltage mode): 2 kV, 12 , 9 F;
Across contacts (diff. mode): Sweep rate 1 octave/min
1 kV, 2 W, 18 F 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes
Measuring inputs,
binary inputs/outputs
From circuit to circuit (common
mode): 2 kV, 42 , 0.5 F;
Shock
IEC 60255-21-2, class I
Half-sine,
acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms, 3
Across contacts (diff. mode): 3 shocks in each direction of
1 kV, 42 W, 0.5 F 3 orthogonal axes
Conducted RF 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; Seismic vibration Sinusoidal
amplitude-modulated
AM 80 %; 1 kHz IEC 60255-21-3, class I
IEC 60068-3-3
(horizontal axis)
4
Power frequency magnetic eld 30 A/m continuous
(vertical axis)
IEC 61000-4-8, class IV 300 A/m for 3 s, 50 Hz
IEC 60255-6
0.5 mT, 50 Hz
2.5 to 3 kV (peak value),
(horizontal axis)
5
capability 1 to 1.5 MHz damped wave; (vertical axis)
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 50 surges per s; duration 2 s Sweep rate 1 octave/min
Ri = 150 to 200 ; 1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes
capability
4 to 5 kV, 10/150 ns,
50 surges per s, both polarities;
During transportation 6
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 duration 2 s, Ri = 80 ; Standards Acc. to IEC 60255-21
and IEC 60068-2
Radiated electromagnetic 35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz;
interference amplitude and pulse-modulated Vibration Sinusoidal
ANSI/IEEE Std C37.90.2 IEC 60255-21-1, class II
IEC 60068-2-6
7
Damped wave 2.5 kV (peak value), Sweep rate 1 octave/min
IEC 60694/ IEC 61000-4-12 polarity alternating 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes
100 kHz, 1 MHz, 10 and 50 MHz,
Shock Half-sine,
Ri = 200 ;
EMC tests interference emission; type tests
IEC 60255-21-2, class I
IEC 60068-2-27
acceleration 15 g, duration 11 ms;
3 shocks in each direction of
8
Standard EN 50081-* (generic specication) 3 orthogonal axes
Conducted interferences, 150 kHz to 30 MHz Continuous shock Half-sine,
only auxiliary voltage
IEC/CISPR 22
limit class B IEC 60255-21-2, class I
IEC 60068-2-29
acceleration 10 g, duration 16 ms,
1000 shocks in each direction of 9
3 orthogonal axes
Radio interference eld strength 30 to 1000 MHz
IEC/CISPR 22 limit class B
Harmonic currents on incoming Unit belongs to class D
lines of system at AC 230 V
IEC 61000-3-2
(applies only to units with > 50 VA
power consumption)
Climatic stress tests
Temperatures 10
Voltage uctuation and icker Limit values are adhered to
During operation 5 C to +55 C / 23 F to 131 F,
range on incoming lines of
(> 55 C decreased display contrast)
system at AC 230 V
IEC 61000-3-3 Limit temperature
During operation 20 C to +70 C / 4 F to 158 F
11
During storage 25 C to +55 C / 13 F to 131 F
During transport 25 C to +70 C / 13 F to 158 F
(Storage and transport
with standard works packaging) 12
Humidity
Permissible humidity stress: Annual average: 75 % relative
It is recommended to arrange the humidity, on 56 days per year 95 %
units in such a way that they are
not exposed to direct sunlight or
relative humidity, condensation not
permissible!
13
pronounced temperature changes
that ould cause condensation.
14
15
Technical data
Functions Inverse-time overcurrent protection (ANSI 51/51N)
1 Denite-time overcurrent protection (ANSI 50, 50N)

Setting ranges/steps
Low-set overcurrent element
Phase Ip I/IN = 0.1 to 4 (steps 0.1)
Low-set overcurrent element
Phase I> I/IN = 0.1 to 25 (steps 0.1); or Ground IEp I/IN = 0.05 to 4 (steps 0.01)
Ground IE> I/IN = 0.05 to 25 (steps 0.01); or Time multiplier for Ip, IEp
2 High-set overcurrent element

Phase I>> I/IN = 0.1 to 25 (steps 0.1); or
(IEC charac.)
Time multiplier for Ip, IEp
Tp = 0.05 to 3.2 s (steps 0.01 s)
Ground IE>> I/IN = 0.05 to 25 (steps 0.01); or (ANSI charac.) D = 0.5 to 15 s (steps 0.1 s)
Instantaneous tripping High-set overcurrent element
Phase I>>> I/IN = 0.3 to 12.5 (steps 0.1); or Phase I>> I/IN = 0.1 to 25 (steps 0.1); or
3 Delay times T for I>, IE>, I>>, Ground IE>> I/IN = 0.05 to 25 (steps 0.01); or
IE>> and I>>> 0 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s) Instantaneous tripping
The set times are pure delay Phase I>>> I/IN = 0.3 to 12.5 (steps 0.1); or
times Delay time TI>> 0 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s)
4 Pickup times I>, I>>, IE>, IE>>
At 2 x setting value, Approx. 25 ms
Tripping time characteristic
acc. to IEC See page 5/33
without meas. repetition
At 2 x setting value, Approx. 35 ms
Reset threshold,
with meas. repetition
5 Pickup times for I>>> Approx. 15 ms
alternatively disk emulation
Dropout time
Approx. 1.03 x Ip
at 2 x setting value
50 Hz Approx. 50 ms
Reset times I>, I>>, IE>, IE>> Approx. 40 ms 60 Hz Approx. 60 ms
Reset time I>>> Approx. 50 ms
Tolerances
6 Reset ratios
Overshot time
Approx. 0.95
Approx. 55 ms
Pickup values 5 % of setting value or 5 % of
rated value
Tolerances Timing period for 2 I/Ip 20 5 % of theoretical value
Pickup values I>, I>>, I>>>, 5 % of setting value or 5 % of and 0.5 I/Ip 24 2 % current tolerance;
7 IE>, IE>>
Delay times T
rated value
1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Inuencing variables
at least 30 ms
Inuencing variables
Auxiliary voltage, range:
0.8 Vaux/VauxN 1.2 1%
8 Temperature, range:
- 5 C amb 40 C / 0.5 %/10 K
Temperature, range:
-5 C amb 40 C / 0.5 %/10 K
-23 F amb 104 F
23 F amb 104 F
Frequency, range:
Frequency, range
0.95 f/fN 1.05 8 %, referred to theoretical
9 0.98 f/fN 1.02
0.95 f/fN 1.05
1.5 %
2.5 %
Tripping characteristic
time value
Harmonics
acc. to ANSI/IEEE See page 5/33
Up to 10 % of 3rd harmonic 1%
Up to 10 % of 5th harmonic 1% Pickup threshold Approx. 1.06 x Ip
10 Dropout threshold,
Approx. 1.03 x Ip
Tolerances
Pickup threshold 5 % of setting value or 5 % of
11 Timing period for 2 I/Ip 20

rated value
5 % of theoretical value
and 0.5 I/Ip 24 2 % current tolerance; at least
30 ms
Inuencing variables
12 Auxiliary voltage, range:
Temperature, range:
-5 C amb 40 C / 0.5 % /10 K
13 23 F amb 104 F
Frequency, range:
0.95 f/fN 1.05 8 %, referred to theoretical
time value
14
15
Technical data
(Sensitive) ground-fault protection (directional/non-directional) Inverse-time ground-fault protection (ANSI 51Ns), contd
Denite-time ground-fault protection (ANSI 50Ns)
Temperature, range:
-5 C amb 40 C /
23 F amb 104 F
0.5 %/10 K 1
Low-set element IEE> I/IEEN = 0.003 to 1.5 (steps 0.001);
or (deactivated) Frequency, range: 8 %, referred to theoretical
High-set element IEE>> I/IEEN = 0.003 to 1.5 (steps 0.001); 0.95 f/fN 1.05 time value
or (deactivated)
Delay times T for IEE> and IEE>> 0 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s)
Tripping characteristic acc. to
ANSI/IEEE See page 5/33
2
Pickup times IEE>, IEE>> Pickup threshold Approx. 1.06 x IEEp
At 2 x setting value Approx. 35 ms Dropout threshold, Approx. 1.03 x IEEp

without meas. repetition
At 2 x setting value Approx. 55 ms
Tolerances
3
with meas. repetition Pickup threshold 5 % of setting value or 5 % of
rated value
Reset times IEE>, IEE>>
Timing period for 2 I/IEEp 20 5 % of theoretical value
At 50 Hz
At 60 Hz
Approx. 65 ms
Approx. 95 ms and 0.5 I/IEEN 24 2 % current tolerance; at least
30 ms
4
Reset ratios Approx. 0.95
Inuencing variables
Overshot time Approx. 55 ms Auxiliary voltage, range:
Tolerances
Pickup values IEE>, IEE>> 5 % of setting value or 5 % of
0.8 Vaux/VauxN 1.2
Temperature, range:
1%
5
rated value -5 C amb 40 C / 0.5 %/10 K
Delay times T 1 % of setting value or 10 ms 23 F amb 104 F
Frequency, range: 8 %, referred to theoretical
Inuencing variables
0.95 f/fN 1.05
Direction detection (ANSI 67Ns)
time value 6
Temperature, range: Direction measurement IE, VE (measured)
- 5 C amb 40 C / 0.5 %/10 K Measuring principle Active/reactive measurement
23 F amb 104 F
Frequency, ranges:
Measuring enable
For sensitive input I/IEEN = 0.003 to 1.2
7
0.98 f/fN 1.02 1.5 % (in steps of 0.001 I/IEEN)
0.95 f/fN 1.05 2.5 %
Reset ratio Approx. 0.8
Harmonics
Measuring method
Direction vector
cos and sin
-45 to +45 (in steps of 0.1 )
8
Dropout delay TReset Delay 1 to 60 s (steps 1 s)
Inverse-time ground-fault protection (ANSI 51Ns)
Angle correction for cable In 2 operating points F1 and F2
Low-set element IEEp I/IEEN = 0.003 to 1.4 (steps 0.001)
converter
(for resonant-grounded system) 9
Time multiplier for IEEp Tp = 0.05 to 3.2 s (steps 0.01 s) Angle correction F1, F2 0 to 5 (in steps of 0.1 )
(IEC characteristic)
Current values I1, I2
Time multiplier for IEEp D = 0.5 to 15 s (steps 0.1 s) For sensitive input I/IEEN = 0.003 to 1.6
(ANSI characteristic)
High-set element IEE>> I/IEEN = 0.003 to 1.5 (steps 0.001);
(in steps of 0.001 I/IEEN) 10
Measuring tolerance 2 % of the setting value or 1 mA
or (deactivated) acc. to DIN 57435
Delay time T for IEE>> 0 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s) Angle tolerance 3
acc. to IEC See page 5/33
Displacement voltage (ANSI 64) 11
Displacement voltage, measured VE >/VN = 0.02 to 1.3 (steps 0.001)
Pickup threshold Approx. 1.1 x IEEp
Measuring time Approx. 60 ms
Reset threshold Approx. 1.03 x IEEp
Pickup delay time 0.04 to 320 s or (steps 0.01 s)
Dropout time Time delay 0.1 to 40000 s or (steps 0.01 s) 12
50 Hz Approx. 50 ms Dropout ratio 0.95 or (pickup value - 0.6 V)
60 Hz Approx. 60 ms Measuring tolerance
Tolerances
Pickup values 5 % of setting value or 5 % of rated
value
VE (measured)
Operating time tolerances
3 % of setting value, or 0.3 V
1 % of setting value, or 10 ms 13
Timing period for 2 I/IEEp 20 5 % of theoretical value The set times are pure delay times
and 0.5 I/IEEN 24 2 % current tolerance;
at least 30 ms
Inuencing variables 14
15
Technical data
Thermal overload protection with memory (ANSI 49) with preload Negative-sequence protection (ANSI 46)
1 Setting ranges
Factor k according to IEC 60255-8 0.40 to 2 (steps 0.01)
Tripping stages I2> and I2>> 8 to 80 % to IN (steps 1 %)
Thermal time constant th 1 to 999.9 min (steps 0.1 min) Delay times T (I2>), T (I2>>) 0 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s)
Thermal warning stage 50 to 99 % referred to trip Lower function limit At least one phase current 0.1 x IN
alarm/trip temperature rise (steps 1 %)
2 Prolongation factor at motor 1 to 10 (steps 0.01)
Pickup times
Tripping stages I2> and I2>>
at fN = 50 Hz
Approx. 60 ms
at fN = 60 Hz
Approx. 75 ms
stand-still k But with currents I/IN > 1.5
Reset ratios (overcurrent case) or negative-
/trip Reset below 0.99 alarm sequence current < (set value
3 /alarm
Tolerances
Approx. 0.99 +0.1 x IN)
Reset times
Approx. 200 ms Approx. 310 ms
Referring to k IN 5% Tripping stages I2> and I2>> Approx. 35 ms Approx. 42 ms

(class 5 % acc. to IEC 60255-8)
Reset ratios
4 Referring to trip time 5%2s
(class 5 % acc. to IEC 60255-8) Tripping stages I2> and I2>>
Tolerances
Approx. 0.9 to 0.01 x IN
Inuencing variables
Auxiliary DC voltage, range Pickup values I2>, I2>>
0.8 Vaux/VauxN 1.2 1% Current I/IN 1.5 1 % of IN 5 % of set value
5 Temperature, range
- 5 C amb + 40 C / 0.5 %/10 K
Current I/IN > 1.5 5 % of IN 5 % of set value
Delay times T (I2>) and T (I2>>) 1 % but min. 10 ms
23 F amb 104 F Inuencing variables
Frequency, range Auxiliary DC voltage, range
6 0.95 f/fN 1.05 1%
Thermal overload protection without memory (ANSI 49) without preload
0.8 Vaux/VauxN 1.2
Temperature, range
1%
Setting ranges 5 C amb +40 C / 0.5 %/10 K

23 F amb 104 F
Pickup value IL/IN = 0.4 to 4 (steps 0.1)
7 Time multiplier tL (= t6 -time)
Reset ratio I/IL
1 to 120 s (steps 0.1 s)
Approx. 0.94
Frequency, range
0.98 f/fN 1.02 1 % of IN
0.95 f/fN 1.05 5 % of IN
Tolerances Auto-reclosure (ANSI 79)
Referring to pickup 5 % of setting value or 5 % Number of possible shots 1 to 9, congurable
8 threshold 1.1 IL
Referring to trip time
of rated value
5%2s
Auto-reclosure modes 3-pole
Dead times for 1st and any 0.05 s to 1800 s (steps 0.01 s)
Inuencing variables further shot
Auxiliary DC voltage, range Blocking time after successful AR 0.05 s to 320 s (steps 0.01 s)
9 0.8 Vaux/VauxN 1.2
Temperature, range
1%
Lock-out time after unsuccessful AR 0.05 s to 320 s (steps 0.01 s)
- 5 C amb + 40 C / 0.5 %/10 K Reclaim time after manual close 0.50 s to 320 s (steps 0.01 s)
23 F amb 104 F Duration of reclose command 0.01 s to 60 s (steps 0.01 s)
10 Frequency, range
0.95 f/fN 1.05 1%
Trip circuit supervision With one or two binary inputs
Breaker failure protection Circuit-breaker trip test Trip/reclosure cycle
Setting ranges/steps Control
11 Pickup of current element

Delay time
CB I>/IN = 0.04 to 1.0 (steps 0.01)
0.06 to 60 s or (steps 0.01 s)
Number of devices
Evaluation of breaker contact
1
None
Pickup times (with internal start) is contained in the delay time
(via control) is contained in the delay time
(with external start) is contained in the delay time
12 Dropout time Approx. 25 ms
Tolerances
Pickup value 2 % of setting value
Delay time 1 % or 20 ms
13
14
15
Technical data
Motor protection Thermo-box (instead of system interface) (ANSI 38)

Rated motor current/
transformer rated current Imotor/IN = 0.2 to 1.2
Number of temperature sensors
Type of measuring
Max. 6
Pt 100 or Ni 100 or Ni 120 1
(in steps of 0.1) Installation drawing Oil or Environment or Stator
or Bearing or Other
Start-up current of the motor Istart/Imotor = 0.4 to 20
Limit values for indications
(in steps of 0.1)
Permissible start-up time tstart max 1 to 360 s (in steps of 0.1 s)
For each measuring detector
Warning temperature -50 C to 250 C (in steps of 1 C)
2
Starting time supervision (ANSI 48) (stage 1) -58 F to 482 F (in steps of 1 F)
or (no indication)
Pickup threshold Ipickup/Imotor = 0.4 to 20
(in steps of 0.1)
Alarm temperature
(stage 2)
-50 C to 250 C (in steps of 1 C)
-58 F to 482 F (in steps of 1 F) 3
or (no indication)
Tripping time characteristic I 2
tTRIP = start t start max
I mrs
For Irms > Ipickup
Operational measured values 4
Istart = Start-up current of the For currents IL1, IL2, IL3, IE
motor in A (Amps) primary or in % IN
Range 10 to 240 % IN
Irms
Ipickup
= Current actually owing
= Pickup threshold, from
Tolerance
For voltages
3 % of measured value
VL1-E, in kV primary or in %
5
which the motor start-up is
detected
Range 10 to 120 % of VN
Tolerance 3 % of measured value
tstart max = Maximum permissible
tTRIP
starting time
= Tripping time
For sensitive ground-current
detection
IEE, IEEac, IEEreac
(r.m.s., active and reactive current) 6
in A (kA) primary, or in %
Reset ratio Irms/Ipickup Approx. 0.94 Range 0 to 160 % IEEN
Tolerances Tolerance 3 % of measured value
Pickup values 5 % of setting value or 5 % rated
value
Power/work 7
S Apparent power in kVA, MVA, GVA
Delay time 5 % or 330 ms S/VA (apparent power) For V/VN, I/IN = 50 to 120 %
typically < 6 %
Restart inhibit for motors (ANSI 66/86)
P Active power,
P/Watts (active power)
in kW, MW, GW
For |cos | = 0.707 to 1, typically
8
Rotor temperature compen- 0 to 60 min (in steps of 0.1min)
sation time TCOMP < 6 %, for V/VN, I/IN = 50 to 120 %
Minimum restart inhibit 0.2 to 120 min (in steps of 0.1 min) Q Reactive power, In kvar, Mvar, Gvar
time Trestart
Maximum permissible number 1 to 4 (in steps of 1)
Q/Var (reactive power) For |sin | = 0.707 to 1, typically
< 6 %, for V/VN, I/IN = 50 to 120 %
9
of warm starts nw cos , total and phase-selective -1 to +1
Difference between cold and 1 to 2 (in steps of 1) Power factor cos For |cos | = 0.707 to 1, typically
warm start nc - nw
Extension factor for cooling 1 to 10 (in steps of 0.1) Metering
<5%
10
simulation of the rotor
+ Wp kWh In kWh, MWh, GWh forward
(running and stop)
nc 1 - Wp kWh In kWh reverse
Restarting limit restart = rot max perm
+ Wq kvarh
restart = Temperature limit

nc
- Wq kvarh
In kvarh inductive
In kvarh, Mvarh, Gvarh capacitive 11
Long-term mean values
below which restarting
is possible Mean values 15, 30, 60 minutes mean values
rot max perm = Maximum permissible
rotor overtemperature
IL1 dmd
IL2 dmd
IL3 dmd
in A, kA
in A, kA
in A, kA
Pdmd
Qdmd
in kW
in kvar 12
(= 100 % in operatio- Sdmd in kVA
nal measured value
rot/rot trip)
nc = Number of permissible
start-ups from cold
13
state
Threshold
Delay time for IL<
IL < /IN = 0.1 to 4 (in steps of 0.01)
0 to 320 s (in steps of 0.1 s)
14
15
Technical data
Min/max. LOG (memory) CE conformity
1 Measured values
Reset automatic
With date and time
Time of day (settable in minutes)
Time range (settable in days;
1 to 365, ) 2004/108/EG previous 89/336/EEC) and electrical equipment designed
for use within certain voltage limits (Council Directive 2006/95/EG
Reset manual Via binary input previous 73/23/EEC).
2 Via keyboard
Via communication This unit conforms to the international standard IEC 60255, and the
German standard DIN 57435/Part 303 (corresponding to VDE 0435/
Min./max. values of primary IL1; IL2; IL3 Part 303).
currents
The unit has been developed and manufactured for
3 Min./max. values of primary
voltages
VL1-E application in an industrial environment according to the EMC
standards.
Min./max. values of power S Apparent Power This conformity is the result of a test that was performed by Siemens AG
P Active power in accordance with Article 10 of the Council Directive complying
Q Reactive power with the generic standards EN 50081-2 and EN 50082-2 for the EMC
4 Min./max. values of primary
Power factor cos Directive and standard EN 60255-6 for the low-voltage Directive.
currents mean values IL1dmd, IL2dmd, IL3dmd

Min./max. values of power mean
5 value
Fault event log
Pdmd, Qdmd, Sdmd
Storage Storage of the last 8 faults

Time assignment
6 Resolution for operationa

indications
1s
Resolution for fault event 1 ms

indications
7 Max. time deviation

Fault recording
0.01 %
Storage Storage of max. 8 fault events

Total storage time (fault detection Max. 5 s, selectable pre-trigger and
8 or trip command = 0 ms)

Max. storage period per fault
post-fault time
event Tmax 0.30 s to 5 s (steps 0.01 s)

Pre-trigger time Tpre 0.05 s to 0.50 s (steps 0.01 s)
9 Post-fault time Tpost

Sampling rate at 50 Hz
0.05 s to 0.50 s (steps 0.01 s)
1 instantaneous value per ms
Sampling rate at 60 Hz 1 instantaneous value per 0.83 ms
Backup battery Lithium battery 3 V/1 Ah,
type CR AA
10 Self-discharge time > 5 years
Battery fault battery charge
warning
11
12
13
14
15

7SJ602 multifunction overcurrent and motor protection relay
Measuring inputs (4 x I), default settings

7SJ602 - - -
1
IN = 1A1), 15th position only with A 1
IN = 5A1), 15th position only with A 5
Measuring inputs (1 x V, 3 x I), default settings See next 2

Iph = 1A1), Ie = sensitive (IEE = 0.003 to 1.5 A), page
15th position only with B and J 2

Iph = 5A1), Ie = sensitive (IEE = 0.015 to 7.5 A),
15th position only with B and J 6
3
Auxiliary voltage
DC 24/48 V, binary input threshold DC 19 V 2
DC 60/110 V 2), binary input threshold DC19 V 3) 4 4
DC 110/125/220/250 V, AC 115/230 V 2) binary input threshold 88 V3) 5
Unit design
Surface-mounting housing, terminals on top and bottom
Flush-mounting housing, screw-type terminals
B
E
5
Region-specic default and language settings
Region World, 50/60 Hz, ANSI/IEC characteristic,
languages: English, German, French, Spanish, Russian B
6
System port (on bottom of unit)
No system port 0
IEC 60870-5-103, electrical RS232 1 7
IEC 60870-5-103, electrical RS485 2
IEC 60870-5-103, optical 820 nm, ST connector 3
Temperature monitoring box, electrical RS4854) 8
PROFIBUS-DP Slave, electrical RS485 9 L 0 A 8
PROFIBUS-DP Slave, optical 820 nm, double ring, ST connector 9 L 0 B
MODBUS, electrical RS485 9 L 0 D
MODBUS, optical 820 nm, ST connector
Command (without process check back signal)

9 L 0 E
9
Without command 0
With command 1
Measuring / fault recording 10

Oscillographic fault recording 1
Oscillographic fault recording, slave pointer,mean values, min./max. values 3
11
12
1) Rated current can be selected by

13
means of jumpers.
2) Transition between the two auxiliary
voltage ranges can be selected by
means of jumpers. 14
3) The binary input thresholds can be
selected in two stages by means of
jumpers.
4) Temperature monitoring box
7XV5662- AD10, refer to part 13. 15
ANSI No. Description Order No.
1 7SJ602 multifunction overcurrent and motor protection relay

Basic version
7SJ602 - -
50/51 Overcurrent protection TOC phase I>, I>>, I>>>, Ip, reverse interlocking
50N/51N Earth/ground-fault protection TOC ground/earth IE>, IE>>, IEp
49 Thermal overload protection
2 74TC
50BF
Trip-circuit supervision
Circuit-breaker failure protection
Cold load pickup
46 Negative-sequence system overcurrent protection F A 1)
3 50/51
Basic version + directional earth/ground-fault detection
Overcurrent protection TOC phase I>, I>>, I>>>, Ip, reverse interlocking
67Ns Directional sensitive earth/ground-fault detection IEE>, IEE>>, IEp
64 Sensitive ground-fault protection
4 74TC
50BF
Trip-circuit supervision
Circuit-breaker failure protection
Cold load pickup
46 Negative-sequence system overcurrent protection F B 2)
5 50/51
Basic version + sensitive earth/ground-fault detection + measuring
50Ns/51Ns Sensitive earth/ground-fault detection IEE>, IEE>>, IEp
74TC Trip-circuit supervision
6 50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection
Cold load pickup
46 Negative-sequence system overcurrent protection
Voltage and power measuring F J 2)
Basic version + motor protection

7 50/51 Overcurrent protection TOC phase I>, I>>, I>>>, Ip, reverse interlocking
50N/51N Earth/ground-fault protection TOC ground/earth IE>, IE>>, IEp
74TC Trip circuit supervision
8 50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection

Cold load pickup
48 Start-time supervision
37 Undercurrent/loss of load monitoring
9 66/86 Restart inhibit

Basic version + directional ground/earth fault protection + motor protection
H A 1)
50/51 Overcurrent protection TOC phase I>, I>>, I>>>, Ip, reverse interlocking
67Ns Sensitive ground fault detection for sytems with resonant or isolated IEE>, IEE>>, IEp
10 64
49
74TC
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection
Cold load pickup
11 48
37
Start-time supervision
Undercurrent/loss of load monitoring
66/86 Restart inhibit H B 2)
Basic version + sensitive ground/earth-fault detection + measuring + motor protection

12 50/51
50Ns/51Ns
Sensitive ground/earth-fault detection IEE>, IEE>>, IEp
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection
13 46
Cold load pickup
Negative-sequence system overcurrent protection
Voltage and power measuring
48 Start-time supervision
37 Undercurrent/loss of load monitoring
14 66/86 Restart inhibit H J 2)
Auto-reclosure (ARC)
Without auto-reclosure ARC 0
79 With auto-reclosure ARC
15 1) Only with position 7 = 1 or 5 2) Only with position 7 = 2 or 6
1

DIGSI 4
Software for conguration and operation of Siemens protection
1
units running under MS Windows 2000/XP Professional Edition,
device templates, Comtrade Viewer, electronic manual included
as well as Getting started manual on paper, connecting cables
(copper) 2
Basis
Full version with license for 10 computers, on CD-ROM
(authorization by serial number) 7XS5400-0AA00
Professional 3
DIGSI 4 Basis and additionally SIGRA (fault record analysis),
CFC Editor (logic editor), Display Editor (editor for default and
control displays) and DIGSI 4 Remote (remote operation) 7XS5402-0AA00
SIGRA 4 4
(generally contained in DIGSI Professional, but can be ordered
additionally). Software for graphic visualization, analysis and
evaluation of fault records.
Can also be used for fault records of devices of other manu-
facturers (Comtrade format). Running under MS Windows. 5
Incl. templates, electronic manual with license for 10 PCs on
CD-ROM.
Authorization by serial number. 7XS5410-0AA00
Temperature monitoring box 6

AC/DC 24 to 60 V 7XV5662-2AD10
AC/DC 90 to 240 V 7XV5662-5AD10
Connecting cable
(contained in DIGSI 4, but can be ordered additionally)
7
Cable between PC/notebook (9-pin con.) and protection unit
(9-pin connector) 7XV5100-4
Cable between temperature monitoring box and

SIPROTEC 4 unit
8
- length 5 m / 16.4 ft 7XV5103-7AA05
- length 25 m / 82 ft 7XV5103-7AA25
- length 50 m / 164 ft
Manual for 7SJ602

7XV5103-7AA50
9
English please visit www.siemens.com/siprotec
Spanish please visit www.siemens.com/siprotec
10
Accessories Description Order No. Size of Supplier
package
11
Terminal safety cover
LSP2093-afp.eps
Voltage/current terminal 18-pole C73334-A1-C31-1 1 Siemens
Voltage/current terminal 8-pole C73334-A1-C32-1 1 Siemens

12
Short-circuit links
Short-circuit links
For current terminals C73334-A1-C33-1 1 Siemens
for current terminals
For other terminals C73334-A1-C34-1 1 Siemens
Mounting rail for 19" rack C73165-A63-D200-1 1 Siemens 13

LSP2289-afp.eps
Your local Siemens representative

can inform you on local suppliers.
Mounting rail
14
15
Connection diagram
8
Fig. 5/54 Connection diagram according to IEC standard
10
11
12
13
14
15
Connection diagram
8
Fig. 5/55 Connection diagram according to IEC standard
10
11
12
13
14
15
10
11
12
13
14
15
SIPV6_116.eps
LSP2299-afpen.eps
4
Fig. 5/56 SIPROTEC 4 7SJ61 multifunction protection relay with text (left) and graphic display 5
Description Breaker failure protection
The SIPROTEC 4 7SJ61 relays can be used for line protection of

Auto-reclosure
6
high and medium voltage networks with earthed (grounded),
Lockout
low-resistance grounded, isolated or compensated neutral
point. When protecting motors, the SIPROTEC 4 7SJ61 is suitable
for asynchronous machines of all sizes. The relay performs all
Control functions/programmable logic 7
Commands for control of a circuit-breaker and of isolators
functions of backup protection supplementary to transformer
differential protection. Position of switching elements is shown on the graphic display
The relay provides control of the circuit-breaker, further

switching devices and automation functions. The integrated pro-
Control via keyboard, binary inputs, DIGSI 4 or SCADA system
User-dened logic with CFC (e.g. interlocking)
8
grammable logic (CFC) allows the user to implement their own
functions, e. g. for the automation of switchgear (interlocking).
The user is also allowed to generate user-dened indications.
The exible communication interfaces are open for modern
Operational measured values I
Circuit-breaker wear monitoring
9
communication architectures with control systems. Slave pointer
Time metering of operating hours
Trip circuit supervision 10
Function overview 8 oscillographic fault records
Motor statistics
Overcurrent protection Communication interfaces 11
(denite-time/inverse-time/user-def.) System interface
Sensitive ground-fault detection IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850
PROFIBUS-FMS/-DP
Intermittent ground-fault protection
High-impedance restricted ground fault
DNP 3.0/ DNP3 TCP/MODBUS RTU 12
Service interface for DIGSI 4 (modem)
Inrush-current detection
Motor protection
Time synchronization via IRIG B/DCF77
13
Restart inhibit
Locked rotor Hardware
Load jam protection
Overload protection 4 current transformers 14
Temperature monitoring 3/8/11 binary inputs
4/8/6 output relays
15
Application
LSA2959-egpen.eps
7
8 Application Motor protection

When protecting motors, the 7SJ61 relay is suitable for asyn-
The SIPROTEC 4 7SJ61 unit is a numerical protection relay that chronous machines of all sizes.
9 also performs control and monitoring functions and therefore
supports the user in cost-effective power system management, Transformer protection
and ensures reliable supply of electric power to the customers.
The relay performs all functions of backup protection supple-
Local operation has been designed according to ergonomic
mentary to transformer differential protection. The inrush
10 criteria. A large, easy-to-read display was a major design aim.
suppression effectively prevents tripping by inrush currents.
Control The high-impedance restricted ground-fault protection detects
The integrated control function permits control of disconnect short-circuits and insulation faults on the transformer.
11 devices, grounding switches or circuit-breakers via the inte-

grated operator panel, binary inputs, DIGSI 4 or the control and
Backup protection
protection system (e.g. SICAM). The present status (or position) The 7SJ61can be used universally for backup protection.
of the primary equipment can be displayed, in case of devices
with graphic display. A full range of command processing func- Flexible protection functions
12 tions is provided. By conguring a connection between a standard protection logic
and any measured or derived quantity, the functional scope of
Programmable logic
the relays can be easily expanded by up to 20 protection stages
The integrated logic characteristics (CFC) allow the user to or protection functions.
13 implement their own functions for automation of switchgear
Metering values
(interlocking) or a substation via a graphic user interface. The
user can also generate user-dened indications. Extensive measured values, limit values and metered values
permit improved system management.
14 Line protection
The relay is a non-directional overcurrent relay which can be
used for line protection of high and medium-voltage networks
with earthed (grounded), low-resistance grounded, isolated or
15 compensated neutral point.

ANSI IEC Protection functions 1

50, 50N I>, I>>, I>>> Denite-time overcurrent protection (phase/neutral)
IE>, IE>>
Ip, IEp Inverse-time overcurrent protection (phase/neutral)
50, 51N
IEE>, IEE>>, IEEp Sensitive ground-fault protection

2
50Ns, 51Ns
Cold load pick-up (dynamic setting change)

IE> Intermittent ground fault 3
87N High-impedance restricted ground-fault protection
50BF Breaker failure protection
79 Auto-reclosure
4
46 I2> Phase-balance current protection (negative-sequence protection)
49 > Thermal overload protection 5

51M Load jam protection 6

14 Locked rotor protection
66/86 Restart inhibit

7
38 Temperature monitoring via external device (RTD-box),

e.g. bearing temperature monitoring
8
Construction 9
Connection techniques and housing with many advantages
-rack size (text display variants) and -rack size (graphic
display variants) are the available housing widths of the 7SJ61 10
relays referred to a 19" module frame system. This means that
previous models can always be replaced. The height is a uniform
244 mm for ush-mounting housings and 266 mm for surface-
mounting housing. All cables can be connected with or without 11
ring lugs.
LSP2099-afpen.eps
In the case of surface mounting on a panel, the connection

terminals are located above and below in the form of screw-type
terminals. The communication interfaces are located in a sloped 12
case at the top and bottom of the housing.
13
Fig. 5/58 Rear view with screw-type, -rack size
14
15
1 Overcurrent protection
(ANSI 50, 50N, 51, 51N)
This function is based on the phase-
2 selective measurement of the three phase
currents and the ground current (four
transformers). Three denite-time over-
current protection elements (DMT) exist
3 both for the phases and for the ground.

The current threshold and the delay time
can be set within a wide range. In addi-
tion, inverse-time overcurrent protection
characteristics (IDMTL) can be activated.
4 Reset characteristics
For easier time coordination with electro- Fig. 5/59 Denite-time overcurrent Fig. 5/60 Inverse-time overcurrent
mechanical relays, reset characteristics characteristic characteristic
5 according to ANSI C37.112 and
IEC 60255-3 / BS 142 standards are
applied. Available inverse-time characteristics
When using the reset characteristic (disk Characteristics acc. to ANSI/IEEE IEC 60255-3
6 emulation), a reset process is initiated
after the fault current has disappeared. Inverse
This reset process corresponds to the Short inverse
reverse movement of the Ferraris disk of Long inverse
7 an electromechanical relay (thus: disk
emulation).
Moderately inverse
Very inverse
User-denable characteristics Extremely inverse
8 Instead of the predened time char-

acteristics according to ANSI, tripping
characteristics can be dened by the user for phase and ground Flexible protection functions
units separately. Up to 20 current/ time value pairs may be
The 7SJ61 units enable the user to easily add on up to 20 protec-
programmed. They are set as pairs of numbers or graphically
9 in DIGSI 4.
tive functions. To this end, parameter denitions are used to link
a standard protection logic with any chosen characteristic quan-
Inrush restraint tity (measured or derived quantity). The standard logic consists
of the usual protection elements such as the pickup message,
The relay features second harmonic restraint. If the second
10 harmonic is detected during transformer energization, pickup
the parameter- denable delay time, the TRIP command, a block-
ing possibility, etc. The mode of operation for current quantities
of non-directional normal elements (I>, Ip) are blocked. can be three-phase or single-phase. The quantities can be oper-
ated as greater than or less than stages. All stages operate with
Cold load pickup/dynamic setting change
protection priority. Protection stages/functions attainable on the
11 For overcurrent protection functions the initiation basis of the available characteristic quantities:
thresholds and tripping times can be switched via binary
inputs or by time control. Function ANSI No.
I>, IE> 50, 50N
12 3I0>, I1>, I2>, I2/I1> 50N, 46
Binary input
13
14
15
(Sensitive) ground-fault detection (ANSI 50Ns, 51Ns/50N, 51N) The overcurrent elements can either be blocked or operated
For high-resistance grounded networks, a sensitive input non-delayed depending on the auto-reclosure cycle
transformer is connected to a phase-balance neutral current Dynamic setting change of the overcurrent elements can be
activated depending on the ready AR
1
transformer (also called core-balance CT).
The function can also be operated in the insensitive mode as an Thermal overload protection (ANSI 49)
additional short-circuit protection.

For protecting cables and transformers, an overload protection
with an integrated pre-warning element for temperature and cur-
2
rent can be applied. The temperature is calculated using a thermal
Intermittent (re-striking) faults occur due to insulation weaknesses homogeneous-body model (according to IEC 60255-8), which
in cables or as a result of water penetrating cable joints. Such
faults either simply cease at some stage or develop into lasting
takes account both of the energy entering the equipment and the
energy losses. The calculated temperature is constantly adjusted 3
short-circuits. During intermittent activity, however, star-point accordingly. Thus, account is taken of the previous load and the
resistors in networks that are impedance-grounded may undergo load uctuations.
thermal overloading. The normal ground-fault protection cannot
reliably detect and interrupt the current pulses, some of which can
be very brief.
For thermal protection of motors (especially the stator) a further
time constant can be set so that the thermal ratios can be detected 4
The selectivity required with intermittent ground faults is achieved correctly while the motor is rotating and when it is stopped. The
by summating the duration of the individual pulses and by trig- ambient temperature or the temperature of the coolant can be
detected serially via an external temperature monitoring box
gering when a (settable) summed time is reached. The response
threshold IIE> evaluates the r.m.s. value, referred to one systems (resistance-temperature detector box, also called RTD-box). The 5
period. thermal replica of the overload function is automatically adapted
to the ambient conditions. If there is no RTD-box it is assumed that
Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF) the ambient temperatures are constant.
If a faulted portion of the electrical circuit is not disconnected High-impedance restricted ground-fault protection (ANSI 87N)
6
upon issuance of a trip command, another command can be
initiated using the breaker failure protection which operates the The high-impedance measurement principle is an uncomplicated
circuit-breaker, e.g. of an upstream (higher-level) protection relay. and sensitive method for detecting ground faults, especially on
Breaker failure is detected if after a trip command, current is still
owing in the faulted circuit. As an option it is possible to make
transformers. It can also be applied to motors, generators and
reactors when these are operated on an grounded network.
7
use of the circuit-breaker position indication. When the high-impedance measurement principle is applied,
all current transformers in the protected area are connected in
Phase-balance current protection (ANSI 46)
(Negative-sequence protection)
parallel and operated on one common resistor of relatively high
R whose voltage is measured (see Fig. 5/61). In the case of 7SJ6
8
In line protection, the two-element phase-balance current/ units, the voltage is measured by detecting the current through
negative-sequence protection permits detection on the high side the (external) resistor R at the sensitive current measurement
of high-resistance phase-to-phase faults and phase-to-ground
faults that are on the low side of a transformer (e.g. with the
input IEE. The varistor V serves to limit the voltage in the event of
an internal fault. It cuts off the high momentary voltage spikes 9
switch group Dy 5). This provides backup protection for high- occurring at transformer saturation. At the same time, this results
resistance faults beyond the transformer. in smoothing of the voltage without any noteworthy reduction
of the average value. If no faults have occurred and in the event
Settable dropout delay times of external faults, the system is at equilibrium, and the voltage 10
If the devices are used in parallel with electromechanical relays in through the resistor is approximately zero. In the event of internal
networks with intermittent faults, the long dropout times of the faults, an imbalance occurs which leads to a voltage and a current
electromechanical devices (several hundred milliseconds) can ow through the resistor R.
lead to problems in terms of time grading. Clean time grading is
only possible if the dropout time is approximately the same. This
The current trans- 11
formers must be of
is why the parameter of dropout times can be dened for certain the same type and
functions such as overcurrent protection, ground short-circuit and must at least offer
phase-balance current protection. a separate core for
the high-impedance
12
Auto-reclosure (ANSI 79)
restricted ground-
Multiple reclosures can be dened by the user and lockout will fault protection.
occur if a fault is present after the last reclosure. The following
functions are possible:
They must in
particular have the 13
3-pole ARC for all types of faults same transforma-
Separate settings for phase and ground faults tion ratio and an
Multiple ARC, one rapid auto-reclosure (RAR) and up to nine approximately
delayed auto-reclosures (DAR) identical knee-point 14
Starting of the ARC depends on the trip command selection (e.g. voltage. They
46, 50, 51) should also demon-
Blocking option of the ARC via binary inputs strate only minimal
ARC can be initiated externally or via CFC
measuring errors. Fig. 5/61 High-impedance restricted
ground-fault protection
15
Motor protection
1 Starting time supervision (ANSI 48)

that might occur when excessive load
2 torque occurs, excessive voltage drops
occur within the motor or if the rotor is
locked. Rotor temperature is calculated
from measured stator current. The tripping
3 time is calculated according to the follow-
ing equation:
for I > IMOTOR START
4 I 2
t = A TA
I
I = Actual current owing
5 IMOTOR START = Pickup current to detect a

motor start
t = Tripping time Fig. 5/62
6 IA
TA
= Rated motor starting current
= Tripping time at rated motor starting current
(2 times, for warm and cold motor) The negative-sequence / phase-balance current protection detects
a phase failure or load unbalance due to network asymmetry and
The characteristic (equation) can be adapted optimally to the state
7 of the motor by applying different tripping times TA in dependence
protects the rotor from impermissible temperature rise.
of either cold or warm motor state. For differentiation of the motor Restart inhibit (ANSI 66/86)
state the thermal model of the rotor is applied.
If a motor is started up too many times in succession, the rotor can
8 If the trip time is rated according to the above formula, even a
prolonged start-up and reduced voltage (and reduced start-up
be subject to thermal overload, especially the upper edges of the
bars. The rotor temperature is calculated from the stator current.
current) will be evaluated correctly. The tripping time is inverse The reclosing lockout only permits start-up of the motor if the
(current dependent). rotor has sufcient thermal reserves for a complete start-up (see
9 A binary signal is set by a speed sensor to detect a blocked rotor.

An instantaneous tripping is effected.
Fig. 5/62).
Emergency start-up
Temperature monitoring (ANSI 38) This function disables the reclosing lockout via a binary input by
10 Up to 2 temperature monitoring boxes with a total of 12 meas-

uring sensors can be used for temperature monitoring and
storing the state of the thermal replica as long as the binary input
is active. It is also possible to reset the thermal replica to zero.
detection by the protection relay. The thermal status of motors,
generators and transformers can be monitored with this device. Undercurrent monitoring (ANSI 37)
Additionally, the temperature of the bearings of rotating machines
11 are monitored for limit value violation. The temperatures are being
With this function, a sudden drop in current, that can occur due to
a reduced motor load, is detected. This may be due to shaft break-
measured with the help of temperature detectors at various loca- age, no-load operation of pumps or fan failure.
tions of the device to be protected. This data is transmitted to the
protection relay via one or two temperature monitoring boxes (see Motor statistics
12 Accessories, page 5/78).
Essential information on start-up of the motor (duration, current,
Load jam protection (ANSI 51M) voltage) and general information on number of starts, total opera-
ting time, total down time, etc. are saved as statistics in the device.
Sudden high loads can cause slowing down and blocking of the
13 motor and mechanical damages. The rise of current due to a load
jam is being monitored by this function (alarm and tripping). The
Methods for determining circuit-breaker contact wear or the
overload protection function is too slow and therefore not suitable
remaining service life of a circuit-breaker (CB) allow CB mainte-
under these circumstances.
nance intervals to be aligned to their actual degree of wear. The
14 benet lies in reduced maintenance costs.
There is no mathematically exact method of calculating the wear
or the remaining service life of circuit-breakers that takes into
15 account the arc-chamber's physical conditions when the CB opens.

This is why various methods of determining CB wear have evolved

which reect the different operator philosophies. To do justice to
these, the devices offer several methods: 1
I
Ix, with x = 1... 3
i2t
The devices additionally offer a new method for determining the
2
remaining service life:
Two-point method
The CB manufacturers double-logarithmic switching cycle diagram 3
(see Fig. 5/63) and the breaking current at the time of contact
opening serve as the basis for this method. After CB opening, the
two-point method calculates the number of still possible switching
cycles. To this end, the two points P1 and P2 only have to be set on
the device. These are specied in the CB's technical data.
4
All of these methods are phase-selective and a limit value can be
set in order to obtain an alarm if the actual value falls below or
exceeds the limit value during determination of the remaining 5
service life.
Commissioning Fig. 5/63 CB switching cycle diagram

Commissioning could hardly be easier and is fully supported by
DIGSI 4. The status of the binary inputs can be read individually
6
and the state of the binary outputs can be set individually. The Automation / user-dened logic
operation of switching elements (circuit-breakers, disconnect
With integrated logic, the user can set, via a graphic interface
devices) can be checked using the switching functions of the bay
controller. The analog measured values are represented as wide-
(CFC), specic functions for the automation of switchgear or 7
substation. Functions are activated via function keys, binary input
ranging operational measured values.
or via communication interface.
To prevent transmission of information to the control center during
maintenance, the bay controller communications can be disabled
to prevent unnecessary data from being transmitted. During com-
Switching authority
Switching authority is determined according to parameters and
8
missioning, all indications with test marking for test purposes can communication.
be connected to a control and protection system.
If a source is set to LOCAL, only local switching operations are
Test operation possible. The following sequence of switching authority is laid 9
down: LOCAL; DIGSI PC program, REMOTE.
During commissioning, all indications can be passed to an auto-
matic control system for test purposes. Command processing
All the functionality of command processing is offered. This
includes the processing of single and double commands with
10
Control and automatic functions
or without feedback, sophisticated monitoring of the control
Control hardware and software, checking of the external process, control

actions using functions such as runtime monitoring and
automatic command termination after output. Here are some
11
support all control and monitoring functions that are required for typical applications:
operating medium-voltage or high-voltage substations. Single and double commands using 1, 1 plus 1 common or
The main application is reliable control of switching and other
processes.
2 trip contacts
User-denable bay interlocks
12
The status of primary equipment or auxiliary devices can be Operating sequences combining several switching operations
obtained from auxiliary contacts and communicated to the 7SJ61 such as control of circuit-breakers, disconnectors and ground-
via binary inputs. Therefore it is possible to detect and indicate
both the OPEN and CLOSED position or a fault or intermediate
ing switches
Triggering of switching operations, indications or alarm by
13
circuit-breaker or auxiliary contact position. combination with existing information
The switchgear or circuit-breaker can be controlled via:
integrated operator panel 14
binary inputs
substation control and protection system
DIGSI 4
15
Functions
Functions
1 Assignment of feedback to command

The positions of the circuit-breaker or switching devices and
transformer taps are acquired by feedback. These indication inputs
2 are logically assigned to the corresponding command outputs. The

unit can therefore distinguish whether the indication change is a
consequence of switching operation or whether it is a spontane-
ous change of state.
3 Chatter disable
Chatter disable feature evaluates whether, in a congured period
of time, the number of status changes of indication input exceeds
a specied gure. If exceeded, the indication input is blocked for
4 a certain period, so that the event list will not record excessive
operations.
LSP2077f.eps
Indication ltering and delay
5 Binary indications can be ltered or delayed.

Filtering serves to suppress brief changes in potential at the indica-
tion input. The indication is passed on only if the indication voltage
is still present after a set period of time. In the event of indication
6 delay, there is a wait for a preset time. The information is passed
on only if the indication voltage is still present after this time.
Indication derivation
7 A further indication (or a command) can be derived from an exist-
ing indication. Group indications can also be formed. The volume Fig. 5/64 NXAIR panel (air-insulated)
of information to the system interface can thus be reduced and
restricted to the most important signals.
8 Measured values
Metered values
If an external meter with a metering pulse output is available, the
The r.m.s. values are calculated from the acquired current. The SIPROTEC 4 unit can obtain and process metering pulses via an
following functions are available for measured value processing: indication input.
9 Currents IL1, IL2, IL3, IE, IEE (50Ns) The metered values can be displayed and passed on to a control
Symmetrical components I1, I2, 3I0 center as an accumulation with reset.
Mean as well as minimum and maximum current values
Switchgear cubicles for high/medium voltage
10 Operating hours counter
Mean operating temperature of overload function
All units are designed specically to meet the requirements of
high/medium-voltage applications.
Limit values are monitored using programmable logic in the In general, no separate measuring instruments or additional
11 CFC. Commands can be derived from this limit value indica-
tion.
control components are necessary.
Zero suppression
12 to zero to suppress interference.
13
14
15
Communication
Communication
In terms of communication, the units offer substantial exibility 1

in the context of connection to industrial and power automation
standards. Communication can be extended or added on thanks
to modules for retrotting on which the common protocols run.
Therefore, also in the future it will be possible to optimally inte-
grate units into the changing communication infrastructure, for
2
example in Ethernet networks (which will also be used increasingly
in the power supply sector in the years to come).
Serial front interface 3

There is a serial RS232 interface on the front of all the units. All of
the units functions can be set on a PC by means of the DIGSI 4
protection operation program. Commissioning tools and fault
analysis are also built into the program and are available through
4
this interface. Fig. 5/65 IEC 60870-5-103: Radial ber-optic connection
Rear-mounted interfaces1)
A number of communication modules suitable for various applica-
5
tions can be tted in the rear of the ush-mounting housing. In
the ush-mounting housing, the modules can be easily replaced
by the user.
The interface modules support the following applications:
6
All units feature a permanently integrated electrical time
synchronization interface. It can be used to feed timing
telegrams in IRIG-B or DCF77 format into the units via time
7
synchronization receivers.
System interface
Communication with a central control system takes place
through this interface. Radial or ring type station bus topolo-
8
gies can be congured depending on the chosen interface.
Furthermore, the units can exchange data through this
interface via Ethernet and IEC 61850 protocol and can also be
operated by DIGSI. 9
Service interface Fig. 5/66 Bus structure for station bus with Ethernet
The service interface was conceived for remote access to a and IEC 61850, ber-optic ring
number of protection units via DIGSI. On all units, it can be
an electrical RS232/RS485 or an optical interface. For special from the unit and also control commands can be transferred by
10
applications, a maximum of two temperature monitoring means of published, Siemens-specic extensions to the protocol.
boxes (RTD-box) can be connected to this interface as an
alternative. Redundant solutions are also possible. Optionally it is possible to
System interface protocols (retrottable)

read out and alter individual parameters (only possible with the
redundant module).
11
IEC 61850 protocol PROFIBUS-DP protocol
The Ethernet-based IEC 61850 protocol is the worldwide standard
for protection and control systems used by power supply corpora-
PROFIBUS-DP is the most widespread protocol in industrial automa-
tion. Via PROFIBUS-DP, SIPROTEC units make their information
12
tions. Siemens was the rst manufacturer to support this standard. available to a SIMATIC controller or, in the control direction, receive
By means of this protocol, information can also be exchanged commands from a central SIMATIC. Measured values can also be
directly between bay units so as to set up simple masterless
systems for bay and system interlocking. Access to the units via the
transferred.
13
Ethernet bus is also possible with DIGSI. MODBUS RTU protocol
This uncomplicated, serial protocol is mainly used in industry and
The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is an international standard for the
by power supply corporations, and is supported by a number of
unit manufacturers. SIPROTEC units function as MODBUS slaves,
14
transmission of protective data and fault recordings. All messages making their information available to a master or receiving
information from it.
1) For units in panel surface-mounting housings

A time-stamped event list is available.
15
please refer to note on page 5/77.

Communication
PROFINET
1 PROFINET is the ethernet-based successor

of Probus DP and is supported in the
variant PROFINET IO. The protocol which
is used in industry together with the
SIMATIC systems control is realized on
2 the optical and electrical Plus ethernet
modules which are delivered since
November 2012. All network redundancy
procedures which are available for the
3 ethernet modules, such as RSTP, PRP or
HSR, are also available for PROFINET. The
time synchronization is made via SNTP.
The network monitoring is possible via
4 SNMP V2 where special MIB les exist

for PROFINET. The LLDP protocol of the
device also supports the monitoring of
the network topology. Single-point indica-
tions, double-point indications, measured
5 and metered values can be transmitted
cyclically in the monitoring direction
via the protocol and can be selected by
the user with DIGSI 4. Important events
6 are also transmitted spontaneously via
congurable process alarms. Switching Fig. 5/67 System solution/communication
commands can be executed by the system
control via the device in the controlling
7 direction. The PROFINET implementation

is certi ed. The device also supports
the IEC 61850 protocol as a server on
the same ethernet module in addition
LSP3.01-0021.tif
to the PROFINET protocol. Client server
8 connections are possible for the intercom-
munication between devices, e.g. for
transmitting fault records and GOOSE
messages.
9 DNP 3.0
Power utilities use the serial DNP 3.0 (Dis-
tributed Network Protocol) for the station
10 and network control levels. SIPROTEC units
function as DNP slaves, supplying their
information to a master system or receiving Fig. 5/68 Optical Ethernet communication module
information from it. for IEC 61850 with integrated Ethernet-switch
11 DNP3 TCP System solutions for protection and station control

The ethernet-based TCP variant of the DNP3 protocol is supported Together with the SICAM power automation system, SIPROTEC
with the electrical and optical ethernet module. Two DNP3 TCP 4 can be used with PROFIBUS-FMS. Over the low-cost electrical
12 clients are supported. Redundant ring structures can be realized
for DNP3 TCP with the help of the integrated switch in the module.
RS485 bus, or interference-free via the optical double ring, the
units exchange information with the control system.
For instance, a redundant optical ethernet ring can be constructed.
Single-point indications, double-point indications, measured and Units featuring IEC 60870-5-103 interfaces can be connected to
metered values can be congured with DIGSI 4 and are transmitted SICAM in parallel via the RS485 bus or radially by ber-optic link.
13 to the DNP3 TCP client. Switching commands can be executed in Through this interface, the system is open for the connection of
the controlling direction. Fault records of the device are stored in units of other manufacturers (see Fig. 5/65).
the binary Comtrade format and can be retrieved via the DNP3 le
Because of the standardized interfaces, SIPROTEC units can also
transfer. The time synchronization is performed via the DNP3 TCP
14 client or SNTP. The device can also be integrated into a network
monitoring system via the SNMP V2 protocol. Parallel to the DNP3
be integrated into systems of other manufacturers or in SIMATIC.
Electrical RS485 or optical interfaces are available. The optimum
physical data transfer medium can be chosen thanks to opto-
TCP protocol the IEC 61850 protocol (the device works as a server)
electrical converters. Thus, the RS485 bus allows low-cost wiring
and the GOOSE messages of the IEC 61850 are available for the
in the cubicles and an interference-free optical connection to the
15 intercommunication between devices.
master can be established.

Typical connections
For IEC 61850, an interoperable system solution is offered with

SICAM PAS. Via the 100 Mbits/s Ethernet bus, the units are linked
with PAS electrically or optically to the station PC. The interface
is standardized, thus also enabling direct connection of units of
1
other manufacturers to the Ethernet bus. With IEC 61850, how-
ever, the units can also be used in other manufacturers systems
(see Fig. 5/66).
2
Typical connections
Connection of current
3
and voltage transformers
Standard connection
For grounded networks, the ground current
4
is obtained from the phase currents by the
residual current circuit.
5
Fig. 5/69 Residual current circuit

7
10
11
12
Fig. 5/70 Sensitive ground current detection
13
14
15
Overview of connection types
1 Type of network Function Current connection
(Low-resistance) grounded network Overcurrent protection Residual circuit, with 3 phase-current transformers required,
hase/ground non-directional phase-balance neutral current transformer possible
(Low-resistance) grounded networks Sensitive ground-fault protection Phase-balance neutral current transformers required
2 Isolated or compensated networks Overcurrent protection Residual circuit, with 3 or 2 phase current transformers possible
phases non-directional
Isolated networks Sensitive ground-fault protection Phase-balance neutral current transformers required
3 Compensated networks Sensitive ground-fault protection Phase-balance neutral current transformers required
4 Typical applications

One or two binary inputs can be used for
5 monitoring the circuit-breaker trip coil
including its incoming cables. An alarm
signal occurs whenever the circuit is
interrupted.
6
8
Fig. 5/71 Trip circuit supervision with 2 binary inputs
10
11
12
13
14
15
Technical data
General unit data Electrical tests

Measuring circuits
System frequency 50 / 60 Hz (settable)
Specication
Standards IEC 60255 1
Current transformer ANSI C37.90, C37.90.1, C37.90.2,
UL508
Rated current Inom 1 or 5 A (settable)
Insulation tests
Option: sensitive ground-fault CT
Power consumption
IEE < 1.6 A
Standards IEC 60255-5; ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0 2
at Inom = 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA per phase Voltage test (100 % test) 2.5 kV (r.m.s. value), 50/60 Hz
at Inom = 5 A Approx. 0.3 VA per phase all circuits except for auxiliary
for sensitive ground-fault CT at 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA voltage and RS485/RS232 and
Overload capability
Thermal (effective) 500 A for 1 s
time synchronization
Auxiliary voltage DC 3.5 kV
3
150 A for 10 s Communication ports AC 500 V
20 A continuous and time synchronization
Dynamic (impulse current)
Overload capability if equipped with
250 x Inom (half cycle) Impulse voltage test (type test) 5 kV (peak value); 1.2/50 s; 0.5 J
all circuits, except communication 3 positive and 3 negative impulses 4
sensitive ground-fault CT ports and time synchronization, at intervals of 5 s
Thermal (effective) 300 A for 1 s class III
100 A for 10 s
15 A continuous
750 A (half cycle) Standards IEC 60255-6; IEC 60255-22 5
(product standard)
Auxiliary voltage (via integrated converter)
EN 50082-2 (generic specication)
Rated auxiliary DC 24/48 V 60/125 V 110/250 V DIN 57435 Part 303
voltage Vaux
Permissible tolerance
AC 115/230 V
DC 19-58 V 48-150 V 88-330 V
High-frequency test
2.5 kV (peak value); 1 MHz; =15 ms;
400 surges per s; test duration 2 s
6
AC 92-138 V 184-265 V and VDE 0435 Part 303, class III
Ripple voltage, peak-to-peak 12 % Electrostatic discharge 8 kV contact discharge;
IEC 60255-22-2 class IV 15 kV air gap discharge;
Power consumption
Quiescent
Energized
Approx. 3 W
Approx. 7 W
and EN 61000-4-2, class IV
both polarities; 150 pF; Ri = 330
10 V/m; 27 to 500 MHz
7
Backup time during 50 ms at V DC 110 V eld, non-modulated
loss/short-circuit of 20 ms at V DC 24 V IEC 60255-22-3 (Report) class III
auxiliary voltage 200 ms at AC 115 V/230 V
Binary inputs/indication inputs
10 V/m, 80 to 1000 MHz;
AM 80 %; 1 kHz 8
IEC 61000-4-3; class III
Type 7SJ610 7SJ611, 7SJ612,
Irradiation with radio-frequency 10 V/m, 900 MHz; repetition
7SJ613 7SJ614
eld, pulse-modulated rate 200 Hz, on duration 50 %
Number
Voltage range
3
DC 24250 V
8 11 IEC 61000-4-3/ENV 50204; class III
Fast transient interference/burst 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz;
9
Pickup threshold Modiable by plug-in jumpers IEC 60255-22-4 and burst length = 15 ms;
Pickup threshold DC 19 V 88 V IEC 61000-4-4, class IV repetition rate 300 ms; both polarities;
Ri = 50 ; test duration 1 min
For rated control voltage DC 24/48/60/110/125 V
Response time/
110/220/250 V
High-energy surge voltages 10
(Surge)
drop-out time Approx. 3.5 ms IEC 61000-4-5; class III
Power consumption 1.8 mA (independent of operating voltage) Auxiliary voltage From circuit to circuit: 2 kV; 12 ; 9 F
energized
Binary outputs/command outputs Binary inputs/outputs
across contacts: 1 kV; 2 ;18 F
From circuit to circuit: 2 kV; 42 ;
11
0.5 F
Type 7SJ610, 7SJ611, 7SJ613
across contacts: 1 kV; 42 ; 0.5 F
7SJ612, 7SJ614
Line-conducted HF, 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz;
Number command/indication relay
Contacts per command/
4
1 NO / form A
8 6 amplitude-modulated
AM 80 %; 1 kHz 12
indication relay (2 contacts changeable to Power frequency magnetic eld 30 A/m; 50 Hz, continuous
NC / form B, via jumpers) IEC 61000-4-8, class IV 300 A/m; 50 Hz, 3 s
Live status contact 1 NO / NC (jumper) / form
A/B
IEC 60255-6
0.5 mT, 50 Hz
2.5 to 3 kV (peak value), 1 to 1.5 MHz 13
Switching capacity Make 1000 W/VA capability damped wave; 50 surges per s;
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 duration 2 s, Ri = 150 to 200
Break 30 W/VA / 40 Wresistive /
Switching voltage DC 250 V

25 W at L/R 50 ms
14
Permissible current 5 A continuous, 30 A for 0.5 s making current,
2000 switching cycles
15
Technical data
EMC tests for interference immunity; type tests (cont'd) Climatic stress tests
1 Fast transient surge withstand

4 to 5 kV; 10/150 ns; 50 surges per s
both polarities; duration 2 s, Ri = 80
Temperatures
Type-tested acc. to IEC 60068-2-1 -25 C to +85 C /-13 F to +185 F
Radiated electromagnetic 35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz; and -2, test Bd, for 16 h
interference amplitude and pulse-modulated Temporarily permissible operating -20 C to +70 C /-4 F to -158 F
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 temperature, tested for 96 h
2 Damped wave
IEC 60694 / IEC 61000-4-12
2.5 kV (peak value, polarity
alternating)
Recommended permanent
operating temperature acc. to
-5 C to +55 C /+25 F to +131 F
100 kHz, 1 MHz, 10 and 50 MHz, IEC 60255-6
Ri = 200 (Legibility of display may be
EMC tests for interference emission; type tests impaired above +55 C /+131 F)
3 Standard EN 50081-* (generic specication) Limiting temperature during
permanent storage
-25 C to +55 C /-13 F to +131 F
Conducted interferences 150 kHz to 30 MHz Limiting temperature during

only auxiliary voltage IEC/CISPR 22 Limit class B -25 C to +70 C /-13 F to +158 F
transport
4 IEC/CISPR 11 Limit class B
Humidity
Permissible humidity Annual average 75 % relative
Units with a detached operator
It is recommended to arrange the humidity; on 56 days a year up to
panel must be installed in a metal
units in such a way that they are 95 % relative humidity;
cubicle to maintain limit class B
not exposed to direct sunlight or condensation not permissible!
5 Mechanical stress tests
that could cause condensation.
Vibration, shock stress and seismic vibration Unit design
During operation Housing 7XP20

6 Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2
Dimensions
Weight
See dimension drawings, part 14
Vibration Sinusoidal
1/3 19, surface-mounting housing 4.5 kg
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2 10 to 60 Hz; 0.075 mm amplitude;
1/3 19, ush-mounting housing 4.0 kg
IEC 60068-2-6 60 to 150 Hz; 1 g acceleration
7 frequency sweep 1 octave/min
1/2 19, surface-mounting housing
1/2 19, ush-mounting housing
7.5 kg
6.5 kg
Shock Semi-sinusoidal
acc. to EN 60529
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms;
Surface-mounting housing IP 51
IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks in both directions of 3 axes
8 Seismic vibration
IEC 60255-21-3, class 1
Sinusoidal
Flush-mounting housing
Operator safety
Front: IP 51, rear: IP 20;
IP 2x with cover

1 to 8 Hz: 1.5 mm amplitude Serial interfaces
9 (vertical axis)
(horizontal axis)
Operating interface (front of unit)
Connection Non-isolated, RS232; front panel,
8 to 35 Hz: 0.5 g acceleration 9-pin subminiature connector
(vertical axis) Transmission rate Factory setting 115200 baud,
10 Frequency sweep 1 octave/min

1 cycle in 3 perpendicular axes
Service/modem interface (rear of unit)
min. 4800 baud, max. 115200 baud
During transportation
Isolated interface for data transfer Port C: DIGSI / modem / RTD-box
Transmission rate Factory setting 38400 baud,
11 Vibration
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2
IEC 60068-2-6
Sinusoidal
8 to 150 Hz; 2 g acceleration, RS232/RS485
frequency sweep 1 octave/min Connection

20 cycles in 3 perpendicular axes For ush-mounting housing/ 9-pin subminiature connector,
12 Shock
IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1
Semi-sinusoidal
Acceleration 15 g, duration 11 ms
surface-mounting housing with
detached operator panel
mounting location C
IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks in both directions of 3 axes For surface-mounting housing At the bottom part of the housing:
with two-tier terminal at the shielded data cable
Continuous shock Semi-sinusoidal
top/bottom part
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 10 g, duration 16 ms
13 IEC 60068-2-29 1000 shocks in both directions
of 3 axes
Distance RS232
Distance RS485
15 m / 49.2 ft
Max. 1 km / 3300 ft
Test voltage AC 500 V against ground
14
15
Technical data
System interface (rear of unit) PROFIBUS-FMS/DP

Isolated interface for data transfer Port B
to a control center 1
to a control center Transmission rate Up to 1.5 Mbaud
Transmission rate Factory setting 9600 baud, RS485
RS232/RS485
Connection
For ush-mounting housing/ 9-pin subminiature connector,
surface-mounting housing with mounting location B
2
Connection
For ush-mounting housing/ Mounting location B detached operator panel
surface-mounting housing with For surface-mounting housing At the bottom part of the housing:
For surface-mounting housing At the bottom part of the housing:
with two-tier terminal on the
top/bottom part
shielded data cable
3
with two-tier terminal on the shielded data cable Distance 1000 m / 3300 ft 93.75 kbaud;
top/bottom part 500 m /1500 ft 187.5 kbaud;
200 m / 600 ft 1.5 Mbaud;
Distance RS232
Distance RS485
Max. 15 m / 49 ft
Max. 1 km / 3300 ft
Test voltage
100 m / 300 ft 12 Mbaud
4
Fiber optic
Fiber optic
Connection ber-optic cable Integr. ST connector for FO connection
Connection ber-optic cable Integrated ST connector for ber-
optic connection
For ush-mounting housing/
Mounting location B 5
For ush-mounting housing/ Mounting location B detached operator panel
detached operator panel For surface-mounting housing At the bottom part of the housing
For surface-mounting housing

At the bottom part of the housing
top/bottom part
Important: Please refer to footnotes
1) and 2) on page 5/99 6
top/bottom part Optical wavelength 820 nm
Optical wavelength 820 nm Permissible path attenuation Max. 8 dB, for glass ber 62.5/125 m
Distance 500 kB/s 1.6 km / 0.99 miles
Distance
Max. 1.5 km / 0.9 miles
1500 kB/s 530 m / 0.33 miles 7
MODBUS RTU, ASCII, DNP 3.0
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, redundant
RS485 to a control center
Connection
For ush-mounting housing/ Mounting location B
Transmission rate Up to 19200 baud 8
surface-mounting housing with RS485
detached operator panel Connection
top/bottom part
(not available)
9
Distance RS485 Max. 1 km / 3300 ft For surface-mounting housing At bottom part of the housing:
Ethernet (EN 100) for DIGSI,
IEC 61850, DNP3 TCP, PROFINET
top/bottom part
Distance Max. 1 km / 3300 ft max. 32 units 10
recommended
Isolated interface for data transfer: Port B, 100 Base T acc. to IEEE802.3 Test voltage AC 500 V against ground
- to a control center
- with DIGSI
- between SIPROTEC 4 relays
Fiber optic
11
Transmission rate 100 Mbit optic connection
Ethernet, electrical For ush-mounting housing/ Mounting location B

Connection
Two RJ45 connectors
mounting location "B"
For surface-mounting housing At the bottom part of the housing
12
with two-tier terminal at the Important: Please refer to footnotes
detached operator panel 1) and 2) on page 5/77
top/bottom part
Distance Max. 20 m / 65.6 ft
Optical wavelength
Permissible path attenuaion
820 nm
13
Ethernet, optical
Distance Max. 1.5 km/0.9 miles
Connection Integr. LC connector for FO connection
For ush-mounting housing/ Mounting location "B"
14
Optical wavelength 1300 nm
Distance 1.5 km / 0.9 miles
15
Technical data
Time synchronization DCF77 / IRIG-B signal (Format IRIG-B000) Inrush blocking
1 Connection 9-pin subminiature connector

(SUB-D)
(terminal with surface-mounting
Inuenced functions Time-overcurrent elements, I>, IE>,
Ip, IEp
Lower function limit phases At least one phase current
housing) (50 Hz and 100 Hz) 125 mA 1)
Voltage levels 5 V, 12 V or 24 V (optional) Lower function limit ground Ground current (50 Hz and 100 Hz)
2 Functions
Upper function limit (setting
125 mA 1)
1.5 to 125 A 1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
range)
Denite-time overcurrent protection (ANSI 50, 50N)
Setting range I2f /I 10 to 45 % (in steps of 1 %)
Operating mode phase protection 3-phase (standard) or 2-phase
3 (ANSI 50) (L1 and L3)
Crossblock (IL1, IL2, IL3)
Dynamic setting change
ON/OFF
Number of elements (stages) I>, I>>, I>>> (phases)

IE>, IE>>, IE>>> (ground) Controllable function Pickup, tripping time
Setting ranges Start criteria Current criteria,
4 Pickup phase elements

Pickup ground elements
0.5 to 175 A or 1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
CB position via aux. contacts,
binary input,
auto-reclosure ready
Delay times T 0 to 60 s or (in steps of 0.01 s)
Time control 3 timers
Dropout delay time TDO 0 to 60 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
Current criteria Current threshold
5 Times
Pickup times (without inrush
(reset on dropping below threshold;
monitoring with timer)
restraint, with inrush restraint
+ 10 ms) (Sensitive) ground-fault detection (ANSI 50 Ns, 51Ns)
With twice the setting value pprox. 30 ms Ground-fault pickup for all types of ground faults
6 With ve times the setting value
Dropout times
Approx. 20 ms
Approx. 40 ms
Denite-time characteristic (ANSI 50Ns)
Setting ranges
Dropout ratio Approx. 0.95 for I/Inom 0.3 Pickup threshold IEE>, IEE>>
Tolerances For sensitive input 0.001 to 1.5 A (in steps of 0.001 A)
7 Pickup
Delay times T, TDO
2 % of setting value or 50 mA1)
1 % or 10 ms
For normal input
Delay times T for IEE>, IEE>>
0.25 to 175 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
0 to 320 s or (in steps of 0.01 s)
Inverse-time overcurrent protection (ANSI 51, 51N)
Times
Operating mode phase protection 3-phase (standard) or 2-phase Pickup times Approx. 50 ms
8 (ANSI 51)
Setting ranges
(L1 and L3)
Dropout ratio Approx. 0.95
Pickup phase element IP 0.5 to 20 A or 1) (in steps of 0.01 A) Tolerances

Pickup ground element IEP 0.25 to 20 A or 1) (in steps of 0.01 A) Pickup threshold IEE>, IEE>> 2 % of setting value or 1 mA
Time multiplier T 0.05 to 3.2 s or (in steps of 0.01 s) Delay times 1 % of setting value or 20 ms
9 (IEC characteristics)
Time multiplier D 0.05 to 15 s or (in steps of 0.01 s)
Ground-fault pickup for all types of ground faults
Inverse-time characteristic (ANSI 51Ns)
(ANSI characteristics)
User-dened characteristic Dened by a maximum of 20 pairs of
Trip characteristics
Setting ranges current and delay time values
IEC Normal inverse, very inverse,
10 ANSI
extremely inverse, long inverse
Inverse, short inverse, long inverse
Pickup threshold IEEp
For sensitive input 0.001 A to 1.4 A (in steps of 0.001 A)
moderately inverse, very inverse, For normal input 0.25 to 20 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
extremely inverse, denite inverse User dened
Time multiplier T 0.1 to 4 s or (in steps of 0.01 s)
11 User-dened characteristic Dened by a maximum of 20 value
pairs of current and time delay Times
Dropout setting Pickup times Approx. 50 ms
Without disk emulation Approx. 1.05 setting value Ip for Pickup threshold Approx. 1.1 IEEp
Ip/Inom 0.3, corresponds to approx. Dropout ratio Approx. 1.05 IEEp
12 With disk emulation
0.95 pickup threshold
Approx. 0.90 setting value Ip
Tolerances
Pickup threshold 2 % of setting value or 1 mA
Tolerances For sensitive input 2 % of setting value or 50 mA1)
Pickup/dropout thresholds Ip, IEp 2 % of setting value or 50 mA1) For normal input 7 % of reference value for 2 I/IEEp
13 Pickup time for 2 I/Ip 20 5 % of reference (calculated) value

+ 2 % current tolerance, respectively
30 ms
Dropout times in linear range
Logarithmic inverse
20 + 2 % current tolerance, or 70 ms
Refer to the manual
Logarithmic inverse with knee Refer to the manual
Dropout ratio for 0.05 I/Ip 0.9 5 % of reference (calculated) value point
30 ms
14
15 1) For Inom = 1 A, all limits divided by 5.

Technical data
2 2
High-impedance restricted ground-fault protection (ANSI 87N) /
single-phase overcurrent protection
(I /k Inom ) (Ipre /k Inom )
Tripping characteristic t = t th ln
Setting ranges
Pickup thresholds I>, I>>
For (I/k Inom) 8
2
(I /k Inom ) 1 1
t = Tripping time
For sensitive input 0.003 to 1.5 A or (in steps of 0.001 A) th = Temperature rise time constant
For normal input 0.25 to 175 A1) or (in steps of 0.01 A)
I = Load current
Delay times TI>, TI>> 0 to 60 s or (in steps of 0.01 s)
Times
Ipre = Preload current
k = Setting factor acc. to VDE 0435
2
Pickup times
Part 3011 and IEC 60255-8
Minimum Approx. 20 ms
Inom = Rated (nominal) current of the
Typical Approx. 30 ms
protection relay
Dropout times
Dropout ratio
Approx. 30 ms
Approx. 0.95 for I/Inom 0.5 Dropout ratios 3
/Trip Drops out with Alarm
Tolerances
/Alarm Approx. 0.99
Pickup thresholds 3 % of setting value or
I/IAlarm Approx. 0.97
1 % rated current at Inom = 1 or 5 A;
5 % of setting value or
3 % rated current at Inom = 0.1 A
Tolerances
With reference to k Inom Class 5 acc. to IEC 60255-8
4
Delay times 1 % of setting value or 10 ms With reference to tripping time 5 % 2 s acc. to IEC 60255-8
Intermittent ground-fault protection Auto-reclosure (ANSI 79)
Setting ranges
Pickup threshold
Number of reclosures 0 to 9
Shot 1 to 4 individually adjustable
5
For IE IIE> 0.25 to 175 A1)(in steps of 0.01 A) Program for phase fault
For 3I0 IIE> 0.25 to 175 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A) Start-up by Time-overcurrent elements, negative
For IEE IIE> 0.005 to 1.5 A (in steps of 0.001 A) sequence, binary input
Pickup prolon- TV 0 to 10 s (in steps of 0.01 s) Program for ground fault
Start-up by Time-overcurrent elements, sensitive
6
gation time
ground-fault protection, binary input
Ground-fault accu- Tsum 0 to 100 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
mulation time Blocking of ARC Pickup of protection functions,
Reset time for
accumulation
Tres 1 to 600 s (in steps of 1 s)
three-phase fault detected by a
protective element, binary input, 7
last TRIP command after the
Number of pickups for 2 to 10 (in steps of 1) reclosing cycle is complete
intermittent ground fault (unsuccessful reclosing),
Times
Pickup times
TRIP command by the breaker failure
protection (50BF), 8
Current = 1.25 pickup value Approx. 30 ms opening the CB without ARC
Current 2 pickup value Approx. 22 ms initiation,
Dropout time Approx. 22 ms external CLOSE command
Tolerances
Pickup threshold IIE> 3 % of setting value, or 50 mA1)
Setting ranges
Dead time 0.01 to 320 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
9
(separate for phase and ground
Times TV, Tsum, Tres 1 % of setting value or 10 ms and individual for shots 1 to 4)
Thermal overload protection (ANSI 49) Blocking duration for manual- 0.5 s to 320 s or 0 (in steps of 0.01 s)
Setting ranges CLOSE detection
Blocking duration after 0.5 s to 320 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
10
Factor k 0.1 to 4 (in steps of 0.01)
reclosure
Time constant 1 to 999.9 min (in steps of 0.1 min) Blocking duration after 0.01 to 320 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
Warning overtemperature 50 to 100 % with reference dynamic blocking
alarm/trip to the tripping overtemperature
(in steps of 1 %)
Start-signal monitoring time 0.01 to 320 s or (in steps of 0.01 s) 11
Circuit-breaker supervision 0.1 to 320 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
Current warning stage Ialarm 0.5 to 20 A (in steps of 0.01 A) time
Extension factor when stopped 1 to 10 with reference to the time Max. delay of dead-time start 0 to 1800 s or (in steps of 0.1 s)
kt factor constant with the machine running
(in steps of 0.1)
Maximum dead time extension 0.5 to 320 s or (in steps of 0.01 s) 12
Action time 0.01 to 320 s or (in steps of 0.01 s)
Rated overtemperature (for Inom) 40 to 200 C (in steps of 1 C)
The delay times of the following protection function can be altered
individually by the ARC for shots 1 to 4
(setting value T = T, non-delayed T = 0, blocking T = ):
I>>>, I>>, I>, Ip,
13
IE>>>, IE>>, IE>, IEp
14
1) For Inom = 1 A, all limits divided by 5. 15

Technical data
Auto-reclosure (ANSI 79) (cont'd) Times

Pickup times Approx. 35 ms
1 Additional functions Lockout (nal trip),
delay of dead-time start via binary
input (monitored),
Dropout times
Dropout ratio
Approx. 35 ms
Approx. 0.95 for I2 /Inom > 0.3
dead-time extension via binary input Tolerances
(monitored), Pickup thresholds 3 % of the setting value or 50 mA1)
co-ordination with other protection Delay times 1 % or 10 ms
2 relays,
circuit-breaker monitoring,
Inverse-time characteristic (ANSI 46-TOC)
evaluation of the CB contacts Setting ranges

Pickup current 0.5 to 10 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50 BF) Time multiplier T 0.05 to 3.2 s or (in steps of 0.01 s)
3 Setting ranges
Pickup thresholds 0.2 to 5 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
(IEC characteristics)
Delay time 0.06 to 60 s or (in steps of 0.01 s) (ANSI characteristics)
Times Functional limit All phase currents 50 A1)
4 Pickup times
with internal start is contained in the delay time
with external start is contained in the delay time extremely inverse
Dropout times Approx. 25 ms ANSI Inverse, moderately inverse,
Tolerances very inverse, extremely inverse
5 Pickup value
Delay time
2 % of setting value (50 mA)1)
1 % or 20 ms
Pickup threshold
Dropout
Approx. 1.1 I2p setting value
Flexible protection functions (ANSI 47, 50, 50N) IEC and ANSI Approx. 1.05 I2p setting value,
(without disk emulation) which is approx. 0.95 pickup
Operating modes/measuring threshold
6 quantities
3-phase I, I1, I2, I2/I1, 3I0
ANSI with disk emulation
Tolerances
Approx. 0.90 I2p setting value
1-phase I, IE, IE sens.
Without xed phase relation Binary input Pickup threshold 3 % of the setting value or 50 mA1)
Pickup when Exceeding or falling below threshold Time for 2 M 20 5 % of setpoint (calculated)
7 Setting ranges
value +2 % current tolerance, at least 30 ms
Starting time monitoring for motors (ANSI 48)
Current I, I1, I2, 3I0, IE 0.15 to 200 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A) Setting ranges
Current ratio I2 / I1 15 to 100 % (in steps of 1 %) Motor starting current ISTARTUP 2.5 to 80 A1) (in steps of 0.01)
Sensitive ground current IE sens. 0.001 to 1.5 A (in steps of 0.001 A) Pickup threshold IMOTOR START 2 to 50 A1) (in steps of 0.01)
8 Dropout ratio >- stage
Dropout ratio <- stage
1.01 to 3 (in steps of 0.01)
0.7 to 0.99 (in steps of 0.01)
Permissible starting
time TSTARTUP, cold motor
Pickup delay time 0 to 60 s (in steps of 0.01 s) Permissible starting 0.5 to 180 s (in steps of 0.1 s)
Trip delay time 0 to 3600 s (in steps of 0.01 s) time TSTARTUP, warm motor
Dropout delay time 0 to 60 s (in steps of 0.01 s) Temperature threshold cold 0 to 80 % (in steps of 1 %)
9 Times
Pickup times, phase quantities
motor
Permissible blocked rotor 0.5 to 120 s or (in steps of 0.1 s)
With 2 times the setting value Approx. 30 ms time TLOCKED-ROTOR
With 10 times the setting value Approx. 20 ms Tripping time characteristic
Pickup times, symmetrical I 2
10 components
With 2 times the setting value Approx. 40 ms
For I > IMOTOR START t = STARTUP TSTRATUP
I
With 10 times the setting value Approx. 30 ms ISTARTUP = Rated motor starting
Binary input Approx. 20 ms current
11 Dropout times
Phase quantities
Symmetrical components
< 20 ms
< 30 ms
TSTARTUP = Tripping time for rated
motor starting current
t = Tripping time in seconds
Binary input < 10 ms
Dropout ratio IMOTOR START Approx. 0.95
Tolerances
Tolerances
12 Pickup threshold
Phase quantities 1 % of setting value or 50 mA1)
Pickup threshold
Delay time
5 % or 30 ms
Symmetrical components 2 % of setting value or 100 mA1)
Times 1 % of setting value or 10 ms Load jam protection for motors (ANSI 51M)
Negative-sequence current detection (ANSI 46) Setting ranges
13 Denite-time characteristic (ANSI 46-1 and 46-2)
Current threshold for
alarm and trip 0.25 to 60 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
Setting ranges Delay times 0 to 600 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
Pickup current I2>, I2>> 0.5 to 15 A or (in steps of 0.01 A) Blocking duration after 0 to 600 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
Delay times 0 to 60 s or (in steps of 0.01 s) close signal detection
14 Dropout delay time TDO
Functional limit
All phase currents 50 A1)
Tolerances
Pickup threshold 2 % of setting value or 50 mA1)
Delay time 1 % of setting value or 10 ms

Technical data
Restart inhibit for motors (ANSI 66) Additional functions

Setting ranges
Motor starting current relative 1.1 to 10 (in steps of 0.1)
Currents In A (kA) primary, in A secondary 1
to rated motor current IL1, IL2, IL3 or in % Inom
IMOTOR START/IMotor Nom Positive-sequence component I1
Rated motor current IMotor Nom 1 to 6 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A) Negative-sequence component I2
Max. permissible starting time
TStart Max
1 to 320 s (in steps of 1 s)
IE or 3I0
Range 10 to 200 % Inom
2
Tolerance1) 1 % of measured value or 0.5 % Inom
Equilibrium time TEqual 0 min to 320 min (in steps of 0.1 min)
Minimum inhibit time 0.2 min to 120 min (in steps of 0.1 min) Temperature overload protection In %
/Trip
TMIN. INHIBIT TIME
Max. permissible number of 1 to 4 (in steps of 1) Range 0 to 400 % 3
warm starts Tolerance1) 5 % class accuracy per IEC 60255-8
Difference between cold and 1 to 2 (in steps of 1) Temperature restart inhibit In %
warm starts L/L Trip
Extension k-factor for cooling
simulations of rotor at zero speed
0.2 to 100 (in steps of 0.1) Range
Tolerance1)
0 to 400 %
5 % class accuracy per IEC 60255-8
4
kt at STOP Restart threshold Restart/L Trip In %
Extension factor for cooling time 0.2 to 100 (in steps of 0.1) Reclose time TReclose In min
constant with motor running
kt RUNNING
Current of sensitive ground fault
detection IEE
In A (kA) primary and in mA
secondary
5
Restarting limit Range 0 mA to 1600 mA
nc - 1 Tolerance1) 2 % of measured value or 1 mA
restart = rot max perm
restart
nc
= Temperature limit
RTD-box See section "Temperature monitoring
box" 6
below which restarting Long-term averages
is possible Time window 5, 15, 30 or 60 minutes
(= 100 % in operati-
Frequency of updates
Long-term averages
Adjustable
7
of currents IL1dmd, IL2dmd, IL3dmd, I1dmd in A (kA)
onal measured value
rot/rot trip) Max. / Min. report
start-ups from cold
Report of measured values
Reset, automatic
With date and time
Time of day adjustable (in minutes,
8
state 0 to 1439 min)
Undercurrent monitoring (ANSI 37) Time frame and starting time adjus-
table (in days, 1 to 365 days, and )
Signal from the operational Predened with programmable logic
measured values Reset, manual Using binary input,
using keypad,
9
Temperature monitoring box (ANSI 38) via communication
Temperature detectors Min./Max. values for current IL1, IL2, IL3
I1 (positive-sequence component)
Connectable boxes
Number of temperature
detectors per box
1 or 2
Max. 6 Min./Max. values for overload /Trip 10
protection
Type of measuring Pt 100 or Ni 100 or Ni 120
Min./Max. values for mean values IL1dmd, IL2dmd, IL3dmd
Mounting identication Oil or Environment or Stator or
Thresholds for indications

Bearing or Other
Local measured values monitoring 11
For each measuring detector Current asymmetry Imax/Imin > balance factor,
Stage 1 -50 C to 250 C (in steps of 1 C) for I>Ibalance limit
-58 F to 482 F (in steps of 1 F) Current phase sequence Clockwise (ABC) / counter-clockwise
Stage 2
or (no indication)
-50 C to 250 C (in steps of 1 C) Limit value monitoring
(ACB)
Predened limit values, user-dened
12
-58 F to 482 F (in steps of 1 F) expansions via CFC
or (no indication)
Fault recording
Recording of indications of the
last 8 power system faults
13
last 3 power system ground faults
14
1) At rated frequency.
15
Technical data
Time stamping Setting group switchover of the function parameters
1 Resolution for event log

(operational annunciations)
1 ms Number of available setting
groups
4 (parameter group A, B, C and D)
Resolution for trip log 1 ms Switchover performed Via keypad, DIGSI, system (SCADA)
(fault annunciations) interface or binary input
Maximum time deviation 0.01 % Control
2 (internal clock)
Battery Lithium battery 3 V/1 Ah,
Number of switching units Depends on the binary inputs and
outputs
type CR 1/2 AA, message "Battery
Interlocking Programmable
Fault" for insufcient battery charge
Circuit-breaker signals Feedback, close, open, intermediate
3 Oscillographic fault recording
Maximum 8 fault records saved, Control commands
position
Single command / double command
memory maintained by buffer 1, 1 plus 1 common or 2 trip contacts
battery in case of loss of power
supply Programmable controller CFC logic, graphic input tool
4 Recording time Total 20 s

Pre-trigger and post-fault recording
Local control Control via menu,
assignment of a function key
and memory time adjustable Remote control Via communication interfaces,
Sampling rate for 50 Hz 1 sample/1.25 ms (16 samples/cycle using a substation automation and
control system
5 Sampling rate for 60 Hz
Statistics
1 sample/1.04 ms (16 samples/cycle)
(e.g. SICAM),
DIGSI 4 (e.g. via modem)
Saved number of trips Up to 9 digits
Number of automatic reclosing Up to 9 digits CE conformity
6 commands (segregated according
to 1st and 2nd cycle) This product is in conformity with the Directives of the European
Circuit-breaker wear relating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Council Directive
Methods Ix with x = 1 .. 3 2004/108/EG previous 89/336/EEC) and electrical equipment designed
7 2-point method
(remaining service life)
i2t
This unit conforms to the international standard IEC 60255, and the
Operation Phase-selective accumulation of German standard DIN 57435/Part 303 (corresponding to VDE 0435/
measured values on TRIP command, Part 303).
8 up to 8 digits, phase-selective limit

values, monitoring indication
Further applicable standards: ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0 and C37.90.1.
The unit conforms to the international standard IEC 60255, and the
Motor statistics German standard DIN 57435/Part 303 (corresponding to VDE 0435/
Total number of motor start-ups 0 to 9999 (resolution 1) Part 303).
9 Total operating time

Total down-time
Ratio operating time/down-time
0 to 99999 h
0 to 99999 h
0 to 100 %
(resolution 1 h)
(resolution 1 h)
(resolution 0.1 %)
the generic standards EN 50081-2 and EN 50082-2 for the EMC
Motor start-up data: of the last 5 start-ups Directive and standard EN 60255-6 for the low-voltage Directive.
start-up time 0.30 s to 9999.99 s (resolution 10 ms)
10 start-up current (primary)

0 A to 1000 kA (resolution 1 A)
Display range Up to 7 digits

Criterion Overshoot of an adjustable current
11 Trip circuit monitoring

threshold (BkrClosed IMIN)
With one or two binary inputs

Commissioning aids
12 Phase rotation eld check,

operational measured values,
circuit-breaker/switching device
test,
creation of a test measurement
13 report
Clock
Time synchronization DCF77/IRIG-B signal
(telegram format IRIG-B000),
14 binary input,
communication
15

7SJ61multifunction protection relay
Housing, binary inputs (BI) and outputs (BO)

7SJ61 - -
1
Housing 19, 4 line text display, 3 BI, 4 BO, 1 live status contact 0
Housing 19, 4 line text display, 8 BI, 8 BO, 1 live status contact 1
Housing 19, 4 line text display, 11 BI, 6 BO, 1 live status contact
Housing 19, graphic display, 8 BI, 8 BO, 1 live status contact 7)
2 2
3
Housing 19, graphic display, 11 BI, 6 BO, 1 live status contact 7) 4
Measuring inputs (4 x I)
Iph =1A1), Ie =1A1) (min. = 0.05 A)
3
Position 15 only with A 1
Iph =1A1), Ie = sensitive (min. = 0.001 A)
Position 15 only with B
Iph =5A1), Ie =5A1) (min. = 0.25 A)
2
4
Iph =5A1), Ie = sensitive (min. = 0.001 A)
Position 15 only with B 6
Iph =5A1), Ie =1A1) (min. = 0.05 A)
5
Rated auxiliary voltage (power supply, indication voltage)
DC 24 to 48 V, threshold binary input DC 19 V 3)
DC 60 to 125 V 2), threshold binary input DC 19 V 3)
2
4 6
DC 110 to 250 V 2), AC 115 to 230 V4) , threshold binary input DC 88 V 3) 5
Unit version
For panel surface mounting, 2 tier terminal top/bottom
7
B
For panel ush mounting, plug-in terminal (2/3 pin connector) D
For panel ush mounting, screw-type terminal (direct connection/ring-type cable lugs) E
Region-specic default settings/function versions and language settings

8
Region DE, 50 Hz, IEC, language: German, selectable A
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: English (GB), selectable B
Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI, language: English (US), selectable
Region FR, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: French, selectable
C
D
9
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: Spanish, selectable E
Region IT, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: Italian, selectable F
System interface (Port B): Refer to page 5/77 10

No system interface 0
Protocols see page 5/77
Service interface (Port C)

No interface at rear side
11
0
DIGSI 4 / modem, electrical RS232 1
DIGSI 4 / modem / RTD-box5), electrical RS485 2
DIGSI 4 / modem / RTD-box5)6), optical 820 nm wavelength, ST connector 3 12
Measuring/fault recording
Fault recording 1
Slave pointer,mean values, min /max values, fault recording 3
13
1) Rated current can be selected by means of jumpers.

2) Transition between the two auxiliary voltage ranges can be selected
5) Temperature monitoring box 7XV5662-
refer to Accessories.
AD10, 14
by means of jumpers. 6) When using the temperature monitoring box at an optical interface,
3) The binary input thresholds can be selected per binary input by the additional RS485 ber-optic converter 7XV5650-0 A00 is
means of jumpers.
4) AC 230 V, starting from device version /EE.
required.
7) starting from device version .../GG and FW-Version V4.82 15
Description Order No. Order code
1 7SJ61multifunction protection relay
Designation ANSI No. Description

7SJ61 - -
Basic version Control
2 50/51
50N/51N
50N/51N
Overcurrent protection I>, I>>, I>>>, Ip
Ground-fault protection IE>, IE>>, IE>>>, IEp
Ground-fault protection via insensitive
IEE function: IEE>, IEE>>, IEEp1)
50/50N Flexible protection functions (index quantities
3 49
derived from current): Additional time-overcurrent
protection stages I2>, I>>>>, IE>>>>
Overload protection (with 2 time constants)
46 Phase balance current protection
4 50BF
37
74TC
Breaker failure protection
4 setting groups, cold-load pickup
Inrush blocking
5 IEF
86 Lockout
Intermittent ground fault

F A
P A
50Ns/51Ns Sensitive ground-fault detection (non-directional)

87N High-impedance restricted ground fault
6 IEF 50Ns/51Ns Sensitive ground-fault detection (non-directional)
F B 2)

Intermittent ground fault P B 2)
7 Motor IEF 50Ns/51Ns

87N
Sensitive ground-fault detection (non-directional)
48/14 Starting time supervision, locked rotor
8 51M Load jam protection, motor statistics R B 2)
Motor 50Ns/51Ns Sensitive ground-fault detection (non-directional)

9 66/86
51M
Restart inhibit
Load jam protection, motor statistics H B 2)
Motor 48/14 Starting time supervision, locked rotor

10 51M Load jam protection, motor statistics H A
ARC Without 0
79 With auto-reclosure 1
11
12
13
14 Basic version included

IEF = Intermittent ground fault
1) 50N/51N only with insensitive ground-current transformer
15 when position 7 = 1, 5, 7.
2) Sensitive ground-current transformer only when position 7 = 2, 6.


7SJ61multifunction protection relay
System interface (on rear of unit, Port B)

7SJ61 - - -
1
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, RS232 1
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, RS485 2 2
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, 820 nm ber, ST connector 3
PROFIBUS-FMS Slave, RS485 4
PROFIBUS-FMS Slave, 820 nm wavelength, single ring, ST connector 1)
PROFIBUS-FMS Slave, 820 nm wavelength, double ring, ST connector 1)
5
6 3
PROFIBUS-DP Slave, RS485 9 L 0 A
PROFIBUS-DP Slave, 820 nm wavelength, double ring, ST connector 1) 9 L 0 B
MODBUS, RS485
MODBUS, 820 nm wavelength, ST connector 2)
9
9
L 0 D
L 0 E
4
DNP 3.0, RS485 9 L 0 G
DNP 3.0, 820 nm wavelength, ST connector 2) 9 L 0 H
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, redundant, RS485, RJ45 connector 2)
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RSJ45 connector (EN 100)
9
9
L 0 P
L 0 R
5
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, optical, double, ST connector (EN 100) 2) 9 L 0 S
DNP3 TCP + IEC 61850, 100Mbit Eth, electrical, double, RJ45 connector 3) 9 L 2 R
DNP3 TCP + IEC 61850, 100Mbit Eth, optical, double, LC connector 3)
PROFINET + IEC 61850, 100Mbit Eth, electrical, double, RJ45 connector 3)
9
9
L 2 S
L 3 R
6
PROFINET + IEC 61850, 100Mbit Eth, optical, double, RJ45 connector 3) 9 L 3 S
1) Not with position 9 = B; if 9 = B, please order 7SJ6 unit with RS485 port and separate ber-optic converters.
For single ring, please order converter 6GK1502-3AB10, not available with position 9 = B. 7
For double ring, please order converter 6GK1502-4AB10, not available with position 9 = B.
The converter requires a AC 24 V power supply (e.g. power supply 7XV5810-0BA00).
2) Not available with position 9 = B.
3) Available with V4.9 8
Sample order 9
Position Order No. + Order code
7SJ612 5 - 5 E C 9 1 - 3 F A 1 + L 0 G
10
6 I/Os: 11 BI/6 BO, 1 live status contact 2
7 Current transformer: 5 A 5
8 Power supply: DC 110 to 250 V, AC 115 V to AC 230 V
9 Unit version: Flush-mounting housing, screw-type terminals
5
E 11
10 Region: US, English language (US); 60 Hz, ANSI C
11 Communication: System interface: DNP 3.0, RS485 9 L 0 G
12
13
Communication: DIGSI 4, electric RS232
Measuring/fault recording: Extended measuring and fault records
1
3
12
14/15 Protection function package: Basic version F A
13
14
15
1 DIGSI 4
units running under MS Windows 2000/XP Professional Edition
Basis
2 Full version with license for 10 computers, on CD-ROM

Professional
3 control displays) and DIGSI 4 Remote (remote operation)
Professional + IEC 61850
7XS5402-0AA00
Complete version:
CFC Editor (logic editor), Display Editor (editor for control
4 displays),
DIGSI 4 Remote (remote operation)
+ IEC 61850 system congurator 7XS5403-0AA00
IEC 61850 System congurator

5 Software for conguration of stations with IEC 61850 commu-
nication under DIGSI, running under MS Windows 2000 or
XP Professional Edition
Optional package for DIGSI 4 Basis or Professional
License for 10 PCs. Authorization by serial number. On CD-ROM 7XS5460-0AA00
6 SIGRA 4
Software for graphic visualization, analysis and evaluation of
fault records. Can also be used for fault records of devices of
7 other manufacturers (Comtrade format). Running under

MS Windows 2000 or XP Professional Edition (generally contai-
ned in DIGSI Professional, but can be ordered additionally)
Authorization by serial number. On CD-ROM. 7XS5410-0AA00
Temperature monitoring box

8 AC/DC 24 to 60 V 7XV5662-2AD10
AC/DC 90 to 240 V 7XV5662-5AD10
Varistor / Voltage Arrester
9 Voltage arrester for high-impedance REF protection

125 Vrms; 600 A; 1S/S 256 C53207-A401-D76-1
240 Vrms; 600 A; 1S/S 1088 C53207-A401-D77-1
Connecting cable
10 Cable between PC/notebook (9-pin con.) and protection unit
(9-pin connector) (contained in DIGSI 4, but can be ordered
additionally) 7XV5100-4
11 SIPROTEC 4 unit
- length 5 m /16.4 ft 7XV5103-7AA05
- length 25 m / 82 ft 7XV5103-7AA25
- length 50 m /164 ft 7XV5103-7AA50
12 Manual for 7SJ61

English/German C53000-G1140-C210-x 1)
13
14
15 1) x = please inquire for latest edition (exact Order No.).


package
Terminal safety cover

1
LSP2289-afp.eps
Voltage/current terminal 18-pole/12-pole C73334-A1-C31-1 1 Siemens
Mounting rail Connector 2-pin
Connector 3-pin
C73334-A1-C35-1
C73334-A1-C36-1
1
1
Siemens
Siemens
2
Crimp connector CI2 0.5 to 1 mm2 0-827039-1 4000 AMP 1)
taped on reel
3
LSP2090-afp.eps
LSP2091-afp.eps
Crimp connector: Type III+ 0.75 to 1.5 mm2 0-163084-2 1 AMP 1)
taped on reel
2-pin connector 3-pin connector Crimping tool for Type III+ 0-539635-1 1 AMP 1) 4
and matching female 0-539668-2 1 AMP 1)
Crimping tool for CI2 0-734372-1 1 AMP 1)
5
LSP2093-afp.eps
LSP2092-afp.eps
Short-circuit links
for current terminals C73334-A1-C33-1 1 Siemens
for other terminals C73334-A1-C34-1 1 Siemens
Short-circuit links
Short-circuit links
for current terminals Mounting rail for 19" rack C73165-A63-D200-1 1 Siemens 6
1) Your local Siemens representative can inform you on local suppliers.
10
11
12
13
14
15
Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
14 *) For pinout of communication ports see part 14 of this catalog.

For the allocation of the terminals of the panel surface-mounting version
refer to the manual (http://www.siemens.com/siprotec).
15 Fig. 5/72 7SJ610 connection diagram

Connection diagram
7SJ611x-x B xxx-xxxx
7SJ611x-x D xxx-xxxx
1
7SJ611, E
7SJ613 E
9
LSA2820-dgpen.eps
10
11
12
13
*) For pinout of communication ports see part 14 of this catalog. 14

Fig. 5/73 7SJ611, 7SJ613 connection diagram 15

Connection diagram
10
11
12
13

15 Fig. 5/74 7SJ612, 7SJ614 connection diagram

Protection functions (continued)

Inrush restraint
Motor protection 1
Overload protection
Under-/overvoltage protection 2
Under-/overfrequency protection
Rate-of-frequency-change protection
LSP2299-afpen.eps
Power protection (e.g. reverse, factor)
3
SIPV6_116.eps
Undervoltage controlled reactive power
protection
Negative-sequence protection 4
Phase-sequence monitoring
Synchro-check
Fig. 5/75 SIPROTEC 4 7SJ62 multifunction protection relay

Fault locator
Lockout
5
with text (left) and graphic display
Auto-reclosure
Description
Control functions/programmable logic
Commands f. ctrl of CB and of isolators
6
The SIPROTEC 4 7SJ62 relays can be used for line protection of Position of switching elements is shown on the graphic display
high and medium voltage networks with earthed (grounded), Control via keyboard, binary inputs, DIGSI 4 or SCADA system
low-resistance grounded, isolated or compensated neutral point.
With regard to motor protection, the SIPROTEC 4 7SJ62 is suit-
User-dened logic with CFC (e.g. interlocking) 7
able for asynchronous machines of all sizes. The relay performs Monitoring functions
all functions of backup protection supplementary to transformer
Operational measured values V, I, f
differential protection.
7SJ62 is featuring the "exible protection functions". Up to
Energy metering values Wp, Wq 8
20 protection functions can be added according to individual
requirements. Thus, for example, a rate-of-frequency-change Slave pointer
protection or reverse power protection can be implemented. Trip circuit supervision
Fuse failure monitor
9
The relay provides control of the circuit-breaker, further
switching devices and automation functions. The integrated pro- 8 oscillographic fault records
grammable logic (CFC) allows the user to implement their own Motor statistics
functions, e. g. for the automation of switchgear (interlocking).
The user is also allowed to generate user-dened messages. Communication interfaces
10
The exible communication interfaces are open for modern System interface
communication architectures with control systems. IEC 60870-5-103 / IEC 61850
PROFIBUS-FMS / -DP
DNP 3.0/DNP3 TCP/MODBUS RTU
11
Function overview Service interface for DIGSI 4 (modem)
Time synchronization via IRIG B/DCF77 12
Directional overcurrent protection
Sensitive directional ground-fault detection
Hardware
13
Intermittent ground-fault protection 4 current transformers
Directional intermittent ground fault protection 3/4 voltage transformers
High-impedance restricted ground fault 8/11 binary inputs

8/6 output relays
14
15
Application
LSA2958-egpen.eps
7
8 Application Synchro-check
In order to connect two components of a power system, the
The SIPROTEC 4 7SJ62 unit is a numerical protection relay that relay provides a synchro-check function which veries that
9 also performs control and monitoring functions and therefore
supports the user in cost-effective power system management,
switching ON does not endanger the stability of the power
system.
and ensures reliable supply of electric power to the customers.
Local operation has been designed according to ergonomic Motor protection
10 criteria. A large, easy-to-read display was a major design aim.

When protecting motors, the 7SJ62 relay is suitable for asyn-
chronous machines of all sizes.
Control
The integrated control function permits control of disconnect Transformer protection
11 devices, grounding switches or circuit-breakers via the inte-

grated operator panel, binary inputs, DIGSI 4 or the control and
The relay performs all functions of backup protection supple-
mentary to transformer differential protection. The inrush
protection system (e.g. SICAM). The present status (or position)
of the primary equipment can be displayed, in case of devices
The high-impedance restricted ground-fault protection detects
with graphic display. A full range of command processing func-
12 tions is provided.
short-circuits and insulation faults on the transformer.
Backup protection
Programmable logic
The 7SJ62 can be used universally for backup protection.
The integrated logic characteristics (CFC) allow the user to
13 implement their own functions for automation of switchgear Flexible protection functions
user can also generate user-dened messages. By conguring a connection between a standard protection logic
and any measured or derived quantity, the functional scope of
14 Line protection the relays can be easily expanded by up to 20 protection stages
or protection functions.
The 7SJ62 units can be used for line protection of high and
medium-voltage networks with earthed (grounded), low- Metering values
resistance grounded, isolated or compensated neutral point.
15 Extensive measured values, limit values and metered values

Application
50, 50N I>, I>>, I>>>, IE>, IE>>,IE>>> Denite-time overcurrent protection (phase/neutral)
Ip, IEp Inverse overcurrent protection (phase/neutral), phase function with voltage-dependent option
1
50, 51V, 51N
67, 67N Idir>, Idir>>, Ip dir Directional overcurrent protection (denite/inverse, phase/neutral),
IEdir>, IEdir>>, IEp dir Directional comparison protection
67Ns/50Ns IEE>, IEE>>, IEEp Directional / non-directional sensitive ground-fault detection 2
59N/64 VE, V0> Displacement voltage, zero-sequence voltage
IIE> Intermittent ground fault

3
67Ns IIE dir> Directional intermittent ground fault protection
High-impedance restricted ground-fault protection
50BF
87N
4
79 Auto-reclosure
25 Synchro-check 5
V2>, phase-sequence Unbalance-voltage protection and / or phase-sequence monitoring

47
> Thermal overload protection
6
49
51M Load jam protection 7

Restart inhibit
66/86

8
38 Temperature monitoring via external device (RTD-box), e.g. bearing temperature monitoring
27, 59 V<, V> Undervoltage / overvoltage protection 9

59R dV/dt Rate-of-voltage-change protection
32 P<>, Q<> Reverse-power, forward-power protection
27/Q Q>/V< Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection

10
55 cos Power factor protection
81O/U f>, f< Overfrequency / underfrequency protection

11
81R df/dt Rate-of-frequency-change protection
21FL Fault locator

12
13
14
15
2
LSP2099-afpen.eps
3
4
Fig. 5/77 Rear view with screw-type Fig. 5/78 Denite-time overcurrent protection Fig. 5/79 Inverse-time overcurrent protection
terminals, 1/3-rack size
5
Construction Available inverse-time characteristics
6 Connection techniques and housing with many advantages
Inverse
1/3-rack size (text display variants) and 1/2-rack size (graphic Short inverse
display variants) are the available housing widths of the 7SJ62
Long inverse
relays, referred to a 19" module frame system. This means that
7 previous models can always be replaced. The height is a uniform
244 mm for ush-mounting housings and 266 mm for surface-
Moderately inverse
Very inverse
mounting housing. All cables can be connected with or without
Extremely inverse
ring lugs.
8 In the case of surface mounting on a panel, the connection Reset characteristics
terminals are located above and below in the form of screw-type
terminals. The communication interfaces are located in a sloped For easier time coordination with electromechanical relays, reset
case at the top and bottom of the housing. characteristics according to ANSI C37.112 and IEC 60255-3 /
9 BS 142 standards are applied.
When using the reset characteristic (disk emulation), a reset
Protection functions process is initiated after the fault current has disappeared. This
reset process corresponds to the reverse movement of the Fer-
10 Overcurrent protection (ANSI 50, 50N, 51, 51V, 51N) raris disk of an electromechanical relay (thus: disk emulation).
This function is based on the phase-selective measurement of User-denable characteristics

the three phase currents and the ground current (four trans-
Instead of the predened time characteristics according to ANSI,
11 formers). Three denite-time overcurrent protection elements
(DMT) exist both for the phases and for the ground. The current
tripping characteristics can be dened by the user for phase and
ground units separately. Up to 20 current/time value pairs may
threshold and the delay time can be set within a wide range.
be programmed. They are set as pairs of numbers or graphically
In addition, inverse-time overcurrent protection characteristics
in DIGSI 4.
12 The inverse-time function provides as an option voltage- Inrush restraint
restraint or voltage-controlled operating modes.
harmonic is detected during transformer energization, pickup of
13 non-directional and directional normal elements are blocked.

For directional and non-directional overcurrent protection
14 functions the initiation thresholds and tripping times can be
switched via binary inputs or by time control.
15
Directional overcurrent protection (ANSI 67, 67N)

Directional phase and ground protection are separate functions.
They operate in parallel to the non-directional overcurrent 1
elements. Their pickup values and delay times can be set sepa-
rately. Denite-time and inverse-time characteristics are offered.
The tripping characteristic can be rotated about 180 degrees.
By means of voltage memory, directionality can be determined
2
reliably even for close-in (local) faults. If the switching device
closes onto a fault and the voltage is too low to determine direc-
tion, directionality (directional decision) is made with voltage
from the voltage memory. If no voltage exists in the memory, 3
tripping occurs according to the coordination schedule.
For ground protection, users can choose whether the direction
is to be determined via zero-sequence system or negative-
sequence system quantities (selectable). Using negative- 4
sequence variables can be advantageous in cases where the zero
Fig. 5/80 Directional characteristic of the directional overcurrent
voltage tends to be very low due to unfavorable zero-sequence protection
impedances.
Directional comparison protection (cross-coupling)

5
It is used for selective protection of sections fed from two
sources with instantaneous tripping, i.e. without the disad-
vantage of time coordination. The directional comparison 6
protection is suitable if the distances between the protection
stations are not signicant and pilot wires are available for
signal transmission. In addition to the directional comparison
protection, the directional coordinated overcurrent protection
is used for complete selective backup protection. If operated in
7
a closed-circuit connection, an interruption of the transmission
line is detected.
(Sensitive) directional ground-fault detection 8

(ANSI 64, 67Ns, 67N)
For isolated-neutral and compensated networks, the direction
of power ow in the zero sequence is calculated from the zero-
sequence current I0 and zero-sequence voltage V0.
9
For networks with an isolated neutral, the reactive current
component is evaluated; for compensated networks, the active
current component or residual resistive current is evaluated.
For special network conditions, e.g. high-resistance grounded
10
networks with ohmic-capacitive ground-fault current or low- Fig. 5/81 Directional determination using cosine measurements for
resistance grounded networks with ohmic-inductive current, the compensated networks
tripping characteristics can be rotated approximately
45 degrees. 11
Two modes of ground-fault direction detection can be imple-
(Sensitive) ground-fault detection
mented: tripping or signalling only mode.
(ANSI 50Ns, 51Ns / 50N, 51N)
It has the following functions:
For high-resistance grounded networks, a sensitive input
12
TRIP via the displacement voltage VE. transformer is connected to a phase-balance neutral current
Two instantaneous elements or one instantaneous plus one transformer (also called core-balance CT).
user-dened characteristic.
Each element can be set in forward, reverse, or non-
The function can also be operated in the insensitive mode as an
additional short-circuit protection.
13
directional.
The function can also be operated in the insensitive mode as
an additional short-circuit protection.
14
15
1 Intermittent (re-striking) faults occur due to insulation weak-

nesses in cables or as a result of water penetrating cable joints.
Such faults either simply cease at some stage or develop into
lasting short-circuits. During intermittent activity, however,
star-point resistors in networks that are impedance-grounded
2 may undergo thermal overloading. The normal ground-fault pro-
tection cannot reliably detect and interrupt the current pulses,
some of which can be very brief.
The selectivity required with intermittent ground faults is
3 achieved by summating the duration of the individual pulses and
by triggering when a (settable) summed time is reached. The
response threshold IIE> evaluates the r.m.s. value, referred to
one systems period.
4 Directional intermittent ground fault protection (ANSI 67Ns)

Fig. 5/82 High-impedance restricted ground-fault protection
The directional intermittent ground fault protection has to detect
intermittent ground faults in resonant grounded cable systems
5 selectively. Intermittent ground faults in resonant grounded

cable systems are usually characterized by the following proper- High-impedance restricted ground-fault protection (ANSI 87N)
ties:
The high-impedance measurement principle is an uncomplicated
A very short high-current ground current pulse (up to several
and sensitive method for detecting ground faults, especially on
6 hundred amperes) with a duration of under 1 ms
They are self-extinguishing and re-ignite within one halfperiod
up to several periods, depending on the power system condi-
tions and the fault characteristic. When the high-impedance measurement principle is applied,
all current transformers in the protected area are connected in
7 Over longer periods (many seconds to minutes), they can
develop into static faults.
parallel and operated on one common resistor of relatively high
R whose voltage is measured (see Fig. 5/82). In the case of 7SJ6
Such intermittent ground faults are frequently caused by weak units, the voltage is measured by detecting the current through
insulation, e.g. due to decreased water resistance of old cables. the (external) resistor R at the sensitive current measurement
8 Ground fault functions based on fundamental component
measured values are primarily designed to detect static ground
input IEE. The varistor V serves to limit the voltage in the event
of an internal fault. It cuts off the high momentary voltage
faults and do not always behave correctly in case of intermittent spikes occurring at transformer saturation. At the same time,
ground faults. The function described here evaluates speci cally this results in smoothing of the voltage without any noteworthy
9 the ground current pulses and puts them into relation with the
zero-sequence voltage to determine the direction.
reduction of the average value.
If no faults have occurred and in the event of external faults, the
Phase-balance current protection (ANSI 46) system is at equilibrium, and the voltage through the resistor is
(Negative-sequence protection) approximately zero. In the event of internal faults, an imbalance
10 In line protection, the two-element phase-balance current/
occurs which leads to a voltage and a current ow through the
resistor R.
negative-sequence protection permits detection on the high side
of high-resistance phase-to-phase faults and phase-to-ground The current transformers must be of the same type and must
faults that are on the low side of a transformer (e.g. with the at least offer a separate core for the high-impedance restricted
11 switch group Dy 5). This provides backup protection for high- ground-fault protection. They must in particular have the same
transformation ratio and an approximately identical knee-point
resistance faults beyond the transformer.
voltage. They should also demonstrate only minimal measuring
Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF) errors.
12 If a faulted portion of the electrical circuit is not disconnected
initiated using the breaker failure protection which operates
the circuit-breaker, e.g. of an upstream (higher-level) protection
13 relay. Breaker failure is detected if, after a trip command, current
is still owing in the faulted circuit. As an option, it is possible to
make use of the circuit-breaker position indication.
14
15
Flexible protection functions

The 7SJ62 units enable the user to easily add on up to 20
protective functions. To this end, parameter denitions are used 1
to link a standard protection logic with any chosen characteristic
quantity (measured or derived quantity) (Fig. 5/83). The stand-
ard logic consists of the usual protection elements such as the
pickup message, the parameter-denable delay time, the TRIP
command, a blocking possibility, etc. The mode of operation
dv /dt
2
for current, voltage, power and power factor quantities can be
three-phase or single-phase. Almost all quantities can be oper-
ated as greater than or less than stages. All stages operate with
protection priority. LSA4113-aen.eps
3
Protection stages/functions attainable on the basis of the avail-
Fig. 5/83 Flexible protection functions
able characteristic quantities:
Function ANSI No.

4
I>, IE> 50, 50N
Starting of the ARC depends on the trip command selection
(e.g. 46, 50, 51, 67)
V<, V>, VE>, dV/dt 27, 59, 59R, 64
3I0>, I1>, I2>, I2/I1, 50N, 46,
Blocking option of the ARC via binary inputs
5
3V0>, V1><, V2>< 59N, 47
P><, Q>< 32
The directional and non-directional elements can either be
blocked or operated non-delayed depending on the auto-
cos (p.f.)><
f><
55
81O, 81U
reclosure cycle 6
Dynamic setting change of the directional and non-directional
df/dt>< 81R elements can be activated depending on the ready AR
For example, the following can be implemented:

7
Reverse power protection (ANSI 32R) with an integrated pre-warning element for temperature and
Rate-of-frequency-change protection (ANSI 81R) current can be applied. The temperature is calculated using a
Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection

thermal homogeneous-body model (according to IEC 60255-8),
which takes account both of the energy entering the equipment
8
(ANSI 27/Q) and the energy losses. The calculated temperature is constantly
The undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection protects adjusted accordingly. Thus, account is taken of the previous load
the system for mains decoupling purposes. To prevent a voltage
collapse in energy systems, the generating side, e.g. a genera-
and the load uctuations.
9
For thermal protection of motors (especially the stator) a
tor, must be equipped with voltage and frequency protection further time constant can be set so that the thermal ratios can
devices. An undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection is be detected correctly while the motor is rotating and when it is
required at the supply system connection point. It detects critical
power system situations and ensures that the power generation
stopped. The ambient temperature or the temperature of the
coolant can be detected serially via an external temperature
10
facility is disconnected from the mains. Furthermore, it ensures monitoring box (resistance-temperature detector box, also
that reconnection only takes place under stable power system called RTD-box). The thermal replica of the overload function
conditions. The associated criteria can be parameterized. is automatically adapted to the ambient conditions. If there is
no RTD-box it is assumed that the ambient temperatures are 11
Synchro-check (ANSI 25) constant.
In case of switching ON the circuit- breaker, the units can check
Settable dropout delay times
whether the two subnetworks are synchronized.
Voltage-, frequency- and phase-angle-differences are being If the devices are used in parallel with electromechanical relays 12
checked to determine whether synchronous conditions are in networks with intermittent faults, the long dropout times of
existent. the electromechanical devices (several hundred milliseconds)
can lead to problems in terms of time grading. Clean time
Auto-reclosure (ANSI 79) grading is only possible if the dropout time is approximately the 13
Multiple reclosures can be dened by the user and lockout will same. This is why the parameter of dropout times can be dened
occur if a fault is present after the last reclosure. The following for certain functions such as time-over-current protection,
functions are possible: ground short-circuit and phase-balance current protection.
3-pole ARC for all types of faults 14
Separate settings for phase and ground faults
Multiple ARC, one rapid auto-reclosure (RAR) and up to nine
delayed auto-reclosures (DAR)
15
Motor protection
1 Restart inhibit (ANSI 66/86)

If a motor is started up too many times in
succession, the rotor can be subject to
thermal overload, especially the upper
2 edges of the bars. The rotor temperature

is calculated from the stator current. The
reclosing lockout only permits start-up
of the motor if the rotor has sufcient
thermal reserves for a complete start-up
3 (see Fig. 5/84).
Emergency start-up
This function disables the reclosing lockout
4 via a binary input by storing the state of
the thermal replica as long as the binary
input is active. It is also possible to reset
the thermal replica to zero.
5 Temperature monitoring (ANSI 38)

Up to two temperature monitoring boxes
Fig. 5/84
with a total of 12 measuring sensors
can be used for temperature monitoring
6 and detection by the protection relay. The thermal status of
motors, generators and transformers can be monitored with this
Load jam protection (ANSI 51M)
Sudden high loads can cause slowing down and blocking of
device. Additionally, the temperature of the bearings of rotating the motor and mechanical damages. The rise of current due
machines are monitored for limit value violation. The tempera- to a load jam is being monitored by this function (alarm and
tripping).
7 tures are being measured with the help of temperature detectors
at various locations of the device to be protected. This data is The overload protection function is too slow and therefore not
transmitted to the protection relay via one or two temperature suitable under these circumstances.
monitoring boxes (see Accessories, page 5/115).
8 Starting time supervision (ANSI 48/14)
Starting time supervision protects the motor against long
The negative-sequence / phase-balance current protection detects
unwanted start-ups that might occur in the event of excessive a phase failure or load unbalance due to network asymmetry and
load torque or excessive voltage drops within the motor, or if the protects the rotor from impermissible temperature rise.
9 rotor is locked. Rotor temperature is calculated from measured
stator current. The tripping time is calculated according to the Undercurrent monitoring (ANSI 37)
following equation: With this function, a sudden drop in current, which can occur
due to a reduced motor load, is detected. This may be due to
10 I 2 Motor statistics
t = A TA
I Essential information on start-up of the motor (duration, cur-
rent, voltage) and general information on number of starts, total
11 IMOTOR START = Pickup current to detect a motor start
operating time, total down time, etc. are saved as statistics in
the device.
t = Tripping time
Voltage protection
IA = Rated motor starting current
12 TA = Tripping time at rated motor starting current
(2 times, for warm and cold motor)
Overvoltage protection (ANSI 59)
The two-element overvoltage protection detects unwanted
network and machine overvoltage conditions. The function can
The characteristic (equation) can be adapted optimally to the operate either with phase-to-phase, phase-to-ground, positive
13 state of the motor by applying different tripping times TA in
dependence of either cold or warm motor state. For differentia-
phase-sequence or negative phase-sequence system voltage.
Three-phase and single-phase connections are possible.
tion of the motor state the thermal model of the rotor is applied.
Undervoltage protection (ANSI 27)
If the trip time is rated according to the above formula, even a
The two-element undervoltage protection provides protec-
14 prolonged start-up and reduced voltage (and reduced start-up
current) will be evaluated correctly. The tripping time is inverse
tion against dangerous voltage drops (especially for electric
machines). Applications include the isolation of generators or
(current dependent).
motors from the network to avoid undesired operating states
A binary signal is set by a speed sensor to detect a blocked rotor. and a possible loss of stability. Proper operating conditions
15 An instantaneous tripping is effected. of electrical machines are best evaluated with the positive-
sequence quantities. The protection function is active over a

wide frequency range (45 to 55, 55 to 65 Hz)1). Even when

falling below this frequency range the function continues to
work, however, with a greater tolerance band. 1
The function can operate either with phase-to-phase, phase-to-
ground or positive phase-sequence voltage and can be moni-
tored with a current criterion. Three-phase and single-phase
connections are possible. 2
Frequency protection (ANSI 81O/U)
Frequency protection can be used for overfrequency and under-
frequency protection. Electric machines and parts of the system
are protected from unwanted speed deviations. Unwanted 3
frequency changes in the network can be detected and the load
can be removed at a specied frequency setting.
Frequency protection can be used over a wide frequency range
(40 to 60, 50 to 70 Hz)1). There are four elements (selectable 4
as overfrequency or underfrequency) and each element can be
delayed separately. Blocking of the frequency protection can be
performed if using a binary input or by using an undervoltage
element. 5
Fault locator (ANSI 21FL)
The integrated fault locator calculates the fault impedance and
Fig. 5/85 CB switching cycle diagram
the distance-to-fault. The results are displayed in , kilometers
(miles) and in percent of the line length. 6
Circuit-breaker wear monitoring Commissioning
Methods for determining circuit-breaker contact wear or the Commissioning could hardly be easier and is fully supported by
and the state of the binary outputs can be set individually. The
7
benet lies in reduced maintenance costs. operation of switching elements (circuit-breakers, disconnect
There is no mathematically exact method of calculating the devices) can be checked using the switching functions of the bay
wear or the remaining service life of circuit-breakers that takes
into account the arc-chamber's physical conditions when the CB
ranging operational measured values. To prevent transmission of
8
opens. This is why various methods of determining CB wear have information to the control center during maintenance, the bay
evolved which reect the different operator philosophies. To do controller communications can be disabled to prevent unneces-
sary data from being transmitted. During commissioning, all
justice to these, the devices offer several methods:
I
indications with test marking for test purposes can be connected 9
to a control and protection system.
Ix, with x = 1... 3
Test operation
i2t
During commissioning, all indications can be passed to an
automatic control system for test purposes.
10
Two-point method Control and automatic functions
The CB manufacturers double-logarithmic switching cycle
diagram (see Fig. 5/85) and the breaking current at the time
Control
11
of contact opening serve as the basis for this method. After CB
support all control and monitoring functions that are required
opening, the two-point method calculates the number of still
for operating medium-voltage or high-voltage substations.
possible switching cycles. To this end, the two points P1 and P2
only have to be set on the device. These are specied in the CB's The main application is reliable control of switching and other
processes.
12
technical data.
All of these methods are phase-selective and a limit value can be The status of primary equipment or auxiliary devices can be
set in order to obtain an alarm if the actual value falls below or obtained from auxiliary contacts and communicated to the
exceeds the limit value during determination of the remaining 7SJ62 via binary inputs. Therefore it is possible to detect and
indicate both the OPEN and CLOSED position or a fault or
13
service life.
intermediate circuit-breaker or auxiliary contact position.
Customized functions (ANSI 32, 51V, 55, etc.)
Additional functions, which are not time critical, can be imple-
mented via the CFC using measured values. Typical functions
integrated operator panel
binary inputs
14
include reverse power, voltage controlled overcurrent, phase substation control and protection system
angle detection, and zero-sequence voltage detection. DIGSI 4
15
1) The 45 to 55, 55 to 65 Hz range is available for fN = 50/60 Hz.

Functions
Automation / user-dened logic

1 (CFC), specic functions for the automation of switchgear or
substation. Functions are activated via function keys, binary
input or via communication interface.
2 Switching authority
Switching authority is determined according to parameters and
communication.
3 possible. The following sequence of switching authority is laid
Command processing
4
LSP2077f.eps
hardware and software, checking of the external process,
control actions using functions such as runtime monitoring and
5 automatic command termination after output. Here are some
typical applications:
Single and double commands using 1, 1 plus 1 common or 2
trip contacts
6 User-denable bay interlocks
Operating sequences combining several switching operations Fig. 5/86 NXAIR panel (air-insulated)
such as control of circuit-breakers, disconnectors and ground-
ing switches
7 Triggering of switching operations, indications or alarm by Switchgear cubicles for high/medium voltage
combination with existing information All units are designed specically to meet the requirements of
Assignment of feedback to command high/medium-voltage applications.
8 The positions of the circuit-breaker or switching devices and

transformer taps are acquired by feedback. These indication
In general, no separate measuring instruments (e.g., for current,
voltage, frequency, ) or additional control components are
inputs are logically assigned to the corresponding command necessary.
outputs. The unit can therefore distinguish whether the indica- Measured values
9 tion change is a consequence of switching operation or whether
it is a spontaneous change of state.
The r.m.s. values are calculated from the acquired current and
voltage along with the power factor, frequency, active and reac-
Chatter disable tive power. The following functions are available for measured
Chatter disable feature evaluates whether, in a congured value processing:
10 period of time, the number of status changes of indication input
exceeds a specied gure. If exceeded, the indication input is
Currents IL1, IL2, IL3, IE, IEE (67Ns)
Voltages VL1, VL2, VL3, VL1L2, VL2L3, VL3L1
blocked for a certain period, so that the event list will not record
Symmetrical components I1, I2, 3I0; V1, V2, V0
excessive operations.
11 Indication ltering and delay
Power Watts, Vars, VA/P, Q, S (P, Q: total and phase selective)
Power factor (cos ), (total and phase selective)
Binary indications can be ltered or delayed.
Frequency
Filtering serves to suppress brief changes in potential at the
Energy kWh, kVarh, forward and reverse power ow
indication input. The indication is passed on only if the indica-
12 tion voltage is still present after a set period of time. In the Mean as well as minimum and maximum current and voltage
event of indication delay, there is a wait for a preset time. The values
information is passed on only if the indication voltage is still Operating hours counter
present after this time.
A further indication (or a command) can be derived from an Limit values are monitored using programmable logic in the
existing indication. Group indications can also be formed. The CFC. Commands can be derived from this limit value indica-
tion.
14 volume of information to the system interface can thus be
reduced and restricted to the most important signals. Zero suppression
15
Communication
Communication

2

4
5
by the user. The interface modules support the following applica-
tions: 6
telegrams in IRIG-B or DCF77 format into the units via time 7
System interface
through this interface. Radial or ring type station bus topolo- 8
Furthermore, the units can exchange data through this inter-
face via Ethernet and IEC 61850 protocol and can also be
Service interface
Fig. 5/88 Bus structure for station bus with Ethernet and
The service interface was conceived for remote access to a IEC 61850, ber-optic ring
number of protection units via DIGSI. On all units, it can be
an electrical RS232/RS485 or an optical interface. For special
applications, a maximum of two temperature monitoring Redundant solutions are also possible. Optionally it is possible to
10
boxes (RTD-box) can be connected to this interface as an read out and alter individual parameters (only possible with the
alternative. redundant module).
System interface protocols (retrottable) PROFIBUS-DP protocol 11

IEC 61850 protocol
available to a SIMATIC controller or, in the control direction, receive
commands from a central SIMATIC. Measured values can also be 12
tions. Siemens was the rst manufacturer to support this standard. transferred.
By means of this protocol, information can also be exchanged
directly between bay units so as to set up simple masterless MODBUS RTU protocol
systems for bay and system interlocking. Access to the units via the This uncomplicated, serial protocol is mainly used in industry and 13
Ethernet bus is also possible with DIGSI. by power supply corporations, and is supported by a number of
unit manufacturers. SIPROTEC units function as MODBUS slaves,
making their information available to a master or receiving infor-
The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is an international standard for the mation from it. A time-stamped event list is available. 14
transmission of protective data and fault recordings. All messages
from the unit and also control commands can be transferred by
means of published, Siemens-specic extensions to the protocol.
1) For units in panel surface-mounting housings 15

Communication
PROFINET
1 PROFINET is the ethernet-based successor

of Pro bus DP and is supported in the
is used in industry together with the
2 the optical and electrical Plus ethernet
November 2012. All network redundancy
3 ethernet modules, such as RSTP, PRP or
The network monitoring is possible via
4 SNMP V2 where special MIB les exist

the network topology. Single-point indica-
5 and metered values can be transmitted
via the protocol and can be selected by
6 are also transmitted spontaneously via
con gurable process alarms. Switching Fig. 5/89 System solution/communication
control via the device in the controlling
7 direction. The PROFINET implementation

is certied. The device also supports
the IEC 61850 protocol as a server on
the same ethernet module in addition
LSP3.01-0021.tif
to the PROFINET protocol. Client server
8 connections are possible for the intercom-
munication between devices, e.g. for
transmitting fault records and GOOSE
messages.
9 DNP 3.0 protocol
Power utilities use the serial DNP 3.0
(Distributed Network Protocol) for the sta-
10 tion and network control levels. SIPROTEC
units function as DNP slaves, supplying
their information to a master system or Fig. 5/90 Optical Ethernet communication module
receiving information from it. for IEC 61850 with integrated Ethernet-switch
11 DNP3 TCP
The ethernet-based TCP variant of the DNP3 protocol is sup- System solutions for protection and station control
ported with the electrical and optical ethernet module. Two
Together with the SICAM power automation system, SIPROTEC
12 DNP3 TCP clients are supported. Redundant ring structures can
be realized for DNP3 TCP with the help of the integrated switch
4 can be used with PROFIBUS-FMS. Over the low-cost electrical
RS485 bus, or interference-free via the optical double ring, the
in the module. For instance, a redundant optical ethernet ring
can be constructed. Single-point indications, double-point indi-
cations, measured and metered values can be congured with Units featuring IEC 60870-5-103 interfaces can be connected to
13 DIGSI 4 and are transmitted to the DNPi client. Switching com- SICAM in parallel via the RS485 bus or radially by ber-optic link.
mands can be executed in the controlling direction. Fault records Through this interface, the system is open for the connection of
of the device are stored in the binary Comtrade format and can units of other manufacturers (see Fig. 5/87).
be retrieved via the DNP 3 le transfer. The time synchronization
14 is performed via the DNPi client or SNTP. The device can also
be integrated into a network monitoring system via the SNMP
V2 protocol. Parallel to the DNP3 TCP protocol the IEC 61850
protocol (the device works as a server) and the GOOSE messages
15 of the IEC 61850 are available for the intercommunication
between devices.

Typical connections

For IEC 61850, an interoperable system solution is offered with 1
2
(see Fig. 5/88).
3
Typical connections
Connection of current and voltage transformers 4

Standard connection
For grounded networks, the ground current is obtained from the
phase currents by the residual current circuit. 5
Fig. 5/91 Residual current circuit without directional element Fig. 5/92 Sensitive ground-current detection without directional element 10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 5/93 Residual current circuit with directional element 15

Typical connections
Connection for compensated networks
1 The gure shows the connection of

two phase-to-ground voltages and the
VE voltage of the open delta winding
and a phase-balance neutral current
transformer for the ground current. This
2 connection maintains maximum precision
for directional ground-fault detection and
must be used in compensated networks.
Fig. 5/94 shows sensitive directional
3 ground-fault detection.
5 Fig. 5/94 Sensitive directional ground-fault detection with directional element for phases
Connection for isolated-neutral

6 or compensated networks only
If directional ground-fault protection is
not used, the connection can be made
with only two phase current transformers.
7 Directional phase short-circuit protection
can be achieved by using only two
primary transformers.
9
Fig. 5/95 Isolated-neutral or compensated networks
10
Connection for the synchro-check
function
11 The 3-phase system is connected as refer-

ence voltage, i. e. the outgoing voltages
as well as a single-phase voltage, in this
case a busbar voltage, that has to be
12 checked for synchronism.
13
14 Fig. 5/96 Measuring of the busbar voltage and the outgoing feeder
voltage for the synchro-check
15
Type of network Function Current connection Voltage connection 1

(Low-resistance) grounded network Overcurrent protection Residual circuit, with 3 phase-current
phase/ground non-directional transformers required, phase-balance
neutral current transformer possible
(Low-resistance) grounded networks Sensitive ground-fault protection Phase-balance neutral current

transformers required
2
Isolated or compensated networks Overcurrent protection phases Residual circuit, with 3 or 2 phase
non-directional
(Low-resistance) grounded networks Overcurrent protection

current transformers possible
Residual circuit, with 3 phase-current Phase-to-ground connection or

3
phases directional transformers possible phase-to-phase connection
Isolated or compensated networks Overcurrent protection Residual circuit, with 3 or 2 phase- Phase-to-ground connection or
phases directional current transformers possible phase-to-phase connection
4
(Low-resistance) grounded networks Overcurrent protection Residual circuit, with 3 phase-current Phase-to-ground connection required
ground directional transformers required, phase-balance
neutral current transformers possible
Isolated networks Sensitive ground-fault

protection
Residual circuit, if ground current
> 0.05 IN on secondary side, otherwise
3 times phase-to-ground connection or
phase-to-ground connection with open
5
phase-balance neutral current delta winding
Compensated networks Sensitive ground-fault protection Phase-balance neutral current

cos measurement transformers required
Phase-to-ground connection with open
delta winding required
6
7
Connection of circuit-breaker
Undervoltage releases
8
Undervoltage releases are used for auto-
matic tripping of high-voltage motors.
Example: 9
DC supply voltage of control system fails
and manual electric tripping is no longer
possible.
Automatic tripping takes place when 10
voltage across the coil drops below the trip
limit. In Fig. 5/97, tripping occurs due to Fig. 5/97 Undervoltage release with make contact (50, 51)
failure of DC supply voltage, by automatic
opening of the live status contact upon 11
failure of the protection unit or by short-
circuiting the trip coil in event of network
fault.
In Fig. 5/98 tripping is by failure of auxiliary 12
voltage and by interruption of tripping
circuit in the event of network failure. Upon
failure of the protection unit, the tripping
circuit is also interrupted, since contact 13
held by internal logic drops back into open
position.
14
Fig. 5/98 Undervoltage trip with locking contact (trip signal 50 is inverted) 15
1 One or two binary inputs can be used for

monitoring the circuit-breaker trip coil
interrupted.
2 Lockout (ANSI 86)
All binary outputs can be stored like LEDs
and reset using the LED reset key. The
3 lockout state is also stored in the event of
supply voltage failure. Reclosure can only
occur after the lockout state is reset.
4 Reverse-power protection for dual

supply (ANSI 32R)
If power is fed to a busbar through two
parallel infeeds, then in the event of any
5 fault on one of the infeeds it should be
selectively interrupted. This ensures a
continued supply to the busbar through

the remaining infeed. For this purpose,
6 directional devices are needed which

detect a short-circuit current or a power
ow from the busbar in the direction of
the infeed. The directional overcurrent
protection is usually set via the load
7 current. It cannot be used to deactivate
low-current faults. Reverse-power
protection can be set far below the rated
power. This ensures that it also detects
8 power feedback into the line in the event
of low-current faults with levels far below
the load current.
Reverse-power protection is performed via
9 the exible protection functions of the
7SJ62.
10
Fig. 5/100 Reverse-power protection for dual supply
11
12
13
14
15
Technical data
General unit data Binary outputs/command outputs

Measuring circuits
Type 7SJ621,
7SJ623,
7SJ625,
7SJ622
7SJ624
7SJ626
1
Current transformer
Command/indication relay 8 6
Rated current Inom 1 or 5 A (settable)
Contacts per command/ 1 NO / form A
Option: sensitive ground-fault CT
Power consumption
IEE < 1.6 A indication relay (Two contacts changeable to NC/form
B, via jumpers)
2
at Inom = 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA per phase Live status contact 1 NO / NC (jumper) / form A/B
at Inom = 5 A Approx. 0.3 VA per phase Switching capacity
for sensitive ground-fault CT at 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA
Overload capability
Make
Break
1000 W / VA
30 W / VA / 40 W resistive /
3
25 W at L/R 50 ms
DC 250 V
150 A for 10 s
20 A continuous
Switching voltage
Permissible current
5 A continuous,
30 A for 0.5 s making current, 4
Dynamic (impulse current) 250 x Inom (half cycle) 2000 switching cycles
sensitive ground-fault CT
Electrical tests
Specication
5
100 A for 10 s
Standards IEC 60255
15 A continuous
ANSI C37.90, C37.90.1, C37.90.2,
Voltage transformer
750 A (half cycle)
Insulation tests
UL508
6
Type 7SJ621, 7SJ623, 7SJ625 Standards IEC 60255-5; ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0
7SJ622, 7SJ624, 7SJ626
Voltage test (100 % test) 2.5 kV (r.m.s. value), 50/60 Hz
Number
Rated voltage Vnom
3
100 V to 225 V
4 4 all circuits except for auxiliary
voltage and RS485/RS232 and 7
Measuring range 0 V to 170 V time synchronization
Power consumption at Vnom = 100 V < 0.3 VA per phase Auxiliary voltage DC 3.5 kV
Communication ports AC 500 V
Overload capability in voltage path
(phase-neutral voltage) and time synchronization 8
Thermal (effective) 230 V continuous Impulse voltage test (type test) 5 kV (peak value); 1.2/50 s; 0.5 J
all circuits, except communication 3 positive and 3 negative impulses
Auxiliary voltage
ports and time synchronization, at intervals of 5 s
Rated auxiliary
voltage Vaux
DC 24 / 48 V 60 /125 V 110 / 250 V
AC 115 / 230 V
class III
9
Permissible tolerance DC 19-58 V 48150 V 88300 V
AC 92138 V 184265 V Standards IEC 60255-6; IEC 60255-22
(product standard)
Ripple voltage, 12 %
peak-to-peak
Power consumption
DIN 57435 Part 303 10
High-frequency test 2.5 kV (peak value); 1 MHz; =15 ms;
Quiescent Approx. 4 W IEC 60255-22-1, class III 400 surges per s; test duration 2 s
Energized Approx. 7 W and VDE 0435 Part 303, class III
Backup time during
loss/short circuit of
50 ms at V DC 110 V
20 ms at V DC 24 V
IEC 60255-22-2 class IV
8 kV contact discharge;
15 kV air gap discharge;
11
auxiliary voltage 200 ms at 115 V / AC 230 V and EN 61000-4-2, class IV both polarities; 150 pF; Ri = 330
Binary inputs/indication inputs Irradiation with radio-frequency 10 V/m; 27 to 500 MHz
eld, non-modulated
Type 7SJ621,
7SJ623,
7SJ625,
7SJ622,
7SJ624
7SJ626
IEC 60255-22-3 (Report) class III 12
Irradiation with radio-frequency 10 V/m, 80 to 1000 MHz;
Number 8 11 eld, amplitude-modulated AM 80 %; 1 kHz
Voltage range DC 24250 V
Pickup threshold modiable by plug-in jumpers
eld, pulse-modulated
10 V/m, 900 MHz; repetition
rate 200 Hz, on duration 50 %
13
Pickup threshold DC 19 V IEC 61000-4-3/ENV 50204; class III
For rated control 24/48/60/ 110/125/ Fast transient interference/burst 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz;
voltage 110/125 V DC 220/250 V IEC 60255-22-4 and IEC 61000-4- burst length = 15 ms;
Response time/drop-
out time
Approx. 3.5 4, class IV repetition rate 300 ms; both polarities;
14
Power consumption 1.8 mA (independent of operating voltage)
energized
15
Technical data
EMC tests for interference immunity; type tests (cont'd) During transportation
1 High-energy surge voltages

(Surge)
Standards
Vibration
IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2
Sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2 5 to 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude;
Auxiliary voltage From circuit to circuit: 2 kV; 12 ; 9 F IEC 60068-2-6 8 to 150 Hz; 2 g acceleration,
across contacts: 1 kV; 2 ;18 F frequency sweep 1 octave/min
2 Binary inputs/outputs From circuit to circuit: 2 kV; 42 ; 0.5 F

across contacts: 1 kV; 42 ; 0.5 F Shock
Semi-sinusoidal
Line-conducted HF, 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1 Acceleration 15 g, duration 11 ms
amplitude-modulated AM 80 %; 1 kHz IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks in both directions of 3 axes
IEC 61000-4-6, class III Continuous shock Semi-sinusoidal
3 Power frequency magnetic eld
30 A/m; 50 Hz, continuous
300 A/m; 50 Hz, 3 s
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
IEC 60068-2-29
1000 shocks in both directions
IEC 60255-6 0.5 mT, 50 Hz of 3 axes
Oscillatory surge withstand 2.5 to 3 kV (peak value), 1 to 1.5 MHz
4 capability
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1
damped wave; 50 surges per s;
duration 2 s, Ri = 150 to 200
Temperatures
Fast transient surge withstand 4 to 5 kV; 10/150 ns; 50 surges per s
capability ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 both polarities; duration 2 s, Ri = 80 Type-tested acc. to IEC 60068-2-1 -25 C to +85 C /-13 F to +185 F
Radiated electromagnetic 35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz; and -2, test Bd, for 16 h
5 interference
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2
amplitude and pulse-modulated Temporarily permissible operating -20 C to +70 C /-4 F to -158 F
temperature, tested for 96 h
Damped wave 2.5 kV (peak value, polarity Recommended permanent -5 C to +55 C /+25 F to +131 F
IEC 60694 / IEC 61000-4-12 alternating) operating temperature acc. to
6 100 kHz, 1 MHz, 10 and 50 MHz,

Ri = 200
IEC 60255-6
(Legibility of display may be
impaired above +55 C /+131 F)
EMC tests for interference emission; type tests
Limiting temperature during -25 C to +55 C /-13 F to +131 F
Standard EN 50081-* (generic specication)
permanent storage
7 Conducted interferences 150 kHz to 30 MHz

only auxiliary voltage IEC/CISPR 22 Limit class B
Limiting temperature during
transport -25 C to +70 C /-13 F to +158 F
Radio interference eld strength 30 to 1000 MHz Humidity
IEC/CISPR 11 Limit class B
8 panel must be installed in a metal
It is recommended to arrange the
humidity; on 56 days a year up to
95 % relative humidity;
condensation not permissible!
Mechanical stress tests
Unit design
Housing 7XP20
During operation
Dimensions See dimension drawings, part 14
Weight
10 IEC 60255-21-1, class 2
IEC 60068-2-6
10 to 60 Hz; 0.075 mm amplitude;
60 to 150 Hz; 1 g acceleration
Surface-mounting housing
4.5 kg
4.0 kg
frequency sweep 1 octave/min Degree of protection
20 cycles in 3 perpendicular axes acc. to EN 60529
11 Shock
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
Semi-sinusoidal
Acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms;
Operator safety
IP 2x with cover
IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks in both directions of 3 axes
Seismic vibration Sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-3, class 1 1 to 8 Hz: 3.5 mm amplitude
12 IEC 60068-3-3 (horizontal axis)
(vertical axis)
(horizontal axis)
13 8 to 35 Hz: 0.5 g acceleration
(vertical axis)
1 cycle in 3 perpendicular axe
14
15
Technical data
Serial interfaces Ethernet (EN 100) for DIGSI, IEC 61850, DNP3 TCP, PROFINET
Electrical
Connection for ush-mounted rear panel, mounting location B 1
9-pin subminiature connector casing 2 x RJ45 socket contact
Transmission rate Factory setting 115200 baud, 100BaseT acc. to IEEE802.3
min. 4800 baud, max. 115200 baud Connection for surface-mounted in console housing at case bottom
Service/modem interface (rear of unit) casing 2
Isolated interface for data transfer Port C: DIGSI 4/modem/RTD-box Test voltage (reg. socket) 500 V; 50 Hz
Transmission rate Factory setting 38400 baud, Transmission speed 100 Mbit/s
min. 4800 baud, max. 115200 baud Bridgeable distance 65.62 feet (200 m)
RS232/RS485 Optical 3
Connection Connection for ush-mounted rear panel, slot position B, duplex
For ush-mounting housing/ 9-pin subminiature connector, case LC, 100BaseT acc. to IEEE802.3
surface-mounting housing with mounting location C
Connection for surface-mounted
case
(not available)
4
with two-tier terminal at the shielded data cable Transmission speed 100 Mbit/s
top/bottom part Optical wavelength 1300 nm
Distance RS232 15 m /49.2 ft
Distance RS485 Max. 1 km/3300 ft
Bridgeable distance
PROFIBUS-FMS/DP
max. 0.93 miles (1.5 km)
5
Isolated interface for data Port B
System interface (rear of unit) transfer to a control center
Transmission rate
RS485
Up to 1.5 Mbaud
6
to a control center
Connection 9-pin subminiature connector,
Transmission rate Factory setting 9600 baud, For ush-mounting housing/ mounting location B
RS232/RS485
detached operator panel 7
Connection
with two-tier terminal on the shielded data cable
top/bottom part
Distance 1000 m/3300 ft 93.75 kbaud;
500 m/1500 ft 187.5 kbaud;
8
with two-tier terminal on the shielded data cable 200 m/600 ft 1.5 Mbaud;
top/bottom part 100 m/300 ft 12 Mbaud
Distance RS232 Max. 15 m/49 ft Test voltage AC 500 V against ground
Distance RS485 Max. 1 km/3300 ft Fiber optic 9
Test voltage AC 500 V against ground Connection ber-optic cable Integr. ST connector for FO
Fiber optic connection
optic connection
10
For ush-mounting housing/ Mounting location B For surface-mounting housing At the bottom part of the housing
surface-mounting housing with with two-tier terminal on the Important: Please refer to footnotes
detached operator panel top/bottom part 1) and 2) on page 5/136
with two-tier terminal on the Optical avelength 820 nm 11
top/bottom part Permissible path attenuation Max. 8 dB, for glass ber 62.5/125 m
Optical wavelength 820 nm Distance 500 kB/s 1.6 km/0.99 miles
Permissible path attenuation Max. 8 dB, for glass ber 62.5/125 m 1500 kB/s 530 m/0.33 miles
Distance Max. 1.5 km/0.9 miles MODBUS RTU, ASCII, DNP 3.0 12
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, redundant Isolated interface for data Port B
transfer to a control center
RS485
Transmission rate Up to 19200 baud
Connection
For ush-mounting housing/ Mounting location B 13
For surface-mounting housing (not available)
top/bottom part 14
Distance RS485 Max. 1 km/3300 ft
15
Technical data
System interface (rear of unit) (cont'd) Inverse-time overcurrent protection, directional/non-directional

(ANSI 51, 51N, 67, 67N)
1 RS485
Connection Operating mode non-directional
phase protection (ANSI 51)
3-phase (standard) or 2-phase
(L1 and L3)
surface-mounting housing with mounting location B Setting ranges
detached operator panel Pickup phase element IP 0.5 to 20 A or 1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
2 For surface-mounting housing

with two-tier terminal at the
At bottom part of the housing:
shielded data cable
Pickup ground element IEP
Time multiplier T
0.05 to 3.2 s or (in steps of 0.01 s)
top/bottom part (IEC characteristics)
Test voltage AC 500 V against ground Time multiplier D 0.05 to 15 s or (in steps of 0.01 s)
3 Fiber-optic
Undervoltage threshold
V< for release Ip
10.0 to 125.0 V (in steps of 0.1 V)
optic onnection
4 detached operator panel
ANSI Inverse, short inverse, long inverse
moderately inverse, very inverse,
with two-tier terminal at the Important: Please refer to footnotes
1) and 2) on page 5/136
extremely inverse, denite inverse
top/bottom part
User-dened characteristic Dened by a maximum of 20 value
5 Permissible path attenuation Max 8 dB. for glass ber 62.5/125 m
Dropout setting
pairs of current and time delay
Distance Max. 1.5 km/0.9 miles Without disk emulation Approx. 1.05 setting value Ip for
Time synchronization DCF77/IRIG-B signal (Format IRIG-B000) Ip/Inom 0.3, corresponds to approx.
(SUB-D)
With disk emulation
Tolerances
housing) Pickup/dropout thresholds Ip, IEp 2 % of setting value or 50 mA1)

Pickup time for 2 I/Ip 20 5 % of reference (calculated) value
Voltage levels 5 V, 12 V or 24 V (optional) + 2 % current tolerance, respectively
7 30 ms
Dropout ratio for 0.05 I/Ip 0.9 5 % of reference (calculated) value
Functions
Denite-time overcurrent protection, directional/non-directional 30 ms
(ANSI 50, 50N, 67, 67N)
8 Operating mode non-directional
(L1 and L3)
Direction detection
For phase faults
Number of elements (stages) I>, I>>, I>>> (phases) Polarization With cross-polarized voltages;
IE>, IE>>, IE>>> (ground) With voltage memory for measure-
ment voltages that are too low
9 Setting ranges
Pickup phase elements 0.5 to 175 A or 1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
Forward range Vref,rot 86
- 180 to 180 (in steps of 1)
Pickup ground elements 0.25 to 175 A or 1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
Rotation of reference voltage For one and two-phase faults
Delay times T 0 to 60 s or (in steps of 0.01 s) Vref,rot unlimited;
Times
Direction sensitivity For three-phase faults dynamically
unlimited;
Pickup times (without inrush Steady-state approx. 7 V phase-to-
restraint, with inrush restraint phase
+ 10 ms)
11 With twice the setting value
Non-directional
Approx. 30 ms
Directional
45 ms
For ground faults
Polarization With zero-sequence quantities 3V0,
3I0 or with negative-sequence
With ve times the setting value Approx. 20 ms 40 ms
quantities 3V2, 3I2
Dropout times Approx. 40 ms
Forward range Vref,rot 86
12 Dropout ratio Approx. 0.95 for
I/Inom 0.3
Rotation of reference voltage Vref,rot - 180 to 180 (in steps of 1)
Direction sensitivity
Tolerances Zero-sequence quantities 3V0, 3I0 VE 2.5 V displacement voltage,
Pickup 2 % of setting value or 50 mA1) measured;
Delay times T, TDO 1 % or 10 ms
13 Negative-sequence quantities
3V0 5 V displacement voltage,
calculated
3V2 5 V negative-sequence voltage;
3V2, 3I2 3I2 225 mA negative-sequence
current1)
14 Tolerances (phase angle error

under reference conditions)
For phase and ground faults 1 electrical
15 1) At Inom = 1 A, all limits divided by 5.

Technical data
Inrush-current detection Tolerances

Pickup threshold
Inuenced functions Time-overcurrent elements, I>, IE>,
Ip, IEp (directional, non-directional)
For sensitive input
For normal input
2 % of setting value or 1 mA
1
Lower function limit phases At least one phase current Delay times 1 % of setting value or 20 ms
(50 Hz and 100 Hz) 125 mA1)
Lower function limit ground Ground current Ground-fault pickup for all types of ground faults
Upper function limit

(50 Hz and 100 Hz) 125 mA1)
1.5 to 125 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
2
(setting range) current and delay time values
Setting range I2f /I 10 to 45 % (in steps of 1 %) Setting ranges
Crossblock (IL1, IL2, IL3)
ON/OFF
For sensitive input
For normal input
0.001 A to 1.4 A (in steps of 0.001 A)
0.25 to 20 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
3
Controllable function Directional and non-directional User dened
pickup, tripping time Time multiplier T 0.1 to 4 s or (in steps of 0.01 s)
Start criteria Current criteria,
Times
4
binary input,
Pickup threshold Approx. 1.1 IEEp
Dropout ratio Approx. 1.05 IEEp
Tolerances
Pickup threshold
5
For sensitive input 2 % of setting value or 1 mA
monitoring with timer)
For normal input 2 % of setting value or 50 mA1)
(Sensitive) ground-fault detection (ANSI 64, 50 Ns, 51Ns, 67Ns) Delay times in linear range 7 % of reference value for 2 I/IEEp
Displacement voltage starting for all types of ground fault (ANSI 64)
Setting ranges Logarithmic inverse
Refer to the manual
6
Pickup threshold VE> (measured) 1.8 to 170 V (in steps of 0.1 V) Logarithmic inverse with knee Refer to the manual
Pickup threshold 3V0> 10 to 225 V (in steps of 0.1 V) point
(calculated)
Delay time TDelay pickup
Additional trip delay TVDELAY
0.04 to 320 s or (in steps of 0.01 s)
Direction detection for all types of ground-faults (ANSI 67Ns)
Measuring method cos / sin
7
Times Direction measurement IE and VE measured or
Pickup time Approx. 50 ms 3I0 and 3V0 calculated
Dropout ratio
Tolerances
0.95 or (pickup value -0.6 V) Measuring principle
Setting ranges
Active/reactive power measurement
8
Pickup threshold VE (measured) 3 % of setting value or 0.3 V Measuring enable IRelease direct.
Pickup threshold 3V0 (calculated) 3 % of setting value or 3 V For sensitive input 0.001 to 1.2 A (in steps of 0.001 A)
Delay times 1 % of setting value or 10 ms For normal input 0.25 to 150 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
Phase detection for ground fault in an ungrounded system
Direction phasor Correction
Dropout delay TReset delay
- 45 to + 45 (in steps of 0.1 )
9
Measuring principle Voltage measurement (phase-to- Reduction of dir. area Red.dir.area 1 to 15 (in steps of 1 )
ground) Tolerances
Setting ranges
Vph min (ground-fault phase) 10 to 100 V (in steps of 1 V)
Pickup measuring enable
For sensitive input
For normal input
10
Vph max (unfaulted phases) 10 to 100 V (in steps of 1 V)
Angle tolerance 3
Measuring tolerance 3 % of setting value, or 1 V
acc. to DIN 57435 part 303 Measuring method (V0 / I0)
Ground-fault pickup for all types of ground faults Direction measurement IE and VE measured or
3I0 and 3V0 calculated
11
Minimum voltage Vmin,measured 0.4 to 50 V (in steps of 0.1 V)
Setting ranges Minimum voltage Vmin, calculated 10 to 90 V (in steps of 1 V)
Pickup threshold IEE>, IEE>> Phase angle - 180 to 180 (in steps of 0.1)
For sensitive input
For normal input
0.001 to 1.5 A (in steps of 0.001 A)
0.25 to 175 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
Delta phase angle
Tolerances
0 to 180 (in steps of 0.1) 12
Delay times T for IEE>, IEE>> 0 to 320 s or (in steps of 0.01 s) Pickup threshold VE (measured) 3 % of setting value or 0.3 V
Dropout delay time TDO 0 to 60 s (in steps of 0.01 s) Pickup threshold 3V0 (calculated) 3 % of setting value or 3 V
Times Angle tolerance 3
Pickup times Approx. 50 ms Angle correction for cable CT 13
Dropout ratio Approx. 0.95 Angle correction F1, F2
Current value I1, I2 0 to 5 (in steps of 0.1 )
For sensitive input 0.001 to 1.5 A (in steps of 0.001 A)
For normal input 0.25 to 175 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
14
Note: Due to the high sensitivity the linear range of the measuring input
IN with integrated sensitive input transformer is from 0.001 A to 1.6 A.
For currents greater than 1.6 A, correct directionality can no longer be
1) For Inom = 1 A, all limits divided by 5.
guaranteed.
15
Technical data
High-impedance restricted ground-fault protection (ANSI 87N) / single- Current warning stage Ialarm 0.5 to 20 A (in steps of 0.01 A)
phase overcurrent protection Extension factor when stopped 1 to 10 with reference to the time
1 Setting ranges
Pickup thresholds I>, I>>
k factor constant with the machine running
(in steps of 0.1)
For sensitive input 0.003 to 1.5 A or (in steps of 0.001 A) Rated overtemperature (for Inom) 40 to 200 C (in steps of 1 C)
Tripping characteristic 2 2
Delay times TI>, TI>> 0 to 60 s or (in steps of 0.01 s) (I /k Inom ) (Ipre /k Inom )
2 Times
For (I/k Inom) 8 t =th ln 2
(I /k Inom ) 1
Pickup times
Minimum Approx. 20 ms 1) For Inom = 1 A, all limits divided by 5.
3 Dropout times
Dropout ratio
Approx. 30 ms
Approx. 0.95 for I/Inom 0.5
t
th
I
= Tripping time
= Temperature rise time constant
= Load current
Tolerances 3 % of setting value or Ipre = Preload current
Pickup thresholds 1 % rated current at Inom = 1 or 5 A; k = Setting factor acc. to VDE 0435
5 % of setting value or Part 3011 and IEC 60255-8
4 Delay times
3 % rated current at Inom = 0.1 A
protection relay
Intermittent ground-fault protection Dropout ratios
Setting ranges /Alarm Approx. 0.99
5 Pickup threshold
For IE IIE> 0.25 to 175 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
I/IAlarm Approx. 0.97
Tolerances
For 3I0 IIE> 0.25 to 175 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A) With reference to k Inom Class 5 acc. to IEC 60255-8
For IEE IIE> 0.005 to 1.5 A (in steps of 0.001 A) With reference to tripping time 5 % 2 s acc. to IEC 60255-8
6 Pickup prolon-
gation time
TV 0 to 10 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
Number of reclosures 0 to 9
Ground-fault accu- Tsum 0 to 100 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
Shot 1 to 4 individually adjustable
mulation time
Program for phase fault
Reset time for Tres 1 to 600 s (in steps of 1 s)
7 accumulation
Number of pickups for 2 to 10 (in steps of 1)
Start-up by Time-overcurrent elements
(dir., non-dir.), negative sequence,
binary input
intermittent ground fault
Program for ground fault
Times Start-up by Time-overcurrent elements
8 Pickup times
Current = 1.25 pickup value Approx. 30 ms
(dir., non-dir.), sensitive ground-fault
protection, binary input
Current 2 pickup value Approx. 22 ms
Blocking of ARC Pickup of protection functions,
Dropout time Approx. 22 ms three-phase fault detected by a pro-
Tolerances tective element, binary input,last TRIP
9 Pickup threshold IIE> 3 % of setting value, or 50 mA1) command after the reclosing cycle is
complete (unsuccessful reclosing),
Times TV, Tsum, Tres 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Directional intermittent ground fault protection (ANSI 67Ns) protection (50BF),
opening the CB without ARC initiation,
10 Setting ranges / Increments
Pickup threshold
external CLOSE command
Vgnd> / 3V0> 2.0 V to 100.0 V Increments 1 V
Monitoring time after 0.04 s ... 10.00 s Increents 0.01 s Setting ranges
pickup detected Dead time 0.01 to 320 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
11 Pulse no. for detecting the

interm. E/F
2 ... 50 Increments 1 (separate for phase and ground
and individual for shots 1 to 4)
Dropout ratio Blocking duration for manual- 0.5 s to 320 s or 0 (in steps of 0.01 s)
Dropout ratio Vgnd> / 3V0> 0,95 or (pickup value - 0,6 V) CLOSE detection
Blocking duration after 0.5 s to 320 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
Tolerances
12 Measurement tolerance
Vgnd> / 3V0> 3 % of setting value
reclosure
Blocking duration after 0.01 to 320 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
dynamic blocking
Times 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Start-signal monitoring time 0.01 to 320 s or (in steps of 0.01 s)
Inuencing Variables
Circuit-breaker supervision 0.1 to 320 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
13 Power supply direct voltage in
range
0.8 VPS/VPSNom 1.15 <1 %
time
Temperature in range 23.00 F (-5 C) amb 131.00 F Max. delay of dead-time start 0 to 1800 s or (in steps of 0.1 s)
(55 C) <0.5 %/ K Maximum dead time extension 0.5 to 320 s or (in steps of 0.01 s)
Thermal overload protection (ANSI 49) Action time 0.01 to 320 s or (in steps of 0.01 s)
14 Setting ranges The delay times of the following protection function can be altered
Factor k 0.1 to 4 (in steps of 0.01) individually by the ARC for shots 1 to 4
Time constant 1 to 999.9 min (in steps of 0.1 min) I>>>, I>>, I>, Ip, Idir>>, Idir>, Ipdir
15 Warning overtemperature
alarm/trip
50 to 100 % with reference
to the tripping overtemperature
IE>>>, IE>>, IE>, IEp, IEdir>>, IEdir>, IEdir
(in steps of 1 %)

Technical data
Additional functions Lockout (nal trip), delay of dead- Frequency of V1 and V2 f1, f2 in Hz
time start via binary input (monito- Range fN 5 Hz
red), dead-time extension via binary
input (monitored), co-ordination
Tolerance*)
Voltage difference (V2 V1)
20 mHz
In kV primary, in V secondary or in % Vnom
1
with other protection relays, circuit- Range 10 to 120 % Vnom
breaker monitoring, evaluation of the Tolerance*) 1 % of measured value or 0.5 % of Vnom
CB contacts
Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50 BF)
Frequency difference (f2 f1)
Range
In mHz
fN 5 Hz 2
Setting ranges Tolerance*) 20 mHz
Pickup thresholds 0.2 to 5 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A) Angle difference (2 1) In
Delay time 0.06 to 60 s or (in steps of 0.01 s) Range 0 to 180
Times
Pickup times
Tolerance*) 0.5
Flexible protection functions (ANSI 27, 32, 47, 50, 55, 59, 81R)
3
with internal start is contained in the delay time Operating modes / measuring
with external start is contained in the delay time quantities
Dropout times
Tolerances
Approx. 25 ms 3-phase
1-phase
I, I1, I2, I2/I1, 3I0, V, V1, V2, 3V0, dV/dt,
P, Q, cos I, IE, IE sens., V, VE, P, Q, 4
Pickup value 2 % of setting value (50 mA)1) Without xed phase relation cos f, df/dt, binary input
Delay time 1 % or 20 ms Pickup when Exceeding or falling below threshold
value
Synchro- and voltage check (ANSI 25)
Operating mode Synchro-check
Setting ranges
Current I, I1, I2, 3I0, IE 0.15 to 200 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
5
Additional release conditions Live-bus / dead line Current ratio I2/I1 15 to 100 % (in steps of 1 %)
Dead-bus / live-line Sens. ground curr. IE sens. 0.001 to 1.5 A (in steps of 0.001 A)
Dead-bus and dead-line Voltages V, V1, V2, 3V0 2 to 260 V (in steps of 0.1 V)
Voltages
Bypassing Displacement voltage VE
Power P, Q
2 to 200 V (in steps of 0.1 V)
0.5 to 10000 W (in steps of 0.1 W)
6
Max. operating voltage Vmax 20 to 140 V (phase-to-phase) Power factor (cos ) - 0.99 to + 0.99 (in steps of 0.01)
(in steps of 1 V) Frequency fN = 50 Hz 40 to 60 Hz (in steps of 0.01 Hz)
Min. operating voltage Vmin 20 to 125 V (phase-to-phase)
(in steps of 1 V)
V< for dead-line / dead-bus check 1 to 60 V (phase-to-phase)
fN = 60 Hz
Rate-of-frequency change df/dt
50 to 70 Hz (in steps of 0.01 Hz)
0.1 to 20 Hz/s (in steps of 0.01 Hz/s) 7
Voltage change dV/dt 4 V/s to 100 V/s (in steps of 1 V/s)
(in steps of 1 V)
V> for live-line / live-bus check 20 to 140 V (phase-to-phase) Dropout ratio >- stage 1.01 to 3 (insteps of 0.01)
(in steps of 1 V) Dropout ratio <- stage 0.7 to 0.99 (in steps of 0.01)
Primary rated voltage of 0.1 to 800 kV (in steps of 0.01 kV)
Dropout differential f
Pickup delay time
0.02 to 1.00 Hz (in steps of 0.01 Hz)
8
transformer V2nom Trip delay time 0 to 3600 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
Tolerances 2 % of pickup value or 2 V Dropout delay time 0 to 60 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
Drop-off to pickup ratios approx. 0.9 (V>) or 1.1 (V<) Times
V-measurement
Voltage difference 0.5 to 50 V (phase-to-phase)
Pickup times
Current, voltage
9
(in steps of 1 V) (phase quantities)
Tolerance 1V With 2 times the setting value Approx. 30 ms
With 10times the setting value Approx. 20 ms
f-measurement
Df-measurement (f2>f1; f2<f1
Tolerance
0.01 to 2 Hz (in steps of 0.01 Hz)
15 mHz
Current, voltages 10
(symmetrical components)
-measurement With 2 times the setting value Approx. 40 ms
-measurement 2 to 80 (in steps of 1 ) With 10 times the setting value Approx. 30 ms
(2>1; 2>1)
Tolerance 2
Power
11
Max. phase displacement 5 for f 1 Hz Maximum (low signals and Approx. 350 ms
10 for f > 1 Hz thresholds)
Adaptation Power factor 300 to 600 ms
Vector group adaptation by angle 0 to 360 (in steps of 1 )
Different voltage 0.5 to 2 (in steps of 0.01)
Frequency
Rate-of-frequency change
Approx. 100 ms
12
transformers V1/V2 With 1.25 times the setting Approx. 220 ms
value
Times
Voltage change dV/dt
Minimum measuring time Approx. 80 ms
Max. duration TSYN DURATION
Supervision time TSUP VOLTAGE
0.01 to 1200 s; (in steps of 0.01 s)
For 2 times pickup value
Binary input
Approx. 220 ms
Approx. 20 ms 13
Closing time of CB TCB close 0 to 60 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
Tolerance of all timers 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Measuring values of synchro-check function
Reference voltage V1 In kV primary, in V secondary or in % Vnom
14
Range 10 to 120 % Vnom
Tolerance*) 1 % of measured value or 0.5 % of Vnom
*) With rated frequency.
Voltage to be synchronized V2 In kV primary, in V secondary or in % Vnom
Range
Tolerance*)
10 to 120 % Vnom
1 % of measured value or 0.5 % of Vnom
1) At Inom = 1 A, all limits divided by 5. 15
Technical data
Flexible protection functions (ANSI 27, 32, 47, 50, 55, 59, 81R) (cont'd) Starting time monitoring for motors (ANSI 48)
1 Dropout times
Current, voltage (phase < 20 ms
Setting ranges
Motor starting current ISTARTUP
Pickup threshold IMOTOR START
2.5 to 80 A1) (in steps of 0.01)
2 to 50 A1) (in steps of 0.01)
quantities)
Current, voltages < 30 ms Permissible starting 1 to 180 s (in steps of 0.1 s)
(symmetrical components) time TSTARTUP, cold motor
2 Power
Typical < 50 ms
Permissible starting time
TSTARTUP, warm motor
Temperature threshold
0.5 to 180 s (in steps of 0.1 s)
0 to 80 % (in steps of 1 %)
Maximum < 350 ms cold motor
Power factor < 300 ms
Frequency < 100 ms Permissible blocked rotor 0.5 to 120 s or (in steps of 0.1 s)
3 Rate-of-frequency change
Voltage change
< 200 ms
< 220 ms
time TLOCKED-ROTOR
Binary input < 10 ms For I > IMOTOR START I 2
t = STARTUP TSTARTUP
Tolerances I
Pickup threshold
4 Current
Current (symmetrical
0.5 % of setting value or 50 mA1)
ISTARTUP = Rated motor starting
current
components) TSTARTUP = Tripping time for rated
Voltage 0.5 % of setting value or 0.1 V motor starting current
Voltage (symmetrical 1 % of setting value or 0.2 V
5 components)
Power 1 % of setting value or 0.3 W Dropout ratio IMOTOR START
Approx. 0.95
Power factor 2 degrees Tolerances
Frequency 5 mHz (at V = VN, f = fN) Pickup threshold 2 % of setting value or 50 mA1)
10 mHz (at V = VN) Delay time 5 % or 30 ms
5 % of setting value or 0.05 Hz/s
5 % of setting value or 1.5 V/s
Load jam protection for motors (ANSI 51M)
Times 1 % of setting value or 10 ms Setting ranges 0.25 to 60 A1) (in steps 0.01 A)
Current threshold for
Negative-sequence current detection (ANSI 46) alarm and trip
7 Denite-time characteristic (ANSI 46-1 and 46-2)
Setting ranges
Delay times
Blocking duration after
0 to 600 s (in steps 0.01 s)
0 to 600 s (in steps 0.01 s)
CLOSE signal detection
Pickup current I2>, I2>> 0.25 to 15 A1) or (in steps of 0.01 A)
Tolerances
Delay times 0 to 60 s or (in steps of 0.01 s)
8 Functional limit All phase currents 50 A1)
Delay time
Restart inhibit for motors (ANSI 66)
Times
Pickup times Approx. 35 ms Setting ranges
Dropout times Approx. 35 ms Motor starting current relative 1.1 to 10 (in steps of 0.1)
9 Dropout ratio Approx. 0.95 for I2 /Inom > 0.3

to rated motor current
IMOTOR START/IMotor Nom
Tolerances Rated motor current IMotor Nom 1 to 6 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
Pickup thresholds 3 % of the setting value or 50 mA1) Max. permissible starting time 1 to 320 s (in steps of 1 s)
Delay times 1 % or 10 ms TStart Max
10 Inverse-time characteristic (ANSI 46-TOC)

Setting ranges
Equilibrium time TEqual
Minimum inhibit time
0 min to 320 min (in steps of 0.1 min)
0.2 min to 120 min (in steps of 0.1 min)
TMIN. INHIBIT TIME
Pickup current 0.25 to 10 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A) Max. permissible number of 1 to 4 (in steps of 1)
Time multiplier T 0.05 to 3.2 s or (in steps of 0.01 s) warm starts
11 Time multiplier D
Difference between cold and
warm starts
1 to 2 (in steps of 1)
Extension k-factor for cooling 0.2 to 100 (in steps of 0.1)

Functional limit All phase currents 50 A1) simulations of rotor at zero
Trip characteristics speed k at STOP
12 IEC Normal inverse, very inverse,

extremely inverse
Extension factor for cooling time
k RUNNING
0.2 to 100 (in steps of 0.1)
ANSI Inverse, moderately inverse, n c -1

very inverse, extremely inverse Restarting limit restart = rot max perm
nc
Pickup threshold Approx. 1.1 I2p setting value
13 Dropout
IEC and ANSI Approx. 1.05 I2p setting value,
(without disk emulation) which is approx. 0.95 pickup threshold is possible
ANSI with disk emulation Approx. 0.90 I2p setting value rot max perm = Maximum permissible
14 Tolerances
Pickup threshold 3 % of the setting value or 50 mA1)
(= 100 % in operational
measured value
Time for 2 M 20 5 % of setpoint (calculat ed) rot/rot trip)
+2 % current tolerance, at least 30 ms
15 1) For Inom = 1 A,
all limits divided by 5.
start-ups from cold
state

Technical data
Undercurrent monitoring (ANSI 37) Frequency protection (ANSI 81)

Signal from the operational
measured values
Number of frequency elements
Setting ranges
4
1
Temperature monitoring box (ANSI 38) Pickup thresholds for fnom = 50 Hz 40 to 60 Hz (in steps of 0.01 Hz)
Pickup thresholds for fnom = 60 Hz 50 to 70 Hz (in steps of 0.01 Hz)
Temperature detectors
Dropout differential = |pickup 0.02 Hz to 1.00 Hz (in steps of 0.01 Hz)
Connectable boxes
1 or 2
Max. 6
threshold dropout threshold|
Delay times
2
detectors per box
Type of measuring Pt 100 or Ni 100 or Ni 120 Undervoltage blocking, with 0 to 100 s or (in steps of 0.01 s)
Mounting identication Oil or Environment or Stator or positive-sequence voltage V1 10 to 150 V (in steps of 1 V)

Bearing or Other Times
Pickup times Approx. 150 ms 3
For each measuring detector Dropout times Approx. 150 ms
Stage 1 -50 C to 250 C (in steps of 1 C) Dropout
-58 F to 482 F (in steps of 1 F) Ratio undervoltage blocking Approx. 1.05
Stage 2
or (no indication)
-50 C to 250 C (in steps of 1 C)
Tolerances
Pickup thresholds
4
-58 F to 482 F (in steps of 1 F) Frequency 5 mHz (at V = VN, f = fN)
or (no indication) 10 mHz (at V = VN)
Undervoltage blocking 3 % of setting value or 1 V
Operating modes/measuring
Delay times 3 % of the setting value or 10 ms 5
quantities Fault locator (ANSI 21FL)
3-phase Positive phase-sequence voltage or Output of the fault distance in primary and secondary,
phase-to-phase voltages or in km or miles line length,
1-phase
phase-to-ground voltages
Single-phase phase-ground or phase- Starting signal
in % of line length
Trip command, dropout of a
6
phase voltage protection element, via binary input
Setting ranges Setting ranges
Pickup thresholds V<, V<<
dependent on voltage 10 to 120 V (in steps of 1 V)
Reactance (secondary) 0.001 to 1.9 /km1) (in steps of 0.0001)
0.001 to 3 /mile1) (in steps of 0.0001) 7
connection and chosen 10 to 210 V (in steps of 1 V) Tolerances
measuring quantity Measurement tolerance acc. to 2.0 % fault location, or 0.025
Dropout ratio r 1.01 to 3 (in steps of 0.01) VDE 0435, Part 303 for sinusoi- (without intermediate infeed) for
Current Criteria "Bkr Closed IMIN" 0.2 to 5 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
dal measurement quantities 30 K 90 and VK/Vnom 0.1
and IK/Inom 1 8
Times Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection (ANSI 27/Q)
Pickup times Approx. 50 ms Measured Values / Modes of
Dropout times As pickup times
Tolerances
Operation
3-phase I1, V, Q, 9
Pickup thresholds 1 % of setting value or 1 V Measuring method for I, V Fundamental wave, Pickup when
Times 1 % of setting value or 10 ms Exceeding threshold value or falling
below threshold value
Operating modes/measuring
quantities
Setting Ranges / Increments
Pickup thresholds
10
3-phase Positive phase-sequence voltage or Current I1 for INom = 1 A 0.01 to 0.20 A Increments 0.01 A
negative phase-sequence voltage or for INom = 5 A 0.05 to 1.00 A
phase-to-phase voltages or
Voltage V
Power Q for INom = 1 A
for I VAR Nom = 5 A
10.0 to 210.00 V Increments 0.1 V
1.0 to 100 VAR Increments 0.01
5.0 to 500 VAR
11
1-phase Single-phase phase-ground or phase-
phase voltage Pickup delay (standard) 0.00 to 60.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Command delay time 0.00 to 3600.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Setting ranges
Pickup thresholds V>, V>>
dependent on voltage 40 to 260 V (in steps of 1 V)
Dropout delay
Function Limits
0.00 to 60.00 s Increments 0.01 s
12
connection and chosen 40 to 150 V (in steps of 1 V) Power measurement I1
measuring quantity 2 to 150 V (in steps of 1 V) for INom = 1 A Positive sequence system current >
0.03 A
Dropout ratio r 0.9 to 0.99 (in steps of 0.01)
Delay times T
Times
Times
for INom = 5 A Positive sequence system current >
0.15 A 13
Pickup times:
Pickup times V Approx. 50 ms
QU protection typical approx. 120 ms
Pickup times V1, V2 Approx. 60 ms
maximum (small signals approx. 350 ms
Dropout times
Tolerances
As pickup times
and thresholds)
Binary input approx. 20 ms
14
Pickup thresholds 1 % of setting value or 1 V Dropout times:
Times 1 % of setting value or 10 ms QU protection typical < 50 ms
maximum < 350 ms

Binary input <10 ms
15
Technical data
Tolerances cos , power factor (p.f.) Total and phase segregated

Pickup thresholds Range - 1 to + 1
1 Current I1 for INom = 1 A 1% of setting value or 10 mA
at INom 0.03 A
Tolerance2) 2 % for |cos | 0.707
2% of setting value or 20 mA Frequency f In Hz

at INom <0.03 A Range fnom 5 Hz
for INom = 5 A 1% of setting value or 50 mA Tolerance2) 20 mHz
2 at INom 0.25 A
2% of setting value or 100 mA
Temperature overload protection
/Trip
In %
at INom <0.25 A
Current I1 (symmetrical Range 0 to 400 %
components) for INom = 1 A Tolerance2) 5 % class accuracy per IEC 60255-8
2% of set value or 20 mA
3 Voltage
for INom = 5 A 2% of set value or 100 mA
1% of set value or 0.1 V
Temperature restart inhibit
L/L Trip
In %
Voltage (symmetrical components) 2% of set value or 0.2 V Range 0 to 400 %

Power 1% of setting value or 0.3 VAR Tolerance2) 5 % class accuracy per IEC 60255-8
Times 1% of setting value or 10 ms
4 Inuencing Variables for Pickup
Values
Restart threshold Restart/L Trip
Reclose time TReclose
In %
In min
Currents of sensitive ground fault In A (kA) primary and in mA
Auxiliary direct voltage in the range from 0.8 VPS/VPSNom 1.15 1 %
detection (total, real, and reactive secondary
Temperature in the range from 23.00 F (-5 C) amb
current) IEE, IEE real, IEE reactive
5 Frequency in the range
131.00 F (55 C) 0.5 %/10 K
from 25 Hz to 70 Hz 1 %
Range
Tolerance2)
0 mA to 1600 mA
2 % of measured value or 1 mA
Harmonics
up to 10 % 3rd harmonic 1%
box"
up to 10 % 5th harmonic 1%
6 Additional functions
Long-term averages
Time window 5, 15, 30 or 60 minutes
Frequency of updates Adjustable
Currents In A (kA) primary, Long-term averages
7 IL1, IL2, IL3
Positive-sequence component I1
in A secondary or in % Inom of currents
of real power
IL1dmd, IL2dmd, IL3dmd, I1dmd in A (kA)
Pdmd in W (kW, MW)
Negative-sequence component I2 of reactive power Qdmd in VAr (kVAr, MVAr)
IE or 3I0 of apparent power Sdmd in VAr (kVAr, MVAr)
8 Tolerance2)
Phase-to-ground voltages
1 % of measured value or 0.5 % Inom
In kV primary, in V secondary or in
Max. / Min. report
Report of measured values With date and time
VL1-E, VL2-E, VL3-E % Vnom Reset, automatic Time of day adjustable (in minutes,
Phase-to-phase voltages 0 to 1439 min)
VL1-L2, VL2-L3, VL3-L1, VE or V0
9 Positive-sequence component V1
Negative-sequence component V2
Time frame and starting time adjus-
Range 10 to 120 % Vnom Reset, manual Using binary input, using keypad,
Tolerance2) 1 % of measured value or 0.5 % of via communication
Vnom Min./Max. values for current IL1, IL2, IL3,
10 S, apparent power In kVAr (MVAr or GVAr) primary and
in % of Snom
Min./Max. values for voltages VL1-E, VL2-E, VL3-E
Range 0 to 120 % Snom V1 (positive-sequence component)
Tolerance2) 1 % of Snom VL1-L2, VL2-L3, VL3-L1
11 P, active power
for V/Vnom and I/Inom = 50 to 120 %
With sign, total and phase-segrega-
Min./Max. values for power
Min./Max. values for overload
S, P, Q, cos , frequency
/Trip
ted in kW (MW or GW) primary and protection
in % Snom
12 2) At rated frequency.
I1 (positive-sequence component);
Sdmd, Pdmd, Qdmd
Operational measured values (cont'd) Local measured values monitoring
Range 0 to 120 % Snom Current asymmetry Imax/Imin > balance factor,
Tolerance2) for I>Ibalance limit
13 1 % of Snom
and |cos | = 0.707 to 1 with
Voltage asymmetry Vmax/Vmin > balance factor,
for V>Vlim
Snom = 3 Vnom Inom
Current phase sequence Clockwise (ABC) / counter-clockwise
Q, reactive power With sign, total and phase- (ACB)
14 segregated in kVAr (MVAr or GVAr)
primary and in % Snom
Voltage phase sequence Clockwise (ABC) / counter-clockwise
(ACB)
Range 0 to 120 % Snom
Limit value monitoring Predened limit values, user-dened
Tolerance2) 1 % of Snom
expansions via CFC
15 and |sin | = 0.707 to 1 with
Snom = 3 Vnom Inom
1) At Inom = 1 A, all limits multiplied with 5.

Technical data
Fuse failure monitor Operating hours counter

For all network types With the option of blocking affected
protection functions
Display range
Criterion
Up to 7 digits
Overshoot of an adjustable current
1
Fault recording
Recording of indications of the Trip circuit monitoring
last 8 power system faults With one or two binary input
Commissioning aids 2
Phase rotation eld check,
Time stamping operational measured values,
Resolution for event log 1 ms circuit-breaker/switching device
(operational annunciations) test, creation of a test measure-
ment report
3
Resolution for trip log 1 ms
(fault annunciations) Clock
Maximum time deviation 0.01 % Time synchronization DCF77 / IRIG-B signal
(internal clock)
binary input, 4
communication
type CR 1/2 AA, message "Battery
Setting group switchover of the function parameters
Number of available setting 4 (parameter group A, B, C and D) 5
groups
Oscillographic fault recording Switchover performed Via keypad, DIGSI, system (SCADA)
Maximum 8 fault records saved, interface or binary input
memory maintained by buffer
Control
6
supply
outputs
Recording time Total 20 s
Interlocking Programmable
Sampling rate for 50 Hz

and memory time adjustable
1 sample /1.25 ms (16 samples/cycle)
Circuit-breaker signals Feedback, close, open, intermediate
position
7
Sampling rate for 60 Hz 1 sample /1.04 ms (16 samples/cycle) Control commands Single command / double command
1, 1 plus 1 common or 2 trip contacts
Energy/power
Meter values for power
Wp, Wq (real and reactive power
in kWh (MWh or GWh) and kVARh
(MVARh or GVARh)
Programmable controller
Local control
CFC logic, graphic input tool
Control via menu, 8
demand) assignment of a function key
Tolerance1) 2 % for I > 0.1 Inom, V > 0.1 Vnom Remote control Via communication interfaces,
using a substation automation and
Statistics
and |cos | (p.f.) 0.707
control system (e.g. SICAM),
9
Saved number of trips Up to 9 digits CE conformity
Number of automatic reclosing Up to 9 digits
commands (segregated according
to 1st and 2nd cycle)
10
2004/108/EG previous 89/336/EEC) and electrical equipment designed
Circuit-breakerwear previous 73/23/EEC).
Methods Ix with x = 1 .. 3 This unit conforms to the international standard IEC 60255, and the
11
2-point method (remaining service
life) Part 303).
i2t Further applicable standards: ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0 and C37.90.1.
Operation Phase-selective accumulation of
measured values on TRIP command,
The unit conforms to the international standard IEC 60255, and the
German standard DIN 57435/Part 303 (corresponding to VDE 0435/ 12
Part 303).
up to 8 digits, phase-selective limit
values, monitoring indication This conformity is the result of a test that was performed by Siemens AG
Motor statistics
Total number of motor start-ups 0 to 9999 (resolution 1)
Directive and standard EN 60255-6 for the low-voltage Directive.
13
Total operating time 0 to 99999 h (resolution 1 h)
Total down-time 0 to 99999 h (resolution 1 h)
Ratio operating time/down-time 0 to 100 % (resolution 0.1 %)
Active energy and reactive energy
Motor start-up data:
See operational measured values
Of the last 5 start-ups
14
Start-up time 0.30 s to 9999.99 s (resolution 10 s)
Start-up current (primary) 0 A to 1000 kA (resolution 1 A)
Start-up voltage (primary) 0 V to 100 kV (resolution 1 V)
15
1 7SJ62 multifunction protection relay
Housing, inputs, outputs

7SJ62 - -
Housing 19, 4 line text display, 3 x U, 4 x I, 8 BI, 8 BO, 1 live status-contact 1

Housing 19, 4 line text display, 3 x U, 4 x I, 11 BI,6 BO, 1 live status-contact 2
2 Housing 19, 4 line text display, 4 x U, 4 x I, 8 BI, 8 BO, 1 live status-contact
Housing 19, 4 line text display, 4 x U, 4 x I, 11 BI,6 BO, 1 live status-contact
3
See next
4 page
Housing 19, graphic display, 4 x U, 4 x I,8 BI, 8 BO, 1 live status contact 7) 5
Housing 19, graphic display, 4 x U, 4 x I, 11 BI, 6 BO, 1 live status contact 7) 6
3 Measuring inputs (3 x V / 4 x V, 4 x I)
Iph = 1 A1), Ie = 1 A1) (min. = 0.05 A)
Position 15 only with A, C, E, G 1
4 Iph = 1 A1), Ie = sensitive (min. = 0.001 A)

Position 15 only with B, D, F, H 2
Iph = 5 A1), Ie = 5 A1) (min. = 0.25 A)
Iph = 5 A1), Ie = sensitive (min. = 0.001 A)
5 Position 15 only with B, D, F, H
Iph = 5 A1), Ie = 1 A1) (min. = 0.05 A)
6
Position 15 only with A, C, E,G 7

6 DC 24 to 48 V, threshold binary input DC 19 V 3) 2
DC 60 to 125 V 2), threshold binary input DC 19 V 3) 4
7 DC 110 to 250 V 2), AC 115 to 230 V4) , threshold binary input DC 176 V 3)
Unit version
6
For panel surfacemounting, two-tier terminal top/bottom B

For panel ushmounting, plug-in terminal (2/3 pin connector) D
8 For panel ushmounting, screw-type terminal (direct connection /ring-type cable lugs) E

Region DE, 50 Hz, IEC, language: German, selectable A
9 Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: English (GB), selectable

Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI, language: English (US), selectable
B
C
Region FR, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: French, selectable D
10 Region IT, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: Italian, selectable
Region RU, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: Russian, selectable
F
G
System interface (Port B): Refer to page 5/114
11 No system interface
0

No interface at rear side 0
12 DIGSI 4 / modem, electrical RS232 1
DIGSI 4 / modem / RTD-box5), electrical RS485 2
DIGSI 4 / modem / RTD-box5)6), optical 820 nm wavelength, ST connector 3
13 Measuring / fault recording

Fault recording 1
Slave pointer,mean values, min/max values, fault recording 3
14 1) Rated current can be selected by means of jumpers.

5) Temperature monitoring box 7XV5662-
refer to Accessories.
AD10,
15 means of jumpers.
required.
7) Starting from device version .../GG and FW-Version V4.82


7SJ62 multifunction protection relay

7SJ62 - -
1
50/51 Overcurrent protection I>, I>>, I>>>, Ip
50N/51N
50N/51N
Insensitive ground-fault protection via 2
51 V
Voltage-dependent inverse-time overcurrent protection 3
49 Overload protection (with 2 time constants)
37
47
59N/64
Phase sequence
4
86
Inrush blocking
Lockout
5
V, P, f 27/59 Under-/overvoltage
81O/U Under-/overfrequency
27/Q Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection 3)
27/47/59(N) Flexible protection (index quantities derived from 6
32/55/81R current and voltages): Voltage, power, p.f.,
rate-of-frequency-change protection F E
IEF V, P, f 27/59 Under-/overvoltage
81O/U
27/Q
Under-/overfrequency
Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection 3)
7
27/47/59(N) Flexible protection (index quantities derived from
rate-of-frequency-change protection
Dir 67/67N
Direction determination for overcurrent,
P E 8
phases and ground F C
Dir V, P, f 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
27/59
81O/U
Under-/overvoltage
Under-/overfrequency 9
Dir IEF 67/67N

Direction determination for overcurrent,
F G
10
phases and ground
Intermittent ground fault P C
Dir V,P,f IEF 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
27/59
Intermittent ground fault protection
Under-/overvoltage
11
81U/O Under-/overfrequency
27/47/59(N) Flexible protection functions (quantities derived from
current & voltages):
32/55/81R Voltage-/power-/p.f.-/rate of freq. change-protection
12
Intermittent ground-fault P G
Sens.ground-f.det. 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent,
Dir REF
67Ns
phases and ground
Directional sensitive ground-fault detection 13
67Ns Directional intermittent ground fault protection 3)
87N High-impedance restricted ground fault F D 2)
Continued on
14
next page
Basic version included 1) 50N/51N only with insensitive ground-current transformer when
V, P, f = Voltage, power, frequency protection position 7 = 1, 5, 7.
Dir
IEF
= Directional overcurrent protection
= Intermittent ground fault
3) available beginning with FW / Parameterset-version V4.90 15

7SJ62 - -

2 50N/51N
50N/51N
Insensitive ground-fault protection via
3 51 V
Voltage-dependent inverse-time overcurrent protection
4 37
47
Phase sequence
59N/64 Displacement voltage
74TC Trip circuit supervision, 4 setting groups, cold-load pickup
5 86
Inrush blocking
Lockout
Sens.ground-f.det. V, P, f 67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
V,P,f REF 67Ns Directional intermittent ground fault protection 3)
6
27/59 Under-/overvoltage
7
rate-of-frequency-change protection F F 2)
Sens.ground-f.det. 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
Dir IEF REF 67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
8 87N High-impedance restricted ground fault
Intermittent ground faults P D 2)
Sens.ground-f.det. 67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
REF 67Ns Directional intermittent ground fault protection 3)
9
Sens.ground-f.det. Motor
87N
67Ns

F B 2)
V,P,f REF 67Ns Directional intermittent ground fault protection 3)

10
51M Load jam protection, motor statistics
Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection 3)
11
27/Q
H F 2)
Sens.ground-f.det. Motor 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
12 Dir V,P,f REF 67Ns

67Ns
Directional intermittent ground fault protection 3)
13 51M
27/59
Load jam protection, motor statistics
Under-/overvoltage
14 32/55/81R current and voltages): Voltage, power, p.f.,

H H 2)
Basic version included 1) 50N/51N only with insensitive ground-current transformer when
V, P, f = Voltage, power, frequency protection position 7 = 1, 5, 7.
15 Dir
IEF
3) available beginning with FW / Parameterset-version V4.90
Continued on
next page



7SJ62 - -
1
50N/51N
50N/51N
2
51 V
protection, stages I2>, I>>>>, IE>>>>
3
37
47
Phase sequence 4
Inrush blocking 5
86 Lockout
Sens.ground-f.det. Motor IEF 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
Dir IEF V,P,f REF 67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
67Ns
87N
6
66/86
51M
27/59
Restart inhibit
Undervoltage/overvoltage
7
81O/U Underfrequency/overfrequency
8
R H 2)
Motor V, P, f 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent,
Dir phases and ground
48/14
66/86
Starting time supervision, locked rotor
Restart inhibit
9
10
rate-of-frequency-change protection H G
Motor 48/14
66/86
Restart inhibit 11
51M Load jam protection, motor statistics H A
ARC, fault locator, synchro-check Without
0
79 With auto-reclosure
21FL
79, 21FL
With fault locator
With auto-reclosure, with fault locator
1
2 12
3
25 With synchro-check3)
4 4)
25, 79,21FL With synchro-check3), auto-reclosure, fault locator
7 4)
13
Basic version included 3) Synchro-check (no asynchronous
V, P, f = Voltage, power, frequency protection switching), one function group; available
Dir
IEF
only with devices 7SJ623 and 7SJ624
4) Ordering option only available for devices 14
7SJ623 and 7SJ624
1) 50N/51N only with insensitive ground-current 5) available beginning with FW /
transformer when position 7 = 1, 5, 7. Parameterset-version V4.90
2) Sensitive ground-current transformer
only when position 7 = 2, 6.
15

7SJ62 - - -
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, RS232 1
2 IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, RS485 2
3 PROFIBUS-FMS Slave, 820 nm wavelength, double ring, ST connector 1)
5
6
4 MODBUS, RS485
9
9
L 0 D
L 0 E
DNP 3.0, RS485 9 L 0 G
5 IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, redundant, RS485, RJ45 connector 2)

IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RSJ45 connector (EN 100)
9
9
L 0 P
L 0 R
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, optical, double, LC connector (EN 100)2) 9 L 0 S
6 DNP3 TCP + IEC 61850, 100Mbit Eth, optical, double, LC connector 3)

9 L 2 S
9 L 3 R
PROFINET + IEC 61850, 100Mbit Eth, optical, double, LC connector 3) 9 L 3 S
7 1) Not with position 9 = B; if 9 = B, please order 7SJ6 unit with RS485 port and separate ber-optic converters.
For single ring, please order converter 6GK1502-3AB10, not available with position 9 = B.
8 3) available with V4.9
Sample order
9 Position Order No. + Order code
7SJ622 5 - 5 E C 9 1 - 3 F A 1 + L 0 G
10 6 I/Os: 11 BI/6 BO, 1 live status contact 2

8 Power supply: DC 110 to 250 V, AC 115 V to AC 230 V 5
11 10 Region: US, English language (US); 60 Hz, ANSI
E
C
12 Communication: DIGSI 4, electric RS232 1
12 13 Measuring/fault recording: Extended measuring and fault records

14/15 Protection function package: Basic version plus directional TOC
3
F C
13
14
15
DIGSI 4
1
units running under MS Windows 2000 / XP Professional Edition
Basis
(authorization by serial number) 7XS5400-0AA00 2
Professional
control displays) and DIGSI 4 Remote (remote operation)
7XS5402-0AA00
3
Complete version:
displays),
4

Software for conguration of stations with IEC 61850 commu-
5
SIGRA 4
6
other manufacturers (Comtrade format). Running under
MS Windows 2000 or XP Professional Edition. (generally contai-
7

AC/DC 24 to 60 V 7XV5662-2AD10 8
AC/DC 90 to 240 V 7XV5662-5AD10
Varistor / Voltage Arrester

Voltage arrester for high-impedance REF protection
125 Vrms; 600 A; 1S/S 256 C53207-A401-D76-1
9
240 Vrms; 600 A; 1S/S 1088 C53207-A401-D77-1
Connecting cable
Cable between PC/notebook (9-pin con.) and protection unit 10
SIPROTEC 4 unit
- length 5 m / 16.4 ft 7XV5103-7AA05
11
- length 25 m / 82 ft 7XV5103-7AA25
- length 50 m / 164 ft 7XV5103-7AA50
Manual for 7SJ62 12

English C53000-G1140-C207-x 1)
German C53000-G1100-C207-6
13
14
1) x = please inquire for latest edition (exact Order No.).

15

package
1 Terminal safety cover
LSP2289-afp.eps
2 Mounting rail
Connector 2-pin
Connector 3-pin
C73334-A1-C35-1
C73334-A1-C36-1
1
1
Siemens
Siemens

taped on reel
3
LSP2090-afp.eps
LSP2091-afp.eps
taped on reel
4 2-pin connector 3-pin connector Crimping tool for Type III+ 0-539635-1 1 AMP 1)
5
LSP2093-afp.eps
LSP2092-afp.eps
Short-circuit links
6 Short-circuit links
Short-circuit links
Mounting rail for 19" rack C73165-A63-D200-1 1 Siemens
10
11
12
13
14
15
Connection diagram
10
11
12
13

Fig. 5/101 7SJ621 connection diagram 15

Connection diagram
10
11
12
13


Connection diagram
1
7SJ623, E
7SJ625 7SJ625x-x D xxx-xxxx
E
9
LSA4734a-en.eps
10
11
12
13

Fig. 5/103 7SJ623, 7SJ625 connection diagram 15

Connection diagram
1 7SJ626x-x B xxx-xxxx
7SJ624, E
7SJ626 7SJ626x-x D xxx-xxxx
E
9
LSA4735a-en.eps
10
11
12
13

15 Fig. 5/104 7SJ624, 7SJ626 connection diagram

Function overview
(denite-time/inverse-time/user-def.)
(denite-time/inverse-time/user-def.) 2
Sensitive dir./non-dir. ground-fault detection
Intermittent ground-fault protection 3
LSP2316-afpen.tif
Inrush restraint
Motor protection
Overload protection
4
Under-/overvoltage protection
Under-/overfrequency protection 5
Fig. 5/105 SIPROTEC 4 7SJ63 multifunction protection relay
Description
Phase-sequence monitoring
Auto-reclosure
6
Fault locator
The SIPROTEC 4 7SJ63 can be used as a protective control and
Lockout
monitoring relay for distribution feeders and transmission
lines of any voltage in networks that are earthed (grounded), Control functions/programmable logic
7
low-resistance grounded, ungrounded, or of a compensated
Flexible number of switching devices
neutral point structure. The relay is suited for networks that
Position of switching elements is shown on the graphic display
are radial or looped, and for lines with single or multi-terminal
feeds. Regarding the time-overcurrent/directional overcurrent Local/remote switching via key-operated switch 8
protection the characteristics can be either denite time, inverse Control via keyboard, binary inputs, DIGSI 4 or SCADA system
time or user-dened.
Extended user-dened logic with CFC (e.g. interlocking)
The SIPROTEC 4 7SJ63 is equipped with motor protection appli-
cable for asynchronous machines of all sizes. Motor protection Monitoring functions
9
comprises undercurrent monitoring, starting time supervision, Operational measured values V, I, f,...
restart inhibit, locked rotor. Energy metering values Wp, Wq
The relay provides easy-to-use local control and automation
functions. The number of controllable switchgear depends only
Circuit-breaker wear monitoring 10
Slave pointer
on the number of available inputs and outputs. The integrated
programmable logic (CFC) allows the user to implement their Trip circuit supervision
own functions, e.g. for the automation of switchgear (interlock-
ing). The user is able to generate user-dened messages as well.
11
Communication interfaces
System interface
IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850
12
PROFIBUS-FMS /-DP
DNP 3.0 / MODBUS RTU
13
Time synchronization via IRIG-B/DCF77
14
15
Application
7 Fig. 5/106 Function diagram
Application Line protection
8 The SIPROTEC 4 7SJ63 unit is a numerical protection relay that

The 7SJ63 units can be used for line protection of high and
medium-voltage networks with earthed (grounded), low-
also performs control and monitoring functions and therefore resistance grounded, isolated or compensated neutral point.
supports the user in cost-effective power system management,
9 and ensures reliable supply of electric power to the customers.
Local operation has been designed according to ergonomic
Motor protection
When protecting motors, the 7SJ63 relays are suitable for
criteria. A large, easy-to-read graphic display was a major design
asynchronous machines of all sizes.
aim.
10 Control
The 7SJ63 units perform all functions of backup protection
The integrated control function permits control of disconnect
supplementary to transformer differential protection. The inrush
devices (electrically operated/motorized switches) or circuit-
breakers via the integrated operator panel, binary inputs, DIGSI 4
11 or the control and protection system (e.g. SICAM). The present The high-impedance restricted ground-fault protection detects
status (or position) of the primary equipment can be displayed. short-circuits and insulation faults on the transformer.
7SJ63 supports substations with single and duplicate busbars.
The number of elements that can be controlled (usually 1 to 5) is Backup protection
12 only restricted by the number of inputs and outputs available.
A full range of command processing functions is provided.
The relays can be used universally for backup protection.
Metering values
Programmable logic
13 The integrated logic characteristics (CFC) allow the user to

implement their own functions for automation of switchgear
Extensive measured values, limit values and metering values
permit improved systems management.

user can also generate user-dened messages.
14
15
Application
50, 50N I>, I>>

IE>, IE>>
Denite-time overcurrent protection (phase / neutral)
1
50, 51V, 51N Ip, IEp Inverse overcurrent protection (phase / neutral), phase function with voltage-dependent option
67, 67N Idir>, Idir>>, Ip dir Directional overcurrent protection (denite / inverse, phase / neutral),
67Ns/50Ns
IEdir>, IEdir>>, Ip dir
IEE>, IEE>>, IEEp
Directional comparison protection
Directional / non-directional sensitive ground-fault detection
2
VE, V0> Displacement voltage, zero-sequence voltage
59N/64
3

4
79 Auto-reclosure
47 V2>, phase seq. Unbalance-voltage protection and / or phase-sequence monitoring 5

49 > Thermal overload protection

6
37 I< Undercurrent monitoring 7

38 Temperature monitoring via external device (RTD-box), e.g. bearing temperature monitoring
27, 59 V<, V> Undervoltage / overvoltage protection

8
81O/U f>, f< Overfrequency / underfrequency protection
21FL Fault locator
10
11
12
13
14
15
Construction
Construction
1 Connection techniques and housing

with many advantages
and -rack sizes
2 These are the available housing widths

of the 7SJ63 relays, referred to a 19"
module frame system. This means that
previous models can always be replaced.
LSP2174-afp.tif
3 The height is a uniform 244 mm for
LSP2166-afp.tif
ush-mounting housings and 266 mm
for surface-mounting housings for all
housing widths. All cables can be con-
4 nected with or without ring lugs. Plug-in

terminals are available as an option.
It is thus possible to employ prefabricated
cable harnesses. In the case of surface Fig. 5/107 Flush-mounting housing Fig. 5/108 Rear view of ush-mounting
with screw-type terminals housing with covered connection
5 mounting on a panel, the connection
terminals are located above and below
terminals andwirings
in the form of screw-type terminals. The

communication interfaces are located
in a sloped case at the top and bottom
6 of the housing. The housing can also
be supplied optionally with a detached
operator panel (refer to Fig. 5/109),
or without operator panel, in order to
7 allow optimum operation for all types of
applications.
LSP2196-afp.eps
9
10 Fig. 5/109 Housing with plug-in terminals and detached operator panel
11
12
LSP2219-afpen.eps
13
LSP2237-afp.tif
14
Fig. 5/110 Surface-mounting housing with Fig. 5/111 Communication interfaces in a
15 screw-type terminals sloped case in a surface-mounting
housing

Overcurrent protection 1
(ANSI 50, 50N, 51, 51N)
selective measurement of the three phase
currents and the ground current (four 2
transformers). Two denite-time overcur-
rent protection elements (DMT) exist both
for the phases and for the ground. The
current threshold and the delay time can 3
be set within a wide range. In addition,
inverse-time overcurrent protection
Reset characteristics
4
For easier time coordination with electro-
Fig. 5/112 Denite-time overcurrent Fig. 5/113 Inverse-time overcurrent
mechanical relays, reset characteristics protection protection
according to ANSI C37.112 and
5
applied. Available inverse-time characteristics
When using the reset characteristic (disk Characteristics acc. to ANSI/IEEE IEC 60255-3
emulation), a reset process is initiated Inverse 6
after the fault current has disappeared.
Short inverse
This reset process corresponds to the
reverse movement of the Ferraris disk of Long inverse
an electromechanical relay (thus: disk
emulation).
Moderately inverse 7
Very inverse
User-denable characteristics Extremely inverse
Instead of the predened time char-

acteristics according to ANSI, tripping
8
characteristics can be dened by the user for phase and ground
units separately. Up to 20 current / time value pairs may be
programmed. They are set as pairs of numbers or graphically in
DIGSI 4. 9
Inrush restraint
harmonic is detected during transformer energization, pickup of 10
non-directional and directional normal elements are blocked.
Cold load pickup / dynamic setting change

For directional and non-directional overcurrent protection
11
functions the initiation thresholds and tripping times can be
12
13
14
15
1 Directional phase and ground protection are separate functions.

They operate in parallel to the non-directional overcurrent
rately. Denite-time and inverse-time characteristic is offered.
2 By means of voltage memory, directionality can be determined
3 from the voltage memory. If no voltage exists in the memory,
4 is to be determined via zero-sequence system or negative-
sequence system quantities (selectable). Using negative-
sequence variables can be advantageous in cases where the zero
voltage tends to be very low due to unfavorable zero-sequence protection
impedances.
5 Directional comparison protection (cross-coupling)
sources with instantaneous tripping, i.e. without the disadvan-
6 tage of time coordination. The directional comparison protection
is suitable if the distances between the protection stations are
not signicant and pilot wires are available for signal transmis-
sion. In addition to the directional comparison protection, the
7 directional coordinated overcurrent protection is used for com-
plete selective backup protection. If operated in a closed-circuit
connection, an interruption of the transmission line is detected.
8 (Sensitive) directional ground-fault detection

(ANSI 64, 67Ns, 67N)
9 sequence current I0 and zero-sequence voltage V0. For networks
with an isolated neutral, the reactive current component
is evaluated; for compensated networks, the active current
component or residual resistive current is evaluated. For special
network conditions, e.g. high-resistance grounded networks
10 with ohmic-capacitive ground-fault current or low-resistance
grounded networks with ohmic-inductive current, the tripping
characteristics can be rotated approximately 45 degrees. Fig. 5/115 Directional determination using cosine measurements for
compensated networks
11 Two modes of ground-fault direction detection can be imple-
mented: tripping or signalling only mode.
It has the following functions: (Sensitive) ground-fault detection
(ANSI 50Ns, 51Ns / 50N, 51N)
TRIP via the displacement voltage VE.
12 Two instantaneous elements or one instantaneous plus one For high-resistance grounded networks, a sensitive input
user-dened characteristic.
transformer (also called core-balance CT).
Each element can be set in forward, reverse, or non-
directional. The function can also be operated in the insensitive mode as an
13 The function can also be operated in the insensitive mode as additional short-circuit protection.
an additional short-circuit protection.
Intermittent (re-striking) faults occur due to insulation weak-
14 nesses in cables or as a result of water penetrating cable joints.
Such faults either simply cease at some stage or develop into
15 may undergo thermal overloading. The normal ground-fault pro-

tection cannot reliably detect and interrupt the current pulses,

some of which can be very brief.
The selectivity required with intermittent ground faults is
achieved by summating the duration of the individual pulses and
1
one systems period.
2
In line protection, the two-element phase-balance current/
negative-sequence protection permits detection on the high side
3
switch group Dy 5). This provides backup protection for high-
resistance faults beyond the transformer. 4
Fig. 5/116 High-impedance restricted ground-fault protection
If a faulted portion of the electrical circuit is not disconnected
delayed auto-reclosures (DAR) 5
initiated using the breaker failure protection which operates Starting of the ARC depends on the trip command selection
the circuit-breaker, e.g. of an upstream (higher-level) protection (e.g. 46, 50, 51, 67)
relay. Breaker failure is detected if, after a trip command, current
is still owing in the faulted circuit. As an option, it is possible to
6
The directional and non-directional elements can either be
High-impedance restricted ground-fault protection (ANSI 87N) blocked or operated non-delayed depending on the auto-
The high-impedance measurement principle is an uncomplicated
reclosure cycle
7
transformers. It can also be applied to motors, generators and elements can be activated depending on the ready AR
When the high-impedance measurement principle is applied, all
8
current transformers in the protected area are connected in par- For protecting cables and transformers, an overload protection
allel and operated on one common resistor of relatively high R with an integrated pre-warning element for temperature and
whose voltage is measured (see Fig. 5/116). In the case of 7SJ6 current can be applied. The temperature is calculated using a
units, the voltage is measured by detecting the current through
the (external) resistor R at the sensitive current measurement
thermal homogeneous-body model (according to IEC 60255-8),
which takes account both of the energy entering the equipment
9
input IEE. The varistor V serves to limit the voltage in the event and the energy losses. The calculated temperature is constantly
of an internal fault. It cuts off the high momentary voltage adjusted accordingly. Thus, account is taken of the previous load
spikes occurring at transformer saturation. At the same time,
this results in smoothing of the voltage without any noteworthy
and the load uctuations.
For thermal protection of motors (especially the stator) a further
10
reduction of the average value.
time constant can be set so that the thermal ratios can be detected
If no faults have occurred and in the event of external faults, the correctly while the motor is rotating and when it is stopped. The
system is at equilibrium, and the voltage through the resistor is
approximately zero. In the event of internal faults, an imbalance
ambient temperature or the temperature of the coolant can be
detected serially via an external temperature monitoring box
11
occurs which leads to a voltage and a current ow through the (resistance-temperature detector box, also called RTD- box). The
resistor R. thermal replica of the overload function is automatically adapted
The current transformers must be of the same type and must

at least offer a separate core for the high-impedance restricted
to the ambient conditions. If there is no RTD-box it is assumed that
the ambient temperatures are constant. 12
ground-fault protection. They must in particular have the same Settable dropout delay times
voltage. They should also demonstrate only minimal measuring
errors.
If the devices are used in parallel with electromechanical relays
in networks with intermittent faults, the long dropout times of 13
the electromechanical devices (several hundred milliseconds)
Auto-reclosure (ANSI 79) can lead to problems in terms of time grading. Clean time
grading is only possible if the dropout time is approximately the
Multiple reclosures can be dened by the user and lockout will
same. This is why the parameter of dropout times can be dened
for certain functions such as time-overcurrent protection,
14
functions are possible: ground short-circuit and phase-balance current protection.
3-pole ARC for all types of faults
Separate settings for phase and ground faults 15
Motor protection
1 If a motor is started up too many times in succes-
sion, the rotor can be subject to thermal overload,
especially the upper edges of the bars. The rotor
temperature is calculated from the stator current.
2 The reclosing lockout only permits start-up of the
motor if the rotor has sufcient thermal reserves for
a complete start-up (see Fig. 5/117).
3 Emergency start-up
This function disables the reclosing lockout via a
binary input by storing the state of the thermal
replica as long as the binary input is active. It is
also possible to reset the thermal replica to zero.
4 Temperature monitoring (ANSI 38)
Up to two temperature monitoring boxes with a total
of 12 measuring sensors can be used for tempera-
5 ture monitoring and detection by the protection
relay. The thermal status of motors, generators and Fig. 5/117
transformers can be monitored with this device.
Additionally, the temperature of the bearings of rotating machines Voltage protection
6 are monitored for limit value violation. The temperatures are being
measured with the help of temperature detectors at various loca- Overvoltage protection (ANSI 59)
tions of the device to be protected. This data is transmitted to the The two-element overvoltage protection detects unwanted
protection relay via one or two temperature monitoring boxes (see network and machine overvoltage conditions. The function can
Accessories, page 5/153). operate either with phase-to-phase voltage (default) or with
7 Starting time supervision (ANSI 48/14)
the negative phase-sequence system voltage. Three-phase and
single-phase connections are possible.
Starting time supervision protects the motor against long
unwanted start-ups that might occur in the event of excessive Undervoltage protection (ANSI 27)
8 load torque or excessive voltage drops within the motor, or if the

rotor is locked. Rotor temperature is calculated from measured
The two-element undervoltage protection provides protec-
stator current. The tripping time is calculated according to the machines). Applications include the isolation of generators or
following equation: motors from the network to avoid undesired operating states
and a possible loss of stability. Proper operating conditions
9 for I > IMOTOR START
of electrical machines are best evaluated with the positive-
I 2 sequence quantities. The protection function is active over a
t = A TA wide frequency range (45 to 55, 55 to 65 Hz)1). Even when
I
falling below this frequency range the function continues to
10 I
IMOTOR START
= Actual current owing
= Pickup current to detect a motor start
work, however, with a greater tolerance band.
The function can operate either with the positive phase-
t = Tripping time sequence system voltage (default) or with the phase-to-phase
IA = Rated motor starting current voltages, and can be monitored with a current criterion. Three-
11 TA = Tripping time at rated motor starting current phase and single-phase connections are possible.

prolonged start-up and reduced voltage (and reduced start-up Frequency protection can be used for over-frequency and under-
12 current) will be evaluated correctly. The tripping time is inverse
(current dependent). are protected from unwanted speed deviations. Unwanted
A binary signal is set by a speed sensor to detect a blocked rotor.
can be removed at a specied frequency setting. Frequency pro-
An instantaneous tripping is effected.
tection can be used over a wide frequency range (45 to 55, 55 to
13 Phase-balance current protection (ANSI 46)
65 Hz)1). There are four elements (selectable as overfrequency
or underfrequency) and each element can be delayed separately.
The negative-sequence / phase-balance current protection detects Blocking of the frequency protection can be performed if using a
a phase failure or load unbalance due to network asymmetry and binary input or by using an undervoltage element.
14 protects the rotor from impermissible temperature rise. Fault locator (ANSI 21FL)
Undercurrent monitoring (ANSI 37) The fault locator species the distance to a fault location in
With this function, a sudden drop in current, which can occur kilometers or miles or the reactance of a second fault operation.
15 due to a reduced motor load, is detected. This may be due to



1
benet lies in reduced maintenance costs.
There is no mathematically exact method of calculating the
2
opens. This is why various methods of determining CB wear have
evolved which reect the different operator philosophies. To do
I
3
Ix, with x = 1... 3
Two-point method
4
The CB manufacturers double-logarithmic switching cycle diagram
(see Fig. 5/118) and the breaking current at the time of contact
opening serve as the basis for this method. After CB opening, the
two-point method calculates the number of still possible switching 5
cycles. To this end, the two points P1 and P2 only have to be set on Fig. 5/118 CB switching cycle diagram
the device. These are specied in the CB's technical data.
All of these methods are phase-selective and a limit value can be
set in order to obtain an alarm if the actual value falls below or
6
exceeds the limit value during determination of the remaining binary inputs
service life. substation control and protection system
DIGSI 4
Customized functions (ANSI 32, 51V, 55, etc.)
Additional functions, which are not time critical, can be imple- Automation / user-dened logic
7
mented via the CFC using measured values. Typical functions With integrated logic, the user can set, via a graphic interface
include reverse power, voltage controlled overcurrent, phase (CFC), specic functions for the automation of switchgear or
angle detection, and zero-sequence voltage detection. substation. Functions are activated via function keys, binary
8
Commissioning
Commissioning could hardly be easier and is fully supported by Switching authority
DIGSI 4. The status of the binary inputs can be read individually Switching authority is determined according to parameters,
operation of switching elements (circuit-breakers, disconnect
communication or by key-operated switch (when available). 9
possible. The following sequence of switching authority is laid
ranging operational measured values. To prevent transmission of
information to the control center during maintenance, the bay Key-operated switch
10
controller communications can be disabled to prevent unneces- 7SJ63 units are tted with key-operated switch function for
sary data from being transmitted. During commissioning, all local/remote changeover and changeover between interlocked
indications with test marking for test purposes can be connected
switching and test operation.
11
Command processing
Test operation All the functionality of command processing is offered. This includes
During commissioning, all indications can be passed to an the processing of single and double commands with or without
automatic control system for test purposes. feedback, sophisticated monitoring of the control hardware and
software, checking of the external process, control actions using
12
Control and automatic functions
functions such as runtime monitoring and automatic command
Control termination after output. Here are some typical applications:
support all control and monitoring functions that are required for
trip contacts
13
operating medium-voltage or high-voltage substations. User-denable bay interlocks
The main application is reliable control of switching and other Operating sequences combining several switching operations
processes.
such as control of circuit-breakers, disconnectors and ground- 14
ing switches
obtained from auxiliary contacts and communicated to the Triggering of switching operations, indications or alarm by
7SJ63 via binary inputs. Therefore it is possible to detect and combination with existing information
indicate both the OPEN and CLOSED position or a fault or
intermediate circuit-breaker or auxiliary contact position.
15
Functions
Functions
1 Motor control
The SIPROTEC 4 7SJ63 with high per-
formance relays is well-suited for direct
2 activation of the circuit-breaker, discon-

nector and grounding switch operating
mechanisms in automated substations.
Interlocking of the individual switching
3 devices takes place with the aid of
programmable logic. Additional auxiliary
relays can be eliminated. This results in
less wiring and engineering effort.
4 Assignment of feedback to command

The positions of the circuit-breaker or
switching devices and transformer taps
5 are acquired by feedback. These indica-

tion inputs are logically assigned to the Fig. 5/119 Typical wiring for 7SJ632 motor direct control (simplied representation without
corresponding command outputs. The fuses). Binary output BO4 and BO5 are interlocked so that only one set of contacts
unit can therefore distinguish whether are closed at a time.
the indication change is a consequence
6 of switching operation or whether it is a
spontaneous change of state.
Chatter disable
7 Chatter disable feature evaluates whether,
in a congured period of time, the num-
ber of status changes of indication input
exceeds a specied gure. If exceeded,
8 the indication input is blocked for a
certain period, so that the event list will
not record excessive operations.

9 Binary indications can be ltered or
delayed.
Fig. 5/120 Example: Single busbar with circuit-breaker and motor-controlled three-position
Filtering serves to suppress brief changes
10 in potential at the indication input. The
indication is passed on only if the indica-
switch
tion voltage is still present after a set

period of time. In the event of indication
11 delay, there is a wait for a preset time.
The information is passed on only if the
indication voltage is still present after this
time.
A further indication (or a command) can
be derived from an existing indication.
13 Group indications can also be formed.

The volume of information to the system
interface can thus be reduced and
restricted to the most important signals.
14
Fig. 5/121 Example: Circuit-breaker interlocking
15
Functions
Measured values
voltage along with the power factor, frequency, active and reac- 1
tive power. The following functions are available for measured
value processing:
Voltages VL1, VL2, VL3, VL1L2, VL2L3, VL3L1 2
Power factor (cos ), (total and phase selective) 3
Frequency
Mean as well as minimum and maximum current and voltage
values 4
Limit value monitoring 5
LSP2078-afp.eps
Limit values are monitored using programmable logic in the
CFC. Commands can be derived from this limit value indica-
tion.
Zero suppression
6
Metered values
For internal metering, the unit can calculate an energy metered
7
value from the measured current and voltage values. If an
Fig. 5/122 NX PLUS panel (gas-insulated)
external meter with a metering pulse output is available, the
SIPROTEC 4 unit can obtain and process metering pulses via an
indication input. Measuring transducers
8
The metered values can be displayed and passed on to a control Characteristic with knee
center as an accumulation with reset. A distinction is made For measuring transducers it sometimes makes sense to
between forward, reverse, active and reactive energy. extend a small range of the input value, e.g. for the frequency
that is only relevant in the range 45 to 55, 55 to 65 Hz. This
9
can be achieved by using a knee characteristic.
Live-zero monitoring
4 20 mA circuits are monitored for open-circuit detection.
10
Switchgear cubicles for high/medium voltage
11
In general, no separate measuring instruments (e.g. for current,
voltage, frequency measuring transducer ...) or additional
12
13
14
15
Communication
Communication
1 In terms of communication, the units offer substantial exibility

2 Therefore, also in the future it will be possible to optimally inte-
3 Serial front interface
4 protection operation program. Commissioning tools and fault
5 A number of communication modules suitable for various applica-
6 by the user.
The interface modules support the following applications:
7 telegrams in IRIG-B or DCF77 format into the units via time
System interface
8 through this interface. Radial or ring type station bus topolo-
9 operated by DIGSI.
Service interface
The service interface was conceived for remote access to a
number of protection units via DIGSI. On all units, it can be Fig. 5/124 Bus structure for station bus with Ethernet and
10 an electrical RS232/RS485 or an optical interface. For special

applications, a maximum of two temperature monitoring
IEC 61850, ber-optic ring
boxes (RTD-box) can be connected to this interface as an

alternative.
11 System interface protocols (retrottable)
PROFIBUS-DP is the most widespread protocol in industrial auto-
mation. Via PROFIBUS-DP, SIPROTEC units make their information
IEC 61850 protocol commands from a central SIMATIC. Measured values can also be
transferred.
12 The Ethernet-based IEC 61850 protocol is the worldwide standard
MODBUS RTU protocol
tions. Siemens was the rst manufacturer to support this standard.
By means of this protocol, information can also be exchanged This uncomplicated, serial protocol is mainly used in industry and
directly between bay units so as to set up simple masterless by power supply corporations, and is supported by a number of
13 systems for bay and system interlocking. Access to the units via the unit manufacturers. SIPROTEC units function as MODBUS slaves,
Ethernet bus is also possible with DIGSI. making their information available to a master or receiving infor-
mation from it. A time-stamped event list is available.
14 The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is an international standard for the
from the unit and also control commands can be transferred by
15 1) For units in panel surface-mounting housings

Communication
DNP 3.0 protocol

Power supply corporations use the serial
DNP 3.0 (Distributed Network Protocol) 1
for the station and network control levels.
SIPROTEC units function as DNP slaves, sup-
plying their information to a master system
or receiving information from it. 2
System solutions for protection and
station control
Together with the SICAM power automa- 3
tion system, SIPROTEC 4 can be used with
PROFIBUS-FMS. Over the low-cost electrical
RS485 bus, or interference-free via the
optical double ring, the units exchange
information with the control system.
4
Units featuring IEC 60870-5-103 interfaces
can be connected to SICAM in parallel via
the RS485 bus or radially by ber-optic
link. Through this interface, the system is
5
open for the connection of units of other
manufacturers (see Fig. 5/123).
Because of the standardized interfaces,
6
SIPROTEC units can also be integrated
into systems of other manufacturers or
in SIMATIC. Electrical RS485 or optical
interfaces are available. The optimum
physical data transfer medium can be
7
chosen thanks to opto-electrical converters.
LSP3.01-0021.tif
Thus, the RS485 bus allows low-cost wiring
in the cubicles and an interference-free
optical connection to the master can be
8
established.
For IEC 61850, an interoperable system
solution is offered with SICAM PAS. Via
the 100 Mbits/s Ethernet bus, the units are
9
linked with PAS electrically or optically to
the station PC. The interface is standard-
ized, thus also enabling direct connection
of units of other manufacturers to the 10
Ethernet bus. With IEC 61850, however, the
Fig. 5/126 Optical Ethernet communication module for IEC 61850
units can also be used in other manufactur-
with integrated Ethernet-switch
ers systems (see Fig. 5/124).
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connections
Typical connections
1 Connection of current
Standard connection
2 For grounded networks, the ground current
is obtained from the phase currents by the
residual current circuit.
5 Fig. 5/127 Residual current circuit without directional element
10 Fig. 5/128 Sensitive ground-current detection without directional element
11
12
13
14
15 Fig. 5/129 Residual current circuit with directional element

Typical connections

The gure shows the connection of
two phase-to-ground voltages and the 1
VE voltage of the open delta winding
and a phase-balance neutral current
transformer for the ground current. This
connection maintains maximum precision
for directional ground-fault detection and
2
must be used in compensated networks.
Figure 5/130 shows sensitive directional
ground-fault detection. 3
Fig. 5/130 Sensitive directional ground-fault detection with directional element for phases
5
9
Fig. 5/131 Sensitive directional ground-fault detection
10
or compensated networks only
11
Directional phase short-circuit protection
can be achieved by using only two 12
13
14
Fig. 5/132 Isolated-neutral or compensated networks
15
1 Type of network Function Current connection Voltage connection

2 (Low-resistance) grounded networks Sensitive ground-fault protection Phase-balance neutral current


non-directional current transformers possible
3 (Low-resistance) grounded networks Overcurrent protection Residual circuit, with 3 phase-current Phase-to-ground connection or
4 phases directional

Residual circuit, with 3 phase-current

phase-to-phase connection
Phase-to-ground connection required

5 Isolated networks Sensitive ground-fault

protection
6 Compensated networks Sensitive ground-fault protection Phase-balance neutral current

7 Typical applications
8 Undervoltage releases
9 Example:
DC supply voltage of control system fails
andmanual electric tripping is no longer
possible.
10 Automatic tripping takes place when
voltage across the coil drops below the trip
limit. In Fig. 5/133, tripping occurs due to
failure of DC supply voltage, by automatic
11 opening of the live status contact upon
failure of the protection unit or by short-
circuiting the trip coil in event of a network
fault Fig. 5/133 Undervoltage release with make contact (50, 51)
12
13
14
15
In Fig. 5/134 tripping is by failure of

auxiliary voltage and by interruption of
tripping circuit in the event of network
failure.Upon failure of the protection unit,
1
the tripping circuit is also interrupted,
since contact held by internal logic drops
back into open position.
2
monitoring the circuit-breaker trip coil
3
interrupted.
Lockout (ANSI 86) 4

lockout state is also stored in the event of
supply voltage failure. Reclosure can only Fig. 5/134 Undervoltage release with locking contact (trip signal 50 is inverted) 5
Fig. 5/135 Trip circuit supervision with 2 binary inputs 10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 5/136 Trip circuit supervision with 1 binary input
15
Technical data
General unit data Binary imputs / command inputs
1 Measuring circuits
Type
Number (marshallable)
7SJ631 7SJ632 7SJ633 7SJ635 7SJ636
11 24 20 37 33
Current transformer Voltage range DC 24 250 V
Rated current Inom 1 or 5 A (settable) Pickup threshold
2 Option: sensitive ground-fault CT

Power consumption
IEE < 1.6 A
modiable by plug-in
jumpers
Pickup threshold DC DC 19 V DC 88 V
at Inom = 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA per phase
at Inom = 5 A Approx. 0.3 VA per phase For rated control voltage
for sensitive ground-fault CT at 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA DC 24/48/60/110/ DC 110/125/220/250 V
3 Overload capability
Thermal (effective) 500 A for 1 s Power consumption
DC 125 V
0.9 mA (independent of operating voltage)
150 A for 10 s energized for BI 16 / 819 / 2536;
20 A continuous 1.8 mA for BI 7 / 2024 / 37
4 Dynamic (impulse current)

250 x Inom (half cycle) Binary outputs / command outputs
Type 7SJ631 7SJ632 7SJ633 7SJ635 7SJ636
Thermal (effective) 300 A for 1 s Command/indication 8 11 11 14 14
100 A for 10 s relay

15 A continuous
750 A (half cycle)
indication relay
Voltage transformer Live status contact 1 NO / NC (jumper) / form A / B
Rated voltage Vnom 100 V to 225 V Switching capacity
Make 1000 W / VA
6 Power consumption at Vnom = 100 V
< 0.3 VA per phase
Break 30 W / VA / 40 W resistive /
25 W at L/R 50 ms
(phase-neutral voltage)
Thermal (effective) 230 V continuous Switching voltage DC 250 V
Permissible current 5 A continuous,
7 Measuring transducer inputs
Type 7SJ633 7SJ636
30 A for 0.5 s making current,
Number 2 2 Power relay (for motor control)
Input current DC 0 20 mA
Type 7SJ631 7SJ632 7SJ635
8 Input resistance
Power consumption
10
5.8 mW at 24 mA
7SJ633
7SJ636
Auxiliary voltage (via integrated converter) Number 0 2(4) 4 (8)
Rated auxiliary voltage Vaux DC 24/48 V 60/125 V 110/250 V Number of contacts/relay 2 NO / form A
9 Permissible tolerance DC 19 58 V 48 150 V 88 300 V Switching capacity

Make 1000 W / VA at 48 V 250 V / 500 W at 24 V
Ripple voltage, 12 % of rated auxiliary voltage
peak-to-peak Break 1000 W / VA at 48 V 250 V / 500 W at 24 V
Power consumption 7SJ631 7SJ632 7SJ635 Switching voltage DC 250 V
10 Quiescent Approx. 4 W
7SJ633
5.5 W
7SJ636
7W
30 A for 0.5 s
Energized Approx. 10 W 16 W 20 W
Backup time during 50 ms at V > DC 110 V
11 loss/short-circuit of
auxiliary direct voltage
20 ms at V > DC 24 V
Rated auxiliary voltage Vaux AC 115 V 230 V

Permissible tolerance AC 92 132 V 184 265 V
12 Power consumption
7SJ631 7SJ632 7SJ635
7SJ633 7SJ636
Quiescent Approx. 3 W 5W 7W
Energized Approx. 12 W 18 W 23 W
13 Backup time during

loss/short-circuit of
200 ms
auxiliary alternating voltage
14
15
Technical data
Electrical tests Fast transient surge withstand 4 to 5 kV; 10/150 ns; 50 surges per s
capability ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 both polarities; duration 2 s, Ri = 80
Specication
Standards IEC 60255
Radiated electromagnetic
interference
35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz;
amplitude and pulse-modulated
1
ANSI C37.90, C37.90.1, C37.90.2,
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2
UL508
Damped wave 2.5 kV (peak value, polarity
Insulation tests
Standards IEC 60255-5; ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0
IEC 60694 / IEC 61000-4-12 alternating)
100 kHz, 1 MHz, 10 and 50 MHz, 2
Voltage test (100 % test) 2.5 kV (r.m.s. value), 50/60 Hz Ri = 200
all circuits except for auxiliary EMC tests for interference emission; type tests
voltage and RS485/RS232 and
Standard EN 50081-* (generic specication)
Conducted interferences 150 kHz to 30 MHz 3
and time synchronization
Impulse voltage test (type test) 5 kV (peak value); 1.2/50 s; 0.5 J
4
class III
Standards IEC 60255-6; IEC 60255-22
(product standard)
Vibration, shock stress and seismic vibration
5
EN 50082-2 (generic specication) During operation
DIN 57435 Part 303
High-frequency test
400 surges per s; test duration 2 s Vibration
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2
Sinusoidal
10 to 60 Hz; 0.075 mm amplitude;
6
and VDE 0435 Part 303, class III
Electrostatic discharge 8 kV contact discharge; frequency sweep 1 octave/min
10 V/m; 27 to 500 MHz
Shock
Semi-sinusoidal 7
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms;
eld, non-modulated IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks in both directions of 3 axes
IEC 60255-22-3 (Report) class III
10 V/m, 80 to 1000 MHz;
AM 80 %; 1 kHz
IEC 60255-21-3, class 1
IEC 60068-3-3
(horizontal axis)
8
IEC 61000-4-3; class III 1 to 8 Hz: 1.5 mm amplitude
Irradiation with radio-frequency 10 V/m, 900 MHz; repetition (vertical axis)
eld, pulse-modulated rate 200 Hz, on duration 50 % 8 to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration
IEC 61000-4-3/ENV 50204; class III
(horizontal axis)
9
IEC 60255-22-4 and IEC 61000-4- burst length = 15 ms; (vertical axis)
4, class IV repetition rate 300 ms; both polarities; Frequency sweep 1 octave/min
Ri = 50 ; test duration 1 min 1 cycle in 3 perpendicular axes
High-energy surge voltages
(Surge)
During transportation 10
Auxiliary voltage From circuit to circuit: 2 kV; 12 ; 9 F
Binary inputs/outputs
From circuit to circuit: 2 kV; 42 ; 0.5 F
IEC 60068-2-6 8 to 150 Hz; 2 g acceleration,
11
across contacts: 1 kV; 42 ; 0.5 F 20 cycles in 3 perpendicular axes
Line-conducted HF, 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; Shock Semi-sinusoidal
amplitude-modulated AM 80 %; 1 kHz IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1 Acceleration 15 g, duration 11 ms
Power frequency magnetic eld 30 A/m; 50 Hz, continuous
IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks in both directions of 3 axes 12
IEC 61000-4-8, class IV 300 A/m; 50 Hz, 3 s IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 10 g, duration 16 ms
IEC 60255-6 0.5 mT, 50 Hz IEC 60068-2-29 1000 shocks in both directions
capability
2.5 to 3 kV (peak value), 1 to 1.5 MHz
damped wave; 50 surges per s;
of 3 axes
13
14
15
Technical data
Climatic stress tests System interface (rear of unit)
1 Temperatures
Type-tested acc. to IEC 60068-2-1 -25 C to +85 C /-13 F to +185 F
and -2, test Bd, for 16 h transfer to a control center
Temporarily permissible operating -20 C to +70 C /-4 F to +158 F Transmission rate Factory setting: 9600 baud,
temperature, tested for 96 h min. 9600 baud, max. 19200 baud
2 Recommended permanent
-5 C to +55 C /+25 F to +131 F RS232/RS485
Connection Mounting location B
IEC 60255-6
impaired above +55 C /+131 F)
3 Limiting temperature during
permanent storage
-25 C to +55 C /-13 F to +131 F
Limiting temperature during -25 C to +70 C /-13 F to +158 F with two-tier terminal on the shielded data cable
transport top/bottom part
4 Humidity
Distance RS232
Distance RS485
Max. 15 m/49 ft
Max. 1 km/3300 ft
It is recommended to arrange the humidity; on 56 days a year up to Test voltage AC 500 V against ground
units in such a way that they are 95 % relative humidity; Fiber optic
not exposed to direct sunlight or condensation not permissible!
5 pronounced temperature changes
Connection ber-optic cable Integrated ST connector for
ber-optic connection
Unit design surface-mounting housing with
Housing 7XP20 detached operator panel
6 Dimensions See dimension drawings, part 14 of
this catalog
Weight in kg Housing width 1/2 Housing width 1/1 top/bottom part

Surface-mounting housing 7.5 15 Optical wavelength 820 nm
7 Flush-mounting housing
Housing for detached operator
panel
6.5
8.0
13
15
Distance
Detached operator panel 2.5 2.5 IEC 61850 protocol
Degree of protection Isolated interface for data Port B, 100 Base T acc. to IEEE802.3
8 acc. to EN 60529
transfer:
to a control center
Flush-mounting housing Front: IP 51, rear: IP 20; with DIGSI
Operator safety IP 2x with cover between SIPROTEC 4 relays
Transmission rate 100 Mbit
9 Serial interfaces Ethernet, electrical
Operating interface (front of unit) Connection Two RJ45 connectors
Connection Non-isolated, RS232; front panel, For ush-mounting housing/ Mounting location "B"
9-pin subminiature connector surface-mounting housing with
10 Transmission rate min. 4800 baud, max. 115200 baud
Distance Max. 20 m / 65.6 ft
Service/modem interface (rear of unit)
Isolated interface for data transfer Port C: DIGSI 4/modem/RTD-box
Ethernet, optical
11 Transmission rate Factory setting 38400 baud
min. 4800 baud, max. 115200 baud Connection Intergr. LC connector for FO
connection
RS232/RS485
For ush-mounting housing/ Mounting location "B"
Connection surface-mounting housing with
12 For ush-mounting housing/

9-pin subminiature connector,
mounting location C
Optical wavelength
Distance
1300 nmm
1.5 km/0.9 miles
PROFIBUS-FMS/DP
top/bottom part Isolated interface for data Port B
13 Distance RS232 15 m /49.2 ft
Transmission rate Up to 1.5 Mbaud
Distance RS485 Max. 1 km / 3300 ft
14
15
Technical data
RS485 Functions
Connection
mounting location B
Denite-time overcurrent protection, directional/non-directional
(ANSI 50, 50N, 67, 67N) 1
Operating mode non-directional 3-phase (standard) or 2-phase
detached operator panel phase protection (ANSI 50) (L1 and L3)
with two-tier terminal on the shielded data cable Setting ranges
top/bottom part Pickup phase elements
Pickup ground elements
2
Distance 1000 m/3300 ft 93.75 kbaud;
500 m/1500 ft 187.5 kbaud; Delay times T 0 to 60 s or (in steps of 0.01 s)
200 m/600 ft 1.5 Mbaud; Dropout delay time TDO 0 to 60 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
Test voltage
100 m/300 ft 12 Mbaud
Times
3
Fiber optic restraint, with inrush restraint
+ 10 ms)
Connection ber-optic cable Integr. ST connector for FO connec-
Non-directional Directional
tion, mounting location B
With twice the setting value Approx. 30 ms
With ve times the setting value Approx. 20 ms
45 ms
40 ms
4
Dropout ratio Approx. 0.95 for I/I 0.3
with two-tier terminal on the Important: Please refer to footnotes nom
top/bottom part
Optical wavelength
1) and 2) on page 5/174
820 nm
Tolerances
Pickup 2 % of setting value or 50 mA1)
5
Permissible path attenuation Max. 8 dB, for glass ber 62.5/125 m
Distance 500 kB/s 1.6 km/0.99 miles Inverse-time overcurrent protection, directional/non-directional
(ANSI 51, 51N, 67, 67N)
MODBUS RTU, ASCII, DNP 3.0

1500 kB/s 530 m/0.33 miles
Operating mode non-directional 3-phase (standard) or 2-phase 6
phase protection (ANSI 51) (L1 and L3)
Setting ranges
Pickup phase element IP 0.5 to 20 A or 1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
Transmission rate
RS485
Up to 19200 baud Pickup ground element IEP
Time multiplier T
0.05 to 3.2 s or (in steps of 0.01 s)
7
Connection
detached operator panel Trip characteristics
8
For surface-mounting housing At bottom part of the housing:
ANSI Inverse, short inverse, long inverse
top/bottom part
moderately inverse, very inverse,
Distance Max. 1 km/3300 ft max. 32 units
recommended
User-dened characteristic
Dened by a maximum of 20 value
9
Test voltage AC 500 V against ground pairs of current and time delay
Fiber-optic Dropout setting
Connection ber-optic cable Integrated ST connector for ber-optic
connection
Without disk emulation Approx. 1.05 setting value Ip for
Ip/Inom 0.3, corresponds to approx. 10
For ush-mounting housing/ Mounting location B 0.95 pickup threshold
surface-mounting housing with With disk emulation Approx. 0.90 setting value Ip
detached operator panel Tolerances
Important: Please refer to footnotes
Pickup/dropout thresholds Ip, IEp 2 % of setting value or 50 mA1)
11
top/bottom part 1) and 2) on page 5/174 + 2 % current tolerance, respectively
Optical wavelength 820 nm 30 ms
Dropout ratio for 0.05 I/Ip 5 % of reference (calculated) value
Distance
Max 8 dB. for glass ber 62.5/125 m
0.9 + 2 % current tolerance, respectively
30 ms
12
Time synchronization DCF77/IRIG-B signal (Format IRIG-B000)
Connection 9-pin subminiature connector
(SUB-D)
13
housing)
Voltage levels 5 V, 12 V or 24 V (optional)
14
1) At Inom = 1 A, all limits divided by 5.

15
Technical data
Direction detection (Sensitive) ground-fault detection (ANSI 64, 50 Ns, 51Ns, 67Ns)
1 For phase faults

Polarization With cross-polarized voltages;
Setting ranges
With voltage memory for measure- Pickup threshold VE> (measured) 1.8 to 170 V (in steps of 0.1 V)
ment voltages that are too low Pickup threshold 3V0> 10 to 225 V (in steps of 0.1 V)
Forward range Vref,rot 86 (calculated)
2 Rotation of reference voltage Vref,rot - 180 to 180 (in steps of 1)
Direction sensitivity For one and two-phase faults
unlimited; Times
For three-phase faults dynamically Pickup time Approx. 60 ms
unlimited; Dropout ratio 0.95 or (pickup value -0.6 V)
3 Steady-state approx. 7 V phase-to-
phase
Tolerances
Pickup threshold VE (measured) 3 % of setting value or 0.3 V
For ground faults Pickup threshold 3V0 (calculated) 3 % of setting value or 3 V
Delay times 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Polarization With zero-sequence quantities
4 3V0, 3I0 or with negative-sequence
quantities 3V2, 3I2
Measuring principle Voltage measurement
Forward range Vref,rot 86 (phase-to-ground)
Rotation of reference voltage Vref,rot - 180 to 180 (in steps of 1) Setting ranges
5 Direction sensitivity
Zero-sequence quantities 3V0, 3I0 VE 2.5 V displacement voltage,
Vph min (ground-fault phase)
Vph max (unfaulted phases)
10 to 100 V (in steps of 1 V)
measured; Measuring tolerance 3 % of setting value, or 1 V
3V0 5 V displacement voltage, acc. to DIN 57435 part 303
calculated
6 Negative-sequence quantities
3V2, 3I2
3V2 5 V negative-sequence voltage
3I2 225 mA negative-sequence
current1) Setting ranges
Tolerances (phase angle error Pickup threshold IEE>, IEE>>
under reference conditions) For sensitive input 0.001 to 1.5 A (in steps of 0.001 A)
7 For phase and ground faults 3 electrical
For normal input
Delay times T for IEE >, IEE>>
0.25 to 175 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
Inrush blocking Dropout delay time TDO 0 to 60 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
Inuenced functions Time-overcurrent elements, I>, IE>, Times
Ip, IEp (directional, non-directional) Pickup times Approx. 60 ms (non-directional)
8 Lower function limit 1.25 A1) Approx. 80 ms (directional
Upper function limit (setting 1.5 to 125 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A) Dropout ratio Approx. 0.95
range) Tolerances
Setting range I2f /I 10 to 45 % (in steps of 1 %) Pickup threshold IEE>, IEE>> 2 % of setting value or 1 mA
9 Crossblock (IL1, IL2, IL3) ON/OFF
Controllable function Directional and non-directional
pickup, tripping time User-dened characteristic Dened by a maximum of 20 pairs of
10 Start criteria Current criteria,
Logarithmic inverse
current and delay time values
CB position via aux. contacts, I
t = TIEEpmax TIEEp ln
binary input, I EEp
auto-reclosure ready Setting ranges
11 Time control
Current criteria
3 timers
Current threshold
Pickup threshold IIEEp
(reset on dropping below threshold; For normal input 0.25 to 20 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
monitoring with timer) User dened
12 Logarithmic inverse
Time multiplier TIEEp mul 0.05 to 15 s or (in steps of 0.01 s)
Delay time TIEEp 0.1 to 4 s or (in steps of 0.01 s)
Min time delay TIEEpmin 0 to 32 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
Max. time delay TIEEpmax 0 to 32 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
13
For currents greater than 1.6 A, correct directionality can no longer be
14 guaranteed.

Technical data
Times Times
Pickup times Approx. 60 ms (non-directional) Pickup times
Pickup threshold
Approx 80 ms (directional)
Approx. 1.1 IEEp
Current = 1.25 pickup value
Current 2 pickup value
Approx. 30 ms
Approx. 22 ms
1
Dropout ratio Approx. 1.05 IEEp Dropout time Approx. 22 ms
Tolerances Tolerances
Delay times in linear range
7 % of reference value for 2 I/IEEp
Pickup threshold IIE>
Times TV, Tsum, Tres
3 % of setting value, or 50 mA1)
2
20 + 2 % current tolerance, or 70 ms Thermal overload protection (ANSI 49)
Direction detection for all types of ground-faults (ANSI 67Ns) Setting ranges
Direction measurement IE and VE measured or
Factor k
Time constant
0.1 to 4 (in steps of 0.01)
1 to 999.9 min (in steps of 0.1 min)
3
Measuring principle Active/reactive power measurement
Warning overtemperature 50 to 100 % with reference
Setting ranges alarm/trip to the tripping overtemperature
Measuring enable IRelease direct.
For sensitive input
For normal input
0.001 to 1.2 A (in steps of 0.001 A)
0.25 to 150 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A) Current warning stage Ialarm
(in steps of 1 %)
0.5 to 20 A (in steps of 0.01 A)
4
Measuring method cos and sin Extension factor when stopped 1 to 10 with reference to the time
Direction phasor Correction - 45 to + 45 (in steps of 0.1 ) k factor constant with the machine running
Dropout delay TReset delay 1 to 60 s (in steps of 1 s) (in steps of 0.1)
Angle correction for cable CT
Angle correction F1, F2 0 to 5 (in steps of 0.1 )
Rated overtemperature (for Inom) 40 to 200 C (in steps of 1 C) 5
Tripping characteristic 2 2
Current value I1, I2
For (I/k Inom) 8 t =th ln
(I /k Inom ) (Ipre /k Inom )
For sensitive input 0.001 to 1.5 A (in steps of 0.001 A) 2
For normal input 0.25 to 175 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A) (I /k Inom ) 1
Tolerances
Pickup measuring enable 2 % of the setting value or 1 mA
t = Tripping time 6
th = Temperature rise time constant
Angle tolerance 3 I = Load current
High-impedance restricted ground-faultprotection (ANSI 87N) / Ipre = Preload current
Setting ranges
k = Setting factor acc. to VDE 0435
Part 3011 and IEC 60255-8 7
Pickup thresholds I>, I>> protection relay
For sensitive input 0.003 to 1.5 A or (in steps of 0.001 A)
Dropout ratios
Delay times TI>, TI>> 0 to 60 s or (in steps of 0.01 s)
/Trip
/Alarm
Drops out with Alarm
Approx. 0.99
8
Times I/IAlarm Approx. 0.97
Pickup times
Tolerances
Minimum Approx. 20 ms Class 5 acc. to IEC 60255-8
With reference to k Inom
Typical
Dropout times
Approx. 30 ms
Approx. 30 ms
With reference to tripping time
5 % 2 s acc. to IEC 60255-8
9
Dropout ratio Approx. 0.95 for I/Inom 0.5
Tolerances Number of reclosures 0 to 9
Pickup thresholds 3 % of setting value or Shot 1 to 4 individually adjustable
5 % of setting value or
10
3 % rated current at Inom = 0.1 A (dir., non-dir.), negative sequence,
Delay times 1 % of setting value or 10 ms binary input
Program for ground fault
Setting ranges
(dir., non-dir.), sensitive ground-fault
11
Pickup threshold protection, binary input
Blocking of ARC Pickup of protection functions,
For 3I0 IIE> 0.25 to 175 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
For IEE
Pickup prolon-
IIE>
TV
0.005 to 1.5 A (in steps of 0.001 A)
three-phase fault detected by a
protective element, binary input, 12
last TRIP command after the reclosing
gation time cycle is complete (unsuccessful
Ground-fault accu- Tsum 0 to 100 s (in steps of 0.01 s) reclosing),
mulation time
Reset time for Tres 1 to 600 s (in steps of 1 s)
protection (50BF), 13
accumulation
14

15
Technical data
Auto-reclosure (ANSI 79) (cont'd) Inverse-time characteristic (ANSI 46-TOC)
1 Setting ranges
Dead time
0.01 to 320 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
Setting ranges
Pickup current
Time multiplier T
0.5 to 10 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
0.05 to 3.2 s or (in steps of 0.01s)
and individual for shots 1 to 4) (IEC characteristics)
Blocking duration for manual- 0.5 s to 320 s or 0 (in steps of 0.01 s) Time multiplier D 0.5 to 15 s or (in steps of 0.01 s)
2 CLOSE detection
Blocking duration after 0.5 s to 320 s (in steps of 0.01 s) Functional limit All phase currents 20 A1)
reclosure Trip characteristics
Blocking duration after 0.01 to 320 s (in steps of 0.01 s) IEC Normal inverse, very inverse,
dynamic blocking extremely inverse
3 Start-signal monitoring time
Circuit-breaker supervision
0.1 to 320 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
ANSI Inverse, moderately inverse,
very inverse, extremely inverse
time Pickup threshold Approx. 1.1 I2p setting value
Max. delay of dead-time start 0 to 1800 s or (in steps of 0.1 s) Dropout
4 Maximum dead time extension

Action time
IEC and ANSI
(without disk emulation)
Approx. 1.05 I2p setting value,
which is approx. 0.95 pickup threshold
ANSI with disk emulation Approx. 0.90 I2p setting value
The delay times of the following protection function can be altered Tolerances
individually by the ARC for shots 1 to 4 Pickup threshold 3 % of the setting value or 50 mA1)
5 (setting value T = T, non-delayed T = 0, blocking T = ):
I>>, I>, Ip, Idir>>, Idir>, Ipdir
Time for 2 M 20 5 % of setpoint (calculated)
IE>>, IE>, IEp, IEdir>>, IEdir>, IEdir
Additional functions Lockout (nal trip), delay of dead-
time start via binary input (monito- Setting ranges
6 red), dead-time extension via binary

input (monitored), co-ordination
Motor starting current ISTARTUP
Pickup threshold IMOTOR STAR
2.5 to 80 A1) (in steps of 0.01)
with other protection relays, circuit- Permissible starting 1 to 180 s (in steps of 0.1 s)
breaker monitoring, evaluation of the time TSTARTUP
CB contacts Permissible blocked rotor 0.5 to 120 s or (in steps of 0.1 s)
7 Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50 BF)

time TLOCKED-ROTOR
Setting ranges
For I > IMOTOR START I 2
Pickup threshold CB I> 0.2 to 5 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A) t = STARTUP TSTARTUP
Delay time 0.06 to 60 s or (in steps of 0.01 s)
I
8 Times
Pickup times
current
with internal start is contained in the delay time I = Actual current owing
start via control is contained in the delay time TSTARTUP = Tripping time for rated
with external start is contained in the delay time motor starting current
9 Dropout times Approx. 25 ms
Tolerances
Dropout ratio IMOTOR START Approx. 0.95
Pickup value 2 % of setting value (50 mA)1)
Delay time 1 % or 20 ms Tolerances
10 Negative-sequence current detection (ANSI 46)
Denite-time characteristic (ANSI 46-1 and 46-2)
Delay time 5 % or 30 ms
Setting ranges
Pickup current I2>, I2>> 0.5 to 15 A or (in steps of 0.01 A)
11 Delay times
Dropout delay time TDO
Functional limit All phase currents 20 A1)
Times
12 Dropout times
Dropout ratio
Approx. 35 ms
Approx. 0.95 for I2 /Inom > 0.3
Tolerances
Pickup thresholds 3 % of the setting value or 50 mA1)
13 Delay times 1 % or 10 ms
14

Technical data
Restart inhibit for motors (ANSI 66) Undervoltage protection (ANSI 27)
Setting ranges
Motor starting current relative
1.1 to 10 (in steps of 0.1)
Operating modes / measuring
quantities 1
3-phase Positive-sequence component or
IMOTOR START/IMotor Nom smallest of the phase-to-phase
Rated motor current IMotor Nom 1 to 6 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A) voltages
Max. permissible starting time 1 to 320 s (in steps of 1 s)
TStart Max
1-phase Single-phase phase-ground or phase-
phase voltage
2
Minimum inhibit time 0.2 min to 120 min (in steps of 0.1 min) Setting ranges
TMIN. INHIBIT TIME Pickup thresholds V<, V<<
Max. permissible number of 1 to 4 (in steps of 1) 3-phase, phase-ground 10 to 210 V (in steps of 1 V)
warm starts
Difference between cold and 1 to 2 (in steps of 1)
connection
3-phase, phase-phase 10 to 120 V (in steps of 1 V)
3
warm starts connection
Extension k-factor for cooling 0.2 to 100 (in steps of 0.1) 1-phase connection 10 to 120 V (in steps of 1 V)
simulations of rotor at zero
speed k at STOP
Extension factor for cooling time 0.2 to 100 (in steps of 0.1)
Dropout ratio r
Delay times T
1.01 to 3 (in steps of 0.01)
0 to 100 s or (in steps of 0.01 s) 4
Current Criteria Bkr Closed IMIN 0.2 to 5 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
Dropout threshold r V<(<) Max. 130 V for phase-phase voltages
k RUNNING
n -1 Max. 225 V phase-ground voltages
Restarting limit restart = rot max perm c
nc Times
Pickup times V<, V<<, V1<, V1<< Approx. 50 ms
5
restart = Temperature limit Dropout times As pickup times
Tolerances
is possible
Pickup thresholds
Times
1 % of setting value or 1 V
1 % of setting value or 10 ms 6
(= 100 % in operational Overvoltage protection (ANSI 59)
measured value Operating modes/measuring
rot/rot trip) quantities
start-ups from cold
3-phase Negative-sequence component or
largest of the phase-to-phase
7
state voltages
Undercurrent monitoring (ANSI 37) 1-phase Single-phase phase-ground or phase-
Signal from the operational

measured values
Predened with programmable logic
Setting ranges
phase voltage
8
Temperature monitoring box (ANSI 38) 3-phase, phase-ground con- 40 to 260 V (in steps of 1 V)
Temperature detectors nection, largest phase-phase
Connectable boxes
1 or 2
Max. 6
voltage
3-phase, phase-phase con- 40 to 150 V (in steps of 1 V) 9
nection, largest phase-phase
detectors per box
voltage
Type of measuring Pt 100 or Ni 100 or Ni 120
3-phase, negative-sequence 2 to 150 V (in steps of 1 V)
Bearing or Other
voltage
1-phase connection 40 to 150 V (in steps of 1 V) 10
Dropout ratio r 0.9 to 0.99 (in steps of 0.01)
For each measuring detector
Stage 1 -50 C to 250 C (in steps of 1 C)
Times
-58 F to 482 F (in steps of 1 F)
or (no indication)- Pickup times V>, V>>
Pickup times V2>, V2>>
Approx. 50 ms
Approx. 60 ms
11
Stage 2 50 C to 250 C (in steps of 1 C)
Dropout times As pickup times
or (no indication) Tolerances
Pickup thresholds
Times
13
14

15
Technical data
Frequency protection (ANSI 81) Q, reactive power With sign, total and phase-
segregated in kVAr (MVAr or GVAr)
1 Number of frequency elements
Setting ranges
4
0 to 120 % Snom
Pickup thresholds for fnom = 50 Hz 45.5 to 54.5 Hz (in steps of 0.01 Hz) Range
Pickup thresholds for fnom = 60 H 55.5 to 64.5 Hz (in steps of 0.01 Hz) Tolerance2) 2 % of Snom
Delay times 0 to 100 s or (in steps of 0.01 s) for V/Vnom and I/Inom = 50 to 120 %
and |sin | = 0.707 to 1 with
2 Undervoltage blocking, with
positive-sequence voltage V1
Snom = 3 Vnom Inom
Times cos , power factor (p.f.) Total and phase segregated
Pickup times Approx. 150 ms Range - 1 to + 1
Dropout times Approx. 150 ms Tolerance2) 3 % for |cos | 0.707
3 Dropout
f = pickup value - dropout value Approx. 20 mHz
Frequency f In Hz
Range fnom 5 Hz
Ratio undervoltage blocking Approx. 1.05
Tolerance2) 20 mHz
Tolerances
Temperature overload protection In %
4 Pickup thresholds
Frequency 10 mHz
/Trip
Range 0 to 400 %
Undervoltage blocking 3 % of setting value or 1 V
Delay times 3 % of the setting value or 10 ms Tolerance2) 5 % class accuracy per IEC 60255-8
Fault locator (ANSI 21FL) Temperature restart inhibit In %
5 Output of the fault distance in secondary,

in km / miles line length
L/L Trip
Range 0 to 400 %
Tolerance2) 5 % class accuracy per IEC 60255-8
Starting signal Trip command, dropout of a
protection element, via binary input Restart threshold Restart/L Trip In %
6 Setting ranges
Reclose time TReclose In min
0.001 to 3 /mile1) (in steps of 0.0001) detection (total, real, and reactive secondary
Tolerances current) IEE, IEE real, IEE reactive
Measurement tolerance acc. to 2.5 % fault location, or 0.025 Range 0 mA to 1600 mA
7 VDE 0435, Part 303 for sinusoi- (without intermediate infeed) for
Tolerance2)
Measuring transducer
and IK/Inom 1 Operating range 0 to 24mA

Accuracy range 1 to 20mA
Tolerance2) 1.5 %, relative to rated value
of 20 mA
For standard usage of the measurement transducer for pressure and
Currents In A (kA) primary, in A secondary or temperature monitoring
IL1, IL2, IL3 in % Inom
9 Positive-sequence component I1
Negative-sequence component I2
Operating measured value
Operating range (presetting)
Operating measured value
Pressure in hPa
0 hPa to 1200 hPa
Temp in C / F
IE or 3I0
Range 10 to 200 % Inom temperature
Tolerance2) 1 % of measured value or 0.5 % Inom Operating range (presetting) 0 C to 240 C or 32 F to 464 F
10 Phase-to-ground voltages
VL1-E, VL2-E, VL3-E
% Vnom
box"
Phase-to-phase voltages Long-term averages
VL1-L2, VL2-L3, VL3-L1, VE or V0
Positive-sequence component V1 Time window 5, 15, 30 or 60 minutes
11 Negative-sequence component V2
Range 10 to 120 % Vnom
Long-term averages
Adjustable
Tolerance2) 1 % of measured value or 0.5 % of Vnom of currents IL1dmd, IL2dmd, IL3dmd, I1dmd in A (kA)
S, apparent power In kVAr (MVAr or GVAr) primary and of real power Pdmd in W (kW, MW)
of reactive power Qdmd in VAr (kVAr, MVAr)
12 Range
in % of Snom
0 to 120 % Snom
of apparent power Sdmd in VAr (kVAr, MVAr)
P, active power With sign, total and phase-segrega-
13 ted in kW (MW or GW) primary and
in % Snom
14 for V/Vnom and I/Inom = 50 to 120 %

and |cos | = 0.707 to 1 with
Snom = 3 Vnom Inom
15 1) At Inom = 1 A, all limits multiplied with 5.


Technical data
Max. / Min. report Energy/power

Reset, automatic Time of day adjustable
Meter values for power
Wp, Wq (real and reactive power
demand)
in kWh (MWh or GWh) and kVARh
(MVARh or GVARh) 1
(in minutes, 0 to 1439 min)
Time frame and starting time adjus- Tolerance1) 5 % for I > 0.5 Inom, V > 0.5 Vnom
table (in days, 1 to 365 days, and ) and |cos | (p.f.) 0.707
Reset, manual Using binary input,
using keypad,
Statistics
Saved number of trips Up to 9 digits
2
via communication
Min./Max. values for current IL1, IL2, IL3,
Min./Max. values for voltages VL1-E, VL2-E, VL3-E
to 1st and 2nd cycle)
Circuit-breaker wear
3
V1 (positive-sequence component)
VL1-L2, VL2-L3, VL3-L1 Methods Ix with x = 1 .. 3
Min./Max. values for power S, P, Q, cos , frequency 2-point method (remaining service
Min./Max. values for overload
protection
/Trip
Operation
life)
Phase-selective accumulation of
4
Min./Max. values for mean values IL1dmd, IL2dmd, IL3dmd measured values on TRIP command,
I1 (positive-sequence component); up to 8 digits, phase-selective limit
values, monitoring indication
Local measured values monitoring

Sdmd, Pdmd, Qdmd
Operating hours counter 5
Current asymmetry Imax/Imin > balance factor, Display range Up to 7 digits
for I>Ibalance limit Criterion Overshoot of an adjustable current
Voltage asymmetry Vmax/Vmin > balance factor,
for V>Vlim Trip circuit monitoring 6
Current sum |iL1 + iL2 + iL3 + kiE iE| > limit value, With one or two binary input
with
Commissioning aids
I CT PRIM I earth CT SEC
kiE = earth
CT PRIM CT SEC Phase rotation eld check,
operational measured values, 7
Current phase sequence Clockwise (ABC) / counter-clockwise circuit-breaker/switching device
(ACB) test,
Voltage phase sequence Clockwise (ABC) / counter-clockwise creation of a test measurement

(ACB)
Predened limit values, user-dened
report
Clock
8
expansions via CFC Time synchronization DCF77/IRIG-B signal
Fault recording (telegram format IRIG-B000),
binary input,
communication 9
Recording of indications of the Control
last 3 power system ground faults Number of switching units Depends on the binary inputs and
Time stamping
Resolution for event log 1 ms Interlocking
outputs
Programmable
10
(operational annunciations) Circuit-breaker signals Feedback, close, open, intermediate
Resolution for trip log 1 ms position
(fault annunciations)
Maximum time deviation 0.01 %
Control commands Single command / double command
1, 1 plus 1 common or 2 trip contacts 11
(internal clock) Programmable controller CFC logic, graphic input tool
Battery Lithium battery 3 V/1 Ah, Local control Control via menu,
type CR 1/2 AA, message "Battery assignment of a function key

Fault" for insufcient battery charge Remote control Via communication interfaces,
using a substation automation and
12
control system (e.g. SICAM),
Maximum 8 fault records saved,
supply 13
and memory time adjustable
14
1) At rated frequency. 15
Technical data
1 Number of available setting groups 4 (parameter group A, B, C and D)

Switchover performed Via keypad, DIGSI, system (SCADA)
interface or binary input
2 CE conformity
3 for use within certain voltage limits (Council Directive 2006/95/EG
4 Part 303).
Further applicable standards: ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0 and C37.90.1.The
unit conforms to the international standard IEC 60255, and the German
standard DIN 57435/Part 303 (corresponding to VDE 0435/Part 303).
5 in accordance with Article 10 of the Council Directive complying with
the generic standards EN 50081-2 and EN 50082-2 for the EMC Directi-
ve and standard EN 60255-6 for the low-voltage Directive.
10
11
12
13
14
15

Housing, binary inputs (BI) and outputs (BO),measuring transducer

7SJ63 - -
1
Housing 19, 11 BI, 8 BO, 1 live status contact 1
Housing 19, 24 BI, 11 BO, 2 power relays (4 contacts), 1 live status contact 2
Housing 19, 20 BI, 11 BO, 2 measuring transducer inputs, 2 power relays (4 contacts), 1 live status contact
Housing 19, 37 BI, 14 BO, 4 power relays (8 contacts), 1 live status contact
3
See next 2
5 page
Housing 19, 33 BI, 14 BO, 2 measuring transducer inputs, 4 power relays (8 contacts), 1 live status contact 6
Measuring inputs (3 x V , 4 x I)
Iph = 1 A1), Ie = 1 A1) (min. = 0.05 A)
3
Position 15 only with B, D, F, H
Iph = 5 A1), Ie = 5 A1) (min. = 0.25 A)
2
4
Position 15 only with B, D, F, H 6
Iph = 5 A1), Ie = 1 A1) (min. = 0.05 A)
5
DC 24 to 48 V, threshold binary input DC 19 V 3)
DC 60 to 125 V 2), threshold binary input DC 19 V 3)
2
4 6
Unit version
For panel surface mounting, plug-in terminals, detached operator panel
For panel surface mounting, two-tier terminal top/bottom
A 7
B
For panel surface mounting, screw-type terminals, detached operator panel C
For panel ush mounting, plug-in terminal (2/3 pin connector) D
For panel ush mounting , screw-type terminals (direct connection/ring-type cable lugs) E 8
For panel ush mounting, screw-type terminal (direct connection/ring-type cable lugs)
without operator panel, panel mounting in low-voltage housing F
Surface-mounting housing, plug-in terminals, without operator panel, panel mounting
in low-voltage housing G 9
Region DE, 50Hz, IEC, language: German, selectable A
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: English (GB), selectable
Region US, 60Hz, ANSI, language: English (US), selectable
B
C
10
Region FR, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: French, selectable D
System interface (Port B): Refer to page 5/152 11


No interface at rear side 0
12
DIGSI 4/modem, electrical RS232 1
DIGSI 4/modem/RTD-box5), electrical RS485 2
DIGSI 4/modem/RTD-box5)6), optical 820 nm wavelength, ST connector 3 13
1) Rated current can be selected by means of jumpers. 5) Temperature monitoring box 7XV5662- AD10, 14
2) Transition between the two auxiliary voltage ranges can be selected refer to Accessories.
means of jumpers.
required.
15

7SJ63 - -

50/51 Overcurrent protection I>, I>>, Ip, reverse interlocking
2 50N/51N
50N/51N
Ground-fault protection IE>, IE>>, IEp
3 37
47 Phase sequence
4 74TC Trip circuit supervision

Inrush blocking
86 Lockout F A
V, f 27/59 Under-/overvoltage
5 IEF V, f
81O/U
27/59
Under-/overvoltage
F E
Intermittent ground fault P E

6 Dir 67/67N
47
Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
Phase sequence F C
Dir V, f 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
81O/U Under-/overfrequency F G
7 Dir IEF 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
Directional Dir 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
ground-fault 67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
8 detection

F D 2)
Directional Dir IEF 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
ground-fault 67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
detection 87N High-impedance restricted ground fault
9
Directional 67Ns
P D 2)
ground-fault 87N High-impedance restricted ground fault

detection

10 Directional Motor V, f 67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
F B 2)
ground-fault 87N High-impedance restricted ground fault detection

11 27/59
81O/U
Under-/overvoltage
Under-/overfrequency H F 2)
12 Continued on
next page
13
14
Basic version included 1) Only with insensitive ground-current
V, f = Voltage, frequency protection transformer when position 7 = 1, 5, 7.
2) For isolated / compensated networks
15 Dir
IEF
only with sensitive ground-current
transformer when position 7 = 2, 6.



7SJ63 - -
1
50/51 Overcurrent protection I>, I>>, Ip, reverse interlocking
50N/51N
50N/51N
Ground-fault protection IE>, IE>>, IEp
Ground-fault protection via insensitive
2
37
3
47 Phase sequence
4 setting groups, cold-load pickup 4
Inrush blocking
86 Lockout
Directional Motor V, f 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
ground-fault Dir
detection
67Ns
87N
5
81O/U Under-/overfrequency H H 2) 6
Directional Motor IEF V, f 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
ground-fault Dir 67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
detection 87N High-impedance restricted ground fault
48/14
7
27/59 Undervoltage/overvoltage
81O/U Underfrequency/overfrequency R H 2)
Motor
Dir
V, f 67/67N
48/14
Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
8
Motor
81O/U
48/14

H G
9
66/86 Restart inhibit H A
ARC, fault locator Without 0
79
21FL
With auto-reclosure
With fault locator
1
2
10
79, 21FL With auto-reclosure, with fault locator 3
11
12
13
14
Basic version included 1) Only with insensitive ground-current transformer when
V, f = Voltage, power, frequency protection position 7 = 1, 5, 7.
Dir = Directional overcurrent protection 2) For isolated / compensated networks only with sensitive
IEF = Intermittent ground fault

ground-current transformer when position 7 = 2, 6.
15

7SJ63 - - -
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, RS232 1
2 IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, RS485 2
3 PROFIBUS-FMS Slave, 820 nm wavelength, double ring, ST connector 1)
5
6
4 MODBUS, RS485
9
9
L 0 D
L 0 E
DNP 3.0, RS485 9 L 0 G
5 IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RSJ45 connector (EN 100)
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, optical, double, LC connector (EN 100)2)
9
9
L 0 R
L 0 S
1) Not with position 9 = B; if 9 = B, please order 7SJ6 unit with RS485 port and separate ber-optic converters.
6 For single ring, please order converter 6GK1502-3AB10, not available with position 9 = B.
7
Sample order
8 Position Order No. + Order code
7SJ632 5 - 5 E C 9 1 - 3 F C 1 + L 0 G
9 6 I/Os: 24 BI/11 BO, 1 live status contact 2

8 Power supply: DC 110 to 250 V, AC 115 V to AC 230 V 5
10 10 Region: US, English language (US); 60 Hz, ANSI
E
C
12 Communication: DIGSI 4, electric RS232 1
11 13 Measuring/fault recording: Extended measuring and fault records

14/15 Protection function package: Basic version plus directional TOC
3
F C
12
13
14
15
DIGSI 4
1
Basis
Professional
7XS5402-0AA00
3
Complete version:
displays),
4

5
SIGRA 4
6
ned in DIGSI Professional, but can be ordered additionally).
7

AC/DC 24 to 60 V 7XV5662-2AD10 8
AC/DC 90 to 240 V 7XV5662-5AD10
Varistor/VoltageArrester
125 Vrms; 600 A; 1S/S 256 C53207-A401-D76-1
9
240 Vrms; 600 A; 1S/S 1088 C53207-A401-D77-1
Connecting cable
Cable between PC/notebook (9-pin con.) and protection unit 10
SIPROTEC 4 unit
- length 5 m / 16.4 ft 7XV5103-7AA05
11
- length 25 m / 82 ft 7XV5103-7AA25
- length 50 m / 164 ft 7XV5103-7AA50
Manual for 7SJ63 12

English/German C53000-G1140-C147-x 1)
13
14

15

package
LSP2289-afp.eps
2 Mounting rail
Connector 2-pin
Connector 3-pin
C73334-A1-C35-1
C73334-A1-C36-1
1
1
Siemens
Siemens

taped on reel
3 LSP2091-afp.eps
LSP2090-afp.eps

taped on reel
4 2-pin connector 3-pin connector
Crimping tool for Type III+ 0-539635-1 1 AMP 1)
5
LSP2093-afp.eps
LSP2092-afp.eps
Short-circuit links
Short-circuit links
10
11
12
13
14
15
Connection diagram
10
11
12
13


Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
*) For pinout of communication ports see part 14 1) Power relays are intended to directly control motorized switches. The power relays are
14 of this catalog.
For the allocation of the terminals of the panel
interlocked so only one relay of each pair can close at a time, in order to avoid shorting
out the power supply. The power relay pairs are BO4/BO5, BO6/BO7. If used for protection
surface-mounting version refer to the manual purposes only one binary output of a pair can be used.
(http://www.siemens.com/siprotec).

Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
of this catalog.
14

Connection diagram
10
11
12 *) For pinout of communication ports see

part 14 of this catalog.
For the allocation of the terminals of
the panel surface-mounting version
refer to the manual
13 (http://www.siemens.com/siprotec).
1) Power relays are intended to directly
control motorized switches. The power
relays are interlocked so only one relay
of each pair can close at a time, in order
14 to avoid shorting out the power supply.
The power relay pairs are BO4/BO5,
BO6/BO7, BO16/BO17 and BO18/BO19.
If used for protection purposes only one
binary output of a pair can be used.
15
Fig. 5/140 7SJ635 connection diagram

Connection diagram
10
11
*) For pinout of communication ports see
part 14 of this catalog. 12
refer to the manual
13
to avoid shorting out the power supply.
14
BO6/BO7, BO16/BO17 and BO18/BO19.
15

10
11
12
13
14
15
SIPROTEC 4 7SJ64 multifunction protection relay with synchronization
Function overview
Sensitive dir./non-dir. ground-fault detection
2
Directional intermittent ground fault protection
High-impedance restricted ground fault 3
LSP2316-afpen.tif
Inrush restraint
Motor protection
Overload protection 4
Under-/overvoltage protection
Under-/overfrequency protection
5
Fig. 5/142 SIPROTEC 4 7SJ64 multifunction protection relay Power protection (e.g. reverse, factor)
Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection
Description
Breaker failure protection 6
The SIPROTEC 4 7SJ64 can be used as a protective control and Phase-sequence monitoring
monitoring relay for distribution feeders and transmission
lines of any voltage in networks that are earthed (grounded),
Synchronization
Auto-reclosure
7
low-resistance grounded, ungrounded, or of a compensated
Fault locator
neutral point structure. The relay is suited for networks that
Lockout
are radial or looped, and for lines with single or multi-terminal
feeds. The SIPROTEC 4 7SJ64 is equipped with a synchronization
Control functions/programmable logic
8
function which provides the operation modes synchronization
check (classical) and synchronous/asynchronous switching Flexible number of switching devices
(which takes the CB mechanical delay into consideration). Motor Position of switching elements is shown on the graphic display
protection comprises undercurrent monitoring, starting time Local/remote switching via key-operated switch
9
supervision, restart inhibit, locked rotor, load jam protection as
well as motor statistics. Control via keyboard, binary inputs, DIGSI 4 or SCADA system
Extended user-dened logic with CFC (e.g. interlocking)
The 7SJ64 is featuring the "exible protection functions". Up to
20 protection functions can be added according to individual Monitoring functions
10
requirements. Thus, for example, rate-of-frequency-change
Operational measured values V, I, f, ...
protection or reverse power protection can be implemented.
Energy metering values Wp, Wq
The relay provides easy-to-use local control and automation
functions. The number of controllable switchgear depends only
Circuit-breaker wear monitoring 11
on the number of available inputs and outputs. The integrated Slave pointer
programmable logic (CFC) allows the user to implement their Trip circuit supervision
own functions, e.g. for the automation of switchgear (interlock-
ing). CFC capacity is much larger compared to 7SJ63 due to
12
extended CPU power. The user is able to generate user-dened
messages as well. Motor statistics

communication architectures with control systems.
System interface
13
IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850
PROFIBUS-FMS / DP
DNP 3.0 / DNP3 TCP / MODBUS RTU
14
Additional interface for temperature detection (RTD-box)
Time synchronization via IRIG B/DCF77 15
Application
Application Synchronization
In order to connect two components of a power system, the relay
8 The SIPROTEC 4 7SJ64 unit is a numerical protection relay that also
performs control and monitoring functions and therefore supports
provides a synchronization function which veries that switching
ON does not endanger the stability of the power system.
the user in cost-effective power system management, and ensures
reliable supply of electric power to the customers. Local operation The synchronization function provides the operation modes syn-
chro-check (classical) and synchronous/asynchronous switching
9 has been designed according to ergonomic criteria. A large, easy-
to-read graphic display was a major design aim. (which takes the c.-b. mechanical delay into consideration).
Control Motor protection

When protecting motors, the relays are suitable for asynchro-
10 The integrated control function permits control of disconnect
devices (electrically operated/motorized switches) or circuit- nous machines of all sizes.
breakers via the integrated operator panel, binary inputs, DIGSI 4
or the control and protection system (e.g. SICAM). The present
status (or position) of the primary equipment can be displayed. The 7SJ64 units perform all functions of backup protection
11 7SJ64 supports substations with single and duplicate busbars. supplementary to transformer differential protection. The inrush
The number of elements that can be controlled (usually 1 to 5) is suppression effectively prevents tripping by inrush currents.
only restricted by the number of inputs and outputs available. A
The high-impedance restricted ground-fault protection detects
full range of command processing functions is provided.
12 Programmable logic
short-circuits and insulation faults of the transformer.
Backup protection
The integrated logic characteristics (CFC) allow users to
The relays can be used universally for backup protection.
implement their own functions for automation of switchgear
13 (interlocking) or a substation via a graphic user interface. Due
to extended CPU power, the programmable logic capacity is
Flexible protection functions
much larger compared to 7SJ63. The user can also generate By conguring a connection between a standard protection logic
user-dened messages. and any measured or derived quantity, the functional scope of
14 Line protection
the relays can be easily expanded by up to 20 protection stages
or protection functions.
The 7SJ64 units can be used for line protection of high and Metering values
medium-voltage networks with grounded, low-resistance
15 grounded, isolated or compensated neutral point. Extensive measured values, limit values and metered values

Application
50, 50N I>, I>>, I>>>

IE>, IE>>, IE>>>
Denite-time overcurrent protection (phase/neutral)
1
50, 50N I>>>>, I2> Additional denite-time overcurrent protection stages
IE>>>> (phase/neutral) via exible protection functions
51, 51V, 51N Ip, IEp Inverse overcurrent protection (phase/neutral), phase function with voltage-dependent option
67, 67N Idir>, Idir>>, Ip dir Directional overcurrent protection (denite/inverse, phase/neutral),
2
IEdir>, IEdir>>, IEp dir Directional comparison protection
67Ns/50Ns IEE>, IEE>>, IEEp Sensitive ground-fault protection
Cold load pick-up (dynamic setting change) 3

59N/64 VE, V0> Displacement voltage, zero-sequence voltage
67Ns IIE dir> Directional intermittent ground fault protection 4

79M Auto-reclosure 5
25 Synchronization

6
47 V2>, phase seq. Unbalance-voltage protection and/or phase-sequence monitoring
49 > Thermal overload protection
48 Starting time supervision 7

51M Load jam protection

8
38 Temperature monitoring via external device (RTD-box), e.g. bearing temperature monitoring 9
27, 59 V<, V> Undervoltage/overvoltage protection
59R dV/dt
P<>, Q<>
Rate-of-voltage-change protection
Reverse-power, forward-power protection

10
32
27/Q Q>/V< Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection
35 cos Power factor protection 11

81O/U f>, f< Overfrequency/underfrequency protection
df/dt Rate-of-frequency-change protection

81R
21FL Fault locator

12
13
14
15
Construction
Construction

, and -rack sizes
2 These are the available housing widths

of the 7SJ64 relays, referred to a
LSP2299-bfpen.tif
19 module frame system. This means
that previous models can always be
LSP2174-afp.tif
3 replaced. The height is a uniform 244 mm
for ush-mounting housings and 266 mm
4 nected with or without ring lugs. Plug-in

terminals are available as an option.
cable harnesses. In the case of surface Fig. 5/144 Flush-mounting housing Fig. 5/145 Front view of 7SJ64 with
with screw-type terminals 19" housing
5 mounting on a panel, the connection
communication interfaces are located in
a sloped case at the top and bottom of
6 the housing. The housing can also be sup-
plied optionally with a detached operator
panel (refer to Fig. 5/146), or without
operator panel, in order to allow optimum
7 operation for all types of applications.
LSP2196-afp.eps
9
10 Fig. 5/146 Housing with plug-in terminals and detached operator panel
11
12
LSP2219-afpen.eps
13
LSP2237-afp.tif
14
15 screw-type terminals sloped case in a surface-mounting
housing

Overcurrent protection 1
(ANSI 50, 50N, 51,51V, 51N)
selective measurement of the three phase
currents and the ground current (four 2
transformers). Three denite-time over-
current protection elements (DMT) exist
both for the phases and for the ground.
The current threshold and the delay time 3
can be set in a wide range. In addition,
inverse-time overcurrent protection
The inverse-time function provides as
an option voltage-restraint or voltage-
4
controlled operating modes.
With the "exible protection functions", Fig. 5/149 Denite-time overcurrent Fig. 5/150 Inverse-time overcurrent
protection protection
further denite-time overcurrent stages
can be implemented in the 7SJ64 unit. 5
Reset characteristics Available inverse-time characteristics
For easier time coordination with electro-
mechanical relays, reset characteristics Inverse 6
according to ANSI C37.112 and Short inverse
Long inverse
applied.
When using the reset characteristic (disk
Moderately inverse 7
Very inverse
emulation), a reset process is initiated
after the fault current has disappeared. Extremely inverse
This reset process corresponds to the
reverse movement of the Ferraris disk of
Denite inverse
8
an electromechanical relay (thus: disk
emulation).
User-denable characteristics 9
Instead of the predened time characteristics according to ANSI,
tripping characteristics can be dened by the user for phase and
ground units separately. Up to 20 current / time value pairs may
be programmed. They are set as pairs of numbers or graphically 10
in DIGSI 4.
Inrush restraint
The relay features second harmonic restraint. If the second 11
harmonic is detected during transformer energization, pickup of
non-directional and directional normal elements are blocked.

12
For directional and nondirectional overcurrent protection
functions the initiation thresholds and tripping times can be
13
14
15
1 Directional phase and ground protection are separate functions.

They operate in parallel to the non-directional overcurrent
rately. Denite-time and inverse-time characteristic is offered.
2 By means of voltage memory, directionality can be determined
3 from the voltage memory. If no voltage exists in the memory,
4 is to be determined via zero-sequence system or negative-
sequence system quantities (selectable).
Using negative-sequence variables can be advantageous in cases
where the zero voltage tends to be very low due to unfavorable protection
zero-sequence impedances.
5 Directional comparison protection (cross-coupling)
sources with instantaneous tripping, i.e. without the disadvan-
6 tage of time coordination. The directional comparison protection
is suitable if the distances between the protection stations are
not signicant and pilot wires are available for signal transmis-
sion. In addition to the directional comparison protection, the
7 directional coordinated overcurrent protection is used for com-
plete selective backup protection. If operated in a closed-circuit
connection, an interruption of the transmission line is detected.
8 (Sensitive) directional ground-fault detection (ANSI 64,

67Ns/67N)
9 sequence current I0 and zero-sequence voltage V0. For networks
with an isolated neutral, the reactive current component is
evaluated; for compensated networks, the active current compo-
nent or residual resistive current is evaluated.
10 For special network conditions, e.g. high-resistance grounded

networks with ohmic-capacitive ground-fault current or low-
resistance grounded networks with ohmic-inductive current, the Fig. 5/152 Directional determination using cosine measurements for
tripping characteristics can be rotated approximately compensated networks
11 45 degrees.
Two modes of ground-fault direction detection can be The function can also be operated in the insensitive mode, as an
implemented: tripping or signalling only mode. additional short-circuit protection.
It has the following functions: Intermittent ground-fault protection

12 TRIP via the displacement voltage VE. Intermittent (re-striking) faults occur due to insulation weak-
Two instantaneous elements or one instantaneous plus one nesses in cables or as a result of water penetrating cable joints.
user-dened characteristic. Such faults either simply cease at some stage or develop into
13 Each element can be set in forward, reverse, or non-

directional.
may undergo thermal overloading. The normal ground-fault pro-
The function can also be operated in the insensitive mode, as tection cannot reliably detect and interrupt the current pulses,
an additional short-circuit protection. some of which can be very brief.
14 (Sensitive) ground-fault detection (ANSI 50Ns, 51Ns/50N, 51N) The selectivity required with intermittent ground faults is
achieved by summating the duration of the individual pulses and
For high-resistance grounded networks, a sensitive input
15 transformer (also called core-balance CT).
one systems period.

Directional intermittent ground fault protection (ANSI 67Ns)

The directional intermittent ground fault protection has to detect
intermittent ground faults in resonant grounded cable systems 1
selectively. Intermittent ground faults in resonant grounded cable
systems are usually characterized by the following properties:
A very short high-current ground current pulse (up to several
hundred amperes) with a duration of under 1 ms 2
dv /dt
They are self-extinguishing and re-ignite within one halfperiod
up to several periods, depending on the power system condi-
tions and the fault characteristic.
Over longer periods (many seconds to minutes), they can
3
develop into static faults. LSA4113-aen.eps
Such intermittent ground faults are frequently caused by weak

insulation, e.g. due to decreased water resistance of old cables.
Ground fault functions based on fundamental component
Fig. 5/153 Flexible protection functions
4
measured values are primarily designed to detect static ground Flexible protection functions
faults and do not always behave correctly in case of intermittent
The 7SJ64 units enable the user to easily add on up to 20
ground faults. The function described here evaluates specically
the ground current pulses and puts them into relation with the
protective functions. To this end, parameter denitions are used
to link a standard protection logic with any chosen characteristic
5
zero-sequence voltage to determine the direction.
quantity (measured or derived quantity) (Fig. 5/153). The
Phase-balance current protection (ANSI 46) standard logic consists of the usual protection elements such
(Negative-sequence protection) as the pickup message, the parameter-denable delay time, the
TRIP command, a blocking possibility, etc. The mode of opera-
6
In line protection, the two-element phase-balance current/ tion for current, voltage, power and power factor quantities can
negative-sequence protection permits detection on the high side be three-phase or single-phase. Almost all quantities can be
operated as greater than or less than stages. All stages operate
with protection priority. 7
switch group Dy 5). This provides backup protection for high-
resistance faults beyond the transformer. Protection stages/functions attainable on the basis of the avail-
able characteristic quantities:
Function ANSI No. 8
If a faulted portion of the electrical circuit is not disconnected
I>, IE> 50, 50N
initiated using the breaker failure protection which operates V<, V>, VE>, dV/dt 27, 59, 59R, 64
the circuit-breaker, e.g. of an upstream (higher-level) protection
relay. Breaker failure is detected if, after a trip command, current
3I0>, I1>, I2>, I2/I1,
3V0>, V1><, V2><
50N, 46,
59N, 47
9
is still owing in the faulted circuit. As an option, it is possible to P><, Q>< 32
cos (p.f.)>< 55
Auto-reclosures (ANSI 79) f>< 81O, 81U
10
Multiple reclosures can be dened by the user and lockout will df/dt>< 81R
functions are possible:
3-pole ARC for all types of faults
For example, the following can be implemented: 11
Reverse power protection (ANSI 32R)
Separate settings for phase and ground faults
Rate-of-frequency-change protection (ANSI 81R)
delayed auto-reclosures (DAR) Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection (ANSI 12
Starting of the ARC depends on the trip command selection 27/Q)
(e.g. 46, 50, 51, 67)
The undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection protects
the system for mains decoupling purposes. To prevent a voltage
collapse in energy systems, the generating side, e.g. a genera-
13
The directional and non-directional elements can either be tor, must be equipped with voltage and frequency protection
blocked or operated non-delayed depending on the auto- devices. An undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection is
required at the supply system connection point. It detects critical
reclosure cycle
power system situations and ensures that the power generation 14
facility is disconnected from the mains. Furthermore, it ensures
elements can be activated depending on the ready AR
that reconnection only takes place under stable power system
The AR CLOSE command can be given synchronous by use of conditions. The associated criteria can be parameterized.
the synchronization function. 15
Synchronization (ANSI 25)

In case of switching ON the circuit-breaker, the units can
1 check whether the two subnetworks are synchronized (classic
synchro-check). Furthermore, the synchronizing function
may operate in the Synchronous/asynchronous switching
mode. The unit then distinguishes between synchronous and
2 asynchronous networks:
In synchronous networks, frequency differences between the
two subnetworks are almost non-existant. In this case, the
circuit-breaker operating time does not need to be considered.
3 Under asynchronous condition, however, this difference is

markedly larger and the time window for switching is shorter.
In this case, it is recommended to consider the operating time
of the circuit- breaker.
4 The command is automatically pre-dated by the duration of the

operating time of the circuit-breaker, thus ensuring that the
contacts of the CB close at exactly the right time. Fig. 5/154 High-impedance restricted ground-fault protection
Up to 4 sets of parameters for the synchronizing function can

5 be stored in the unit. This is an important feature when several
circuit-breakers with different operating times are to be oper-
event of internal faults, an imbalance occurs which leads to a
voltage and a current ow through the resistor R.
ated by one single relay. The current transformers must be of the same type and must
at least offer a separate core for the high-impedance restricted
ground-fault protection. They must in particular have the same
with an integrated pre-warning element for temperature and voltage. They should also demonstrate only minimal measuring
current can be applied. The temperature is calculated using a errors.
7 thermal homogeneous-body model (according to IEC 60255-8),
which takes account both of the energy entering the equipment Settable dropout delay times
and the energy losses. The calculated temperature is constantly If the devices are used in parallel with electromechanical relays
adjusted accordingly. Thus, account is taken of the previous load in networks with intermittent faults, the long dropout times of
8 and the load uctuations.
For thermal protection of motors (especially the stator), a
the electromechanical devices (several hundred milliseconds)
can lead to problems in terms of time grading. Clean time
further time constant can be set so that the thermal ratios can grading is only possible if the dropout time is approximately the
be detected correctly while the motor is rotating and when it is same. This is why the parameter of dropout times can be dened
9 stopped. The ambient temperature or the temperature of the

coolant can be detected serially via an external temperature
for certain functions such as time-overcurrent protection,
ground short-circuit and phase-balance current protection.
monitoring box (resistance-temperature detector box, also
called RTD- box). The thermal replica of the overload function Motor protection
is automatically adapted to the ambient conditions. If there is
10 no RTD-box it is assumed that the ambient temperatures are
constant. If a motor is started up too many times in succession, the rotor

can be subject to thermal overload, especially the upper edges
High-impedance restricted ground-fault protection (ANSI 87N) of the bars. The rotor temperature is calculated from the stator
11 The high-impedance measurement principle is an uncomplicated
current. The reclosing lockout only permits start-up of the motor
if the rotor has sufcient thermal reserves for a complete start-
up (see Fig. 5/155).
reactors when these are operated on an grounded network. Emergency start-up
12 When the high-impedance measurement principle is applied, all This function disables the reclosing lockout via a binary input
current transformers in the protected area are connected in par- by storing the state of the thermal replica as long as the binary
allel and operated on one common resistor of relatively high R input is active. It is also possible to reset the thermal replica to
whose voltage is measured (see Fig. 5/154). In the case of 7SJ6
13 units, the voltage is measured by detecting the current through
zero.
the (external) resistor R at the sensitive current measurement Temperature monitoring (ANSI 38)
input IEE.
Up to two temperature monitoring boxes with a total of
14 The varistor V serves to limit the voltage in the event of an
internal fault. It cuts off the high momentary voltage spikes
12 measuring sensors can be used for temperature monitoring
and detection by the protection relay. The thermal status of
occurring at transformer saturation. At the same time, this motors, generators and transformers can be monitored with
results in smoothing of the voltage without any noteworthy this device. Additionally, the temperature of the bearings of
reduction of the average value. If no faults have occurred and rotating machines are monitored for limit value violation. The
15 in the event of external faults, the system is at equilibrium, and
the voltage through the resistor is approximately zero. In the
temperatures are being measured with the help of temperature

detectors at various locations of the device

to be protected. This data is transmitted
to the protection relay via one or two
temperature monitoring boxes (see Acces-
1
sories, page 5/197).
Starting time supervision (ANSI 48/14)

2
that might occur in the event of excessive
load torque or excessive voltage drops
within the motor, or if the rotor is locked.
3
Rotor temperature is calculated from
measured stator current. The tripping time
is calculated according to the following
equation: 4
I 2
t = A TA
I 5
Fig. 5/155
IMOTOR START = Pickup current to detect a
t
motor start
= Tripping time
Motor statistics
6
Essential information on start-up of the motor (duration, cur-
IA = Rated motor starting current rent, voltage) and general information on number of starts, total
TA = Tripping time at rated motor starting current (2 times, for operating time, total down time, etc. are saved as statistics in
warm and cold motor) the device. 7
The characteristic (equation) can be adapted optimally to the
state of the motor by applying different tripping times TA in Voltage protection
dependence of either cold or warm motor state. For differentia-
tion of the motor state the thermal model of the rotor is applied.
Overvoltage protection (ANSI 59) 8
The two-element overvoltage protection detects unwanted
network and machine overvoltage conditions. The function can
prolonged start-up and reduced voltage (and reduced start-up
current) will be evaluated correctly. The tripping time is inverse
(current dependent).
operate either with phase-to-phase, phase-to-ground, positive
phase-sequence or negative phase-sequence voltage. Three- 9
phase and single-phase connections are possible.
A binary signal is set by a speed sensor to detect a blocked rotor.
An instantaneous tripping is effected. Undervoltage protection (ANSI 27)
Load jam protection (ANSI 51M)

The two-element undervoltage protection provides protec- 10
Sudden high loads can cause slowing down and blocking of the machines). Applications include the isolation of generators or
motor and mechanical damages. The rise of current due to a load motors from the network to avoid undesired operating states
jam is being monitored by this function (alarm and tripping). and a possible loss of stability. Proper operating conditions
of electrical machines are best evaluated with the positive-
11
The overload protection function is too slow and therefore not
sequence quantities. The protection function is active over a
suitable under these circumstances.
wide frequency range (45 to 55, 55 to 65 Hz)1). Even when
Phase-balance current protection (ANSI 46) falling below this frequency range the function continues to
work, however, with a greater tolerance band.
12
The negative-sequence / phase-balance current protection detects The function can operate either with phase-to-phase, phase-
a phase failure or load unbalance due to network asymmetry and to-ground or positive phase-sequence voltage, and can be
protects the rotor from impermissible temperature rise. monitored with a current criterion.
Three-phase and single-phase connections are possible.
13
With this function, a sudden drop in current, which can occur
due to a reduced motor load, is detected. This may be due to Frequency protection can be used for over-frequency and under-
14
are protected from unwanted speed deviations. Unwanted

can be removed at a specied frequency setting. Frequency pro-
tection can be used over a wide frequency range (40 to 60, 50 to
15
Protection functions, functions
70 Hz)1). There are four elements (selectable as overfrequency

or underfrequency) and each element can be delayed separately.
1 Blocking of the frequency protection can be performed if using a
binary input or by using an undervoltage element.
2 The integrated fault locator calculates the fault impedance and

the distance-to-fault. The results are displayed in , kilometers
(miles) and in percent of the line length.
3 Circuit-breaker wear monitoring

4 benet lies in reduced maintenance costs.
There is no mathematically exact method of calculating the
5 opens. This is why various methods of determining CB wear have
evolved which reect the different operator philosophies. To do
Fig. 5/156 CB switching cycle diagram
I
6 Ix, with x = 1... 3
I2t
Functions
The devices additionally offer a new method for determining the Control and automatic functions
7 Two-point method
Control
The CB manufacturers double-logarithmic switching cycle support all control and monitoring functions that are required
diagram (see Fig. 5/156) and the breaking current at the time for operating medium-voltage or high-voltage substations.
8 of contact opening serve as the basis for this method. After CB
opening, the two-point method calculates the number of still The main application is reliable control of switching and other
possible switching cycles. To this end, the two points P1 and P2 processes.
only have to be set on the device. These are specied in the CB's The status of primary equipment or auxiliary devices can be
technical data. All of these methods are phase-selective and a
9 limit value can be set in order to obtain an alarm if the actual
obtained from auxiliary contacts and communicated to the
7SJ64 via binary inputs. Therefore it is possible to detect and
value falls below or exceeds the limit value during determination indicate both the OPEN and CLOSED position or a fault or
of the remaining service life. intermediate circuit-breaker or auxiliary contact position.
10 Commissioning The switchgear or circuit-breaker can be controlled via:

Commissioning could hardly be easier and is fully supported by
binary inputs
substation control and protection system
11 operation of switching elements (circuit-breakers, disconnect
DIGSI 4
Automation / user-dened logic

ranging operational measured values. To prevent transmission of With integrated logic, the user can set, via a graphic interface
12 information to the control center during maintenance, the bay
controller communications can be disabled to prevent unneces-
(CFC), specic functions for the automation of switchgear or
sary data from being transmitted. During commissioning, all input or via communication interface.
indications with test marking for test purposes can be connected
Switching authority
13 to a control and protection system.
Switching authority is determined according to parameters,
Test operation communication or by key-operated switch (when available).
During commissioning, all indications can be passed to an If a source is set to LOCAL, only local switching operations are
14 automatic control system for test purposes.
Key-operated switch
7SJ64 units are tted with key-operated switch function for
15 1) The 40 to 60, 50 to 70 Hz range is available for fN = 50/60 Hz. local/remote changeover and changeover between interlocked
switching and test operation.
Functions
Command processing
All the functionality of command process-
ing is offered. This includes the processing 1
of single and double commands with or
without feedback, sophisticated monitor-
ing of the control hardware and software,
checking of the external process, control
actions using functions such as runtime
2
monitoring and automatic command
termination after output. Here are some
Single and double commands using 1,
3
1 plus 1 common or 2 trip contacts
Operating sequences combining several 4
switching operations such as control
of circuit-breakers, disconnectors and
grounding switches
Triggering of switching operations, 5
indications or alarm by combination with
existing information Fig. 5/157 Typical wiring for 7SJ642 motor direct control (simplied representation without
fuses). Binary output BO6 and BO7 are interlocked so that only one set of contacts
Motor control are closed at a time.
6
The SIPROTEC 4 7SJ64 with high
performance relays is well-suited for direct
activation of the circuit-breaker, discon-
nector and grounding switch operating
mechanisms in automated substations.
7
Interlocking of the individual switching
devices takes place with the aid of
programmable logic. Additional auxiliary 8
relays can be eliminated. This results in
less wiring and engineering effort.
Assignment of feedback to command

9
The positions of the circuit-breaker or
switching devices and transformer taps
are acquired by feedback. These indica-
tion inputs are logically assigned to the
corresponding command outputs. The
Fig. 5/158 Example: Single busbar with circuit-breaker and motor-controlled three-position 10
switch
unit can therefore distinguish whether
the indication change is a consequence
of switching operation or whether it is a
spontaneous change of state. 11
Chatter disable
Chatter disable feature evaluates whether,
in a congured period of time, the number
12
of status changes of indication input
exceeds a specied gure. If exceeded, the
indication input is blocked for a certain
period, so that the event list will not record 13

Binary indications can be ltered or 14
delayed.
Filtering serves to suppress brief changes
in potential at the indication input. The
Fig. 5/159 Example: Circuit-breaker interlocking 15
Functions
indication is passed on only if the indication voltage is still pres-

ent after a set period of time.
1 In the event of indication delay, there is a wait for a preset time.
The information is passed on only if the indication voltage is still
existing indication. Group indications can also be formed. The
volume of information to the system interface can thus be
3 reduced and restricted to the most important signals.
Measured values
4 voltage along with the power factor, frequency, active and reac-
tive power. The following functions are available for measured
value processing:
5 Voltages VL1, VL2, VL3, VL1L2, VL2L3, VL3L1, Vsyn
LSP2078-afp.eps
Power factor (cos ), (total and phase selective)
6 Frequency
Mean as well as minimum and maximum current and voltage
7 values
Mean operating temperature of overload function Fig. 5/160 NX PLUS panel (gas-insulated)
8 Limit values are monitored using programmable logic in the
CFC. Commands can be derived from this limit value indica-
tion.
Zero suppression
9 In a certain range of very low measured values, the value is set
Metered values
10 For internal metering, the unit can calculate an energy metered
value from the measured current and voltage values. If an
external meter with a metering pulse output is available, the
SIPROTEC 4 unit can obtain and process metering pulses via an
11 indication input.
The metered values can be displayed and passed on to a control
center as an accumulation with reset. A distinction is made
between forward, reverse, active and reactive energy.
12 Switchgear cubicles for high/medium voltage
13 In general, no separate measuring instruments (e.g. for current,
voltage, frequency measuring transducer ...) or additional
14
15
Communication
Communication

2

4
5
by the user.
The interface modules support the following applications: 6
telegrams in IRIG-B or DCF77 format into the units via time 7
System interface
through this interface. Radial or ring type station bus topolo- 8
Service interface
The service interface was conceived for remote access to a
number of protection units via DIGSI. It can be an electrical Fig. 5/162 Bus structure for station bus with Ethernet and
RS232/RS485 interface. For special applications, a maximum
of two temperature monitoring boxes (RTD-box) can be con-
IEC 61850, ber-optic ring
10
nected to this interface as an alternative.
Additional interface
Up to 2 RTD-boxes can be connected via this interface. The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is an international standard for the
11
System interface protocols (retrottable) from the unit and also control commands can be transferred by
IEC 61850 protocol
Redundant solutions are also possible. Optionally it is possible to
read out and alter individual parameters (only possible with the
12
for protection and control systems used by power supply corpora- redundant module).
tions. Siemens was the rst manufacturer to support this standard.
By means of this protocol, information can also be exchanged
directly between bay units so as to set up simple masterless
13
systems for bay and system interlocking. Access to the units via
the Ethernet bus is also possible with DIGSI. It is also possible to
retrieve operating and fault messages and fault recordings via
a browser. This Web monitor also provides a few items of unit-
specic information in browser windows.
commands from a central SIMATIC. Measured values can also be
transferred. 14
1) For units in panel surface-mounting housings 15


Communication
MODBUS RTU protocol
1 This uncomplicated, serial protocol is

mainly used in industry and by power
supply corporations, and is supported by a
number of unit manufacturers. SIPROTEC
units function as MODBUS slaves, making
2 their information available to a master
or receiving information from it. A time-
stamped event list is available.
3 PROFINET
PROFINET is the ethernet-based successor
of Probus DP and is supported in the
4 is used in industry together with the
the optical and electrical Plus ethernet
5 November 2012. All network redundancy

ethernet modules, such as RSTP, PRP or
6 The network monitoring is possible via
SNMP V2 where special MIB les exist
7 the network topology. Single-point indica-
and metered values can be transmitted
LSP3.01-0021.tif
8 via the protocol and can be selected by
are also transmitted spontaneously via
congurable process alarms. Switching
9 control via the device in the controlling
direction. The PROFINET implementation is
certied. The device also supports the IEC
61850 protocol as a server on the same
10 ethernet module in addition to the PRO-
FINET protocol. Client server connections
are possible for the intercommunication
between devices, e.g. for transmitting Fig. 5/164 Optical Ethernet communication module for IEC 61850
with integrated Ethernet-switch
11 fault records and GOOSE messages.
DNP 3.0 protocol

the binary Comtrade format and can be retrieved via the DNP3 le
Power utilities use the serial DNP 3.0 (Distributed Network transfer. The time synchronization is performed via the DNP3 TCP
12 Protocol) for the station and network control levels. SIPROTEC units
function as DNP slaves, supplying their information to a master
client or SNTP. The device can also be integrated into a network
monitoring system via the SNMP V2 protocol. Parallel to the DNP3
system or receiving information from it. TCP protocol the IEC 61850 protocol (the device works as a server)
and the GOOSE messages of the IEC 61850 are available for the
DNP3 TCP intercommunication between devices.
13 The ethernet-based TCP variant of the DNP3 protocol is supported System solutions for protection and station control
with the electrical and optical ethernet module. Two DNP3 TCP
clients are supported. Redundant ring structures can be realized Together with the SICAM power automation system, SIPROTEC
for DNP3 TCP with the help of the integrated switch in the module. 4 can be used with PROFIBUS-FMS. Over the low-cost electrical
14 For instance, a redundant optical ethernet ring can be constructed. RS485 bus, or interference-free via the optical double ring, the
Single-point indications, double-point indications, measured and units exchange information with the control system.
metered values can be con gured with DIGSI 4 and are transmit-
Units featuring IEC 60870-5-103 interfaces can be connected to
ted to the DNPi client. Switching commands can be executed in
15 the controlling direction. Fault records of the device are stored in
SICAM in parallel via the RS485 bus or radially by ber-optic link.

Typical connections
Through this interface, the system is open for the connection of For IEC 61850, an interoperable system solution is offered with
units of other manufacturers (see Fig. 5/161). SICAM PAS. Via the 100 Mbits/s Ethernet bus, the units are linked
1
(see Fig. 5/162).
2
3
Typical connections
Connection of current and voltage transformers 4

Standard connection
For grounded networks, the ground current is obtained from the
phase currents by the residual current circuit. 5
10
Fig. 5/165 Residual current circuit without directional element Fig. 5/166 Sensitive ground current detection without directional element
11
12
13
14
15
Fig. 5/167 Residual current circuit with directional element

Typical connections
1 The gure shows the connection of two

phase-to-ground voltages and the VE
voltage of the open delta winding and a
phase-ground neutral current transformer
for the ground current. This connection
2 maintains maximum precision for direc-
tional ground-fault detection and must be
used in compensated networks.
Fig. 5/168 shows sensitive directional
3 ground-fault detection.
5 Fig. 5/168 Sensitive directional ground-fault detection with directional element for phases

6 or compensated networks only
7 Directional phase short-circuit protection
can be achieved by using only two
9 Fig. 5/169 Isolated-neutral or compensated networks
10
Connection for the synchronization
11 function
The 3-phase system is connected as refer-
ence voltage, i. e. the outgoing voltages
as well as a single-phase voltage, in this
12 case a busbar voltage, that has to be
synchronized.
13
Fig. 5/170 Measuring of the busbar voltage and the outgoing feeder
voltage for synchronization
14
15
Type of network Function Current connection Voltage connection 1

(Low-resistance) grounded networks Sensitive ground-fault protection Phase-balance neutral current

2
non-directional

Residual circuit, with 3 phase-current Phase-to-ground connection or

3
phases directional current transformers possible phase-to-phase connection
4
(Low-resistance) grounded networks Overcurrent protection Residual circuit, with 3 phase-current Phase-to-ground connection required
Isolated networks Sensitive ground-fault

protection
5
Compensated networks Sensitive ground-fault protection Phase-balance neutral current

6
Typical applications 7
Application examples
Synchronization function
When two subnetworks must be intercon-
8
nected, the synchronization function
monitors whether the subnetworks are
synchronous and can be connected without
risk of losing stability.
9
As shown in Fig. 5/171, load is being fed
from a generator to a busbar via a trans-
former. It is assumed that the frequency
difference of the 2 subnetworks is such
10
that the device determines asynchronous 1) Synchronization function
system conditions. 2) Auto-reclosure function
The voltages of the busbar and the feeder 11
should be the same when the contacts Fig. 5/171 Measuring of busbar and feeder voltages for synchronization
are made; to ensure this condition the
synchronism function must run in the
synchronous/asynchronous switching mode. In this mode, the
operating time of the CB can be set within the relay. The vector group of the transformer can be considered by setting 12
Differences between angle and frequency can then be calculated parameters. Thus no external circuits for vector group adaptation
by the relay while taking into account the operating time of the are required.
CB. From these differences, the unit derives the exact time for
issuing the CLOSE command under asynchronous conditions.
This synchronism function can be applied in conjunction with the
auto-reclosure function as well as with the control function CLOSE
13
When the contacts close, the voltages will be in phase. commands (local/remote).
14
15
1 Undervoltage releases
Example:
2 DC supply voltage of control system fails
and manual electric tripping is no longer
possible.
3 Automatic tripping takes place when

voltage across the coil drops below the
trip limit. In Figure 5/172, tripping occurs
due to failure of DC supply voltage, by
automatic opening of the live status
4 contact upon failure of the protection unit
or by short-circuiting the trip coil in event
of a network fault.
5 Fig. 5/172 Undervoltage release with make contact 50, 51
In Fig. 5/173 tripping is by failure of auxil-

iary voltage and by interruption of tripping
6 circuit in the event of network failure. Upon
failure of the protection unit, the tripping
circuit is also interrupted, since contact
held by internal logic drops back into open
7 position.
10 Fig. 5/173 Undervoltage release with locking contact (trip signal 50 is inverted)
11
12
13
14
15

monitoring the circuit-breaker trip coil 1
interrupted.
Lockout (ANSI 86)

2
lockout state is also stored in the event of 3
supply voltage failure. Reclosure can only
Reverse-power protection for

dual supply (ANSI 32R)
4
If power is fed to a busbar through two
parallel infeeds, then in the event of any
fault on one of the infeeds it should be
selectively interrupted. This ensures a
5
continued supply to the busbar through
the remaining infeed. For this purpose,
directional devices are needed which
detect a short-circuit current or a power 6
ow from the busbar in the direction of
the infeed. The directional overcurrent
protection is usually set via the load
current. It cannot be used to deactivate 7
low-current faults. Reverse-power protec-
tion can be set far below the rated power.
This ensures that it also detects power
feedback into the line in the event of low-
current faults with levels far below the
8
load current. Reverse-power protection
is performed via the exible protection
functions of the 7SJ64.
9
10
Fig. 5/175 Reverse-power protection for dual supply 11
12
13
14
15
Technical data
General unit data Binary LQSXWVLQGLFDWLRQLQSXWV
Type
Number (marshallable)
7SJ640 7SJ641 7SJ642 7SJ645 7SJ647
7 15 20 33 48
Current transformer Voltage range DC 24 250 V
Rated current Inom 1 or 5 A (settable) Pickup threshold
2 Option: sensitive ground-fault CT

Power consumption
IEE < 1.6 A
modiable by plug-in
jumpers
Pickup threshold DC DC 19 V DC 88 V
at Inom = 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA per phase
at Inom = 5 A Approx. 0.3 VA per phase For rated control voltage
for sensitive ground-fault CT at 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA DC DC 24/48/60/110/ DC 110/125/220/250 V
3 Overload capability
Thermal (effective) 500 A for 1 s Power consumption
125 V
0.9 mA (independent of operating voltage)
150 A for 10 s energized for BI 819 / 2132;
20 A continuous 1.8 mA for BI 17 / 20/3348

250 x Inom (half cycle) Binary outputs/command outputs
Type 7SJ640 7SJ641 7SJ642 7SJ645 7SJ647
Thermal (effective) 300 A for 1 s Command/indication 5 13 8 11 21
100 A for 10 s relay

15 A continuous
750 A (half cycle)
indication relay
Voltage transformer Live status contact 1 NO / NC (jumper) / form A / B
Rated voltage Vnom 100 V to 225 V Switching capacity
Make 1000 W / VA
6 Measuring range
Power consumption at Vnom = 100 V
0 V to 200 V
< 0.3 VA per phase
Break 30 W / VA / 40 W resistive /
25 W at L/R 50 ms
Switching voltage DC 250 V
(phase-neutral voltage)
7 Thermal (effective) 230 V continuous
Auxiliary voltage (via integrated converter)
30 A for 0.5 s making current,
Rated auxiliary voltage Vaux DC 24 / 48 V 60 /125 V 110 / 250 V
Power relay (for motor control)
Permissible tolerance DC 19 58 V 48 150 V 88 300 V
Type 7SJ640 7SJ642 7SJ645 7SJ647
8 Ripple voltage,
peak-to-peak
12 % of rated auxiliary voltage
Number
7SJ641
0 2 (4) 4 (8) 4 (8)
Power consumption 7SJ640 7SJ641 7SJ645 7SJ647
7SJ642 Number of contacts/relay 2 NO / form A
Switching capacity
9 Quiescent
Energized
Approx. 5 W
Approx. 9 W
5.5 W 6.5 W
12.5 W 15 W
7.5 W
21 W
Make 1000 W / VA
at 48 V 250 V / 500 W at 24 V
Backup time during 50 ms at V > DC 110 V
Break 1000 W / VA
loss/short-circuit of 20 ms at V > DC 24 V
at 48 V 250 V / 500 W at 24 V
auxiliary direct voltage
10 Rated auxiliary voltage Vaux AC

Permissible tolerance AC
115 V / 230 V
92 32 V / 184 265 V
Switching voltage
Permissible current
DC 250 V
5 A continuous,
30 A for 0.5 s
Power consumption 7SJ640 7SJ641 7SJ645 7SJ647
7SJ642
11 Quiescent
Energized
Approx. 7 W
Approx. 12 W
9W
19 W
12 W
23 W
16 W
33 W
Backup time during 200 ms
loss/short-circuit of
12 auxiliary alternating voltage
13
14
15
Technical data
Electrical tests Radiated electromagnetic 35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz;

interference amplitude and pulse-modulated
Specication
Standards IEC 60255
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2
Damped wave 2.5 kV (peak value, polarity
1
ANSI C37.90, C37.90.1, C37.90.2,
IEC 60694 / IEC 61000-4-12 alternating)
UL508
Insulation tests Ri = 200
Standards IEC 60255-5; ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0 EMC tests for interference emission; type tests 2
Voltage test (100 % test) 2.5 kV (r.m.s. value), 50/60 Hz Standard EN 50081-* (generic specication)
all circuits except for auxiliary
Conducted interferences 150 kHz to 30 MHz
voltage and RS485/RS232 and
Radio interference eld strength 30 to 1000 MHz 3
Impulse voltage test (type test) 5 kV (peak value); 1.2/50 s; 0.5 J
4
class III Mechanical stress tests
EMC tests for interference immunity; type tests Vibration, shock stress and seismic vibration
(product standard)
During operation 5
DIN 57435 Part 303 Vibration Sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2 10 to 60 Hz; 0.075 mm amplitude;
High-frequency test
400 surges per s; test duration 2 s
6
and VDE 0435 Part 303, class III 20 cycles in 3 perpendicular axes
Electrostatic discharge 8 kV contact discharge; Shock Semi-sinusoidal
10 V/m; 27 to 500 MHz
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
IEC 60068-2-27
Acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms;
3 shocks in both directions of 3 axes 7
eld, non-modulated IEC 60255-21-3, class 1 1 to 8 Hz: 3.5 mm amplitude
IEC 60255-22-3 (Report) class III IEC 60068-3-3 (horizontal axis)
10 V/m, 80 to 1000 MHz;
AM 80 %; 1 kHz
(vertical axis) 8
IEC 61000-4-3; class III 8 to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration
Irradiation with radio-frequency 10 V/m, 900 MHz; repetition (horizontal axis)
eld, pulse-modulated rate 200 Hz, on duration 50 % 8 to 35 Hz: 0.5 g acceleration
IEC 61000-4-3/ENV 50204; class III
(vertical axis)
Frequency sweep 1 octave/min 9
1 cycle in 3 perpendicular axes
IEC 60255-22-4 and IEC 61000-4- burst length = 15 ms;
4, class IV repetition rate 300 ms; both polarities; During transportation
(Surge)
Standards
Vibration
IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2
Sinusoidal 10
IEC 61000-4-5; class III IEC 60068-2-6 8 to 150 Hz; 2 g acceleration,
Auxiliary voltage From circuit to circuit: 2 kV; 12 ; 9 F frequency sweep 1 octave/min
Binary inputs/outputs
From circuit to circuit: 2 kV; 42 ; 0.5 F Shock
Semi-sinusoidal
11
across contacts: 1 kV; 42 ; 0.5 F IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1 Acceleration 15 g, duration 11 ms
Line-conducted HF, 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks in both directions of 3 axes
amplitude-modulated AM 80 %; 1 kHz Continuous shock Semi-sinusoidal
Power frequency magnetic eld 30 A/m; 50 Hz, continuous
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
IEC 60068-2-29
1000 shocks in both directions
12
IEC 61000-4-8, class IV 300 A/m; 50 Hz, 3 s of 3 axes
IEC 60255-6 0.5 mT, 50 Hz
capability
2.5 to 3 kV (peak value), 1 to 1.5 MHz
damped wave; 50 surges per s; 13
Fast transient surge withstand 4 to 5 kV; 10/150 ns; 50 surges per s
capability ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 both polarities; duration 2 s, Ri = 80
14
15
Technical data
Climatic stress tests Serial interfaces
1 Temperatures
Type-tested acc. to IEC 60068-2-1 -25 C to +85 C / -13 F to +185 F
and -2, test Bd, for 16 h 9-pin subminiature connector
Temporarily permissible operating -20 C to +70 C / -4 F to +158 F Transmission rate Factory setting 115200 baud,
temperature, tested for 96 h min. 4800 baud, max. 115200 baud
-5 C to +55 C / +25 F to +131 F Service/modem interface (rear of unit)
Isolated interface for data transfer Port C: DIGSI 4 / modem / RTD-box
IEC 60255-6
(Legibility of display may be Transmission rate Factory setting 38400 baud
impaired above +55 C / +131 F) min. 4800 baud, max. 115200 baud
permanent storage
-25 C to +55 C / -13 F to +131 F RS232/RS485
Limiting temperature during -25 C to +70 C / -13 F to +158 F Connection

transport For ush-mounting housing / 9-pin subminiature connector,
surface-mounting housing with mounting location C
4 Humidity
Permissible humidity Annual average 75 % relative humi-
It is recommended to arrange the dity; on 56 days a year up to 95 % with two-tier terminal at the shielded data cable
units in such a way that they are relative humidity; condensation not top / bottom part
not exposed to direct sunlight or permissible! Distance RS232 15 m / 49.2 ft
Distance RS485 Max. 1 km / 3300 ft
Unit design
Additional interface (rear of unit)
Type 7SJ640 7SJ641 7SJ645
6 Housing
7SJ642
7XP20
7SJ647 Isolated interface for data
transfer
Port D: RTD-box
Transmission rate Factory setting 38400 baud,

Dimensions See dimension drawings, part 14 of min. 4800 baud, max. 115200 baud
this catalog
RS485
7 Weight in kg Housing
width
Housing
width
Housing
width Connection
Surface-mounting housing 8 11 15 For ush-mounting housing / 9-pin subminiature connector,
Flush-mounting housing 5 6 10 surface-mounting housing with mounting location D
Housing for detached operator detached operator panel
8 operator panel
Detached operator panel

8
2.5
12
2.5
At the bottom part of the housing:
shielded data cable
top / bottom part
acc. to EN 60529 Distance Max. 1 km / 3300 ft
Surface-mounting housing IP 51 Test voltage AC 500 V against ground
9 Flush-mounting housing
Operator safety
IP 2x with cover
Fiber optic
optic connection
For ush-mounting housing / Mounting location D
10 surface-mounting housing with
top / bottom part
11 Optical wavelength 820 nm
Distance Max. 1.5 km / 0.9 miles
12
13
14
15
Technical data
System interface (rear of unit) PROFIBUS-FMS/DP

Isolated interface for data
Port B
1
transfer to a control center Transmission rate Up to 1.5 Mbaud
Transmission rate Factory setting: 9600 baud, RS485
RS232/RS485
Connection
mounting location B
2
Connection Mounting location B
For ush-mounting housing / detached operator panel
surface-mounting housing with For surface-mounting housing At the bottom part of the housing:
top / bottom part
shielded data cable
3
with two-tier terminal on the shielded data cable Distance 1000 m / 3300 ft 93.75 kbaud;
top / bottom part 500 m / 1500 ft 187.5 kbaud;
200 m / 600 ft 1.5 Mbaud;
Distance RS232
Distance RS485
Max. 15 m / 49 ft
Max. 1 km / 3300 ft Test voltage
100 m / 300 ft 12 Mbaud
4
Test voltage AC 500 V against ground Fiber optic
Fiber optic Connection ber-optic cable Integr. ST connector for FO connec-
Connection ber-optic cable Integrated ST connector for
ber-optic connection
tion, mounting location B
5
For ush-mounting housing / Mounting location B detached operator panel
surface-mounting housing with For surface-mounting housing At the bottom part of the housing
detached operator panel with two-tier terminal on the Important: Please refer to footnotes
At the bottom part of the housing top / bottom part
Optical wavelength
1) and 2) on page 5/215
820 nm
6
top / bottom part
Permissible path attenuation Max. 8 dB, for glass ber 62.5/125 m
Optical wavelength 820 nm Distance 500 kB/s 1.6 km / 0.99 miles
Distance
Max. 1.5 km / 0.9 miles MODBUS RTU, ASCII, DNP 3.0
1500 kB/s 530 m / 0.33 miles
7
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, redundant Isolated interface for data Port B
RS485 transfer
Connection
For ush-mounting housing / Mounting location B
to a control center
Transmission rate
Up to 19200 baud 8
surface-mounting housing with RS485
detached operator panel Connection
For surface-mounting housing (not available)
top / bottom part
surface-mounting housing with mounting location B 9
Distance RS485 Max. 1 km / 3300 ft For surface-mounting housing At bottom part of the housing:
Test voltage AC 500 V against ground with two-tier terminal at the shielded data cable
Ethernet (EN 100) for DIGSI, IEC 61850, DNP3 TCP, PROFINET top / bottom part
Distance Max. 1 km / 3300 ft max. 32 units
10
Electrical
recommended
Connection for ush-mounted rear panel, mounting location B
casing 2 x RJ45 socket contact
100BaseT acc. to IEEE802.3 Fiber-optic
Connection ber-optic cable Integrated ST connector for ber-optic
11
Connection for surface-mounted in console housing at case bottom
casing connection
Test voltage (reg. socket) 500 V; 50 Hz
Transmission speed 100 Mbit/s
detached operator panel 12
Bridgeable distance 65.62 feet (200 m) For surface-mounting housing At the bottom part of the housing
Optical with two-tier terminal at the Important: Please refer to footnotes
top / bottom part 1) and 2) on page 5/174
Connection for ush-mounted
case
rear panel, slot position B, duplex
LC, 100BaseT acc. to IEEE802.3
Optical wavelength
820 nm
Max 8 dB. for glass ber 62.5/125 m
13
Connection for surface-mounted (not available)
case Distance Max. 1.5 km / 0.9 miles
Transmission speed 100 Mbit/s

Optical wavelength 1300 nm 14
Bridgeable distance max. 0.93 miles (1.5 km)
1) At Inom = 1 A, all limits divided by 5. 15

Technical data
Time synchronization DCF77/IRIG-B signal (Format IRIG-B000) Tolerances

Pickup/dropout thresholds Ip, IEp 2 % of setting value or 50 mA1)
(SUB-D)
housing) 30 ms
Dropout ratio for 0.05 I/Ip 5 % of reference (calculated) value
Voltage levels 5 V, 12 V or 24 V (optional) 0.9 + 2 % current tolerance, respectively
2 Functions Direction detection
30 ms
Denite-time overcurrent protection, directional/non-directional For phase faults

(ANSI 50, 50N, 67, 67N) Polarization With cross-polarized voltages;
3 Operating mode non-directional
(L1 and L3)
With voltage memory for measure-
ment voltages that are too low
Number of elements (stages) I>, I>>, I>>> (phases) Forward range Vref,rot 86
IE>, IE>>, IE>>> (ground) Rotation of reference voltage Vref,rot - 180 to 180 (in steps of 1)
4 Setting ranges
Pickup phase elements 0.5 to 175 A or 1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
Direction sensitivity For one and two-phase faults
unlimited;
For three-phase faults dynamically
Pickup ground elements 0.25 to 175 A or 1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
unlimited;
Delay times T 0 to 60 s or (in steps of 0.01 s) Steady-state approx. 7 V phase-to-

Times
For ground faults
phase

restraint, with inrush restraint Polarization With zero-sequence quantities
+ 10 ms) 3V0, 3I0 or with negative-sequence
6 With twice the setting value

Non-directional
Approx. 30 ms
Directional
45 ms Forward range
quantities 3V2, 3I2
Vref,rot 86
With ve times the setting value Approx. 20 ms 40 ms Rotation of reference voltage Vref,rot - 180 to 180 (in steps of 1)
Dropout times Approx. 40 ms Direction sensitivity
Dropout ratio Approx. 0.95 for I/I 0.3 Zero-sequence quantities 3V0, 3I0 VE 2.5 V displacement voltage,
7 Tolerances
Pickup
nom
measured;
3V0 5 V displacement voltage,
2 % of setting value or 50 mA1) calculated
Negative -sequence quantities 3V2 5 V negative-sequence voltage
Inverse-time overcurrent protection, directional/non-directional 3V2, 3I2 3I2 225 mA negative-sequence
8 (ANSI 51, 51N, 67, 67N)
Operating mode non-directional 3-phase (standard) or 2-phase
current1)
Tolerances (phase angle error
phase protection (ANSI 51) (L1 and L3) under reference conditions)
Setting ranges For phase and ground faults 1 electrical
9 Pickup phase element IP
Pickup ground element IEP
0.25 to 20 A or 1) (in steps of 0.01 A) Inrush blocking
Time multiplier T 0.05 to 3.2 s or (in steps of 0.01 s) Inuenced functions Time-overcurrent elements, I>, IE>,
(IEC characteristics) Ip, IEp (directional, non-directional)
Time multiplier D 0.05 to 15 s or (in steps of 0.01 s) Lower function limit phases At least one phase current
10 (ANSI characteristics)
Undervoltage threshold V< for 10.0 to 125.0 V (in steps of 0.1 V) Lower function limit ground
(50 Hz and 100 Hz) 125 mA1)
Ground current
release Ip (50 Hz and 100 Hz) 125 mA1)
Trip characteristics Upper function limit 1.5 to 125 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
11 ANSI
Inverse, short inverse, long inverse
(setting range)
Setting range I2f /I 10 to 45 % (in steps of 1 %)
moderately inverse, very inverse, Crossblock (IL1, IL2, IL3) ON/OFF
extremely inverse, denite inverse Dynamic setting change
12 User-dened characteristic Dened by a maximum of 20 value

pairs of current and time delay
Controllable function Directional and non-directional
pickup, tripping time
Dropout setting
Start criteria Current criteria,
Without disk emulation Approx. 1.05 setting value Ip for
Ip/Inom 0.3, corresponds to approx.
binary input,
13 With disk emulation
14 monitoring with timer)

Technical data
(Sensitive) ground-fault detection (ANSI 64, 50 Ns, 51Ns, 67Ns) Delay times in linear range 7 % of reference value for 2 I/IEEp
Setting ranges
Logarithmic inverse
Logarithmic inverse with knee
Refer to the manual
Refer to the manual
1
Pickup threshold VE> (measured) 1.8 to 170 V (in steps of 0.1 V)
point
Pickup threshold 3V0> 10 to 225 V (in steps of 0.1 V)
(calculated) Direction detection for all types of ground-faults (ANSI 67Ns)
Measuring method cos / sin
Direction measurement IE and VE measured or
2
Times 3I0 and 3V0 calculated
Pickup time Approx. 50 ms
Measuring principle Active/reactive power measurement
Dropout ratio 0.95 or (pickup value -0.6 V)
Tolerances
Setting ranges
Measuring enable IRelease direct.
3
Pickup threshold VE (measured) 3 % of setting value or 0.3 V For sensitive input 0.001 to 1.2 A (in steps of 0.001 A)
Pickup threshold 3V0 (calculated) 3 % of setting value or 3 V For normal input 0.25 to 150 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
Delay times 1 % of setting value or 10 ms Direction phasor Correction - 45 to + 45 (in steps of 0.1 )
Measuring principle Voltage measurement
Dropout delay TReset delay
Tolerances
1 to 60 s (in steps of 1 s) 4
(phase-to-ground) Pickup measuring enable
Setting ranges For sensitive input 2 % of setting value or 1 mA
For normal input 2 % of setting value or 50 mA1)
Vph min (ground-fault phase)
Vph max (unfaulted phases)
10 to 100 V (in steps of 1 V) Angle tolerance 3 5
Measuring tolerance 3 % of setting value, or 1 V Measuring method (V0/I0)
acc. to DIN 57435 part 303 Direction measurement IE and VE measured or
Denite-time characteristic (ANSI 50Ns) Minimum voltage Vmin. measured
Minimum voltage Vmincalculated
0.4 to 50 V (in steps of 0.1 V)
6
Setting ranges Phase angle -180 to 180 (in steps of 0.1)
Pickup threshold IEE>, IEE>> Delta phase angle 0 to 180 (in steps of 0.1)
For sensitive input 0.001 to 1.5 A (in steps of 0.001 A)
For normal input
Delay times T for IEE >, IEE>>
0.25 to 175 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
Tolerances
Pickup threshold VE (measured) 3 % of setting value or 0.3 V 7
Dropout delay time TDO 0 to 60 s (in steps of 0.01 s) Pickup threshold 3V0 (calculated) 3 % of setting value or 3 V
Angle tolerance 3
Times
Pickup times Approx. 50 ms Angle correction for cable CT
Dropout ratio Approx. 0.95 Angle correction F1, F2 0 to 5 (in steps of 0.1) 8
Tolerances Current value I1, I2
Pickup threshold For sensitive input 0.001 to 1.5 A (in steps of 0.001 A)
For sensitive input 2 % of setting value or 1 mA For normal input 0.25 to 175 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
For normal input
Delay times
2 % of setting value or 50mA1)
High-impedance restricted ground-fault protection (ANSI 87N) /
9
Ground-fault pickup for all types of ground faults Setting ranges
Inverse-time characteristic (ANSI 51Ns) Pickup thresholds I>, I>>
current and delay time values
For sensitive input
For normal input
Delay times TI>, TI>>
0.003 to 1.5 A or (in steps of 0.001 A)
0.25 to 175 A1) or (in steps of 0.01 A)
10
Setting ranges
Times
Pickup threshold IIEEp
Pickup times
For normal input
User dened
0.25 to 20 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
Minimum
Typical
Approx. 20 ms
Approx. 30 ms 11
Dropout ratio Approx. 0.95 for I/Inom 0.5
Times
Tolerances
Pickup times
Pickup threshold
Approx. 50 ms
Approx. 1.1 IEEp
Pickup thresholds 3 % of setting value or
12
Dropout ratio Approx. 1.05 IEEp 5 % of setting value or
Tolerances 3 % rated current at Inom = 0.1 A
Pickup threshold
For sensitive input
For normal input
2 % of setting value or 50mA1)
13
For currents greater than 1.6 A, correct directionality can no longer be 14
guaranteed.

15
Technical data
Intermittent ground-fault protection Dropout ratios

1 Setting ranges
Pickup threshold
/Alarm
I/IAlarm
Approx. 0.99
Approx. 0.97
For 3I0 IIE> 0.25 to 175 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A) Tolerances
For IEE IIE> 0.005 to 1.5 A (in steps of 0.001 A) With reference to k Inom Class 5 acc. to IEC 60255-8
With reference to tripping time 5 % 2 s acc. to IEC 60255-8
2 Pickup prolon-
gation time
TV 0 to 10 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
Ground-fault accu- Tsum 0 to 100 s (in steps of 0.01 s) Number of reclosures 0 to 9
mulation time Shot 1 to 4 individually adjustable
3 Reset time for
accumulation
Tres 1 to 600 s (in steps of 1 s)
Start-up by Time-overcurrent elements (dir., non-
dir.), sensitive ground-fault protection,
binary input
Blocking of ARC Pickup of protection functions, three-
Times
4 Pickup times
Current = 1.25 pickup value Approx. 30 ms
phase fault detected by a protective ele-
ment, binary input, last TRIP command
after the reclosing cycle is complete
Current 2 pickup value Approx. 22 ms
(unsuccessful reclosing), TRIP command
Dropout time Approx. 22 ms by the breaker failure protection (50BF),
5 Tolerances
Pickup threshold IIE> 3 % of setting value, or 50 mA1) Setting ranges
Times TV, Tsum, Tres 1 % of setting value or 10 ms Dead time 0.01 to 320 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
Directional intermittent ground fault protection (ANSI 67Ns) and individual for shots 1 to 4)
6 Setting ranges / Increments
Pickup threshold
Blocking duration for manual-
CLOSE detection
0.5 s to 320 s or 0 (in steps of 0.01 s)
Vgnd> / 3V0> 2.0 V to 100.0 V Increments 1 V Blocking duration after 0.5 s to 320 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
Monitoring time after 0.04 s ... 10.00 s Increments 0.01 s reclosure
pickup detected Blocking duration after 0.01 to 320 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
7 Pulse no. for detecting the
interm. E/F
2 ... 50 Increments 1 dynamic blocking
Start-signal monitoring time 0.01 to 320 s or (in steps of 0.01 s)
Dropout ratio Circuit-breaker supervision 0.1 to 320 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
Dropout ratio Vgnd> / 3V0> 0,95 or (pickup value - 0,6 V)
time
8 Tolerances
Measurement tolerance
Max. delay of dead-time start
Maximum dead time extension
Vgnd> / 3V0> 3 % of setting value
Times 1 % of setting value or 10 ms Action time 0.01 to 320 s or (in steps of 0.01 s)
Inuencing Variables The delay times of the following protection function can be altered
9 Power supply direct voltage in
range
0.8 VPS/VPSNom 1.15 <1 % individually by the ARC for shots 1 to 4
Temperature in range 23.00 F (-5 C) amb 131.00 F I>>>, I>>, I>, Ip, Idir>>, Idir>, Ipdir
(55 C) <0.5 %/ K IE>>>, IE>>, IE>, IEp, IEdir>>, IEdir>, IEdir

Setting ranges
Additional functions Lockout (nal trip), delay of dead-time
start via binary input (monitored),
dead-time extension via binary input
Factor k 0.1 to 4 (in steps of 0.01) (monitored), co-ordination with other
Time constant 1 to 999.9 min (in steps of 0.1 min) protection relays, circuit-breaker moni-
toring, evaluation of the CB contacts
11 Warning overtemperature
alarm/trip
50 to 100 % with reference
to the tripping overtemperature Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50 BF)
(in steps of 1 %) Setting ranges
Current warning stage Ialarm 0.5 to 20 A (in steps of 0.01 A) Pickup threshold 0.2 to 5 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
12 Extension factor when stopped

k factor
1 to 10 with reference to the time
constant with the machine running
Delay time
Times
(in steps of 0.1) Pickup times

Rated overtemperature (for Inom) 40 to 200 C (in steps of 1 C) with internal start is contained in the delay time
with external start is contained in the delay time
13 2 2
For (I/k Inom) 8 t =th ln
(I /k Inom ) (Ipre /k Inom ) Dropout times Approx. 25 ms
2 Tolerances
(I /k Inom ) 1 Pickup value 2 % of setting value (50 mA)1)
t = Tripping time Delay time 1 % or 20 ms
th = Temperature rise time constant
14 I
Ipre
= Load current
= Preload current
Synchro- and voltage check (ANSI 25)
Operating modes Synchrocheck
k = Setting factor acc. to VDE 0435 Asynchronous/synchronous
Part 3011 and IEC 60255-8 Additional release conditions Live-bus / dead line
Inom = Rated (nominal) current of the Dead-bus / live-line
15 protection relay Dead-bus and dead-line
Bypassing

Technical data
Voltages Negative-sequence current detection (ANSI 46)

Max. operating voltage Vmax 20 to 140 V (phase-to-phase)
Min. operating voltage Vmin

(in steps of 1 V)
20 to 125 V (phase-to-phase)
Denite-time characteristic (ANSI 46-1 and 46-2)
Setting ranges 1
Pickup current I2>, I2>> 0.25 to 15 A1) or (in steps of 0.01 A)
(in steps of 1 V)
V< for dead-line / dead-bus 1 to 60 V (phase-to-phase) Dropout delay time TDO 0 to 60 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
check
V> for live-line / live-bus check
(in steps of 1 V)
20 to 140 V (phase-to-phase)
Functional limit
Times
All phase currents 20 A1) 2
(in steps of 1 V)
Primary rated voltage of 0.1 to 800 kV (in steps of 0.01 kV)
transformer V2nom
Dropout ratio Approx. 0.95 for I2 /Inom > 0.3
Tolerances
Drop-off to pickup ratios
2 % of pickup value or 2 V
approx. 0.9 (V>) or 1.1 (V<)
Tolerances 3
Pickup thresholds 3 % of the setting value or 50 mA1)
V-measurement Delay times 1 % or 10 ms
Voltage difference 0.5 to 50 V (phase-to-phase)
Inverse-time characteristic (ANSI 46-TOC)
Tolerance
(in steps of 1 V)
1V Setting ranges
Pickup current 0.25 to 10 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
4
f-measurement
f-measurement (f2>f1; f2<f1 0.01 to 2 Hz (in steps of 0.01 Hz) Time multiplier T 0.05 to 3.2 s or (in steps of 0.01s)
Tolerance 15 mHz (IEC characteristics)
-measurement
-measurement 2 to 80 (in steps of 1 )
Time multiplier D
5
(2>1; 2<1) Functional limit All phase currents 50 A1)
Tolerance 2 Trip characteristics
Max. phase displacement 5 for f 1 Hz IEC Normal inverse, very inverse,
Circuit-breaker operating time

10 for f > 1 Hz
ANSI
extremely inverse
Inverse, moderately inverse,
6
CB operating time 0.01 to 0.6 s (in steps of 0.01 s) very inverse, extremely inverse
Threshold ASYN SYN Pickup threshold Approx. 1.1 I2p setting value
Threshold synchronous /
asynchronous
0.01 to 0.04 Hz (in steps of 0.01 Hz) Dropout
IEC and ANSI Approx. 1.05 I2p setting value, 7
Adaptation (without disk emulation) which is approx. 0.95 pickup threshold
Vector group adaptation by angle 0 to 360 (in steps of 1 ) ANSI with disk emulation Approx. 0.90 I2p setting value
Different voltage 0.5 to 2 (in steps of 0.01) Tolerances
transformers V1/V2
Times
Pickup threshold
Time for 2 M 20
3 % of the setting value or 50 mA1)
5 % of setpoint (calculated)
8
Minimum measuring time Approx. 80 ms
Max. duration TSYN DURATION 0.01 to 1200 s; (in steps of 0.01 s) Flexible protection functions (ANSI 27, 32, 47, 50, 55, 59, 81R)
Supervision time TSUP VOLTAGE
Closing time of CB TCB close
Tolerance of all timers
Operating modes / measuring
quantities 9
3-phase I, I1, I2, I2/I1, 3I0, V, V1, V2, 3V0,
Measuring values of synchro-check function dV/dt, P, Q, cos
Reference voltage V1 In kV primary, in V secondary or in 1-phase I, IE, IE sens., V, VE, P, Q, cos
Range
% Vnom
10 to 120 % Vnom
Without xed phase relation
Pickup when
f, df/dt, binary input
Exceeding or falling below threshold
10
Tolerance*) 1 % of measured value or 0.5 % of value
Vnom Setting ranges
Current I, I1, I2, 3I0, IE 0.15 to 200 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
Voltage to be synchronized V2
Range
% Vnom
10 to 120 % Vnom
Current ratio I2/I1
Sens. ground curr. IE sens.
15 to 100 % (in steps of 1 %)
0.001 to 1.5 A (in steps of 0.001 A)
11
Tolerance*) 1 % of measured value or 0.5 % of Voltages V, V1, V2, 3V0 2 to 260 V (in steps of 0.1 V)
Vnom Displacement voltage VE 2 to 200 V (in steps of 0.1 V)
Frequency of V1 and V2
Range
f1, f2 in Hz
fN 5 Hz
Power P, Q
Power factor (cos )
Frequency fN = 50 Hz
0.5 to 10000 W (in steps of 0.1 W)
- 0.99 to + 0.99 (in steps of 0.01)
40 to 60 Hz (in steps of 0.01 Hz)
12
Tolerance*) 20 mHz
fN = 60 Hz 50 to 70 Hz (in steps of 0.01 Hz)
Voltage difference (V2 V1) In kV primary, in V secondary or in Rate-of-frequency change df/dt 0.1 to 20 Hz/s (in steps of 0.01 Hz/s)
% Vnom
Range
Tolerance*)
10 to 120 % Vnom
1 % of measured value or 0.5 % of
Dropout ratio >- stage
Dropout ratio <- stage
4 V/s to 100 V/s (in steps of 1 V/s)
1.01 to 3 (in steps of 0.01)
0.7 to 0.99 (in steps of 0.01)
13
Vnom Dropout differential f 0.02 to 1.00 Hz (in steps of 0.01 Hz)
Frequency difference (f2 f1) In mHz Pickup delay time 0 to 60 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
Range fN 5 Hz Trip delay time 0 to 3600 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
Tolerance*) 20 mHz Dropout delay time 0 to 60 s (in steps of 0.01 s) 14
Angle difference (2 1) In
Range 0 to 180
Tolerance*) 0.5
*) With rated frequency. 15


Technical data
Flexible protection functions (ANSI 27, 32, 47, 50, 55, 59, 81R) (cont'd) Tripping time characteristic
For I > IMOTOR START
1 Times
Pickup times
Current, voltage
I 2
t = STARTUP TSTARTUP
I
(phase quantities)
current
With 10 times the setting Approx. 20 ms
2 value
Current, voltages
TSTARTUP = Tripping time for rated
(symmetrical components) motor starting current
With 10 times the setting Approx. 30 ms
3 value
Power
Dropout ratio IMOTOR START
Tolerances
Approx. 0.95
Typical Approx. 120 ms Pickup threshold 2 % of setting value or 50 mA1)

Maximum (low signals and Approx. 350 ms Delay time 5 % or 30 ms
thresholds)
4 Power factor
Frequency
300 to 600 ms
Approx. 100 ms
Load jam protection for motors (ANSI 51M)
Setting ranges
Rate-of-frequency change Current threshold for
with 1.25 times the setting Approx. 220 ms alarm and trip 0.25 to 60 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
value Delay times 0 to 600 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
5 Voltage change dV/dt
for 2 times pickup value
Approx. 220 ms Blocking duration after
CLOSE signal detection 0 to 600 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
Binary input Approx. 20 ms Tolerances
Dropout times Pickup threshold 2 % of setting value or 50 mA1)
6 Current, voltage (phase

quantities)
< 20 ms Delay time
Restart inhibit for motors (ANSI 66)
Current, voltages (symmetrical < 30 ms

components) Setting ranges
Power Motor starting current relative 1.1 to 10 (in steps of 0.1)
7 Typical
Maximum
< 50 ms
< 350 ms IMOTOR START/IMotor Nom
Rated motor current IMotor Nom 1 to 6 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A)
Power factor < 300 ms
Frequency < 100 ms Max. permissible starting time 1 to 320 s (in steps of 1 s)
Rate-of-frequency change < 200 ms TStart Max
8 Voltage change
Binary input
< 220 ms
< 10 ms Minimum inhibit time
TMIN. INHIBIT TIME
0.2 min to 120 min (in steps of 0.1 min)
Tolerances Max. permissible number of 1 to 4 (in steps of 1)

Pickup threshold warm starts
Current 0.5 % of setting value or 50 mA1) Difference between cold and 1 to 2 (in steps of 1)
9 Current (symmetrical
components)
1 % of setting value or 100 mA1) warm starts
Extension k-factor for cooling 0.2 to 100 (in steps of 0.1)
Voltage 0.5 % of setting value or 0.1 V simulations of rotor at zero
Voltage (symmetrical 1 % of setting value or 0.2 V speed k at STOP
components) Extension factor for cooling time 0.2 to 100 (in steps of 0.1)
10 Power
Power factor
1 % of setting value or 0.3 W
2 degrees
k RUNNING
Frequency 5 mHz (at V = VN, f = fN) n c -1
Restarting limit restart = rot max perm
10 mHz (at V = VN) nc
Rate-of-frequency change 5 % of setting value or 0.05 Hz/s
11 Voltage change dV/dt
Times
5 % of setting value or 2 V/s
is possible
Setting ranges rotor overtemperature
12 Motor starting current ISTARTUP
Pickup threshold IMOTOR START
2.5 to 80 A1) (in steps of 0.01)
(= 100 % in operational
measured value
Permissible starting 1 to 180 s (in steps of 0.1 s) rot/rot trip)
time TSTARTUP , COLD MOTOR
Permissible starting 0.5 to 180 s (in steps of 0.1 s) start-ups from cold
13 time TSTARTUP, WARM MOTOR
Temperature threshold 0 to 80 % (in steps of 1 %)
state
cold motor
Signal from the operational Predened with programmable logic
Permissible blocked rotor 0.5 to 120 s or (in steps of 0.1 s)
measured values
14 time TBLOCKED-ROTOR

Technical data
Temperature monitoring box (ANSI 38) Frequency protection (ANSI 81)

Temperature detectors
Connectable boxes 1 or 2
Number of frequency elements
Setting ranges
4
1
Number of temperature Max. 6 Pickup thresholds for fnom = 50 Hz 40 to 60 Hz (in steps of 0.01 Hz)
detectors per box Pickup thresholds for fnom = 60 Hz 50 to 70 Hz (in steps of 0.01 Hz)
Type of measuring Pt 100 or Ni 100 or Ni 120 Dropout differential 0.02 Hz to 1.00 Hz (in steps of 0.01 Hz)
Bearing or Other
= |pickup threshold dropout threshold|

2
Thresholds for indications Undervoltage blocking, with 10 to 150 V (in steps of 1 V)
For each measuring detector positive-sequence voltage V1
or (no indication)
Times
Pickup times Approx. 80 ms 3
-58 F to 482 F (in steps of 1 F) Dropout
or (no indication) Ratio undervoltage blocking Approx. 1.05
Undervoltage protection (ANSI 27) Tolerances

Pickup thresholds
4
Operating modes/measuring Frequency 5 mHz (at V = VN, f = fN)
quantities 10 mHz (at V = VN)
3-phase Positive phase-sequence voltage or Undervoltage blocking 3 % of setting value or 1 V
phase-to-phase voltages or
Delay times 3 % of the setting value or 10 ms 5
1-phase Single-phase phase-ground or phase- Output of the fault distance in primary and secondary,
phase voltage in km or miles line length,
Setting ranges
Pickup thresholds V<, V<< Starting signal
in % of line length
Trip command, dropout of a
6
dependent on voltage 10 to 120 V (in steps of 1 V) protection element, via binary input
connection and chosen 10 to 210 V (in steps of 1 V)
measuring quantity Setting ranges
Dropout ratio r
Delay times T
1.01 to 3 (in steps of 0.01)
0.001 to 3 /mile2) (in steps of 0.0001) 7
Current Criteria "Bkr Closed IMIN" 0.2 to 5 A1) (in steps of 0.01 A) Tolerances
Measurement tolerance acc. to 2.0 % fault location, or 0.025
Times VDE 0435, Part 303 for sinusoi- (without intermediate infeed) for
Pickup times
Dropout times
Approx. 50 ms
As pickup times
and IK/Inom 1 8
Tolerances
Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection (ANSI 27/Q)
Pickup thresholds 1 % of setting value or 1 V
Times 1 % of setting value or 10 ms Measured Values / Modes of
Operation
3-phase I1, V, Q, 9
Operating modes/measuring Measuring method for I, V Fundamental wave, Pickup when
quantities Exceeding threshold value or falling
3-phase Positive phase-sequence voltage or below threshold value
negative phase-sequence voltage or
phase-to-phase voltages or Setting Ranges / Increments
Pickup thresholds
10
1-phase Single-phase phase-ground or phase- Current I1 for INom = 1 A 0.01 to 0.20 A Increments 0.01 A
phase voltage for INom = 5 A 0.05 to 1.00 A
Setting ranges
Voltage V
Power Q for INom = 1 A
for I VAR Nom = 5 A
10.0 to 210.00 V Increments 0.1 V
1.0 to 100 VAR Increments 0.01
5.0 to 500 VAR
11
dependent on voltage 40 to 260 V (in steps of 1 V) Pickup delay (standard) 0.00 to 60.00 s Increments 0.01 s
connection and chosen 40 to 150 V (in steps of 1 V) Command delay time 0.00 to 3600.00 s Increments 0.01 s
measuring quantity 2 to 150 V (in steps of 1 V)
Dropout ratio r
Delay times T
0.9 to 0.99 (in steps of 0.01)
Dropout delay
Function Limits
0.00 to 60.00 s Increments 0.01 s
12
Power measurement I1
Times for INom = 1 A Positive sequence system current >
Pickup times V>, V>> Approx. 50 ms 0.03 A
Pickup times V1>, V2>>
Dropout times
Approx. 60 ms
As pickup times Times
for INom = 5 A Positive sequence system current >
0.15 A 13
Tolerances Pickup times:
Pickup thresholds 1 % of setting value or 1 V QU protection typical approx. 120 ms
Times 1 % of setting value or 10 ms maximum (small signals approx. 350 ms
and thresholds)
Binary input approx. 20 ms
14
Dropout times:
QU protection typical < 50 ms
maximum < 350 ms
2) At Inom = 1 A, all limitsmultiplied with 5.
Binary input <10 ms
15
Technical data
Tolerances cos , power factor (p.f.) Total and phase segregated

Pickup thresholds Range - 1 to + 1
1 Current I1 for INom = 1 A 1% of setting value or 10 mA
at INom 0.03 A
Tolerance1) 2 % for |cos | 0.707
2% of setting value or 20 mA Frequency f In Hz

at INom <0.03 A Range fnom 5 Hz
for INom = 5 A 1% of setting value or 50 mA Tolerance1) 20 mHz
2 at INom 0.25 A
2% of setting value or 100 mA
Temperature overload protection
/Trip
In %
at INom <0.25 A
Current I1 (symmetrical Range 0 to 400 %
components) for INom = 1 A Tolerance1) 5 % class accuracy per IEC 60255-8
2% of set value or 20 mA
3 Voltage
for INom = 5 A 2% of set value or 100 mA
1% of set value or 0.1 V
Temperature restart inhibit
L/L Trip
In %
Voltage (symmetrical components) 2% of set value or 0.2 V Range 0 to 400 %

Power 1% of setting value or 0.3 VAR Tolerance1) 5 % class accuracy per IEC 60255-8
Times 1% of setting value or 10 ms
4 Inuencing Variables for Pickup
Values
Restart threshold Restart/L Trip
Reclose time TReclose
In %
In min
Auxiliary direct voltage in the range from 0.8 VPS/VPSNom 1.15 1 %
detection (total, real, and reactive secondary
Temperature in the range from 23.00 F (-5 C) amb
current) IEE, IEE real, IEE reactive
5 Frequency in the range
131.00 F (55 C) 0.5 %/10 K
from 25 Hz to 70 Hz 1 %
Range
Tolerance1)
0 mA to 1600 mA
Harmonics
RTD-box See section "Temperature monitoring box"
up to 10 % 3rd harmonic 1%
up to 10 % 5th harmonic 1% See section Synchronism and
6 Synchronism and voltage check voltage check
Long-term averages
Additional functions Time window 5, 15, 30 or 60 minuets

Currents In A (kA) primary,
Long-term averages
Adjustable
IL1, IL2, IL3 in A secondary or in % Inom of currents IL1dmd, IL2dmd, IL3dmd, I1dmd in A (kA)
Positive-sequence component I1 of real power Pdmd in W (kW, MW)
Negative-sequence component I2 of reactive power Qdmd in VAr (kVAr, MVAr)
8 IE or 3I0
of apparent power
Max. /Min. report
Sdmd in VAr (kVAr, MVAr)
Tolerance1) 1 % of measured value or 0.5 % Inom

Phase-to-ground voltages In kV primary, in V secondary or in
Reset, automatic Time of day adjustable (in minutes,
VL1-E, VL2-E, VL3-E % Vnom
9 Phase-to-phase voltages
VL1-L2, VL2-L3, VL3-L1, VSYN,
0 to 1439 min)
VE or V0 table (in days, 1 to 365 days, and )
Positive-sequence component V1 Reset, manual Using binary input,using keypad,
Negative-sequence component V2
10 Range
Tolerance1)
10 to 120 % Vnom
1 % of measured value or 0.5 % of
Min./Max. values for current
via communication
IL1, IL2, IL3,
Vnom
Min./Max. values for voltages voltages VL1-E, VL2-E, VL3-E
S, apparent power In kVAr (MVAr or GVAr) primary and
V1 (positive-sequence component)
11 Range
in % of Snom
0 to 120 % Snom
Min./Max. values for power
VL1-L2, VL2-L3, VL3-L1
S, P, Q, cos , frequency
for V/Vnom and I/Inom = 50 to 120 % Min./Max. values for overload /Trip
protection
Operational measured values (cont'd)
12 P, active power With sign, total and phase-segrega-
ted in kW (MW or GW) primary and
I1 (positive-sequence component);
Sdmd, Pdmd, Qdmd
in % Snom
Local measured values monitoring
13 Tolerance1) 1 % of Snom
Current asymmetry Imax/Imin > balance factor,
for I>Ibalance limit
and |cos | = 0.707 to 1 with Voltage asymmetry Vmax/Vmin > balance factor,
Snom = 3 Vnom Inom for V>Vlim
Q, reactive power With sign, total and phase- Current phase sequence Clockwise (ABC) / counter-clockwise
14 segregated in kVAr (MVAr or GVAr)
(ACB)
Voltage phase sequence Clockwise (ABC) / counter-clockwise
Range 0 to 120 % Snom (ACB)
Limit value monitoring Predened limit values, user-dened
15 and |sin | = 0.707 to 1 with
Snom = 3 Vnom Inom 1) At rated frequency.
expansions via CFC

Technical data
Fuse failure monitor Operating hours counter

For all types of networks With the option of blocking affected
protection functions
Display range
Criterion
Up to 7 digits
Overshoot of an adjustable current 1
Fault recording threshold (BkrClosed IMIN)
Recording of indications of the Trip circuit monitoring
With one or two binary input
Commissioning aids
2
Phase rotation eld check,
Time stamping operational measured values,
Resolution for event log 1 ms circuit-breaker/switching device
(operational annunciations) test, creation of a test measure-
ment report
3
Resolution for trip log 1 ms
(fault annunciations) Clock
Maximum time deviation 0.01 % Time synchronization DCF77/IRIG-B signal
(internal clock)
binary input,
4
type CR AA, message "Battery communication
Maximum 8 fault records saved,
Number of available setting
groups
4 (parameter group A, B, C and D) 5
Switchover performed Via keypad, DIGSI, system (SCADA)
interface or binary input
supply
Control
6
and memory time adjustable outputs
Sampling rate for 50 Hz 1 sample/1.25 ms (16 samples/cycle) Interlocking Programmable
Energy/power
Circuit-breaker signals Feedback, close, open,
intermediate position
7
Meter values for power in kWh (MWh or GWh) and kVARh Control commands Single command /
Wp, Wq (real and reactive power (MVARh or GVARh) double command 1,
demand) 1 plus 1 common or 2 trip contacts
Tolerance1) 2 % for I > 0.1 Inom, V > 0.1 Vnom
and |cos | (p.f.) 0.707
Programmable controller CFC logic, graphic input tool 8
Local control
Statistics Units with small display Control via menu,
Saved number of trips Up to 9 digits assignment of a function key
Units with large display Control via menu,
control with control keys
9
to 1st and 2nd cycle) Remote control Via communication interfaces,
using a substation automation
Circuit-breaker wear and control system (e.g. SICAM),
Methods Ix with x = 1 .. 3 DIGSI 4 (e.g. via modem) 10
2-point method CE conformity
(remaining service life) This product is in conformity with the Directives of the European
I2t Communities on the harmonization of the laws of the Member States
Operation Phase-selective accumulation of
measured values on TRIP command,
11
up to 8 digits, phase-selective limit for use within certain voltage limits (Council Directive 2006/95/EG
values, monitoring indication previous 73/23/EEC).
Motor statistics
Total number of motor start-ups 0 to 9999 (resolution 1)
Part 303).
12
Total operating time 0 to 99999 h (resolution 1 h)
Further applicable standards: ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0 and C37.90.1.The
Total down-time 0 to 99999 h (resolution 1 h)
unit conforms to the international standard IEC 60255, and the German
Ratio operating time/down-time 0 to 100 % (resolution 0.1 %)
Active energy and reactive energy
Motor start-up data
See operational measured values
Of the last 5 start-ups
standard DIN 57435/Part 303 (corresponding to VDE 0435/Part 303).
This conformity is the result of a test that was performed by Siemens AG 13
Start-up time 0.30 s to 9999.99 s (resolution 10 ms) in accordance with Article 10 of the Council Directive complying with
Start-up current (primary) 0 A to 1000 kA (resolution 1 A) the generic standards EN 50081-2 and EN 50082-2 for the EMC Directi-
Start-up voltage (primary) 0 V to 100 kV (resolution 1 V) ve and standard EN 60255-6 for the low-voltage Directive.
14
1) At rated frequency. 15
1 7SJ64 multifunction protection relay with synchronization
Housing, binary inputs and outputs

7SJ64 - -
Housing 19, 7 BI, 5 BO, 1 live status contact, text display 4 x 20 character (only for 7SJ640)
9th position only with: B, D, E 0
2 Housing 19, 15 BI, 13 BO (1 NO/NC or 1a/b contact), 1 live status contact, graphic display
Housing 19, 20 BI, 8 BO, 2 power relays (4 contacts), 1 live status contact, graphic display
1
2
See next page
Housing 19, 33 BI, 11 BO, 4 power relays (8 contacts), 1 live status contact, graphic display 5
Housing 19, 48 BI, 21 BO, 4 power relays (8 contacts), 1 live status contact, graphic display 7
3 Measuring inputs (4 x V , 4 x I)
Iph = 1 A1), Ie = 1 A1) (min. = 0.05 A)
4 Position 15 only with B, D, F, H 2
Iph = 5 A1), Ie = 5 A1) (min. = 0.25 A)
5 Position 15 only with B, D, F, H
Iph = 5 A1), Ie = 1 A1) (min. = 0.05 A)
6
Rated auxiliary voltage (power supply, binary inputs)

6 DC 24 to 48 V, threshold binary input DC 19 V 3) 2
DC 60 to 125 V 2), threshold binary input DC19 V 3) 4
DC 110 to 250 V 2), AC 115 to 230 V, threshold binary input DC 88 V 3) 5
7 Unit version
Surface-mounting housing, plug-in terminals, detached operator panel,
panel mounting in low-voltage housing A
Surface-mounting housing, 2-tier terminals on top/bottom B
8 Surface-mounting housing, screw-type terminals (direct connection/ring-type cable lugs),

detached operator panel, panel mounting in low-voltage housing C
Flush-mounting housing, plug-in terminals (2/3 pin connector) D
Flush-mounting housing, screw-type terminals (direct connection/ring-type cable lugs) E
9 Surface-mounting housing, screw-type terminals (direct connection/ring-type cable lugs),

without operator panel, panel mounting in low-voltage housingg F
Surface-mounting housing, plug-in terminals, without operator panel,
panel mounting in low-voltage housing G
10 Region-specic default settings / function versions and language settings

Region DE, 50 Hz, IEC, language: German (language selectable) A
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: English (GB) (language selectable) B
Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI, language: English (US) (language selectable) C
11 Region FR, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: French (language selectable)
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: Spanish (language selectable)
D
E
Region IT, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: Italian (language selectable) F
Region RU, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: Russian(language can be changed) G
12
13
14
by means of jumpers.
15 3) The binary input thresholds can be selected per binary input by

means of jumpers.


7SJ64 multifunction protection relay with synchronization

7SJ64 - - -
1
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, RS232 1 See
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, RS485 2

following
pages
2

PROFIBUS-FMS Slave, 820 nm wavelength, single ring, ST connector 1) 5 3
PROFIBUS-FMS Slave, 820 nm wavelength, double ring, ST connector 1) 6
PROFIBUS-DP Slave, 820 nm wavelength, double ring, ST connector 1) 9 L 0 B 4
MODBUS, RS485 9 L 0 D
MODBUS, 820 nm wavelength, ST connector 2) 9 L 0 E
DNP 3.0, RS485 9 L 0 G
5
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, redundant, RS485, RJ45 connector 2) 9 L 0 P

IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45 connector (EN 100)
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, optical, double, LC connector (EN 100) 2)
9
9
L 0 R
L 0 S
6
DNP3 TCP + IEC 61850, 100Mbit Eth, optical, double, LC connector 4)
9
9
L 2 S
L 3 R
7
PROFINET + IEC 61850, 100Mbit Eth, optical, double, LC connector 4) 9 L 3 S
Only Port C (service interface)
DIGSI 4/modem, electrical RS232 1 8
Port C and D (service and additional interface) 9 M
Port C (service interface)
DIGSI 4/modem, electrical RS232
9
1
PortD(additional interface)
RTD-box3), 820 nm ber, ST connector 5) A
10
RTD-box3), electrical RS485 F
Fault recording 1 11
12
13
1) Not with position 9 = B; if 9 = B, please order 7SJ6 unit with 2) Not available with position 9 = B.
RS485 port and separate ber-optic converters.
For single ring, please order converter 6GK1502-2CB10, not availab-
3) Temperature monitoring box 7XV5662- AD10,
refer to Accessories. 14
le with position 9 = B. 4) Available with V4.9
For double ring, please order converter 6GK1502-3CB10, not
5) When using the temperature monitoring box at an optical interface,
available with position 9 = B.
the additional RS485 ber-optic converter 7XV5650-0 A00 is
The converter requires a AC 24 V power supply (e.g. power supply
7XV5810-0BA00).
required. 15

7SJ64 - - -

2 50N/51N
50N/51N
Insensitive ground-fault protection through
3 51 V
49
4 37
47
59N/64
Phase sequence
5 86
4 setting groups, cold-load pickup, Inrush blocking
Lockout F A
V, P, f 27/59 Under-/overvoltage
6 27/47/59(N) Flexible protection (index quantities derived from

rate-of-frequency-change protection F E
IEF V, P, f 27/59 Under-/overvoltage
7 27/Q Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection 3)
32/55/81R current and voltages): Voltage, power, p.f.,rate-of-frequency-
change protection Intermittent ground fault P E
Dir 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent,
8 phases and ground F C
Dir V, P, f 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground

rate-of-frequency-change protection F G
Dir V,P,f IEF 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
10 27/59
Intermittent ground fault protection
Under-/overvoltage
81U/O Under-/overfrequency
27/47/59(N) Flexible protection functions (quantities derived from
11 current & voltages)
32/55/81R Voltage-/power-/p.f.-/rate of freq. change-protection
Intermittent ground-fault P G
Dir IEF 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
12 Sens.ground-f.det. Motor 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
Dir V,P,f REF 67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
87N High-impedance restricted ground fault F D 2)
13
Continued on
14 Basic version included 1) Only with insensitive ground-current transformer when position
next page
V, P, f = Voltage, power, frequency protection 7 = 1, 5, 7.
Dir = Directional overcurrent protection 2) For isolated/compensated networks only with sensitive
15 IEF = Intermittent ground fault

ground-current transformer when position 7 = 2, 6.
3) available with V4.9


7SJ64 multifunction protection relay with synchronization

7SJ64 - - -
1
50N/51N
50N/51N
2
51 V
49
3
37
47
59N/64
Phase sequence
Displacement volt
4
86
Inrush blocking
Lockout
5
Sens.ground-f.det. Motor 67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
Dir V,P,f REF 67Ns Directional intermittent ground fault protection 3)
87N
27/59
Under-/overvoltage 6
rate-of-frequency-change protection F F 2) 7
Sens.ground-f.det. Motor IEF 67/67N Directional sensitive ground-fault detection, phases and ground
Intermittent ground fault P D 2)
8
Sens.ground-f.det. Motor 67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
Sens.ground-f.det. Motor
87N
67Ns

F B 2)
9
66/86
51M
Restart inhibit
10
11
rate-of-frequency-change protection H F 2)
Dir V,P,f REF 67Ns
67Ns
87N
12
51M
27/59
81O/U
Under-/overvoltage
13
H H 2) 14
Basic version included 1) Only with insensitive ground-current transformer when position 7 = 1, 5, 7.
Continued on
V, P, f = Voltage, power, frequency protection 2) For isolated/compensated networks only with sensitive ground-current next page
transformer when position 7 = 2, 6.
Dir
IEF
= Intermittent ground fault 3) available with V4.9 15

7SJ64 - - -

2 50N/51N
50N/51N
3 51 V
4 37
47
Phase sequence
5 4 setting groups, cold-load pickup
Inrush blocking
86 Lockout
6 67Ns
87N
7 51M
27/59
Undervoltage/overvoltage
81O/U Underfrequency/overfrequency
8 32/55/81R current and voltages): Voltage, power, p.f.,
rate-of-frequency-change protection R H 2)
Motor V, P, f 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent,
Dir phases and ground
9 48/14
66/86
Restart inhibit

rate-of-frequency-change protection H G
Motor 48/14 Starting time supervision, locked rotor
11 66/86
51M
Restart inhibit
Load jam protection, motor statistics H A
ARC, fault locator, synchronization
Without 0
12 79
21FL
With auto-reclosure
With fault locator
1
2
79, 21FL With auto-reclosure, with fault locator 3
25 With synchronization 4
25, 79,21FL With synchronization, auto-reclosure, fault locator 7
13 ATEX100 Certication
For protection of explosion-protected motors (increased-safety type of protection e) Z X 9 9 2)
14
Basic version included 1) Only with insensitive ground-current transformer when position 7 = 1, 5, 7.
15 V, P, f = Voltage, power, frequency protection

Dir = Directional overcurrent protection
2) This variantmight be supplied with a previous rmware version.
3) available with V4.9

DIGSI 4
1
Basis
Professional
7XS5402-0AA00
3
Complete version:
displays),
4
IEC 61850 Systemcongurator

5
SIGRA 4
6
7

AC/DC 24 to 60 V 7XV5662-2AD10 8
AC/DC 90 to 240 V 7XV5662-5AD10
Varistor/VoltageArrester
125 Vrms; 600 A; 1S/S 256 C53207-A401-D76-1
9
240 Vrms; 600 A; 1S/S 1088 C53207-A401-D77-1
Connecting cable
Cable between PC / notebook (9-pin con.) and protection unit 10
SIPROTEC 4 unit
- length 5 m / 16.4 ft 7XV5103-7AA05
11
- length 25 m / 82 ft 7XV5103-7AA25
- length 50 m / 164 ft 7XV5103-7AA50
Manual for 7SJ64 12

English /German C53000-G1100-C147-x 1)
13
14

15

package
LSP2289-afp.eps
2 Mounting rail
Connector 2-pin
Connector 3-pin
C73334-A1-C35-1
C73334-A1-C36-1
1
1
Siemens
Siemens

taped on reel
3 Crimp connector CI2 0.5 to 1 mm2 AMP 1)
LSP2090-afp.eps
LSP2091-afp.eps
0-827396-1 1
taped on reel
4 2-pin connector 3-pin connector Crimping tool for Type III+ 0-539635-1 1 AMP 1)
5
LSP2093-afp.eps
LSP2092-afp.eps
Short-circuit links
Short-circuit links
10
11
12
13
14
15
Connection diagram
10
11
12
13


Connection diagram
10
11
12
13


Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
of this catalog.
14

Connection diagram
10
11
12 *) For pinout of communication ports see

part 14 of this catalog.
refer to the manual
13 (http://www.siemens.com/siprotec).
14 to avoid shorting out the power supply.
BO8/BO9, BO13/BO14, BO15/BO16.
15

Connection diagram
10
11
12

13
to avoid shorting out the power supply.
14
BO8/BO9, BO13/BO14, BO15/BO16.
15
Fig. 5/180 7SJ647 connection diagram part 1; continued on following page

Connection diagram
10
11
12
13

15 Fig. 5/181 7SJ647 connection diagram part 2

Distance Protection
Page
SIPROTEC 4 7SA6 distance protection relay

for all voltage levels 6/3
SIPROTEC 4 7SA522 distance protection relay

for transmission lines 6/45
6
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Distance Protection 7SA6
SIPROTEC 4 7SA6 distance protection relay for all voltage levels
Function overview
Non-switched distance protection with
6 measuring systems (21/21N)
High resistance ground-fault protection
for single and three-pole tripping (50N, 2
51N, 67N)
Ground-fault detection in isolated and
resonant-grounded networks
Tele (pilot) protection (85)
3
Fault locator (FL)
Power-swing detection/tripping (68/68T)
Phase overcurrent protection (50/51/67) 4
LSP2318-afp.tif
Switch-onto-fault protection (50HS)
STUB bus overcurrent protection
(50STUB)
Overvoltage/undervoltage protection
5
(59/27)
Over/underfrequency protection 81O/U)
Fig. 6/1 SIPROTEC 47SA6 distance protection relay

Auto-reclosure (79) 6
Synchro-check (25)
Breaker failure protection (50BF)
Description Thermal overload protection (49)
7
The SIPROTEC 4 7SA6 distance protection relay is a universal Control function
device for protection, control and automation on the basis of the Commands for control of CBs and isolators
SIPROTEC 4 system. Its high level of exibility makes it suitable
to be implemented at all voltage levels. With this relay you are
ideally equipped for the future: it offers security of investment
Monitoring functions 8
Trip circuit supervision (74TC)
and also saves on operating costs.
Self-supervision of the relay
High-speed tripping time
Impedance setting range allows very small settings for the
Measured-value supervision
Event logging/fault logging
9
protection of very short lines Oscillographic fault recording
Self-setting detection for power swing frequencies up to 7 Hz Switching statistics
Current transformer saturation detector prevents non-selective Front design
10
tripping by distance protection in the event of CT saturation.
Easy operation with numeric keys
Phase-segregated teleprotection for improved selectivity and Function keys
availability
LEDs for local alarm 11
Digital relay-to-relay communication by means of an inte- PC front port for convenient relay setting
grated serial protection data interface
Adaptive auto-reclosure (ADT)
Front interface for connecting a PC 12
System interface for connecting to a control system via various
protocols
IEC 61850 Ethernet
PROFIBUS-FMS/-DP
DNP 3.0
1 serial protection data interface for teleprotection
Rear-side service/modem interface 14
Time synchronization via
IRIG-B or DCF 77 or
system interface
15
Application
Application
1 The distance protection relay 7SA6 is non-

switched incorporating all the additional
functions for protection of overhead lines
and cables at all voltage levels from 5 to
2 765 kV.
All methods of neutral point connection
(resonant grounding, isolated, solid or
low-resistance grounding) are reliably
3 dealt with. The unit can issue single or
three-pole TRIP commands as well as
CLOSE commands. Consequently both
single-pole, three-pole and multiple auto-
4 reclosure is possible.
Teleprotection functions as well as
ground-fault protection and sensitive
ground-fault detection are included.
5 Power swings are detected reliably and
non-selective tripping is prevented. The
unit operates reliably and selectively 1) Teleprotection schemes can use conventional
even under the most difcult network signaling or serial data exchange
6 conditions.
Cost-effective power system Fig. 6/2 Function diagram

management
7 The SIPROTEC 4 units are numerical relays which also provide

control and monitoring functions and therefore support the ANSI Protection functions
user in view of a cost-effective power system management. The
21/21N Distance protection
security and reliability of power supply is increased as a result of
8 minimizing the use of hardware.

The local operation has been designed according to ergonomic
FL Fault locator
50N/51N/67N Directional ground-fault protection

criteria. Large, easy-to-read backlit displays are provided.
50/51/67 Backup overcurrent protection
The SIPROTEC 4 units have a uniform design and a degree
9 of functionality which represents a benchmark-level of 50 STUB STUB-bus overcurrent stage
performance in protection and control. If the requirements
for protection, control or interlocking change, it is possible in 68/68T Power swing detection/tripping
the majority of cases to implement such changes by means of Teleprotection for distance protection
10 parameterization using DIGSI 4 without having to change the
hardware.
85/21
Weak-infeed protection
27WI
The use of powerful microcontrollers and the application of 85/67N Teleprotection for ground-fault protection
digital measured-value conditioning and processing largely sup-
11 presses the inuence of higher-frequency transients, harmonics 50HS Switch-onto-fault protection
and DC components. Breaker-failure protection
50BF
59/27 Overvoltage/undervoltage protection
12 81O/U Over/underfrequency protection
25 Synchro-check
13 79 Auto-reclosure
86 Lockout (CLOSE command interlocking)
14 49 Thermal overload protection
IEE Sensitive ground-fault detection
15
Construction
Construction
Connection techniques and housing 1

, , , and -rack sizes:
These are the available housing widths
of the 7SA6 relays, referred to a 2
19" module frame system. This means
replaced. The height is a uniform 245 mm
LSP2174-afp.tif
3
LSP2166-afp.tif
for ush-mounting housings and 266 mm
nected with or without ring lugs. Plug-in
terminals are available as an option. 4
cable harnesses. In the case of surface Fig. 6/3 Flush-mounting housing Fig. 6/4 Rear view of ush-mounting housing
mounting on a panel, the connection with screw-type terminals with covered connection terminals
and wirings 5
communication interfaces are located
in a sloped case at the top and bottom
of the housing. The housing can also
be supplied optionally with a detached
6
operator panel (refer to Fig. 6/5), in order
to allow optimum operation for all types
of applications.
7
LSP2244-afp.eps
9
Fig. 6/5 Flush-mounting housing with plug-in terminals and detached operator panel
10
11
12
LSP2219-afp.eps
13
LSP2237-afp.tif
14
screw-type terminals sloped case in a surface-mounting
housing 15
1 Distance protection (ANSI 21, 21N)

The main function of the 7SA6 is a non-
switched distance protection. By parallel
2 calculation and monitoring of all six
impedance loops, a high degree of
sensitivity and selectivity is achieved
for all types of fault. The shortest
3 tripping time is less than one cycle. All

methods of neutral-point connection
(resonant grounding, isolated, solid or
low-resistance grounding) are reliably
dealt with. Single-pole and three-pole
4 tripping is possible. Overhead lines can be
equipped with or without series capacitor
compensation.
5 Four pickup methods

The following pickup methods can be
Fig. 6/8 Impedance fault detection Z< with quadrilateral characteristic
employed alternatively:
Overcurrent pickup I>>
6 Voltage-dependent overcurrent pickup

V/I
Voltage-dependent and phase angle-
dependent overcurrent pickup V / I /
7 Impedance pickup Z<

Load zone
The pickup mode with quadrilateral
impedance pickup (Z<) is tted with a
8 variable load zone. In order to guarantee
a reliable discrimination between load
operation and short-circuit (especially
on long high loaded lines), the relay is
9 equipped with a selectable load encroach-
ment characteristic. Impedances within
this load encroachment characteristic pre-
vent the distance zones from unwanted Fig. 6/9 Voltage and angle-dependent Fig. 6/10 Angle pickup for the V / I / fault
10 tripping.
Absolute phase-selectivity
overcurrent fault detection V / I / detection
The 7SA6 distance protection incorpo-

rates a well-proven, highly sophisticated
11 phase selection algorithm. The pickup of
unfaulted phases is reliably eliminated.
This phase selection algorithm achieves
single-pole tripping and correct distance
measurement in a wide application range.
12 Interference to distance measurement
caused by parallel lines can be compen-
sated by taking the ground current of the
parallel system into account.
13 This parallel line compensation can be
taken into account both for distance
measurement and for fault locating.
14
15 Fig. 6/11 Distance zones with circle characteristic

Seven distance zones

Six independant distance zones and one
separate overreach zone are available.
Each distance zone has dedicated time
1
stages, partially separate for single-phase
and three-phase faults. Ground faults
are detected by monitoring the ground
current 3I0 and the zero-sequence voltage
2
3V0. The quadrilateral tripping charac-
teristic allows use of separate settings
for the X and the R directions. Different
R settings can be employed for ground 3
and phase faults. This characteristic
offers advantages in the case of faults
with fault resistance. For applications
LSP2209-afp.tif
to medium-voltage cables with low line
angles, it may be advantageous to select
4
the distance zones with the optional circle
characteristic.
All the distance protection zones can be
set to forward, reverse or non-directional. Fig. 6/12 Power swing current and voltage wave forms 5
Optimum direction detection Tele (pilot) protection for distance protection (ANSI 85-21)
Use of voltages, which are not involved with the short-circuit
A teleprotection function is available for fast clearance of faults
loop, and of voltage memories for determination of the fault
direction ensure that the results are always reliable.
up to 100 % of the line length. The following operating modes 6
may be selected:
Elimination of interference signals POTT
Digital lters render the unit immune to interference signals
contained in the measured values. In particular, the inuence of
DC components, capacitive voltage transformers and frequency
Directional comparison pickup
Unblocking
7
changes is considerably reduced. A special measuring method is PUTT acceleration with pickup
employed in order to assure protection selectivity during satura- PUTT acceleration with Z1B
tion of the current transformers.
Blocking 8
Measuring voltage monitoring Pilot-wire comparison
Tripping of the distance protection is blocked automatically in
Reverse interlocking
the event of failure of the measuring voltage, thus preventing
spurious tripping.
The measuring voltage is monitored by the integrated fuse fail-
DUTT, direct underreaching zone transfer trip (together with
Direct Transfer Trip function).
9
ure monitor. Distance protection is blocked if either the fuse fail- The carrier send and receive signals are available as binary inputs
ure monitor or the auxiliary contact of the voltage transformer and outputs and can be freely assigned to each physical relay input
protection switch operates and in this case the EMERGENCY
denite-time overcurrent protection can be activated.
or output. At least one channel is required for each direction. 10
Common transmission channels are powerline carrier, micro-
Fault locator wave radio and ber-optic links. A serial protection data inter-
face for direct connection to a digital communication network or
The integrated fault locator calculates the fault impedance
and the distance-to-fault. The results are displayed in ohms,
ber-optic link is available. 11
kilometers (miles) and in percent of the line length. Parallel 7SA6 also permits the transfer of phase-selective signals. This
line compensation and load current compensation for high- feature is particularly advantageous as it ensures reliable single-
resistance faults is also available. pole tripping, if single-pole faults occur on different lines. The
transmission methods are suitable also for lines with three ends 12
Power swing detection (ANSI 68, 68T) (three-terminal lines). Phase-selective transmission is also pos-
Dynamic transient reactions, for instance short-circuits, load sible with multi-end application, if some user-specic linkages
are implemented by way of the integrated CFC logic.
uctuations, auto-reclosures or switching operations can cause
power swings in the transmission network. During power During disturbances in the signaling channel receiver or on the
13
swings, large currents along with small voltages can cause transmission circuit, the teleprotection function can be blocked
unwanted tripping of distance protection relays. To avoid via a binary input signal without losing the zone selectivity.
uncontrolled tripping of the distance protection and to achieve
controlled tripping in the event of loss of synchronism, the
7SA6 relay is equipped with an efcient power swing detection
The control of the overreach zone Z1B (zone extension) can be
switched over to the auto-reclosure function. Transient blocking
14
function. Power swings can be detected under symmetrical load (current reversal guard) is provided for all the release and block-
conditions as well as during single-pole auto-reclosures. ing methods in order to suppress interference signals during
tripping of parallel lines.
15
Direct transfer tripping
1 Under certain conditions on the power

system it is necessary to execute remote
tripping of the circuit-breaker. The 7SA6
relay is equipped with phase-selective
external trip inputs that can be assigned
2 to the received inter-trip signal for this
purpose.
Weak-infeed protection:
3 echo and/or trip (ANSI 27 WI)
To prevent delayed tripping of permissive
schemes during weak or zero infeed
LSP2209-afp.tif
situations, an echo function is provided.
4 If no fault detector is picked up at the
weak-infeed end of the line, the signal
received here is returned as echo to allow
accelerated tripping at the strong infeed
5 end of the line. It is also possible to initi-

ate phase-selective tripping at the weak-
infeed end. A phase-selective single-pole
0,14
or three-pole trip is issued if a permissive t= 0,02 Tp
trip signal (POTT or Unblocking) is (I / I ) 1
6
p
received and if the phase-ground voltage

drops correspondingly. As an option, Fig. 6/13 Normal inverse Fig. 6/14 Transient ground-fault relay 7SN60
the weak infeed logic can be equipped
according to a French specication.
7 Overvoltage protection, undervoltage protection (ANSI 59, 27) over a wide frequency range (45 to 55, 55 to 65 Hz). There are
four elements (selectable as overfrequency or underfrequency)
A voltage rise can occur on long lines that are operating at no-
and each element can be delayed separately.
load or that are only lightly loaded. The 7SA6 contains a number
8 of overvoltage measuring elements. Each measuring element
is of two-stage design. The following measuring elements are
Directional ground-fault protection for high-resistance faults
(ANSI 50N, 51N, 67N)
available:
In an grounded network it may happen that the distance
Phase-to-ground overvoltage
9 Phase-to-phase overvoltage
protections sensitivity is not sufcient to detect high-resistance
ground faults. The 7SA6 protection relay therefore offers protec-
Zero-sequence overvoltage tion functions for faults of this nature.
The zero-sequence voltage can be connected to the 4th voltage
The ground-fault protection can be used with three denite-time
input or be derived from the phase voltages.
10 Positive-sequence overvoltage of the local end or calculated
stages and one inverse-time stage (IDMT).
for the remote end of the line (compounding) Inverse-time characteristics according to IEC 60255-3 and
ANSI/IEEE are provided (see Technical data). A 4th denite-time
Negative-sequence overvoltage
stage can be applied instead of the 1st inverse-time stage.
11 Tripping by the overvoltage measuring elements can be effected
either at the local circuit-breaker or at the remote station by
An additional logarithmic inverse-time characteristic is also
available.
means of a transmitted signal.
The direction decision is determined by the ground current
The 7SA6 is tted, in addition, with three two-stage undervolt-
12 age measuring elements:
and the zero-sequence voltage or by the negative-sequence
components V2 and I2. In addition or as an alternative, the direc-
Phase-to-ground undervoltage tion can be determined with the ground current of an grounded
Phase-to-phase undervoltage power transformer and the zero-sequence voltage. Dual
polarization applications can therefore be fullled. Alternatively,
13 Positive-sequence undervoltage
The undervoltage measuring elements can be blocked by means
the direction can be determined by evaluation of zero-sequence
power. Each overcurrent stage can be set in forward or reverse
of a minimum current criterion and by means of binary inputs. direction or in both directions (non-directional).
14 Frequency protection (ANSI 81O/U)

Frequency protection can be used for overfrequency and
The function is equipped with special digital lter algorithms,
providing the elimination of higher harmonics. This feature is
particularly important for small zero-sequence fault currents
underfrequency protection. Unwanted frequency changes in which usually have a high content of 3rd and 5th harmonic.
the network can be detected and the load can be removed at a
15 specied frequency setting. Frequency protection can be used

Inrush stabilization and instantaneous switch-onto-fault tripping Determination of the faulted phase by measurement of the
can be activated separately for each stage as well. phase-to-ground voltage
Different operating modes can be selected. The ground-fault Determination of the ground-fault direction by highly accurate 1
protection is suitable for three-phase and, optionally, for single- measurement of the active and reactive power components in
phase tripping by means of a sophisticated phase selector. It the residual ground fault current.
may be blocked during the dead time of single-pole auto-reclose Alarm or trip output can be selected in the event of an ground-
cycles or during pickup of the distance protection. fault in the forward direction. 2
Operation measurement of the active and reactive component
Tele (pilot) protection for directional ground-fault protection
in the residual ground current during an ground-fault.
(ANSI 85-67N)
The directional ground-fault protection can be combined with
Ground-fault direction detection can also be effected on the
basis of the transient ground-fault principle by interfacing with
3
the available signaling methods:
the additional unit 7SN60 (see Fig. 6/14). Procedures for log-
Directional comparison ging, time stamping and event recording for the network control
system are standardized by the 7SA6.
BLOCKING
UNBLOCKING
4
The transient blocking function (current reversal guard) is also
The 7SA6 relay incorporates a two-stage breaker failure
provided in order to suppress interference signals during tripping
protection to detect failures of tripping command execution,
of parallel lines.
for example, due to a defective circuit-breaker. The current 5
The pilot functions for distance protection and for ground-fault detection logic is phase-selective and can therefore also be used
protection can use the same signaling channel or two separate in single-pole tripping schemes. If the fault current is not inter-
and redundant channels. rupted after a settable time delay has expired, a retrip command
Backup overcurrent protection (ANSI 50, 50N, 51, 51N, 67)

or a busbar trip command will be generated. The breaker failure
protection can be initiated by all integrated protection functions,
6
as well as by external devices via binary input signals.
The 7SA6 provides a backup overcurrent protection. Two
denite-time stages and one inverse-time stage (IDMTL) are
available, separately for phase currents and for the ground cur-
rent. The application can be extended to a directional overcur-
STUB bus overcurrent protection (ANSI 50(N)-STUB)
The STUB bus overcurrent protection is a separate denite-time
7
rent protection (ANSI 67) by taking into account the decision of overcurrent stage. It can be activated via a binary input signaling
the available direction detection elements. Two operating modes that the line isolator (disconnector) is open.
are selectable. The function can run in parallel to the distance
protection or only during failure of the voltage in the VT second-
Separate settings are available for phase and ground faults. 8
ary circuit (emergency operation). Auto-recIosure (ANSI 79)
The secondary voltage failure can be detected by the integrated The 7SA6 relay is equipped with an auto-reclosure function (AR).
fuse failure monitor or via a binary input from a VT miniature
circuit-breaker (VT m.c.b. trip).
The function includes several operating modes: 9
3-pole auto-reclosure for all types of faults; different dead
Inverse-time characteristics according to IEC 60255-3 and ANSI/ times are available depending on the type of fault
IEEE are provided (see Technical data).
Instantaneous high-speed switch-onto-fault overcurrent

1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase faults, no reclosing for multi-
phase faults 10
protection (ANSI 50HS) 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase faults and for 2-phase faults
without ground, no reclosing for multi-phase faults
Instantaneous tripping is required when energizing a faulty line.
In the event of large fault currents, the high-speed switch-onto-
1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase and 3-pole auto-reclosure for
multi-phase faults
11
fault overcurrent stage can initiate very fast three-pole tripping.
1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase faults and 2-phase faults
With smaller fault currents, instantaneous tripping after switch- without ground and 3-pole auto-reclosure for multi-phase
onto-fault is also possible with the overreach distance zone Z1B
or with pickup.
faults
Multiple-shot auto-reclosure
12
The switch-onto-fault initiation can be detected via the binary Interaction with an external device for auto-reclosure via
input manual close or automatically via measurement. binary inputs and outputs
Ground-fault detection in systems with a star-point that is Control of the internal AR function by external protection 13
not effectively grounded Interaction with the internal or an external synchro-check
In systems with an isolated or resonant grounded (grounded) Monitoring of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts
star-point, single-phase ground faults can be detected. The
following functions are integrated for this purpose:
In addition to the above-mentioned operating modes, several
other operating principles can be employed by means of the
14
Detection of an ground fault by monitoring of the displace- integrated programmable logic (CFC).
ment voltage
15
Auto-recIosure (continued) (ANSI 79)

Negative active jQ Positive active jQ Inductive (+Q)
1 Integration of auto-reclosure in the

feeder protection allows evaluation of the
power (-P) power (+P)
line-side voltages. A number of voltage-

dependent supplementary functions are
thus available:
2 DLC jA
jA
By means of dead-line check, reclosure P P
jB
is effected only when the line is deen-
jB
ergized (prevention of asynchronous
3 breaker closure). S1 S1
LSA_5019a en eps
LSA_5018a en eps
ADT
The adaptive dead time is employed Capacitive (-Q)
only if auto-reclosure at the remote sta-
4 tion was successful (reduction of stress
on equipment). Fig. 6/15 Monitoring of active power Fig. 6/16 Monitoring of reactive power
RDT direction
Reduced dead time is employed in
5 conjunction with auto-reclosure where no teleprotection
method is employed: When faults within the zone extension
Directional power protection
The 7SA6 has a function for detecting the power direction by
but external to the protected line are switched off for rapid
measuring the phase angle of the positive-sequence system's
auto-reclosure (RAR), the RDT function decides on the basis of
power. Fig. 6/15 shows an application example displaying nega-
6 measurement of the return voltage from the remote station
which has not tripped whether or not to reduce the dead time.
tive active power. An indication is issued in the case when the
measured angle (S1) of the positive-sequence system power is
Synchronism check (ANSI 25) within the P - Q - level sector. This sector is between angles A
and B. Via CFC the output signal of the directional monitoring
7 Where two network sections are switched in by control com-
mand or following a 3-pole auto-reclosure, it must be ensured
can be linked to the "Direct Transfer Trip (DTT)" function and
thus, as reverse power protection, initiate tripping of the CB.
that both network sections are mutually synchronous. For this
purpose a synchro-check function is provided. After verication Fig. 6/16 shows another application displaying capacitive
reactive power. In the case of overvoltage being detected due
8 of the network synchronism, the function releases the CLOSE
command. Alternatively, reclosing can be enabled for different to long lines under no-load conditions it is possible to select the
criteria, e.g. checking that the busbar or line is not carrying a lines where capacitive reactive power is measured.
voltage (dead line or dead bus).
9 Fuse failure monitoring and other supervision functions One or two binary inputs for each circuit-breaker pole can be
The 7SA6 relay provides comprehensive supervision functions used for monitoring the circuit-breaker trip coils including the
covering both hardware and software. Furthermore, the mea- connecting cables. An alarm signal is issued whenever the circuit
sured values are continuously checked for plausibility. Therefore is interrupted.
10 the current and voltage transformers are also included in this
supervision system.
Lockout (ANSI 86)
Under certain operating conditions it is advisable to block CLOSE
If any measured voltage is not present due to short-circuit or
commands after a TRIP command of the relay has been issued.
open circuit in the voltage transformer secondary circuit, the
11 distance protection would respond with an unwanted trip due to
Only a manual RESET command unblocks the CLOSE command.
The 7SA6 is equipped with such an interlocking logic.
this loss of voltage.
This secondary voltage interruption can be detected by means Thermal overload protection (ANSI 49)
12 of the integrated fuse failure monitor. Immediate blocking of

distance protection and switching to the backup-emergency
For thermal protection of cables and transformers an overload
protection with an early-warning stage is provided. The thermal
overcurrent protection is provided for all types of secondary replica can be generated with the maximum or mean value of
voltage failures. the respective overtemperatures in the three phases, or with the
13 Additional measurement supervision functions are
Symmetry of voltages and currents
overtemperature corresponding to the maximum phase current.
The tripping time characteristics are exponential functions
Broken-conductor supervision according to IEC 60255-8 and they take account of heat loss due
to the load current and the accompanying drop in temperature
Summation of currents and voltages
14 Phase-sequence supervision.
of the cooling medium. The previous load is therefore taken
into account in the tripping time with overload. A settable alarm
stage can output a current or temperature-dependent indication
before the tripping point is reached.
15
BCD-coded output of fault location

The fault location calculated by the unit
can be output for remote indication in 1
BCD code. The output of the fault location
is made in percent of the set line length
with 3 decimal digits.
Analog output 0 to 20 mA
2
Some measured values can be output as
analog values (0 to 20 mA). On a plug-in
module (Fig. 6/24) two analog channels 3
are made available. Up to two plug-in
modules can be installed in the 7SA6. As
an option, 2, 4 or no analog channels are
available (please refer to the selection
and ordering data). The measured values
4
available for output are listed in the
technical data.
Commissioning and fault event 5
LSP2819.tif
analyzing
Special attention has been paid to com-
missioning. All binary inputs and outputs
can be displayed and activated directly. Fig. 6/17 Web Monitor: Supported commissioning by phasor diagram
6
This can simplify the wiring check
signicantly for the user. The operational
and fault events and the fault records are
clearly arranged. For applications with 7
serial protection data interface, all cur-
rents, voltages and phases are available
via communication link at each local unit,
displayed at the front of the unit with
DIGSI 4 or with WEB Monitor. A common
8
time tagging facilitates the comparison of
events and fault records.
WEB Monitor Internet technology 9

simplies visualization
In addition to the universal DIGSI 4
operating program, the relay contains
a WEB server that can be accessed via a
10
LSP2818.tif
telecommunication link using a browser
(e.g. Internet Explorer). The advantage of
this solution is to operate the unit with
standard software tools and at the same 11
time make use of the Intranet/Internet Fig. 6/18 Web Monitor: Display of the protection direction
infrastructure. Apart from numeric values,
graphical displays in particular provide
clear information and a high degree of operating reliability. Of
course, it is also possible to call up detailed measured value dis-
12
plays and annunciation buffers. By emulation of the integrated
unit operation on the PC it is also possible to adjust selected
settings for commissioning purposes.
13
14
15
Communication
Communication
1 With respect to communication, particular emphasis is placed on

the customer requirements in energy automation:
Every data item is time-stamped at the source, i.e. where it
originates.
2 Already during the process of communication, information is
assigned to the cause thereof (e.g. assignment of the indica-
tion circuit-breaker TRIP to the corresponding command).
3 The communication system automatically handles the transfer

of large data blocks (e.g. fault recordings or parameter data
les). The user has access to these features without any
4 For the safe execution of a control command the correspond-

ing data telegram is initially acknowledged by the unit which
will execute the command. After the release and execution of
Fig. 6/19 IEC 60870-5-103 star-type RS232 copper conductor
the command a feedback signal is generated. At every stage connection or ber-optic connection
of the control command execution particular conditions are
5 checked. If these are not satised, command execution may be
terminated in a controlled manner.
The units offer a high degree of exibility by supporting differ-
ent standards for connection to industrial and power automation
6 systems. By means of the communication modules, on which
the protocols run, exchange and retrot is possible. Therefore,
the units will also in future allow for optimal adaptation to
changing communication infrastructure such as the application
7 of Ethernet networks which are already widely applied in the
power supply sector.
Local PC interface
8 The serial RS232 PC interface accessible from the front of the

unit permits quick access to all parameters and fault event data.
The use of the DIGSI 4 operating program is particularly advanta-
geous during commissioning.
9 Service/modem interface
7SA6 units are always tted with a rear-side hardwired service
interface, optionally as RS232 or RS485. In addition to the Fig. 6/20 Bus structure for station bus with Ethernet and IEC 61850
10 front-side operator interface, a PC can be connected here either

directly or via a modem.
Retrotting: Modules for every type of communication
Communication modules for retrotting are available for the
11 The time synchronization interface is a standard feature in all
units. The supported formats are IRIG-B and DCF77.
entire SIPROTEC 4 unit range. These ensure that, where different
communication protocols (IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103, PROFIBUS,
DNP, etc.) are required, such demands can be met. For ber-optic
Reliable bus architecture
communication, no external converter is required for SIPROTEC 4.
12 RS485 bus
With this data transmission via copper conductors, electro- IEC 61850 protocol
magnetic fault inuences are largely eliminated by the use of
twisted-pair conductors. Upon failure of a unit, the remaining
for protection and control systems used by power supply
system continues to operate without any problem.
13 Fiber-optic double ring circuit
corporations. Siemens was the rst manufacturer to support
this standard. By means of this protocol, information can also
The ber-optic double ring circuit is immune to electromagnetic be exchanged directly between bay units so as to set up simple
interference. Upon failure of a section between two units, masterless systems for bay and system interlocking. Access to
the communication system continues to operate without
14 disturbance. It is usually impossible to communicate with a
the units via the Ethernet but is also possible with DIGSI. It is also
possible to retrieve operating and fault records as well as fault
unit that has failed. Should a unit fail, there is no effect on the recordings via a browser. This Web monitor will also provide a
communication with the rest of the system. few items of unit-specic information in browser windows.
15
Communication
LSP2162-afpen.tif
standardized protocol for efcient com- 1
munication with protection relays.
IEC 60870-5-103 is supported by a
LSP3.01-0021.tif
number of protection device manufactur-
ers and is used worldwide. Supplements
for control functions are dened in
2
the manufacturer-specic part of this
standard.
PROFIBUS-DP
3
PROFIBUS-DP is an industrial communica-
Fig. 6/21 820 nm ber-optic communication Fig. 6/22 Fiber-optic Ethernet communication
tions standard and is supported by a
module module for IEC 61850 with
number of PLC and protection device
manufacturers.
integrated Ethernet switch 4
DNP 3.0
LSP2163-afpen.tif
DNP 3.0 (Distributed Network Protocol,
Version 3) is an internationally recognized
5
protection and bay unit communication
protocol. SIPROTEC 4 units are Level 1 and
Level 2 compatible.
6
Analog outputs 0 to 20 mA
LSP2207-afp.tif
2 or 4 analog output interfaces for trans-
mission of measured or fault location
values are available for the 7SA6. Two 7
analog output interfaces are provided
in an analog output module. Up to two Fig. 6/23 RS232/RS485 electrical Fig. 6/24 Output module 0 to 20 mA,
analog output modules can be inserted
per unit.
communication module 2 channels
8
10
11
12
13
Fig. 6/25 Communication

14
15
Communication
System solutions for protection and station control The communication possibilities are identical to those for the
line differential protection relays 7SD5 and 7SD610. The follow-
1 Together with the SICAM power automation system, SIPROTEC 4
can be used with PROFIBUS-FMS. Over the low-cost electrical
ing options are available:
RS485 bus, or interference-free via the optical double ring, FO51), OMA12) module: Optical 820 nm, 2 ST connectors,
the units exchange information with the control system. Units FO cable length up to 1.5 km for link to communication
equipped with IEC 60870-5-103 interfaces can be connected networks via communication converters or for direct FO cable
2 to SICAM in parallel via the RS485 bus or connected in star by connection
ber-optic link. Through this interface, the system is open for FO61), OMA22) module: Optical 820 nm, 2 ST connectors,
the connection of units of other manufacturers (see Fig. 6/25). FO cable length up to 3.5 km, for direct connection via multi-
mode FO cable
3 be integrated into systems of other manufacturers or in SIMATIC. FO171): For direct connection up to 24 km3), 1300 nm, for
mono-mode ber 9/125 m, LC-Duplex connector
physical data transfer medium can be chosen thanks to opto- FO181): For direct connection up to 60 km3) 1300 nm, for
electrical converters. Thus, the RS485 bus allows low-cost wiring mono-mode ber 9/125 m, LC-Duplex connector
4 in the cubicles and an interference-free optical connection to the
FO191): For direct connection up to 100 km3) 1550 nm, for
For IEC 61850, an interoperable system solution is offered with FO301): For transmission with the IEEE C37.94 standard.
5 with PAS electrically or optically to the station PC. The interface
The link to a multiplexed communication network is made by
separate communication converters (7XV5662). These have
is standardized, thus also enabling direct connection of units
a ber-optic interface with 820 nm and ST connectors to the
of other manufacturers to the Ethernet bus. With IEC 61850,
protection relay. The link to the communication network is
however, the units can also be used in other manufacturers
6 systems. Units with an IEC 60870-5-103 interface are connected
with PAS via the Ethernet station bus by means of serial/Ethernet
optionally an electrical X21 or a G703.1 interface. If the connec-
tion to the multiplexor supports IEEE C37.94, a direct bre optic
connection to the relay is possible using the FO30 module.
converters. DIGSI and the Web monitor can also be used via the
same station bus. For operation via copper wire communication (pilot wires), a
7 Serial protection data interface
modern communication converter for copper cables is available.
This operates with both the two-wire and three-wire copper con-
The tele (pilot) protection schemes can be implemented using nections which were used by conventional differential protection
digital serial communication. The 7SA6 is capable of remote systems before. The communication converter for copper cables
8 relay communication via direct links or multiplexed digital com-

munication networks. The serial protection data interface has
is designed for 5 kV insulation voltage. An additional 20 kV
isolation transformer can extend the eld of applications of this
the following features: technique into ranges with higher insulation voltage require-
ments. With SIPROTEC 4 and the communication converter
Fast phase-selective teleprotection signaling for distance
for copper cables a digital follow-up technique is available for
9 protection, optionally with POTT or PUTT schemes
Signaling for directional ground-fault protection directional
two-wire protection systems (typical 15 km) and all three-wire
protection systems using existing copper communication links.
comparison for high resistance faults in solidly grounded
systems Communication data:
10 Echo-function
Two and three-terminal line applications can be implemented
Supported network interfaces G703.1 with 64 kBit/s;
X21/RS422 with 64 or 128 or 512 kBit/s; IEEE C37.94
without additional logic Max. channel delay time 0.1 ms to 30 ms (in steps of 0.1 ms)
Interclose command transfer with the auto-reclosure Adaptive Protocol HDLC
11 dead time (ADT) mode 32-bit CRC-check according to CCITT and ITU
28 remote signals for fast transfer of binary signals Each protection relay possesses a unique relay address
Flexible utilisation of the communication channels by means Continuous communication link supervision: Individual faulty
of the programmable CFC logic data telegrams do not constitute an immediate danger, if
12 Display of the operational measured values of the opposite they occur only sporadically. The statistical availability, per
terminal(s) with phase-angle information relative to a common minute and hour, of the serial protection data interface can be
reference vector displayed.
13 Clock synchronization: the clock in only one of the relays

must be synchronized from an external so called Absolute
Figure 6/26 shows four applications for the serial protection data
interface on a two-terminal line.
Master when using the serial protection data interface. This
relay will then synchronize the clock of the other (or the two
other relays in 3 terminal applications) via the protection data
14 interface.
7SA522 and 7SA6 can be combined via the protection data
interface. 1) For ush-mounting housing.
2) For surface-mounting housing.
15 3) For surface-mounting housing the internal ber-optic module
OMA1 will be delivered together with an external repeater.

Communication
10
11
12
Fig. 6/26 Communication topologies for the serial protection data interface on a two-terminal line
13
14
15
Communication
Three-terminal lines can also be protected

with a tele (pilot) protection scheme by
1 using SIPROTEC 4 distance protection
relays. The communication topology may
then be a ring or a chain topology, see
Fig. 6/27. In a ring topology a loss of one
2 data connection is tolerated by the system.
The topology is re-routed to become a
chain topology within less than 100 ms. To
reduce communication links and to save
money for communications, a chain topol-
3 ogy may be generally applied.
5 Ring topology
9
Chain topology
10
Fig. 6/27 Ring or chain communication topology
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connection
Typical connection
Connection of current 1
3 phase current transformers with neutral
point in the line direction, I4 connected as
summation current transformer (= 3I0): 2
Holmgreen circuit
3 voltage transformers, without connection
of the broken (open) delta winding on
the line side; the 3V0 voltage is derived
3
internally.
4
Fig. 6/28 Example of connection for current and voltage transformers
5
Alternative current measurement
The 3 phase current transformers are 6
connected in the usual manner. The neutral
point is in line direction. I4 is connected to
a separate neutral core-balance CT, thus
permitting a high sensitive 3I0 measure-
ment.
7
Note: Terminal Q7 of the I4 transformer
must be connected to the terminal of
the core balance CT pointing in the same 8
direction as the neutral point of the phase
current transformers (in this case in line
direction). The voltage connection is
effected in accordance with Fig. 6/28, 6/32
or 6/33.
9
Fig. 6/29 Alternative connection of current transformers for sensitive
ground-current measuring with core-balance current transformers 10
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connection
Alternative current connection
1 3 phase current transformers with neutral

point in the line direction, I4 connected to
a current transformer in the neutral point
of an grounded transformer for directional
ground-fault protection. The voltage con-
2 nection is effected in accordance with
Fig. 6/28, 6/32 or 6/33.
5 Fig. 6/30 Alternative connection of current transformers for measuring

neutral current of an grounded power transformer

summation current of the parallel line for
parallel line compensation on overhead
7 lines. The voltage connection is effected in
accordance with Fig. 6/28, 6/32 or 6/33.

the ground current of a parallel line
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connection
Alternative voltage connection

3 phase voltage transformers, V4 con-
nected to broken (open) delta winding 1
(Ven) for additional summation voltage
monitoring and ground-fault directional
protection.
The current connection is effected in
accordance with Fig. 6/28, 6/29, 6/30 and
2
6/31.
4
Fig. 6/32 Alternative connection of voltage transformers for measuring the
displacement voltage (e-n voltage) 5
Alternative voltage connection 6

nected to busbar voltage transformer for
synchro-check.
Note: Any phase-to-phase or phase-to-
7
ground voltage may be employed as the
busbar voltage. Parameterization is carried
out on the unit. The current connection is
effected in accordance with Fig. 6/28, 6/29, 8
6/30 and 6/31.
Fig. 6/33 Alternative connection of voltage transformers for measuring 10

the busbar voltage
11
12
13
14
15
Technical data
General unit data Output contacts

1 NC/NO contact1)
1 Analog inputs
Rated frequency 50 or 60 Hz (selectable)
Unit ready contact
(live status contact)
Rated current Inom 1 or 5 A (selectable) Command/indication relay
Rated voltage Vnom 80 to 125 V (selectable) Quantity

7SA610*-*A/E/J 5 NO contacts, 3 NC/NO contact1)
2 Power consumption
With Inom = 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA
7SA610*-*B/F/K
7SA6*1*-*A/E/J
5 NO contacts,
12 NO contacts, 4 NC/NO contacts1)
With Inom = 5 A Approx. 0.30 VA 7SA6*1*-*B/F/K 8 NO contacts, 4 power relays2)
For IE, sensitive with 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA 7SA6*2*-*A/E/J 19 NO contacts, 5 NC/NO contacts1)
Voltage inputs 0.10 VA 7SA6*2*-*B/F/K 26 NO contacts, 6 NC/NO contacts1)
3 Overload capacity of current
circuit (r.m.s.)
7SA6*2*-*C/G/L
NO/NC contact
11 NO contacts, 8 power relays2)
Thermal 500 A for 1 s

150 A for 10 s Switching capacity
20 A continuous Make 1000 W / VA
4 Dynamic (peak value)

Ground current
1250 A (half cycle) Break, high-speed trip outputs
Break, contacts
1000 W / VA
30 VA
Break, contacts (for resistive 40 W
Sensitive 300 A for 1 s load)
100 A for 10 s Break, contacts
15 A continuous
5 Dynamic (peak value) 750 A (half cycle)
(for = L/R 50 ms)
Switching voltage
25 VA
250 V
Thermal overload capacity of 230 V continuous
voltage circuit Permissible total current 30 A for 0.5 seconds
5 A continuous
Auxiliary voltage
6 Rated voltages DC 24 to 48 V
DC 60 to 125 V
Operating time, approx.
NO contact
NO/NC contact (selectable)
8 ms
8 ms
DC 110 to 250 V Fast NO contact 5 ms
and AC 115 to 230 V (50/60 Hz) High-speed NO trip outputs < 1 ms
7 Permissible tolerance
Superimposed AC voltage
-20 % to +20 %
15 %
Power relay
for direct control of disconnector
(peak-to-peak) actuator motors
Power consumption Switching capacity
Quiescent Approx. 5 W Make for 48 to 250 V 1000 W/ VA
8 Energized Approx. 12 W to 18 W, depending on
design
Break
Make
for 48 to 250 V
for 24 V
1000 W/ VA
500 W/ VA
Break for 24 V 500 W/ VA
Bridging time during failure of the
auxiliary voltage Switching voltage 250 V
9 For Vaux = 48 V and Vaux 110 V 50 ms

For Vaux = 24 V and Vaux = 60 V 20 ms
Permissible total current 30 A for 0.5 seconds
5 A continuous
Binary inputs Max. operating time 30 s
Quantity Permissible relative operating 1%
7SA610*-*A/E/J 5 time
10 7SA610*-*B/F/K
7SA6*1*-*A/E/J
7
13
LEDs
7SA6*1*-*B/F/K 20 Quantity
7SA6*2*-*A/E/J 21 RUN (green) 1
7SA6*2*-*B/F/K 29 ERROR (red) 1
11 7SA6*2*-*C/G/L
Rated voltage range
33
24 to 250 V, bipolar
LED (red),
function can be assigned
Pickup threshold DC 17 or 73 or 154 V, bipolar 7SA610 7
7SA6*1/2/3 14
Functions are freely assignable 1
12 Pickup/reset voltage thresholds DC 9 V/ DC 10 V or DC 88 V/ DC 44 V,

Ranges are settable by means of or DC 176 V/ DC 88 V bipolar
jumpers for each binary input (3 nominal ranges DC 17/73/154 V)
Maximum permissible voltage DC 300 V
Current consumption, energized Approx. 1.8 mA
13 Input impulse suppression 220 nF coupling capacitance at 220 V
with a recovery time >60 ms
14
1) Can be set via jumpers.
15 2) Each pair of power relays is mechanically
interlocked to prevent simultaneous closing.

Technical data
Unit design PROFIBUS ber-optic

Only for ush-mounting ST connector
Housing
Dimensions
7XP20
Refer to part 14 for dimension
housing
For surface-mounting housing Optical interface with OLM4)
1
drawings Baud rate Max. 1.5 Mbaud
Degree of protection acc. to Optical wavelength = 820 nm
EN 60529 Permissible attenuation Max. 8 dB for 62.5/125 m ber
IP 51 Distance
Protection data interface
500 kbit/s 1.6 km 1500 kbit/s 530 m
2
Front IP 51
Rear IP 50 Quantity 1
For the terminals IP 20 with terminal cover put on FO51), OMA12): Fiber-optic inter- For multi-mode ber 62.5/125 m,
Weight
Flush-mounting 1/3 x 19" 4 kg
face with clock recovery for direct ST connectors
connection up to 1.5 km or for Permissible ber attenuation 8 dB
3
housing 1/2 x 19" 6 kg connection to a communication
2/3 x 19" 8 kg converter,
1/1 x 19" 10 kg 820 nm
Surface-mounting 1/3 x 19"
housing 1/2 x 19"
6 kg
11 kg
FO61), OMA22): Fiber-optic For multi-mode ber 62.5/125 m,
interface for direct connection up ST connectors
4
1/1 x 19" 19 kg to 3.5 km, 820 nm Permissible ber attenuation 16 dB
FO301): for direct bre-optic For multi-mode ber 62.5/125 m,
Serial interfaces
Operating interface for DIGSI 4 (front of unit)
connection to a multiplexor using ST connectors
IEEE C37.94 standard Permissible ber attenuation 8 dB 5
FO171): for direct connection up For mono-mode ber 9/125 m,
Connection Non-isolated, RS232, to 24 km3), 1300 nm LC-Duplex connector
9-pin subminiature connector Permissible ber attenuation 13 dB
Baud rate
(SUB-D)
4800 to 115200 baud
FO181): for direct connection up
to 60 km3), 1300 nm
For mono-mode ber 9/125 m,
LC-Duplex connector
6
setting as supplied: 38400 baud; Permissible ber attenuation 29 dB
parity 8E1 FO191): for direct connection up For mono-mode ber 9/125 m,
to 100 km3), 1550 nm
DCF77/ IRIG-B signal (format IRIG-B000)
LC-Duplex connector
Permissible ber attenuation 29 dB 7
Connection 9-pin subminiature connector Relay communication equipment
(SUB-D) External communication converter 7XV5662-0AA00 with X21/ RS422 or
(terminal with surface-mounting G703.1 interface
Voltage levels
housing)
5 V, 12 V or 24 V (optional)
External communication conver- Electrical X21/RS422 or G703.1 8
ter for linking the optical 820 nm interface settable by jumper
Service / modem interface for DIGSI4 / modem / service interface of the unit (FO5/OMA1 Baud rate settable by jumper
option with clock recovery) to the
Isolated RS232/RS485 9-pin subminiature connector
Dielectric test
(SUB-D)
500 V / 50 Hz
X21/RS422/G703.1 interface of
the communication network 9
Distance for RS232 Max. 15 m FO interface with 820 nm with Max. 1.5 km with 62.5/125 m
Distance for RS485 Max. 1000 m clock recovery multi- mode ber to protection relay
Electrical X21/RS422 interface 64/128/512 kbit (settable by jumper)
System interface
IEC 61850 Ethernet
max. 800 m, 15-pin connector to the
communication network
10
Electrical G703.1 interface 64 kbit/s max. 800 m, screw-type
PROFIBUS-FMS
terminal to the communication
PROFIBUS-DP
Isolated RS232/RS485
DNP 3.0
network
External communication converter 7XV5662-0AC00 for pilot wires
11
(SUB-D) External communication conver- Typical distance: 15 km max.
Baud rate 4800 to 38400 baud ter for linking the optical 820 nm
Dielectric test 500 V / 50 Hz interface of the unit (FO5/OMA1
Distance for RS232
Distance for RS485
Max. 15 m
Max. 1000 m
option with clock recovery) to
pilot wires.
12
PROFIBUS RS485 FO interface for 820 nm with
Dielectric test 500 V / 50 Hz clock recovery Max. 1.5 km with 62.5/125 m
Baud rate
Distance
Max. 12 Mbaud
1 km at 93.75 kBd; 100 m at 12 MBd
multimode ber to protection relay,
128 kbit 13
Electrical interface to pilot wires 5 kV-isolated
14
1) For ush-mounting housing. 4) Conversion with external OLM
For ber-optic interface please complete order number at 11th positi-
2) For surface-mounting housing. on with 4 (FMS RS485) or 9 and Order Code L0A (DP RS485) or 9 and
3) For surface-mounting housing the internal ber-optic module (OMA1)
will be delivered together with an external repeater.
Order Code L0G (DNP 3.0) and additionally a suitable external
repeater.
15
Technical data
Electrical tests Oscillatory surge withstand 2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz

capability, IEEE Std C37.90.1 = 50 s; 400 surges per second,
1 Specications
test duration 2 s, Ri = 200
4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; burst length =
IEEE Std C37.90.0/.1/.2; UL 508
capability, IEEE Std C37.90.1 15 ms
VDE 0435
repetition rate 300 ms, ; both polari-
Further standards see Individual
ties; test duration 1 min; Ri = 50
2 Insulation tests
functions
Radiated electromagnetic 35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz,
interference IEEE Std C37.90.2 amplitude and pulse-modulated
Standards IEC 602555 and 60870-2-1 Damped oscillations 2.5 kV (peak value); polarity alterna-
High-voltage test (routine test) IEC 60694, IEC 61000-4-12 ting 100 kHz; 1 MHz; 10 and 50 MHz;
3 All circuits except for power
supply, binary inputs,
2.5 kV (r.m.s.), 50 Hz Ri = 200
EMC tests for noise emission; type test
high-speed outputs,
Standard EN 61000-6-3 (generic standard)
communication and time
synchronization interfaces Radio noise voltage to lines, only 150 kHz to 30 MHz
4 Auxiliary voltage, binary
inputs and high-speed outputs
DC 3.5 kV
auxiliary voltage
IEC-CISPR 22
Limit class B
(routine test) Radio interference eld strength 30 to 1000 MHz

IEC-CISPR 22 Limit class B
only isolated communication 500 V (r.m.s.), 50 Hz
5 interfaces and time synchroni-

zation interface (routine test)
Harmonic currents on the
network lead at AC 230 V,
Class A limits are observed
IEC 61000-3-2
Impulse voltage test (type test) 5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 s; 0.5 Ws,
All circuits except for communi- 3 positive and 3 negative impulses in Voltage uctuations and icker Limits are observed
cation interfaces and time intervals of 5 s on the network incoming feeder
6 synchronization interface,
class III
at AC 230 V, IEC 61000-3-3
EMC tests for noise immunity; type tests Mechanical stress test
Standards IEC 60255-6/-22 (product standard) Vibration, shock stress and seismic vibration
7 EN 61000-6-2 (generic standard),
VDE 0435 part 301 During operation
DIN VDE 0435-110 Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2
High-frequency test 2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz; = 15 ms; Vibration Sinusoidal
IEC 60255-22-1 class III and 400 surges per s; test duration 2 s, IEC 60255-21-1, class 2 10 to 60 Hz: 0.075 mm amplitude;
8 VDE 0435 Section 303, class III
Ri = 200
8 kV contact discharge; 15 kV air
IEC 60255-22-2 class IV discharge; both polarities; 150 pF; 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes
and IEC 61000-4-2, class IV Ri = 330 Shock Semi-sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms,
9 Irradiation with HF eld, frequency 10 V/m; 80 to 1000 MHz: 80 % AM;
sweep 1 kHz IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks on each of the 3 axes in
both directions
IEC 60255-22-3 (report) class III 10 V/m; 800 to 960 MHz: 80 % AM;
1 kHz Seismic vibration Sinusoidal
IEC 61000-4-3, class III 10 V/m; 1.4 to 2 GHz: 80 % AM; 1 kHz IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 1 to 8 Hz: 3.5 mm amplitude
10 Irradiation with HF eld, single

frequencies
10 V/m; 80, 160, 450, 900 MHz;
80 % AM; 1 kHz; duty cycle > 10 s
IEC 60255-22-31, IEC 61000-4-3, 900 MHz; 50 % PM, repetition (vertical axis)
class III frequency 200 Hz 8 to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration
amplitude/pulse modulated (horizontal axis)
11 Fast transient disturbance/bursts

IEC 60255-22-4 and
4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz;
(vertical axis)
IEC 61000-4-4, class IV repetition rate 300 ms; both polari- 1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes
ties; Ri = 50 ; test duration 1 min
During transport
(SURGE),
IEC 61000-4-5 installation class III
Impulse: 1.2/50 s
Auxiliary supply Common mode: 2 kV; 12 ; 9 F IEC 60255-21-1, class 2 5 to 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude;
Differential mode:1 kV; 2 ; 18 F IEC 60068-2-6 8 to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration
13 Analog measurement inputs,

binary inputs, relays output
Common mode: 2 kV; 42 ; 0.5 F
Differential mode: 1 kV; 42 ; 0.5 F
Line-conducted HF, amplitude- 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM; Shock Semi-sinusoidal
modulated, IEC 61000-4-6, 1 kHz IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 15 g, duration 11 ms,
class III IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks on each of the 3 axes in
14 Power system frequency magnetic 30 A/m continuous; 300 A/m for 3 s;
eld Continuous shock
both directions
Semi-sinusoidal
IEC 61000-4-8, class IV; 50 Hz IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 10 g, duration 16 ms,
IEC 60255-6 0.5 mT; 50 Hz IEC 60068-2-29 1000 shocks on each of the 3 axes in
both directions
15
Technical data
Climatic stress tests Inclination angle for 30 to 90 (step 1)

quadrilateral characteristic
Standard
Temperatures
IEC 60255-6
Zone setting Zr
(for circle characteristic)
0.050 to 600 (1 A)/0.010 to 120 (5A)
(step 0.001 )
1
Type-tested acc. to IEC 60068-2-1 -25 C to +85 C / -13 F to +185 F Threshold angle for increased 10 to 90 (step 1)
and -2, test Bd resistance tolerance (circle
Temporarily permissible operating -20 C to +70 C / -4 F to +158 F
charac.)
Overcurrent pickup I>> 0.25 to 10 A (1A) / 1.25 to 50 A (5A)
2
(for I>>, V, V/>) (step 0.01 A)
impaired above +55 C / +131 F)
Minimum current pickup I> 0.05 to 4 A (1A) / 0.25 to 20 A (5A)
Recommended permanent -5 C to +55 C / +23 F to +131 F (for V, V/> and Z<) (step 0.01 A)
IEC 60255-6 Minimum current pickup I>
(for V/>)
0.1 to 8 A (1A) / 0.5 to 40 A (5A)
(step 0.01 A)
3
Limiting temperature during -25 C to +55 C / -13 F to 131 F
permanent storage Undervoltage pickup (for V
and V/>)
Limiting temperature during -25 C to +70 C / -13 F to +158 F
transport
VPH-e<
VPH-PH<
20 to 70 V (step 1 V)
40 to 130 V (step 1 V) 4
Humidity Load angle pickup (for V/>)
Permissible humidity stress: Annual average on 75 % relative Load angle 30 to 80
It is recommended to arrange the humidity; on 56 days per year up to Load angle 90 to 120
93 % relative humidity; condensation
is not permitted.
Load zone (for Z<) Impedances within the load zone do
not cause pickup in pickup mode Z<;
5
pronounced temperature changes Load zones for phase-to-phase and
that could cause condensation. phase-to-ground faults can be set
separately
Functions
Load angle
Resistance
20 to 60
0.1 to 600 (1A) / 0.02 to 120 (5A)
6
Distance protection (ANSI 21, 21N) Ground-fault detection
Types of pickup Overcurrent pickup (I>); Ground current 3I0> 0.05 to 4 A (1A) / 0.25 A to 20 A (5A)
Voltage-dependent overcurrent
pickup (V); Zero-sequence voltage 3V0>
(step 0.01 A)
7
Voltage-dependent and phase angle- for grounded networks 1 to 100 V (step 1 V) or deactivated
dependent overcurrent pickup for resonant-grounded networks 10 to 200 V (step 1 V) or deactivated
(V / >);
Ground impedance matching
Types of tripping
Impedance pickup (Z<)
Three-pole for all types of faults;
Parameter formats
Separately settable for
RE/RL and XE/XL or k0 and (k0)
Distance protection zone Z1 and
8
Single-pole for single-phase faults/ higher distance zones (Z1B, Z2 to Z6)
otherwise three-pole; RE/RL and XE/XL -0.33 to +7.00 (step 0.01)
Single-pole for single-phase faults k0 and (k0) 0 to 4 (step 0.01) and - 135 to 135
and two-pole phase-to-phase faults /
otherwise three-pole Parallel line matching
(step 0.01 )
For parallel compensation
9
Characteristic Quadrilateral or circle RM/RL and XM/XL 0 to 8 (step 0.01)
Distance protection zones 7, 1 of which as controlled zone Phase preference on double Phase preference or no preference
All zones can be set to forward,
reverse, non-directional or inactive
ground-faults in resonant-grounded / (selectable)
non-grounded networks 10
Timer stages for tripping delay 7 for multi-phase faults Direction decision for all types With fault-free voltages and/or
3 for single-phase faults of faults voltage memory
Setting range 0 to 30 s or deactivated (steps 0.01 s) Direction sensitivity Dynamically unlimited
Zone setting X 0.050 to 600 (1A) / 0.01 to 120 (5A)
(for distance zones and Z< starting) (step 0.001 )
11
Resistance setting
(for quadrilateral distance zones
and Z< starting)
Phase-to-phase faults and 0.05 to 600 (1A) / 0.01 to 120 (5A) 12
phase-to-ground faults (step 0.001 )
Line angle 10 to 89
13
14
15
Technical data
Times Weak-infeed protection (ANSI 27-WI)

Shortest trip time Approx. 17 ms for fN = 50 Hz
1 (measured at the fast relay;
refer to the terminal
Approx. 15 ms for fN = 60 Hz
Operating modes with carrier
(signal) reception and no fault
detection
Echo
Echo and trip with undervoltage
connection diagram)
Shortest trip time (measured at Approx. 12 ms at 50 Hz Undervoltage phase-ground 2 to 70 V (step 1 V)
the high-speed trip outputs) Approx. 10 ms at 60 Hz Time delay 0 to 30 s (step 0.01 s)
2 Reset time
Tolerances
Approx. 30 ms
For sinusoidal measured variables
Echo impulse 0 to 30 s (step 0.01 s)
Tolerances
Response values (in conformity Voltage threshold 5 % of setting value or 0.5 V
with DIN 57435, Part 303) Timer 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
3 V and I
Angle ()
5 % of setting value
3
Direct transfer trip (DTT)
Direct phase-selective tripping via Alternatively with or without auto-
X binary input reclosure
Impedances 5 % for 30 SC 90
X Trip time delay 0 to 30 s (step 0.01 s)
(in conformity with DIN 57435,
4 Part 303) R
R
5 % for 0 SC 60
Timer tolerance
Power swing detection (ANSI 68, 68T)
Power swing detection principle Measurement of the rate of change

Time stages 1 % of setting value or 10 ms of the impedance vector and monito-
5 Fault locator
Output of the distance to fault X, R (secondary) in Max. detectable power swing
ring of the vector path
Approx. 7 Hz
X, R (primary) in frequency
Distance in kilometers or in % of line Operating modes Power swing blocking and/or
length power swing tripping for out-of-step
6 Start of calculation With trip, with reset of pickup, with
binary input
conditions
Power swing blocking programs All zones blocked; Z1/Z1B blocked;
Reactance per unit length 0.005 to 6.5 /km(1A) / 0.001 to Z2 to Z6 blocked; Z1, Z1B, Z2
1.3 /km(5A) blocked
Tolerance
7 (step 0.001 /km)
For sinusoidal quantities
Detection of faults during power
swing blocking
Reset of power swing blocking for all
types of faults
2.5 % line length for Backup overcurrent protection (ANSI 50 (N), 51 (N), 67)
30 SC 90 and VSC/Vnom > 0.1
Operating modes Active only with loss of VT secondary
8 BCD-coded output of fault location

Indicated value Fault location in % of the line length Characteristic
circuit or always active
2 denite-time stages / 1 inverse-
Output signals Max. 10: time stage, 1 denite-time Stub-
d[1 %], d[2 %], d[4 %], d[8 %], protection stage
d[10 %], d[20 %], d[40 %], d[80 %], Instantaneous trip after switch- Selectable for every stage
9 Indication range
d[100 %], d[release]
0 % to 195 %
onto-fault
Denite-time stage (ANSI 50, 50N)
Tele (pilot) protection for distance protection (ANSI 85-21) Phase current pickup IPH>> 0.1 to 25 A (1A) / 0.5 to 125 A (5A)
Modes of operation PUTT (Z1B acceleration); DUTT; (step 0.01 A)
10 PUTT (acceleration with pickup);
POTT; Directional comparison;
Ground current pickup 3I0>> 0.05 to 25 A (1A) / 0.25 to 125 A (5A)
(step 0.01 A)
Phase current pickup IPH> 0.1 to 25 A (1A) / 0.5 to 125 A (5A)
Pilot-wire comparison; Unblocking;
(step 0.01 A)
Blocking
11 Additional functions Echo function
(refer to weak-infeed function)
Ground current pickup 3I0> 0.05 to 25 A (1A) / 0.25 to 125 A (5A)
(step 0.01 A)
Transient blocking for schemes with Time delay 0 to 30 s (step 0.01 s) or deactivated
measuring range extension Tolerances
12 Transmission and reception

signals
Phase-selective signals available for
maximum selectivity with single-pole
Current pickup
Delay times
3 % of setting value or 1 % IN
tripping; signals for 2- and 3-end- Operating time Approx. 25 ms
lines
13
14
15
Technical data
Inverse-time stage (ANSI 51, 51N) Tolerances

Current pickup 3 % of setting value or 1 % Inom
Phase current pickup IP 0.1 to 4 A (1A) / 0.5 to 20 A (5A)
(step 0.01 A) Delay times
Command / pickup times 3I0>>>
Approx. 30 ms
1
Ground current pickup 3I0P 0.05 to 4 A (1A) / 0.25 to 20 A (5A)
(step 0.01 A) and 3I0>>
Normal inverse; very inverse; Command / pickup times 3I0> and Approx. 40 ms
Tripping time characteristics acc.
to IEC 60255-3
extremely inverse; long time inverse
Inverse; short inverse; long inverse;
3I0, 4th stage
Inverse-time stage (ANSI 51N)
2
to ANSI/IEEE moderately inverse; very inverse; Ground-current pickup 3I0P 0.05 to 4 A (1A) / 0.25 to 20 A (5A)
(not for DE region, see selection extremely inverse; denite inverse (step 0.01 A)
and ordering data 10th position) Neutral (residual) current transfor-
Time multiplier for IEC charac. T Tp = 0.05 to 3 s (step 0.01 s) mer with normal sensitivity
(refer to ordering data, position 7)
3
Time multiplier for ANSI charac. D DIP = 0.5 to 15 s (step 0.01 s)
0.003 to 4 A (1A) / 0.015 to 20 A (5A)
Pickup threshold Approx. 1.1 II/Ip (ANSI: I/Ip = M ) (step 0.001 A)
Neutral (residual) current transfor-
Reset threshold
Tolerances
Approx. 1.05 x I/Ip (ANSI: I/Ip = M )
mer with high sensitivity (refer to
ordering data, position 7)
4
Operating time for 2 I/Ip 20 5 % of setpoint 15 ms
Tripping characteristics acc. to Normal inverse; very inverse;
Directional ground-fault overcurrent protection IEC 60255-3 extremely inverse; long time
for high-resistance faults in systems with grounded star point
(ANSI 50N, 51N, 67N) ANSI/IEEE tripping characteristic
(not for region DE, see selection
Inverse; short inverse; long inverse;
moderately inverse; very inverse;
5
Characteristic 3 denite-time stages /1 inverse-time and ordering data, position 10) extremely inverse; denite inverse
stage or 4 denite-time stages or
3 denite-time stages /1 V0invers. stage Inverse logarithmic tripping
characteristics (not for regions 3I0
t = T3I 0Pmax T3I 0P ln
Phase selector Permits 1-pole tripping for single-
phase faults or 3-pole tripping for
DE and US, see selection and
ordering data, position 10)
3I0P
6
multi-phase faults selectable for
every stage Pickup threshold 1.1 to 4.0 x I/Ip (step 0.1 s)
Inrush restraint Selectable for every stage Time multiplier for IEC charac. T Tp = 0.05 to 3 s (step 0.01 s)
Instantaneous trip after switch-

onto-fault
Selectable for every stage Time multiplier for ANSI charac. D DI0P = 0.5 to 15 s (step 0.01 s)
Pickup threshold Approx. 1.1 I/Ip (ANSI: I/Ip = M)
7
Inuence of harmonics Inverse logarithmic pickup 1.1 to 4.0 x I/I0P (step 0.1)
Stages 1 and 2 (I>>> and I>>) 3rd and higher harmonics are comple- threshold
Stages 3 and 4
tely suppressed by digital ltering
2nd and higher harmonics are com-
Reset threshold
Tolerance
Approx. 1.05 I/I0P (ANSI: I/Ip = M)
8
(I> and inverse 4th stage) pletely suppressed by digital ltering
Denite-time stage (ANSI 50N)
Zero-sequence voltage protection V
Pickup value 3I0>>> 0.5 to 25 A (1A) / 2.5 to 125 A (5A)
(step 0.01 A) Tripping characteristic
t=
V0
2s 9
Pickup value 3I0>> 0.2 to 25 A (1A) / 1 to 125 A (5A) V0inv min
4
(step 0.01 A)
Pickup value 3I0> 0.05 to 25 A (1A) / 0.25 to 125 A (5A) Zero-sequence power-dependent stage
(step 0.01 A)
Compensated zero-sequence
power
Sr = 3I0 3V0 cos ( - comp.) 10
mer with normal sensitivity
(refer to ordering data, position 7); Direction decision (ANSI 67N)
0.003 to 25 A (1A) / 0.015 to 125 A (5A) Measured signals for direction 3I0 and 3V0 or
(step 0.001 A)
decision 3I0 and 3V0 and IY (star point current
of an grounded power transformer)
11
mer with high sensitivity (refer to or 3I2 and 3V2 (negative-sequence
ordering data, position 7) system) or zero-sequence power Sr or
Pickup value 3I0, 4th stage 0.05 to 25 A (1A) / 0.25 to 125 A (5A) automatic selection of zero-sequence
(step 0.01 A)
or negative-sequence quantities
dependent on the magnitude of the
12
mer with normal sensitivity component voltages
(refer to ordering data, position 7); Min. zero-sequence voltage 3V0 0.5 to 10 V (step 0.1 V)
0.003 to 25 A (1A) / 0.015 to 125 A (5A)
(step 0.001 A)
Min. current IY
(of grounded transformers)
0.05 to 1 A (1A) / 0.25 to 5 A (5A)
(step 0.01 A) 13
mer with high sensitivity Min. negative-sequence voltage 3V2 0.5 to 10 V (step 0.1 V)
(refer to ordering data, position 7) Min. negative-sequence current 3I2 0.05 to 1 A (1A) / 0.25 to 5 A (5A)
Time delay for denite-time
stages
0 to 30 s (step 0.01 s) or deactivated (step 0.01 A)
14
15
Technical data
Inrush current blocking, capable of being activated for each stage Time delays
Component of the 2nd harmonic
1 10 to 45 % of the fundamental
(step 1 %)
Time delay for all stages
Command / pickup time
0 to 100 s (step 0.01 s) or deactivated
Approx. 30 ms
Max. current, which cancels 0.5 to 25 A (1A) / 2.5 to 125 A (5A) Command/pickup time for 3V0 Approx. 30 ms or 65 ms (settable)
inrush current blocking (step 0.01 A) stages
Tele (pilot) protection Tolerances
2 For directional ground-fault protection (ANSI 85-67N) Voltage limit values
Time stages
Operating modes Directional comparison, blocking,
unblocking Frequency protection (ANSI 81)
Additional functions Echo (see function weak infeed); Number of frequency elements 4
3 transient blocking for schemes with
parallel lines
Setting range 45.5 to 54.5 Hz
(in steps of 0.01) at fnom = 50 Hz
Send and receive signals Suitable for 2 and 3 end-lines 55.5 to 64.5 Hz
Instantaneous high-speed switch-onto-fault overcurrent protection
4 (ANSI 50HS)
Operating mode Active only after CB closing;
Delay times
Operating voltage range
6 to 230 V (phase-to-ground)
instantaneous trip after pickup Pickup times Approx. 80 ms
Pickup current I>>> 1 to 25 A (1A) / 5 to 125 A (5A) Dropout times Approx. 80 ms
5 Reset ratio
(step 0.01 A)
Approx. 0.90
Hysteresis
Dropout condition
Approx. 20 mHz
Voltage = 0 V and current = 0 A
Tolerances Tolerances
Current starting 3 % of setting value or 1 % IN Frequency 15 mHz for VPH-PH: 50 to 230 V
Delay times 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
6 Shortest tripping time
With reference to fast relays Approx. 12 ms
With high-speed trip to outputs Approx. 8 ms
Factor k acc. to IEC 60255-8 0.1 to 4 (steps 0.01)
Voltage protection (ANSI 59, 27) Time constant 1 to 999.9 min (steps 0.1 min)
Operating modes Local tripping and/or carrier trip for Thermal alarm stage Alarm/Trip 50 to 100 % referred to tripping
7 remote end temperature (steps 1 %)
Overvoltage protection Current-based alarm stage IAlarm 0.1 to 4 A (1A) / 0.5 to 20 A (5A)
(steps 0.01 A)
Pickup values VPH-E>>, VPH-E> 1 to 170 V (step 0.1 V)
(phase-ground overvoltage) Calculating mode for overtem- max, mean, with Imax
8 Pickup values VPH-PH>>, VPH-PH>
(phase-phase overvoltage)
2 to 220 V (step 0.1 V)
perature
I 2 I 2pre
Pickup values 3V0>>, 3V0> 1 to 220 V (step 0.1 V) Pickup time characteristic t = t ln
I (kInom )2
2
(3V0 can be measured via
9 V4 transformers or calculated by
the relay)
Reset ratio
/Alarm Approx. 0.99
(zero-sequence overvoltage)
/Trip Approx. 0.99
Pickup values V1>>, V1> 2 to 220 V (step 0.1 V) I/IAlarm Approx. 0.97
(positive-sequence overvoltage)
Overload measured values /Trip L1; /Trip L2; /Trip L3;
10 Measured voltage Local positive-sequence voltage or
calculated remote positive-
/Trip
sequence voltage (compounding) Tolerances Class 10 % acc. to IEC 60255-8
Pickup values V2>>, V2> 2 to 220 V (step 0.1 V) Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF)
(negative-sequence overvoltage)
11 Reset ratio (settable) 0.5 to 0.98 (step 0.01)
Number of stages
Pickup of current element
2
0.05 to 20 A (1A) / 0.25 to 100 A (5A)
Undervoltage protection (step 0.01 A)
Pickup values VPH-E<<, VPH-E< 1 to 100 V (step 0.1 V) Time delays T11phase, T13phase, T2 0 to 30 s (steps 0.01 s) or deactivated
(phase-ground undervoltage) Additional functions End-fault protection
12 Pickup values VPH-PH<<, VPH-PH<
(phase-phase undervoltage)
1 to 170 V (step 0.1 V) CB pole discrepancy monitoring
Drop-off (overshoot) time, 15 ms, typical; 25 ms, max.
Pickup values V1<<, V1< 1 to 100 V (step 0.1 V) internal
(positive-sequence undervoltage) Tolerances
13 Blocking of undervoltage prot.
stages
Minimum current; binary input Current limit value
Time stages
5 % of setting value or 1 % Inom
Reset ratio (settable) 1.01 to 1.20 (step 0.01)
14
15
Technical data
Auto-reclosure (ANSI 79) Delay times 0 to 320 s (step 0.01 s)

Number of auto-reclosures
Operating mode
Up to 8
Only 1-pole; only 3-pole, 1 or 3-pole Ground-fault measured values Active and reactive component 1
Operating modes with line DLC dead-line check of ground-fault current IEEac, IEEreac
voltage check ADT adaptive dead time Tolerances
RDT reduced dead time Voltage limit values 5 % of setting value or 1 V
Dead times T1-PH, T3-PH, TSeq 0 to 1800 s (step 0.01 s) or deacti-
vated
Current limit values
Time stages
10 % of setting value
2
Action times 0.01 to 300 s (step 0.01 s) or Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74TC)
deactivated Number of supervisable trip Up to 3
Reclaim times
Start-signal monitoring time
0.5 to 300 s (step 0.01 s)
0.01 to 300 s (step 0.01 s)
circuits
Number of required binary inputs 1 or 2
3
per trip circuit
Additional functions Synchro-check request
3-phase intertripping Indication relay 1 to 30 s (step 1 s)
InterCLOSE command to the remote
end
Check of CB ready state
4
Blocking with manual CLOSE Operational measured values
Voltage limit values for DLC, ADT, Representation Primary, secondary and percentage
RDT
Healthy line voltage PH-E 30 to 90 V (step 1 V) Currents
referred to rated value
3 x IPhase ; 3I0; IE sensitve; I1; I2; IY;
5
Dead line voltage PH-E 2 to 70 V (step 1 V) 3I0PAR
Tolerances Tolerances Typ. 0.3 % of indicated measured
Time stages 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Voltage limit values
Synchro-check (ANSI 25)
Voltages
value or 0.5 % Inom
3 x VPhase-Ground; 3 x VPhase-Phase; 6
3V0, V1, V2, VSYNC, Ven
Initiate options Auto-reclosure; Tolerances Typ. 0.25 % of indicated measured
Manual CLOSE control value or 0.01 % Vnom
Operating modes
Control commands
Power with direction indication P, Q, S 7
Tolerances
With auto-reclosure Synchro-check
P: for |cos | = 0.7 to 1 and Typical 1%
Line dead/busbar live
V/Vnom, I/Inom = 50 to 120 %
Line live/busbar dead
Line and busbar dead
Bypassing
Q: for |sin | = 0.7 to 1 and
Typical 1%
8
S: for V/Vnom, I/Inom = 50 to Typical 1%
For manual closure 120 %
and control commands As for auto-reclosure
Frequency f
Permissible voltage difference
Permissible frequency difference
1 to 60 V (step 0.1 V)
0.03 to 2 Hz (step 0.01 Hz)
Tolerance
Power factor
10 mHz
p.f. (cos )
9
Permissible angle difference 2 to 80 (step 1) Tolerance for |cos | = 0.7 to 1 Typical 0.02
Max. duration of synchronization 0.01 to 600 s (step 0.01 s) or Load impedances with directional 3 x RPhase-Ground, XPhase-Ground
Release delay with synchronous

deactivated
0 to 30 s (step 0.01 s)
indication
Ground-fault measured values
3 x RPhase-Phase, XPhase-Phase
Active and reactive component
10
networks of ground-fault current IEEac, IEEreac
Minimum measuring time Approx. 80 ms Overload measured values /Trip L1; /Trip L2; /Trip L3;
/Trip
Tolerances
Time stages
Long-term mean values 11
Interval for derivation of mean 15 min / 1 min; 15 min / 3 min;
Ground-fault detection for compensated / isolated networks value 15 min / 15 min
Zero-sequence voltage 3V0 1 to 150 V (step 1 V)
Phase selection with phase 10 to 100 V (step 1 V)
Synchronization instant Every hour; every hour; every
hour 12
voltages V< and V> Values 3 x IPhase; I1; P; P+; P-; Q; Q+; Q-; S
Directional determination Active / reactive power measure-
ments
Minimum current for directional
determination
3 to 1000 mA (steps 1 mA) 13
Angle correction for core-balance 0 to 5 at 2 operating points
CT (step 0.1 )
Operating modes Only indication; indication and trip
14
15
Technical data
Minimum / maximum memory Further additional functions
1 Indication
Resetting
Measured values with date and time
Cyclically
Measured value supervision Current sum
Current symmetry
Voltage sum
Via binary input
Via the keyboard Voltage symmetry
Via serial interface Phase sequence
2 Values
Min./max. of measured values 3 x IPhase; I1; 3 x VPhase-Ground;
Power direction
3 x VPhase-to-phase; 3V0; V1; Indications
P+; P-; Q+; Q-; S; f; power factor (+); Operational indications Buffer size 200
power factor () System disturbance indication Storage of indications of the last
3 Min./max. of mean values
Energy meters
3 x IPhase; I1; P; Q; S
Ground-fault indication
8 faults, buffer size 600
Storage of indications of the last
8 faults, buffer size 200
Four-quadrant meters WP+; WP-; WQ+; WQ-
Switching statistics Number of breaking operations per
Tolerance
4 for |cos | > 0.7 and V > 50 %
Vnom and I > 50 % Inom
5%
CB pole
Sum of breaking current per phase
Breaking current of last trip operation
Analog measured value output 0 to 20 mA Max. breaking current per phase
Number of analog channels 2 per plug-in module Circuit-breaker test TRIP/CLOSE cycle, 3 phases
5 Alternatively 1 or 2 or no plug-in
module (Refer to ordering data, Dead time for CB TRIP / CLOSE
TRIP/CLOSE per phase
0 to 30 s (steps 0.01 s)
position 11 and Order code for cycle
position 12)
Commissioning support Operational measured values, c.-b.
Indication range 0 to 22 mA
6 Selectable measured values Fault location [%];
fault location [km]; VL23 [%]; IL2 [%];
test, status display of binary inputs,
setting of output relays, generation
of indications for testing serial
|P| [%]; |Q| [%]; interfaces
breaking current Imax-primary Phase rotation adjustment Clockwise or anti-clockwise
7 Max. burden
350
CE conformity
Analog channels 3 x IPhase, 3I0, 3I0 PAR
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European
3 x VPhase, 30, VSYNC, Ven
Communities on the approximation of the laws of the Member States
8 Max. number of available
recordings
8, backed-up by battery if auxiliary
voltage supply fails
89/336/EEC) and concerning electrical equipment for use within
Sampling intervals 20 samplings per cycle specied voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 73/23/EEC).
Total storage time > 15 s This conformity is proved by tests conducted by Siemens AG in
accordance with Article 10 of the Council Directive in agreement
9 Binary channels Pickup and trip information; number
and contents can be freely congu-
with the generic standards EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4 for the
EMC directive and with the standard EN 60255-6 for the low-voltage
red by the user
directive.
Max. number of displayed binary 100
This device is designed and produced for industrial use.
channels
10 Control
The product conforms with the international standard of the series
IEC 60255 and the German standard VDE 0435.
Number of switching units Depends on the number of binary/
indication inputs and indication/
command outputs
11 Control commands Single command / double command

1, 1 plus 1 common or 2 pole
Feed back CLOSE, TRIP, intermediate position
Interlocking Freely congurable
12 Local control Control via menu, function keys,

control keys (if available)
Remote control Control protection, DIGSI,
pilot wires
13
14
15

7SA61 distance protection relay for all voltage levels
Housing, number of LEDs

7SA61 - -
1
Housing width 19", 7 LEDs 0
Operator panel with:
4-line backlit display,
Housing width 19", 14 LEDs
Housing width 19", 14 LEDs
2
see pages 6/32
to 6/35 2
3
function keys,
numerical keys, Measuring inputs (4 x V / 4 x I)
PC interface
Iph = 1 A1), Ie = 1 A1) (min. = 0.05 A)
1
2
3
Iph = 5 A1), Ie = 5 A (min. = 0.25 A) 5
Iph = 5 A1), Ie = sensitive (min. = 0.003 A) 6
Rated auxiliary voltage (power supply, binary inputs) 4

DC 24 to 48 V, binary input threshold 17 V3) 2
DC 60 to 125 V 2), binary input threshold 17 V3) 4
DC 110 to 250 V 2), AC 115 to 230 V, binary input threshold 73 V3)
Binary/ Indication/ Fast High- Power Flush- Flush- Surface-

5
5
indication command relay4) speed relay5) mounting mounting mounting
inputs outputs trip housing/ housing/ housing/
incl. output screw-type plug-in screw-type
live status
contact
terminals terminals terminals 6
For 7SA610

5
5
5
4
4
4
5
5
5

A
E
J
7
7 6 B
7 6 F
7 6
For 7SA611
K
8
13 5 12 A
13 5 12 E

13
13
13
5
4
4
12
8
8
5
5

J
M 9
N
13 4 8 5 P
20 9 4 B

20
20
9
9
4
4
F
K 10
1) Rated current can be
selected by means of For 7SA612
jumpers. 21 13 12 A
2) Transition between the
two auxiliary voltage
21
21
13
13
12
12
E
J 11
ranges can be selected by 21 12 8 5 M
means of jumpers. 21 12 8 5 P
21 12 8 5 R
3) The binary input
thresholds are selectable
in three stages by means
29
29
21
21
12
12

B
F 12
29 21 12 K
of jumpers, exception:
29 20 8 5 N
versions with power
29 20 8 5 Q
relays have some binary
inputs with only two
binary input thresholds.
29
33
33
20
12
12
8 5
8
8

S
C 13
G
4) Fast relays are identied 33 12 8 L
in the terminal connec-
tion diagram. For 7SA613
5) Power relay for direct 21 13 12 A 14
control of disconnector 21 12 8 5 M
actuator motors. Each
pair of contacts is
mechanically interlocked
to prevent simultaneous
closure.
15

LSA2539-agpen.eps
1 7SA63 distance protection relay for all voltage levels

7SA63 - -

2 Operator panel with:
backlit graphic display for Measuring inputs (4 x V / 4 x I)
see pages 6/32
to 6/35
single-line diagram Iph = 1 A1), Ie = 1 A1) (min. = 0.05 A) 1
control keys, Iph = 1 A1), Ie = sensitive (min. = 0.003 A) 2
key-operated switches,
3 function keys,
numerical keys,
Iph = 5 A1), Ie = 5 A (min. = 0.25 A)
5
6
PC interface
4 DC 60 to 125 V 2), binary input threshold 17 V3) 4
DC 110 to 250 V 2), AC 115 to 230 V, binary input threshold 73 V3) 5
Binary/ Indication/ Fast High- Power Flush- Flush- Surface-
5 indication command relay4)

inputs outputs
speed relay5) mounting
trip housing/
mounting
housing/
mounting
housing/
incl. output screw-type plug-in screw-type
live status terminals terminals terminals
contact
6 For 7SA63
13 5 12 A
13 5 12 E
13 5 12 J
7 13
13
4
4
8
8
5
5

M
N
13 4 8 5 P
20 9 4 B
20 9 4 F
8 20 9 4 K
For 7SA632
21 13 12 A
21 13 12 E
9 21
21
13
12
12
8 5
J
M
21 12 8 5 P
21 12 8 5 R
29 21 12 B
10 29
29
21
21
12
12
F
K
29 20 8 5 N
29 20 8 5 Q
29 20 8 5 S
11 33
33
12
12
8
8

C
G
33 12 8 L
12
13
1) Rated current can be selected by means of jumpers. 4) Fast relays are identied in the terminal connection
14 2) Transition between the two auxiliary voltage ranges diagram.
can be selected by means of jumpers. 5) Power relay for direct control of disconnector actu-
3) The binary input thresholds are selectable in three ator motors. Each pair of contacts is mechanically
stages by means of jumpers, exception: versions interlocked to prevent simultaneous closure.
15 with power relays have some binary inputs with only

two binary input thresholds.

LSA2540-agpen.eps

7SA64 - -
1
Units with detached Measuring inputs (4 x V / 4 x I)

see pages 6/32
to 6/35 2
operator panel with: Iph = 1 A1), Ie = 1 A1) (min. = 0.05 A) 1
backlit graphic display Iph = 1 A1), Ie = sensitive (min. = 0.003 A) 2
control keys,
key-operated switches,
function keys,
Iph = 5 A1), Ie = 5 A (min. = 0.25 A)
5
6
3
numerical keys,
PC interface Rated auxiliary voltage (power supply, binary inputs)
DC 60 to 125 V 2), binary input threshold 17 V3) 4 4
Binary/ Indication/ Fast High- Power Flush- Flush-

indication command relay4)
inputs outputs
speed relay5) mounting
trip housing/
mounting
housing/ 5
incl. output screw-type plug-in
live status terminals terminals
contact
For 7SA641 6
13 5 12 A
13 5 12 J
13 4 8 5 M
13
20
4
9
8 5
4
P
B 7
20 9 4 K
For 7SA642
21
21
13
13
12
12

A
J
8
21 12 8 5 M
21 12 8 5 R
29 21 12 B
29
29
21
20
12
8 5
K
N
9
29 20 8 5 S
29 12 8 C
33 12 8 L
10
11
12
13
2) Transition between the two auxiliary voltage ranges
4) Fast relays are identied in the terminal connection
diagram. 14
can be selected by means of jumpers. 5) Power relay for direct control of disconnector actu-
3) The binary input thresholds are selectable in three ator motors. Each pair of contacts is mechanically
stages by means of jumpers, exception: versions interlocked to prevent simultaneous closure.
with power relays have some binary inputs with only
two binary input thresholds.
15
1 7SA6 distance protection relay for all voltage levels
Region-specic default settings / language settings 1)

7SA6 - -
see pages
Region DE, language: German A
6/33 to 6/35
Region World, language: English (GB) B
2 Region US, language: English (US)
Region FR, French
C
D
Region World, Spanish E
Region World, Italian F
3 Region World, language: Russian G
Region World, language: Polish H
Port B
4 Empty
System interface, IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, electrical RS232
0
1
System interface, IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, electrical RS485 2
System interface, IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, optical 820 nm, ST connector 3
5 System interface, PROFIBUS-FMS Slave2), electrical RS485

System interface, PROFIBUS-FMS Slave2), optical 3), double ring 3), ST connector
4
6
2 analog outputs, each 0.....20 mA 7
System interface, PROFIBUS-DP, electrical RS485 9 L 0 A
6 System interface, PROFIBUS-DP, optical 820 nm, double ring 3), ST connector 9 L 0 B
System interface, DNP 3.0, electrical RS485 9 L 0 G
System interface, DNP 3.0, optical 820 nm, ST connector3) 9 L 0 H
System interface, IEC 61850, 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, electrical, duplicate, RJ45 plug connectors 9 L 0 R
7 System interface, IEC 61850, 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, optical, double, LC connector4) 9 L 0 S
10
1) Denitions for region-specic default settings and functions:
Region DE: preset to f = 50 Hz and line length in km, only IEC
11 inverse characteristic can be selected, directional earth (ground)

fault protection: no logarithmic inverse characteristic, no direction decision
with zero-sequence power Sr; distance protection can be selected with
quadrilateral or circle characteristic.
Region US: preset to f = 60 Hz and line length in miles, ANSI inverse
12 characteristic only, directional earth (ground) fault protection:
no logarithmic inverse characteristic, no direction decision
with zero-sequence power Sr, no U0 inverse characteristic.
Region World: preset to f = 50 Hz and line length in km, directional earth (ground) fault
protection: no direction decision with zero-sequence power Sr,
13 Region FR:
no U0 inverse characteristic.
preset to f = 50 Hz and line length in km, directional earth (ground)
fault protection: no U0 inverse characteristic, no logarithmic inverse
characteristic, weak infeed logic selectable between French specication
14 and world specication.

2) For SICAM energy automation systems.
3) Optical double ring interfaces are not available with surface mounting housings.
4) For surface mounting housing applications please order the relay with electrical Ethernet interface
and use a separate ber-optic switch.
15

Port C and port D

7SA6 - -
1
see pages
Port C: DIGSI/modem, electrical RS232,
6/34 and
Port D: empty 1 6/35
Port C: DIGSI/modem, electrical RS485,
Port D: empty
2
2
Port C and Port D installed 9 M
Port C
DIGSI/modem, electrical RS232 1
3
DIGSI/modem, electrical RS485 2
Port D
Protection data interface: optical 820 nm, two ST connectors, FO cable length up to 1.5 km
For direct connection via multi-mode FO cable or communication networks 1)
4
A
For direct connection via multi-mode FO cable B
Two analog outputs, each 0...20 mA
Protection data interface: optical 1300 nm, LC-Duplex connector
K 5
FO cable length up to 24 km for direct connection via mono-mode FO cable2) G
FO cable length up to 60 km for direct connection via mono-mode FO cable2)3)
H
6
FO cable length up to 100 km for direct connection via mono-mode FO cable2)4) J
FO30 optical 820 nm, 2-ST-connector, length of optical bre up to 1.5 km
for multimode bre, for communication networks with IEEEC37.94 interface
or direct optical bre connection (not available for surface-mounted housing) S 7
10
11
12
1) For suitable communication converters 7XV5662 (optical to

13
G703.1/X21/RS422 or optical to pilot wire) see "Accessories".
2) For surface-mounting housing applications an internal ber-optic
module 820 nm will be delivered in combination with an external
repeater. 14
3) For distances less than 25 km, two optical attenuators 7XV5107-0AA00
are required to avoid optical saturation of the receiver element.
4) For distances less than 50 km, two optical attenuators 7XV5107-0AA00
are required to avoid optical saturation of the receiver element.
15
1 7SA6 distance protection relay for all voltage levels 7SA6 - -
Functions 1
Trip mode Thermal overload BCD-coded output for
protection (ANSI 49) fault location
2 3-pole
3-pole
0
1
3-pole 2
3-pole 3
3 1/3-pole
1/3-pole
1/3-pole

4
5
6
1/3-pole 7
Functions 2
4 Distance protection pickup
(ANSI 21, 21N)
Power swing detection
(ANSI 68, 68T)
Parallel line compensation
I> A
V B
5 Quadrilateral (Z<)
Quadrilateral (Z<), V /
C
D
Quadrilateral (Z<) F
Quadrilateral (Z<), V / G
V 1) J
6 Quadrilateral (Z<)
Quadrilateral (Z<), V /
1)
1)
K
L
Quadrilateral (Z<) 1) N
Quadrilateral (Z<), V / 1) P
7 Functions 3
Auto-reclosure (ANSI Synchro-check Breaker failure protection Over/undervoltage protection
79) (ANSI 25) (ANSI 50BF) V>, V< (ANSI 27, 59)
Over/underfrequency protection
(ANSI 81)
8
A
B
C
D
E
9

F
G
H
J
K
10

L
M
N
P
Q
11 R
Functions 4
Directional ground-fault Ground-fault detection Measured values
protection, grounded compensated/ isolated extended Min, max, mean
12 networks (ANSI 50N, networks
51N, 67N)
0
1
2)
13
2)
2
3
4
5
2) 6
2)
14 7
15 1) Only with position 7 of Order No. = 1 or 5.

2) Only with position 7 of Order No. = 2 or 6.


Preferential types
7SA6 - -
1
Functions 1
2
Z< (quadrilateral) V/
directional for grounded
Ground-fault directional
Ground-fault protection
Power swing detection
Trip mode 1 or 3-pole
Frequency protection
Overload protection
Voltage protection
isolated networks
Trip mode, 3-pole
Measured values,
for compensated
min. max. mean

Auto-reclosure
Synchro-check
3
Pickup V
extended,
networks
Pickup I>
Basic version 4
1 AB 0
Medium voltage, cables

1 AB 1
5
1) 3 B D6
1) 1 B D7 6
Medium voltage, overhead lines
1) 3 BM6
1) 3 BM7
7
High voltage, cables
3 GH4
8
3 GH5
High voltage, overhead lines
2) 7 P R 4 9
2) 7 P R 5
10
11
12
13
14
15
1 DIGSI 4
Basis

Professional
7XS5402-0AA00
Complete version:
4 displays),

nication under DIGSI, running under MS Windows 2000 or XP
Professional Edition
6 SIGRA 4
7 other manufacturers (Comtrade format). Running under MS

Windows 2000 or XP Professional Edition (generally contained
in DIGSI Professional, but can be ordered additionally).
Connecting cable (copper)

8 Cable between PC/notebook (9-pin connector) and protection
unit (9-pin connector) (contained in DIGSI 4, but can be
ordered additionally) 7XV5100-4
9 Voltage transformer miniature circuit-breaker

Rated current 1.6 A; thermal overload release 1.6 A;
overcurrent trip 6 A 3RV1611-1AG14
Manual for 7SA6
10 English, V4.70 and higher C53000-G1176-C156-7
German, V4.70 C53000-G1100-C156-8
11
12
13
14
15
Opto-electric communication converters

Optical to X21/RS422 or G703.1 7XV5662-0AA00
1
Optical to pilot wires 7XV5662-0AC00
Additional interface modules

Protection data interface FO 5, OMA1, 820 nm, multi-mode FO cable,
2
ST connector, 1.5 km C53207-A351-D651-1
Protection data interface FO 17, 1300 nm, mono-mode FO cable,
LC-Duplex connector, 24 km C53207-A322-B115-3
3
4
Optical repeaters
Serial repeater (2-channel), opt. 1300 nm, mono-mode FO cable,
LC-Duplex connector, 24 km 7XV5461-0BG00 5
LC-Duplex connector, 60 km 7XV5461-0BH00
LC-Duplex connector, 100 km 7XV5461-0BJ00
6
Accessories Description Order No. Size of

package
Supplier Fig. 9
Connector 2-pin C73334-A1-C35-1 1 Siemens 6/35
LSP2289-afp.eps
3-pin C73334-A1-C36-1 1 Siemens 6/36
Crimp CI2 0.5 to 1 mm2 0-827039-1 4000 AMP 1)

10
Fig. 6/34 Mounting rail connector 0-827396-1 1 AMP 1)
for 19" rack CI2 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 0-827040-1 4000 AMP 1)
AMP 1)
0-827397-1
Type III+ 0.75 to 1.5 mm2 0-163083-7
1
4000 AMP 1) 11
0-163084-2 1 AMP 1)
LSP2090-afp.eps
LSP2091-afp.eps
Crimping For type III+ 0-539635-1 1 AMP 1)

tool and matching female 0-539668-2 AMP 1)
For CI2
and matching female
0-734372-1
1-734387-1
1 AMP 1)
AMP 1)
12
Fig. 6/35 Fig. 6/36 19"-mounting rail C73165-A63-D200-1 1 Siemens 6/34
2-pin connector 3-pin connector
Short-circuit
links
For current terminals
For other terminals
C73334-A1-C33-1
C73334-A1-C34-1
1
1
Siemens
Siemens
6/37
6/38 13
LSP2093-afp.eps
LSP2092-afp.eps
Safety cover large C73334-A1-C31-1 1 Siemens 6/4

for terminals small C73334-A1-C32-1 1 Siemens 6/4

14
Fig. 6/37 Fig. 6/38
Short-circuit link Short-circuit link
for current contacts for voltage contacts/
indications contacts 15
Connection diagram
LSA2532-agpen.eps
7
10
11
12
13
14 1) Starting from unit version ..../EE.
Fig. 6/40 Serial interfaces
15
Connection diagram
LSA2532-agpen.eps
7
Note: For serial interfaces see Fig. 6/40.
Fig. 6/41 Connection diagram 8
10
11
12
13
14
15
Connection diagram
1 SA2545-agpen.eps
10
11
12
1) Starting from unit version .../EE.
13 2) High-speed trip outputs in versions 7SA6*1*-*M, 7SA*1*-*N, 7SA*1*-*P.
Time advantage of high-speed relays over fast relays: approx. 5 ms
3) Time advantage with fast relay approx. 3 ms.
4) Version with 3-pole tripping.
14 5) Version with 1/3-pole tripping.
15 Fig. 6/42 Connection diagram

Connection diagram
SA2545-agpen.eps 1
10
11
12
13
1) Version with 3-pole tripping.
2) Each pair of contacts is mechanically interlocked to prevent simultaneous closure.
3) Version with 1/3-pole tripping. 14

15
Connection diagram
2 SA2546-agpen.eps
10
11
12
13
1) 7SA613 is only available in a 2/3 x 19" ush-mounting housing. 5) Version with 3-pole tripping.
14 2) Starting from unit version .../EE

3) Time advantage with fast relay approx. 3 ms.
6) Version with 1/3-pole tripping.
4) High-speed trip outputs in versions 7SA6*2*-*M, 7SA6*2*-*P,
7SA6*2*-*R.
Time advantage of high-speed relays over fast relays: approx. 5 ms
15

Connection diagram
SA2546-agpen.eps
2
10
11
1) Starting from unit version
.../EE.
2) High-speed trip outputs
in versions 7SA6*2*-*N,
12
7SA6*2*-*Q, 7SA6*2*-*S.
3) Time advantage with fast
relay approx. 3 ms.
4) Version with 3-pole 13
tripping.
5) Version with 1/3-pole
tripping.
Time advantage of high-
speed relays over fast 14
relays: approx. 5 ms.
Note: For serial interfaces
see Fig. 6/40.
15

Connection diagram
2 SA2546-agpen.eps
10
11
12
1) Version with 3-pole
13 tripping.
2) Each pair of contacts is
mechanically interlocked
to prevent simultaneous
14 closure.
3) Version with 1/3-pole
tripping.
Note: For serial interfaces see
Fig. 6/40.
15

SIPROTEC 4 7SA522 distance protection relay for transmission lines
Function overview
Non-switched distance protection with 6 measuring systems
(21/21N)
High resistance ground (earth)-fault protection for single- and
three-pole tripping (50N/51N/67N) 2
Tele (pilot) protection (85)
Fault locator (FL)
Power swing detection/tripping (68/68T) 3
Phase-overcurrent protection (50/51/67)
STUB bus overcurrent protection (50 STUB)
LSP2309-afpen.tif
Switch-onto-fault protection (50HS)
Over/undervoltage protection (59/27)
4
Over/underfrequency protection (81O/U)
Auto-reclosure (79)
Synchro-check (25) 5
Control functions
Fig. 6/47 SIPROTEC 4 7SA522 distance protection relay Commands for control of CB and isolators 6
Description Trip circuit supervision (74TC)
Self-supervision of the relay 7
The SIPROTEC 4 7SA522 relay provides full-scheme distance Measured-value supervision
protection and incorporates all functions usually required for the
protection of a power line. The relay is designed to provide fast Event logging/fault logging
and selective fault clearance on transmission and subtransmis-
sion cables and overhead lines with or without series capacitor
Switching statistics
8
compensation. The power system star point can be solid or
resistance grounded (earthed), resonant-grounded via Peterson Front design
coil or isolated. The 7SA522 is suitable for single-pole and
three-pole tripping applications with and without tele (pilot)
User-friendly local operation with numeric keys
LEDs for local alarm
9
protection schemes.
PC front port for convenient relay setting
The 7SA522 incorporates several protective functions usually
Function keys
required for transmission line protection.
10
High-speed tripping time
Front interface for connecting a PC
Suitable for cables and overhead lines with or without series
System interface for connecting to a control system via various
capacitor compensation
Self-setting power swing detection for power swing
protocols 11
IEC 61850 Ethernet
frequencies up to 7 Hz IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
Digital relay-to-relay communication for two and three PROFIBUS-FMS/-DP
terminal topologies DNP 3.0 12
2 serial protection data interfaces for tele (pilot) protection
Rear-side service/modem interface
Time synchronization via IRIG B or DCF77 or system interface
13
Hardware
Binary inputs: 8/16/24 14

Output relays: 16/24/32
High-speed trip outputs: 5 (optional)
15
Application
Application
1 The 7SA522 relay provides full-scheme

distance protection and incorporates all
functions usually required for the protec-
tion of a power line. The relay is designed
2 to provide fast and selective fault clear-
ance on transmission and subtransmission
cables and overhead lines with or without
series capacitor compensation. This
3 contributes towards improved stability and
availability of your electrical power trans-
mission system. The power system star
point can be solid or impedance grounded
(earthed), resonant-grounded via Peterson
4 coil or isolated. The 7SA522 is suitable for
single and three-pole tripping applications
with and without tele (pilot) protection
schemes.
5 The effect of apparent impedances in
unfaulted fault loops is eliminated by a Fig. 6/48 Single-line diagram
sophisticated and improved method which
uses pattern recognition with symmetrical components and load
6 compensation. The correct phase selection is essential for selective ANSI Protection functions
tripping and reliable fault location. Distance protection
21/21N
During network power swings, an improved power swing block- Fault locator
FL
7 ing feature prevents the distance protection from unwanted trip-
ping and optionally provides controlled tripping in the event of 50N/51N/67N Directional earth(ground)-fault protection
loss of synchronism (out of step). This function guarantees power
transmission even under critical network operating conditions. 50/51/67 Backup overcurrent protection
8 Cost-effective power system management 50 STUB STUB-bus overcurrent stage
Power swing detection/tripping

The SIPROTEC 4 units are numerical relays which also provide 68/68T
control and monitoring functions and therefore support the Teleprotection for distance protection
85/21
user in view of a cost-effective power system management. The
9 security and reliability of power supply is increased as a result of 27WI Weak-infeed protection
minimizing the use of hardware.
85/67N Teleprotection for earth(ground)-fault protection
The local operation has been designed according to ergonomic
50HS Switch-onto-fault protection
10 criteria. Large, easy-to-read backlit displays are provided.
The SIPROTEC 4 units have a uniform design and a degree of func- 50BF Breaker-failure protection
tionality which represents a benchmark-level of performance in Overvoltage/undervoltage protection
59/27
protection and control. If the requirements for protection, control
11 and interlocking change, it is possible in the majority of the cases
to implement such changes by means of parameterization using
81O/U Over/underfrequency protection
Synchro-check
DIGSI 4 without having to change the hardware. 25
The use of powerful microcontrollers and the application of 79 Auto-reclosure
12 digital measured-value conditioning and processing largely sup-

presses the inuence of higher-frequency transients, harmonics 74TC Trip circuit supervision
and DC components. 86 Lockout (CLOSE command interlocking)
Features
13 High speed tripping time
Suitable for cables and overhead lines with or without series
capacitor compensation
14 Self setting power swing detection fo frequencies up to 7 Hz

Digital relay-to-relay communication for two and three
terminal topologies
15
Construction
Construction
Connection techniques and housing 1

and -rack sizes
These are the available housing widths
of the SIPROTEC 4 7SA522 relays, referred
2
to a 19" module frame system. This
means that previous models can always
be replaced. The height is a uniform
245 mm for ush-mounting housings and
3
266 mm for surface-mounting housings
LSP2310-afpen.tif
for all housing widths. All cables can be
connected with or without ring lugs. Plug-
in terminals are available as an option. 4
cable harnesses. In the case of surface
mounting on a panel, the connection
5
communication interfaces are located in a Fig. 6/49 Housing widths 19" and 19"
sloped case at the top and bottom of the
housing. 6
8
LSP2174-afp.tif
LSP2166-afp.tif
9
10
Fig. 6/50 Rear view with screw-type terminals Fig. 6/51 Rear view with terminal covers and
and serial interfaces wiring
11
12
13
14
15
1 Distance protection (ANSI 21, 21N)

The main function of the 7SA522 is a full-scheme distance
protection. By parallel calculation and monitoring of all six
2 impedance loops, a high degree of sensitivity and selectivity is

achieved for all types of faults. The shortest tripping time is less
than one cycle. Single-pole and three-pole tripping is possible.
The distance protection is suitable for cables and overhead lines
with or without series capacitor compensation.
3 Mho and quadrilateral characteristics
The 7SA522 relay provides quadrilateral as well as mho zone
characteristics. Both characteristics can be used separately for
4 phase and ground (earth) faults. Resistance ground (earth)
faults can, for instance, be covered with the quadrilateral
characteristic and phase faults with the mho characteristic.
Load zone
5 In order to guarantee a reliable discrimination between load Fig. 6/52 Distance protection: quadrilateral characteristic
operation and short-circuit - especially on long high loaded
lines - the relay is equipped with a selectable load encroachment
6 characteristic. Impedances within this load encroachment char-

acteristic prevent the distance zones from unwanted tripping.
Absolute phase-selectivity
The 7SA522 distance protection incorporates a well-proven,
7 highly sophisticated phase selection algorithm. The pickup of
unfaulted loops is reliably eliminated to prevent the adverse
inuence of currents and voltages in the fault-free loops. This
phase selection algorithm achieves single-pole tripping and
8 correct distance measurement in a wide application range.
The inuence of wrong distance measurement due to parallel
9 lines can be compensated by feeding the neutral current of the
parallel line to the relay. Parallel line compensation can be used
for distance protection as well as for the fault locator.
7 distance zones
10 Six independant distance zones and one separate overreach
zone are available. Each distance zone has dedicated time
stages, partly separate for single-phase or multi-phase faults. Fig. 6/53 Distance protection: mho characteristic
Ground (earth) faults are detected by monitoring the neutral
11 current 3I0 and the zero-sequence voltage 3V0.
Elimination of interference signals
The quadrilateral tripping characteristic permits separate setting
Digital lters render the unit immune to interference signals
of the reactance X and the resistance R. The resistance section R
contained in the measured values. In particular, the inuence of
can be set separately for faults with and without ground involve-
12 ment. This characteristic has therefore an optimal performance
DC components, capacitive voltage transformers and frequency
changes is considerably reduced. A special measuring method is
in case of faults with fault resistance. The distance zones can be
employed in order to assure protection selectivity during satura-
set forward, reverse or non-directional. Sound phase polariza-
tion of the current transformers.
tion and voltage memory provides a dynamically unlimited
13 directional sensitivity. Measuring voltage monitoring
Mho Tripping of the distance protection is blocked automatically in
the event of failure of the measuring voltage, thus preventing
The mho tripping characteristic provides sound phase respec-
spurious tripping.
14 tively memory polarization for all distance zones. The diagram
shows characteristic without the expansion due to polarizing. The measuring voltage is monitored by the integrated fuse fail-
During a forward fault the polarizing expands the mho circle ure monitor. Distance protection is blocked if either the fuse fail-
towards the source so that the origin is included. This mho circle ure monitor or the auxiliary contact of the voltage transformer
15 expansion guarantees safe and selective operation for all types

of faults, even for close-in faults.
protection switch operates and, in this case, the EMERGENCY
denite-time overcurrent protection can be activated.

Fault locator
The integrated fault locator calculates
the fault impedance and the distance- 1
to-fault. The result is displayed in ohms,
miles, kilometers or in percent of the
line length. Parallel line and load current
compensation is also available. 2
Dynamic transient reactions, for instance
short-circuits, load uctuations, auto- 3
reclosures or switching operations can
cause power swings in the transmission
network. During power swings, large
4
LSP2311-afp.tif
currents along with small voltages can
cause unwanted tripping of distance
protection relays. To avoid uncontrolled
tripping of the distance protection and
to achieve controlled tripping in the
event of loss of synchronism, the 7SA522 Fig. 6/54 Power swing current and voltage wave forms 5
relay is equipped with an efcient power
swing detection function. Power swings
can be detected under symmetrical load
conditions as well as during single-pole 6
auto-reclosures.
Tele (pilot) protection for distance pro-

tection (ANSI 85-21)
7
A teleprotection function is available for
fast clearance of faults up to 100 % of
the line length. The following operating
modes may be selected: 8
PUTT, permissive underreaching zone
transfer trip
LSP2312-afp.tif
POTT, permissive overreaching zone
transfer trip 9
UNBLOCKING
BLOCKING
DUTT, direct underreaching zone trans-
fer trip (together with Direct Transfer
Fig. 6/55 Power swing circle diagram 10
Trip function)
The carrier send and receive signals are available as binary Phase-selective transmission is also possible with multi-end
inputs and outputs and can be freely assigned to each physical
relay input or output. At least one channel is required for each
applications, if some user-specic linkages are implemented
by way of the integrated CFC logic. During disturbances in the
11
direction. transmission receiver or on the transmission circuit, the tele-
protection function can be blocked by a binary input signal with-
Common transmission channels are power-line carrier,
microwave radio and ber-optic links. A serial protection data
out losing the zone selectivity. The control of the overreach zone
Z1B (zone extension) can be switched over to the auto-reclosure
12
interface for direct connection to a digital communication function. A transient blocking function (Current reversal guard)
network or ber-optic link is available as well. is provided in order to suppress interference signals during trip-
ping of parallel lines.
7SA522 also permits the transfer of phase-selective signals. This
feature is particularly advantageous as it ensures reliable single-
13
pole tripping, if two single-pole faults occur on different lines.
The transmission methods are suitable also for lines with three Under certain conditions on the power system it is necessary to
ends (three-terminal lines). execute remote tripping of the circuit-breaker. The 7SA522 relay
is equipped with phase-selective "external trip inputs" that can 14
be assigned to the received inter-trip signal for this purpose.
15
Weak-infeed protection: echo and/or trip (ANSI 27 WI)
1 To prevent delayed tripping of permissive schemes during weak

or zero infeed situations, an echo function is provided. If no
fault detector is picked up at the weak-infeed end of the line,
the signal received here is returned as echo to allow accelerated
tripping at the strong infeed end of the line. It is also possible
2 to initiate tripping at the weak-infeed end. A phase- selective
1-pole or 3-pole trip is issued if a permissive trip signal (POTT or
Unblocking) is received and if the phase-ground voltage drops
correspondingly. As an option, the weak infeed logic can be
3 equipped according to a French specication.
Directional ground(earth)-fault protection for high-

resistance faults (ANSI 50N, 51N, 67N)
4 In grounded (earthed) networks, it may happen that the

distance protection sensitivity is not sufcient to detect high-
resistance ground (earth) faults. The 7SA522 protection relay
therefore has protection functions for faults of this nature.
5 The ground (earth)-fault overcurrent protection can be used

with 3 denite-time stages and one inverse-time stage (IDMT).
t=
0,14
(I / I )
p
0,02
1
Tp
A 4th denite-time stage can be applied instead of the one

inverse-time stage. Fig. 6/56 Normal inverse
6 Inverse-time characteristics according to IEC 60255-3 and ANSI/
IEEE are provided (see Technical data). An additional logarith-
Tele (pilot) protection for directional ground(earth)-fault
mic inverse-time characteristic is also available.
protection (ANSI 85-67N)
7 The direction decision can be determined by the neutral current

The directional ground(earth)-fault overcurrent protection can
be combined with one of the following teleprotection schemes:
components V2 and I2. In addition or as an alternative to the
directional determination with zero-sequence voltage, the star- Directional comparison
point current of an grounded (earthed) power transformer may BLOCKING
8 also be used for polarization. Dual polarization applications can UNBLOCKING
therefore be fullled.
Alternatively, the direction can be determined by evaluation of provided in order to suppress interference signals during tripping
9 zero-sequence power. Each overcurrent stage can be set in for-
ward or reverse direction or for both directions (non-directional).
of parallel lines.
The pilot functions for distance protection and for ground
As an option, the 7SA522 relay can be provided with a sensitive (earth)-fault protection can use the same signaling channel or
neutral (residual) current transformer. This feature provides a two separate and redundant channels.
10 measuring range for the neutral (residual) current from 5 mA to
100 A with a nominal relay current of 1 A and from 5 mA to Backup overcurrent protection (ANSI 50, 50N, 51, 51N, 67)
500 A with a nominal relay current of 5 A. Thus the ground
(earth)- fault overcurrent protection can be applied with extreme The 7SA522 provides a backup overcurrent protection. Two
sensitivity. denite-time stages and one inverse-time stage (IDMTL) are
11 The function is equipped with special digital lter algorithms,
available, separately for phase currents and for the neutral
(residual) current.
providing the elimination of higher harmonics. This feature
is particularly important for low zero-sequence fault currents The application can be extended to a directional overcurrent
protection (ANSI 67) by taking into account the decision of the
12 which usually have a high content of 3rd and 5th harmonics.
Inrush stabilization and instantaneous switch-onto-fault trip can available direction detection elements.
be activated separately for each stage as well. Two operating modes are selectable. The function can run in
Different operating modes can be selected. The ground(earth)- parallel to the distance protection or only during failure of the
13 fault protection is suitable for three-phase and, optionally, for

single-phase tripping by means of a sophisticated phase selector.
voltage in the VT secondary circuit (emergency operation).
The secondary voltage failure can be detected by the integrated
It may be blocked during the dead time of single-pole auto- fuse failure monitor or via a binary input from a VT miniature
reclose cycles or during pickup of the distance protection. circuit-breaker (VT m.c.b. trip).
14 Inverse-time characteristics according to IEC 60255-3 and ANSI/
IEEE are provided (see Technical data).
15
STUB bus overcurrent protection (ANSI 50(N)-STUB) Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF)
The STUB bus overcurrent protection is a separate denite-time
overcurrent stage. It can be activated from a binary input signal-
The 7SA522 relay incorporates a two-stage circuit-breaker failure
protection to detect failures of tripping command execution, for 1
ling that the line isolator (disconnector) is open. example due to a defective circuit-breaker. The current detection
Settings are available for phase and ground(earth)-faults. logic is phase-segregated and can therefore also be used in
single-pole tripping schemes.
Instantaneous high-speed switch-onto-fault overcurrent
protection (ANSI 50HS) If the fault current is not interrupted after a time delay has
2
expired, a retrip command or the busbar trip command will be
Instantaneous tripping is possible when energizing a faulty line. generated. The breaker failure protection can be initiated by all
In the event of large fault currents, the high-speed switch-onto- integrated protection functions as well as by external devices via
fault overcurrent stage can initiate very fast 3-pole tripping. binary input signals. 3
With lower fault currents, instantaneous tripping after switch-
onto-fault is also possible with the overreach distance zone Z1B
or just with pickup in any zone.
The switch-onto-fault initiation can be detected via the binary
The 7SA522 relay is equipped with an auto-reclose function
(AR). The function includes several operating modes: 4
input manual close or automatically via measurement. 3-pole auto-reclosure for all types of faults; different dead
times are available depending the type of fault
Overvoltage protection, undervoltage protection
(ANSI 59, 27)
phase faults
5
A voltage rise can occur on long lines that are operating at 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase faults and for 2-phase faults
no-load or that are only lightly loaded. The 7SA522 contains a without ground, no reclosing for multi-phase faults
number of overvoltage measuring elements. Each measuring
element is of two-stage design. The following measuring ele-
1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase and 3-pole auto-reclosing for
multi-phase faults
6
ments are available:
Phase-to-ground overvoltage without ground and 3-pole auto-reclosure for other faults
Phase-to-phase overvoltage
Zero-sequence overvoltage
Multiple-shot auto-reclosure 7
Interaction with an external device for auto-reclosure via
The zero-sequence voltage can be connected to the 4th voltage binary inputs and outputs
input or be derived from the phase voltages. Control of the integrated AR function by external protection
Positive-sequence overvoltage of the local end or calculated Interaction with the internal or an external synchro-check 8
for the remote end of the line (compounding).
Monitoring of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts
In addition to the above-mentioned operating modes, several
Tripping by the overvoltage measuring elements can be effected
other operating principles can be employed by means of the
integrated programmable logic (CFC).
9
Integration of auto-reclosure in the feeder protection allows
The 7SA522 is tted, in addition, with three two-stage under- evaluation of the line-side voltages. A number of voltage-
voltage measuring elements: dependent supplementary functions are thus available: 10
Phase-to-ground undervoltage DLC
Phase-to-phase undervoltage By means of dead-line check, reclosure is effected only when
the line is deenergized (prevention of asynchronous breaker
Positive-sequence undervoltage
closure). 11
ADT
of a minimum current criterion and by means of binary inputs. The adaptive dead time is employed only if auto-reclosure
at the remote station was successful (reduction of stress on
Frequency protection can be used for over-frequency and
equipment). 12
RDT
underfrequency protection. Unwanted frequency changes in Reduced dead time is employed in conjunction with auto-
the network can be detected and the load can be removed at a reclosure where no tele-protection method is employed:
specied frequency setting. Frequency protection can be used
over a wide frequency range (45 to 55, 55 to 65 Hz). There are When faults within the zone extension, but external to the pro-
13
four elements (selectable as overfrequency or underfrequency) tected line, are switched off for rapid auto-reclosure (RAR), the
and each element can be delayed separately. RDT function decides on the basis of measurement of the return
voltage from the remote station which has not tripped whether
or not to reduce the dead time. 14
15
Synchronism check (ANSI 25)

Negative active jQ Positive active
1 Where two network sections are switched in by control

command or following a 3-pole, it must be ensured that both
power (-P) power (+P)
network sections are mutually synchronous. For this purpose,

a synchronism-check function is provided. After verication
of the network synchronism the function releases the CLOSE
2 command. Alternatively, reclosing can be enabled for different
criteria, e.g., checking that the busbar or line is not carrying
jA
P
a voltage (dead line or dead bus).Fuse failure monitoring and
other supervision functions jB
3 The 7SA522 relay provides comprehensive monitoring functions S1
LSA_5018a en eps
covering both hardware and software. Furthermore, the mea-
sured values are continuously checked for plausibility. Therefore
the current and voltage transformers are also included in this
4 monitoring system.
Fig. 6/57 Monitoring of active power direction
open circuit in the voltage transformer secondary circuit, the
distance protection would respond with an unwanted trip due
5 to this loss of voltage. This secondary voltage interruption can
jQ Inductive (+Q)
be detected by means of the integrated fuse failure monitor.

Immediate blocking of distance protection and switching to
the backup-emergency protection is provided for all types of
6 secondary voltage failures.
jA
Additional measurement supervision functions are
P
Symmetry of voltages and currents jB
7 Broken-conductor supervision
Summation of currents and voltages S1
LSA_5019a en eps
Phase-sequence supervision
Capacitive (-Q)
8 Directional power protection

The 7SA522 has a function for detecting the power direction by
Fig. 6/58 Monitoring of reactive power
measuring the phase angle of the positive-sequence system's
power. Fig. 6/57 shows an application example displaying nega-
9 tive active power. An indication is issued in the case when the
measured angle (S1) of the positive-sequence system power is
One or two binary inputs for each circuit-breaker pole can be
within the P - Q - level sector. This sector is between angles A used for monitoring the circuit-breaker trip coils including the
and B. connecting cables. An alarm signal is issued whenever the circuit
10 Via CFC the output signal of the directional monitoring can be
linked to the Direct Transfer Trip (DTT) function and thus, as
is interrupted.
reverse power protection, initiate tripping of the CB. Lockout (ANSI 86)
Fig.6/58 shows another application displaying capacitive reactive Under certain operating conditions, it is advisable to block
11 power. In the case of overvoltage being detected due to long
lines under no-load conditions it is possible to select the lines
CLOSE commands after a TRIP command of the relay has been
issued. Only a manual Reset command unblocks the CLOSE
where capacitive reactive power is measured. command. The 7SA522 is equipped with such an interlocking
logic.
12
13
14
15
Commissioning and fault event

analyzing
Special attention has been paid to com- 1
missioning. All binary inputs and outputs
can be displayed and activated directly.
This can simplify the wiring check
and fault events and the fault records are
2
clearly arranged. For applications with
serial protection data interface, all cur-
rents, voltages and phases are available
via communication link at each local unit,
3
displayed at the front of the unit with
DIGSI 4 or with WEB Monitor.
A common time tagging facilitates the
comparison of events and fault records. 4
LSP2818.tif
WEB Monitor Internet technology
In addition to the universal DIGSI 4 Fig. 6/59 Web Monitor: Display of the protection direction
5
operating program, the relay contains
(e.g. Internet Explorer). The advantage of 6
standard software tools and at the same
time make use of the Intranet/Internet
infrastructure. Apart from numeric values,
graphical displays in particular provide
7
clear information and a high degree of
operating reliability. Of course, it is also
possible to call up detailed measured
value displays and annunciation buffers. 8
By emulation of the integrated unit opera-
tion on the PC it is also possible to adjust
selected settings for commissioning
purposes. 9
10
LSP2820.tif
11
Fig. 6/60 Web monitor: Supported commissioning by phasor diagram
12
13
14
15
Communication
Communication

originates.
ing data telegram is initially acknowledged by the device
which will execute the command. After the release and execu-
tion of the command a feedback signal is generated. At every
4 stage of the control command execution particular conditions
are checked. If these are not satised, command execution
may be terminated in a controlled manner. Fig. 6/61 IEC 60870-5-103 star-type RS232 copper conductor
connection or ber-optic connection
5 The units offer a high degree of exibility by supporting different

standards for connection to industrial and power automation
systems. By means of the communication modules, on which the
protocols run, exchange and retrot is possible. Therefore, the
units will also in future allow for optimal adaptation to changing
6 communication infrastructure such as the application of Ethernet
networks which are already widely applied in the power supply
sector.
7 Local PC interface
The serial RS232 PC interface accessible from the front of the
8 geous during commissioning.
Service / modem interface

By means of the RS 485/RS 232 interface, it is possible to
9 efciently operate a number of protection units centrally via
DIGSI 4. Remote operation is possible on connection of a modem.
This offers the advantage of rapid fault clarication, especially
in the case of unmanned power plants. With the optical version, Fig. 6/62 Bus structure for station bus with Ethernet and IEC 61850
10 centralized operation can be implemented by means of a star

coupler.
entire SIPROTEC 4 unit range. These ensure that, where differ-
ent communcation protocols (IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103,
PROFIBUS, DNP, etc) are required, such demands can be met. For
Reliable bus architecture ber-optic communication, no external converter is required for
RS485 bus SIPROTEC 4.
12 With this data transmission via copper conductors, electro-
magnetic fault inuences are largely eliminated by the use of IEC 61850 protocol
system continues to operate without any problems.
for protection and control systems used by power supply
The ber-optic double ring circuit is immune to electromag- this standard. By means of this protocol, information can also
netic interference. Upon failure of a section between two be exchanged directly between bay units so as to set up simple
units, the communication system continues to operate without masterless systems for bay and system interlocking. Access to
14 disturbance.
It is usually impossible to communicate with a unit that has
the units via the Ethernet but is also possible with DIGSI. It is also
possible to retrieve operating and fault records as well as fault
failed. Should the unit fail, there is no effect on the communi- recordings via a browser. This Web monitor will also provide a
cation with the rest of the system. few items of unit-specic information in browser windows.
15
Communication
LSP2162-afpen.tif
standardized protocol for efcient com- 1
LSP2164-afp.tif
munication with protection relays.
number of protection relay manufacturers
and is used worldwide. Supplements
for control functions are dened in
2
the manufacturer-specic part of this
standard.
PROFIBUS-DP
3
PROFIBUS-DP is an industrial com-
Fig. 6/63 820 nm ber-optic communication Fig. 6/64 PROFIBUS ber-optic double ring
munication standard and is supported
module
by a number of PLC and protection relay
manufacturers.
communication module
4
DNP 3.0
LSP2163-afpen.tif
5
protocol. SIPROTEC 4 units are Level 1 and
LSP3.01-0021.tif
Level 2 compatible.
6
station control
Together with the SICAM power automa-
tion system, SIPROTEC 4 can be used with 7
PROFIBUS-FMS. Over the low-cost electri-
cal RS485 bus, or interference-free via the Fig. 6/65 RS232/RS485 electrical Fig. 6/66 Fiber-optic Ethernet communication
communication module module for IEC 61850 with
Units equipped with IEC 60870-5-103
interfaces can be connected to SICAM in
parallel via the RS485 bus or connected in
star by ber-optic link. 9
Through this interface, the system is
open for the connection of units of other
manufacturers (see Fig. 6/67).
10
11
12
13
14
15
Communication
Because of the standardized interfaces, SIPROTEC units can also The communication possibilities are identical to those for the
be integrated into systems of other manufacturers or in SIMATIC. line differential protection relays 7SD5 and 7SD610. The follow-
1 Electrical RS485 or optical interfaces are available. The optimum
ing options are available:
FO51), OMA12) module: Optical 820 nm, 2 ST connectors,
electrical converters. Thus, the RS485 bus allows low-cost wiring FO cable length up to 1.5 km for link to communication
in the cubicles and an interference-free optical connection to the networks via communication converters or for direct FO cable
2 master can be established. connection
For IEC 61850, an interoperable system solution is offered with FO61), OMA22) module: Optical 820 nm, 2 ST connectors, FO
SICAM PAS. Via the 100 Mbits/s Ethernet bus, the units are linked cable length up to 3.5 km, for direct connection via multi-
with PAS electrically or optically to the station PC. The interface mode FO cable
3 is standardized, thus also enabling direct connection of units
FO171): for direct connection up to 24 km3), 1300 nm, for
FO181): for direct connection up to 60 km3), 1300 nm, for
systems. Units with an IEC 60870-5-103 interface are connected
4 with PAS via the Ethernet station bus by means of serial/Ethernet
converters. DIGSI and the Web monitor can also be used via the FO191): for direct connection up to 100 km3), 1550 nm, for
same station bus. mono-mode ber 9/125 m, LC-Duplex connector
FO301): for transmission with the IEEE C37.94 standard
Serial protection data interface
5 The tele (pilot) protection schemes can be implemented using
separate communication converters (7XV5662). These have a
digital serial communication. The 7SA522 is capable of remote ber-optic interface with 820 nm and 2 ST connectors to the
relay communication via direct links or multiplexed digital com- protection relay. The link to the communication network is
munication networks. The serial protection data interface has
6 the following features:
optionally an electrical X21 or a G703.1 interface. If the connec-
tion to the multiplexor supports IEEE C37.94 a direct bre optic
Fast phase-selective teleprotection signaling for distance connection to the relay is possible using the FO30 module.
protection, optionally with POTT or PUTT schemes
For operation via copper wire communication (pilot wires), a
7 Signaling for directional ground(earth)- fault protection
directional comparison for high-resistance faults in solidly
modern communication converter for copper cables is available.
This operates with both the two-wire and three-wire copper con-
grounded systems. nections which were used by conventional differential protection
Echo-function systems before. The communication converter for copper cables
8 Two and three-terminal line applications can be implemented

without additional logic
is designed for 5 kV insulation voltage. An additional 20 kV
isolation transformer can extend the eld of applications of this
technique into ranges with higher insulation voltage require-
Interclose command transfer with the auto-reclosure Adaptive
ments. With SIPROTEC 4 and the communication converter
dead time (ADT) mode
for copper cables a digital follow-up technique is available for
9 Redundant communication path switchover is possible with
the 7SA522 when 2 serial protection data interfaces are
two-wire protection systems (typical 15 km) and all three-wire
protection systems using existing copper communication links.
installed
Communication data:
28 remote signals for fast transfer of binary signals
10 Flexible utilization of the communication channels by means
of the programmable CFC logic
Supported network interfaces G703.1 with 64 kbit/s; X21/
RS422 with 64 or 128 or 512 kbit/s; IEEE C37.94
Max. channel delay time 0.1 ms to 30 ms (in steps of 0.1 ms)
Display of the operational measured values of the opposite
terminal(s) with phase-angle information relative to a common Protocol HDLC
11 reference vector 32-bit CRC-check according to CCITT and ITU
Clock synchronization: the clock in only one of the relays Each protection relay possesses a unique relay address
must be synchronized from an external so called Absolute Continuous communication link supervision: Individual faulty
Master when using the serial protection data interface. This data telegrams do not constitute an immediate danger, if
12 relay will then synchronize the clock of the other (or the two
other relays in 3 terminal applications) via the protection data
they occur only sporadically. The statistical availability, per
minute and hour, of the serial protection data interface can be
interface. displayed.
7SA522 and 7SA6 can be combined via the protection data
13 interface.
Figure 6/68 shows four applications for the serial protection data
interface on a two-terminal line.
14
1) For ush-mounting housing.
15 3) For surface-mounting housing the internal ber-optic module
(OMA1) will be delivered together with an external repeater.

Communication
10
11
12
Fig. 6/68 Communication topologies for the serial protection data interface on a two-terminal line
13
14
15
Communication
Three-terminal lines can also be protected

with a tele (pilot) protection scheme by
1 using SIPROTEC 4 distance protection
relays. The communication topology may
then be a ring or a chain topology, see
Fig. 6/69. In a ring topology a loss of one
2 data connection is tolerated by the system.
The topology is re-routed to become a
chain topology within less than 100 ms.
To reduce communication links and to
3 save money for communications, a chain
topology may be generally applied.
5 Ring topology
9
Chain topology
10
Fig. 6/69 Ring or chain communication topology
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connection
Typical connection
point in the line direction, I4 connected as
summation current transformer (= 3I0): 2
Holmgreen circuit
of the broken (open) delta winding on
3
internally.
4
Fig. 6/70 Example of connection for current and voltage transformers
5

6
The 3 phase current transformers are
7
permitting a high sensitive 3I0 measure-
ment.
Note: Terminal Q7 of the I4 transformer 8
must be connected to the terminal of
the core balance CT pointing in the same
direction as the neutral point of the phase
current transformers (in this case in line
direction). The voltage connection is
9
effected in accordance with Fig. 66/70,
6/74 or 6/75.
Fig. 6/71 Alternative connection of current transformers for sensitive ground-
current measuring with core-balance current transformers 10
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connection

of a grounded (earthed) transformer for
directional ground(earth)-fault protection.
2 The voltage connection is effected in

neutral current of a grounded (earthed) power transformer

the summation current of the parallel line
for parallel line compensation on overhead
7 lines. The voltage connection is effected in

the ground (earth) current of a parallel line
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connection

nected to broken (open) delta winding 1
monitoring and ground(earth)-fault
directional protection.
The current connection is effected in
accordance with Fig. 6/70, 6/71, 6/72 and
2
6/73.
4
Fig. 6/74 Alternative connection of voltage transformers for measuring
the displacement voltage (e-n voltage) 5
Alternative voltage connection 6

synchro-check.
Note: Any phase-to-phase or phase-to-
7
ground (earth) voltage may be employed
as the busbar voltage. Parameterization is
carried out on the unit. The current con-
nection is effected in accordance with 8
Fig. 6/70, 6/71, 6/72 and 6/73.
Fig. 6/75 Alternative connection of voltage transformers for measuring 10

the busbar voltage
11
12
13
14
15
Technical data
1 Analog inputs
Quantity
Function can be assigned
8 or 16 or 24 (refer to ordering code)
Rated current Inom 1 or 5 A (selectable) Switching capacity

Make 1000 W/VA
Rated voltage 80 to 125 V (selectable) Break, high-speed trip outputs 1000 W/VA
2 Power consumption
In CT circuits with Inom = 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA
Break, contacts
Break, contacts (for resistive
30 VA
40 W
In CT circuits with Inom = 5 A Approx. 0.30 VA load)
In the CT circuit for high sensitive Approx. 0.05 VA Break, contacts 25 VA
ground(earth)-fault protection (for = L/R 50 ms)
3 (refer to ordering code) at 1 A
In VT circuits Approx. 0.10 VA
Permissible current 30 A for 0.5 s
Thermal overload capacity 5 A continuous
In CT circuits 500 A for 1 s
150 A for 10 s Operating time, approx.
4 20 A continuous
In the CT circuit for high sensitive 300 A for 1 s
NO contact
8 ms
8 ms
ground(earth)-fault protection 100 A for 10 s Fast NO contact 5 ms
(refer to ordering code) 15 A continuous High-speed NO trip outputs < 1 ms
LEDs
5 In VT circuits
Dynamic overload capacity
230 V continuous per phase
Quantity
In CT circuits 1250 A (one half cycle) RUN (green) 1
In the CT circuit for high sensitive 750 A (one half cycle) ERROR (red) 1
ground(earth)-fault protection Indication (red), 14
6 (refer to ordering code)

Auxiliary voltage
Unit design
Rated auxiliary voltage DC 24 to 48 V Housing 7XP20
DC 60 to 125 V Dimension 1/2 x 19" or 1/1 x 19"
7 DC 110 to 250 V
and AC 115 V with 50/60 Hz
Refer to ordering code, and see
dimension drawings, part 14
Permissible tolerance of the rated -20 % to +20 % Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529
auxiliary voltage
Max. superimposed AC voltage 15 %
8 (peak-to-peak)
Power consumption
Front
Rear
IP 51
IP 50
During normal operation Approx. 8 W For the terminals IP 20 with terminal cover put on
During pickup with all inputs and Approx. 18 W Weight
9 outputs activated
Bridging time during auxiliary
x 19" 6 kg
voltage failure x 19" 10 kg
Vaux = 48 V and Vaux 110 V 50 ms Surface-mounting housing
x 19" 11 kg
Binary inputs
10 Quantity
Functions are freely assignable
8 or 16 or 24 (refer to ordering
code)
x 19" 19 kg
Pickup/Reset voltage thresholds DC 19 V/ DC 10 V or DC 88 V/ DC 44 V Serial interfaces

Ranges are settable by means of or DC 176 V/ DC 88 V, bipolar Operating interface, front of unit for DIGSI 4
11 jumpers for each binary input
Maximum permissible voltage
(3 nominal ranges DC 17/73/154 V)
DC 300 V
Connection Non-isolated, RS232,
Current consumption, energized Approx. 1.8 mA (SUB-D)
Input impulse suppression 220 nF coupling capacitance Baud rate 4800 to 115200 baud
12 at 220 V with a recovery time

> 60 ms.
setting as supplied: 38400 baud;
parity 8E1
DCF77/IRIG-B signal (Format IRIG-B000)

(SUB-D) (terminal with surface-
mounting housing)
Voltage levels 5 V, 12 V or 24 V (optional)
14
15
Technical data
Service/modem interface (operating interface 2) Relay communication equipment

(refer to ordering code)
Dielectric test
For DIGSI 4 / modem / service
500 V/ 50 Hz
External communication converter7XV5662-0AA00 with X21 / RS422 or
G703.1 interface 1
External communication conver- Electrical X21/RS422 or G703.1
Distance for RS232 Max. 15 m ter for linking the optical interface settable by jumper
Distance for RS485 Max. 1000 m 820 nm interface of the unit Baud rate settable by jumper
Fiber-optic
Optical wavelength
Integrated ST connector
= 820 nm
(FO5/OMA1 with clock recovery)
to the X21/RS422/G703.1 2
Permissible attenuation Max. 8 dB for 62.5/125 m ber interface of the communication
Distance max. 1.5 km network
System interface FO interface with 820 nm with Max. 1.5 km with 62.5/125 m multi-
(refer to ordering code) IEC 61850 Ethernet
IEC 60870-5-103
clock recovery
Electrical X21/RS422 interface
mode ber to protection relay
64/128/512 kbit (settable by jumper)
3
PROFIBUS-FMS max. 800 m, 15-pin connector to the
PROFIBUS-DP communication network
DNP 3.0
Electrical G703.1 interface 64 kbit/s max. 800 m, screw-type
terminal to the communication 4
Baud rate 4800 to 38400 baud network
Dielectric test 500 V/50 Hz External communication converter 7XV5662-0AC00 for pilotwires
Distance for RS232 Max. 15 m
Distance for RS485
PROFIBUS RS485
Max. 1000 m External communication conver- Typical distance: 15 km
ter for linking the optical 820 nm
interface of the unit (FO5/OMA1
5
Dielectric test 500 V/50 Hz option w. clock recovery) to pilot
Baud rate Max. 12 Mbaud wires.
Distance 1000 m at 93.75 kbaud;
PROFIBUS ber-optic2)
100 m at 12 Mbaud FO interface for 820 nm
with clock recovery
Max. 1.5 km with 62.5/125 m multi-
mode ber to protection relay, 6
128 kbit
Only for ush-mounting ST connector Electrical interface to pilot wires 5 kV-isolated
housing
For surface-mounting housing Optical interface withOLM4)
Baud rate
Optical wavelength
Max. 1.5 Mbaud
= 820 nm
Electrical tests 7
Permissible attenuation Max. 8 dB for 62.5/125 m ber Specications
Distance 500 kbit/s 1.6 km 1500 kbit/s 530 m Standards IEC 60255 (product standards)
IEEE Std C37.90.0/.1/.2; UL 508
Protection data relay interfaces
Quantity Max. 2 (refer to ordering code)
VDE 0435
Further standards see Individual
8
FO51), OMA12):Fiber-optic For multi-mode ber 62.5/125 m, functions
interface ST connectors Insulation tests
with clock recovery for direct
connection up to 1.5 km or for
connection to a communication
Standards
High-voltage test (routine test)
IEC 602555 and 60870-2-1
9
converter, 820 nm All circuits except for power 2.5 kV (r.m.s.), 50 Hz
FO61), OMA22): Fiber-optic For multi-mode ber 62.5/125 m, supply, binary inputs,
interface for direct connection up ST connectors
to 3.5 km, 820 nm
high-speed outputs,
communication and time 10
FO301): for direct bre-optic For multi-mode ber 62.5/125 m, synchronization interfaces
connection to a multiplexor using ST connectors Auxiliary voltage, binary DC 3.5 kV
IEEE C37.94 standard inputs and high-speed outputs
to 24 km3), 1300 nm
LC-Duplex connector
(routine test)
only isolated communication 500 V (r.m.s.), 50 Hz
11
FO181): for direct connection up For mono-mode ber 9/125 m, interfaces and time synchroni-
to 60 km3), 1300 nm LC-Duplex connector zation interface (routine test)
to 100 km3), 1550 nm
LC-Duplex connector
Impulse voltage test (type test)
All circuits except for commu-
nication interfaces and time
5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 s; 0.5 Ws,
3 positive and 3 negative impulses in
12
synchronization interface, intervals of 5 s
class III
13
1) For ush-mouting housing.
3) For surface-mounting housing the internal ber-optic module (OMA1) 14
will be delivered together with an external repeater.
4) Conversion with external OLM
For ber-optic interface please complete order number at 11th position
with 4 (FMS RS485) or 9 and Order Code L0A (DP RS485) or 9 and Or-
der Code L0G (DNP 3.0) and additionally a suitable external repeater.
15
Technical data
Electrical tests (cont'd) Mechanical stress test
1 EMC tests for noise immunity; type tests

Standards IEC 60255-6/-22 (product standard)
During operation
EN 61000-6-2 (generic standard), Standards IEC 6025521 and IEC 600682
VDE 0435 part 301
DIN VDE 0435-110 Vibration Sinusoidal
2 High-frequency test
IEC 60255-22-1 class III and
2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz; = 15 ms;
400 surges per s; test duration 2 s,
IEC 60255211, class 2
IEC 6006826
VDE 0435 Section 303, class III Ri = 200 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes
Electrostatic discharge 8 kV contact discharge; 15 kV air Shock Semi-sinusoidal
IEC 60255-22-2 class IV discharge; both polarities; 150 pF;
3 and IEC 61000-4-2, class IV Ri = 330
IEC 60255212, class 1
IEC 60068227
Acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms,
3 shocks on each of the 3 axes in
Irradiation with HF eld, frequency 10 V/m; 80 to 1000 MHz: 80 % AM; both directions
sweep 1 kHz Seismic vibration Sinusoidal
IEC 60255-22-3 (report) class III 10 V/m; 800 to 960 MHz: 80 % AM; IEC 60255212, class 1 1 to 8 Hz: 3.5 mm amplitude
1 kHz
10 V/m; 1.4 to 2 GHz: 80 % AM; 1 kHz
IEC 6006833 (horizontal axis)
Irradiation with HF eld, single 10 V/m; 80, 160, 450, 900 MHz; (vertical axis)
frequencies 80 % AM; 1 kHz; duty cycle > 10 s 8 to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration
IEC 60255-22-31, IEC 61000-4-3, 900 MHz; 50 % PM, repetition (horizontal axis)
5 class III
amplitude/pulse modulated
frequency 200 Hz 8 to 35 Hz: 0.5 g acceleration
(vertical axis)
Fast transient disturbance/bursts 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; Frequency sweep 1 octave/min
IEC 60255-22-4 and burst length = 15 ms; 1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes
IEC 61000-4-4, class IV repetition rate 300 ms; During transport
6 both polarities; Ri = 50 ;
test duration 1 min
Standards IEC 6025521 and IEC 600682
High-energy surge voltages Impulse: 1.2/50 s
IEC 60255211, class 2 5 to 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude;
(SURGE),
IEC 6006826 8 to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration
7 IEC 61000-4-5 installation class III
Auxiliary supply Common mode: 2 kV; 12 ; 9 F
Differential mode:1 kV; 2 ; 18 F
Shock Semi-sinusoidal
Analog measurement inputs, Common mode: 2 kV; 42 ; 0.5 F
IEC 60255212, class 1 Acceleration 15 g, duration 11 ms,
binary inputs, relays output Differential mode: 1 kV; 42 ; 0.5 F
IEC 60068227 3 shocks on each of the 3 axes in
8 Line-conducted HF, amplitude- 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM;
modulated, IEC 61000-4-6, class III 1 kHz
both directions
Power system frequency magnetic 30 A/m continuous; 300 A/m for 3 s; IEC 60255212, class 1 Acceleration 10 g, duration 16 ms,
eld IEC 60068229 1000 shocks on each of the 3 axes in
IEC 61000-4-8, class IV; 50 Hz
9 IEC 60255-6 0.5 mT; 50 Hz
both directions
Oscillatory surge withstand 2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz

capability, IEEE Std C37.90.1 = 50 s; 400 surges per second, Climatic stress tests
test duration 2 s, Ri = 200 Standard IEC 60255-6
capability, IEEE Std C37.90.1
4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; burst length =
15 ms
Temperatures
repition rate 300 ms, ; both polarities; Type-tested acc. to IEC 60068-2-1 -25 C to +85 C / -13 F to +185 F
test duration 1 min; Ri = 50 and -2, test Bd
Radiated electromagnetic inter- 35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz, Temporarily permissible operating -20 C to +70 C / -4 F to +158 F
11 ference IEEE Std C37.90.2
Damped oscillations
amplitude and pulse-modulated
2.5 kV (peak value); polarity alterna-
IEC 60694, IEC 61000-4-12 ting 100 kHz; 1 MHz; 10 and 50 MHz;
Ri = 200 Recommended permanent -5 C to +55 C / +23 F to +131 F
12 EMC tests for noise emission; type test
IEC 60255-6
permanent storage
Radio noise voltage to lines, only 150 kHz to 30 MHz
auxiliary voltage Limit class B Limiting temperature during -25 C to +70 C / -13 F to +158 F
13 IEC-CISPR 22
transport
Humidity
IEC-CISPR 22 Limit class B Permissible humidity stress: Annual average on 75 % relative
Harmonic currents on the network Class A limits are observed It is recommended to arrange the humidity; on 56 days per year up to
lead at AC 230 V, IEC 61000-3-2 units in such a way that they are 93 % relative humidity; condensation
14 Voltage uctuations and icker
on the network incoming feeder
Limits are observed not exposed to direct sunlight or
is not permitted.
at AC 230 V, IEC 61000-3-3 that could cause condensation.
15
Technical data
Certications Tolerances For sinusoidal quantities

UL listing
Models with threaded terminals
7SA522*-*A*
7SA522*-*C*
7SA522*-*D*
X
X
5 % for 30 SC 90 1
UL recognition 7SA522*-*J* R
5 % for 0 SC 60
Models with plug-in terminals 7SA522*-*L* R
7SA522*-*M*
Z
5 % for -30 (SC - line) +30
2
Z
Functions
Timer tolerance 1 % of set value or 10 ms
Distance protection (ANSI 21, 21N)
Distance protection zones 7, 1 of which as controlled zone,
all zones can be set forward or/and
Operating times
Minimum trip time Approx. 17 ms at 50 Hz 3
with fast relays Approx. 15 ms at 60 Hz
reverse Minimum trip time Approx. 12 ms at 50 Hz
Time stages for tripping delay 7 for multi-phase faults with high-speed relays Approx. 10 ms at 60 Hz
Setting range 0 to 30 s or deacti-
vated (steps 0.01 s)
3 for single-phase faults Reset time
Fault locator
Approx. 30 ms
4
Characteristic (refer to ordering code)
Output of the distance to fault X, R (secondary) in
Selectable separately for phase quadrilateral and/or
X, R (primary) in
and ground (earth) faults MHO
Distance in kilometers or miles
Time range 0.00 to 30 s (step 0.01 s) or deacti-
vated
Distance in % of line length 5
Start of calculation With trip, with pickup reset
Line angle L 10 to 89 (step 1 )
Reactance per unit length 0.005 to 6.5 / km (1A) /
Inclination angle for quadrilateral 30 to 90 (step 1) 0.001 to 1.3 / km (5A) or
characteristic
Quadrilateral reactance reach X 0.05 to 600 (1A) / 0.01 to 120 (5A)
0.005 to 10 / mile (1A) /
0.001 to 2 / mile (5A)
6
(step 0.001 ) (step 0.001 / unit)
Quadrilateral resistance reach R Tolerance For sinusoidal quantities
for phase-to-phase faults and 0.05 to 600 (1A) / 0.01 to 120 (5A) 2.5 % line length for
phase-to-ground(earth) faults (step 0.001 ) 30 SC 90 and VSC/VN > 0.10 7
MHO impedance reach ZR 0.05 to 200 (1A) / 0.01 to 40 (5A) BCD-coded output of fault location
(step 0.01 ) Indicated value Fault location in % of the line length
Minimum phase current I 0.05 to 4 A (1A) / 0.25 to 20 A (5A) Output signals Max. 10:
Ground(earth)-fault pickup
(step 0.01 A) d[1 %], d[2 %], d[4 %], d[8 %],
d[10 %], d[20 %], d[401 %], d[80 %],
8
Neutral (residual) current 3I0 0.05 to 4 A (1A) / 0.25 to 20 A (5A) d[100 %], d[release]
(Ground current) (step 0.01 A) Indication range 0 % to 195 %
Zero-sequence voltage 3V0
Zero-sequence compensation
1 to 100 V (step 1V) or deactivated
Power swing detection principle Measurement of the rate of impe-
9
selectable input formats RE/RL and XE/XL
dance vector change and monitoring
k0 and (k0)
of the vector path
Separately selectable for zones Z1
RE/RL and XE/XL

higher zones (Z1B, Z2 to Z5)
-0.33 to 7 (step 0.01)
Max. detectable power swing
frequency
Approx. 7 Hz
10
Operating modes Power swing blocking and/or power
k0 0 to 4 (step 0.001) swing tripping (out-of-step tripping)
(k0) -135 to 135 (steps 0.01 )
Power swing blocking programs All zones blocked
Parallel line mutual compensation (refer to ordering code)
RM/RL and XM/XL 0.00 to 8 (step 0.01)
Z1/Z1B blocked
Z2 to Z6 blocked
11
Load encroachment Z1, Z1B, Z2 blocked
Minimum load resistance 0.10 to 600 (1A) / 0.02 to 120 (5A) Detection of faults during power Reset of power swing blocking for all
(step 0.001 ) or deactivated
Maximum load angle 20 to 60 (step 1 )
swing blocking types of faults
12
Directional decision for all types With sound phase polarization and/or
of faults voltage memory
Directional sensitivity Dynamically unlimited
13
14
15
Technical data
Tele (pilot) protection for distance protection (ANSI 85-21) Inverse-time stage
1 Operating modes POTT

PUTT, DUTT
Directional comparison: Blocking
Current starting
inverse-time stage 3I0
0.05 to 4 A(1A) / 0.25 to 20 A(5A)
(step 0.01 A)
With normal neutral (residual)
Directional comparison: Unblocking current CT (refer to ordering code)
Directional comparison hybrid 0.003 to 4 A(1A) / 0.015 to 20 A(5A)
(POTT and echo with weak-infeed (step 0.001 A)
2 protection) With high sensitive neutral (residual)
current CT (refer to ordering code)
Transient blocking logic For overreaching schemes
(current reversal guard) Characteristics according Normal inverse, very inverse,
Send and receive signals Suitable for 2- and 3- terminal lines, to IEC 60255-3 extremely inverse, long time inverse,
3 phase-segregated signals for selecti-

ve single-phase tripping selectable
Time multiplier for
IEC T characteristics
Tp = 0.05 to 3 s (step 0.01s) or
deactivated
Direct transfer trip (DTT) Pickup threshold Approx. 1.1 x I/Ip
Direct phase-selective tripping Alternatively with or without auto- Reset threshold Approx. 1.05 x I/Ip
4 via binary input

Trip time delay
reclosure
0.00 to 30 s (step 0.01 s) or deacti-
Tolerances
vated Characteristics according Inverse, short inverse, long inverse,
Timer tolerance 1 % of setting value or 10 ms to ANSI/IEEE moderately inverse, very inverse,
5 Directional ground(earth)-fault overcurrent protection
(ANSI 50N, 51N, 67N) Time dial 0.50 to 15 s (step 0.01) or deacti-
vated
Characteristics 3 denite-time stages /1 inverse-time
stage or 4 denite-time stages Pickup threshold Approx. 1.1 x M
Reset threshold Approx. 1.05 x M
6 Phase selector Permits 1-pole tripping for single-
multi-phase faults selectable for
Tolerances
Operating time for 2 M 20 5 % of setpoint 15 ms
every stage Characteristic according to
logarithmic inverse characteristic t = T3I 3I 0
Inrush restraint Selectable for every stage max T3I 0 P ln
7 3I 0 p
0P
Instantaneous trip after switch- Selectable for every stage

onto-fault Pickup threshold 1.1 to 4.0 x I/Ip (step 0.1)
Inuence of harmonics Characteristic according to com- Sr = 3I0 3V0 cos ( - comp.)
Stages 1 and 2 (I>>> and I>>) 3rd and higher harmonics are compensated zero-sequence power
pletely suppressed by digital ltering
8 Stages 3 and 4
(I> and inverse 4th stage)
2nd and higher harmonics are com-
pletely suppressed by digital ltering
Polarizing quantities for directio-
nal decision
3I0 and 3V0 or
3I0 and 3V0 and IE (grounded
(earthed) power transformer) or
Denite-time stage 3I2 and 3V2 (negative sequence)
or zero-sequence power Sr or
Pickup denite-time stage 1, 3I0 0.05 to 25 A(1A) / 0.25 to 125 A(5A)
9 Pickup denite-time stage 2, 3I0
(step 0.01 A)
0.05 to 25 A(1A) / 0.25 to 125 A(5A)
automatic selection of zero-sequence
or negative-sequence quantities
dependent on the magnitude of the
(step 0.01 A) component voltages
Pickup denite-time stage 3, 3I0 0.05 to 25 A(1A) / 0.25 to 125 A(5A) Min. zero-sequence voltage 3V0 0.5 to 10 V (step 0.1 V)
10 (step 0.01 A)
With normal neutral (residual)
Ground (earth) current IE of
grounded (earthed) power
0.05 to 1 A(1A) / 0.25 to 5 A(5A)
(step 0.01 A)
transformer
0.003 to 25 A(1A) / 0.015 to 125 A(5A)
(step 0.01 A) Min. negative-sequence voltage 3V2 0.5 to 10 V (step 0.1 V)
11 With high sensitive neutral (residual)

Min. negative-sequence current 3I2 0.05 to 1 A(1A) / 0.25 to 5 A(5A)
(step 0.01 A)
Pickup denite-time stage 4, 3I0 0.05 to 4 A(1A) / 0.25 to 20 A(5A) 2nd harmonic ratio 10 to 45 % of fundamental (step 1 %)
(step 0.01 A) for inrush restraint
With normal neutral (residual) Maximum current, overriding 0.5 to 25 A(1A) / 2.5 to 125 A(5A)
12 current CT (refer to ordering code)
0.003 to 4 A(1A) / 0.015 to 20 A(5A)
inrush restraint (step 0.01 A)
(step 0.01 A) Tele (pilot) protection for directional ground(earth)-fault overcurrent
With high sensitive neutral (residual) protection (ANSI 85-67N)
current CT (refer to ordering code) Operating modes Directional comparison: Pickup
13 Time delay for denite-time
stages
0.00 to 30 s (step 0.01 s) or
deactivated
Directional comparison: Unblocking
Tolerances Transient blocking logic For schemes with parallel lines
Current starting 3 % of setting value or 1 % of Inom Send and receive signals Suitable for 2- and 3- terminal lines
14 Delay times
Pickup times
Denite-time stages 1 and 2 Approx. 30 ms

Denite-time stages 3 and 4 Approx. 40 ms
15
Technical data
Weak-infeed protection with undervoltage (ANSI 27WI) STUB bus overcurrent protection (ANSI 50(N)STUB)
Operating modes with carrier
(signal) reception
Echo
Echo and trip with undervoltage
Operating modes Active only with open isolator posi-
tion (signaled via binary input) 1
Undervoltage phase ground 2 to 70 V (step 1 V) Characteristic 1 denite-time stage
(earth) Instantaneous trip after switch- Selectable
Time delay 0.00 to 30 s (step 0.01 s) onto-fault
Echo impulse 0.00 to 30 s (step 0.01 s) Pickup phase current 0.1 to 25 A(1A) / 0.5 to 125 A(5A)
(step 0.01 A)
2
Tolerances
Voltage threshold 5 % of setting value or 0.5 V Pickup neutral (residual) current 0.05 to 25 A(1A) / 0.25 to 125 A(5A)
Timer 1 % of setting value or 10 ms (step 0.01 A)
Backup overcurrent protection (ANSI 50N, 51N, 67)
Operating modes Active only with loss of VT secondary
Time delay, separate for phase
and ground (earth) stage
0.00 to 30 s (step 0.01 s)
or deactivated
3
circuit or always active Reset ratio Approx. 0.95
Characteristic 2 denite-time stages / Tolerances
1 inverse-time stage,
1 denite-time Stub-protection stage
Current starting
Delay times
3 % of setting value or 1 % of Inom
Instantaneous trip after switch- Selectable for every stage Instantaneous high-speed switch-onto-fault overcurrent protection
onto-fault (ANSI 50HS)
Denite-time stage Operating mode Active only after CB closing;
Pickup denite-time stage 1, 0.1 to 25 A(1A) / 0.5 to 125 A(5A)
instantaneous trip after pickup 5
phase current (step 0.01 A) Pickup current 1 to 25 A(1A) / 5 to 125 A(5A)
(step 0.01 A)
Pickup denite-time stage 1, 0.05 to 25 A(1A) / 0.25 to 125 A(5A)
neutral (residual) current (step 0.01A) Reset ratio Approx. 0.95
Pickup denite-time stage 2,
phase current
0.1 to 25 A(1A) / 0.5 to 125 A(5A)
(step 0.01A)
Tolerances
Current starting 3 % of setting value or 1 % of Inom
6
Pickup denite-time stage 2, 0.05 to 25 A(1A) / 0.25 to 125 A(5A) Operating time
neutral (residual) current (step 0.01 A) With fast relays Approx. 13 ms
Time delay for denite-time
stages
0.0 to 30 s (step 0.01 s) or deactivated
With high-speed trip outputs
Voltage protection (ANSI 59, 27)
Approx. 8 ms
7
Tolerances Operating modes Local tripping and/or carrier trip im-
Current starting 3 % of setting value or 1 % of Inom pulse for remote end, only indication
Operating time Approx. 25 ms
Overvoltage protection
Pickup values VPH-Gnd>>, VPH-Gnd> 1 to 170 V (step 0.1 V)
8
Inverse-time stage (phase-ground overvoltage)
Phase current starting 0.1 to 4 A(1A) / 0.5 to 20 A(5A) Pickup values VPH-PH>>, VPH-PH> 2 to 220 V (step 0.1 V)
for inverse-time stage (step 0.01 A) (phase-phase overvoltage)
Neutral (residual) current starting 0.05 to 4 A(1A) / 0.25 to 20 A(5A) Pickup values 3V0>>, 3V0> 1 to 220 V (step 0.1 V) 9
for inverse-time stage (step 0.01 A) (3V0 can be measured via V4
Characteristic according Normal inverse, very inverse, transformers or calculated by the
to IEC 60255-3 extremely inverse, long time inverse relay)
Time multiplier Tp = 0.05 to 3 s (step 0.01 s) or
deactivated
Pickup values V1>>, V1> 2 to 220 V (step 0.1 V)
10
Pickup threshold Approx. 1.1 x I/Ip
Measured voltage Local positive-sequence
Reset threshold Approx. 1.05 x I/Ip voltage or calculated
Tolerances
remote positive-sequence
voltage (compounding)
11
Characteristics according Inverse, short inverse, long inverse, Pickup values V2>>, V2> 2 to 220 V (step 0.1 V)
to ANSI/IEEE moderately inverse, very inverse, (negative-sequence overvoltage)
Time dial DIP 0.50 to 15 s (step 0.01) or
12
deactivated
Pickup threshold Approx. 1.1 x M (M = I/Ip)
Reset threshold Approx. 1.05 x M
Tolerances 13
Operating time for 2 M 20 5 % of setpoint 15 ms
14
15
Technical data
Undervoltage protection Auto-reclosure (ANSI 79)
1 Pickup values VPH-E<<, VPH-E<

(phase-ground undervoltage)
1 to 100 V (step 0.1 V) Number of auto-reclosures
Operating mode
Up to 8
Only 1-pole; only 3-pole, 1- or 3-pole
Pickup values VPH-PH<<, VPH-PH< 1 to 170 V (step 0.1 V) Operating modes with line DLC dead-line check
(phase-phase undervoltage) voltage check ADT adaptive dead time
Pickup values V1<<, V1< 1 to 100 V (step 0.1 V) RDT reduced dead time
2 (positive-sequence undervoltage)
Blocking of undervoltage protec- Minimum current; binary input
Dead times T1-PH, T3-PH, TSeq 0 to 1800 s (step 0.01 s) or deacti-
vated
tion stages Action times 0.01 to 300 s (step 0.01 s) or
Reset ratio (settable) 1.01 to 1.20 (step 0.01) deactivated
3 Time delays
Time delay for 3V0 stages 0 to 100 s (step 0.01 s) or deactivated
Reclaim times
0.5 to 300 s (step 0.01 s)
0.01 to 300 s (step 0.01 s)
Time delay for all other over- and 0 to 30 s (steps 0.01 s) or deactivated Additional functions Synchro-check request
undervoltage stages 3-phase intertripping
4 Command / pickup time

Command/pickup time for 3V0
Approx. 30 ms
Approx. 30 ms or 65 ms (settable)
InterCLOSE command
to the remote end
stages
Blocking with manual CLOSE
Tolerances
Voltage limit values for DLC, ADT,
Voltage limit values 3 % of setting value or 0.5 V
5 Time stages 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
RDT
Healthy line voltage 30 to 90 V (step 1 V)
Frequency protection (ANSI 81) Dead line 2 to 70 V (step 1 V)
Number of frequency elements 4 Tolerances
Setting range 45.5 to 54.5 Hz
6 (in steps of 0.01) at fnom = 50 Hz
55.5 to 64.5 Hz
3 % of setting value or 0.5 V

Initiate options Auto-reclosure;
Delay times 0 to 600 s or (in steps of 0.01 s) Manual CLOSE control
7 Operating voltage range
Pickup times
6 to 230 V (phase-to-ground)
Approx. 80 ms Operating modes
Control commands
with auto-reclosure Synchro-check

Hysteresis Approx. 20 mHz
8 Dropout condition
Tolerances
Voltage = 0 V and current = 0 A
Bypassing
Frequency 15 mHz for VPH-PH: 50 to 230 V
For manual closure
and control commands As for auto-reclosure
9 Number of stages 2
Permissible voltage difference
Permissible frequency difference
1 to 60 V (step 0.1 V)
0.03 to 2 Hz (step 0.01 Hz)
Pickup of current element 0.05 to 20 A(1A) / 0.25 to 100 A(5A) Permissible angle difference 2 to 80 (step 1 )
(step 0.01 A)
Max. duration of synchronization 0.01 to 600 s (step 0.01 s) or
Time delays T11phase, T13phase, T2 0 to 30 s (steps 0.01 s) or deactivated
10 Additional functions End-fault protection
CB pole discrepancy monitoring
Release delay with synchronous
deactivated
0 to 30 s (step 0.01 s)
networks
Reset time 12 ms, typical; 25 ms max. Tolerances
Tolerances Time stages 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
11 Current limit value
Time stages
5 % of setting value or 1 % Inom
Voltage limit values 2 % of setting value or 2 V
Number of supervisable trip Up to 3
circuits
12 Number of required binary inputs 1 or 2
per trip circuit
Indication relay 1 to 30 s (step 1 s)
13
14
15
Technical data
Additional functions Control

Representation Primary, secondary and percentage
Number of switching units Depends on the number of binary /
indication inputs and indication /
command outputs
1
Currents 3 x IPhase ; 3I0; IGnd sensitve; I1; I2; IY; Control commands Single command / double command
3I0 PAR 1, 1 plus 1 common or 2 pole
Tolerances Typical 0.3 % of indicated measured

value or 0.5 % Inom
Feed back
Interlocking
CLOSE, TRIP, intermediate position
Freely congurable
2
Voltages 3 x VPhase-Ground; 3 x VPhase-Phase; 3V0, Local control Control via menu, function keys
V1, V2, VSYNC, Ven Remote control Control protection, DIGSI, pilot wires
Tolerances Typical 0.25 % of indicated measured
value or 0.01 Vnom
Further additional functions 3
Measurement supervision Current sum
Power with direction indication P, Q, S Current symmetry
Tolerances Voltage sum
P: for |cos | = 0.7 to 1 and
Typical 1 % Voltage symmetry
Voltage phase sequence 4
Q: for |sin | = 0.7 to 1 and Typical 1 % Fuse failure monitor
V/Vnom, I/Inom = 50 to 120 % Power direction
S: for V/Vnom, I/Inom = 50 to Typical 1 % Annunciations
120 %
Frequency f
Event logging
Fault logging
Buffer size 200
Storage of signals of the last 8 faults,
5
Tolerance 20 mHz buffer size 600
Power factor p.f. (cos ) Switching statistics Number of breaking operations per
CB pole
Tolerance for |cos | = 0.7 to 1 Typical 3 %
Load impedances with directional 3 x RPhase-Ground, XPhase-Ground
Breaking current of last trip operation
6
indication 3 x RPhase-Phase, XPhase-Phase
Max. breaking current per phase
Long-term mean values Circuit-breaker test TRIP/CLOSE cycle 3-phase
Interval for derivation of mean
value
15 min / 1 min; 15 min / 3 min;
15 min /15 min Setting range
TRIP/CLOSE cycle per phase
7
Synchronization instant Every hour; every hour; every Dead time for c.b. TRIP/CLOSE 0.00 to 30 s (step 0.01 s)
hour cycle
Values 3 x IPhase; I1; P; P+; P-; Q; Q+; Q-; S Commissioning support Operational measured values, CB
Minimum / maximum memory
test, status display of binary indica-
tion inputs, setting of output relays,
8
Indication Measured values with date and time generation of indications for testing
Resetting Cyclically serial interfaces
Via binary input Phase rotation adjustment Clockwise or anti-clockwise
Via the keyboard
Via serial interface
9
Values CE conformity
Min./max. of measured values 3 x IPhase; I1; 3 x VPhase-Ground; This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European
3 x VPhase-to-phase; 3V0; V1;
P+; P; Q+; Q; S; f; power factor (+);
power factor ()
Communities on the approximation of the laws of the Member States
relating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Council Directive 10
2004/108/EG previous 89/336/EEC) and concerning electrical equipment
Min./max. of mean values 3 x IPhase; I1; P; Q; S for use within specied voltage limits (Low-voltage directive
Energy meters 2006/95/EG previous 73/23/EEC).
Four-quadrant meters WP+; WP; WQ+; WQ

This conformity is proved by tests conducted by Siemens AG in
accordance with Article 10 of the Council Directive in agreement with 11
Tolerance the generic standards EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4 for the EMC
for |cos | > 0.7 and V > 50 % 5% directive and with the standard EN 60255-6 for the low-voltage
Vnom and I> 50 % Inom directive.
Analog channels 3 x IPhase, 3I0, 3I0 PAR
This device is designed and produced for industrial use.
The product conforms with the international standard of the series
12
3 x VPhase, 3V0, VSYNC, Ven IEC 60255 and the German standard VDE 0435.
Max. number of available 8, backed-up by battery if auxiliary
recordings
Sampling intervals
20 samplings per cycle
13
Total storage time > 15 s
Binary channels Pickup and trip information;
number and contents can be freely
congured by the user 14
Max. number of displayed binary 100
channels
15
1 7SA522 distance protection relay or transmission lines
Current transformer
7SA522 - -
Iph = 1 A1), IGnd = 1 A1) (min. = 0.05 A) 1

Iph = 1 A1), IGnd = high sensitive (min. = 0.003 A) 2
2 Iph = 5 A1), IGnd = 5 A (min. = 0.25 A)
Iph = 5 A1), IGnd = high sensitive (min. = 0.003 A)
5
see following
pages
6
3 DC 24 to 48 V, binary input threshold DC 17 V 3)

DC 60 to 125 V 2), binary input threshold DC 17 V 3)
2
4
DC 110 to 250 V 2), AC 115 V, binary input threshold DC 73 V 3) 5
DC 220 to 250 V 2), AC 115 V, binary input threshold DC 154 V 3) 6
4 Binary/
indication
Signal/
command
Fast
relay
High-
speed
Housing
width
Flush-
mounting
Flush-
mounting
Surface-
mounting
inputs outputs incl. trip referred housing/ housing/ housing/
live status output to 19 screw-type plug-in screw-type
5 contact terminals terminals terminals
8 4 12 A
8 4 12 E
8 4 12 J
6 16 12 12 C
16 12 12 G
16 12 12 L

7 16
16
4
4
15
15
5
5

N
Q
16 4 15 5 S
24 20 12 D
8 24
24
20
20
12
12

H
M
24 12 15 5 P
24 12 15 5 R
9 24
22
24
32
3
12
5

T
U
24 4 18 10 W
10 Region-specic default settings/language settings (language selectable)

Region DE, language: German A
Region World, language: English (GB) B
Region US, language: English (US) C
11 Region FR, language: French

Region World, language: Spanish
D
E
Region World, language: Italian F
Region World, language: Russian G
12 Region World, language: Polish H
Regulation on region-specic presettings and function versions:

Region DE: preset to f = 50 Hz and line length in km, only IEC, directional ground-(earth)
13 fault protection: no logarithmic inverse characteristic, no direction decision with
zero-sequence power Sr
Region US: preset to f = 60 Hz and line length in miles, ANSI inverse characteristic only, directional
ground-(earth) fault protection: no logarithmic inverse characteristic, no direction
14 decision with zero-sequence power Sr, no U0 inverse characteristic

Region World: preset to f = 50 Hz and line length in km, directional ground-(earth) fault protection:
1) Rated current can be selected by
means of jumpers.
no direction decision with zero-sequence Sr, no U0 inverse characteristic 2) Transition between the three
auxiliary voltage ranges can be
Region FR: preset to f = 50 Hz and line length in km, directional ground-(earth) fault protection:
selected by means of jumpers.
no U0 inverse characteristic, no logarithmic inverse characteristic, weak infeed logic
15 selectable between French specication and World specication. 3) The binary input thresholds can be
selected by means of jumpers.

Description Order No. Order Code

7SA522 distance protection relay for transmission lines
Port B
7SA522 - -
1
see
Empty 0
following
System interface, IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, electrical RS232 1 pages
System interface, IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, electrical RS485
System interface, IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, optical 820 nm, ST connector
2 2
3
System interface, PROFIBUS-FMS Slave, electrical RS4851) 4
System interface, PROFIBUS-FMS Slave, optical, double ring, ST connector1) 2) 6
System interface, PROFIBUS-DP, electrical RS485 9 L 0 A 3
System interface, PROFIBUS-DP, optical 820 nm, double ring, ST connector2) 9 L 0 B
System interface, DNP 3.0, electrical RS485 9 L 0 G
System interface, DNP 3.0, optical 820 nm, ST connector2)
System interface, IEC 61850, 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, electrical, duplicate,RJ45 plug connectors
9
9
L 0 H
L 0 R 4
System interface, IEC 61850, 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, optical, double, LC connector5) 9 L 0 S
Port C and/or Port D

Empty
Port C: DIGSI / modem, electrical RS232; Port D: empty
0 5
1
Port C: DIGSI / modem, electrical RS485; Port D: empty 2
Port C: DIGSI / modem, optical 820 nm, ST connector; Port D: empty 3
With Port D 9 M
6
Port C
Empty 0
DIGSI / modem, electrical RS232 1 7
DIGSI / modem, electrical RS485 2
DIGSI / modem, optical 820 nm, ST connector 3
Port D
8
For direct connection via multi-mode FO cable or communication networks3) A
For direct connection via multi-mode FO cable
B
9
FO cable length up to 24 km for direct connection via mono-mode FO cable4) G
FO cable length up to 60 km for direct connection via mono-mode FO cable4) 6) H
FO cable length up to 100 km for direct connection via mono-mode FO cable4) 7) J
10
FO30 optical 820 nm, 2 ST-connectors, length of optical bre up to 1.5 km for multimode bre,
for communication networks with IEEE C37.94 interface or direct optical bre connection (not
available for surface-mounted housing) S
11
12
1) For SICAM energy automation system. 5) For surface-mounting housing applications please order
13
2) Optical double ring interfaces are not available with surface- the relay with electrical Ethernet interface and use a separate
mounting housings. Please, order the version with RS485 interface ber-optic switch.
and a separate electrical/ optical converter. 6) For distances less than 25 km, two optical attenuators
3) Suitable communication converters 7XV5662 7XV5107-0AA00 are required to avoid optical saturation of the
receiver element.
14
(optical to G703.1/X21/RS422 or optical to pilot wire or optical to
ISDN) see Accessories. 7) For distances less than 50 km, two optical attenuators
4) For surface-mounting housing applications an internal ber-optic 7XV5107-0AA00 are required to avoid optical saturation of the
module 820 nm will be delivered in combination with an external
repeater.
receiver element.
15
1 7SA522 distance protection relay for transmission lines
Functions 1 and Port E

7SA522 - -
see
Trip mode 3-pole; Port E: empty 0 next
Trip mode 3-pole; BCD-coded output for fault location, Port E: empty 1 page
2 Trip mode 1 and 3-pole; Port E: empty
Trip mode 1 and 3-pole; BCD-coded output for fault location, Port E: empty
4
5
With Port E 9 N
3 Functions 1
Trip mode 3-pole 0
Trip mode 3-pole; BCD-coded output for fault location 1
Trip mode 1 and 3-pole 4
4 Trip mode 1 and 3-pole; BCD-coded output for fault location 5
Port E
Protection data interface:
5 FO5: Optical 820 nm, 2 ST connectors, FO cable length up to 1.5 km

for communication networks1) or direct connection via multi-mode FO cable A
FO6: Optical 820 nm, 2 ST connectors, FO cable length up to 3.5 km
for direct connection via multi-mode FO cable B
FO17: Optical 1300 nm, LC-Duplex connector
6 FO cable length up to 24 km for direct connection via mono-mode FO cable2) G
FO cable length up to 60 km or direct connection via mono-mode FO cable2) 3) H
7 FO cable length up to 100 km for direct connection via mono-mode FO cable2) 4)
FO30: Optical 820 nm, 2 ST connectors, length of optical bre up to 1.5 km for multimode bre,
J
for communication networks with IEEE C37.94 interface or direct optical bre connection
(not available for surface-mounted housing) S
10
11
12
13
14 1) Suitable communication converters 7XV5662 3) For distances less than 25 km, two optical attenuators
(optical to G703.1/X21/ RS422 or optical to pilot wire) 7XV5107-0AA00 are required to avoid optical saturation of the
see "Accessories". receiver element.
2) For surface-mounting housing applications an internal ber-optic 4) For distances less than 50 km, two optical attenuators
15 module 820 nm will be delivered in combination with an external
repeater.
7XV5107-0AA00 are required to avoid optical saturation of the
receiver element.


7SA522 distance protection relay for transmission lines
Functions 2
7SA522 - -
1
Distance protection characteristic Power swing detection Parallel line
(ANSI 21, 21N) (ANSI 68, 68T) compensation
Quadrilateral
Quadrilateral and / or MHO
C
E
2
Quadrilateral F
Quadrilateral and / or MHO H
Quadrilateral
Quadrilateral and / or MHO
1)
1)
K
M
3
Quadrilateral 1) N
Quadrilateral and / or MHO 1) Q
Functions 3
4
Auto-reclosure Synchro-check Breaker failure protection Over- / undervoltage
(ANSI 79) (ANSI 25) (ANSI 50BF) protection (ANSI 27, 59)
Over- / underfrequency
protection (ANSI 81)
A
5
B
C
D 6
E
F
G
H 7
J
K

L
M
8
N
P

Q
R
9
Functions 4
Direction ground(earth)-fault Measured values, extended
protection, grounded (earthed)
networks (ANSI 50N, 51N, 67N)
Min, max, mean 10
0
1

4
5
11
12
13
14
1) Only with position 7 of Order No. = 1 or 5. 15

1 DIGSI 4
Basis

Professional
7XS5402-0AA00
Complete version:
4 displays),

6 SIGRA 4
7 other manufacturers (Comtrade format). Running under

ned in DIGSI Professional, but can be ordered additionally).

8 Cable between PC/notebook (9-pin connector) and protection

Manual for 7SA522
10 English, V4.61 and higher C53000-G1176-C155-5
German, V4.70 C53000-G1100-C155-8
11
12
13
14
15
Opto-electric communication converters

Optical to X21/RS422 or G703.1 7XV5662-0AA00
1
Optical to pilot wires 7XV5662-0AC00
Additional interface modules

2
3
4
Optical repeaters
LC-Duplex connector, 25 km 7XV5461-0BG00 5
6

package
Supplier Fig. 9
LSP2289-afp.eps
3-pin C73334-A1-C36-1 1 Siemens 6/78
Crimp CI2 0.5 to 1 mm2 0-827039-1 4000 AMP 1)

10
AMP 1)
0-827397-1
Type III+ 0.75 to 1.5 mm2 0-163083-7
1
4000 AMP 1) 11
0-163084-2 1 AMP 1)
LSP2090-afp.eps
LSP2091-afp.eps

For CI2
and matching female
0-734372-1
1-734387-1
1 AMP 1)
AMP 1)
12
Fig. 6/77 Fig. 6/78
19"-mounting rail C73165-A63-D200-1 1 Siemens 6/76
Short-circuit
links
For other terminals
C73334-A1-C33-1
C73334-A1-C34-1
1
1
Siemens
Siemens
6/79
6/80 13
LSP2093-afp.eps
LSP2092-afp.eps


14
Fig. 6/79 Fig. 6/80
Connection diagram, IEC
9 Fig. 6/81 Housing 1/2 x 19, basic version 7SA522x-xA, 7SA522x-xE and 7SA522x-xJ
with 8 binary inputs and 16 binary outputs, hardware version .../FF
10
11
12
13
14 Fig. 6/81a Additional setting by jumpers: Fig. 6/82 Serial interfaces

Separation of common circuit of BO8 to BO12 with
jumpers X80, X81, X82. Switching of BO13, BO14,
BO15 as NO contact or NC contact with jumpers.
15
4
Fig. 6/83a
Additional setting by jumpers:
Separation of common circuit
5
of BO8 to BO12 with jumpers
X80, X81, X82. Switching
of BO13, BO14, BO15 as NO
contact or NC contact with
jumpers.
6
10
11
12
13
1) High-speed trip outputs in versions 7SA522x-xN, 7SA522x-xQ, 7SA522x-xS. 14

Note: For serial interfaces see Figure 6/82.
Fig. 6/83 Housing x 19,medium version 7SA522x-xC, 7SA522x-xG, 7SA522x-xL, 7SA522x-xN, 7SA522x-xQ and
7SA522x-xS with 16 binary inputs and 24 binary outputs, hardware version .../FF 15
4
Fig. 6/84a
5 Additional setting by jumpers:
6 contact or NC contact with
jumpers.
10
11
12
13
1) High-speed trip outputs in
versions 7SA522x-xP,
7SA522x-xR, 7SA522x-xT.
14 Note: For serial interfaces
see Figure 6/82.
15 Fig. 6/84 Housing x 19, maximum version 7SA522x-xD, 7SA522x-xH, 7SA522x-xM, 7SA522x-xP, 7SA522x-xR and
7SA522x-xT with 24 binary inputs and 32 binary outputs, hardware version .../FF

Connection diagram, ANSI
4
Fig. 6/85a
5
jumpers.
6
10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 6/85 Housing x 19, basic version 7SA522x-xA, 7SA522x-xE and 7SA522x-xJ
with 8 binary inputs and 16 binary outputs, hardware version .../FF 15
4
Fig. 6/86a
6 contact or NC contact with
jumpers.
10
11
12
13
14 1) High-speed trip outputs in versions 7SA522x-xN, 7SA522x-xQ, 7SA522x-xS.

15 Fig. 6/86 Housing x 19,medium version 7SA522x-xC, 7SA522x-xG, 7SA522x-xL, 7SA522x-xN, 7SA522x-xQ and
7SA522x-xS with 16 binary inputs and 24 binary outputs, hardware version .../FF

4
Fig. 6/87a
5
jumpers.
6
10
11
12
13
1) High-speed trip outputs
in versions 7SA522x-xP,
7SA522x-xR, 7SA522x-xT.
Note: For serial interfaces see
Figure 6/82.
14
Fig. 6/87 Housing x 19, maximum version 7SA522x-xD, 7SA522x-xH and 7SA522x-xM
with 24 binary inputs and 32 binary outputs, hardware version ../FF 15
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Line Differential Protection
Page
SIPROTEC 7SD60
numerical pilot-wire current differential protection relay 7/3
SIPROTEC 4 7SD61 differential protection relay

for two line ends 7/17
SIPROTEC 4 7SD52/53
multi-end differential and distance
protection in one relay 7/43
7
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Line Differential Protection / 7SD60
SIPROTEC 7SD60 numerical pilot-wire current differential protection relay
Function overview
Differential protection relay for overhead lines and cables 1

Current differential protection with external summation cur-
rent transformer 4AM49 (87L)
Suitable for use for distances of approx. 12 km max. via two
pilot wires (1200 loop resistance) 2
Differential protection can be combined with an overcurrent
release
Pilot-wire monitoring function
Bidirectional remote tripping
3
LSP2001-afpen.tif
Circuit-breaker intertripping at the remote station
Seal-in of the TRIP command until manual reset (Lockout
function) 4
Minimal current transformer requirements due to integrated
saturation detector
Restraint against inrush/undelayed trip for high differential
fault currents 5
Emergency overcurrent protection

Fig. 7/1 SIPROTEC 7SD600 numerical current differential Local and remote current 6
protection relay
Differential current
Restraint current
Description
The 7SD600 relay is a numerical current differential protection
Hardware
relay, simple to set, operating in conjunction with the remote
station via a two pilot-wire link. It is connected to the primary Firmware
current transformers via an external summation current
transformer. The primary eld of application of the relay is
Spill current supervision 8
protection of short overhead lines and cables with two line ends. Communication
However, transformers and reactors may be located within the Via personal computer and DIGSI 3
protection zone. Features like inrush restraint, lockout, modern
PCM-intertrip facilities, full self-monitoring facilities, local and
Via RS232RS485 converter 9
remote interrogation are integrated in the unit. With modem
With substation control system via IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
2 kV isolated RS485 interface, bus connection possible
10
Hardware
Local operation by means of integrated keyboard 11

LCD display for settings and analysis
Housing
Flush-mounting housing 19" 7XP20
Surface-mounting housing 19" 7XP20 12
13
14
15
Application
1 The 7SD60 relay is a numerical current differential protection

relay, simple to set, and is operated in conjunction with the
remote station via a two pilot-wire link.
2 It is connected to the primary current transformers via an exter-

nal summation current transformer. The unit operates internally
on the summated current taken from the secondary side of the
summation current transformer. The link to the remote station
is realized by means of a pair of symmetrical pilot wires allowing
LSP2002-afpen.tif
3 distances of up to approximately 12 km. Adaptation to the pilot-
wire resistance is effected by means of software within the unit.
Therefore, matching is not necessary.
4 The primary eld of application of the unit is protection of

short overhead lines and cables with two line ends. However,
transformers and reactors may be located within the protection
zone. The unit can be tted with inrush restraint in such cases.
Fig. 7/2 Rear view ush-mountig housing
A differential protection instantaneous tripping stage is also
5 provided in this case. Vector group adaptation is not effected
inside the unit and must, if necessary, be effected by means of a
Construction
matching current transformer.
The 7SD60 can be tted with a pilot-wire monitoring function. In The compact 7SD60 protection relay contains all the compo-
6 addition to monitoring the pilot-wire link to the remote station, nents for:
this also includes bidirectional circuit-breaker intertripping and a Measured-value acquisition and evaluation
remote tripping command.
Operation and LCD indications
7 If the differential protection becomes inactive due to a pilot-wire

failure, the relay has an emergency overcurrent function as an
Alarm and command contacts
option. It includes one denite-time overcurrent stage and can
be delayed. Data transmission via the RS485 bus interface to DIGSI or a
substation control system
8 This unit substitutes the 7SD24 steady-state differential protec-
tion. However, direct interoperation with the 7SD24 is not
Auxiliary voltage supply
possible. On replacement of a 7SD24, its external summation The primary current transformers are connected to the 4AM49
current transformer can be used as the input transformer for the summation current transformer. At the rated current value
9 7SD60. of either 1 A or 5 A, the latter outputs a current of 20 mA

which is measured by the 7SD60 unit. The summation current
ANSI Protection functions transformer is supplied together with the protection unit, if so
I for lines/cables, transformers ordered.
87L/87T
10 85 Intertrip, remote trip The unit can be supplied in two different housings. The one for
ush mounting in a panel or cubicle has connection terminals at
86 Lockout function the rear.
Single-stage, denite-time emergency The version for panel surface mounting is supplied with terminals
11 50
overcurrent protection accessible from the front. Alternatively, the unit can be supplied
with two-tier terminals arranged above and below the unit.
12
13
14
15
Mode of operation of the differential 1

protection relay
An external summation current trans-
former 4AM49, which can be supplied
as an accessory either in a 1 A or a 5 A 2
version, allows any secondary currents of
the primary current transformers (see Fig.
7/3) to be connected. The standard ratios
of the three primary windings of the sum- 3
mation current transformer are IL1:IL2:IL3
= 5:3:4 (IL1:IL3:IL0 = 2:1:3) (see Fig. 7/6).
In consequence, the sensitivity of the
tripping characteristic for single-phase
faults is appreciably higher compared to
4
that for two-phase and three-phase faults.
Since the current on such faults is often
weak, an amplication factor of 1.7 to
2.8 referred to the symmetrical response 5
value is achieved.
Fig. 7/3 7SD60 line differential protection for operation with two pilotwires
Other sensitivity values can, however, be
obtained by altering the connections at
the summation CT.
6
With a symmetrical three-phase current of
1 x IN, the secondary current of the sum-
mation current transformer is 20 mA. 7
The 7SD60 measures and digitalizes the
current IM1 of the local relay by means of
a sensitive current input (see Fig. 7/6).
A voltage drop occurs across a xed-value 8
resistor Rb installed in the unit. With a
through-owing load or a through-ow-
ing short-circuit current, the voltage drop
at both ends of the line is approximately
equal but of opposite polarity, so that no
9
current ows through the pilot wire. On
occurrence of an internal fault, different
values are obtained for the voltage drop
across Rb at both ends. In consequence,
10
a current Ia ows through the pilot wire,
which is measured by means of the
current transformer. In conjunction with
the pilot- wire resistance (available as a 11
parameter in the unit) and the internal
resistor Ra, it is possible to calculate the Fig. 7/4 Trip characteristic of differential protection
differential current from the measured
current owing through the pilot wire. As
soon as an adjustable value is reached, the protection relay trips
12
the line at both ends. is only necessary to set the tripping value IDiff>, although the
standard setting is suitable for most applications. It should be
Matching of the sensitivity of the unit for different values of
pilot-wire resistance is effected by the rmware of the unit dur-
parameterized according to the rated current of the line; sensi-
tive setting is possible even when the current transformer rated 13
ing parameter setting, so that time-consuming matching of the currents and the line rated currents differ by as much as a factor
pilot-wire resistance is unnecessary. of 2. Differences in the current transformation ratios at the ends
of the line must, however, be compensated for by means of
Trip characteristic of the differential protection relay
external matching current transformers. 14
The main function of the unit is current comparison protection.
In some cases, this can be realized by the summation current
The trip characteristic is xed and takes into account both the
transformer.
linear and the non-linear errors of the current transformers. It
15
Overcurrent release / differential current monitoring Emergency overcurrent protection
1 The differential protection function can be combined with an

additional overcurrent release. To this end, the criteria overcur-
If the differential protection becomes inactive due to a pilot-wire
failure or an internal or external blocking of the differential func-
rent and differential current are linked logically so that a TRIP tion, the relay offers a single-stage, denite-time overcurrent
command is given out by the differential function only when a function. It works with the local owing operational current IM1.
differential current and an overcurrent coexist. The pickup value and the delay time are settable via parameters
2 By this means it is often possible to avoid malfunctioning due to
in the device.
pilot-wire short-circuit or wire-break of a connection between a Circuit-breaker intertripping / remote tripping
current transformer and the summation current transformer. For
this purpose, the 7SD60 is tted with an additional differential Normally, tripping is effected at both stations as a result of
3 current monitoring function, which can effectively block the current comparison. Tripping at one end only can occur when
differential protection after a delay of some seconds on reaching an overcurrent release is used or with short-circuit currents only
of an adjustable value of differential current in conjunction with slightly above the tripping value. Circuit-breaker intertripping
simultaneous operational current IM1 within the load range. can be parameterized in the unit with integral pilot-wire moni-
4 Saturation detector
tor, so that denite tripping at both ends of the line is assured.
In addition, it is possible by means of a binary input to output
Improved stability on single-ended saturation of the primary a remote tripping command for both directions. The command
current transformers is ensured by means of an integrated satu- transmission time is approximately 80 ms.
5 ration detector. It provides additional stability during external
faults. 5 ms are enough time to measure an external fault due to Lockout of the TRIP command with manual reset
a high restraint and small differential current. Indication is done The TRIP command can be locked-out after tripping. In particu-
within the additional restraint area (see Fig. 7/4). If due to CT lar, in the case of transformers within the protection zone, reclo-
6 saturation the differential current ows into the trip area, the
differential trip is blocked for a certain time. Transient saturation
sure of the line is normally effected only after the cause of the
fault has been ascertained by the user. Manual reset is possible
of current transformers caused by decaying DC components in either via the operator panel (with password) or via a binary
the short-circuit current can thus be recognized. input. As a result, premature reclosure of the circuit-breaker is
7 As a result, the requirements on the current transformers are
reduced so that they are only required to conduct the steady-
prevented. The logic state of the TRIP command remains stored
even during failure of the auxiliary supply voltage, so that it is
state through-owing short-circuit current without saturation. still present on restoration of the auxiliary supply voltage.
Inrush restraint / instantaneous tripping stage

8 Pilot-wire link / pilot-wire monitoring
The link to the remote station comprises a symmetrical pair of Where transformers or reactors are located within the protection
wires (e.g. telephone lines). The maximum permissible distance zone, inrush restraint can be supplied as an option. This inrush
between two stations is approximately 12 km. 7XR9513 (20 kV) restraint evaluates the second harmonic of the differential
9 or 7XR9515 (5 kV) isolation transformers can be employed for

potential isolation against interference induced by longitudinal
current, which is typical for inrush phenomena. If the second
harmonic value of the differential current referred to the
voltages where the pilot wires run parallel to power cables over fundamental frequency exceeds a preset value, tripping by the
long distances. differential protection is blocked. In the case of high-current
internal faults, whose amplitude exceeds the inrush current
10 Since the pilot wires form an integral part of the differential
protection, these are normally monitored continuously. This
peak, tripping can be carried out instantaneously.
function is available as an option. To achieve this, 2 kHz pulses Vector group adaptation is not effected inside the unit and must,
with a dened pulse width ratio are transmitted to the remote where necessary, be brought about by means of an external
11 relay via the pilot wires. Detection of a fault in the pilot-wire link
results in blocking of the differential protection.
matching transformer scheme.
12
13
14
15
Features
Features
Serial data transmission 1

As standard, the unit is tted with an
RS485 interface. This is suitable for
connection to a bus and allows up to
32 devices to be connected via a two- 2
wire serial interface (use of a third core
for ground is recommended). A PC is
connected via this interface using an
RS232RS485 converter, thus allowing 3
the DIGSI operator program to be used,
by means of which PC-aided planning, Fig. 7/5 Bus communication via RS485 interface
parameter setting and evaluation can be For convenient wiring of RS485 bus, use bus cable system 7XV5103
performed. By this readout, it is also pos-
sible to output the fault recordings stored
(see part 13 of this catalog). 4
by the unit on occurrence of faults.
Using an RS485820 nm optical converter as an accessory
(7XV5650, 7XV5651), it is possible to provide an interference-
free and isolated link to a central control system or a remote
5
control system employing DIGSI, thus allowing economically
viable congurations to be used, e.g. for remote diagnostics.
The serial interface can also be set to the IEC 60870-5-103 6
protocol (VDEW - Association of German Utilities - interface),
thus allowing the unit to be integrated in a substation control
system. However, only 2 messages (ready for operation and the
trip signal) and the fault recording are available. 7
For this reason, it is recommended to use the 7SD610 unit com-
bined with an external communication converter for pilot wires
in those cases in which integration in the substation control
system is a prime consideration. 8
10
11
12
13
14
15
Connection diagrams
Connection diagrams
5
Fig. 7/6 Standard connection L1-L3-E,
suitable for all types of networks
9
Fig. 7/7 Protection conguration with main
10 (7SD60) and backup overcurrent
(7SJ60) protection
11
12
13
14
Fig. 7/8 Typical circuit for auxiliary voltage
15 supply

Technical data
General unit data Binary inputs

Input circuits
Rated current IN 20 mA without summation current
Number
Operating voltage
3 (marshallable)
DC 24 to 250 V 1
transformer 1 or 5 A with summation Current consumption, energized Approx. 2.5 mA
current transformer independent of operating voltage
Rated frequency fN 50/60 Hz parameterizable Pick-up threshold reconnectable By solder bridges
Thermal overload capability
current path
Rated aux. voltages DC 24/48/60 V
Vpick-up DC 17 V
2
Continuous 2 x IN Vdrop-off < DC 8 V
For 10 s 30 x IN Rated aux. voltages
For 1 s 100 x IN
Auxiliary voltage
DC 110/125/220/250 V
Vpick-up DC 74 V 3
Vdrop-off < DC 45 V
Auxiliary voltage via integrated
DC/DC converter Unit design
Housing 7XP20
Rated auxiliary DC voltage/
permissible variations
DC 24/48 V
DC 60/110/125 V
DC 220/250 V
/ DC 19 to 58 V
/ DC 48 to 150 V
/ DC 176 to 300 V
Dimensions For dimensions, see dimension 4
drawings, part 14
Superimposed AC voltage Vaux 12 % at rated voltage Weight
Peak-to-peak 6 % at limits of admissible voltage With housing for surface
Power consumption
Quiescent Approx. 2 W
mounting
With housing for ush
Approx. 4.5 kg
5
Energized Approx. 4 W mounting/cubicle mounting Approx. 4 kg
Bridging time during failure/ 50 ms (at Vaux AC/DC 100 V) Degree of protection acc. to
short-circuit of auxiliary voltage 20 ms (at Vaux 2 DC 4 V) EN 60529
Rated auxiliary voltage AC Vaux/ AC 115 V / AC 88 to 133 V Housing
Terminals
IP 51
IP 21
6
permissible variations
Command contacts Serial interface (Isolated)
Standard RS485
Number of relays
Contacts per relay
2 (marshallable)
2 NO or 1 NO Test voltage DC 2.8 kV for 1 min 7
Switching capacity Connection Via wire to housing terminals,
Make 1000 W/VA 2 data transmission lines,
Break 30 W/VA 1 grounding cable for connection

to an RS485RS232 converter,
cables have to be shielded, 8
Permissible current screen has to be grounded
Continuous 5A Setting at supply: 9600 baud
For 0.5 s 30 A Baud rate Min. 1200 baud; max. 19200 baud
Signal contacts
Number of relays 3 (2 marshallable)
9
Contacts per relay 1 CO
Switching capacity
Make
Break
1000 W/VA
30 W/VA
10
Switching voltage AC/DC 250 V
Permissible current 5A
11
12
13
14
15
Technical data
Electrical tests EMC tests for interference emission; type tests
1 Specication
Standards IEC 60255-5 ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0
Standard
Conducted interference voltage
EN 50081- (generic standard)
150 kHz to 30 MHz
on lines, auxiliary voltage only,
Insulation tests
EN 55022, VDE 0878 Part 22,
Voltage test (routine test) CISPR 22, limit value, limit class B
2 All circuits except DC voltage

supply
2 kV (r.m.s.), 50 Hz
Interference eld strength
EN 55011, VDE 0875 Part 11,
30 to 1000 MHz
and RS485 DC 2.8 kV
IEC CISPR 11, limit value,
Only DC voltage supply and
limit class A
RS485
3 Impulse voltage test (type test)

All circuits, class III 5 kV (peak), 1.2/50 s, 0.5 J; Mechanical dynamic tests
3 positive and 3 negative impulses Vibration, shock stress and seismic vibration
at intervals of 5 s
During operation
Test crosswise:
4 Measurement circuits, pilot
wire connections, power supply,
Standards
Vibration
IEC 60255-21; IEC 60068-2
Sinusoidal
binary inputs, class III, IEC 60255-21-1, class I 10 to 60 Hz; 0.035 mm amplitude;
(no tests crosswise over open IEC 60068-2-6 60 to 150 Hz; 0.5 g acceleration;
contacts, RS458 interface sweep rate 1 octave/min; 20 cycles
5 terminals)
EMC tests for noise immunity; type tests Shock
in 3 orthogonal axes
Half-sine
Standards IEC 60255-6; IEC 60255-22 IEC 60255-21-2, class I 5 g acceleration, duration 11 ms,
(international product standard) 3 shocks in each direction of
6 EN 50082-2 (generic standard)

VDE 0435, Part 303 (German Seismic vibration
3 orthogonal axes
Sinusoidal
product standard) IEC 60255-21-3, class I 1 to 8 Hz; 3.5 mm amplitude
High-frequency test 2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz; = 15 ms; IEC 60068-2-6 (horizontal axis)
IEC 60255-22-1, 400 surges; duration 2 s 1 to 8 Hz; 1.5 mm amplitude
7 VDE 0435 Part 303; class III
Electrostatic discharge 4/6 kV contact discharge;
(vertical axis)
(horizontal axis)
IEC 60255-22-2, EN 61000-4-2; 8 kV air discharge; both polarities; 8 to 35 Hz; 0.5 g acceleration
class III 150 pF; Ri = 330 (vertical axis)
8 Irradiation with RF eld,

non-modulated
10 V/m 27 to 500 MHz Sweep rate 1 octave/min
1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes
IEC 60255-22-3 class III During transport
Irradiation with RF eld, 10 V/m 80 to 1000 MHz; AM 80 %;
amplitude-modulated 1 kHz
9 IEC 61000-4-3; class III
Irradiation with RF eld, 10 V/m, 900 MHz; repetition rate
Vibration
IEC 60255-21-1, class II
Sinusoidal
5 Hz to 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude
IEC 60068-2-6 8 Hz to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration
pulse-modulated 200 Hz, duty cycle 50 %
IEC 61000-4-3/ENV 50204;
class III
10 Fast transients/bursts 2 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; burst length =
Shock
IEC 60255-21-2, class I
Half-sine
IEC 60255-22-3, IEC 61000-4-4, 15 ms; repetition rate 300 ms; both
3 shocks
class IV polarities; Ri = 50 ; duration 1 min
IEC 60068-2-27 Shocks in each direction of
Line-conducted RF 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 3 orthogonal axes
11 amplitude-modulated
AM 80 %; 1 kHz
Continuous shock
IEC 60255-21-2, class I
Half-sine
Power frequency magnetic eld 30 A/m; 50 Hz, continuous IEC 60068-2-29 1000 shocks in each direction of
IEC 61000-4-8; class IV; 300 A/m for 3 s; 50 Hz; 0.5 mT, 3 orthogonal axes
EN 60255-6 50 Hz
12 Oscillatory surge withstand
2.5 to 3 kV (peak), 1 MHz to
1.5 MHz decaying oscillation;
(common mode) 50 shots per s; duration 2 s;
Ri = 150 to 200

4 to 5 kV; 10/150 ns; 50 shots per s
both polarities; duration 2 s;
(common mode) Ri = 80
Radiated electromagnetic interfe- 10 to 20 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz;
rence ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 amplitude and pulse-modulated
14 High-frequency test
Document 17C (SEC) 102
2.5 kV (peak, alternating polarity)
decaying oscillation; Ri= 50
15
Technical data
Climatic stress test Pilot-wire monitoring and

intertripping (optional)
Temperatures
Standards EN 60255-6, IEC 60255-6
Monitoring signal
Alarm signal delay
2000 Hz, pulse-code modulation
1 to 60 s (step 1 s)
1
DIN VDE 0435 Part 303
Inherent delay time of Approx. 65 ms
Recommended temperature -5 to +55 C (>55 C/131 F
intertripping
decreased display contrast)
Limit temperature
During service -20 to +70 C - 4 to +158 F
Extension of the intertripping
signal 0 to 5 s (step 0.01 s
2
During storage -25 to +55 C -13 to +131 F Emergency overcurrent protection
During transport -25 to +70 C -13 to +158 F Setting ranges
(Storage and transport with
standard works packing!)
Overcurrent pickup value
IM1 / INline 0.1 to 15 (step 0.1) 3
Humidity Delay time 0.0 to 60 s (step 0.01 s )
It is recommended to arrange the Mean value per year 75 % relative Remote trip
units in such a way that they are humidity, on 30 days a year up to
95 % relative humidity, condensati-
on not permissible!
Note Tripping of the remote end
circuit-breaker for units with
pilot-wire monitoring only
4
that could cause condensation
Setting ranges
Prolongation time for 0 to 60 s (step 0.01 s)
Functions
Line differential protection
transmission to remote station
Delay time for reception from 0 to 60 s (step 0.01 s) 5
the remote station
Note All current values refer to the Prolongation time for reception 0 to 60 s (step 0.01 s)
symmetrical current using standard from the remote station
Setting ranges
connection
Tolerances
Delay time/release delay
1 % and 10 ms respectively 6
Current threshold I1 I/IN Line: 0 to 1.5 (step 0.01)
(release by local station current) Inherent delay
Differential current I/IN Line: 0.5 to 2.5 (step 0.01) Transmission time without delay Approx. 80 ms
Delay time t
Restraint by 2nd harmonic
0 to 60 s (step 0.01 s) Lockout function
Lockout seal-in of trip command For differential protection and
7
(see Fig. 7/4) remote trip until reset
2fN /fN 10 to 80 % Lockout reset By means of binary input and/or local
Reset ratio Approx. 0.7 drop-off ratio
Inherent delays
(IRestraint = 0)
operator panel/DIGSI
8
TRIP time for two-end supply Approx. 20 to 28 ms without Additional functions
at 4 x set value restraint by 2nd harmonic Operational measured values
Approx. 32 to 42 ms with restraint
by 2nd harmonic
Operational currents
Measurement range
I1, I2, IDiff, Irestraint
0 to 240 % IN 9
Drop-off time Approx. 35 ms Tolerance (I1) 3 % of rated value or of measured
Tolerances at preset values under value
reference conditions Fault event recording Storage of the events relating to the
Local station current threshold
Differential current
3 % of setpoint, min. 0.02 x IN
5 % of setpoint, min. 0.02 x IN Time-tagging
last 8 faults 10
Inuence parameters Resolution for operational 1s
Auxiliary supply voltage 1% events
0.8 Vaux/VauxN x 1.15 for fault events 1 ms
Temperature in range
0 C amb 40 C
1 %/10 K Fault recording (max. 8 faults) 11
Storage time (from response Total of 5 s max., pre-trigger and
Frequency in range 0.9 f/fN 1.1 4% or trip command) post-fault time settable
Pilot wires Maximum length per
Number 2
Symmetric telephone pairs are
recording Tmax
Pre-trigger time Tpre
0.30 to 5.00 s (step 0.01 s)
0.05 to 0.50 s (step 0.01 s)
12
recommended with loop resistance Post-fault time Tpost 0.05 to 0.50 s (step 0.01 s)
73 /km and capacitance 60 nF/km Time resolution at 50 Hz 1 instantaneous value per 1.66 ms
Core-to-core asymmetry at 800 Hz Max. 10-3 Time resolution at 60 Hz 1 instantaneous value per 1.38 ms
Maximum loop resistance 1200 Circuit-breaker test Using test circuit 13
Permissible induced longitudinal
voltages
On direct connection of the 1.2 kV, however, max. 60 % of
pilot wires
For connection via isolating
the test voltage of the pilot wires
1.2 kV, however, max. 60 % of 14
transformer the test voltage of the pilot wires
and max. 60 % of the test voltage
of the isolating transformers
15
Technical data
4AM4930 summation current transformer CE conformity
1 Power consumption in the circuit with standard connection L1-L3-E

(Fig. 7/6) referred to the through-owing rated current 7SD600 unit
in operation).
in phase (approx. VA) 2004/108/EG previous 89/336/EEC) and electrical equipment designed
IN L1 L2 L3 previous 73/23/EEC).
2 1A Single-phase 2.2 1.3 1.7 This unit conforms to the international standard IEC 60255, and the
Symmetrical three-phase 0.6 0.2 0.35 German standard DIN 57435/Part 303 (corresponding to VDE 0435/
Part 303).
2A Single-phase 3.5 1.5 2.2
3 Symmetrical three-phase 0.7 0.2 0.5 Further applicable standards: ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0 and C37.90.1.
This conformity is the result of a test that was performed by
Connections 4AM4930-7DB 4AM4930-6DB Siemens AG in accordance with Article 10 of the Council Directive
CT rated current IN = 1 A IN = 5 A complying with the generic standards EN 50081-2 and EN 50082-2
for the EMC Directive and standard EN 60255-6 for the low-voltage
4 Number of turns
Primary windings A to B 5 1
Directive.
C to D 10 2
E to F 15 3
G to H 30 6
5 I to K
K to L
30
30
6
6
L to M 60 12
Secondary windings Y to Z 1736 1736
6 Thermal rating
Continuous
A to B
C to D
4.5
4.5
20
20
current E to F 4.5 20
in Amperes G to H 4.5 20
I to K 1.2 6.5
7 K to L
L to M
1.2
1.2
6.5
6.5
Y to Z 0.2 0.2
Secondary rated Y to Z 20 mA 20 mA
8 current with standard

connection
(see Fig. 7/6)
and symmetrical
3-phase current
9 Requirements for the

current transformers K'ssc
I scc max (ext. fault)
I pn
(CT)
and:
(
3 K' ssc I pn ) 4
10
(
4 K' ssc I pn )
end2
end1

3
K' ssc1 = effective symmetrical short-circuit

current factor end 1
11 K' ssc2 = effective symmetrical short-circuit

current factor end 2
Isccmax = maximum symmetrical short-circuit
current
Ipn = CT rated primary current
12
13
14
15

7SD60 numerical pilot-wire current comparison protection relay
Rated current; rated frequency

7SD600 - A 0- DA0
1
20 mA, 50/60 Hz; without external summation current transformer 0
1 A, 50/60 Hz; with external summation CT 4AM4930-7DB00-0AN2 1
5 A, 50/60 Hz; with external summation CT 4AM4930-6DB00-0AN2 5 2
DC 24, 48 V 2
DC 60, 110, 125 V
DC 220, 250 V, AC 115 V, 50/60 Hz
4
5
3
Unit design
For panel surfacemounting with terminals at the side B
with terminals on top and bottom D 4
For panel ushmounting or cubicle mounting E
Operating language
English alternatively either German or Spanish can be selected 0 5
Scope of functions
Differential protection 0
Differential protection, inrush restraint
Differential protection, pilot-wire monitoring, remote trip
1
2
6
Differential protection, pilot-wire monitoring, remote trip, inrush restraint 3
10
11
12
13
14
15
1 DIGSI 4
Basis

Professional
7XS5402-0AA00
Complete version:
4 displays),
SIGRA 4
5 Software for graphic visualization, analysis and evaluation of
6 Authorization by serial number. On CD-ROM. 7XS5410-0AA00
Connecting cable
Cable between PC/notebook (9-pin connector)
7 and protection unit (9-pin connector)

(contained in DIGSI 4, but can be ordered additionally) 7XV5100-4
Voltage transformer miniature circuit-breaker

8 overcurrent trip 6 A 3RV1611-1AG14
Converter R232 (V.24)RS485*

With connecting cable1m, PC adapter,
with plug-in power supply unit AC 230 V 7XV5700-0001)
9 With plug-in power supply unit AC 110 V 7XV5700-1001)
Converter RS485FO
Rated auxiliary voltage DC 24 to 250 V and AC 250 V
10 Single optical interface

Double optical interface (cascadable)
7XV5650-0BA00
7XV5651-0BA00
Summation current transformer

1 A, 50/60 Hz, for 7SD600 4AM4930-7DB00-0AN2
11 5 A, 50/60 Hz, for 7SD600 4AM4930-6DB00-0AN2
Isolating transformer
Up to 20 kV 7XR9513
12 Up to 5 kV 7XR9515
Manual for 7SD60

English E50417-G1176-C069-A3
13
14
1) Possible versions see part 13.
* RS485 bus system up to 115 kbaud
RS485 bus cable and adaptor
15 7XV5103- AA ; see part 13.

Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 7/9 Connection diagram of the 7SD60 current differential protection 15

10
11
12
13
14
15
SIPROTEC 4 7SD61 differential protection relay for two line ends
Function overview
Differential protection for universal use with power lines and
cables on all voltage levels with phase-segregated measure-
ment (87L)
Two line ends capability 2
Suitable for transformers in protected zones (87T)
Restricted ground-fault protection (87N) if a transformer is
within the protection zone
Well-suited for serial compensated lines
3
LSP2247-afpen.tif
Two independent differential stages:
one stage for sensitive measuring for high-resistance faults
and one stage for high-current faults and fast fault clearance 4
Breaker-failure protection (50BF)
Phase and ground overcurrent protection with directional
element (50, 50N, 51, 51N, 67, 67N)
Phase-selective intertripping (85) 5
Overload protection (49)
Fig. 7/10 SIPROTEC 4 7SD61 differential protection relay Over/underfrequency protection (81O/U) 6
Auto-reclosure single/three-pole (79)
Control functions
Description
Command and inputs for control of CB and disconnectors
(isolators)
7
The 7SD610 relay is a differential protection relay suitable for all
types of applications and incorporating all those functions
required for differential protection of lines, cables and trans-
formers. Transformers and compensation coils within the
differential protection zone are protected by means of integrated
8
functions, which were previously to be found only in transformer 8 oscillographic fault records
differential protection. It is also well-suited for complex applica-
CT-secondary current supervision
tions such as series and parallel compensation of lines and
cables. Event logging / fault logging 9
It is designed to provide differential and directional back-up Switching statistics
protection for all voltage levels and types of networks. The relay
Front design
features high speed and phase-selective short-circuit measure-
ment. The unit is thus suitable for single-phase and three-phase User-friendly local operation 10
fault clearance. PC front port for convenient relay setting
Digital data communication for differential current measure- Function keys and 8 LEDs for local alarm
ment is effected via ber-optic cables, networks or pilot wires
connections, so that the line ends can be quite far apart. The
Communication interfaces 11
serial protection interface (R2R interface) of the relay can exibly 1 serial protection data (R2R) interface
be adapted to the requirements of all existing communication Front interface for PC connection
media. If the communication method is changed, exible retro-
tting of communication modules to the existing conguration
System interface
IEC 61850 Ethernet
12
is possible. IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
Apart from the main protection function, i.e. the differential pro- PROFIBUS-DP, DNP 3.0 and MODBUS
tection, the 7SD610 has a full range of congurable emergency
and / or back-up protection functions such as phase and ground
Service / modem interface (rear) 13
Time synchronization via IRIG-B, DCF77 or system interface
overcurrent protection with directional elements if voltage
transformers are connected. Overload, under- and over-voltage/ Features
frequency and breaker-failure protection round off the functional
scope of the 7SD610.
Browser-based commissioning tool 14
Direct connection to digital communication networks
15
Application
6 Fig. 7/11
Application ANSI Protection functions

I for lines / cables
7 The 7SD610 relay is a differential protection relay suitable for
all types of applications and incorporating all those functions
87L
87T I for lines / cables with transformers

required for differential protection of lines, cables and trans-
87N Restricted ground-fault protection
formers.
8 Transformers and compensation coils within the differential
protection zone are protected by means of integrated functions,
85 Phase-selective intertrip, remote trip
which were previously to be found only in transformer differ- 86 Lockout function

ential protection. It is also well-suited for complex applications
50/50N Overcurrent protection
such as series and parallel compensation of lines and cables.
9 It is designed to provide protection for all voltage levels and
51/51N/67/67N
with directional elements
types of networks; two line ends may lie within the protection 50HS Instantaneous high-current tripping
zone. The relay features very high-speed and phase-selective (switch-onto-fault)
10 short-circuit measurement. The unit is thus suitable for single

and three-phase fault clearance. The necessary restraint current
79 Single or three-pole auto-reclosure
with new adaptive technology
for secure operation is calculated from the current transformer 49 Overload protection
data by the differential protection unit itself.
50BF Breaker-failure protection
11 Digital data communication for differential current measure-

ment is effected via ber-optic cables, digital communication 59/27 Overvoltage / undervoltage protection
networks or pilot wires, so that the line ends can be quite far Overfrequency / underfrequency protection
81O/U
apart. Thanks to special product characteristics, the relay is
12 particularly suitable for use in conjunction with digital com-
munication networks.
74TC
The units measure the delay time in the communication network

and adaptively match their measurements accordingly. The units
13 can be operated through pilot wires or twisted telephone pairs
at typical distances of 8 km by means of special converters.
The serial communication interfaces for data transmission
between the ends are replaceable by virtue of plug-in modules
14 and can easily be adapted to multi-mode and mono-mode
ber-optic cables and to leased lines within the communication
networks. Secure, selective and sensitive protection of two-end
lines can now be provided by means of these relays.
15
Application
Typical applications employing ber-

optic cables or communication net-
works 1
Five applications are shown in Fig. 7/12.
The 7SD610 differential protection relay
is connected to the current transformers
and to the voltage transformers at one
end of the cable, although only the
2
currents are required for the differential
protection function. The voltage connec-
tion improves, among other things, the
frequency measurement and allows the
3
measured values and the fault records
to be extended. Direct connection to the
other units is effected via mono-mode
ber-optic cables and is thus immune to 4
interference.
Five different modules are available.
In the case of direct connection via
ber-optic cables, data communication is
5
effected at 512 kbit/s and the command
time of the protection unit is reduced to
15 ms. Parallel compensation (for the
load currents) is provided within the 6
protection zone of the cable. By means
of the integrated inrush restraint, the
differential protection relay can tolerate
the surge on switching-on of the cable
and the compensation reactors, and thus
7
allows sensitive settings to be used under
load conditions.
7SD610 offers many features to reliably 8
and safely handle data exchange via com-
munication networks.
Depending on the bandwidth available a
communication converter for G703- 9
64 kbit/s or X21-64/128/512 kbit/s can max. 1.5 km with max. 1.5 km with
be selected. For higher communication 62.5 m/125 m 62.5 m/125 m
speed a communication converter with multi-mode ber multi-mode ber
10
SIPV6.010en.eps
MUX Communication MUX
G703-E1 (2,048 kbit/s) or G703-T1 network
IEEE C37.94 IEEE C37.94
(1,554 kbit/s) is available. Furthermore
the 7SD610 supports the IEEE C37.94
interface with 1/2/4 and 8 timeslots. FO30 with ST connectors FO30 with ST connectors
The connection to the communication 11

converter is effected via a cost-effective
820 nm interface with multi-mode ber.
This communication converter converts
the optical input to electrical signals in
accordance to the specied telecommuni-
12
cation interface.
The fourth example shows the relays
being connected via a twisted pilot 13
pair. Data exchange and transmission is
effected via pilot wires of a typical length
of 15 km. Here a transformer is in the pro-
tected zone. In this application, 7SD610
is set like a transformer differential
14
relay. Vector group matching and inrush
restraint is provided by the relay.
Fig. 7/12 Typical applications 15

A special feature of the unit is parameterization of the current

transformer data. The unit automatically calculates the
1 necessary restraint current by means of the previously entered
current transformer error. The unit thus adaptively matches
the working point on the tripping characteristic so that it is no
longer necessary for the user to enter characteristic settings.
2 Different current-transformer ratios may be employed at the
ends of the line. A mismatch of 1: 8 is permissible.
Differential protection tripping can be guarded with overcur-
rent pickup. In this case, pickup of the protection relay is
3
LSP2236-afpen.tif
initiated only on simultaneous presence of differential current
and overcurrent.
Easy to set tripping characteristic. Because the relay works
adaptively, only the set-point IDiff> (sensitive stage) and IDiff>>
4 (high-set current differential stage) must be set according to
the charge current of the line/cable.
Differential and restraint current are monitored continuously
during normal operation and are displayed as operational
Fig. 7/13
5 measured values.
High stability during external faults even with different current
Construction transformers saturation level. For an external fault, only 5 ms
of saturation-free time are necessary to guarantee the stability
6 The 7SD610 is available in a housing width of 1/3, referred to a
19 module frame system. The height is a uniform 245 mm for
of the differential protection.
Single-phase short-circuits within the protection zone can be
ush-mounting housings and 266 mm for surface-mounting cleared using a time delay, whereas multi-phase faults are
housings. cleared instantaneously. Because of this function, the unit is
7 All cables can be connected with or without cable ring lugs.
Plug-in terminals are available as an option, it is thus possible
optimally suited for applications in inductively compensated
networks, where differential current can occur as a result of
charge transfer phenomena on occurrence of a single-phase
to employ prefabricated cable harnesses. In the case of surface
ground fault within the protection zone, thus resulting in
mounting on a panel, the connection terminals are located
undesired tripping by the differential protection relay. Unde-
8 above and below in the form of screw-type terminals. The
communication interfaces are located on the same sides of the
sired tripping of the differential protection can be suppressed
by making use of the provision for introduction of a time delay
housing. For dimensions, please refer to Dimension drawings.
on occurrence of single-phase faults.
With transformers or compensation coils in the protection
9 Protection functions
zone, the sensitive response threshold IDiff> can be blocked by
an inrush detection function. Like in transformer differential
protection, it works with the second harmonic of the measured
Differential protection (ANSI 87L, 87T, 87N) current compared with the fundamental component. Blocking
10 The differential protection function has the following features: is cancelled when an adjustable threshold value of the short-
circuit current is reached, so that very high current faults are
Measurements are performed separately for each phase; thus
switched off instantaneously.
the trip sensitivity is independent of the fault type.
In the case of transformers within the protection zone, vector
An adaptive measurement method with high sensitivity for
11 differential fault currents below the rated current offers the
group adaptation and matching of different current trans-
former ratios is carried out within the unit. The interference
detection of highly resistive faults. This trip element uses
zero current, which ows through the grounded winding, is
special lters, which offer high security even with high level
eliminated from the differential current measurement. The
DC components in the short-circuit current. The trip time of
12 this stage is about 35 ms, the pickup value is about 10 % of
the rated current.
7SD610 thus behaves like a transformer differential relay
whose ends, however, can be quite far apart.
A more sensitive protection for transformers within the protec-
A high-set differential trip stage which clears differential fault
tion zone is given by measurement of the star-point current on
currents higher than the rated current within 15 ms offers
13 fast tripping time and high-speed fault clearance time. A
high-speed charging comparison method is employed for this
an grounded winding. Therefore the IE current measurement
input has to be used.
If the sum of the phase currents of a winding is compared with
function.
the measured star-point current, a sensitive ground-current
When a long line or cable is switched on at one end, transient differential protection (REF) can be implemented. This function
14 peaks of the charge current load the line. To avoid a higher
setting of the sensitive differential trip stage, this setpoint may
is substantially more sensitive than the differential protection
during faults to ground in a winding, detecting fault currents
be increased for a settable time. This offers greater sensitivity as small as 10 % of the transformer rated current.
under normal load conditions.
15
Characteristics of differential protection communciation through

the remote relay interfaces
The 7SD610 is ideally adapted for application in communication 1
networks.
The data required for measurement of differential currents and
numerous other variables are exchanged between the protection
units in the form of synchronous serial telegrams employing
2
the full duplex mode. The telegrams are secured using 32-bit
check-sums so that transmission errors in a communication
network are detected immediately. Moreover, each telegram
carries a time stamp accurate to a microsecond, thus allowing 3
measurement and monitoring of the continuous transmission
delay times.
Data communication is immune to electromagnetic interfer-
ence, since ber-optic cables are employed in the critical 4
region, e.g. in the relay house or relay room. Fig. 7/14 Tripping characteristic
Monitoring of each individual incoming telegram and of
overall communication between the units, no need of
supplementary equipment. The check sum (correctness of the
In addition, four high-speed remote commands are available,
which can be introduced either via a binary input or by means
5
telegram contents), the address of the neighboring unit and
of an internal event and then rapidly communicated to the
the transmission delay time of the telegram are monitored.
other end.
Unambiguous identication of each unit is ensured by assign-
ment of a settable communication address within a differential
Provided that the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are wired
to binary inputs at the line ends, the switching status of the
6
protection topology. Only those units mutually known to each
circuit-breakers is indicated and evaluated at the remote ends
other can cooperate. Incorrect interconnection of the com-
of the line. Otherwise the switching status is derived from the
munication links results in blocking of the protection system.
measured current.
Detection of telegrams, which are reected back to the trans-
Possible modes of operation of the differential protection section
7
mitting unit within the communication network.
Detection of path switching in a communication network. Special modes of operation such as the Commissioning mode
Automatic restraint of the protection function until measure- and Test operation are advantageous for commissioning and
ment of the parameters of the new communication link has
been completed.
servicing the units. 8
In general, an alarm indication is generated on interruption
Continuous measurement of the transmission delay time to of the communication links and an attempt is made to
the remote line end. Taking into account the delay time in re-establish the communication link. The units operate in the
differential current measurement and compensation thereof,
including monitoring of a settable maximum permissible delay
emergency mode, provided that these have been parameter-
ized.
9
time of 30 ms. The complete conguration can also be used in a testing
Generation of alarm signals on disturbed communication mode. The local end is in an operating mode, which, for
links. Statistical values for the percentage availability of the
communication links per minute and per hour are available as
example, allows the pickup values to be tested. The current
values received from the remote end of the line are set to
10
operational measured values. zero, so as to achieve dened test conditions. The remote-end
With a GPS high-precision 1-s pulse from a GPS receiver the unit ignores the differential currents, which occur as a result
relays can be syncronized with an absolute, exact time at each
line end. In this way, the delay in the receive and transmit path
of testing, and blocks differential protection and breaker
intertripping. It may optionally operate in the backup protec-
11
can be measured exactly. With this optional feature the relay tion mode.
can used in communication networks where this delay times Differential protection is activated in the commissioning mode.
are quite different. However, test currents injected at one end of the line and
which generate a differential current do not lead to output of 12
Phase-selective intertrip and remote trip/indications
a TRIP command by the differential protection or to breaker
Normally the differential current is calculated for each line end intertripping. All those indications that would actually occur
in conjunction with a genuine short-circuit are generated
nearly at the same time. This leads to fast and uniform tripping
times. Under weak infeed conditions, especially when the and displayed. TRIP commands can be issued by the backup 13
differential function is combined with an overcurrent pickup, a protection.
phase-selective intertrip offers a tripping of both line ends.
7SD610 has 4 intertrip signals which are transmitted in high-
speed mode (20 ms) to the other terminals. These intertrip 14
signals can also be initiated and transmitted by an external
relay via binary inputs. In cases where these signals are not
employed for breaker intertripping, other alternative informa-
tion can be rapidly transmitted to the remote end of the line. 15
1 A built-in overload protection with a current and thermal alarm

stage is provided for thermal protection of cables and transf-
ormers.
The trip time characteristics are exponential functions according
2 to IEC 60255-8. The preload is considered in the trip times for
overloads.
An adjustable alarm stage can initiate an alarm before tripping is
initiated.
3 Overcurrent protection
(ANSI 50, 50N, 51, 51N, 67, 67N)
The 7SD610 provides a three-stage overcurrent protection.
4 Two denite-time stages and one inverse-time stage (IDMT) are
available, separately for phase currents and for the ground cur-
rent. Two operating modes (backup, emergency) are selectable.
Two stages e.g. can run in backup mode, whereas the third stage
5 is congured for emergency operation, e.g. during interruption
of the protection communication and/or failure of the voltage in
t=
0,14
(I / I )
p
0,02
1
Tp
the VT secondary circuit. The secondary voltage failure can be

detected by the integrated fuse failure monitor or via a binary
Fig. 7/15 Inverse
input from a VT miniature circuit-breaker (VT m.c.b. trip).
6 The following ANSI/IEC inverse-time characteristics are available:
Inverse Auto-reclosure (ANSI 79)
Short inverse The 7SD610 relay is equipped with an auto-reclose function
7 Long inverse (AR). The function includes several operating modes:
Moderately inverse 3-pole auto-reclosure for all types of faults; different dead
times are available depending the type of fault
Very inverse
8 Extremely inverse
Denite inverse
phase faults
1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase faults and for 2-phase faults
If VTs are connected, separate stages with directional measure- without ground, no reclosing for multi-phase faults
ment are available, two denite-time and two inverse-time
9 stages (each for phase and ground). Using the forward pickup
1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase and 3-pole auto-reclosing for
multi-phase faults
indication as a signal to the remote end, a 100 % protection cov-
erage of the line can be operated in parallel to the differential
without ground and 3-pole auto-reclosure for other faults
protection.
10 Instantaneous high-speed switch-onto-fault overcurrent
protection (ANSI 50HS) binary inputs and outputs
Instantaneous tripping is possible when energizing a faulty Control of the integrated AR function by external protection
11 line. On large fault currents, the high-speed switch-onto-fault
overcurrent stage can initiate very fast three-pole tripping.
Adaptive auto-reclosure. Only one line end is closed after the
dead time. If the fault persists this line end is switched off.
Circuit-breaker closure onto a faulty line is also possible provided Otherwise the other line ends are closed via a command over
that the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts of the remote end are the communication links. This avoids stress when heavy fault
12 connected and monitored. If an overcurrent arises on closing currents are fed from all line ends again.
of the circuit-breaker at one end of a line (while the other Interaction with an external synchro-check
end is energized) the measured current can only be due to a Monitoring of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts
short-circuit. In this case, the energizing line end is tripped
13 instantaneously.
In the case of circuit-breaker closure, the auto-reclosure is
blocked at both ends of the line to prevent a further unsuccess-
ful closure onto a short-circuit. If circuit-breaker intertripping to
14 the remote end is activated, intertripping is also blocked.
15
In addition to the above-mentioned operating modes, several The 7SD610 is tted, in addition, with three two-stage under-
other operating principles can be employed by means of the voltage measuring elements:
integrated programmable logic (CFC). Phase-to-ground undervoltage 1
Integration of auto-reclosure in the feeder protection allows Phase-to-phase undervoltage
evaluation of the line-side voltages. A number of voltage- Positive-sequence undervoltage
dependent supplementary functions are thus available:
DLC
of a minimum current criterion and by means of binary inputs.
2
By means of dead-line check, reclosure is effected only when
the line is deenergized (prevention of asynchronous breaker Frequency protection (ANSI 81O/U)
closure).
ADT Frequency protection can be used for overfrequency and
underfrequency protection. Unwanted frequency changes in
3
The adaptive dead time is employed only if auto-reclosure
at the remote station was successful (reduction of stress on the network can be detected and the load can be removed at a
equipment). specied frequency setting. Frequency protection can be used
RDT
over a wide frequency range (45 to 55, 55 to 65 Hz). There are
4
Reduced dead time is employed in conjunction with auto- and each element can be delayed separately.
reclosure where no tele-protection method is employed:
When faults within the zone extension, but external to the
protected line, are switched off for rapid auto-reclosure (RAR),
the RDT function decides on the basis of measurement of the
5
return voltage from the remote station which has not tripped
whether or not to reduce the dead time.
Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF) 6

The 7SD610 relay incorporates a two-stage breaker failure
protection to detect the failure of tripping command execution,
for example, due to a defective circuit-breaker. The current
detection logic is phase-segregated and can therefore also be
7
used in single-pole tripping schemes. If the fault current is
not interrupted after a settable time delay has expired, a retrip
command or a busbar trip command is generated. The breaker
failure protection can be initiated by all integrated protection 8
functions as well as by external devices via binary input signals.

(ANSI 59, 27) 9
load or are only lightly loaded. The 7SD610 contains a number
of overvoltage measuring elements. Each measuring element
is of two-stage design. The following measuring elements are
available:
10
Zero-sequence overvoltage 11
input or be derived from the phase voltages.
Positive-sequence overvoltage of the local end or calculated
for the remote end of the line (compounding).
12
either at the local circuit-breaker or at the remote station by 13
14
15
Monitoring and supervision functions Lockout (ANSI 86)
1 The 7SD610 relay provides comprehensive monitoring functions

covering both hardware and software. Furthermore, the mea-
All binary outputs can be stored like LEDs and reset using the
LED reset key. The lockout state is also stored in the event of
sured values are continuously checked for plausibility. Therefore supply voltage failure. Reclosure can only be issued after the
the current and voltage transformers are also included in this lockout state is reset.
monitoring system.
2 Current transformer / Monitoring functions
Local measured values
The measured values are calculated from the measured current
A broken wire between the CTs and relay inputs under load may and voltage signals along with the power factor (cos ), the
lead to maloperation of a differential relay if the load current frequency, the active and reactive power. Measured values are
3 exceeds the differential setpoint. The 7SD610 provides fast bro- displayed as primary or secondary values or in percent of the
ken wire supervision which immediatelly blocks all line ends if specic line rated current and voltage. The relay uses a 20 bit
a broken wire condition is measured by a local relay. This avoids high-resolution AD converter and the analog inputs are factory-
maloperation due to broken wire condition. Only the phase calibrated, so a high accuracy is reached.
4 where the broken wire is detected is blocked. The other phases
remain under differential operation.
The following values are available for measured-value
processing:
Fuse failure monitoring Currents 3 x IPhase, 3I0, IE, IE sensitive
5 If any measured voltage is not present due to short-circuit or

open circuit in the voltage transformer secondary circuit this can
Voltages 3 x VPhase-Ground, 3 x VPhase-Phase,
3V0,Ven,
lead to a failure or a being missing measuring of the directional Symmetrical components I1, I2, V1, V2
overcurrent protection. This secondary voltage interruption can
Real power P (Watt), reactive power
6 be detected by means of the integrated fuse failure monitor.
Immediate blocking of the directional steps of the overcurrent Q (Var), apparent power S (VA)
protection is started automatically. Power factor PF (= cos )
Additional measurement supervision functions are Frequency f
7 Symmetry of voltages and currents Differential and restraint current per phase
Availability of the data connection to the remote line ends per
minute and per hour
Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74TC) Regarding delay time measuring with the GPS-version the
8 One or two binary inputs for each circuit- breaker pole can be absolute time for transmit and receive path is displayed
separately.
used for monitoring the circuit-breaker trip coils including the
connecting cables. An alarm signal is issued whenever the circuit Limit value monitoring: Limit values are monitored by means
is interrupted. of the CFC. Commands can be derived from these limit value
9 indications.
10
11
12
13
14
15
Measured values at remote line ends

Every two seconds the currents and volt-
ages are freezed at the same time at all 1
line ends and transmitted via the commu-
nication link. At a local line end, currents
and voltages are thus available with their
amount and phases (angle) locally and
remotely. This allows checking the whole
2
conguration under load conditions. In
addition, the differential and restraint
currents are also displayed. Important
communication measurements, such as
3
delay time or faulty telegrams per minute/
hour are also available as measurements.
These measured values can be processed
with the help of the CFC logic editor. 4
Commissioning
commissioning. All binary inputs and 5
outputs can be displayed and activated
directly. This can simplify the wiring check
LSP2845.tif
and fault events and the fault records are 6
clearly arranged.
Furthermore, all currents and optional Fig. 7/16 Browser-aided commissioning: Phasor diagram
voltages and phases are available via
communication link at the local relay and 7
are displayed in the relay, with DIGSI 4 or
with the Web Monitor.
The operational and fault events and
fault records from all line ends share a
8
common time tagging which allows to
compare events registered in the different
line ends on a common time base.
WEB Monitor Internet technology

9
operating program, the relay contains 10
11
infrastructure. This program shows the
protection topology and comprehensive
measurements from local and remote line
12
LSP2846.tif
ends. Local and remote measurements

are shown as phasors and the breaker
positions of each line end are depicted. It
is possible to check the correct connection Fig. 7/17 Browser-aided commissioning: Differential protection tripping characteristic
13
of the current transformers or the correct
vector group of a transformer.
Stability can be checked by using the operating characteristic
as well as the calculated differential and restraint values in the
14
browser windows.
Event log and trip log messages are also available. Remote
control can be used, if the local front panel cannot be accessed. 15
Functions
Functions Assignment of feedback to command
1 Control and automation functions

inputs are logically assigned to the corresponding command
Control outputs. The unit can therefore distinguish whether the indica-
In addition to the protection functions, the SIPROTEC 4 units also tion change is a consequence of switching operation or whether
2 support all control and monitoring functions that are required it is a spontaneous change of state (intermediate position).
for operating medium-voltage or high-voltage substations.
Chatter disable
The chatter disable feature evaluates whether, in a congured
3 processes.
period of time, the number of status changes of indication input
obtained from auxiliary contacts and communicated via binary blocked for a certain period, so that the event list will not record
inputs. Therefore it is possible to detect and indicate both the excessive operations.
4 OPEN and CLOSED position or a fault or intermediate circuit-
breaker or auxiliary contact position. Filter time
The switchgear or circuit-breaker can be controlled via: All binary indications can be subjected to a lter time (indication
integrated operator panel suppression).
5 binary inputs
substation control and protection system Indication ltering and delay
DIGSI 4 Indications can be ltered or delayed.
6 Command processing
indication input. The indication is passed on only if the indica-
tion voltage is still present after a set period of time. In the
includes the processing of single and double commands with event of indication delay, there is a wait for a preset time. The
or without feedback, sophisticated monitoring of the control information is passed on only if the indication voltage is still
7 hardware and software, checking of the external process,
control actions using functions such as runtime monitoring and
automatic command termination after output. Here are some Indication derivation
8 Single and double commands using 1, 1 plus 1 common or 2
trip contacts
existing indication. Group indications can also be formed. The
User-denable bay interlocks reduced and restricted to the most important signals.
Operating sequences combining several switching operations
9 such as control of circuit-breakers, disconnectors and ground-
ing switches
Transmission lockout
A data transmission lockout can be activated, so as to prevent
Triggering of switching operations, indications or alarm by transfer of information to the control center during work on a
combination with existing information circuit bay.
10 Automation / user-dened logic Test operation
With integrated logic, the user can set, via a graphic interface During commissioning, all indications can be passed to an
(CFC), specic functions for the automation of switchgear or automatic control system for test purposes.
11 substation. Functions are activated via function keys, binary
Switching authority
12 Switching authority is determined according to parameters,

communication or by key-operated switch (when available).
13 down: LOCAL; DIGSI PC program, REMOTE
Every switching operation and change of breaker position is kept
in the status indication memory. The switch command source,
switching device, cause (i.e. spontaneous change or command)
14 and result of a switching operation are retained.
15
Functions
With respect to communication, particular emphasis has been

placed on high exibility, data security and use of customary
standards in the eld of energy automation. The concept of the
communication modules allows interchangeability on the one
1
hand, and, on the other hand, is open for future standards.
Local PC interface
The PC interface provided on the front panel on the unit allows
2
the parameters, status and fault event data to be rapidly accessed
by means of the DIGSI 4 operating program. Use of this program
is particularly advantageous during testing and commissioning.
3
Rear-mounted interfaces
The service and system communication interfaces are located at
the rear of the unit. In addition, the 7SD610 is provided with a
protection interface. The interface complement is variable and
4
retrotting is possible without any difculty. These interfaces Fig. 7/18 IEC 60870-5-103 star-type RS232 copper conductor
ensure that the requirements for different communication connection or ber-optic connection
interfaces (electrical and optical) and protocols can be met.
The interfaces are designed for the following applications:
5
Service / modem interface
By means of the RS485 interface, it is possible to efciently oper-
ate a number of protection units centrally via DIGSI 4. Remote
6
operation is possible on connection of a modem. This offers the
advantage of rapid fault clarication, especially in the case of
unmanned power plants.
In the case of the 7SD610, a PC with a standard browser can
7
be connected to the service interface (refer to Commissioning
program).
System interface
8
This interface is used to carry out communication with a control
or protection and control system and supports a variety of com-
munication protocols and interface designs, depending on the
module connected.
9
Commissioning aid via a standard Web browser Fig. 7/19 Bus structure for station bus with Ethernet and IEC 61850
In the case of the 7SD610, a PC with a standard browser can be
connected to the local PC interface or to the service interface
10
(refer to Commissioning program). The relays include a small Safe bus architecture
Web server and sends its HTML pages to the browser via an RS485 bus
established dial-up network connection. With this data transmission via copper conductors, electro-
magnetic fault inuences are largely eliminated by the use of 11
Retrotting: Modules for every type of communication twisted-pair conductor. Upon failure of a unit, the remaining
system continues to operate without any disturbances.
Fiber-optic double ring circuit
entire SIPROTEC 4 unit range. These ensure that, where different
communication interfaces (electrical or optical) and protocols The ber-optic double ring circuit is immune to electromag- 12
(IEC 61850 Ethernet, IEC 60870-5-103, PROFIBUS-DP, DNP 3.0, netic interference. Upon failure of a section between two
MODBUS, DIGSI, etc.) are required, such demands can be met. units, the communication system continues to operate without
disturbance.
It is generally impossible to communicate with a unit that has 13
failed. If a unit were to fail, there is no effect on the communica-
tion with the rest of the system.
14
15
Communication
Communication
LSP2163-afpen.tif
1 IEC 61850 Ethernet
LSP2164-afp.tif
The Ethernet-based IEC 61850 protocol
is the worldwide standard for protection
2 and control systems used by power supply

corporations. Siemens was the rst
manufacturer to support this standard.
By means of this protocol, information
can also be exchanged directly between
3 bay units so as to set up simple masterless
systems for bay ans system interlocking.
Access to the units via the Ethernet bus is
Fig. 7/20 RS232/RS485 electrical Fig. 7/21 PROFIBUS ber-optic double ring
also possible with DIGSI. communication module communication module
4 IEC 60870-5-103
standardized protocol for the efcient
LSP2162-afpen.tif
5 communication in the protected area.
ers and is used worldwide.
LSP3.01-0021.tif
6 PROFIBUS-DP
standard for communications and is
7 supported by a number of PLC and protec-
tion device manufacturers.
MODBUS RTU
Fig. 7/22 820 nm ber-optic communication Fig. 7/23 Fiber-optic Ethernet communication
8 MODBUS RTU is an industry-recognized

standard for communications and is
integrated Ethernet switch
supported by a number of PLC and protec-
tion device manufacturers.
9 DNP 3.0
DNP 3.0 (Distributed Network Protocol
Version 3) is a messaging-based commu-
10 nication protocol. The SIPROTEC 4 units

are fully Level 1 and Level 2 compliant
with DNP 3.0. DNP 3.0 is supported by
a number of protection device manufac-
turers.
11
12
13
14
Fig. 7/24 System solution: Communications
15
Communication
System solutions for protection and station control New ber-optic interfaces, series FO1x
FO171):
Together with the SICAM power automation system, SIPROTEC 4
can be used with PROFIBUS-FMS. Over the low-cost electrical For direct connection up to 24 km3), 1300 nm, for mono-mode 1
RS485 bus, or interference-free via the optical double ring, the ber 9/125 m, LC-Duplex connector
FO181):
Units featuring IEC 60870-5-103 interfaces can be connected to
For direct connection up to 60 km3), 1300 nm, for mono-mode
ber 9/125 m, LC-Duplex connector
2
Through this interface, the system is open for the connection of
FO191):
units of other manufacturers (see Fig. 7/18).
For direct connection up to 100 km3), 1550 nm, for mono-mode
ber 9/125 m, LC-Duplex connector 3
FO30:
820 nm ber-optic interface/ST connectors for direct connection
up to 1.5 km and for connections to a IEEE C37.94 multiplexer
interface. 4
master can be established. The link to a multiplexed communication network is made by
a ber-optic interface with 820 nm and 2 ST connectors to
the protection relay. The link to the communication network 5
is optionally an electrical X21/G703-64 kbit/s or G703-E1/-T1
is standardized, thus also enabling direct connection of units
interface. Furthermore the IEEE C37.94 interface is supported by
the FO30 module.
however, the units can also be used in other manufacturers'
systems (see Fig. 7/19). For operation via copper wire communication (pilot wires or 6
twisted telephone pair), a modern communication converter
Via modem and service interface, the protection engineer has
for copper cables is available. This operates with both the
access to the protection devices at all times. This permits remote
two-wire and three-wire copper connections which were used
maintenance and diagnosis (cyclic testing).
by conventional differential protection systems before. The 7
Parallel to this, local communication is possible, for example, communication converter for copper cables is designed for 5 kV
during a major inspection. insulation voltage. An additional 20 kV isolation transformer
can extend the eld of applications of this technique into ranges
Serial protection interface (R2R interface) with higher insulation voltage requirements. The connection
via FO cable to the relay is interference-free. With SIPROTEC 4
8
The 7SD610 provides one protection interface to cover two line
end applications. and the communication converter for copper cables a digital
follow-up technique is available for two-wire protection systems
In addition to the differential protection function, other protec-
tion functions can use this interface to increase selectivity and
(up to 8 km) and all three-wire protection systems using existing
copper communication links.
9
sensitivity as well as covering advanced applications.
Different communication converters are listed under
Fast phase-selective teleprotection signaling using the "Accessories".
directional stages of the overcurrent protection with POTT or
PUTT schemes Communication data: 10
Two terminal line applications can be implemented without 32-bit CRC-check according to CCITT and ITU
additional logic Each protection relay possesses a unique relay address
dead time (ADT) mode
Continuous communication link supervision: Individual faulty
data telegrams do not constitute an immediate danger, if they
11
4 remote signals for fast transfer of binary signals occur only sporadically. The statistical availability, per minute
Flexible utilization of the communication channels by means and hour, of the serial protection interface can be displayed.
of the programmable CFC logic Supported network interfaces X21/RS422 with 64 or 128 or
512 kbit/s; or G703-64 kbit/s and G703-E1 (2,048 kbit/s) or
12
The protection interfaces have different options to cover new G703-T1 (1,554 kbit/s) or IEEE C37.94.
and existing communication infrastructures.
Max. channel delay time 0.1 ms to 30 ms (in steps of 0.1 ms)
FO51), OMA12) module:
820 nm ber-optic interface with clock recovery/ST connectors Protocol HDLC 13
for direct connection with multi-mode FO cable up to 1.5 km
for the connection to a communication converter.
820 nm ber-optic interface/ST connectors for direct connec- 14
tion up to 3.5 km with multi-mode FO cable. 1) For ush-mounting housing.
3) For surface-mounting housing the internal FO module
OMA1 will be delivered together with an external repeater. 15
Communication
Communication possibilities between relays
3
Fig. 7/25 Direct optical link up to 1.5 km/3.5 km, 820nm Fig. 7/26 Direct optical link up to 25/60 km with 1300 nm
or up to 100 km with 1550 nm
4
7
Fig. 7/27 Connection to a communication network CC-XG Fig. 7/28 Connection to a communication network CC-2M
9
max. 1.5 km with
62.5 m/125 m
7SD52/53 multi-mode ber
10 7SD610
FO30 IEEE C37.94
MUX Communication
network
SIPV6.011en.eps
FO30 with ST connectors
11 Fig. 7/29 Connection to a communication network via IEEE C37.94 Fig. 7/30 Connection to a pilot wire
12
13
14
15
Typical connection
Typical connection
A typical connection is to the phase CT. The residual cur-
rent at the IE input is formed by summation of the phase
currents. This ensures optimum supervision functions for 2
the current.
Optionally, voltages are measured by means of voltage
transformers and are fed to the unit as a phase-to-ground
voltage. The zero voltage is derived from the summation
3
voltage by calculation performed in the unit.
As a matter of fact, the 7SD610 unit does not require
any voltage transformers for operation of the differential
protection.
Fig. 7/31 Typical connection to current transformers 4
3 phase current transformers with neutral point in the
line direction, I4 connected to a current transformer in
5
the neutral point of a grounded (earthed) transformer
for restricted ground-fault protection (REF) or directional
ground (earth)-fault protection.
6
9
Fig. 7/32 Typical connection to current transformers with optional
voltage inputs
10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 7/33 Connection for transformer with restricted ground- Fig. 7/34 Alternative connection of current transformers for
fault protection (REF) measuring neutral current of a grounded (earthed)
power transformer
15
Technical data
General unit data LEDs
1 Analog inputs
Number
RUN (green)
ERROR (red)
1
1
Rated current IN 1 or 5 A (selectable) LED (red), function can be 7
Rated voltage VN 80 to 125 V (selectable) assigned
2 Power consumption
in CT circuits with IN = 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA
Unit design
Housing 7XP20 For dimensions refer to dimension
with IN = 5 A Approx. 0.3 VA
drawings, part 14
in VT circuits Approx. 0.1 VA
Thermal overload capacity IN
3 in CT circuits (for IN = 5 A) 100 A for 1 s
30 IN for 10 s
acc. to EN 60529
IP 51
4 IN continuous
front IP 51
Dynamic (peak value) 250 IN (half sine)
rear IP 50
In VT circuits for highly sensitive
4 ground-fault protection 300 A for 1 s
100 A for 10 s
Weight
for the terminals IP 20 with terminal cover put on
15 A continuous
1/3 x 19" 4 kg
in VT circuits 230 V per phase continuous
5 Auxiliary voltage
Rated voltages DC 24 to 48 V
1/3 x 19" 6 kg
Ranges are settable by DC 60 to 125 V 1)

means of jumpers DC 110 to 250 V 1) Serial interfaces
and AC 115 V (50/60 Hz)1) Operating interface 1 for DIGSI 4 or browser (front of unit)
6 Permissible tolerance -20 % to +20 % Connection Non-isolated, RS232,
Superimposed AC voltage 15 % front panel, 9-pin subminiature
(peak-to-peak) connector (SUB-D)
Power consumption Baud rate 4800 to 115200 baud, setting as
7 Under normal operating conditions Approx. 8 W
During pickup with all Approx. 18 W
supplied: 38400 baud; parity 8E1
Time synchronization (rear of unit DCF77 / IRIG-B signal format IRIG-B000)
inputs and outputs activated
Bridging time during failure of the
front panel, 9-pin subminiature
auxiliary voltage
8 Vaux 110 V 50 ms
Baud rate
connector (SUB-D)
4800 to 115200 baud, setting as
Binary inputs supplied: 38400 baud; parity 8E1
Number 7 (marshallable) Service interface (op. interface 2) for DIGSI 4 / modem / service / browser
Rated voltage range 24 to 250 V, bipolar (rear of unit)
9 Pickup threshold 17 or 73 V (selectable)
Isolated RS232/RS485 9-pin subminiature connector (SUB-D)
Functions are freely assignable Dielectric test 500 V/50 Hz
Minimum pickup threshold Distance for RS232 Max. 15 m
Ranges are settable by means of DC 17 or 73 V, bipolar Distance for RS485 Max. 1000 m

System interface (rear of unit)
Refer to ordering code IEC 61850 Ethernet
Current consumption, energized Approx. 1.8 mA IEC 60870-5-103
PROFIBUS-DP
Output relay
11 Command / indication relay
DNP 3.0, MODBUS
9-pin subminiature connector (SUB-D)
Number 5 (marshallable) Baud rate 4800 to 38400 baud
1 alarm contact (not marshallable) Dielectric test 500 V/50 Hz
12 Switching capacity
Make
1000 W/VA
30 VA
Distance for RS485
For ber-optic cable
Max. 1000 m
ST connector
Break 40 W Optical wavelength = 820 nm
Break (with resistive load) 25 W Permissible attenuation Max. 8 dB for 62.5/125 m ber
Break (with L/R 50 ms) 250 V Distance (spanned) Max. 1.5 km
13 Switching voltage
30 A for 0.5 seconds
5 A continuous
14
15
Technical data
System interface, continued External communication converter 7XV5662-0AC00 for pilot wires
PROFIBUS RS485
Dielectric test
Baud rate
500 V/50 Hz
Max. 12 Mbaud
External communication converter
to interface between relays, optical
820 nm interface and a pilot wire
1
Distance 1 km at 93.75 kbd; 100 m at 12 Mbd or twisted telephone pair.
PROFIBUS ber-optic2) Typical distance 15 km
Only for ush-mounting housing
ST connector
Optical interface with OLM2)
Fiber-optic 820 nm with clock
recovery
Max. 1.5 km with 62.5/125 m multi-
mode FO cable
2
Baud rate Max. 1.5 Mbaud
Optical wavelength = 820 nm Pilot wire Screw-type terminal 5 kV isolated
Permissible attenuation Max. 8 dB for 62.5/125 m ber Permissible time delay (duration of data transmission)
Distance
Protection interface (R2R interface)
500 kbit/s 1.6 km; 1500 kbit/s 530 m
Delay of telegrams due to trans- Max. 30 ms per transmission path
mission from one unit to the Permissible max. value can be
3
FO51), OMA12): Fiber-optic inter- For multi-mode ber 62.5/125 m, other. Delay is constantly measu- selected
face with clock recovery for direct ST connectors red and adjusted
connection up to 1.5 km or for
connection to a comm. converter,
820 nm
Permissible ber attenuation: 8 dB Electrical tests
Specication
4
FO61), OMA22): Fiber-optic For multi-mode ber 62.5/125 m, Standards EC 60255 (product standards)
interface for direct connection ST connectors ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0/.1/.2
up to 3.5 km, 820 nm Permissible ber attenuation: 16 dB UL 508
New ber-optic interfaces, series FO1:
For further standards see
Individual functions
5
FO30: Fiber-optic interface to sup- For multi-mode ber 62.5/125 m,
port the IEEE C37.94 interface and ST connectors Insulation tests
for direct ber optic connection Permissible ber attenuation: 8 dB Standards IEC 60255-5
up to 1.5 km
FO171): for direct connection For mono-mode ber 9/125 m,
Voltage test (100 % test)
All circuits except for auxiliary 2.5 kV (r.m.s.), 50 / 60 Hz
6
up to 24 km3), 1300 nm LC-Duplex connector supply, binary inputs and
Permissible ber attenuation: 13 dB communication interfaces
FO181): for direct connection
up to 60 km3), 1300 nm
LC-Duplex connector
Permissible ber attenuation: 29 dB
inputs (100 % test)
DC 3.5 kV
7
RS485/RS232 rear side commu- 500 V (r.m.s.), 50 / 60 Hz
FO191): for direct connection For mono-mode ber 9/125 m, nication interfaces and time
up to 100 km3), 1550 nm LC-Duplex connector synchronization interface
Relay communication equipment

Permissible ber attenuation: 29 dB (100 % test)
Impulse voltage test (type test)
8
External communication converter 7XV5662-0AA00 All circuits except for communi- 5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 ms; 0.5 J
for communication networks X21/G703-64 kbit/s cation interfaces and time 3 positive and 3 negative impulses at
synchronization interface, intervals of 5 s
External communication converter
to interface between the relays,
class III
EMC tests for noise immunity; type tests
9
optical 820 nm interface and the
X21/RS422/G703-64 kbit/s interface Standards IEC 60255-6, IEC 60255-22
of a communication device (product standards) (type tests)
X21/G703, RS422 selectable by
jumpers. Baud rate selectable by
DIN 57435 part 303
10
jumpers High frequency test 2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz; = 15 ms;
Input: ber-optic 820 nm Max. 1.5 km with 62.5/125 m IEC 60255-22-1, class III and 400 surges per s;
VDE 0435 part 303, class III test duration 2 s
with clock recovery
Output: X21 (RS422) electrical
multi-mode FO cable to device side
64/128/512 kbit (selectable by jum- Electrostatic discharge
discharge; both polarities; 150 pF;
11
interface on communication device per) max. 800 m, 15-pin connector
EN 61000-4-2, class IV Ri = 330
G703-64 kbit/s electrical interface 64 kbit/s, max. 800 m, screw-type
on communication device terminal Irradiation with RF eld, 10 V/m; 27 to 500 MHz
External communication converter 7XV5662-0AD00

for communication networks with G703-E1 or G703-T1
non-modulated
IEC 60255-22-3 (report), class III 12
Irradiation with RF eld, 10 V/m; 80 to 1000 MHz;
External communication converter amplitude-modulated 80 % AM; 1 kHz
to interface between the relays, IEC 61000-4-3, class III
optical 820 nm interface and
G703-E1 or G703-T1 interface of a 13
communication network
Inputs: 2 ber-optic inputs 820 nm, Max. 1.5 km with 62.5/125 m
1 RS232 input multi-mode 1 FO cable to device side
Output:
G703.5 E1: 2,048 kbit/s
14
G703.6 T1: 1,554 kbit/s 1) For ush-mounting housing.
Electrical interface on max. 800 m, screw-type terminal 2) For surface-mounting housing.

communication network 3) For surface-mounting housing the internal FO module OMA1
will be delivered together with an external repeater. 15
Technical data
Irradiation with RF eld, 10 V/m; 900 MHz; repetition Mechanical dynamic tests
pulse-modulated IEC 61000-4-3/ frequency 200 Hz; duty cycle 50 %
1 ENV 50204, class III
Fast transients, bursts 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz;
During operation
IEC 60255-22-4 and burst length = 15 ms; Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2
IEC 61000-4-4, class IV repetition rate 300 ms; Vibration Sinusoidal
both polarities; Ri = 50 ;
2 test duration 1 min
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2
IEC 60068-2-6
(SURGE), 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes
IEC 61000-4-5 installation, class III Shock Half-sinusoidal
3 Auxiliary supply Common (longitudinal) mode:
2 kV; 12 ; 9 F
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
IEC 60068-2-27
3 shocks on each of the 3 axes in
Differential (transversal) mode: both directions
1 kV; 2 ; 18 F Seismic vibration Sinusoidal
Measurement inputs, binary inputs, Common (longitudinal) mode: IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 1 to 8 Hz: 3.5 mm amplitude
4 binary output relays 2 kV; 42 ; 0.5 F
Differential (transversal) mode:
IEC 60068-3-3 (horizontal axis),
1 kV; 42 ; 0.5 F (vertical axis),
Line-conducted HF, amplitude- 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM; 8 to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration
(horizontal axis),
5 modulated
1 kHz
(vertical axis),
Magnetic eld with power 30 A/m continuous; 300 A/m for frequency sweep 1 octave/min
frequency 3 s; 50 Hz 0.5 mT; 50 Hz 1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes
IEC 61000-4-8, class IV;
During transport
6 IEC 60255-6
Oscillatory surge withstand 2.5 to 3 kV (peak); 1 to 1.5 MHz Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2
capability damped wave; Vibration Sinusoidal
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 50 surges per second, duration 2 s, IEC 60255-21-1, class 2 5 to 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude;
Ri = 150 to 200 IEC 60068-2-6 8 to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration,
capability
4 to 5 kV; 10/150 ns;
50 impulses per second;
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 both polarities; duration 2 s; Shock Half-sinusoidal
Ri = 80 IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 15 g, duration 11 ms,
IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks on each of the 3 axes in
8 Radiated electromagnetic
interference
35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz
both directions
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 Continuous shock Half-sinusoidal
Damped oscillation 2.5 kV (peak value); polarity IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 10 g, duration 16 ms,
IEC 60694, IEC 61000-4-12 alternating 100 kHz; 1 MHz; 10 and IEC 60068-2-29 1000 shocks on each of the 3 axes
9 50 MHz; Ri = 200
in both directions
Standard EN 50081-1 (generic standard) Climatic stress test

Conducted interference voltage on 150 kHz to 30 MHz Temperatures
10 lines, only auxiliary voltage
IEC-CISPR 22
Type-tested acc. to IEC 60068-2-1 25 C to +85 C / 13 F to +185 F
and -2, test Bd, for 16 h
Radio interference eld strength Limit class B Temporarily permissible operating 20 C to +70 C / 4 F to +158 F
IEC-CISPR 22 30 to 1000 MHz temperature, tested for 96 h
Limit class B
5 C to +55 C / +25 F to +131 F
IEC 60255-6
impaired above +55 C / +131 C)

permanent storage
25 C to +55 C / 13 F to +131 F
Limiting temperature during 25 C to +70 C / 13 F to +158 F

transport
13 Humidity
Permissible humidity stress; It Annual average 75 % relative
is recommended to arrange the humidity; on 56 days in the year up
units in such a way that they are to 93 % relative humidity; moisture
not exposed to direct sunlight or condensation during operation is not
permitted
15
Technical data
Functions Inverse-time stage (ANSI 51, 51N)

Differential protection (ANSI 87L, 87T)
Sensitive differential current trip stage IDiff>
Phase current pickup Ip 0.1 to 4 A (1A) / 0.5 to 20 A (5A)
(step 0.01 A) 1
Ground current pickup 3I0 0.05 to 4 A (1A) / 0.25 to 20 A (5A)
Setting range
(step 0.01 A)
IDiff> IN secondary 1 A 0.1 to 20 A (steps 0.01 A)
secondary 5 A 0.5 to 100 A Phase current pickup Ip > 0.1 to 4 A (1A) / 0.5 to 20 A (5 A)
Tripping time
IDiff> 2 x IDiff > (setting value)
Typical 35 ms with FO cable
with directional element
Ground current pickup 3I0 >
(step 0.01 A)
0.05 to 25 (1A) / 0.25 to 20 A (5A)
2
with directional element (step 0.01 A)
High current differential trip stage IDiff>>
Tripping characteristics
Setting range
IDiff>> secondary 1 A
secondary 5 A
0.8 to 100 A (steps 0.01 A)
4.0 to 50 A
to IEC 60255-3
Normal inverse; very inverse; extre-
mely inverse; long time inverse
3
Tripping time Tripping time characteristics acc. Inverse; short inverse; long inverse;
IDiff> 2 x IDiff >> (setting value) Typical 16 ms with FO cable to ANSI/IEEE moderately inverse; very inverse;
(not for DE region, see selection extremely inverse; denite inverse
Vector group adaption with transformers in the differential zone
Adaption of connection sympol 0 to 11 (x 30)(step 1)
and ordering data 10th position) 4
Time multiplier for IEC characte- Tp = 0.05 to 3 s (step 0.01 s) or
Neutral point connection Grounded (earthed) or not grounded ristics T deactivated
(earthed)(for each winding) Time multiplier for ANSI DIP = 0.5 to 15 (step 0.01) or
Inrush restaint
Restraint ratio
characteristics D
Pickup threshold
deactivated
Approx. 1.1 I/Ip (ANSI: I/Ip = M )
5
2nd harmonic I2fn/IfN 10 % to 45 % (step 1 %) Reset threshold Approx. 1.05 x I/Ip (ANSI: I/Ip = M )
Max. current for restraint 1.1 A to 25 A1) (step 0.1 A) Tolerances
Crossblock function Can be switched on and off
Max. operative time for crossblock 0 to 60 s (step 0.01 s) or
Instantaneous high-speed switch-onto-fault overcurrent protection
6
Toper crossblk deactivated (operating up to release) (ANSI 50HS)
Backup / emergency overcurrent protection (ANSI 50N, 51N, 67, 67N) Operating mode Active only with connected auxiliary
Operating modes Backup (always active) or emergency
(e.g. loss of data connection) Characteristic
contacts
2 independent stages
7
Characteristic 2 denite-time stages / 1 inverse- Pickup current I>>> 0.1 to 15 A (1A) / 0.5 to 75 A (5A)
time stage (step 0.01 A) or deactivated
Denite-time stage (ANSI 50, 50N)
Phase current pickup Iph>> 0.1 to 25 A (1A) / 0.5 to 125 A (5A)
Pickup current I>>>> 1 to 25 A (1A) / 5 to 125 A (5A)
(step 0.01 A) or deactivated 8
(step 0.01 A) or deactivated Reset ratio Approx. 0.95
Ground current pickup 3I0>> 0.05 to 25 A (1A) / 0.25 to 125 A (5A) Tolerances
Current starting 3 % of setting value or 1 % IN
Phase current pickup Iph>
(step 0.01 A) or deactivated
0.1 to 25 A (1A) / 0.5 to 125 A (5A) Auto-reclosure (ANSI 79) 9
(step 0.01 A) Number of auto-reclosures Up to 8
Ground current pickup 3I0> 0.05 to 25 A (1A) / 0.25 to 125 A (5A) Operating modes with line Only 1-pole; only 3-pole, 1 or 3-pole,
(step 0.01 A) voltage check adaptive AR
Phase current pickup Iph >
with directional element
0.1 to 25 A (1A) / 0.5 to 125 A (5A) Discrimination between successful
and non-successful reclose attempts
10
Ground current pickup 3I0 > 0.05 to 25 A (1A) / 0.25 to 125 A (5A) Dead times T1-ph, T3-ph, TSeq 0.01 to 1800 s (step 0.01 s) or
with directional element (step 0.01 A) deactivated
Time delay
Tolerances
0 to 30 s (step 0.01 s) or deactivated Action times 0.01 to 300 s (step 0.01 s) or
deactivated 11
Current pickup Reclaim times 0.5 to 300 s (step 0.01 s)
3 % setting value or 1 % of IN
Delay times 1 % setting value or 10 ms CLOSE command duration 0.01 to 30 s (steps 0.01 s)
Operating time Approx. 25 ms Tolerances
Time stages 1 % of setting value or 10 ms 12
13
14
15
Technical data
Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF) Dropout times Approx. 30 ms

Hysteresis Approx. 20 mHz
1 Number of stages
2
0.05 to 20 A (1A) / 0.25 to 100 A (5A) Dropout condition Voltage = 0 V and current = 0 A
(step 0.01 A) Tolerances
Time delays T11phase, T13phase, T2 0 to 30 s (steps 0.01 s) or deactivated Frequency 12 m Hz for V = 29 to 230 V
Reset time
CB synchronism monitoring
10 ms, typical Restricted ground-fault protection (ANSI 87N)
Tolerances Multiple availability 2 times (option)

Current limit value 3 % of setting value or 1 % IN Settings
3 Voltage protection (ANSI 59, 27)
Differential current IREF >/INobj 0.05 to 2.00
Limit angle REF 110 (xed)
(steps 0.01)
Operating modes Local tripping or only indication Time delay TREF 0.00 to 60.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
Overvoltage protection or deactivated (no trip)
The set times are pure delay
4 Pickup values VPH-Gnd>>, VPH-Gnd> 1 to 170 V (step 0.1 V)
(phase-ground (earth) overvol- or deactivated times
tage) Operating times
Pickup values VPH-PH>>, VPH-PH> 2 to 220 V (step 0.1 V) Pickup time (in ms) at
(phase-phase overvoltage) or deactivated frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz
5 Pickup values 3V0>>, 3V0>
(3V0 can be measured via V4
1 to 220 V (step 0.1 V)
or deactivated
At 1.5 setting value IREF >, 35 30
approx.
transformers or calculated by the
relay)(zero-sequence overvoltage) At 2.5 setting value IREF >, 33 29
approx.
6 Pickup values V1>>, V1>
2 to 220 V (step 0.1 V)
or deactivated Dropout time (in ms), approx. 26
Dropout ratio, approx. 0.7
23
voltage or calculated Overcurrent-time protection for phase and residual currents
remote positive-sequence
Multiple availability 3 times (option)
7 Pickup values V2>>, V2>
voltage (compounding)
2 to 220 V (step 0.1 V) Characteristics
(negative-sequence overvoltage) or deactivated Denite-time stages (DT) IPh >>, 3I0 >>, IPh >, 3I0 >
Reset ratio (settable) 0.5 to 0.98 (step 0.01) Inverse-time stages (IT) IP, 3I0P
Acc. to IEC Inverse, very inverse, extremely
8 Undervoltage protection
Pickup values VPH-Gnd<<, VPH-Gnd< 1 to 100 V (step 0.1 V)
inverse, long-time inverse
Acc. to ANSI Inverse, moderately inverse, very
(phase-ground (earth) undervol- or deactivated
inverse, extremely inverse, denite
tage)
inverse, short inverse, long inverse
Pickup values VPH-PH<<, VPH-PH< 1 to 175 V (step 0.1 V)
9 (phase-phase undervoltage) or deactivated
Alternatively, user-specied
trip and reset characteristics
Pickup values V1<<, V1< 1 to 100 V (step 0.1 V)
Reset characteristics (IT) Acc. to ANSI with disk emulation
(positive-sequence undervoltage) or deactivated
Blocking of undervoltage protec- Minimum current; binary input Current stages
10 tion stages
Reset ratio 1.05
High-current stages IPh >> 0.10 to 35.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A)
or deactivated (stage ineffective)
Time delays TIPh >> 0.00 to 60.00 s (steps 0.01 s)

or deactivated (no trip)
Time delay for all over- and 0 to 100 s (steps 0.01 s) or deacti-
11 undervoltage stages
vated
Approx. 40 ms
3I0 >> 0.05 to 35.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A)
T3I0 >> 0.00 to 60.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
Tolerances or deactivated (no trip)
Denite-time stages IPh > 0.10 to 35.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A)
12 Time stages
Frequency protection (ANSI 81)
TIPh
0.00 to 60.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
Number of frequency elements 4 or deactivated (no trip)
Setting range 45.5 to 54.5 Hz 3I0 > 0.05 to 35.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A)
13 (in steps of 0.01) at fnom = 50 Hz

55.5 to 64.5 Hz (in steps of 0.01) at T3I0 >
0.00 to 60.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
fnom = 60 Hz or deactivated (no trip)
Operating voltage range 6 to 230 V (phase-to-ground (earth))
14 Pickup times Approx. 85 ms
15
Technical data
Inverse-time stages IP 0.10 to 4.00 A 1) (steps 0.01 A) Fault record storage

Acc. to IEC TIP 0.05 to 3.20 s (steps 0.01 s)
Measured analog channels 3 x IPhase, 3I0, 3IDiff
3 x VPhase, 3V0, 3IRestraint 1
3I0P 0.05 to 4.00 A 1) (steps 0.01 A) Max. number of available 8, backed up by battery if auxiliary
T3I0P 0.05 to 3.20 s (steps 0.01 s) recordings voltage supply fails
or deactivated (no trip) Sampling intervals 20 samplings per cycle
Inverse-time stages IP 0.10 to 4.00 A 1) (steps 0.01 A) Total storage time Approx. 10 s 2
Acc. to ANSI DIP 0.50 to 15.00 s (steps 0.01 s) Binary channels Pickup and trip information; number
or deactivated (no trip) and contents can be freely congu-
3I0P 0.05 to 4.00 A 1) (steps 0.01 A) red by the user
D3I0P 0.50 to 15.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
Further additional functions
3
Thermal overload protection (ANSI 49) Current symmetry
Voltage sum
Setting range
Voltage symmetry
Factor k to IEC 60255.8
Time constant
0.1 to 4 (steps 0.01)
1 to 999.9 min (steps 0.1 min)
Voltage phase sequence
4
Thermal alarm stage Alarm/Trip 50 to 100 % referred to tripping
Indications
temperature (steps 1 %)
Operational indications Buffer size 200
Current-based alarm stage Ialarm 0.1 to 4 A (1A) / 0.5 to 5 A (5A)
(steps 0.01 A)
System disturbance indication Storage of signals of the last 8 faults,
buffer size
5
Calculating mode for max, mean, with Imax
Switching statistics 600 Number of breaking operations
overtemperature
per CB pole
Pickup time characteristic t = ln
I 2 I 2pre
I 2 (k I N )
2 Breaking current of last trip
operations
6
Reset ratio Approx. 0.99 Max. breaking current per phase
/Alarm Approx. 0.99 TRIP/CLOSE cycle, 3 phases
Circuit-breaker test
/Trip Approx. 0.99
I/IAlarm Class 10 % acc. to IEC 60255-8
Dead time for CB TRIP / CLOSE
0 to 30 s (steps 0.01 s) 7
Tolerances
cycle
Additional functions Commissioning support Operational measured values, CB
test, status display of binary indica-
tion inputs, setting of output relays,
generation of indications for testing
8
referred to rated value serial interfaces, commissioning
Currents 3 x IPhase ; 3I0; IE; I1; I2 support via Web-browser, test mode,
commissioning mode
Tolerances
10 to 50 % IN
50 to 200 % IN
Typical 1 % of 50 % IN
Typical 1 % of measured value
9
CE conformity
Voltages 3 x VPhase-Ground; 3 x VPhase-Phase;
3V0, V1, V2, Ven
Tolerances
10 to 50 % VN Typical 1 % of 50 % VN
10
50 to 200 % VN Typical 1 % of measured value for use within certain voltage limits (Council Directive 2006/95/EG
Power with direction indication P, Q, S previous 73/23/EEC).
Tolerances
P: for |cos | = 0.7 to 1 and V/VN, Typical 3 %
Part 303).
11
I/IN = 50 to 120 %
Q: for |sin | = 0.7 to 1 and V/VN, Typical 3 % Further applicable standards: ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0 and C37.90.1.
I/IN = 50 to 120 %
S: for V/VN , I/IN = 50 to 120 %
Frequency f
Typical 2 %
12
Tolerance 20 mHz
Power factor p.f. (cos ) the generic standards EN 50081-2 and EN 50082-2 for the EMC Directive
Tolerance for |cos | = 0.7 to 1
Remote measurements
Typical 3 %
3 x IPhase-Ground; 3I0, 3 x VPhase-Ground; 3V0 13
Overload measured values /Trip L1; /Trip L2; /Trip L3;
/Trip
14
15
Description Order No. Short code
1 7SD61 numerical line differential protection 87L SIPROTEC 4 for two-line ends,
allows transformers in the protection zone
7SD610 - - -
Current transformer
Iph = 1 A1), Ie = 1 A1) see next page
1
2 Iph = 1 A1), Ie = 5 A1) 5
Auxiliary voltage
(Power supply, BI operating voltage) DC 24 to 48 V, trigger level binary input 19 V3) 2
DC 60 to 125 V 2), trigger level binary input 19 V3)
3 DC 110 to 250 V 2), AC 115 to 230 V, trigger level binary input 88 V3)
4
5
DC 110 to 250 V 2), AC 115 to 230 V, trigger level binary input 176 V3) 6
Housing, number of binary inputs/outputs

4 Flush-mounting housing with screw-type terminals 19", 7 BI, 5 BO, 1 live-status contact
Surface-mounting housing with screw-type terminals 19", 7 BI, 5 BO, 1 live-status contact
B
F
Flush-mounting housing with plug-in terminals, 19", 7 BI, 5 BO , 1 live-status contact K
5 Region-specic default settings / function versions and language settings

Region DE, German language (language changeable) A
Region world, English language (language changeable) B
Region US, US-English language (language changeable) C
6 Region world, French language (language changeable)

Region world, Spanish language (language changeable)
D
E
Region world, Italian language (language changeable) F
System interfaces, functions and hardware

7 Without system interface 0
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, electric RS232 1
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, electric RS485 2
8 IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, optical 820 nm, ST connector

Further protocols see supplement L
3
9 L 0
PROFIBUS DP slave, RS485 A

PROFIBUS DP slave, optical 820 nm, double ring, ST connector4)
9 MODBUS, RS485
B
D
MODBUS, optical 820 nm, ST connector4) E
DNP 3.0, RS485 G
10 DNP 3.0, optical 820 nm, ST connector4)

IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet electrical, double, RS45 connector (EN 100)
H
R
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, with integrated switch optical, double, LC connector5) S
11
12
13
BI = Binary input
BO = Binary output
14 1) Rated current 1/5 A can be selected by means of jumpers.

4) Not possible for surface mounting housing (Order No. pos. 9 = F).
For the surface mounted version, please order a device with the
2) Transition between the two auxiliary voltage ranges can be selected appropriate electrical RS485 interface and an external FO-converter
by means of jumpers. 5) Not possible for surface mounting housing (Order No. pos. 9 = F)
15 3) Setting of the BI thresholds can be made for each binary input via
jumpers in 3 steps.
please order the relay with electrical interface and use a separate
ber-optic switch


7SD61 numerical line differential protection 87L SIPROTEC 4
(continued)
7SD610 - - -
1
DIGSI/Modem interface (on rear of device) and protection interface 1 9 M
DIGSI/Modem interface (on rear of device)
DIGSI 4, electrical RS232
DIGSI 4, electrical RS485
1
2
2
Protection data interface 1
FO5: Optical 820 nm, 2 ST-plugs, line length up to 1.5 km via multimode FO cable
for communication converter or direct FO connection 1)
A 3
for direct FO connection B
FO17: Optical 1300 nm, LC-Duplex-plugs, line length up to 24 km 2) via monomode FO cable
for direct FO connection 2)
FO18: Optical 1300 nm, LC-Duplex-plugs, line length up to 60 km via monomode FO cable
G
4
for direct FO connection 2)3) H
FO19: Optical 1550 nm, LC-Duplex-plugs, line length up to 100 km via monomode FO cable
for direct FO connection 2)4) J
for communication networks with IEEE C37.94 interface or direct FO connection 5)
5
S
Functions 1
Trip mode 3-pole only without auto reclosure
Trip mode 3-pole only with auto reclosure
0
1
6
Trip mode 1- and 3-pole without auto reclosure 2
Trip mode 1- and 3-pole with auto reclosure 3
Back-up functions 7
with emergency or back-up overcurrent protection B
without with emergency or back-up overcurrent and breaker failure protection C
with directional emergency or back-up overcurrent protection
with directional emergency or back-up overcurrent and breaker failure protection
R
S 8
Additional functions 1
4 Remote commands/
24 Remote indications
Transformer
expansions
Voltage-/frequence
protection
Restricted earth fault
(low impedance) 9
A
B
E 10
F
J
K 11
N
P
S 12
T
without external GPS synchronisation of differential protection 0
with external GPS synchronisation of differential protection 1
13
1) Communication converter 7XV5662, see Accessories.
2) Device for surface-mounting housing (Order No. pos. 9 = F) will be
4) For distances less than 50 km a set of optical attenuators
7XV5107-0AA00 must be installed to avoid saturation of the 14
delivered with external repeater 7XV5461-0Bx00. receiver element.
3) For distances less than 25 km a set of optical attenuators 5) Only available in ush-mounting housing (Order No. pos. 9 = B, K).
7XV5107-0AA00 must be installed to avoid saturation of the
receiver element. 15
Accessories
1 Opto-electric communication converter CC-XG (connection to

communication network)
Converter to interface to X21 or RS422 or G703-64 kbit/s synchronous
communication interfaces
Connection via FO cable for 62.5 / 125 m or 50 / 120 m and
2 820 nm wavelength (multi-mode FO cable) with ST connector,
max. distance 1.5 km
Electrical connection via X21/RS422 or G703-64 kbit/s interface 7XV5662-0AA00
Opto-electric communication converter CC-2M to G703-E1/-T1

3 communication networks with 2,048 / 1,554 kbit/s
Converter to interface between optical 820 nm interface and
G703-E1/-T1 interface of a communication network
Connection via FO cable for 62.5/125 m or 50/120 m and
4 820 nm wavelength (multi-mode FO cable) with ST connector,

max. distance 1.5 km
Electrical connection via G703-E1/-T1 interface 7XV5662-0AD00
Opto-electric communication converter (connection to pilot wire)
5 Converter to interface to a pilot wire or twisted telephone pair

(typical 15 km length)
Connection via FO cable for 62.5/125 mor 50/120 m and
820 nm wavelength (multi-mode FO cable) with ST connector;
max. distance 1.5 km, screw-type terminals to pilot wire 7XV5662-0AC00
6 Additional interface modules

Protection interface module, optical 820 nm,
multi-mode FO cable, ST connector, 1.5 km C53207-A351-D651-1
7 multi-mode FO cable, ST connector, 3.5 km C53207-A351-D652-1
Further modules
mono-mode FO cable, LC-Duplex connector, 24 km C53207-A351-D655-1
8 Protection interface module, optical 1300 nm,
9 Protection interface module, optical 820 nm,

multi-mode FO cable, ST connector, 1.5 km support of IEEE C37.94 C53207-A351-D658-1
Optical repeaters
Serial repeater (2-channel), optical 1300 nm,mono-mode FO cable,
10 LC-Duplex connector, 24 km
7XV5461-0BG00

Time synchronizing unit with GPS output

7XV5461-0BJ00
GPS 1 sec pulse and time telegram IRIG B/DCF 77 7XV5664-0AA00
12 Isolation transformer (20 kV) for pilot wire communication 7XR9516

13
14
15
DIGSI 4
1
(copper) 2
Basis
Professional
Complete version:
3
CFC Editor (logic editor), Display Editor (editor for control displays),
DIGSI 4 Remote (remote operation) 7XS5402-0AA00
SIGRA 4 4
additionally)
Software for graphic visualization, analysis and evaluation of fault
records. Can also be used for fault records of devices of other
manufacturers (Comtrade format). Running under MS Windows
5
(Windows 2000 / XP Professional).
Incl. templates, electronic manual with license for 10 PCs.

6
and protection unit (9-pin connector)
Manual for 7SD61 V4.6

7
English C53000-G1176-C145-4

package
Supplier Fig. 9
LSP2289-afp.eps
3-pin C73334-A1-C36-1 1 Siemens 7/37
Crimp CI2 0.5 to 1 mm2 0-827039-1 4000 AMP 1)

10
AMP 1)
0-827397-1
Type III+ 0.75 to 1.5 mm2 0-163083-7
1
4000 AMP 1) 11
0-163084-2 1 AMP 1)
LSP2090-afp.eps
LSP2091-afp.eps

For CI2
and matching female
0-734372-1
1-734387-1
1 AMP 1)
AMP 1)
12
Short-circuit
links
For other terminals
C73334-A1-C33-1
C73334-A1-C34-1
1
1
Siemens
Siemens
7/38
7/39 13
LSP2093-afp.eps
LSP2092-afp.eps
Safety cover large C73334-A1-C31-1 1 Siemens

for terminals small C73334-A1-C32-1 1 Siemens

14
Fig. 7/38 Fig. 7/39
Connection diagram
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
Line Differential Protection / 7SD52/53
SIPROTEC 4 7SD52/53 multi-end differential and distance protection in one relay
Fault locator for one and two terminal measurement for high
accuracy on long lines with high load and high fault resistance.
Capacitive charge current compensation increases the sensitivity
of the differential protection on cables and long lines.
1
Function overview
2
LSP2173f.eps
Differential protection with phase-segregated measurement
LSP2314-afp.eps
(87L, 87T)
Restricted ground-fault protection (87N) if a transformer is
within the protection zone
3
Sensitive meas. stage f. high-resist. faults
Non-switched distance protection with 7 measuring systems
(21/21N)
High resistance ground (earth)-fault protection for single and
4
three-pole tripping (50N/51N/67N)
Fig. 7/42 SIPROTEC 4 7SD52/53 differential protection relay
Phase-selective intertripping (85)
Description
Ground-fault detection in isolated and resonant-grounded
networks
5
Tele (pilot) protection (85/21, 85/67N)
The 7SD52/53 relay provides full scheme differential protection
Weak-infeed protection (27WI)
and incorporates all functions usually required for the protection
of power lines. It is designed for all power and distribution Fault locator (FL) 6
levels and protects lines with two up to six line ends. The relay is Power swing detection/tripping (68/68T)
designed to provide high-speed and phase-selective fault clear- 3-stage overcurrent protection (50, 50N, 51, 51N)
ance. The relay uses ber-optic cables or digital communication STUB bus protection (50 STUB)
networks to exchange telegrams and includes special features
for the use in multiplexed communication networks. Also pilot
Switch-onto-fault protection (50HS) 7
wires connections can be used with an external converter. This
Over/underfrequency protection (81O/U)
contributes toward improved reliability and availability of the
Auto-reclosure (79), Synchro-check (25)
electrical power system.
Breaker failure protection (50BF) 8
The relay is suitable for single and three-phase tripping applica-
Overload protection (49)
tions for two up to six line ends. Also, transformers and compen-
Lockout function (86)
sation coils within the differential protection zone are protected
as are serial and parallel-compensated lines and cables. The
relays may be employed with any type of system grounding.
Control functions
Commands for control of CB and isolators
9
The relay also provides a full-scheme and non-switched distance Monitoring functions
protection as an optional main 2 protection. Several teleprotec- Self-supervision of relay and protection data (R2R)
tion schemes ensure maximum selectivity and high-speed
tripping time.
communication 10
The units measure the delay time in the communication net- Measured-value supervision
works and adaptively match their measurements accordingly. Oscillographic fault recording
A special GPS-option allows the use of the relays in communica- Event logging/fault logging 11
tion networks, where the delay time in the transmit and receive Switching statistics
path may be quite different.
Front design
The 7SD52/53 has the following features:
2 full-scheme main protections in one unit (differential and
User-friendly local operation
PC front port for relay setting
12
distance protection) Function keys and 14 LEDs f. local alarm
High-speed tripping 10 15 ms
The serial protection interfaces (R2R interfaces) of the relays can
exibly be adapted to the requirements of all communication 2 serial protection data (R2R) interfaces for ring and chain 13
media available. topology
If the communication method is changed, exible retrotting Front interface for connecting a PC
of communication modules to the existing conguration is System interface for connection to a control system via various
possible. protocols 14
Tolerates loss of one data connection in a ring topology (routing IEC 61850 Ethernet
in 120 ms). The differential protection scheme is fully available IEC 60870-5-103
in a chain topology. PROFIBUS-FMS/-DP and DNP 3.0
Browser-based commissioning tool. Rear-side service/modem interface 15
Time synchronization via IRIG-B or DCF77 or system interface

Application
Application
1 ANSI Protection functions ANSI Protection functions
87L I for lines / cables 85/67N Teleprotection for earth(ground)-fault protection
I for lines / cables with transformers Overcurrent protection

2 87T
87N Low impedance restricted ground-fault protection for

50/50N/51/51N
50HS Instantaneous high-current tripping (switch-onto-fault)

transformers
Phase-selective intertrip, remote trip 59/27 Overvoltage/undervoltage protection
85
3 86 Lockout function 81O/U Over/underfrequency protection
25 Synchro-check
21/21N Distance protection
79 Single or three-pole auto-reclosure with new adaptive

Fault locator
4 FL
Power swing detection/tripping 49
technology
Overload protection
68/68T
Teleprotection for distance protection 50BF Breaker-failure protection
85/21
5 27WI Weak-infeed protection 74TC Trip circuit supervision
Directional earth(ground)-fault protection 50 STUB STUB-bus overcurrent stage

50N/51N/67N
10
11
12
*) Option
13 Fig. 7/43
14
15
Application
Fig. 7/44 Application for three line ends (Ring topology) 6

Typical applications Depending on the bandwidth available in the communication
SIPROTEC 7SD52/53 is a full-scheme differential protection
relay for two up to six line ends, incorporating all the additional
system, 64, 128 or 512 kbits/s can be selected for the X21
(RS422) interface; the G703 interface with 64 kbit/s, and 7
G703-E1 (2,048 kbit/s) or G703-T1 (1,554 kbit/s). Furthermore
functions for protection of overhead lines and cables at all
the 7SD610 supports the IEEE C37.94 interface with 1/ 2 / 4 and
voltage levels. Also transformers and compensation coils within
8 timeslots.
the protection zone are protected. The 7SD52/53 is suitable
for single-pole and three-pole tripping. The power system The connection to the communication device is effected via
8
star point can be solid or impedance-grounded (earthed), cost-effective 820 nm interface with multi-mode FO cables.
resonant-grounded via Peterson coil or isolated. On the TAP-line, A communication converter converts the optical to electrical
the 7SD52/53 differential relay is connected to current (CT)
and optionally voltage (VT) transformers. For the differential
signals. This offers an interference-free and isolated connection
between the relay and the communication device. 9
functions, only CTs are necessary. By connecting the relay to
VTs, the integrated "main 2" distance protection can be applied Cost-effective power system management
(full-scheme, nonswitched). Therefore, no separate distance
protection relay is required.
The SIPROTEC 4 units are numerical relays which also provide
control and monitoring functions and therefore support the 10
The link to the other relays is made by multi-mode or user in view of a cost-effective power system management. The
mono-mode FO cables. There are 5 options available, which security and reliability of power supply is increased as a result of
minimizing the use of hardware.
correspondingly cover:
820 nm, up to 1.5 km, multi-mode The local operation has been designed according to ergonomic
11
820 nm, up to 3.5 km, multi-mode criteria. Large, easy-to-read backlit displays are provided.
1300 nm, up to 24 km, mono-mode The SIPROTEC 4 units have a uniform design and a degree
820 nm support of the IEEE C37.94 interface of functionality which represents a benchmark-level of
performance in protection and control. If the requirements
12
1300 nm, up to 60 km, mono-mode
for protection, control or interlocking change, it is possible in
1550 nm, up to 100 km, mono-mode the majority of cases to implement such changes by means of
Direct ber-optic connection offers high-speed data exchange
with 512 kbit/s and improves the speed for remote signaling.
parameterization using DIGSI 4 without having to change the
hardware.
13
At the main line two differential relays are connected to CTs. The use of powerful microcontrollers and the application of
The communication is made via a multiplexed communication digital measured-value conditioning and processing largely sup-
network. presses the inuence of higher-frequency transients, harmonics
and DC components.
14
The 7SD52/53 offers many features to reliably and safely handle
data exchange via communication networks.
15
Construction
Construction

, , , and -rack sizes:
2 These are the available housing widths of

the 7SD52/53 relays, referred to a
19" module frame system. This means
LSP2174-afp.tif
replaced. The height is a uniform 245 mm
3 for ush-mounting housings and 266 mm
LSP2166-afp.tif
nected with or without ring lugs. Plug-in
4 terminals are available as an option. It
is thus possible to employ prefabricated
cable harnesses. In the case of surface
mounting on a panel, the connection Fig. 7/45 Flush-mounting housing with Fig. 7/46 Rear view with screw-type terminals
screw-type terminals and serial interfaces
5 terminals are located above and below
communication interfaces are located in a
housing.
6
7
LSP2219-afp.eps
LSP2237-afp.tif
9
screw-type terminals sloped case in a surfacemounting
10 housing
11
12
13
14
15
Differential protection (ANSI 87L, 87T, 87N) 1

The differential protection function has the following features:
It is possible to select the operating mode as "main" or as
"main 1", if the back-up distance protection is activated as
"main 2".
2
Measurements are performed separately for each phase; thus
the trip sensitivity is independent of the fault type.
An adaptive, sensitive measurement method with high sen-
sitivity for differential fault currents below the rated current
3
offers the detection of highly resistive faults. This trip element
uses special lters, which offers high security even with high
level DC-components in the short-circuit current. The trip time
of this stage is about 30 ms.
4
A high-set differential trip stage which clears differential fault
currents higher than the rated current within 10 15 ms
offers fast tripping time and high-speed fault clearence time.
When a long line or cable is switched on, transient charge
Fig. 7/49 Tripping characteristic
5
currents load the line. To avoid a higher setting of the sensitive
differential trip stage, this setpoint may be increased for a A more sensitive protection for transformers within the protec-
settable time. This offers greater sensitivity under normal load
conditions.
tion zone is given by measurement of the star-point current
on an grounded winding. Therefore the IE current measuring
6
With the setting of the CT-errors the relay automatically input has to be used.
calculates the restraint/stabilization current and adapts its If the sum of the phase currents of winding is compared with
the measured star-point current, a sensitive ground-current
permissible sensitivity according to the CTs data in the dif-
ferential conguration, optimizing sensitivity. differential protection (REF) can be implemented. 7
This function is substantially more sensitive than the dif-
Different CT ratios at the line ends are handled inside the relay.
ferential protection during faults to ground in a winding,
The mismatch of 1 to 6 is allowed.
detecting fault currents as small as 10 % of the transformer
The differential protection trip can be guarded with an overcur-
rent pickup. Thus differential current and overcurrent lead to a
rated current. 8
nal trip decision. Enhanced communication features for communication networks
Easy to set tripping characteristic. Because the relay works The data required for the differential calculations are cyclically
adaptively, only the setpoint IDiff> (sensitive stage) and IDiff>>
(high-set current differential stage) must be set according to
exchanged in full-duplex mode in form of synchronous, serial
telegrams between the protection units. The telegrams are
9
the charge current of the line/cable. secured with CRC check sums, so that transmission errors in a
With an optional capacitive charge current compensation, the communication network are immediately detected.
sensitivity can be increased to 40 % of the normal setting of
IDiff>. This function is recommended for long cables and long
Data communication is immune to electromagnetic interfer-
ence because ber-optic cables are employed in the critical
10
lines. region
Differential and restraint currents are monitored continuously Supervision of each individual incoming telegram and of
during normal operation and are displayed as operational
measurements.
the entire communication path between the units without
additional equipment.
11
High stability during external faults even with different current Unambiguous identication of each unit is ensured by assign-
transformers saturation level. For an external fault, only 5 ms ment of a settable communication address within a differential
saturation-free time are necessary to guarantee the stability of
the differential conguration.
protection topology. Only those units mutually known to each
other can cooperate. Incorrect interconnection of the com- 12
With transformers or compensation coils in the protection munication links results in blocking of the protection system.
zone, the sensitive trip stage can be blocked by an inrush Detection of reected telegrams in the communication system.
detection function. It works with the second harmonic of the
measured current which is compared with the fundamental
Detection of delay time changes in communication networks.
Measurement of the delay time to the remote line ends
13
component.
with dynamic compensation of the delay in the differential
With transformers in the protection zone, vector group adapta- measurement. Supervision of the maximum permissible delay
tion and matching of different CT ratios are carried out in the
relay. Additionally, the zero-sequence current owing through
time is included.
Generation of alarms on heavily disturbed communication
14
an grounded neutral is eliminated from the differential mea-
links. Faulty telegram counters are available as operational
surement. The 7SD52/53 therefore works like a transformer
measurement.
differential relay, whereas the line ends may be far away.
(continued on next page)
15
With a GPS high-precision 1-s pulse

from a GPS receiver the relays can be
1 synchronized with an absolute, exact
time at each line end. In this way, the
delay in the receive and transmit path
can be measured exactly. With this
2 optional feature the relay can be used
in communication networks where this
delay times are quite different.
Phase-selective intertrip and remote trip/
3 indications
Normally the differential fault current is
calculated for each line end nearly at the
same time. This leads to fast and uniform
4 tripping times. Under weak infeed condi-
tions, especially when the differential
function is combined with an overcurrent
pickup a phase-selective intertrip offers a
5 tripping of all line ends.
7SD52/53 has 4 intertrip signals which Fig. 7/50 Differential protection in ring or chain topology
are transmitted in high-speed (< 20 ms)
to the other line ends. These intertrip
6 signals can also be initiated by an external relay via binary
inputs and therefore be used to indicate, for example, a
The two-end line is a special case, because when the main
connection is interrupted, the communication switches over
directional decision of the backup distance relay. from a main path to a secondary path. This hot standby trans-
In addition, 4 high-speed remote trip signals are available, mission function ensures a high availability of the system and
protects differential protection against communication route
7 which may be initiated by an external or internal event.
24 remote signals can be freely assigned to inputs and outputs
failure on important lines.
at each line end and are circulating between the different In a ring topology, one line end can be logged out from the
devices. differential protection topology for service or maintenance
reasons by a signal via binary input. Checks for the breaker
8 Communication topologies / modes of operation position and load current are made before this logout is initi-
The differential relays may work in a ring or daisy chain line ated. In a chain topology, the relays at the end of the line can
topology. Use of a test mode offer advantages under commis- be logged out from the differential protection topology.
sioning and service conditions. The whole conguration can be set up into a test mode. All
9 The system tolerates the loss of one data connection in a ring functions and indications are available except the breakers
topology. The ring topology is rerouted within 20 ms forming are not tripped. The local relay can be tested and no trip or
then a chain topology, while the differential protection func- intertrip reaction is effected by the other relays.
tion is immediately reactivated.
10 When the communication connections need to be reduced
or when these are not available, the whole system is able to
function without interruption as chain topology. At the line
ends, only cost-effective 7SD52/53 relays with one protection
11 interface are necessary for this application.
12
13
14
15

7SD52/53 provides a non-switched distance protection featuring
all well-proven algogrithms of 7SA522 and 7SA6. It is possible 1
to select the operating mode "main" or "main 2", if the back-up
differential is activated as "main 1". By parallel calculation
and monitoring of all six impedance loops, a high degree of
sensitivity and selectivity is achieved for all types of faults. The
shortest tripping time is less than one cycle. All methods of
2
neutral-point connection (resonant grounding, isolated, solid
or low-resistance grounding) are reliably dealt with. Single and
three-pole tripping is possible. Overhead lines can be equipped
with or without series capacitor compensation.
3
Quadrilateral and mho characteristics
The 7SD52/53 relay provides quadrilateral as well as mho zone
characteristics. Both characteristics can be used separately for 4
phase and ground (earth) faults. Resistance ground (earth)
faults can, for instance, be covered with the quadrilateral
characteristic and phase faults with the mho characteristic.
Alternatively, the quadrilateral characteristic is available with Fig. 7/51 Distance protection: quadrilateral characteristic
5
4 different pickup methods:
Overcurrent pickup I>>
Voltage-dependent overcurrent pickup V/I 6
Voltage-dependent and phase angle-dependent overcurrent
pickup V/I/
Impedance pickup Z<
Load zone
7
In order to guarantee a reliable discrimination between load
operation and short-circuit especially on long high loaded
lines the relay is equipped with a selectable load encroach-
ment characteristic. Impedances within this load encroachment
8
characteristic prevent the distance zones from unwanted
tripping.
Absolute phase-selectivity 9
The distance protection incorporates a well-proven highly
sophisticated phase selection algorithm. The pickup of unfaulted
loops is reliably eliminated to prevent the adverse inuence of
currents and voltages in the fault-free loops. This phase selec- 10
tion algorithm achieves single-pole tripping and correct distance
measurement in a wide application range. Fig. 7/52 Distance protection: mho characteristic

in case of faults with fault resistance. The distance zones can be 11
The inuence of wrong distance measurement due to parallel set forward, reverse or non-directional. Sound phase polariza-
lines can be compensated by feeding the neutral current of the tion and voltage memory provides a dynamically unlimited
parallel line to the relay. Parallel line compensation can be used directional sensitivity.
for distance protection as well as for fault locating.
Mho 12
7 distance zones
The mho tripping characteristic provides sound phase respec-
6 independent distance zones and one separate overreach zone tively memory polarization for all distance zones. The diagram
are available. Each distance zone has dedicated time stages,
partly separate for single-phase or multi-phase faults. Ground
shows characteristic without the expansion due to polarizing.
During a forward fault the polarizing expands the mho circle
13
(earth) faults are detected by monitoring the neutral current 3I0 towards the source so that the origin is included. This mho circle
and the zero-sequence voltage 3V0. expansion guarantees safe and selective operation for all types
of faults, even for close-in faults.
The quadrilateral tripping characteristic permits separate setting
of the reactance X and the resistance R. The resistance section R
14
can be set separately for faults with and without ground involve-
ment. This characteristic has therefore an optimal performance
15
Elimination of interference signals
1 Digital lters render the unit immune to

interference signals contained in the mea-
sured values. In particular, the inuence
of DC components, capacitive voltage
transformers and frequency changes is
2 considerably reduced. A special measur-
ing method is employed in order to assure
protection selectivity during saturation of
the current transformers.
3 Measuring voltage monitoring
Tripping of the distance protection is
blocked automatically in the event of
4
LSP2311-afp.tif
failure of the measuring voltage, thus
preventing spurious tripping.
The measuring voltage is monitored
by the integrated fuse failure monitor.
5 Distance protection is blocked if either
the fuse failure monitor or the auxiliary
Fig. 7/53 Power swing current and voltage wave forms
contact of the voltage transformer protec-

tion switch operates and, in this case, the
6 EMERGENCY denite-time overcurrent

protection can be activated.
7 Dynamic transient reactions, for instance

short-circuits, load uctuations, auto-
reclosures or switching operations can
cause power swings in the transmission
network. During power swings, large
8 currents along with small voltages can
cause unwanted tripping of distance
protection relays. To avoid uncontrolled
tripping of the distance protection and to
LSP2312-afp.tif
9 achieve controlled tripping in the event
of loss of synchronism, the 7SD52/53
relay is equipped with an efcient power
swing detection function. Power swings
10 can be detected under symmetrical load

conditions as well as during single-pole
Fig. 7/54 Power swing circle diagram
auto-reclosures.
Tele (pilot) protection for distance protection (ANSI 85-21) Common transmission channels are power-line carrier, micro-
11 A teleprotection function is available for fast clearance of faults
wave radio and ber-optic links. The serial protection interface
can be used for direct connection to a digital communication
up to 100 % of the line length. The following operating modes network, ber-optic or pilot-wire link as well.
may be selected:
7SD52/53 also permits the transfer of phase-selective signals.
12 PUTT, permissive underreaching zone transfer trip
POTT, permissive overreaching zone transfer trip
This feature is particularly advantageous as it ensures reliable
single-pole tripping, if two single-pole faults occur on different
UNBLOCKING lines. The transmission methods are suitable also for lines with
BLOCKING three ends (three-terminal lines).
13 Directional comparison pickup Phase-selective transmission is also possible with multi-end
Pilot-wire comparison applications, if some user-specic linkages are implemented
by way of the integrated CFC logic. During disturbances in the
transmission receiver or on the transmission circuit, the tele-
14 DUTT, direct underreaching zone transfer trip (together with
Direct Transfer Trip function)
protection function can be blocked by a binary input signal with-
out losing the zone selectivity. The control of the overreach zone
The carrier send and receive signals are available as binary Z1B (zone extension) can be switched over to the auto-reclosure
inputs and outputs and can be freely assigned to each physical function. A transient blocking function (Current reversal guard)
15 relay input or output. At least one channel is required for each
direction.
is provided in order to suppress interference signals during trip-
ping of parallel lines.


Under certain conditions on the power system it is necessary
to execute remote tripping of the circuit-breaker. The 7SD52/53 1
relay is equipped with phase-selective external trip inputs that
can be assigned to the received inter-trip signal for this purpose.
Weak-infeed protection: echo and/or trip (ANSI 27 WI) 2

To prevent delayed tripping of permissive schemes during weak
or zero infeed situations, an echo function is provided. If no
fault detector is picked up at the weak-infeed end of the line,
the signal received here is returned as echo to allow accelerated 3
tripping at the strong infeed end of the line. It is also possible
to initiate tripping at the weak-infeed end. A phase-selective
1-pole or 3-pole trip is issued if a permissive trip signal (POTT or
Unblocking) is received and if the phase-ground voltage drops
correspondingly. As an option, the weak-infeed logic can be
4
equipped according to a French specication.
Directional ground(earth)-fault protection for high-

resistance faults (ANSI 50N, 51N, 67N) 0,14
5
t= 0,02 Tp
In grounded (earthed) networks, it may happen that the (I / I )
p 1
distance protection sensitivity is not sufcient to detect high-
resistance ground (earth) faults. The 7SD52/53 protection relay
has therefore protection functions for faults of this nature.
Fig. 7/55 Normal inverse 6
The ground (earth)-fault overcurrent protection can be used with Tele (pilot) protection for directional ground(earth)-fault
3 denite-time stages and one inverse-time stage (IDMT). A 4th protection (ANSI 85-67N)
denite-time stage can be applied instead of the 1st inverse-time
stage.
The directional ground(earth)-fault overcurrent protection can 7
be combined with one of the following teleprotection schemes:
Inverse-time characteristics according to IEC 60255-3 and ANSI/ Directional comparison
IEEE are provided (see Technical data). An additional logarith-
mic inverse-time characteristic is also available.
BLOCKING
UNBLOCKING 8
The direction decision can be determined by the neutral current
provided in order to suppress interference signals during tripping
components V2 and I2. In addition or as an alternative to the
directional determination with zero-sequence voltage, the star-
of parallel lines.
9
point current of a grounded (earthed) power transformer may The pilot functions for distance protection and for
also be used for polarization. Dual polarization applications can ground(earth)-fault protection can use the same signaling
therefore be fullled. channel or two separate and redundant channels.
Alternatively, the direction can be determined by evaluation of Overcurrent protection (ANSI 50, 50N, 51, 51N)
10
zero-sequence power. Each overcurrent stage can be set in for-
ward or reverse direction or for both directions (non-directional). The 7SD52/53 provides a backup over-current protection. Two
As an option the 7SD52/53 relay can be provided with a sensitive denite-time stages and one inverse-time stage (IDMTL) are
neutral (residual) current transformer. This feature provides a
measuring range for the neutral (residual) current from 5 mA
available, separately for phase currents and for the neutral
(residual) current. Two operating modes are selectable. The
11
to 100 A with a nominal relay current of 1 A and from 5 mA function can run in parallel to the differential protection and the
to 500 A with a nominal relay current of 5 A. Thus the ground distance protection or only during interruption of the protection
(earth)-fault overcurrent protection can be applied with extreme
sensitivity.
communication and/or failure of the voltage in the VT secondary
circuit (emergency operation). The secondary voltage failure can 12
be detected by the integrated fuse failure monitor or via a binary
The function is equipped with special digital lter algorithms, input from a VT miniature circuit-breaker (VT m.c.b. trip).
providing the elimination of higher harmonics. This feature
is particularly important for low zero-sequence fault currents
which usually have a high content of 3rd and 5th harmonics.
The following inverse-time characteristics according to
IEC 60255-3 and ANSI/IEEE are provided:
13
Inrush stabilization and instantaneous switch-onto-fault trip can Inverse
be activated separately for each stage as well. Short inverse
Different operating modes can be selected. The ground(earth)- Long inverse
Moderately inverse
14
fault protection is suitable for three-phase and, optionally, for
single-phase tripping by means of a sophisticated phase selector. Very inverse
It may be blocked during the dead time of single-pole auto- Extremely inverse
reclose cycles or during pickup of the distance protection. Denite inverse 15
STUB bus overcurrent protection (ANSI 50(N)-STUB) Frequency protection (ANSI 81O/U)
1 The STUB bus overcurrent protection is a separate denite-time

overcurrent stage. It can be activated from a binary input signal-
Frequency protection can be used for overfrequency and
underfrequency protection. Unwanted frequency changes in
ing the line isolator (disconnector) is open. Settings are available the network can be detected and the load can be removed at a
for phase and ground (earth)-faults. specied frequency setting. Frequency protection can be used
over a wide frequency range (45 to 55, 55 to 65 Hz). There are
2 Instantaneous high-speed switch-onto-fault overcurrent
protection (ANSI 50HS)
and each element can be delayed separately.
Instantaneous tripping is possible when energizing a faulty line.
In the event of large fault currents, the high-speed switch-onto-
3 fault overcurrent stage can initiate very fast 3-pole tripping. The 7SD52/53 relay incorporates a two-stage breaker failure
protection to detect the failure of tripping command execution,
With lower fault currents, instantaneous tripping after switch-
for example due to a defective ciruit-breaker. The current detec-
onto-fault is also possible
tion logic is phase-segregated and can therefore also be used
4 if the breaker positions at the line ends are monitored and
connected to the relays. This breaker position monitor offers a
in single-pole tripping schemes. If the fault current is not inter-
rupted after a settable time delay has expired, a retrip command
high-speed trip during switch-onto-fault conditions. or a busbar trip command is generated. The breaker failure
with the overreach distance zone Z1B or just with pickup in any protection can be initiated by all integrated protection functions
5 zone. as well as by external devices via binary input signals.
The switch-onto-fault initiation can be detected via the binary Auto-reclosure (ANSI 79)
input "manual close" or automatically via measurement.
The 7SD52/53 relay is equipped with an auto-reclose function
6 Fault locator (AR). The function includes several operating modes:

3-pole auto-reclosure for all types of faults; different dead
The integrated fault locator calculates the fault impedance and
the distance-to-fault. The result is displayed in ohms, miles, times are available depending the type of fault
kilometers or in percent of the line length. Parallel line and load 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase faults, no reclosing for multi-
7 current compensation is also available. phase faults
1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase faults and for 2-phase faults
As an option for a line with two ends, a fault locator function
with measurement at both ends of the line is available.Thanks without ground, no reclosing for multi-phase faults
to this feature, accuracy of measurement on long lines under 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase and 3-pole auto-reclosing for
8 high load conditions and high fault resistances is considerably
increased.
multi-phase faults
without ground and 3-pole auto-reclosure for other faults
9 (ANSI 59, 27)
binary inputs and outputs
load or are only lightly loaded. The 7SD52/53 contains a number
of overvoltage measuring elements. Each measuring element Control of the integrated AR function by external protection
10 is of two-stage design. The following measuring elements are

available:
Adaptive auto-reclosure. Only one line end is closed after the
dead time. If the fault persists this line end is switched off.
Phase-to-ground overvoltage Otherwise the other line ends are closed via a command over
the communication links. This avoids stress when heavy fault
11 Zero-sequence overvoltage
currents are fed from all line ends again.
Interaction with the internal or an external synchro-check
input or be derived from the phase voltages. Monitoring of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts
Positive-sequence overvoltage of the local end or calculated In addition to the above-mentioned operating modes, several
12 for the remote end of the line (compounding). other operating principles can be employed by means of the
Negative-sequence overvoltage integrated programmable logic (CFC).
Tripping by the overvoltage measuring elements can be effected Integration of auto-reclosure in the feeder protection allows
evaluation of the line-side voltages. A number of voltage-
13 either at the local circuit-breaker or at the remote station by
means of a transmitted signal. dependent supplementary functions are thus available:
The 7SD52/53 is tted, in addition, with three two-stage under- DLC

voltage measuring elements: By means of dead-line check, reclosure is effected only when
the line is deenergized (prevention of asynchronous breaker
14 Phase-to-ground undervoltage
Phase-to-phase undervoltage
closure).
Positive-sequence undervoltage
15 of a minimum current criterion and by means of binary inputs.

ADT Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74TC)

at the remote station was successful (reduction of stress on
equipment).
One or two binary inputs for each circuit- breaker pole can be
used for monitoring the circuit-breaker trip coils including the 1
connecting cables. An alarm signal is issued whenever the circuit
RDT is interrupted.
Reduced dead time is employed in conjunction with auto-
reclosure where no tele-protection method is employed:
When faults within the zone extension, but external to the
Lockout (ANSI 86) 2
protected line, are switched off for rapid auto-reclosure (RAR), All binary outputs can be stored like LEDs and reset using the
the RDT function decides on the basis of measurement of the LED reset key. The lockout state is also stored in the event of
supply voltage failure. Reclosure can only be issued after the
return voltage from the remote station which has not tripped
whether or not to reduce the dead time. lockout state is reset. 3
Synchronism check (ANSI 25) Local measured values
The measured values are calculated from the measured current
Where two network sections are switched in by control com-
mand or following a 3-pole auto-reclosure, it must be ensured and voltage signals along with the power factor (cos ), the 4
that both network sections are mutually synchronous. For frequency, the active and reactive power. Measured values are
this purpose, a synchronism-check function is provided. After displayed as primary or secondary values or in percent of the
verication of the network synchronism the function releases specic line rated current and voltage. The relay uses a 20 bit
the CLOSE command. Alternatively, reclosing can be enabled high-resolution AD converter and the analog inputs are factory-
calibrated, so a high accuracy is reached.
5
for different criteria, e.g., checking that the busbar or line is not
carrying a voltage (dead line or dead bus). The following values are available for measured-value
processing:
Currents 3 x IPhase, 3I0, IE, IE sensitive 6
A built-in overload protection with a current and thermal alarm Voltages 3 x VPhase-Ground, 3 x VPhase-Phase, 3V0, Ven, VSYNC,
stage is provided for the thermal protection of cables and trans- VCOMP
formers. The trip time characteristics are exponential functions
according to IEC 60255-8. The preload is thus considered in the
trip times for overloads. An adjustable alarm stage can initiate
Symmetrical components I1, I2, V1, V2
Real power P (Watt), reactive power Q (Var),
7
an alarm before tripping is initiated. apparent power S (VA)
Power factor PF (= cos )
Monitoring and supervision functions
The 7SD52/53 relay provides comprehensive monitoring
Frequency f 8
Differential and restraint current per phase
functions covering both hardware and software. Furthermore,
the measured values are continuously checked for plausibility. Load impedances with directional indication
3 x RPhase-Ground, XPhase-Ground
Therefore the current and voltage transformers are also included
in this monitoring system. 3 x RPhase-Phase, XPhase-Phase 9
Long term mean values
Current transformer / Monitoring functions 3 x IPhase; I1; P; P+; P-; Q; Q+; Q-; S
A broken wire between the CTs and relay inputs under load may
lead to maloperation of a differential relay if the load current
Minimum/maximum memory
3 x IPhase; I1; 3 x VPhase-Ground 10
exceeds the differential setpoint. The 7SD52/53 provides fast 3 x VPhase-Phase, 3V0; V1; P+; P-; Q+; Q-; S; f;
broken wire supervision which immediatelly blocks all line ends power factor (+); power factor (-);
from mean values 3 x IPhase; I1; P; Q; S
if a broken wire condition is measured by a local relay. This
avoids mal-operation due to broken wire condition. Only the Energy meters Wp+; Wp-; WQ+; WQ- 11
phase where the broken wire is detected is blocked. The other Availability of the data connection to the remote line ends per
phases remain under differential operation. minute and per hour Regarding delay time measuring with the
Fuse failure monitoring
GPS-version the absolute time for transmit and receive path is
displayed separately. 12
Limit value monitoring: Limit values are monitored by means
open circuit in the voltage transformer secondary circuit the
of the CFC. Commands can be derived from these limit value
distance protection would respond with an unwanted trip due
to this loss of voltage. This secondary voltage interruption can
be detected by means of the integrated fuse failure monitor.
indications.
13
Immediate blocking of distance protection is provided for all
types of secondary voltage failures.
Additional measurement supervision functions are 14
Symmetry of voltages and currents
15
Measured values at remote line ends
1 Every two seconds the currents and volt-

ages are freezed at the same time at all
line ends and transmitted via the commu-
nication link. At a local line end, currents
and voltages are thus available with their
2 amount and phases (angle) locally and
remotely. This allows checking the whole
conguration under load conditions. In
addition, the differential and restraint
3 currents are also displayed. Important
communication measurements, such as
delay time or faulty telegrams per minute/
hour are also available as measurements.
4 These measured values can be processed

with the help of the CFC logic editor.
Commissioning
5 Special attention has been paid to

outputs can be displayed and activated
directly. This can simplify the wiring check
LSP2845.tif
6 and fault events and the fault records are
clearly arranged.
Furthermore, all currents and optional Fig. 7/56 Browser-aided commissioning: Phasor diagram
7 voltages and phases are available via

communication link at the local relay and
are displayed in the relay, with DIGSI 4 or
with the Web Monitor.
8 The operational and fault events and

fault records from all line ends share a
common time tagging which allows to
compare events registered in the different
line ends on a common time base.
9 WEB Monitor Internet technology
10 operating program, the relay contains
11 this solution is to operate the unit with
infrastructure. This program shows the
12 protection topology and comprehensive
measurements from local and remote line
LSP2846.tif
ends. Local and remote measurements

are shown as phasors and the breaker
13 positions of each line end are depicted. It

is possible to check the correct connection Fig. 7/57 Browser-aided commissioning: Differential protection tripping characteristic
of the current transformers or the correct
vector group of a transformer.
14 Stability can be checked by using the operating characteristic

as well as the calculated differential and restraint values in the
If the distance protection is active, then the valid zone character-
istic (quadrilateral/mho) is displayed.
browser windows.
Event log and trip log messages are also available. Remote
control can be used, if the local front panel cannot be accessed.
15
Control and automation functions Assignment of feedback to command
Control The positions of the circuit-breaker or switching devices and

transformer taps are acquired by feedback. These indication 1
In addition to the protection functions, the SIPROTEC 4 units also inputs are logically assigned to the corresponding command
support all control and monitoring functions that are required outputs. The unit can therefore distinguish whether the indica-
for operating medium-voltage or high-voltage substations. tion change is a consequence of switching operation or whether
The main application is reliable control of switching and other it is a spontaneous change of state (intermediate position). 2
processes.
Chatter disable
obtained from auxiliary contacts and communicated via binary
inputs. Therefore it is possible to detect and indicate both the
period of time, the number of status changes of indication input 3
OPEN and CLOSED position or a fault or intermediate circuit-
blocked for a certain period, so that the event list will not record
breaker or auxiliary contact position.
integrated operator panel Filter time
4
binary inputs All binary indications can be subjected to a lter time (indication
substation control and protection system suppression).
DIGSI 4
5
Command processing
Indications can be ltered or delayed.
indication input. The indication is passed on only if the indica- 6
hardware and software, checking of the external process, tion voltage is still present after a set period of time. In the
control actions using functions such as runtime monitoring and event of indication delay, there is a wait for a preset time. The
automatic command termination after output. Here are some information is passed on only if the indication voltage is still
typical applications: present after this time. 7
Single and double commands using 1, 1 plus 1 common or Indication derivation
2 trip contacts
existing indication. Group indications can also be formed. The 8
such as control of circuit-breakers, disconnectors and ground- reduced and restricted to the most important signals.
ing switches
combination with existing information
9
A data transmission lockout can be activated, so as to prevent
Automation/user-dened logic transfer of information to the control center during work on a
circuit bay.
(CFC), specic functions for the automation of switchgear or Test operation
10
automatic control system for test purposes.
Switching authority 11
communication or by key-operated switch (when available).
12
down: LOCAL; DIGSI PC program, REMOTE
Every switching operation and change of breaker position is kept
in the status indication memory. The switch command source, 13
and result of a switching operation are retained.
14
15
Communication
Communication
1 With respect to communication, particular emphasis has been

placed on high levels of exibility, data integrity and utilization of
standards common in energy automation. The design of the com-
munication modules permits interchangeability on the one hand,
2 and on the other hand provides openness for future standards
(for example, Industrial Ethernet).
Local PC interface
3 The PC interface accessible from the front of the unit permits

quick access to all parameters and fault event data. Of particular
commissioning.
4 Rear-mounted interfaces
Two communication modules located on the rear of the unit Fig. 7/58 IEC 60870-5-103 star-type RS232 copper conductor
incorporate optional equipment complements and readily permit connection or ber-optic connection
5 retrotting. They assure the ability to comply with the require-

ments of different communication interfaces.
The interfaces make provision for the following applications:
Service /modem interface
6 By means of the RS232/RS485 or optical interface, it is possible
to efciently operate a number of protection units centrally
via DIGSI 4 or standard browser. Remote operation is possible
on connection of a modem. This offers the advantage of rapid
7 fault clarication, especially in the case of unmanned power
plants.
With the optical version, centralized operation can be imple-
mented by means of a star coupler.
8 System interface
This interface is used to carry out communication with a
control or protection and control system and supports a variety
of communication protocols and interface designs, depending
9 on the module connected.
Commissioning aid via a standard Web browser

In the case of the 7SD52/53, a PC with a standard browser can Fig. 7/59 Bus structure for station bus with Ethernet and IEC 61850
10 be connected to the local PC interface or to the service interface

(refer to Commissioning program). The relays include a small
Web server that sends its HTML pages to the browser via an Safe bus architecture
established dial-up network connection. RS485 bus
11 Retrotting: Modules for every type of communication

With this data transmission via copper conductors electro-
Communication modules for retrotting are available for the twisted-pair conductors. Upon failure of a unit, the remaining
entire SIPROTEC 4 unit range. These ensure that, where different system continues to operate without any disturbances.
communication interfaces (electrical or optical) and protocols Fiber-optic double ring circuit
12 (IEC 61850 Ethernet, IEC 60870-5-103, PROFIBUS-FMS/-DP, The ber-optic double ring circuit is immune to electromag-
DNP 3.0, DIGSI, etc.) are required, such demands can be met. netic interference. Upon failure of a section between two
units, the communication system continues to operate without
disturbance.
13 It is generally impossible to communicate with a unit that has
14
15
Communication
IEC 61850 Ethernet
LSP2163-afpen.tif
The Ethernet-based IEC 61850 protocol
is the worldwide standard for protection 1
LSP2164-afp.tif
and control systems used by power supply
corporations. Siemens was the rst
manufacturer to support this standard. By
means of this protocol, information can
also be exchanged directly between bay
2
units so as to set up simple masterless
systems for bay and system interlocking.
Access to the units via the Ethernet bus is
also possible with DIGSI.
3
IEC 60870-5-103 Fig. 7/60 RS232/RS485 electrical Fig. 7/61 PROFIBUS communication module,
communication module optical double-ring
standardized protocol for the efcient
4
communication in the protected area. IEC
60870-5-103 is supported by a number
LSP2162-afpen.tif
of protection device manufacturers and is
used worldwide. 5
PROFIBUS-DP
LSP3.01-0021.tif
standard for communications and is sup- 6
device manufacturers.
DNP 3.0 7
DNP 3.0 (Distributed Network Protocol
Version 3) is a messaging-based commu- Fig. 7/62 820 nm ber-optic communication Fig. 7/63 Fiber-optic Ethernet communication
nication protocol. The SIPROTEC 4 units
are fully Level 1 and Level 2 compliant
with DNP 3.0. DNP 3.0 is supported by a
ers.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Communication
System solutions for protection and station control FO61), OMA22) module:
820 nm ber-optic interface/ST connectors for direct connec-
1 Together with the SICAM power automation system, SIPROTEC 4
can be used with PROFIBUS-FMS. Over the low-cost electrical
tion up to 3.5 km with multi-mode FO cable.
RS485 bus, or interference-free via the optical double ring, the New ber-optic interfaces, series FO1x
units exchange information with the control system. FO171): For direct connection up to 24 km3), 1300 nm, for
2 Units featuring IEC 60870-5-103 interfaces can be connected to

FO181): For direct connection up to 60 km3), 1300 nm, for
Through this interface, the system is open for the connection of mono-mode ber 9/125 m, LC-Duplex connector
units of other manufacturers (see Fig. 7/58). FO191): For direct connection up to 100 km3), 1550 nm, for
3 Because of the standardized interfaces, SIPROTEC units can also
FO30: 820 nm ber-optic interface/ST connectors for direct
Electrical RS485 or optical interfaces are available. The optimum connection up to 1.5 km and for connections to a IEEE C37.94
physical data transfer medium can be chosen thanks to opto- multiplexer interface.
4 electrical converters. Thus, the RS485 bus allows low-cost wiring
a ber-optic interface with 820 nm and 2 ST connectors to
For IEC 61850, an interoperable system solution is offered with the protection relay. The link to the communication network
5 SICAM PAS. Via the 100 Mbits/s Ethernet bus, the units are linked
is optionally an electrical X21 or a G703/-E1/-T1 interface.
Furthermore the IEEE C37.94 interface is supported by the FO30
is standardized, thus also enabling direct connection of units module.
For operation via copper wire communication (pilot wires or
6 however, the units can also be used in other manufacturers'
systems (see Fig. 7/59).
twisted telephone pair), a modern communication converter for
copper cables is available. This operates with both the two-wire
Via modem and service interface, the protection engineer and three-wire copper connections which were used by conven-
has access to the protection devices at all times. This permits tional differential protection systems before. The communication
7 remote maintenance and diagnosis (cyclic testing). converter for copper cables is designed for 5 kV insulation
voltage. An additional 20 kV isolation transformer can extend
Parallel to this, local communication is possible, for example,
the eld of applications of this technique into ranges with
during a major inspection.
higher insulation voltage requirements. The connection via FO
8 Serial protection interface (R2R interface) cable to the relay is interference-free. With SIPROTEC 4 and the
communication converter for copper cables a digital follow-up
As an option, the 7SD52/53 provides one or two protection technique is available for two-wire protection systems (typical 8
interfaces to cover two up to six line end applications in ring or km) and all three-wire protection systems using existing copper
chain topology and hot standby communication between two communication links.
9 line ends.
Different communication converters are listed under
In addition to the differential protection function, other protec- "Accessories".
tion functions can use this interface to increase selectivity and
sensitivity as well as covering advanced applications. Communication data:
10 Fast phase-selective teleprotection signaling for distance 32-bit CRC-check according to CCITT and ITU
protection, optionally with POTT or PUTT schemes Each protection relay possesses a unique relay address
Two and three-terminal line applications can be implemented Continuous communication link supervision: Individual faulty
data telegrams do not constitute an immediate danger, if they
11 without additional logic
Signaling for directional ground(earth)- fault protection occur only sporadically. The statistical availability, per minute
directional comparison for high-resistance faults in solidly and hour, of the serial protection interface can be displayed.
grounded systems Supported network interfaces X21/RS422 with 64 or 128 or
512 kbit/s; or G703-64 kbit/s and G703-E1 (2,048 kbit/s) or
12 Echo function
G703-T1 (1,554 kbit/s).
dead time (ADT) mode Max. channel delay time 0.1 ms to 30 ms (in steps of 0.1 ms)
or IEEE C37.94.
28 remote signals for fast transfer of binary signals
13 Flexible utilization of the communication channels by means of
Protocol HDLC
the programmable CFC logic

The protection interfaces have different options to cover new
14 and existing communication infrastructures.
820 nm ber-optic interface with clock recovery/ST connectors
1) For ush-mounting housing.
for direct connection with multi-mode FO cable up to 1.5 km
15 for the connection to a communication converter.
3) For surface-mounting housing the internal ber-optic module
(OMA1) will be delivered together with an external repeater.

Communication
Communication possibilities between relays
3
Fig. 7/65 Direct optical link up to 1.5 km/3.5 km, 820nm Fig. 7/66 Direct optical link up to 25/60 km with 1300 nm
or up to 100 km with 1550 nm
4
7
Fig. 7/67 Connection to a communication network CC-XG Fig. 7/69 Connection to a communication network CC-2M
9
max. 1.5 km with
62.5 m/125 m
7SD52/53 multi-mode ber
Communication
7SD610
FO30 IEEE C37.94
MUX
network 10
SIPV6.011en.eps
FO30 with ST connectors
Fig. 7/68 Connection to a communication network via IEEE C37.94 Fig. 7/70 Connection to a pilot wire 11
12
13
14
15
Typical connection
Typical connection
1 Typical connection for current and volt-

age transformers
2 point in the line direction, I4 connected as

summation current transformer (= 3I0):
Holmgreen circuit
3 of the broken (open) delta winding on
internally.
Note:
4 Voltage inputs are always available in the
relay. But there is no need to connect it to
voltage transformers for the differential
protection function.
5 Fig. 7/71 Example of connection for current and voltage transformers

6 The 3 phase current transformers are
7 permitting a high sensitive 3I0 measure-
ment.
Note:
Terminal Q7 of the I4 transformer must
8 be connected to the terminal of the core-
balance CT pointing in the same direction
as the neutral point of the phase current
transformers (in this case in line direction).
9 The voltage connection is effected in
10 Fig. 7/72 Alternative connection of current transformers for sensitive

ground(earth)-current measuring with core-balance current transformers
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connection

point in the line direction, I4 connected to 1
of a grounded (earthed) transformer for
directional ground(earth)-fault protection.
The voltage connection is effected in
2
4
Fig. 7/73 Alternative connection of current transformers for measuring
neutral current of a grounded (earthed) power transformer 5
6
the summation current of the parallel line
for parallel line compensation on overhead
lines. The voltage connection is effected in
7
9
Fig. 7/74 Alternative connection of current transformers for measuring
the ground (earth) current of a parallel line 10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 7/75 Connection of current transformer with restricted ground-fault
protection (REF)
15
Typical connection
1 3 phase voltage transformers, V4 con-

nected to broken (open) delta winding
monitoring and ground(earth)-fault direc-
tional protection. The current connection is
2 effected in accordance with Fig. 7/71, 7/72,
7/73 and 7/74.
5 Fig. 6/76 Alternative connection of voltage transformers for measuring

the displacement voltage (e-n voltage)
6 Alternative voltage connection

synchrocheck.
7 Note:
Any phase-to-phase or phase-toground
(earth) voltage may be employed as the
busbar voltage. Parameterization is carried
8 out on the unit. The current connection is
effected in accordance with Fig. 7/71, 7/72,
7/73 and 7/74.
10 Fig. 6/77 Alternative connection of voltage transformers for measuring

the busbar voltage
11
12
13
14
15
Technical data

Analog inputs
Rated frequency 50 or 60 Hz (selectable) RUN (green)
Quantity
1 1
Rated current IN 1 or 5 A (selectable, controlled by ERROR (red) 1
rmware) Indication (red), function can be 14
assigned
Rated voltage
Power consumption
80 to 125 V (selectable)
Unit design 2
In CT circuits with IN = 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA Housing 7XP20 See dimension drawings, part 14
In CT circuits with IN = 5 A Approx. 0.30 VA 1/2 x 19" or 1/1 x 19"
In VT circuits Approx. 0.10 VA
Thermal overload capacity
In CT circuits 500 A for 1 s
Degree of protection acc. to
EN 60529
3
150 A for 10 s Flush-mounting housing
4 x IN continuous Rear IP 50
In VT circuits 230 V, continuous per phase Front IP 51
Dynamic overload capacity For the terminals IP 2x with cover cap 4
In CT circuits 1250 A (half cycle) Weight
In the CT circuit for high sensitive Flush-mounting housing
ground-fault protection 1/2 x 19" 6 kg
Auxiliary voltage
1/1 x 19"
10 kg
5
Rated voltage DC 24 to 48 V 1/2 x 19" 11 kg
DC 60 to 125 V 1) 1/1 x 19" 19 kg
DC 110 to 250 V 1)
and AC 115 V with 50/60 Hz1)
Serial interfaces
6
Permissible tolerance -20 % to +20 %
Operating interface, front of unit for DIGSI 4
Max. superimposed AC voltage 15 %
(peak-to-peak) Connection Front panel, non-isolated, RS232,
Power consumption
During normal operation Approx. 8 W Baud rate
4800 to 115200 baud
7
During pickup with all inputs Approx. 18 W Time synchronization (rear of unit)
and outputs activated
IRIG-B/DCF77/SCADA or 1 sec pulse from GPS (format IRIG-B000)
voltage failure Vaux AC/DC 110 V
50 ms
Connection 9-pin subminiature connector
(SUB-D)
8
Binary inputs
Voltage levels 5 or 12 or 24 V
Quantity 8 or 16 or 24
Function can be assigned Dielectric test 500 V/50 Hz
Minimum permissible voltage DC 19 or 88 or 176 V, bipolar Service interface (operating interface 2) for DIGSI 4 /modem / service 9
Range is selectable with jumpers (3 operating ranges) Isolated RS232/RS485 9-pin subminiature connector
for each binary input Dielectric test 500 V/50 Hz
Maximum permissible voltage DC 300 V Distance for RS232 Max. 15 m
Distance for RS485, depends
on the baud rate
Max. 1000 m
10
Output relays Fiber-optic Integrated ST connector
Quantity 16 or 24 or 32 Optical wavelength = 820 nm
Function can be assigned Permissible attenuation Max. 8 dB for glass-ber 62.5/125 m
Switching capacity
Make 1000 W /VA
Distance
System interface
Max. 1.5 km
11
Break 30 VA
(refer to ordering code) IEC 61850 Ethernet
Break (for resistive load) 40 W
IEC 60870-5-103
Break (for = L/R 50 ms) 25 VA
PROFIBUS-FMS
PROFIBUS-DP 12
Permissible current 30 A for 0.5 s DNP 3.0
5 A continuous Isolated RS232/RS485 9-pin subminiature connector
Baud rate 4800 to 38400 baud
Dielectric test
Distance for RS232
500 V/50 Hz
Max. 15 m
13
14
1) Ranges are settable by means of jumpers. 15

Technical data
System interface, continued External communication converter 7XV5662-0AC00 for pilotwires
1 PROFIBUS RS485
Dielectric test
Baud rate
500 V/50 Hz
Max. 12 Mbaud
External communication conver-
ter to interface between relays,
optical 820 nm interface and a
Distance 1 km at 93.75 kB; 100 m at 12 MB pilot wire or twisted telephone
PROFIBUS ber-optic2) pair.
2 Only for ush-mounting housing

ST connector
Typical distance
Fiber-optic 820 nm with clock
15 km
Max. 1.5 km with 62.5/125 m
Baud rate Max. 1.5 Mbaud recovery multi-mode FO cable
Optical wavelength = 820 nm
Permissible attenuation Max. 8 dB for glass-ber 62.5/125 m Pilot wire Screw-type terminal 5 kV isolated
3 Distance
Protection interface (R2R interface)
500 kB/s 1.6 km, 1500 kB/s 530 m Permissible time delay (duration of data transmission)
Delay of telegrams due to trans- Max. 30 ms per transmission path
FO51), OMA12): Fiber-optic inter- For multi-mode ber 62.5/125 m, mission for one unit to the other. Permissible max. value can be
face with clock recovery for direct ST connectors Delay is constantly measured and selected
adjusted
4 connection up to 1.5 km or for
connection to a communication
converter, 820 nm
Permissible ber attenuation 8 dB
Electrical tests
FO61), OMA22): Fiber-optic inter- For multi-mode ber 62.5/125 m,
Specications
face for direct connection up to ST connectors
5 3.5 km, 820 nm

New ber-optic interfaces, series FO1x
Permissible ber attenuation 16 dB Standards IEC 60255 (product standards)
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0/.1/.2
UL 508
FO171): for direct connection up For mono-mode ber 9/125 m, For further standards see
to 24 km3), 1300 nm LC-Duplex connector Individual functions
6 FO181): for direct connection up

Insulation tests
to 60 km3), 1300 nm LC-Duplex connector
Permissible ber attenuation 29 dB Voltage test (100 % test)
FO191): for direct connection up For mono-mode ber 9/125 m, All circuits except for auxiliary 2.5 kV (r.m.s.), 50/60 Hz
7 to 100 km3), 1550 nm LC-Duplex connector

supply, binary inputs and
Auxiliary voltage and binary DC 3.5 kV
Relay communication equipment
inputs (100 % test)
External communication converter 7XV5662-0AA00
RS485/RS232 rear side commu- 500 V (r.m.s.), 50/60 Hz
8 for communication networks X21/ G703-64 kbit/s
External communication con-
synchronization interface
verter to interface between the (100 % test)
relays, optical 820 nm interface Impulse voltage test (type test)
and the X21(RS422) G703-
9 64 kbit/s interface of a communi-
cation device
All circuits except for commu-
synchronization interface,
5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 s; 0.5 J
3 positive and 3 negative impulses
at intervals of 5 s
X21/G703, RS422 selectable by class III
jumpers. Baud rate selectable by
10 jumpers
Input: ber-optic 820 nm Max. 1.5 km with 62.5/125 m
Standards IEC 60255-6, IEC 60255-22
(product standards) (type tests)
with clock recovery multi-mode FO cable to device side
Output: X21 (RS422) electrical 64/128/512 kbit (selectable by DIN 57435 part 303
interface on communication jumper)
11 device max. 800 m, 15-pin connector
G703-64 kbit/s electrical interface 64 kbit/s, max. 800 m, screw-type
High frequency test
IEC 60255-22-1, class III and
2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz; = 15 ms;
400 surges per s;
VDE 0435 part 303, class III test duration 2 s
on communication device terminal
Electrostatic discharge 8 kV contact discharge; 15 kV air
External communication converter 7XV5662-0AD00 IEC 60255-22-2, class IV discharge; both polarities; 150 pF;
12 for communication networks with G703-E1 or G703-T1
External communication conver-
Irradiation with RF eld, non-
Ri = 330
10 V/m; 27 to 500 MHz
ter to interface between the re- modulated
lays, optical 820 nm interface and IEC 60255-22-3 (report), class III
G703-E1 or G703-T1 interface of
13 a communication network.
Inputs: 2 ber-optic inputs Max. 1.5 km with 62.5/125m
Irradiation with RF eld,
amplitude-modulated
10 V/m; 80 to 1000 MHz;
80 % AM; 1 kHz
820 nm, 1RS232 input multi-mode 1 FO cable to device side

Output:
14 G703.5
G703.6
E1: 2,048 kbit/s
T1: 1,554 kbit/s
Electrical interface on communi- max. 800 m, screw-type terminal 1) For ush-mounting housing.
cation network 2) For surface-mounting housing.
3) For surface-mounting housing the internal FO module OMA1
15 will be delivered together with an external repeater.

Technical data
Irradiation with RF eld, pulse- 10 V/m; 900 MHz; repetition During transport
modulated IEC 61000-4-3/ frequency 200 Hz; duty cycle 50 %
ENV 50204, class III
Fast transients, bursts 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz;
Standards
Vibration
IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2
Sinusoidal 1
IEC 60255-22-4 and burst length = 15 ms; IEC 60255-2-6 8 to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration
IEC 61000-4-4, class IV repetition rate 300 ms; frequency sweep 1 octave/min
both polarities; Ri = 50 ;
test duration 1 min
Shock
Half-sinusoidal
2
High-energy surge voltages IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 15 g, duration 11 ms,
(SURGE) IEC 61000-4-5, installati- IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks each in both directions
on class III Auxiliary supply Common mode: 2 kV, 12 , 9 F of the 3 axes
Measurements inputs, binary

Differential mode: 1 kV; 2 , 18 F
Common mode: 2 kV, 42 , 0.5 F
Continuous shock
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
Half-sinusoidal
3
inputs, binary outputs Differential mode: 1 kV; 42 , 0.5 F IEC 60068-2-29 1000 shocks each in both directions
Line-conducted HF, amplitude- 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM; of the 3 axes
Magnetic eld with power
frequency
30 A/m continuous; 300 A/m for 3 s;
50 Hz; 0.5 mT; 50 MHz
4
IEC 61000-4-8, class IV; Temperatures
IEC 60255-6 Type-tested acc. to IEC 60068-2-1 -25 C to +85 C / -13 F to +185 F
capability
Damped wave; 50 surges per second;
Temporarily permissible operating -20 C to +70 C / -4 F to +158 F
5
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 Duration 2 s; Ri = 150 to 200 temperature, tested for 96 h
Fast transient surge withstand 4 to 5 kV; 10/150 ns; 50 surges Recommended permanent -5 C to +55 C / +25 F to +131 F
capability, ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 per second; both polarities;
duration 2 s; Ri = 80
Radiated electromagnetic interfe- 35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz
IEC 60255-6
6
rence, IEEE C37.90.2 amplitude and pulse-modulated impaired above +55 C / +131 F)
Damped oscillations IEC 60894, 2.5 kV (peak value), polarity Limiting temperature during -25 C to +55 C / -13 F to 131 F
IEC 61000-4-12 alternating 100 kHz
1, 10 and 50 MHz, Ri = 200
permanent storage
7
EMC tests for interference emission; type tests transport
Standard EN 50081-* (generic standard) Humidity
on lines, only auxiliary supply,
150 kHz to 30 MHz
Limit class B
Permissible humidity stress
Yearly average 75 % relative humi-
dity; on 56 days in the year up to 8
IEC-CISPR 22 units in such a way, that they are 93 % relative humidity; condensation
Radio interference eld strength 30 to 1000 MHz not exposed to direct sunlight or is not permitted
IEC-CISPR 22 Limit class B pronounced temperature changes
9
Mechanical dynamic tests
Functions
Differential protection (ANSI 87L, 87T)
During operation
Sensitive normal trip stage IDiff> 10
Setting range of
IDiff > secondary 1 A 0.1 to 20 A (step 0.1)
secondary 5 A 0.5 to 100 A
20 cycles in 3 othogonal axes
Tripping time (three line ends)
IDiff > 2.5 IDiff > (setting)
50 Hz
Min. 27 ms
11
Typ. 29 ms
Shock Half-sinusoidal
60 Hz
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms,
Min. 24 ms
IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks each in both directions
of the 3 axes
Delay time of IDiff> trip stage
Typ. 26 ms
12
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 1 to 8 Hz: 3.5 mm amplitude Delay time 0 to 60 s (step 0.01 s)
IEC 60068-3-3 (horizontal axis), Capacitive current load compensation
(vertical axis), Restraint ratio
IC STAB / ICN 2 to 4 (steps 0.1)
13
(horizontal axis), High-set fast trip stage IDiff>>
Setting range
(vertical axis),
IDiff>> secondary 1 A
secondary 5 A
0.8 to 100 A (step 0.1)
4 to 500 A (step 0.5)
14
Tripping time (three line ends) Min. 9 ms1)
IDiff 2.5 IDiff>> (setting) Typ. 12 ms1)
1) Ordering option with high-speed contacts required. 15

Technical data
Vector group adaptationwith transformers in the differential zone Ground(earth)-fault pickup

Neutral (residual) current 3I0 0.05 to 4 A(1A) / 0.25 to 20 A(5A)
1 Adaptation of connection symbol
Neutral point connection
0 to 11 (x 30 ) (step 1)
Grounded (earthed) or not grounded
(Ground current)
Zero-sequence voltage 3V0>
(step 0.01 A)
(earthed) (for each winding)

for grounded networks 1 to 100 V (step 1 V) or deactivated
Inrush restraint for resonant-grounded 10 to 200 V (step 1 V)
networks
2 Restraint ratio
2nd harmonic I2fN/IfN 10 % to 45 % (step 1 %) Zero-sequence compensation RE/RL and XE/XL
Max. current for restraint 1.1 A to 25 A1) (step 0.1 A) Selectable input formats k0 and (k0)
Crossblock function Can be switched on and off Z1
Separately selectable for zones higher zones (Z1B, Z2 to Z5)
3 Max. operative time for crossblock 0 to 60 s (step 0.01 s) or
Toper crossblk deactivated (operating up to release)
RE/RL and XE/XL
-0.33 to 7 (step 0.01)
0 to 4 (step 0.001)
k0 -135 to 135 (step 0.01 )
Distance protection zones 6, 1 of which as controlled zone,
all zones can be set forward or/and (k0) (refer to ordering code)
4 Time stages for tripping delay
reverse
6 for multi-phase faults
Parallel line mutual compensation 0.00 to 8 (step 0.01)
RM/RL and XM/XL Phase preference or no preference
3 for single-phase faults Phase reference on double (selectable)
Setting range 0 to 30 s or deactivated (steps 0.01 s) ground-faults in resonant-
grounded/non-grounded network
5 Characteristic
Selectable separately for phase
quadrilateral and/or Load encroachment 0.10 to 600 (1A)/0.02 to 120 (5A)
and ground (earth) faults Mho (only impedance pickup) Minimum load resistance (step 0.001 ) or deactivated
Types of pickup Overcurrent pickup (I>); 20 to 60 (step 1 )
Voltage-dependent overcurrent Maximum load angle With sound phase polarization and/or
6 pickup (V);
Voltage-dependent and phase angle-
Directional decision for all types
of faults
voltage memory
Dynamically unlimited
dependent overcurrent pickup
Directional sensitivity For sinusodial quantities
(V/>);
Impedance pickup (Z<) Tolerances
7 Types of tripping Three-pole for all types of faults;
Single-pole for single-phase faults /
Impedances
(in conformity with DIN 57435,
X
X
5 % for 30 SC 90
otherwise three-pole; Part 303)

R
Single-pole for single-phase faults 5 % for 0 SC 60
R
8 and two-pole phase-to-phase faults /
otherwise three-pole
Z
Time range 0 to 30 s (step 0.01 s) or deactivated 5 % for -30 (SC - line) +30
Z
Line angle L 30 to 89 (step 1 )
9 Inclination angle for quadrilateral 30 to 90 (step 1)

characteristic
Response values (in conformity
with DIN 57435, Part 303) 5 % of setting value
Quadrilateral reactance reach X 0.05 to 600 (1A) / 0.01 to 120 (5A) V and I 3
(step 0.001 ) Angle () 1 % of set value or 10 ms
Quadrilateral resistance reach R Timer tolerance
10 for phase-to-phase faults and
phase-to-ground(earth) faults
0.05 to 600 (1A) / 0.01 to 120 (5A)
(step 0.001 )
Operating times Approx. 17 ms at 50 Hz
Minimum trip time Approx. 15 ms at 60 Hz
Mho impedance reach ZR 0.05 to 200 (1A) / 0.01 to 40 (5A) with fast relays Approx. 12 ms at 50 Hz
(step 0.01 ) Minimum trip time Approx. 10 ms at 60 Hz
11 Minimum phase current I 0.05 to 4 A(1A) / 0.25 to 20 A(5A)

(step 0.01 A)
with high-speed relays
Reset time
Approx. 30 ms
Overcurrent pickup I>> 0.25 to 10 A(1A) / 1.25 to 50 A(5A)

(for I>>, V, V/>) (step 0.01 A)
Minimum current pickup I> 0.05 to 4 A(1A) / 0.25 to 20 A(5A)
12 (for V, V/> and Z<) (step 0.01 A)
Minimum current pickup I> 0.1 to 8 A(1A) / 0.5 to 40 A(5A)
(for V, V/>) (step 0.01 A)
Undervoltage pickup (for V
13 and V/>)
Vph-e< 20 to 70 V (step 1 V)
Vph-ph< 40 to 130 V (step 1 V)
Load angle pickup (for V/>)
Load angle 30 to 80
14 Load angle 90 to 120
15 1) Secondary data for IN = 1 A; with IN = 5 A the values must be multiplied.

Technical data
Power swing detection (ANSI 68, 68T) Inverse-time stage (ANSI 51, 51N)
Power swing detection principle Measurement of the rate of impe-
dance vector change and monitoring
of the vector path
Phase current pickup 0.1 to 4 A (1A) /0.5 to 20 A (5A)
(step 0.01 A) or deactivated 1
Neutral (residual) current pickup 0.05 to 4 A (1A) /0.25 to 20 A (5A)
Max. detectable power swing Approx. 7 Hz (step 0.01 A) or deactivated
frequency Characteristics
Operating modes Power swing blocking and/or power
swing tripping (out-of-step tripping)
Characteristics
according to IEC 60255-3
Normal inverse
Very inverse
2
Power swing blocking programs All zones blocked Extremely inverse
Z1/Z1B blocked Long time inverse
Z2 to Z5 blocked
Z1, Z1B, Z2 blocked
Time multiplier Tp = 0.05 to 3 s (step 0.01 s)
or deactivated 3
Detection of faults during power Reset of power swing blocking for all
Pickup threshold Approx. 1.1 x I/Ip
swing blocking types of faults
Reset threshold Approx. 1.05 x I/Ip
Tele (pilot) protection for distance protection (ANSI 85-21)
Modes of operation PUTT (Z1B acceleration); DUTT
PUTT (acceleration with pickup);
Tolerances
Operating time for 2 I/Ip 20 5 % of setpoint 15 ms 4
POTT; Directional comparison; Characteristics Inverse
Reverse interlocking according to ANSI/IEEE Short inverse
Pilot-wire comparison; Unblocking; Long inverse
Blocking Moderately inverse
Very inverse
5
Additional functions Echo function Extremely inverse
(refer to weak-infeed function) Denite inverse
Transient blocking for schemes with
Time dial 0.5 to 15 (step 0.01) or deactivated
Transmission and reception

measuring range extension
Phase-selective signals available for Pickup threshold Approx. 1.1 x M 6
signals maximum selectivity with single-pole Reset threshold Approx. 1.05 x M
tripping; signals for 2 and 3-end- Tolerances
lines Operating time for 2 M 20 5 % of setpoint 15 ms
Direct transfer trip (DTT) Instantaneous high-speed switch-onto-fault overcurrent protection 7
Direct phase-selective tripping via Alternatively with or without auto- (ANSI 50HS)
binary input reclosure Operating mode Active only after c.b. closing;
Trip time delay 0 to 30 s (step 0.01 s) or deactivated instantaneous trip after pickup
Timer tolerance 1 % of setting value or 10 ms Characteristic
Pickup current I>>>
2 denite-time stages
0.1 to 15 A (1A) /0.5 to 75 A (5A)
8
Backup overcurrent protection (ANSI 50N, 51N)
Operating modes Active only with loss of data
connection and voltage or always Pickup current I>>>> 1 to 25 A (1A) /5 to 125 A (5A)
Characteristics
active
3 denite-time stages / 1 inverse- Reset ratio
Approx. 0.95
9
time stage Tolerances < 3 % of set value or 1 % of IN
Denite-time stage (ANSI 50, 50N ) Directional ground (earth)-fault overcurrent protection
Pickup denite time stage 1,
phase current
0.1 to 25 A (1A) / 0.5 to 125 A (5A)
for high-resistance faults in systemswith grounded star point
(ANSI 50N, 51N, 67N) 10
Pickup denite-time stage 1, 0.5 to 25 A (1A) / 0.25 to 125 A(5A) Characteristic 3 denite-time stages / 1 inverse-time
neutral (residual) current (step 0.01 A) or deactivated stage or 4 denite-time stages or
denite-time stages / 1 V0invers. stage
Pickup denite-time stage 2,
phase current
0.1 to 25 A (1A) / 0.5 to 125 A (5A)
(step 0.01 A) or deactivated Phase selector Permits 1-pole tripping for single-
11
Pickup denite-time stage 2, 0.05 to 25 A (1A) / 0.25 to 125 A (5A)
multi-phase faults
neutral (residual) current (step 0.01 A) or deactivated
Inrush restraint Selectable for every stage
phase current (step 0.01 A) or deactivated Instantaneous trip after switch-
onto-fault
Selectable for every stage 12
neutral (residual) current (step 0.01 A) or deactivated Inuence of harmonics
Stages 1 and 2 (I>>> and I>>) 3rd and higher harmonics are comple-
Time delay for denite-time 0 to 30 s, (step 0.01 s) or deactivated
tely suppressed by digital ltering
stages
Tolerances
Stages 3 and 4 2nd and higher harmonics are comple- 13
(I> and inverse 4th stage) tely suppressed by digital ltering
Current pickup 3 % of set value or 1 % of IN
Delay times 1 % of set value or 10 ms
Operating time Approx. 25 ms
14
15
Technical data
Denite-time stage (ANSI 50N) Zero-sequence voltage protection V0inverse
1 Pickup value 3I0>>> 0.5 to 25 A (1A) / 2.5 to 125 A (5A)

(step 0.01 A)
t=
V0
2s
V0inv min
Pickup value 3I0>> 0.2 to 25 A (1A) / 1 to 125 A (5A) 4
(step 0.01 A)
Direction decision (ANSI 67N)
Pickup value 3I0> 0.05 to 25 A (1A) / 0.25 to 125 A (5A)
2 (step 0.01 A)
Neutral (residual) current trans-
Measured signals for direction
decision
3I0 and 3V0 or
3I0 and 3V0 and IY (star
former with normal sensitivity point current of an grounded
(refer to ordering data, position 7); power transformer) or 3I2 and 3V2
0.003 to 25 A(1A) / 0.015 to 125 A(5A) (negative-sequence system) or
3 (step 0.001 A)
zero-sequence power Sr or auto-
matic selection of zero-sequence
former with high sensitivity or negative-sequence quantities
(refer to ordering data, position 7) dependent on the magnitude of the
component voltages
Pickup value 3I0, 4th stage 0.05 to 25 A (1A) / 0.25 to 125 A (5A)
4 (step 0.01 A)
Min. zero-sequence voltage 3V0
Min. current IY (of grounded
0.5 to 10 V (step 0.1 V)
0.05 to 1 A (1A) / 0.25 to 5 A (5A)
former with normal sensitivity (earthed) transformers) (step 0.01 A)
(refer to ordering data, position 7);
Min. negative-sequence voltage 3V2 0.5 to 10 V (step 0.1 V)
0.003 to 25 A(1A) / 0.015 to 125 A(5A)
5 (step 0.001 A)
Min. negative-sequence current 3I2 0.05 to 1 A (1A) / 0.25 to 5 A (5A)
(step 0.01 A)
former with high sensitivity Inrush current blocking, capable of being activated for each stage
(refer to ordering data, position 7)
Component of the 2nd harmonic 10 to 45 % of the fundamental
6 Time delay for denite-time stages 0 to 30 s (step 0.01 s) or deactivated

Tolerances
(step 1 %)
Max. current, which cancels inrush 0.5 to 25 A (1A) / 2.5 to 125 A (5A)
Current pickup 3 % of setting value or 1 % IN current blocking (step 0.01 A)
Tele (pilot) protection for directional ground(earth)-fault overcurrent
Command / pickup times 3I0>>> Approx. 30 ms
7 and 3I0>>
Command / pickup times 3I0> Approx. 40 ms
protection (ANSI 85-67N)
Operating modes Directional comparison: Pickup
and 3I0, 4th stage Directional comparison: Unblocking
Inverse-time stage (ANSI 51N) Additional functions Echo (see function "weak infeed");
8 Ground (earth)-current pickup 3I0P 0.05 to 4 A (1A) / 0.25 to 20 A (5A)
(step 0.01 A)
transient blocking for schemes
with parallel lines
Neutral (residual) current trans- Transmission and reception signals Phase-selective signals available
former with normal sensitivity for maximum selectivity with
(refer to ordering data, position 7) single-pole tripping; signals for 2
9 0.003 to 4 A (1A) / 0.015 to 20 A (5A)
(step 0.001 A)
and 3-end-lines
Neutral (residual) current trans- Weak-infeed protection with undervoltage (ANSI 27WI)
former with high sensitivity Operating modes with carrier Echo
(refer to ordering data, position 7) (signal) reception Echo and trip with undervoltage
10 Tripping characteristics acc. to
IEC 60255-3
Normal inverse; very inverse;
extremely inverse; long inverse
Undervoltage phase ground
(earth)
2 to 70 V (step 1 V)
ANSI/IEEE tripping characteristic Inverse; short inverse; long inverse; Time delay 0.00 to 30 s (step 0.01 s)
(not for region DE, refer to moderately inverse; very inverse; Echo impulse 0.00 to 30 s (step 0.01 s)
11 ordering data, position 10)
Inverse logarithmic tripping
extremely inverse; denite inverse
3I0
Tolerances
Voltage threshold 5 % of set value or 0.5 V
characteristics (not for regions t = T3I 0P max T3I 0P ln Timer 1 % of set value or 10 ms
3I0p
DE and US, refer to ordering data,
position 10) Fault locator
12 Pickup threshold 1.1 to 4.0 x I/Ip (step 0.1 s) Output of the distance to fault X, R (secondary) in
X, R (primary) in
Time multiplier for IEC T charac- Tp = 0.05 to 3 s (step 0.01 s)
Distance in kilometers or in % of
teristics
line length
Time multiplier for ANSI D
DI0P = 0.5 to 15 s (step 0.01 s) Start of calculation With trip, with reset of pickup,
13 characteristics
Pickup threshold
with binary input
Approx. 1.1 x I/Ip (ANSI: I/Ip = M) Reactance per unit length 0.005 to 6.5 /km(1A) / 0.001 to
Inverse logarithmic pickup 1.3 /km(5A)
threshold 1.1 to 4.0 x I/I0P (step 0.1)
(step 0.0001 /km)
14 Reset threshold
Tolerance
Approx. 1.05 x I/I0 (ANSI: I/Ip = M)
Tolerance For sinusoidal quantities
2.5 % line length for
Operating time for 2 I/Ip 20 30 SC 90 and VSC/Vnom > 0.1
5 % of setpoint 15 ms
15
Technical data
Voltage protection (ANSI 59, 27) Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF)
Operating modes
Local tripping or only indication Number of stages
2
0.05 to 20 A(1A) / 0.25 to 100 A(5A) 1
(step 0.01 A)
Pickup values VPH-Gnd>>, VPH-Gnd> 1 to 170 V (step 0.1 V)
(phase-ground (earth) overvol- or deactivated Time delays T11phase, T13phase, T2 0 to 30 s (steps 0.01 s) or deactivated
tage) Additional functions End-fault protection
Pickup values VPH-PH>>, VPH-PH>
2 to 220 V (step 0.1 V)
or deactivated
Reset time CB pole discrepancy monitoring 2
Approx. 15 ms, typical; 25 ms max.
Pickup values 3V0>>, 3V0> 1 to 220 V (step 0.1 V) Tolerances
(3V0 can be measured via V4 or deactivated Current limit value 5 % of setting value or 1 % Inom
transformers or calculated by the
relay)
Time stages
3
Pickup values V1>>, V1> 2 to 220 V (step 0.1 V) Number of auto-reclosures Up to 8
(positive-sequence overvoltage) or deactivated Operating mode Only 1-pole; only 3-pole, 1 or 3-pole
voltage or calculated
Operating modes with line
voltage check
DLC dead-line check
ADT adaptive dead time
4
remote positive-sequence RDT reduced dead time
voltage (compounding) Dead times T1-ph, T3-ph, TSeq 0 to 1800 s (step 0.01 s) or
Pickup values V2>>, V2>
(negative-sequence overvoltage)
2 to 220 V (step 0.1 V)
or deactivated Action times
deactivated
0.01 to 300 s (step 0.01 s) or
5
Reset ratio (settable) 0.5 to 0.98 (step 0.01) deactivated
Undervoltage protection Reclaim times 0.5 to 300 s (step 0.01 s)
Pickup values VPH-Gnd<<, VPH-Gnd< 1 to 100 V (step 0.1 V)
(phase-ground (earth) undervol- or deactivated
0.01 to 300 s (step 0.01 s)
Synchro-check request 6
tage) 3-phase intertripping
Pickup values VPH-PH<<, VPH-PH< 1 to 175 V (step 0.1 V) InterCLOSE command
(phase-phase undervoltage) or deactivated to the remote end
(positive-sequence undervoltage) or deactivated
Blocking with manual CLOSE 7
Blocking of undervoltage protec- Minimum current; binary input
RDT
tion stages
Healthy line voltage 30 to 90 V (step 1 V)
Reset ratio
Time delays
1.05 Dead line
Tolerances
2 to 70 V (step 1 V) 8
Time delay for all over- and 0 to 100 s (steps 0.01 s) or Time stages 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
undervoltage stages deactivated Voltage limit values 3 % of setting value or 0.5 V
Tolerances
Approx. 30 ms Synchro-check (ANSI 25)
9
Voltage limit values 3 % of setting value or 0.5 V Manual CLOSE control
Time stages 1 % of setting value or 10 ms Control commands
Number of frequency elements 4
Operating modes
with auto-reclosure Synchro-check
10
Setting range 45.5 to 54.5 Hz Line live/busbar dead
(in steps of 0.01) at fnom = 50 Hz Line and busbar dead
55.5 to 64.5 Hz Bypassing
(in steps of 0.01) at fnom = 60 Hz For manual closure 11
Delay times 0 to 600 s or (in steps of 0.01 s) and control commands As for auto-reclosure
Operating voltage range 6 to 230 V (phase-to-ground (earth)) Permissible voltage difference 1 to 60 V (step 0.1 V)
Pickup times Approx. 80 ms Permissible frequency difference 0.03 to 2 Hz (step 0.01 Hz)
Dropout times Approx. 80 ms Permissible angle difference 2 to 80 (step 1 ) 12
Hysteresis Approx. 20 mHz Max. duration of synchronization 0.01 to 600 s (step 0.01 s) or
Dropout condition Voltage = 0 V and current = 0 A deactivated
Tolerances Release delay with synchronous 0 to 30 s (step 0.01 s)
Frequency
Delay times
12 m Hz for V = 29 to 230 V
1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
networks
Tolerances
13
Voltage limit values 2 % of setting value or 2 V
14
15
Technical data
Restricted ground-fault protection (ANSI 87N) Thermal overload protection (ANSI 49)
1 Multiple availability
Settings
2 times (option) Setting ranges
Factor k acc. to IEC 60255-8 1 to 4 (steps 0.01)
Time constant 1 to 999.9 min (steps 0.1 min)
Differential current IREF>/INobj 0.05 to 2.00 (steps 0.01)
Temperature alarm stage alarm/ 50 to 100 % in relation to the trip
Limit angle REF 110 (xed)
trip temperature
2 Time delay TREF 0.00 to 60.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
Current alarm stage Ialarm
Secondary 1 A 0.1 to 4 A (step 0.1)
The set times are pure delay times Secondary 5 A 0.5 to 20 A (step 0.1)
Operating times
I 2 I 2 pre
3 Pickup time (in ms) at frequency 50 Hz
At 1.5 setting value IREF>, 30
60 Hz
25
Trip time characteristic t = ln
I (k I N )
2 2
approx. Reset ratios

At 2.5 setting value IREF>, 28 24 /alarm Approx. 0.99
approx. /trip Approx. 0.99
4 Dropout time (in ms), approx. 26 23
I/Ialarm
Tolerances
Approx. 0.99
Class 10 % acc. to IEC
Overcurrent-time protection for phase and residual currents
Number of supervisable trip Up to 3
Characteristics
3 times (option) circuits
Number of required binary inputs 1 or 2
Denite-time stages (DT) IPh >>, 3I0 >>, IPh >, 3I0 > per trip circuit
Inverse-time stages (IT) IP, 3I0P Indication relay 1 to 30 s (step 1 s)
6 Acc. to IEC Inverse, very inverse, extremely

inverse, long-time inverse
inverse, extremely inverse, denite Operational measured values
inverse, short inverse, long inverse Representation Primary, secondary and percentage
7 Alternatively, user-specied
trip and reset characteristics Currents
3 x IPhase; 3I0; IGnd sensitve; I1; I2; IY;
Reset characteristics (IT) Acc. to ANSI with disk emulation 3I0PAR
3 x IDiff, 3 x IStab
Current stages
8 High-current stages IPh >> 0.10 to 35.00 A 1) (steps 0.01 A)
Tolerances 0.5 % of indicated measured value
or 0.5 % Inom
Voltages 3 x VPhase-Ground; 3 x VPhase-Phase; 3V0,
TIPh >> 0.00 to 60.00 s (steps 0.01 s) V1, V2, VSYNC, Ven, VCOMP
Tolerances 0.5 % of indicated measured value
9 3I0 >> 0.05 to 35.00 A 1) (steps 0.01 A)
or 0.5 % Vnom
Power with direction indication P, Q, S
T3I0 >> 0.00 to 60.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
or deactivated (no trip) Tolerances
P: for |cos | = 0.7 to 1 and Typical 1 %
10 Denite-time stages IPh > 0.10 to 35.00 A 1) (steps 0.01 A)
Q: for |sin | = 0.7 to 1 and Typical 1 %
TIPh 0.00 to 60.00 s (steps 0.01 s) V/Vnom , I/Inom = 50 to 120 %
or deactivated (no trip) S: for V/Vnom, I/Inom = 50 to Typical 1 %
3I0 > 0.05 to 35.00 A 1) (steps 0.01 A) 120 %
11 T3I0 >
0.00 to 60.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
Frequency
Tolerance
f
20 mHz
or deactivated (no trip) Power factor PF (cos )
Inverse-time stages IP 0.10 to 4.00 A 1) (steps 0.01 A) Tolerance for |cos | = 0.7 to 1 Typical 3 %
12 Acc. to IEC TIP 0.05 to 3.20 s (steps 0.01 s)

Load impedances with directional 3 x RPhase-Ground, XPhase-Ground
indication 3 x RPhase-Phase, XPhase-Phase
3I0P 0.05 to 4.00 A 1) (steps 0.01 A) Overload measured values /Trip L1; /Trip L2; /Trip L3;
T3I0P 0.05 to 3.20 s (steps 0.01 s) /Trip
13 Inverse-time stages IP
0.10 to 4.00 A 1) (steps 0.01 A)
Long-term mean values
Interval for derivation of mean 15 min / 1 min; 15 min / 3 min;
Acc. to ANSI DIP 0.50 to 15.00 s (steps 0.01 s) value 15 min / 15 min
or deactivated (no trip) Synchronization instant Every hour; every hour; every
14 3I0P
D3I0
0.05 to 4.00 A 1)
0.50 to 15.00 s
(steps 0.01 A)
(steps 0.01 s) Values
hour
3 x IPhase; I1; P; P+; P-; Q; Q+; Q; S
15
Technical data
Minimum /maximum memory Further additional functions

Indication
Resetting
Measured values with date and time
Cyclically
Measurement supervision Current sum
Current symmetry
Voltage sum
1
Via binary input
Via the keyboard Voltage symmetry
Via serial interface Voltage phase sequence
Values
Min./max. of measured values 3 x IPhase; I1; 3 x VPhase-Ground; Annunciations 2
3 x VPhase-to-phase; 3V0; V1; Event logging Buffer size 200
P+; P; Q+; Q; S; f; power factor (+); Fault logging Storage of signals of the last 8 faults,
power factor () buffer size 800
Min./max. of mean values
Energy meters
3 x IPhase; I1; P; Q; S Switching statistics Number of breaking operations per
c.b. pole
3
Four-quadrant meters WP+; WP; WQ+; WQ Breaking current of last trip operation
Tolerance Max. breaking current per phase
for |cos | > 0.7 and V > 50 %
Vnom and I> 50 % Inom
5% Circuit-breaker test TRIP/CLOSE cycle 3-phase
4
Oscillographic fault recording Setting range 0.00 to 30 s (step 0.01 s)
Analog channels 3 x IPhase, 3I0, 3I0PAR, 3I0 Gnd sensitive, Dead time for CB TRIP/CLOSE 0.00 to 30 s (step 0.01 s)
3 x IDiff, 3 x IStab
3 x VPhase, 3V0, VSYNC, Ven, Vx
cycle
Commissioning support Operational measured values 5
Max. number of available 8, backed-up by battery if auxiliary Circuit-breaker test
recordings voltage supply fails Read binary test
Initiate binary inputs
Sampling intervals
Total storage time
Approx. 15 s
Set binary outputs
Set serial interface outputs 6
Binary channels Pickup and trip information; number Lockout of a device
and contents can be freely congu- Test mode ot the differential
red by the user protection topology
Max. number of displayed binary
channels
40 7
CE conformity
Control This product is in conformity with the Directives of the European
Number of switching units Depends on the number of binary / Communities on the harmonization of the laws of the Member States
command outputs
8
Feed back
Interlocking
Freely congurable
Part 303).
9
Local control Control via menu, function keys Further applicable standards: ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0 and C37.90.1.
Remote control Control protection, DIGSI, pilot wires The unit has been developed and manufactured for application in an
10
Directive and standard EN 60255-6 for the low-voltage Directive.
11
12
13
14
15
1 7SD5 combined multi-end line differential protection with distance protection
Device type1)
7SD5 - - -
Two-terminal differential relay with 4-line display 2 2

Two-terminal differential relay with grapical display 3 2
2 Multi-terminal differential relay with 4-line display
Multi-terminal differential relay with graphical display
2 3
see next page
3 3
Measurement input
3 Iph = 1 A2), Ie = 1 A2)

Iph = 1 A2), Ie = high (min. = 0.005 A)
1
2
Iph = 5 A2), Ie = 5 A2) 5
Iph = 5 A2), Ie = sensitive (min. = 0.005 A) 6
4 Auxiliary voltage (Power supply, BI trigger level)

24 to 48 V DC, trigger level binary input 19 V4) 2
60 to 125 V DC3), trigger level binary input 19 V4) 4
110 to 250 V DC3), 115 V AC, trigger level binary input 88 V4)
5 220 to 250 V DC3), 115 V AC, trigger level binary input 176 V4)
5
6
Binary/ Signal/ Fast High- Housing Flush- Flush- Surface-

indication command relay5) speed width mounting mounting mounting
6 inputs outputs incl.

live status
trip
output6)
referred
to 19
housing/
screw-type
housing/
plug-in
housing/
screw-type
contact terminals terminals terminals
8 4 12 A
7 8
8
4
4
12
12

E
J
16 12 12 C
16 12 12 G
8 16 12 12 L
16 4 15 5 N
16 4 15 5 Q
16 4 15 5 S
9 24 20 12 D
24 20 12 H
24 20 12 M

10 24
24
12
12
15
15
5
5

P
R
24 12 15 5 T
24 4 18 10 W
11 Region-specic default / language settings and function versions

Region GE, German language (can be changed) A
Region world, English language (can be changed) B
Region US, US-English language (can be changed) C
12 Region world, French language (can be changed) D
Region world, Spanish language (can be changed) E
Region world, Italian language (can be changed) F
13
1) Redundant prot. data interface for Hot-Standby-service is possible 4) The binary input thresholds are selectable in three steps by means
14 with a two terminal differential relay (second prot. data interface is
needed)
of jumpers.
5) Fast relays are indentied in the terminal diagram. The time
2) Rated current 1/5 A can be selected by the means of jumpers. advantage compared to signal/command outputs is approx. 3 ms,
3) Transition between three auxiliary voltage ranges can be selected mainly for protection commands
15 by means of jumpers. 6) High-speed trip outputs are identied in the in the terminal dia-
gram. The time advantage compared to fast relays is approx. 5 ms


7SD5 combined multi-end line differential protection with distance protection
System interfaces
7SD52 - - -
1
IEC protocol, electrical RS232 1
IEC protocol, electrical RS485
IEC protocol, optical 820 nm, ST-plug
2
see next
page 2
3
PROFIBUS FMS Slave, electrical RS485 4
PROFIBUS FMS Slave, optical 820 nm, twin-ring, ST-plug 6
Further protocols see supplement L 9 L 0

3
PROFIBUS DP slave, RS485 A
PROFIBUS DP slave, optical 820 nm, double ring, ST connector 1)
DNP 3.0, RS485 G
B
G
4
DNP 3.0, optical 820 nm, ST connector 1) H
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Etherrnet, electrical, double, RS45 connector (EN100) R
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, with integrated switch, optical, double, LC-connector (EN100) 2) S 5
DIGSI / Modem interface (on rear of device) and protection interface 1
See additional indication M 9 M
DIGSI / Modem interface (on rear of device)

Without DIGSI-interface on rear
6
0
DIGSI 4, electric RS232 1
DIGSI 4, electric RS485 2
DIGSI 4, optical 820 nm, ST plug 3 7
Protection data interface 1
FO5: Optical 820 nm, 2 ST-plugs, line length up to 1.5 km
via multimode FO cable for communication converter or direct FO connection 3)
A
8
via multimode FO cable for direct FO connection B
FO17: Optical 1300 nm, LC-Duplex-plugs, line length up to 24 km
via monomode FO cable for direct FO connection 4) G
via monomode FO cable for direct FO connection 4) 5)
9
H
via monomode FO cable for direct FO connection 4) 6) J
via multimode FO cable for communication networks with
10
IEEE C37.94 interface or direct FO connection 7) S
11
12
1) Not possible for surface mounting housing (Order No. pos. 5) For distances less than 25 km a set of optical attenuators
13
9 = E/G/H/Q/R). For the surface mounted version, please order 7XV5107-0AA00 must be installed to avoid saturation of the
a device with the appropriate electrical RS485 interface and an receiver element
external FO-converter 6) For distances less than 50 km a set of optical attenuators
2) Not possible for surface mounting housing (Order No. pos.
9 = E/G/H/Q/R) please order the relay with electrical interface and
7XV5107-0AA00 must be installed to avoid saturation of the
receiver element
14
use a separate ber-optic switch. 7) Only available in ush-mounting housing (Order No. pos.
3) Communication converter 7XV5662, see Accessories. 9 E/G/H/Q/R).
4) Device for surface mounting housing (Order No. pos. 9 = E/G/H/Q/R)
will be delivered with external repeater 7XV5461-0Bx00. 15
1 7SD5 combined multi-end line differential protection with distance protection
Functions 1 / Protection interface 2

7SD52 - - -
Trip mode Auto-reclosure (ANSI 79) Synchro-check (ANSI 25)

3-pole without without
2 3-pole with without
0 see next
1 page
1-/3-pole without without 2
1-/3-pole with without 3
3 3-pole
3-pole
without
with
with
with
4
5
1-/3-pole without with 6
1-/3-pole with with 7
4 Functions 1 and Protection interface 2 6) 9 N

Functions 1
Trip mode Auto-reclosure (ANSI 79) Synchro-check (ANSI 25)
5 3-pole
3-pole
without
with
without
without
0
1
1-/3-pole without without 2
1-/3-pole with without 3
6 3-pole without with 4
3-pole with with 5
1-/3-pole without with 6
1-/3-pole with with 7
7 Protection interface 2
via multimode FO cable for communication converter or direct FO connection 1) A
8 FO6: Optical 820 nm, 2 ST-plugs, line length up to 3.5 km

via multimode FO cable for direct FO connection B
via monomode FO cable for direct FO connection 2) G
9 via monomode FO cable for direct FO connection 2) 3) H
via monomode FO cable for direct FO connection 2) 4) J
10 via multimode FO cable for communication networks with
IEEE C37.94 interface or direct FO connection 5) S
11
12
13
1) Communication converter 7XV5662, see Accessories. 4) For distances less than 50 km a set of optical attenuators
14 2) Device for surface mounting housing (Order No. pos. 9 = E/G/H/Q/R) 7XV5107-0AA00 must be installed to avoid saturation of the
receiver element.
will be delivered with external repeater 7XV5461-0Bx00.
3) For distances less than 25 km a set of optical attenuators 5) Only available in ush-mounting housing (Order No. pos. 9
7XV5107-0AA00 must be installed to avoid saturation of the E/G/H/Q/R).
15 receiver element. 6) In a two terminal differential relay the protection interface 2 can
be used as redundant protection interface (Hot Standby).


7SD5 combined multi-end line differential protection with distance protection
Functions
7SD52 - - -
1
Time overcurrent pro- Ground fault Distance protection Distance protection (Ipick- Ground fault
tection/ Breaker failure protection (Pickup Z<, polygon, up I>,-VI/, -Z<), polygon, detection
protection (ANSI 50,
50N, 51, 51N, 50BF)
(ANSI 67N) MHO, parallel line
comp.) Power swing
parallel line comp. 2),
power swing det. (ANSI
for isolated/
compensated
2
detection (ANSI 21, 21, 21N, 68, 68T) networks 1)
21N, 68, 68T)
with without without without without
with without without with without
C
D
3
with without with without without E
with with without without without F
with
with
with
with
without
with
with
without
without
without
G
H
4
with without without without with J
with without without with with K
with
with
with
with
without
without
without
with
with
with
L
M
5
4 Remote commands/
24 Remote indications
Transformer
expansions
Fault locator Voltage protection,
frequence protection
Restricted ground
fault low impedance
6
(ANSI 27, 50) (ANSI 87N) 2)
with without 1-side measuring without without J
with
with
without
without
1-side measuring
2-side measuring
with
without
without
without
K
L
7
with without 2-side measuring with without M
with with 1-side measuring without without N
with with 1-side measuring with without P 8
with with 2-side measuring without without Q
with with 2-side measuring with without R
with with 1-side measuring without with S
with with 1-side measuring with with T 9
with with 2-side measuring without with U
with with 2-side measuring with with V
10
Measured values, External GPS Capacitive current
extended, synchronization load compensation
Min/Max values
without without without 0
11
without with without 1
with without without 2
with
without
with
without
without
with
3
4
12
without with with 5
with without with 6
with with with 7 13
14
1) Only available with Order No. Pos. 7 = 2 or 6
2) Only available with Order No. Pos. 7 = 1 or 5
15
1 Opto-electric communication converter CC-XG (connection to

communication network)
Converter to interface to X21 or RS422 or G703-64 kbit/s synchronous
Connection via FO cable for 62.5 /125 m or 50 /120 m and
2 820 nm wavelength (multi-mode FO cable) with ST connector, max.
distance 1.5 km
Electrical connection via X21/RS422 or G703-64 kbit/s interface 7XV5662-0AA00
Opto-electric communication converter CC-2M to G703-E1 / -T1

3 communication networks with 2,048 /1,554 kbit/s
Converter to interface between optical 820 nm interface and
G703-E1 /-T1 interface of a communication network
4 820 nm wavelength (multi-mode FO cable) with ST connector,max.

distance 1.5 km
Electrical connection via G703-E1/-T1 interface 7XV5662-0AD00
Opto-electric communication converter (connection to pilot wire)
5 Converter to interface to a pilot wire or twisted telephone pair

(typical 15 km length)
820 nm wavelength (multi-mode FO cable) with ST connector;
max. distance 1.5 km, screw-type terminals to pilot wire 7XV5662-0AC00
6 Additional interface modules

Protection interface mod. opt. 820 nm, multi-mode FO cable,
Protection interface mod. opt. 820 nm, multi-mode FO cable,
7 ST connector, 3.5 km C53207-A351-D652-1
Further modules
Protection interface mod. opt. 1300 nm, mono-mode FO cable,
LC-Duplex connector, 24 km C53207-A351-D655-1
8 Protection interface mod. opt. 1300 nm, mono-mode FO cable,
Protection interface mod. opt. 1550 nm, mono-mode FO cable,
9 Optical repeaters
LC-Duplex connector, 24 km 7XV5461-0BG00
7XV5461-0BH00
Time synchronizing unit with GPS output

11 GPS 1 sec pulse and time telegram IRIG B / DCF 77 7XV5664-0AA00
Isolation transformer (20 kV) for pilot wire communication 7XR9516

12 Rated current 1.6 A; thermal overload release 1.6 A;
13
14
15
DIGSI 4
1
(copper) 2
Basis
Professional
Complete version:
3
CFC Editor (logic editor), Display Editor (editor for default
and control displays) and DIGSI 4 Remote (remote operation) 7XS5402-0AA00
SIGRA 4 4
additionally)
manufacturers (Comtrade format). Running under MS Windows
5
(Windows 2000 or XP Professional).
Connecting cable
6
Cable between PC / notebook (9-pin connector)
Manual for 7SD522/523 V4.6

7
English C53000-G1176-C169
Description Order No. Size of

package
Supplier Fig. 9
LSP2289-afp.eps
3-pin C73334-A1-C36-1 1 Siemens 7/80
Crimp CI2 0.5 to 1 mm2 0-827039-1 4000 AMP 1)

10
AMP 1)
0-827397-1
Type III+ 0.75 to 1.5 mm2 0-163083-7
1
4000 AMP 1) 11
0-163084-2 1 AMP 1)
LSP2090-afp.eps
LSP2091-afp.eps

For CI2
and matching female
0-734372-1
1-734387-1
1 AMP 1)
AMP 1)
12
Short-circuit
links
For other terminals
C73334-A1-C33-1
C73334-A1-C34-1
1
1
Siemens
Siemens
7/81
7/82 13
LSP2093-afp.eps
LSP2092-afp.eps


14
Fig. 7/81 Fig. 7/82
Connection diagram
4
Fig. 7/85
X80, X81, X82. Switching of
BO14, BO15 as NO contact
6 or NC contact with jumpers
X41, X42, X43.
9
1) Conguration of binary outputs
10 until Hardware-version /EE.
For advanced exibility see
Fig. 7/85.
11 Fig. 7/83 Basic version in housing

x 19 with 8 binary inputs
and 16 binary outputs
12
13
14
15 Fig. 7/84 Serial interfaces

Connection diagram
4
Fig. 7/87
5
BO14, BO15 as NO contact or
NC contact with jumpers X41,
X42, X43.
6
10
11
12
13
*) For unit version 7SD52xx-xN/S/Q high-speed contacts
1) Conguration of binary outputs until Hardware-version /EE.
14
For advanced exibility see Fig. 7/87.
Fig. 7/86 Medium version in housing x 19

15
Connection diagram
4
Fig. 7/89
BO14, BO15 as NO contact or
6 NC contact with jumpers X41,
X42, X43.
10
11
12
13
14 *) For unit version 7SD52xx-xR/P/T high-speed contacts

1) Conguration of binary outputs until Hardware-version /EE.
For advanced exibility see Fig. 7/89.
15 Fig. 7/88 Medium version in housing x 19

Transformer Differential Protection
Page
SIPROTEC 4 7UT6 differential protection relay

for transformers, generators, motors and busbars 8/3
8
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Transformer Differential Protection / 7UT6
SIPROTEC 4 7UT6 differential protection relay for transformers, generators, motors and busbars
Function overview
Differential protection for 2- up to 5-winding transformers

(3-/1-phase)
1
Differential protection for motors and generators
Differential protection for short 2 up to 5 terminal lines
Differential protection for busbars up to 12 feeders 2
(phase-segregated or with summation CT)
LSP2456-afpen.tif
Differential protection with phase-segregated measurement 3
Sensitive measuring for low-fault currents
Fast tripping for high-fault currents
Restraint against inrush of transformer
Phase /ground overcurrent protection
4
Fig. 8/1 SIPROTEC 4 7UT6 differential protection relay for ransformers,
Overload protection with or without temperature
generators, motors and busbar
measurement
Negative-sequence protection 5
Description Breaker failure protection
Low/high-impedance restricted ground fault (REF)
The SIPROTEC 7UT6 differential protection relays are used for
fast and selective fault clearing of short-circuits in transformers
Voltage protection functions (7UT613/633)
6
of all voltage levels and also in rotating electric machines like Control functions
motors and generators, for short lines and busbars. Commands for control of circuit-breakers and isolators
The protection relay can be parameterized for use with three-
phase and single-phase transformers.
7UT63x: Graphic display shows position of switching elements,
local/remote switching by key-operated switch
7
The specic application can be chosen by parameterization. Control via keyboard, binary inputs, DIGSI 4 or SCADA system
In this way an optimal adaptation of the relay to the protected User-dened logic with CFC
object can be achieved.
8
In addition to the differential function, a backup overcurrent pro-
tection for 1 winding/star point is integrated in the relay. Option-
ally, a low or high-impedance restricted ground-fault protection, Trip circuit supervision
a negative-sequence protection and a breaker failure protection Oscillographic fault recording 9
can be used. 7UT613 and 7UT633 feature 4 voltage inputs. With Permanent differential and restraint current measurement,
this option an overvoltage and undervoltage protection is avail- extensive scope of operational values
able as well as frequency protection, reverse / forward power
protection, fuse failure monitor and overexcitation protection.
With external temperature monitoring boxes (thermo-boxes)
Communication interfaces 10
PC front port for setting with DIGSI 4
temperatures can be measured and monitored in the relay.
Therefore, complete thermal monitoring of a transformer is System interface
IEC 61850 Ethernet
possible, e.g. hot-spot calculation of the oil temperature.
7UT613 and 7UT63x only feature full coverage of applications
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, 11
PROFIBUS-FMS/-DP,
without external relays by the option of multiple protection MODBUS or DNP 3.0
functions e.g. overcurrent protection is available for each wind-
Service interface for DIGSI 4 (modem)/ temperature
ing or measurement location of a transformer. Other functions
are available twice: ground-fault differential protection, breaker
monitoring (thermo-box) 12
failure protection and overload protection. Furthermore, up to Time synchronization via IRIG-B/DCF 77
12 user-dened (exible) protection functions may be activated
by the customer with the choice of measured voltages, currents,
power and frequency as input variables. 13
The relays provide easy-to-use local control and automation
functions. The integrated programmable logic (CFC) allows the
users to implement their own functions, e.g. for the automation
of switchgear (interlocking). User-dened messages can be gen-
14
erated as well. The exible communication interfaces are open
for modem communication architectures with control system.
15
Application
Application
1 The numerical protection relays 7UT6 are

primarily applied as differential protection
on
2 transformers
7UT612: 2 windings
7UT613/633: 2 up to 3 windings
7UT635: 2 up to 5 windings,
generators
3 motors
short line sections
small busbars
parallel and series reactors.
4 The user selects the type of object that
is to be protected by setting during
conguration of the relay. Subsequently,
only those parameters that are relevant
5 for this particular protected object need
to be set. This concept, whereby only
those parameters relevant to a particular
protected object need to be set, substan-
6 tially contributed to a simplication of the
setting procedure. Only a few parameters
must be set. Therefore the new 7UT6
relays also make use of and extend this
7 concept. Apart from the protected plant

objects dened in the 7UT6, a further
differential protection function allows the
protection of
8 single busbars with up to 12 feeders.

The well-proven differential measuring
algorithm of the 7UT51 relay is also
used in the new relays, so that a similar
9 response with regard to short-circuit
detection, tripping time saturation detec-
tion and inrush restraint is achieved.
10
11
13
14
15
Application
Protection functions ANSI No. Three-phase Single-phase Auto- Generator/ Busbar, Busbar,
1
7UT613/33
transformer transformer trans- Motor 3-phase 1-phase
7UT612
7UT635
former
Differential protection
Ground-fault differential protection
87T/G/M/L
87 N
1
1
1
2
1
2

*)

2
Overcurrent-time protection, phases 50/51 1 3 3
Overcurrent-time protection 3I0 50/51N 1 3 3
Overcurrent-time protection, ground 50/51G 1 2 2 3
Overcurrent-time protection, 1 1 1
single-phase
Negative-sequence protection 46 1 1 1
Overload protection IEC 60255-8 49 1 2 2 4
Overload protection IEC 60354 49 1 2 2
Overexcitation protection *) V/Hz 24 1
Overvoltage protection *) V> 59 1
Undervoltage protection *) V< 27 1 5
Frequency protection *) f>, f< 81 1
Reverse power protection *) -P 32R 1
Forward power protection*) P>, P< 32F 1
Fuse failure protection 60FL 1 6
Breaker failure protection 50 BF 1 2 2
External temperature monitoring 38
(thermo-box)
Lockout 86 7
Measured-value supervision
Trip circuit supervision 74 TC

Direct coupling 1
Direct coupling 2 8
Flexible protection functions 27, 32, 47, 12 12
Function applicable
50, 55, 59, 81
9
Function not applicable in this application
*) Only 7UT613/63x
10
Construction
The 7UT6 is available in three housing widths referred to a

11
19" module frame system. The height is 243 mm.
(7UT612),
(7UT613), 12
(7UT633/635) of 19
All cables can be connected with or without cable ring lugs.
Plug-in terminals are available as an option, it is thus possible
to employ prefabricated cable harnesses. In the case of surface 13
mounting on a panel, the connection terminals are located
LSP2236F.tif
above and below in the form of screw-type terminals. The

communication interfaces are located on the same sides of the
housing. For dimensions please refer to the dimension drawings
(part 14).
14
Fig. 8/3 Rear view ush-mountig housing 15

1 Differential protection for transformers

(ANSI 87T)
When the 7UT6 is employed as fast and
2 selective short-circuit protection for trans-

formers the following properties apply:
Tripping characteristic according to
Fig. 8/4 with normal sensitive IDIFF> and
3 high-set trip stage IDIFF>>

Vector group and ratio adaptation
Depending on the treatment of the
transformer neutral point, zero-
4 sequence current conditioning can be
set with or without consideration of
the neutral current. With the 7UT6, the
star-point current at the star-point CT
5 can be measured and considered in the

vector group treatment, which increases
sensitivity by one third for single-phase
faults.
Fig. 8/4 Tripping characteristic with preset transformer parameters for three-phase faults
Fast clearance of heavy internal trans-
6 former faults with high-set differential
element IDIFF>>.
Restrain of inrush current with 2nd
harmonic. Cross-block function that can
7 be limited in time or switched off.
Restrain against overuxing with a
choice of 3rd or 5th harmonic stabiliza-
tion is only active up to a settable value
8 for the fundamental component of the
differential current.
Additional restrain for an external fault
with current transformer saturation
9 (patented CT-saturation detector from
Fig. 8/5 3-winding transformers (1 or 3-phase)
7UT51).
Insensitivity to DC current and current
transformer errors due to the freely
10 programmable tripping characteristic
and fundamental ltering.
The differential protection function can
be blocked externally by means of a
11 binary input.
12
13
14
15
Sensitive protection by measurement of star-point current

(see Fig. 8/6) (ANSI 87N/87GD)
Apart from the current inputs for detection of the phase 1
currents on the sides of the protected object, the 7UT6 also
contains normal sensitivity IE and high sensitivity IEE current
measuring inputs. Measurement of the star-point current of an
grounded winding via the normal sensitivity measuring input,
and consideration of this current by the differential protection,
2
increases the sensitivity during internal single-phase faults by
33 %. If the sum of the phase currents of a winding is compared
with the star-point current measured with the normal sensitivity
input IE, a sensitive ground current differential protection can be
3
implemented (REF).
This function is substantially more sensitive than the differential
protection during faults to ground in a winding, detecting fault
currents as small as 10 % of the transformer rated current.
4
Furthermore, this relay contains a high-impedance differential Fig. 8/6 High-impedance differential protection
protection input. The sum of the phase currents is compared
with the star-point current. A voltage-dependent resistor (varis- 5
tor) is applied in shunt (see Fig. 8/6). Via the sensitive current
measuring input IEE, the voltage across the varistor is measured;
in the milli-amp range via the external resistor. The varistor and
the resistor are mounted externally. An ground fault results in a
voltage across the varistor that is larger than the voltage result-
6
ing from normal current transformer errors. A prerequisite is the
application of accurate current transformers of the class 5P (TPY)
which exhibit a small measuring error in the operational and
overcurrent range. These current transformers may not be the
7
same as used for the differential protection, as the varistor may
cause rapid saturation of this current transformers.
Both high-impedance and low-impedance REF are each available
twice (option) for transformers with two grounded windings.
8
Thus separate REF relays are not required.
Differential protection for single-phase busbars (see Fig. 8/7)

(ANSI 87L) 9
The short-circuit protection is characterized by the large number Fig. 8/7 Simple busbar protection with phase-selective conguration
of current measuring inputs. The scope of busbar protection 7UT612: 7 feeders; 7UT613/633: 9 feeders;
ranges from a few bays e.g. in conjunction with one and a half
circuit-breaker applications, to large stations having up to more
7UT635: 12 feeders
10
than 50 feeders. In particular in smaller stations, the busbar
protection arrangements are too expensive. With the 7UT6 relays
the current inputs may also be used to achieve a cost-effective
busbar protection system for up to 12 feeders (Fig. 8/7). This 11
busbar protection functions as a phase-selective protection with
1 or 5 A current transformers, whereby the protected phase
is connected. All three phases can therefore be protected by
applying three relays. Furthermore a single-phase protection can
be implemented by connecting the three-phase currents via a
12
Fig. 8/8 Generator/motor differential protection
summation transformer. The summation transformer connection
has a rated current of 100 mA.
The selectivity of the protection can be improved by monitoring
the current magnitude in all feeders, and only releasing the
After expiry of the time delay the circuit-breakers of the infeeds
to the busbar may be tripped.
13
differential protection trip command when the overcurrent Differential protection for generators and motors
condition is also met. The security measures to prevent (see Fig. 8/8) (ANSI 87G/M)
maloperation resulting from failures in the current transformer
secondary circuits can be improved in this manner. This overcur- Equal conditions apply for generators, motors and series
14
rent release may also be used to implement a breaker failure reactors. The protected zone is limited by the sets of current
protection. Should the release signal not reset within a settable transfomers at each side of the protected object.
time, this indicates that a breaker failure condition is present, as
the short-circuit was not switched off by the bay circuit-breaker. 15
Backup protection functions Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74TC)
1 Overcurrent-time protection (ANSI 50, 50N, 51, 51N) One or two binary inputs can be used for monitoring the circuit-
breaker trip coil including its incoming cables. An alarm signal
Backup protection on the transformer is achieved with a two- occurs whenever the circuit is interrupted.
stage overcurrent protection for the phase currents and 3I0 for
the calculated neutral current. This function may be congured Lockout (ANSI 86)
2 for one of the sides or measurement locations of the protected
object. The high-set stage is implemented as a denite-time
All binary outputs (alarm or trip relays) can be stored like LEDs
and reset using the LED reset key. The lockout state is also stored
stage, whereas the normal stage may have a denite-time or
in the event of supply voltage failure. Reclosure can only occur
inverse-time characteristic. Optionally, IEC or ANSI character-
after the lockout state is reset.
3 istics may be selected for the inverse stage. The overcurrent
protection 3I0 uses the calculated zero-sequence current of the External trip coupling
congured side or measurement location.
Multiple availability: 3 times (option) For recording and processing of external trip information via
binary inputs. They are provided for information from the
4 Overcurrent-time protection for ground (ANSI 50 / 51G) Buchholz relay or specic commands and act like a protective
function. Each input initiates a fault event and can be individu-
The 7UT6 feature a separate 2-stage overcurrent-time protection
ally delayed by a timer.
for the ground. As an option, an inverse-time characteristic
according to IEC or ANSI is available. In this way, it is possible
5 to protect e.g. a resistor in the transformer star point against
Undervoltage protection (ANSI 27) (7UT613/633 only)
thermal overload, in the event of a single-phase short-circuit not The undervoltage protection evaluates the positive-sequence
being cleared within the time permitted by the thermal rating. components of the voltages and compares them with the
Multiple availability: 3 times (option) threshold values. There are two stages available.
6 Phase-balance current protection (ANSI 46) The undervoltage function is used for asynchronous motors
(Negative-sequence protection) and pumped-storage stations and prevents the voltage-related
instability of such machines.
Furthermore a negative-sequence protection may be dened for The function can also be used for monitoring purposes.
7 one of the sides or measurement locations. This provides sensi-
tive overcurrent protection in the event of asymmetrical faults in Overvoltage protection (ANSI 59) (7UT613/633 only)
the transformer. The set pickup threshold may be smaller than
This protection prevents insulation faults that result when the
the rated current.
voltage is too high.
8 Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF) Either the maximum line-to-line voltages or the phase-to-ground
If a faulted portion of the electrical circuit is not disconnected voltages (for low-voltage generators) can be evaluated. The
upon issuing of a trip command, another command can be measuring results of the line-to-line voltages are independent of
the neutral point displacement caused by ground faults.
9 initiated using the breaker failure protection which operates the
circuit-breaker, e.g., of an upstream (higher-level) protection This function is implemented in two stages.
relay.
Frequency protection (ANSI 81) (7UT613 / 633 only)
Multiple availability: 2 times (option)
10 Overexcitation protection Volt / Hertz

The frequency protection prevents impermissible stress of the
equipment (e.g. turbine) in case of under or overfrequency.
(ANSI 24) (7UT613 / 633 only) It also serves as a monitoring and control element.
The overexcitation protection serves for detection of an unper- The function has four stages; the stages can be implemented
11 missible high induction (proportional to V/f) in generators or
transformers, which leads to a thermal overloading. This may
either as underfrequency or overfrequency protection. Each
stage can be delayed separately.
occur when starting up, shutting down under full load, with
weak systems or under isolated operation. The inverse character- Even in the event of voltage distortion, the frequency measur-
istic can be set via seven points derived from the manufacturer ing algorithm reliably identies the fundamental waves and
12 data. determines the frequency extremely precisely. Frequency
measurement can be blocked by using an undervoltage stage.
In addition, a denite-time alarm stage and an instantaneous
stage can be used.
13
14
15
Reverse-power protection (ANSI 32R)

(7UT613/633 only)
The reverse-power protection monitors 1
the direction of active power ow and
picks up when the mechanical energy
fails. This function can be used for opera-
tional shutdown (sequential tripping) of
the generator but also prevents damage
2
to the steam turbines. The reverse power
Serial communication via RS485 bus or
is calculated from the positive-sequence
ber-optic connection (possible with external converter
systems of current and voltage. Asym-
metrical power system faults therefore do
3
not cause reduced measuring accuracy.
The position of the emergency trip
LSP2376-afp.tif
valve is injected as binary information
and is used to switch between two trip 4
command delays. When applied for motor
protection, the sign () of the active
power can be reversed via parameters.
Forward-power protection (ANSI 32F)

max. 6 temperatures max. 6 temperatures
5
(7UT613/633 only)
Fig. 8/9 Temperature measurement and monitoring with external thermo-boxes
Monitoring of the active power produced
by a generator can be useful for starting 6
up and shutting down generators. One stage monitors exceed- The ability of the 7UT6 to monitor the thermal condition can be
ing of a limit value, while another stage monitors falling below improved by serial connection of a temperature monitoring box
another limit value. The power is calculated using the positive- (also called thermo-box or RTD-box) (Fig. 8/9). The temperature
sequence component of current and voltage. The function can
be used to shut down idling motors.
of up to 12 measuring points (connection of 2 boxes) can be
registered. The type of sensor (Pt100, Ni100, Ni120) can be
7
selected individually for each measuring point. Two alarm stages
Flexible protection functions (7UT613/63x only) are derived for each measuring point when the corresponding
For customer-specic solutions up to 12 exible protection
functions are available and can be parameterized. Voltages,
set threshold is exceeded.
Alternatively to the conventional overload protection, the relay
8
currents, power and frequency from all measurement locations can also provide a hot-spot calculation according to IEC 60345.
can be chosen as inputs. Each protection function has a settable The hot-spot calculation is carried out separately for each leg
threshold, delay time, blocking input and can be congured as a
1-phase or 3-phase unit.
of the transformer and takes the different cooling modes of the
transformer into consideration.
9
Monitoring functions The oil temperature must be registered via the thermo-box for
the implementation of this function. An alarm warning stage
The relay comprises high-performance monitoring for the
hardware and software.
and nal alarm stage is issued when the maximum hot-spot
temperature of the three legs exceeds the threshold value.
10
The measuring circuits, analog-digital conversion, power supply For each transformer leg a relative rate of ageing, based on the
voltages, battery, memories and software sequence (watch-dog) ageing at 98 C is indicated as a measured value. This value can
are all monitored. be used to determine the thermal condition and the current 11
The fuse failure function detects failure of the measuring voltage thermal reserve of each transformer leg. Based on this rate of
due to short-circuit or open circuit of the wiring or VT and avoids ageing, a remaining thermal reserve is indicated in % for the
overfunction of the undervoltage elements in the protection hottest spot before the alarm warning and nal alarm stage is
functions. (7UT613/633 only) reached. 12
Thermal monitoring of transformers
The importance of reducing the costs of transmitting and
distributing energy by optimizing the system load has resulted in
the increased importance of monitoring the thermal condition of
13
transformers. This monitoring is one of the tasks of the monitor-
ing systems, designed for medium and large transformers.
Overload protection based on a simple thermal model, and using
only the measured current for evaluation, has been integrated in
14
differential protection systems for a number of years.
15
Measured values
1 The operational measured values and sta-

tistic value registering in the 7UT6, apart
from the registration of phase currents and
voltages (7UT613/633 only) as primary and
secondary values, comprises the following:
2 Currents 3-phase IL1, IL2, IL3, I1, I2, 3I0
for each side and measurement location
Currents 1-phase I1 to I12 for each feeder
and further inputs Ix1 to Ix4
3 Voltages 3-phase VL1, VL2, VL3, VL1L2, VL2L3,
VL3L1, V1, V2, V0 and 1-phase VEN, V4
Phase angles of all 3-phase / 1-phase
4 currents and voltages
Power Watts, Vars, VA/P, Q, S (P, Q: total
and phase selective)
Power factor (cos ),
5 Frequency
LSP2821.tif
Energy + kWh, + kVarh, forward and
reverse power ow
Min./max. and mean values of VPH-PH,
6 VPHE, VE, V0, V1, V2, IPH, I1, I2, 3I0, IDIFF, Fig. 8/10 Commissioning via a standard Web browser: Phasor diagram
IRESTRAINT, S, P, Q, cos , f
7 Registration of the interrupted currents

and counter for protection trip com-
mands
Mean operating temperature of over-
8 load function
Measured temperatures of external
thermo-boxes
Differential and restraint currents of
9 differential protection and REF
Metered values
For internal metering, the unit can
10 calculate an energy metered value from
the measured current and voltage values.
The 7UT6 relays may be integrated into
monitoring systems by means of the
11 diverse communication options available
in the relays. An example for this is the
LSP2821.tif
connection to the SITRAM transformer

monitoring system with PROFIBUS-DP
12 interface.
Fig. 8/11 Commissioning via a standard Web browser:Operating characteristic
Commissioning and operating aids
Commissioning could hardly be easier and is fully supported by All measured currents and voltages (7UT613/633 only) of the
13 DIGSI 4. The status of the binary inputs can be read individually
transformer can be indicated as primary or secondary values.
The differential protection bases its pickup thresholds on the
operation of switching elements (circuit-breakers, disconnect rated currents of the transformer. The referred differential and
devices) can be checked using the switching functions of the bay stabilising (restraint) currents are available as measured values
controller. The analog measured values are represented as wide- per phase.
14 ranging operational measured values. To prevent transmission of
If a thermo-box is connected, registered temperature values
information to the control center during maintenance, the bay
may also be displayed. To check the connection of the relay to
controller communications can be disabled to prevent unneces-
the primary current and voltage transformers, a commissioning
sary data from being transmitted. During commissioning, all
15 indications with test marking for test purposes can be connected
measurement is provided.

This measurement function works with only 5 to 10 % of the Automation / user-dened logic
transformer rated current and indicates the current and the
angle between the currents and voltages (if voltages applied).
Termination errors between the primary current transfomers
(CFC), specic functions for the automation of switchgear or 1
and input transformers of the relay are easily detected in this
manner.
The operating state of the protection may therefore be checked
online at any time. The fault records of the relay contain the
Switching authority 2
phase and ground currents as well as the calculated differential communication or by key-operated switch (when available).
and restraint currents. The fault records of the 7UT613/633
relays also contain voltages. If a source is set to LOCAL, only local switching operations are
3
Browser-based commissioning aid down: LOCAL; DIGSI PC program, REMOTE
The 7UT6 provides a commissioning and test program which Every switching operation and change of breaker position is kept
runs under a standard internet browser and is therefore
independent of the conguration software provided by the
in the status indication memory. The switch command source,
4
manufacturer. and result of a switching operation are retained.
For example, the correct vector group of the transformer may
be checked. These values may be displayed graphically as vector
diagrams.
Assignment of feedback to command
5
The stability check in the operating characteristic is available as inputs are logically assigned to the corresponding command
well as event log and trip log messages. Remote control can be
used if the local front panel cannot be accessed.
outputs. The unit can therefore distinguish whether the indica-
tion change is a consequence of switching operation or whether
6
it is a spontaneous change of state (intermediate position).
Control and automation functions
Chatter disable
Control
7
In addition to the protection functions, the SIPROTEC 4 units also period of time, the number of status changes of indication input
support all control and monitoring functions that are required exceeds a specied gure. If exceeded, the indication input is
for operating medium-voltage or high-voltage substations. blocked for a certain period, so that the event list will not record
excessive operations. 8
processes. Filter time
The status of primary equipment or auxiliary devices can be All binary indications can be subjected to a lter time (indication
obtained from auxiliary contacts and communicated via binary
inputs. Therefore it is possible to detect and indicate both the
suppression). 9
OPEN and CLOSED position or a fault or intermediate circuit- Indication ltering and delay
breaker or auxiliary contact position.
Indications can be ltered or delayed.
10
binary inputs indication input. The indication is passed on only if the indica-
substation control and protection system tion voltage is still present after a set period of time. In the
DIGSI 4 event of indication delay, there is a wait for a preset time. The
information is passed on only if the indication voltage is still
11
Command processing present after this time.
All the functionality of command processing is offered. This Indication derivation

or without feedback, sophisticated monitoring of the control A further indication (or a command) can be derived from an
12
hardware and software, checking of the external process, existing indication. Group indications can also be formed. The
control actions using functions such as runtime monitoring and volume of information to the system interface can thus be
reduced and restricted to the most important signals.
automatic command termination after output. Here are some
13
trip contacts A data transmission lockout can be activated, so as to prevent
transfer of information to the control center during work on a
circuit bay. 14
such as control of circuit-breakers, disconnectors and ground- Test operation
ing switches
automatic control system for test purposes. 15
combination with existing information

Communication
Communication
1 With respect to communication, particular emphasis has been

of standards common in energy automation. The design of
the communication modules permits interchangeability on the
2 one hand, and on the other hand provides openness for future
standards (for example, Industrial Ethernet).
Local PC interface
3 The PC interface accessible from the front of the unit permits

quick access to all parameters and fault event data. Of particular
commissioning.
4 Rear-mounted interfaces
Two communication modules located on the rear of the unit Fig. 8/12 IEC 60870-5-103 star-type RS232 copper conductor
incorporate optional equipment complements and readily permit connection or ber-optic connection
5 retrotting. They assure the ability to comply with the require-

ments of different communication interfaces.
Service interface (Port C/Port D)
6 In the RS485 version, several protection units can be centrally
operated with DIGSI 4. On connection of a modem, remote
control is possible. Via this interface communication with
thermo-boxes is executed.
7 System interface (Port B)
This interface is used to carry out communication with a
control or protection and control system and supports a variety
of communication protocols and interface designs, depending
8 on the module connected.
Commissioning aid via a standard Web browser

In the case of the 7UT6, a PC with a standard browser can be
9 connected to the local PC interface or to the service interface
(refer to Commissioning program). The relays include a small
Web server and send their HTML-pages to the browser via an
established dial-up network connection. Fig. 8/13 Bus structure for station buswith Ethernet
10 Retrotting: Modules for every type of communication

und IEC 61850, ber-optic ring
Communication modules for retrotting are available for the Safe bus architecture
entire SIPROTEC 4 unit range. These ensure that, where different RS485 bus
11 communication interfaces (electrical or optical) and protocols
(IEC 61850 Ethernet, IEC 60870-5-103, PROFIBUS-FMS/-DP,
With this data transmission via copper conductors electro-
MODBUS RTU, DNP 3.0, DIGSI, etc.) are required, such demands twisted-pair conductor. Upon failure of a unit, the remaining
can be met. system continues to operate without any disturbances.

The ber-optic double ring circuit is immune to electromag-
netic interference. Upon failure of a section between two
13 disturbance.
It is generally impossible to communicate with a unit that has
14
15
Communication
IEC 61850 Ethernet
LSP2163-afpen.tif
The Ethernet-based IEC 61850 protocol is the worldwide stan-
dard for protection and control systems used by power supply 1
be exchanged directly between bay units so as to set up simple
masterless systems for bay and system interlocking. Access to
the units via the Ethernet bus is also possible with DIGSI.
2
IEC 60870-5-103
IEC 60870-5-103 is an internationally standardized protocol for 3
the efcient communication in the protected area.
IEC 60870-5-103 is supported by a number of protection device
manufacturers and is used worldwide. Fig. 8/14 RS232 / RS485 electrical communication module
PROFIBUS-DP
4
PROFIBUS-DP is an industry-recognized standard for communica-
LSP2162-afpen.tif
tions and is supported by a number of PLC and protection device
manufacturers. 5
MODBUS RTU
MODBUS RTU is an industry-recognized standard for communica-
tions and is supported by a number of PLC and protection device
manufacturers.
6
DNP 3.0
DNP 3.0 (Distributed Network Protocol Version 3) is a messaging-
based communication protocol. The SIPROTEC 4 units are fully
7
Level 1 and Level 2 compliant with DNP 3.0. Fig. 8/15 820 nm ber-optic communication module
DNP 3.0 is supported by a number of protection device manu-
facturers.
8
9
LSP2164-afp.tif
10
Fig. 8/16 PROFIBUS communication module, optical double-ring
11
12
LSP3.01-0021.tif
13
14
Fig. 8/17 Optical Ethernet communication module for IEC 61850 with
integrated Ethernet switch
15
Communication

station control
1 Together with the SICAM power automa-
tion system, SIPROTEC 4 can be used
with PROFIBUS-FMS. Over the low-cost
electrical RS485 bus, or interference-free
2 via the optical double ring, the units
exchange information with the control
system.
Units featuring IEC 60870-5-103
3 interfaces can be connected to SICAM in
parallel via the RS485 bus or radially by
ber-optic link. Through this interface,
the system is open for the connection
4 of units of other manufacturers
(see Fig. 8/12).
5 into systems of other manufacturers or
in SIMATIC. Electrical RS485 or optical
interfaces are available. The optimum
physical data transfer medium can be
6 chosen thanks to opto-electrical con-
verters. Thus, the RS485 bus allows
low-cost wiring in the cubicles and an
interference-free optical connection to
7 the master can be established.
8 is standardized, thus also enabling direct connection of units
systems (see Fig. 8/13).
10
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connections
Typical connections
Fig. 8/19 Standard connection to a transformer without neutral current measurement 5
10
Fig. 8/20 Connection to a transformer with neutral current measurement
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connections
LSA4023-cen.eps
6
7 Fig. 8/21 Connection of transformer differential protection with high impedance REF (I8)
and neutral current measurement at I7
10
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connections
5
Fig. 8/22 Connection example to a single-phase power transformer with current
transformer between starpoint and grounding point
10
Fig. 8/23 Connection example to a single-phase power transformer with only one
current transformer (right side)
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connections
5
Fig. 8/24 Connection to a three-phase auto-transformer with current transformer
between starpoint and grounding point
6
10
11 Fig. 8/25 Generator or motor protection
12
13
14
15
Typical connections
6
Fig. 8/26 Connection 7UT612 as single-phase busbar protection for 7 feeders, illustrated for phase L1
7
10
11
12
13
Fig. 8/27 Connection 7UT612 as busbar protection for feeders, connected via external summation current transformers (SCT) 14
partial illustration for feeders 1, 2 and 7
15
Typical connections
8
Fig. 8/28 Connection example 7UT613 for a three-winding power transformer
10
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connections
10
11
12
Fig. 8/29 Connection example 7UT613 for a three-winding power transformer with current transformers between starpoint
and grounding point, additional connection for high-impedance protection; IX3 connected as high-sensitivity input
13
14
15
Typical connections
9 Fig. 8/30 Connection example 7UT613 for a three-phase auto-transformer

with three-winding and current transformer between starpoint and grounding point
10
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connections
10
Fig. 8/31 Connection example 7UT635 for a three-winding power transformer
with 5 measurement locations (3-phase) and neutral current measurement
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connections
3
Fig. 8/32 Voltage transformer connection to 3 star-connected voltage transformers (7UT613 and 7UT633 only)
7
Fig. 8/33 Voltage transformer connection to 3 star-connected voltage transformers with additional delta winding
8 (e-n-winding) (7UT613 and 7UT633 only)
10
11
12
13
14
15
Technical data
General unit data Switching capacity

Make 1000 W / VA
Analog inputs
Break
Break (with resistive load)
30 VA
40 W
1
Rated current 0.1 or 1 or 5 A Break (with L/R w 50 ms) 25 W
(selectable by jumper, 0.1 A) Switching voltage 250 V
Power consumption
In CT circuits
7UT
612 613 633 635
Permissible total current 30 A for 0.5 seconds
5 A continuous 2
with IN = 1 A; in VA approx. 0.02 0.05 0.05 0.05 Operating time, approx.
with IN = 5 A; in VA approx. 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.3 NO contact 8 ms
with IN = 0.1 A; in VA approx. 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 NO/NC contact (selectable) 8 ms
sensitive input; in VA approx.
Overload capacity
0.05
IN
0.05 0.05 0.05 Fast NO contact
High-speed*) NO trip outputs
5 ms
< 1 ms
3
In CT circuits LEDs
30 IN for 10 s Quantity 7UT
Dynamic (peak value)

4 IN continuous
250 IN (half cycle) RUN (green)
612
1
613
1
633
1
635
1
4
In CT circuits for ERROR (red) 1 1 1 1
highly sensitive input IEE LED (red), function can 7 14 14 14
Thermal 300 A for 1 s be assigned
100 A for 10 s
15 A continuous
Unit design 5
Housing 7XP20 For dimensions please refer
Dynamic 750 A (half cycle)
to dimension drawings part 14
Rated voltage (7UT613/633 only) 80 to 125 V
Power consumption per phase 0.1 VA
at 100 V
acc. to IEC 60529
For the device
6
Overload capacity in surface-mounting housing IP 51
Thermal (r.m.s.) 230 V continuous in ush-mounting housing
Auxiliary voltage front IP 51
Rated voltage DC 24 to 48 V
DC 60 to 125 V
rear
For personal safety
IP 50
IP 2x with closed protection cover
7
DC 110 to 250 V and Housing 7UT
AC 115 V (50/60 Hz), AC 230 V 612 613 633 635
Permissible tolerance
-20 to +20 %
15 %
Size, referred to 19 frame
Weight, in kg
1/3 1/2 1/1 1/1
8
(peak-to-peak) Flush-mounting housing 5.1 8.7 13.8 14.5
Surface-mounting housing 9.6 13.5 22.0 22.7
Power consumption (DC/AC) 7UT
612 613 633 635
Quiescent; in W approx. 5 6/12 6/12 6/12 Serial interfaces 9
Energized; in W approx. 7 12/19 20/28 20/28 Operating interface 1 for DIGSI 4 or browser
depending on design
Connection Front side, non-isolated, RS232,
Bridging time during
failure of the auxiliary voltage
Vaux 110 V 50 ms
(SUB-D) 10
Transmission rate in kbaud 7UT612: 4.8 to 38.4 kbaud
Binary inputs
Setting as supplied: 7UT613/633/635: 4.8 to 115 kbaud
Functions are freely assignable 38.4 kbaud, parity 8E1
Quantity marshallable 7UT
612 613 633 635
Distance, max. 15 m
Time synchronization DCF77 / IRIG-B signal / IRIG-B000
11
3 5 21 29
Connection Rear side, 9-pin subminiature
Rated voltage range 24 to 250 V, bipolar connector (SUB-D) (terminals with
Minimum pickup threshold
Ranges are settable by means of
DC 19 or 88 V (bipolar)
Voltage levels
surface-mounting housing)
5, 12 or 24 V (optional)
12
jumpers for each binary input
Service interface (operating interface 2) for DIGSI 4 /modem / service
Isolated RS232/RS485/FO 9-pin subminiature connector
Output relay Dielectric test
(SUB-D)
500 V / 50 Hz
13
Command / indication / Distance for RS232 Max. 15 m / 49.2 ft
alarm relay Distance for RS485 Max. 1000 m / 3300 ft
Distance for FO 1.5 km (1mile)
Quantity
each with 1 NO contact
7UT
612 613 633 635 14
(marshallable) 4 8 24 24
1 alarm contact, with 1 NO or
NC contact (not marshallable)
*) With high-speed contacts all operating times are reduced by 4.5 ms.
15
Technical data
System interface Electrical tests
1 IEC 61850
Ethernet, electrical (EN 100) for IEC 61850 and DIGSI
Specications
Standards IEC 60255 (Product standards)
Connection ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0/.1/.2
for ush-mounting case Rear panel, mounting location "B", UL 508
two RJ45 connector, 100 Mbit acc. Insulation tests
2 for surface-mounting case
to IEEE802.3
At bottom part of the housing
Standards EC 60255-5 and 60870-2-1
Test voltage 500 V; 50 Hz Voltage test (100 % test)
Transmission Speed 100 Mbits/s All circuits except for auxiliary 2.5 kV (r.m.s.), 50 Hz / 60 Hz
Distance 20 m/66 ft supply, binary inputs and
3 Ethernet, optical (EN 100) for IEC 61850 and DIGSI
Auxiliary voltage and binary DC 3.5 kV
Connection inputs (100 % test)
for ush-mounting case Rear panel, mounting location "B",
RS485/RS232 rear side 500 V (r.m.s.), 50 Hz / 60 Hz
LC connector receiver/transmitter
Optical wavelength
Not available
= 1350 nm
interface (100 % test)
Transmission Speed 100 Mbits/s
Laser class 1 acc. to EN 60825-1/-2 glass ber 50/125 m or Impulse voltage test (type test)
glass ber 62/125 m All circuits except for 5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 ms; 0.5 J
5 Permissible path attenuation Max. 5 dB for glass ber

62.5/125 m
at intervals of 5 s
Distance Max. 800 m/0.5 mile interface, class III
IEC 60870-5-103 EMC tests for interference immunity
6 Isolated RS232/RS485/FO 9-pin subminiature connector

(SUB-D)
Standards IEC 60255-6, 60255-22
(product standards)
EN 6100-6-2 (generic standard)
Dielectric test 500 V/50 Hz DIN 57435 / Part 303
Distance for RS232 Max. 15 m High frequency test 2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz; = 15 ms;
7 Distance for RS485
For ber-optic cable
Max. 1000 m IEC 60255-22-1, class III and
DIN 57435 / Part 303, class III
400 surges per s; test duration 2 s;
Ri = 200
Connector type ST connector Electrostatic discharge 8 kV contact discharge; 15 kV air
Optical wavelength = 820 nm IEC 60255-22-2 class IV discharge; both polarities;
Permissible attenuation Max. 8 dB, for glass-ber EN 61000-4-2, class IV 150 pF; Ri = 330
8 Distance
62.5/125 m
Max. 1.5 km
frequency sweep,
10 V/m; 80 to 1000 MHz;
80 % AM; 1 kHZ
PROFIBUS RS485 (-FMS/-DP) IEC 60255-22-3,
Connector type 9-pin subminiature IEC 61000-4-3 class III
connector (SUB-D)
9 Baud rate
Dielectric test
Max. 1.5 Mbaud
500 V / 50 Hz
amplitude-modulated, single
10 V/m; 80, 160, 450, 900 MHz,
80 % AM;
frequencies, duration > 10 s
Distance Max. 1000 m (3300 ft)
IEC 60255-22-3,
at w 93.75 kbaud
10 PROFIBUS ber optic (-FMS/-DP)

ST connector
Irradiation with RF eld, pulse-
modulated, single frequencies,
10 V/m; 900 MHz; repetition
frequency 200 Hz;
IEC 60255-22-3, IEC 61000-4-3/ duty cycle 50 % PM
Permissible attenuation Max. 8 dB, for glass-ber Fast transients interference, 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz;
11 Distance
62.5/125 m
500 kbaud 1.6 km (0.99 miles)
bursts
IEC 60255-22-4 and
repetition rate 300 ms; both
1500 kbaud 530 m (0.33 miles) IEC 61000-4-4, class IV polarities;
DNP 3.0 RS485 / MODBUS RS485
12 Connector type 9-pin subminiatur connector

(SUB-D)
(SURGE), IEC 61000-4-5,
installation class III
Impulse: 1.2/50 ms
Baud rate Max. 19200 baud

Dielectric test 500 V / 50 Hz Auxiliary supply Common (longitudinal) mode:
Distance Max. 1000 m (3300 ft) 2kV; 12 , 9 F
13 DNP 3.0 Optical/MODBUS FO

Connector type ST connector
1kV; 2 , 18 F
Optical wavelength = 820 nm Analog inputs, binary inputs, Common (longitude) mode:
Permissible attenuation Max. 8 dB, for glass-ber binary outputs 2kV; 42 , 0.5 F
62.5/125 m Differential (transversal) mode:
14 Distance 1.5 km (1 mile)
Line-conducted HF, amplitude-
1kV; 42 , 0.5 F
10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM;
1) Conversion with external OLM modulated IEC 61000-4-6, class III 1 kHz
For ber-optic interface please complete Order No. at 11th position
with 4 (FMS RS485) or 9 (DP RS485) and Order code L0A and additio-
15 nally order: For single ring: SIEMENS OLM 6GK1502-3AB10
For double ring: SIEMENS OLM 6GK1502-4AB10

Technical data
Electrical tests (contd) Climatic stress tests

EMC tests for interference immunity (contd)
Magnetic eld with power 30 A/m continuous; 300 A/m for
Temperatures
Type-tested acc. to IEC 60068-2-1 -25 C to +85 C / -13 F to +185 F 1
frequency 3 s; 50 Hz, 0.5 mT; 50 Hz and -2, test Bd, for 16 h
IEC 61000-4-8, IEC 60255-6 class IV Temporarily permissible operating -20 C to +70 C / -4 F to +158 F
Oscillatory surge withstand 2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz; = 15 s; temperature, tested for 96 h
capability, ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 Damped wave; 400 surges per
second; duration 2 s; Ri = 200
Recommended permanent
-5 C to +55 C / +25 F to +131 F 2
Fast transient surge withstand 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; burst 15 ms; IEC 60255-6
capability, ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 repetition rate 300 ms; (Legibility of display may be
both polarities; duration 1 min.; impaired above +55 C / +131 F)
Ri = 80 Limiting temperature during
permanent storage
-25 C to +55 C / -13 F to +131 F 3
Damped oscillations 2.5 kV (peak value), polarity
IEC 60894, IEC 61000-4-12 alternating 100 kHz, 1 MHz, 10 Limiting temperature during- -25 C to +70 C / -13 F to +158 F
MHz and transport
50 MHz, Ri = 200
EMC tests for interference emission (type test)
Humidity
Permissible humidity stress Yearly average 75 % relative
4
Standard EN 50081-* (generic standard) It is recommended to arrange the humidity; on 56 days in the year
units in such a way that they are up to 93 % relative humidity;
Conducted interference, 150 kHz to 30 MHz not exposed to direct sunlight or ondensation not permitted
only auxiliary supply
IEC-CISPR 22
Limit class B pronounced temperature changes
5
Radio interference eld strenght 30 to 1000 MHz
IEC-CISPR 22 Limit class B
CE conformity

6
Vibration, shock stress and seismic vibration relating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Council Directive
During operation 2004/108/EG previous 89/336/EEC) and electrical equipment designed
Standards
Vibration
IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068
Sinusoidal
previous 73/23/EEC). 7
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2 10 to 60 Hz: 0.075 mm amplitu- German standard DIN 57435/Part 303 (corresponding to VDE 0435/
IEC 60068-2-6 de; 60 to 150 Hz: 1 g acceleration Part 303).
frequency sweep 1 octave/min.
Further applicable standards: ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0 and C37.90.1. 8
This conformity is the result of a test that was performed by
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms,
Siemens AG in accordance with Article 10 of the Council Directive
IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks each in both directions of
complying with the generic standards EN 50081-2 and EN 50082-2
Seismic vibration
the 3 axes
Sinusoidal
for the EMC Directive and standard EN 60255-6 for the low-voltage
Directive.
9
(vertical axis)
8 to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration 10
(horizontal axis)
(vertical axis)
1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes 11
During transport
Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068
Vibration
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2
Sinusoidal
5 to 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude; 12
Shock
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
Half-sinusoidal
13
the 3 axes
Continuous shock Half-sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
IEC 60068-2-29
1000 shocks on each of the 3 axes
14
in both directions
15
Technical data
Functions Generators,motors, reactors
1 Differential protection
General
Operating times
Pickup time/dropout time with
Pickup values single-side infeed
Pickup time (in ms) at frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz
Differential current IDIFF > /INobj 0.05 to 2.00 (steps 0.01)
2 High-current stage IDIFF >> /INobj 0.5 to 35.0

or deactivated
(steps 0.1)
(stage ineffective)
7UT 612
IDIFF >, min.
IDIFF >>, min.
38
19
35
17
Pickup on switch-on 1.0 to 2.0 (steps 0.1)
(factor of IDIFF >) Dropout time (in ms), approx. 35 30
7UT 613/63x
3 Add-on stabilization on external
fault
(ISTAB > set value) Iadd-on /INobj
2.00 to 15.00 (steps 0.01)
2 to 250 cycles (steps 1 cycle)
or deactivated (effective until
IDIFF >, min.
IDIFF >>, min.
30
11
27
11
action time dropoff) Dropout time (in ms), approx. 54 46
Tolerances (at preset parameters) Dropout ratio, approx. 0.7
4 IDIFF > stage and characteristic

IDIFF >> stage
5 % of set value
5 % of set value
Busbars, short lines
Differential current monitor
Time delays
Steady-state differential 0.15 to 0.80 (steps 0.01)
Delay of IDIFF > stage TI-DIFF> 0.00 to 60.00 s (steps 0.01 s) current monitoring IDIFF mon/INobj
5 Delay of IDIFF >> stage TI-DIFF >>
0.00 to 60.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
Delay of blocking with differential
current monitoring TDIFF mon 1 to 10 s (steps 1 s)
Feeder current guard
Time tolerance 1 % of set value or 10 ms
Trip release Iguard/INobj by 0.20 to 2.00 (steps 0.01)
6 The set times are pure delay times
Transformers
feeder current guard
Operating times
or 0 (always released)
Harmonic stabilization
Inrush restraint ratio 10 to 80 % (steps 1 %) single-side infeed
7 (2nd harmonic) I2fN/IfN

Stabilization ratio further (n-th) 10 to 80 % (steps 1 %)
Pickup time (in ms) at frequency
7UT 612
50 Hz 60 Hz
harmonic (optional 3rd or 5th) IDIFF >, min. 25 25

InfN/IfN IDIFF >>, min. 19 17
Crossblock function Can be activated / deactivated
8 max. action time for crossblock 2 to 1000 AC cycles (steps 1 cycle)
or 0 (crossblock deactivated)
Dropout time (in ms), approx.
7UT 613/63x
30 30
or deactivated (active until IDIFF >, min. 11 11

dropout) IDIFF >>, min. 11 11
Dropout time (in ms), approx. 54 46
9 Operating times
single-side infeed
10 7UT 612
IDIFF >, min. 38 35
IDIFF >>, min. 19 17
7UT 613/63x
11 IDIFF >, min.
IDIFF >>, min.
30
11
27
11
12 Current matching for transformers
Vector group adaptation 0 to 11 (x 30 ) (steps 1)
Star-point conditioning Grounded or non-grounded
(for each winding)
13
14
15
Technical data
Restricted ground-fault protection Current stages (contd)

Multiple availability
Settings
2 times (option) Tolerances
Denite time Currents 3 % of set value or 1 % of rated
current
1
Differential current IREF >/INobj 0.05 to 2.00 (steps 0.01) Times 1 % of set value or 10 ms
Limit angle REF 110 (xed) Inverse time Currents Pickup at 1.05 I/IP 1.15;
Time delay TREF 0.00 to 60.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
or deactivated (no trip) Acc. to IEC Times
or 1.05 I/3IOP 1.15
5 % 15 ms at fN = 50/60 Hz
2
Operating times for 2 I/IP 20
and TIP/s 1;
Pickup time (in ms) at frequency 0 Hz 60 Hz or 2 I/3I0P 20
7UT 612
At 1.5 setting value IREF >, approx. 40 38 Acc. to ANSI Times
and T3I0P/s 1
5 % 15 ms at fN = 50/60 Hz
3
At 2.5 setting value IREF >, approx. 37 32 for 2 I/IP 20
Dropout time (in ms), approx. 40 40 and DIP/s 1;
or 2 I/3I0P 20
7UT 613/63x
At 1.5 setting value IREF >, approx. 35 30 and D3I0P/s 1
The set denite times are pure delay times.
4
At 2.5 setting value IREF >, approx. 33 29
Dropout time (in ms), approx. 26 23 Operating times of the denite-time stages
Dropout ratio, approx. 0.7 Pickup time/dropout time phase current stages
Overcurrent-time protection for phase and residual currents Pickup time (in ms) at frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz 5
Multiple availability 3 times (option) 7UT612
Without inrush restraint, min. 20 18
Characteristics
With inrush restraint, min. 40 35
Denite-time stages (DT)
Inverse-time stages (IT)
IPh >>, 3I0 >>, IPh >, 3I0 >
IP, 3I0P
7UT613/6x
30 30
6
Acc. to IEC Inverse, very inverse, extremely Without inrush restraint, min. 11 11
inverse, long-time inverse With inrush restraint, min. 33 29
Acc. to ANSI Inverse, moderately inverse, very Dropout time (in ms), approx. 35 35
inverse, extremely inverse, denite
inverse, short inverse, long inverse
Pickup time/dropout time residual current stages 7
Alternatively, user-specied 7UT612
trip and reset characteristics Without inrush restraint, min. 40 35
Reset characteristics (IT)
Current stages
Acc. to ANSI with disk emulation With inrush restraint, min.
40
30
35
30
8
7UT613/6x
High-current stages IPh >> 0.10 to 35.00 A 1) (steps 0.01 A)
With inrush restraint, min.
TIPh >> 0.00 to 60.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
31
45
29
43 9
Dropout ratios
3I0 >> 0.05 to 35.00 A 1) (steps 0.01 A)
or deactivated (stage ineffective) Current stages Approx. 0.95 for I/IN 0.5
T3I0 >> 0.00 to 60.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
Inrush blocking
Inrush blocking ratio 10 to 45 % (steps 1 %)
10
Denite-time stages IPh > 0.10 to 35.00 A 1)(steps 0.01 A (2nd harmonic) I2fN/IfN
or deactivated (stage ineffective) Lower operation limit I > 0.2 A1)
TIPh 0.00 to 60.00 s (steps 0.01 s) 0.30 to 25.00 A 1) (steps 0.01 A)
3I0 >
0.05 to 35.00 A 1) (steps 0.01 A)
Max. current for blocking
Crossblock function between Can be activated /deactivated 11
phases
or deactivated (stage ineffective) max. action time for crossblock 0.00 to 180 s (steps 0.01 A)
T3I0 > 0.00 to 60.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
Inverse-time stages IP
0.10 to 4.00 A 1) (steps 0.01 A)
12
Acc. to IEC TIP 0.05 to 3.20 s (steps 0.01 s)
3I0P
T3I0P
0.05 to 4.00 A 1)
0.05 to 3.20 s
(steps 0.01 A)
(steps 0.01 s)
13
Inverse-time stages IP 0.10 to 4.00 A 1) (steps 0.01 A
Acc. to ANSI DIP 0.50 to 15.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
or deactivated (no trip) 14
3I0P 0.05 to 4.00 A 1) (steps 0.01 A)
D3I0P 0.50 to 15.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
1) Secondary values based on IN = 1 A;
for IN = 5 A they must be multiplied by 5. 15
Technical data
Overcurrent-time protection for ground current Dynamic cold-load pickup for overcurrent-time protection
Characteristics
3 times (option) Time control
Start criterion Binary input from circuit-breaker
Denite-time stages (DT) IE >>, IE > auxiliary contact or current criterion
(of the assigned side)
Inverse-time stages (IT) IEP
CB open time TCB open 0 to 21600 s (= 6 h) (steps 1 s)
2 Acc. to IEC Inverse, very inverse, extremely
inverse, long-time inverse Active time TActive time 1 to 21600 s (= 6 h) (steps 1 s)
Acc. to ANSI Inverse, moderately inverse, very Accelerated dropout time

inverse, extremely inverse, denite TStop time 1 to 600 s (= 10 min) (steps 1 s) or
inverse, short inverse, long inverse deactivated (no accelerated dropout)
3 Alternatively, user-specied trip and

reset characteristics
Setting ranges and changeover values
Dynamic parameters of current Setting ranges and steps are the
Reset characteristics (IT) Acc. to ANSI with disk emulation pickup and delay times or time same as for the functions to be
multipliers inuenced
Current stages
4 High-current stage IE >> 0.05 to 35.00 A 1) (steps 0.01 A)
Single-phase overcurrent-time protection
Current stages
TIE >> 0.00 to 60.00 s (steps 0.01 s) High-current stage I >> 0.05 to 35.00 A 1) (steps 0.01 A)
or deactivated (no trip) 0.003 to 1.500 A 2) (steps 0.001 A)
5 Denite-time stage IE > 0.05 to 35.00 A 1) (steps 0.01 A)

or deactivated (stage ineffective) TT >>
0.00 to 60.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
TIE > 0.00 to 60.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
or deactivated (no trip) Denite-time stage I > 0.05 to 35.00 A 1) (steps 0.01 A)
0.003 to 1.500 A 2) (steps 0.001 A)
6 Inverse-time stages IEP
Acc. to IEC TIEP
0.05 to 4.00 A 1)
0.05 to 3.20 s
(steps 0.01 A)
(steps 0.01 s)
TI >
0.00 to 60.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
Inverse-time stages IEP 0.05 to 4.00 A 1) (steps 0.01 A)
Tolerances Currents 3 % of set value or
7 Acc. to ANSI DIEP 0.50 to 15.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
1 % of rated current at IN = 1 A or 5 A;
5 % of set value or
Tolerances 3 % of rated current at IN = 0.1 A
Denite time Currents 3 % of set value or 1 % of rated Times 1 % of set value or 10 ms
current
8 Inverse time
Times
Currents
1 % of set value or 10 ms
Pickup at 1.05 I/IEP 1.15
Operating times
Acc. to IEC Times 5 % 15 ms at fN = 50/60 Hz 7UT612
for 2 I/IEP 20 and TIEP/s 1 Minimum 20 18
9 Acc. to ANSI Times 5 % 15 ms at fN = 50/60 Hz
for 2 I/IEP 20 and DIEP/s 1 7UT613/63x
The set denite times are pure delay times. Minimum 14 13
Operating times of the denite-time stages
Dropout ratios
10 Pickup time / dropout time
Current stages Approx. 0.95 for I/IN 0.5
7UT612
7UT613/63x
Dropout ratios
Current stages Approx. 0.95 for I/IN 0.5
Inrush blocking
13 Inrush blocking ratio 10 to 45 % (steps 1 %)
(2nd harmonic) I2fN/IfN
Lower operation limit I > 0.2 A 1)
Max. current for blocking 0.30 to 25.00 A 1) steps 0.01 A)
14
15 1) Secondary values based on IN = 1 A;

for IN = 5 A they must be multiplied by 5.
2) Secondary values for high-sensitivity current
input I8, independent of rated current.

Technical data
Unbalanced load protection (Negative-sequence protection) Overload protection using a thermal replica (continued)
Characteristics
Denite-time stages (DT) I2 >>, I2 >
Tripping characteristics
Tripping characteristic 1
I 2 I pre 2
Inverse-time stages (IT) I2P for I/(k IN) 8
Acc. to IEC Inverse, very inverse, extremely k I N k I N
t = IN
inverse I 2
inverse, extremely inverse
1
k I N 2
t Tripping time
Reset characteristics (IT) Acc. to ANSI with disk emulation Heating-up time constant
Operating range 0.1 to 4 A 1) I Actual load current
Current stages
Ipre Preload current
k Setting factor IEC 60255-8
3
High-current stage I2 >> 0.10 to 3.00 A 1) (steps 0.01 A) IN Rated current of the protected
TI2 >> 0.00 to 60.00 s (steps 0.01 s) object
or deactivated (no trip) Dropout ratios
Denite-time stage I2 >
TI2 >
0.10 to 3.00 A 1)
0.00 to 60.00 s
(steps 0.01 A)
(steps 0.01 s)
/trip Dropout at alarm 4
or deactivated (no trip) /alarm Approx. 0.99
Inverse-time stages I2P 0.10 to 2.00 A 1) (steps 0.01 A) I/Ialarm Approx. 0.97
Acc. to IEC TI2P 0.05 to 3.20 s (steps 0.01 s)
Tolerances
(with one 3-phase measuring location)
5
Inverse-time stages I2P 0.10 to 2.00 A 1) (steps 0.01 A)
Referring to k IN 3 % or 10 mA1);
Acc. to ANSI DI2P 0.50 to 15.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
class 3 % acc. IEC 60255-8
Tolerances
Denite-time Currents 3 % of set value or 1 % of rated
Referring to tripping time 3 % or 1 s at fN = 50/60 Hz
for I/(k IN) > 1.25 6
current Frequency inuence referring to k IN
Times 1 % of set value or 10 ms In the range 0.9 f/fN 1.1 1 % at fN = 50/60 Hz
Inverse time
Acc. to IEC
Currents
Times
Pickup at 1.05 I/IEP 1.15
5 % 15 ms at fN = 50/60 Hz
Hot-spot calculation and determination of the ageing rate
Thermo-box
7
for 2 I/IEP 20 and TIEP/s 1
Acc. to ANSI Times 5 % 15 ms at fN = 50/60 Hz (temperature monitoring box)
for 2 I/IEP 20 and DIEP/s 1 Number of measuring points From 1 thermo-box
The set denite times are pure delay times.
Operating times of the denite-time stages
(up to 6 temperature sensors) or
from 2 thermo-boxes 8
(up to 12 temperature sensors)
Pickup time/dropout time For hot spot calculation one tempe-
Pickup time (in ms) at frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz rature sensor must be connected.
7UT612
Minimum 50 45
Cooling 9
Dropout time (in ms), approx. 30 30 Cooling method ON (oil natural)
OF (oil forced)
7UT613/63x OD (oil directed)
Minimum
41
23
34
20 Oil exponent
Hot spot to top-oil gradient Hgr
Y 1.6 to 2.0 (steps 0.1)
22 to 29 (steps 1)
10
Dropout ratios
Annunciation thresholds
Current stages Approx. 0.95 for I2/IN 0.5
Warning temperature hot spot 98 to 140 C (steps 1 C)
Overload protection using a thermal replica
Alarm temperature hot spot
208 to 284 F
98 to 140 C
(steps 1 F)
(steps 1 C)
11
208 to 284 F (steps 1 F)
Setting ranges Warning ageing rate 0.125 to 128.000 (steps 0.001)
Factor k acc. IEC 60255-8
Time constant
0.10 to 4.00 (steps 0.01)
1.0 to 999.9 min (steps 0.1 min)
Alarm ageing rate 0.125 to 128.000 (steps 0.001) 12
Cooling down factor at motor
stand-still (for motors) K-factor 1.0 to 10.0 (steps 0.1)
Thermal alarm stage alarm/trip 50 to 100 % referred to trip
temperature rise (steps 1 %) 13
Current-based alarm stage 0.10 to 4.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A)
Ialarm
Start-up recognition 0.60 to 10.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A)
(for motors) Istart-up or deactivated
(no start-up recognition)
14
Emergency start run-on time 10 to 15000 s (steps 1 s)
(for motors) Trun-on
1) Secondary values based on IN = 1 A;
for IN = 5 A they must be multiplied by 5. 15
Technical data
Thermo-boxes for overload protection Undervoltage protection (denite-time and inverse-time function)
(ANSI 27)
1 Thermo-boxes (connectable) 1 or 2
Number of temperature sensors per Max. 6 Setting range
Undervoltage pickup V<, V<<, 10 to 125 V (steps 0.1 V)
thermo-box
Vp< (positive sequence as
Measuring type Pt 100 or Ni 100 or Ni 120 phase-to-phase values)
Time delays T 0 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s) or indenite
2 Annuciation thresholds
For each measuring point:
Time multiplier TM 0.1 to 5 s (steps 0.01 s)
Times
Warning temperature (stage 1) -50 to 250 C (steps 1 C)
Pickup time V<, V<< Approx. 50 ms
-58 to 482 F (steps 1 F) Drop-off time V<, V<< Approx. 50 ms
3 Alarm temperature (stage 2)

or deactivated (no warning)
-50 to 250 C (steps 1 C)
Drop-off ratio V<, V<<, Vp<
Tolerances
1.01 or 0.5 V
-58 to 482 F (steps 1 F) Voltage limit values 1 % of set value or 0.5 V

Time delays T 1 % or 10 ms
or deactivated (no alarm)
4 Breaker failure protection

Inverse-time characteristic
1 % of measured value of voltage
Setting ranges
Setting ranges
Overvoltage pickup V>, V>> 30 to 170 V (steps 0.1 V)
Current ow monitoring 0.04 to 1.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A) (maximum phase-to-phase
5 for the respective side voltage or phase-to-ground-
voltage)
Dropoff to pickup ratio Approx. 0.9 for I 0.25 A1)
Pickup tolerance 5 % of set value or 0.01 A1)
Times
Breaker status monitoring Binary input for CB auxiliary contact
6 Starting conditions
Pickup times V>, V>>
Drop-off times V>, V>>
Approx. 50 ms
Approx. 50 ms
For breaker failure protection Internal trip Drop-off ratio V>, V>> 0.9 to 0.99 (steps 0.01)
External trip (via binary input) Tolerances
Times Voltage limit value 1 % of set value 0.5 V
7 Pickup time Approx. 2 ms (7UT613/63x) and
approx. 3 ms (7UT612) with Frequency protection (ANSI 81)
measured quantities present; Setting ranges
Approx. 20 ms after switch-on of Steps; selectable f>, f< 4
8 Reset time
measured quantities, fN = 50/60 Hz Pickup values f>, f<
Time delays T
40 to 65 Hz (steps 0.01 Hz)
3 stages 0 to 100 s, 1 stage up to
(incl. output relay), approx. 50 Hz 60 Hz 600 s
7UT612 30 ms 30 ms Undervoltage blocking V1< (steps 0.01 s)
10 to 125 V (steps 0.1 V)
9 7UT613/63x
Delay times for all stages
25 ms 25 ms
0.00 to 60.00 s; deactivated Times
(steps 0.01 s) Pickup times f>, f< Approx. 100 ms
Drop-off times f>, f< Approx. 100 ms
Time tolerance 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Drop-off difference f Approx. 20 mHz
10 Overexitation protection (Volt /Hertz) (7UT613 / 633 only)
Setting ranges
Drop-off ratio V1<
Tolerances
Approx. 1.05
Pickup threshold alarm stage 1 to 1.2 (steps 0.01) Frequency 10 mHz (at V> 0.5 VN)
Pickup threshold V/f>>-stage 1 to 1.4 (steps 0.01) Undervoltage blocking 1 % of set value or 0.5 V
Time delays T 0 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s) Time delays T 1 % or 10 ms
11 Characteristic values of V/f
or deactivated
1.05/1.1/1.15/1.2/1.25/1.3/1.35/1.4 Reverse-power protection (ANSI 32R)
and assigned times t (V/f) 0 to 20000 s (steps 1 s) Setting ranges
Cooling down time TCooling 0 to 20000 s (steps 1 s) Reverse power PRev.>/SN - 0.5 to - 30 % (steps 0.01 %)
Times (in ms) Time delays T 0 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s) or indenite
12 (alarm and V/f>>-stage)
Pickup times at 1.1 of set value,
50 Hz 60 Hz Times
Pickup time Approx. 360 ms (50 Hz);
approx. 36 31 Approx. 300 ms (60 Hz)
Drop-off times, approx. 28 23 Drop-off time Approx. 360 ms (50 Hz);
Approx. 300 ms (60 Hz)
13 Drop-off ratio (alarm, trip)
Tolerances
0.95
Drop-off ratio PRev.> Approx. 0.6
V/f-Pickup 3 % of set value Tolerances
Time delays T 1 % or 10 ms Reverse power PRev.> 0.25 % SN 3 % set value
Thermal characteristic (time) 5 % rated to V/f or 600 ms Time delays T 1 % or 10 ms
14
15 1) Secondary values based on IN = 1 A;

for IN = 5 A they must be multiplied by 5.

Technical data
Forward-power protection (ANSI 32F) Trip circuit supervision

Setting ranges
Forward power PForw.</SN
Forward power PForw.>/SN
0.5 to 120 % (steps 0.1 %)
1 to 120 % (steps 0.1 %)
Trip circuits
Number of supervised trip circuits 1 1
Time delays T 0 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s) or indenite Operation of each trip circuit With 1 binary input or with 2 binary
inputs
Times
Pickup time
(accurate measuring)
Approx. 360 ms (50 Hz);
Flexible protection functions (ANSI 27, 32, 47, 50, 55, 59,81)
N. of selectable stages 12
2
Operating modes / measuring Measurement location or side
(fast measuring) Approx. 50 ms (60 Hz)
quantities selectable
Drop-off time Approx. 360 ms (50 Hz);
3-phase I, I1, I2, 3I0, V, V1, V2, V0, P, Q, cos
(accurate measuring) Approx. 300 ms (60 Hz)
1-phase
Without xed phase relation
I, IE, IE sens., V, P, Q, cos
f, binary input
3
Drop-off time (fast measuring) Approx. 50 ms (60 Hz)
Pickup when Exceeding or falling below
Drop-off ratio PForw.< 1.1 or 0.5 % of SN threshold value
Drop-off ratio PForw.> Approx. 0.9 or 0.5 % of SN
Tolerances
Active power PForw.<, PForw.> 0.25 % SN 3 % of set value
Setting ranges
Current I, I1, I2, 3I0, IE
Sens. ground curr. IE sens.
0.05 to 35 A (steps of 0.01 A)
0.001 to 1.5 A (steps of 0.001 A)
4
at Q < 0.5 SN at accurate measuring
Voltages V, V1, V2, V0 1 to 170 V (steps of 0.1 V)
0.5 % SN 3 % of set value
Displacement voltage VE 1 to 200 V (steps of 0.1 V)
at Q < 0.5 SN at fast measuring
Time delays T 1 % or 10 ms Power P, Q
Power P, Q (side)
1.6 to 3000 W (steps of 0.1 W)
0.01 to 17 P/SN, Q/SN, (steps of 0.01)
5
External trip commands
Power factor (cos ) - 0.99 to + 0.99 (steps of 0.01)
Binary inputs Frequency fN = 50/60 Hz 10 to 66 Hz (steps of 0.01 Hz)
Number of binary inputs 2
for direct tripping
Pickup delay time
Trip delay time
0 to 60 s (steps of 0.01 s)
0 to 3600 s (steps of 0.01 s) 6
Operating time Approx. 12.5 ms min. Dropout delay time 0 to 60 s (steps of 0.01 s)
Approx. 25 ms typical Times On request (see Manual)
Dropout time Approx. 25 ms Dropout times On request (see Manual)
Delay time 0.00 to 60.00 s (steps 0.01 s) Tolerances On request (see Manual) 7
Expiration tolerance 1 % of set value or 10 ms
The set denite times are pure delay times. Additional functions
Transformer annunciations
External annunciations Buchholz warning
Operational measured values IL1; IL2; IL3
8
Buchholz tank of currents, 3-phase for each side in A primary and secondary
Buchholz tripping and measurement location and % of IN
Tolerance at IN = 1 or 5 A 1 % of measured value or 1 % of IN
Measured quantities supervision
Current symmetry |Imin| / |Imax| < BAL. FAKT. I
Tolerance at IN = 0.1 A
2 % of measured value or 2 % of IN
3I0; I1; I2
9
(for each measurement location) if Imax / IN > BAL. I LIMIT / IN of currents, 3-phase for each side in A primary and secondary
BAL. FAKT. I 0.10 to 0.90 (steps 0.01) and measurement location and % of IN
BAL. I LIMIT 0.10 to 1.00 A 1) (steps 0.01 A) Tolerance 2 % of measured value or 2 % of IN
Voltage symmetry
(if voltages applied)
|Vmin| / |Vmax| < BAL. FAKT.
if |Vmax| > BALANCE V-LIMIT
of currents
Voltage sum |VL1+ VL2+ VL3- kV VEN| > 25 V 1-phase for each measurement in A primary and secondary
(if voltages applied) location and % of IN
Current phase sequence IL1 before IL2 before IL3
(clockwise) or
Tolerance at IN = 1 or 5 A
Tolerance at IN = 0.1 A
1 % of measured value or 1 % of IN
2 % of measured value or 2 % of IN 11
IL1 before IL3 before IL2 For high-sensitivity inputs in A primary and secondary
(counter-clockwise) Tolerance 1 % of measured value or 2 mA
if |IL1|, |IL2|, |IL3| > 0.5 IN Feeder Further High-sensitivity
Voltage phase sequence
(if voltages applied)
VL1 before VL2 before VL3
(clockwise) or
7UT612
7UT613
I1 to I7
I1 to I9
I7 to I8
Ix1 to Ix3
I8
Ix3
12
VL1 before VL3 before VL2 7UT633 I1 to I9 Ix1 to Ix3 Ix3
(counter-clock) 7UT635 I1 to I12 Ix1 to Ix4 Ix3, Ix4
if |VL1|, |VL2|, |VL3| > 40 V/3
Broken wire Unexpected instantaneous current
Phase angles of currents,
3-phase for each measurement
(IL1); (IL2); (IL3) in ,
referred to (IL1) 13
value and current interruption or location
missing zero crossing Tolerance 1 at rated current
detects failure of the measured
voltage
14
15
Technical data
Operational measured values (cont'd) Reset, automatic Time of day adjustable (in minutes,
0 to 1439 min)
1 Phase angles of currents,
7UT612
7UT613
(I1) to (I8)
(I1) to (I9), (Ix1) to (Ix3)
7UT633 (I1) to (I9), (Ix1) to (Ix4) Reset, manual Using binary input,
7UT635 (I1) to (I12), (Ix1) to (Ix4) using keypad,
via communication
2 1-phase for each measurement
location in , referred to (I1) Min./max./mean values for IL1, IL2, IL3,
Tolerance 1 at rated current current I1 (positive-sequence component)
Operational measured values of in kV primary and V secondary I2 (negative-sequence component),
voltages (7UT613/633 only) and % of VN 3I0, IDIFF L1, IDIFF L2, IDIFF L3, IRESTR.L1,
3 3-phase (if voltage applied) VL1-E, VL2-E, VL3-E,

VL1-L2, VL2-L3, VL3-L1, Min./max./mean values for
IRESTR.L2, IRESTR.L3
VL1-E, VL2-E, VL3-E
Tolerance 0.2 % of measured value or + 0.2 V voltages V1 (positive-sequence component)
V 1, V 2, V 0, V2 (negative-sequence component)
Tolerance 0.4 % of measured value or + 0.4 V V0, VE, VL1-L2, VL2-L3, VL3-L1
4 1-phase (if voltage applied)
Tolerance
VEN or V4
0.2 % of measured value or + 0.2 V
Min./max./mean values for power S, P, Q, cos , frequency
Min./max. for mean values see above
Phase angles of voltages (VL1-E)), (VL2-E), (VL3-E), Fault event log
(7UT613/633 only, if voltages (V4), (VEN)
Storage of the messages With a total of max. 200 messages
5 applied)
Tolerance 1 at rated voltage of the last 8 faults
Operational measured values f Fault recording
of frequency in Hz and % of fN Number of stored fault records Max. 8
Range 10 to 75 Hz
Storage period Max. 5 s for each fault,
6 Tolerance 1 % within range fN 10 % and
I IN
(start with pickup or trip) Approx. 5 s in total
7UT
612 613 633 635
of power S P Q
7UT612 x Sampling rate at fN = 50 Hz 600 Hz 800 Hz 800 Hz 800 Hz
7 7UT613
7UT633
x
x
x
x
x
x
Sampling rate at fN = 60 Hz 720 Hz 960 Hz 960 Hz 960 Hz
Switching statistics
7UT635 x
S (apparent power) Applied or rated voltage Number of trip events caused by
7UT6
8 P (active power) Only if voltage applied,
7UT613/633 only Total of interrupted currents
caused by 7UT6
Segregated for each pole, each side
and each measurement location
Q (reactive power) Only if voltage applied,
7UT613/633 only, Operating hours Up to 7 decimal digits
in kVA; MVA; GVA primary Criterion Excess of current threshold
9 Operational measured value of

power factor
cos (p.f.)
Only if voltage applied,
Real-time clock and buffer battery
Resolution for operational 1 ms
7UT613/633 only messages
Overexcitation V/f Resolution for fault messages 1 ms
10 Only if voltage applied,

7UT613/633 only
Buffer battery 3 V/1 Ah, type CR AA
Self-discharging time
Tolerance 2 % of measured value approx. 10 year
Operational measured values L1; L2; L3; res, Time synchronization
for thermal value referred to tripping
temperature rise trip
thermo-box1 to thermo-box12
Operating modes:
Internal Internal via RTC
(Overload protection acc. in C or F relative aging rate, IEC 60870-5-103 External via system interface
to IEC 60354) load reserve (IEC 60870-5-103)
Time signal IRIG B External via IRIG B
12 Measured values of
differential protection
IDIFF L1; IDIFF L2; IDIFF L3;
IREST L1; IREST L2; IREST L3
in % of operational rated current
Time signal DCF77
Time signal synchro-box
External, via time signal DCF77
External, via synchro-box
Pulse via binary input External with pulse via binary input
Tolerance (with preset values) 2 % of measured value or
2 % of IN (50/60 Hz) Indication of conformity
13 3 % of measured value or
3 % of IN (16.7 Hz)
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European
Communities on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating
Measured values of IDIFFREF; IRestREF to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Council Directive 2004/ 108/EC) and
restricted ground-fault protection in % of operational rated current concerning electrical equipment for use within specied voltage limits (Low-
Tolerance (with preset values) 2 % of measured value or voltage Directive 2006/95/EC).
14 2 % of IN (50/60 Hz)
3 % of measured value or
This conformity has been established by means of tests conducted by
Siemens AG in accordance of the Council Directive in agreement with the
3 % of IN (16.7 Hz)
generic standards EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4 for the EMC directives,
Max. /Min. / Mean report and with the standard EN 60255-5 for the low-voltage directive.
15 Report of measured values With date and time from all sides
and measurement locations
The product is conforming to the international standards of the series
IEC 60255 and the German regulation of DIN 57435 part 303 (VDE 0435 part 303).


7UT612 differential protection relay for transformers, generators, motors and busbars
Housing x 19"; 3 BI, 4 BO, 1 live status contact, 7 I, IEE1)
7UT612 - - A0-
1
Rated current
IN = 1 A 1
IN = 5 A 5 see next
page 2
DC 60 to 125 V 3), binary input threshold 19 V2)
DC 110 to 250 V, AC 115/230 V, binary input threshold 88 V2)
4
5 3
Unit design
For panel surface mounting, two-tier terminals on top and bottom B
For panel ush mounting, plug-in terminals (2/3-pole AMP connector)
For panel ush mounting, screw-type terminals, (direct wiring/ring lugs)
D 4
E
Region-specic default settings/function and language settings

Region DE, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language German; selectable
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language English (GB); selectable
A
B
5
Region US, 60/50 Hz, ANSI/IEC, language English (US); selectable C
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language Spanish; selectable E
System interface (Port B ) on rear 6

IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, electrical RS232 1
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, electrical RS485
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, optical 820 nm, ST connector
2
3 7
PROFIBUS-FMS Slave, electrical RS485 4
PROFIBUS-FMS Slave, optical, single loop, ST connector4) 5
PROFIBUS-FMS Slave, optical, double loop, ST connector4)
PROFIBUS-DP Slave, electrical RS485
6
9 L 0A
8
PROFIBUS-DP Slave, optical 820 nm, double loop, ST connector4) 9 L 0 B
MODBUS, electrical RS485 9 L 0D
MODBUS, optical 820 nm, ST connector4)
DNP 3.0, electrical RS485
9
9
L 0 E
L 0G
9
DNP 3.0, optical 820 nm, ST connector4) 9 L 0H
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45 connector (EN 100) 9 L 0 R
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, optical, double, LC connector (EN 100)5) 9 L 0 S 10
11
12
13
1) Sensitivity selectable normal/high. 4) With surface-mounting housing: only RS485 interface available. 14
2) The binary input thresholds are selectable in two stages by means 5) If position 9 = B (surface-mounting housing), please order relay
of jumpers. with electrical Ethernet interface and use a separate FO switch.
by means of jumpers. 15
1 7UT612 differential protection relay for transformers, generators, motors and busbars
DIGSI 4 / browser / modem interface (Port C) on rear/temperature monitoring box connection

7UT612 - - A0
No DIGSI 4 port 0
DIGSI 4 / browser, electrical RS232 1
2 DIGSI 4 / browser or temperature monitoring box1), electrical RS485
DIGSI 4 / browser or temperature monitoring box1), 820 nm ber optic, ST connector
2
3
Functions
3 Measured values/monitoring functions

Basic measured values 1
Basic measured values, transformer monitoring functions
(connection to thermo-box/hot spot acc. to IEC, overload factor) 4
4 Differential protection + basic functions

Differential protection for transformer, generator, motor, busbar (87)
Overload protection for one winding (49), Lockout (86)
Overcurrent-time protection (50/51): I>, I>>, IP (inrush stabilization)
5 Overcurrent-time protection (50N/51N): 3I0>, 3I0>>, 3I0P (inrush stabilization)

Overcurrent-time protection ground (50G/51G): IE>, IE>>, IEP (inrush stabilization) A
Differential protection + basic functions + additional functions

Restricted ground fault protection, low impedance (87N)
6 Restricted ground fault protection, high impedance (87N without resistor and varistor), O/C 1-phase
Trip circuit supervision (74TC), breaker failure protection (50BF), unbalanced load protection (46) B
10
11
12
13
14
15 1) External temperature monitoring box required.


7UT613 differential protection relay for transformers, generators, motors and busbars
Housing x19"; 5 BI, 8 BO, 1 live status contact, 11 I, IEE1)
7UT613 - - -
1
Rated current
IN = 1 A 1
IN = 5 A 5 see next page
2
DC 110 to 250 V 1), AC 115/230 V, binary input threshold 88 V2)
4
5 3
DC 110 to 250 V 1), AC 115/230 V, binary input threshold 176 V2) 6
Unit design
Surface-mounting housing with two-tier terminals
Flush-mounting housing with plug-in terminals
B 4
D
Flush-mounting housing with screw-type terminals E
Region-specic default settings/language settings

Region DE, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language German; selectable A
5
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language English (GB); selectable B
Region US, 60/50 Hz, ANSI/IEC, language English (US); selectable C
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language French; selectable
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language Spanish; selectable
D
E
6
System interface (Port B ) on rear
No system interface
0
1
7
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, optical 820 nm, ST connector 3
PROFIBUS-FMS Slave, electrical RS485
PROFIBUS-FMS Slave, optical, single ring, ST connector4)
4
5
8
PROFIBUS-FMS Slave, optical, double ring, ST connector4) 6
PROFIBUS-DP Slave, electrical RS485 9 L 0A
PROFIBUS-DP Slave, optical 820 nm, double ring, ST connector4)
MODBUS, electrical RS485
9
9
L 0 B
L 0D
9
MODBUS, optical 820 nm, ST connector4) 9 L 0 E
DNP 3.0, electrical RS485 9 L 0G
DNP 3.0, optical 820 nm, ST connector4)
9
9
L 0H
L 0 R
10
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Etherent, optical, double, LC connector (EN 100) 5) 9 L 0 S
11
12
13
1) Sensitivity selectable normal/high. 4) With surface-mounting housing: only RS485 interface available.
14
1 7UT613 differential protection relay for transformers, generators, motors and busbars
Port C and Port D

7UT613 - - -
Port C: DIGSI 4 / modem, electrical RS232; Port D: empty 1

Port C: DIGSI 4 / modem/thermo-box, electrical RS485; Port D: empty 2
2 Port C and Port D installed 9 M

3 DIGSI 4 / modem/thermo-box, electrical RS485 2
Port D (additional interface)

Thermo-box, optical 820 nm, ST connector A
Thermo-box, electrical RS485 F
4 Measured values /monitoring functions
Extended measured values, min./max. values, mean values 2
5 Extended measured values, min./max., mean values, transformer monitoring functions
(connection to thermo-box/hot spot, overload factor) 4
Differential protection + basic functions

Differential protection for transformer, generator, motor, busbar (87)
6 Overload protection according to IEC for one side (49)
Lock out (86)
Overcurrent-time protection phases (50/51): I>, I>>, IP (inrush stabilization)
Overcurrent-time protection 3I0 (50N/51N): 3I0>, 3I0>>, 3I0P (inrush stabilization)
7 Overcurrent-time protection ground (50G/51G): IE>, IE>>, IEP (inrush stabilization) A
Differential protection + basic functions + additional current functions

Restricted ground-fault protection, low impedance (87N)
8 Restricted ground-fault protection, high impedance
(87N without resistor and varistor), O/C 1-phase
Unbalanced load protection (46)
9 Breaker failure protection (50BF)
High-sensitivity overcurrent-time protection/tank leakage protection (64), O/C 1-phase B
Additional voltage functions
10 Without voltage functions

With overexcitation protection and voltage/power/energy/measurement
A
B
With overexcitation protection and voltage/power/energy measurement
+ Over/undervoltage protection (59/27)
11 + Frequency protection (81)
+ Directional power protection (32R/F)
+ Fuse failure monitor (60FL) C
12 Additional functions (general)

Without 0
Multiple protection functions (50, 51, 50N/G, 87N, 50BF, 49)1) 1
Flexible protection functions 2
13 Multiple + exible protection functions 3
14
15 1) Available if selected on position 14.

Transformer Differential Protection/7UT6

7UT63 differential protection relay
for transformers, generators,motors and busbars, graphic display
7UT63 - - -
1
Housing, inputs and outputs
Housing 1/1 x 19, 21 BI, 24 BO, 1 live status contact, 12 current inputs (11 I, IEE1));
4 voltage inputs (1 x 3-phase + 1 x 1-phase)
Housing 1/1 x 19, 29 BI, 24 BO, 1 live status contact, 16 current inputs (14 I, 2 IEE1))
3
5
see next page
2
Rated current
IN = 1 A
3
1
IN = 5 A 5
DC 110 to 250 V 1), AC 115/230 V, binary input threshold 88 V2)
4
5
4
DC 110 to 250 V 1), AC 115/230 V, binary input threshold 176 V2) 6
Unit design
Surface-mounting with two-tier terminals B 5
Flush-mounting with plug-in terminals D
Flush-mounting with screw-type terminals E
Surface-mounting with two-tier terminals, with 5 high-speed trip contacts
Flush-mounting with plug-in terminals, with 5 high-speed trip contacts
N
P
6
Flush-mounting with screw-type terminals, with 5 high-speed trip contacts Q
Region-specific default settings/language settings

Region DE, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI language German; selectable A 7
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI language English (GB); selectable B
Region US, 60/50 Hz, ANSI/IEC language English (US); selectable C
8
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language French; selectable D
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI language Spanish; selectable E
System interface (Port B ) on rear

1
2
9
PROFIBUS-FMS Slave, optical, single ring, ST connector4) 5 10
PROFIBUS-FMS Slave, optical, double ring, ST connector4) 6
PROFIBUS-DP Slave, electrical RS485 9 L 0 A
PROFIBUS-DP Slave, optical 820, double ring, ST connector4)
11
9 L 0 B
MODBUS, electrical RS485 9 L 0 D
MODBUS, optical 820 nm, ST connector4) 9 L 0 E
DNP 3.0, electrical RS485 9 L 0 G
DNP 3.0, optical 820 nm, ST connector4)
9
9
L 0 H
L 0 R 12
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, optical, double, LC connector (EN 100)5) 9 L 0 S
13
1) Sensitivity selectable normal/high. 4) With surface-mounting housing: only RS485 interface available.
14
1 7UT63 differential protection relay

for transformers, generators,motors and busbars, graphic display
7UT63 - - -
Port C and Port D

Port C: DIGSI 4/modem, electrical RS232; Port D: empty 1
2 Port C: DIGSI 4/modem/thermo-box, electrical RS485; Port D: empty

Port C and Port D installed
2
9 M

3 DIGSI 4/modem/thermo-box, electrical RS485
1
2

Thermo-box, optical 820 nm, ST connector A
4 Thermo-box, electrical RS485 F
Measured values/monitoring functions

5 Extended measured values, min./max. values, mean values

Extended measured values, min./max. values, mean values,
2
transformer monitoring functions (connection to thermo-box/hot spot, overload factor) 4
Differential protection + basic functions

6 Differential protection for transformer, generator, motor, busbar (87)
Overload protection according to IEC for one side (49)
Lock out (86)
Overcurrent-time protection phases (50/51): I>, I>>, IP (inrush stabilization)
Overcurrent-time protection 3I0 (50N/51N): 3I0>, 3I0>>, 3I0P (inrush stabilization)
7 Overcurrent-time protection ground (50G/51G): IE>, IE>>, IEP (inrush stabilization) A
Differential protection + basic functions + additional current functions
Restricted ground-fault protection, low impedance (87N)
Restricted ground-fault protection, high impedance
8 (87N without resistor and varistor), O/C 1-phase
Unbalanced load protection (46)
High-sensitivity overcurrent-time protection/tank leakage protection (64), O/C 1-phase
9 Additional voltage functions (only with 7UT633)
B
Without voltage functions A

With overexcitation protection and voltage/power/energy/measurement B
10 With overexcitation protection and voltage/power/energy measurement
+ Over/undervoltage protection (59/27)
+ Frequency protection (81)
+ Directional power protection (32R/F)
+ Fuse failure monitor (6FL) C
11 Additional functions (general)
Without 0
Multiple protection functions (50, 51, 50N/G, 87N, 50BF, 49)1) 1
12 Flexible protection functions

Multiple + exible protection functions
2
3
13
14
15 1) Available if selected on position 14.

DIGSI 4
1
relays running under MS Windows (Windows 2000 / XP Profes-
sional Edition), device templates, Comtrade Viewer, electronic
manual included as well as Getting started manual on paper,
connecting cables (copper) 2
Basis
Professional
3
4
and control displays) and DIGSI 4 Remote (remote operation)

Software for conguration of stations with IEC 61850
5
communication under DIGSI, running under MS Windows 2000
or XP Professional Edition
License for 10 PCs. Authorization by serial number. On CD-ROM 7XS5460-0AA00 6
SIGRA 4
additionally)
Software for graphic visualization, analysis and evaluation
of fault records. Can also be used for fault records of devices
7
of other manufacturers (Comtrade format) running under
MS Windows 2000 / XP Professional Edition. Incl. templates,
electronicmanual with license for 10 PCs.
Authorization by serial number. On CD-ROM.
7XS5410-0AA00
8
Connecting cable
and protection relay (9-pin connector)
(contained in DIGSI 4, but can be ordered additionally) 7XV5100-4 9
Cable between thermo-box and relay
- length 5 m / 16.4 ft 7XV5103-7AA05
- length 25 m / 82 ft 7XV5103-7AA25
- length 50 m / 164 ft 7XV5103-7AA50
10
Rated current 1.6 A;
thermal overload release 1.6 A;
overcurrent trip 6 A 3RV1611-1AG14 11
Temperature monitoring box with 6 thermal inputs
For SIPROTEC units
With 6 temperature sensors and AC/DC 24 to 60 V 7XV5662-2AD10
RS485 interface AC/DC 90 to 240 V 7XV5662-5AD10 12
Manual for 7UT6x
English V4.6 C53000-G1176-C230-2
German V4.6
Turkey V4.6
C53000-G1100-C230-3
C53000-G115A-C230-1
13
Manual for 7UT612
English C53000-G1176-C148-1
Manual for 7UT6

14
English V4.0 C53000-G1176-C160-1
English V4.6 C53000-G1176-C160-2
15
Accessories Description Order No. Size of Supplier Fig.

package
1 Connector 2-pin C73334-A1-C35-1 1 Siemens 8/35
LSP2289-afp.eps
3-pin C73334-A1-C36-1 1 Siemens 8/36
Crimp CI2 0.5 to 1 mm2 0-827039-1 4000 AMP 1)

2 Fig. 8/34 Mounting rail
for 19" rack
connector
CI2 0.5 to 2.5 mm2
0-827396-1
0-827040-1
1
4000
AMP 1)
AMP 1)
0-827397-1 1 AMP 1)
Type III+ 0.75 to 1.5 mm2 0-163083-7 4000 AMP 1)
3 0-163084-2 1 AMP 1)
LSP2090-afp.eps
LSP2091-afp.eps
For CI2 0-734372-1 1 AMP 1)
and matching female 1-734387-1 AMP 1)
4 Fig. 8/35
2-pin connector
Fig. 8/36
3-pin connector 19"-mounting rail C73165-A63-D200-1 1 Siemens 8/34
Short-circuit For current terminals C73334-A1-C33-1 1 Siemens 8/37

links For other terminals C73334-A1-C34-1 1 Siemens 8/38
5
LSP2093-afp.eps
LSP2092-afp.eps

6 Fig. 8/37
Short-circuit link
Fig. 8/38
Short-circuit link
indications contacts 1) Your local Siemens representative can inform you on local suppliers.
10
11
12
13
14
15
Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
14

Connection diagram
7 Fig. 8/40a
Separation of common circuit of fast BO1 to BO5
with jumpers X80, X81, X82. Switching
of fast BO7, BO8 as NO contact or NC contact
8 with jumpers X41, X42, X43.
10
11
12
13
14
1) Conguration of binary outputs up to hardware-version .../CC
For advanced exibility see Fig. 8/40a.
15 Fig. 8/40 Connection diagram 7UT613

Connection diagram
Fig. 8/41a
7
Separation of common circuit of
fast BO1 to BO5 with jumpers X80,
X81, X82. Switching of fast BO7,
BO8 as NO contact or NC contact
with jumpers X41, X42, X43
8
10
11
12
13
1) Conguration of binary outputs up to
hardware-version .../CC
For advanced exibility see Fig. 8/41a.
14
2) High-speed contacts (option), NO only
3) High-speed contacts (option)
Fig. 8/41 Connection diagram 7UT63 15

Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
14
1) High-speed contacts (option), NO only
2) High-speed contacts (option)
15 Fig. 8/42 Connection diagram 7UT635 part 1; continued on following page

Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 8/43 Connection diagram 7UT635 part 2 15

1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Busbar Differential Protection
Page
SIPROTEC 7SS60 centralized numerical busbar protection 9/3
SIPROTEC 4 7SS52 distributed numerical busbar

and breaker failure protection 9/19
9
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Busbar Differential Protection / 7SS60
SIPROTEC 7SS60 centralized numerical busbar protection
Function overview
87BB
86
Features 1
Optimized for single busbar and 1 circuit-breaker
congurations
Suitable for double busbars with or without couplers
Separate check zone possible
2
Short trip times
Unlimited number of feeders
Matching of different primary CT ratios 3
LSP2363-afpen.tif
Differential current principle
Low-impedance measuring method
Numerical measured-value processing
Suitable for all voltage levels
4
Low demands on CTs thanks to additional restraint
Measured-value acquisition via summation current transformer
or phase-selective matching transformers 5
Maintained TRIP command (lockout function)
Centralized, compact design
Fig. 9/1 7SS601 measuring system
Combinative with separate breaker failure protection
6
Description
Primary current transformers including supply leads
The SIPROTEC 7SS60 system is an inexpensive numerical
differential current protection for busbars in a centralized
Operational measured values: Differential and restraint current
7
conguration. 30 event logs
It is suitable for all voltage levels and can be adapted to a large 8 fault logs
variety of busbar congurations with an unlimited number
of feeders. The components are designed for single busbars,
8 oscillographic fault records 8
1-breaker congurations and double busbars with or without Communication interface
couplers.
RS485 interface for local and remote operation with DIGSI
Different primary CT ratios can be matched by using appropriate 9
windings of the input current transformers.
The use of matching transformers allows phase-selective mea- Hardware
surement. Single-phase measurement can be achieved by using
summation current transformers.
Concept of modular components 10
Reduced number of module types
Auxiliary voltage DC 48 V to DC 250 V
7SS601 measuring system in / 19-inch housing 7XP20
Peripheral components in 19-inch housing 7XP20
11
Front design
Display for operation and measured values
6 LEDs for local indication
12
13
14
15
Application
Application
1 The 7SS60 system is an easily settable

numerical differential current protection
for busbars.
2 It is suitable for all voltage levels and can

be adapted to a large variety of busbar
congurations. The components are
designed for single busbars, 1-breaker
congurations and double busbars with
3 or without couplers.
The use of matching transformers allows
phase-selective measurement.
4 Single-phase measurement can be

achieved by using summation current
transformers.
The 7SS60 is designed to be the successor
5 of the 7SS1 static busbar protection. The
existing summation current or matching
transformers can be reused for this Fig. 9/2 Basic connection scheme 7SS60
protection system.
6
10
11
12
13
14
15
Construction, functions
LSP2803.tif
1
2
LSP2383-afp.tif
LSP2803.tif
3
4
Fig. 9/3 Housing for peripheral modules Fig. 9/4 Rear view Fig. 9/5 Rear view detail
(front cover removed)
5
Construction Functions
Design Functions of the components 6

The 7SS60 compactly-built protection system contains all The 7SS601 measuring system comprises:
components for: One measuring input for acquisition and processing of the
differential and the restraint current
Measured-value acquisition and evaluation
Operation and LC display
3 binary inputs for acquisition of information, e.g. a blocking
condition
7
Annunciation and command output 2 command relays for activation of other, feeder-specic
Input and evaluation of binary signals command relays on the 7TM70 and 7TS72 peripheral
Data transmission via the RS485 interface with bus capability

modules.
In circuits with summation current transformer, one 7SS601
8
Auxiliary voltage supply
measuring system is required per protected zone. For phase-
The 7SS60 system comprises the following components: selective measurement, one 7SS601 measuring system is
7SS601 measuring system and the peripheral modules required per phase and protected zone.
7TM70 restraint/command output module
9
7TM70 restraint/command output module
This module contains 5 current transformers with rectiers for
7TR71 isolator replica/preference module
the formation of the restraint current. It has also 5 command
7TS72 command output module
The number of modules required is determined by the substa-
relays with 2 NO contacts each for output of a direct TRIP
command to the circuit-breakers.
10
tion conguration and the measuring principle used (summation 7TR71 isolator replica/preference module
current transformers or phase-selective measurement). The This module enables the two bus isolators to be detected
7SS601 measuring system is accommodated in a separate
housing (/ 19-inch 7XP20) that is suited for panel ush
in a double busbar. The feeder current is assigned to the
corresponding measuring system on the basis of the detected
11
mounting or cubicle mounting. The 7XP2040 peripheral isolator position. The module is also designed for an additional
module housing has a width of 19 inches and can hold up to function. In the case of a double busbar system, for example,
four peripheral modules. where both bus isolators of a feeder are closed at a time, no
It is suited for panel ush mounting or cubicle mounting and
selective protection of the two busbars is possible. During this 12
state, one of the two measuring systems is given priority. The
has plug-on connectors tted at the rear. The primary current
module 7TR71 appropriately assigns feeder currents to the
transformers are connected to summation current transformers
corresponding measuring system 7SS601. The module also
of type 4AM5120-3DA/4DA or to matching transformers of type
4AM5120-1DA/2DA. With a rated current of 1 or 5 A, the current
contains an auxiliary relay with two changeover contacts. 13
output at these transformers is 100 mA. This output current is 7TS72 command output module
fed onto the 7SS601 measuring system (for differential current The 7TM70 contains 5 trip relays with 2 NO contacts each.
formation) and onto the 7TM70 restraint units (for restraint If more trip contacts are needed, the 7TS72 module can be
current formation). The summated restraint current is fed onto used, providing 8 relays with 2 NO contacts each. 14
the 7SS601 measuring system as well.
15
5
Fig. 9/6 Block diagram: Acquisition of measured values
6 Protection functions Function principle of the differential protection

The main function of the 7SS60 protection system is a busbar
Measuring principles protection that operates with the differential current measuring
principle. Its algorithm relies on Kirchhoffs current law, which
7 The feeder currents can be measured and processed according to
different principles.
states that in fault-free condition the vectorial sum Id of all
currents owing into an independent busbar section must be
Summation current transformer principle zero. Some slight deviations from this law may be caused by
In the summation current transformer variant, the three current transformer error, inaccuracies in the matching of the
8 secondary currents of the primary CTs are fed onto the three
primary windings of the summation current transformers with
transformation ratios and measuring inaccuracies. Further
errors, which may be due to e.g. transformer saturation in case
a winding ratio of n1:n2:n3 = 2:1:3. According to the expected of high-current external short-circuits, are counteracted by a
fault currents two different circuits for connecting the sum- load- dependent supplementary restraint.
mation current transformer are possible. For power systems
9 with low-resistance or solid grounding of the starpoint, the The restraint current IR is derived from the load condition. This
restraint current is formed as the summated magnitudes of all
1-phase ground-faults are sufciently high to use the circuit
with normal sensitivity (see Fig. 9/7). An increased sensitivity currents. The differential and the restraint current are fed into
for ground-faults can be achieved by use of a circuit according the 7SS601 measuring system (see Fig. 9/6: Block diagram).
10 to Fig. 9/8. With a symmetrical, three-phase current of 1 x IN,

the secondary current of the summation current transformers
With double busbars or sectionalized busbars, one measuring
system 7SS601 (summation CT), respectively 3 measuring
is 100 mA. systems (phase-selective measurement) will be used for each
Different primary CT transformation ratios can usually be com- selective section. The module 7TS71 (isolator replica/preference)
appropriately assigns feeder currents to the corresponding
11 pensated directly by appropriate selection of the summation
CT primary windings. Where the circuit conditions do not measuring system 7SS601.
allow this, additional matching transformers, such as the
4AM5272-3AA, should be used, preferably in the form of
autotransformers (see Fig. 9/9: Protection with summation
12 current transformer and matching transformers). The auto-
transformer circuit reduces the total burden for the primary
CTs.
Phase-selective measurement
13 In this variant, each phase current is measured separately.
To do so, each of the secondary currents of the primary trans-
formers is fed onto a matching transformer. This transformer
allows, if its primary windings are selected accordingly, to
14 generate a normalized current from a variety of different
primary CT transformation ratios (see Fig. 9/10: Phase-
selective measurement). With a primary current of 1 x IN, the
secondary current of the matching transformers is 100 mA.
15
Typical connections
Typical connections
SIPV6.012en.eps
2
3
Fig. 9/7 Protection with summation current transformer
(L1-L2-L3 circuit)
6
Fig. 9/8 Protection with summation current transformer
(L1-L3-N circuit) 7
10
Fig. 9/9 Protection with summation current transformer and
matching transformers
11
12
13
Fig. 9/10 Phase-selective measurement

14
15
Pickup characteristic of the differential protection
1 The characteristic can be set in the parameters for Id > (pickup

value) and for the k factor which considers the linear and non-
linear current transformer errors. Differential currents above the
set characteristic lead to tripping.
2 Current transformer monitoring

An independent sensitive differential current monitoring with
its parameter Id thr detects faults (short-circuits, open circuit) of
current transformers and their wiring even with load currents.
3 The affected measuring system is blocked and an alarm is given.
By this, the stability of the busbar protection is ensured in case
of external faults. Fig. 9/11 Tripping characteristic
4 Trip command lockout (with manual reset)

Following a trip of the differential protection, the TRIP command
can be kept (sealed-in). The circuit-breakers are not reclosed
until the operator has obtained information on the fault; the
5 command must be manually reset by pressing a key or by a
binary input.
The logical state of the TRIP command is buffered against a loss
of the auxiliary power supply, so that it is still present on restora-
6 tion of the auxiliary voltage supply.
Test and commissioning aids

The protection system provides user support for testing and
7 commissioning. It has a wide range of integrated aids that
can be activated from the keypad or from a PC using the DIGSI
program. For some tests a codeword must be entered.
The following test aids are available:
8 Display of operational measured values
Interrogation of status of binary inputs and LED indicators
Blocking of the TRIP function during testing
10
11
12
13
14
15
Communication
Communication
Serial data transmission 1

The device is equipped with an RS485
interface. The interface has bus capability
and allows a maximum of 32 units to be
connected via a serial two-wire interface.
2
A PC can be connected to the interface
via an RS232RS485 converter, so that
conguration, setting and evaluation
can be performed comfortably via the PC 3
using the DIGSI operating program. The
PC can also be used to read out the fault Fig. 9/12 Communication scheme
record that is generated by the device
when a fault occurs. 4
With RS485820 nm optical convert-
ers, which are available as accessories
(7XV5650, 7XV5651), an interference-
free, isolated connection to a control 5
center or a DIGSI-based remote control
unit is possible; this allows to design low-
cost stations concepts that permit e.g.
remote diagnosis. 6
Comfortable setting
The parameter settings are made in a
menu-guided procedure from the inte-
grated operator panel and the LC display.
7
It is, however, more comfortable to use
a PC for this purpose, together with the
standard DIGSI operating program.
8
Fault recording
If a fault leads to a trip, a fault record is
generated, in which the differential and 9
LSA2747-cgpen.eps
the restraint current are recorded with a
sampling frequency of 2 kHz. In addition,
signals are stored as binary traces, which
represent internal device states or binary
input states. Up to eight fault records 10
can be stored. When a ninth fault occurs,
Fig. 9/13 Communication scheme
the oldest record is overwritten. A total
storage capacity of 7 s is available. The
most recent 2.5 s are buffered against 11
power failure.
12
13
14
15
Technical data
7SS60 measuring system Command contacts
1 Measuring input Id
Rated current 100 mA
Number of relays 1 (2 NO contacts)
1 (1 NO contact)
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz settable, 16.7 Hz Switching capacity

Make 1000 W/VA
Dynamic overload capacity 250 x IN one half cycle Break 30 W/VA
2 (pulse current)
Thermal overload capacity (r.m.s.) 100 x IN for 1 s
Switching voltage
Permissible current
AC/DC 250 V
(where external summation or 30 x IN for 10 s

matching current transformers 4 x IN continuous Continuous 5A
are used, their limit data must be 0.5 s 30 A
3 observed)
Isolating voltage 2.5 kV (r.m.s.)
Signal contacts
Number of relays 3 (2 marshallable)
Measuring range for operational 0 to 240 % Contacts 2 changeover contacts and 1 NO
measured values contact (can be changed to NC by
jumper)
4 Measuring dynamics 100 x IN without offset
50 x IN with full offset Switching capacity
Measuring input IR Make 1000 W/VA
Break 30 W/VA
Rated current 1.9 mA
5 Dynamic overload capability
(pulse current)
250 x IN for 10 ms
Permissible current
Continuous 5A
Thermal overload capability (r.m.s.) 100 x IN for 1 s 0.5 s 30 A
matching current transformers 4 x IN continuous Serial interface
6 are used, their limit data must be

observed)
Standard
Test voltage
Isolated RS485
DC 3.5 kV
Isolating voltage 2.5 kV (r.m.s.) Connection Data cable at housing terminals,
Measuring dynamics 0 to 200 x IN 2 data lines
7 Auxiliary voltage
Via integrated DC/DC converter DC 24/48 V (DC 19 to 58 V)
For connection of a personal
computer or similar
Cables must be shielded, and shields
Rated auxiliary voltage Vaux DC 60/110/125 V (DC 48 to 150 V) must be grounded.
(permissible voltage) DC 220/250 V (DC 176 to 300 V)
AC 115 V (AC 92 to 133 V) As delivered 9600 baud
8 Superimposed AC voltage 15 % of rated voltage
Unit design
(peak-to-peak)
Power consumption Quiescent Approx. 3 W Housing 7XP20 / 19"
Energized Approx. 5 W Dimensions See part 14
9 Bridging time during failure /
short-circuit of auxiliary voltage
Weight Approx. 4.0 kg
Degree of protection according
Binary inputs to IEC 60529-1
Number 3 (marshallable) For the unit IP 51
10 Operating voltage range DC 24 to 250 V

For operator protection IP 2X
Current consumption Approx. 2.5 mA

when energized Independent of operating voltage
Pickup threshold Can be changed by setting jumpers
11 Rated aux. voltage DC 48/60 V
Vpickup DC 17 V
Vdrop-off < DC 8 V
Rated aux. voltage
DC 110/125/220/250 V
12 Vpickup
Vdrop-off
DC 74 V
< DC 45 V
Max. voltage DC 300 V
13
14
15
Technical data
Functions Auxiliary voltage (7TM700)

Differential current protection
Setting ranges for pickup threshold
Rated auxiliary voltage Vaux
(permitted voltage range)
DC 48/60 V (DC 38 to 72 V)
DC 110/125 V (DC 88 to 150 V)
DC 220/250 V (DC 176 to 300 V)
1
Differential current Id> 0.20 to 2.50 INO
Restraint factor 0.25 to 0.80 Settable
As delivered: DC 220/250 V
Tolerance of pickup value
Differential current Id>
Minimum duration
5 % of setpoint
0.01 to 32.00 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
Command contacts (7TM700)
Number of relays 5
2
of trip command Contacts per relay 2 NO contacts
Time delay of trip 0.00 to 10.00 s (in steps of 0.01 s) For short-term operation < 10 s3)
Times
Minimum tripping time 50/60 Hz1) 10 ms
Pickup time
Switching capacity
Approx. 7 ms 3
Typical tripping time 50/60 Hz1) 12 ms (rapid measurement) Make 1000 W/VA
40 ms (repeated measurement) Break 30 W/VA
Minimum tripping time 16.7 Hz1) 12 ms
Typical tripping time 16.7 Hz1) 14 ms (rapid measurement)
40 ms (repeated measurement)
Switching voltage
Permissible currents
AC/DC 250 V
4
Reset time 2) 28 ms at 50 Hz Continuous 5A
26 ms at 60 Hz 0.5 s 30 A
70 ms at 16.7 Hz Weight Approx. 2.0 kg
Differential current supervision 7TR710 isolator replica/preferential treatment module 5
Pickup threshold 0.10 to 1.00 INO
NOTE: The module 7TR710 can be used to implement 2 different
Lockout function functions: isolator replica or preferential treatment
Lockout seal-in of trip command Until reset
Reset By binary input and/or local
Isolator replica
Number of feeders 1 6
operator panel (single busbar and double busbar)
Additional functions Number of isolators per feeder 2
Operating currents
Measuring range
I d, I R
0 to 240 % INO
Preferential treatment
Number of preferential 2
7
treatment circuits
Tolerance 5 % of rated value
Number of contacts per preferen- 3 changeover contacts
Fault logging Buffered storage of the annuncia-
tial treatment
Time stamping
tions of the last 8 faults
Switching time < 20 ms 8
Resolution for operational 1 ms Number of auxiliary relays 1
annunciation Contacts of auxiliary relay 2 changeover contacts
Resolution for fault annunciation 1 ms
Fault recording (max. 8 fault) Buffered against voltage failure
(last 2.5 s)
Auxiliary voltage
Rated auxiliary voltage Vaux DC 48/60 V (DC 38 to 72 V)
9
Recording time Max. 7.1 s total (permissible voltage range) DC 110/125 V (DC 88 to 150 V)
(from fault detection) Pre-trigger and post-fault time DC 220/250 V (DC 176 to 300 V)
can be set Depending on the design
Max. length per record
Pre-trigger time
0.2 to 5.0 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
0.05 to 1.5 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
Relay contacts 10
Switching capacity
Post-fault time 0.01 to 1.5 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
Make 1000 W/VA
Sampling frequency 2 kHz
Break 30 W/VA
Peripheral modules
Switching voltage
Permissible current
AC/DC 250 V
11
7TM700 restraint/command output module Continuous 5A
0.5 s 10 A
Measuring input IR
Number of restraint units
Rated current
5
100 mA
12
Rated frequency 16.7, 50, 60 Hz
Dynamic overload capacity 250 x IN one half cycle
(pulse current)
Thermal overload capacity (r.m.s.) 100 x IN for 1 s
13
matching current transformers 4 x IN continuous
are used, their limit data must be
observed) 14
1) Each additional intermediate relay increases the tripping time by 7 ms.
2) Each additional intermediate relay increases the reset time by 8 ms.
3) Limited by the continuous power dissipation of the device. 15
Technical data
Peripheral modules (contd) Connectorswith screw-type terminals
1 7TS720 command output module

Auxiliary voltage
Type COMBICON system
of PHOENIX CONTACT
Front-MSTB 2.5/10-ST-5.08
Rated auxiliary voltage Vaux 48/60 V (DC 38 to 72 V) For conductor cross-sections of 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (rigid and exible)
(permissible voltage range) 110/125 V (DC 88 to 150 V) AWG 24 to 12
220/250 V (DC 176 to 300 V) 0.25 to 2.5 mm2 (with end sleeve)
2 Settable
As delivered: DC 220/250 V
Multiple conductor connection 0.2 to 1.0 mm2 (rigid)
(2 conductors of same cross- 0.2 to 1.5 mm2 (exible)
Command contacts section) 0.25 to 1.0 mm2 (exible with end
sleeve, without plastic collar)
Number of relays 8
3 Contacts per relay 2 NO contacts
0.5 to 1.5 mm2 (exible with TWIN end
sleeve with plastic collar)
For short term operation < 10 s1) Stripping length 7 mm
Pickup time Approx. 7 ms Recommended tightening 0.5 to 0.6 Nm
torque
4 Switching capacity
Make
Break
1000 W/VA
30 W/VA
Unit design
Housing 7XP204 19"
Dimensions See part 14
Permissible current
5 Continuous
0.5 s
5A
30 A
Weight
Approx. 3.5 kg

For the device IP 51 (front panel)
7SS601 measuring system IP 20 (rear)
6 Current connections (terminals 1 to 6) For the operator protection IP 2X (if all connectors and
blanking plates are tted)
Screw-type terminals For bolts of 6 mm
(ring-type cable lug)
Max. outside diameter 13 mm Matching transformers
7 Type
For conductor cross-sections of
e.g. PDIG of AMP
2.7 to 6.6 mm2
4AM5120-1DA00-0AN2
For connection to current
AWG 12 to 10
In parallel double leaf-spring- 2.5 to 4.0 mm2 transformers with a rated
crimp contact for conductor AWG 13 to 11 current IN of 1A
8 cross-sections of
Max. tightening torque 3.5 Nm
Rated frequency fN
Winding
45-60 Hz
A-B B-C D-E E-F G-H H-J Y-Z
Control connections (terminals 7 to 31) Number of turns 1 2 4 8 16 32 500
Screw-type terminals For 4 mm bolts Max. current, continuous A 6.8 6.8 6.8 6.8 6.8 6.8 0.85
Max. voltage V 0.4 0.8 1.6 3.2 6.4 12.8 200
9 (ring-type cable lug)
Max. outside diameter 9 mm Max. burden VA 1.0
Type e.g. PDIG of AMP 4AM5120-2DA00-0AN2
For conductor cross-sections of 1.0 to 2.6 mm2
AWG 17 to 13 For connection to current
10 In parallel double leaf-spring-

crimp contact for conductor 0.5 to 2.5 mm2
transformers with a rated
current IN of A
cross-sections of AWG 20 to 13 Rated frequency fN 45-60 Hz
Max. tightening torque 1.8 Nm Winding A-B B-C D-E E-F Y-Z
Number of turns 1 2 4 8 500
11 Max. current, continuous A 26 26 26 26 0.85
Max. voltage V 0.4 0.8 1.6 3.2 200
Max. burden VA 1.2
12
13
14
15 1) Limited by the continuous power dissipation of the device.

Technical data
Summation current matching transformers EMC tests for interference immunity; type tests
4AM5120-3DA00-0AN2
Standard IEC 60255-6, IEC 60255-22
(international product standards)
EM 50082-2
1
current IN of 1A (technical generic standard)
DIN VDE 57435 part 303
Rated frequency fN 45-60 Hz (German product standard for
Winding
Number of turns
A-B C-D E-F
3 6 9
G-H J-K
18 24
L-M N-O Y-Z
36 90 500
protection devices) 2
High-frequency test 2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz; t = 15 ms;
IEC 60255-22-1, 400 surges per s; test duration 2 s
Max. current, continuous A 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 0.85 DIN 57435 part 303; class III
Max. voltage V 1.2 2.4 3.6 7.2 9.6 14.4 36 200 Electrostatic discharge
IEC 60255-22-2; IEC 61000-4-2;
8 kV contact discharge;
15 kV air discharge;
3
Max. burden VA 1.8 class IV both polarities; 150 pF; Ri = 330
4AM5120-4DA00-0AN2 Irradiation with RF eld, 10 V/m; 27 to 500 MHz
non-modulated
current IN of 5A
IEC 60255-22-3 (report); class III 4
Irradiation with RF eld, 10 V/m; 80 to 1000 MHz;
Rated frequency fN 45-60 Hz amplitude-modulated 80 % AM; 1 kHz
Winding A-B C-D E-F G-H J-K L-M N-O Y-Z
Number of turns 1 2 3 4 6
Max. current, continuous A 17.5 17.5 17.5 17.5 17.5 17.5 8.0
8 12 500
0.85
pulse-modulated
10 V/m; 900 MHz;
repetition frequency 200 Hz; ED 50 % 5
IEC 61000-4-3 / ENV 50204; class III
Max. voltage V 0.4 0.8 1.2 1.6 2.4 3.2 4.8 200
Fast transient disturbance / bursts 4 kHz; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz, burst length
Max. burden VA 2.5 IEC 60255-22-4; IEC 61000-4-4; = 15 ms; repetition rate 300 ms;
class III both polarities; Ri = 50 ;
test duration 1 min
6
Matching transformer
High-energy surge voltages Auxiliary voltage:
4AM5272-3AA00-0AN2 (SURGE), Longitudinal test: 2 kV; 12 ; 9 F
IEC 61000-4-5, installation, class III Transversal test: 1 kV; 2 ; 18 F
Multi-tap auxiliary current
transformer to match
different c.t. ratios
Measuring inputs, binary inputs
and relay outputs:
7
Rated frequency fN 45-60 Hz Longitudinal test: 2 kV; 42 ; 0.5 F
Transversal test: 1 kV; 42 ; 0.5 F
Winding A-B C-D E-F G-H J-K L-M N-O P-Q
Number of turns
Max. current, continuous A 6
1 2
6
7
6
16 1
1.2 6
2
6
7
6
16
1.2
Line-conducted HF,
amplitude-modulated
10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz;
80 % AM; 1 kHz 8
Max. voltage V 4 8 28 64 4 8 28 64 Magnetic eld with power
resistance 0.018 0.035 0.11 1.05 0.018 0.035 0.11 1.05 frequency
Electrical tests
IEC 61000-4-8; class IV
IEC 60255-6
30 A/m; continuous; 300 A/m for 3 s;
50 Hz; 0.5 mT
9
Oscillatory surge 2.5 to 3 kV (peak); 1 to 1.5 MHz;
Specications withstand capability damped wave; 50 surges per s;
Standards: IEC 60255-5; ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0 ANSI / IEEE C37.90.1 duration 2 s; Ri = 150 to 200
Insulation tests Fast transient surge
withstand capability
4 to 5 kV; 10/150 ns; 50 surges
per s; both polarities; duration 2 s;
10
High voltage test (routine test), 2.5 kV (r.m.s.); 50 Hz
ANSI / IEEE C37.90.1 Ri = 80
measuring input Id and relay outputs
Radiated electromagnetic 35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz
High voltage test (routine test), DC 3.5 kV
auxiliary voltage input and RS485
interface, binary inputs and
interference ANS / IEEE C37.90.2
Damped oscillations
11
measuring input IR IEC 61000-4-12 2.5 kV (peak, alternating polarity);
IEC 60694 100 kHz; 1, 10 and 50 MHz;
Impulse voltage test (type test), 5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 s; 0.5 J;
damped wave; Ri = 50
all circuits, class III 3 positive and 3 negative
impulses in intervals of 5 s EMC tests for interference emission; type test 12
Standard EN 50081-*
(technical generic standard)
Conducted interference voltage on 150 kHz to 30 MHz,
lines only auxiliary voltage,
EN 55022, DIN VDE 0878 part 22,
limit value, class B 13
IEC CISPR 22
Radio interference eld strength 30 to 1000 MHz,
EN 55011; DIN VDE 0875 part 11,
IEC CISPR 11
limit value, class A
14
15
Technical data
Mechanical stress tests CE conformity

During operation
Standards IEC 60255-21-1 2004/108/EG previous 89/336/EEC) and electrical equipment designed
IEC 60068-2 for use within certain voltage limits (Council Directive 2006/95/EG
2 Vibration
IEC 60068-2-6
Sinusoidal
10 to 60 Hz, 0.075 mm amplitude
Sweep rate 1 octave/min Part 303).
3 Shock
IEC 60255-21-2, class I
Half-sinusoidal
Acceleration 5 g; duration 11 ms
IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks in each direction of the
3 orthogonal axes
the generic standards EN 50081-2 and EN 50082-2 for the EMC Directive
Seismic vibration Sinusoidal and standard EN 60255-6 for the low-voltage Directive.
4 IEC 60255-21-3, class I
IEC 60068-3-3
Horizontal axis 1 to 8 Hz: 3.5 mm amplitude
Vertical axis 1 to 8 Hz: 1.5 mm amplitude
5 8 to 35 Hz: 0.5 g acceleration
During transport
6 Standards IEC 60255-21
IEC 60068-2
IEC 60255-21-1, class II 5 to 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude
7 IEC 60068-2-6 8 to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration sweep

rate 1 octave/min
IEC 60255-21-2, class I Acceleration 15 g; duration 11 ms
8 IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks in each direction of the
3 orthogonal axes
Continuous shock Half-sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-2, class I Acceleration 10 g; duration 16 ms
IEC 60068-2-29 1000 shocks in each direction of
9 the 3 orthogonal axes
Climatic stress test
10 Temperatures
Permissible ambient temperatures
In service -20 to +45/55 C
11 During storage
During transport
-25 to +55 C
-25 to +70 C
Storage and transport with
standard works packing
12 Humidity
Standards IEC 60068-2-3
It is recommended to arrange the humidity; on 30 days in the year
units in such a way that they are up to 95 % relative humidity;
13 not exposed to direct sunlight or
14
15

Centralized numerical busbar protection 7SS60, measuring system 50, 60, 16.7 Hz
Rated current/frequency
7SS601 - A 0-0AA0
1
100 mA; 50/60 Hz AC 0
100 mA; 16.7 Hz AC 6
Rated auxiliary voltage 2

24 to 48 V DC 2
60 to 125 V DC 4
220 to 250 V DC 5
3
Unit design
Housing 7XP20 19-inch, for panel ush mounting or cubicle mounting E
Measuring system
Standard 0
4
Stabilizing/command output module
5 stabilizing CTs, 5 relays with 2 NO contacts
48/60 V DC, 110/125 V DC, 220/250 V DC settable 7TM7000-0AA00-0AA0 5
Isolator replica/preference module 7TR7100- AA00-0AA0
48 to 60 V DC
110 to 125 V DC
3
4
6
220 to 250 V DC 5
Command output module

8 relays with 2 NO contacts 7
48/60 V DC, 110/125 V DC, 220/250 V DC settable 7TS7200-0AA00-0AA0
Housing 19-inch for peripheral modules 7SS60

For panel ush mounting or cubicle mounting 7XP2041-2MA00-0AA0 8
10
11
12
13
14
15
1 Copper interconnecting cable

PC (9-pole socket) and converter/protection relay 7XV5100-2
Connector adapter
2 9 pin female / 25 pinmale
RS232 - RS485 converter

7XV5100-8H
With power supply unit for AC 230 V 7XV5700-0AA00

With power supply unit for AC 110 V 7XV5700-1AA00
3 Converter
Full duplex ber-optic cableRS485
Auxiliary voltage: DC 24 V to DC 250 V, DC 110/230 V
4 Line converter ST connector

Cascada converter ST connector
7XV5650-0BA00
7XV5651-0BA00
Connector for peripheral modules, as spare part W73078-B9005-A710
5 Extraction tool for connector
Test adapter
W73078-Z9005-A710
7XV6010-0AA00
Angle bracket (set) C73165-A63-D200-1
6 Summation current matching transformer

1 A, 50/60 Hz 4AM5120-3DA00-0AN2
5 A, 50/60 Hz 4AM5120-4DA00-0AN2
7 Matching transformer
1 A, 50/60 Hz 4AM5120-1DA00-0AN2
5 A, 50/60 Hz 4AM5120-2DA00-0AN2
1 A, 5 A, 50/60 Hz 4AM5272-3AA00-0AN2
8 Manual 7SS60
English E50417-G1176-C132-A3
10
11
12
13
14
15
Connection diagrams
Connection diagrams
6
Fig. 9/14 Connection diagram for 7SS601
10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 9/15 Connection diagram for 7TM700 Fig. 9/16 Connection diagram for 7TS720 15
Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
14
15 Fig. 9/17 Block diagram of 7TR710

SIPROTEC 4 7SS52 distributed numerical busbar and breaker failure protection
Function overview
Busbar protection functions 1

Busbar differential protection
Selective zone tripping
Very short tripping time (<15 ms)
Extreme stability against external fault,
2
short saturation-free time ( 2 ms)
Phase-segregated measuring systems
Integrated check zone 3
48 bays can be congured
12 busbar sections can be protected
LSP2392-afpen.tif
Bay-selective intertripping 4
Breaker failure protection functions
Breaker failure protection (single-phase
with/without current)
5 operation modes, selectable per bay
5
Separate parameterization possible for
busbar and line faults
Fig. 9/18 SIPROTEC 4 7SS52 busbar protection system
Independently settable delay times for
all operation modes
6
2-stage operation bay trip repeat/trip busbar
Description
Intertrip facility (via teleprotection interface)
The SIPROTEC 7SS52 numerical protection is a selective, reliable Low-current mode using the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts 7
and fast protection for busbar faults and breaker failure in
medium, high and extra-high voltage substations with various Additional protection functions
possible busbar congurations. End-fault protection with intertrip or bus zone trip
The protection is suitable for all switchgear types with iron-core Backup overcurrent protection per bay unit (denite-time or 8
or linearized current transformers. The short tripping time is inverse-time)
especially advantageous for applications with high fault levels or Independent breaker failure protection per bay unit
where fast fault clearance is required for power system stability.
The modular hardware allows the protection to be optimally
Features 9
matched to the busbar conguration. The decentralized arrange- Distributed or centralized installation
ment allows the cabling costs in the substation to be drastically Easy expansion capability
reduced. The 7SS52 busbar protection caters for single, double
or triple busbar systems with or without and quadruple busbar
Integrated commissioning aids
Centralized user-friendly conguration / parameterization
10
systems without transfer bus with up to: 48 bays,
with DIGSI
16 bus couplers, and 24 sectionalizing disconnectors and 12 Universal hardware
busbar sections.
11
FO interface
Electrical interface
IEC 61850 protocol with EN 100 module (rmware V4.6)
12
13
14
15
Application
Application
1 The 7SS52 distributed numerical busbar

and breaker failure protection system is
a selective, reliable and fast protection
for busbar faults and breaker failure in
2 medium, high and extra-high voltage
substations with various possible busbar
congurations. The protection is suitable
for all switchgear types with iron-core or
3 linearized current transformers. The short
tripping time is especially advantageous
for applications with high fault levels or
where fast fault clearance is required for
LSA2180-bgpen.eps
power system stability.
4 The modular hardware design allows
the protection system to be optimally
matched to the busbar conguration.
5 The distributed arrangement allows the
cabling costs between bay and substation
to be drastically reduced. The 7SS52 bus-
bar protection caters for single, double,
6 triple and quadruple busbar systems with
or without transfer bus with up to:
48 bays
16 bus couplers
7 24 sectionalizing disconnectors
12 busbar sections
1) Feeder currents, disconnector status trip commands
2) Disconnector status
8 Fig. 9/19 Distributed system structure
10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 9/20 Protection functions of the central unit and the bay units
15
Construction
Construction
The distributed bay units measure the 1

3 phase currents in each bay. The rated
input current is 1 or 5 A and therefore
eliminates the need for interposing
current transformers. The disconnector
status, breaker failure protection trig-
2
LSP2377-afpen.tif
gering, bay out-of- service and other
bay status information is derived via
marshallable binary inputs in the bay
units. The complete information exchange
3
is conveyed to the central unit via a ber-
optic interface. The bay unit also has an
interface on the front side for connection
to a PC for operation and diagnosis. The 4
trip and intertrip commands are issued via Fig. 9/21 7SS522 central unit front view of SIPAC subrack version
trip contacts in the bay units. The 7XP20
standard housing is available in a ush or
surface mounting version (7SS523). 5
The central unit is connected to the bay
units via ber-optic communication links.
The connection is built up in a star con-
guration. The central unit also contains 6
serial ports for system conguration via
PC or communication with a substation
control system, an integrated LC Display
7
LSP2803.tif
with keypad and marshallable binary
inputs, LEDs and alarm relays. The central
unit is available in a 19" SIPAC module
rack version for either cubicle or wall
mounting.
8
Because of its modular hardware design,
it is easy to adapt the central unit to the
substation or to expand it with further Fig. 9/22 7SS522 central unit rear view
modules each being connected with up to
8 bay units.
9
Each bay unit and the central unit has its
own internal power supply.
10
11
LSP2076-afp.tif
LSP2516.tif
12
Fig. 9/23 7SS523 bay unit front view of

panel / ush / cubicle mounting unit
Fig. 9/24 7SS525 bay unit front view of
panel/ush/cubicle mounting unit
13
14
15
1 Busbar protection
The main function of the 7SS52 is busbar protection, and has
the following characteristics:
2 Evaluation of differential currents, with stabilization by

through-currents based on the proven performance of the
Siemens busbar protection 7SS1 and 7SS50/51, currently in
service worldwide
3 Selective busbar protection for busbars with up to 12 busbar

sections and 48 bays
The pickup characteristic can be set independently for selective busbar
Integrated check zone (evaluation of all busbar section cur- protection, for the check zone and for the breaker failure protection.
rents without use of the disconnector replica)
4 Very short tripping time (15 ms typical)
Selective detection of short-circuits, also for faults on the
Fig. 9/25 Standard characteristic
transfer bus, with transfer trip to the remote end.

Detection and clearance of faults between the current trans-
5 former and the circuit-breaker via current measurement and
selective unbalancing.
Tripping only when all three fault detection modules recognize
a busbar fault (2 measurement processors and check zone
6 processor)
No special CT requirements (stability is guaranteed, even when
the CTs saturate after 2 ms)
Selective output tripping relays per feeder in bay units.
7 Mode of operation
The 7SS52 protection relay offers complete numerical measured- Fig. 9/26 Ground-fault characteristic
value processing from sampling to digital conversion of the
8 measured variables through to the circuit-breaker tripping
decision. The bay units dispose of sufcient powerful contacts to Breaker failure protection
directly trip the circuit-breaker. The 7SS52 protection includes an integrated breaker failure
For each busbar section and for all three phases, two indepen- protection with the following features:
9 dent processors execute the protection algorithm on alternate Five breaker failure protection modes that are selectable:
data samples. Based on the proven performance of the 7SS1 and
1. Following the issue of a trip signal from a feeder protection,
7SS50/51, this method of measurement ensures highest stability
the busbar protection monitors the drop-off of the trip signal.
even in case of high short-circuit currents and CT saturation.
10 In addition, an disconnector status independent check-zone
If the feeder current is not interrupted before a set time delay
the polarity of the feeder current is reversed, which results in
measurement is executed on a further processor thus increasing a differential current in the corresponding section of the bus
the protection against unwanted operation. All three processors protection. For this function, a separate parameter set is used.
must reach a trip decision independently before the trip com-
11 mand is released.
2. Following a trip signal from a feeder protection, a trip signal
will be output after a settable time delay from the 7SS52
The disconnector status is monitored using normally open and protection to the corresponding feeder circuit-breaker. If this
normally closed contacts to enable plausibility checks for both second trip signal is also unsuccessful, the unbalancing proce-
12 status and transition time. The contact monitoring voltage is

also supervised.
dure according to mode 1) as described above will take place.
3. With external stand-alone breaker failure protection, the
In case of an auxiliary voltage failure in the bay, the latest disconnector replica of the 7SS52 may be used to selectively
disconnector status is stored and a bay-selective indication of trip the busbar section with the faulty circuit-breaker.
13 the failure is issued.
4. Following a trip signal from the feeder protection, the 7SS52
The assignment of the feeder currents to the corresponding monitors the drop-off of the trip signal. If, after a settable
busbar systems is controlled by software via the disconnector time, the current does not fall below a settable limiting value,
replica. The disconnector replica is applied for both busbar busbar-selective feeder trip commands are issued with the help
14 protection and breaker failure protection. of the disconnector replica within the 7SS52.
The integrated breaker failure protection function provides 5. Following a trip signal from a feeder protection, a trip
phase-segregated two-stage operation (bay-specic trip repeat, signal will be output after a settable time delay from the
trip bus section). Alternatively, an external breaker failure 7SS52 protection to the corresponding feeder circuit-breaker.
15 protection relay can issue its trip commands via the disconnector
replica in the 7SS52.
If this second trip signal is also unsuccessful, the tripping as
described under 4) will take place.

For single-pole or multi-pole starting,

delay times are available.
Breaker failure detection following 1
a busbar fault by comparison of the
measured current with a set value.
For all modes of breaker failure protec-
tion, a transfer trip command output 2
contact is provided for each feeder to
initiate remote tripping.
Sensitive tripping characteristic

3
In some applications, e.g. within resistive
grounded networks, single-phase short-
circuit currents are limited to rated
current values. In order to provide a
busbar protection for these cases, an
4
independent characteristic is available.
This characteristic presents separate
parameters for the pickup threshold, as
well as for a limitation of efciency. The 5
activation of the characteristic takes place
LSP2516.tif
by means of a binary input in the central
unit, e.g. by recognizing a displacement
voltage. 6
End-fault protection Fig. 9/27 Fault record
The location of the current transformer
normally limits the measuring range of 7
the busbar protection. When the circuit-
breaker is open, the area located between
the current transformer and the circuit-
breaker can be optimally protected by
means of the end-fault protection. In the
8
event of a fault, depending on the mount-
ing position of the current transformer,
instantaneous and selective tripping of
the busbar section or intertripping of the
9
circuit-breaker at the opposite end occurs.
Backup protection
As an option, a two-stage backup
10
protection, independent of the busbar
protection is included in every bay unit.
This backup protection is completed by
LSP2516.tif
means of a breaker failure protection. The 11

parametrization and operation can be
carried out in the central unit or locally
in each bay unit with the DIGSI operating
program.
Fig. 9/28 DIGSI plant monitoring
12
Disconnector replica By the assignment NOT open = closed, the disconnector is
taken to be CLOSED during the transition time.
The disconnector replica is used for both the busbar protection
and the breaker failure protection.
Accurate matching of the disconnector auxiliary contacts with
the main contact is not required. 13
The following features characterize the disconnector replica Menu-guided graphic conguration with DIGSI operating
function: program.
Includes up to 48 bays and 12 busbar sections
Integrated bi-stable disconnector status characteristic (status
LEDs in the bay modules indicate the actual status of the
busbar disconnector.
14
stored on loss of auxiliary power). Dynamic visualization of the substation with DIGSI on the
Disconnector transition time monitoring. central unit.
15
Tripping command / reset Phase-segregated trip test including control of feeder circuit-
breaker (by central or bay unit)
1 The tripping output processing for the 7SS52 protection has the
following features: Removal of a bay from the busbar measurement processing
during feeder service and maintenance via central or bay units
Bay-selective tripping by bay units (bay out of service)
Settings provided for overcurrent release of the tripping com- Blocking of breaker failure protection or tripping command for
2 mand (to enable selective tripping of infeeding circuits only)
Settable minimum time for the trip command.
testing purposes.
Disconnector replica freezing (maintenance) with alarm
Current-dependent reset of the tripping command. indication (Disconnector switching prohibition).
Cyclic tests of measured-value acquisition and processing and
3 Disturbance recording
trip circuit tests including coils of the command relays.
The digitized measured values from the phase currents and the
differential and stabilizing currents of the busbar sections and Event recording
check zone are stored following a trip decision by the 7SS52 or
4 following an external initiation via a binary input. Pre-trigger
and post-fault times with regard of the trip command can be
The 7SS52 protection provides complete data for analysis of
protection performance following a trip or any other abnormal
condition and for monitoring the state of the relay during
set. Up to 8 fault recordings are stored in the 7SS52. The fault normal service.
records may be input to a PC connected to the central unit, using
5 the menu-guided DIGSI operating program. Then, the SIGRA
graphics program makes it possible to easily analyze the fault
Up to 200 operational events and 80 fault annunciations with a
resolution of one millisecond may be stored in two independent
recordings. buffers:
Marshallable tripping relays, binary inputs, alarm relays and
6 LEDs
This group includes plant/substation operation events, for
example disconnector switching, disconnector status discrep-
The bay units are equipped with marshallable command relays ancies (transition time limit exceeded, loss of auxiliary voltage,
for direct circuit-breaker tripping. For each bay there are 9 etc.) or event/alarm indications
7 (7SS523) or 8 (7SS525) duty contacts available.

For user-specic output and indication of events, 16 alarm relays
Tripping following a busbar short-circuit fault or circuit-breaker
failure.
and 32 LEDs in the central unit are freely marshallable. Settings
Several individual alarms may be grouped together.
8 The central unit has marshallable binary inputs with:
A PC can be connected to the operator interface located at the
front panel or the rear of the central unit. An operating program
is available for convenient and clear setting, fault recording
Reset of LED display
and evaluation as well as for commissioning. All settings of
Time synchronization the busbar or breaker failure protection, as well as settings of
9 Blocking of protection functions additional functions such as backup protection, need only be
parameterized at the central unit. Settings at the bay units are
The bay units have marshallable binary inputs:
not necessary.
Disconnector status closed/open With the help of the integrated keypad and display on the central
10 Phase-segregated start of circuit-breaker failure protection unit, all setting parameters may be read out.
Keypad, display (7SS523) and the front side interface of the bay
Release of circuit-breaker failure protection
units serve for commissioning, display of operational values and
Release of TRIP command
diagnosis.
11 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts
Bay out of service
All parameters are written into nonvolatile memories to ensure
that they are retained even during loss of auxiliary voltage.
Test of circuit-breaker tripping
Conguration, visualization
12 Measurement and monitoring functions

In the 7SS52 protection relay, a variety of measurement and
The conguration of the 7SS52 is effected by means of a
graphics-orientated editor included in the DIGSI operation
monitoring functions is provided for commissioning and mainte- program. For frequently used bay types, a symbol library is
nance. These functions include: available. Enhancements can be easily effected anytime.
13 Measurement and display of the phase currents of the feeders

in the central unit and bay units.
A graphical conguration visualizes the states of the disconnec-
tor position, the circuit-breaker and measuring values.
Measurement and display (on the integrated LCD or PC) of the
Self-monitoring
differential and stabilizing currents of all measuring systems in
14 the central unit and the bay units. Hardware and software are continuously monitored and any
irregularity is immediately detected and alarmed. The self-
Monitoring of busbar-selective and phase-segregated differen-
tial currents with busbar-selective blocking / alarming monitoring feature improves both the reliability and the avail-
ability of the 7SS52. The following quantities are monitored:
Monitoring of the differential currents of the check zone with
15 alarming / blocking The current transformer circuits
The analog-to-digital conversion

Protection functions, communication
All internal supply voltages Communication

The program memory
The program running times by a watch dog function Serial communication 1
The disconnector status With respect to communication, particular emphasis is placed on
The three channel tripping circuit the customer requirements in energy automation:
Maximum lifetime and reliability

originates.
2
The hardware of the 7SS52 units is guaranteed by more than Already during the process of communication, information
20 years of experience in numerical protection design at is assigned to the cause thereof (e.g. assignment of the indica-
Siemens. The number of components employed is reduced
through use of a powerful microprocessor in conjunction with
tion "circuit-breaker TRIP" to the corresponding command).
The communication system automatically handles the transfer
3
highly-integrated components, thus enhancing the reliability. of large data blocks (e.g. fault recordings or parameter data
The experience gained by Siemens in production of over 1 les). The user has access to these features without any
million numerical protection units has been incorporated in the
software design. The most modern manufacturing methods
4
together with effective quality control ensure high reliability and Local and remote communication
a long service life.
The 7SS52 central unit provides several serial communication
Battery monitoring interfaces for various tasks:
Front interface for connecting a PC
5
The internal battery is used to back-up the clock and memory
for storage of switching statistics, status and fault indications Rear-side service interface (always provided) for connection to
and fault recording, in the event of a power supply failure. The a PC, either directly or via a modern
processor checks its capacity at regular intervals. If the capacity
of the battery is found to be declining, an alarm is generated.
System interface for connecting to a control system via 6
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.
Routine replacement is therefore not necessary. All setting System interface (EN 100 module) for connecting to a control
parameters are stored in the Flash-EPROM, and therefore not lost system via IEC 61850 protocol
if the power supply or the battery fails.
Time synchronization via IRIG-B / DCF / system interface 7
Functions for testing and commissioning
Serial front interface (central unit and bay units)
The 7SS52 offers auxiliary functions for commissioning. The
physical status of all binary inputs and output relays of the
central unit can be displayed and directly altered to facilitate
There is a serial RS232 interface on the front of all the units.
All of the unit's functions can be set on a PC by means of the 8
testing. DIGSI 4 protection operation program. Commissioning tools and
fault analysis are also built into the program and are available
All measured values can be clearly depicted by means of DIGSI through this interface.
and simultaneously displayed in different windows as primary or
percentage values. Rear-mounted interfaces (central unit only)
9
The 7SS52 units are provided with a circuit-breaker test A number of communication modules suitable for various appli-
function. Single-pole and three-pole TRIP commands can be cations can be tted in the rear of the ush-mounting housing.
issued. The interface modules support the following applications: 10
Service interface
Data transmission lockout The service interface was conceived for remote access to a
Data transmission lockout can be activated, so as to prevent number of protection units via DIGSI. It can be an electrical
transfer of information to the control center during work on a RS232/RS85 or an optical interface. 11
circuit bay. RS485 bus
With this data transmission via copper conductors, electro-
Test mode magnetic fault inuences are largely eliminated by the use of
During commissioning, a test mode can be selected; all twisted-pair conductors. Upon failure of a unit, the remaining
12
indications then have a test mode sufx for transmission to the
control system.
System interface
through this interface. Radial or ring type station bus topolo-
13
Furthermore, the units can exchange data through this interface
via Ethernet and IEC 61850 protocol and can also be operated by
DIGSI.
14
15
Communication
IEC 61850 protocol (retrottable)
1 The Ethernet-based IEC 61850 protocol

is the worldwide standard for protection
and control systems used by power supply
corporations. By means of this protocol,
information can also be exchanged
2 directly between protection units so as
to set up simple masterless systems for
bay and system interlocking. Access to
the units via the Ethernet bus will also be
3 possible with DIGSI.

The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is an inter-
4 national standard for the transmission of
protective data and fault recordings. All
messages from the unit and also control
commands can be transferred by means
5 of published, Siemens-specic extensions

to the protocol.
6 The battery-backed clock of the 7SS52

central unit can be synchronized via: Fig. 9/29 Communication structure with DIGSI and IEC 60870-5-103
DCF 77 signal via time synchronization
receiver
7 IRIG-B satellite signal via time synchroni-

zation receiver
Minute-pulse via binary input
System interface by the substation
8 control, e.g. SICAM
Date and time with milliseconds resolu-
tion is assigned to every indication. The
synchronization of the 7SS52 bay units
9 is automatically effected with the central
unit.
10
11
Fig. 9/30 Communication structure for station bus with Ethernet and IEC 61850, FO ring
12
13
14
15
Technical data

Input circuits
Rated current IN 1 or 5 A
Central unit
Operation
indication
Green 1 1
Rated frequency fN 50/60 Hz Device failure Red 1
Thermal overload Continuous 4 x IN Marshallable Red 32
capability in current 10 s
path 1s
10 x IN
100 x IN
Bay unit
Operation Green 1 2
Dynamic overload 250 x IN indication
capability Device failure Red 1
Burden of At IN = 1 A < 0.1 VA Indications Green 5 (7SS523)/ (7SS525)
current inputs
Auxiliary voltage
At IN = 5 A < 0.2 VA
Control, displays
Red 11 (7SS523)/1 (7SS525)
3
Rated auxiliary Central unit DC 48/60, 110/125, 220/250 V Central unit
voltage Vaux LC Display 4 lines x 20 characters
Rated auxiliary
voltage Vaux
Bay unit DC 48, 60 to 250 V
Membrane keyboard
Bay unit (7SS523)
24 keys
4
LC Display 4 lines x 16 characters
Permissible tolerance Vaux 20 to +20 % Membrane keyboard 12 keys
Maximum ripple 15 %
Power consumption
Central unit Quiescent
Conguration dependent
30 to 50 W
Serial interfaces 5
Energized 35 to 65 W Central unit
Bay unit 7SS523 7SS525 PC interface (front)

Quiescent
Energized
12 W
16 W
10 W
14 W
Connection, electrical SUB-D, 9-pin
(subminiature ISO 2110) 6
Max. bridging time during > 50 ms at Vaux 60 V Baud rate 1200 to 115000 baud
loss of voltage supply System interface IEC 60870-5-103 (rear)
Binary inputs
7SS523 7SS525
Connection, optical
electrical
ST connectors
SUB-D, 9-pin 7
(subminiature ISO 2110)
Number of Bay unit 20 10
binary inputs Central unit 12 Baud rate 1200 to 115000 baud
Voltage range
Current consumption
DC 24 to 250 V
Approx. 1.5 mA/input
System interface IEC 61850 (rear)
Connection, electrical with EN 100 RJ45 connector 8
Alarm/event contacts module
Baud rate up to 100 Mbaud
Central unit
Number of
relays
Marshallable
Fixed
16 (each 1 NO contact)
1 (2 NC contacts)
Service interface (rear)
Connection, optical ST connectors
9
Switching capacity Make/Break 20 W/VA electrical SUB-D, 9-pin
Permissible current
Bay unit
1A
7SS523 7SS525
Bay unit 10
Number of Marshallable 1 (1 NO contact) 1 (1 NO contact) PC interface (front)
relays Fixed 1 (2 NC contacts) 1 (1 NC contacts) Connection, electrical SUB-D, 9-pin
Switching capacity Make/Break
20 W/VA
AC/DC 250 V Baud rate 1200 to 19200 baud 11
Permissible current 1 A 1A Central/bay unit
Command contacts Interface for high-speed data communication
Number of relays (bay unit) 7SS523
4 (each 2 NO
7SS525
3 (each 2 NO
Connection
Fiber-optic cable
ST connectors
Glass ber 62.5/125 m 12
contacts) contacts)
Permissible cable attenuation Max. 8 dB
1 (1 NO contact) 2 (1 NO contact)
Transmission distance Max. 1.5 km
Switching capacity Make
Break
1000 W/VA
30 W/VA 13
Permissible Continuous 5A
current 0.5 s 30 A
14
15
Technical data
Unit design (degree of protection according to EN 60529) EMC tests for interference emission; type test
1 Central unit
Cubicle
Housing for wall mounting
IP 54
IP 55
Standard EN 50081-2
(European generic standard for
industrial environment)
SIPAC subrack IP 20 Conducted interference voltage, 150 kHz to 30 MHz, limit class B
Bay unit 7SS523 7SS525 auxiliary voltage
2 Housing
Terminals
IP 51
IP 21
IP 20 CISPR 11, EN 55011
and VDE 0875 part 11
Weight at max. conguration Radio interference eld strength 30 to 1000 MHz, limit class B
Central unit CISPR 11, EN 55011
SIPAC subrack 14.3 kg and VDE 0875 part 11
3 Surface-mounting housing 43.0 kg
Bay unit 7SS523 7SS525 Mechanical stress tests
Flush mounting 8.1 kg 5.5 kg Specication
Surface mounting 11.8 kg
4 Standards
Permissible mechanical stress
IEC 60255-21-1, IEC 6068-2
Electrical tests During service 10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm amplitude

Specication 60 to 500 Hz, 0.5 g acceleration
During transport 5 to 8 Hz, 7.5 mm amplitude
Standards IEC 60255-5, DIN 57435 part 303
5 High-voltage test (routine test), 2 kV (r.m.s.), 50 Hz
8 to 500 Hz, 2 g acceleration
except DC voltage supply input

High-voltage test (routine test), DC 2.8 kV Climatic stress tests
only DC voltage supply input Temperatures
6 Impulse voltage test (type test),
all circuits, class III
5 kV (peak), 1.2/50 s, 0.5 J,
Standard IEC 60255-6
Permissible ambient temperature
at intervals of 5 s
In service 10 C to +55 C (bay unit)
EMC tests for interference immunity; type test 5 C to +55 C (central unit)
7 Standards IEC 60255-6, IEC 60255-22

(international product standard),
For storage
During transport
25 C to +70 C
25 C to +70 C
EN 50082-2 (European generic During start-up 10 C to +55 C (bay unit)
standard for industrial environ- 0 C to +55 C (central unit)
ment), Humidity
8 VDE 0435 part 303
(German product standard)
Standards IEC 60068-2-3
It is recommended to arrange the Annual average 75 % relative
High-frequency test with 1 MHz 2.5 kV (peak), 1 MHz, = 15 s,
units in such a way that they are humidity; on 56 days a year up to
interference 400 surges/s, duration 2 s
not exposed to direct sunlight or 93 % relative humidity;
9 VDE 0435 part 303, class III
Electrostatic discharge 8 kV contact discharge,

Busbar conguration
IEC 60255-22-2, class IV and 15 kV air discharge, both polarities,
IEC 61000-4-2, class IV 150 pF, Ri = 330 Quadruple or triple busbar with
10 Irradiation with radio-frequency

eld, non-modulated
10 V/m, 27 to 500 MHz transfer busbar;
Number of bays
Number of bus sections
48
12
Number of bus couplers 16
Irradiation with radio-frequency 10 V/m, 80 to 1000 MHz, Number of sectionalizers 24
eld, amplitude-modulated AM 80 %, 1 kHz
Irradiation with radio-frequency 10 V/m, 900 MHz, repetition
Number of coupler bus sections
Busbar protection
12
eld, pulse-modulated rate 200 Hz, duty cycle 50 % Tripping characteristics

ENV 50204, class III Setting ranges
Overcurrent I/INO1) 0.2 to 4 (in steps of 0.01)
12 Fast transients interference/bursts
4 kV, 5/50 ns, 5 kHz,
burst length = 15 ms,
Stabilizing factor k
for busbar-selective
0.1 to 0.8 (in steps of 0.01)
IEC 61000-4-4, class IV; repetition rate 300 ms, both polari-
protection
IEC 60801-4 ties, Ri = 50 , duration 1 min
Stabilizing factor k 0 to 0.8 (in steps of 0.01)
Line-conducted disturbances 10 V, 150 kHz to 80 MHz, for check zone
13 induced by radio-frequency elds,
amplitude-modulated
AM 80 %, 1 kHz
Tripping time
Typical trip time 15 ms
Differential current monitoring
Power frequency magnetic eld 30 A/m continuous,
Setting ranges
IEC 61000-4-8, class IV; 300 A/m for 3 s, 50 Hz
14 IEC 60255-6 0.5 mT; 50 Hz
Current limit I/INO1)
Time delay
0.05 to 0.8 (in steps of 0.01)
15 1) INO = highest c.t. ratio.

Technical data
Breaker failure protection Additional functions

Tripping
Setting ranges
Overcurrent I/IN 0.05 to 2 (in steps of 0.01)
Self-diagnosis
Current monitoring per feeder 1
Auxiliary voltage monitoring
Stabilizing factor k 0 to 0.8 (in steps of 0.01)
Time delay for 0.05 to 10 s (in steps of 0.01 s) Cyclic test
unbalancing / I > query
Time delay for TRIP repeat 0.00 to 10 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
Check of the data transmission
between central unit and bay units 2
Modes of operation Memory tests
Individually selectable per feeder: Operational measured values: Central unit
I > query
TRIP repeat (-phase) with I > query
Unbalancing (1-stage BF)
Feeder currents
Range
Tolerance
IL1; IL2; IL3 in A primary and in % IN
0 to 1000 % IN
typically 2 % of measured value
3
Unbalancing with TRIP repeat (-phase, 2-stage BF)
TRIP by external BF protection (tripping via disconnector replica of Differential and restraint (stabili- IdL1; IdL2; IdL3
busbar protection) zing) currents of all bus sections IsL1; IsL2; IsL3 in % IN
Plus for each mode (except for TRIP by external BF): low-current
mode
(separate for ZPS-BSZ1 and
ZPS-BSZ2) 4
Plus for modes with TRIP repeat: pulse mode Range 0 to 1000 % IN
Breaker failure protection for busbar short-circuit Operational measured values: Bay unit
Setting value
Overcurrent I/IN
Time delay
0.05 to 2 (in steps of 0.01)
0.05 to 10.00 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
Feeder currents
Range
IL1; IL2; IL3; IE in A primary and in % IN
0 to 6 000 % IN 5
Tolerance typically 2 % of measured value
General data of the protection system Differential and restraint IdL1; IdL2; IdL3
Min. time of TRIP commands (stabilizing) currents IsL1; IsL2; IsL3
Setting range
Current threshold for 0.02 to 1 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
Range
Frequency
0 to 6 000 % IN
f in Hz (I > 0.1 IN)
6
command reset I/IN 0.05 to 2 (in steps of 0.10) Range fN 5 Hz
Overcurrent release of TRIP commands Tolerance 0.1 Hz
Setting range
Disconnector transition time
0 to 25 (in steps of 0.01) Event recording: Central unit
Storage of the last
7
200 operational events and
Setting range 1 to 180 s (in steps of 0.01 s)
80 fault events
Overcurrent protection in the bay unit
Event recording: Bay unit
Characteristics Denite-time or inverse-time
overcurrent protection
Storage of the last 8
50 operational events and
Setting ranges 100 fault events
High-set stage; I >> (phase) I/IN 0.05 to 25.00 (in steps of 0.01)
High-set stage; IE >> (ground) I/IN 0.05 to 25.00 (in steps of 0.01) Fault recording: Central unit
Trip time delays; TI >>, TIE >> 0.00 to 60.00 s or Resolution 1 ms at 50 Hz;
0.83 ms at 60 Hz
9
Denite-time overcurrent protection
Overcurrent stage; I > (phase) I/IN 0.05 to 25.00 (in steps of 0.01) Storage time (from busbar TRIP or 500 to + 500 ms at 50 Hz
Overcurrent stage; IE > (ground) I/IN 0.05 to 25.00 (in steps of 0.01) external initiation by binary input) 416 to + 416 ms at 60 Hz
(up to 8 fault records)
Trip time delays; TI >, TIE >
Inverse-time overcurrent protection
0.00 to 60.00 s or
Fault recording: Bay unit 10
Inverse time O/C stage; Ip (phase) I/IN 0.10 to 4.00 (in steps of 0.01) Resolution 1 ms at 50 Hz;
Inverse time O/C stage; IE (ground) I/IN 0.10 to 4.00 (in steps of 0.01) 0.83 ms at 60 Hz
Trip time delays; TIp, TIE 0.00 to 10.00 s or Storage time (from busbar TRIP or 500 to + 500 ms at 50 Hz
Characteristics Inverse (IEC 60255-3 type A)
Very inverse (IEC 60255-3 type B)
external initiation by binary input) 416 to + 416 ms at 60 Hz
(up to 8 fault records)
11
Extremely inverse (IEC 60255-3
type C)
CE conformity
12
Part 303).
14
and standard EN 60255-6 for the low-voltage Directive. 15
1 7SS522 distributed busbar/breaker failure protection
Central unit
7SS52 0- - A0-
Central unit 50/60 Hz 2

2 48, 60 V DC 3
110, 125 V DC 4
220, 250 V DC 5
3 Unit design
In subrack ES902C A
Regional presettings/regional functions and languages
Region DE, language German (language can be selected)
4 Region World, language English (UK) (language can be selected)
A
B
Region US, language English (US) (language can be selected) C
Region FR, language French (language can be selected) D
5 Region World, language Spanish (language can be selected)

Region World, language Italian (language can be selected)
E
F
Region World, language Russian (language can be selected) G
System interface
6 Without
0
3
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45 connector 9 L 0 R
7 Service interface (on rear of relay)

DIGSI 4 / modem, optical 820 nm, ST connector 3
without 1 1
with cross stabilisation 2
9 Equipped for
8 bays A
16 bays B
24 bays C
10 32 bays
40 bays
D
E
48 bays F
7SS523 distributed busbar / breaker failure protection 7SS52 - A01- AA1
11 Bay unit, frequency, housing, binary inputs and outputs
Bay unit, 50/60 Hz, housing x 19", 20 BI, 6 BO, 2 live status contacts 3
Rated current
12 1A
5A
1
5
48 V DC 2
13 60 to 250 V DC 5
Unit design
7XP2040-2 for ush mounting or cubicle mounting C
14 7XP2040-1 for surface mounting

7XP2040-2 for ush mounting without glass cover
D
E
Without additional functions 0
15 With overcurrent-time protection 1


7SS523 distributed busbar/breaker failure protection
Bay unit, frequency 50/60 Hz;
Housing 1/3 x 19"; 10 BI, 6 BO, 1 live status contact
7SS525 - A 01- AA1
1
Rated current
1A
5A
1
5
2
Rated auxiliary voltage at converter
DC 48 to 250 V 5
Unit design 3
7XP2040-2 for panel ush mounting or cubicle mounting without glass cover F
Without additional functions
With overcurrent-time protection
0
1
4
5
DIGSI 4
6
relays running under MS Windows (version Windows 2000 /
XP Professional Edition) device templates, Comtrade Viewer,
electronic manual included as well as Getting started manual on
paper, connecting cables (copper)
Basis
7
Professional
CFC Editor (logic editor), Display Editor (editor for default and control
8
displays) and DIGSI 4 Remote (remote operation) 7XS5402-0AA00
CDC Editor (logic editor), Display Editor (editor for default and 9
control displays), and DIGSI 4 Remote (remote operation)

10
11
SIGRA 4
additionally)
12
manufacturers (Comtrade format).
Running under MS Windows 2000 / XP Professional Edition.
Authorization by serial number. On CD-ROM (contained in DIGSI 4,
but can be ordered additionally) 7XS5410-0AA00
13
Connection cable
Cable between PC/notebook (9-pin connector) and protection relay
(9-pin connector)
14
Manual 7SS52 V4.7/V3.3
English C53000-G1176-C182-5
15
Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
14
15 Fig. 9/31 Connection diagram 7SS522

Connection diagram
Live
contact
5
10
LSA2949-bgpen.eps
11
12
13
14
Fig. 9/32 Connection diagram 7SS523

15
Connection diagram
4
Live
contact
5
8
LSA4164-ben.eps
10
11
12
13
14
15 Fig. 9/33 Connection diagram 7SS525

Relays for Various
Protection Applications Page
SIPROTEC 4 7VK61 breaker management relay 10/3
SIPROTEC 7SV600 numerical circuit-breaker

failure protection relay 10/21
SIPROTEC 7SN60 transient ground-fault protection relay 10/31
10
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Relays for Various Protection Applications / 7VK61
SIPROTEC 4 7VK61 breaker management relay
Function overview
25
79
50BF
Single and/or three-pole auto-reclosure
59 Synchro-check with live/dead line/bus measurement
27 Closing under asynchronous conditions
(consideration of CB operating time)
2
86 74TC Circuit-breaker failure protection with two stages
(single and three-pole with/without current)
End-fault protection 3
Pole-discrepancy protection
LSP2458-afp.tif
Overvoltage/undervoltage protection
Control function 4
Commands for control of CB and isolators
Fig. 10/1 SIPROTEC 4 7VK61 breaker management relay
Event buffer and fault protocols
Monitoring of CB auxiliary contacts
6
Description Switching statistics
The SIPROTEC 4 breaker management relay 7VK61 is a highly

exible auto-reclosure, synchro-check and circuit-breaker failure
Features
All functions can be used separately
7
protection unit. Initiation/start by phase-segregated or 3-pole trip commands
This unit is used for the single and three-pole auto-reclosure of Auto-reclosure for max. 8 reclose cycles
a circuit-breaker, after this circuit-breaker has tripped due to a
fault. The synchro-check function ensures that the two circuits
Evolving/sequential trip recognition 8
Auto-reclosure with ADT, DLC, RDT
being reconnected by closing the circuit-breaker are within
a dened safe operating state before the CLOSE command is Synchro-check with V, , f measurement
issued. Breaker failure protection with highly secure 2-out-of-4 current
check detectors
9
The 7VK61 is also applicable as circuit-breaker failure protec-
tion. A breaker failure occurs when the circuit-breaker fails to Breaker failure protection with short reset time and negligible
correctly open and clear the fault after single or three-pole overshoot time
trip commands have been issued by the protection. It is then
necessary to trip the relevant busbar zone (section) to ensure
CommunicatIon interfaces 10
fault clearance. Together with the above-mentioned protection Front interface for connecting a PC
functions, the following additional functions of the 7VK61 can System interface for connecting to a control system via various
be applied: end-fault protection, pole-discrepancy protection,
overvoltage protection and undervoltage protection. As a mem-
protocols
IEC 61850 Ethernet
11
ber of the numerical SIPROTEC 4 relay family, it also provides IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
control and monitoring functions and therefore supports the PROFIBUS-FMS/-DP
user with regard to a cost-effective power system management. DNP 3.0
Rear-side service/modem interface
12
Time synchronization via
IRIG-B or DCF77 or system interface
13
14
15
Application
Application
1 The 7VK61 provides highly exible

breaker management. It applies to single-
breaker, ring-bus, and 1 breaker instal-
lations. The auto-reclosure, synchronism-
2 check, breaker failure protection and
voltage protection functions can be used
separately or combined. Therefore the
current and voltage transformer con-
3 nection can be selected according to the
required application.
The auto-reclosure function closes the
circuit-breaker after this circuit-breaker
4 has tripped due to a fault. The check-
synchronism function ensures that the
two circuits being reconnected by closing
the circuit-breaker are within a dened
5 safe operating state before the CLOSE
command is issued.
The numerical 7VK61 relay provides
rapid backup fault clearance in case the
6 circuit-breaker nearest to the fault fails to
respond to a TRIP command. It is suitable
for power systems of all voltage levels Fig. 10/2 Application and function diagram
with single and/or three-pole circuit-
7 breaker operation. The initiation signal

can be issued from any protection or supervision equipment. If the requirements for protection, control and interlocking
change, it is possible in the majority of cases to implement such
Information from the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact is only
required for the breaker failure protection during faults which changes by means of parameterization using DIGSI 4 without
produce little or no fault current ow, for instance due to a trip having to change the hardware.
8 from the power transformer Buchholz protection. The use of powerful microcontrollers and the application of
digital measured-value conditioning and processing largely sup-
Cost-effective power system management presses the inuence of higher-frequency transients, harmonics
and DC components.
The SIPROTEC 4 units are numerical relays which also provide
9 control and monitoring functions and therefore support the
ANSI Protection functions
user with regard to a cost-effective power system management.
The security and reliability of the power supply is increased as a 50BF Breaker-failure protection
result of minimizing the use of hardware.
10 The local operation has been designed according to ergonomic
59/27 Overvoltage/undervoltage protection
Synchro-check
criteria. Large, easy-to-read backlit displays are provided. 25
The SIPROTEC 4 units have a uniform design and a degree of 79 Auto-reclosure
11 functionality which represents a benchmark-level of perfor-

mance in protection and control. 74TC Trip circuit supervision
86 Lockout (CLOSE command interlocking)
12
13
14
15
Construction
Construction
Connection technique and housing 1

and -rack sizes are available as
housing widths of the SIPROTEC 4 7VK61
relays, referred to a 19" modular frame 2
system. This means that previous models
can always be replaced. The height is
a uniform 255 mm for ush-mounting
LSP2174-afp.tif
3
LSP2166-afp.tif
housings and 266 mm for surface-
mounting housings for all housing
widths. All cables can be connected with
or without ring lugs.
In the case of surface mounting on a 4
panel, the connection terminals are
located above and below the housing in Fig. 10/3 Flush-mounting housing with Fig. 10/4 Rear view of ush-mounting
the form of screw-type terminals. The screw-type terminals housing with covered connection
communication interfaces are located in a
terminals andwirings 5
housing.
7
LSP2219-afp.eps
LSP2237-afp.tif
9
screw-type terminals, example
7SA63
sloped case in a surface-mounting
housing 10
11
12
13
14
15
1 Auto-reclosure (ANSI 79)

The 7VK61 relay is equipped with an
auto-reclose function (AR). Usually the
2 auto-reclosure interacts with the feeder

protection via binary inputs and outputs.
The function includes several operating
modes:
3 3-pole auto-reclosure for all types of
faults; different dead times are available
depending on the type of fault
1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase faults,
4 no reclosing for multi-phase faults
1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase and
3-pole auto-reclosing for multi-phase
faults
5 Multiple-shot auto-reclosure
Interaction with the internal or an Fig. 10/7 Auto-reclosure and synchro-check with voltage measurement
external synchro-check across a power transformer
6 Monitoring of the circuit-breaker

auxiliary contacts. Synchro-check (ANSI 25)
In addition to the above-mentioned operating modes, several Where two network sections are switched in by control com-
other operating principles can be employed by means of the mand or following a 3-pole auto-reclosure, it must be ensured
7 integrated programmable logic (CFC). that both network sections are mutually synchronous. For
this purpose, a synchronism-check function is provided. After
The 7VK61 allows the line-side voltages to be evaluated.
A number of voltage-dependent supplementary functions are verication of the network synchronism, the function releases
thus available: the CLOSE command. Consideration of the duration of the CB
8 ADT
operating time before issuing the CLOSE command (especially
important under asynchronous conditions and when several
circuit-breakers with different operating times are to be oper-
at the remote station was successful (reduction of stress on ated by one single relay).
equipment).
9 DLC
By means of dead-line check, reclosure is effected only when
In addition, reclosing can be enabled for different criteria, e.g.,
when the busbar or line are not carrying a voltage (dead line or
the line is deenergized (prevention of asynchronous breaker dead bus).
closure in case that the synchronism check can not be used).
10 RDT
Reduced dead time is employed in conjunction with auto- The 7VK61 relay incorporates a two-stage circuit-breaker failure
reclosure where no teleprotection method is employed: protection to detect failures of tripping command execution, for
when faults within the zone extension of a distance feeder example due to a defective circuit-breaker. The current detection
11 protection but external to the protected line, are switched off

for rapid auto-reclosure (RAR), the RDT function decides on the
logic is phase-segregated and can therefore also be used in
single-pole tripping schemes.
basis of measurement of the return voltage from the remote If the fault current is not interrupted after a settable time delay
station which has not tripped, that the fault has been cleared has expired, a retrip command or the busbar trip command will
12 by the protection on the faulted downstream feeder and that
reclosure with reduced dead time may take place.
be generated. The breaker failure protection will usually be initi-
ated by external feeder protection relays via binary input signals.
Trip signals from the internal auto-reclosure logic or from the
voltage protection can start the breaker failure protection as
well.
13
14
15

(ANSI 59, 27)
The 7VK61 contains a number of overvoltage measuring 1
elements. Each measuring element is of two-stage design.
The following measuring elements are available:
2
Zero-sequence overvoltage
input (not in conjunction with syncho-check) or be derived
from the phase voltages.
3
Fig. 10/8 End-fault between circuit-breaker and current transformer
means of a transmitted signal. Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74TC)
4
The 7VK61 is tted, in addition, with three two-stage undervolt- One or two binary inputs for each circuit-breaker pole can be
age measuring elements: used for monitoring the circuit-breaker trip coils including the
Phase-to-ground undervoltage connecting cables. An alarm signal is issued whenever the circuit 5
is interrupted. The trip circuit supervision function requires one
Phase-to-phase undervoltage
or two independent potential-free binary inputs per trip circuit.
Positive-sequence undervoltage To make existing (non potential-free) binary inputs potential-
The undervoltage measuring elements can be blocked by means free, external optocoupler modules can be applied. 6
of a minimum current criterion and by means of binary inputs.
Lockout (ANSI 86)
End-fault protection Under certain operating conditions, it is advisable to block
When the circuit-breaker is open, the area located between the CLOSE commands after a nal TRIP command of the relay has
been issued. Only a manual Reset command unblocks the
7
current transformer and the circuit-breaker can be optimally
protected by means of the end-fault protection. In the event CLOSE command. The 7VK61 is equipped with such an interlock-
of a fault, an independently settable time delay is started after ing logic.
a valid initiation has been received and the circuit-breaker
auxiliary contacts indicate an open circuit-breaker position, with
current still owing (see Fig. 10/8). Depending on the mounting The 7VK61 relay provides comprehensive monitoring functions
position of the current transformer, instantaneous tripping of covering both hardware and software. Furthermore, the mea-
the busbar section or intertripping of the circuit-breaker at the
opposite end occurs.
sured values are continuously checked for plausibility. Therefore
the current and voltage transformers are also included in this
9
monitoring system.
Pole-discrepancy protection
If all voltages are connected, the relay will detect secondary
This function ensures that any one or two poles of a circuit-
breaker do not remain open for longer than an independently
voltage interruptions by means of the integrated fuse failure
monitor. Immediate alarm and blocking of the synchronism
10
settable time (i.e. unsymmetrical conditions). This time stage check and dead line check is provided for all types of secondary
is initiated when current (above the set value) is owing in any voltage failures. Additional measurement supervision functions
1 or 2 phases, but not in all 3 phases. Additionally, the circuit-
breaker auxiliary contacts (if connected) are interrogated and
are
Symmetry of voltages and currents (in case of appropriate
11
must show the same condition as the current measurement.
transformer connection)
Should this time delay expire, then a three-pole trip command
is issued. This function is normally used when single-pole auto- Broken-conductor supervision (if current transformers are
reclosing is applied. connected)
Summation of currents and voltages (in case of appropriate
12
transformer connection)
Phase-sequence supervision (if three voltage transformers are
connected) 13
14
15
Communication
Communication

originates.
2 Already during the process of communication, information is
assigned to the cause thereof (e.g. assignment of the indica-
tion circuit-breaker TRIP to the corresponding command).


ing data telegram is initially acknowledged by the unit which
will execute the command. After the release and execution of Fig. 10/9 IEC 60870-5-103 star-type RS232 copper conductor
the command a feedback signal is generated. At every stage connection or ber-optic connection
of the control command execution particular conditions are
5 checked. If these are not satised, command execution may be
terminated in a controlled manner.
The units offer a high degree of exibility by supporting differ-
ent standards for connection to industrial and power automation
6 systems. By means of the communication modules, on which
the protocols run, exchange and retrot is possible. Therefore,
the units will also in future allow for optimal adaptation to
changing communication infrastructure such as the application
7 of Ethernet networks (which will also be used increasingly in the
power supply sector in the years to come).
Local PC interface
8 The serial RS232 PC interface accessible from the front of the

geous during commissioning.
9 Service/modem interface
Fig. 10/10 Bus structure for station bus with Ethernet and IEC 61850
7VK61 units are always tted with a rear-side hardwired service with ber-optic ring
interface, optionally as RS232 or RS485. In addition to the
10 front-side operator interface, a PC can be connected here either
directly or via a modem.
Time synchronization interface entire SIPROTEC 4 unit range. These ensure that, where different
communication protocols (IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103, PROFIBUS,
DNP, etc.) are required, such demands can be met. For ber-optic
communication, no external converter is required for SIPROTEC 4.
Reliable bus architecture IEC 61850 protocol
12 RS485 bus
With this data transmission via copper conductors, electro-
dard for protection and control systems used by power supply
this Standard. By means of this protocol, information can also
masterless systems for bay and system interlocking. Access to
The ber-optic double ring circuit is immune to electromag- the units via the Ethernet bus is also be possible with DIGSI.
units, the communication system continues to operate without IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
14 disturbance. It is usually impossible to communicate with a
IEC 60870-5-103 is an internationally standardized protocol for
unit that has failed. Should a unit fail, there is no effect on the
communication with the rest of the system. efcient communication with protection relays. IEC 60870-5-103
is supported by a number of protection device manufacturers
15 and is used worldwide. Supplements for the control function are

dened in the manufacturer-specic part of this standard.

Communication
PROFIBUS-DP
LSP2163-afpen.tif
LSP2162-afpen.tif
PROFIBUS-DP is an industrial communica-
tions standard and is supported by a 1
number of PLC and protection device
manufacturers.
DNP 3.0 2
protocol. SIPROTEC 4 units are Level 1 and 3
Level 2 compatible.
System solutions for protection and Fig. 10/11 820 nm ber-optic communication Fig. 10/12 RS232/RS485 electrical
module communication module
station control
4
Together with the SICAM power automa-
tion system, SIPROTEC 4 can be used with
PROFIBUS-FMS. Over the low-cost electri-
cal RS485 bus, or interference-free via the
5
LSP3.01-0021.tif
Units equipped with IEC 60870-5-103
interfaces can be connected to SICAM in
parallel via the RS485 bus or connected 6
in star by ber- optic link. Through this
interface, the system is open for the con-
nection of units of other manufacturers
(see Fig. 10/14). 7
into systems of other manufacturers or in
SIMATIC. Electrical RS485 or optical inter-
Fig. 10/13 Fiber-optic Ethernet communication module for IEC 61850
with integrated Ethernet switch 8
faces are available. The optimum physical
data transfer medium can be chosen
thanks to opto-electrical converters. Thus,
the RS485 bus allows low-cost wiring
in the cubicles and an interference-free
9
optical connection to the master can be
established.
For IEC 61850, an interoperable system 10
solution is offered with SICAM PAS.
Via the 100 Mbits/s Ethernet bus, the
units are linked with PAS electrically or
optically to the station PC. The interface
is standardized, thus also enabling direct
11
connection of units of other manufactur-
ers to the Ethernet bus.
With IEC 61850, however, the units can 12
also be used in other manufacturers
systems. Units with an IEC 60870-5-103
interface are connected with PAS via the
Ethernet station bus by means of serial/
Ethernet converters. DIGSI can also be
13
used via the same station bus.
14
15
Typical connection
Typical connection
1 Connection for current and voltage

transformers
With the transformer connection as shown
2 in Fig. 10/15, it is possible to use the

complete scope of functions of 7VK61, i.e.
breaker failure protection, synchronism-
check with 3-phase dead line check (with
or without auto-reclosure), complete mea-
3 sured value monitoring, voltage protection,
and the complete range of operational
measured values.
5
Fig. 10/15 Complete connection of all current and voltage transformers
6
Alternative: Connection for current
7 transformers only
The connection for current transformers
only provides breaker failure protection and
current operational measured values.
8
10
11 Fig. 10/16 Typical current transformer connection for breaker failure protection
12
13
14
15
Typical connection
Alternative: Connection for two voltage

transformers
In case of a connection for two voltage 1
transformers, synchro-check and two
operational measured voltages, and addi-
tionally synchro-check measured values are
applicable. Dead line check is performed
for the connected line voltage only.
2
Note: Please connect the two voltages
always to the terminals R15/R16 and R13/
R14 with the appropriate polarity. The 3
setting address 106 Voltage transformer
must then be set to single-phase. The
terminals R17 and R18 must not be con-
nected. 4
The connection of the voltage VL1-L2 as Fig. 10/17 Typical voltage transformer connection for synchro-check
shown in Fig. 10/17 is just an example: with single voltage dead line check
any other of the shown combinations is
possible for synchronization. 5
The two voltage transformer connection
can also be combined with the current
transformer connection according to
Fig. 10/16. 6
10
11
12
13
14
15
Technical data

1 NC/NO contact1)
1 Analog inputs
Unit ready contact
(live status contact)
Rated current Inom 1 or 5 A (selectable) Command/indication relay
Rated voltage Vnom 80 to 125 V (selectable) Quantity

7VK610 5 NO contacts,
2 Power consumption
7VK611
NO/NC contact
14 NO contacts, 4 NC/NO contacts1)

Voltage inputs 0.10 VA Switching capacity
Overload capacity of current circuit Make 1000 W/VA
3 Thermal (r.m.s.) 500 A for 1 s
150 A for 10 s
Break, contacts
Break, contacts
30 VA
40 W
20 A continuous (for resistive load)
Dynamic (peak value) 1250 A (half cycle) Break, contacts
(for = L/R 50 ms) 25 VA
Thermal overload capacity of 230 V continuous
4 voltage circuit Switching voltage
250 V
Auxiliary voltage
5 A continuous
Rated voltages DC 24, 48 V
DC 60, 125 V Operating time, approx.
5 DC 110, 250 V
and AC 115, 230 V (50/60 Hz)
NO contact
8 ms
8 ms
Fast NO contact 5 ms
Permissible tolerance -20 % to +20 %
LEDs
Superimposed AC voltage 15 %
6 (peak-to-peak)
Power consumption
Quantity
RUN (green)
ERROR (red)
1
1
LED (red),
Energized Approx. 8 W to 14 W, depending
on design
7VK610 7
7 Bridging time during failure of the
auxiliary voltage
7VK611 14
Unit design
For Vaux = 48 V and Vaux 110 V 50 ms
For Vaux = 24 V and Vaux = 60 V 20 ms Housing 7XP20
8 Binary inputs
Quantity
Dimensions Refer to part 14 for dimension
drawings
7VK610 7 Degree of protection acc. to
7VK611 20 EN 60529
Rated voltage range 24 to 250 V, bipolar
9 Pickup threshold DC 19 or 88 V or 176 V, bipolar
Front IP 51
Functions are freely assignable Rear IP 50
Minimum pickup voltage DC 19 or 88 V or 176 V, bipolar For the terminals IP 20 with terminal cover put on
Ranges are settable by means of (3 operating ranges) Weight
x 19" 5 kg
x 19" 6 kg
Input impulse suppression 220 nF coupling capacitance at
x 19"
11 220 V with a recovery time >60 ms
x 19"
9.5 kg
11 kg
12
13
14
15 1) Can be set via jumpers.

Technical data
Serial interfaces Electrical tests

Operating interface, front of unit for DIGSI 4
Specications
Standards IEC 60255 (product standards) 1
9-pin subminiature connector IEEE C37.90.0/.1/.2
(SUB-D) VDE 0435
Baud rate 4800 to 115200 baud For further standards see
setting as supplied: 38400 baud;
parity 8E1 Insulation tests
Individual tests
2
Time synchronization DCF77/ IRIG-B signal (Format IRIG-B000) Standards IEC 60255-5 and 60870-2-1
Connection 9-pin subminiature connector Voltage test (100 % test)
(SUB-D)
All circuits except for auxiliary
supply, binary inputs,
2.5 kV (r.m.s.), 50 Hz 3
housing) communication and time
Voltage levels 5 V, 12 V or 24 V (optional) synchronization interfaces
Service/modem interface for DIGSI4/modem/service
Isolated RS232/RS485 9-pin subminiature connector
inputs (100 % test)
DC 3.5 kV
4
(SUB-D) RS485/RS232 rear side 500 V (r.m.s.), 50 Hz
Dielectric test 500 V / 50 Hz communication interfaces
Distance for RS232 Max. 15 m and time synchronization
Distance for RS485
System interface
Max. 1000 m interface (100 % test)
Impulse voltage test (type test) 5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 s; 0.5 J,
5
All circuits except for communi- 3 positive and 3 negative impulses in
IEC 61850 Ethernet cation interfaces and time intervals of 5 s
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol synchronization interface,
PROFIBUS-FMS
PROFIBUS-DP
class III
6
DNP 3.0
Isolated RS232/RS485 9-pin subminiature connector Standards IEC 60255-6; IEC 60255-22
(SUB-D) (product standard)
Baud rate
Dielectric test
4800 to 38400 baud
500 V / 50 Hz
EN 61000-6-2 (generic standard),
VDE 0435 Part 301, 7
Distance for RS232 Max. 15 m DIN VDE 0435-110
Distance for RS485 Max. 1000 m High-frequency test 2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz; = 15 s;
PROFIBUS RS485 IEC 60255-22-1 class III and 400 surges per s; test duration 2 s;
Dielectric test
Baud rate
500 V / 50 Hz
Max. 12 Mbaud
VDE 0435 Part 303, class III
Ri = 200
8
Distance 1000 m at 93.75 kbaud; IEC 60255-22-2 class IV discharge; both polarities; 150 pF;
100 m at 12 Mbaud and EN 61000-4-2, class IV Ri = 330
PROFIBUS ber-optic
ST connector
Irradiation with HF eld,
IEC 60255-22-3 class III
10 V/m; 80 to 1000 MHz; 80 % AM;
1 kHz 9
IEC 61000-4-3, class III 10 V/m; 1.4 to 2 GHz; 80 % AM; 1 kHz
Irradiation with HF eld, Class III, 10 V/m
IEC 60255-22-31, IEC 61000-4-3
Permissible attenuation
Distance
Max. 8 dB for glass-ber 62.5/125 m
500 kB/s 1.6 km
1500 kB/s 530 m
Amplitude-modulated 80; 160; 450; 900 MHz; 80 % AM
1kHz; duration >10 s
10
Pulse-modulated 900 MHz, 50 % PM,
repetition frequency 200 Hz
Fast transient disturbance/bursts 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz;
IEC 60255-22-4 and
repetition rate 300 ms; both polari-
11
ties; Ri = 50 ; test duration 1 min
12
13
14
Fiber-optic interface please complete order number at 11th position with
4 (FMS RS485) or 9 and Order Code L0A (DP RS485) or 9 and
Order Code L0G (DNP 3.0) and additionally a suitable external repeater. 15
Technical data
EMC tests for noise immunity; type tests (continued) Seismic vibration Sinusoidal
(SURGE),
Impulse: 1.2/50 s
Auxiliary supply Common (longitudinal) mode: (vertical axis)
2 kV; 12 ; 9 F 8 to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration
Differential (transversal) mode: (horizontal axis)
2 1 kV; 2 ; 18 F 8 to 35 Hz: 0.5 g acceleration
(vertical axis)
Measurement inputs, binary inputs, Common (longitudinal) mode: Frequency sweep 1 octave/min
2 kV; 42 ; 0.5 F 1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes
binary output relays Differential (transversal) mode:
During transport
3 Line-conducted HF, amplitude-
1 kV; 42 ; 0.5 F
10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM; Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2
modulated, IEC 61000-4-6, class III 1 kHz Vibration Sinusoidal
Magnetic eld with power frequen- 30 A/m continuous; 300 A/m for IEC 60255-21-1, class 2 5 to 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude;
cy IEC 61000-4-8, class IV; 3 s; 50 Hz IEC 60068-2-6 8 to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration,
4 IEC 60255-6 0.5 mT; 50 Hz frequency sweep 1 octave/min
Oscillatory surge withstand 2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz; = 50 s;
capability, IEEE C37.90.1 400 surges per second, Shock Semi-sinusoidal
duration 2 s, Ri = 200 IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 15 g, duration 11 ms,
capability, IEEE C37.90.1
4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz
burst length = 15 ms; repetition
both directions
rate 300 ms; both polarities; Continuous shock Semi-sinusoidal
Ri = 50 ; duration 1 min IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 10 g, duration 16 ms,
IEC 60068-2-29 1000 shocks on each of the 3 axes
Radiated electromagnetic inter- 35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz,
6 ference IEEE C37.90.2
Damped oscillation 2.5 kV (peak value); polarity
in both directions
IEC 60694, IEC 61000-4-12 alternating 100 kHz; 1 MHz; 10 and Climatic stress tests
50 MHz; Ri = 200 Standard IEC 60255-6
7 EMC tests for interference emission; type tests

Temperatures
Type-tested acc. to IEC 60068-2-1 -25 C to +85 C / -13 F to +185 F
Conducted interference voltage on 150 kHz to 30 MHz and -2, test Bd, for 16 h
lines, only auxiliary voltage Limit class B Temporarily permissible operating -20 C to +70 C / -4 F to +158 F
8 IEC-CISPR 22
IEC-CISPR 22 Limit class B impaired above +55 C / +131 F)
Harmonic currents on the network Class A limits are observed Recommended permanent opera- -5 C to +55 C / +23 F to +131 F
lead at AC 230 V, IEC 61000-3-2 ting temperature acc. to
9 Voltage uctuations and icker
on the network incoming feeder at
Limits are observed IEC 60255-6
AC 230 V, IEC 61000-3-3 permanent storage
transport
10 Mechanical stress test
Humidity
Permissible humidity stress: Annual average on 75 % relative
During operation It is recommended to arrange the humidity; on 56 days per year up t
Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2 units in such a way that they are o 93 % relative humidity; condensa-
11 Vibration Sinusoidal
proounced temperature changes
tion is not permitted.
IEC 60068-2-6 60 to 150 Hz: 1 g acceleration,
12 Shock
Half-sinusoidal
both directions
13
14
15
Technical data
Functions Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF)

Number of auto-reclosures Up to 8
Number of stages
2
0.05 to 20 A (1A) / 0.25 to 100 A (5A) 1
Operating mode Only 1-pole; only 3-pole, 1- or (step 0.01 A)
3-pole Time delays T11phase, T13phase, T2 0 to 30 s (steps 0.01 s) or deacti-
vated
Operating modes with line volt-
age check
DLC dead-line check
ADT adaptive dead time
RDT reduced dead time
Dropout (overshoot) time, internal 15 ms, typical; 25 ms, max. 2
End-fault protection For fault between open CB and CT,
Dead times T1-ph, T3-ph, TSeq 0 to 1800 s (step 0.01 s) or with intertrip to the remote line end
deactivated Pole discrepancy supervision Initiation if not all CB poles are
Action times 0.01 to 300 s (step 0.01 s) or
deactivated Monitoring time
closed or open
0 to 30 s (steps 0.01 s) or deacti-
3
Reclaim times 0.5 to 300 s (step 0.01 s) vated
Start-signal monitoring time 0.01 to 300 s (steps 0.01 s) Tolerances

Current limit value 5 % of setting value or 1 % Inom
Additional functions Synchro-check request
3-phase intertripping
Time stages 1 % of setting value or 10 ms 4
InterCLOSE command to the Voltage protection (ANSI 59, 27)
remote end Operating modes Local tripping and/or carrier trip for
Check of CB ready state remote end

Blocking with manual CLOSE
Overvoltage protection 5
Pickup values VPH-E>>, VPH-E> 1 to 170 V (step 0.1 V)
RDT
(phase-ground overvoltage)
Healthy line voltage PH-E 30 to 90 V (steps 1 V)
Dead line voltage PH-E 2 to 70 V (steps 1 V) Pickup values VPH-PH>>, VPH-PH> 2 to 220 V (step 0.1 V)
Tolerances
Pickup values 3V0>>, 3V0> 1 to 220 V (step 0.1 V)
6
Voltage limit values 3 % of setting value or 1 V (3V0 can be measured via V4 trans-
formers or calculated by the relay)
Manual CLOSE control
Pickup values V1>>, V1> 2 to 220 V (step 0.1 V) 7
Control commands
Pickup values V2>>, V2> 2 to 220 V (step 0.1 V)
Operating modes (negative-sequence overvoltage)
With auto-reclosure Synchro-check
Reset ratio (settable) 0.5 to 0.98 (step 0.01) 8
Undervoltage protection
Pickup values VPH-E<<, VPH-E< 1 to 100 V (step 0.1 V)
Bypassing
(phase-ground undervoltage)
For manual closure
and control commands
As for auto-reclosure
Pickup values VPH-PH<<, VPH-PH<
(phase-phase undervoltage)
1 to 170 V (step 0.1 V) 9
Permissible voltage difference 1 to 60 V (step 0.1 V)
Permissible frequency difference 0.03 to 2 Hz (step 0.01 Hz)
(positive-sequence undervoltage)
Permissible angle difference 2 to 80 (step 1)
Max. duration of synchronization 0.01 to 600 s (steps 0.01 s) or
Blocking of undervoltage protection Minimum current; binary input
stages
10
deactivated
Release delay with synchronous 0 to 30 s (steps 0.01 s)
networks Time delays
Minimum measuring time Approx. 80 ms Time delay for all stages 0 to 100 s (step 0.01 s) or
deactivated
11
Tolerances
Time stages 1 % of setting value or 10 ms Command / pickup time Approx. 34 ms at fnom = 50 Hz
Voltage limit values 2 % of setting value or 1 V Approx. 30 ms at fnom = 60 Hz
Tolerances
Voltage limit values 3 % of setting value or 1 V 12
Number of supervisable trip circuits Up to 3
Number of required binary inputs 1 or 2 13
per trip circuit
Indication relay 1 to 30 s (steps 1 s)
14
15
Technical data
Additional functions Further additional functions

Current symmetry
Voltage sum
Voltage symmetry
Currents 3 x IPhase ; 3I0; I1; I2 Phase sequence
2 Tolerances Typ. 0.3 % of indicated measured
value or 0.5 % Inom Indications Power direction
Voltages 3 x VPhase-Ground; 3 x VPhase-Phase; 3V0, Operational indications Buffer size 200
V1, V2, VSYNC, Ven System disturbance indication Storage of indications of the last 8
Tolerances Typ. 0.25 % of indicated measured faults, buffer size 600
3 Power with direction indication
value or 0.01 % Vnom
P, Q, S
Switching statistics Number of breaking operations per
CB pole
Tolerances Sum of breaking current per phase
P: for |cos | = 0.7 to 1 and Typical 1% Breaking current of last trip
operation
4 V/Vnom, I/Inom = 50 to 120 %
Q: for |sin | = 0.7 to 1 and Typical 1% Max. breaking current per phase
V/Vnom , I/Inom = 50 to 120 % Circuit-breaker test TRIP/CLOSE cycle, 3 phases
S: for V/Vnom, I/Inom = 50 to 120 % Typical 1% TRIP/CLOSE per phase
Frequency f Dead time for CB TRIP / CLOSE 0 to 30 s (steps 0.01 s)
5 Tolerance
Power factor
10 mHz
PF
cycle
Commissioning support Operational measured values, CB
Tolerance for |cos | = 0.7 to 1 Typical 0.02 test, status display of binary inputs,
setting of output relays, generation
Energy meters of indications for testing serial
6 Four-quadrant meters WP+; WP-; WQ+; WQ-
Phase rotation adjustment
interfaces
Clockwise or anti-clockwise
Tolerance
for |cos | > 0.7 and V > 50 % 5%
Vnom and I > 50 % Inom CE conformity
7 Oscillographic fault recording This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European
Analog channels 3 x IPhase, 3I0 Communities on the approximation of the laws of the Member States
3 x VPhase, 3V0, VSYNC, Ven relating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Council Directive
Max. number of available 8, backed-up by battery if auxiliary 2004/108/EG previous 89/336/EEC) and concerning electrical equipment
8 recordings
Sampling intervals
for use within specied voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EG
This conformity is proved by tests conducted by Siemens AG in
Total storage time > 15 s accordance with Article 10 of the Council Directive in agreement with
Binary channels Pickup and trip information; the generic standards EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4 for the EMC
9 number and contents can be freely
congured by the user
directive and with the standard EN 60255-6 for the low-voltage
directive.
Max. number of displayed binary 40 This device is designed and produced for industrial use.
channels The product conforms with the international standard of the series
10 Control
Number of switching units Depends on the number of binary /
IEC 60255 and the German standard VDE 0435.

command outputs
11 Feed back
Interlocking Freely congurable
Local control Control via menu, function keys,
12 Remote control
control keys (if available)
Control protection, DIGSI,
pilot wires
13
14
15

7VK61 breaker management relay 7VK61 - - 4Y 0- 1
Housing, binary inputs (BI) and outputs (BO)
Housing 19, 7 BI, 6 BO incl. 1 live-status contact, 0
Housing 19, 20 BI, 19 BO incl. 1 live-status contact
Measuring inputs (4 x V, 4 x I)
1
2
Iph = 1 A, Ie = 1 A (min. = 0.05 A)1) 1
Iph = 5 A, Ie = 5 A (min. = 0.25 A)1) 5
Rated auxiliary voltage (power supply, threshold of binary inputs)
DC 24 to 48 V, binary input threshold 19 V3)
3
2
DC 60 to 125 V 2), binary input threshold 19 V3) 4
DC 220 to 250 V 2), AC 115 to 230 V, binary input threshold 176 V3) 6 4
Unit version
For panel ush mounting A
For panel surface mounting
Region-specic default settings / language settings and functions versions
E
5
Region DE, language: German, selectable A
Region World, language: English, selectable B
Region US, language:US-English, selectable
Region FR, language: French, selectable
C 6
D
Region World, language: Spanish, selectable E
Region World, language: Italian, selectable F
Port B system interface 7
Empty 0
2
3
8
PROFIBUS-FMS Slave, optical, double ring, ST connector 4) 6
PROFIBUS-DP Slave, RS485
PROFIBUS-DP Slave, optical 820 nm, double ring, ST connector 4)
9
9
L 0A
L 0 B
9
DNP 3.0, RS485 9 L 0G
DNP 3.0, optical 820 nm, ST connector 4) 9 L 0H
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45 connector
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, optical, double, LC connector 5)
9
9
L 0 R
L 0 S
10
Port C service interface
DIGSI 4 / modem, electrical RS485 2 11
Functions
Breaker failure protection Auto-reclosure Over/Undervoltage
1-/3-pole or 3-pole only 1-/3-pole or 3-pole only protection
and synchro-check 12
C
D
N
P 13
Q
R
1) Rated current can be selected by means of jumpers. 4) Optical interfaces are not available with surface mounting housings
14
2) Transition between the 3 auxiliary ranges can be selected by means (position 9 = E). Please order the version with RS485 interface and a
of jumpers. separate electrical/optical converter.
5) For surface-mounting housing applications please order the relay
3) The binary input thresholds are selectable in 3 steps by means of
jumpers. with electrical Ethernet interface and use a separate ber-optic
switch.
15
1 DIGSI 4
2 (copper)
Basis
3 Professional
4 SIGRA 4
additionally)
5 other manufacturers (Comtrade format).
Running under MS Windows 2000/XP Professional Edition
6 Connecting cable (copper)

Cable between PC/notebook (9-pin connector) and protection

Manual for 7VK61

8 For the latest version please visit www.siemens.com/siprotec
9 Accessories Description Order No. Size of

package
Supplier Fig.

LSP2289-afp.eps
3-pin C73334-A1-C36-1 1 Siemens 10/20

10 Crimp CI2 0.5 to 1 mm2 0-827039-1 4000 AMP 1)
Fig. 10/18 Mounting rail
connector 0-827396-1 1 AMP 1)
for 19" rack
CI2 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 0-827040-1 4000 AMP 1)
AMP 1)
11 0-827397-1
Type III+ 0.75 to 1.5 mm2 0-163084-7
1
4000 AMP 1)
0-163083-2 1 AMP 1)
LSP2090-afp.eps

LSP2091-afp.eps

12 for CI2
and matching female
0-734372-1
1-734387-1
1 AMP 1)
AMP 1)

13 Short-circuit
links
For other terminals
C73334-A1-C33-1
C73334-A1-C34-1
1
1
Siemens
Siemens
10/21
10/22
LSP2093-afp.eps
LSP2092-afp.eps

14
Fig. 10/21 Fig. 10/22
15 for current contacts for voltage contacts/

indications contacts

Connection diagrams
9
Fig. 10/23 Connection diagram 7VK610, x 19 housing
10
11
12
13
14
15

Connection diagrams
10
11
12
13
14
15 Fig. 10/25 Connection diagram 7VK611, x 19 housing

Relays for Various Protection Applications / 7SV600
SIPROTEC 7SV600 numerical circuit-breaker failure protection relay
Function overview
Circuit-breaker failure protection (single or three-pole with/
without current)
Independently settable delay times for operation with and
without current 2
Single or two-stage time delay of the busbar trip command
Re-trip (cross trip) stage (1st stage of the 2-stage operation)
Intertrip facility (via teleprotection interface) 3
LSP2001-afpen.tif
End-fault protection with intertrip
No current control using the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts
Features 4
Highly sensitive current detection
2-out-of-4 check of the current detectors
Short reset time, negligible overshoot time
Can be initiated by phase-segregated or common-phase trip
5
commands
Fig. 10/26 SIPROTEC 7SV600 numerical circuit-breaker failure End-fault protection
protection relay
Assignable output relays, LEDs and binary inputs 6
Description Monitoring of circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts
The SIPROTEC 7SV600 is a numerical relay used for circuit-

Operational current measured values 7
breaker failure protection. A failure occurs when the circuit-
Event buffer
breaker fails to correctly open and clear the fault after single or
three-pole trip commands have been issued by the protection
unit. It is then necessary to trip the relevant busbar zone
Fault protocols
8
(section) to ensure fault clearance.
Generally, the monitoring of the current is sufcient as the cri-
terion for the indication that the circuit-breaker has successfully
cleared the fault (current condition). However, under certain
1 x RS485 interface
fault conditions (e.g. overvoltage), little or no current may ow, DIGSI
making the measurement of current unreliable for indication of
the circuit- breaker status (no current condition). The 7SV600
operates correctly for both these conditions. The relay is suitable Hardware 10
for use at all voltage levels and in all applications. The current
transformers can either be of the closed iron core or linear Digital inputs:
type. The relay can be incorporated in conventional switchgear 3 binary inputs
systems and modem substation control systems e.g. SICAM. Digital outputs: 11
4 output relays
Front design
Display for operation and measured values 12
6 LEDs for local alarm
13
14
15
Application
Application
1 The numerical circuit-breaker failure

protection relay 7SV600 provides rapid
backup fault clearance instruction to the
associated circuit-breakers in case the
2 circuit-breaker nearest to the fault fails to
respond.
It is suitable for power systems of all
voltage levels. The initiation signal can be
3 derived from any protection or supervi-
sion equipment or, in case of manual
opening, from the control discrepancy
switch of the breaker. Information from
4 the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact is
required for the breaker failure protection
Simplied application
diagram of circuit-breaker
failure protection.
to function during faults which produce
little or no current ow (possible only
5 with common-phase initiation).
8 Simplied application
diagram of circuit-breaker
failure protection by means
of a circuit-breaker auxiliary
contact.
9
Fig. 10/27 Typical applications
10
11
12
13
14
15
Construction
The relay contains all the components needed for 1

Acquisition and evaluation of measured values
Operation and display
Output of signals and trip commands
2
SCADA interface (RS485)
LSP2002-afpen.tif
Power supply
The rated CT currents applied to the SIPROTEC 7SV600 can be
3
Three different housings are available. The ush-mounting
versions have terminals accessible from the rear. The surface-
mounting version has terminals accessible from the front.
4
Fig. 10/28 Rear view of surface-mounting housing
The breaker failure protection can operate single-stage or two- An end-fault protection function is integrated in the 7SV600
stage. When used as single-stage protection, the bus trip com- relay. An end fault is a short-circuit located between the circuit-
mand is given to the adjacent circuit-breakers if the protected
feeder breaker fails. When used as two-stage protection, the rst
breaker and the current transformer set of the feeder. For this
fault, current ow is detected, although the auxiliary contacts of
6
stage can be used to repeat the trip command to the relevant the breaker indicate open breaker poles.
feeder breaker, normally on a different trip coil, if the initial
A command signal is generated which can be transmitted to the
trip command from the feeder protection is not successful. The
second stage will result in a bus trip to the adjacent breakers, remote-end breaker (possible only for common-phase initiation). 7
if the command of the rst stage is not successful. Special measures are taken to prevent malfunction of the relay.
The bus trip command from the breaker failure protection can be Besides the mentioned 2-out-of-4 check of the current detection
routed to all circuit-breakers linked to the same busbar (section)
as the breaker that failed. It can also be transmitted to the
elements, the trip signals of the feeder protection can be con-
nected in a redundant manner, so that they can be checked for 8
remote end by means of a suitable communication link (e.g. PLC, plausibility (possible only for common-phase initiation).
radio wave, or optical ber). Continuous monitoring of the measured values permits rapid
The isolator replica which is necessary in case of multiple busbar
sections is not part of the 7SV600 relay.
annunciation of any fault in the instrument transformer circuits.
Continuous plausibility monitoring of the internal measured
9
value processing circuits and monitoring of the auxiliary volt-
The current level is monitored in each of the three phases ages to ensure that they remain within tolerance are obviously
against a set threshold. In addition, the zero-sequence compo-
nent or the negative-sequence component of the phase currents
inherent features.
10
derived by symmetrical component analysis is monitored. This
ensures high security against malfunction by use of a 2-out-of-4
check of the current detectors.
The version with phase-segregated initiation enables reliable 11
breaker failure detection even during single-pole auto-reclose
cycles, provided the phase-segregated trip signals of the feeder
protection are connected to the 7SV600.
If the protected circuit-breaker is not operational (e.g. air pres-
12
sure failure or spring not charged), instantaneous bus trip of
the adjacent circuit-breakers can be achieved following a feeder
protection trip, provided the relay is informed via binary input of
the breaker status (possible only for common-phase initiation). 13
14
15
Serial data transmission, connection diagrams
Serial data transmission
1 A PC can be connected to ease setup of the

relay using the Windows-based program
DIGSI which runs under MS-Windows.
2 It can also be used to evaluate up to 8

oscillographic fault records, 8 fault logs
and the operational event buffer. As an
option, a system interface is available.
3 The SIPROTEC 7SV600 transmits a subset

of data via IEC 60870-5-103 protocol:
General fault detection of the device
Fig. 10/29 Wiring communication RS485
General trip of the device For convenient wiring of the RS485 bus, use bus cable system 7XV5103
4 Current in phase L2 [%] = (see part 13 of this catalog)
Breaker failure trip T1 (local trip)

Breaker failure trip T2 (busbar trip)
5 Circuit-breaker defective: Trip

Trip by end-fault protection
Trip by monitoring current symmetry
Breaker failure protection is active
6
Connection diagrams
7
10
11
12
13
14 Fig. 10/30
Connection example for single-stage breaker
failure protection with phase-segregated
initiation
15
Connection diagrams
6
Fig. 10/31
Connection example for 2-stage breaker
failure protection, common-phase initiation,
7
CB interrogation
10
11
12
13
Fig. 10/32
Connection example for single-stage breaker
failure protection with common-phase initation
and Buchholz protection, CB interrogation is
14
imperative; additional intertrip signal to the
opposite line end in case of breaker failure or
end fault
15
Technical data
General unit data Binary inputs
Rated current IN 1 to 5 A
Number
Rated operating voltage
3 (can be marshalled)
DC 24 to 250 V
Rated frequency fN 50 or 60 Hz (selectable) Current consumption Approx. 2.5 mA,
can be parameterized independent of operating voltage
Pick-up threshold selectable by plug-in jumpers
2 Power consumption of current
inputs
At IN = 1 A < 0.1 VA
Rated aux. voltage
DC 24/48/60 V
Vpickup DC 17 V
Vdrop-off < DC 8 V
At IN = 5 A < 0.2 VA Rated aux. voltage Vpickup DC 74 V
Overload capability current path, DC 110/125/220/250 V Vdrop-off < DC 45 V
3 Thermal (r.m.s.) 100 x IN for 1 s

30 x IN for 10 s
Unit design
Housing 7XP20
4 x IN continuous
Dimensions Refer to part 14 for dimension
Dynamic (pulse current) 250 x IN one half cycle drawings
Auxiliary voltage
4 Power supply via integrated DC/DC converter
Weight
In housing for surface mounting Approx. 4.5 kg
In housing for ush mounting Approx. 4.0 kg
Rated auxiliary voltage VAux DC DC 24 / 48 V
DC 60 / 110 / 125 V Degree of protection
DC 220 / 250 V acc. to EN 60529
5 Permissible variations DC 19 to 58 V
DC 48 to 150 V
Housing
Terminals
IP 51
IP 21
DC 176 to 300 V Serial interface
Superimposed Isolated
6 AC voltage
Peak-to-peak
12 % at rated voltage
6 % at limits of admissible voltage
Standard
Test voltage
RS485
DC 2.8 kV
Power consumption Connection Data cable on terminals, two data
Quiescent Approx. 2 W wires, one frame reference, for
Energized Approx. 4 W connection of a personal computer
7 Bridging time during failure/short-

circuit of auxiliary voltage
50 ms at Vrated DC 110 V
20 ms at Vrated DC 24 V
or similar; core pairs with shield,
shield must be grounded; commu-
nication possible via modem
Rated auxiliary voltage VAux AC 115 V, 50/60 Hz Baud rate As delivered 9600 baud
AC 230 V, 50/60 Hz min. 1200 baud; max. 19200 baud
8 Permissible variations AC 92 to 133 V
AC 184 to 265 V
Electrical tests
Heavy duty (command) contacts
Specications
Command (trip) relays, number 2 (can be marshalled)
9 Contacts per relays

Switching capacity
2 NO
Standards
Insulation tests
IEC 60255-5; ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0
Make 1000 W / VA High voltage test (routine test) 2 kV (r.m.s.); 50 Hz

Break 30 W / VA except DC voltage supply input
and RS485
10 Switching voltage
Permissible current
250 V
5 A continuous High voltage test (routine test) DC 2.8 kV
30 A for 0.5 s only DC voltage supply input
and RS485
Signal contacts
High voltage test (type test)
11 Signal / alarm relays
Contact per relays
2 (can be marshalled)
1 CO
Between open contacts of
trip relays
1.5 kV (r.m.s.), 50 Hz
Switching capacity Between open contacts 1 kV (r.m.s.), 50 Hz

Make 1000 W / VA of alarm relays
Break 30 W / VA Impulse voltage test (type test) 5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 s; 0.5 J;
12 Switching voltage 250 V all circuits, class III 3 positive and 3 negative impulses
at intervals of 5 s
Permissible current 5A
13
14
15
Technical data
EMC tests for noise immunity; type tests Mechanical stress tests
Standards: IEC 60255-6, IEC 60255-22 (product standards);
EN 50082-2 (generic standard) VDE 0435, part 303
During operation 1
High frequency 2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz; =15 s; Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2
IEC 60255-22-1, class III 400 shots/s; duration 2 s
Electrostatic discharge 4 kV/6 kV contact discharge;
8 kV air discharge; both polarities;
150 pF; Ri = 330
IEC 60255-21-1, class I
IEC 60068-2-6
2
Irradiation with radio-frequency 10 V/m; 27 to 500 MHz 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes
eld, non-modulated; Shock Half-sine
IEC 60255-22-3 (report), class III
Irradiation with radio-frequency 10 V/m; 80 to 1000 MHz;
IEC 60255-21-2, class I Acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms,
3 shocks in each direction of 3
eld, amplitude-modulated; 80 % AM; 1 kHz 3 orthogonal axes
IEC 61000-4-3, class III Seismic vibration Sinusoidal
Irradiation with radio-frequency 10 V/m; 900 MHz; IEC 60255-21-3, class I 1 to 8 Hz: 3.5 mm amplitude
eld, pulse-modulated;
IEC 61000-4-3/ENV 50204, class III
repetition frequency 200 Hz;
duty cycle 50 %
4
Fast transients/bursts 2 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; burst length (vertical axis)
IEC 60255-22-4 and IEC 61000-4-4, 15 ms; repetition rate 300 ms; both 8 to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration
class III polarities; Ri = 50 ; duration 1 min (horizontal axis)
Line-conducted HF, amplitude- 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz;
(vertical axis)
5
modulated IEC 61000-4-6, class III 80 % AM; 1 kHz
Magnetic eld with power 1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes
frequency 30 A/m continuous;
During transportation
IEC 60255-6
300 A/m for 3 s; 50 Hz
0.5 mT; 50 Hz Standard IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2 6
Oscillatory surge withstand 2.5 to 3 kV (peak); Vibration Sinusoidal
capability ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 1 to 1.5 MHz, decaying oscillation; IEC 60255-21-1, class II 5 to 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude;
(common mode) 50 surges per s; duration 2 s; IEC 60068-2-6 8 to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration

Ri = 150 to 200
4 to 5 kV; 10/150 ns;
7
capability ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 50 surges per s; both polarities; Shock Half-sine
(common mode) duration 2 s; Ri = 80 IEC 60255-21-2, class I Acceleration 15 g, duration 11 ms,
Radiated electromagnetic
interference ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2
10 to 20 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz;
amplitude and pulse modulated
3 orthogonal axes 8
Continuous shock Half-sine
High frequency test 2.5 kV (peak, alternating polarity);
IEC 60255-21-2, class I Acceleration 10 g, duration 16 ms,
document 17C (SEC) 102 100 kHz, 1 MHz, 10 and 50 MHz,
decaying oscillation; Ri = 50
3 orthogonal axes
9
Standard EN 50081-* (generic standard)
Conducted interference voltage, 150 to 30 MHz
aux. voltage
CISPR 22, EN 55022
Radio interference eld strength
Limit class B
30 to 1000 MHz
10
CISPR 11, EN 55011 Limit class A
11
12
13
14
15
Technical data
Climatic stress tests Functions
1 Temperatures
Permissible temperature 20 C to +70 C
Breaker supervision
Current detection
during service (> 55 C decreased display contrast) Setting range 0.05 x IN to 4.00 x IN (steps 0.01
Recommended temperature 5 C to +55 C x I N)
during service
2 Permissible temperature during
storage
25 C to +55 C
Drop-off ratio
Tolerance
Approx. 0.9
0.01 x IN or 5 % of set value
Initiation conditions
Permissible temperature during 25 C to +70 C
transport Depending on ordered version Phase-segregated initiation (single-
pole trip from feeder protection) or
3 Storage and transport with
standard works packaging! common-phase initiation (three-
pole trip from feeder protection)
Humidity and common-phase initiation
Permissible humidity Mean value per year 75 % relative (three-pole trip from non-short-
circuit protection)
4 We recommend that all units are
installed such that they are not
humidity; on 30 days per year 95 %
relative humidity; condensation not
permissible!
Times
subjected to direct sunlight, nor Pickup time Approx. 15 ms with measured
to large temperature uctuations quantities present
which may give rise to condensa- Approx. 25 ms after switch-on of
5 tion.
Drop-off time with sinusoidal
measured quantities
10 ms
measured quantities
Service conditions
Drop-off time maximum 25 ms
The relay is designed for use in The shield of the RS485 cable
Delay times for all time stages 0.00 s to 32.00 s (steps 0.01 ms)
6 industrial environment, for instal-
lation in standard relay rooms and
must be grounded.
It is not permissible to withdraw
or deactivated
compartments so that with proper Delay time tolerance 1 % of set value or 10 ms
or insert individual modules
installation electromagnetic under voltage. In the withdrawn The set times are pure delay times.
compatibility (EMC) is ensured. condition, some components
7 The following should also be
heeded:
are electrostatically endangered;
during handling the standards Additional functions
All contactors and relays which for electrostatically endangered Operational value measurements
operate in the same cubicle or components must be observed. Operational current values IL1; IL2; IL3
on the same relay panel as the The modules are not endange-
8 digital protection equipment
should, as a rule, be tted
red when plugged in.
WARNING! The relay is not
Measurement range
Tolerance
0 % to 240 % IN
3 % of rated value or of measured
value
with suitable spike quenching designed for use in residential,
elements. Steady-state measured value supervision
commercial or light-industrial
Current unbalance Imax / Imin > symmetry factor
9 All external connection leads
in substations from 100 kV
upwards should be shielded
environment as dened in
EN 50081. as long as I > Ilimit
with a shield capable of carrying Fault event data storage

power currents and grounded at Storage of annunciations of the last
both sides. No special measures eight faults with max. 30 messages
10 are normally necessary for
substations of lower voltages.
each
Time assignment
Resolution for operational 1s
annunciations
11 Resolution for fault event
annunciations
1 ms
Max. time deviation 0.01 %

Data storage for fault recording (max. 8 fault events)
12 Total storage time (fault detection
or trip command = 0 ms)
Max. 5 s, selectable pre-trigger and
post-fault time
Max. storage period 0.30 to 5.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
per fault event Tmax
13 Pre-trigger time Tpre

Post-fault time Tpost
0.05 to 0.50 s (steps 0.01 s)
0.05 to 0.50 s (steps 0.01 s)
Sampling rate 1 instantaneous value per ms
at 50 Hz
1 instantaneous value per 0.83 ms
14 at 60 Hz
15

7SV600 numerical circuit-breaker failure protection relay
Rated current; rated frequency

7SV600 - AA0- DA0
1
1 A; 50/60 Hz 1
5 A; 50/60 Hz 5

DC 24, 48 V 2
DC 60, 110, 125 V 4
DC 220, 250 V / AC 115 V, 50/60 Hz
AC 230 V, 50/60 Hz
5
6
3
Unit design
For panel surface mounting with terminals on both sides
For panel surface mounting with terminals at top and bottom
B
D 4
For panel ush mounting / cubicle mounting E
Options
For common-phase initiation
For common-phase initiation or phase-segregated initiation
0
1
5

6
DIGSI 4
units running under MS Windows (version Windows 2000/ 7
XP Professional Edition) device templates, Comtrade Viewer,
electronic manual included as well as Getting started manual
on paper, connecting cables (copper) 7XS5400-0AA00
Basis
8
Professional
9
RS232 (V.24)RS485 converter * 7XV5700 - 00
Plug-in auxiliary power supply unit AC 220 V / 50 Hz 0 10

Plug-in auxiliary power supply unit AC 110 V / 60 Hz 1
With RS485 connecting cable for 7SJ6, 7RW6, 7SD6, 7SV6 A A

With RS485 connecting cable with 9-pin connector for SIMEAS Q
With RS485 connecting cable with plug connector for SIMEAS T
B
C
11
Without RS232 connecting cable A
With RS232 connecting cable 7XV5100-2 for PC/notebook, 9-pin
connector (female) B 12
With RS232 adapter, 25-pin connector (male) to 9-pin connector
(female) for connection to notebook/PC C
Converter full-duplex ber-optic cableRS485
With power supply DC 24 250 V and AC 110 /230 V 7XV5650-0BA00
13
Manual for 7SV600
For the latest version please visit www.siemens.com/siprotec
14
*) RS485 bus system up to 115 kbaud
RS485 bus cable and adaptor 7XV5103- AA ; see part 13.
15
Connection diagram
7 Fig. 10/33 General connection diagram of 7SV600 with presettings for common-phase initiation
10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 10/34 General connection diagram of 7SV600 with presettings for phase-segregated initiation
15
Relays for Various Protection Applications / 7SN60
SIPROTEC 7SN60 transient ground-fault protection relay
Function overview
Units for panel surface mounting or ush mounting in 7XP20
housing, with terminals on the side or terminals on the top/
bottom
Both fault directions indicated by LEDs and signaled by relays 2
High pickup sensitivity due to separate detection and evalua-
tion of total current and displacement voltage
1 A and 5 A rated current selectable for current transformer
3
LSP2367-afpen.tif
matching
16 selectable pickup thresholds for detection of transients in
the current path, even with higher steady-state total currents
of 10 to 300 mA
Fixed pickup threshold of 5 V for detection of transients in the
4
voltage path, even in the case of higher steady-state displace-
ment voltages
4 selectable pickup thresholds for evaluation of the displace-
ment voltage of 10 to 50 V
5
Optional suppression of switching operations by evaluation of
Fig. 10/35 SIPROTEC 7SN60 transient ground-fault relay the displacement voltage after a switching-induced transient
has occured
Wide-range power supply for connection to AC 110/230 V
6
Description systems, DC 60 to 250 V station batteries or DC 100 V voltage
transformers without switchover or DC 24 to 60 V
The highly sensitive 7SN60 transient ground-fault relay deter-
mines the direction of transient and continuous ground faults in
Binary inputs for remote reset and blocking with extremely
wide input voltage range of DC 24 to 250 V
7
systems with isolated neutral, in systems with high-impedance Automatic reset of direction indications and signals after 3 or
resistive grounding and in compensated systems. Continuous 10 s (selectable)
ground faults are indicated with a delay, either in conjunction
with a transient ground fault and subsequently persisting Automatic reset in case of intermittent ground faults only after 8
displacement voltage, or with just the displacement voltage the last ground-fault, i.e. the correct indication and signal of
present. the rst ground fault is preserved
Detection of the displacement voltage and ground-fault indica-
tion/signal, independent of a transient fault detection 9
Signaling and indication of a continuous ground fault possible
only in the forward direction
Fault indication if sensitivity is set too high
10
11
12
13
14
15
3
LSP2002-afpen.tif
5 Fig. 10/36 Rear view Fig. 10/37 Fault currents in the system
Construction This charging process is bound up with a strong current surge

6 The relay contains all the components needed for
(starting oscillation).
The amplitude of this current surge depends on the expands of
Acquisition and evaluation of measured values the system and on the contact resistance values at the ground-
Operation and display fault location.
7 Output of signals and trip commands This current ows via the phase-to-ground capacitances of the
Power supply unaffected lines to ground, enters the ground-faulted phase
via the ground-fault location and ows back from there to the
The rated CT currents applied to the SIPROTEC 7SN60 can be 1 feeding transformer.
Thus the direction of the ground-fault induced current surge is
Three different housings are available. identical to that of the short-circuit current at the same location.
The ush-mounting/cubicle-mounting housings have terminals At measuring point A, as a result of the transformer summation
9 accessible from the rear. The surface-mounting housing has
terminals either on the side or on the top and bottom.
circuit, the ground current of the faulted line is not included
in the measurement, as this current portion ows through the
summation transformer of the relevant Holmgreen circuit and
back, thereby canceling itself out.
10 Protection functions It is the total of the capacitive ground currents from the non-
faulted system which has an effect. In the diagram they are
Ground-fault directional determination summated on the upper line. The capacitive currents of the
non-faulted lines 1, 3 and 2, 4 accumulate vectorially, which
The highly sensitive 7SN60 transient ground-fault relay deter-
11 mines the direction of transient and continuous ground faults in
explains why only three arrows instead of four are shown at the
measuring point A.
systems with isolated neutral, in systems with high-impedance
resistive grounding and in compensated systems. With a transient ground fault, the equalizing current forming a
damped oscillation of 100 to more than 1000 Hz decays after
12 Continuous ground faults are indicated with a delay, either in
conjunction with a transient ground fault and subsequently
only a few periods.
persisting displacement voltage, or with just the displacement The displacement voltage VEM thereupon also returns to zero.
voltage present. In grounded systems this takes place after a number of periods
(decay of the Petersen coil - ground capacitance oscillation
13 In the event of an ground fault, the neutral-point voltage to
ground can be as high as the full-phase voltage.
circuit); in non-grounded systems this occurs after a very short
time.
The phase-to-ground capacitances of the non-ground-faulted
phases are charged via the transformer inductance.
14
15
In the case of a continuous ground

fault, the equalizing current in the non-
grounded system changes into the mostly
capacitive continuous ground current
1
or, in compensated systems, into the
relatively low residual active current.
For the directional determination, the
direction of the rst transient of neutral
2
current and displacement voltage is
considered.
The relay indicates the direction of the 3
transient ground fault by LEDs (red = for-
ward direction, yellow = reverse direction)
and the relevant signaling relay pickups.
Continuous ground faults are indicated 4
after a settable time by an LED on the
relay and signaled by a signaling relay. Fig. 10/38 Neutral current and displacement voltage
Detection of the fault location 5

If the system is of radial conguration,
the red lamp immediately indicates the
faulted line.
If one of the lines consists of several
6
sections, the fault is upstream of the last
red lamp.
The transient ground-fault relay can also
be used without restrictions in any type of
7
meshed systems. Transient ground-fault
relays distributed at suitable points
throughout the system allow detection
of the ground-fault location from the
8
directional indications.
9
Fig. 10/39 Radial system Fig. 10/40 Radial system
10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 10/41 Meshed system Fig. 10/42 Ring system 15

Typical connection
Typical connection
1 Connection of the current and voltage

transformers
Figures 10/43 and 10/44 show the
2 connection of the current and voltage

transformer set in Holmgreen circuit.
In Fig. 10/43, the star point at the
line-side of the CT must be connected
3 to terminal 1 while the star point at the
busbar side of the CTs must be connected
to terminal 2.
The three phase voltages VL1, VL2 and
4 VL3 are connected to terminals 7, 8, 9
respectively. The grounded star point of
the voltage transformer is connected to
terminal 10.
5
6
Fig. 10/43 Connection of transformers and auxiliary power supply for panel ush-mounting
7 housing and panel surface-mounting housing (terminals on the side)
10
11
12
13
Fig. 10/44 Connection of transformers and auxiliary power supply for panel surface-mounting
housing (terminals on the top/bottom)
14
15
Technical data
General unit data

Measuring circuit
Rated current I0 1 or 5 A 1
Input impedance Z at 50 Hz and IN < 0.05
Rated voltage VN AC 100/110 V
Rated frequency fN
Thermal rating
50 Hz (16.7 Hz)
2
- In voltage path, continuous AC 140 V
- In current path, continuous 4 x IN
10 s
1 s (at 1 A)
30 x IN
100 x IN
3
1 s (at 5 ) 300 A
Auxiliary voltage
Rated auxiliary
voltage Vaux
DC 60 250 V and AC 100 230 V
without switchover
4
Power consumption at Quiescent Energized
DC 60 V 3.1 W 4.5 W
DC 110 V 3.0 W 4.5 W 5
DC 220 V 3.6 W 4.6 W
DC 250 V 3.7 W 4.8 W
AC 100 V 2.9 VA 4.2 VA
AC 110 V 3.0 VA 4.2 VA 6
AC 230 V 4.6 VA 5.8 VA
Binary inputs
Input voltage for blocking and
remote reset input
DC 24 250 V
7
Pickup thresholds for
- Blocking X30 pin 1-2, Approx. 19 V
remote reset X31 pin 1-2
- Blocking X30 pin 2-3,
remote reset X31 pin 2-3
Approx. 75 V 8
Signaling relays
Number of relays, forward or 2 NO contacts
reverse direction
Number of relays, continuous 1 NO contact
9
ground-fault signal
Number of relays, alarm 1 NC contact
Switching capacity Make
(all relays)
1000 W/VA
10
Switching capacity Break 30 W/VA
(all relays)
Switching voltage
Permissible switching current
AC/DC 250 V
11
Continuous 5A
0.5 s 30 A
Unit design
Housing, dimensions SIPROTEC housing of width
Refer to part 14 for dimension
12
drawings
For ush mounting, terminals 6 current / 25 voltage terminals
at the top/bottom
For panel surface mounting, 6 current / 25 voltage terminals
13
terminals on the side
Weight Approx. 4 kg
Standards
DIN VDE 0435, Part 303 and IEC 60255-5
14
15
Selection and ordering data, connection diagram
1 7SN60 transient ground-fault protection relay
In SIPROTEC housing width

7SN6000 - A0 0
Rated frequency 50 Hz

2 DC 60 250 V and AC 100 230 V without switchover 0
DC 24 48 V 1
For panel surface mounting with terminals on the side B

3 For panel surface mounting with terminals at top/bottom part
For panel ush mounting or cubicle mounting
D
E
10
11
13
14
15
Generator Protection
Page
SIPROTEC 4 7UM61 multifunction generator

and motor protection relay 11/3
SIPROTEC 4 7UM62 multifunction generator,

motor and transformer protection relay 11/33
SIPROTEC 7UW50 tripping matrix 11/69
SIPROTEC 7RW600 numerical voltage, frequency and

overexcitation protection relay 11/71
SIPROTEC 7VE6 multifunction paralleling device 11/81
SIPROTEC 7VU683 high speed busbar transfer 11/103
11
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Generator Protection / 7UM61
SIPROTEC 4 7UM61 multifunction generator and motor protection relay
Function overview
Basic version 1
Stator ground-fault protection
Sensitive ground-fault protection
Stator overload protection
2
(either denite-time or inverse-time)
Denite-time overcurrent-time protection, directional
Undervoltage and overvoltage protection 3
Underfrequency and overfrequency protection
LSP2176-afpen.tif
Reverse power protection
External trip coupling
4
Standard version
Scope of basic version plus: 5
Forward-power protection
Underexcitation protection
Fig. 11/1 SIPROTEC 4 7UM61
multifunction generator and motor protection relay
6
Full version
Description
The SIPROTEC 4 7UM61 protection relays can do more than just

Scope of standard version plus:
Inadverdent energization protection
7
protect. They also offer numerous additional functions. Be it 100 %-stator ground-fault protection with 3rd harmonic
ground faults, short-circuits, overloads, overvoltage, overfre-
Impedance protection
quency or underfrequency, protection relays assure continued
operation of power stations. The SIPROTEC 4 7UM61 protection Asynchronous motor
8
relay is a compact unit which has been specially developed and
designed for the protection of small and medium-sized genera- Scope of standard version plus
tors. They integrate all the necessary protection functions and
are particularly suited for the protection of:
Motor starting time supervision
Restart inhibit (without underexcitation protection)
9
Hydro and pumped-storage generators
Co-generation stations
Private power stations using regenerative energy sources such
10
as wind or biogases
Diesel generator stations Operational measured values V, I, f,
Every metering value Wp, Wq
Gas-turbine power stations
Industrial power stations Time metering of operation hours 11
Conventional steam power stations. Self-supervision of relay
The device can also be used for protecting synchronous and
asynchronous motors. Communication interfaces 12
The integrated programmable logic functions (continuous func- System interface
tion chart CFC) offer the user high exibility so that adjustments IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
can easily be made to the varying power station requirements,
on the basis of special system conditions.
PROFIBUS-DP
MODBUS RTU 13
DNP 3.0
communication architectures with the control system.
14
15
Application
Application Protection functions Abbreviation ANSI No. Generator

Basic Stan- Full Motor
1 The 7UM6 protection relays of the dard async.
SIPROTEC 4 family are compact multifunc- Stator ground-fault protection non- V0>, 3I0> 59N, 64G,
tion units which have been developed for directional, directional \(V0, 3I0) 67G
small to medium-sized power generation Sensitive ground-fault protection IEE> 50/51GN
2 plants. They incorporate all the necessary
protective functions and are especially
(also rotor ground-fault protection)
Stator overload protection I 2t
(64R)
49
suitable for the protection of: Denite-time overcurrent protection I> +V< 51
with undervoltage seal-in
3 Co-generation stations
Denite-time overcurrent protection,
directional
I>>, Direc. 50/51/67
Private power stations using regen- Inverse-time overcurrent protection t = f (I)+V< 51V
erative energy sources such as wind or Overvoltage protection V> 59
biogases Undervoltage protection V< 27
4 Power generation with diesel generators Frequency protection f<, f> 81
Gas turbine power stations Reverse-power protection P 32R
Overexcitation protection (Volt/Hertz) V/f 24
Industrial power stations

5 Conventional steam power stations.
External trip coupling (7UM611/612)
V2/V1, I1/I2
Incoup.
60FL
2/4 2/4 2/4 2/4
They can also be employed for protection Trip circuit supervision (7UM612) T.C.S. 74TC
of motors and transformers. Forward-power protection P>, P< 32F

6 The numerous other additional functions
assist the user in ensuring cost-effective
Underexcitation protection
1/xd
I2>, t =f(I2)
40
46
system management and reliable power Breaker failure protection Imin> 50BF
supply. Measured values display current Inadvertent energization protection I>, V< 50/27
operating conditions. Stored status
7 indications and fault recording provide
100 %-stator-ground-fault protection
with 3rd harmonics
V0(3rd harm) 59TN 27TN
(3rd harm)

assistance in fault diagnosis not only in Impedance protection with Z< 21

the event of a disturbance in generator (I>+V<)-pickup
operation. Motor starting time supervision Ian2t 48
8 Combination of the units makes it pos-
Restart inhibit for motors I 2t 49 Rotor
External temperature monitoring 38
sible to implement effective redundancy
through serial interface (Thermo-box)
concepts.
Rate-of-frequency-change protection1) df/dt > 81R
9 Protection functions Vector jump supervision (voltage)1) >
1) Available as an option (please refer to Order No., position 15).
Numerous protection functions are neces-
sary for reliable protection of electrical Table 11/1 Scope of functions of the 7UM61
machines. Their extent and combination
10 are determined by a variety of factors,
such as machine size, mode of operation,
plant conguration, availability require-
ments, experience and design philosophy.
11 This results in multifunctionality, which is
implemented in outstanding fashion by
numerical technology.
12 In order to satisfy differing requirements,

the combination of functions is scalable
(see Table 11/1). Selection is facilitated by
division into groups.
13
14
15
Fig. 11/2 Overview

Generator Basic Construction

One application is concentrated on small generators or as
backup protection for larger generators. The function mix is also The SIPROTEC 4 units have a uniform design and a degree of 1
an effective addition to transformer differential protection with functionality which represents a whole new quality in protection
parallel-connected transformers. The functions are also suitable and control. Local operation has been designed according to
for system disconnection. ergonomic criteria. Large, easy-to-read displays were a major
Generator Standard
design aim. The DIGSI 4 operating program considerably
simplies planning and engineering and reduces commissioning
2
times.
This function mix is recommended for generator outputs exceed-
ing 1 MVA. It is also suitable for protection of synchronous The 7UM611 is congured in 19 inch, and the 7UM612 in
motors. Another application is as backup protection for the 19 inch width. This means that the units of previous models 3
larger block units. can be replaced. The height throughout all housing width incre-
ments is 243 mm.
Generator Full
Here, all protection functions are available and are recom-
All wires are connected directly or by means of ring-type cable
lugs. 4
mended from generator outputs exceeding 5 MVA. Backup
protection for the larger block units is also a recommended Alternatively, versions with plug-in terminals are also available.
application. These permit the use of prefabricated cable harnesses.
Asynchronous motor
In the case of panel surface mounting, the connecting terminals 5
are in the form of screw-type terminals at top and bottom. The
This protection function mix is recommended for motors up to communication interfaces are also arranged on the same sides.
1 2 MW. It offers a wide frequency operating range from 11 Hz
to 69 Hz. When an infeed is switched, the protection adapts to
the changed voltage and frequency.
6
LSP2166-afp.tif
9
Fig. 11/3 Rear view with wiring terminal safety cover and
serial interface
10
11
12
13
14
15
1 Denite-time overcurrent protection I>, I>> (ANSI 50, 51, 67)

This protection function comprises the short-circuit protection
for the generator and also the backup protection for upstream
2 devices such as transformers or power system protection.

An undervoltage stage at I> maintains the pickup when, during
the fault, the current falls below the threshold. In the event of
a voltage drop on the generator terminals, the static excitation
3 system can no longer be sufciently supplied. This is one reason
for the decrease of the short-circuit current.
The I>> stage can be implemented as high-set instantaneous trip Fig. 11/4 Protection with current transformer on terminal side
stage. With the integrated directional function it can be applied
4 for generators without star point CT (see Figure 11/4).
Inverse-time overcurrent protection (ANSI 51V)

This function also comprises short-circuit and backup protection
5 and is used for power system protection with current-dependent
protection devices.
IEC and ANSI characteristics can be selected (Table 11/2).
6 The current function can be controlled by evaluating the genera-

tor terminal voltage.
The controlled version releases the sensitive set current stage.
7 With the restraint version, the pickup value of the current is

lowered linearly with decreasing voltage.
Fig. 11/5 Characteristic of negative-sequence protection
The fuse failure monitor prevents unwanted operation.
8 Stator overload protection (ANSI 49)

The task of the overload protection is to protect the stator wind-
ings of generators and motors from high, continuous overload
Inverse
currents. All load variations are evaluated by the mathematical
9 model used. The thermal effect of the r.m.s. current value forms
the basis of the calculation. This conforms to IEC 60255-8.
Moderately inverse
Very inverse

In dependency of the current the cooling time constant is
Extremely inverse
automatically extended. If the ambient temperature or the tem-
Denite inverse
10 perature of the coolant are injected via PROFIBUS-DP, the model
automatically adapts to the ambient conditions; otherwise a
Table 11/2
constant ambient temperature is assumed.
Negative-sequence protection (ANSI 46)

11 Asymmetrical current loads in the three phases of a generator
cause a temperature rise in the rotor because of the negative
sequence eld produced.
12 This protection detects an asymmetrical load in three-phase

generators. It functions on the basis of symmetrical components
and evaluates the negative sequence of the phase currents.
The thermal processes are taken into account in the algorithm
13 and form the inverse characteristic. In addition, the negative

sequence is evaluated by an independent stage (alarm and trip)
which is supplemented by a time-delay element (see Fig. 11/5).
14
15
Underexcitation protection (ANSI 40)

(Loss-of-eld protection)
Derived from the generator terminal voltage and current, 1
the complex admittance is calculated and corresponds to the
generator diagram scaled in per unit. This protection prevents
damage due to loss of synchronism resulting from underexcita-
tion. The protection function provides three characteristics for
monitoring static and dynamic stability. In the event of exciter
2
failure, fast response of the protection can be ensured via binary
input. This input releases a timer with a short time delay.
The straight-line characteristics allow the protection of the 3
generator diagram to be optimally adapted (see Fig. 11/6). The
per-unit-presentation of the diagram allows the setting values to Fig. 11/6 Characteristic of underexcitation protection
be directly read out.
The positive-sequence systems of current and voltage are used 4
to calculate the admittance. This ensures that the protection
always operates correctly even with asymmetrical network
conditions.
If the voltage deviates from the rated voltage, the admittance
5
calculation has the advantage that the characteristics move in
the same direction as the generator diagram.
Reverse-power protection (ANSI 32R) 6

The reverse-power protection monitors the direction of active
power ow and picks up when the mechanical energy fails
because then the drive power is taken from the network. This
function can be used for operational shut-down (sequential
Fig. 11/7 Grading of impedance protection
7
tripping) of the generator but also prevents damage to the
steam turbines. The reverse power is calculated from the Undervoltage protection (ANSI 27)
positive-sequence systems of current and voltage. Asymmetrical The undervoltage protection evaluates the positive-sequence
network faults therefore do not cause reduced measuring components of the voltages and compares them with the 8
accuracy. The position of the emergency trip valve is injected threshold values. There are two stages available.
as binary information and is used to switch between two trip
command delays. When applied for motor protection, the sign The undervoltage function is used for asynchronous motors
() of the active power can be reversed via parameters. and pumped-storage stations and prevents the voltage-related
instability of such machines. 9
The function can also be used for monitoring purposes.
Monitoring of the active power produced by a generator can
be useful for starting up and shutting down generators. One
stage monitors threshold beyond one limit value while another
10
stage monitors threshold below another limit value. The power voltage is too high.
is calculated using the positive-sequence component of current
Either the maximum line-to-line voltages or the phase-to-ground
and voltage.
voltages (for low-voltage generators) can be evaluated. The 11
Impedance protection (ANSI 21) measuring results of the line-to-line voltages are independent
of the neutral point displacement caused by ground-faults. This
This fast short-circuit protection protects the generator, the
function is implemented in two stages.
generator transformer and is a backup protection for the power
system. This protection has two settable impedance stages; in
12
addition, the rst stage can be switched over via binary input.
With the circuit-breaker in open position (see Fig. 11/7) the
impedance measuring range can be extended. The overcurrent
pickup element with under-voltage seal-in ensures a reliable 13
pickup and the loop selection logic a reliable detection of the
faulty loop. With this logic it is possible to perform a correct
measurement via the unit transformer.
14
15
1 The frequency protection prevents impermissible stress of the

equipment (e.g. turbine) in case of under or overfrequency.
It also serves as a monitoring and control element.
The function has four stages; the stages can be implemented
2 either as under-frequency or overfrequency protection. Each
Even in the event of voltage distortion, the frequency measur-
ing algorithm reliably identies the fundamental waves and
3 determines the frequency extremely precisely. Frequency
Fig. 11/8 Logic diagram of breaker failure protection
Sensitive ground-fault protection (ANSI 50/51GN, 64R)

Overexcitation protection Volt/Hertz (ANSI 24)
The sensitive ground-current input can also be used as separate
4 The overexcitation protection serves for detection of an
unpermissible high induction (proportional to V/f) in generators
ground-fault protection. It is of two-stage form. Secondary
ground currents of 2 mA or higher can be reliably handled.
or transformers, which leads to thermal overloading. This may
occur when starting up, shutting down under full load, with Alternatively, this input is also suitable as rotor ground-fault
protection. A voltage with rated frequency (50 or 60 Hz) is
5 weak systems or under isolated operation. The inverse character-
istic can be set via seven points derived from the manufacturer connected in the rotor circuit via the interface unit 7XR61.
data. If a higher ground current is owing, a rotor ground fault has
occurred. Measuring-circuit monitoring is provided for this
In addition, a denite-time alarm stage and an instantaneous application (see Figure 11/20).
6 stage can be used.
100 % stator ground-fault protection with 3rd harmonic
For calculation of the V/f ratio, frequency and also the highest (ANSI 59TN, 27TN (3rd H.))
of the three line-to-line voltages are used. The frequency range
that can be monitored comprises 11 to 69 Hz. Owing to the design, the generator produces a 3rd harmonic
7 Stator ground-fault protection, non-directional, directional
that forms a zero system. It is veriable by the protection on
a broken delta winding or on the neutral transformer. The
(ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G) magnitude of the voltage amplitude depends on the generator
and its operation.
Ground faults manifest themselves in generators that are oper-
8 ated in isolation by the occurrence of a displacement voltage.
In case of unit connections, the displacement voltage is an
In the event of an ground fault in the vicinity of the neutral
point, there is a voltage displacement in the 3rd harmonic (drop-
adequate, selective criterion for protection. ping in the neutral point and rising at the terminals).
For the selective ground-fault detection, the direction of the
9 owing ground current has to be evaluated too, if there is a
Depending on the connection, the protection must be set in
either undervoltage or overvoltage form. It can also be delayed.
direct connection between generator and busbar. So as to avoid overfunction, the active power and the positive-
sequence voltage act as enabling criteria.
The protection relay measures the displacement voltage at a
10 VT located at the transformer star point or at the broken delta-

winding of a VT. As an option, it is also possible to calculate
The nal protection setting can be made only by way of a
primary test with the generator.
the zero-sequence voltage from the phase-to-ground voltages.
Depending on the load resistor selection, 90 to 95 % of the Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF)
stator winding of a generator can be protected.
11 A sensitive current input is available for ground-current measure-
In the event of scheduled downtimes or a fault in the generator,
the generator can remain on line if the circuit-breaker is defec-
ment. This input should be connected to a core-balance current tive and could suffer substantial damage.
transformer. The fault direction is deduced from the displace-
Breaker failure protection evaluates a minimum current and the
12 ment voltage and ground current. The directional characteristic
(straight line) can be easily adapted to the system conditions.
circuit-breaker auxiliary contact. It can be started by internal
protective tripping or externally via binary input. Two-channel
Effective protection for direct connection of a generator to
activation avoids overfunction (see Figure 11/8).
a busbar can therefore be established. During start-up, it is
possible to switch over from the directional to the displacement
13 voltage measurement via an externally injected signal.
Depending on the protection setting, various ground-fault
protection concepts can be implemented with this function
(see Figs. 11/17 to 11/21).
14
15
Inadvertent energization protection

(ANSI 50, 27)
This protection has the function of limit- 1
ing the damage of the generator in the
event of an unintentional switch-on of
the circuit-breaker, whether the generator
is standing still or rotating without being
excited or synchronized. If the power sys-
2
tem voltage is connected, the generator
starts as an asynchronous machine with
a large slip and this leads to excessively
high currents in the rotor.
3
A logic circuit consisting of sensitive
current measurement for each phase,
measured value detector, time control
and blocking as of a minimum voltage,
4
leads to an instantaneous trip command.
If the fuse failure monitor responds, this
function is ineffective.
5
Fig. 11/9 Temperature characteristic at rotor and thermal replica of the rotor (multiple start-ups)
(motor protection only) (ANSI 48)
motor against long unwanted start-ups, which might occur as a signal with which the motor starting circuit can be blocked. The
6
result of excessive load torque or excessive voltage drops within blockage is cancelled again after cooling down and the thermal
the motor, or if the rotor is locked. value has dropped below the pickup threshold.
The tripping time is dependent on the square of the start-up cur-
rent and the set start-up time (Inverse Characteristic). It adapts
As the fan provides no forced cooling when the motor is off, it
cools down more slowly. Depending on the operating state, the
7
itself to the start-up with reduced voltage. The tripping time is protection function controls the cooling time constant. A value
determined in accordance with the following formula: below a minimum current is an effective changeover criterion.
I 2
tTrip = start t start max System disconnection 8
I rms
Take the case of in-plant generators feeding directly into a
tTrip Tripping time system. The incoming line is generally the legal entity boundary
Istart Permissible start-up current

between the system owner and the in-plant generator. If the
incoming line fails as the result of auto-reclosure, for instance,
9
tstart max Permissible start-up time a voltage or frequency deviation may occur depending on the
power balance at the feeding generator. Asynchronous condi-
Irms Measured r.m.s. current value tions may arise in the event of connection, which may lead to
Calculation is not started until the current Irms is higher than an
damage on the generator or the gearing between the generator 10
and the turbine. Besides the classic criteria such as voltage and
adjustable response value (e.g. 2 IN, MOTOR).
frequency, the following two criteria are also applied (vector
If the permissible locked-rotor time is less than the permissible jump, rate-of-frequency-change protection).
start-up time (motors with a thermally critical rotor), a binary
signal is set to detect a locked rotor by means of a tachometer Rate-of-frequency-change protection (ANSI 81)
11
generator. This binary signal releases the set locked-rotor time, The frequency difference is determined on the basis of the
and tripping occurs after it has elapsed. calculated frequency over a time interval. It corresponds to the
Restart inhibit for motors (ANSI 66, 49Rotor)
momentary rate-of-frequency change. The function is designed
so that it reacts to both positive and negative rate-of-frequency
12
When cold or at operating temperature, motors may only be changes. Exceeding of the permissible rate-of-frequency change
connected a certain number of times in succession. The start-up is monitored constantly. Release of the relevant direction
current causes heat development in the rotor which is monitored
by the restart inhibit function.
depends on whether the actual frequency is above or below the
rated frequency. In total, four stages are available, and can be
13
used optionally.
Contrary to classical counting methods, in the restart inhibit
function the heat and cooling phenomena in the rotor are simu-
lated by a thermal replica. The rotor temperature is determined
on the basis of the stator currents. Restart inhibit permits restart
14
of the motor only if the rotor has enough thermal reserve for
a completely new start. Fig. 11/9 illustrates the thermal prole
for a permissible triple start out of the cold state. If the thermal
reserve is too low, the restart inhibit function issues a blocking
15
Vector jump Lockout (ANSI 86)
1 Monitoring the phase angle in the voltage is a criterion for

identifying an interrupted infeed. If the incoming line should
All binary outputs (alarm or trip relays) can be stored like LEDs
and reset using the LED reset key. The lockout state is also stored
fail, the abrupt current discontinuity leads to a phase angle jump in the event of supply voltage failure. Reclosure can only occur
in the voltage. This is measured by means of a delta process. The after the lockout state is reset.
command for opening the generator or coupler circuit-breaker is
2 issued if the set threshold is exceeded. Fuse failure and other monitoring
External trip coupling
For recording and processing of external trip information, there
3 are 2 (for 7UM611) or 4 (for 7UM612) binary inputs. They are
The measuring circuits, analog-digital conversion, power supply
voltages, memories and software sequence (watch-dog) are all
provided for information from the Buchholz relay or generator-
monitored.
specic commands and act like a protective function. Each input
initiates a fault event and can be individually delayed by a timer. The fuse failure function detects failure of the measuring voltage
4 Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74TC)
due to short-circuit or open circuit of the wiring or VT and avoids
overfunction of the undervoltage elements in the protection
One or two binary inputs can be used for monitoring the circuit- functions.
breaker trip coil including its incoming cables. An alarm signal The positive and negative-sequence system (voltage and cur-
5 occurs whenever the circuit is interrupted. rent) are evaluated.
Phase rotation reversal Filter time
If the relay is used in a pumped-storage power plant, matching All binary inputs can be subjected to a lter time (indication
6 to the prevailing rotary eld is possible via a binary input (gen-
erator/motor operation via phase rotation reversal).
suppression).
2 pre-denable parameter groups
7 In the protection, the setting values can be stored in two data

sets. In addition to the standard parameter group, the second
group is provided for certain operating conditions (pumped-
storage power stations). It can be activated via binary input,
8 local control or DIGSI 4.
10
11
12
13
14
15
Communication
Communication
With respect to communication, particular emphasis has been 1

one hand, and on the other hand provides openness for future
2
Local PC interface
The PC interface accessible from the front of the unit permits
quick access to all parameters and fault event data. The use
3
of the DIGSI 4 operating program during commissioning is
particularly advantageous.
Rear-mounted interfaces 4
Two communication modules on the rear of the unit incorporate Fig. 11/10 IEC 60870-5-103 star-type RS232 copper conductor
optional equipment complements and permit retrotting. They connection or ber-optic connection
assure the ability to comply with the requirements of different
communication interfaces (electrical or optical) and protocols
5
(IEC 60870, PROFIBUS, DIGSI).
Service interface
6
In the RS485 version, several protection units can be centrally
operated with DIGSI 4. By using a modem, remote control is
possible. This provides advantages in fault clearance, in
particular in unmanned substations.
7
System interface
This is used to communicate with a control or protection
and control system and supports, depending on the module
8
connected, a variety of communication protocols and interface
designs.
IEC 60870-5-103 Fig. 11/11 PROFIBUS: RS485 copper conductors 9

communication with protection relays. MODBUS RTU
IEC 60870-5-103 is supported by a number of protection unit MODBUS is also a widely utilized communication standard and is 10
manufacturers and is used worldwide. used in numerous automation solutions.
The generator protection functions are stored in the manufac-
DNP 3.0
turer-specic, published part of the protocol.
DNP 3.0 (Distributed Network Protocol version 3) is a messaging- 11
PROFIBUS-DP based communication protocol. The SIPROTEC 4 units are fully
PROFIBUS is an internationally standardized communication Level 1 and Level 2 compliant with DNP 3.0. DNP 3.0 is sup-
ported by a number of protection device manufacturers.
protocol (EN 50170). PROFIBUS is supported internationally
by several hundred manufacturers and has to date been used
Safe bus architecture
12
in more than 1,000,000 applications all over the world.
RS485 bus
With the PROFIBUS-DP, the protection can be directly connected With this data transmission via copper conductors, electromag-
to a SIMATIC S5/S7. The transferred data are fault data,
measured values and information from or to the logic (CFC).
netic interference inuences are largely eliminated by the use
of twisted-pair conductor. Upon failure of a unit, the remaining
13
system continues to operate without any faults.
The ber-optic double ring circuit is immune to electromag-
14
disturbance.
15
Communication
System solution
LSP2163-afpen.tif
LSP2162-afpen.tif
1 SIPROTEC 4 is tailor-made for use in
SIMATIC-based automation systems.
Via the PROFIBUS-DP, indications (pickup
and tripping) and all relevant operational
2 measured values are transmitted from the
protection unit.
Via modem and service interface, the
protection engineer has access to the
3 protection devices at all times. This
permits remote maintenance and
diagnosis.
Fig. 11/12 RS232/RS485 Fig. 11/13 820 nm ber-optic communication
Parallel to this, local communication is Electrical communication module module
4 possible, for example, during a major
inspection.
LSP2164-afpen.tif
6
7 Fig. 11/14 PROFIBUS communication module, optical, double-ring
10
11
12
13 Fig. 11/15 System solution: Communication
14
15
Typical connections
Typical connections
Direct generator busbar connection 1

Fig. 11/16 illustrates the recommended
standard connection if several generators
supply one busbar. Phase-to-ground
faults are disconnected by employing the 2
directional ground-fault criterion. The
ground-fault current is driven through the
cables of the system. If this is not sufcient,
an grounding transformer connected to 3
the busbar supplies the necessary current
(maximum approximately 10 A) and per-
mits a protection range of up to 90 %. The
ground-fault current should be detected by
means of core-balance current transform-
4
ers in order to achieve the necessary
sensitivity. The displacement voltage can
be used as ground-fault criterion during
starting operations until synchronization is 5
achieved.
Fig. 11/16 7
8
Direct generator busbar connection
with low-resistance grounding
If the generator neutral point has low-
resistance grounding, the connection
9
illustrated in Fig. 11/17 is recommended.
In the case of several generators, the
resistance must be connected to only one
generator, in order to prevent circulating 10
currents (3rd harmonic).
For selective ground-fault detection, the
ground-current input should be looped
into the common return conductor of the
11
two current transformer sets (differential
connection). The current transformers
must be grounded at only one point. The
displacement voltage VE is utilized as an 12
additional enabling criterion.
Balanced current transformers are desirable
with this form of connection. In the case
of higher generator power (for example, IN
13
approximately 2000 A), current transform-
ers with a secondary rated current of 5 A
are recommended.
14
Fig. 11/17
15
Typical connections

with high-resistance generator neutral
1 grounding
With this system conguration, selective
ground-fault detection is implemented
on the basis of the lower fault currents
2 through the differential connection of core-
balance current transformers (see Figure
11/18). Secondary-side grounding must be
effected at only one core-balance current
3 transformer. The displacement voltage is to
be utilized additionally as enable criterion.
The load resistor takes the form either
of primary or of secondary resistor with
4 neutral transformer. In the case of several
generators connected to the busbar, again
only one generator will be grounded via
the resistor.
5
8 Fig. 11/18
Unit connection with isolated star point

9 This conguration of unit connection is
a variant to be recommended (see
Figure 11/19). Ground-fault detection is
effected by means of the displacement
10 voltage. In order to prevent unwanted
operation in the event of ground faults
in the system, a load resistor must be
provided at the broken delta winding.
11 Depending on the plant (or substation), a
voltage transformer with a high power (VA)
may in fact be sufcient. If not, an ground-
ing transformer should be employed. The
12 available measuring winding can be used
for the purpose of voltage measurement.
Rotor ground-fault protection can be
implemented with the unassigned ground-
13 fault current input. The 7XR61 coupling
unit must be used for this purpose.
14
15 Fig. 11/19

Typical connections
Unit connection with neutral trans-

former
With this system conguration, disturbance 1
voltage reduction and damping in the
event of ground faults in the generator
area are effected by a load resistor con-
nected to generator neutral point. The
maximum ground-fault current is limited to
2
approximately 10 A. Conguration can take
the form of a primary or secondary resistor
with neutral transformer. In order to avoid
low secondary resistance, the transforma-
3
tion ratio of the neutral transformer should
be low. The higher secondary voltage can
be reduced by means of a voltage divider.
Electrically, the circuit is identical to the
4
conguration in Figure 11/19.
7
Fig. 11/20
8
Connection with low-voltage
generators
9
As is generally known, the low-voltage
system is solidly grounded, so that the gen-
erator neutral point is connected to ground
(see Figure 11/21). With this conguration,
there is the risk that, as a result of the 3rd
10
harmonics forming a zero phase-sequence
system, circulating currents will ow via
the N-conductor. This must be limited by
the generator or system conguration 11
(reactor).
Otherwise, connection corresponds to the
customary standard. In the case of residual
current transformer design, it has to be
12
ensured that the thermal current limit (1 s)
of the IEE input is restricted to 300 A.
13
Fig. 11/21 14
15
Typical connections
Connection of an asynchronous motor
1 The gure shows the standard connection

of motors of medium capacity
(500 kW to <(1-2) MW). In addition to the
short-circuit protection, an ground-fault
protection (VE; IE inputs) is available.
2 As the busbar voltage is being monitored,
starting of the motor is prevented if the
voltage is too low or in case of failure
of infeed the motor circuit-breaker is
3 opened. Here, the wide range of frequency
is advantangeous. For the detection of tem-
peratures, 2 thermo-boxes (temperature
monitoring boxes) can be connected via a
4 serial interface.
10
Fig. 11/22
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connections
Voltage transformer in open delta

connection (V-connection)
Protection can also be implemented on 1
voltage transformers in open delta connec-
tion. Figure 11/23 shows the connection
involved. If necessary, the operational
measured values for the phase-to-ground
voltages can be slightly asymmetrical. If
2
this is disturbing, the neutral point (R16) Fig. 11/23
can be connected to ground via a capacitor.
In the case of open delta connection, it is 3
not possible to calculate the displacement
voltage from the secondary voltages. It
must be passed to the protection relay
along a different path (for example, voltage
transformer at the generator neutral point
4
or from the grounding transformer).
Connection with two current

5
transformers
This conguration is to be found in older
systems with insulated or high-resistance 6
star point. This connection is illustrated
in Fig. 11/24. In the protection unit,
the secondary currents are represented
correctly and, in addition, the positive and
the negative-sequence system are correctly
7
Fig. 11/24
calculated. Limits of application occur
in the case of low-resistance and solid
grounding.
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
Technical data
Hardware Output relays
1 Analog inputs
Rated frequency 50 or 60 Hz
Number
7UM611 12 (1 NO, 1 optional as NC,
via jumper)
Rated current IN 1 or 5 A 7UM612 20 (1 NO, 2 optional as NC,
Ground current, sensitive IEmax 1.6 A via jumper)
2 Rated voltage VN
Power consumption
100 to 125 V Switching capacity
Make 1000 W / VA
With IN = 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA Break 30 VA
With IN = 5 A Approx. 0.3 VA Break (for resistive load) 40 W
For sensitive ground current Approx. 0.05 VA Break (for L/R 50 ms) 25 VA
3 Voltage inputs (with 100 V)

Capability in CT circuits
Approx. 0.3 VA Switching voltage
Permissible current
250 V
5 A continuous
Thermal (r.m.s. values) 100 IN for 1 s 30 A for 0.5 seconds
30 IN for 10 s LEDs
4 IN continuous
4 Dynamic (peak) 250 IN (one half cycle) Number
RUN (green) 1
Ground current, sensitive 300 A for 1 s
ERROR (red) 1
100 A for 10 s
15 A continuous Assignable LED (red)
7UM611 7
5 Dynamic (peak)
Capability in voltage paths
750 A (one half cycle)
230 V continuous
7UM612 14
Unit design
Auxiliary voltage
7XP20 housing For dimensions see dimension
Rated auxiliary voltage DC 24 to 48 V
drawings, part 14
6 DC 60 to 125 V
DC 110 to 250 V Degree of protection acc. to
EN 60529
and AC 115 V / 230 V with 50/60 Hz
For surface-mounting housing IP 51
Permitted tolerance 20 to +20 %
For ush-mounting housing
Superimposed (peak-to-peak) 15 % Front IP 51
7 Power consumption Rear
For the terminals
IP 50
IP 2x with terminal cover put on
During normal operation
7UM611 Approx. 4 W Weight
7UM612 Approx. 4.5 W Flush-mounting housing
8 During pickup with all inputs

and outputs activated
7UM611 Approx. 9.5 W
7UM611 ( x 19")
7UM612 ( x 19")
Approx. 5.5 kg
Approx. 7 kg
7UM611 ( x 19") Approx. 7.5 kg
Bridging time during auxiliary 7UM612 ( x 19") Approx. 12 kg
9 voltage failure
at Vaux = 48 V and Vaux 110 V 50 ms
at Vaux = 24 V and Vaux = 60 V 20 ms
Binary inputs
10 Number
7UM611 7
7UM612 15
3 pickup thresholds DC 10 to 19 V or DC 44 to 88 V
Range is selectable with jumpers 88 to 176 V DC1)
11 Maximum permissible voltage
Current consumption, energized
DC 300 V
Approx. 1.8 mA
12
13
14
15 1) Not valid for the CPU board.

Technical data
Serial interfaces Electrical tests

Operating interface for DIGSI 4
Connection Non-isolated, RS232, front panel;
Specications
Standards IEC 60255 (product standards) 1
9-pin subminiature connector ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0/.1/.2
Baud rate 4800 to 115200 baud UL 508
DIN 57435, part 303
Time synchronization IRIG-B / DCF 77 signal (Format IRIG-B000)
Connection 9-pin subminiature connector, Insulation tests
For further standards see below.
2
terminal with surface-mounting
housing Standards IEC 60255-5
Voltage levels Selectable 5 V or 12 V or 24 V Voltage test (100 % test) 2.5 kV (r.m.s.), 50/60 Hz
Service/modem interface for DIGSI 4 / modem / service

All circuits except for auxiliary
supply, binary inputs communi-
3
Isolated RS232 / RS485 9-pin subminiature connector cation and time synchronization
Test voltage 500 V / 50 Hz interfaces
Distance for RS232 Max. 15 m Voltage test (100 % test) DC 3.5 kV
Distance for RS485
Fiber-optic cable
Max. 1000 m
Integrated ST-connector
inputs
4
Optical wavelength = 820 nm Voltage test (100 % test) 500 V (r.m.s. value), 50/60 Hz
Permissible path attenuation Max. 8 dB for glass-ber 62.5/125 m RS485/RS232 rear side commu-
Max. 1.5 km
Bridgeable distance
synchronization interface 5
System interface IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, PROFIBUS-DP, MODBUS RTU Impulse voltage test (type test) 5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 s; 0.5 J;
Isolated RS232/RS485 9-pin subminiature connector All circuits except for commu- 3 positive and 3 negative impulses
Baud rate 4800 to 115200 baud nication interfaces and time at intervals of 5 s
Test voltage
Distance for RS232
500 V / 50 Hz
Max. 15 m
synchronization interface, class III
EMC tests for noise immunity; type test
6
PROFIBUS RS485 (product standards)
Test voltage 500 V / 50 Hz
Baud rate
Distance
Max. 12 Mbaud
1000 m at 93.75 kBaud;
DIN 57435 part 303 7
High frequency test 2.5 kV (peak value), 1 MHz;
100 m at 12 Mbaud
IEC 60255-22-1, class III = 15 ms, 400 pulses per s;
PROFIBUS ber-optic and VDE 0435 part 303, class III duration 2 s
Baud rate
ST connector
Max. 1.5 Mbaud
discharge; both polarities;
8
EN 61000-4-2, class IV 150 pF; Ri = 330
Permissible path attenuation Max. 8 dB for glass-ber 62.5/125 m Irradiation with RF eld, 10 V/m; 27 to 500 MHz
non-modulated
Distance 1.6 km (500 kB/s)
530 m (1500 kB/s) IEC 60255-22-3 (report), class III 9
Irradiation with RF eld, 10 V/m; 80 to 1000 MHz; 80 % AM;
Irradiation with RF eld, 10 V/m; 900 MHz; repetition
pulse-modulated, IEC 61000-4-3/ frequency 200 Hz; duty cycle 50 %
10
Fast transient interference bursts 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; burst length =
IEC 60255-22-4, IEC 61000-4-4, 15 ms; repetition rate 300 ms;
class IV both polarities;
11
12
13

14
For ber-optic interface please complete order number at 11th
position with 4 (FMS RS485) or 9 and Order code L0A (DP RS485)
and additionally order:
For single ring: SIEMENS OLM 6GK1502-3AB10
15
Technical data
EMC tests for noise immunity; type tests Mechanical stress tests

(SURGE), IEC 61000-4-5
Installation, class III
Impulse: 1.2/50 s Vibration, shock stress and seismic vibration
During operation
Auxiliary supply Common (longitudinal) mode: Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068
2 kV; 12 , 9 F Vibration Sinusoidal
2 1 kV; 2 , 18 F
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2
IEC 60068-2-6
10 to 60 Hz: 0.075 mm ampli-
tude;
Measurement inputs, binary inputs Common (longitudinal) mode:
and relay outputs 2 kV; 42 , 0.5 F Frequency sweep 1 octave/min
Differential (transversal) mode: 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes
3 Line-conducted HF, amplitude-

1 kV; 42 , 0.5 F
10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz;
Shock
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
Half-sinusoidal
modulated 80 % AM; 1 kHz IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks each in both directions of
IEC 61000-4-6, class III the 3 axes
Magnetic eld with power 30 A/m continuous; Seismic vibration Sinusoidal
4 frequency
300 A/m for 3 s; 50 Hz
0.5 mT; 50 Hz
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
IEC 60068-3-3
(horizontal axis)
IEC 60255-6 1 to 8 Hz: 1.5 mm amplitude
(vertical axis)
Oscillatory surge withstand 2.5 to 3 kV (peak); 1 to 1.5 MHz
5 capability
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1
damped wave; 50 surges per
second; Duration 2 s;
Ri = 150 to 200
(horizontal axis)
(vertical axis)
Fast transient surge withstand 4 to 5 kV; 10/150 ns; 50 surges per Frequency sweep 1 octave/min
capability second; both polarities; 1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes
6 ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1
Radiated electromagnetic interfe-
Duration 2 s ; Ri = 80
35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz
During transport
rence Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2

ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 Vibration Sinusoidal
7 Damped oscillations
IEC 60894, IEC 61000-4-12
2.5 kV (peak value), polarity
alternating 100 kHz, 1 MHz,
10 and 50 MHz, Ri = 200
Standard EN 50 081-* (technical generic IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 15 g, duration 11 ms,
8 standard)
150 kHz to 30 MHz
3 axes
on lines only auxiliary supply Limit class B Continuous shock Half-sinusoidal
IEC-CISPR 22 IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 10 g, duration 16 ms,
9 Interference eld strength

IEC-CISPR 22
30 to 1000 MHz
Limit class B
IEC 60068-2-29 1000 shocks in both directions of
the 3 axes
10
11
12
13
14
15
Technical data
Climatic stress tests Inverse-time overcurrent protection (ANSI 51V)

Temperatures
Setting ranges
Pickup overcurrent IP 0.1 to 4 A (steps 0.01 A);
5 times at IN = 5 A
1
Time multiplier 0.05 to 3.2 s (steps 0.01 s)
Temporarily permissible operating 20 C to +70 C / 4 F to +158 F IEC-characteristics T or indenite
Recommended permanent operating 5 C to +55 C / +25 F to +131 F
temperature acc. to IEC 60255-6
Time multiplier
ANSI-characteristics D
0.5 to 15 (steps 0.01) or indenite
2
Undervoltage release V< 10 to 125 V (steps 0.1 V)
permanent storage Trip characteristics
IEC Normal inverse; very inverse;
transport
25 C to +70 C / 13 F to +158 F
ANSI
extremely inverse
Inverse; moderately inverse;
3
Humidity very inverse; extremely inverse;
denite inverse
Permissible humidity stress Annual average 75 % relative
93 % relative humidity;
Pickup threshold
Drop-off threshold
Approx. 1.1 IP
Approx. 1.05 IP for IP/IN 0.3 4
not exposed to direct sunlight or condensation is not permitted Tolerances
pronounced temperature changes Pickup threshold IP 1 % of set value 10/50 mA
that could cause condensation Pickup threshold V< 1 % of set value or 0.5 V
Functions
Time for 2 I/IP 20 5 % of nominal value + 1 % current
tolerance or 40 ms 5
Stator overload protection, thermal (ANSI 49)
General
Setting ranges
Frequency range 11 to 69 Hz
Denite-time overcurrent protection, directional (ANSI 50, 51, 67)
Factor k according to
IEC 60255-8
0.5 to 2.5 (steps 0.01)
6
Time constant 30 to 32000 s (steps 1 s)
Setting ranges
Time delay factor at standstill 1 to 10 (steps 0.01)
Overcurrent I>, I>> 0.1 to 8 A (steps 0.01 A); 5 times
Alarm overtemperature 70 to 100 % related to the trip
at IN = 5 A
Time delay T
Undervoltage seal-in V<
0 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s) or indenite
10 to 125 V (steps 0.1 V)
Alarm/Trip
Overcurrent alarm stage IAlarm
temperature (steps 1 %)
0.1 to 4 A (steps 0.01 A); 5 times at 7
IN = 5 A
Seal-in time of V< 0.1 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s)
Angle of the directional element 90 to + 90 (steps 1 ) Temperature at IN 40 to 200 C (steps 1 C)
(at I>) or 104 to 392 F (steps 1 F)
Times
Pickup time I>, I>>
Scaling temperature of cooling
medium
40 to 300 C (steps 1 C)
or 104 to 572 F (steps 1 F) 8
Reset time at emergency start 20 to 150000 s (steps 1 s)
At 2 times of set value Approx. 35 ms
At 10 times of set value Approx. 25 ms Drop-off ratio
Drop-off time I>, I>> Approx. 50 ms /Trip Drop-off with Alarm
Drop-off ratio I>: 0.95; I>>: 0.9 to 0.99 (steps 0.01)
/Alarm
I/IAlarm
Approx. 0.99
Approx. 0.95
9
Drop-off ratio V< Approx. 1.05
Tolerances
Tolerances
Regarding k x IP 2 % or 10/50 mA; class 2 %
Current pickup (starting) I>, 1 % of set value or 10/50 mA
I>>
Undervoltage seal-in V< 1 % of set value or 0.5 V
Regarding trip time 3 % or 1 s: class 3 %
10
Angle of the directional element 1
for I/(k IN)>1.25
Time delays 1 % or 10 ms
11
12
13
14
15
Technical data
Negative-sequence protection (ANSI 46) Forward-power protection (ANSI 32F)
1 Setting ranges
Permissible negative sequence
I2 perm. /IN
3 to 30 % (steps 1 %)
Setting ranges
Forward power PForw.</SN
Forward power PForw.>/SN
0.5 to 120 % (steps 0.1 %)
1 to 120 % (steps 0.1 %)
Denite time trip stage I2>>/IN 10 to 100 % (steps 1 %) Time delays T 0 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s) or indenite
Time delays TAlarm; TI2>> 0 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s) or indenite Times
Negative-sequence factor k 2 to 40 s (steps 0.1 s)
2 Cooling down time TCooling 0 to 50000 s (steps 1 s)
Pickup time
Times Pickup time Approx. 60 ms (50 Hz);
Pickup time (denite stage) Approx. 50 ms (fast measuring) Approx. 50 ms (60 Hz)
Drop-off time (denite stage) Approx. 50 ms Drop-off time Approx. 360 ms (50 Hz);
3 Drop-off ratios I2 perm.; I2 >>

Drop-off ratio thermal stage
Approx. 0.95
Drop-off at fall below of I2 perm.
Drop-off time (fast measuring)
Tolerances
Pickup values I2 perm.; I2 >> 3 % of set value or 0.3 % negative Drop-off ratio PForw..< 1.1 or 0.5 % of SN
sequence Drop-off ratio PForw.> Approx. 0.9 or 0.5 % of SN
4 Time delays
Thermal characteristic
1 % or 10 ms
5 % of nominal value +1 % current
Tolerances
Time for 2 I2/I2 perm. 20 tolerance or 600 ms at Q < 0.5 SN at accurate measuring
Underexcitation protection (ANSI 40) 0.5 % SN 3 % of set value
5 Setting ranges
Conductance thresholds 1/xd 0.25 to 3.0 (steps 0.01)
characteristic (3 characteristics) Impedance protection (ANSI 21)

Inclination angle 1, 2, 3 50 to 120 (steps 1 ) Setting ranges
Time delay T 0 to 50 s (steps 0.01 s) or indenite Overcurrent pickup I> 0.1 to 4 A (steps 0.01 A); 5 times
6 Times
Stator criterion 1/xd Approx. 60 ms Undervoltage seal-in V<
at IN = 5A
10 to 125 V (steps 0.1V)
characteristic; Impedance Z1 0.05 to 130 (steps 0.01 )
Undervoltage blocking Approx. 50 ms (related to IN =1 A)
Impedance Z1B 0.05 to 65 (steps 0.01 )
7 Drop-off ratio
Stator criterion 1/xd Approx. 0.95 (related to IN =1 A)
Impedance Z2 0.05 to 65 (steps 0.01 )
characteristic; (related to IN =1 A)
Undervoltage blocking Approx. 1.1
Tolerances Times
8 Stator criterion 1/xd
characteristic
3 % of set value Shortest tripping time
Drop-off time
Approx. 40 ms
Approx. 50 ms
Stator criterion 1 electrical
Undervoltage blocking 1 % or 0.5 V Drop-off ratio
Time delays T 1 % or 10 ms Overcurrent pickup I> Approx. 0.95
9 Reverse-power protection (ANSI 32R)

Tolerances
Approx. 1.05
Setting ranges Overcurrent pickup I> 1 % of set value. 10/50 mA

Reverse power PRev.>/SN 0.5 to 30 % (steps 0.01 %) Undervoltage seal-in V< 1 % of set value. or 0.5 V
Time delays T 0 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s) or indenite Impedance measuring Z1, Z2 |Z/Z| 5 % for 30 K 90
10 Times
Time delays T
1 % or 10 ms

Drop-off time Approx. 360 ms (50 Hz); Setting range
Approx. 300 ms (60 Hz) Undervoltage pickup V<, V<< 10 to 125 V (steps 0.1 V)
11 Drop-off ratio PRev.>

Tolerances
Approx. 0.6
(positive sequence as phase-to-
phase values)
Reverse power PRev.> 0.25 % SN 3 % set value Times
Time delays T 1 % or 10 ms Pickup time V<, V<< Approx. 50 ms
12 Drop-off time V<, V<<
Drop-off ratio V<, V<<
Approx. 50 ms
1.01 to 1.1 (steps 0.01)
Tolerances
Voltage limit values 1 % of set value or 0.5 V
13
14
15
Technical data
Overvoltage protection (ANSI 59) 90 % stator ground-fault protection, non-directional, directional

(ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G)
Setting ranges
Overvoltage pickup V>, V>>
(maximum phase-to-phase
30 to 170 V (steps 0.1 V) Setting ranges
Displacement voltage V0 > 5 to 125 V (steps 0.1 V)
1
voltage or phase-to-ground- Ground current 3I0> 2 to 1000 mA (steps 1 mA)
voltage) Angle of direction element 0 to 360 (steps 1 )
Time delays T 0 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s) or indenite Time delays T 0 to 60 s (steps 0,01 s) or indenite
Time Times 2
Pickup times V>, V>> Approx. 50 ms Pickup times V0>, 3I0> Approx. 50 ms
Drop-off times V>, V>> Approx. 50 ms Drop-off times V0>/ 3I0> Approx. 50 ms
Drop-off ratio V>, V>> 0.9 to 0.99 (steps 0.01) Drop-off ratio V0>, 3I0> 0.7
Tolerances
Voltage limit value 1 % of set value 0.5 V
Drop-off difference angle
Tolerances
10 directed to power system
3
Time delays T 1 % or 10 ms Displacement voltage 1 % of set value or 0.5 V
Frequency protection (ANSI 81) Ground current 1 % of set value or 0.5 mA
Setting ranges
Steps; selectable f>, f< 4 Sensitive ground-fault protection (ANSI 50/51GN, 64R) 4
Pickup values f>, f< 40 to 65 Hz (steps 0.01 Hz) Setting ranges
Time delays T 0 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s) or indenite Ground current pickup IEE>, IEE>> 2 to 1000 mA (steps 1 mA)
Undervoltage blocking V1< 10 to 125 V (steps 0.1 V) Time delays T 0 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s) or indenite
Times
Pickup times f>, f< Approx. 100 ms
Measuring circuit supervision
IEE<
1.5 to 50 mA (steps 0.1 mA) 5
Drop-off times f>, f< Approx. 100 ms Times
Drop-off difference f Approx. 20 mHz Pickup times Approx. 50 ms
Drop-off times Approx. 50 ms
Drop-off ratio V1<
Tolerances
Approx. 1.05
Measuring circuit supervision Approx. 50 ms 6
Frequency 10 mHz (at V> 0.5 VN) Drop-off ratio IEE>, IEE>> 0.95 or 1 mA
Undervoltage blocking 1 % of set value or 0.5 V Drop-off ratio measuring circuit Approx. 1.1 or 1 mA
Time delays T 1 % or 10 ms supervision IEE<
Overexcitation protection (Volt/Hertz) (ANSI 24) Tolerances

Ground current pickup 1 % of set value or 0.5 mA
7
Setting ranges Time delays T 1 % or 10 ms
Pickup threshold alarm stage 1 to 1.2 (steps 0.01)
Pickup threshold V/f>>-stage 1 to 1.4 (steps 0.01) 100 % stator ground-fault protection with 3rd harmonics
(ANSI 59TN, 27TN (3rd H.))
Time delays T
Characteristic values of V/f
1.1/1.15/1.2/1.25/1.3/1.35/1.4 Setting ranges 8
and assigned times t(V/f) 0 to 20000 s (steps 1 s) Displacement voltage 0.2 to 40 V (steps 0.1 V)
Cooling down time TCooling 0 to 20000 s (steps 1 s) V0 (3rd harm.)>, V0 (3rd harm.)<
Times (Alarm and V/f>>-stage) Time delay T 0 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s) or indenite
Pickup times at 1.1 of set value
Drop-off times
Approx. 60 ms
Approx. 60 ms
Active-power release
Positive-sequence voltage release
10 to 100 % (steps 1 %) or indenite
50 to 125 V (steps 0.1 V) or 9
indenite
Drop-off ratio (alarm, trip) 0.95
Times
Tolerances Pickup time Approx. 80 ms
V/f-pickup
Time delays T
Thermal characteristic (time)
3 % of set value
1 % or 10 ms
5 % rated to V/f or 600 ms
Drop-off time
Drop-off ratio
Approx. 80 ms
10
Undervoltage stage V0 (3rd harm.)< Approx. 1.4
Overvoltage stage V0 (3rd harm.)> Approx. 0.6
Active-power release Approx. 0.9
Positive-sequence voltage release
Tolerances
Approx. 0.95 11
Displacement voltage 3 % of set value or 0.1 V
Time delay T 1 % or 10 ms
12
13
14
15
Technical data
Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF) Restart inhibit for motors (ANSI 66, 49 Rotor)
1 Setting ranges
Current thresholds I>BF
Time delay BF-T
0.04 to 1 A (steps 0.01 A)
0.06 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s) or
Setting ranges
Motor starting
current IStart max /IN
3.0 to 10.0 (steps 0.01)
indenite Permissible starting 3.0 to 120.0 s (steps 0.1 s)

Time time TStart max
Rotor temperature equalization 0 to 60.0 min (steps 0,1 min)
2 Pickup time
Drop-off time
Approx. 50 ms
Approx. 50 ms time TEquali.
Minimum restart inhibit 0.2 to 120.0 min (steps 0.1 min)
Tolerances time TRestart, min
Current threshold I>BF/IN 1 % of set value or 10/50 mA Permissible number of warm 1 to 4
Time delay T 1 % or 10 ms starts nW
3 Inadvertent energizing protection (ANSI 50, 27) Difference between warm and
cold starts nK-nW
1 to 2
Setting ranges
Extensions of time constants 1.0 to 100.0
Current pickup I>>> 0.1 to 20 A (steps 0.1 A);
(running and stop)
5 times at IN= 5 A
4 Voltage release V1<

Time delay
10 to 125 V (steps 1 V)
Tolerances
Time delays T 1 % or 0.1 ms
Drop-off time 0 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s) or indenite Rate-of-frequency-change protection (ANSI 81R)
Times Setting ranges
Reaction time Approx. 25 ms Steps, selectable +df/dt >; -df/dt 4
5 Drop-off time
Drop-off ratio I>>>
Approx. 35 ms
Approx. 0.8
Pickup value df/dt
Time delays T
0.2 to 10 Hz/s (steps 0.1 Hz/s);
Drop-off ratio V1< Approx. 1.05 Undervoltage blocking V1< 10 to 125 V (steps 0.1 V)
Tolerances Times
6 Current pickup
Undervoltage seal-in V1<
5 % of set value or 20/100 mA
1 % of set value or 0.5 V
Pickup times df/dt
Drop-off times df/dt
Approx. 200 ms
Approx. 200 ms
Time delay T 1 % or 10 ms Drop-off ratio df/dt Approx. 0.95 or 0.1 Hz/s
External trip coupling Drop-off ratio V< Approx. 1.05
Number of external trip couplings 2 for 7UM611 Tolerances
7 4 for 7UM612 Rate-of-frequency change
Undervoltage blocking
Approx. 0.1 Hz/s at V> 0.5 VN
Number of supervised trip circuits 1
Vector jump supervision (voltage)
(only 7UM612)
8 Starting time supervision for motors (ANSI 48)
Setting ranges
Stage 0.5 to 15 (steps 0.1 )
Setting ranges Time delay T 0 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s) or indenite
Motor starting 1.0 to 16 (steps 0.01) Undervoltage blocking V1< 10 to 125 V (steps 0.1 V)
current IStart max /IN Tolerances
9 Starting current
pickup IStart, pickup. /IN
0.6 to 10 (steps 0.01) Vector jump
0.3 at V> 0.5 VN
Permissible starting 1.0 to 180 s (steps 0.1 s) Time delay T 1 % or 10 ms
time TStart max
Permissible locked rotor 0.5 to 120 s (steps 0.1 s) or Incoupling of temperature via serial interface (thermo-box) (ANSI 38)
10 time TBlocking
Times
indenite
Depending on the settings
Number of measuring sensors
Temperature thresholds
6 or 12
40 to 250 C or 100 to 480 F
Drop-off ratio Approx. 0.95 (steps 1 C or 1 F)
Tolerances Sensor types Pt100; Ni 100, Ni 120
11 Current threshold
Time delays T
1 % of set value, or 1 % of IN
5 % or 30 ms
12
13
14
15
Technical data
Operational measured values Additional functions

Description
Currents
Primary; secondary or per unit (%)
IL1; IL2; IL3; IEE; I1; I2
Fault event logging Storage of events of the last 8
faults
Puffer length max. 600 indications
1
Tolerance 0.2 % of measured values or
10 mA 1 digit Time solution 1 ms
Voltages VL1; VL2; VL3; VE; VL12; VL23; VL31; Operational indications Max. 200 indications
Tolerance
V 1; V 2
0.2 % of measured values or Elapsed-hour meter
Time solution 1 ms
Up to 6 decimal digits
2
0.2 V 1 digit (criterion: current threshold)
Impedance R, X Switching statistics Number of breaker operation
Tolerance 1% Phase-summated tripping current
Power S; P; Q 3
Tolerance 1 % of measured values or
CE conformity
0.25 % SN
This product is in conformity with the Directives of the European Com-
Phase angle
Tolerance
Power factor
<0.1
cos (p.f.)
munities on the harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating
to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Council Directive 2004/108/EEC
previous 89/336/EEC) and electrical equipment designed for use within
4
Tolerance 1 % 1 digit certain voltage limits (Council Directive 2006/95/EEC previous 73/23/EEC).
Frequency f This unit conforms to the international standard IEC 60255, and the
Tolerance 10 mHz at (V> 0.5 VN;
40 Hz < f < 65 Hz)
Part 303). 5
Overexcitation V/f; The unit has been developed and manufactured for application in an
Tolerance 1% industrial environment according to the EMC standards.
Thermal measurement L1; L2, L3, I2, V/f, This conformity is the result of a test that was performed by Siemens AG
Tolerance
Min./max.memory
5% in accordance with Article 10 of the Council Directive complying with
6
Memory Measured values with date and
time
Reset manual Via binary input
Via key pad
7
Via communication
Values
Positive sequence voltage
Positive sequence current
Active power
V1
I1
P
8
Reactive power Q
Frequency f
Displacement voltage VE(3rd harm.)
(3rd harmonics) 9
Energy metering
Meter of 4 quadrants WP+; WP; WQ+; WQ
Tolerance 1%
Fault records 10
Number of fault records Max. 8 fault records
Instantaneous values Max. 5 s
Storage time Depending on the actual frequency
Sampling interval (e. g. 1.25 ms at 50 Hz;
1.04 ms at 60 Hz)
11
Channels vL1, vL2, vL3, vE; iL1, iL2, iL3, iEE
R.m.s. values
Storage period
Sampling interval
Max. 80 s
Fixed (20 ms at 50 Hz; 16.67 ms at
60 Hz)
12
Channels V1, VE, I1, I2, IEE, P, Q, , f-fn
13
14
15
1 7UM61multifunction generator and motor protection relay

7UM61 - - 0-
Housing 19", 7 BI, 11 BO, 1 live status contact 1

Housing 19", 15 BI, 19 BO, 1 live status contact 2
2 Current transformer IN
1 A1) 1
5 A1) 5
3 Rated auxiliary voltage (power supply, indication voltage)

DC 24 to 48 V, threshold binary input 19 V3) 2
DC 60 to 125 V2), threshold binary input 19 V3) 4
DC 110 to 220 V2), AC 115 to 230 V, threshold binary input 88 V3) 5
4 Unit version
For panel surface-mounting, 2 tier screw-type terminals top/bottom B
For panel ush-mounting, plug-in terminals (2-/3- pin connector) D
5 Flush-mounting housing, screw-type terminal (direct connection, ring-type cable lugs) E
Region-specic default setting / function and language settings

Region DE, 50 Hz, IEC characteristics, language: German, (language can be selected) A
6 Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC / ANSI characteristics, language: English (UK), (language can be selected)
Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI characteristics, language: English (US), (language can be selected)
B
C
System interface (rear of units)

7 IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, electrical RS232 1
PROFIBUS-DP slave, electrical RS485 9
8 PROFIBUS-DP slave, optical 820 nm, double ring, ST connector* 9
L 0A
L 0 B
MODBUS, electrical RS485 9 L 0D
MODBUS, optical 820 nm, ST connector* 9 L 0 E
9 DNP 3.0, electrical RS485

DNP 3.0, optical 820 nm, ST connector*
9
9
L 0G
L 0H
DIGSI 4 / modem interface (rear of unit)

No interface 0
10 DIGSI 4, electrical RS232
DIGSI 4, temperature monitoring box, electrical RS485
1
2
DIGSI 4, temperature monitoring box, optical 820 nm, ST connector 3
11 Measuring functions
Without 0
Min./max. values, energy metering 3
Functions4)
12 Generator Basic A
Generator Standard B
Generator Full C
13 Motor, asynchronous
Additional functions4)
F
Without A A
Network decoupling (df/dt and vector jump) E
14 1) Rated current can be selected by means of jumpers. 4) For more detailed information on the functions see Table 11/1 on
2) Transition between the two auxiliary voltage ranges can be selected page 11/4.
by means of jumpers. * Not with position 9 = B; if 9 = B, please order 7UM61 unit with
RS485 port and separate ber-optic converters.
15 3) The binary input thresholds can be selected in stages by means of
jumpers.

DIGSI 4 1
(copper)
2
Basis
Professional
3
SIGRA 4 4
additionally)
other manufacturers (Comtrade format). 5
Running under MS Windows 2000 / XP Professional Edition
Connecting cable 6
Cable between PC / notebook (9-pin connector)
Coupling device for rotor ground-fault protection 7XR6100-0CA00 7

Short code
Series resistor for rotor ground-fault protection
(group: 013002)
Resistor for stator ground-fault protection

3PP1336-0DZ K2Y
8
(voltage divider, 5 : 1) (group 013001) 3PP1336-1CZ K2Y
Temperature monitoring box (thermo-box)

AC/DC 24 to 60 V 7XV5662-2AD10 9
AC/DC 90 to 240 V 7XV5662-5AD10
Manual for 7UM61

English C53000-G1176-C127-2 10
11
11
12
13
14
15

package
1 Connector 2-pin C73334-A1-C35-1 1 Siemens 11/26
LSP2289-afp.eps
3-pin C73334-A1-C36-1 1 Siemens 11/27
Crimp CI2 0.5 to 1 mm2 0-827039-1 4000 AMP 1)

2 Fig. 11/25 Mounting rail
for 19" rack
connector
CI2 0.5 to 2.5 mm2
0-827396-1
0-827040-1
1
4000
AMP 1)
AMP 1)
0-827397-1 1 AMP 1)
Type III+ 0.75 to 1.5 mm2 0-163083-7 4000 AMP 1)
3 0-163084-2 1 AMP 1)
LSP2090-afp.eps

LSP2091-afp.eps

For CI2 0-734372-1 1 AMP 1)
4 Fig. 11/26 Fig. 11/27 19"-mounting rail C73165-A63-D200-1 1 Siemens 11/25
5
LSP2093-afp.eps
LSP2092-afp.eps

6 Fig. 11/28 Fig. 11/29


7
10
11
12
13
14
15
9
1) NO or NC with jumper possible.
10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 11/30 7UM611 connection diagram (IEC standard) 15

10
11
12
13 1) NO or NC with jumper possible.
14
15 Fig. 11/31 7UM612 connection diagram (IEC standard)

9
1) NO or NC with jumper possible.
10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 11/32 7UM611 connection diagram (ANSI standard) 15

10
11
12
13 1) NO or NC with jumper possible.
14
15 Fig. 11/33 7UM612 connection diagram (ANSI standard)

SIPROTEC 4 7UM62 multifunction generator, motor and transformer protection relay
Function overview
Standard version 1
Scope of basic version plus:
100 %-stator ground-fault protection with 3rd harmonic
Impedance protection
2
Full version
LSP2171-afpen.eps
Scope of standard version plus:
DC voltage protection
3
Overcurrent protection during start-ups
Ground-current differential protection
Out-of-step protection
4
Additional version
Available for each version:
Fig. 11/34 SIPROTEC 4 7UM62 multifunction protection relay for
generators, motors and transformers
Sensitive rotor ground-fault protection (13 Hz method)
5
Stator ground-fault protection with 20 Hz voltage
Description
The SIPROTEC 4 7UM62 protection relays can do more than just Vector jump supervision 6
protect. They also offer numerous additional functions. Be it
Monitoring function
ground faults, short-circuits, overloads, overvoltage, overfrequency
or underfrequency asynchronous conditions, protection relays Trip circuit supervision
assure continued operation of power stations. The SIPROTEC 4
7UM62 protection relay is a compact unit which has been specially
Fuse failure monitor 7
Operational measured values V, I, f,
developed and designed for the protection of small, medium-sized
and large generators. They integrate all the necessary protection Energy metering values Wp, Wq
functions and are particularly suited for the protection of:
Self-supervision of relay
8
Private power stations using regenerative energy sources such
as wind or biogases
Diesel generator stations
System interface
9
Gas-turbine power stations
IEC 61850 protocol
Industrial power stations
Conventional steam power stations.
The SIPROTEC 4 7UM62 includes all necessary protection func-
PROFIBUS-DP
MODBUS RTU
10
tions for large synchronous and asynchronous motors and for DNP 3.0
transformers.
The integrated programmable logic functions (continuous func-
tion chart CFC) offer the user high exibility so that adjustments Hardware 11
can easily be made to the varying power station requirements
Analog inputs
on the basis of special system conditions.
8 current transformers
communication architectures with the control system. 4 voltage transformers 12
The following basic functions are available for all versions: 7/15 binary inputs
12/20 output relays
Current differential protection for generators, motors and
transformers, stator ground-fault protection, sensitive ground- Front design 13
fault protection, stator overload protection, overcurrent-time
User-friendly local operation
protection (either denite time or inverse time), denite-time
overcurrent protection with directionality, undervoltage and 7/14 LEDs for local alarm
overvoltage protection, underfrequency and overfrequency
protection, overexcitation and underexcitation protection,
Function keys 14
Graphic display with 7UM623
external trip coupling, forward-power and reverse-power
protection, negative-sequence protection, breaker failure
protection, rotor ground-faults protection (fn, R-measuring),
motor starting time supervision and restart inhibit for motors.
15
Application generator as well as backup protection for the block transformer

including the power system. Additional functions such as protec-
1 The 7UM6 protection relays of the SIPROTEC 4 family are com- tion during start-up for generators with starting converters
are also included.The scope of functions can be used for the
pact multifunction units which have been developed for small to
medium-sized power generation plants. They incorporate all the second protection group, and functions that are not used, can be
necessary protective functions and are especially suitable for the masked out.
2 protection of:
Asynchronous motor
Besides differential protection, this function package includes
all protection functions needed to protect large asynchronous
3 Private power stations using regenerative energy sources such
as wind or biogases
motors (more than 1 MVA). Stator and bearing temperatures are
measured by a separate thermo-box and are transmitted serially
Power generation with diesel generators to the protection unit for evaluation.
Gas turbine power stations
Transformer
4 Industrial power stations
This scope of functions not only includes differential and
Conventional steam power stations.
overcurrent protection, but also a number of protection func-
They can also be employed for protection of motors and tions that permit monitoring of voltage and frequency stress, for
instance. The reverse-power protection can be used for energy
5 transformers.
The numerous other additional functions assist the user in
recovery monitoring of parallel-connected transformers.
ensuring cost-effective system management and reliable power

supply. Measured values display current operating conditions.
6 Stored status indications and fault recording provide assistance
in fault diagnosis not only in the event of a disturbance in
Construction
generator operation. The SIPROTEC 4 units have a uniform design and a degree of
functionality which represents a whole new quality in protection
Combination of the units makes it possible to implement effec- and control.
7 tive redundancy concepts.
Local operation has been designed according to ergonomic cri-
Protection functions teria. Large, easy-to-read displays were a major design aim. The
7UM623 is equipped with a graphic display thus providing and
Numerous protection functions are necessary for reliable protec-
depicting more information especially in industrial applications.
8 tion of electrical machines. Their extent and combination are
determined by a variety of factors, such as machine size, mode
The DIGSI 4 operating program considerably simplies planning
and engineering and reduces commissioning times.
of operation, plant conguration, availability requirements,
experience and design philosophy. The 7UM621 and 7UM623 are congured in 1/2 19 inches
9 This results in multifunctionality, which is implemented in

width. This means that the units of previous models can be
replaced. The height throughout all housing width increments
outstanding fashion by numerical technology.
is 243 mm.
In order to satisfy differing requirements, the combination of
All wires are connected directly or by means of ring-type cable
10 functions is scalable (see Table 11/3). Selection is facilitated by
division into ve groups.
lugs. Alternatively, versions with plug-in terminals are also avail-
able. These permit the use of prefabricated cable harnesses.
Generator Basic In the case of panel surface mounting, the connecting terminals
are in the form of screw-type terminals at top and bottom. The
11 One application concentrates on small and medium generators
for which differential protection is required. The function mix communication interfaces are also arranged on the same sides.
is also suitable as backup protection. Protection of synchronous
motors is a further application.
12 Generator Standard
In the case of medium-size generators (10 to 100 MVA) in a unit
connection, this scope of functions offers all necessary protec-
tion functions. Besides inadvertent energization protection, it
13 also includes powerful backup protection for the transformer or
the power system. The scope of protection is also suitable for
LSP2166-afp.tif
units in the second protection group.
14 Generator Full
Here, all protection functions are available and the main applica-
tion focuses on large block units (more than 100 MVA). The
function mix includes all necessary protection functions for the Fig. 11/35 Rear view with wiring terminal safety cover and serial
15 interface

Protection functions Abbreviation ANSI No. Gene- Gene- Gene- Motor Trans-
1
rator rator rator Asyn- former
Basic Standard Full chronous
Current differential protection I 87G/87T/87M
Stator ground-fault protection non-directional, V0>, 3I0> 59N, 64G
2
directional \(V0, 3I0) 67G
Sensitive ground-fault protection IEE> 50/51GN
(also rotor ground-fault protection) (64R)
Sensitive ground-fault prot. B (e.g. shaft current prot.) IEE-B> IEE-B< 51GN
3
Stator overload protection I 2t 49
Denite-time overcurrent prot. with undervolt. seal-in I> +V< 51
Denite-time overcurrent protection, directional I>>, Direc. 50/51/67 4
Inverse-time overcurrent protection t = f(I)+V< 51V
Overvoltage protection V> 59
V<, t = f(V)
f<, f>
27
81

5
Reverse-power protection -P 32R

Overexcitation protection (Volt/Hertz)
V/f
V2/V1, I2/I1
24
60FL
6
External trip coupling Incoup. 4 4 4 4 4
Trip circuit supervision T.C.S. 74TC
Forward-power protection P>, P< 32F 7
Underexcitation protection (loss-of-eld protection) 1/xd 40
Negative-sequence protection I2>, t = f(I2) 46
Breaker failure protection Imin> 50BF 8
Motor starting time supervision Istart2t 48
Restart inhibit for motors I2t 66, 49 Rotor
Rotor ground-fault protection (fn, R-measuring)
R, V<
64R (fn)
50/27

9
100 % stator ground-fault protection with 3rd V0 (3rd harm.) 59TN, 27TN 3rd
harmonics h
Impedance protection with (I>+V<) pickup Z< 21 10
Interturn protection UInterturn> 59N(IT)
DC voltage / DC current time protection Vdc > 59N (DC)
Idc > 51N (DC)
Overcurrent protection during startup I> 51 11
(for gas turbines)
Ground-current differential protection Ie 87GN/TN 1) 1) 1) 1)
Out-of-step protection
Rotor ground-fault protection
Z/t
RREF<
78
64R (1 3 Hz) 1) 1)

1)
12
(1 3 Hz square wave voltage)
100 % stator ground-fault protection with 20 Hz voltage RSEF< 64G (100 %) 1) 1) 1)
Rate-of-frequency-change protection df/dt > 81R 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 13
Vector jump supervision (voltage) > 1) 1) 1) 1) 1)
Threshold supervision
Supervision of phase rotation
Undercurrent via CFC
A, B, C
I<
47
37

14
External temperature monitoring via serial interface (Thermo-box) 38
1) Optional for all function groups.
15
Table 11/3 Scope of functions of the 7UM62

Current differential protection

(ANSI 87G, 87M, 87T)
1 This function provides undelayed short-
circuit protection for generators, motors
and transformers, and is based on the
current differential protection principle
2 (Kirchhoffs current law).
The differential and restraint (stabiliza-
tion) current are calculated on the basis
of the phase currents. Optimized digital
3 lters reliably attenuate disturbances such
as aperiodic component and harmonics.
The high resolution of measured quanti-
ties permits recording of low differential
4 currents (10 % of IN) and thus a very high
sensitivity.
An adjustable restraint characteristic
permits optimum adaptation to the condi-
5 tions of the protected object. Software is
Fig. 11/36 Restraint characteristic of current differential protection
used to correct the possible mismatch of
the current transformers and the phase
angle rotation through the transformer
6 (vector group). Thanks to harmonic
analysis of the differential current, inrush
(second harmonic) and overexcitation
(fth harmonic) are reliably detected, and
7 unwanted operation of the differential
protection is prevented. The current of
internal short-circuits is reliably measured
by a fast measuring stage (IDiff>>), which
operates with two mutually complemen-
8 tary measuring processes. An external
short-circuit with transformer saturation
is picked up by a saturation detector with
time and status monitoring. It becomes
9 active when the differential current (IDiff)
moves out of the add-on restraint area.
If a motor is connected, this is detected by
monitoring the restraint current and the
10 restraint characteristic is briey raised.
Fig. 11/37 Restraint characteristic of ground-current differential protection
This prevents false tripping in the event
of unequal current transmission by the
current transformers.
11 Figure 11/36 shows the restraint characteristic and various DC components in particular are suppressed by means of
areas. specially dimensioned lters. A number of monitoring processes
avoid unwanted operation in the event of external short-circuits.
Ground-current differential protection (ANSI 87GN, 87TN) In the case of a sensitive setting, multiple measurement ensures
12 The ground-current differential protection permits high sensitiv- the necessary reliability.
ity to single-pole faults. The zero currents are compared. On the However, attention must be drawn to the fact that the sensitivity
one hand, the zero-sequence current is calculated on the basis limits are determined by the current transformers.
of the phase currents and on the other hand, the ground current
13 is measured directly at the star-point current transformer. The protection function is only used on generators when the
neutral point is grounded with a low impedance. In the case of
The differential and restraint quantity is generated and tted transformers, it is connected on the neutral side. Low imped-
into the restraint characteristic (see Fig. 11/37). ance or solid grounding is also required.
14
15
Denite-time overcurrent protection I>, I>> (ANSI 50, 51, 67)

This protection function comprises the short-circuit protection
for the generator and also the backup protection for upstream 1
devices such as transformers or power system protection.
An undervoltage stage at I> maintains the pickup when, during
the fault, the current drops below the threshold. In the event of
a voltage drop on the generator terminals, the static excitation
2
system can no longer be sufciently supplied. This is one reason
for the decrease of the short-circuit current.
The I>> stage can be implemented as high-set instantaneous
trip stage. With the integrated directional function it can be used
3
as backup protection on the transformer high-voltage side. With
the information of the directional element, impedance protec-
Fig. 11/38 Characteristic of negative-sequence protection
tion can be controlled via the CFC.
4
Inverse-time overcurrent protection (ANSI 51V)
This function also comprises short-circuit and backup protection Characteristics ANSI IEC 60255-3
and is used for power system protection with current-dependent
protection devices.
Inverse 5
Moderately inverse
IEC and ANSI characteristics can be selected (Table 11/4).
Very inverse
The current function can be controlled by evaluating the genera-
tor terminal voltage.
Extremely inverse
Denite inverse

6
The controlled version releases the sensitive set current stage.
Table 11/4
With the restraint version, the pickup value of the current is
lowered linearly with decreasing voltage. 7
The fuse failure monitor prevents unwanted operation. Underexcitation protection (Loss-of-eld protection)
(ANSI 40)
Stator overload protection (ANSI 49)
The task of the overload protection is to protect the stator
Derived from the generator terminal voltage and current,
the complex admittance is calculated and corresponds to the
8
windings of generators and motors from high, continuous generator diagram scaled in per unit. This protection prevents
overload currents. All load variations are evaluated by a damage due to loss of synchronism resulting from underexcita-
mathematical model. The thermal effect of the r.m.s. current
value forms the basis of the calculation. This conforms to
tion. The protection function provides three characteristics for
monitoring static and dynamic stability. Via a transducer, the 9
IEC 60255-8. excitation voltage (see Figure 11/52) can be injected and, in the
In dependency of the current, the cooling time constant is event of failure, a swift reaction of the protection function can
automatically extended. If the ambient temperature or the be achieved by timer changeover.
temperature of the coolant are injected via a transducer (TD2)
or PROFIBUS-DP, the model automatically adapts to the The straight-line characteristics allow the protection to be opti-
10
ambient conditions; otherwise a constant ambient temperature mally adapted to the generator diagram (see Figure 11/39). The
is assumed. per-unit-presentation of the diagram allows the setting values to
Negative-sequence protection (ANSI 46)

be directly read out.
The positive-sequence systems of current and voltage are used
11
Asymmetrical current loads in the three phases of a generator to calculate the admittance. This ensures that the protection
cause a temperature rise in the rotor because of the negative- always operates correctly even with asymmetrical network
sequence eld produced. conditions.
12
This protection detects an asymmetrical load in three-phase If the voltage deviates from the rated voltage, the admittance
generators. It functions on the basis of symmetrical components calculation has the advantage that the characteristics move in
and evaluates the negative sequence of the phase currents. the same direction as the generator diagram.
The thermal processes are taken into account in the algorithm
and form the inverse characteristic. In addition, the negative
13
sequence is evaluated by an independent stage (alarm and trip)
which is supplemented by a time-delay element (see Fig. 11/38).
In the case of motors, the protection function is also used to
monitor a phase failure.
14
15
1 The reverse-power protection monitors the direction of active

power ow and picks up when the mechanical energy fails. This
function can be used for operational shut-down (sequential
tripping) of the generator but also prevents damage to the
steam turbines. The reverse power is calculated from the
2 positive-sequence systems of current and voltage. Asymmetrical
power system faults therefore do not cause reduced measuring
accuracy. The position of the emergency trip valve is injected as
binary information and is used to switch between two trip
3 command delays. When applied for motor protection, the sign
() of the active power can be reversed via parameters.
Fig. 11/39 Characteristic of underexcitation protection
4 Monitoring of the active power produced by a generator can be

useful for starting up and shutting down generators. One stage
monitors exceeding of a limit value, while another stage moni-
tors falling below another limit value. The power is calculated
5 using the positive-sequence component of current and voltage.

The function can be used to shut down idling motors.
Impedance protection (ANSI 21)
6 This fast short-circuit protection protects the generator and

the unit transformer and is a backup protection for the power
system. This protection has two settable impedance stages; in
addition, the rst stage can be switched over via binary input.
With the circuit-breaker in the open position the impedance
7 measuring range can be extended (see Figure 11/40).
Fig. 11/40 Grading of impedance protection
The overcurrent pickup element with undervoltage seal-in Frequency protection (ANSI 81)
ensures a reliable pickup and the loop selection logic ensures a
The frequency protection prevents impermissible stress of the
8 reliable detection of the faulty loop. With this logic it is possible
to perform correct measurement via the unit transformer. equipment (e.g. turbine) in case of under or overfrequency. It
also serves as a monitoring and control element.
The function has four stages; the stages can be implemented
9 The undervoltage protection evaluates the positive-sequence
components of the voltages and compares them with the
either as underfrequency or overfrequency protection. Each
threshold values. There are two stages available.
Even in the event of voltage distortion, the frequency measur-
The undervoltage function is used for asynchronous motors ing algorithm reliably identies the fundamental waves and
10 and pumped-storage stations and prevents the voltage-related
instability of such machines.
determines the frequency extremely precisely. Frequency
The function can also be used for monitoring purposes. Overexcitation protection Volt/Hertz (ANSI 24)
11 Overvoltage protection (ANSI 59) The overexcitation protection serves for detection of an
unpermissible high induction (proportional to V/f) in generators
or transformers, which leads to thermal overloading. This may
voltage is too high.
occur when starting up, shutting down under full load, with
12 Either the maximum line-to-line voltages or the phase-to-ground

voltages (for low-voltage generators) can be evaluated. The
weak systems or under isolated operation. The inverse character-
istic can be set via eight points derived from the manufacturer
measuring results of the line-to-line voltages are independent data.
of the neutral point displacement caused by ground faults. This
In addition, a denite-time alarm stage and an instantaneous
function is implemented in two stages.
13 stage can be used. For calculation of the V/f ratio, frequency and
also the highest of the three line-to-line voltages are used. The
frequency range that can be monitored comprises 11 to 69 Hz.
14
15
90 % stator ground-fault protection, non-directional,

directional (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G)
Ground faults manifest themselves in generators that are oper- 1
ated in isolation by the occurence of a displacement voltage.
In case of unit connections, the displacement voltage is an
adequate, selective criterion for protection.
For the selective ground-fault detection, the direction of the
2
owing ground current has to be evaluated too, if there is a
direct connection between generator and busbar.
The protection relay measures the displacement voltage at a
VT located at the transformer star point or at the broken delta
Fig. 11/41 Logic diagram of breaker failure protection
3
winding of a VT. As an option, it is also possible to calculate the
zero-sequence voltage from the phase-to-ground voltages. Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF)
Depending on the load resistor selection, 90 to 95 % of the
stator winding of a generator can be protected.
In the event of scheduled downtimes or a fault in the generator,
the generator can remain on line if the circuit-breaker is defec-
4
tive and could suffer substantial damage.
A sensitive current input is available for ground-current measure-
ment. This input should be connected to a core-balance current Breaker failure protection evaluates a minimum current and the
transformer. The fault direction is deduced from the displace- circuit-breaker auxiliary contact. It can be started by internal 5
ment voltage and ground current. The directional characteristic protective tripping or externally via binary input. Two-channel
(straight line) can be easily adapted to the system conditions. activation avoids overfunction (see Figure 11/41).
Effective protection for direct connection of a generator to a
busbar can therefore be established. During startup, it is possible
to switch over from the directional to the displacement voltage
Inadvertent energization protection (ANSI 50, 27) 6
This protection has the function of limiting the damage of the
measurement via an externally injected signal. generator in the event of an unintentional switch-on of the
Depending on the protection setting, various ground-fault circuit-breaker, whether the generator is standing still or rotating
protection concepts can be implemented with this function without being excited or synchronized. If the power system
voltage is connected, the generator starts as an asynchronous
7
(see Figures 11/51 to 11/54).
machine with a large slip and this leads to excessively high
Sensitive ground-fault protection (ANSI 50/51GN, 64R) currents in the rotor.
The sensitive ground-current input can also be used as separate A logic circuit consisting of sensitive current measurement for 8
ground-fault protection. It is of two-stage form. Secondary each phase, measured value detector, time control and block-
ground currents of 2 mA or higher can be reliably handled. ing as of a minimum voltage, leads to an instantaneous trip
command. If the fuse failure monitor responds, this function is
Alternatively, this input is also suitable as rotor ground-fault
protection. A voltage with rated frequency (50 or 60 Hz) is
ineffective. 9
connected in the rotor circuit via the interface unit 7XR61. If Rotor ground-fault protection (ANSI 64R)
a higher ground current is owing, a rotor ground fault has
occurred. Measuring circuit monitoring is provided for this This protection function can be realized in three ways with
application (see Figure 11/56). the 7UM62. The simplest form is the method of rotor-current
measurement (see sensitive ground-current measurement).
10
100 % stator ground-fault protection with 3rd harmonic
Resistance measurement at system-frequency voltage
(ANSI 59TN, 27TN (3rd H.))
Owing to the creative design, the generator produces a 3rd har-
The second form is rotor ground resistance measurement with
voltage at system frequency (see Fig. 11/56). This protection
11
monic that forms a zero phase-sequence system. It is veriable
measures the voltage injected and the owing rotor ground
by the protection on a broken delta winding or on the neutral
current. Taking into account the complex impedance from the
transformer. The magnitude of the voltage amplitude depends
on the generator and its operation.
coupling device (7XR61), the rotor ground resistance is calcu-
lated by way of a mathematical model. By means of this method, 12
In the event of an ground fault in the vicinity of the neutral the disturbing inuence of the rotor ground capacitance is
point, there is a change in the amplitude of the 3rd harmonic eliminated, and sensitivity is increased. Fault resistance values
voltage (dropping in the neutral point and rising at the termi- up to 30 k can be measured if the excitation voltage is without
nals). disturbances. Thus, a two-stage protection function, which
features a warning and a tripping stage, can be realized. An
13
Depending on the connection the protection must be set
additionally implemented undercurrent stage monitors the rotor
either as undervoltage or overvoltage protection. It can also be
circuit for open circuit and issues an alarm.
delayed. So as to avoid overfunction, the active power and the
positive-sequence voltage act as enabling criteria. 14
The picked-up threshold of the voltage stage is restrained by the
active power. This increases sensitivity at low load.
The nal protection setting can be made only by way of a
primary test with the generator.
15
Resistance measurement with a square wave voltage of 1 to 3 Hz I 2

tTrip = start t start max
I rms
1 A higher sensitivity is required for larger generators. On the one
hand, the disturbing inuence of the rotor ground capacitance tTrip Tripping time
must be eliminated more effectively and, on the other hand, the Istart Permissible start-up current
noise ratio with respect to the harmonics (e.g. sixth harmonic)
tstart max Permissible start-up time
of the excitation equipment must be increased. Injecting a low-
2 frequency square wave voltage into the rotor circuit has proven
itself excellently here (see Figure 11/57).
Irms Measured r.m.s. current value
Calculation is not started until the current Irms is higher than an
The square wave voltage injected through the controlling unit adjustable response value (e.g. 2 IN, MOTOR).
7XT71 leads to permanent recharging of the rotor ground capac-
3 itance. By way of a shunt in the controlling unit, the owing
If the permissible locked-rotor time is less than the permissible
start-up time (motors with a thermally critical rotor), a binary
ground current is measured and is injected into the protection signal is set to detect a locked rotor by means of a tachometer
unit (measurement input). In the absence of a fault (RE ), the generator. This binary signal releases the set locked-rotor time,
rotor ground current after charging of the ground capacitance is
4 close to zero. In the event of an ground fault, the fault resistance
including the coupling resistance (7XR6004), and also the
and tripping occurs after it has elapsed.
DC voltage time protection/DC current time protection

injecting voltage, denes the stationary current. The current (ANSI 59N (DC) 51N (DC))
square wave voltage and the frequency are measured via the
5 second input (control input). Fault resistance values up to 80
k can be measured by this measurement principle. The rotor
Hydroelectric generators or gas turbines are started by way of
frequency starting converters. An ground fault in the intermedi-
ground circuit is monitored for discontinuities by evaluation of ate circuit of the frequency starting converter causes DC voltage
the current during the polarity reversals. displacement and thus a direct current. As the neutral or
grounding transformers have a lower ohmic resistance than the
6 100% stator ground-fault protection with 20 Hz injection voltage transformers, the largest part of the direct current ows
through them, thus posing a risk of destruction from thermal
(ANSI 64 G (100%))
overloading.
Injecting a 20 Hz voltage to detect ground faults even at the
As shown in Fig. 11/55, the direct current is measured by means
7 neutral point of generators has proven to be a safe and reliable
method. Contrary to the third harmonic criterion (see page 11/8), of a shunt transformer (measuring transducer) connected
it is independent of the generators characteristics and the mode directly to the shunt. Voltages or currents are fed to the 7UM62
of operation. Measurement is also possible during system standstill depending on the version of the measuring transducer. The
(Fig. 11/56). measurement algorithm lters out the DC component and takes
8 This protection function is designed so as to detect both ground
the threshold value decision. The protection function is active as
from 0 Hz.
faults in the entire generator (genuine 100 %) and all electrically
connected system components. If the measuring transducer transmits a voltage for protection,
the connection must be interference-free and must be kept short.
9 The protection unit measures the injected 20 Hz voltage and the
owing 20 Hz current. The disturbing variables, for example sta- The implemented function can also be used for special applica-
tor ground capacitance, are eliminated by way of a mathematical tions. Thus, the r.m.s. value can be evaluated for the quantity
model, and the ohmic fault resistance is determined. applied at the input over a wide frequency range.
10 On the one hand, this ensures high sensitivity and, on the other
hand, it permits use of generators with large ground capacitance
Overcurrent protection during start-up (ANSI 51)
values, e.g. large hydroelectric generators. Phase-angle errors Gas turbines are started by means of frequency starting
through the grounding or neutral transformer are measured converters. Overcurrent protection during start-up measures
11 during commissioning and are corrected in the algorithm. short-circuits in the lower frequency level (as from about 5 Hz)
and is designed as independent overcurrent-time protection.
The protection function has a warning and tripping stage. The The pickup value is set below the rated current. The function
measurement circuit is also monitored and failure of the 20 Hz is only active during start-up. If frequencies are higher than
generator is measured. 10 Hz, sampling frequency correction takes effect and the
12 Independent of ground resistance calculation, the protection further short-circuit protection functions are active.
function additionally evaluates the amount of the r.m.s. current
Out-of-step protection (ANSI 78)
value.
This protection function serves to measure power swings in
13 Starting time supervision (motor protection only) (ANSI 48) the system. If generators feed to a system short-circuit for too
Starting time supervision protects the motor against long long, low frequency transient phenomena (active power swings)
unwanted start-ups, which might occur as a result of excessive between the system and the generator may occur after fault
load torque or excessive voltage drops within the motor, or if the clearing. If the center of power swing is in the area of the block
14 rotor is locked. unit, the active power surges lead to unpermissible mechanical
stressing of the generator and the turbine.
The tripping time is dependent on the square of the start-up cur-
rent and the set start-up time (Inverse Characteristic). It adapts As the currents and voltages are symmetrical, the positive-
sequence impedance is calculated on the basis of their
15 itself to the start-up with reduced voltage. The tripping time is
determined in accordance with the following formula: positive-sequence components and the impedance trajectory
is evaluated. Symmetry is also monitored by evaluation of the

between the system owner and the in-plant generator. If the

incoming line fails as the result of auto-reclosure, for instance,
a voltage or frequency deviation may occur depending on the
power balance at the feeding generator. Asynchronous condi-
1
tions may arise in the event of connection, which may lead to
damage on the generator or the gearing between the generator
and the turbine. Besides the classic criteria such as voltage and
frequency, the following two criteria are also applied: vector
2
jump, rate-of-frequency-change protection.
Rate-of-frequency-change protection (ANSI 81)

The frequency difference is determined on the basis of the
3
calculated frequency over a time interval. It corresponds to the
momentary rate-of-frequency change. The function is designed
so that it reacts to both positive and negative rate-of-frequency
changes. Exceeding of the permissible rate-of-frequency change 4
is monitored constantly. Release of the relevant direction
depends on whether the actual frequency is above or below the
rated frequency. In total, four stages are available, and can be
used optionally. 5
Vector jump
Monitoring the phase angle in the voltage is a criterion for
Fig. 11/42 Ranges of the characteristic and possible oscillation proles
identifying an interrupted infeed. If the incoming line should
fail, the abrupt current discontinuity leads to a phase angle jump
6
negative-phase-sequence current. Two characteristics in the R/X in the voltage. This is measured by means of a delta process. The
diagram describe the active range (generator, unit transformer command for opening the generator or coupler circuit-breaker is
or power system) of the out-of-step protection. The associated
counters are incremented depending on the range of the
issued if the set threshold is exceeded.
7
characteristic in which the impedance vector enters or departs. Restart inhibit for motors (ANSI 66, 49Rotor)
Tripping occurs when the set counter value is reached.
When cold or at operating temperature, motors may only be
The counters are automatically reset if power swing no longer
occurs after a set time. By means of an adjustable pulse, every
connected a certain number of times in succession. The start-up
current causes heat development in the rotor which is monitored
8
power swing can be signaled. Expansion of the characteristic by the restart inhibit function.
in the R direction denes the power swing angle that can be
Contrary to classical counting methods, in the restart inhibit
measured. An angle of 120 is practicable. The characteristic
can be tilted over an adjustable angle to adapt to the conditions
function the heat and cooling phenomena in the rotor are simu-
lated by a thermal replica. The rotor temperature is determined
9
prevailing when several parallel generators feed into the system.
on the basis of the stator currents. Restart inhibit permits restart
Inverse undervoltage protection (ANSI 27) of the motor only if the rotor has enough thermal reserve for a
Motors tend to fall out of step when their torque is less than
completely new start. Fig. 11/43 illustrates the thermal prole
for a permissible triple start out of the cold state. If the thermal
10
the breakdown torque. This, in turn, depends on the voltage. reserve is too low, the restart inhibit function issues a blocking
On the one hand, it is desirable to keep the motors connected signal with which the motor starting circuit can be blocked. The
to the system for as long as possible while, on the other hand, blockage is canceled again after cooling down and the thermal
the torque should not fall below the breakdown level. This
protection task is realized by inverse undervoltage protection.
value has dropped below the pickup threshold. 11
The inverse characteristic is started if the voltage is less than the As the fan provides no forced cooling when the motor is off, it
pickup threshold Vp<. The tripping time is inversely proportional cools down more slowly. Depending on the operating state, the
to the voltage dip (see equation). The protection function uses
the positive-sequence voltage, for the protection decision.
protection function controls the cooling time constant. A value
below a minimum current is an effective changeover criterion. 12
I Sensitive ground-fault protection B (ANSI 51 GN)
tTRIP = TM
V
I
VP
The IEE-B sensitive ground-fault protection feature of 7UM62
provides greater exibility and can be used for the following 13
tTRIP Tripping time applications:
V Voltage Any kind of ground-fault current supervision to detect ground
Vp
TM
Pickup value
Time multiplier
faults (fundamental and 3rd harmonics)
Protection against load resistances
14
Shaft current protection in order to detect shaft currents of the
System disconnection generator shaft and prevent that bearings take damage.
Take the case of in-plant generators feeding directly into a
system. The incoming line is generally the legal entity boundary
The sensitive ground-current protection IEE-B uses either the hard- 15
ware input IEE1 or IEE2. These inputs are designed in a way that

allows them to cut off currents greater than

1.6 A (thermal limit, see technical data). This
1 has to be considered for the applications or
for the selection of the current transformers.
The shaft current protection function is of
particular interest in conjunction with hydro-
2 electric generators. Due to their construction,
the hydroelectric generators have relatively
long shafts. A number of factors such as
friction, magnetic elds of the generators and
3 others can build up a voltage across the shaft
which then acts as voltage source (electro-
motive force-emf). This inducted voltage of
approx. 10 to 30 V is dependent on the load,
4 the system and the machine.

If the oil lm covering a bearing is too
thin, breakdown can occur. Due to the low
resistance (shaft, bearing and grounding),
5 high currents may ow that destroy the bear-
ing. Past experience has shown that currents
greater than 1 A are critical for the bearings. Fig. 11/43 Temperature characteristic at rotor and thermal replica of the rotor
As different bearings can be affected, the cur- (multiple start-ups)
6 rent entering the shaft is detected by means

of a special transformer (folding transformer).
Phase rotation reversal
Interturn protection (ANSI 59N (IT))
If the relay is used in a pumped-storage power plant, matching
7 The interturn fault protection detects faults between turns

within a generator winding (phase). This situation may involve
to the prevailing rotary eld is possible via a binary input (gen-
erator/motor operation via phase rotation reversal).
relatively high circulating currents that ow in the short-
circuited turns and damage the winding and the stator. The 2 pre-denable parameter groups
protection function is characterized by a high sensitivity.
8 The displacement voltage is measured at the open delta winding
In the protection, the setting values can be stored in two data
sets. In addition to the standard parameter group, the second
by means of 3 two-phase isolated voltage transformers. So as to group is provided for certain operating conditions (pumped-
be insensitive towards ground faults, the isolated voltage trans- storage power stations). It can be activated via binary input,
former star point has to be connected to the generator star point local control or DIGSI 4.
9 by means of a high-voltage cable. The voltage transformer star
Lockout (ANSI 86)
point must not be grounded since this implies that the generator
star point, too, would be grounded with the consequence that All binary outputs (alarm or trip relays) can be stored like LEDs
each fault would lead to a single-pole ground fault. and reset using the LED reset key. The lockout state is also stored
10 In the event of an interturn fault, the voltage in the affected in the event of supply voltage failure. Reclosure can only occur
phase will be reduced causing a displacement voltage that is after the lockout state is reset.
detected at the broken delta winding. The sensitivity is limited
Fuse failure and other monitoring
rather by the winding asymmetries than by the protection unit.
11 An FIR lter determines the fundamental component of the
voltage based an the scanned displacement voltage. Selecting
an appropriate window function has the effect that the sensitiv- The measuring circuits, analog-digital conversion, power supply
12 ity towards higher-frequency oscillations is improved and the

disturbing inuence of the third harmonic is eliminated while
voltages, memories and software sequence (watch-dog) are all
monitored.
achieving the required measurement sensitivity.
The fuse failure function detects failure of the measuring voltage
External trip coupling due to short-circuit or open circuit of the wiring or VT and avoids
13 For recording and processing of external trip information, there
overfunction of the undervoltage elements in the protection
functions.
are 4 binary inputs. They are provided for information from the
Buchholz relay or generator-specic commands and act like a The positive and negative-sequence system (voltage and cur-
protection function. Each input initiates a fault event and can be rent) are evaluated.
14 individually delayed by a timer.
Filter time
Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74TC) All binary inputs can be subjected to a lter time (indication
One or two binary inputs can be used for monitoring the circuit- suppression).
15 breaker trip coil including its incoming cables. An alarm signal
occurs whenever the circuit is interrupted.

Communication
Communication
With respect to communication, particular emphasis has been 1

one hand, and on the other hand provides openness for future
2
Local PC interface
The PC interface accessible from the front of the unit permits
quick access to all parameters and fault event data. The use
3
of the DIGSI 4 operating program during commissioning is
particularly advantageous.
Rear-mounted interfaces 4
Two communication modules on the rear of the unit incorporate Fig. 11/44 IEC 60870-5-103 star-type RS232 copper conductor
optional equipment complements and permit retrotting. They connection or ber-optic connection
assure the ability to comply with the requirements of different
communication interfaces (electrical or optical) and protocols
5
(IEC 60870, PROFIBUS, DIGSI).
Service interface (xed)

6
In the RS485 version, several protection units can be centrally
operated with DIGSI 4. By using a modem, remote control is pos-
sible. This provides advantages in fault clearance, in particular in
unmanned substations.
7
System interface
8
designs. Furthermore, the units can exchange data through this
operated by DIGSI.
9
IEC 61850 protocol
dard for protection and control systems used by power supply
Fig. 11/45 Bus structure for station bus with Ethernet
and IEC 61850, ber-optic ring 10
corporations. Siemens is of the rst manufacturer to support
PROFIBUS-DP
masterless systems for bay and system interlocking. Access to PROFIBUS is an internationally standardized communication 11
the units via the Ethernet bus will also be possible with DIGSI. protocol (EN 50170). PROFIBUS is supported internationally by
several hundred manufacturers and has to date been used in
IEC 60870-5-103 more than 1,000,000 applications all over the world.
IEC 60870-5-103 is an internationally standardized protocol for With the PROFIBUS-DP, the protection can be directly connected
12
communication in the protected area. to a SIMATIC S5/S7. The transferred data are fault data, mea-
IEC 60870-5-103 is supported by a number of protection unit sured values and information from or to the logic (CFC).
manufacturers and is used worldwide.
MODBUS RTU 13
The generator protection functions are stored in the manufac-
MODBUS is also a widely utilized communication standard and is
turer-specic, published part of the protocol.
used in numerous automation solutions.
DNP 3.0 14
DNP 3.0 (Distributed Network Protocol version 3) is a messaging-
based communication protocol. The SIPROTEC 4 units are fully
Level 1 and Level 2 compliant with DNP 3.0. DNP 3.0 is sup-
ported by a number of protection device manufacturers. 15
Communication
Safe bus architecture
LSP2163-afpen.tif
LSP2162-afpen.tif
RS485 bus
1 With this data transmission via copper
conductors, electromagnetic interfer-
ence inuences are largely eliminated
by the use of twisted-pair conductor.
2 Upon failure of a unit, the remaining
system continues to operate without
any faults.
3 The ber-optic double ring circuit is
immune to electromagnetic interfer-
ence. Upon failure of a section between
two units, the communication system Fig. 11/46 RS232/RS485 Fig. 11/47 820 nm ber-optic communication
Electrical communication module module
4 continues to operate without distur-
bance.
System solution
5 SIPROTEC 4 is tailor-made for use in
LSP3.01-0021.eps
SIMATIC-based automation systems.
LSP2164-afpen.tif
Via the PROFIBUS-DP, indications (pickup

and tripping) and all relevant operational
6 measured values are transmitted from the
protection unit.
Via modem and service interface, the
protection engineer has access to the
7 protection devices at all times. This
permits remote maintenance and
Fig. 11/48 PROFIBUS communication module
optical, double-ring
Fig. 11/49 Optical Ethernet communication
module for IEC 61850 with
diagnosis (cyclic testing). integrated Ethernet switch
Parallel to this, local communication is

8 possible, for example, during a major
inspection.
For IEC 61850, an interoperable system
9 solution is offered with SICAM PAS. Via

the 100 Mbit/s Ethernet bus, the unit are
linked with PAS electrically or optically to
the station PC. The interface is standard-
ized, thus also enabling direct connection
10 of units of other manufacturers to the
Ethernet bus. With IEC 61850, however,
the units can also be used in other manu-
facturers' systems (see Fig. 11/45).
11 Analog output 0 to 20 mA
Alternatively to the serial interfaces up to
two analog output modules (4 channels)
12 can be installed in the 7UM62.
Several operational measured values
(I1, I2, V, P, Q, f, PF (cos ), stator, rotor)
can be selected and transmitted via the
13 0 to 20 mA interfaces.
14
15
Typical connections
Typical connections
Direct generator busbar connection 1

Figure 11/51 illustrates the recommended
standard connection when several genera-
tors supply one busbar. Phase-to-ground
faults are disconnected by employing the 2
directional ground-fault criterion. The
ground-fault current is driven through the
cables of the system.
If this is not sufcient, an grounding trans- 3
former connected to the busbar supplies
the necessary current (maximum approxi-
mately 10 A) and permits a protection
range of up to 90 %. The ground-fault
current should be detected by means
4
of core-balance current transformers in
order to achieve the necessary sensitivity.
The displacement voltage can be used
as ground-fault criterion during starting 5
operations until synchronization is
achieved.
Differential protection embraces protection
of the generator and of the outgoing cable.
6
The permissible cable length and the cur-
rent transformer design (permissible load)
are mutually dependent. Recalculation is
advisable for lengths of more than 100 m. 7
10
11
12
13
Fig. 11/51
14
15
Typical connections

with low-resistance grounding
1 If the generator neutral point has low-
resistance grounding, the connection illus-
trated in Fig. 11/52 is recommended. In the
case of several generators, the resistance
2 must be connected to only one generator,
in order to prevent circulating currents
(3rd harmonic).
For selective ground-fault detection, the
3 ground-current input should be looped
into the common return conductor of the
two current transformer sets (differential
connection). The current transformers
4 must be grounded at only one point. The
displacement voltage VE is utilized as an
additional enabling criterion.
Balanced current transformers (calibration
5 of windings) are desirable with this form of
connection. In the case of higher generator
power (for example, IN approximately
2000 A), current transformers with a
6 secondary rated current of 5 A are recom-
mended.
Ground-current differential protection can
be used as an alternative (not illustrated).
7
10
Fig. 11/52
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connections
Unit connection with isolated star point

This conguration of unit connection is
a variant to be recommended (see Fig. 1
11/53). Ground-fault detection is effected
by means of the displacement voltage. In
order to prevent unwanted operation in the
event of ground faults in the system, a load
resistor must be provided at the broken
2
delta winding. Depending on the plant (or
substation), a voltage transformer with a
high power (VA) may in fact be sufcient.
If not, an grounding transformer should be
3
employed. The available measuring wind-
ing can be used for the purpose of voltage
measurement.
In the application example, differential
4
protection is intended for the generator.
The unit transformer is protected by its own
differential relay (e.g. 7UT612).
5
As indicated in the gure, additional pro-
tection functions are available for the other
inputs. They are used on larger generator/
transformer units (see also Figures 11/56
and 11/58).
6
10
11
12
Fig. 11/53
13
14
15
Typical connections
Unit connection with neutral

transformer
1 With this system conguration, disturbance
voltage reduction and damping in the
event of ground faults in the generator
area are effected by a load resistor con-
2 nected to the generator neutral point.
The maximum ground-fault current is lim-
ited to approximately 10 A. Conguration
can take the form of a primary or second-
3 ary resistor with neutral transformer. In
order to avoid low secondary resistance,
the transformation ratio of the neutral
transformer should be below
4 VGen
500 V
3
The higher secondary voltage can be

5 reduced by means of a voltage divider.
Electrically, the circuit is identical to the
conguration in Fig. 11/53.
6 In the application opposite, the differential

protection is designed as an overall func-
tion and embraces the generator and unit
transformer. The protection function carries
7 out vector group adaptation as well as
other adaptations.
10
11
12
13 Fig. 11/54
14
15
Typical connections
Voltage transformer in open delta

connection (V-connection)
Protection can also be implemented 1
on voltage transformers in open delta
connection (Fig. 11/55). If necessary,
the operational measured values for the
phase-to-ground voltages can be slightly
asymmetrical. If this is disturbing, the
2
neutral point (R16) can be connected to Fig. 11/55
ground via a capacitor.
In the case of open delta connection, it is 3
not possible to calculate the displacement
voltage from the secondary voltages. It
must be passed to the protection relay
along a different path (for example, voltage
transformer at the generator neutral point
4
or from the grounding transformer).
100 % stator ground-fault protection,

ground-fault protection during start-up 5
Fig. 11/56 illustrates the interfacing of
100 % stator ground-fault protection with
voltage injection of 20 Hz, as meant for the
example of the neutral transformer. The
6
same interfacing connection also applies to
the broken delta winding of the grounding
transformer.
The 20 Hz generator can be connected
7
both to the DC voltage and also to a power-
ful voltage transformer (>100 VA). The load
of the current transformer 4NC1225 should
not exceed 0.5 .
8
The 7XT33, 7XT34 and load resistance
connection must be established with a
low resistance (RConnection < RL). If large
distances are covered, the devices are
9
accommodated in the grounding cubicle.
Connection of the DC voltage protection
function (TD 1) is shown for systems with
a starting converter. Depending on the
10
device selection, the 7KG6 boosts the
measured signal at the shunt to 10 V or
20 mA.
11
The TD 1 input can be jumpered to the
relevant signal.
Fig. 11/56 12
13
14
15
Typical connections
Rotor ground-fault protection with volt-

age injection at rated frequency
1 Fig. 11/57 shows the connection of rotor
ground-fault protection to a generator with
static excitation. If only the rotor current
is evaluated, there is no need for voltage
2 connection to the relay.
Ground must be connected to the ground-
ing brush. The external resistors 3PP1336
must be added to the coupling device
3 7XR61 if the circulating current can exceed
0.2 A as the result of excitation (sixth
harmonic). This is the case as from a rated
excitation voltage of >150 V, under worst-
4 case conditions.
Fig. 11/57
5 Rotor ground-fault protection with a

square wave voltage of 1 to 3 Hz
The measuring transducers TD1 and TD2
6 are used for this application. The control-
ling unit 7XT71 generates a square wave
voltage of about 50 V at the output. The
frequency can be jumpered and depends
7 on the rotor ground capacitance. Voltage

polarity reversal is measured via the control
input and the owing circular current is
measured via the measurement input.
Ground must be connected to the ground-
8 ing brush.
9 Fig. 11/58
10
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connections
Protection of an asynchronous motor

Fig. 11/59 shows a typical connection
of the protection function to a large 1
asynchronous motor. Differential protection
embraces the motor including the cable.
Recalculation of the permissible current
transformer burden is advisable for lengths
of more than 100 m.
2
The voltage for voltage and displacement
voltage monitoring is generally tapped
off the busbar. If several motors are con- 3
nected to the busbar, ground faults can be
detected with the directional ground-fault
protection and selective tripping is possible.
A core balance current transformer is used
to detect the ground current. The chosen
4
pickup value must be slightly higher if
there are several cables in parallel.
The necessary shut-down of the motor in 5
the event of idling can be realized with
active power monitoring.
10
11
12
Fig. 11/59
13
14
15
Typical connections
Use of selected analog inputs IEE1 IEE2 VE
1 Several protection functions take recourse

to the same analog inputs, thus ruling
Sensitive ground-fault protection
Directional stator ground-fault protection
1) 1)

out certain functions depending on the
Rotor ground-fault protection (fn, R-measuring)
application. One input may only be used by
one protection function. A different combi- 100 % stator ground-fault protection with 20 Hz voltage
2 nation can be used by the unit belonging to
Protection Group 2, for example.
Ground-current differential protection 1) 1)
1) optional (either IEE1 or IEE2)

Multiple use refers to the sensitive ground-
current inputs and the displacement
3 voltage input (see Table 11/5).
Table 11/5 Multiple use of analog inputs
The same applies to the measuring trans- TD1 TD2 TD3

ducers (Table 11/6). Injection of excitation voltage
4 Current transformer requirements DC voltage time/DC current time protection
Injection of a temperature
The requirements imposed on the current
Rotor ground-fault protection (1 to 3 Hz)
transformer are determined by the differen-

5 tial protection function. The instantaneous
trip stage (IDiff>>) reliably masters (via the
Processing of analog values via CFC
instantaneous algorithm) any high-current Table 11/6 Multiple use of measuring transducers
internal short-circuits.
6 The external short-circuit determines

the requirements imposed on the cur-
Symmetrical short-circuit limiting factor
Required actual accuracy limiting factor Resulting rated accuracy limiting factor
rent transformer as a result of the DC IpSC R + RCT
KSSC = Ktd K SSC = b K
component. The non-saturated period of Ipn RBN + RCT SSC
7 a owing short-circuit current should be

at least 5 ms. Table 11/7 shows the design
recommendations. Current transformer requirements
IEC 60044-1 and 60044-6 were taken into Transformer Generator
8 account. The necessary equations are

shown for converting the requirements into
Transient dimensioning
factor Ktd
4
N 100 ms
> (4 to 5)
N > 100 ms
the knee- point voltages. The customary Symmetrical short-circuit 1 1
I I
practice which presently applies should current Ipssc v sc pn, Tr x" d pn, G
9 also be used to determine the rated

primary current of the current transformer
Example vsc = 0.1
K'ssc > 40
xd = 0.12
K'ssc > (34 to 42)
rated current. It should be greater than or
equal to the rated current of the protected Note: Rated power 10 or 15 VA Note:
Identical transformers have Example: Secondary winding resistance
object.
10 to be employed Network transformer
10P10: (10 or 15) VA
Example:
IN, G approx. 1000 to 2000 A
(Isn = 1 or 5 A) 5P15: 15 VA
(Isn = 1 or 5 A)
IN, G > 5 000 A
11 5P20: 30 VA
(Isn = 1 or 5 A)
Knee-point voltage
12 IEC British Standard ANSI
V = K SSC ( Rct + Rb ) I SN V=
(Rct + Rb )I SN K K SSC
V = 20 I SN ( Rct + Rb )
SSC
1.3 20
13 Ktd Rated transient dimensioning factor Rct
Isn = 5A (typical value)
Secondary winding resistance
Ipssc Primary symmetrical short-circuit current vsc Short-circuit voltage (impedance voltage)
Ipn Rated primary current (transformer) xd Subtransient reactance
14 R'b
Rb
Connected burden
Rated resistive burden
Isn
tN
Rated secondary current (transformer)
Network time constant
Table 11/7 Multiple use of measuring transducers
15
Technical data
Hardware Output relays

Analog inputs
Rated frequency 50 or 60 Hz
Number
7UM621 12 (1 NO, 4 optional as NC,
via jumper)
1
Rated current IN 1 or 5 A 7UM622 21 (1 NO, 5 optional as NC,
Ground current, sensitive IEmax 1.6 A via jumper)
Rated voltage VN
Measuring transducer
100 to 125 V
- 10 to + 10 V (Ri=1 M) or
Switching capacity
Make 1000 W / VA 2
- 20 to + 20 mA (Ri = 10 ) Break 30 VA
Break (for resistive load) 40 W
Power consumption Break (for L/R 50 ms) 25 VA
With IN = 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA
With IN = 5 A
For sensitive ground current
Approx. 0.3 VA
Approx. 0.05 VA
Switching voltage
Permissible current
250 V
5 A continuous
3
Voltage inputs (with 100 V) Approx. 0.3 VA 30 A for 0.5 seconds
Capability in CT circuits LEDs
Thermal (r.m.s. values) 100 IN for 1 s
30 IN for 10 s
Number
RUN (green) 1
4
4 IN continuous
ERROR (red) 1
Dynamic (peak) 250 IN (one half cycle)
Assignable LED (red) 14
Ground current, sensitive 300 A for 1 s
100 A for 10 s
15 A continuous
Unit design
5
Dynamic (peak) 750 A (one half cycle) drawings, part 14
Capability in voltage paths 230 V continuous Degree of protection acc. to
Capability of measuring transducer
As voltage input 60 V continuous
EN 60529
IP 51 6
As current input 100 mA continuous
Front IP 51
Auxiliary voltage Rear IP 50
For the terminals IP 2x with terminal cover put on
DC 60 to 125 V Weight 7
DC 110 to 250 V Flush mounting housing
and AC 115 V/230 V with 50/60 Hz 7UM621 ( x 19") Approx. 7 kg
Permitted tolerance 20 to +20 % 7UM622 ( x 19") Approx. 9.5 kg
Superimposed (peak-to-peak)
Power consumption
15 % Surface mounting housing
7UM621 ( x 19") Approx. 12 kg
8
7UM622 ( x 19") Approx. 15 kg
During normal operation
7UM622
7UM623
During pickup with all inputs
Approx. 5.5 W
Approx. 8.1 W
Serial interfaces
9
and outputs activated Connection Non-isolated, RS232, front panel;
7UM611 Approx. 12 W 9-pin subminiature connector
7UM612 Approx. 15 W
Time synchronization IRIG B / DCF 77 signal (Format: IRIG-B000)
10
voltage failure Connection 9-pin subminiature connector,
at Vaux = 48 V and Vaux 110 V 50 ms terminal with surface-mounting
at Vaux = 24 V and Vaux = 60 V
Binary inputs
20 ms
Voltage levels
case
Selectable 5 V, 12 V or 24 V
11
Number Service/modem interface (Port C) for DIGSI 4 / modem / service
7UM621, 7UM623 7 Isolated RS232/RS485 9-pin subminiature connector
7UM622
3 pickup thresholds
15
DC 10 to 19 V or DC 44 to 88 V
Test voltage
Distance for RS232
500 V / 50 Hz
Max. 15 m 12
Range is selectable with jumpers DC 88 to 176 V1) Distance for RS485 Max. 1000 m
13
14
15
Technical data
System interface (Port B) EMC tests for noise immunity; type test
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, PROFIBUS-DP,MODBUS RTU
1 Isolated RS232/RS485
Baud rate
4800 to 115200 baud
(product standards)
Test voltage 500 V / 50 Hz DIN 57435 part 303
Distance for RS232 Max. 15 m High frequency test 2.5 kV (peak value), 1 MHz;
2 PROFIBUS RS485
and DIN 57435 part 303, class III
= 15 ms
400 pulses per s; duration 2 s
Test voltage 500 V / 50 Hz Electrostatic discharge 8 kV contact discharge;
Baud rate Max. 12 MBaud IEC 60255-22-2 class IV 15 kV air discharge;
Distance 1000 m at 93.75 kBaud; EN 61000-4-2, class IV both polarities; 150 pF; Ri = 330
3 PROFIBUS ber-optic
100 m at 12 MBaud
non-modulated
10 V/m; 27 to 500 MHz
Only for ush-mounting housing ST connector IEC 60255-22-3 (report), class III
For surface-mounting housing Optical interface with OLM1)
Baud rate Max. 1.5 MBaud Irradiation with RF eld, amplitude- 10 V/m; 80 to 1000 MHz; 80 % AM;
4 Optical wavelength
= 820 nm
Max. 8 dB for glass-ber 62.5/125 m
Irradiation with RF eld, 10 V/m; 900 MHz; repetition
Distance 1.6 km (500 kB/s) pulse-modulated frequency 200 Hz; duty cycle 50 %
530 m (1500 kB/s) IEC 61000-4-3/ ENV 50204, class III
Analog output module (electrical) 2 ports with 0 to 20 mA Fast transient interference bursts 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz;
5 System interface (Port B)
IEC 60255-22-4,
burst length = 15 ms; repetition
rate 300 ms; both polarities;
IEC 61850
Ethernet, electrical (EN 100) for IEC 61850 and DIGSI
Connection
6 for ush-mounting case Rear panel, mounting location "B",
two RJ45 connector, 100 Mbit/s
(SURGE),
IEC 61000-4-5 installation, class III
Auxiliary supply Common (longitudinal) mode:
acc. to IEEE802.3 2 kV; 12 , 9 F
for surface-mounting case At bottom part of the housing Differential (transversal) mode:
Test voltage 500 V; 50 Hz
7 Transmission speed
Distance
100 Mbits/s
20 m/66 ft
1 kV; 2 , 18 F
Measurement inputs, binary inputs Common (longitudinal) mode:
and relay outputs 2 kV; 42 , 0.5 F
Ethernet, optical (EN 100) for IEC 61850 and DIGSI Differential (transversal) mode:
1 kV; 42 , 0.5 F
Connection
8 for ush-mounting case Rear panel, mounting location "B",
LC connector receiver/transmitter
Line-conducted HF,
amplitude-modulated
10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM;
1 kHz
for panel surface-mounting case Not available IEC 61000-4-6, class III
Optical wavelength = 1350 nm Magnetic eld with power 30 A/m continuous;
Transmission speed 100 Mbits/s frequency 300 A/m for 3 s; 50 Hz
9 Laser class 1 acc. to EN 60825-1/-2 Glass ber 50/125 m or
glass ber 62/125 m
IEC 61000-4-8, class IV; IEC
60255-6
0.5 mT; 50 Hz
Permissible path attenuation Max. 5 dB for glass ber 62.5/125 m

Oscillatory surge withstand 2.5 to 3 kV (peak); 1 to 1.5 MHz
Distance Max. 800 m/0.5 mile
capability damped wave; 50 surges per
10 Electrical tests
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 second; duration 2 s;
Ri = 150 to 200
Specications Fast transient surge withstand 4 to 5 kV; 10/150 ns; 50 surges

capability per second; both polarities;
Standards IEC 60255 (product standards) ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 duration 2 s;
11 ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0/.1/.2
UL 508
Radiated electromagnetic interfe-
Ri = 80
35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz
DIN 57435, part 303
rence
For further standards see below
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2
Insulation tests
12 Standards IEC 60255-5
Damped oscillations
IEC 60894, IEC 61000-4-12
2.5 kV (peak value), polarity
alternating 100 kHz, 1 MHz, 10 and
50 MHz, Ri = 200
Voltage test (routine test) 2.5 kV (r.m.s.), 50 Hz
All circuits except for auxiliary sup-
ply, binary inputs communication
13 and time synchronization interfaces

Voltage test (routine test) 3.5 kV
Auxiliary voltage and binary inputs
Voltage test (routine test) 500 V (r.m.s. value), 50 Hz
only isolated communication
14 interfaces and time synchronization
interface
For ber-optic interface please complete order number at 11th
Impulse voltage test (type test) 5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 s; 0.5 J; position with 4 (FMS RS485) or 9 and Order code L0A (DP RS485)
All circuits except for communication 3 positive and 3 negative impulses and additionally order:
15 interfaces and time synchronization at intervals of 1 s

interface, class III
For single ring: SIEMENS OLM 6GK1502-3AB10

Technical data
EMC tests for interference emission; type tests Humidity

Standard
EN 50081-x (generic standard)
150 kHz to 30 MHz
Annual average 75 % relative
93 % relative humidity; condensa-
1
on lines Limit class B
only auxiliary supply IEC-CISPR 22 not exposed to direct sunlight or tion is
Interference eld strength 30 to 1000 MHz that could cause condensation
IEC-CISPR 22 Limit class B 2
Functions
General
During operation
Frequency range 11 to 69 Hz
Denite-time overcurrent protection, directional (ANSI 50, 51, 67)
3
Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068
Setting ranges
Overcurrent I>, I>> 0.05 to 20 A (steps 0.01 A);
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2 10 to 60 Hz: 0.075 mm ampli-
IEC 60068-2-6 tude;
Time delay T
5 times at IN = 5 A
0 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s) or indenite 4
Undervoltage seal-in V< 10 to 125 V (steps 0.1 V)
Seal-in time of V< 0.1 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s)
Angle of the directional element - 90 to + 90 (steps 1 )
Shock
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
Half-sinusoidal
(at I>>)
Times
5
Pickup time I>, I>>
the 3 axes
at 2 times of set value Approx. 35 ms
Seismic vibration Sinusoidal at 10 times of set value Approx. 25 ms
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
IEC 60068-3-3
(horizontal axis)
Drop-off time I>, I>>
Drop-off ratio
Approx. 50 ms
I>: 0.95; I>>: 0.9 to 0.99 (steps 0.01)
6
(vertical axis)
8 to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration Tolerances
(horizontal axis)
Current pickup (starting) I>, I>>
1 % of set value or 0.5 V 7
(vertical axis) Angle of the directional element 1
Frequency sweep 1 octave/min Time delays 1 % or 10 ms
1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes Inverse-time overcurrent protection (ANSI 51V)
During transport
Setting ranges 8
Pickup overcurrent IP 0.1 to 4 A (steps 0.01 A); 5 times
Vibration Sinusoidal at IN = 5A
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2 5 to 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude; Time multiplier 0.05 to 3.2 s (steps 0,01 s)
IEC-characteristics T
Time multiplier
or indenite
0.5 to 15 (steps 0.01) or indenite
9
20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes ANSI-characteristics D
Shock Half-sinusoidal Undervoltage release V< 10 to 125 V (steps 0.1 V)
3 axes
IEC Normal inverse; very inverse;
extremely inverse
10
Continuous shock Half-sinusoidal ANSI Inverse; moderately inverse;
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 10 g, duration 16 ms, very inverse; extremely inverse;
IEC 60068-2-29 1000 shocks in both directions of
the 3 axes Pickup threshold
Drop-off threshold
denite inverse
Approx. 1.1 IP
Approx. 1.05 IP for IP/IN 0.3
11
Climatic stress test Tolerances
Pickup threshold IP 1 % of set value or 10/50 mA
Temperatures
Pickup threshold V<
Time for 2 I/IP 20
5 % of nominal value + 1 % current 12
and -2, test Bd, for 16 h tolerance or 40 ms
Temporarily permissible operating 20 C to +70 C / 4 F to +158 F
Recommended permanent opera-
ting temperature acc. to
5 C to +55 C / +25 F to +131 F 13
IEC 60255-6
Limiting temperature during 25 C to +55 C / 13 F to +131 F 14
permanent storage
transport
15
Technical data
Stator overload protection, thermal (ANSI 49) Underexcitation protection (ANSI 40)
1 Setting ranges
Factor k according to IEC 60255-8
Time constant
0.5 to 2.5 (steps 0.01)
30 to 32000 s (steps 1 s)
Setting ranges
Conductance thresholds 1/xd
characteristic
0.20 to 3.0 (steps 0.01)
Time delay factor at stand still 1 to 10 (steps 0.01) (3 characteristics)

Alarm overtemperature 70 to 100 % related to the trip Inclination angle 1, 2, 3 50 to 120 (steps 1 )
Alarm/Trip temperature (steps 1 %) Time delay T 0 to 50 s (steps 0.01 s) or indenite
2 Overcurrent alarm stage IAlarm 0.1 to 4 A (steps 0.01 A); 5 times
at IN = 5 A
Undervoltage blocking V< 10 to 125 V (steps 0.1 V)
Times
Temperature at IN 40 to 200 C (steps 1 C) Stator criterion 1/xd characte- Approx. 60 ms
or 104 to 392 F (steps 1 F) ristic;
Scaling temperature of cooling 40 to 300 C (steps 1 C)
3 medium or 104 to 572 F (steps 1 F)
Drop-off ratio
Approx. 50 ms
Limit current ILimit 0.5 to 8 A (steps 0.01), 5 times at Stator criterion 1/xd characte- Approx. 0.95
IN = 5 A ristic;
Reset time at emergency start 20 to 150000 s (steps 1 s) Undervoltage blocking Approx. 1.1
4 Drop-off ratio
/Trip Drop-off with Alarm
Tolerances
Stator criterion 1/xd characteristic 3 % of set value
/Alarm Approx. 0.99 Stator criterion 1 electrical
I/IAlarm Approx. 0.95 Undervoltage blocking 1 % or 0.5 V
5 Tolerances
Regarding k x IN 2 % or 10/50 mA; class 2 % accor-
ding to IEC 60255-8
Setting ranges
Regarding trip time 3 % or 1 s: class 3 % according to Reverse power PRev.>/SN - 0.5 to - 30 % (steps 0.01 %)
IEC 60255-8 for I/(k IN)>1.25 Time delays T 0 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s) or indenite
6 Negative-sequence protection (ANSI 46) Times
Setting ranges
Permissible negative sequence 3 to 30 % (steps 1 %) Approx. 300 ms (60 Hz)
I2 perm. /IN Drop-off time Approx. 360 ms (50 Hz);
7 Denite time trip stage I2 >>/IN
Time delays TAlarm; TI2>>
10 to 200 % (steps 1 %)
0 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s) or indenite Drop-off ratio PRev.> Approx. 0.6
Negative-sequence factor K 1 to 40 s (steps 0.1 s) Tolerances
Cooling down time TCooling 0 to 50000 s (steps 1 s) Reverse power PRev.> 0.25 % SN 3 % set value
Times Time delays T 1 % or 10 ms
8 Pickup time (denite stage)
Drop-off time (denite stage)
Approx. 50 ms
Approx. 50 ms
Setting ranges
Drop-off ratios I2 perm.; I2>> Approx. 0.95
Forward power PForw.</SN 0.5 to 120 % (steps 0.1 %)
Drop-off ratio thermal stage Drop-off at fall below of I2 perm.
Forward power PForw.>/SN 1 to 120 % (steps 0.1 %)
9 Tolerances
Pickup values I2 perm.; I2>> 3 % of set value or 0.3 % negative
sequence
Time delays T
Times
Pickup time (accurate measuring) Approx. 360 ms (50 Hz);

Time delays 1 % or 10 ms
Thermal characteristic 5 % of set point + 1 % current
Pickup time (fast measuring) Approx. 60 ms (50 Hz);
tolerance
10 Time for 2 I2/I2 perm. 20 or 600 ms
Drop-off time (accurate measuring) Approx. 360 ms (50 Hz);
Drop-off time (fast measuring) Approx. 60 ms (50 Hz);
11 Drop-off ratio PForw.<
Drop-off ratio PForw.>
1.1 or 0.5 % of SN
Approx. 0.9 or 0.5 % of SN
Tolerances
12 Time delays T
at Q < 0.5 SN at accurate measuring
0.5 % SN 3 % of set value
1 % or 10 ms
13
14
15
Technical data
Impedance protection (ANSI 21) Frequency protection (ANSI 81)

Setting ranges
Overcurrent pickup I> 0.1 to 20 A (steps 0.01 A);
5 times at IN = 5A
Setting ranges
Steps; selectable f>, f<
Pickup values f>, f<
4
1
Undervoltage seal-in V< 10 to 125 V (steps 0.1V) Time delays T 3 stages 0 to 100 s, 1 stage up to
Impedance Z1 (related to IN =1 A) 0.05 to 130 (steps 0.01 ) 600 s
Impedance Z1B (related to IN =1 A) 0.05 to 65 (steps 0.01 )
Impedance Z2 (related to IN =1 A) 0.05 to 65 (steps 0.01 )
Undervoltage blocking V1< (steps 0.01 s)
10 to 125 V (steps 0.1 V) 2
Times
Times Pickup times f>, f< Approx. 100 ms
Shortest tripping time Approx. 40 ms Drop-off times f>, f< Approx. 100 ms
Drop-off time
Drop-off ratio
Approx. 50 ms
Drop-off difference f
Drop-off ratio V1<
Approx. 20 mHz
Approx. 1.05
3
Overcurrent pickup I> Approx. 0.95
Undervoltage seal-in V< Approx. 1.05 Tolerances
Frequency 10 mHz (at V> 0.5 VN)
Tolerances
Overcurrent pickup I>
Time delays T
1 % or 10 ms 4
Impedance measuring Z1, Z2 |Z/Z| 5 % for 30 K 90 Overexcitation protection (Volt/Hertz) (ANSI 24)
Time delays T 1 % or 10 ms Setting ranges
Pickup threshold alarm stage 1 to 1.2 (steps 0.01)
Undervoltage protection (denite-time and inverse-time function)
(ANSI 27) Pickup threshold V/f>>-stage
Time delays T
1 to 1.4 (steps 0.01)
5
Setting range Characteristic values of V/f 1.05 / 1.1 / 1.15 / 1.2 / 1.25 / 1.3 / 1.35 / 1.4
Undervoltage pickup V<, V<<, 10 to 125 V (steps 0.1 V) and assigned times t(V/f ) 0 to 20000 s (steps 1 s)
Vp< (positive sequence as phase- Cooling down time TCooling 0 to 20000 s (steps 1 s)
to-phase values)
Time delays T 0 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s) or indenite Times (Alarm and V/f>>-stage) 6
Time multiplier TM 0.1 to 5 s (steps 0.01 s) Pickup times at 1.1 of set value Approx. 60 ms
Times
Pickup time V<, V<< Approx. 50 ms Drop-off ratio (alarm, trip) 0.95
Drop-off time V<, V<< Approx. 50 ms Tolerances
V/f-pickup 3 % of set value
7
Drop-off ratio V<, V<<, Vp< 1.01 or 0.5 V
Tolerances Thermal characteristic (time) 5 % rated to V/for 600 ms
Time delays T
Inverse-time characteristic
1 % or 10 ms
1 % of measured value of voltage
90 % stator ground-fault protection, non-directional, directional
(ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G) 8
Setting ranges
Overvoltage protection (ANSI 59) Displacement voltage V0 > 2 to 125 V (steps 0.1 V)
Setting ranges Ground current 3I0> 2 to 1000 mA (steps 1 mA)
(maximum phase-to-phase
30 to 170 V (steps 0.1 V) Angle of direction element
Time delays T
0 to 360 (steps 1 )
9
voltage or phase-to-ground Times
voltage) 0 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s) or indenite Pickup times V0>, 3I0> Approx. 50 ms
Time delays T Drop-off times V0>/ 3I0> Approx. 50 ms
Times
Pickup times V>, V>>
Approx. 50 ms
Approx. 50 ms
Drop-off ratio V0>, 3I0>
Drop-off difference angle
0.95
10 directed to power system
10
Drop-off times V>, V>> 0.9 to 0.99 (steps 0.01) Tolerances
Drop-off ratio V>, V>> Displacement voltage 1 % of set value or 0.5 V
Tolerances
Voltage limit value
1 % of set value 0.5 V
1 % or 10 ms
Ground current
Time delays T
1 % of set value or 0.5 mA
1 % or 10 ms 11
Time delays T
12
13
14
15
Technical data
Sensitive ground-fault protection (ANSI 50/51GN, 64R) Inadvertent energizing protection (ANSI 50, 27)
1 Setting ranges
Ground current pickup IEE>, IEE>> 2 to 1000 mA (steps 1 mA)
Setting ranges
Current pickup I>>> 0.1 to 20 A (steps 0.1 A);
5 times at IN = 5 A
Measuring circuit supervision IEE< 1.5 to 50 mA (steps 0.1 mA) Voltage release V1< 10 to 125 V (steps 1 V)
Times Time delay 0 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s) or indenite
Drop-off time 0 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s) or indenite
2 Pickup times
Drop-off times
Approx. 50 ms
Approx. 50 ms Times
Measuring circuit supervision Approx. 2 s Reaction time Approx. 25 ms
Drop-off ratio IEE>, IEE>> 0.95 or 1 mA Drop-off time Approx. 35 ms
Drop-off ratio measuring circuit Approx. 1.1 or 1 mA Drop-off ratio I>>> Approx. 0.8
3 supervision IEE<
Tolerances
Drop-off ratio V1<
Tolerances
Approx. 1.05
Ground current pickup 1 % of set value or 0.5 mA Current pickup 5 % of set value or 20/100 mA
Time delays T 1 % or 10 ms Undervoltage seal-in V1< 1 % of set value or 0.5 V
4 100 % stator ground-fault protection with 3rd harmonic
(ANSI 59TN, 27TN) (3rd H.) Current differential protection (ANSI 87G, 87M, 87T)
Setting ranges Setting ranges
Displacement voltage V0 (3rd harm.)>, 0.2 to 40 V (steps 0.1 V) Differential current ID>IN 0.05 to 2 (steps 0.01)
V0 (3rd harm.)< High-current stage ID>>IN 0.8 to 12 (steps 0.1)
5 Time delay T
Active-power release
10 to 100 % (steps 1 %) or
Inrush stabilization ratio I2fN/IN
Harmonic stabilization ratio InfN/IN
10 to 80 (steps 1 %)
10 to 80 (steps 1 %)
indenite (n = 3rd or 4th or 5th harmonics)
Positive-sequence voltage release 50 to 125 V (steps 0.1 V) or Additional trip time delay T 0 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s) or indenite
indenite Times
6 Times
Pickup time
(ID 1.5 setting value ID>)
Approx. 35 ms
Drop-off time Approx. 80 ms Pickup time Approx. 20 ms

Drop-off ratio (ID 1.5 setting value ID>>)
Drop-off time Approx. 35 ms
7 Undervoltage stage V0 (3rd harm.)<
Overvoltage stage V0 (3rd harm.)>
Approx. 1.4
Approx. 0.6 Drop-off ratio Approx. 0.7
Active-power release Approx. 0.9 Tolerances
Positive-sequence voltage release Approx. 0.95 Pickup characteristic 3 % of set value or 0.01 I/IN
Tolerances Inrush stabilization 3 % of set value or 0.01 I/IN
8 Displacement voltage
Time delay T
1 % or 10 ms
Additional time delays 1 % or 10 ms
Ground-current differential protection (ANSI 87GN, 87TN)
Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF) Setting ranges
Setting ranges Differential current IE-D >/IN 0.01 to 1 (steps 0.01)
9 Current thresholds I>BF

Time delay BF-T
0.04 to 1 A (steps 0.01 A)
0.06 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s) or
Additional trip time delay
Times
indenite Pickup time Approx. 50 ms

Times (IE-D 1.5 setting value IE-D >)
Pickup time Approx. 50 ms Drop-off time Approx. 50 ms
10 Drop-off time
Tolerances
Approx. 50 ms Drop-off ratio
Tolerances
Approx. 0.7
Current threshold I>BF/IN 1 % of set value or 10/50 mA Pickup characteristic 3 % of set value
Time delay T 1 % or 10 ms Additional time delay 1 % or 10 ms
11
12
13
14
15
Technical data
Rotor ground-fault protection with fN (ANSI 64R) (fN) Out-of-step protection (ANSI 78)
Setting ranges
Alarm stage RE, Alarm <
Trip stage RE, Trip <
3 to 30 k (steps 1 k)
1.0 to 5 k (steps 0.1 k)
Setting ranges
Positive sequence current
pickup I1>
0.2 to 4 I1/IN (steps 0.1 I1/IN) 1
Time delays T 0 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s) or indenite Negative-sequence current 0.05 to 1 I2/IN (steps 0.01 I2/IN)
Correction angle - 15 to + 15 (steps 1 ) pickup I2<
Impedances Za to Zd 0.05 to 130 (steps 0.01 )
Times
Pickup time 80 ms (based on IN =1 A)
Inclination angle of polygon P 60 to 90 (steps 1 )
2
Drop-off time 80 ms
Number of out-of-step periods 1 to 10
Drop-off ratio Approx. 1.25 characteristic 1
Tolerances Number of out-of-step periods 1 to 20
Trip stage RE, Trip <,
Alarm stage RE, Alarm <
Approx. 5 % of set value
Approx. 10 % of set value
characteristic 2
Holding time of pickup tH 0.2 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s)
3
Time delays T 1 % or 10 ms Holding time for out-of-step 0.02 to 0.15 s (steps 0.01 s)
Permissible rotor ground 0.15 to 3 F annunciation
capacitance
Sensitive rotor fault protection with 1 to 3 Hz (ANSI 64R) (1 to 3 Hz)
Times
Typical trip time Depending from the out-of-step 4
frequency
Setting ranges
Alarm stage RE,Alarrn < 5 to 80 k (steps 1 k) Tolerances
Trip stage RE, Trip < 1 to 10 k (steps 1 k) Impedance measurement |Z/Z| 5 % for 30 SC 90
Time delays T
Pickup value of meas. circuit
0.01 to 1 mAs (steps 0.01 mAs) Time delays T
or 10 m
1 % to 10 ms
5
supervision QC< DC voltage time / DC current time protection (ANSI 59N (DC) ; 51N (DC))
Times Setting ranges
Pickup time Approx. 1 to 1.5 s (depends on
Drop-off time
frequency of 7XT71)
Approx. 1 to 1.5 s
Voltage pickup V = >,<
Current pickup I = >, <
0.1 to 8.5 V (steps 0.1 V)
0.2 to 17 mA (steps 0.1 mA) 6
Drop-off ratio RE Approx 1.25 Times
Drop-off ratio QC < 1.2 or 0.01 mAs Pickup time Approx. 60 ms
Tolerances
Trip stage Approx. 5 % or 0.5 k at
(operational condition 1)
7
(RE,Trip <; Alarm stage RE, Alarm<) 0.15 F CE < 1F (operational condition 0)
Approx. 10 % or 0.5 k Drop-off time Approx. 60 ms or 200 ms
at 1 F CE < 3 F Drop-off ratio 0.9 or 1.1
Time delays T
Permissible rotor ground-
1 % or 10 ms
0.15 to 3 F Tolerances
Voltage 1 % of set value, or 0.1 V
8
capacitance
Current 1 % of set value, or 0.1 mA
100 % stator ground-fault protection with 20 Hz (ANSI 64G) (100 %) Time delays T 1 % or 10 ms
Setting ranges
Alarm stage RSEF < 20 to 500 (steps 1 )
Starting time supervision for motors (ANSI 48)
Setting ranges
9
Trip stage RSEF << 10 to 300 (steps 1 )
Ground current stage ISEF > 0.02 to 1.5 A (steps 0.01 A) Motor starting 1.0 to 16 (steps 0.01)
Time delays T 0 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s) or indenite current TStart max /IN
Starting current 0.6 to 10 (steps 0.01)
Supervision of 20 Hz generator
V20 Hz 0.3 to 15 V (steps 0.1 V) pickup IStart, pickup. /IN
Permissible starting 1.0 to 180 s (steps 0.1 s)
10
I20 Hz 5 to 40 mA (steps 1 mA)
Correction angle - 60 to + 60 (steps 1 ) time TStart max
Permissible locked rotor 0.5 to 120 s (steps 0.1 s) or
Times time TBlocking indenite
Pickup times RSEF<, RSEF<<
Pickup time ISEF>
1.3 s
250 ms Times Depending on the settings 11
Drop-off times RSEF<, RSEF<< 0.8 s Drop-off ratio Approx. 0.95
Drop-off time ISEF> 120 ms Tolerances
Drop-off ratio Approx. 1.2 to 1.7 Current threshold 1 % of set value, or 1 % of IN
Tolerances
Resistance (RSEF) ca. 5 % or 2
Time delays T 5 % or 30 ms 12
Ground current stage (ISEF >) 3 % or 3 mA
13
14
15
Technical data
Restart inhibit for motors (ANSI 66, 49 Rotor) Interturn protection (ANSI 59N(IT))
1 Setting ranges
Motor starting
current IStart max /IN
3.0 to 10.0 (steps 0.01)
Setting ranges
Displacement voltage VInterturn>
Time delays T
0.3 to 130 V (steps 0.1 V)
Permissible starting 3.0 to 120.0 s (steps 0.1 s) Times
time TStart max Pick-up times VInterturn> Approx. 60 ms
Rotor temperature equalization 0 to 60.0 min (steps 0.1 min)
2 time TEquali.
Minimum restart inhibit 0.2 to 120.0 min (steps 0.1 min)
Drop-off times VInterturn>
Drop-off ratio VInterturn>
Approx. 60 ms
0.5 to 0.95 adjustable
time TRestart, min Tolerances
Permissible number of warm 1 to 4 Displacement voltage 1 % of set value or 0.5 V
starts nW Time delays T 1 % of set value or 10 ms
3 Difference between warm and
cold starts nK-nW
1 to 2 Incoupling of temperature via serial interface (thermo-box) (ANSI 38)
Extensions of time constants 1.0 to 100.0 Number of measuring sensors 6 or 12
(running and stop) Temperature thresholds 40 to 250 C or 100 to 480 F
(steps 1 C or 1 F)
4 Tolerances
Time delays T
1 % or 0.1 ms
Sensors types Pt100; Ni 100, Ni 120
Rate-of-frequency-change protection (ANSI 81R) External trip coupling
Setting ranges Number of external trip couplings 4
Steps, selectable +df/dt >; - df/dt 4
5 Pickup value df/dt
Time delays T
Threshold supervision
Setting ranges
Undervoltage blocking V1< 10 to 125 V (steps 0.1 V) Threshold of measured values
MV1 > to MV10< -200 % to +200 % (steps 1 %)
Times
Assignable measured values P, active power
6 Pickup times df/dt
Drop-off times df/dt
Approx. 200 ms
Approx. 200 ms
Q, reactive power
change of active power P
Drop-off ratio df/dt Approx. 0.95 or 0.1 Hz/s Voltage VL1, VL2, VL3, VE, V0, V1,
Drop-off ratio V< Approx. 1.05 V2, VE3h
Tolerances Current 3I0, I1, I2, IEE1, IEE2
Approx. 0.1 Hz/s at V> 0.5 VN
Power angle
Power factor cos
Time delays T 1 % or 10 ms Value at TD1
Vector jump supervision (voltage) Times
8 Setting ranges
Stage 0.5 to 15 (steps 0.1 )
Pick-up times
Drop-off times
Approx. 20 40 ms
Approx. 20 40 ms
Time delay T 0 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s) or indenite Drop-off to pick-up ratio
Undervoltage blocking V1< 10 to 125 V (steps 0.1 V) Threshold MVx> 0.95
Threshold MVx< 1.05
Tolerances
9 Vector jump
0.3 at V> 0.5 VN
Number of supervised trip circuits 1
Sensitive ground-fault protection B (ANSI 51GN)
10 Setting ranges
Ground current IEE-B>, 0.3 to 1000 mA (steps 0.1 A)
Ground current IEE-B<, 0.3 to 500 mA (steps 0.1 mA)
Measuring method - Fundamental,
11 - 3rd harmonica
- 1rst and 3rd harmonics
Times
Pick-up times Approx. 50 ms
12 Drop-off ratio IEE-B> 0.90 or 0.15 mA
Drop-off ratio IEE-B< 1.1 or 0.15 mA
Tolerances
Ground current 1 % of set value or 0.1 mA
13 Time delays T 1 % of set value or 10 ms
14
15
Technical data
Operational measured values Fault records

Description
Currents
Primary; secondary or per unit (%)
IL1, S1; IL2, S1; IL3, S1; IL1, S2; IL2, S2;
Number of fault records
Instantaneous values
Max. 8 fault records
Max. 5 s 1
IL3, S2; IEE1; IEE2; I1; I2; I20Hz Storage time Depending on the actual frequency
Tolerance 0.2 % of measurement values Sampling interval (e. g. 1.25 ms at 50 Hz;
or 10 mA 1 digit 1.04 ms at 60 Hz)
Differential protection currents IDiffL1; IDiffL2; IDiffL3; IRestL1; IRestL2;
IRestL3;
Channels vL1, vL2, vL3, vE; iL1,S1; iL2,S1; iL3,S1;
iEE1; iL1,S2; iL2,S2; iL3,S2; iEE2; TD1;
2
Tolerances 0.1 % of measured TD2; TD3
or 10 mA 1 digit R.m.s. values
Phase angles of currents IL1,S1; IL2,S1; IL3,S1; IL1,S2; Storage period Max. 80 s
Tolerances
IL2,S2; IL3,S2;
< 0.5
Sampling interval Fixed (20 ms at 50 Hz; 16.67 ms
at 60 Hz)
3
Voltages VL1; VL2; VL3; VE; VL12; VL23; VL31; Channels V1, VE, I1, I2, IEE1, IEE2, P, Q, , R,
V1; V2; V20 Hz X, f-fn
Tolerance 0.2 % of measured values
or 0.2 V 1 digit
Fault event logging Storage of events of the last 8
4
Impedance R, X faults
Tolerance 1% Puffer length max. 600 indications
Power S; P; Q Time solution 1 ms
Tolerance 1 % of measured values
or 0.25 % SN
Operational indications Max. 200 indications
Time solution 1 ms
5
Phase angle Elapsed-hour meter Up to 6 decimal digits
Tolerance <0.1 (criterion: current threshold)
Power factor
Tolerance
cos (p.f.)
1 % 1 digit
Switching statistics Number of breaker operation
Phase-summated tripping current
6
Frequency f
Tolerance 10 mHz (at V> 0.5 VN;
40 Hz < f < 65 Hz) CE conformity
Overexcitation
Tolerance
V/f;
1%
7
Thermal measurement L1; L2, L3, I2, V/f, sensors relating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Council Directive
Tolerance 5% 2004/108/EEC previous 89/336/EEC) and electrical equipment designed
for use within certain voltage limits (Council Directive 2006/95/EEC
Min. / max.memory
Memory Measured values with date and
time German standard DIN 57435/Part 303 (corresponding to VDE 0435/
Reset manual Via binary input Part 303).
Via key pad
Via communication
9
Values This conformity is the result of a test that was performed by Siemens AG
Positive sequence voltage V1 in accordance with Article 10 of the Council Directive complying with
Positive sequence current I1 the generic standards EN 50081-2 and EN 50082-2 for the EMC Directive
Active power
Reactive power
P
Q
and standard EN 60255-6 for the low-voltage Directive. 10
Frequency f
Displacement voltage VE(3rd harm.)
(3rd harmonics)
Energy metering 11
Meter of 4 quadrants WP+; WP; WQ+; WQ
Tolerance 1%
Analog outputs (optional)
Number max. 4 (depending on variant) 12
Possible measured values I1, I2, IEE1, IEE2, V1, V0, V03h, |P|, |Q|,
|S|, |cos | f, V/f, , S/S Trip,
Rotor/Rotor Trip, RE, REF; RE, REF 1-3Hz;
Range
RE SEF
0 to 22.5 mA
13
Minimum threshold (limit of validity) 0 to 5 mA (steps 0.1 mA)
Maximum threshold 22 mA (xed)
Congurable reference value 20 mA 10 to 1000 % (steps 0.1 %)
14
15
1 7UM62 multifunction generator, motor and transformer protection relay

7UM62 - - 0-
Housing 19", 7 BI, 12 BO, 1 live status contact 1 Continued

Housing 19", 15 BI, 20 BO, 1 live status contact on next
2
2 Graphic display, 19'', 7 BI, 12 BO, 1 live status contact 3
page
1 A1), IEE (sensitive) 1
3 5 A1), IEE (sensitive)

5

DC 60 to 125 V2), threshold binary input 19 V3) 4
4 DC 110 to 220 V2), AC 115 V/230 V, threshold binary input 88 V3) 5
DC 220 to 250 V, AC 115 V/230 V, threshold binary input 176 V 6
Unit version
5 For panel surface-mounting, 2 tier screw-type terminals top/bottom

For panel ush-mounting, plug-in terminals (2-/3- pin connector)
B
D
Flush-mounting housing, screw-type terminal (direct connection, ring-type cable lugs) E
Region-specic default setting / function and language settings

6 Region DE, 50 Hz, IEC characteristics, language: German, (language can be selected) A
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI characteristics, language: English (UK), (language can be selected) B
Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI characteristics, language: English (US), (language can be selected) C
7 Port B (System interface)

8 IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, optical 820 nm, ST connector
Analog output 2 x 0 to 20 mA
3
7
PROFIBUS-DP slave, electrical RS485 9 L 0A
PROFIBUS-DP slave, optical 820 nm, double ring, ST connector* 9 L 0 B
9 MODBUS, electrical RS485 9 L 0D
MODBUS, optical 820 nm, ST connector* 9 L 0 E
DNP 3.0, optical 820 nm, ST connector*
10 IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45 connectors
9
9
L 0H
L 0 R
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, optical, double, LC connector4) 9 L 0 S
Only Port C (Service interface)
11 DIGSI 4 /modem, electrical RS232

DIGSI 4 /modem, temperature monitoring box, electrical RS485
1
2
Port C (Service interface) and Port D (Additional interface) 9 M
Port C (Service interface)

12 DIGSI 4 /modem, electrical RS232 1
DIGSI 4 /modem, temperature monitoring box, electrical RS485 2
Port D (Additional interface)

13 Temperature monitoring box, optical 820 nm, ST connector
Temperature monitoring box, electrical RS485
A
F
Analog outputs 2 x 0 to 20 mA K
14 1) Rated current can be selected by means of jumpers. 4) Not available with position 9 = B
2) Transition between the two auxiliary voltage ranges can be selected * Not with position 9 = B; if 9 = B, please order 7UM62 unit with
by means of jumpers. RS485 port and separate ber-optic converters.
15 3) The binary input thresholds can be selected in stages by means of

jumpers.


7UM62 multifunction generator, motor and transformer protection relay
Measuring functions
7UM62 - - 0
1
Without extended measuring functions 0
Min./max. values, energy metering 3
Function 2
Generator Basic A
Generator Standard B
Generator Full
Asynchronous Motor
C
F
3
Transformer H
Functions (additional functions)

Without A 4
Sensitive rotor ground-fault protection and 100 % stator ground-fault protection B
Restricted ground-fault protection C
Network decoupling (df/dt and vector jump)
All additional functions
E
G
5
1) For more detailed information on the functions see Table 11/3.
6
DIGSI 4
7
(copper)
8
Basis
Professional
7XS5400-0AA00
9
Complete version
10
11
12
License for 10 PCs. Authorization by serial number.
On CD-ROM 7XS5460-0AA00
SIGRA 4
13
additionally)
other manufacturers (Comtrade format).
Running under MS Windows 2000/XP Professional Edition
14
15
1 Connecting cable
2 Cable between thermo-box and relay

length 5 m / 5.5 yd 7XV5103-7AA05
length 25 m / 27.3 yd 7XV5103-7AA25
length 50 m / 54.7 yd 7XV5103-7AA50
3 Coupling device for rotor ground-fault protection 7XR6100-0CA00
Short code
Series resistor for rotor ground-fault protection
(group: 013002) 3PP1336-0DZ K2Y
4 Resistor for underexcitation protection
(voltage divider, 20:1) (group: 012009) 3PP1326-0BZ K2Y
Resistor for stator ground-fault protection

5 (voltage divider, 5:1) (group 013001) 3PP1336-1CZ K2Y
20 Hz generator 7XT3300-0CA00
20 Hz band pass lter 7XT3400-0CA00
6 Current transformer (400 A / 5 A, 5 VA) 4NC5225-2CE20
Controlling unit f. rotor ground-fault protection (0.5 to 4Hz) 7XT7100-0EA00
7 Resistor for 1 to 3 Hz rotor ground-fault protection
Temperature monitoring box (thermo-box)

7XR6004-0CA00
AC/DC 24 to 60 V 7XV5662-2AD10
AC/DC 90 to 240 V 7XV5662-5AD10
8
package
9
LSP2289-afp.eps

3-pin C73334-A1-C36-1 1 Siemens 11/62
Crimp CI2 0.5 to 1 mm2 0-827039-1 4000 AMP 1)

Fig. 11/60 Mounting rail
10 for 19" rack
connector
CI2 0.5 to 2.5 mm2
0-827396-1
0-827040-1
1
4000
AMP 1)
AMP 1)
0-827397-1 1 AMP 1)
LSP2090-afp.eps
Type III+ 0.75 to 1.5 mm2 0-163083-7 4000 AMP 1)

0-163084-2 1 AMP 1)
11
LSP2091-afp.eps

For CI2 0-734372-1 1 AMP 1)
12 Fig. 11/61
2-pin connector
Fig. 11/62
3-pin connector
19"-mounting rail C73165-A63-D200-1 1 Siemens 11/60

13
LSP2093-afp.eps
LSP2092-afp.eps


14 Fig. 11/63
Short-circuit link
Fig. 11/64
Short-circuit link
15
10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 11/65 7UM621 and 7UM623 connection diagram (IEC standard) 15

10
11
12
13
14
15 Fig. 11/66 7UM622 connection diagram (IEC standard)

10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 11/67 7UM621 and 7UM623 connection diagram (ANSI standard) 15

10
11
12
13
14
15 Fig. 11/68 7UM622 connection diagram (ANSI standard)

Generator Protection / 7UW50
SIPROTEC 7UW50 tripping matrix
Function overview
Functions 1
Hardware tripping matrix
28 inputs
10 outputs
One LED is assigned to each input and output
2
Features
Easy marshalling of trip signals via diode plugs 3
LSP2300-afpen.tif
Plexiglass cover prevents unauthorized marshalling
5
Fig. 11/69 SIPROTEC 7UW50 tripping matrix
6
Description
The tripping matrix 7UW50 is a component of the Siemens

numerical generator protection system. The tripping matrix
7
provides a transparent, easily programmable facility for combining
output commands of the trip outputs of individual protection
devices with plant items such as the circuit-breakers, de-excitation
etc. The matrix was developed for marshalling tripping commands
8
of large power stations.
With its help, the tripping schematic can be temporarily changed,
e.g., on the basis of a generator circuit-breaker revision. If the
software matrix incorporated in each generator protection unit is
9
used for marshalling the tripping commands, the marshalling in
the protection units must be changed for this purpose.
10
11
12
13
14
15
Generator Protection / 7UW50
1 7UW50 tripping matrix

7UW5000 - A00
DC 60 V, 110 V, 125 V 4
DC 220 V, 250 V 5
2 Unit design
For panel surface-mounting B
For panel ush-mounting or cubicle mounting C
10
11
12
13
14
15
Generator Protection / 7RW600
SIPROTEC 7RW600 numerical voltage, frequency and overexcitation protection relay
Function overview
Line protection 1
Voltage protection
Generator protection 2
Voltage protection
Overexcitation protection 3
LSP2001-afpen.tif
Voltage protection
Overexcitation protection 4
Power system decoupling
Voltage protection
Frequency protection 5
Load shedding
Fig. 11/70 SIPROTEC 7RW600 numerical voltage, frequency and
overexcitation protection relay Rate-of-frequency-change protection 6
Status measured values
Description Monitoring functions
The SIPROTEC 7RW600 is a numerical multifunction protection

Hardware 7
relay for connection to voltage transformers. It can be used Software
in distribution systems, on transformers and for electrical Event logging
machines. If the SIPROTEC 7RW600 detects any deviation from
the permitted voltage, frequency or overexcitation values, it
Fault recording 8
will respond according to the values set. The SIPROTEC 7RW600
can be used for the purposes of system decoupling and for load
shedding if ever there is a risk of a system collapse as a result
of inadmissibly large frequency drops. Voltage and frequency Hardware 9
thresholds can also be monitored.
Auxiliary voltages:
The SIPROTEC 7RW600 voltage, frequency and overexcitation DC 24, 48 V
relay can be used to protect generators and transformers in the
event of defective voltage control, of defective frequency con-
DC 60, 110, 125 V
DC 220, 250 V, AC 115 V
10
trol, or of full load rejection, or furthermore islanding generation Local operation
systems.
LCD for setting and analysis
This device is intended as a supplement to Siemens substation
systems and for use in individual applications. It has two
Housing for
Flush-mounting 19-inch 7XP20;
11
voltage inputs (V; Vx) to which a variety of functions have been Surface-mounting 19-inch 7XP20
assigned. While input V serves all of the implemented functions,
input Vx is exclusively dedicated to the voltage protection
functions. The scope of functions can be selected from three
Communication ports
Personal computer
12
ordering options.
Via RS485RS232 converter
Via modem
SCADA 13
Bus-capable
14
15
Application
Application ANSI IEC Protection functions
1 The SIPROTEC 7RW600 is a numerical mul-

27 V<, t; t = f (V<) Undervoltage protection
tifunction protection relay for connection 59/59N V>>, t; V> t Overvoltage protection
to voltage transformers. It can be used in
81/81R df df Frequency protection, rate of-frequency change protection
distribution systems, on transformers and f >; f < ; >; +
2 for electrical machines.
V V
dt dt
If the SIPROTEC 7RW600 detects any 24 >, t; = f(t)
f f
deviation from the permitted voltage,
frequency or overexcitation values, it will
3 respond according to the values set. The
SIPROTEC 7RW600 can be used for the
purposes of system decoupling and for
load shedding if ever there is a risk of a
4 system collapse as a result of inadmissibly
large frequency drops. Voltage and fre-
quency thresholds can also be monitored.
The SIPROTEC 7RW600 voltage, frequency
5 and overexcitation relay can be used to
protect generators and transformers in
the event of defective voltage control,
of defective frequency control, or of full
6 load rejection, or furthermore islanding
generation systems.
10
11
12 Fig. 11/72
13
14
15
The main function of the undervoltage protection is protecting
electrical machines (e.g. pumped-storage power generators and 1
motors) against the consequences of dangerous voltage drops. It
separates the machines from the power system and thus avoids
inadmissible operating states and the possible risk of stability
2
LSP2002-afpen.tif
loss. This is a necessary criterion in system decoupling.

To ensure that the protection functions in a physically correct
manner, when used in conjunction with electrical machines, the
positive-sequence system must be evaluated.
The protection function can be blocked, via a binary input,
3
causing a drop in energizing power. The auxiliary contact of
the circuit-breaker can be used for this purpose with the circuit-
Fig. 11/73 Rear view of surface-mounting housing
breaker open. Alternatively, undervoltage acquisition can be
activated on a conductor-separated basis (V<,Vx< ).
4
Construction Additionally, it is possible to use an inverse-time undervoltage
protection function for motor protection. The tripping time
The SIPROTEC 7RW600 relay contains, in a compact form, all the
components needed for:
depends in the undervoltage drop. A time grading is possible. 5
Acquisition and evaluation of measured values Frequency protection
Operation and display The frequency protection can be used to protect against overfre-
Output of messages, signals and commands quency or against underfrequency. It protects electrical machines
and plants/substations against adverse effects in the event of
6
Input and evaluation of binary signals deviations in the rated speed (e.g. vibration, heating, etc.),
Data transmission (RS485) and detects and records frequency uctuations in the power system,
Auxiliary voltage supply. and disconnects certain loads according to the thresholds set. It
can also be used for the purposes of system decoupling, and thus 7
The SIPROTEC 7RW600 receives AC voltages from the primary improves the availability of in-plant power generation.
voltage transformer. The secondary rated voltage range, 100 to
125 V, is adapted internally on the device. The frequency protection function is implemented via voltage
There are two device variants available:

input V. From the sampled voltage, the frequency is measured
by means of various lter functions. The system thus remains
8
The rst version, for panel ush mounting or cubicle mount- unaffected by harmonics, ripple control frequencies and other
ing, has its terminals accessible from the rear. disturbances.
The second version for panel surface mounting, has its termi-
nals accessible from the front.
The frequency protection function operates over a wide
frequency range (25 70 Hz).
9
It is implemented (optionally for overfrequency or for underfre-
quency) on a four-stage basis; each stage can be individually
Protection functions delayed. The frequency stages can be blocked either via the 10
binary input or by an undervoltage stage.
The overvoltage protection has the function of detecting inad-
missible overvoltages in power systems and electrical machines The rate-of-frequency-change protection calculates, from the 11
and, in such event, it initiates system decoupling or shuts down measured frequency, the gradient of frequency change df/dt.
the generators. It is thus possible to detect and record any major active power
overloading in the power system, to disconnect certain consum-
Two voltage measuring inputs (V, Vx) are provided on the unit.
These must be connected to two phase-to-phase voltages. The
ers accordingly, and to restore the system to stability. Unlike
frequency protection, rate-of-frequency-change protection
12
input voltages are processed separately in two two-stage protec- already reacts before the frequency threshold is undershot. To
tive functions. From these, two principle connection variants are ensure effective protection settings, power system studies are
derived.
Fig. 11/76, Fig. 11/77, and Fig. 11/78, on page 11/75, show the
recommended. The rate-of-frequency-change protection func-
tion can also be used for the purposes of system decoupling.
13
following connection examples: The rate-of-frequency-change protection function is imple-
mented on a four-stage basis; each stage can be individually
Fig. 11/76: Separated connection, used for overvoltage protec-
tion and ground-fault detection
delayed. It detects and records any negative or positive
frequency gradient. The measured result is generally released as
14
Fig. 11/77: Two-phase connection to a voltage transformer soon as the rated frequency is undershot or overshot.
Fig. 11/78: Alternative V connection Rate-of-frequency-change protection can also be enabled by an
underfrequency or overfrequency stage. 15
Protection functions, features
1 Overexcitation protection
The overexcitation protection detects and
records any inadmissibly high induction
2 (B ~
V
f
)
in electrical equipment, e.g. generators or

transformers, that may occur as a result
3 of a voltage increase and/or frequency
drop. Increased induction of this nature
may lead to saturation of the iron core,
excessive eddy current losses, and thus to
4 inadmissible heating.
It is recommended to use the overexcita-
tion protection function in power systems
subject to large frequency uctuations
5 (e.g. systems in island conguration or
with weak infeed) and for electrical block Fig. 11/74 Tripping range of overexcitation protection
units that are separated from the system.
The overexcitation protection function
6 calculates, from the maximum voltage
(V, Vx) and the frequency, the ratio V/f.
This function incorporates an indepen-
dent warning and tripping stage and a
7 curve which is dependent on and adapt-

able to the object to be protected and
which takes due account of the objects
thermal behavior. Incorrect adaptation of
the voltage transformer is also corrected.
8 The overexcitation protection function is
effective over a broad frequency range
(25 to 70 Hz) and voltage range (10 to
170 V). The overexcitation protection
9 function can be blocked and the thermal
store can be reset separately via binary
inputs.
10 Features
Serial data transmission

11 The SIPROTEC 7RW600 relay is tted with
an RS485 port, via which a PC can be
connected, thus providing, in conjunction
with the DIGSI operating and analysis pro-
12 gram, a convenient tool for conguring
and parameter setting. The DIGSI program
(which runs under MS-Windows) also
performs fault recording and fault evalua-
13 tion. The SIPROTEC 7RW600 relay can also
be linked, via the appropriate converters, Fig. 11/75 Wiring communication
either directly or over an optoelectronic For convenient wiring of the RS485 bus, use bus cable system 7XV5103 (see part 13
connection (optical ber) to the interface of this catalog)
of the PC or substation control system
14 (IEC 60870-5-103 protocol).
15
Connection diagrams
Connection diagrams
4
Fig. 11/76 Connection of a phase-to-phase voltage V and a Fig. 11/77 Connection of two phase-to-phase voltages V to one
displacement voltage Vx voltage transformer set
Fig. 11/78 Connection to voltage transformers in V-conguration Fig. 11/79 Communication port
9
10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 11/80 Typical auxiliary voltage wiring
15
Technical data
Hardware Serial port (isolated)
1 Measuring circuits (v.t. circuits)

Rated voltage VN 100 to 125 V
Type
Test voltage
RS485
AC 2 kV for 1 min
Rated frequency fN 50 or 60 Hz Connections Data cable at housing, two data
Dynamic range 170 V wires, one frame reference for
connection of a PC or similar
2 Power consumption
Thermal overload capacity,
0.2 VA
Transmission speed At least 1200 baud,
max. 19 200 baud
continuous 200 V
for 10 s 230 V Unit design
Case 7XP20 For dimensions, see dimension
3 Power supply via integratedDC/DC converter
Rated auxiliary voltage Vaux DC 24/48 V
Weight
drawings, part 14
DC 60/110/125 V
DC 220/250 V, AC 115 V Flush mounting/cubicle mounting Approx. 4 kg
Maximum ripple at rated voltage 12 %
4 Power consumption
to IEC 60529/EN 60529
IP 51
Energized Approx. 4 W
Maximum bridging time 20 ms at VAUX (DC 24 V) Electrical test
5 following failure of auxiliary

voltage
50 ms at VAUX (DC 110 V) Specications
Standards IEC 60255-5, ANSI / IEEE C37.90.0
Binary inputs
Insulation tests
Number 3
Voltage test (routine test)
6 Voltage range DC 24 to 250 V
Current consumption, independent Approx. 2.5 mA
All circuits except auxiliary
voltage and RS485
2.0 kV (rms), 50 Hz
of operating voltage Auxiliary voltage and RS485 only DC 2.8 kV

2 switching thresholds (adjustable) 17 V, 75 V Voltage test (type test)
Over open command contacts 1.5 kV (rms), 50 Hz
7 Command contacts
Number of relays, total 6
Impulse withstand capability 5 kV (peak); 1.2 / 50 s; 0.5 J
(SWC) test (type test)
Number of relays
All circuits, class III 3 positive and 3 negative impulses
with 2-channel energization 2
at intervals of 5 s
8 Contacts per relay (K1 to K5)

Contact for relay (K6)
1 NO contact
1 NC contact or 1 NO contact
(set via jumper)
Test crosswise:
Measurement circuits, pilot-wire
connections, power supply,
Switching capacity binary inputs, class III, (no tests
Make 1000 W/VA crosswise over open contacts,
9 Break
Switching voltage
30 W/VA
250 V (AC/DC)
RS485 interface terminals)
EMC tests, immunity; type tests
Permissible current, Standards IEC 60255-22 (product standard)
continuous 5A EN 50082-x (generic standard)
0.5 s 30 A
10 LEDs High-frequency test
DIN VDE 0435, Part 303
2.5 kV (peak), 1 MHz, = 15 s,
Ready-to-operate (green) 1 IEC 60255-22-1, class III and 400 shots/s duration 2 s
DIN VDE 0435 Part 303, class III
Marshallable displays (red) 4
Electrostatic discharge 4 kV/6 kV contact discharge
11 Fault indication (red) 1
IEC 60255-22-2
and IEC 61000-4-2, class III
8 kV air discharge, both polarities,
150 pF, Ri = 330
Irradiation with RF eld
Non-modulated, IEC 60255-22-3 10 V/m, 27 to 500 MHz
12 (report), class III

Amplitude-modulated,
10 V/m, 80 to 1000 MHz,
80 % AM, 1 kHz
Pulse-modulated, 10 V/m, 900 MHz, repetition
IEC 6100-4-3, class III frequency 200 Hz, duty cycle 50 %
13
14
15
Technical data
EMC tests, immunity; type tests During transport

Fast transients 2 kV, 5/50 ns, 5 kHz, burst length
IEC 60255-22-4 and IEC 61000-4-4, 15 ms, repetition rate 300 ms, both
class III polarities, Ri = 50 , duration 1 min
Standards
Vibration
IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2
Sinusoidal 1
Conducted disturbances induced by 10 V, 150 kHz to 80 MHz, IEC 60068-2-6 8 to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration
radio-frequency elds, amplitude- 80 % AM, 1 kHz Sweep rate 1 octave/min
modulated, IEC 61000-4-6, class III
Power frequency magnetic eld 30 A/m continuous, 50 Hz Shock
Half-sinusoidal
2
IEC 61000-4-8, class IV 300 A/m for 3 s, 50 Hz IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 acceleration 15 g, duration 11 ms,
0.5 mT; 50 Hz IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks in each direction of 3
Oscillatory surge withstand 2.5 kV to 3 kV (peak), orthogonal axes
(common mode)
1 MHz to 1.5 MHz, decaying
oscillation, 50 shots per s,
Continuous shock
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
Half-sinusoidal
3
duration 2 s, Ri = 150 to 200 IEC 60068-2-29 1000 shocks in each direction
Fast transient surge withstand 4 to 5 kV, 10/150 ns, 50 shots per s, of 3 orthogonal axes
(common mode)
both polarities, duration 2 s,
Ri = 80
4
Radiated electromagnetic 10 to 20 V/m, 25 to 1000 MHz,
Temperatures
interference ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 amplitude- and pulse-modulated
High-frequency test 2.5 kV (peak, alternating polarity), Recommended temperature during 5 to +55 C
Document 17C (SEC) 102 100, 1, 10 and 50 MHz,
decaying oscillation, Ri = 50
service (legibility may be impaired
> +55 C) 5
Temperature tolerances:
EMC tests, emission; type tests
During service 20 to +70 C
Standard EN 50081-* (generic standard) During storage 25 to +55 C
Conducted interference voltage,
aux. voltage only CISPR 11,
150 kHz to 30 MHz During transport
(storage and transport in
25 to +70 C 6
EN 55022, DIN VDE 0878 Part 22, standard works packaging)
limit value, class B Humidity
Interference eld strength CISPR 11, 30 to 1000 MHz
EN 55011, DIN VDE 0875 Part 11,
limit value, class A
Annual average 75 % relative
humidity, on 30 days during
7
units in such a way that they are the year 95 % relative humidity,
not exposed to direct sunlight or condensation not permitted!
8
During operation
Functions
Vibration
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2
Sinusoidal
10 to 60 Hz: 0.035 mm amplitude Setting range V<, Vx<Vp< 20 to 120 V (in steps of 1 V) 9
IEC 60068-2-6 60 to 150 Hz: 0.5 g acceleration Delay times 0 to 60 s (in steps of 0.01 s) or
Sweep rate 1 octave/min (i.e. non-effective)
20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes Time multiplier for
Shock
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
Half-sinusoidal
acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms
inverse characteristic
Pickup time
0.1 to 5 s
50 ms
10
IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks in each direction of Reset time 50 ms
3 orthogonal axes Reset ratio 1.05
Seismic vibration Sinusoidal Tolerances
IEC 60255-21-3, class 1 1 to 8 Hz: 4 mm amplitude
(horizontal axis)
Voltage pickup
Delay times
11
IEC 60068-2-59 1 to 8 Hz: 2 mm amplitude Overvoltage protection
(vertical axis)
8 to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration Setting range
(horizontal axis)
V>, V>>
Vx>, Vx>>
12
(vertical axis) Delay times 0 to 60 s or (in steps of 0.01 s)
Sweep rate 1 octave/min Pickup time 50 ms
1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes Reset time
Reset ratio
50 ms
0.95 13
Tolerances
Voltage pickup 3 % of setting value or 1 V
< 1 % of setting value for V > Vn
14
15
Technical data
Frequency protection Fault recording
1 Number of frequency stages f> or f< 4

Setting range f> or f< 40 to 68 Hz (in steps of 0.01 Hz)
Instantaneous value fault record
Measured values
Pattern
V, Vx
1.00 ms (50 Hz)
Delay times 0 to 60 s or (in steps of 0.01 s) 0.83 ms (60 Hz)
Undervoltage blocking 20 to 100 V or (in steps of 1 V) Fault record duration Max. 5 s
Start signal Tripping, energization, binary
2 Pickup time f>, f<
Reset times f>, f<
Approx. 100 ms
Approx. 100 ms input, PC
Reset difference Approx. 20 mHz R.m.s. fault record
Reset ratio (undervoltage blocking) 1.05 Measured values V, Vx, f-fN
Tolerances Pattern 10 ms (50 Hz)
3 Frequencies f>, f< 5 mHz at f = fN and V = VN

10 mHz at f = fN Fault record duration
8.3 ms (60 Hz)
Max. 50 s
Undervoltage blocking 3 % of setting value or 1 V Starting signal Tripping, energization, binary
Delay times 1 % of setting value or 10 ms input, PC
Rate-of-frequency-change protection Operational measured values
4 Number of rates-of-frequency- Measured values V, Vx, V1, V/f, f
changing stages 4 Measuring range voltage 0 to 170 V
df Tolerance 2 V or 5 %
Setting range 0.4 to 10 Hz/s or (in steps of Measuring range overexcitation 0 to 2.4
dt
5 Delay times
0.1 Hz/s)
Tolerance
Measuring range frequency
5%
25 to 70 Hz
Undervoltage blocking 20 to 100 V or (in steps of 1 V) Tolerance 0.05 Hz or 5 MHz at f = fN
df
6 dt
Reset ratio pickup
df
Approx. 0.6
CE conformity
dt
Reset ratio (undervoltage blocking) 1.05 relating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Council Directive
7 Tolerances
Changes of frequencies
df
dt
2004/108/EEC previous 89/336/EEC) and electrical equipment designed
for use within certain voltage limits (Council Directive 2006/195/EEC
In the 45 to 50 Hz range 100 mHz/s at fN = 50 Hz and V = VN This unit conforms to the international standard IEC 60255, and the
In the 54 to 60 Hz range 150 mHz/s at fN = 60 Hz and V = VN German standard DIN 57435/Part 303 (corresponding to VDE 0435/
8 Undervoltage blocking V<

Delay times
Part 303).
V VN in accordance with Article 10 of the Council Directive complying with the
9 Warning stage
f fN
1 to 1.2 (in steps of 0.01)
generic standards EN 50081-2 and EN 50082-2 for the EMC Directive and
standard EN 60255-6 for the low-voltage Directive.
V VN
Tripping stage 1 to 1.4 (in steps of 0.01)
f fN
10 Delay times,
warning and tripping stages
0 to 60 s, or (in steps of 0.01 s)
Curve values V/f 1.1 / 1.15 / 1.2 / 1.25 / 1.3 / 1.35 / 1.4
Associated delay times 0 to 20000 s (in steps of 1 s)
Cooling-down time 0 to 20000 s (in steps of 1 s)
11 Voltage transformer adaption factor 0.5 to 2 (in steps 0.01)
Pickup response time (stage curve) 50 ms
Reset time (stage curve) 60 ms
Reset ratio 0.95
12 Tolerances
Overexcitation V/f 3 % of setting value
Delay times (stage curve) 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Delay times (dependent curve) 5 % with respect to V/f value 0.5 s
13
14
15

7RW600 numerical voltage, frequency and overexcitation protection relay

7RW6000 - A 0- DA0
1
DC 24, 48 V 2
DC 60, 110, 125 V 4
DC 220, 250 V, AC 115 V 5 2
Unit design
For panel surface mounting, terminals on the side B
For panel surface mounting, terminals on the top and bottom
For panel ush mounting/cubicle mounting, terminals on the rear
D
E
3
Languages
English 0
German 1 4
Spanish 2
French 3
Scope of functions
Voltage and frequency protection 0
5
Voltage, frequency and rate-of-frequency-change protection 1
Voltage and overexcitation protections 2
6
DIGSI 4
7
Software for conguration and operation of Siemens protection units
running under MS Windows 2000 / XP Professional Edition device
templates, Comtrade Viewer, electronic manual included as well as
Getting started manual on paper, connecting cables (copper)
Basis
8
Professional
DIGSI 4 Basis and additionally SIGRA (fault record analysis), 9
CFC Editor (logic editor), Display Editor (editor for default and control
displays) and DIGSI 4 Remote (remote operation) 7XS5402-0AA00
SIGRA 4
10
additionally)
manufacturers (Comtrade format).
Running under MS Windows 2000 / XP Professional Edition.
11
Converter RS232RS485*
With communication cable for the SIPROTEC 7RW600
12
numerical voltage, frequency and overexcitation relay; length 1 m
With plug-in power supply unit AC 230 V 7XV5700-0 001)
With plug-in power supply unit AC 110 V
Converter, full-duplex FO cable, RS485,

7XV5700-1 001)
13
with built-in power supply unit
Auxiliary voltage DC 24 250 V and AC 110 / 230 V 7XV5650-0BA00
Manual for 7RW600 14

English C53000-G1176-C117-4
1) Possible versions see part 13, 7XV57 RS232RS485 Converter

* RS485 bus system up to 115 kbaud, RS485 cable and adaptor 7XV5103- AA see part 13 15
Connection diagrams
7
Fig. 11/81 Connection circuit diagram of 7RW600 voltage and frequency protection with presetting of marshallable binary inputs and command
contacts. (Ordering Code: 7RW600x-xBxxx-; 7RW600x-xExxx-).
10
11
12
13
14
15 Fig. 11/82 Connection circuit diagram of 7RW600 voltage and overexcitation protection with presetting of marshallable binary inputs and
command contacts. (Ordering Code: 7RW600x-xBxxx-; 7RW600x-xExxx-).

Generator Protection / 7VE6
SIPROTEC 7VE6 multifunction paralleling device
Voltage and frequency functions (V>, V<, f>, f< df/dt) including
voltage vector jump () are optionally available for protection
or network decoupling applications. 1
The integrated programmable logic functions (continuous
function chart CFC) offer the user a high exibility so that
adjustments can easily be made to the varying requirements on
the basis of special system conditions. 2
The exible communication interfaces are open to modern com-
munication architectures with control systems.
LSP2483-afpen.tif
Function overview
Basic functions
High reliability with a two-out-of-two design (1 channels in
4
7VE61 and 2 channels in 7VE63)
Paralleling of asynchronous voltage sources
Balancing commands for voltage and speed (frequency) 5
Paralleling of synchronous voltage sources
Synchro-check function for manual synchronization
Fig. 11/83 SIPROTEC 7VE6 multifunction paralleling device Parameter blocks for use on several synchronizing points
(7VE61 max. 4 and 7VE63 max. 8) 6
Description Additional functions
Consideration of transformer vector group and tap changer
The 7VE61 and 7VE63 paralleling devices of the SIPROTEC 4 fam-
ily are multifunctional compact units used for paralleling power Synchronization record (instantaneous or r.m.s. record) 7
systems and generators. Commissioning support (CB-time measurement, test
synchronization)
Their technical design ensures highly reliable paralleling due to
their 1-channel or 2-channel measurement method and their
hardware design. This is supported by numerous monitoring
Browser operation
Full control functionality of SIPROTEC 4
8
functions. The units automatically detect the operating condi- Analog outputs of operational measured values
tions. The response to these conditions depends on settings.
Functions for protection or network decoupling tasks
In synchronous network switching mode, the frequency
difference is measured with great accuracy. If the frequency dif- Protection functions (option)
9
ference is almost zero for a long enough time, the networks are
already synchronous and a larger making angle is permissible. Undervoltage protection(27)
Overvoltage protection (59)
If the conditions are asynchronous, as is the case when synchro-
nizing generators, the generator speed is automatically matched Frequency protection (81) 10
to the system frequency and the generator voltage to the system Rate-of-frequency-change protection ( 81R)
voltage. The connection is then made at the synchronous point, Jump of voltage vector monitoring
allowing for circuit-breaker make-time.
The 7VE61 paralleling device is a 1-channel unit (paralleling
function + synchro-check) for use with small to medium-size Self-supervision of paralleling function
generators and power systems. It is more reliable than 1-channel Operational measured values
paralleling devices. It can also be used for synchro-check, with
parallel operation of three synchronization points.
8 oscillographic fault records 12
For larger generators and power systems with high reliability
requirements, the 2-channel 7VE63 is recommended. Two System interface
independent methods decide on the connection conditions. The
unit also has the full control functions of the SIPROTEC 4 family.
IEC 60870-5-103
IEC 61850 protocol
13
PROFIBUS-DP
MODBUS RTU and DNP 3.0
14
Time synchronization via IRIG B/DCF77
15
Application
Application Programmable logic
1 The 7VE61 and 7VE63 paralleling devices of the SIPROTEC 4

The integrated programmable logic function allows the user
to implement his own functions for automation of switchgear
family are multifunctional compact units used for paralleling (interlocking) via a graphic user interface. The user can also
power systems and generators. generate user-dened messages.
2 Their technical design ensures highly reliable paralleling due to

their 1-channel or 2-channel measurement method and their
Adjustments can easily be made to the varying power station
requirements.
hardware design. This is supported by numerous monitoring
functions. Measurement method
3 The units automatically detect the operating conditions.

The response to these conditions depends on settings.
Powerful and successful algorithms based on years of experience
have been incorporated. They ensure both a high level of mea-
surement accuracy and effective noise signal suppression. That
In synchronous network switching mode, the frequency makes for reliable paralleling even in networks with harmonics.
difference is measured with great accuracy. If the frequency
4 difference is almost zero for a long enough time, the
networks are already synchronous and a larger making angle
Complementary measurement methods avoid unwanted opera-
tion.
is permissible. Design
If the conditions are asynchronous, as is the case when synchro-
5 nizing generators, the generator speed is automatically matched
The units are available in two designs: the 19" wide 7VE61
and the 19" wide 7VE63. The 7VE61 features a four-line
to the system frequency and the generator voltage to the system display. The 7VE63 is equipped with a graphic display for visual-
voltage. The connection is then made at the synchronous point, ization of switching states. It also has a larger number of binary
allowing for circuit-breaker make-time. inputs and outputs than the 7VE61.
6 The 7VE61 paralleling device is a 1-channel unit (paralleling
Communication
function + synchro-check) for use with small to medium-size
generators and power systems. It is more reliable than 1-channel Flexible and powerful communication is paramount. That is
paralleling devices. It can also be used for synchro-check, with why the paralleling devices have up to ve serial interfaces (for
7 parallel operation of three synchronization points. details see chapter 4 "Communication"):
For larger generators and power systems with high reliability Front interface for connecting a PC
requirements, the 2-channel 7VE63 is recommended. Two Service interface for connecting a PC (e.g. via a modem)
independent methods decide on the connection conditions. The
8 unit also has the full control functions of the SIPROTEC 4 family.
System interface for connecting to a control system via
IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850, PROFIBUS-DP, MODBUS RTU or
Voltage and frequency functions (V>, V<, f>, f< df/dt) including DNP 3.0
voltage vector jump () are optionally available for protection Interface for an analog output module (2 20 mA) and an
9 or network decoupling applications. input

For time synchronization via DCF77 or IRIG B.
Uniform design
The SIPROTEC 4 units have a uniform design and a degree of Operational measured values
10 functionality which represents a whole new quality in protection

and control and automation.
In order to assist system management and for commissioning
purposes, relevant measured values are displayed as primary and
Local operation has been designed according to ergonomic crite- secondary values with unit and values relating to the object to
ria. Large, easy-to-read displays (graphic display for 7VE63) were be protected.
11 a major design aim. The DIGSI 4 operating program considerably

simplies planning and engineering and reduces commissioning
The measured values can also be transferred via the serial
interfaces.
times.
In addition, the programmable logic permits limit value scans
Highly reliable and status indications derived therefrom.
12 The 7VE6 hardware is based on 20 years of Siemens experience Metered values are available in the form of energy metered
with numerical protection equipment. State-of-the-art technol- values for the active and reactive energy supplied and are also
ogy and a high-efciency, 32-bit microprocessor are employed. provided by an elapsed-hour meter.
13 Production is subject to exacting quality standards.

Special attention has been paid to electromagnetic compatibility,
and the number of electronic modules has been drastically
reduced by the use of highly integrated circuits.
14 The software design incorporates accumulated experience and
the latest technical knowledge. Object orientation and high-level
language programming, combined with the continuous quality
assurance system, ensure maximized software reliability.
15
Application, functions
Indications Continuous self-monitoring

The SIPROTEC 4 units provide detailed data for analysis of syn-
chronization (fault events from activated protection functions)
The hardware and software are continuously monitored. If
abnormal conditions are detected, the unit signals immediately. 1
and for checking states during operation. All indications are In this way, a great degree of safety, reliability and availability is
protected against power supply failure. achieved.
Synchronization indications
(Fault indications)
Reliable battery monitoring 2
The last eight synchronizations (faults) are stored in the unit at The battery buffers the indications and fault recordings in the
all times. A fresh synchronization (fault) will erase the oldest event of power supply voltage failure. Its function is checked at
one. The fault indications have a time resolution of 1 ms. They regular intervals by the processor. If the capacity of the battery is
provide detailed information on history. The buffer memory is
designed for a total of 600 indications.
found to be declining, an alarm indication is generated. 3
All setting parameters are stored in the Flash-EPROM which are
Operational indications not lost if the power supply or battery fails. The SIPROTEC 4 unit
All indications that are not directly associated with the
synchronization (fault) (e.g. operating or switching actions)
are stored in the status indication buffer. The time resolution is
remains fully functional.
4
1 ms, buffer size: 200 indications.
Functions
Fault recording at up to 10 or 100 seconds
An instantaneous value or r.m.s. value recorder is provided. The Functional scope of the paralleling function
5
rmware permits storage of 8 fault recordings. Triggering can The units contain numerous individually settable functions
be effected by the synchronization function (starting or closing for different applications. They cover the following operating
command), protection function (pickup or tripping), binary
input, the DIGSI 4 operating program or by the control system.
modes: 6
Synchro-check
The instantaneous value recording stores the voltage input
values (va, vb, vc, vd, ve, vf), voltage differences (va-vd, vb-ve, In this mode, the variables V, f, are checked. If they reach
vc-vf), and calculated r.m.s. values V, f, at 1-ms intervals
(or 0.83-ms intervals for 60 Hz). The r.m.s. values are calculated
set values, a release command is issued for as long as all three
conditions are met, but at least for a settable time.
7
every half cycle. The total duration of the fault recording is
10 seconds. If the time is exceeded, the oldest recording is Switching synchronous networks
overwritten. The characteristic of synchronous networks is their identical
frequency (f0). This state is detected, and fulllment of the
8
If you want to record for a longer period for commissioning
purposes (for example, to show the effect of balancing V and conditions is checked. If the conditions remain met
commands), r.m.s. value recording is advisable. The relevant for a set time, the CLOSE command is issued.
calculated values (V1,V2, f1, f2, V, f, ) are recorded at
half-cycle intervals. The total duration is 100 seconds. Switching asynchronous networks 9
This state occurs in the power system and generator (open
Time synchronization generator circuit-breaker). A check is made for fulllment of V
A battery-backed clock is a standard component and can be
synchronized via a synchronization signal (DCF77; IRIG B via
and f conditions and the connection time is calculated, taking
account of , and the circuit-breaker making time. By means of
10
satellite receiver), binary input, system interface or SCADA balancing commands (for voltage and frequency), the generator
(e.g. SICAM). A date and time are assigned to every indication. can automatically be put into a synchronous condition.
Freely assignable binary inputs and outputs Switching onto dead busbars 11
Binary inputs, output relays, and LEDs can each be given The voltage inputs are checked here. The CLOSE command is
separate user-specic assignments. Assignment is effected using issued depending on the set program and the result of measure-
a software matrix, which greatly simplies the allocation of
individual signals.
ment. A three-phase connection increases reliability because
several voltages must fulll the conditions (see Fig. 11/84). 12
To ensure dual-channel redundancy, control of the CLOSE relay The following operating states are possible:
(relay R1 and R2) is prioritized and should not be altered. These V1< V2 >
two relays have a special, highly reliable control and monitoring
logic (see Fig. 11/89).
(connection to dead busbar (side 1)) 13
V1> V2 <
(connection to dead line (side 2))
V1< V2 <
(forced closing) 14
15
Functions
Voltage and frequency band query
1 Synchronization is not activated until the

set limits are reached. Then the remaining
parameters (see above) are checked.
Vector group adaptation

2 If synchronization is effected using a
transformer, the unit will take account of
the phase-angle rotation of the voltage
phasor in accordance with the vector
3 group entry for the transformer. On
transformers with a tap changer, the tap
setting can be communicated to the unit,
for example, as BCD code (implemented
4 in the 7VE63). When using the IEC 61850
communication standard, it is possible
to detect tap position indications with
LSP2480fen.tif
a bay control unit (e.g. 6MD66) and to
5 transmit these indications via GOOSE to

the 7VE6 paralleling device. Deviations
from the rated transformation ratio result
in the appropriate voltage amplitude
adaptation. Fig. 11/84 SIGRA 4, synchronization record with balancing commands
6 Voltage and frequency balancing
If the synchronization conditions are not fullled, the unit will Commissioning aids
automatically issue balancing signals. These are the appropriate
7 up or down commands to the voltage or speed controller (fre-
The paralleling device is designed to be commissioned without
an external tester/recorder (see Fig. 11/84). For that purpose,
quency controller). The balancing signals are proportional to the
it contains a codeword-protected commissioning section. This
voltage or frequency difference, which means that if the voltage
can be used to measure the make time automatically with the
or frequency difference is substantial, longer balancing com-
unit (internal command issue until the CB poles are closed). This
8 mands will be output. A set pause is allowed to elapse between
balancing commands to allow the state change to settle. This
process is logged by the fault recording function.
method ensures rapid balancing of the generator voltage or The operational measured values also include all measured
frequency to the target conditions. values required for commissioning. The behavior of the paral-
9 If identical frequency is detected during generator-network
synchronization (motionless synchronization phasor), a kick
leling function or the unit is also documented in detail in the
operational annunciation and synchronization annunciation
buffer. The connection conditions are documented in the
pulse will put the generator out of this state.
synchronization record. Test synchronization is also permitted.
For example, if the voltage is to be adjusted using the trans- All actions inside the synchronizer are taken but the two CLOSE
10 former tap changer, a dened control pulse will be issued. relays are not operated (R1 and R2). This state can also be initi-
ated via a binary input.
Several synchronizing points
11 Depending on the ordered scope, several synchronization

points can be operated. The data for synchronization of each
circuit-breaker (synchronization function group) are stored
individually. In the maximum version, the 7VE63 operates up to
8 synchronization points. Selection is made either via the binary
12 input or the serial interface. With the CFC, it is also possible to
control the connection of the measured variables or commands
via a master relay.
13
14
15
Functions
Fig. 11/85 Two-channel redundancy

5
Great safety and reliability due to multi-channel redundancy
Generator synchronization especially requires units in which 6
unwanted operation can be ruled out. The paralleling device
achieves this multi-channel redundancy with a two-out-of-two
decision. That means that two conditions for the CLOSE com-
mand must be fullled. Fig. 11/85 shows the structure of the
1 -channel version (7VE61)
7
two designs.
In the 1-channel version (7VE61), the paralleling function is
the function that gives the CLOSE command. The synchro-check
function acts as a release criterion with rougher monitoring limit 8
settings. Other monitoring functions are also active at the same
time (see below).
In the two-channel version (7VE63), two independent methods
work in parallel. The CLOSE command is given when the two
2-channel version (7VE63) 9
methods simultaneously decide on CLOSE. Fig. 11/86 shows the
consistent implementation of dual-channel redundancy. Fig. 11/86 Design of multi-channel redundancy
The measured quantities are fed to two ADCs. The second

ADC processes the values rotated through 180 (e.g. V1). The Moreover, coil operation is monitored in the background. For
10
monitoring methods test all the transformer circuits including this purpose, transistors are activated individually and the
internal data acquisition for plausibility and they block measure- response is fed back. Both interruptions and transistor break-
ment if deviations are found. The phase-sequence test detects
connection errors. The measuring methods 1 and 2 include the
down are detected. When faults are found, the unit is blocked
immediately. 11
measurement algorithms and logic functions.
The plausibility monitoring of set values (valid limits) and
In keeping with the two-channel redundancy principle, differing selection of the synchronization function groups (only one can
measurement methods are used to prevent unwanted operation
due to systematic errors.
be selected) are also supported. In the event of any deviations,
messages are output and the paralleling function is blocked.
12
In addition, numerous methods are also active, such as closure
monitoring (synchronism monitoring of both methods).
Unwanted relay operation is avoided by two-channel operation
of both CLOSE relays. The two measurement methods operate
13
the transistors crossed over.
14
15
Functions
Internet technology simplies

commissioning
1 In addition to the universal DIGSI 4 oper-
ating program, the synchronizer contains
a Web server that can be accessed via a
telecommunications link using a browser
2 (e.g. Internet Explorer). The advantage of
this solution is that it is both possible to
operate the unit with standard software
tools and to make use of the Intranet/
3 Internet infrastructure. Moreover, infor-
mation can be stored in the unit without
any problems. In addition to numeric
values, visualizations facilitate work with
4 the unit. In particular, graphical displays
LSP2481fen.tif
provide clear information and a high
degree of operating reliability. Fig. 11/88
shows an example of an overview that is
familiar from conventional synchronizers.
5 The current status of synchronization Fig. 11/87 Browser-based operation
conditions is clearly visible. Of course, it
is possible to call up further measured
value displays and annunciation buffers.
6 By emulation of integrated unit opera-
tion, it is also possible to adjust selected
settings for commissioning purposes,
(see Fig. 11/87).
LSP2482fen.tif
10 Fig. 11/88 Overview display of the synchronization function
11
12
13
14
15
Functions
Protection and automation functions Jump of voltage vector monitoring
Basic concept Smaller generating plants frequently require the vector jump
function. With this criterion it is possible to detect a discon- 1
The paralleling function is not performed constantly. Therefore nected supply (e.g. due to the dead time during an automatic
the measured quantities provided at the analog inputs are reclosure) and initiate generator disconnection. This avoids
available for other functions. Voltage and frequency protection impermissible loads on the generating plant, especially the drive
or limit value monitoring of these quantities are typical applica-
tions. Another possible application is network decoupling. After
gearing, if reconnection to the network is asynchronous. 2
network disconnection, automatic resynchronization using the The vector jump function monitors the phase angle change in
CFC is possible on request. To allow for great exibility, these the voltage.
functions can be assigned to the analog inputs. This is dened
for the specic application.
If the incoming line should fail, the abrupt current discontinuity
leads to a phase angle jump in the voltage. This is measured
3
by means of a delta process. The command for opening the
generator or coupler circuit- breaker is issued if the set threshold
The protection function is implemented on two stages and
evaluates the voltage at an input assigned to it. Analysis of a
is exceeded.
Vector jump monitoring is performed again for the assigned
4
phase-to-phase voltage is benecial as it avoids starting in the
voltage input. This function is blocked during synchronization.
event of ground faults. The protection function can be used
for monitoring and decoupling purposes or to prevent voltage-
induced instability of generators by disconnection.
Threshold monitoring
5
The threshold function is provided for fast monitoring and
Overvoltage protection (ANSI 59) further processing in the CFC. Optional monitoring of the
calculated voltage (for violation of an upper or lower threshold)
The protection function is implemented on two stages and
evaluates the voltage at an input assigned to it.
at the six voltage inputs is possible. A total of three greater-than
and three less-than thresholds are available. The check is made
6
The overvoltage protection prevents impermissible stress on
once per cycle, resulting in a minimum operating time of about
equipment due to excessive voltages.
30 ms for the voltage. The times can be extended by the internal
Frequency protection (ANSI 81) check time, if necessary (about 1 cycle).
7
The protection function is implemented on four stages and
evaluates the frequency of an input assigned to it. Depending on
the frequency threshold setting, the function can provide over-
frequency protection (setting > fn) or underfrequency protection
(setting < fn). Each stage can be delayed separately. Stage 4 can
8
be congured either as an overfrequency or underfrequency
stage.
The application consists of frequency monitoring usually causing 9
network disconnection in the event of any deviations. The func-
tion is suitable as a load shedding criterion.
Rate-of-frequency-change protection (ANSI 81R) 10

This function can also be assigned to an input. The frequency
difference is determined on the basis of the calculated frequency
over a time interval. It corresponds to the momentary rate-of-
frequency change. The function is designed to react to both
positive and negative rate-of-frequency changes. Exceeding
11
of the permissible rate-of-frequency change is monitored con-
stantly. Release of the relevant direction depends on whether
the actual frequency is above or below the rated frequency.
In total, four stages are available, and can be used optionally.
12
This function is used for fast load shedding or for network
decoupling.
13
14
15
1 Connection to three-phase voltage

transformer
If three-phase voltage transformers are
2 available, connection as shown in

Fig. 11/89 is recommended. This is the
standard circuit because it provides a
high level of reliability for the paralleling
function. The phase-sequence test is
3 additionally active, and several voltages are
checked on connection to a dead busbar.
Interruption in the voltage connection does
not lead to unwanted operation. Please
4 note that side 1 (that is, V1) is always the
feed side. That is important for thedirection
of balancing commands.
6
Fig. 11/89
7
Connection to open delta connection
(V-connection) voltage transformer
8 Fig. 11/90 shows an alternative to

Fig. 11/89 for substations in which the volt-
age transformers have to be V-connected.
For the paralleling device, this connection
9 is the electrical equivalent of the connec-
tion described above. It is also possible to
combine the two: three one-pole isolated
voltage transformers on one side and the
10 V-connection on the other. If, additionally,

a synchroscope is connected, it must
be electrically isolated by means of an
interposing transformer.
11
12
13 Fig. 11/90
14
15
Connection to oating voltage

transformer
To save costs for the voltage transformer, 1
two-phase isolated voltage transformers
are used that are connected to the phase-
to-phase voltage (see Fig. 11/91). In that
case, the phase-rotation supervision is
inactive and reliability restrictions when
2
connecting to the dead busbarmust be
accepted.
Full two-channel redundancy is ensured. 3
6
Fig. 11/91
7
Connection to single-phase isolated
voltage transformer
As an alternative to Fig. 11/91, some
substations use single-phase isolated
8
voltage transformers (see Fig. 11/92). In
this case, only a phase-to-ground voltage
is available. This connection should be
avoided if possible. Especially in isolated
9
or resonant-(star point) neutral-grounded
networks, an ground fault would lead to a
voltage value of zero. That does not permit
synchronization and the busbar is detected 10
as dead.
If V1< and V2 > connection is permitted,
there is a high risk of incorrect synchroniza-
tion. Furthermore, an ground fault in phase
11
L2 leads to an angle rotation of for
instance 30 in phase L1. This means that
the device switches at a large fault angle.
12
Fig. 11/92 13
14
15
Switching in 16.7 Hz networks for

application in traction systems
1 The unit can also be used for synchronizing
railway networks or generators. The
connection has to be executed according
to Fig. 11/93. No phase sequence test is
2 available here. Two-channel redundancy is
ensured.
The voltage inputs permit the application
of the 16.7 Hz frequency without any
3 difculties.
On connection to a dead busbar, a broken
wire in the external voltage transformer
4 circuit is not detected. It is recommended
to make another interrogation of a second
voltage transformer.
6
Fig. 11/93
10
11
12
13
14
15
Synchro-check for several synchroniz-

ing points
To avoid unwanted operation during 1
manual synchronization or during con-
nection of circuit-breakers in the network,
the synchro-check function is used as an
enabling criterion. It is fully compatible
with all of the connections described
2
above (see Figs. 11/89 to 11/93). With
the synchro-check ordering option, the
paralleling device also allows up to three
circuit-breakers to bemonitored in parallel.
3
That saves wiring, switching and testing.
In particular, that is an application for the
1 circuit-breaker method. Moreover, on
smaller generating plants one unit can 4
be used for up to three generators, which
helps reduce costs.
The connection shown in Fig. 11/94 is a
single-pole version, which is acceptable for
5
the synchro-check function.
An alternative is the connection for two
switching devices (see Fig. 11/95). 6
The two free voltage inputs can be used for
monitoring purposes.
7
Fig. 11/94
10
11
12
13
Fig. 11/95
14
15
8
DIGSI: BI "L" active
9 Fig. 11/96
Synchronization of a generator
10 Fig. 11/96 shows an example of the 7VE61 paralleling device
connected to a medium-power generator.Where three-phase volt-
age transformers are available, direct connection is recommended.
11 The synchronization point and start of synchronization is selected

via the binary inputs. If cancellation is necessary, the stop input
must be used.
If synchronization onto a dead busbar is permitted, the alarm
12 contact of the voltage transformer miniature circuit-breakers
(m.c.b.) must be connected to the unit.
Relays R1 and R2 are used for a CLOSE command. The other relays
are used for selected indications and for the balancing commands.
13 The live status contact operated by the unit self-supervision
function must also be wired.
14
15
Technical data
Hardware Unit design

Analog inputs
Rated frequency 50, 60 or 16.7 Hz
drawings part 14 1
Rated voltage VN 100 to 125 V Degree of protection acc. to
EN 60529
Power consumption For surface-mounting housing IP 51
Voltage inputs (at 100 V)
Capability in voltage paths
Approx. 0.3 VA
230 V continuous
Front IP 51 2
Rear IP 50
Auxiliary voltage
For the terminals IP 2x with terminal cover put on
Weight
DC 60 to 125 V
DC 110 to 250 V
DC 220 to 250 V
7VE61 ( x 19) Approx. 5.2 kg
3
7VE63 ( x 19) Approx. 7 kg
AC 115 and 230 V (50/60 Hz)
Permitted tolerance -20 to +20 %
7VE61 ( x 19) Approx. 9.2 kg
(peak-to-peak)
15 % 7VE63 ( x 19) Approx. 12 4
Power consumption
Quiescent Serial interfaces
7VE61 Approx. 4 W
7VE63 Approx. 5.5 W
Connection Non-isolated, RS232, front panel; 5
Energized 9-pin subminiature connector
7VE61 Approx. 9.5 W (SUB-D)
7VE63 Approx. 12 W
Baud rate 4800 to 115,200 baud
voltage failure
Time synchronization IRIG-B / DCF77 signal (Format: IRIG B000) 6
at Vaux = 48 V and Vaux 110 V 50 ms Connection 9-pin subminiature connector,
at Vaux = 24 V and Vaux = 60 V 20 ms (SUB-D), terminal with surface-
mounting case
Binary inputs
Quantity
Voltage levels Selectable 5, 12 or 24 V 7
7VE61 6 Service / modem interface (Port C) for DIGSI 4 / modem / service
7VE63 14 Isolated RS232/RS485 9-pin subminiature connector
3 pickup thresholds DC 14 to 19 V, DC 66 to 88 V; (SUB-D)
Range is settable with jumpers
Maximum permissible voltage
DC 117 to 176 V
DC 300 V
Test voltage
Distance for RS232
500 V / 50 Hz
Max. 15 m
8
System interface (Port B) IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, PROFIBUS-DP,
Output relays MODBUS RTU, DNP 3.0) and interface (Port D)
Quantity
7VE61 9 (each with 1 NO; 1 optional as
Isolated RS232/RS485 9-pin subminiature connector 9
(SUB-D)
NC, via jumper) Baud rate 4800 to 115200 Baud
7VE62 17 (each with 1 NO; 2 optional as Test voltage 500 V / 50 Hz
NC, via jumper)
7VE61+7VE63 1 live status contact
(NC, NO via jumper)
Distance for RS232
Distance for RS485
Max. 15 m
Max. 1000 m 10
RS485: PROFIBUS-DP, MODBUS RTU, 9-pin subminiature connector
Switching capacity DNP 3.0 (SUB-D)
Make 1000 W / VA Test voltage 500 V / 50 Hz
Break
Break (for resistive load)
30 VA
40 W Baud rate
PROFIBUS-DP Max. 12 MBaud
11
Break (for L/R 50 ms) 25 W
MODBUS RTU, DNP 3.0 Max. 19200 Baud
Distance
Permissible current 5 A continuous
PROFIBUS-DP
MODBUS RTU, DNP 3.0

Max. 1000 m with 93.75 kBaud;
Max. 100 m with 12 MBaud
1000 m
12
LEDs
Quantity Fiber optic: IEC, PROFIBUS-DP, ST connector
RUN (green) 1 MODBUS RTU, DNP 3.0
ERROR (red)
Assignable LED (red)
1 PROFIBUS-DP
IEC, MODBUS RTU, DNP 3.0
Double ring
Point-to-point 13
7VE61 7 Baud rate
7VE63 14 PROFIBUS-DP Max. 1.5 MBaud
MODBUS RTU, DNP 3.0 Max. 19200 Baud
Optical wavelength = 820 nm 14
Permissible path attenuation Max. 8 dB, for glass-ber
62.5/125 m
Distance Max. 1.5 km
Analog output module (electrical) 2 ports with 0 to +20 mA 15
Technical data
System interface (Port B) Irradiation with RF eld, 10 V/m; 900 MHz; repetition
IEC 61850 pulse-modulated frequency 200 Hz; duty cycle 50 %
1 Ethernet, electrical (EN 100) for IEC 61850 and DIGSI IEC 61000-4-3/ ENV 50204, class III
Fast transient interference bursts 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz;
Connection Rear panel, mounting location "B",
IEC 60255-22-4, burst length = 15 ms; repetition
for ush-mounting case two RJ45 connector, 100 Mbit/s
IEC 61000-4-4, class IV rate 300 ms; both polarities;
acc. to IEEE802.3
Test voltage
At bottom part of the housing
500 V; 50 Hz High-energy surge voltages Impulse: 1.2/50 s
Transmission speed 100 Mbits/s (SURGE),
Distance 20 m/66 ft IEC 61000-4-5 installation, class III
Auxiliary supply Common (longitudinal) mode:
Ethernet, optical (EN 100) for IEC 61850 and DIGSI
3 Connection
2 kV; 12 , 9 F
for ush-mounting case Rear panel, mounting location "B", 1 kV; 2 , 18 F
LC connector receiver/transmitter Measurement inputs, binary inputs
for panel surface-mounting case Not available and relay outputs Common (longitudinal) mode:
4 Optical wavelength
Transmission speed
= 1350 nm
100 Mbits/s
Laser class 1 acc. to EN 60825-1/-2 Glass ber 50/125 m or
2 kV; 42 , 0.5 F
1 kV; 42 , 0.5 F
glass ber 62/125 m
Permissible path attenuation Max. 5 dB for glass ber Line-conducted HF, 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM;
5 Distance
62.5/125m
Max. 800 m/0.5 mile IEC 61000-4-6, class III
Magnetic eld with power frequency 30 A/m continuous;
IEC 61000-4-8, class IV; IEC 60255-6 300 A/m for 3 s; 50 Hz
Electrical tests 0.5 mT; 50 Hz
6 Specications
capability
damped wave; 50 surges
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0/.1/.2 ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 per second;
UL 508 Duration 2 s; Ri = 150 to 200
DIN 57435, part 303 Fast transient surge withstand 4 to 5 kV; 10/150 ns; 50 surges per
7 Insulating tests
For further standards see below capability ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 second; both polarities;
duration 2 s ; Ri = 80
Radiated electromagnetic 35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz
interference
Voltage test (100 % test) 2.5 kV (r.m.s.), 50/60 Hz ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2
8 All circuits except for auxiliary sup-
ply, binary inputs, communication
Damped oscillations 2.5 kV (peak value), polarity
IEC 60894, IEC 61000-4-12 alternating 100 kHz, 1 MHz,
and time synchronization interfaces
10 and 50 MHz, Ri = 200
Voltage test (100 % test) DC 3.5 kV
EMC tests for interference emission (type test)
Auxiliary voltage and binary inputs
9 Voltage test (100 % test) only 500 V (r.m.s. value), 50/60 Hz Standard EN 50081-x (generic standard)
isolated communication interfaces Conducted interference voltage 150 kHz to 30 MHz
and time synchronization interface on lines only auxiliary supply Limit class B
Impulse voltage test (type test) 5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 s; 0.5 J; IEC-CISPR 22
10 All circuits except for communica- 3 positive and 3 negative impulses

tion interfaces and time synchroni- at intervals of 5 s
Interference eld strength
IEC-CISPR 22
30 to 1000 MHz
Limit class B
zation interface, class III
EMC tests for noise immunity (type test) Mechanical stress tests
11 Standards IEC 60255-6, IEC 60255-22

(product standards)
During operation
DIN 57435 part 303 Standards EC 60255-21 and IEC 60068
High frequency test 2.5 kV (peak value), 1 MHz; Vibration Sinusoidal
12 IEC 60255-22-1, class III
and DIN 57435 part 303, class III
= 15 ms
IEC 60068-2-6
Electrostatic discharge 8 kV contact discharge; Frequency sweep 1 octave/min
IEC 60255-22-2, class IV 15 kV air discharge; 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes
EN 61000-4-2, class IV both polarities; 150 pF; Ri = 330
13 Irradiation with RF eld, 10 V/m; 27 to 500 MHz
Shock
IEC 60255-21-2, class I
IEC 60068-2-27
Half-sinusoidal
3 shocks each in both directions of
non-modulated
IEC 60255-22-3 (report), class III the 3 axes
Irradiation with RF eld, 10 V/m; 80 to 1000 MHz; 80 % AM;
14 amplitude-modulated,
1 kHz
15
Technical data
Seismic vibration Sinusoidal Paralleling function (ANSI 25)

IEC 60255-21-2, class I 1 to 8 Hz: 3.5 mm amplitude
Setting ranges
Upper voltage limit Vmax
Lower voltage limit Vmin
20 to 140 V (steps 1 V)
20 to 125 V (steps 1 V)
1
(vertical axis) V < for de-energized status 1 to 60 V (steps 1 V)
8 to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration V > for energized status 20 to 140 V (steps 1 V)
(horizontal axis) Voltage difference V 0 to 40 V (steps 1 V)
(vertical axis)
Frequency difference f
Angle difference
2 to 80 (steps 1)
2
Frequency sweep 1 octave/min Changeover threshold 0.01 to 0.04 Hz (steps 0.01 Hz)
1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes asynchronous synchronous
During transport Angle correction of vector group 0 to 359 (steps 1)
Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2 Matching voltage transformer V1/V2
Circuit-breaker making time
0.5 to 2 (steps 0.01)
10 to 1000 ms (steps 1 ms)
3
Vibration Sinusoidal Operating time of circuit-breaker 0.01 to 10 s (steps 0.01 s)
IEC 60255-21-1, class II 5 to 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude; Max. operating time after start 0.01 to 1200 s (steps 0.01 s)
IEC 60068-2-6 8 to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration Monitoring time of voltage 0 to 60 s (steps 0.1 s)
Release delay
Synchronous switching
0 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s)
0 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s)
4
Shock Half-sinusoidal Times
IEC 60255-21-2, class I Acceleration 15 g, duration 11 ms, Minimum measuring time Approx. 80 ms (50/60 Hz)
3 axes
Drop-off
Approx. 240 ms (16.7 Hz)
5
Continuous shock Half-sinusoidal Drop-off ratio voltage Approx. 0.9 (V >) or 1 (V <)
IEC 60255-21-2, class I Acceleration 10 g, duration 16 ms, Drop-off difference frequency 20 mHz
IEC 60068-2-29 1000 shocks in both directions of Drop-off difference phase angle 1
the 3 axes
Tolerance
Voltage measurement 1 % of pickup value or 0.5 V
6
Climatic stress test Voltage difference f 1 % of pickup value or max. 0.5 V
(typical < 0.2 V)
Temperatures Frequency difference f < 10 mHz (synchronous network)
Standards
Recommended operating limiting
IEC 60068-2-1, IEC 60068-2-2
5 C to +55 C / +25 F to +131 F Angle difference
< 15 mHz (asynchronous network)
0.5 with minor slip and approx.
7
temperature rated frequency 3 for f < 1 Hz,
5 for f > 1 Hz
Temporarily permissible operating -20 to +70 C Delay times 1 % or 10 ms
temperature (Legibility of display may be
impaired above +55 C / +131 F) Readjustment commands for synchronization 8
Limiting temperature during 25 C to +55 C / 13 F to +131 F Frequency balancing
permanent storage (with supplied Minimum control pulse 10 to 1000 ms (steps 1 ms)
packing) Maximum control pulse 1 to 32 s (steps 0.01 s)
transport (with supplied packing)
25 C to +70 C / 13 F to +158 F
Frequency change of controller
Setting time of controller
0.05 to 5 Hz/s (steps 0.01 Hz/s)
0 to 32 s (steps 0.01 s)
9
Target value for frequency -1 to 1 Hz (steps 0.01 Hz)
Humidity balancing
Standards IEC 60068-2-3 Kick pulse Available
Permissible humidity stress Annual average 75 % relative
Voltage balancing
Minimum control pulse 10 to 1000 ms (steps 1 ms)
10
93 % relative humidity; conden- Maximum control pulse 1 to 32 s (steps 0.01 s)
sation is not permit Voltage change of controller 0.1 to 50 V/s (steps 0.1 V/s)
Setting time of controller 0 to 32 s (steps 0.01 s)
Permissible overexcitation
(V/VN)/(f/fN)
1 to 1.4 (steps 0.01) 11
Tolerances
Functions Minimum control pulse 1%
Control times Approx. 5 % or 20 ms
General
Frequency range 25 to 75 Hz (fN = 50 Hz)
Undervoltage protection (ANSI 27) 12
30 to 90 Hz (fN = 60 Hz) Setting range
8.35 to 25 Hz (fN = 16.7 Hz) Undervoltage pickup 10 to 125 V (steps 0.1 V)
V <, V <<
Time delays T
Times
0 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s) or indenite 13
Pickup times V <, V << Approx. 50 ms (150 ms at 16.7 Hz)
Drop-off times V <, V << Approx. 50 ms (150 ms at 16.7 Hz)
Drop-off ratio V <, V <<
Tolerances
1.01 to 1.10 (steps 0.01)
14
15
Technical data
Overvoltage protection (ANSI 59) Threshold value supervision
1 Setting ranges
Time delays T
30 to 170 V (steps 0.1 V)
Number of steps
Measured quantity
Setting ranges
6 (3 larger and 3 smaller)
V a, V b, V c, V d, V e, V f
2 to + 200 % (steps 1 %)
Time Times
Pickup times V>, V>> Approx. 50 ms (150 ms at 16.7 Hz) Pickup times Approx. 50 ms (150 ms at 16.7 Hz)
2 Drop-off times V>, V>>

Drop-off ratio V>, V>>
Approx. 50 ms (150 ms at 16.7 Hz)
0.90 to 0.99 (steps 0.01)
Drop-off times
Drop-off ratio
Approx. 50 ms (150 ms at 16.7 Hz)
0.95
Tolerances Voltage tolerance 1 % of set value or 0.5 V
Voltage limit values 1 % of set value or 0.5 V Typical operational measured values
3 Frequency protection (ANSI 81)
Description
Voltages
Secondary
Va; Vb; Vc; Vd; Ve; Vf; V1, V2, V
Setting ranges Tolerance 0.2 % of measured value
Steps; selectable f>, f< 4 or 0.2 V 1 digit
Pickup values f>, f< 40 to 65 Hz (steps 0.01 Hz) Phase angle
4 Time delays T
Undervoltage blocking V<
10 to 125 V (steps 0.1 V)
Tolerance < 0.5
Frequency f1, f2, f
Times Tolerance 10 mHz at f = fN
Pickup times f>, f< Approx. 100 ms (300 ms at 16.7 Hz) 15 mHz at f = fN 10 %
Drop-off times f>, f< Approx. 100 ms (300 ms at 16.7 Hz)
5 Drop-off difference f Approx. 20 mHz
Fault records
Number of fault records Max. 8 fault records
Instantaneous values
Tolerances
10 mHz at f = fN Storage time Max. 10 s
Frequencies
6 Undervoltage blocking
Time delays T
1 % or 10 ms
Sampling interval Depending on the actual frequency
(e. g. 1 ms at 50 Hz;
0.83 ms at 60 Hz)
Rate-of-frequency-change protection (ANSI 81R) Channels Va; Vb; Vc; Vd; Ve; Vf; Vd-Va, Ve-Vb,
Setting ranges Vf-Vc, V, f,
7 Steps, selectable +df/dt >; - df/dt
Pickup value df/dt
4
R.m.s. values
Storage period Max. 100 s
Time delays T 0 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s) or indenite Sampling interval Fixed (10 ms at 50 Hz,
Undervoltage blocking V< 10 to 125 V (steps 0.1 V) 8.33 ms at 60 Hz)
Times Channels V1, V2, f1, f2, V, f,
8 Pickup times df/dt
at 16.7 Hz: times x 3
Approx. 200 to 700 ms
(depending on measuring duration)
Drop-off times df/dt Approx. 200 to 700 ms Fault event logging Storage of events of the last 8
at 16.7 Hz: times x 3 (depending on measuring duration) faults
Puffer length max. 600 indications
9 Drop-off ratio df/dt
Drop-off ratio V<
0.02 at 0.99 Hz/s (settable)
Approx. 1.05
Time solution 1 ms
Max. 200 indications
Tolerances
Time solution 1 ms
Rate-of-frequency change Approx. 0.1 Hz/s at V > 0.5 VN
Measuring duration < 5 Approx. 5 % or 0.15 Hz/s Elapsed-hour meter Up to 6 decimal digits
10 Measuring duration > 5

at V > 0.5 VN
Approx. 3 % or 0.15 Hz/s
Switching statistics Number of break operations
Number of make operations
at V > 0.5 VN
Undervoltage blocking 1 % of set value or 0.5 V
Time delays T 1 % or 10 ms CE conformity
11 Jump of voltage vector monitoring This product is in conformity with the Directives of the European
Communities on the harmonization of the laws of the Member States rela-
Setting ranges
ting to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Council Directive 2004/108/EEC
Stage 2 to 30 (steps 0.1)
previous 89/336/EEC) and electrical equipment designed for use within
Time delay T 0 to 60 s (steps 0.01 s) or indenite
certain voltage limits (Council Directive 2006/95/EEC previous 73/23/EEC).
12 Undervoltage blocking V<
Maximum voltage
10 to 125 V (steps 0.1 V)
10 to 170 V (steps 0.1 V)
Times Part 303).
Pickup times Approx. 75 ms (225 ms at 16.7 Hz)
Drop-off times Approx. 75 ms (225 ms at 16.7 Hz)
13 Tolerances
Vector jump 0.5 at V > 0.5 VN
in accordance with Article 10 of the Council Directive complying with the
Undervoltage blocking 1 % of set value or 0.5 V
generic standards EN 50081-2 and EN 50082-2 for the EMC Directive and
standard EN 60255-6 for the low-voltage Directive.
14 External trip coupling
Number of external trip couplings 4
15

7VE61multifunction paralleling unit
Housing 19, 6 BI, 9 BO, 1 live status contact
7VE6110 - -0 -
1
Auxiliary voltage (power supply, indication voltage)
24 to 48 V DC , threshold binary input 19 V 2
60 to 125 V DC, threshold binary input 19 V
110 to 250 V DC, 115 to 230 V AC, threshold binary input 88 V DC
4
5
2
220 to 250 V DC, 115 to 230 V AC, threshold binary input 176 V DC 6
Unit design
Surface-mounting housing, 2-tier screw-type terminals at top/bottom
Flush-mounting housing, screw-type terminals (direct connection/ring-type cable lugs)
B 3
E
Region-specic default setting/function and language settings
Region DE, 50
50Hz,
Hz,language
languageGerman
German(language
(languageselectable)
selectable)
Region World, 50/60 Hz, language English (GB) (language selectable)
A
B 4
Region US, 60
60Hz,
Hz,language
languageEnglish
English(US)
(US)(language
selectable) C
Region World, 50/60 Hz, language Spanish (language selectable) E
Port B (system
(systeminterface)
interface)
5
IEC 60870-5-103-protocol, electrical RS232 1
IEC 60870-5-103-protocol, optical 820 nm, ST connector
Analog outputs 2 x 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA
3
7
6
PROFIBUS-DP Slave, optical 820 nm, double ring, ST connector1) 9 L 0 B
MODBUS RTU, electrical RS485
MODBUS RTU, optical 820 nm, ST connector1)
9 L 0D 7
9 L 0 E
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45 connectors 9 L 0 R 8
1
2
9
Port C (service interface) and Port D
D((additional
additional interface)
DIGSI 4
4/modem,
DIGSI 4
/ modem,electrical
4/modem,
electricalRS232
/ modem,electrical
RS232
electricalRS485
RS485
9
9
M 1
M 2
10
Analog outputs 2 x 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20
20mA
mA K
Scope of functions of the unit
Synchro-check for up to 3 synchronizing points (with dead bus
bus/linemonitoring)
/ line monitoring)
11
A
Paralleling function for 2 synchronizing points without balancing commands, 1-channel,
synchro-check in 2nd channel B
Paralleling function for 2 synchronizing points with balancing commands, 1-channel,
synchro-check in 2nd channel C
12
Paralleling function for 4 synchronizing points with balancing commands, 1-channel,
synchro-check in 2nd channel D
Without A A
13
Protection and network decoupling function
(voltage, frequency and rate-of-frequency-change protection, vector jump) B
Additional applications
Without 0
14
Application for traction systems (fn = 16.7Hz) 1
1) With position 9 = B (surface-mounting housing) the unit must be

ordered with RS485 interface and a separate FO converter.
2) Not available with position 9 = "B"
15
1 7VE63multifunction paralleling unit

7VE61multifunction
Housing
Housing 19,
19, 14
6 BI,
BI,917
BO,
BO,1
1 live
livestatus
statuscontact
contact
7VE6110
7VE6320 - -0 -
Auxiliary voltage (power supply, indication voltage)

DC 24 to 48 V, hreshold
thresholdbinary
binaryinput
input19
19VV 2
2 DC 60 to 125 V, threshold binary input 19 V

DC 110 to 250 V, AC 115 to 230 V, threshold binary input DC
88 V
88 V
4
5
220220
DC to 250
to 250
V DC,
V, AC
115115
to 230
to 230
V AC,
V, threshold
threshold binary
binary input
input DC
176176
V DC
V 6
Unit design
3 Surface-mounting housing, 2-tier screw-type terminals at top/bottom
Flush-mounting housing, screw-type terminals (direct connection/ring-type cable lugs)
B
E
Region-specic default setting
setting/function
/ functionand
andlanguage
languagesettings
settings
Region DE, 50
50Hz,
Hz,language
languageGerman
German(language
selectable)
4 Region World, 50/60 Hz, language English (GB) (language selectable)
A
B
Region US, 60
60Hz,
Hz,language
languageEnglish
English(US)
(US)(language
selectable) C
Region World, 50/60 Hz, language Spanish (language selectable) E
5 Port B (system
(systeminterface)
interface)
6 IEC 60870-5-103-protocol, optical 820 nm, ST connector
Analog outputs 2 x 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA
3
7
PROFIBUS-DP Slave, optical 820 nm, double ring, ST connector1) 9 L 0 B
7 MODBUS RTU, electrical RS485
MODBUS RTU, optical 820 nm, ST connector1)
9 L 0D
9 L 0 E
8 IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45 connectors 9 L 0 R
9 DIGSI 4/modem, electrical RS232

1
2
Port C (service interface) and Port D
D((additional
additional interface)
10 DIGSI 4
4/modem,
DIGSI 4
/ modem,electrical
4/modem,
electricalRS232
/ modem,electrical
RS232
electricalRS485
RS485
9
9
M 1
M 2
Analog outputs 2 x 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA K
11 Scope of functions of the unit
Synchro-check for up to 3 synchronizing points (with dead bus
bus/linemonitoring)
/ line monitoring) A
Paralleling function for 2 synchronizing points without balancing commands, 2-channel,
1-channel,
independent in 2nd channel
synchro-checkmeasuring procedures B
12 Paralleling function for 2 synchronizing points with balancing commands, 1-channel,
synchro-check in 2nd channel
independent measuring procedures
2-channel,
C
Paralleling function for 4
8 synchronizing points with balancing commands, 1-channel,
2-channel,
synchro-check in 2nd channel
independent measuring procedures D
Without A A
Protection and network decoupling function
(voltage, frequency and rate-of-frequency-change protection, vector jump) B
14 Additional applications
Without 0
Application for traction systems (fn = 16.7Hz) 1
15 1) With position 9 = B (surface-mounting housing) the unit must be

ordered with RS485 interface and a separate FO converter.
2) Not available with position 9 = "B"

DIGSI 4
1
running under MS Windows 2000/XP Professional Edition device
templates, Comtrade Viewer, electronic manual included as well as
Getting started manual on paper, connecting cables (copper)
Basis 2
Professional
Basis and all optional packages on CD-ROM, DIGSI 4 and DIGSI 3 7XS5402-0AA00
3
Copper connecting cable
(contained in DIGSI 4, but can be ordered additionally) 7XV5100-4 4
Manual
7VE61 and 7VE63 Multifunction Paralleling Device C53000-G1176-C163-1
5
package
6
Crimp CI2 0.5 to 1 mm2 0-827039-1 4000 AMP 1)
LSP2092-afp.eps
connector 0-827396-1 1 AMP 1)

CI2 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 0-827040-1 4000 AMP 1)
Type III+ 0.75 to 1.5

0-827397-1
0-163083-7
1
4000
AMP 1)
AMP 1)
7
mm2 0-163084-2 1 AMP 1)
Fig. 11/97 Short-circuit link
for voltage contacts 0-539635-1 1 AMP 1)
Crimping
tool
For type III+
and matching female
0-539668-2
0-734372-1 1
AMP 1)
AMP 1) 8
LSP2289-afp.eps
For CI2 1-734387-1 AMP 1)

and matching female
19"-mounting rail
Short-circuit links For voltage terminals

C73165-A63-D200-1
C73334-A1-C34-1
1
1
Siemens
Siemens
9
Fig. 11/98 Mounting rail for 19" rack

10
11
12
13
14
15
Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
14

Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
14

1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Generator Protection / 7VU683
High Speed Busbar Transfer
Function overview
High speed busbar transfer function 1

Starting conditions
- NORMAL condition
- FAULT condition
- Inadmissible under-voltage 2
- Inadmissible under-frequency
- Inadvertent CB open
Switching sequences
- PARALLEL Auto switching sequence 3
LSP2187-afp.tif
- PARALLEL Half-Auto switching sequence
- SIMULTANEOUS switching sequence
- SEQUENTIAL sequence
Transfer modes
- FAST transfer mode
4
- REAL-TIME FAST transfer mode
- IN-PHASE transfer mode
- RES-VOLT transfer mode
- LONG-TIME transfer mode
5
Single busbar and segmented single busbar supported
Fig. 11/101 High speed contact with approx.1ms for closing
SIPROTEC 4 7VU683 high speed busbar transfer device
Permission of bi-direction switching settable 6
Low voltage load-shedding settable
CB de-coupling when OPEN failed
Description
Permanent availability of electricity is essential for reliable

NORMAL start locally or remotely
Manual CB closing to block HSBT
7
production of a great number of processes in power stations and ON/OFF set locally or remotely
industrial plants where lots of inductive motor are installed. To
HSBT test mode supported
achieve this, a busbar is normally equipped with two or more
independent in-coming power sources to provide the possibility
8
to switch to standby source in case of main source interruption Protection functions for tie-CB
or failure. Overcurrent protection
The power supply interruption with tens of millisecond has small
impact to rotating loads. Thus, the High Speed Busbar Transfer
Ground overcurrent protection 9
Overcurrent protection for busbar energization
(HSBT) device helps to control and monitor the progress to
Ground overcurrent protection for busbar energization
ensure the fast but reliable switching-over. It can be initiated
manually or automatically.
10
Based on the existing world-wide used SIPROTEC 4 platform,
the reliability, stability and efciency of HSBT 7VU683 are guar- Self-supervision of the device
anteed. Thanks to its powerful and exible performance, multi Oscillographic fault recording
functions are integrated into one system, e.g, power supply
transfer, relay protection and supervision.
Phase sequence of busbar voltage 11
Voltage circuit of busbar and line
The compact solution HSBT 7VU683 is designed to t for the
primary diagrams of single busbar (2 CBs) and segmented single
busbar (3 CBs). It has incorporated the traditional HSBT philoso- Communication interfaces
PC front port for setting with DIGSI 4
12
phy. Additionally, the unique Real Time Fast Transfer mode helps
to improve the efciency. System interface
The integrated protective functions are to protect the tie-CB - IEC 60870-5-103, redundant optional
in segmented single busbar diagram against short-circuit and - IEC 61850, Ethernet
- Probus-DP or Modbus RTU
13
ground fault. The integrated supervision functions are to moni-
tor the voltage phase sequence and voltage secondary circuit , Service interface for DIGSI 4 (modem)
then gives out alarm in case of failure. Time synchronization via IRIG B/DCF 77
The integrated programmable logic (CFC) allows the users to 14
implement their own functions. The exible communication
interfaces are open for modern communication architectures
with control system.
15
Application
Application HSBT function

In station service system of thermal power station and some
The 7VU683 high speed busbar transfer (HBST) device of industrial plants, a lot of asynchronous motor are connected.
SIPROTEC 4 family is compact multifunction unit which has been The restarting motors after some seconds power loss will cause
developed for very fast power supply transfer of busbar which is heavy starting current and system voltage drop. On the other
installed with big rotating loads. It accommodates the primary hand, the incorrect reconnecting to stand-by power source will
diagram of both single busbar and segmented single busbar. It even damage the winding of rotor.
incorporates all the necessary HSBT conditions and even some
protection functions. It is specially suitable for the power supply The version HSBT 7VU683 is designed for this case. It will
transfer of: evaluate the necessary switching conditions to ensure the fast
but secure transfer. Some improvements like as REAL-TIME FAST
Coal-red power station transfer mode, additional line current criteria will signicantly
Gas-red power station help to the efciency and safety.
Combined cycle power station Protection functions for tie-CB
Integrated gasication combined cycle (IGCC) power station
The integrated protections are intend to protect the tie-CB in
Nuclear power station segmented single busbar diagram against short-circuit or ground
Chemical plant fault.
Petrochemical plant Some special concerning is done to the busbar switch-onto-fault.
Renery plant Protection functions will only be active for a settable time.
Iron and steel plant Programmable logic
Cement plant
The integrated logic characteristics (CFC) allow the user to
The numerous other additional functions assist the user in implement their own functions and generate user-dened
ensuring the cost effective system management and reliable messages.
power supply. Local operation has been designed according to
Measuring values
economic criteria. A large, easy-to-use graphic display is a major
design aim. The measuring values like as U, I, f, dV, df, dj, 3I0, 3V0 and CB
closing time can be recorded and displayed.
11

Construction
Function Abbreviation ANSI C o d e 2 Line-CBs 2 Line-CBs

+ 1 Tie-CB
HSBT
Line1->Line2 X X
Line2->Line1 X X
Busbar1->Busbar2 X
Busbar2->Busbar1 X
Busbar1->Line1 X
Busbar2->Line2 X
Protection
Denite overcurrent protection I>+V< 50 X
Ground-overcurrent protection 3I0>+3V0> 50N X
Overcurrent protection for busbar energization I>+V< 50.en X
Ground-overcurrent protection for busbar energization 3I0>+3V0> 50N.en X
Supervision
Phase sequence 47 X X
Voltage circuit X X
Table 11/8 Functional scope of HSBT 7VU683
Construction
The SIPROTEC 4 units have a uniform design and a degree of

functionality which represents a whole new quality. Local opera-
tion has been designed according to ergonomic criteria. Large,
easy-to read displays were a major design aim. The device HSBT
7VU683 is equipped with a graphic display thus providing and
depicting more information especially in industrial applications.
The DIGSI 4 operating program considerably simplies planning
and engineering and reduces commissioning times.
1/1-rack size is the available housing width of the device HSBT
7VU683, referred to a 19" module frame system. The height is
a uniform 245 mm. Only ush-mounting housing with screw
type terminals is available. All cables can be connected with or
without ring lugs.
Fig. 11/103 Rear view with wiring terminal safety cover and
serial interface
11

HSBT functions
HSBT functions Switching sequences

The category HSBT 7VU683 is designed to serve for the follow-
Starting conditions ing switching sequences according to CBs operating behavior,
The device HSBT 7VU683 is designed to support the following PARALLEL switching sequence
staring conditions,
SIMULTANEOUS switching sequence
NORMAL condition SEQUENTIAL switching sequence
FAULT condition
PARALLEL and SIMULATEOUS switching sequences can exclu-
Inadmissible Under-voltage condition sively support the starting condition NORMAL while SEQUENTIAL
Inadmissible Under-frequency condition can support all starting conditions.
Inadvertent CB Open condition PARALLEL switching sequence
The above conditions can be freely combined together, i.e, one If the two sources are allowed to work on busbar in parallel for
of them can be individually switched OFF. a short time, the PARALLEL sequence can be used for power
NORMAL condition supply transfer.
Under the NORMAL condition, the power system is fault free and Under PARALLEL sequence, HSBT 7VU683 will rstly issue a
the starting command must be manually issued. This command CLOSE command to the to-be-closed CB after the device get the
can come from remote control center and/or local controller via starting command. When the closure is successful, the device
wiring connection or communication over protocol, e.g, will trip the to-be-opened CB. The tripping command can be
automatically generated by device or derived from manual
DCS of power station operation which are dependent on setting,
Turbine control system PARALLEL Auto sequence
Local panel PARALLEL Half-Auto sequence
The switching of remote and local starting authority is done Under PARALLEL Auto sequence, the device will automatically
by internal CFC logic and controlled by device switching key issue an OPEN command after a settable time delay when the
Remote/Local. The starting command can only be remotely closure is successful. Under PARALLE Half-Auto sequence, the
executed over communication when the switching key is at device will not issue the OPEN command until the Manual Open
position Remote, vice versa. command arrived. The criterions are as below,
FAULT condition df < 8851 PARAL. Delta f
Under the FAULT condition, power system fault must be there on |dU| < 8852 PARAL. Delta U
the in-feeder line and the starting command must be externally dj < 8853 PARAL. Delta PHI
issued by other device, e.g, protection device.
If the to-be-opened CB failed to open, the device will automati-
Abnormal condition cally de-couple the to-be-closed CB.
Under the abnormal condition, voltage disturbance must be The time sequence under PARALLEL can be understandable via
there on the busbar due to any causes. The starting command Fig. 11/104 (assumed switching of closing CB2 and opening
can be internally issued by device HSBT 7VU683 according to the CB1).
following abnormal conditions
Inadmissible Under-voltage
Inadmissible Under-frequency
11 Inadvertent CB Open
To secure the starting reliability, line current is used as the
additional criterion to the above conditions.
In case the operating CB is manually tripped, transfer must
not be started. This can be recognized via indication 17864
>NonManu.Op.CB1 and 17865 >NonManu.Op.CB2 in
conguration matrix.

HSBT functions
Starting Starting
Command Command
t action CLOSE t action tBB-dead

Command
1 1
OPEN
0 tCB2-closing toverlapping 0 tCB1-opening Command
1 1
CB2 Status CB1 Status
0 tCB1-opening 0
tCB2 Close Delay
1 1
CB1 Status CLOSE
0 tCB1 Open Delay 0 Command
1 OPEN 1 CB2 Status tCB2-closing

Command
0 0
Fig. 11/104 Time sequence of PARALLEL Fig. 11/105 Time sequence of SIMULTANEOUS
The advantage of PARALLEL sequence is to avoid any interrup- Due to the different operating time of the CB (a CB normally
tion of busbar power supply. PARALLEL Auto sequence should be opens faster than it close), the power supply of busbar will
preferred to reduce the overlapping time of two sources. be interrupted for a few milliseconds. The length of this dead
interval depends on the difference of CB operating time.
SIMULTANEOUS switching sequence
SEQUENTIAL switching sequence
If the two sources are not allowed to work on busbar in parallel,
the SIMULTANEOUS sequence can be used for power supply Under SEQUENTIAL sequence, HSBT 7VU683 will rstly issue a
transfer.Under SIMULTANEOUS sequence, HSBT 7VU683 will OPEN command to the to-be-opened CB after the device get the
rstly issue a OPEN command to the to-be-opened CB after the starting command. Differentiate from PARALLEL and SIMULTANE-
device gets the starting command. Meanwhile, the device will OUS switching sequences, SEQUENTIAL sequence can only issue
issue a CLOSE command to the to-be-closed CB if other criterions CLOSE command after the opening succeeded.
are met. The overlapping can be avoided via the settable CB
The time sequence under SEQUENTIAL can be understandable
close time delay if CB making time is small than breaking time.
via Fig. 11/106 (assumed switching of closing CB2 and opening
The criterions are as below,
CB1).
df < 8855 SIMUL. Delta f
dj< 8856 SIMUL. Delta PHI Starting
Command
If the to-be-opened CB failed to open, the device will automati-
taction tBB-dead
cally de-couple the to-be-closed CB.
1
The time sequence under SIMULTANEOUS can be understand-
OPEN
able via Fig. 11/105 (assumed switching of closing CB2 and 0 tCB1-opening Command
opening CB1).
1
CB2 Status
0
1 CLOSE
Command
11
0
t operating
1 tCB1-closing
CB1 Status
0
Fig. 11/106 Time sequence of SEQUENTIAL

HSBT functions
Transfer modes The equivalent circuit of residual voltage Ures and referred volt-
age Uref is shown in Fig. 11/109.
In the station service system of power station and industrial
plants, lots of asynchronous motors are connected. In case of The voltage drop on motor Um at instant of CB closing is
the main source interruption, the residual voltage of busbar calculated by following,
will be induced by connected asynchronous motors. Fig.11/107
Um = dU xm /(xm +xs) = k dU (Equa.-1)
shows the well-known typical diagram of vector trajectory of
residual voltage. Here, xm and xs are respectively the equivalent reactance of
busbar loading and referred system.
Un-safe Area Safe Area

RE
AL
-T
Tr I M
dU
270
as E
nf FA
er S
T

24
0
30
0
C
B
21
0
33
0 Xs CB Xm
0.4s
IV
0.6s
IN-PHASE
Transfer
III V
Uref
180
0.7s
s
0.8
0.3s
dU
s
0.1
0.5s I
es
~ Uref Ures ~
Ur
0 30
15 A II
T r AST
0.2s
r
sfe
an
F
0
60
12
90
ST
E FA
L-TIM r
REA Transfe
Fig. 11/107 Vector trajectory of residual voltage Fig. 11/109 Equivalent circuit of dU
Some notes are there regarding curve A according to Fig. For safety reason, the value |Um| must not exceed the permis-
11/110. The amplitude and frequency of residual voltage will sible voltage ko/v |Un.|, Then, the maximum of permissible
decrease regarding time, while the delta phase angle against differential voltage |dU|max will be,
referred voltage will increase. Fig. 11/108 gives more messages |dU|max = ko/v /k |Un| (Equa.-2)
to differential voltage.
In case ko/v = 1.1 and k = 0.67, the calculated |dU|max should
be less than 1.64 |Un| (refer to curve B in Fig. 11/107).
In case ko/v = 1.1 and k = 0.95, the calculated |dU|max should
be less than 1.15 |Un| (refer to curve C in Fig. 11/107). This
calculation result would be the base for setting.
The plane is divided into two parts by curve B (or curve C). The
left is dened as un-safe area because the value |dU| is bigger
than the up-limit |dU|max which could damage the winding of
stator. Vice versa, the right is safe area.
Based on the above principles, the category HSBT 7VU683 is
designed to have the following modes (refer to Fig. 11/107) to
11 t for the safe transfer,
FAST transfer mode (area I)
REAL-TIME FAST transfer mode (area II and IV)
IN-PHASE transfer mode (area V)
RES-VOLT transfer mode
Fig. 11/108 Vector trajectory of residual voltage
LONG-TIME transfer mode

HSBT functions
All of above modes can be freely combined together, i.e, one of IN-PHASE transfer mode
them can be individually switched ON or OFF remotely via
When the residual voltage comes close to the referred voltage,
communication or locally at device panel.
it comes to transfer mode IN-PHASE. Its good for safe transfer if
To be noted that the original dj and |dU| between busbar voltage the CB closes at the instant the value dj is zero.
and standby voltage due to wiring can be automatically compen-
The intelligent device 7VU683 estimates the delta phase angle
sated by device during conguration.
dj at the instant the CB closes. based on real-time slipping rate
FAST transfer mode and the settable CBx Closing Time. If If all the quantity of
predicted dj, the real-time df and |Ures| meet the dened crite-
The study and testing results show, in most cases the typical
rions,, the device will immediately issue the CLOSE command to
values of df, dj and |dU| are smaller enough within the rst
the to-be-closed CB. The criterions are as below,
tens of millisecond from the instant the CB opens. Its good to
safe and fast transfer due to the slight shock to motors. If the df < 8868 IN-PHA Delta f
real-time measured df, dj and |Ures| meet the dened criterions, dj < 8869 IN-PHA Delta PHI
the device will immediately issue the CLOSE command to the |Ures| > 8870 IN-PHA U/V BLK
to-be-closed CB. The criterions are as below,
RES-VOLT transfer mode
df < 8858 FT Delta f
If the above mentioned transfer modes failed, the transfer can
dj < 8859 FT Delta PHI
still go on with mode RES-VOLT.
|Ures| > 8860 FT U/V BLK
When the residual voltage |Ures| under-shots the settable
The typical operating time of 7VU683 in this case is approx. parameter 8871 RES-VOLT Threshold, the RES-VOLT transfer
20ms. As modern vacuum breaker has less making time, e.g, mode will perform and the device will immediately issue the
60ms, the dead time of busbar will be as short as approx. 80ms. CLOSE command to the to-be-closed CB. The typical setting
could be 30%Un.
REAL-TIME FAST transfer mode
To reduce the shock under low voltage restarting of motors,
When FAST transfer chance is missed, the device will automati- two stages of Low Voltage Load-Shedding (LVLSH) function are
cally, if activated, turn to next transfer mode REAL-TIME FAST. integrated in the device. LVLSH will pickup before the RES-VOLT
This mode has more concerning on the permissible motor volt- transfer mode. This function can be activated or de-activated
age, i.e, the differential voltage |dU| across the opened CB must manually on site.
not exceed the value |dU|max. The intelligent device 7VU683
LONG-TIME transfer mode
then estimates the delta phase angle dj and differential voltage
dU at the instant the CB closes based on real-time slipping The last criterion to start the transfer is LONG-TIME mode if all
rate and the settable CBx Closing Time. If all the quantity of above mentioned modes failed.
predicted dj and dU, the real-time df and |Ures| meet the dened When the transfer time is more than the settable parameter
criterions, the device will immediately issue the CLOSE command 8872 LONG-TIME Threshold, the LONG-TIME transfer mode will
to the to-be-closed CB. The criterions are as below, perform and the device will immediately issue the CLOSE com-
df < 8861 RTFT Delta f mand to the to-be-closed CB. The typical setting could be 3s.
|dU| < 8862 RTFT Delta U
dj< 8863 RTFT Delta PHI
|Ures| > 8864 RTFT U/V BLK
11

HSBT functions
Switching directions To be noted that power supply 1 is exclusively dened as main

source while power supply 2 dened as standby source. Then,
The device support bi-direction power transfer under NORMAL
if mono-direction against NORMAL condition is required, power
condition, i.e, the device can transfer the main source of busbar
supply 1 in Fig. 11/121 to Fig. 11/128 should be identied as
to standby depending on the actual CBs status, vice versa.
main source.
In most cases, the switching is limited from main source to
The transfer permission under various starting conditions and
standby source under starting conditions of FAULT, Inadmissible
switching directions can be referred to below two tables.
Under-voltage, Inadmissible Under-frequency and Inadvertent
CB Open. The requirement can be met by set the parameter
8831 Mono-direction against NORMAL condition = YES.
The default setting YES can be changed to NO if bi-direction
transfer is always required in any conditions.
CB1 CB2 Switching-over Voltage Busbar Transfer Permitted?

Status Status Comparison
From To NORMAL FAULT Inadmissible Inadmissible Un- Inadvertent CB
Undervoltage derfrequency Open
Closed Open L1 L2 U_B U_L2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Open Closed L2 L1 U_B U_L1 Yes No1) No1) No1) No1)
1) If parameter 8831 "Mono-direction against NORMAL" = "YES", this cell says No. Otherwise, this cell says Yes.
Table 11/9 Transfer permission under default setting, single busbar
CB1 CB3 CB2 Switching- Voltage Busbar Transfer Permitted?

Status Status Status over Comparison
From To NORMAL FAULT Inadmissible Inadmissible Un- Inadvertent CB
Undervoltage derfrequency Open
Closed Closed Open L1 L2 U_B2 U_L2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
B2 L2 U_B2 U_L2 Yes / 2) / 2) / 2) / 2)
Closed Open Closed B1 B2 U_B1 U_B2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
B2 B1 U_B2 U_B1 Yes No1) No1) No1) No1)
Open Closed Closed L2 L1 U_B1 U_L1 Yes No1) No1) No1) No1)
B1 L1 U_B1 U_L1 Yes / 2) / 2) / 2) / 2)
1) If parameter 8831 "Mono-direction against NORMAL" = "YES", this cell says No. Otherwise, this cell says Yes.
11
2) Not applicable for this cell
Table 11/10 Transfer permission under default setting, segmented single busbar

HSBT functions
HSBT test mode Sample of oscillographic FAST transfer

To facilitate the functional testing and site commissioning, the
Test Mode is specially designed for this purpose. This function
can be activated on site by parameter setting 8820 HSBT Test
Mode = Yes or by indication 18020 >HSBT Test Mode via
binary input.
If the function HSBT goes into Test Mode, the transfer process
is the same except that the CLOSE command will be blocked.
Instead, CLOSE command with test mark will be issued for
indicating.
HSBT Test Mode could be helpful before the device is put into
service. When CB is manually tripped, HSBT 7VU683 picks up
and goes into transfer process. Under the assistance of inte-
grated Fault Recorder and Event Log, the operating consequence
and settings can be assessed. Optimization to parameter settings
Fig. 11/111 Oscillographic FAST transfer at segmented single busbar
can be done based on the assessment.
8819 HSBT Test Mode

17767
21 OR AND CommandCloseCB1
1
17768
2))
CommandCloseCB2
18020 17769
CommandCloseCB3
>HSBT Test Mode
18021
AND Cnd.Cl.CB1.Test
CLOSE
18022
Cnd.Cl.CB2.Test
18023
CB1 Cnd.Cl.CB3.Test
CB2
CB3
Fig. 11/110 Logic diagram of test mode
Fig. 11/112 Trip log of FAST transfer at segmented single busbar

Reset of transfer
The default setting is to block the device after once transfer Some notes to the two gures,
is executed, i.e, either failure or success, the device goes into Primary connection of segmented single busbar
blocking status till to the reset indication via binary input or
Line1 in operating while Line2 in standby, CB3 serve as tie-CB
LED button on device panel. This can be changed by setting the
which is in closed status
parameter 8817 Manual Restart HSBT = NO. Then, after
once successful transfer, the device will automatically execute Fault is there in Line1 and cleared by protection relay. Mean-
a new transfer request before the reset indication arrives. But, while, HSBT is started
after once failed transfer, the device will go into blocking status Switching-over between Line1 and Line2 are dened
till to the reset indication. Instant 0ms, device picked up, CommandOpenCB1 issued
Instant 12ms, CB1 opened
Instant 26ms, CommandCloseCB2 issued
Instant 62ms, CB2 closed
FAST transfer succeeded, approx. 50ms dead time interval of
11
busbar

Protection functions Phase-overcurrent protection

This function is designed to detect any short-circuit faults in MV
The Power Supply Transfer device 7VU68 integrates protection system. The device will evaluate all current inputs at channel I_B
functions for tie-CB in primary connection of Segmented Single and will pickup immediately if one of phase current over-shots
Busbar. This function can be set Enabled or Disabled during the settable threshold.
conguration.
The function has two stages, one time delay for each stage.
The protection include the following functions,
The voltage element can be activated or de-activated under
Phase overcurrent protection
parameter 9001 Compound Voltage Control.
Ground overcurrent protection
Ground-overcurrent protection
Phase overcurrent protection for Busbar Energization
Ground overcurrent protection for Busbar Energization This function is designed to detect ground fault in MV system.
The device will evaluate zero sequence current and will pickup
To secure the reliability and sensitivity, the voltage element is immediately if it over-shots the settable threshold.
additionally introduced to current criterion to release trip com-
mand. The quantity of zero sequence current is derived from calculated
3I0 or measured ground current Ie. This can be set under param-
For functions of Phase-overcurrent protection and Phase overcur- eter 9018 3I0/Ie Assignment.
rent for Busbar Energization, compound voltage element is used.
The criterion of compound voltage element is illustrated in Fig. The function has two stages, one time delay for each stage.
11/113. The voltage element can be activated or de-activated under
parameter 9011 3U0 Control.
9003 U2 Over-voltage Phase-overcurrent protection for busbar energization
Busbar1 U2 To avoid any switch-onto-fault, the function phase-over-current
protection can be activated for some time after the busbar
9002 Ph-ph Under-voltage
is energized when tie-CB is closed. An individual function
OR Compound Voltage
Busbar1 Uab phase-overcurrent protection for busbar energization is specially
Busbar1 Ubc OR designed for this utilization.
Busbar1 Uca
The function has the same criterion and stages to phase- over-
current protection. The function will not be activated until the
tie-CB is closed.
Fig. 11/113 Logic of compound voltage element
Ground-overcurrent protection for busbar energization
For functions of ground overcurrent protection and ground To avoid any switch-onto-fault, the function ground-over-current
overcurrent protection for Busbar Energization, the element of protection can be activated for some time after the busbar is
zero sequence over-voltage is used. The quantity is derived from energized when tie-CB is closed. An individual function ground-
calculated 3U0 based on measured busbar1 voltage. overcurrent protection for busbar energization is specially
The validity of protections in case of busbar energization can be esigned for this utilization.
set under parameter 9019A Active Time for Busbar Energiza- The function has the same criterion and stages to ground- over-
tion. current protection. The function will not be activated until the
Each of above functions can be separately switched ON or tie-CB is closed.
OFF remotely via communication or locally at device panel.
11

Communication
Communication IEC 60870-5-103

With respect to communication, particular emphasis has been communication in the protected area. IEC 60870-5-103 is sup-
placed on high levels of exibility, data integrity and utilization ported by a numerous of manufacturers and is used worldwide.
the communication modules permits interchangeability on the PROFIBUS-DP
one hand, and on the other hand provides openness for future PROFIBUS is an internationally standardized communication
standards (for example, Industrial Ethernet). system (EN 50170). PROFIBUS is supported internationally by
Local PC interface several hundred manufacturers and has to date been used in
more than 1,000,000 applications all over the world. With the
The PC interface from the front of the unit permits quick access PROFIBUS-DP, the device can be directly connected to a SIMATIC
to all parameters and fault event data. The use of the DIGSI S5/S7. The transferred data are fault data, measured values and
4 operating program during commissioning is particularly information from or to the logic (CFC).
advantageous.
MODBUS RTU
Rear mounted interface
MODBUS is also a widely utilized communication standard and is
At the rear of the unit there is one xed interface and two used in numerous automation solutions.
communication modules which incorporate optional equipment
complements and permit retrotting. They assure the ability Safe bus architecture
to comply with the requirements of different communication RS485 bus
interfaces (electrical or optical) and protocols (IEC 60870, PRO-
FIBUS, DIGSI). The interfaces make provision for the following With this data transmission via copper conductors, electromag-
applications: netic interference inuences are largely eliminated by the use
of twisted-pair conductor. Upon failure of a unit, the remaining
Service interface (xed) system continues to operate without any faults.
In the RS485 version, several protection units can be centrally Fiber-optic double ring circuit
operated with DIGSI 4. By using a modem, remote control is pos-
sible. This provides advantages in fault clearance, in particular in The ber-optic double ring circuit is immune to electromagnetic
unmanned substations. interference. Upon failure of a section between two units, the
communication system continues to operate without distur-
System interface bance.
designs. Furthermore, the units can exchange data through this Substation
interface via Ethernet and IEC 61850 protocol and can also be controller
operated by DIGSI.
IEC 61850 protocol
As of mid-2004, the Ethernet-based IEC 61850 protocol is the
worldwide standard for protection and control systems used by
power supply corporations. Siemens is of the rst manufacturer
to support this standard and has 200.000 IEC61850 devices in
operation. By means of this protocol, information can also be S SIPROTEC S SIPROTEC S SIPROTEC
exchanged directly between bay units so as to set up simple

masterless systems for bay and system interlocking. Access to 11
the units via the Ethernet bus will also be possible with DIGSI.
Fig. 11/114 IEC 60870-5-103: Radial electrical or ber-optic

connection

High Speed Busbar Transfer Communication
Option: Control
SICAM center
',*6, PAS
6ZLWFK
S SIPROTEC S SIPROTEC S SIPROTEC
Fig. 11/115 Bus structure for station bus with Ethernet and IEC 61850, Fig. 11/116 Optical Ethernet communication module for IEC 61850
ber-optic ring with integrated Ethernet-switch
Fig. 11/117 PROFIBUS communication module, optical, double ring Fig. 11/118 Fiber-optic communication module
11
Fig. 11/119 RS232/RS485 electrical communication module

High Speed Busbar Transfer Communication
System solution Parallel to this, local communication is possible, for example,

during a major inspection. For IEC 61850, an interoperable
SIPROTEC 4 is tailor-made for use in SIMATIC-based automation
system solution is offered with SICAM PAS. Via the 100 Mbit/s
systems.
Ethernet bus, the unit are linked with PAS electrically or opti-
Via the PROFIBUS-DP, indications (pickup and tripping) and all cally to the station PC. The interface is standardized, thus also
relevant operational measured values are transmitted from the enabling direct connection of units of other manufacturers to
HSBT device. the Ethernet bus. With IEC 61850, however, the units can also
be used in other manufacturers' systems.
Via modem and service interface, the electric engineer has
access to the protection devices at all times. This permits remote
maintenance and diagnosis (cyclic testing).
2SHUDWLRQDQG
PRQLWRULQJ
$XWRPDWLRQV\VWHPV
HJ6,0$7,&
352),%86'3
56
RSWLFDOFRQYHUWHU
SS SIPROTEC SS SIPROTEC SS SIPROTEC SS SIPROTEC
56
RSWLFDOFRQYHUWHU
&RPP
QHWZRUN
0RGHP 0RGHP
7VU68 7VU68 7VU68 7VU68
',*6,
5HPRWHFRQWURO
',*6, YLDPRGHP
/RFDOIRUFRPPLVVLRQLQJ
Fig. 11/120 System solution: communication
11

High Speed Busbar Transfer Typical applications
Primary connection of single busbar

The device HSBT 7VU683 will automatically determine the Each switching-over can be individually switched ON or OFF
switching direction based on the actual CBs status. remotely via communication or locally at device panel.
Main Stand-by
Source Source
Switching Direction
L1->L2
R13
R14
K14
K13
PT1 PT2
Ux_L1
Ux_L2
HSBT 7VU683
BO11
Ua_B
Ub_B
Ix_L1
Ix_L2
Uc_B
BO6
Line1/L1 Line2/L2
CT1
CT2
R15
R17
R18
R16
J1
J2
J6
J5
Close
Open
CB1 CB2
Busbar
Fig. 11/121 Switching-over L1->L2, single busbar
Main Stand-by
Source Source
Switching Direction
L2->L1
R13
R14
K14
K13
PT1 PT2
11
Ux_L1
Ux_L2
HSBT 7VU683
BO10
BO13
Ua_B
Ub_B
Ix_L1
Ix_L2
Uc_B
Line1/L1 Line2/L2
CT1
CT2
R15
R17
R18
R16
J1
J2
J6
J5
Close
Open
CB1 CB2
Busbar
Fig. 11/122 Switching-over L2->L1, single busbar

Primary connection of segmented single busbar: CB1 and The device will properly execute the switching direction based
CB3 are closed, CB2 is opened on the command input under this case.
In case of these CBs status, two possible switching directions are Each switching-over can be individually switched ON or OFF
there. Then, the starting command of two switching directions remotely via communication or locally at device panel.
must be externally separately routed to devices binary inputs,
e.g, starting command L1->L2 routed to BI13, B2->L2 to BI12.
Main Stand-by
Source Source
Switching Direction
L1->L2
R13
R14
K14
K13
PT1 PT2
Ux_L1
Ux_L2
HSBT 7VU683
Ua_B1
Ub_B1
Ub_B2
Ua_B2
Uc_B1
Uc_B2
BO11
Ix_L1
Ix_L2
Ie_B
Ib_B
Ia_B
Ic_B
BO6
Line1/L1 Line2/L2
CT1
CT2
R15
R17
R18
R16
K16
K18
K17
K15
Q8
Q7
Q5 Q6
Q3 Q4
Q1 Q2
J1
J2
J6
J5
Close
Open
CT3
CB1 CB2
Busbar1/B1 CB3 Busbar2/B2
Fig. 11/123 Switching-over L1->L2, segmented single busbar
Main Stand-by
Source Source
Switching Direction
B2->L2
R13
R14
K14
K13
PT1 PT2
11
Ux_L1
Ux_L2
HSBT 7VU683
Ua_B1
Ub_B1
Ub_B2
Ua_B2
Uc_B1
Uc_B2
BO11
Ix_L1
Ix_L2
Ie_B
Ib_B
Ia_B
Ic_B
BO5
Line1/L1 Line2/L2
CT1
CT2
R15
R17
R18
R16
K16
K18
K17
K15
Q8
Q7
Q5 Q6
Q3 Q4
Q1 Q2
J1
J2
J6
J5
Close
Open
CT3
CB1 CB2
Fig. 11/124 Switching-over B2->L2, segmented single busbar

Primary connection of segmented single busbar: CB2 and Starting command B1->L1 can be designated to BI13 too even if
CB3 are closed, CB1 is opened starting command L1->L2 is already there, the reason is only one
of these two switching directions will be automatically executed
In case of these CBs status, two possible switching directions are
by device based on the actual CBs status. The same situation
there. Then, the starting command of two switching directions
applies to L2->L1.
e.g, starting command B1->L1 routed to BI13, L2->L1 to BI12. The above switching-overs can be individually switched ON or
The device will properly execute the switching direction based OFF remotely via communication or locally at device panel.
on the command input under this case.
Main Stand-by
Source Source
Switching Direction
L2->L1
R13
R14
K14
K13
PT1 PT2
Ux_L1
Ux_L2
HSBT 7VU683
Ua_B1
Ub_B1
Ub_B2
Ua_B2
Uc_B1
Uc_B2
BO13
BO10
Ix_L1
Ix_L2
Ie_B
Ib_B
Ia_B
Ic_B
Line1/L1 Line2/L2
CT1
CT2
R15
R17
R18
R16
K16
K18
K17
K15
Q8
Q7
Q5 Q6
Q3 Q4
Q1 Q2
J1
J2
J6
J5
Close
Open
CT3
CB1 CB2
Fig. 11/125 Switching-over L2->L1, segmented single busbar
Main Stand-by
Source Source
Switching Direction
B1->L1
R13
R14
K14
K13
PT1 PT2
11
Ux_L1
Ux_L2
HSBT 7VU683
Ua_B1
Ub_B1
Ub_B2
Ua_B2
Uc_B1
Uc_B2
BO10
Ix_L1
Ix_L2
Ie_B
Ib_B
Ia_B
Ic_B
BO5
Line1/L1 Line2/L2
CT1
CT2
R15
R17
R18
R16
K16
K18
K17
K15
Q8
Q7
Q5 Q6
Q3 Q4
Q1 Q2
J1
J2
J6
J5
Close
Open
CT3
CB1 CB2
Fig. 11/126 Switching-over B1->L1, segmented single busbar

Primary connection of segmented single busbar: CB1 and Starting command B1->B2 can be designated to BI13 too even
CB2 are closed, CB3 is opened if starting command L1->L2 and B1->L1 are already there, the
reason is only one of these three switching directions will be
In case of these CBs status, two possible switching directions are
automatically executed by device based on the actual CBs
there. Then, the starting command of two switching directions
status. The same situation applies to B2->B1.
e.g, starting command B1->B2 routed to BI13, B2->B1 to BI12. The above switching-overs can be individually switched ON or
The device will properly execute the switching direction based OFF remotely via communication or locally at device panel.
on the command input under this case.
Main Stand-by
Source Source
Switching Direction
B1->B2
R13
R14
K14
K13
PT1 PT2
Ux_L1
Ux_L2
HSBT 7VU683
Ua_B1
Ub_B1
Ub_B2
Ua_B2
Uc_B1
Uc_B2
BO12
Ix_L1
Ix_L2
Ie_B
Ib_B
Ia_B
Ic_B
BO6
Line1/L1 Line2/L2
CT1
CT2
R15
R17
R18
R16
K16
K18
K17
K15
Q8
Q7
Q5 Q6
Q3 Q4
Q1 Q2
J1
J2
J6
J5
Close
Open
CT3
CB1 CB2
Fig. 11/127 Switching-over B1->B2, segmented single busbar
Main Stand-by
Source Source
Switching Direction
B2->B1
R13
R14
K14
K13
PT1 PT2
11
Ux_L1
Ux_L2
HSBT 7VU683
Ua_B1
Ub_B1
Ub_B2
Ua_B2
Uc_B1
Uc_B2
BO13
BO12
Ix_L1
Ix_L2
Ie_B
Ib_B
Ia_B
Ic_B
Line1/L1 Line2/L2
CT1
CT2
R15
R17
R18
R16
K16
K18
K17
K15
Q8
Q7
Q5 Q6
Q3 Q4
Q1 Q2
J1
J2
J6
J5
Close
Open
CT3
CB1 CB2
Fig. 11/128 Switching-over B2->B1, segmented single busbar

High Speed Busbar Transfer Selection and ordering data
7VU683 - E -1A A 0
7VU683 high speed busbar transfer device

Housing binary inputs and outputs
Housing 1/1 19'', 17 BI, 18 BO (incl.5 High Speed), 1 live-status contact
Current transformer: In
IN=1A1) 1
IN=5A1) 5
Auxiliary Voltage
DC 24 to 48 V, binary input threshold DC 19 V3) 2
DC 60 to 125 V2), binary input threshold DC 19 V3)
4
DC 110 to 250 V2), AC 115/230 V, binary input threshold DC 88 V3)
5
DC 220 to 250 V2), AC 115/230 V, binary input threshold DC 176 V3) 6
Construction
Flush-mounting housing, screw-type terminals E
Region-specic default settings/ language Settings

Region World, English4), 50/60Hz B
Region China, Chinese4), 50/60Hz W
Port B: (System port on rear of device)

No system port 0
IEC 60870-5-103 Protocol, electrical RS232 1
IEC 60870-5-103 Protocol, electrical RS485 2
IEC 60870-5-103 Protocol, 820 nm bre, ST-connector 3
L 0
Probus DP Slave, RS485 9 A
Probus DP Slave, 820 nm bre, double ring, ST-connector 9 B
Modbus, RS485 9 D
Modbus, 820 nm bre, ST-connector 9 E
IEC 60870-5-103 Protocol, redundant RS485 9 P
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45-connector 9 R
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, with integrated switch optical, double, LC-connector 9 S
11 Port C (Service)
Port C: DIGSI 4/Modem, electrical RS232; 1
Port C: DIGSI 4/Modem/ RTD-box, electrical RS485;
2
Measuring/ fault recording

Basic measured Values
1
Functions A
High Speed Busbar Transfer (HSBT) (2 or 3 circuit breakers)
Protection functions (Overcurrent phase/ground (50, 50N);
Overcurrent phase/ground for busbar energization
Supervision functions
1) Rated current 1/5 A can be selected by means of jumpers.

2) Transition between the three auxiliary voltage can be selected by mean of jumpers.
3) The threshold of each binary input can be set via jumpers.
4) Device language can be selected via DIGSI.

High Speed Busbar Transfer Accessories
DIGSI 4

running underMSWindows XP Professional Edition, Windows 7 (32- and 64-bit)
and Windows Server 2008 R2 64-bit, device templates, Comtrade Viewer,
electronic manual included as well as Getting started manual on paper,
connecting cables (copper), Basis
Full version with license for 10 computers, on CD-ROM 7XS5400-0AA00
Professional
CFC Editor (logic editor), Display Editor (editor for default 7XS5402-0AA00

Complete version
CFC Editor (logic editor), Display Editor (editor for default 7XS5403-0AA00
+ IEC 61850 system congurator
IEC 61850 Systemcongurator

Software for conguration of stations with IEC 61850 communication under DIGSI,
Optional package for DIGSI 4 Basis or Professional 7XS5460-0AA00
License for 10 PCs. Authorization by serial number. On CD-ROM
SIGRA 4
(generally contained in DIGSI Professional, but can be ordered additionally)
Software for graphic visualization, analysis and evaluation of fault records.
Can also be used for fault records of devices of other manufacturers
(Comtrade format).
Incl. templates, electronic manual with license for 10 PCs. 7XS5410-0AA00
Authorization by serial number. On CD-ROM.
Connecting cable
Cable between PC/notebook (9-pin connector) 7XV5100-4
11
(contained in DIGSI 4, but can be ordered additionally)

High Speed Busbar Transfer Accessories
Description Order No. Size of Supplier Fig.

package
Mounting rail C73165-A63-D200-1 1 Siemens 11/129
Short-circuit link For current terminals C73334-A1-C34-1 1 Siemens 11/130

For other terminals C73334-A1-C34-1 1 Siemens 11/131
Safety cover for Large C73334-A1-C31-1 1 Siemens

terminals Small C73334-A1-C32-1 1 Siemens
Fig. 11/129 Mounting rail for 19" rack Fig. 11/130 Short-circuit link for Fig. 11/131 Short-circuit link for
current terminals voltage terminals/
indications terminals
11

High Speed Busbar Transfer Connection diagram
Q1 Ia_B HSBT 7VU683 BI 1 F5

Q2 BI 2 F6
Q3 Ib_B BI 3 F7
Q4 BI 4 F8
Q5 Ic_B BI 5 F9
Q6 F10
Q7 Ie_B
BO 1 R1
Q8
BO 2 R2
J1 Ix_L1 BO 3 R3
J2 R4
J3 N/A BO 4 R5
J4 R6
J5 Ix_L2 BO 5 R7
J6 R8
J7 N/A
BO 62) P3
J8
P4
R15 Ua_B1 / Ua_B BO 71) P6
R17 Ub_B1 / Ub_B BO 81) P7
R18 Uc_B1 / Uc_B BO 91) P8
R16 P5
R13 Ux_L1 BO 102) P9
R14 P10
BO 112) P11
K15 Ua_B2
P12
K17 Ub_B2
BO 122) P13
K18 Uc_B2
P14
K16
BO 132) P15
K13 Ux_L2
P16
K14
BO 14 K1
R9 BI 6
BO 15 K2
R10
BO 16 K3
R11 BI 7
K4
R12
BO 17 K5
P17 BI 8 K6
P18 BO 18 K7
N1 BI 9 K8
N2 Life Status 1 2
F3
N3 BI 10 Contact 3 2
N4 BI 11
F4
11
N6 BI 12
N5 Power = +
F1
(~)
N7 BI 13 Supply
=
- F2
N8
N9 BI 14 Service Port C
N10
System Port B
N11 BI 15
N12 Time Synchronization A
K9 BI 16 Front Operator
K10
K11 BI 17 1) Fast speed contact Ground at rear
2) High speed contact of housing
K12
Fig. 11/132 7VU683 connection diagram

11

Substation Automation
Page
SIPROTEC 4 6MD61 IO-Box 12/3
SIPROTEC 4 6MD63 bay control unit 12/11
SIPROTEC 4 6MD66 high-voltage bay control unit 12/13
12
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Substation Automation / 6MD61
SIPROTEC 4 6MD61 IO-Box
2
LSP2795-afp.tif
LSP2797.eps
4
5
Fig. 12/1 SIPROTEC 4 6MD61 IO-Box
Description Function overview

6
The SIPROTEC 4 6MD61 IO-Box enables in a simple, easy way Application
to enhance the number of binary inputs and outputs in the
switchgear. It can be used directly in the bay together with other
Extension of number of inputs and outputs of bay controller 7
Extension of number of inputs and outputs of protection unit
SIPROTEC 4 units and also together with SICAM PAS to serve as a
central process connection. Central process connection for SICAM PAS
The IO-Box is based on the SIPROTEC 6MD63 and 6MD66 series,

so it can be easily integrated in systems with other SIPROTEC 4
Features 8
Standard SIPROTEC hardware for easy conguration with DIGSI
units.
Full EMC compliance like all other SIPROTEC devices
The IO-Box supports a wide range of demand for additional
binary inputs (BI) and binary outputs (BO), starting from
Housing can be used for surface mounting or ush mounting
(units are always delivered with two mounting rails for surface
9
20 BI+10 BO and going up to 80 BI+53 BO. All important mounting. These rails can be dismounted for ush mounting)
standard communication protocols are supported.
With IEC 61850-GOOSE communication, a direct information Three types with different amount of inputs and outputs
interchange with other SIPROTEC units is possible. For simpli-
cation and cost reduction, the IO-Box is available only without
available
10
automation (CFC), without keypad and without display.
Operational measured values (only 6MD612)
.
Energy metering values (only 6MD612)
11
Self supervision of relay
IEC 61850 Ethernet
12
PROFIBUS-FMS
PROFIBUS-DP 13
Front interface for DIGSI4
Time synchronization via IRIG B / DCF77 14
15
Application
Application
1 The following gures show the most

SICAM PAS substation
controller
important applications of the SIPROTEC electrical
IO-Box 6MD61. optical Switch
2 The conguration shown in Fig. 12/2

allows direct GOOSE communication
between the SIPROTEC 4 units (6MD66,
7SJ63) and the IO-Boxes, independent
of the substation controller. Of course,
3 this conguration is also possible without
Bay 1 Bay 2
substation controller. The IO-Box is

used as additional digital inputs and
measurements (measurements only with
4
SIPV6.022en.eps
6MD612), and serves as an additional
command output. 6MD66 IO-Box 6MD61 7SJ63 IO-Box 6MD61
The communication between IO-Box and
the substation controller is established by
5 using the IEC 61850 standard protocol. Fig. 12/2 Conguration with IO-Box in IEC 61850 substation
Fig. 12/3 shows a conguration in which
the IO-Box is used as a central process
connection in the cubicle of the substa-
6 tion controller. For example, cubicle
SICAM PAS substation
controller
signaling lamps or a signaling horn are electrical
controlled by the command relays of the optical Switch IO-Box 6MD61
IO-Box.
7 Fig. 12/4 shows the communication for
substations with no Ethernet protocol
used. In this case, all communication lines
go directly to the substation controller.
8 If information from the IO-Box is used for Bay 1 Bay 2
switchgear interlocking, the interlocking
logic must be part of the substation
controller.
9
SIPV6.023en.eps
6MD66 7SA63 6MD66 7SA63
10
Fig. 12/3 IO-Box as central input/output for SICAM PAS substation controller
11
12
13
14
15 Fig. 12/4 Direct connection of IO-Boxes and protection relays to substation controller via
standard protocol


6MD61 IO-Box
20 binary inputs, 6 command relays, 4 (2) power relays, 1 live status contact (similar to 6MD634)
6MD61 - - 0AA0 -
1
in 19'' housing 1
33 binary inputs, 14 command relays, 8 (4) power relays, 1 live status contact, 2 x 20 mA, 3 x V, 4 x I,
(similar to 6MD636) in 19'' housing
80 binary inputs, 53 command relays, 1 live status contact
2
2
in 19'' housing 3
Current transformer: rated current In

No analog measured variables
1 A2)
0 3
1
5 A2) 5

24 to 48 V DC, threshold binary input 19 V 2
4
60 V DC, threshold binary input 19 V2) 3
110 V DC, threshold binary input 88 V2) 4
220 to 250 V DC, 115 to 230 V AC, threshold binary input 176 V for input No. 8-80
for 6MD613 (C-I/O 4), otherwise threshold 88 V2) 5
5
Unit version
Surface-mounting case, without HMI, mounting in low voltage compartment,
screw-type terminals (direct wiring / ring lugs), also usable as ush-mounting case F 6
Region DE, 50 Hz, language: German, changeable A
Region World, 50/60 Hz, language: English (GB), changeable
Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI, language: English (US), changeable
B
C
7
Region FR, language: French, changeable D
Region World, language: Spanish, changeable E
System interface (on rear of unit, port B) 8

No system port 0
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, optical 820 nm, ST connector 3 9
PROFIBUS-FMS Slave, ber, double ring, ST connector 6
PROFIBUS DP Slave, electrical RS485
PROFIBUS-DP Slave, 820 nm ber, double ring, ST connectors
9
9
L 0A
L 0 B
10
IEC 61850, 100 BaseT (100 Mbit Ethernet electric, double, RJ45 connector) 9 L 0 R
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, ber optic, double, LC connectors 9 L 0 S
Function interface (on rear of unit, port C)

No function port
11
0
DIGSI 4, RS232 1
DIGSI 4, RS485 2
DIGSI 4, 820 nm ber, ST connector 3 12
13
14
1) Only for position 6 = 2
2) Thresholds can be changed (jumper) for each binary input between
19 V and 88 V, for 6MD613 BI No. 8-80 also to 176 V.
15
Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
14

Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
14

15
Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
14
15 Fig. 12/7 Connection diagram, part 1; continued on the following page

Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 12/8 Connection diagram part 2

15
10
11
12
13
14
15
SIPROTEC 4 6MD63 bay control unit
Function overview
Application
1
Optimized for connection to three-position disconnectors
Switchgear interlocking interface
Suitable for redundant master station 2
Automation can be congured easily by graphic means
with CFC
Control functions 3
Number of switching devices only limited by number of
LSP2314-afp.tif
available inputs and outputs
Position of switching elements is shown on the graphic display
Local/remote switching via key switch 4
Command derivation from an indication
4 freely assignable function keys to speed up frequently
recurring operator actions
Switchgear interlocking isolator/c.-b.
5
Fig. 12/9 SIPROTEC 4 6MD63 bay control unit Key-operated switching authority
Feeder control diagram
Measured-value acquisition 6
Description Signal and command indications
P, Q, cos (power factor) and meter-reading calculation
The 6MD63 bay control unit is a exible, easy-to-use control
unit. It is optimally tailored for medium-voltage applications but Event logging 7
can also be used in high-voltage substations. Switching statistics
The 6MD63 bay control unit has the same design (look and feel) Monitoring functions
as the other protection and combined units of the SIPROTEC 4
relay series. Conguration is also performed in a standardized
way with the easy-to-use DIGSI 4 conguration tool . Energy metering values
For operation, a large graphic display with a keyboard is avail-
able. The important operating actions are performed in a simple
and intuitive way, e.g. alarm list display or switchgear control.
Slave pointer
Self-supervision of relay
9
The operator panel can be mounted separately from the relay,
if required. Thus, exibility with regard to the mounting position Communication interfaces
of the unit is ensured.
Integrated key-operated switches control the switching authority
System interface
IEC 61850 Ethernet 10
and authorization for switching without interlocking.
PROFIBUS-FMS
DNP 3.0
PROFIBUS-DP 11
MODBUS
Service interface for DIGSI 4 (modem)/temperature
detection (thermo-box)
Time synchronization via IRIG-B/DCF 77
12
13
14
15
1 6MD63 bay control unit with local control
Housing, binary inputs (BI) and outputs (BO), measuring transducer

6MD63 - - AA0 -
Housing 19, 11 BI, 8 BO, 1 live status contact 1

Housing 19, 24 BI, 11 BO, 4 power relays, 1 live status contact 2
2 Housing 19, 20 BI, 11 BO, 2 measuring transducer inputs, 4 power relays, 1 live status contact
Housing 19, 20 BI, 6 BO, 4 power relays, 1 live status contact1)
3
4
Housing 19, 37 BI, 14 BO, 8 power relays, 1 live status contact 5
Housing 19, 33 BI, 14 BO, 2 measuring transducer inputs, 8 power relays, 1 live status contact 6
Housing 19, 33 BI, 9 BO, 8 power relays, 1 live status contact1)
3 Current transformer In
7
No analog measured variables 0

1 A2) 1
5 A2)
4 Rated auxiliary voltage (power supply, indication voltage)
5
24 to 48 V DC, threshold binary input 19 V3) 2

60 to 125 V DC4), threshold binary input 19 V3) 4
110 to 250 V DC4), 115 to 230 V AC, threshold binary input 88 V3)
5 Unit version
5
For panel surface mounting, plug-in terminal, detached operator panel A

For panel surface mounting, 2-tier terminal, top/bottom B
For panel surface mounting, screw-type terminal, detached operator panel
6 For panel ush mounting, plug-in terminal (2/3 pin AMP connector)
C
D
For panel ush mounting, screw-type terminal (direct connection / ring-type cable lugs) E
For panel surface mounting, screw-type terminal (direct connection / ring-type cable lugs), without HMI F
For panel surface mounting, plug-in terminal without HMI G
7 Region-specic default settings/function versions and language settings
Region DE, 50 Hz, IEC, language: German, changeable A
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: English (GB), changeable B
Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI, language: English (US), changeable C
8 Region FR, IEC/ANSI, language: French, changeable
Region World, IEC/ANSI, language: Spanish, changeable
D
E
System interface (on rear of unit/Port B)
No system port 0
9 IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, electrical RS232
1
2
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, 820 nm ber optic, ST connector 3
10 PROFIBUS-FMS Slave, ber optic, single ring, ST connector5)

PROFIBUS-FMS Slave, ber optic, double ring, ST connector5)
5
6
PROFIBUS-DP Slave, 820 nm ber optic, double ring, ST connector5) 9 L 0 B
MODBUS, RS485
11 MODBUS, 820 nm ber optic, ST connector5)
9
9
L
L
0
0
D
E
DNP 3.0, RS485 9 L 0 G
DNP 3.0, 820 nm ber optic, ST connector5) 9 L 0 H
12 IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, optical, double, LC connector5) 9 L 0 S
DIGSI 4 / modem interface (on rear of unit/Port C)
No port on rear side 0
DIGSI 4, electrical RS232 1
13 DIGSI 4, electrical RS485
DIGSI 4, optical 820 nm, ST connector
2
3
Measuring
Basic metering (current, voltage) 0
14 Slave pointer, mean values, min/max values only for position 7 = 1 and 5 2
1) Only for position 7 = 0 4) Transition between the two auxiliary voltage ranges can be selected
2) Rated current can be selected by means of jumpers. by means of jumpers.
15 3) The binary input thresholds can be selected in two stages by means

of jumpers.
5) Not with position 9 = B; if 9 = B; please order 6MD6 unit with
RS485 port and separate ber-optic converter.

SIPROTEC 4 6MD66 high-voltage bay control unit
Function overview
Application 1
Integrated synchro-check for synchro-
nized closing of the circuit-breaker
Breaker-related protection functions
(Breaker Failure 50BF, Auto-reclosure 2
79)
Automation can be congured easily by
graphic means with CFC
3
LSP2187-afp.eps
Flexible, powerful measured-value
LSP2187-afp.eps
processing
Connection for 4 voltage transformers,
3 current transformers, two 20 mA
transducers
4
Volume of signals for high voltage
Up to 14 1 -pole circuit-breakers can
be operated 5
Up to 11 2-pole switching devices can
Fig. 12/10 SIPROTEC 4 6MD66 high-voltage bay control unit
be operated
Up to 65 indication inputs,
Description up to 45 command relays 6
Can be supplied with 3 volumes of signals as 6MD662
The 6MD66 high-voltage bay control unit is the control unit for (35 indications, 25 commands), 6MD663 (50 indications,
high voltage bays from the SIPROTEC 4 relay series. Because of 35 commands) or 6MD664 (65 indications, 45 commands);
its integrated functions, it is an optimum, low-cost solution for number of measured values is the same 7
high-voltage switchbays. Switchgear interlocking
The 6MD66 high-voltage bay control unit also has the same Inter-relay communication with other devices of the 6MD66
series, even without a master station interface with higher
design (look and feel) as the other protection and combined
units of the SIPROTEC 4 relay series. Conguration is performed level control and protection 8
in a standardized way with the easy-to-use DIGSI 4 conguration Suitable for redundant master station
tool.
Display of operational measured values V, I, P, Q, S, f, cos
For operation, a large graphic display with a keyboard is avail-
able. The important operating actions are performed in a simple
(power factor) (single and three-phase measurement)
Limit values for measured values
9
and intuitive way, e.g. alarm list display or switchgear control.
Can be supplied in a standard housing for cubicle mounting
The operator panel can be mounted separately from the unit, if
or with a separate display for free location of the operator
required. Thus, exibility with regard to the mounting position
of the unit is ensured. Integrated key-operated switches control
elements
4 freely assignable function keys to speed up frequently
10
the switching authority and authorization for switching without
interlocking. High-accuracy measurement ( 0.5 %) for voltage, recurring operator actions
current and calculated values P and Q are another feature of the
unit.
System interface
11
IEC 61850 Ethernet
PROFIBUS-FMS/-DP
Service interface for DIGSI 4 (modem) 12
Time synchronization via IRIG B/DCF 77
13
14
15
Application
Application
1 Communication
With regard to communication between
components, particular emphasis is
2 placed on the SIPROTEC 4 functions

required for energy automation.
Every data item is time-stamped at its
source, i.e. where it originates.
3 Information is marked according to

where it originates from (e.g. if a com-
mand originates local or remote)
The feedback to switching processes is
4 allocated to the commands.
Communication processes the transfer
of large data blocks, e.g. le transfers,
independently.
5 For the reliable execution of a
command, the relevant signal is rst
Fig. 12/11 Connection diagram of the switching devices (circuit-breaker 2 poles closed,
1 pole open; disconnector/grounding switch 1 pole)
acknowledged in the unit executing
the command. A check-back indication
6 is issued after the command has been
enabled (i.e. interlocking check, target
= actual check) and executed.
In addition to the communication inter-
7 faces on the rear of the unit, which are
equipped to suit the customers require-
ments, the front includes an RS232 inter-
face for connection of DIGSI. This is used
8 for quick diagnostics as well as for the

loading of parameters. DIGSI 4 can read
out and represent the entire status of the
unit online, thus making diagnostics and
documentation more convenient.
9 Control
The bay control units of the 6MD66 series
have command outputs and indication
10 inputs that are particularly suited to the Fig. 12/12 2-pole connection diagram of circuit-breakers and disconnectors
requirements of high-voltage technology.
As an example, the 2-pole control of a
switching device is illustrated (see Fig. 12/11). In this example,
11 two poles of the circuit-breaker are closed and 1 pole is open. All
other switching devices (disconnectors, grounding switches) are
closed and open in 1-pole control. A maximum of 14 switching
devices can be controlled in this manner.
12 A complete 2-pole control of all switching devices (see
Fig. 12/12) is likewise possible. However more contacts are
required for this. A maximum of 11 switching devices can be
controlled in this manner.
13 A possible method to connect the switching devices to the bay
control unit 6MD66 is shown in Fig. 12/13. There it is shown
how three switching devices Q0, Q1, and Q2 are connected
using 1 pole control.
14
15
Functions
Functions
Switchgear interlockings 1
Using the CFC (Continuous Function Chart) available in all
SIPROTEC 4 units, the bay interlock conditions can, among other
things, be conveniently congured graphically in the 6MD66 bay
control unit. The inter-bay interlock conditions can be checked 2
via the inter-relay communication (see next section) to other
6MD66 devices. With the introduction of IEC 61850 communica-
tion, the exchange of information for interlocking purposes
is also possible via Ethernet. This is handled via the GOOSE 3
message method. Possible partners are all other bay devices or
protection devices which support
IEC 61850- GOOSE message.
In the tests prior to command output, the positions of both 4
key-operated switches are also taken into consideration. The
upper key-operated switch corresponds to the S5 function (local/
remote switch), which is already familiar from the 8TK switch-
gear interlock system. The lower key-operated switch effects the
changeover to non-interlocked command output (S1 function).
5
In the position Interlocking Off the key cannot be withdrawn,
with the result that non-operation of the congured interlocks is
immediately evident. 6
The precise action of the key-operated switch can be set using
the parameter switching authority.
With the integrated function switchgear interlocking there is
no need for an external switchgear interlock device. Fig. 12/13 Typical connection for 1-pole control
7
Furthermore, the following tests are implemented (parameteriz-
able) before the output of a command:
Target = Actual, i.e. is the switching device already in the
desired position?
8
Double command lockout, i.e. is another command already
running?
Individual commands, e.g. grounding control can additionally 9
be secured using a code.
10
11
12
13
14
15
Functions
Synchronization
1 The bay control unit can, upon closing

of the circuit-breaker, check whether the
synchronization conditions of both partial
networks are met (synchro-check). Thus
an additional, external synchronization
2 device is not required. The synchroniza-
tion conditions can be easily specied
using the conguration system DIGSI 4.
The unit differentiates between synchro-
3 nous and asynchronous networks and
reacts differently upon connection:
In synchronous networks there are
minor differences with regard to phase
4 angle and voltage moduli and so the
circuit-breaker response time does not
need to be taken into consideration. For
asynchronous networks however, the
5 differences are larger and the range of the
connection window is traversed at a faster
Fig. 12/14 Connection of the measured values for synchronization
rate. Therefore it is wise here to take the

circuit-breaker response time into consid-
6 eration. The command is automatically

dated in advance of this time so that the
circuit-breaker contacts close at precisely
the right time.
7 Fig. 12/14 illustrates the connection of

the voltages.
As is evident from Fig. 12/14, the syn-
chronization conditions are tested for one
8 phase. The important parameters for
synchronization are:
|Umin| < |U| < |Umax|
(Voltage modulus)
9 < max
(Angle difference)
f < fmax
10 (Frequency difference) Fig. 12/15 Voltage selection for synchronization with duplicate busbar system
Using the automation functions available

in the bay control unit, it is possible
to connect various reference voltages
11 depending on the setting of a disconnec-
tor. Thus in the case of a double busbar
system, the reference voltage of the
active busbar can be automatically used
12 for synchronization (see Fig. 12/15).
Alternatively the selection of the refer-
ence voltage can also take place via relay
switching, if the measurement inputs are
13 already being used for other purposes.
14
Fig. 12/16 Simultaneous connection of measured values according to a two-wattmeter circuit
15 and synchronization

Functions
Synchronization
The bay control unit offers the option
of storing various parameter sets (up 1
to eight) for the synchronization func-
tion and of selecting one of these for
operation. Thus the different properties
of several circuit- breakers can be taken
into consideration. These are then used
2
at the appropriate time. This is relevant if
several circuit-breakers with e.g. different
LSP2493en.tif
response times are to be served by one
bay control unit.
3
The measured values can be connected
to the bay control unit in accordance with
Fig. 12/14 (single-phase system) or
Fig. 12/16 (two-wattmeter circuit).
Fig. 12/17 Power System Data, sheet for parameters of the synchronization function
4
The synchronization function can be
parameterized via four tabs in DIGSI.
5
LSP2496en.tif
8
Fig. 12/18 General parameters of the synchronization function
10
LSP2494en.tif
11
Fig. 12/19 Parameter page for asynchronous networks
12
13
14
LSP2495en.tif
Fig. 12/20 Parameter page for asynchronous networks

15
Communication
Communication
1 The device is not only able to communicate

to the substation control level via standard
protocol like IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103
or others. It is also possible to communi-
2 cate with other bay devices or protection
devices. Two possibilities are available.
Inter-relay-communication
3 The function inter-relay-communication

enables the exchange of information
directly between 6MD66 bay controller
devices. The communication is realized
4 via Port C of the devices, so it is inde-

pendent from the substation communica-
tion port B. Port C is equipped with a
RS485 interface. For communication over
longer distances, an external converter to
5 ber-optic cable can be used.
Fig. 12/21 Typical application: 1 circuit-breaker method
(disconnector and grounding switch not shown)
An application example for inter-relay-
communication is shown in Fig. 12/22.
Three 6MD66 devices are used for control
6 of a 1 circuit-breaker bay. One device
is assigned to each of the three circuit-
breakers. By this means, the redundancy
of the primary equipment is also available
7
LSP2227f.tif
on the secondary side. Even if one
circuit-breaker fails, both feeders can be
supplied. Control over the entire bay is
retained, even if one bay control unit fails.
8 The three bay control units use the inter-
relay-communication for interchange of
Fig. 12/22 Connection matrix of inter-relay communication in DIGSI 4
switchgear interlocking conditions. So
the interlocking is working completely
9 independent from the substation control

level.
IEC 61850-GOOSE
With the communication standard
10 IEC 61850, a similar function like inter-
relay-communication is provided with
the GOOSE communication to other
IEC 61850-devices. Since the standard
11 IEC 61850 is used by nearly all SIPROTEC
devices and many devices from other
suppliers, the number of possible
communication partners is large.
12 The applications for IEC 61850-GOOSE are

quite the same as for inter-relay-commu-
nication. The most used application is the
interchange of switchgear interlocking
13 information between bay devices. GOOSE
uses the IEC 61850 substation Ethernet,
Fig. 12/23 Connection for IEC 61850-GOOSE communication
so no separate communication port is needed.The conguration

Like inter-relay-communication, GOOSE also supplies a status
is shown in Fig. 12/23. The SIPROTEC devices are connected
information for supervision of the communication. In case of
14 via optical Ethernet and grouped by voltage levels (110 kV and
20 kV). The devices in the same voltage level can interchange
interruption, the respective information is marked as invalid.
the substation-wide interlocking information. GOOSE uses the Therefore, non-affected information still can be used for inter-
substation Ethernet. locking, and a maximum functional availability is guaranteed.
15
Functions
Measured-value processing
Measured-value processing is imple-
mented by predened function modules, 1
which are likewise congured using
DIGSI 4.
The transducer modules are assigned in
the DIGSI 4 assignment matrix to current
2
and voltage channels of the bay control
unit. From these input variables, they
LSP2228f.tif
form various computation variables (see
Table 12/1). 3
Fig. 12/24 DIGSI 4 Parameter view transducer packets
The individual transducer modules can be Name of the Max. availability of Required input Calculated variables
4
activated in the functional scope of the transducer module transducers on the channels (= output variables)
unit and will then appear in the DIGSI 4 unit (can be set via
the functional scope)
assignment matrix with the input chan-
nels and output variables from Table 1.
Transducer V x1 V V, f
5
The output variables can then be assigned
to the system interface or represented Transducer I x1 I I, f
in the measured value window in the
display. Transducer packet
1 phase
x3 V, I V, I, P, Q, S, ,
cos (PF), sin , f
6
Transducer packet x1 V1, V2, V3, I1, I2, I3 V0, V1, V2, V3, V12,
3 phase V23, V31, I0, I1, I2, I3,
P, Q, S, , cos (PF),
sin , f 7
Transducer packet x1 V1, V2, I1, I2 V12, V13, I2, I3, P, Q, S,
two-wattmeter circuit , cos (PF), sin , f
Table 12/1 Properties of measured-value processing

8
Sample presentation of the measured
value display. 9
10
11
12
13
LSP2189f.tif
Fig. 12/25
14
15
Functions
The connection of the input channels can

be chosen without restriction. For the
1 two-wattmeter circuit, the interface con-
nection should be selected in accordance
with Fig. 12/26. The two-wattmeter circuit
enables the complete calculation of a
2 three-phase system with only two voltage
and two current transformers.
Metered values
3 For internal metering, the unit can

calculate an energy metered value from
the measured current and voltage values.
If an external meter with a metering pulse
output is available, the bay control unit
4 can obtain and process metering pulses
via an indication input.
The metered values can be displayed and
5 passed on to a master unit. A distinction

is made between forward, reverse, active
Fig. 12/26 Two-wattmeter circuit (connection to bay control unit)
and reactive power ( kWh, kvarh).
Automation Indication / measured value blocking

6 With integrated logic, the user can set, via a graphic interface To avoid the transmission of information to the master unit dur-
(CFC, Continuous Function Chart), specic functions for the ing works on the bay, a transmission blocking can be activated.
automation of switchgear or substation. Functions are activated
via function keys, binary input or via communication interface. Indication ltering
7 Processing of internal indications or measured values is also Indications can be ltered and delayed.
possible.
Switching authorization / key-operated switch indication input. The indication is passed on only if the indica-
8 The switching authorization (control authorization) (interlocked/
tion voltage is still present after a set period of time.
The lter time can be set from 0 to 24 hours in 1 ms steps. It is
non-interlocked, corresponds to key-operated S1 in the 8TK
also possible to set the lter time so that it can, if desired, be
interlock system) and the switching authority (local/remote,
retriggered.
corresponds to key-operated S5 for 8TK) can be preset for the
9 SIPROTEC 4 bay control unit using key-operated switches. The
position of both keys is automatically evaluated by command
Furthermore, the hardware lter time can be taken into consid-
eration in the time stamp; i.e. the time stamp of a message that
processing. The key for operation without interlocks cannot be is detected as arriving will be predated by the known, constant
removed when in the position non-interlocked, such that this hardware lter time. This can be set individually for every binary
10 mode of operation is immediately recognizable (see also page
12/15, Section Switchgear interlockings).
input in a 6MD66 bay control unit.
Every change in the key-operated switch positions is logged.
11 Chatter blocking
Chatter blocking feature evaluates whether, in a congured
period of time, the number of status changes of indication input
12 blocked for a certain period, so that the communication line to
the master unit will not be overloaded by disturbed inputs.
For every binary input, it is possible to set separately whether
the chatter blocking should be active or not. The parameters
13 (number of status changes, test time, etc.) can be set once per
unit.
14
15
Functions

The 6MD66 is equipped with an auto-
reclosure function (AR). The function 1
includes several operating modes:
Interaction with an external device
for auto-reclosure via binary inputs
and binary outputs; also possible with 2
interaction via IEC 61850-GOOSE
Control of the internal AR function by
external protection
3-pole auto-reclosure for all types of
3
faults; different dead times are available
depending on the type of the fault
1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase faults,
4
LSP2229f.tif
no reclosing for multi-phase faults
1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase faults
and 2-phase faults, no reclosing for
multi-phase faults.
1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase and
Fig. 12/27 Parameterization of time management 5
3-pole auto-reclosure for multi-phase
faults Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF)
1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase faults and 2-phase faults and
3-phase auto-reclosure for multi-phase faults
The 6MD66 incorporates a two-stage circuit-breaker failure
protection to detect failures of tripping command execution,
6
Multiple-shot auto-reclosure for example, due to a defective circuit breaker. The current
Interaction with the internal synchro-check detection logic is phase-selective and can therefore also be used
Monitoring of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts
in single-pole tripping schemes. lf the fault current is not inter-
rupted after a settable time delay has expired, a retrip command
7
In addition to the above-mentioned operating modes, several or a busbar trip command will be generated. The breaker failure
other operating principles can be employed by means of the protection can be initiated by external devices via binary input
integrated programmable logic (CFC). Integration of auto-
reclosure in the feeder protection allows the line-side voltages
signals or IEC 61850 GOOSE messages.
8
to be evaluated. A number of voltage-dependent supplementary Time management
functions are thus available: The 6MD66 bay control units can, like the other units in the
DLC
By means of dead-line-check (DLC), reclosure is effected only
SIPROTEC 4 range, be provided with the current time by a
number of different methods: 9
when the line is deenergized (prevention of asynchronous Via the interface to the higher-level system control
breaker closure) (PROFIBUS FMS or IEC 61850)
ADT
The adaptive dead time (ADT) is employed only if auto-
Via the external time synchronization interface on the rear
of the unit (various protocols such as IRIG B and DCF77 are
10
reclosure at the remote station was successful (reduction of possible)
stress on equipment).
Via external minute impulse, assigned to a binary input
RDT
Reduced dead time (RDT) is employed in conjunction with From another bay control unit by means of inter-relay
communication
11
auto-reclosure where no teleprotection method is employed:
When faults within the zone extension but external to the pro- Via the internal unit clock.
tected line of a distance protection are switched off for rapid
auto-reclosure (RAR), the RDT function decides on the basis of
measurement of the return voltage from the remote station
Fig. 12/27 illustrates the settings that are possible on the DIGSI
interface. 12
which has not tripped whether or not to reduce the dead time.
13
14
15
DIGSI 4 Conguration tool
DIGSI 4 Conguration tool
1 The PC program DIGSI 4 is used for the

convenient conguration of all
SIPROTEC 4 units. Data exchange with
the conguration tool SICAM PAS of the
2 energy automation system is possible,
such that the bay level information
needs only be entered once. Thus errors
that could arise as a result of duplicated
3 entries are excluded.
DIGSI 4 offers the user a modern and
intuitive Windows interface, with which
the units can be set and also read out.
4 DIGSI 4 conguration matrix
The DIGSI 4 conguration matrix allows
the user to see the overall view of the unit
5 conguration at a glance (see Part 3,
LSP2231f.tif
Fig. 3/3). For example, all allocations of
the binary inputs, the output relays and
the LEDs are shown at a glance. And with
6 one click of the button, connections can
be switched. Also the measuring and
Fig. 12/28 CFC plan for interlocking logic (example)
metering values are contained in this

matrix.
7 Commissioning
outputs can be read and set directly. This
8 can simplify the wire checking process
signicantly for the user.
CFC: Reduced time and planning for

9 programming logic
With the help of the CFC (Continuous
Function Chart), you can congure inter-
locks and switching sequences simply by
10 drawing the logic sequences; no special
knowledge of software is required. Logi-
cal elements, such as AND, OR and time
elements, measured limit values, etc. are
11 available.
LSP2233f.tif
Display editor
A convenient display editor is available
12 to design the display on SIPROTEC 4
units. The predened symbol sets can
Fig. 12/29 General conguration view of the bay control unit
be expanded to suit the user. Drawing a

single-line diagram is extremely simple. Operational measured Fig. 12/29 illustrates the general view of the 6MD66 bay control
13 values (analog values) in the unit can be placed where required.
In order to also display the comprehensive plant of the high-
unit on the DIGSI 4 conguration interface.
As is the case with the SIPROTEC 4 protection units, there is an
voltage switchgear and controlgear, the feeder control display of icon called Functional Scope. It enables the conguration of
the 6MD66 bay control unit can have a number of pages. measured-value processing and the synchronization function
14 In this process, several pages of a control display can be and the protection functions (auto-reclosure and breaker failure
protection).
congured under one another, and the user can switch between
them using the cursor. The number of pages, including the basic
display and the feeder control display, should not exceed 10, as
15 otherwise the memory in the unit will be completely occupied.

Technical data
General unit data Output relay

Analog inputs
Rated frequency 50 or 60 Hz (adjustable, depending
Live contact 1 NC/NO (can be set via jumper:
Factory setting is Break contact,
i.e. the contact is normally open but
1
on the order number)
then closes in the event of an error)
Rated current IN 1 or 5 A (can be changed via plug-
in jumper) Number of command relays,
Rated voltage VN 100 V, 110 V, 125 V, 100 V3,

110 V3 can be adjusted using
single pole
6MD662 25, grouping in 2 groups of 4, 2
1 group of 3, 6 groups of 2 and two
parameters ungrouped relays
Power consumption 6MD663 35, grouping in 3 groups of 4,
at IN = 1 A
at IN = 5 A
< 0.1 VA
< 0.5 VA
1 group of 3, 9 groups of 2 and two
ungrouped relays
3
Voltage inputs < 0.3 VA with 100 V
6MD664 45, grouping 4 groups of 4,
Measurement range current I Up to 1.2 times the rated current 1 group of 3, 12 groups of 2 plus two
Thermal loading capacity 12 A continuous, 15 A for 10 s, ungrouped relays
200 A for 1 s Switching capacity, command 4
Measurement range voltage V Up to 170 V (rms value) relay
Max. permitted voltage 170 V (rms value) continuous Make max. 1000 W/ VA
Break max. 30 VA
Transducer inputs
Measurement range DC 24 mA
Max. permitted continuous current DC 250 mA
Break (at L/R 50 ms)
Max. switching voltage
Max. contact continuous current
25 VA
250 V
5A
5
Input resistance, 10 1 % Max. (short-duration) current 15 A
recorded power loss at 24 mA 5.76 mW for 4 s
Power supply
Rated auxiliary voltages DC 24 to 48 V, DC 60 to 125 V,
Switching capacity,
live contact ON and OFF 20 W/VA 6
Max. switching voltage 250 V
DC 110 to 250 V
Max. contact continuous current 1 A
Permitted tolerance -20 % to +20 %
Max. make-time 8 ms
Permitted ripple of the rated
auxiliary voltage
15 %
Max. chatter time 2.5 ms 7
Max. break time 2 ms
Power consumption
Max. at DC 60 to 250 V 20 W LED
Max. at DC 24 to 48 V 21.5 W
Typical at DC 60 to 250 V
Typical at DC 24 to 48 V
17.5 W
18.5 W
Number
RUN (green)
ERROR (red)
1
1
8
(typical = 5 relays picked up + Display (red), function can be 14
live contact active + allocated
LCD display illuminated +
2 interface cards plugged in)
Bridging time
Unit design
Housing 7XP20 For dimensions drawings,
9
at DC 24 and 60 V 20 ms see part 14
at DC 48 and 110 V 50 ms Type of protection acc. to
Binary inputs
Number
EN60529
in the surface-mounting
housing
IP20 10
6MD662 35 in the ush-mounting housing
6MD663 50 front IP51
6MD664 65
Rated voltage range DC 24 to 250 V (selectable)
rear
Weight
IP20
11
Pick-up value (range can be set DC 17, 73 or 154 V Flush-mounting housing,
using jumpers for every binary integrated local control
input) 6MD663 approx. 10.5 kg
Function (allocation)
Minimum voltage threshold
Can be assigned freely 6MD664
Surface-mounting housing,
approx. 11 kg 12
(presetting) without local control,
for rated voltage 24, 48, 60 V DC 17 V with assembly angle
for rated voltage 110 V DC 73 V 6MD663 approx. 12.5 kg
for rated voltage 220, 250 V DC 154 V 6MD664 approx. 13 kg 13
Maximum permitted voltage DC 300 V Detached local control approx. 2.5 kg
Current consumption, excited approx. 1.5 mA
for 3 ms approx. 50 mA to increase pickup
Permitted capacitive coupling of

time
220 nF
14
the indication inputs
Minimum impulse duration for 4.3 ms
message
15
Technical data
Serial interfaces Ethernet, electrical
1 System interfaces
PROFIBUS FMS,
Connection
for ush-mounting housing/ Two RJ45 connectors,
Hardware version depending on
Order No.: detached operator panel
PROFIBUS ber optic cable ST connector Distance Max. 20 m/65.6 ft
2 Baud rate
Optical wave length
max 1.5 Mbaud
820 nm
Test voltage
Ethernet, optical
Permissible path attenuation max. 8 dB for glassber 62.5/125 m

Distance, bridgeable max. 1.5 km Connection
for ush-mounting housing/ Integrated LC connector for FO
PROFIBUS RS485 9-pin SUB-D connector
3 Baud rate
Distance, bridgeable
max. 12 Mbaud
max. 1000 m at 93.75 kBaud
surface-mounting housing with connection, mounting location B
max. 100 m at 12 Mbaud Optical wavelength 1300 nm
PROFIBUS RS232 9-pin SUB-D connector Distance 1.5 km/0.9 miles
4 Baud rate
Distance, bridgeable
4800 to 115200 baud
max. 15 m
Electrical tests
Time synchronization DCF77/IRIG B signal
Specications
Connection 9-pin SUB-D connector
5 Input voltage level
Connection allocation Pin 1
either 5 V, 12 V or 24 V
24 V input for minute impulse
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0/.1/.2
DIN 57435 Part 303
Pin 2 5 V input for minute impulse For further standards see specic
Pin 3 Return conductor for minute impulse tests
Pin 4 Return conductor for time message
6 Pin 7
Pin 8
5 V input for minute impulse
24 V input for time message
Insulation tests
Standards IEC 60255-5 and IEC 60870-2-1
Pin 5, 9 Screen Voltage test (100 % test) 2.5 kV (rms), 50 Hz
Pin 6 Not allocated All circuits except for auxiliary
Message type (IRIG B, DCF, etc.) Can be adjusted using parameters supply, binary inputs,
7 Control interface for RS232 DIGSI 4 communication and time synchro-
nization interfaces
Connection Front side, non-isolated, 9-pin
Voltage test (100 % test) DC 3.5 kV
SUB-D connector
8 DIGSI 4 interface (rear of unit)

Fiber optic ST connector
inputs
Voltage test (100 % test) 500 V (rms value), 50 Hz
Baud rate max. 1.5 Mbaud only isolated communication
Optical wave length 820 nm and time synchronization
Permissible path attenuation max. 8 dB for glass ber of interfaces
9 Distance, bridgeable
62.5/125 m
max. 1.5 km
Surge voltage test (type test)
All circuits except for communi-
5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 s; 0.5 J;
3 positive and 3 negative surges
RS485 9-pin SUB-D connector cation and time synchronization at intervals of 5 s
Baud rate max. 12 Mbaud interfaces, class III
Distance, bridgeable max. 1000 m at 93.75 kBaud
10 RS232
max. 100 m at 12 MBaud
9-pin SUB-D connector
EMC tests for noise immunity; type test
Standards IEC 60255-6, IEC 60255-22 (product
standards)
Baud rate 4800 to 115200 Baud
Distance, bridgeable max. 15m
DIN 57 435 Part 303
11 Interface for inter-unit communication
RS485 9-pin SUB-D connector
High frequency test
2.5 kV (peak value), 1 MHz; = 15 ms
Baud rate max. 12 Mbaud and DIN 57435 part 303, class III
Distance, bridgeable max. 1000 m at 93.75 kBaud Discharge of static electricity 8 kV contact discharge; 15 kV air
max. 100 m at 12 Mbaud
12 IEC 60255-22-2 class IV
discharge; both polarities; 150 pF;
Ri = 330
Ethernet interface Exposure to RF eld, non- 10 V/m; 27 to 500 MHz
modulated IEC 60255-22-3
IEC 61850 protocol
(report), class III
13 Isolated interface for data transfer:

to a control center Port B, 100 Base T acc. to
Exposure to RF eld, amplitude- 10 V/m; 80 to 1000 MHz; 80 % AM;
modulated IEC 61000-4-3, class III 1 kHz
with DIGSI IEEE 802.3
between SIPROTEC 4 relays Exposure to RF eld, pulse- 10 V/m; 900 MHz; repetition frequen-
modulated cy 200 Hz; duty cycle 50 %
Transmission rate 1000 MBit IEC 61000-4-3/ ENV 50204, class III
14 Fast transient interference bursts 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; burst length =
IEC 60255-22-4, IEC 61000-4-4, 15 ms; repetition frequency 300 ms;
class IV both polarities; Ri = 50 ;
test duration 1 min
15
Technical data
EMC tests for noise immunity; type test (continued) During transport
(SURGE),
Impulse: 1.2/50 s Standards
Vibration
IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2
Sinusoidal 1
Auxiliary supply common mode: 2 kV; 12 , 9 F IEC 60068-2-6 8 to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration
differential mode:1 kV; 2 , 18 F Frequency sweep 1 octave/min
Measurement inputs, binary inputs common mode: 2 kV; 42 , 0.5 F
and relay outputs differential mode: 1 kV; 42 , 0.5 F Shock
Half-sinusoidal
2
Conducted RF, amplitude- 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM; IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 15 g, duration 11 ms,
modulated IEC 61000-4-6, class III 1 kHz IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks
Magnetic eld with power 30 A/m continuous; 300 A/m for each in both directions 3 axes
frequency
3 s; 50 Hz
0.5 mT; 50 Hz
Continuous shock
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
Half-sinusoidal
3
IEC 60255-6 IEC 60068-2-29 1000 shocks in both directions of the
Oscillatory surge withstand 2.5 to 3 kV (peak); 1 to 1.5 MHz 3 axes
capability
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 damped wave; 50 surges per second;
4
duration 2 s; Ri = 150 to 200
Temperatures
Fast transient surge withstand 4 to 5 kV; 10/150 ns; 50 impulses
capability per second; Standards IEC 60255-6
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 both polarities; duration 2 s ;
Ri = 80
during operation
-5 to +55 C 25 to 131 F 5
Radiated electromagnetic interfe- 35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz Temporary permissible tempera- -20 to +70 C -4 to 158 F
rence ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 ture limit during operation
Damped oscillations
IEC 60894, IEC 61000-4-12
2.5 kV (peak value), 100 kHz
polarity alternating, 1 MHz, 10 and
50 MHz, Ri = 200
(The legibility of the display may
be impaired above 55 C/131 F) 6
Limit temperature during storage -25 to +55 C -13 to 131 F
EMC tests for interference emission; type tests Limit temperature during -25 to +70 C -13 to 158 F
Standard EN 50081-1 (Basic specication) transport
Radio interference voltage on lines 150 kHz to 30 MHz
only auxiliary supply class B
Storage and transport with
standard factory packaging
7
IEC-CISPR 22 Humidity
Interference eld strength 30 to 1000 MHz Permissible humidity stress Annual average 75 % relative
IEC-CISPR 22 class B We recommend arranging the
93 % relative humidity; condensation 8
not exposed to direct sunlight or during operation is not permitted
Mechanical dynamic tests pronounced temperature changes
Vibration, shock stress and seismic vibration that could cause condensation
During operation
CE conformity
9
Vibration Sinusoidal The product meets the stipulations of the guideline of the council of
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2 10 to 60 Hz: 0.075 mm amplitude; the European Communities for harmonization of the legal requirements
of the member states on electro-magnetic compatibility (EMC directive
2004/108/EEC previous 89/336/EEC) and product use within certain
10
20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes voltage limits (low-voltage directive 2006/95/EEC previous 73/23/EEC).
Shock Half-sinusoidal The product conforms with the international standard of the IEC 60255
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms, series and the German national standard DIN VDE 57 435,Part 303. The
the 3 axes
unit has been developed and manufactured for use in industrial areas in
accordance with the EMC standard.
11
Vibration during earthquake Sinusoidal Further applicable standards: ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0 and C37.90.1
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 1 to 8 Hz: 4 mm amplitude This conformity is the result of a test that was performed by Siemens AG
1 to 8 Hz: 2 mm amplitude
in accordance with Article 10 of the directive in conformance with
generic standards EN 50081-2 and EN 50082-2 for the EMC directive and 12
(vertical axis) EN 60255-6 for the low-voltage directive.
(horizontal axis)
8 to 35 Hz: 0,5 g acceleration
(vertical axis) 13
14
15
1 6MD66 high-voltage bay control unit
Processor module with power supply, input/output modules with a total of:
6MD662 - -0 -
Number of inputs and outputs see

next
35 single-point indications, 22 1-pole single commands, page
2 3 single commands to common potential, 1 live contact, 3 x current
4 x voltage via direct CT inputs, 2 measuring transducer inputs
3 1A
1 A / 150 % IN
1
2
1 A / 200 % IN 3
5A 5
4 5 A / 150 % IN
5 A / 200 % IN
6
7

DC 24 to 48 V, threshold binary input 19 V2)
5 DC 60 V, threshold binary input 19 V2)
2
3
DC 110 V, threshold binary input 88 V2) 4
6 Unit version
For panel ush mounting, with integr. local operation, HMI, plug-in terminal (2/3-pole AMP socket) D
For panel ush mounting, with integr. local operation, graphic display,
keyboard, screw-type terminals (direct connec./ring-type cable lugs) E
7 Region-specic default settings / function and language settings
Region DE, 50Hz, language: German, changeable A
Region World, 50/60 Hz, language: English (GB), changeable B
8 Region US, ANSI, language: English (US), changeable

Region World, 50/60 Hz, language: French, changeable
C
D
Region World, 50/60 Hz, language: Spanish, changeable E
System interface (on rear of unit, port B)

9 No system interface 0
PROFIBUS-FMS Slave, electrical RS485
10 PROFIBUS-FMS Slave, optical, single ring, ST connector
4
5
PROFIBUS-FMS Slave, optical, double ring, ST connector 6
11 PROFIBUS-DP Slave, 820 nm ber, double ring, ST plugs

PROFIBUS-DP Slave, double electrical RS485 (second module on port D)
9
9
L 0 B
L 1A
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, optical, double, LC connector 9 L 0 S
12 Function interface (on rear of unit, port C andD)

No function interface 0
DIGSI 4, electrical RS232, port C 1
DIGSI 4, electrical RS485, port C
13 DIGSI 4, optical 820 nm, ST connector, port D
2
3
With RS485 interface for inter-relay communication, port C and DIGSI 4 4
With RS485 interface for inter-relay communication, port C and DIGSI 4,
with optical 820 nm, ST connector, port D 5
14

of jumpers.


6MD66 high-voltage bay control unit
6MD662 - -0 -
1
Full measured-value processing and display A
No measured-value processing and no display F
Synchronization 2
With synchronization A
Without synchronization F
Protection function 3
Without protection functions 0
With auto-reclosure (AR) 1
With circuit-breaker failure protection 2
With auto-reclosure and circuit-breaker failure protection 3 4
With fault recording 4
10
11
12
13
14
15
1 6MD66 high-voltage bay control unit
Processor module with power supply, input/output modules with a total of:
6MD66 - -0 -
Number of inputs and outputs see next page

50 single-point indications, 32 1-pole single commands,
2 3 single commands to common potential, 1 live contact,
3 x current, 4 x voltage via direct CT inputs
2 measuring transducer inputs 3 3
65 single-point indications, 42 1-pole single commands,
3 single commands to common potential, 1 live contact,
3 3 x current, 4 x voltage via direct CT inputs
2 measuring transducer inputs 4
1A
4 1 A / 150 % IN
1
2
1 A / 200 % IN 3
5A 5
5 5 A / 150 % IN
5 A / 200 % IN (for 6MD664)
6
7

6 DC 60 V, threshold binary input 19 V1) 3
DC 110 V, threshold binary input 88 V1) 4
7 Unit version
For panel surface mounting, detached operator panel, for mounting in low-voltage case,
screw-type terminals (direct connec./ring-type cable lugs) C
For panel ush mounting, with integr. local operation, graphic display, keyboard,
8 screw-type terminals (direct connec./ring-type cable lugs)

For panel surface mounting, w /o operator unit, for mounting in low-voltage case,
E
screw-type terminals (direct connec./ring-type cable lugs) F
Region-specic default settings / function and language settings
9 Region DE, 50 Hz, language: German, changeable

Region World, 50/60 Hz, language: English (GB), changeable
A
B
Region US, ANSI, language: English (US), changeable C
Region World, 50/60 Hz, language: French, changeable D
10 Region World, 50/60 Hz, language: Spanish, changeable E
System interface (on rear of unit, port B)

11 IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, electrical RS485

2
3
PROFIBUS-FMS Slave, optical, single ring, ST connector 5
12 PROFIBUS-FMS Slave, optical, double ring, ST connector

PROFIBUS-DP Slave, electrical RS485
6
9 L 0A
PROFIBUS-DP Slave, optical 820 nm, double ring, ST connector 9 L 0 B
PROFIBUS-DP Slave, double electrical RS485 (second module on port D) 9 L 1A
13 PROFIBUS-DP Slave, double optical double ring ST (second module on port D)
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45 connector
9 L 1 B
9 L 0 R
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, optical, double, LC connector 9 L 0 S
14

of jumpers.


6MD66 high-voltage bay control unit
Function interface (on rear of unit, port C and D)

6MD66 - -0
1
No function interface 0
DIGSI 4, electrical RS232, port C 1
DIGSI 4, electrical RS485, port C
DIGSI 4, optical 820 nm, ST connector, port D1)
2 2
3
With RS485 interface for inter-relay communication, port C and DIGSI 4 4
With RS485 interface for inter-relay communication, port C and DIGSI 4,
with optical 820 nm, ST connector, port D1) 5 3
Full measured-value processing and display A
No measured-value processing and no display2)
Synchronization
F
4
With synchronization A
Without synchronization F
Protection function
5
Without protection functions 0
With auto-reclosure (AR) incl. fault recording 1
With circuit-breaker failure protection (BF) incl. fault recording
With auto-reclosure (AR) and circuit-breaker failure protection (BF) incl. fault recording
2
3
6
Fault recording 4
1) Not for double PROFIBUS-DP (position 11 = 9-L1A or 9-L1B).

2) Only for position 16 = 0 (without protection functions).
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
Connection diagrams
Bay unit 6MD662
6 Fig. 12/30 Module 1, indications, commands Fig. 12/31 Module 2, indications, commands
10
11
12
Fig. 12/32 Module 4, measuring values commands
13
14
15
Connection diagrams
Bay unit 6MD662
or or 1
Fig. 12/33 CPU, C-CPU 2

For unit 6MD662*-****1-0AA0 and
For unit 6MD662*-****3-0AA0
6
6MD662*-****2-0AA0 (DIGSI interface, optical,
(DIGSI interface, electrical, system interface optical or electrical)
system interface optical or electrical)
7
or
10
11
12
Fig. 12/35 CPU, C-CPU 2 Fig. 12/36 CPU, C-CPU 2
For unit 6MD662*-****4-0AA0 For unit 6MD662*-****5-0AA0
(Inter-relay communication interface electrical, (DIGSI interface, optical,
system interface optical or electrical) Inter-relay communication
interface electrical,
13
system interface optical or electrical)
14
15
Connection diagrams
Bay unit 6MD664
6 Fig. 12/37 Module 1,

indications, commands
Fig. 12/38 Module 2,
Fig. 12/39 Module 3,
10
11
12
Fig. 12/40 Module 4, Fig. 12/41 Module 5,
indications, commands measuring values, commands
13
14
15
Connection diagrams
Bay unit 6MD664
or or or 1

6
and 6MD664*-****2-0AA0 (DIGSI interface optical,
(DIGSI interface electric, system interface optical optical or electric)
system interface optical optical or electric)
7
or
10
11
12
Fig. 12/44 CPU, C-CPU 2 Fig. 12/45 CPU, C-CPU 2
For unit 6MD664*-****4-0AA0 For unit 6MD664*-****5-0AA0
(Inter-relay communication (DIGSI interface optical,
interface electric,
system interface optical or electric)
(Inter-relay communication electric,
system interface optical or electric)
13
14
15
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Accessories
Page
General
3RV16 Voltage transformer Circuit-Breaker 13/3
4AM Auxiliary Current Transformers and

7XR Isolating Transformers 13/7
7PA22/23 Auxiliary Relays for Various Applications 13/11
7PA26/27/30 Auxiliary Relays for Various Applications/

Trip Circuit Supervision 13/15
7TS16 Annunciation Relay 13/21
7XV5673 SICAM I/O-Unit with 6 Binary In-/Outputs 13/23
SICAM AI Unit 7XV5674 13/31
Communication
6XV8100 F.O. Link Cable 13/35
7KE6000-8Gx Ethernet Patch Cable 13/42
7XV5101 RS232 FO Connector Module 13/43
7XV5103 RS485 Bus System up to 115 kbit/s 13/45
7XV5450 Mini Star-Coupler 13/53
7XV5461 Two-Channel Serial Optical Repeater

(for 1 mono-mode FO cables) 13/57

(for duplex mono-mode FO cables) 13/61

(for duplex multi-mode FO cables) 13/65
Further accessories/contents on the next page
13
Contents
Page Page
1 7XV5550 Active Mini Star-Coupler 13/69

Temperature Detection
7XV5662 6AD10 RTD-box / Thermobox TR1200 13/145

7XV5650/5651 RS485 FO Converter 13/73
7XV5662 7AD10 Universal Relay / RTD-box TR800 13/149
2 7XV5652 RS232 FO Converter 13/77
7XV5662 8AD10 RTD-box / Thermobox TR1200 IP 13/153
7XV5653 Two-Channel Binary Transducer 13/81
7XV5655 Ethernet Modem for Substations 13/85

3 7XV5655 Ethernet Serial Hub for Substations 13/89
Test Equipment
7XV75 Test Switch 13/157
7XV5662 Communication Converter X.21/RS422 and G.703.1 13/93
4 7XV5662 Communication Converter for Pilot Wires 13/97

Time Synchronization
SNTP Master/Server 7SC80 13/159

7XV5662 Two-Channel Serial Communication Converter G.703.6 13/101
5 7XV5700 RS232 RS485 Converter 13/105

7XV5104 Bus Cables for Time Synchronization 13/161
7XV5105 Bus Cable for Time Synchronization (for 7SD5 relays) 13/163
7XV5710 USB RS485 Converter Cable 13/109
7XV5664-0 / 7XV5654 GPS/DFC77 Time Synchronization System 13/165
6 7XV5820 Industrial Modem and Modem-Router with Switch 13/113
GPS / DCF77 Time Sync. Receiver - 7XV5664-1 13/169
7XV5850 Ethernet Modems for Ofce Applications 13/121
SCALANCE X204RNA for HSR networks 13/125

7 SCALANCE X204RNA for PRP networks 13/127
SOFTNET-IE RNA 13/129
8 SCALANCE S Security Modules 13/131
SCALANCE M EDGE/HSPA-Router 13/133
9 RUGGEDCOM Switch RS900 13/135
RUGGEDCOM Switch RSG2100 13/137
RUGGEDCOM Switch RSG2488 13/139

10 SITOP Power Supply 13/143
11
12
13
14
15
Accessories / 3RV16
3RV16 voltage transformer circuit-breaker
Function overview
Application 1
Protection of voltage-transformer secondary circuits for the
connection of protection relays with voltagedependent start-
ing element
2
Functions
Auxiliary contact of 3RV16 prevents the distance protection
tripping via the underimpedance starting in case of a fault in
the voltage transformer circuits 3
Tripping time of instantaneous element in few milliseconds
LSP2402-afp.tif
Construction
Snap-on mounting on 35-mm mounting rail, or screw 4
mounting
5
Fig. 13/1 3RV16 voltage transformer circuit-breaker
Description 6
The voltage transformer circuit-breaker protects the secondary
side of voltage transformers used to connect protection relays
with voltage-dependent starting. The switch is used for distance 7
protection with low-impedance starting. Special auxiliary
contacts reliably prevent low-impedance starting from trigger-
ing distance protection if only one error has occurred in the
converter line. 8
The voltage transformer circuit-breaker can also be used to
safely disconnect the distance protection relay from the voltage
transformer. In this case the special auxiliary contacts also
prevent erratic triggering of the distance protection. 9
Additional fuses are not required. A Fuse Failure Monitor (FFM)
is also not required.
The circuit-breakers are snap-mounted on a 35-mm mounting
rail to EN 50022. Push-in lugs are available for screw-type con-
10
nection of the circuit-breakers.
The circuit-breaker for voltage transformers also incorporates
2 auxiliary contacts (normally 1 NO + 1 NC). During the closing
operation, contact making via the NO contact of the control
11
switch takes place later than via the main contacts, whereas
during the opening operation the auxiliary circuits are inter-
rupted at the same time as the main circuits, if not before.
This adjustment has the effect of preventing the opening of
12
the circuit-breaker from producing a tripping command via the
underimpedance starting of the distance protection relay.
The auxiliary voltage for blocking voltage-dependent starting
(underimpedance) must always be routed via the
13
NO contact 11-14.
14
15
Accessories / 3RV16
Functions at 230 V, it is also suitable for modern solid-state distance

protection relays.
1 The voltage transformer circuit-breaker largely corresponds The laterally mountable auxiliary switches of the SIRIUS range
with the circuit- breaker 3RV1, SIRIUS, size S00. Two special can be used for signaling functions. They cannot be used for
characteristics are taken into account for safe prevention of blocking the distance protection relay.
faulty triggering of the distance protection relay.
2 Auxiliary switch for blocking the distance protection
Impedance across the main contacts
There is only minor current ow across the main contacts of the
The main contacts of the circuit-breaker open if the voltage voltage transformer circuit-breaker. To ensure reliable function-
transformer circuit-breaker is tripped or switched off. The ing of the distance protection, main contact resistance must be
3 distance protection would falsely interpret low impedance as a
fault, which results in immediate power cut-out within only a
minimal and nearly constant throughout the service life of the
circuit-breaker.
few milliseconds.
This is realized with suitable contacts and contact materials for
To prevent this fault response, special auxiliary contacts with
4 a time-dependent assignment to the circuit-breakers main
the 3RV16 voltage transformer circuit-breaker.
contacts (see Technical data) must be provided. The distance

protection is blocked with the help of these auxiliary contacts,
Characteristics
and thus prevents faulty triggering.
5 An auxiliary switch for blocking the distance protection relay The specied tripping characteristics of the thermal overload
is available, equipped with 1 changeover contact tted perma- pickup (a) correspond to the mean value of the leakage band-
nently in the voltage transformer circuit-breaker. This changeover width in cold state; at operating temperature these times are
contact can be used as 1 NO (11-14) or 1 NC (11-12) contact. reduced to approx. 25 % of the specied values. The characteris-
6 Due to the high contact stability of these auxiliary contacts at tics below are schematic representations. Precise characteristics
the lowest possible rated operational currents Ie/AC-15 0.5 mA are available from Technical Assistance (E-mail: nst.technical-
assistance@ siemens.com).
9 Fig. 13/2 Timing diagram of auxiliary switches for blocking distance protection
10
11
12
13 Note:
When using the NC contact to connect the voltage
transformer circuit- breaker, the binary input of the
distance protection device (Siemens 7SA xxx)
14 should be set to active without voltage.
This type of connection is used for additional
monitoring of correct wiring.
15 Fig. 13/3 Characteristics Fig. 13/4 Internal Fig. 13/5 Typical connections
connections

Accessories / 3RV16
Technical data
Conductor cross-sections, main circuit, 1 or 2 conductors General technical data

1
Type 3RV1611- Type 3RV1611-
1AG14 1CG14 1DG14 1AG14 1CG14 1DG14
Terminal type
Terminal screw
Screw connection
Prozidriv size 2
Rated current
Permissible ambient temperature
1.4 2.5 3
2
Solid 2 (0.5 to 1.5 mm2); During storage / transport -50 to +80 C
2 (0.75 to 2.5 mm2); During operation -20 to +60 C (up to 70 C possible
(max. 4 mm2); with current reduction)
Finely stranded with end sleeve 2 (0.5 to 1.5 mm2); Rated operational voltage VE 400 V 3
2 (0.75 to 2.5 mm2) Rated frequency 16.7 to 60 Hz
Stranded 2 (0.5 to 1.5 mm2); Rated insulation voltage VI 690 V
2 (0.75 to 2.5 mm2); Short-circuit breaking capacity at
(max. 4 mm2) AC 400 V, short-circuit proof up to 50 kA 4
Auxiliary switch for blocking the distance protection Current setting of the thermal 1.4 A 2.5 A 3A
With dened time-dependent 1 changeover contact, solid-state overload release
assignment for blocking distance compatible (usable as 1 NO or 1 Operating value of the 6 20 % 10.5 20 % 20 20 %
protection
Rated operational current IE/
NC)
AC-14 0.5 A / VE 250 V
instantaneous electromagnetic
overcurrent release
5
rated operational voltage VE AC-14 1 A / VE 125 V Tripping time of the Approx.
DC-13 0.27 A / VE 250 V instantaneous electromagnetic 6 ms at 12 A 6 ms at 20 A 6 ms at 40 A
DC-13 0.44 A / VE 125 V overcurrent release
Short-circuit protection for auxiliary circuit Disconnection life: 6
short-circuit current Ip Max. short-circuit disconnections
Fusible link, gL/gG max. 10 A
0.1 kA 10
Miniature circuit-breaker, max. 6 A
0.1 to 2 kA 3
C characteristic
2 kA to 50 kA 1 7
Internal resistance
in cold state > 0.25 6.5 %
in heated state > 0.30 6.5 %
Shock resistance
acc. to IEC 60068, Part 2-27
15 g
8
Degree of protection IP 20
acc. to IEC 60529
Touch protection Safe against nger touch
acc. to DIN VDE 0106 Part 100
Service life Operating cycles
9
mechanical 10000
electrical 10000
Permissible mounting position any
10

11
with 1 auxiliary contact, 1 changeover

1.4 / 6 A 3RV1611-1AG14 12
2.5 / 10.5 A 3RV1611-1CG14
3 / 20 A 3RV1611-1DG14
Laterally mountable auxiliary switches 1 NO / NC 3RV1901-1A
13
14
15
Accessories / 3RV16
10
11
12
13
14
15
Accessories / 4AM and 7XR
4AM auxiliary current transformers, 7XR95 isolating transformers
SIPV6-110.eps
SIPV6-111.eps
SIPV6-108.eps
SIPV6-109.eps
2
SIPV6-112.eps
3
4AM5, without varistor 4AM5, with varistor 7XR9513 7XR9515 7XR9516
Fig. 13/6 Auxiliary 4AM current and 7XR isolating transformers

4
Overview
Application Comment Climatic requirements Features

5
according to former
DIN 40040
Matching
current
transformer
Multi-tap aux. current transformer to match different current transformer ratios.
4AM51 70-7AA: Standard version, primarily for transformer differetial protection. HKG
Numerous ratios can
be selected using
terminal connections
6
4AM52 72-2AA: Version with double thermal withstand capability, e.g. when (next page)
connecting to wide-range current transformer fN = 45 to 60 Hz
(continuous rating 2 IN). HKG
4AM52 72-3AA: Version with higher saturation factor (mainly for the busbar
differential protection).
7
Greater overcurrent factor because of higher voltages HKG
Input and Input and matching current transformer for phase selective busbar differential fN = 45 to 60 Hz
matching
current
protection (a.o. for 7SS60, 7UT6)
4AM51 20-1DA: For 1 A C.T.s HKG
with varistor
8
transformer 4AM51 20-2DA: For 5 A C.T.s 1) HKG
3-phase Input 3-phase summation current transformer for busbar differential protection fN = 45 to 60 Hz
summation
input C.T.
(a.o. for 7SS60).
with varistor
9
for line differential protection (a.o. for 7SD600) fN = 45 to 60 Hz
4AM49 30-6DA: For 5 A HKG with varistor
4AM49 30-7DA: For 1 A HKG
10
Aux. C.T. for Auxiliary current transformer for C.T. powered trip coils in stations where Unlike transducers, no
C.T. powered no battery supply can be made available. dened rated power or
tripping 4AM50 65-2CB: For 1 A C.T.s HKD class accuracy required.
circuits 4AM50 70-8AB: For 5 A C.T.s
Suitable for tripping coils with IN 0.5 A or 1 A, VN 40 V or 20 V, P 20 VA.
HKD fN = 45 to 60 Hz
11
Isolating Isolating transformer for pilot wire differential protection.
transformer Provides galvanic isolation between pilot wires and relays.
7XR9 513: For differential protection with 1 pair of pilot wires
(a.o. for 7SD600) HKG 20 kV insulation 12
7XR9 515: For differential protection with 1 pair of pilot wires
(a.o. for 7SD600) HKG 5 kV insulation
7XR9 516: For communication converter 7XV5662-0AC00
(a.o. for SIPROTEC 4 device 7SA522, 7SA6, 7SD52, 7SD61) 20 kV insulation 13
Climatic requirements: HKG = 25 C to +125 C relative humidity max. 75 %; annual average < 65 % on 60 days of the year up to 85 %
(uniformly distributed over the year); condensation not permissible
HKD = 25 C to +125 C relative humidity max. 90 %; annual average < 80 % on 30 days of the year up to 100 %
(uniformly distributed over the year); condensation permissible 14
1) If increased thermal withstand is required type 4AM51 20-4DA is recommended.
15
4AM auxiliary current transformers, 7XR isolating transformers
Order No. and technical data
1 Order No. Windings of auxiliary current transformers Weight, approx.

Number of windings A B C D E F G H I K L M Y Z
1 2 7 16 6 6 12
1736
2 4AM49 30-6DB00-0AN2 Max. current, continuously A

Max. voltage V
28
0.23
28
0.46
28
0.69
28
1.38
6.5
(5.6)
0.2
400
1.9 kg
Number of windings A B C D E F G H I K L M Y Z
5 10 15 30 30 30 60
1736
3 4AM49 30-7DB00-0AN2 Max. current, continuously A 4.5
Max. voltage V 1.15
4.5
2.3
4.5
3.5
4.5
7
1.2
(20)
0.2
400
2 kg
Number of windings A B C D E F G H I K L M N O P Q
1 2 7 16 1 2 7 16
(in relation to each other)
4 4AM51 70-7AA00-0AN2 Rated current IN1)
Max. voltage
A
V
5
2
5
4
5
14
1
32
5
2
5
4
5
14
1
32
3.6 kg
4AM52 72-2AA00-0AN2 Rated current IN1) A 10 10 10 2 10 10 10 2 5.4 kg

Max. voltage V 2 4 14 32 2 4 14 32
5 4AM52 72-3AA00-0AN2 Rated current IN1)

Max. voltage
A
V
5
4
5
8
5
28
1
64
5
4
5
8
5
28
1
64
5.4 kg
4MA50 65-2CB00-0AN2 Rated current IN1) A 1 1 1 1 2.9 kg

Number of windings K a La K b Lb Kc L c Kd L d Primary windings
110 110 110 110
6 88 88
Number of windings ka la kb lb Secondary windings
Rated current IN1) A 1.25 1.25
7 4MA50 70-8AB00-0AN2 Rated current IN1)

Number of windings
A 5
K a La K b L b
5 5
K c Lc K d L d
5
Primary windings
2.9 kg
22 22 22 22
8 Number of windings
Rated current IN1) A
ka
1.25
88
la kb
1.25
88
lb Secondary windings
Number of windings A B C D E F G H I Y Z
1 2 4 8 16 32
9
500
4AM51 20-1DA00-0AN2 Max. current, continuously A 6.8 6.8 6.8 0.85 3.6 kg
Max. voltage V 0.4 0.8 1.6 3.2 6.4 12.5 200
4AM51 20-2DA00-0AN2 Max. current, continuously A 26 26 not tted 0.85 3.6 kg
Max. voltage V 0.4 0.8 1.6 3.2 200
10 Number of windings A B C D E F G H I K L M N O Y Z
3 6 9 18 24 36 90
500
4AM51 20-3DA00-0AN2 Max. current, continuously A 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 0.85 3.6 kg
11 Max. voltage
Number of windings
V 1.2 2.4 3.6 7.2 9.6 14.4 36 200
A B C D E F G H I K L M N O Y Z
1 2 3 4 6 8 12
500
12 4AM51 20-4DA00-0AN2 Max. current, continuously A

Max. voltage V
17.5
0.4
17.5
0.8
17.5
1.2
17.5
1.6
17.5
2.4
17.5
3.2
8
4.8
0.85
200
3.6 kg
7XR9 513 Isolating transformer for K1 M1 K1 Isolating transformer 1:1, max. 550 V 5 kg
differential protection with 0.4 A continously, 3 A 10 s, 10 A 1 s
1 pair of pilotwires test voltage 20 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min
13 7XR9 515 Isolating transformer for
K2 M2 L2
T1 TO PILOT T2 Isolating transformer 1:1, max. 450 V 2 kg

1150
differential protection with test voltage 5 kV, 50Hz, 1 min
1 pair of pilotwires 575 575
T3 E T4
14 7XR9 516 Isolating transformer for
a
P
m b
Isolating transformer 1:1, 1.4 kg
communication converter max. test voltage 20 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min
a m b
S
15 1) Thermal withstand with simultaneous loading of all the windings: 1.2 x IN/continuously; 10 x IN/10 s; 25 IN/1 s.

4AM auxiliary current transformers, 7XR isolating transformers
Order No. and technical data
1
A B C D E F Z Ka La Kb Lb ka la A B C D E F
SIPV6.028.eps
SIPV6.025.eps
SIPV6.029.eps
G H J K L M Y Kc Lc Kd Ld kb lb G H J Y Z
2
4AM49 30-6DB 4AM50 65-2CB 4AM51 20-1DA
4AM49 30-7DB 4AM50 70-8AB 3
A B C D E F GH A B C D E F GH
4
SIPV6.026.eps
SIPV6.024.eps
SIPV6.027.eps
A B C D E F Y Z
J K L MNO Y Z J K L MNO P Q
4AM51 20-2DA 4AM51 20-3DA 4AM51 70-7AA

5
4AM51 20-4DA 4AM52 72-2AA
4AM52 72-3AA
Fig. 13/7 Connection of windings

6
10
11
12
13
14
15
10
11
12
13
14
15
Accessories / 7PA
7PA22/23 auxiliary relays for various applications
Technical data for 7PA22 and 7PA23
Switching contacts 1
LSP2427_afp.tif
Continuous current 10 A
Overload capability 80 A / 200 ms
150 A / 10 ms
Switching current / voltage
Breaking capacity for 105 operating cycles
40 A / 0.5 s / DC 110 V
2
Non-inductive Inductive, 20 ms
1 contact 2 contacts in series 1 contact 2 contacts in series
[DC V] [A] [A] [A] [A] 3
LSP2415_afp.tif
24 6.6 12.7 3.2 6.0
60 2.6 4.9 1.4 2.7
125 1.2 2.2 0.6 1.1
220 0.6 1.1 0.3 0.6 4
Vmax, open contact DC 250 V / AC 400 V
Mechanical service life
Operating temperature
107 operating cycles
- 10 C to + 55 C
5
14 F to 131 F
Fig. 13/8 7PA2 auxiliary relays
Max. permissible humidity 93 % at 40 C /104 F
Description
Seismic stress class according to IEEE 501
Degree of ZPA 3 g acceleration at 33 Hz 6
Due to their quality, reliability and design, these relays are
optimal for applications requiring high reliability and availability
such as power stations, substations, railway and industrial
7
plants. Typical examples include petrochemical industry,
chemical industry, cement industry, rolling mills etc.
The relays comply with the IEC, EN, IEEE standards (type and
routine test) and bear the CE mark.
8
The robust switch contacts are characterized by high make/break
capacity, overload capability and continuous current intensity
capacity; thus perfect insulation is obtained. Direct control of 9
high-voltage and medium-voltage switchgear is possible.
Their high degree of protection and the transparent cover Standards
ensure reliable operation in tropical and/or salty sea air ambient
conditions. Electrical tests performed according to IEC 60255
10
Dielectric test 2 kV/50 Hz/ 1 min
Surge withstand test 5 kV/1.2/50 s
Insulation > 2000 M / 500 Vpeak-to-peak
Flammability tests according to IEC 60692-2-1 11
Plastic materials UL 94: VO, IEC 60695: 850 C / 30 s
1562 F / 30 s
Degree of protection Relay: IP 40
acc. to IEC 60529 With socket cover: IP 50 12
Climatic stress test according to
IEC 60255-7 Non-dissipating unit
dry heat +70 C / 96 h 158 F / 96 h
Dissipating unit
+55 C / 96 h 131 F / 96 h
13
IEC 60068-2-30 +55 C / 12 h
cyclic humid heat 131 F / 12 h
IEC 60068-2-1
cold
100 cycles
Non-dissipating unit
14
-10 C / 2 h 14 F / 2 h
IEC 60255-7 At rated voltage VN
thermal aging test +55 C / 1440 h
131 F / 1440 h 15
Accessories / 7PA
7PA22 fast-acting lockout relay
Description
1 The bistable 7PA22 is a fast-acting lockout relay with eight

changeover contacts and is plugged into a mounting frame
equipped with a plug-in socket (type 7XP9010) with screw-type
terminals at the rear.
2
Functions
3 No continuous power consumption. Position indication on the

front side. Mechanical reset pushbutton.
Position memory with two positions (e.g. for yes / no,
open / close, auto / manual, local / remote etc.).
4
Technical data Selection and ordering data

6 While the auxiliary voltage is being supplied to the SET coil, the Description Order No.
reset pushbutton must not remain pushed longer than 20 s.
7PA22 fast-acting lockout relay 7PA22 1-
Rated voltages and consumption
7 VN Voltage range Consumption while switching
Auxiliary voltage
DC 24 V 1
[DC V] [DC V] DC 60 V 2
24 19 26 DC 110 V 3
8 30 24 33 DC 220 V
DC 125 V
4
5
60 48 66
48 W DC 30 V 6
110 88 121
9 125 100 137

Socket
without socket 0
220 176 242
with ush-mounting socket 7XP9010-1 1
Pick-up time < 10 ms
10 General description see page 13/11.

Refer to part 14 for dimension drawings. Description Order No.
Accessories
11 Socket as spare part

Flush mounting 7XP9010-1
Surface mounting 7XP9012-0
12
13
14
15
Accessories / 7PA
7PA23 fast-acting lockout relay
Description
The bistable 7PA23 is a fast-acting lockout relay with four 1

changeover contacts and is plugged into a mounting frame
equipped with a plug-in socket (type 7XP9011) with screw-type
terminals at the rear.
2
Functions
No continuous power consumption. Position indication on the

front side. Mechanical reset pushbutton.
3
Position memory with two positions (e.g. for yes / no,
open / close, auto / manual, local / remote etc.).

4
Contacts represented in position RESET
Technical data Selection and ordering data

5
While the auxiliary voltage is being supplied to the SET coil, the Description Order No.
reset pushbutton must not remain pushed longer than 20 s.
Rated voltages and consumption

7PA23 fast-acting lockout relay 7PA23 1- 6
Auxiliary voltage
VN Voltage range Consumption while switching DC 24 V 1
[DC V] [DC V]
24 19 26
DC 60 V
DC 110 V
2
3
7
30 24 33 DC 220 V 4
DC 125 V 5
60 48 66
110 88 121
24 W DC 30 V 6
8
Socket
125 100 137
without socket 0
220 176 242
with ush-mounting socket 7XP9011-1
Pick-up time < 8 ms
1
9
General description see page 13/11.
Refer to part 14 for dimension drawings. Description Order No.
Accessories 10
Socket as spare part
11
12
13
14
15
Accessories / 7PA
10
11
12
13
14
15
Accessories / 7PA
7PA26/27/30 auxiliary relays for various applications / trip circuit supervision
Technical data for 7PA26 and 7PA27
Switching contacts 1
Continuous current 10 A
Overload capability 80 A / 200 ms
150 A / 10 ms
Switching current / voltage 40 A / 0.5 s / DC 110 V
Breaking capacity for 105 operating cycles
2
7PA_26_27_30.tif
Non-inductive Inductive, 20 ms
1 contact 2 contacts in series 1 contact 2 contacts in series
[DC V] [A] [A] [A] [A] 3
24 6.6 12.7 3.2 6.0
60 2.6 4.9 1.4 2.7
125 1.2 2.2 0.6 1.1
220 0.6 1.1 0.3 0.6 4
Vmax, open contact DC 250 V / AC400 V
Fig. 13/11 7PA2 auxiliary relays
Mechanical service life
107 operating cycles
- 10 C to + 55 C
5
Description 14 F to 131 F
Max. permissible humidity 93 % at 40 C /104 F
Due to their quality, reliability and design, these relays are
optimal for applications requiring high reliability and availability 6
such as power stations, substations, railway and industrial
plants. Typical examples include petrochemical industry, chemi-
cal industry, cement industry, rolling mills etc.
The relays comply with the IEC, EN, IEEE standards (type and
7
routine test) and bear the CE mark.
The robust switch contacts are characterized by high make/break
capacity, overload capability and continuous current intensity
capacity; thus perfect insulation is obtained. Direct control of
8
high-voltage and medium-voltage switchgear is possible.
Technical data for 7PA30

9
Contacts
Permanent current
Instantaneous current
8A
15 A 10
Making capacity 15 A/4 s / DC 110 V
Breaking capacity 0.3 A / DC 110 V
Umax opened contact
Mechanical life
DC 250 V / AC 400 V
107 operations
11
Operating temperature -10 C +55 C
Storage temperature -30 C +70 C
Operating humidity 93 % / 40 C
12
13
14
15
Accessories / 7PA
7PA26/27/30 auxiliary relays
Standards
1 Electrical tests performed according to IEC 60255

Dielectric test 2 kV / 50 Hz /1 min
Surge withstand test 5 kV / 1.2/50 s
Insulation > 100 M / DC 500 V
2 Flammability tests UL 94: VO
Plastic materials
Degree of protection Relay: IP 40
acc. to IEC 60529
3 Climatic stress test according to IEC 60068-2
Dry cold, operation - 10 C
Dry heat, operation + 55 C
4 Storage and transport

Immunity test EMC
- 25 C + 70 C
EN 60255-22-1 High frequency 1 MHz burst disturbance test:

Test level: 1 MHz, 400 imp/s, 2 s
Common mode: 2.5 kV
5 Differential mode: 1 kV
EN 61000-4-4 Electrical Fast transient burst:
Test level 4 kV, 2.5 kHz,
1min 2 kV, 5 kHz, 1 min
6 EN 61000-4-5 Surge 8/20 s (current)

1.2/50 s (voltage)
Common mode: 2 kV
Differential mode: 1 kV
EN 61000-4-3 Radiated electromagnetic eld:
7 Test level: 80-1000 MHz,
10 V/m, 80 % AM (1 kHz)
EN 61000-4-3 Digital telephones radiated electromagnetic
eld:
Test level: 900 5MHz, 10 V/m, 50% (200 Hz)
8 1.89 GHz 10 MHz, 10 V/m, 50 % (200 Hz)
EN 61000-4-6 Conducted disturbances induced by radio
frequency elds.
Test level: 0.15-80 MHz, 10 V, 80 % AM(1kHz)
9 EN 61000-4-2 Electrostatic discharges:

Test level: Contact 15 kV;
Air mode 15 kV
EN 61000-4-8 Power frequency magnetic eld:
Test level:
10 100 A/m
1min 1000 A/m 1 s
EN 55011 Emission test: Test level: Cover:
Class A 30-230 MHz, 40 dB (V/m)
(quasi peak) -10 m
11 230-1000 MHz, 47 dB (V/m)
(quasi peak) -10 m
Power supply:
0.15-0.5 MHz, 79 dB(V)
12 (quasi peak) / 66 dB average value

0.5-5 MHz, 73 dB(V)
(quasi peak) / 60 dB average value
5-30 MHz, 73 dB(V)
(quasi peak) / 60 dB average value
13
14
15
Accessories / 7PA
7PA26 monostable fast-acting relay
Description Technical data
The monostable 7PA26 has eight changeover contacts. Rated voltages and consumption 1
VN Voltage range Consumption
[DC V] [DC V] [mA]
7PA2620
24/30 20 33 278
2
60 48 66 100
110/125
220
88 138
176 242
55
28
3
Consumption
7PA2621 Normal Peak
24/30 19 36 50 0.8 A / 20 ms 4
60 42 72 20
110/125 77 150 14 0.3 A / 20 ms
220 154 264 7
5
Pick-up time 7PA2620 < 20 ms
7PA2621 < 10 ms
Drop-out time: < 40 ms
6
Fig. 13/12 Connection diagram Refer to part 14 for dimension drawings.
7

8
7PA26 monostable relay with 8 changeover contacts 7PA26 2- AA00-
Auxiliary voltage
DC 24 /30 V 1 9
DC 60 V 2
DC 110 /125 V 3
DC 220 V
Standard, 20 ms
4
0
10
Fast, 10 ms 1
Socket
without socket 0
11
with surface-mounting socket 7XP9012-0 2
Accessories 12
13
14
15
Accessories / 7PA
7PA27 monostable fast-acting relay
Description Technical data
1 The monostable 7PA27 is a fast-acting relay with four change- Rated voltages and consumption
over contacts.
VN Voltage range Consumption
Normal Peak
2 [DC V]
20/30
[DC V]
19 36
[mA]
28 1 A / 20 ms
60 42 72 12 1 A / 20 ms
110/125 77 150 8 0.3 A / 20 ms
3 220 154 264 7 0.3 A / 20 ms
Pick-up time < 8 ms

Drop-out time: < 40 ms
4
Refer to part 14 for dimension drawings.

6
7PA27monostable fast-acting relay 7PA27 2 - 0AA00-
7 Auxiliary voltage
DC 24 /30 V 1
DC 60 V 2
DC 110 /125 V
8 DC 220 V
3
4
Socket
without socket 0
9 with ush-mounting socket 7XP9011-2
with surface-mounting socket 7XP9013-0
1
2
Accessories

11
12
13
14
15
Accessories / 7PA
7PA30 three-phase trip circuit supervision
Description
The relay is for supervision of the trip circuit of a circuit breaker 1

with three selective trip coils. The trip circuit wiring is supervised
from the positive supply to the negative supply whilst the circuit
breaker is open or closed.
Functions
2
The design, quality and rugged construction of the relay make
it suitable for applications requiring high levels of reliability/
dependability. The high degree of protection guarantees reliable 3
operation over a wide temperature range, even under extreme
environmental conditions.
The relay has been tested in accordance with IEC, EN and IEEE
standards. The relay is CE marked. The supervision current is
4
always less than 1.4 mA thus avoiding unwanted operation of
the trip coil. Correct operation is shown via a green LED.
6
Fig. 13/14 Connection diagram for 3-phase relay
7
Technical data
Standard voltages and consumption

VN Voltage range Consumption Impedance per phase Pickup Drop out voltage 8
DC V DC V mA k/s DC V
24/30 18 33 35 20 between 12 and 18
60 42 66 20 44 36 and 42
110/125 77 138 20 94 66 and 77 9
220 154 275 15 200 132 and 154
Drop-out time: between 150 ms and 400 ms
10

7PA30 trip circuit supervision (three-phase) 7PA30 2 - 3AA00- 11
Auxiliary voltage
DC 24 /30 V 1
DC 60 V
DC 110 /125 V
2 12
3
DC 220 V 4
Socket
without socket 0
13
Accessories 14
15
Accessories / 7PA
7PA30 single-phase trip circuit supervision
Description
1 The relay is for supervision of the trip circuit of a circuit breaker

with one trip coil. The trip circuit wiring is supervised from the
positive supply to the negative supply whilst the circuit breaker
is open or closed.
2 Functions
The design, quality and rugged construction of the relay make

3 it suitable for applications requiring high levels of reliability/
dependability. The high degree of protection guarantees reliable
operation over a wide temperature range, even under extreme
environmental conditions.
4 The relay has been tested in accordance with IEC, EN and IEEE
standards. The relay is CE marked. The supervision current is
always less than 1.4 mA thus avoiding unwanted operation of
the trip coil. Correct operation is shown via a green LED.
5
Fig. 13/15 Connection diagram for 1-phase relay
6
Technical data
7 Rated voltages and consumption

VN Voltage range Consumption Impedance per phase Pickup Drop out voltage
DC V DC V mA k/s DC V
8 14/30
60
18 33
42 66
32
18
20
44
between 12 and 18
36 and 42
110/125 77 138 18 94 66 and 77
220 154 275 13 200 132 and 154
9 Drop-out time: between 150 ms and 400 ms
10 Selection and ordering data

7PA30 trip circuit supervision (single-phase) 7PA30 2 - 1AA00-
11 Auxiliary voltage
DC 24 /30 V 1
DC 60 V 2
12 DC 110 /125 V
DC 220 V
3
4
Socket
without socket
13 with ush-mounting socket 7XP9011-0
0
1
Accessories
15
Accessories / 7TS16
7TS16 annunciation relay
Function overview
Indications: Four LEDs, latching type, signaling until reset. 1

Inputs: Four alarm/trip inputs
Input for remote reset
Push button for local reset
Outputs: For each alarm/trip input: 2
One diode 2.5 A
One potential free changeover contact
One potential free NO contact
One common tripping output through diode 3
SIPV6-107.eps (2.5 A; Vmax DC 220 V)
Contacts:
Permanent current 8 A
Instantaneous current 15 A 4
Making capacity 15 A /4 s / DC 110 V
Breaking capacity 0.3 A / DC 110 V
Fig. 13/16 7TS16 annunciation relay
5
Description
The 7TS16 relay features auxiliary trip indication for local and
remote signaling. It has four independent output contacts and
6
LED indication. The relay complies with the IEC and EN standards
and bears the CE mark.
The 7TS16 is a reliable and versatile high-speed relay with four
signal inputs. It has four local LEDs and auto-resetting output 7
contacts, used in SCADA controls. Additionally, it features two
diode tripping circuits.
Reset is possible via remote input and via local reset push
button.
The reset should not be permanently switched on.
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
Accessories / 7TS16
7TS16 annunciation relay
Technical data Connection diagram
1 Rated voltages (VN) 24/30, 110/125, DC 220 V

Voltage range +10 % 30 % VN
Operating temperature -10 to +55 C
2 Operating humidity
Pickup time
93 %/40 C
< 5 ms
Consumption
For one trip
VN
3 DC 24/30 V
DC 110/125 V
1 A/3 ms
3 A/3 ms
DC 220 V 4 A/3 ms
For a permanent trip
VN mA
4 DC 24/30 V
DC 110/125 V
21
8
DC 220 V 6.5
For a latched LED
VN mA
5 DC 24/30 V
DC 110/125 V
1
3
DC 220 V 5
6 Standards
Electrical tests performed acc. to IEC 60255-5
7 - Dielectric test
- Surge withstand test
2 kV / 50 Hz / 1min
5 kV / 1.2 / 50 s
High-frequency test acc. to IEC 60255-22-1
- Common mode 2.5 kV / 1 MHz
8 - Differential mode
Inammability tests
1 kV / 1 MHz
UL94: VO
2 Direct common trip output
3, 4, 5, 6 Direct trip output
Plastic materials 1(-), 7(+) Auxiliary supply
Degree of protection Relay: IP40 D External relay contact
acc. to IEC 60529
9 Climatic stress test acc. to IEC 60068-2 Fig. 13/17 Connection diagram
Dry cold, operation - 10 C Contacts represented without auxiliary supply in the relay
Dry heat, operation + 55 C
10 Storage and transport - 30 C + 70 C
11 Description Order No.

7TS16 annunciation relay with 4 LEDs 7TS16 2 - 0AA00-
Auxiliary voltage
12 DC 24 /30 V 1
DC 110 /125 V 3
DC 220 V 4
13 Socket
without socket 0
With ush-mounting socket 7XP9010-2 1
With surface-mounting socket 7XP9012-0 2
14 Accessories

15 Surface mounting 7XP9012-0

Accessories / 7XV5673
SICAM I/O-Unit with 6 binary in-/outputs
Function overview
Binary inputs
6 ruggedized EMC hardened binary inputs
1
Pickup voltage threshold settable to DC 19 V, DC 88 V
or DC 176 V for different station battery voltages
Binary outputs
6 command relay outputs
2
SIPV6_104.tif
Safe state of contacts after loss of connection settable by
the user
Signal/Alarm outputs
4 LED
3
Wide-range power supply
24 DC 250 V 20 % and AC 100 230 V 45 65 Hz
Fig. 13/18 7XV5673 SICAM I/O-Unit binary I/O mirror, -binary I/O
Electrical RJ45 Ethernet interface 4
Cascading many devices without additional costs by the use
expansion, -contact multiplier
of the integrated switch
Serial ber-optic interface (optional)
ST-connector, 820 nm for multi-mode ber 62.5 /125 m,
typical range 2000 m using ber 62.5 m /125 m,
5
Description
baud rate 1.2 kBit/s 187.5 kBit/s settable per software
SICAM I/O-Unit 7XV5673 is a binary input/output device and is Serial RS485-interface (optional)
designed for substations and increased industrial environment
requirements. The SICAM I/O-Unit allows the transmission of
Sub-D plug, 9-pole female 6
Protocols, communication
binary inputs to binary outputs locally or via long distances. It MODBUS TCP or MODBUS RTU for connection to a substation
can be used for protection applications, e.g. overcurrent protec- controller
tion, signal comparison, teleprotection or as I/O-expansion in
substation automation systems.
MODBUS UDP for point-to-point connections between two
SICAM I/O-Units
7
SNTP for time synchronization
IEC 61850 (GOOSE, MMS, Reporting)
Function Housing
IP20 rail mounting
8
Via binary inputs, all kinds of binary signals of switchgear/ protec-
Standards
tion scheme (for example tripping commands, switch position
CE, UL, IEC 60255, IEEE 61000 ...
signal, fault and status indications) are securely detected. This
information can directly be distributed at this SICAM I/O-Unit via Environmental conditions 9
contacts, or be transmitted via communication links to further EMC hardened binary I/O for substation environment
SICAM I/O-Units or to automation systems. Extended high temperature range up to 85 C (16 h/day).
Secured telegrams are used for the communication via Ethernet

or serial connections. The parameter setting of the SICAM I/O-
10
Unit is simply carried out with a standard Web browser at the PC
which is connected by the Ethernet interface.
The SICAM I/O-Unit can be set as: 11
I/O mirror: Point-to-point transfer of binary signals between
two SICAM I/O-Units via Ethernet or a serial connection. Signal
inputs and outputs assignable by the user.
I/O expansion:
Expansion of substation controllers by binary inputs and
12
outputs using standard protocols.
Detection and output of binary states by substation
controllers via standard protocols Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP
or IEC 61850.
13
Extension for protection devices of the compact class 7SJ80
and 7SK80 via connection on their low-cost Ethernet inter
face (LEM).
Contact multiplier: Distribution of signals on one or several
14
binary inputs via relay contacts of the same SICAM I/O-Unit,
e.g. for isolation between different voltage levels.
15
Operation features, application
4 Fig. 13/19 I/O mirror, bi-directional transmission between two devices
Operation features Application

5 Easy parameterization with a standard Internet browser (no
I/O mirror function
special software required)
Password protection against unauthorized access When using the SICAM I/O-Units as I/O mirror according to Fig.
6 Monitoring of data errors, loss of connection, transfer time
and the state of BI, BO.
13/19, the devices transmits the binary signals bi-directional.
The transmission takes place between the two devices over serial
links (option) or over Ethernet networks.
Time synchronization with SNTP-Protocol with 1 ms resolution
from an external time server over Ethernet. Redundant time Via the relay output contacts voltages up to AC/DC 250 V and
7 servers are supported currents up to AC/DC 5 A can be switched. The pick threshold of
the binary inputs can be set by the user on different levels.
Buffer battery changeable from the front
Fast I/O mirror: Fast transmission time from BI pickup to Signal inputs and outputs can be assigned by the user.
contact closing between two SICAM I/O-Units typically 11 ms
8 for high bandwidth connection
Extension of the transmission distance
Connection to a substation controller over MODBUS TCP, An extension of the transmission distance is possible.
MODBUS RTU or IEC 61850 (GOOSE, MMS, Reporting) protocol The following devices can be used:
With serial optical repeater 7XV5461 scalable up to 170 km
9 Blocking of data transmission with a binary input for testing
Battery buffered operational event log with 1 ms resolution RS485-FO Converter 7XV5650 for cascading devices
time stamp With different communication converters.
Assignment of BI / BO signals which shall be logged into the
10 operational buffer
Integration into network management systems with SNMP
protocol and provided MIB les.
11
12
13
14
15
Application
Uni-directional binary signal

transmission
When using the SICAM I/O-Units for 1
uni-directional binary signal transmission
according to Fig. 13/20, the devices
transfer binary signals unidirectional
from one device to several devices. In this
application, the transmission only takes
2
place in one direction. Input signals
(max. 6) from the left unit are sending to
output contacts of one or more units on
the right side.
3
Fig. 13/20 I/O mirror, uni-directional transmission from one to multiple SICAM I/O-Units
6
I/O expansion of a substation
The SICAM I/O-Unit is used as I/O
expansion, according to Fig. 13/21. 7
Binary signals are exchanged between a
substation controller (e.g. SICAM PAS) and
the SICAM I/O-Units by using the MODBUS
TCP protocol over an Ethernet network.
If the integrated switch in the SICAM
8
I/O-Unit is used, the units can be operated
in a line without using additional external
switches as shown in Fig. 13/24. Also IEC
61850 client server communication will
9
be provided in future.
Ethernet *)
10
11
12
Ethernet *)
13
*) cascading with Ethernet
Y-adapter cable
7KE60008GD000BA2
14
Fig. 13/21 I/O expansion of a substation with binary inputs and outputs
15
Application
Uni-directional binary signal

transmission
1 Instead of using an Ethernet network
there is also the option of serial connec-
tion with MODBUS RTU protocol. The link
can be done by a RS485-bus line structure
2 or an optical star network.
8 Fig. 13/22 I/O expansion for the connection to substation controller

using a serial optical star topology
10
11
12
13
14
15
Application
Contact multiplier
Input signals on one or more binary inputs
can be assigned to binary outputs of the 1
local device (Fig. 13/23)
1 binary signal on up to 6 relay outputs
Several binary signals to several relay
outputs assignable by the user
2
Different voltage levels for inputs and
outputs in a wide voltage range to
isolate between different voltage levels.
3
Fig. 13/23 Contact multiplier 4

Applications for remote transmission of
binary signals
Binary signal transmission via

5
communication networks using a
G.703.1/X.21 interface
The picture shows the optical connection 6
of an SICAM I/O-Unit to a communication
converter (KU-XG) 7XV5662-0AA01,
which establishes a connection to a mul-
tiplexer with G.703.1 or X.21 interface.
This allows the use of this communication
7
converter to transfer the signals via com-
munication network. The average delay
time in the network and the signal quality
is monitored by the SICAM I/O-Unit. Also 8
loss of connection is indicated. In this Fig. 13/24 Binary signal exchange over a communication converter with G.703.1/X.21 interface
case, the state of the binary outputs can via a communication network
be set by the user to a safe condition
depending on the application. 9
A maximum of 6 binary single signals
can be transmitted bi-directional via the
communication network.
10
11
12
13
14
15
Application
Binary signal transmission via two-wire

copper cable with blocking I/O mirror I/O mirror
1 The picture shows the optical connection

7XV5673
BI1
5 kV isolation voltage
20 kV with
isolation transformer
BO6
of an SICAM I/O-Unit to a communication in converter 7XR9516 BO1

converter 7XV5662-0AC01, which estab- KU-KU KU-KU
FO 820 nm
FO 820 nm
BI6 FO FO
lishes a connection via pilot wire. Only E E
2 one pair is necessary for bi-directional max. O O max. BI6
SIPV6.019en.eps
38.4 Pilot wire (2-wire) up to 8 km 38.4
signal exchange. BO1 depending on the consistence
kbit/s kbit/s BI1
of the pilot wire 2 KU-KU distances
An additional isolation transformer allows BO6
can be cascaded 7XV5673
20 kV isolation from the pilot wire con-
3 nection.
FO: 2 multi-mode FO 62.5 m/125 m
with ST plug, max. 1.5 km
A maximum of 6 binary single signals can KU-KU: Communication converter - copper 7XV5662-0AC01
be transmitted bi-directionally over the
4 pilot wire. The additional delay caused
by the transfer over the communication
Fig. 13/25 Binary signal exchange of 6 signals via pilot wire connection
converter and pilot wire is less than 1 ms.

A typical application is the signal compari-
5 son of a directional overcurrent protection
device via pilot wires. In this case, the
denite overcurrent protection device
is connected to the SICAM I/O-Unit via
6 contacts and binary inputs and directional

signals are transferred.
Binary signal exchange of over long

7 ber optic links
The gure shows the optical connection
I/O mirror 1
Client
I/O mirror 1
Server
7XV5673
BO6
of an SICAM I/O-Unit to a serial optical BI1
repeater 7XV5461-0BX00, which Optical repeater Optical repeater BO1
8 establishes a connection to multi-mode or with multiplexer with multiplexer
FO 820 nm
FO 820 nm
BI6 ST ST
single-mode ber cables. A max. distance O FO communication route: O
FO FO BI6
of 170 km can be reached with this O
Single-mode FO 9 m/125 m (2 FO)
O
application without additional ampliers. BO1 LC plug: 24 km/60 km/100 km/170 km

BI1
9 A maximum of 12 binary signals can

be exchanged via long ber optical
BO6 Single-mode FO 9 m/125 m (1 FO)
LC plug: 40 km 7XV5673
I/O mirror 2 Multi-mode FO 50 m to 62.5 m/125 m (2 FO) I/O mirror 2

connections because the repeater allows Client LC plug: 4 km/8 km Server
connecting two SICAM I/O-Units. 7XV5673
10 BI1
BO6
BO1
optional second optional second
FO 820 nm
FO 820 nm
BI6 ST connection connection ST

BI6
11
SIPV6.020en.eps
BO1
BI1
BO6 FO: 2 multi-mode FO 62.5 m/125 m
with ST plug, max. 1.5 km 7XV5673
12 Fig. 13/26 Binary signal exchange of up to 12 signals over long ber optic links
13
14
15
Application, device conguration
Binary signal transmission via a com-

munication networks using a G.703.6 I/O mirror 1 I/O mirror 1
interface
Client
7XV5673
Server
BO6
1
The gure shows the optical connection BI1
BO1
of one up to three SICAM I/O-Units to a
FO 820 nm
communication converter KU-2M KU-2M KU-2M
FO 820 nm
7XV5662-0AD00, which establishes
a connection to a multiplexer with a
BI6 ST
FO
O
E Synchronous leased line in
communication network O
E
ST
FO BI6
2
RS232 G703.6 1.4 Mbit/s/2 Mbit/s (T1/E1) G703.6 RS232
G.703.6 interface (1.44 kbit/s/2 Mbit/s, BO1
BI1
E1/T1). BO6
A maximum of 18 binary single signals I/O mirror 2 I/O mirror 3 I/O mirror 3
7XV5673
I/O mirror 2
3
can be transmitted bi-directionally over Client Client Server Server
the communication network. The KU-2M 7XV5673 7XV5673
7XV5652- BO6 7XV5652- BO6
is provided with two optical and one
4
BI1 0BA00 BI1 0BA00
electrical RS232 interface. Two SICAM O BO1 O BO1
I/O-Units can be directly connected by an
FO 820 nm
FO 820 nm
E E
FO 820 nm
FO 820 nm
BI6 BI6
ST optional optional ST
optical cable to the KU-2M. On the RS232 third third
optional BI6 optional BI6
interface, an additional SICAM I/O-Unit connection connection second
SIPV6.021en.eps
second
can be connected via an optoelectronic
converter. Using all input interfaces (2 FO,
BO1
BO6
connection
BI1
BO1
BO6
connection
BI1 5
7XV5673 7XV5673
1 RS232) of the KU-2M, a maximum of 18
signals can be exchanged bi-directionally. FO: 2 multi-mode FO 62.5 m/125 m with
For long distance connections via

Ether-net media converters or Ethernet
ST plug, max. 1.5 km
KU-2M = 7XV5662-0AD00
Communication converter for:
6
networks can be used. The SICAM I/O-Unit G703.6 (2 Mbit/s synchronous: 115.2 kbit/s asynchronous in I/O mirror)
supports IP address settings and settings
for a standard gateway. The electrical
Ethernet interface of the SICAM I/O-Unit is
Fig. 13/27 Binary signal exchange with G.703.6 interface via a communication network
7
connected to a media converter or switch
which transfer the signals of the units
over long distance Ethernet connections.
The average delay time in the network is 8
measured by the SICAM I/O-Unit.
Device conguration 9
The SICAM I/O-Unit is equipped with an
integrated Web Server which allows easy
setting using standard Internet-Browsers.
Fig. 13/28 shows the User interface. All
10
settings are done with the Browser. Also
operational log and commissioning aid
are supported by the Browser like the
indication of the actual state of the inputs 11
and outputs.
For conguring the IEC 61850-GOOSE
Subscriber-Conguration, the SICAM I/O
Mapping Tool is used. When the substa-
12
tion conguration is ready, the SICAM
I/O Mapping reads the SCD data of the
substation conguration and creates a
13
SIPV6_113.tif
binary IEC 61850 parameter set, which

can be uploaded over HTML.
Fig. 13/28 Conguration screen of the SICAM I/O-Unit in the Browser

14
15
Application example/Selection and ordering data
Binary signal transmission via a optical-

ber or wireless connection
1 The application (gure 13/29) shows the
electric connection of a SICAM I/O-Unit
7XV5673 to Ethernet-based transmission
devices via patch cable, which establish
2 a connection via optical bers on the
remote side or a wireless connection.
The connection could also be realized via
switches with long-distance modules or
3 via IP networks.
5
Fig. 13/29 Binary signal transmission via optical bers or wireless connection; connection via
6 the integrated Ethernet interface to external transmission devices
Technical data/Selection and ordering data
7 Housing
Dimensions 96 96 100 mm (W x H x D)
Protection class IP20
Assembly DIN rail
8 In- and output
Binary input 6 with setting threshold voltage
Relais output 6 (2 make contact, 1change-over contact)
9 Serial interface
without serial communication
RS485 MODBUS RTU, binary signal transmission
optical, 820 nm MODBUS RTU, binary signal transmission
10 Communication interface and communication protocol
Ethernet interface with MODBUS TCP / UDP or binary signal transmission
Ethernet interface with MODBUS TCP / UDP, binary signal transmission or IEC 61850 (GOOSE, MMS, Reporting)
11 Specials
Integrated Ethernet switch
12 Description
SICAM I/O-Unit, integrated electrical Ethernet interface, RJ45 connector
Order No.
7XV5673-0JJ 0- AA1
Serial interface and communication protocol
13 Without serial communication

RS485 MODBUS RTU, binary signal transmission
0
1
Optisch, 820 nm MODBUS RTU, binary signal transmission 2
Communication interface and communication protocol

14 Ethernet interface with MODBUS TCP / UDP or binary signal transmission 0
Ethernet interface with MODBUS TCP / UDP, binary signal transmission 1
or IEC 61850 (GOOSE, MMS, Reporting) 2
15 Accessories
Y cable 77KE6000-8GD00-0BA2

SICAM AI Unit 7XV5674
Description Application
The SICAM AI Unit 7XV5674 is used for the acquisition of analog
signals from automation processes and for the transmission of
The SICAM AI Unit 7XV5674 can support diverse applications. For
acquiring DC eld signals, SICAM AI Unit 7XV5674 can be applied 1
measured values to a connected supervisory system or control in the following application elds:
center over communication protocol. The modules of the device Protection
detect, calculate, analyze and transmit measured values.
SICAM AI Unit offers twelve 20-mA inputs referring to the
SCADA
DMS
2
standard IEC 60688. The 20-mA inputs are divided into 2 groups,
EMS systems
on 2 boards each with 6 channels.
GIS (Gas-Insulated Switchgear) gas pressure monitoring
Device type:
Other industrial processes 3
DIN rail mounted device
For example, 4-mA to 20-mA signals coming from transducers
Plastic case 96 mm x 96 mm x 100 mm (W x H x D)
(for example, for monitoring of: power, temperatures, pressure
Protection class IP20 and position) are delivered over standard protocol for further
processing, as visualization or connection
4
to other automation processes. The DC inputs from
SICAM AI Unit 7XV5674 can be parametrized to support
the following ranges:
DC 0 mA to 20 mA
5
DC 4 mA to 20 mA
The measuring accuracy amounts to 0.2 % of the rated value
(20 mA) under reference conditions. The measuring accuracy
amounts to 1.0 % of the rated current (20 mA) under environ-
6
mental impact.
Highlights
Wide application eld (SCADA, protection and automation
7
processes)
Connection to serial or Ethernet interfaces of SIPROTEC 4 or 5
devices
Connection to all protection and eld devices using
8
IEC 61850-GOOSE messages and IEC 61850 reporting
Fig. 13/30 SICAM AI Unit Compact and robust design (-25 C to 70 C operation tempera-
ture) 9
Flexible communication variations (Ethernet, optical ber or
electrical RS485)
Modbus RTU/TCP, SIPROTEC 20 mA Serial or Ethernet
interface to SIPROTEC 5 devices via SUP protocol 10
Accurate process measurement (0.2 % reference conditions)
Time synchronization over NTP
Internal switch allows cost savings
The integrated web server allows you to congure the
11
parameters via HTML pages using a web browser
12
13
14
Fig. 13/31 Application example 15

Description
Measurands Serial interface
1 Only direct currents are measured with SICAM AI Unit. The

measurement cycles on the board 1 and board 2 are carried
The serial interface as electrical RS485 or optical can be
chosen:
out simultaneously. A complete measurement cycle amounts Without serial interface
to 642 ms for 6 channels. The measurement of one channel
With RS485 interface
amounts to 107 ms and is repeated after 642 ms.
2 Limit settings
With optical interface
The serial interface supports the following functions:
With the automation functions menu, you can set up to 16 Transmission of measured data
upper or lower limit violations. Limit violations of the upper or
3 lower value range can be output as indications. Up to 4 limit
Transmission of indications
Time synchronization via Modbus RTU
value violations can be signaled at the device via the two binary
outputs. 4 group indications can be parameterized and up to 16 If the serial interface is selected, you can use either the
logically linked single-point indications can be assigned to each Modbus RTU or the SIPROTEC RTU 20 mA communication
4 of them. protocol.
Communication Time synchronization
To communicate with the substation controller and other periph- During operation, SICAM AI Unit needs the date and time for all
5 eral devices, the SICAM AI Unit device has an Ethernet interface
and optionally a serial interface (RS485 or optical).
time-relevant processes. This ensures that a common time basis
exists when communicating with peripheral devices and enables
SICAM AI Unit is available in various variants: time stamping of the process data.
Communication via Ethernet
6 With integrated Ethernet switch: Modbus TCP protocol
The following types of time synchronization can be executed:
External time synchronization via Ethernet NTP (preferred)
With integrated Ethernet switch: Modbus TCP protocol
External time synchronization via eld bus using the
and IEC 61850 protocol
Modbus RTU communication protocol
7 Via Ethernet, the following functions are supported: Internal time synchronization via RTC Real Time Clock
Connection to SIPRPOTEC 5 devices via SUP (if external time synchronization is not available)
(Slave Unit/Protocol)
Device parameterization
8 Transmission of measured data
Transmission of indications
Time synchronization via NTP
9 Communication protocols Modbus TCP and IEC 61850 (report-
ing and GOOSE)
Integrated Ethernet switch
10 With the Ethernet switch that is integrated in the device, further

network components can be cascaded via a Y cable, and can
therefore also be incorporated in an existing network with IEC
61850 or another Ethernet protocol.
11
12
13
14
15
Description
Indications signaled by LEDs Accessories

SICAM AI Unit automatically monitors the functions of its
hardware, software and rmware components. The LEDs on the
The following components are optionally available:
Device manual E50417-G1140-C492
1
top side of the housing indicate the current device status. (download available at www.siprotec.com)
Parameterization Y cable, order no. 7KE6000-8GD00-0BA2
No special software is needed for parameterization. You can set

Ethernet patch cables (CAT6) RS485 cables for
SIPROTEC devices 6XV1 830-0E
2
the parameters from your computer via HTML pages and a web
browser. Internet Explorer 6 (or higher) is necessary for this RS485 bus connectors for SIPROTEC devices,
purpose. 6ES7972-0BA42-0XA0, 6ES7972-0BB42-0XA0
RS485 cable for SIPROTEC device 6XV1 830-0E 3
Order information for assembled ber-optic cable (FO cable)
can be found in the SIPROTEC download area at www.siemens.
com/siprotec under accessories, 6XV81xx.
Further details on the accessories of the device can be found 4
at: www.siprotec.com.
10
11
12
Fig. 13/32 Application example

13
14
15

SICAM AI Unit 7XV 5 6 7 4 0 K K 0 AA1
1 Device
Twelve 20-mA inputs for SIPROTEC devices
DIN rail mounting unit, IP20
Case 96 mm x 96 mm x 100 mm
2 Power supply: DC 24-240 V, AC 100-230 V
Ethernet interface, connection RJ45
Intergrated Ethernet switch
Web server for parameterization
3 UL certication
Serial interface and communication protocol
Without serial communication 0
RS485, 9-pol. Sub-D plug Serial Modbus RTU and SIPROTEC 20 mA protocol FO 820 nm 3
4 ST connector Serial Modbus RTU and SIPROTEC 20 mA protocol 4
Ethernet interface and communication protocol
Ethernet interface with Modbus TCP/UDP
Ethernet interface with Modbus TCP/UDP and IEC 61850 reporting and GOOSE
5 Cummunication interface and communication protocol
Ethernet interface with Modbus TCP/UDP or binary signal transmission 1
Ethernet interface with Modbus TCP/UDP, binary signal transmission or IEC 61850 (GOOSE, MMS, reporting) 2
10
11
12
13
14
15
Accessories for Communication 6XV8100 F.O. Cable

1
Fiber-optical indoor cable 6XV8100-0DA 1-0A
F. O. link cable W/ 2 bres, Fiber type PMMA S980/1000, PE-Insulation diam. = 2.2mm black, Good
resistance to oil, petrol, acid and leach, Cable for simply systems of loads, For links inside a cubicle,
Cable type L46916-U2-U19, V-2 x 1S980/1000PE
2
Variants
Both side with FSMA-connectors
Length 0,5 m
Length 1,0 m
2
2
A 5
B 0
3
Length 1,5 m 2 B 5
Length 2,0 m 2 C 0
Length 2,5 m 2 C 5 4
Length 3,0 m 2 D 0
Length 3,5 m 2 D 5
Length 4,0 m 2 E 0
5
Both side with ST-connectors
Length 0,5 m 4 A 5
Length 1,0 m
Length 1,5 m
4
4
B 0
B 5 6
Length 2,0 m 4 C 0
Length 2,5 m 4 C 5
Length 3,0 m
Length 3,5 m
4
4
D 0
D 5
7
Length 4,0 m 4 E 0
One side FSMA other ST-connectors

Length 0,5 m 5 A 5
8
Length 1,0 m 5 B 0
Length 1,5 m 5 B 5
Length 2,0 m
Length 2,5 m
5
5
C 0
C 5
9
Length 3,0 m 5 D 0
Length 3,5 m 5 D 5
Length 4,0 m 5 E 0 10
Fiber-optical duplex outdoor cables 1) 6XV8100-0BD - 11
Fibre-optic duplex data line outdoor, 2 Break-out elements, Fiber type glass 62.5/125um, Halogen-free
and ame-retardend, Nonmetallic rodent protection, External dimension =9.2 mm black, Internal
dimension =2.5mm orange, For indoor an outdoor use (base material AT-VHBH 2G62,5/125)
Variants 12
Connector
without 0 1
One side with FSMA connector prefabricated 1 1
Both sides with FSMA connector prefabricated 2 1 13
With ST and LC-connector prefabricated 3 1
Both sides with ST connector prefabricated 4 1
With FSMA and ST connector prefabricated
Both sides with LC-connector prefabricated
5 1
6 1
14
Both sides with FC/PC connector prefabric 7 1
One side FC/PC other with LC con prefabric. 8 1
One side ST other with SC connector prefabric. 1 2
15

Fiber-optical duplex outdoor cables 1)
1 100 meter lengths
6XV8100-0BD -
Length 0 m + 0
Length 100 m + 1
2 Length 200 m +
Length 300 m +
2
3
Length 400 m + 4
Length 500 m +
3 Length 600 m +
5
6
Length 700 m + 7
Length 800 m + 8
Length 900 m +
4 10 meter lengths
92)
Length 0 m + A
Length 10 m + B
5 Length 20 m + C
Length 30 m + D
Length 40 m + E
Length 50 m +
6 Length 60 m +
F
G
Length 70 m + H
Length 80 m + J
Length 90 m +
7 1 meter lengths
K
Length 0 m + A
Length 1 m + B
8 Length 2 m + C
Length 3 m + D
Length 4 m + E
Length 5 m +
9 Length 6 m +
F
G
Length 7 m + H
Length 8 m + J
10 Length 9 m + K
1000 meter lengths

Length 0 m + 0
Length 1000 m + 1
11 Length 2000 m + 2
Length selection:
12 To 490 m is the staggering 10 m
From 500 m is the staggering 50 m
Interlengths on inquiries with the supplier
1) Attention: For order volume up to 204,- EUR a handling fee of 38,50 EUR will be charged.
13 2) Attention: For this conguration please append the short-code N1A to the order-number.
14
15

Fiber-optical duplex indoor cables1)
Fiber-optic duplex data line indoor, 2 Break-out elements, Fiber type glass 62.5/125um, Halogenfree
6XV8100-0BE - 0
1
and ame-retardend, External dimension =2.8x4.5mm orange, Internal dimension =1.7mm orange,
number print. For indoor use (base material I-VHH 2x1xG62.5/125)
Variants
Connector
2
without 0 1
One side with FSMA connector prefabricated 1 1
One side FSMA other SC connector prefabr.
One side FSMA other LC-connector prefabr.
1 2
1 3
3
Both sides with LC-connector prefabricated 1 4
One side FSMA other FC/PC connector prefabr. 1 5
One side ST other SC connector prefabr.
One side ST other LC-connector prefabr.
1 6
1 7
4
One side ST other E2000 connector prefabr. 1 8
Both sides with FSMA connector prefabr.

One side with ST connector prefabricated
2 1
3 1
5
One side FSMA other ST connector prefabr. 5 1
One side FSMA/K other ST connector prefabr.
Both sides with FSMA/K connector prefabr.
6 1
7 1
6
Both sides with FC/PC connector prefabr. 8 1
Both sides with SC connector prefabr. / crossbred

Both sides with E2000 connector prefabr.
2 2
2 3
7
One side FC/PC other LC-connector prefabr. 2 4
One side SC other LC-connector prefabr. 2 5
One side ST other FC/PC connector prefabr.
Both sides with ST con. and bre angle prefabr.
2 6
2 7
8
100 meter lengths
Length 0 m +
Length 100 m +
0
1
9
Length 200 m + 2
Length 300 m + 3
Length 400 m +
Length 500 m +
4
5
10
Length 600 m + 6
Length 700 m + 7
Length 800 m +
Length 900 m +
8
92)
11
10 meter lengths
Length 0 m +
Length 10 m +
A
B
12
Length 20 m + C
Length 30 m + D
Length 40 m +
Length 50 m +
E
F
13
Length 60 m + G
Length 70 m + H
Length 80 m +
Length 90 m +
J
K
14
15
1 Fiber-optical duplex indoor cables1)
1 meter lengths
6XV8100-0BE - 0
Length 0 m + A
Length 1 m + B
2 Length 2 m +
Length 3 m +
C
D
Length 4 m + E
Length 5 m +
3 Length 6 m +
F
G
Length 7 m + H
Length 8 m + J
Length 9 m +
4 K
Length selection:
5 To 49 m is the staggering 1 m
6 2) Attention: For this conguration please append the short-code N1A to the order-number.
10
11
12
13
14
15

Fiber-optical duplex outdoor cables with MTRJ-connectors 1)
Fiber-optic duplex data line outdoor, 2 Break-out elements, Fiber type glass 62.5/125um, Halogen-free
6XV8100-0BF 1- A
1
and ame-retardend, Nonmetallic rodent protection, External dimension =8.3 mm black, Internal
dimension =1.8mm orange, For indoor and outdoor use (base material AT-VHBH 2G62.5/125)
Variants
Connector 2
One side with MTRJ connector, other side with FSMA/K connector prepared 1
One side with MTRJ connector, other side with ST connector prepared 2
Both sides with MTRJ connector prepared 3
3
100 meter lengths
Length 0 m + 0
Length 100 m +
Length 200 m +
1
2
4
Length 300 m + 3
Length 400 m + 4
Length 500 m +
Length 600 m +
5
6
5
Length 700 m + 7
Length 800 m + 8
Length 900 m + 92) 6
10 meter lengths
Length 0 m + A
Length 10 m +
Length 20 m +
B
C
7
Length 30 m + D
Length 40 m + E
Length 50 m +
Length 60 m +
F
G
8
Length 70 m + H
Length 80 m + J
Length 90 m + K 9
1000 meter lengths
Length 0 m + 0
Length 1000 m +
Length 2000 m +
1
2
10
Length selection:
To 490 m is the staggering 10 m
11
2) Attention: For this conguration please append the short-code N1A to the order-number.
12
13
14
15
1 Fiber-optical duplex indoor cables with MTRJ-connectors 1)
Fiber-optic duplex data line indoor, 2 Break-out elements, Fiber type glass 62.5/125um, Halogenfree
6XV8100-0BG 1- 0
and ame-retardend, External dimension =2.8x4.5mm orange, Internal dimension =1.7mm orange,
Number print, for indoor use (base material I-VHH 2x1xG62.5/125)
2 Variants
Connector
One side with MTRJ connector, other side with FSMA/K connector prepared 1
One side with MTRJ connector, other side with ST connector prepared 2
3 Both sides with MTRJ connector prepared physical crossbred

One side with MTRJ connector, other side with SC connector prepared
3
4
One side with MTRJ connector, other side with LC-connector prepared 5
Both sides with MTRJ connector prepared physical uncrossed 6
4 100 meter lengths

Length 0 m + 0
Length 100 m + 1
5 Length 200 m +
Length 300 m +
2
3
Length 400 m + 4
Length 500 m + 5
6 Length 600 m +
Length 700 m +
6
7
Length 800 m + 8
Length 900 m + 92)
7 10 meter lengths
Length 0 m + A
Length 10 m + B
8 Length 20 m +
Length 30 m +
C
D
Length 40 m + E
Length 50 m + F
9 Length 60 m +
Length 70 m +
G
H
Length 80 m + J
Length 90 m + K
10 1 meter lengths
Length 0 m + A
Length 1 m + B
11 Length 2 m +
Length 3 m +
C
D
Length 4 m + E
Length 5 m + F
12 Length 6 m +
Length 7 m +
G
H
Length 8 m + J
Length 9 m + K
13
Length selection:
14 From 50 m is the staggering 10 m
15

Fiber-optical duplex indoor cables1)
Fiber-optic duplex data line indoor, 2 Break-out elements, Fiber type glass E9/125um, Halogenfree and
6XV8100-0CF - 0
1
ame-retardend, External dimension =3.9x6.8mm yellow, Internal dimension =2.8mm red+green,
number print. For indoor use/Diff. protec. (base material I-VHH 2x1xE9/125)
Variants
Connector
2
without 0 1
One side with ST connector prefabricated other side with SC connector prefabricated 1 1
One side ST other side LC-connector prefabr.
One side FC/PC other side SC connector prefabr.
1 2
2 1
3
One side with ST connector prefabricated 3 1
Both sides with LC-connector prefabricated
One side with FC/PC connector prefabricated
5 1
6 1
4
Both sides with FC/PC connector prefabricated 7 1
One side with FC/PC connector prefabricated other side with ST connector prefabricated 8 1
One side with E2000 connector prefabricated 1 3

5
One side E2000 other side ST connector prefabr. 1 4
One side E2000/APC 8 other side ST connector prefabricated 1 5
One side FC/PC other side LC-connector prefabr.
One side SC other side LC-connector prefabr.
1 6
1 7
6
Both sides with SC connector prefabricated 1 8
One side DIN other side LC-connector prefabr.

One side SC/APC 9 other side LC-connector prefabr.
2 2
2 3
7
One side SC/APC 9 other ST connector prefabr. 2 4
One side E2000/APC 8 other ST connector prefabr. 2 5
100 meter lengths 8

Length 0 m + 0
Length 100 m + 1
Length 200 m +
Length 300 m +
2
3
9
Length 400 m + 4
Length 500 m + 5
Length 600 m +
Length 700 m +
6
7
10
Length 800 m + 8
Length 900 m + 92)
10 meter lengths 11
Length 0 m + A
Length 10 m + B
Length 20 m +
Length 30 m +
C
D
12
Length 40 m + E
Length 50 m + F
Length 60 m +
Length 70 m +
G
H
13
Length 80 m + J
Length 90 m + K
14
15
Accessories / 6XV8100/7KE600
1 Fiber-optical duplex indoor cables1)
1 meter lengths
6XV8100-0CF - 0
Length 0 m + A
Length 1 m + B
2 Length 2 m +
Length 3 m +
C
D
Length 4 m + E
Length 5 m + F
3 Length 6 m + G
Length 7 m + H
Length 8 m + J
Length 9 m +
4 K
Length selection:
5 From 50 m is the staggering 10 m
6
7
7KE600 Ethernet Patch Cable

8 Ethernet patch cable with double shield (SFTP) 7KE6000-8GD0 - AA
LAN connector on both sides
SIMEAS R HUB
9 HUB PC
Length 0.5 m 0 0 5
Length 1.0 m 0 1 0
Length 2.0 m 0 2 0
10 Length 3.0 m
Length 5.0 m
0 3
0 5
0
0
Length 10.0 m 1 0 0
Length 15.0 m 1 5 0
11 Length 20.0 m 2 0 0
Ethernet patch cable, cross-over connection with double shield (SFTP) 7KE6000-8GE0 - AA
LAN connector on both sides
12 HUB HUB
SIMEAS R PC
Length 0.5 m 0 0 5
13 Length 1.0 m
Length 2.0 m
0 1
0 2
0
0
Length 3.0 m 0 3 0
Length 5.0 m 0 5 0
14 Length 10.0 m
Length 15.0 m
1 0
1 5
0
0
Length 20.0 m 2 0 0
15
7XV5101 RS232-FO connector module
LSP2886.tif
2
Fig. 13/33 Connector modules/adapters 7XV5101-3C 5

Description
Connector modules 7XV5101

6
Optical connection of protection relays with an electrical (non-
isolated) RS232 interface, e.g. to a star coupler, for centralized
control is made possible with the ber-optic RS232 connector 7
modules.
Thus, further devices such as PCs or notebooks, modems
or serial data switches can be effectively protected against
electromagnetic interference. An appropriate connector module 8
is available for each of the above-mentioned applications. These
ber-optic RS232 connector modules are housed in a SUB-D plug
casing and can be directly plugged into the respective interfaces
of the pertaining devices. No further settings are required. In its
normal position, the optical interface is set to steady light OFF.
9
Data transmission is fully duplex and transparent. The optical
interface with FSMA connectors has an operational wavelength
of 820 nm and can reach distances of up to 1500 m with
62.5/125 m multi-mode FO cables.
10
11
12
13
14
15
Technical data, selection and ordering data
Technical data
1 Housing 7XV5101- 3C
Plastics, metal-plated C
Dimensions 72 32 17 mm C
2 Via external keyboard connector located at the notebook C
Electrical interfaces
Bridge contact 7 8, 1 4 6 9-pin C

3 Optical interfaces
FSMA connector (screw-type) T = transmit, R = receive C

Optical power 27 W (-15.7 dBm)1) C
4 Sensitivity 1 W (-30 dBm)1) C
Optical budget 7 dB (+3 dB backup)1) C
Wavelength 850 nm C
5 Transmission range 1500 m (with 62.5 m multi-mode FO cable)
800 m (with 50 m multi-mode FO cable)
C
1) Valid for 62.5 m FO cable.

6

7XV5101 ber-optic connector module 820 nm RS232 7XV5101-3C
9-pin female connector for notebook
10
11
12
13
14
15
7XV5103 RS485 bus systems up to 115 kbit/s (not suitable for PROFIBUS)
LSP2396-afp.tif
3
LSP2895.tif
4
Fig. 13/34 RS485 bus cable system (left) / 7XV5103 cable and connector modules / adapters (right) 5
Description Function overview
The RS485 bus is a low-cost half-duplex communication bus, For data transfer up to 115 kbit/s
6
which, due to its relatively high interference immunity, is not (e.g. DIGSI, IEC 60870-5-103, DNP 3)
only used for monitoring and control in industrial systems, but is Variable bus structure with shielded cables of various lengths.
now increasingly used for SCADA and protection applications by
utilities in substations. Protocols, such as DIGSI, IEC 60870-5-103,
Metal-plated, shielded connector housings with reduced
mounting depth and strain relief.
7
DNP 3 and MODBUS up to 115 kbit/s, are used between a station
Bus termination with terminating connectors and integrated
master and up to 31 slave devices on shielded twisted-pair (STP)
resistor.
cable. In ideal conditions, the length of the bus may be up to
1000 m. This requires correct conguration of the bus, use of Connection of the SIPROTEC 4 protection devices with redun- 8
suitable cables, and connector connectors, as well as correct ter- dant IEC 60870-5-103 interface via the Y-adapter cable and
mination of the bus. Devices with different termination methods RJ45 connector.
require special adaptors to achieve the highest possible interfer- Connection of the SIPROTEC 4 protection devices with RS485
ence immunity. The RS485 bus systems 7XV5103 are optimized
in this respect for our control and protection product range.
interface and SUB-D connector directly, or via a Y-adapter
cable.
9
With the ordering code 7XV5103, two different RS485 bus Adapter/cable for compact protection devices with RS485
systems are available. interface on screw-type terminals, e.g. 7SJ600, 7SD600,
When combining the required components for a RS485 bus, the

7RW600 etc. 10
Connection to various RS485 converters, e.g. 7XV5650/51.
corresponding application examples contained in this document
can be of assistance. Combination of both bus systems is possible.
The bus system with 9-pin SUB-D connectors has long been
applied in systems with SIPROTEC protection devices, 7XV5 con-
Max. length of the bus within a common grounding system
may be up to 1000 m. 11
verters, and master units. Connection to the individual devices is Please note that this system must not be used for PROFIBUS-FMS
achieved directly with a special Y-cable or with a corresponding or PROFIBUS-DP. These have their own bus system with compo-
adapter cable to devices with different termination methods.
The bus terminates in a 9-pin SUB-D bus terminating connector
nents suitable for use with PROFIBUS.
12
with an integrated 220- resistor.
On some SIPROTEC devices, the serial signals are routed to RJ45
female connectors on the communication module, as is the
case, for example, with the redundant IEC 60870-5-103 module.
13
There the bus is based on double-shielded CAT 5 patch cables.
Connection of the individual devices to the two redundant buses
is achieved via two special Y-adapter cables each. The buses
each terminate with a RJ45 bus terminating connector with a 14
120- resistor.
A combination of the two bus systems and the different device
interfaces or a combination of the two systems is also possible
using the Y-adapter cable 7XV5103-2BA00.
15
Application
Application
1 Notes on conguring the RS485 bus system

The housings of all devices connected to the bus must be solidly
grounded to a common ground to avoid dangerous ground
2 currents owing via the cable shields.
Larger distances, especially into other buildings with separate
grounding system should preferably be covered via converters
(e.g. 7XV5650/51) using FO links.
3
LSP2895.tif
The RS485 bus must be linear, i.e. tee-offs from the bus (e.g. a
terminal strip) to the connected bus devices must not be used.
This would form a star conguration, which has negative inu-
ence on the functionality.
4 The bus must be terminated at the rst device (usually the mas-
ter) and at the last device with a bus terminating resistor to avoid
interference due to reection. No further terminating resistors
5 must be connected between these terminals.

As all of the devices, maximum 32 (including the master) are
Fig. 13/35 Protection unit connected to the RS485 bus
listening in on the RS485 bus, all the devices on the bus must be
set to the same baud rate and the same data format.
6 The slaves must all have different device addresses.
Within the system, only one master may be active at any one
time and only one slave may respond.
7 The bus system with 9-pin SUB-D connectors

The bus system with 9-pin SUB-D bus terminating connectors has
long been used with SIPROTEC protection devices, the converters
8 7XV5 and Siemens master units. Connection of individual devices

to devices with various connection modes is achieved directly
via specialized Y cables, or via suitable adapter cables. The bus
terminates at a 9-pin SUB-D bus terminating connector with an
integrated 220-W resistor.
9 Specications
Direct connection to SIPROTEC 4 protection devices with
RS485 interface via a FO-RS485 converter 7XV5650/51
10 Adapter/cable for compact protection devices with RS485
interface on screw-type terminals, e.g. 7SJ600, 7SD600,
7RW600 etc.
4 cable lengths from 1 to 10 meters
11 Shielded twisted-pair (STP) cable with 9-pin SUB-D connector
connectors
Metal-plated, shielded connector housings with reduced
mounting depth and strain relief
12 Data transfer up to 115 kbit/s (e.g. DIGSI, IEC 60870-5/VDEW)
Maximum length of the bus up to 1000 m within a common
grounding system
13 Bus termination with terminating connectors and integrated
220- resistor
14
15
Application, selection and ordering data
Application example 1:
The 9-pin male connector of the Y bus
cable S1 always comes from the master 1
side and provides the connection to the
slaves via the 1, 3, 5 or 10-m cable and
9-pin male connector S2. At the connector
S2 a 20-cm long cable with a 9-pin female
connection B3 is provided to extend the
2
bus. The compact protection devices,
e.g. 7SJ600 are directly connected via
the adapter cable 7XV5103-2AA00 with
female connector B2 or an RS485 adapter
3
7XV5103-3AA00. After the nal device,
a bus terminating connector
7XV5103-5AA00 is connected to
connector B3 to terminate the bus. 4
Fig. 13/36 SIPROTEC protection devices on the RS485 bus
5

RS485 Y-bus cable shielded twisted pair with 9-pin SUB-D connectors 7XV5103-0AA
7XV5103 RS485 bus with SUB-D connectors
Length 1 m 0 1 7
Length 3 m 0 3
Length 5 m 0 5
Length 10 m 1 0 8
RS485 bus extension cable STP with 9-pin SUB-D connector 7XV5103-1AA
Length 10 m 1 0 9
Length 20 m 2 0
Length 30 m 3 0
Length 40 m 4 0 10
Length 50 m 5 0
RS485 adapter 7XV5103- AA00 11

Adapter cable with STP with ferrule / 9-pin SUB-D connector
for units with screw-type terminals or compact protection units, e.g. 7SJ600, 7SD600 etc. 2
RS485 adapter with 9-pin SUB-D connector formounting

on screw-type terminals on compact protection units, e.g. 7SJ600, 7SD600 etc. 3
12
Bus terminating connector 220-, 9-pin SUB-D connector 5
RS485 cable to thermo-box (RTD) 7XV5103-7AA 13

For connection between the 7XV5662-AD10 thermo-box
and SIPROTEC 4 units (port C or port D with RS485 interface)
Length 5 m
Length 25 m
0 5
14
2 5
Length 50 m 5 0
15
Application
Bus system with RJ45 patch cables
1 The bus system with RJ45 connectors was specially developed

for SIPROTEC devices for communication modules with serial
RJ45 connectors and is built with low cost double-shielded CAT 5
patch cables.
2 Connection of the individual devices to the two redundant buses

is achieved via two special Y-adapter cables each. The buses
each terminate with a RJ45 bus terminating connector with an
integrated 120- resistor.
3 Specications
LSP2396-afp.tif
Low-cost bus structure with shielded patch cables (CAT 5) with
RJ45 connectors
4 Cable lengths from 0.5 to 20 meters (7KE6000-8G)

Connection of SIPROTEC 4 protection devices with redundant
IEC 60870-5-103 interfaces via Y-adapter with RJ45 connector
Connection of SIPROTEC 4 protection devices with RS485
5 interface via Y-cable to SUB-D connector
Adapter/cable for compact protection devices, e.g. 7SJ600,
Fig. 13/37 Bus system with RJ45 patch cable
7SD600, 7RW600 etc.

This would form a star conguration, which has negative inu-
Metal-plated connector housings with strain relief of the cable ence on the functionality.
6 connections
Compact connectors
Only CAT 5 double-shielded patch cables (e.g. 7KE6000) must
be used as the bus cables. The maximum bus length must not
Data transfer up to 115 kbit/s (e.g. DIGSI, IEC 60870-5/VDEW) exceed 800 m.
Maximum extension of the bus of up to 800 m within a
7 common grounding system
The bus must be terminated at the rst device (usually the
master) and at the last device with a bus terminating resistor
Bus termination with terminating connectors and integrated to avoid interference due to reection. No further terminating
120- resistor resistors must be connected between these terminals.
8 Connection to the FO-RS485 converter 7XV5650 or the bus
system with SUB-D connector via Y-adapter
As all of the devices, maximum 32 (including the master) are
listening in on the RS485 bus, all the devices on the bus must be
Notes on conguring the RS485 bus system (application set to the same baud rate and the same data format. The slaves
examples 2 and 3, see page 13/9) must all have different device addresses.
9 The housings of all devices connected to the bus must be solidly Within the system on each bus, only one master may be active at
grounded to a common ground to avoid dangerous ground any one time and only one slave may respond.
currents owing via the cable shields.
10 Larger distances, especially into other buildings with separate

grounding system should preferably be covered via converters
(e.g. 7XV5650/51) using FO cables.
The RS485 bus must be linear, i.e. tee-offs from the bus (e.g.
11 a terminal strip) to the connected bus devices must not be used.
12
13
14
15
Application
Application example 2: Connection of

SIPROTEC 4 to a (redundant) control
system 1
The RS485 bus cable system with patch
LSA4844-aen.eps
cables (CAT 5) was developed as a low-
cost alternative to the previous systems
7XV5103 with SUB-D connectors. The
advantages are the widespread use of
2
patch cables throughout the world and
the compact dimensions of the RJ45
connector. This allows a redundant
IEC 60870-5-103 interface with a single
3
interface module within a SIPROTEC 4
device.
Two different Y-adapters permit imple-
mentation of a RS485 bus with patch
4
cables and connection of devices having
RS485 interfaces and different designs of
interface connector. Both Y-adapters have
two RJ45 female connectors in parallel
5
to facilitate the implementation of the
buses. The approx. 20 cm long connection
cable to the device either has a RJ45 or
SUB-D connector.
Fig. 13/38 Connection of SIPROTEC 4 to a (redundant) control system
6
Devices with SUB-D connector (e.g.
Master RTU, 7XV5650/51, SIPROTEC 4
devices with SUB-D) are connected using
the Y-adapter 7XV5103-2BA00.
7
Devices with RJ45 connector such as
SIPROTEC 4 with redundant
IEC 60870-5-103 interface are connected
with the Y-adapter 7XV5103-2CA00. For
8
the redundant bus system 2 Y-adapters
are required per SIPROTEC 4 device.
After the nal device the bus is termi-
nated with a bus terminating connector
9
7XV5103-5BA00. For the redundant
bus system, a bus terminating resistor is
required for each bus.
10
Application example 3: Central opera-
tion of SIPROTEC 4 units with DIGSI 4
The RS485-bus cable system with patch
cables (CAT 5) was developed as a low-
11
cost alternative to the previous systems
Fig. 13/39 Central operation of SIPROTEC 4 units with DIGSI 4
7XV5103 with SUB-D connectors. The
advantages are the widespread use of
patch cables throughout the world and 12
the compact dimensions of the RJ45 connector. Devices with an RS485 interface on screw- type connectors
require an additional adapter for 9-pin SUB-D to single core,
The Y-adapter 7XV5103-2BA00 allows for the implementation
e.g. 7XV5103-2AA00 or 7XV5103-3AA00.
of a RS485 bus with patch cables and the connection of various
SIPROTEC devices having RS485 interfaces. The Y-adapters have After the last device, the bus is terminated with a bus
13
two RJ45 female connectors in parallel to facilitate the imple- terminating connector 7XV5103-5BA00
mentation of the buses. The approx. 20 cm long connection
cable to the device has a RJ45 with suitable pin allocation.
Devices with an RS485 interface and SUB-D connector
14
(7XV5650/51, SIPROTEC 4 devices) with SUB-D are connected
using the Y-adapter 7XV5103-2BA00.
15
1 RS485 adapter/accessories
Adapter cable STP with ferrule/9-pin SUB-D connection for devices with
7XV5103- 00
screw-type terminals or compact protection devices, e.g. 7SJ600 2AA
Y-adapter cable for connection of SIPROTEC 4 or other devices with a

2 9-pin SUB-D connection to a RS485 bus with patch cables (RJ45) 2 BA
Y-adapter cable for connection of SIPROTEC 4 with a redundant T103

interfacemodule to a RS485 bus with patch cables (RJ45) 2 C A 2 CA
3 RS485 adapter with 9-pin SUB-D connection formounting on screw-type

terminals with compact protection devices, e.g. 7SJ600, 7SD600 etc. 3AA
Bus terminating connector 220- in a 9-pin SUB-D connector 5AA
4 Bus terminating connector 120- in a RJ45 connector 5 BA
Patch cable CAT 5 shielded with RJ45 connectors 7KE6000-8GD0 - AA0/BB
See Accessories for Communication 7KE6000-8Gx

5
10
11
12
13
14
15
Application
Application example 4: Connecting the

two bus systems 7XV5103
The Y-adapter 7XV5103-2BA00 enables 1
conguration of the RS485 bus with RJ45
patch cables and connection of SIPROTEC
devices with an RS485 interface with a
2
LSA4846-aen.eps
SUB-D connector.
Use of an additional gender changer
(female-female) enables connection
of a RS485 bus with Y-bus cables
7XV5103-0AAxx instead of a SIPROTEC 3
device.
Fig. 13/40 Connecting the two 7XV5103 bus systems 7
10
11
12
13
14
15
1 RS485 Y-bus cable shielded twisted-pair with 9-pin SUB-D connector
Length 1 m
7XV5103-0AA
0 1
Length 3 m 0 3
2 Length 5 m 0 5
Length 10 m 1 0
3 RS485 bus extension cable STP with 9-pin SUB-D connector
Length 10 m
7XV5103-1AA
1 0
Length 20 m 2 0
4 Length 30 m 3 0
Length 40 m 4 0
Length 50 m 5 0
5 RS485 adapter / accessories 7XV5103- 00
Adapter cable STP with ferrule/9-pin SUB-D connector for devices with
screw-type terminals or compact protection devices, e.g. 7SJ600 2AA
6 Y-adapter cable for connection of SIPROTEC 4 or other devices with
9-pin SUB-D connection to a RS485 bus with patch cables (RJ45) 2 BA
Y-adapter cable for connection of SIPROTEC 4 with a redundant T103

7 interface module to a RS485 bus with patch cables (RJ45) 2 CA
RS485 adapter with 9-pin SUB-D connector formounting to screw-type

terminals for compact protection devices, e.g. 7SJ600, 7SD600 etc. 3AA
8 Bus terminating connector 220- in a 9-pin SUB-D connector 5AA
Bus terminating connector 120-in a RJ45 connector 5 BA
RS485 cable to thermo-box (RTD) 7XV5103-7AA

9 Connection cable for thermo-box 7XV5662-xAD to SIPROTEC 4
Open cable ends, each 5 / 20 cm with ferrules to
9-pin SUB-D connector with an integrated 220- terminating resistor
Length 5 m 0 5
10 Length 25 m 2 5
Length 50 m 5 0
11 Patch cable CAT 5 shielded with RJ45 connector 7KE6000-8GD0 - AA0/BB
See Accessories for Communication 7KE6000-8G
12
13
14
15
7XV5450 mini star-coupler
Function overview
One optical input and up to 4 optical outputs 1

Distance spanned: 1.5 km with 62.5/125 m multi-mode ber
Multiple mini star-couplers cascadable
RS232 interface for local access 2
LSP2360-afpen.tif
Baud rate via FO: up to 1.5 Mbaud; Baud rate with RS232:
Up to 115 kbaud
Protocol transparency
Light idle state: Light ON/light OFF selectable 3
Wide-range power supply with self-monitoring function and
alarm contact
Optical ST connectors
4
Fig. 13/41 Mini star-coupler
Description
5
The mini star-coupler multiplies an optical signal received at
an input for up to four outputs. A signal received at one of the
outputs is transmitted via the input interface to a central unit or 6
to an upstream mini star-coupler or converter.
As the mini star-coupler does not transmit selectively to
individual outputs, the protocols used for data transmission must
operate with unique DTE addresses, so all units hear the central
7
interrogation, but only the addressed unit answers to the request
(e.g. IEC 60870-5-103 or DIGSI).
Data are transmitted in transparent full-duplex mode. An RS232
interface is provided for direct serial communication with DTEs
8
at each mini star-coupler. As long as this interface is in use, the
optical input interface to the central unit is blocked.
Cascading mini star-couplers replace the 7XV5300 star coupler. 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Application
1 The mini star-coupler allows SIPROTEC

relays to be centrally accessed or remotely
interrogated with DIGSI via optical inter-
faces. The component is cascadable, so
2 that star topologies or ring topologies can
be congured. A ring structure ensures
that all four outputs are used. The mini
star-coupler has a local RS232 interface
3 socket. By connecting a PC to this inter-
face and using the 7XV5100-4 cable, the
optical input is disconnected to avoid data
collision due to local and remote access
concurring at the same time.
4
Construction
5 The 7XV5450 mini star-coupler is pro-

vided with a snap-on mounting housing
for a 35 mm EN 50022 rail. Auxiliary
power supplies can be connected via
6 screw-type terminals. The ber-optic
cables are connected by ST connectors. Fig. 13/42 Star topology with mini star-couplers
The unit is free of silicone and halogen as
well as ame-retardant.
7
10
11
12
Fig. 13/43 Ring structure with mini star-couplers
13
14
15
Technical data

1
DC 24 to 250 V and AC 60 to 230 V 20 % without switchover
Current consumption
Approx. 0.25 to 0.4 A 2
LEDs
3 LEDs
Green Operating voltage o.k.
Yellow
Yellow
Receiving data
Sending data
3
Connectors
Power supply 2-pole Phoenix screw-type terminal
FO cables Multi-mode ber with ST connectors 4
RS232 9-pin SUB-D socket
Alarm contact 2-pole Phoenix screw-type terminal
Light idle state
Light ON/OFF selectable By jumpers
5
Housing
Plastic housing, EG90, charcoal grey; 90 75 105 mm (W H D)
for snap-on mounting on 35 mm EN 50022 rail
6
Selection and ordering data 7

7XV5450 mini star-coupler 7XV5450-0BA00
Optical mini star-coupler with plastic housing for snap-on mounting onto 35 mm rail.
8
Rated auxiliary voltage DC 24 250 V and AC 110 220 V with alarm relay.
Connection of up to 4 protection units to a star coupler via FO cable for 62.5 /125 m and
850 nm wavelength, max. distance 1.5 km.
Connection of PC or modem to a star coupler via FO cable for 62. /125 m and 9
850 nm wavelength, max. distance 1.5 km.
Connection also by 9-pin RS232 connector.
Cascadable
Fiber-optic connectors with ST connector 10
11
12
13
14
15
10
11
12
13
14
15
7XV5461 two-channel serial optical repeater (for 1 mono-mode FO cable)
Function overview
Two independent multiplexed 820 nm Ports 1/2 with ST

connectors for max. 1.5 km via 50/125 m and 62.5/125 m
1
LSP2897.tif
multi-mode FO cable.
Data rate of serial Ports 1/2 from 300 bit/s 4.096 Mbit/s.
Automatic baud rate adjustments to synchronous and asyn-
chronous serial signals; no settings necessary.
2
Powerful 1300 nm/1550 nm port with LC-single connector for
distances up to 40 km via one 9/125 m mono-mode FO cable
DC 24 to 250 V and AC 115/230 V wide-range power supply 3
with alarm relay.
Data exchange display by LED
Fig. 13/44 Optical repeater with integrated 1300 nm/1550 nm wave
length multiplexer for one single mono-mode FO-cable
Integrated commissioning support
4
Description
The optical repeater exchanges serial optical signals over long

5
distances via only one single mono-mode FO cable. It converts
serial optical 820 nm signals at Port 1 and Port 2 in the range
300 bit/s 4.096 Mbit/s to 1300/1550 nm for one mono-mode
FO cable. Both synchronous and asynchronous signals can be
6
connected at Port 1/2. Two independent, serial 820 nm inputs
with ST connectors are available, which are multiplexed to
Port 3. Two devices with an optical 820 nm interface, for
example the 7SD5/7SD610 line differential protection relay or 7
the RS232/820 nm 7XV5652 converter, can be connected to
Ports 1 and 2 via multi-mode FO cables for distances of up to
1.5 km. Signal transmission at Port 3 is achieved via the single
LC connector at wavelengths of 1300 nm /1550 nm for connec-
tion of mono-mode FO cable up to 40 km. The device can be
8
connected to DC battery voltages and AC supply sources. Loops
can be activated for Port 1/2 for commissioning purposes, so
that the input signals can be mirrored at each port to support
commissioning of the ber optical links.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Application, technical data
Application
1 Until now, two FO cables are required

for the bidirectional transmission of
protection signals. With the repeater with
integrated wavelength multiplexer one
2 FO cable is sufcient: Two protection
relays e.g. 7SD52/7SD610 differential
protection or 7SA52/7SA6 distance
protection, exchange information via
3 Port 1 (po1). Interference-free data
exchange is performed via one optical
mono-mode FO cable up to a max.
distance of 40 km. Protection remote
control with DIGSI is connected to
4 Port 2 of the repeater via a 7XV5450
mini star-coupler. This port provides the
serial connection to the other substation
with a PC on which DIGSI is installed.
5 In this way, the remote protection
devices can be remotely interrogated
via Port 2. The baud rate is optimally
set to 57.6 kbit/s so that there is no
6 difference from local operation. The data
of the devices on the other substation
can be changed or read out during com-
missioning and operation. Alternatively, it
7 is possible to connect substation control

devices, RTU or additional protection data
transmission to Port 2. This makes for
optimum use of the long-distance optical
cable for two separate serial connections
8 for transmitting serial data between
300 bit/s and 4.096 Mbit/s.
Fig. 13/45 Transfer of protection data signals and remote control / integration via one
mono-mode FO cable
(Note: Devices 7XV5461-0BK00 and 7XV5461-0BL00 must be used in pairs)
9
Technical data
10 Connections
Ports 1 / 2 ST connector for 820 nm for 50 /125 m and 62.5/125 m multi-mode FO cable
Port 3 LC-single connector for 1300 nm /1550 nm for 9/125 m mono-mode FO cable
Screw-type terminals 2-pole screw-type terminals for auxiliary voltage supply
11 3-pole make/break contact for alarm relay
Housing
Interference-free 188 56 120 mm metal housing for mounting on 35 mm DIN rail to EN 50032.
Weight 0.8 kg. Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529: IP41
12 Power supply
Wide range DC 24 to 250 V or AC 115 / 230 V
Displays
13 4 LEDs
Green Power supply
Red Alarm relays
2 yellow Data exchange indication
14
15

Two-channel serial optical repeater with integrated wavelength multiplexer
Connection of two serial optical inputs with ST connector for 62.5/125 m multi-mode FO cable
7XV5461 - 0B 00
1
up to 1.5 km, from 300 bit/s 4.096 Mbit/s
24 250 V DC, 115/230 V AC wide-range power supply
Alarm relay and LED for operational and fault display
Optical 1550 nm output with LC-single connector for 9/125 m mono-mode 2
FO cable for distances up to 40 km (permissible path attenuation 25 dB) K
Optical 1300 nm output with LC-single connector for 9/125 m mono-mode FO cable
for distances up to 40 km (permissible path attenuation 25 dB) L
3
10
11
12
13
14
15
10
11
12
13
14
15
7XV5461 two-channel serial optical repeater (for duplex-mono-mode FO cables)
Function overview
Two independent multiplexed 820 nm ports with ST

connectors for max. 1.5 km via 50 /125 m and 62.5/125 m
1
duplex-multi-mode FO cable.
Data rate of serial ports 1 / 2 from 300 bit/s 4.096 Mbit/s.
Automatic baud rate adjustment to synchronous and
asynchronous serial signals; no settings necessary.
2
LSP2507.tif
Powerful 1300 nm / 1550 nm port with LC-Duplex connector
for distances up to 24 km / 60 km / 100 km / 170 km via
9 /125 mm duplex-mono-mode FO cable 3
DC 24 to 250 V and AC 115 /230 V wide-range power supply
Fig. 13/46 Optical repeater with wide-range power supply with alarm relay.
Description
Integrated commissioning support 4
The optical repeater transmits serial optical signals over long
distances via duplex-mono-mode FO cables. It converts serial
optical 820 nm signals at Port 1 and Port 2 in the range of
5
300 bit/s to 4.096 Mbit/s. Both synchronous and asynchronous
signals can be connected. Two independent, serial 820 nm inputs
with ST connectors are available, which are multiplexed to
Port 3. Two devices with an optical 820 nm interface, for example 6
the 7SD5 / 7SD6 line differential protection relay or the
RS232/ 820 nm 7XV5652 converter, can be connected to Ports 1
and 2 via duplex-multi-mode FO cables for distances of up to
1.5 km. Signal transmission at Port 3 is achieved via the 7
LC-Duplex connector at wavelengths of 1300 nm/1550 nm for
connection of a duplex-mono-mode FO cable. For Port 3 there
are three options for max. 25 km (1300 nm) / 60 km (1300 nm)
and 100 km / 170 km (1550 nm) optical ber lengths. The device
can be connected to all battery voltages and AC supply sources.
8
Loops can be activated for Ports 1 / 2 for commissioning purposes,
so that the input signals can be mirrored at the port in question.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Typical applications, technical data
1 The protection relays (for example

7SD5 / 7SD6 differential protection
or 7SA52 / 7SA6 distance protection)
exchange information via Port 1. Inter-
2 ference-free data exchange is performed
via duplex-mono-mode FO cable up to a
distance of 170 km. Protection remote
control with DIGSI is connected to Port 2
3 of the repeater via the 7XV5450 mini
star-coupler. This port provides the serial
connection to the other substation with a
PC where DIGSI is installed. The protection
relays on the remote substation can be
4 scanned remotely via Port 2.The baud rate
is optimally set to 57.6 kbit/s so that there
is no difference from local operation. Dur-
LSA4177-cen.eps
ing commissioning and operation, data of
5 the device on the other substation can be
changed and read out. Alternatively, it is
possible to connect power system control
or additional protection data transmission
6 to Port 2. This makes for optimum use of
the long-distance optical ber for two se-
parate serial connections for transmitting
data between 300 bit/s and 4.096 Mbit/s.
7
100/170 km
8
9 Fig. 13/47 Transfer of protection data and remote control of a substation via an optical long-
distance connection
Technical data
10 Connections
Ports 1 / 2 ST connector for 820 nm for 50/125 m and 62.5/125 m multi-mode FO cable
Port 3 LC-Duplex connector for 1300 nm/1550 nm for 9/125 m mono-mode FO cable
11 Screw-type terminals 2-pole screw-type terminals for auxiliary voltage supply
3-pole make/break contact for alarm relay
Housing
12 188 56 100 mm aluminum housing for mounting on 35 mm DIN rail to EN 50032. Weight 0.8 kg.
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529: IP41
Power supply
Wide range 24 to 250 V DC without connector jumpers, AC 115 / 230 V
13 Displays
4 LEDs
Green Power supply
Red Alarm relays
2 yellow Data exchange
14
15

7XV5461 two-channel serial optical repeater (for duplex-mono-mode FO cables)
7XV5461 - 0B 00
1
up to 1.5 km, from 300 bit/s to 4.096 Mbit/s
24 to 250 V DC, 115/230 V AC wide-range power supply
Fault relay and LED for operational and fault display
Optical 1300 nm output with LC-Duplex connector for 9/125 m mono-mode 2
FO cable for distances up to 24 km (permissible path attenuation 13 dB) G
Optical 1300 nm output with LC-Duplex connector for 9/125 m mono-mode
3
FO cable for distances up to 60 km (permissible path attenuation 29 dB) H 1)

FO cable for distances up to 100 km (permissible path attenuation 29 dB) J 1)

FO cable for distances up to 170 km (permissible path attenuation 43 dB) M 4
1) When ordering options H/J an additional attenuator is required if the devices are used for distances < 20 km
10
11
12
13
14
15
10
11
12
13
14
15
7XV5461 two-channel serial optical repeater (for duplex-multi-mode FO cables)
Function overview
Two independent multiplexed 820 nm ports with ST connec-

tors for a max. of 1.5 km via 50 /125 m and 62.5 /125 m
1
duplex-multi-mode FO cable.
Data rate of serial Ports 1 / 2 from 300 bit/s 1.5 Mbit/s. Auto-
matic baud rate adjustment to synchronous and asynchronous
serial signals; no settings necessary.
2
LSP2507.tif
Powerful 1300 nm port with LC-Duplex connector for distances
up to 4 km / 8 km via 50/125 mm / 62.5/125 mm duplex-multi-
mode FO cable 3
DC 24 to 250 V and AC 115/230 V wide-range power supply
Fig. 13/48 Optical repeater with wide-range power supply with alarm relay.
Description
Integrated commissioning support with test loop feature 4
The optical repeater transmits serial optical signals over long
distances via duplex-multi-mode FO cables. It converts serial
optical 820 nm signals at Port 1 and Port 2 in the range 300 bit/s
5
1.5 Mbit/s to 1300 nm for duplex-multi-mode ber cables.
Both synchronous and asynchronous signals can be connected.
Two independent, serial 820 nm inputs with ST connectors are
available, which are multiplexed to Port 3. One transmit (Tx) 6
and one receive (Rx) signal is supported (no RTS / CTS handshake
signals). Two devices with an optical 820 nm interface, for
example the 7SD52 / 7SD610 line differential protection relay
or the RS232/820 nm 7XV5652 converter, can be connected to
Ports 1 and 2 via duplex-multi-mode FO cables for distances of
7
up to 1.5 km. Signal transmission at Port 3 is achieved via the
LC-Duplex connector at wavelengths of 1300 nm for connection
of a duplex-multi-mode FO cable. For Port 3 there are two
options for a max. of 4 km (1300 nm) and 8 km (1300 nm)
8
optical ber lengths. The device can be connected to all battery
voltages and AC supply sources. Loops can be activated for
Ports 1 / 2 for commissioning purposes, so that the input signals
can be mirrored at the port in question. 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Typical applications, technical data
1 Two protection relays (for example

7SD52/7SD610 differential protection
or 7SA52/7SA6 distance protection)
exchange information via Port 1. Inter-
2 ference-free data exchange is performed
via optical duplex-multi-mode FO cable
up to a distance of 4/8 km. Protection
remote control with DIGSI is connected to
3 Port 2 of the repeater via 7XV5450 mini
star-coupler. This port provides the serial
connection to the other substation with
a PC where DIGSI is installed. The protec-
tion relays on the remote substation can
4 be interrogated remotely via Port 2. The
baud rate is optimally set to 57.6 kbit/s
so that there is no difference from local
operation. During commissioning and
5 operation, the data of the device in the
other substation can be changed and read
out. Alternatively, it is possible to connect
a substation control system or additional
6 protection data transmission to Port 2.
This makes for optimum use of the long-
distance optical ber for two separate
serial connections for transmitting data
7 between 300 bit/s and 4.096 Mbit/s. Fig. 13/49 Transfer of protection data and remote control of a substation via
an optical long-distance connection
8 Technical data
Connections
Ports 1 / 2 ST connector for 820 nm for 50/125 m and 62.5/125 m multi-mode FO cable
9 Port 3 LC-Duplex connector for 1300 nm for 50/125 m / 62.5/125 m multi-mode FO cable
Screw-type terminals 2-pole screw-type terminals for auxiliary voltage supply
3-pole make/break contact for alarm relay
Housing
10 188 56 100 mm aluminum housing for mounting on 35 mm DIN rail to EN 50032. Weight 0.8 kg.
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529: IP41
Power supply
11 Wide range 24 to 250 V DC without connector jumpers, AC 115 / 230 V

Displays
4 LEDs
Green Power supply
12 Red
2 yellow
Alarm relays
Data exchange
13
14
15

Two-channel serial optical repeater (for duplex multi-mode FO cables)
7XV5461 - 0B 00
1
up to 1.5 km, from 300 bit/s to 1.5 Mbit/s
DC 24 to 250 V, AC 115/230 V wide-range power supply
Fault relay and LED for operational and fault display
Optical 1300 nm output with LC-Duplex connector for 50/125 m / 62.5/125 m multi-mode 2
FO cable for distances up to 4 km (permissible path attenuation 13 dB) F
Optical 1300 nm output with LC-Duplex connector for 50/125 m / 62.5/125 m multi-mode
FO cable for distances up to 8 km (permissible path attenuation 29 dB) E
3
10
11
12
13
14
15
10
11
12
13
14
15
7XV5550 active mini star-coupler
Function overview
One optical input and 4 optical outputs or 1

one RS485 input and 5 optical outputs
RS232 interface for local access
RS485 interface for bus structure
2
LSP2359-afpen.tif
Baud rate and data format can be set independently for each
port
Baud rate 1200 baud 115 kbaud
Data format 8N1, 8N2, 8E1 3
Max. distance: 1.5 km with 62.5/125 m multi-mode FO cable
Light idle state: Light ON/light OFF selectable
Wide-range power supply with self-supervision function and
alarm contact 4
Fig. 13/50 Active mini star-coupler Optical ST connectors
Description
5
Five optical ports allow the active mini star-coupler to centrally
or remotely communicate with devices with serial interfaces
using different baud rates and data formats. Using a simple ASCII 6
sequence, only one of the available output channels is switched
to a transparent full duplex operation. The active mini star-
coupler can be used with any terminal program or for SIPROTEC
protection relays with the DIGSI operating program. Each of the
input and output channels can be parameterized independently
7
to the device attached by adjustable baud rates and data formats
or as input or output ports. For communication with more than
5 devices, the active mini star-coupler can be cascaded together
with an RS485 bus in half-duplex mode with further devices.
8
Please note:
The 7XV5450 passive mini star-coupler is recommended for
controlling several SIPROTEC 3 or SIPROTEC 4 devices with DIGSI
or for communication by a remote control system.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Application
1 Using the integrated optical interfaces of

the active mini star-coupler, data trans-
mission for the protection relays V1/2,
SIPROTEC 3 or 4 can be performed cen-
2 trally or remotely with DIGSI. When using
the RS485 bus structure each active mini
star-coupler provides ve optical outputs.
An RS232 interface is available for local
3 operation with a notebook. The control PC
(directly or via modem) always operates
with the same data format, while the
interfaces to the different protection
relays using other formats are adapted
4 accordingly. For V1/2 protection relays, a
7XV5101-0A plug-in connector module
is required for each relay and each relay
must be connected to a separate port.
5
Construction
6 The active mini star-coupler is provided

with a snap-on mounting housing for a
35 mm EN 50022 rail. Auxiliary power
supplies can be connected via screw-type
7 terminals. The ber-optic cables are
connected by ST connectors. The unit is
free of silicone and halogen as well as Fig. 13/51 Data transmission via using the integrated optical interfaces of the mini star-coupler
ame-retardant.
10
11
12
13
14
15
Technical data

1
LEDs
3 LEDs
2
Yellow Receiving data
Yellow Sending data
Connectors
3
FO connections 820 nm ST connectors
RS485
Alarm contact
2-pole Phoenix screw-type terminal
4
Light idle state
Light ON/OFF selectable By jumpers
Housing
5

7XV5550 active mini star-coupler 7XV5550-0BA00
Optical active mini star-coupler with plastic housing for snap-on mounting onto 35 mm rail.
8
Rated auxiliary voltage DC 24 250 V and AC 110 230 V with alarm relay.
Connection of up to 4 protection units to an active mini star-coupler via FO cable
for 62.5 /125 m and 850 nm wavelength, max. distance 1.5 km.
Connection of PC ormodem to an active mini star-coupler via FO cable 9
for 62.5 /125 m and 850 nm wavelength, max. distance 1.5 km.
Connection also by 9-pin RS232 connector.
Cascadable
Fiber-optic connectors with ST connector 10
11
12
13
14
15
10
11
12
13
14
15
Accessories / 7XV5650/51
7XV5650 / 5651 RS485 FO converter
Function overview
Baud rates 9.6 115 kbaud 1

Topologies:
7XV5650: Optical star
7XV5651: Optical line, RS485 bus
Protocol transparency 2
Light idle state: Light ON/light OFF
selectable
Distance: 1.5 km with 62.5 /125 m
FO cable 3
LSP2409-afp.tif
120 terminator for RS485 bus,
activated/deactivated by DIP switch
Wide-range power supply with self-
supervision function and fault output
4
relay
Fig. 13/52 RS485 FO converter

5
Description
6
The RS485 FO converter allows up to 31 devices to be con-
nected with a bus-capable electrical RS485 interface. It provides
an optical link-up to a central unit or a star coupler. The converter
has been designed for use in substations for interference-free 7
transmission of serial data with rates between 9.6 and
115.2 kbaud by multi-mode FO cable.
The 7XV5651 converter is designed to act as a T-coupler, data
can be distributed in a line structure system, forming a basis for 8
building up cost-effective optical bus systems.
The version 7XV5650 is designed for star topology via ber-optic
connection. 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Application
Application
1 The converters can be used in an optical

line structure or in an optical star structure.
Application in optical line structure allows
relays to be connected interference-free via
2 ber-optic cables; for indoor installation, a
cost-effective RS485 bus can be used.
7
Fig. 13/53 Optical line structure with connected RS485 interfaces
10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 13/54 Connection of optical interfaces to an RS485 bus
15
Application
Several units equipped with FO interface

and DIGSI or IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
can be connected to an existing RS485 bus
structure.
1
Within one system, the data format and
the baud rate have to be set to the same
values. 2
7
Fig. 13/55 Optical star structure with connected RS485 interfaces
10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 13/56 Connection of optical interfaces to an RS485 bus
15
Construction, technical data, selection and ordering data
Construction
1 The converter is provided with a snap-on mounting housing for

a 35 mm EN 50022 rail. Auxiliary power supplies can be con-
nected via screw-type terminals.
2 The ber-optic cables are connected by ST connectors. The unit

is free of silicone and halogen as well as ame-retardant.
3 Technical data

4 Current consumption
Approx. 0.2 to 0.3 A
LEDs
5 2 / 3 LEDs
Yellow Receiving data on FO channel 1
Yellow Sending data on FO channel 2 (7XV5651 only)
6 Connectors
FO 820 nm ST connector
7 Alarm contact
Light idle state
Light ON/OFF selectable
8 Housing
9

7XV565 RS485 FO converter 7XV565 - 0BA00
Converter with 1 RS485 interface and 2 FO cables for transmission rates from 9.6 kbaud to 115 kbaud
11 With plastic housing for snap-on mounting on 35 mm rail.

Rated auxiliary voltage DC 24 250 V and AC 110 230 V with alarm contact.
Connection of units with RS485 interface by 9-pin SUB-D connector or screw-type terminals.
Connection of PC or modem to a star coupler via FO cable
12 for 62.5 /125 m or 50 /125 m and 850 nm wavelength.
Fiber-optic connectors: FO 820 nm with ST connector
1 channel 0
2 channels
13 1
14
15
7XV5652 RS232 FO converter
Function overview
Serial baud rates up to 115 kbaud 1

No setting of baud rate necessary
Protocol transparency
Light idle state: Light ON / light OFF selectable
2
LSP2406-afpde.tif
Distance: 3 km with 62.5 /125 m FO cable
alarm contact
Supports the serial TxD and RxD lines of the RS232 interface. 3
No handshake lines supported
Fig. 13/57 RS232 FO converter

4
Description
5
The RS232 FO converter is used to convert serial RS232 signals
to FO transmission signals in full duplex mode. It has one FO
channel for transmission and one for receiving, as well as a
protected RS232 interface rated to withstand 2 kV discharges, 6
thus allowing direct connection to the serial system interface
of SIPROTEC relays. It is designed to be used in substations for
isolated, interference-free transmission of serial signals to a
central unit, a star coupler or a PC. 7
The converter supports the conversion of serial TxD (transmit)
and RxD (receive) signals to an optical output. No handshake
signals are supported.
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
Application
1 With the serial RS232 FO converter, an

existing RS232 interface at a SIPROTEC
relay can be upgraded to an optical
820 nm interface to connect the relay with
2 further optical components for central and
remote interrogation with DIGSI. Another
application is the interfacing between a
line differential relay and a communication
3 network, which provides electrical RS232
inputs. The connection between the com-
munication room, where the converter is
located, and the relay is executed without
interference via multi-mode FO cables
4 (Fig. 13/58).
5 Construction
The converter is provided with a snap-on

mounting housing for a 35 mm EN 50022
rail. Auxiliary power supplies can be
6 connected via screw-type terminals. The
ber-optic cables are connected by ST
connectors. The unit is free of silicone and
halogen as well as ame-retardant.
7 Fig. 13/58 Remote interrogation with the RS232 interface
10
11
12
13
14
15
Technical data

Current consumption
Approx. 0.1 to 0.2 A 2
LEDs
1 LED
Connectors 3
FO cables 820 nm ST connector
RS485
Alarm contact
9-pin SUB-D socket
4
Light idle state
Housing 5
6

7XV5652 RS232 FO converter 7XV5652-0BA00
For conversion of FO to RS232 (V.24) signals up to 115 kbaud

With plastic housing for snap-on mounting on 35 mm rail
Rated auxiliary voltage DC 24 250 V and AC 110 230 V with alarm contact.
8
Connection of units with RS232 interface by 9-pin SUB-D connector
Connection of PC, star coupler, modem via FO cable for 62.5/125 m and 850 nm wavelength
Fiber-optic connectors: FO 820 nm with ST connector
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
10
11
12
13
14
15
7XV5653 two-channel binary transducer
Function overview
2 isolated binary inputs (DC 24 to 250 V) 1

2 isolated trip contacts
Fast remote trip via a serial point-to-point link of up to
115 kbaud /12 ms.
2
LSP2361-afpde.tif
Telegram-backed interference-free transmission via FO cable
Permanent data link supervision and indication
Distance of approx. 3 km via multi-mode FO cable
62.5 /125 m
Transmission of up to 170 km via mono-mode FO cable with
3
7XV5461 repeater
Transmission via communication networks and leased lines
and pilot wires with 7XV5662-0AC01 communication
converters
4
Fig. 13/59 Binary transducer Wide-range power supply with self-supervision function and
alarm relay
Description
5
The transducer registers binary information from contacts via
two binary inputs and forwards it interference-free to the second
transducer via ber-optic cable. The indications/signals received 6
by this second transducer are put out via its contacts. The two
contacts can be used as trip contacts. The transducer is equipped
with independent and bidirectional binary inputs (2) and contact
outputs (2). 7
The transducer has been designed for application in substations.
Highly reliable, telegram-backed serial data transmission is used
between the transducers. Transmission errors and failure of the
data link are indicated via an alarm contact, i.e. a permanent 8
supervision of power supply and the datalink is integrated in the
transducer.
10
11
12
13
14
15
Application
1 The bidirectional transducer registers

binary information at two binary inputs
and forwards it via ber-optic cable to
a second transducer, which outputs the
2 signals via contacts. Distances of about
3 km can be covered directly via multi-
mode beroptic cables. The 7XV5461
repeater is available for distances up to
3 170 km via mono-mode ber-optic cable.
(Fig. 13/60)
With two transducers connected to
7XV5461, up to four binary signals can
be transferred. One application is phase-
4 selective intertripping.
With a communication converter, the
transducer can be interfaced to different
5 kinds of communication links. Modern
N 64 kbit/s digital networks can be used.
Existing pilot wires can also be used for
data exchange between the relays. The
data to be exchanged includes directional
6 signals, intertrip signals and other informa- Fig. 13/60
tion.
7 Construction
The converter is provided with a snap-on

mounting housing for a 35 mm EN 50022
8 rail. Auxiliary power supplies can be
connected via screw-type terminals. The
ber-optic cables are connected by
ST connectors. The unit is free of silicone
9 and halogen as well as ame-retardant.
10
11
X = A: Options for the communication link:
G.703.1, X.21 interface to a communication network
X = C: pilot-wire cable up to 10 km
12 X = D: G.703.6 (E1/T1) interface to a communication network
Fig. 13/61
13
14
15
Technical data

1
Current consumption
Approx. 0.15 to 0.25 A 2
LEDs
6 LEDs
1 x green Operating voltage o.k.
2 x yellow
2 x yellow
Contact unit active
Command relay active
3
1 x red Alarm
Connectors
Power supply
FO connection
820 nm FSMA screw-type connector
4
FO connection 820 nm ST connector
Binary inputs 4-pole Phoenix screw-type terminal
Alarm contact 2-pole Phoenix screw-type terminal 5
Light idle state
Housing
6
7

7XV5653 two-channel binary transducer 7XV5653-0BA00 8
Binary signal transducer
Plastic housing, for snap-on mounting onto 35 mm EN 50022 rail
and AC 110 to 230 V with alarm relay, 2 binary inputs, 2 trip contacts,
9
1 alarm relay with potential-free contact for pilot-wire supervision
Connection to a second transducer via FO cable for 62.5 /125 m
and 820 nm wavelength (ST connectors). Max. distance 3 km.
Connection to a second transducer via a communication system 10
with a RS232 interface, 9-pin SUB-D connector, baud rate settable by DIP-switches
Fiber-optic connectors with ST connector
11
12
13
14
15
10
11
12
13
14
15
7XV5655-0BB00 Ethernet modem for substations
Function overview
RS232 interface for data transfer and conguration of the

modems
1
Serial data rate and data format (RS232 / RS485) for the
terminal devices is selectable from 2.4 kbit/s up to 57.6 kbit/s
with data format 8N1, 8E1 2
FO interface for serial data transfer
LSP2806.tif
10 Mbit Ethernet interface (LAN) to the 10/100 Mbit Ethernet
network
Increased security with password protection and IP address 3
selection is possible
Exchange of serial data via Ethernet network between two
Ethernet modems
(e.g. DIGSI protocol, IEC 60870-5-103 protocol) 4
Exchange of serial protocols via Ethenet without gaps in the
Fig. 13/62 Front view of the Ethernet modem telegram structure
5
Description
A control PC and protection relays can exchange serial data via

an Ethernet network using two Ethernet modems 7XV5655. 6
Connection to the Ethernet modem is in each case made via
the asynchronous serial interface of the terminal devices. In the
modem the serial data is packed into the secure IP protocol as
information data, and is transferred between the modems using
the Ethernet connection. Conformity with the standard and
7
gap-free transmission of serial DIGSI or IEC 60870-5-103/101
telegrams (frames) via the network is ensured by the modem
which receives the serial telegram communication and packs
the serial IEC telegrams into blocks for communication via the
8
Ethernet. Data is transmitted in full duplex mode, the serial
handshake is not supported. Connection is set up between the
IP address of the dialing modem in the ofce and the IP address
of the answering modem in the substation and is congured 9
prior to dial up with DIGSI by means of AT commands via the
RS232 interface.
The substation modem may be congured to have password pro-
tection, and provides the additional security feature, permitting 10
access only from dened IP addresses, e.g. only that of the ofce
modem. The modem is accessed with DIGSI Remote like a normal
telephone modem with the exception that instead of telephone
numbers, IP addresses are assigned by the network administrator 11
for each modem.
12
13
14
15
Application
1 8
LSA4475-aen.eps
5
6 compact
Fig. 13/63 Operation of various SIPROTEC protection unit generations via Ethernet modems
7
Application The Ethernet modems are integrated similarly to telephone
modems in DIGSI 4. Instead of the telephone number, the pre-set
8 Using the ofce computer and DIGSI 4, both substations 1 and 2

may be dialed up via the Ethernet modems. An IP point-to-point
IP address assigned to the modem is selected. If later an Ethernet
connection is available in the substation, the existing modem can
data connection is established between the ofce and correspond- be replaced by an Ethernet modem. The entire serial bus structure
ing substation modem when dialed up via the network. This is and cabling may remain unchanged.
9 maintained until the ofce modem terminates the connection. The

serial data exchange takes place via this data connection whereby
the modem converts the data from serial to Ethernet with full
duplex mode. Between the ofce modem and the ofce PC the
highest data rate e.g. 57.6 kbit/s for SIPROTEC 4 devices is always
10 used. The serial data rate of the substation modem is adapted
to the data rate required by the protection relays e.g. substation
modem 1 with 57.6 kbit/s for SIPROTEC 4 and substation modem
2 with 9.6 kbit/s for SIPROTEC 3 devices. These settings are only
11 pre-set once in the modem.
12
13
14
15
Technical data
Connections
1
RS232 interface 9-pin SUB-D or
RS485 interface 9-pin SUB-D settable by switches
FO interface 820 nm with ST connectors for the connection to 62.5/125 m multi-mode FO cables.
Ethernet 10BaseT, 10/100 Mbit, RJ45 connector
Power supply / Fail safe relay with screw-type terminals
2
Housing
Rail mounting, plastic, charcoal grey, 90 x 90 x 107 (W x H x D) in mm
Wide-range power supply / fail safe relay 3
Auxiliary voltage DC 24 to 250 V and AC 115/230 V connected with screw-type terminals
Fail safe relay for power supervision connected with screw-type terminals
Indication (8 x LED)
Power Operating voltage o.k. System RS232 connection established
4
RS232 TD Transmitting data to RS232 RS232 RD Receiving data from RS232
LAN T Transmitting data to LAN LAN R Receiving data from LAN
Error Error on RS232 Link LAN LAN connection established 5
6
Ethernet modem 7XV5655 - 0BB00
Ethernet modem for serial, asynchronous transmission of data up to 57.6 kbit/s via the 10/100 Mbit
Ethernet and conguration software DIN-rail device mounting device suitable for substation.
7
Connection to Ethernet via RJ45 connector. Serial connection SUB-D 9-pin socket RS232/RS485
interface settable by switches.
FO interface 820 nm for 62.5 /125 m multi-mode-FO cables.
Auxiliary supply DC 24 250 V and AC 115/230 V.
8
Fail safe contact for device supervision.
With gender-changer (pin-pin) for adaptation to DIGSI-cable 7XV5100-4
(cable not included in the scope of supply).
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
10
11
12
13
14
15
7XV5655-0BA00 Ethernet serial hub for substations
Function overview
Conguration software for Windows NT / 2000 / XP to congure

virtual COM ports on the PC and for conguration of the serial
1
hub.
RS232 / RS485 interfaces for data transfer and conguration
of the serial hub 2
FO interface for serial data transfer
LSP2807.tif
Serial data rate and data format (RS232) for the terminal
devices is selectable from 2.4 kbit/s up to 57.6 kbit/s with data
format 8N1, 8E1. 3
10 Mbit Ethernet interface (LAN) to the 10/100 Mbit Ethernet
network.
Better security with password protection for the access to the
protection relays via the serial hup 4
Exchange of serial data via Ethernet network (e.g. DIGSI
Fig. 13/64 Front view of Ethernet serial hub for substation protocol, IEC 60870-5-103 protocol)
Exchange of serial protocols via Ethernet without gaps in the
telegram structure
5
Description
By means of the serial hub and the associated conguration

software it is possible to establish serial communication via an 6
Ethernet network between a PC or notebook running DIGSI 4 and
SIPROTEC protection relays. The conguration software installs
virtual serial interfaces (COM ports) on the PC. Each COM port is
allocated to a serial hub within the network by means of its
IP address. This must be set in the serial hub. The PC is connected
7
to the network via Ethernet interface. The protection relays are
connected via an RS232 / RS485 or FO interface to the serial hub.
Connection with DIGSI is achieved via the virtual COM port on
the PC and the IP address of the serial hub in the substation.
8
The serial data is packed as user data into a secure IP protocol in
the PC and transferred via the Ethernet connection to the serial
hub. The requirements regarding standard compliant gap-free
transmission of serial DIGSI or IEC 60870-5-103/101 telegrams 9
(frames) via the network is complied with by the communication
driver on the PC and the serial hub which monitor the serial
telegram communication. The serial IEC telegrams are transferred
in blocks across the Ethernet. Data communication is full duplex.
Control signals of the serial interfaces are not used.
10
11
12
13
14
15
Application
LSA4477-aen.eps
5
6 compact
7 Fig. 13/65 Operation of various SIPROTEC protection unit generations via serial hub
Application on the serial hub. With DIGSI 4 the serial hubs are integrated by
means of further serial COM ports (max. 254). The connection
8 From the ofce PC running DIGSI 4 it is possible to select one of to the IP address of the serial hub in the network is achieved by
opening the corresponding COM port. If an Ethernet network to
the serial hubs 1 and 2 via one of the virtual COM ports. In DIGSI 4,
when the COM port is selected, a IP point-to-point data connection the substation or in the substation is available, serial data can then
via the network is established and maintained between the ofce be transferred via this network.
9 and the relevant substation modem until the interface is released. The existing serial star or bus structure with cabling in the substa-
The serial data exchange takes place via this data link, whereby tion can still be used.
the data conversion from serial to Ethernet is full duplex. The
ofce PC towards the network is always operating with high data SIPROTEC 4 devices from version 4.6 and newer with integrated
10 rate, as the data is fed to the network via the network driver on
the PC. The serial data rate of the serial hub in the substation is
Ethernet interface may be connected directly to the router or
switch by means of a patch cable.
adapted to the baud rate set in the protection relay, e.g. serial
hub 1 with 57.6 kbit/s for SIPROTEC 4 and serial hub 2 with 9.6
11 kbit/s for SIPROTEC 3 devices. These parameters must be pre-set
12
13
14
15
Technical data
Connections
1
RS232 interface 9-pin SUB-D socket or
RS485 interface 9-pin SUB-D socket selectable via DIL switch.
FO interface 820 nm with ST connectors for connection to multi-mode FO cables.
Ethernet 10BaseT, 10/100 Mbit, RJ45 connector to Ethernet
Auxiliary voltage/alarm relay (5 terminals)
2
Housing
Rail mounting, plastic, charcoal grey, 90 x 90 x 107 (W x H x D) in mm
Wide-range power supply / fail safe relay 3
Auxiliary voltage DC 24 to 250 V and AC 115/230 V connected with screw-type terminals
Alarm relay for monitoring of the device
Power Operating voltage o.k. System RS232 connection established
4
RS232 TD Transmitting data to RS232 RS232 RD Receiving data from RS232
LAN T Transmitting data to LAN LAN R Receiving data from LAN
Error Error on RS232 Link LAN LAN connection established 5
6
Ethernet hub for substations 7XV5655 - 0BA00
Serial hub for serial, asynchronous transfer of data up to 57.6 kbit/s via 10/100 Mbit Ethernet including
conguration software.
7
Connection to the Ethernet via RJ45 connector. Serial connection with S232/RS485 interface
via SUB-D 9-pin socket or optical with 820 nm
ST connector and multi-mode FO cable.
Wide-range auxiliary supply for DC 24 250 V and AC 115 /230 V.
8
With gender-changer (pin-pin) for adaptation to DIGSI cable 7XV5100-4
(cable not included in the scope of supply).
10
11
12
13
14
15
10
11
12
13
14
15
Communication Converter 7XV5662-0AA00/GG for X.21 / RS422 / G.703.1 *)
Function overview
Optical interface with ST connector for connection to the

protection unit
1
Distance: 1.5 km (0.93 mile) with 62.5 /125 m and 50/125 m
multi-mode FO cable between CC-XG and the protection
unit / serial device 2
Electrical interface to the communication device via SUB-D
connector (X.21, 15 pins, automatic detection and setting to 64,
128, 256 or 512 kbit/s or G.703.1, 9 pins, 64 kbit/s).
Synchronous and Asynchronous mode now within one device, 3
selectable by push-button.
Synchronous data exchange for SIPROTEC 4 protection relays
7SD52/53, 7SD61, 7SA52, 7SA6, and all SIPROTEC 5 protection
Fig. 13/66 Communication converter for X.21/ RS422 and G.703.1
relays e.g. 7SD8, 7SA8 and 7SL8. 4
Asynchronous data exchange for 7SD51 protection relay,
Description Binary signal transmitter, 7XV5653/7XV5673 or other devices
with asynchronous interface
The communication converter CC-XG for coupling to a commu-
nication network is a peripheral device linked to the protection
Monitoring of: 5
auxiliary supply voltage,
device via ber-optic cables, which enables serial data exchange
X.21: clock signal of communication network; G703.1:
between two protection relays. A digital communication network
Receive dates are on and correspond to the standardized
is used. The electrical interfaces in the CC-XG for the access to
the communication device are selectable as X.21 (64 kbit/s,
pulse mask.
and internal logic
6
128 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s or 512 kbit/s) or G.703.1 (64 kbit/s). At the
opposite side, the data are converted by second communication Fail safe relay (1 changeover contact, SIPROTEC standard)
converter so that they can be read by the second device. The Loop test function selectable by push-button
communication converters thus allow two protection devices to Wide-range power supply unit (PSU) for DC 24 to 250 V 7
communicate synchronously and to exchange large data volumes and AC 115 to 230 V
over large distances. Typical applications are the serial protection
interfaces of differential protection and distance protection
of SIPROTEC 4 devices 7SD52/53, 7SD61, 7SA52, 7SA6, and
SIPROTEC 5 devices 7SD8, 7SA8 and 7SL8, where 7XV5662-
8
0AA00 has to be used.
Should asynchronous serial data of differential protection
7SD51 or of the binary signal transducer 7XV5653/7XV5673 9
be transmitted, the device 7XV5662-0AA00 has to be used
(asynchronous from 300 bit/s to 115.2 kbit/s dependent on the
baudrateof X.21 or G.703.1 interface). Interference-free con-
nection to the protection device is achieved by means of a multi-
mode ber-optic cable, with ST connectors at the CC-XG. The
10
maximum optical transmission distance is 1.5 km (0.93 mile).
The CC-XG should be mounted or installed respectively near the
DCE (data communication equipment) in the same cubicle frame
or at least in the same room. The electrically connectable dis-
11
tance should be as short as possible; a few meters are favorable.
The data transfer between the protection devices is realized as
a point-to-point connection that is bit-transparent. Data must be 12
exchanged via dedicated communication channels within the
same communication system.
13
14
*) in preparation 15
Applications, functions, technical data
Application
1 Synchronous serial data exchange between

two devices from same type:
SIPROTEC 4 : distance protection with
2 teleprotection and differential protection

(7SA52/6,7SD52/53/61); devices have to be
equipped with optical module FO5.
Fig. 13/67 Connection of two protection devices via a communication network linked
SIPROTEC 5 : all device types
with 7XV5662-0AA00 in synchronous or asynchronous mode.
possible(e.g.7SD8/A8/L8); devices have
3 to be equipped with USART-AD-1FO or
USART-AE-2FO.
Technical data
Asynchronous serial data exchange
4 between two devices from same type:

SIPROTEC 3 : differential protection
DC 24 to 250 V 20 %
(7SD51). Binary signal transmitter, AC 115 to 230 V 20 %
SICAM I/O-Unit: I/O Mirror, bidirectional
Power consumption Approx. 2,5 W, <9,5 VA
5 transmission of binary signals e.g. for
teleprotection (7XV5653, 7XV5673). LEDs
4 LEDs
LED 1 Red: Error and loop mode
6 Functions LED 2 -Green: the device operates in synchronous mode.

-Yellow: the device operates in asynchronous mode.
The protection unit is optically linked to LED 3 -Green: the device operates in synchronous mode
the CC-XG, which makes interference-free -Yellow: the device operates in asynchronous mode.
7 data transfer between the CC-XG and the

protection unit possible. The communi-
LED 4 - Green: The device communicates via the G.703.1
interface.
cation converter is located close to the -Yellow: The device communicates via the X.21 interface.
communication device. It adapts the FO
active interface of the protection relay to Connectors
8 the electrical specications of the commu-
nication network interface. The interface
Power supply 2-pole screw-type terminal
Alarm/ready contact 3-pole make/break contact
types optionally X.21/RS422 or G.703.1 Serial G.703.1 interface 9 pole SUB-D connector for 4-pole receive and
can be set by a push-button at the top of transmit line
9 the device. The required transmission rate
is automatically detected and set by the
X.21 interface 15-pin SUB-D connector for electrical X.21/ RS422
interface
CC-XG. FO cable 820 nm, 2 ST connectors for TD and RD for
62.5/125 m multi-mode FO
Data transfer between the protection units
10 is effected on the basis of a point-to-point
connection, furthermore it is a synchro- Housing
(max. distance to protection unit 1.5 km/0.93 mile)
nous, bit-transparent transmission via the Steel sheet housing Dimensions 188 55 120 mm (W H D)
communication network. Weight Approx. 0.8 kg
11 Degree of protection
For snap-on mounting onto 35 mm
According to EN 60529: IP41
EN 50022 rail
12
13
14
15
Operating modes of CC-XG 7XV5662-0AA00

Synchronous operation with 7SA52/6,7SD52/53/61; and all SIPROTEC 5 types possible e.g. 7SD8/A8/L8
G.703.1: Interface selectable by push-button

1
Setting in the protection unit Automatic setting in CC-XG
64 kbit/s per parameter 64 kbit/s
X.21/RS422: Interface selectable by push-button

2
Setting in the protection unit Automatic setting in CC-XG:
128 kbit/s per parameter
256 kbit/s per parameter
128 kbit/s
256 kbit/s
3
Asynchronous operation with 7SD51, 7XV5653/7XV5673 and units with asynchronous serial nterface
(no handshake supported, only serial TxD and RxD signals are supported) 4
G.703.1: Interface selectable by push-button
Setting in protection unit Automatic setting in CC-XG
max. 19.2 kbit/s
X.21/RS422: Interface settable by push-button

64 kbit/s
5
Setting in protection unit Automatic setting in CC-XG
max. 19.2 kbit/s async. 64 kbit/s
max. 38.4 kbit/s async. 128 kbit/s 6
7

Communication converter for X.21 / RS422 / G.703.1 interface 7XV5662 - 0AA00
Converter to synchronous or asynchronous serial coupling of protection units with optical inputs/
outputs with ST connector to communication devices with electrical X.21/RS422 or G.703.1 interface.
Connection to protection unit via FO cable for 62.5/125 m and 820 nm wavelength,
max. distance 1.5 km (0.93 mile), ST connectors
9
Electrical with X.21/RS422 (15-pin SUB-D connector) or G.703.1 (9 pole SUB-D connector)
Automatic detection and setting of baud rate. Interface type selectable by push-button.
For synchronous operation with 7SD52/53, 7SD61, 7SA52, 7SA6, and all SIPROTEC 5 protection
relays e.g. 7SD8, 7SA8 and 7SL8. For asynchronous operation with 7SD51, Binary signal transmitter,
7XV5653/7XV5673 or serial devices
10
11
12
13
14
15
10
11
12
13
14
15
7XV5662-0AC00 / 7XV5662-0AC01 communication converter for pilot wires
Function overview
Optical interface with ST connector for connection to the 1
LSP2460-afp.tif
protection unit
Distance: 1.5 km with 62.5/125 m multi-mode FO cable
between CC-CO and the protection unit
Electrical interface to the pilot wire (line) with 2 screw-type 2
terminals. 5 kV isolated
Synchronous data exchange for 7SD52, 7SD6, 7SA6 and 7SA52
via pilot wire (typ. 15 km) (CC-CO version -0AA00)
Asynchronous data exchange for 7SD51, 7XV5653 or other 3
units with asynchronous interface (CC-CO version -0AA01)
(typ. 15 km)
Fig. 13/68 Communication converter for pilot wires Loop test function selectable by jumpers in CC-CO
Master or slave mode of the CC-CO selectable by jumper (one
4
master and one slave device required at the end of the pilot
Description
wire, factory presetting: master mode)
The communication converter copper (CC-CO) is a peripheral
device linked to the protection device which enables serial data
alarm contact
5
exchange between two protection relays. It uses a single pair of
copper wires (pilot wire) that may be part of a telecommunica-
tions cable or of any other suitable symmetrical communications
cable (no PuApin cable). At the opposite side, the data are
6
converted by a second communication converter so that they
can be read by the second protection device. The communica-
tion converters (master/slave) thus allow two protection devices
to communicate synchronously and to exchange large data 7
volumes over considerable distances. Typical applications are
the protection interfaces of differential protection and distance
protection of the devices 7SD5, 7SD6, 7SA52 and 7SA6, where
7XV5662-0AC00 must be used (synchronous connection with
128 kbit/s). Should asynchronous serial data of differential
8
protection 7SD5 or of the binary signal transducer 7XV5653
be transmitted, the device 7XV5662-0AC01 must be used
(asynchronous from 300 bit/s to 38.2 kbit/s).
9
Interference-free connection to the protection device is achieved
by means of a multi-mode ber-optic cable, with ST connectors
at the CC-CO. The maximum optical transmission distance is
1.5 km (0.93 mile). The data transfer between the protection
devices is realized as a point-to-point connection that is bit-
10
transparent. Data must be exchanged via dedicated pilot wires,
not via switching points.
11
12
13
14
15
Application, functions
Application
1 The CC-CO can be used for two

applications.
One application is the synchronous serial
data exchange (converter version
2 0AA00) between SIPROTEC 4 differential
relays (7SD52, 7SD6) and/or the serial
teleprotection between distance relays
(7SA6 and 7SA52). The relays have to be
3 equipped with an optical 820 nm plug-in
module FO5.
Another application is the transmission of
asynchronous serial data via pilot wires
4 to the line differential protection relay
7SD51 or the binary signal transmitter Fig. 13/69
7XV5653. Other serial devices may also
be used.
5 If the maximum distance between the
protection units is longer than spanned
by two CC-CO, the converters can be
cascaded (see Fig. 13/70). A power supply
6 between the two master units is required.
If the isolation level is higher than 5 kV
(provided by the pilot wire inputs of the
units), external isolation transformers
7 (barrier transformers) can be used on

both sides. These transformers offer 20 kV
isolation voltage and thus help to avoid
hazardous high voltages at the inputs of
the CC-CO, which might be induced by a
8 short-circuit from a parallel power line or
cable.
9 Fig. 13/70
Functions The measured characteristics are used as parameters that will be

adhered to for optimal data transfer. Digital data transfer makes
10 The protection unit is optically linked to the CC-CO, which makes a low insulation level of the pilot wire possible, because no high
interference-free data transfer between the CC-CO and the voltages are produced on the pilot wire during short-circuit
protection unit possible. The communication converter is located conditions.
close to the pilot wire. It converts serial data of the protection
11 unit into a frequency-modulated signal. This signal is transmit-
Data transfer between the protection units is effected on the
basis of a point-to-point connection, furthermore it is a synchro-
ted via one pair of copper wires of a pilot wire/communication nous, bit-transparent transmission. Due to the telegram-backed
line (bi-directional, full duplex operation). data exchange, mal-operation is ruled out.
12 By means of jumpers, one unit is dened as master and the

other unit as slave. In a training during commissioning,
the electrical characteristics of the pilot wire are measured
by pressing a pushbutton, and the CC-COs are tuned to these
characteristics.
13
14
15
Technical data

1
DC 24 to 250 V 20 %
AC 115/230 V 20 % without switchover
LEDs
4 LEDs
2
LED 1 Red: Line activation
LED 2 Yellow: Line transparent
LED 3 Yellow: Data transfer 3
LED 5 Green: Power ON
Connectors
Power supply
Alarm/ready contact
2-pole screw-type terminal
3-pole make/break contact
4
Pilot wire 2-pole for pilot-wire connection
5-kV isolated inputs
FO cable 820 nm, 2 ST connectors for TxD and RxD for 62.5/125 m multi-mode FO
(max. distance to protection unit 1.5 km) 5
Pushbutton
Measuring and training of parameters of the pilot wire
Housing
Aluminum die-cast housing Dimensions 188 x 56 x 120 mm (W H D)
6
Degree of protection According to EN 60529: IP41
For snap-on mounting onto 35 mm EN 50022 rail 7
Operating mode
Synchronous operation with 7XV5662-0AC00 for 7SD52, 7SD6, 75A52 and 7SA6
Setting in the protection unit: 128 kbit/s per parameter
Setting in CC-CO: 128 kbit/s. No setting required 8
Asynchronous operation with 7XV5662-0AC01 for 7SD51, 7XV5653 and units with asynchronous serial interface (no handshake
supported, only serial TxD and RxD signals are supported)
Max. baud rate for protection unit: 38.4 kbit/s
Max. baud rate for CC-CO 128 kbit/s.
No setting required 9
Max. distance with pilot wire AWG 22 / 0.33 mm2 / 51.7 / km: max. 11 km
AWG 26 / 0.13 mm2 / 137 / km: max. 4.5 km
Shielded twisted pair (STP) recommended. Max. loop resistance: 1400
Attenuation < 40 dB at 80 kHz 10

11
Communication converter for pilot wires 7XV5662 - 0AC0
Converter for synchronous or asynchronous serial coupling of protection units with optical
12
inputs/outputs with ST connector to conventional pilot wires. 5-kV isolation of unit analog inputs
towards the pilot wires.
Connection to protection unit via FO cable for 62.5/125 m and 820 nm wavelength,
max. distance 1.5 km, ST connectors
Synchronous serial data 128 kbit/s
13
Asynchronous serial data rate max. 57.2 kbit/s
For synchronous operation with 7SD52, 7SD6, 7SA6, 7SA52 0
For asynchronous operation with 7SD51, 7XV5653 for other units 1 14
15
10
11
12
13
14
15
7XV5662-0AD00 two-channel serial communication converter G.703.6
Function overview
Interference-free protection data transfer of two independent

serial data signals, selectable either in synchronous or asyn-
1
LSP2898.tif
chronous mode.
PC interface for operation of devices at the remote line end.
Network interface as E1 or T1 format for connection to 2
multiplexer.
Wide-range power supply from DC 24 V to 250 V and
AC 115 / 230 V with failsafe relay.
Indication of the data exchange via LED 3
Integrated commissioning aid (loop test)
Fig. 13/71 Communication converter 4

Description
The CC-2M communication converter is used for serial data 5

transmission over long distances via a communication network.
It converts synchronous or asynchronous serial 820 nm optical
input signals at inputs FO1 and FO2 to a network interface and
again returns these signals at the remote terminal via the latter's 6
interfaces. FO1 and FO2 may be congured independently for
either synchronous or asynchronous operation, but must be set
to the same operating mode at both ends. In synchronous mode,
the interface should only be used for exchanging the protection
data of the 7SD5 / 7SD6 differential protection or 7SA52 / 7SA6
7
distance protection and is precongured for 512 kbit/s. In
asynchronous mode, the interface can be used for connection of
devices with baud rates between 1.2 to 115.2 kbit/s. A further
asynchronous electrical RS232 interface is provided for max.
8
115.2 kbit/s. It provides for the connection of a serial PC interface
with DIGSI and thereby the operations interface to SIPROTEC
devices at the remote end. The G.703.6 network interface is
provided in the form of 4-way screw terminals and can be con- 9
gured as a 2-Mbit/s interface with European E1 format or as a
1.544-Mbit/s interface in the American T1 format. All settings of
the device are made with jumpers, so that no special PC software
is required. 10
11
12
13
14
15
Application
Application
1 Two protection devices e.g. 7SD52 /

7SD610 differential protection or
7SA52 / 7SA6 distance protection,
exchange protection data via FO1.
2 Interference-free data exchange is
performed via the communication
network, the devices being connected
synchronously with 512 kbit/s (con-
3 nection 1; see Fig. 13/72). Protection
remote control with DIGSI is connected
to FO2 of the converter via a 7XV5450
mini star-coupler. This port provides the
serial connection to the other substation
4 with a PC on which DIGSI is installed. In
this way, the remote protection devices
can be remotely interrogated via FO2
(connection 2). The baud rate is optimally
5 set to 57.6 kbit/s for SIPROTEC 4 devices,
so that there is no difference from local
operation. The data of the devices on the
other substation can be changed and read
6 out during commissioning and operation.
Alternatively, it is possible to connect a
substation control system or additional
protection data transmission to FO2.
7 This makes for optimum use of the
1.544/2 Mbit/s transmission channel for
two separate serial connections. In addi-
tion, an asynchronous serial connection is
8 available via the RS232 interface, which
can be used to temporarily operate
devices of the other substation with
DIGSI. Fig. 13/72 Protection data transmission and remote control of a substation
9 via a communication network
10
11
12
13
14
15
Technical data
Connections
1
FO 1 / 2 ST plug / 820 nm for 50 /125 m or 62.5 /125 m multi-mode FO cable (max. 1.5 km)
RS232 For asynchronous connection from 1.2 115.21 kbit/s
Power supply
Fail safe relay
2-pole screw-type terminal
3-pole screw-type terminal with NC/NO contact
2
Network E1/T1 4-pole screw-type terminal
Housing
Aluminium housing 188 56 120 mm for mounting on 35 mm rail mounting according to EN 50032
weight 0.8 kg. Protection class according to EN 60529: IP41
3
Power supply
Wide range DC 24 to 250 V and AC 115/230 V, 50/60 Hz
Displays
4
4 LEDs
Green Power supply
Red Fault alarm
2 yellow Data transfer 5

Two-channel serial 1.544/2 Mbit/s communication converter 7XV5662 - 0AD00
7
Conversion of 2 independent serial FO interfaces with synchronous or asynchronous data to a
E1 network interface with 2 Mbit/s (G.703.6) or T1 network interface (1.544 Mbit/s).
Two independent serial optical input channels with ST connectors and 820 nm for multi-mode
FO cable for a max. of 512 kbit/s /115.2 kbit/s for synchronous/asynchronous data.
An electrical serial RS232 interface with a max. 115.2 kbit/s constructed as a 9-pin SUB-D socket for
connection with DIGSI 7XV5104 cable.
8
Connection from multiplexer to the E1/T1 network interface via a 4-poles crew-type terminal.
Wide-range power supply of DC 24 V to 250 V and AC 115/230 V. A make/break fail safe contact for
power supply faults or interruption of the data connection. All settings are made with jumpers in the
device (presetting for E1 and synchronous serial data input). 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
10
11
12
13
14
15
7XV5700 RS232 RS485 converter
Function overview
Minimum baud rate: 9600 baud 1

Maximum baud rate: 115 kbaud
No setting of baud rate necessary
Compact plug casing
Power supply via plug in PSU
2
Maximum 31 relays at RS485 bus
Complete set for connecting 1 relay to RS485 bus
LSP2027-afp.tif
3
5
Fig. 13/73 RS232 RS485 converter
6
Description
Up to 31 SIPROTEC 4 relays with an electrical, bus-capable RS485

interface to a PC for centralized control can be connected via the 7
RS232RS485 converter.
The converter is housed in an expanded plug casing. The inter-
faces are connected to 25-pin female connectors. The auxiliary
voltage is supplied via a plug-in power supply unit attached to
8
the side. Auxiliary voltages of AC 110 or 230 V make operation
with all common AC networks possible.
A twisted and shielded cable with two wires is required for the
RS485 bus. The protection relays are connected to the bus in
9
series. Data transmission at a speed of 19.2 kbaud with a bus
length of up to approximately 1000 m is possible.
The converter, plug-in power supply unit and the connecting 10
cable to the rst relay are included in the scope of supply.
11
12
13
14
15
Applications, functions
4
Fig. 13/74 Protection units connected to the RS485 bus
Note
The converter may not be used with a substationmodem due to non-existing isolation.
5 It is recommended to use the 7XV5650 and 7XV5651 converters in conjunction with the substation modem.
Applications No handshake signals are being processed during communica-

6 The RS232RS485 converter allows up to 31 SIPROTEC 4
tion. This means that data sent by the PC are mirrored, which
may cause problems in special applications.
protection relays with electrical busable RS485 interfaces to be
Connections
connected to a PC notebook.
7 The converter is housed in an expanded plug casing. The
The PC is connected to the converter by means of a DIGSI cable
e.g. 7XV5100-2.
interfaces are connected to 25 pin female connectors. The
RS485 interface has a terminating resistor. The auxiliary voltage A twisted and shielded cable with two wires is required for the
is supplied via a plug-in power supply unit attached to the side. RS485 bus. The conductor cross section has to be adapted to the
8 Auxiliary voltages of AC 110 V or 230 V make operation with all
common AC networks possible.
ring cable lugs and the SUB-D connectors. The individual wires
protruding from the shield should be kept as short as possible.
The shield is connected to the housing ground at both ends. The
protection units are connected in series to the bus. The shield
9 Functions
between the converter and the protection units, or between the
protection units, is connected at both sides. Whenever substan-
tial cable lengths or high baud rates are involved, a terminating
The converter works according to the master/slave principle.
resistor of 220 ohm should be applied between signal lines A
In idle state, the RS232 interface is inactive while the RS485
and B at the last protection unit. Data transmission at a speed
10 interface is switched to the receiving mode. During communica-
tion, the PC (master) sends data to the RS232 interface, which
of 19.2 kbit/s, with a bus length of up to approx. 1000 m, is
possible.
are transmitted (half duplex) to the protection unit (slave) by the
converter at the RS485 interface. After data transmission, the
11 RS485 interface is once again switched to the receiving mode.

Vice versa, data supplied by the protection unit are sent back by
the converter to the RS232 interface and to the PC.
12
13
14
15
Technical data
Design 1
Plug chassis Plastics
Dimensions 63 94 16 mm (W H D)
Power supply
IP20
2
Power supply AC 110 or 230 V
Via Plug-in power supply unit
Electrical interfaces 3
Type RS232 to RS485 (non-isolated)
Assignment See Fig. 13/74
CE conformity, standards
This product is in conformity with the Conformity is proved by tests performed by
4
directive of the Council of the European Siemens AG in accordance with the generic standards
Communities on the approximation of the EN 50081-1 and EN 50082-2.
laws of the Member States relating to the
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Council
Directive 2004/108/EG previous 89/336/EEC).
5

7XV5700 RS232 RS485 converter 7XV5700 - 00
7
Via plug-in auxiliary power supply unit (PSU) 230 V / 50 Hz AC 0
Via plug-in auxiliary PSU 110 V / 60 Hz AC 1
Connecting cable
8
With RS485 connecting cable for 7SJ60, 7RW60, 7SD6, 7SV60, length 1 m A
With RS485 connecting cable for SIMEAS Q and SIPROTEC 4, length 1 m B
With RS485 connecting cable for SIMEAS T, length 1 m
Without RS232 connecting cable
C
A
9
With RS232 connecting cable 7XV5100-2 for PC / notebook, 9 pin B
With RS232 adaptor, 25-pin connector (male) to 9-pin connector (female) for PC / notebook C
10
11
12
13
14
15
10
11
12
13
14
15
7XV5710 USB RS485 converter cable
Function overview
Compact connector housing 1

USB 2.0 /1.1 interface Type A
RS485 interface 9-pin SUB-D
Max. bus length 800 m
Termination resistances switchable
2
Baudrates 300 to 115000 baud
Indicated data transfer (data LED)
Protocol transparency (not only for PROFIBUS) 3
Power supply via USB connector (no galvanic separation)
Compatible with 7XV5103 bus system (with gender changer
LSP2896.tif
9-pin female / female)
4
Fig. 13/75 USB RS485 converter cable

5
Description
The USB converter cable with its special pin assignment allows
6
temporary connection of up to 31 Siemens protection devices
having an electrical RS 485 interface to a PC with a USB interface
for direct or central control with DIGSI 4. 7
The converter is connected directly to the PC via a standard USB
connector (type A). The RS485 connector (9-pin SUB-D male) may
be used for direct connection to SIPROTEC 4 devices with RS485
interface modules. To connect individual compact devices with
an RS485 interface on terminals, e.g. 7SJ600, 7SD600, 7RW600,
8
etc., the 7XV5103-2AA00 or -3AA00 adapter is required. Using
the gender changer (female-female), which is included, the
converter may also be connected to the 7XV5103 bus system,
which enables communication with all the devices connected to
9
the bus. Because the cable includes a switchable bus termination,
it may be connected at either end or in the middle of the bus.
The converter draws all the power it needs via the USB interface
of the PC. 10
11
12
13
14
15
Application
6 Fig. 13/76 PRS485 bus with USB converter cable 7XV5710 and several SIPROTEC devices (connection diagram)
Application Termination of the RS485 bus

7 Data transfer
The RS485 bus is a two-wire bus (half duplex) over which up to
32 devices (participants) can exchange their data on the master/
Before the converter cable is rst used, a USB driver must be slave principle. All devices are connected to the bus in line (not
installed from the CD supplied. The driver creates a new virtual in star or ring topology). At the rst and last devices, a 220-
8 COM port, which may then be selected by the application, e.g. bus terminating resistor is connected between pin 3 (A) and
pin 8 (B), irrespective of whether this is a master or slave device.
DIGSI 4. The converter works in half-duplex mode on the master/
slave principle. The SIPROTEC protection devices are preferably connected to the
bus as a slave behind a master, e.g. 7XV5710 or 7XV5650/51
9 In the quiescent state, the USB interface is inactive and the
RS485 interface is ready to receive. For communication, the PC, RS484 converter. In these converters (1st device) the terminating
resistor may be implemented by additional pull-up/pull-down
acting as the master, transmits its data to the USB interface,
which in turn forwards the data from the converter at the RS485 resistors via DIL switches (S1, S2). The low-resistance pull-up/
interface to the protection device (slave). Following this, the pull-down resistors are essential in various SIPROTEC bus applica-
10 RS485 interface is switched back to receive. Data coming from
the protection is now transmitted in the other direction to the
tions, i.e. the use of other converters may result in problems.
In the protection devices, the terminating resistor must only
USB interface and PC by the converter. A data LED indicates be activated at the last device on the bus using the jumpers
when data transfer is active. provided for that purpose. If this is not possible in the device,
11 Connection of the compact devices, e.g. 7SJ600 with termi-
an external terminating resistor, e.g. 7XV5103-5AA00 must be
applied behind the last device (see Fig. 13/76).
nals (without bus cables 7XV5103)
In this example, the terminating resistors of the converter cable
A shielded twisted pair (STP) cable must be used for the RS485 are active (default), the terminating resistors that are available
12 bus. The conductor cross-section must be suitable for termina-
tion with ring lugs or SUB-D connectors. The protection devices
at some of the protection devices remain inactive. The bus is
terminated after the last device with the 7XV5103-5AA00 bus
are connected to the bus in line (not in star or ring topology). terminating connector or an external resistor (220 W). If the last
The core ends protruding from the shield should be kept as short protection device has a switchable terminating resistor, this may
13 as possible.
The shield must be connected to the housing ground at both
also be activated to ensure termination.
ends. At the last protection device, a 220- terminating resis-

tor is connected between data cores A and B.
14
15
4
Fig. 13/77 Central operation via the RS485 bus
Application example For the connection of individual compact protection devices with 5
the RS485 interface on terminals e.g. 7SJ600, 7SD600, 7RW600,
A number of SIPROTEC 3 and 4 protection devices can be
etc.., the adapter cable 7XV5103-2AA00 or the adapter
centrally operated via their interface with DIGSI via the 7XV5710
7XV5103-3AA00 is required (see Fig. 13/77).
USB converter cable. Suitable cables and adap-ters are available
for the various connection types of the SIPROTEC devices. The converter cable must only be used on a non-permanent
6
For more information, please refer to catalog sheet 7XV5103. basis because of the lack of galvanic separation. For permanent
SIPROTEC 4 devices with an RS485 interface may be directly operation, the FO converters 7XV5652 and 7XV5650/51 should
connected and operated with DIGSI 4. be used. The FO conductor ensures complete galvanic separation
between PC and SIPROTEC devices. Corresponding applications 7
may be found at: www.siprotec.com/accessories/7XV56
Technical data
8
Product USB converter cable 7XV5710-0AA00
Driver
Installation
Included on CD or on the Internet at: www.siprotec.com/accessories/7XV5710
Plug & Play
9
Cable length 1.8 m
USB interface Virtual COM port
Connection 1
Connection 1 pin assignment
USB 2.0 (1.1) connector type A
Pin 1 Vcc
10
Pin 2 D-
Pin 3 D+
Connection 2
Pin 4 GND
SUB-D 9-pin connector (male) with securing screws 11
Connection 2 pin assignment Pin 3 Tx / Rx- (A)
Pin 5 GND
Pin 8 Tx / Rx+ (B)
Terminating resistors
All other pins are not connected (nc)
Selectable (S1, S2 ON = terminating resistor selected)
12
+5 V Pin 3 = 390
Pin 3 Pin 8 = 220
Pin 8 Pin 5 = 390
Connection 2 protection Receiver: 15 kV human body model
6 kV IEC 1000-4-2, contact discharge
13
12 kV IEC 1000-4-2, air-gap discharge
Permitted: up to 128 receivers on the bus True-fail-safe receiver
-7 V ... +12 V common-mode range
Thermal protection against output short circuit 14
Driver: 9 kV human body model
Slew-rate limited for errorless data transmission
-7 V ... +12 V common-mode range
Current limiting
Thermal shutdown for driver-overload protection
15
Product USB converter cable 7XV5710-0AA00
1 Handshake
TX/RX switchover
None
Automatic
Serial data transmission channels Half-duplex 2-wire
Power supply +5 V via USB (max. 80 mA)
Module logs on with 96 mA at the USB
2 Max. 38 mA ready (converter on, no data transmission)
Max. 80 mA full-duplex 4-core operation, (max. data rate)
Serial transmission rates 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bits/s
3 Status indication
Tx and Rx - 3 mm LED red
-5 up to +70C
Driver software Windows 98, Windows 98 SE, Windows 2000, ME, XP, Vista 32/64, Windows 7 32/64.
Certication No administrator rights required.
4 Application
CE-compliant / RoHS-compliant
Non-permanent installation with SIPROTEC devices
6
Fig. 13/78 68 USB converter cable with connector.
Default switch position:
7 S1+S2ON = terminating resistor active

Dimensions: 75 32 15 (l w h)

USB RS485 converter cable 7XV5710 - 0AA00
9 USB 2.0 /1.1 with connector type A to RS485 with 9-pin SUB-D male connector,
pin assignment for SIPROTEC 4 and SIMEAS Q, bus termination switchable,
power supply via USB interface, incl. 9-pin female-female gender changer and driver CD
For the connection of individual compact protection devices with the RS485 interface on terminals,
10 e.g.. 7SJ600, 7SD600, 7RW600, etc., the 7XV5103-2AA00 adapter cable or the 7XV5103-3AA00
adapter is required
11
12
13
14
15
7XV5820 industrial modem and modem-router with switch
LSP2884.tif
LSP2885.tif
LSP2883.tif
3
Modem 56k / ISDN TA Modem /ISDN Router Pocket Modem / ISDN

5
Fig. 13/79 Industrial modems
6
Description With the same analog modem Pocket 56k in the ofce it pos-
sible to establish a connection to SIPROTEC 4 devices with EN100
interfaces in a local Ethernet network using the rail-mounted
Depending on the available infrastructure and transmission
requirements, various modems and routers are available for the modem router MoRoS Modem 56k in the substation. 7
remote communication with SIPROTEC protection devices using Using the digital modem Pocket ISDN as a desktop device in the
DIGSI. ofce and the ISDN TA as a rail-mounted device in the substa-
tion ensures secure serial data communication with SIPROTEC 3
The existing infrastructure may consist of analog or digital (ISDN)
transmission networks, which may be private (internal telephone devices using 8E1 (with parity bit) up to 19.2 kbit/s, or with 8
system) or a leased line. This may determine the corresponding SIPROTEC 4 devices using 8N1 up to 57.6 kbit/s.
combinations of the modems or routers. A suitable combination With the same digital modem Pocket ISDN in the ofce, it is
usually consists of a desktop device with plug adapter in the
ofce, and a rail-mounted device in the substation (see Applica-
also possible to communicate with SIPROTEC 4 devices with an
EN100 interface module in a local Ethernet network using a rail- 9
tion). The rail-mounted devices may be operated with an optional mounted ISDN router MoRoS ISDN in the substation.
wide-range power supply adapter with all alternating current
networks as well as station batteries. Other combinations, especially with devices from other manufac-
The desktop analog modem Pocket 56k as the ofce device and
turers are strictly not recommended.
10
the rail-mounted Modem 56k in the substation ensure a secure All versions are suitable for application in control systems, and
serial data communication with SIPROTEC 3 devices using 8E1 substations as well as in areas of energy supply and distribution.
(with parity bit) up to 19.2 kbit/s, or with SIPROTEC devices using The modems can be deployed internationally (certicates of
8N1 up to 57.6 kbit/s. approval see Technical Data). As a rule, no certication is
required for use in internal networks.
11
12
13
14
15
Application
6
Fig. 13/80 Remote control of SIPROTEC 3 and 4 devices over INSYS Pocket to INSYS Modem, mini star-coupler or RS485 bus with DIGSI 4
7
Application modem with the 7XV5652 RS232-FO converter is preferably
located in a communication or control room while the 7XV5450
Example 1: Remote operation of SIPROTEC 3 devices via star coupler or 7XV5650/51 FO-RS485 converter is located in
8 modem the rst protection cubicle. If the protection devices are to be
controlled centrally in the substation using a notebook, this is
This application example illustrates remote operation of achieved by plugging a DIGSI cable into the rst star coupler,
SIPROTEC 3 protection devices with an optical interface and which disables the optical interface and enables the RS232
9 compact protection devices with an RS485 interface using

analog modems (7XV5820-1 and -5) or digital ISDN modems
connection.
Communication with the modems is transparent. Secure data
(7XV5820-2 and -6). Connection to protection or bay control
RTUs via an optical interface is achieved with a star conguration transfer to the SIPROTEC 3 devices is achieved with the data
using cascadable star couplers. The compact protection devices format 8E1 (with parity bit). The data transmission rate depends
10 with RS485 interface are connected via a FO-RS485 converter
and the RS485 bus system 7XV5103. SIPROTEC 4 devices may
on the slowest device (9.6 kbit/s or 19.2 kbit/s) and must be
set to be equal for all devices. The SIPROTEC 4 devices can then
be connected optically or electrically, depending on the vailable only be operated with this data rate which is relatively slow for
service interface SIPROTEC 4.
11 To ensure secure lightning protection, galvanic separation

between the substation modem and the protection devices must
be implemented by means of an optical barrier. The substation
12
13
14
15
Application
6
Fig. 13/81 Remote control of SIPROTEC 4 devices over INSYS Pocket to INSYS Modem, mini star-coupler or RS485 bus with DIGSI 4
7
Example 2: Remote operation of SIPROTEC 4 devices via If the protection devices are to be centrally controlled in the
modem substation, an additional star coupler must be used (A2). By
plugging the DIGSI cable into the rst star coupler, the optical
This application example illustrates remote operation of
SIPROTEC 4 devices with an optical or RS485 interface via analog
interface is disabled and the RS232 connection is established.
If no mini star coupler is used, central operation is only possible
8
modems (7XV5820-1 and -5) or the very much faster digital
via the electrical interface of the RS232-FO converter. The
ISDN modems (7XV5820-2 and -6). Connection of the protection
modem plug must be disconnected for this purpose.
or RTU devices with optical interface is achieved via cascadable
star couplers. The devices with RS485 interfaces are connected
via the FO-RS485 converter and the RS485 bus system 7XV5103.
A secure communication via the modems is possible with the
standard data format 8N1, with data compression and error
9
correction. The data transmission rate is determined by the
To ensure secure lightning protection of the RS485 bus, galvanic
slowest device (38.4 kbit/s or 57.6 kbit/s) and must be set to be
separation should always be implemented between the substa-
tion modem and the protection devices by means of an optical
the same on all devices.
10
barrier. The substation modem with the RS232-FO converter
7XV5652 is preferably located in a communication or control
room while the rst FO-RS485 converter 7XV5651/50 is located
in the rst protection cubicle (A1). 11
12
13
14
15
Application
6
Fig. 13/82 Remote control of SIPROTEC 4 devices with EN100 Ethernet module with DIGSI 4 over INSYS Pocket Modem / ISDN to INSYS Modem / ISDN
7 router with switch and external optical / electrical switch
Example 3: Remote operation of SIPROTEC 4 devices with Remote connection from the ofce to the substation is
Ethernet interfaces via a modem-router established by means of a password-protected DUN connection
8 This application example shows remote operation of
under Windows. The connection is then transparent and the
protection devices can be operated with DIGSI 4 in the local
SIPROTEC 4 protection devices with an optical or electrical
subnet with their own IP addresses.
EN100 Ethernet interface via an analog or digital ISDN ofce
modem, (7XV5820-1 or -2), to a modem or digital ISDN router If the protection devices are to be conveniently centrally con-
9 (7XV5820-7 and -8). This router with an integrated 4-way switch
together with the RUGGEDCOM switches connected via a patch
trolled using a notebook in the substation, the notebook with an
Ethernet interface can be logged into the local subnet with
cable form a local subnet. a patch cable.
The protection or RTU devices with optical EN100 interface are Secure communication via modems is performed at 57.6 kbit/s,
10 connected to the RUGGEDCOM switches in a ring structure. The with standard data format 8N1 with data compression and error
protection / RTU devices with an electrical EN100 interface are correction
directly connected to the modem-router and switch or to the
electrical interfaces of the RUGGEDCOM switches by means of
11 double-shielded patch cables. To minimize any possible inter-
ference, the electrical connections with patch cables should be
kept as short as possible.
12
13
14
15
7XV5810-1AA00 and 7XV5820-2AA00 INSYS pocket modem
Description
Data communication in the private, commercial and industrial 1

applications is becoming ever more important.
INSYS Pocket Modem 56k and INSYS Pocket ISDN TA fascinate
LSP2883.tif
with their sophisticated engineering and their shapely compact
metal housing. 2
The devices are ideal as remote stations for our DIN rail series.
4
Fig. 13/83 7XV5810/7XV5820 pocket modem
Technical data
5
Modem 7XV5820-1AA00 7XV5820-2AA00
Network interface, line requirement
Data transmission rate
Analog telephone network
Up to 56 kbits/s
ISDN net, S0/I.430 Euro ISDN DSS1
64 kbit/s
6
Software update Flash Flash
Approvals R & TTE, CTR21 R & TTE, CTR3
Application
Standards
For international use
Developed according to CE directives,
Europe
Developed according to CE directives,
7
manufactured according to ISO 9002 manufactured according to ISO 9002
Features
Conguration Remote conguration, AT commands Local, via PC terminal, remote via ISDN 8
Connection Auto answer mode, hardware-handshake Auto answer mode with optional phone number
Speed adjustable, sleep mode, auto-bauding, verication
display caller ID
Data format 10 and 11 bit: 7E1, 7O1, 7N2, 7E2, 7O2, 8N1,
8E1, 8O1, 8N2
B channel: V.110, X.75, V.120, X.25/X.31,
HDLC (PPP), T70NL, T90NL
9
D channel: 1TR6 DSS1, VNx
Protocols V.92, V.90, V.34+, V.34, V.32bis, V.32, V.23,
V.22bis, V.22, V.21, Bell Norm 103/212,
Fax class 1/2 10
Compression MNP5, V.42 bis, MNP 10, 10 EC, V.44
Error correction MNP 2/3/4 and V.42
Security functions Security call-back, alarm transmission, SMS to xed Access protection via approved phone number
network or as fax over AT command, selective call (accessable), password protection of remote
answer, line-in-use detection, selectable key-abort conguration
11
Electrical features
Power supply DC 9 ... 10 V (with plug power supply AC 230 V) DC 5 V (with plug power supply AC 100 to 230 V)
Consumption Approx. DC 140 mA Max. 100 mA at 5 V / 500 mW 12
Interface to application RS232, 9-pin SUB-D jack RS232, 9-pin SUB-D jack
Interface to network RJ-12 (Western) RJ-45 connector
Physical features
Size in mm (W D H) 71 128 22 71 128 22
13
Temperature range 0 to 55 C 0 to 55 C
Humidity 0 to 95 % (non-condensing) 0 to 95 % (non-condensing)
14
15
7XV5820 INSYS modem 56k Pro, 7XV5820 INSYS ISDN TA Pro
Description
1 With the INSYS Modem 56k Pro any application can be con-
nected to the analog telephone network, which is available
worldwide. The INSYS ISDN 4.0 can easily be connected to the
digital ISDN network.
2 Both modems enhance pure data communication with alarming
LSP2884.tif
and security functions: alarms with a user-dened text as an
SMS, fax or e-mail are triggered by digital inputs. Data connec-
tions (INSYS Modem 56k) and remote control are protected by
3 passwords. The INSYS 56k modem establishes a connection only
to a predened number in response to an incoming call if the
security call-back is activated. Selective call answer allows only
data calls from specied numbers.
4 The digital outputs can be controlled remotely. The INSYS 56k
Fig. 13/84 7XV5820 modem modem controls these outputs by data connection as well as by
DTMF tones from a tone dial phone. The digital outputs can be
congured to display the connections status.
5
Technical data
6 Modem
Network interface
7XV5820-5AA00
2-wire leased or dial-up line
7XV5820-6AA00
S0/1.430 Euro ISDN network, DSS1
Data transmission rate Max. 56 kbit/s Max. 68 kbit/s (channel building 128 kbit/s)
Digital in-/outputs 2 alarm inputs /2 control outputs 2 alarm inputs /2 control outputs
7 Watchdog
Software update
Yes

Flash update
Approvals R & TTE, CTR3
Application Europe
8 Standards Developed according to CE directives

Features
Conguration AT commands via serial line, AT commands, conguration over serial line,
remote conguration remote conguration, CAPI
9 Connection Auto-answer mode, idle connection ctrl, auto-bauding, number storage, hard- / software handshake
International settings, caller ID presentation,
SMS to xed-line telephone network,
xed serial speed, sleep mode
10 Alarm functions Triggered by alarm input or AT command: send SMS, (send fax and collective fax message
7XV5820-5AA00), establish data connection, transmit message over data connection
Output control AT command (local & remote) DTMF AT command, congurator, connection status
Security functions Password protection for connection, remote control and security callback
11 Data formats
Selective call answer, watchdog Number identication (CLIP)
10 and 11 bit: 7E1, 7O1, 7N2, 7E2, 7O2, 8N1, 8E1, 8O1, 8N2
Bit transparent
Protocols, error correction, compression V.32bis, V.32, V.23, V.22, V.22bis, V.21, V.34+, B channel: X.75, X.25 / X.31, HDLC/PPP, V.110,
V.90, V.92, Bell Norm 103/212, Fax Class , V.120 asynchronous;
12 MNP 2/3/4, V.42, MNP 10, MNP 10 EC, D channel: X.31
MNP 5 V.42bis
Electrical features
13 Supply voltage
Current consumption
DC 10 to 60 V
Transmission: 200 mA (at 12 V)
DC 10 to 60 V
40 mA
Standby: 160 mA (at 12 V)
Inuts/outputs SPDT (single-pole double-throw) switches by galvanically isolated relays,
max. voltage DC 30 V / AC 42 V, max. current: DC 1 A / AC 0.5 A
14 Serial line speed 300 bit/s to 115.2 kbit/s 1.2 to 230.4 kbit/s
Physical features
Housing size in mm (W D H) 55 110 75 55 110 75
15 Temperature range
Humidity
0 to 55 C
0 to 95 % (non-condensing)
0 to 70 C

7XV5820-7/-8AA00 Modem-Router-Switch (MoRoS)
Function overview
Integrated communication module

(analog modem or ISDN-TA)
1
Dial-in
Dial-out (dial-on-demand)
4-port switch with 10/100 Mbits/s 2
LSP2885.tif
DHCP server and client
Integrated conguration interface with help function
Authentication for up to 10 users (dial-in) 3
Dialing lter for dial-out
Authentication via PAP, CHAP, MS-CHAP, MS-CHAP 2
Easy conguration
Local or remote conguration
4
Fig. 13/85 7XV5820 Modem-Router-Switch (MoRoS)
Firmware update (local and remote)
2 digital inputs and outputs
Description Buffered RTC (real time clock) 5
Full NAT
Modem-Router-Switch by INSYS combines a modem, a router
and a 4-port switch. The dial-in and dial-out functionality enables DNS relay
remote maintenance and operation of devices in an Ethernet
network.
Serial Ethernet Server1)
VPN1)
6
The MoRoS device is available with an integrated analog modem Firewall1)
or with ISDN-TA. The integrated 4-port switch allows for direct
connection of up to four network devices. The MoRoS device has
an international 56k modem for global application. The congu- 1) version MoRoS PRO only
7
ration of the MoRoS device is easy and fast via a Web interface.
MoRoS by INSYS is a device that combines modem, router and
switch functions for the remote maintenance of Ethernet-enabled 8
products, e.g. PLC, HMI, etc.
Technical data 9
Modem 7XV5820-7 / -8AA00MoRoS Switch
Certications R & TTE, CTR2 (dial-up line), Ports 4
CTR3 (ISDN), CE Operating mode 10/100 Mbits/s for full and half 10
Dial-up line Transmission rate 56 kbits/s duplex operation
ISDN Transmission rate 64 kbits/s Auto detect Automatically recognizes patch and
Conguration Web interface, AT command (via cross-over cables; automatic speed
Web interface), local and remote
Conguration
adjustment
11
Router
Function Dial-in, dial-out Web interface Local/remote
Additional features Digital inputs and outputs,
Authentication 10 users for dial-in, authentication
via PAP, CHAP, MS-CHAP, MS-CHAP 2 rmware update local/remote 12
Dialing lter (dial-out) Filtering of IP addresses and / or Supply
ports
Voltage DC 10 V to 60 V
Conguration Web interface, AT command (via
DHCP server and client

Web interface), local and remote
Power input
Physical features
Approx. 2.5 W (during connection)
13
Watchdog Housing size in mm 70 110 75 mm
(ext. hardware watchdog) Operating temperature 0 to 55 C
RTC (buffered real time clock)
Full NAT
Humidity
Weight
10.58 oz
14
VPN1)
Firewall1)
Serial Ethernet server1) 15
1 7XV5820 modem/modem-router
Analog Pocket Modem 56k

7XV5820 - AA00
Desktop device, with plug-in power supply AC 230 V 1
2 Digital Pocket Modem ISDN 64k

Desktop device, with plug-in power supply AC 100 to 230 V 2
Analog Modem 56k

for DIN rail-mounting, power supply DC 10 to 60 V 5
3 Digital Modem ISDN 64k
for DIN rail-mounting, power supply DC 10 to 60 V 6
Analog Modem-Router
4 with 4-way switch for DIN rail-mounting, power supply DC 10 to 60 V 7
Digital ISDN Router

with 4-way switch for rail-mounting DC 10 to 60 V 8
5 Modem / Modem-Router Accessories 7XV5820 - 0AA10
Data cable from modem to 7XV5300, 7XV5450, 7XV5550, 7XV5652

2 SUB-Dconnector, 9-pin female, length 2 m
6
10
11
12
13
14
15
7XV5850 Ethernet modems for ofce applications
Function overview
DIGSI supports the administration and the setting-up of con-

nections via the Ethernet network.
1
RS232 interfaces for data transfer and conguration of the
modem.
LSP2509.tif
Serial baud rate and data format (RS232) for the terminal 2
devices is selectable from 2400 Bd up to 57.6 kBd with data
format 8N1, 8E1.
An Ethernet interface LAN to the 10/100 Mbit network.
Better security with password protection and IP address 3
selection is possible.
Fig. 13/86 7XV5850 Ethernet modem
4
Description
A control PC and protection units can exchange serial data via

an Ethernet network using two Ethernet modems 7XV5850 and
5
7XV5655. Connection to the Ethernet modem is in each case
made via the asynchronous serial interface of the terminal units.
In the modem, the serial data is packed into the secure IP proto-
col as information data, and is transferred between the modems 6
using the Ethernet connection. Conformity with the standard
and gap-free transmission of serial DIGSI or IEC 60870-5-103/101
telegrams via the network is ensured by the modem which
receives the serial telegram communication and packs the serial
IEC telegrams into blocks for communication via the Ethernet.
7
The data is transmitted in full duplex mode; serial control wires
are not supported. Connection is established between the
IP address of the dialing modem in the ofce and the IP address
of the pick-up modem in the substation, and is congured prior
8
to dialing up with DIGSI by means of AT commands via the
RS232 interface.
The substation modem may be congured to have password
protection, and provides the additional security feature, whereby
9
access is only permitted from dened IP addresses, e.g. only that
of the ofce modem. The modem is accessed with DIGSI Remote
like a normal telephone modem with the exception that instead
of telephone numbers, IP addresses are assigned by the network
10
administrator for each modem.
11
12
13
14
15
Application
1 8
LSA4475-aen.eps
5
6 compact
Fig. 13/87 Operation of various SIPROTEC protection unit generations via Ethernet modems
7
Using the ofce computer and DIGSI 4, both substation 1 and 2
may be dialed up via Ethernet modems. A TCP/IP point-to-point
8 data connection is established between the ofce modem and
corresponding substation modem when dialed up via the net-
work. This is maintained until the ofce modem terminates the
connection. The serial data exchange takes place via this data
9 connection, with the modem converting the data from serial to
Ethernet with full duplex mode. Between the ofce modem and
the ofce PC, the highest baud rate is always used, e.g. 57.6 kB
for SIPROTEC 4 units. The serial baud rate of the substation
modem is adapted to the baud rate required by the protection
10 relays, e.g. substation modem 1 with 57.6 kB for SIPROTEC 4
and substation modem 2 with 9.6 kB for SIPROTEC 3 units. These
settings are only dened once in the modem. The Ethernet
modems are integrated in DIGSI 4 similar to telephone modems.
11 Instead of the telephone number, the preset IP address assigned
to the modem is selected.
If later an Ethernet connection is available in the substation, the
existing modem can be replaced by an Ethernet modem. The
12 entire serial bus structure and cabling may remain unchanged.
13
14
15
Technical data
Connections 1
RS232 interface 9-pin, SUB-D connector
Ethernet 10BaseT, 10/100 Mbit, RJ45
Power supply (see below)
Desktop device for ofce use 7XV5850-0AA00 2
Housing Desktop housing, plastic, charcoal grey, 46 109 74 (W H D) in mm
Supply Wide-range plug-in power supply, auxiliary voltage AC 100 240 V
Scope of supply
With RS232 cable for Notebook/PC. With Ethernet cable (cross-over) 2 m
3
Power Operating voltage o.k.
RS232 TxD Transmitting data to RS232
LAN Tx
Error
Transmitting data to LAN
Error on RS232
4
System RS232 connection established
RS232 RxD Receiving data from RS232
LAN Rx Receiving data from LAN 5
Link LAN LAN connection established

Ethernet Modem 7XV5850 - 0AA00
7
Ethernet modem for serial, asynchronous transmission of data up to 57.6 kbit
via the 10 /100 Mbit Ethernet and conguration software
Desktop device (ofce version)
Connection to Ethernet via RJ45 connector, serial connection SUB-D 9-pin socket
including wide-range power supply AC 100 / 240 V 8
With cross-over Ethernet patch cable 2 m for conguration
With serial connection cable to PC 2 m
10
11
12
13
14
15
10
11
12
13
14
15
Accessories / SCALANCE X-200RNA
SCALANCE X204RNA HSR
Benets
Ideal solution for establishing Industrial Ethernet networks

with high network availability (seamless media redundancy
1
through parallel data transfer in parallel network topologies)
Seamless data transmission in ring-shaped network structures
for high-availability systems (e.g. process automation) 2
Fast and easy diagnosis with LEDs on the device, through the
integral Web server and through signaling contacts
Integration of the SCALANCE X-200RNA network access points
into the existing network management infrastructure through 3
SNMP access
Simple commissioning without mandatory conguring
Module replacement without the need for a programming
device, using the C-PLUG swap media for backing up the 4
conguration data
Fig. 13/88 SCALANCE X204RNA HSR
Overview
Application 5
The SCALANCE X-200RNA Industrial Ethernet network access
The SCALANCE X-200RNA (Redundant Network Access) managed points with HSR functionality enable low-cost connection of
Industrial Ethernet network access devices with HSR functionality
(High-availability Seamless Redundancy Protocol in accordance
non-HSR-enabled terminal devices to ring-shaped networks in
which high availability is demanded. The devices with degree
6
with IEC 62439-3) are used to connect up to two non-HSR- of protection IP20 are designed for operation in the control
enabled terminal devices or network segments to a ring-shaped cabinet.
HSR network structure. They can also be used for simple and
redundant transition from HSR to PRP (Parallel Redundancy Product versions 7
Protocol) network structures. Network access point in plastic enclosure with electrical ports
Electrical or optical connection to stations or network in SCALANCE X204RNA;
accordance with the port type of the devices
Media redundancy thanks to duplicate transmission of frames
for connecting up to two non-HSR-enabled terminal devices
to ring-shaped networks with four electrical ports 8
in ring-shaped networks Network access point in metal enclosure with electrical and
High system availability since frames are sent simultaneously optical ports, as well as a wide-range power supply unit for use
under extended ambient conditions
via two routes in the ring
No reconguration times of the ring-shaped networks are SCALANCE X204RNA EEC;
9
required in the event of an error due to duplicate transmission for connecting up to two non-HSR-enabled terminal devices
of frames in the ring to ring-shaped networks with two electrical terminal device
ports and two optical/electrical combo ports for network
Simple and redundant connection of HSR and PRP network
structures
connection 10
SCALANCE X204RNA EEC;
Redundant 24 V DC power input or wide-range power supply with congurable functionality (PRP or HSR) for connecting
unit, depending on device version up to two non-HSR-enabled terminal devices to ring-shaped
SNMP access, integrated Web server and automatic e-mail networks with two electrical terminal device ports and two 11
transmission function for remote diagnostics and signaling via optical/electrical combo ports for network connection
the network
Features
Device diagnostics with LEDs (power, link status,
data communication)
12
Remote diagnostics possible via signaling contact
(fault signaling contact can be set locally using SET button),
SNMP, and Web browser 13
With its extended ambient conditions, the SCALANCE
X204RNA EEC is suitable for use in electric power substations
and distribution systems (IEC 61850-3, IEEE 1613)
14
15
SCALANCE X204RNA HSR
1 PG/PC/IPC Server
PRP communication
SIMATIC S7-400 with

CP 443-1RNA Server with
SOFTNET-IE RNA
2 SCALANCE
X204RNA
SCALANCE
X204RNA
3 Industrial Ethernet
SCALANCE
XR-300
SCALANCE
XR-300 EEC
HSR communication
SCALANCE SCALANCE
X204RNA X204RNA
4 EEC SCALANCE SCALANCE

X204RNA X204RNA EEC
Protection device
IP camera with HSR 1) Industrial Ethernet
Protection device
5 without HSR 1)
G_IK10_XX_10343
PC
Environment with a
SCALANCE SCALANCE
high EMC load, e.g.
X204RNA X204RNA
low-voltage and
EEC
1) high-voltage switchgear
High-availability Seamless Redundancy Protocol
6 IP camera
Protection device
with HSR 1)
G_IK10_XX_10344
Protection device
without HSR 1)
PC
7 1)
High-availability Seamless Redundancy Protocol
For extended ambient
conditions, e.g. EMC load
8 Fig. 13/89 Seamless, ring-shaped network with

HSR redundancy protocol
Fig. 13/90 Redundant transition from ring-shaped HSR network
structure to parallel PRP network structure by means of
SCALANCE X204RNA
More information
9 Further products and completions in the catalog IK PI. Online version:

http://www.siemens.de/snst
For more information on Redundant Network Access see
http://www.siemens.com/RNA Ofine version:
http://www.siemens.de/snst-download
10 To assist in selecting the right Industrial Ethernet switches as
well as conguration of modular variants, both the SIMATIC NET TIA Selection Tool:
Selection Tool and the TIA Selection Tool are available: http://www.siemens.com/tia-selection-tool

11
SCALANCE X204RNA for HSR networks 6GK5204-0BA00-2MB2
12 SCALANCE X204RNA EEC for HSR networks

SCALANCE X204RNA EEC for both HSR and PRP networks
6GK5204-0BS00-2NA3
6GK5204-0BS00-3PA3
SFP transceivers
SFP991-1 (multi-mode, glass to max. 3 km) 6GK5 991-1AD00-8AA0
13 SFP991-1LH+ (single-mode, glass to max. 70 km, LH+)

SFP991-1LD (single-mode, glass to max. 26 km)
6GK5 991-1AE00-8AA0
6GK5 991-1AF00-8AA0
IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 6GK1 901-1BB10-2A 0
RJ45 plug connector for Industrial Ethernet with a rugged metal housing and integrated insulation-
14 displacement/terminal contacts for connecting Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables, with a

180 cable outlet, for network components and CPs/CPUs with Industrial Ethernet interface
1 pack = 1 unit A
1 pack = 10 unit B
15 1 pack = 50 unit B

Application
The SCALANCE X-200RNA Industrial Ethernet network access 1

devices enable low-cost connection of non-PRP-enabled terminal
equipment to parallel, separate networks in which high avail-
ability is demanded. The devices with degree of protection IP20
are designed for operation in the control cabinet. 2
Product versions
Network access point in plastic enclosure with electrical ports
SCALANCE X204RNA;
for connecting up to two non-PRP-enabled terminal devices
3
to two redundant networks with four electrical ports
Network access point in metal enclosure with electrical and
optical ports, as well as a wide-range power supply unit for use
under extended ambient conditions
4
Fig. 13/91 SCALANCE X204RNA PRP SCALANCE X204RNA EEC;
for connecting up to two non-PRP-enabled terminal devices
Overview
to two redundant networks with two electrical terminal
device ports and two optical/electrical combo ports for
5
network connection
The SCALANCE X-200RNA (Redundant Network Access) managed SCALANCE X204RNA EEC;
Industrial Ethernet network access points with PRP functionality
(Parallel Redundancy Protocol in accordance with IEC 62439-3)
with congurable functionality (PRP or HSR) for connecting
up to two non-HSR-enabled terminal devices to ring-shaped
6
are used to connect up to two non-PRP-enabled terminal devices networks with two electrical terminal device ports and two
or network segments to parallel networks. optical/electrical combo ports for network connection
Electrical or optical connection to stations or networks in
accordance with the port type of the devices
Features 7
Device diagnostics with LEDs (power, link status,
Redundancy thanks to duplicate transmission of frames in two
data communication)
parallel, separate networks
High system availability since frames are sent simultaneously
over two separate networks
Remote diagnostics possible via signaling contact
(signal screen can be set locally using buttons), SNMP, 8
and Web browser
Reconguration times in a subnetwork do not affect the
With its extended ambient conditions, the SCALANCE
propogation time because the frames are transmitted via two
separate networks (seamless redundancy)
X204RNA EEC is suitable for use in power switching and
distribution systems (IEC 61850-3, IEEE 1613) 9
Redundant 24 V DC voltage infeed or wide-range power supply
unit, depending on device version
SNMP access, integrated Web server and automatic e-mail
transmission function for remote diagnostics and signaling via 10
the network
Benets
11
The reconguration time of a subnetwork does not inuence 12
frame transmission
Fast and easy diagnosis with LEDs on the device, through the
integral Web server and through signaling contacts
Integration of the SCALANCE X-200RNA network access
13
devices into the existing network management infrastructure
through SNMP access
Simple commissioning without mandatory conguring
Module replacement without the need for a programming
14
device, using the C-PLUG swap media for backing up the
conguration data
15
1 PG/PC/IPC with Server with

SOFTNET-IE RNA SOFTNET-IE
RNA
2 Industrial
Ethernet
(LAN A)
3 Industrial
Ethernet
(LAN B)
SIPROTEC SCALANCE
4 X204RNA
SIMATIC PC
5 S7-400 with
G_IK10_XX_10333
CP 443-1RNA
6
Fig. 13/92 Seamless, parallel networks with PRP redundancy protocol
7
More information
8 Further products and completions in the catalog IK PI. Online version:
http://www.siemens.de/snst
To assist in selecting the right Industrial Ethernet switches as
well as conguration of modular variants, both the SIMATIC NET Ofine version:
9 Selection Tool and the TIA Selection Tool are available: http://www.siemens.de/snst-download
TIA Selection Tool:
http://www.siemens.com/tia-selection-tool

SCALANCE X204RNA for PRP networks 6GK5204-0BA00-2KB2
11 SCALANCE X204RNA EEC for PRP networks 6GK5204-0BS00-3LA3
SCALANCE X204RNA EEC for both HSR and PRP networks 6GK5204-0BS00-3PA3
SFP transceivers
SFP991-1 (multi-mode, glass to max. 3 km) 6GK5 991-1AD00-8AA0
12 SFP991-1LH+ (single-mode, glass to max. 70 km, LH+) 6GK5 991-1AE00-8AA0
SFP991-1LD (single-mode, glass to max. 26 km) 6GK5 991-1AF00-8AA0
CP 443-1RNA 6GK7 443-1RX00 0XE0
13 RJ45 plug connector for Industrial Ethernet with a rugged metal housing and integrated insulation-
displacement/terminal contacts for connecting Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables, with a
1 pack = 1 unit A
14 1 pack = 10 unit
1 pack = 50 unit
B
B
15
Accessories / SOFTNET-IE RNA
SOFTNET-IE RNA
Benets

1
No additional programming overhead required in the PC
High availability of the overall plant 2
Secures the investment thanks to the use of the existing
applications and the exible application options
Simple integration into the existing network management
systems thanks to the access to the diagnostic data via SNMP 3
as the standard interface
Application 4
Fig. 13/93 SOFTNET-IE RNA The SOFTNET-IE RNA software package enables low-cost con-
nection of PCs with two network interfaces to parallel, separate
Overview
networks in which high availability is demanded.
5
SOFTNET-IE RNA (Redundant Network Access) is the software
for connecting a PC to networks with PRP (Parallel Redundancy
Protocol in accordance with IEC 62439-3) capability 6
High level of plant availability thanks to duplicate transmission
of frames in two parallel, separate networks
Reconguration times in a subnetwork do not affect the
propagation time because the frames are transmitted via two
7
separate networks (seamless redundancy)
Integration in network management systems through support
for SNMP
Conguring tools are included in the scope of delivery of the
8
communication software in each case
9
PG/PC/IPC with
SOFTNET-IE RNA
Server with
SOFTNET-IE
RNA
10
11
Industrial
Ethernet
(LAN A)
Industrial
Ethernet
(LAN B)
SIPROTEC SCALANCE
X204RNA
12
SIMATIC PC
S7-400 with
13
G_IK10_XX_10333
CP 443-1RNA
14
Fig. 13/94 Parallel PRP network structure with SOFTNET-IE RNA

and SCALANCE X204RNA
15
Accessories / SOFTNET-IE RNA
1 SOFTNET-IE RNA
Software for connecting PCs to PRP-enabled networks with integrated SNMP, runtime software,
software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on USB ash drive, Class A
2 SOFTNET-IE RNA V8.1 6GK1 711-1EW08-1AA0
For 32-bit Windows XP;

German/English
Single License for one installation
3
SOFTNET-IE RNA V8.2 6GK1 711-1EW08-2AA0
For 32/64-bit Windows 7 Professional/Ultimate; for 64-bit Windows 2008 Server R2;
4 German/English
Software Update Service 6GK1 711-1EW00-3AL0
5 For 1 year with automatic extension;

requirement: current software version
Upgrade 6GK1711-1EW00-3AE0
6 From V8.1 to V8.2
10
11
12
13
14
15
Accessories / SCALANCE S
SCALANCE S
Benets
Prevents industrial networks against unauthorized access. If nec- 1

essary it is possible with S623 to establish a DMZ (demilitarized
zone) for data exchange between networks without direct access
to the automation network.
With establishing the cell protection concept: 2
Protection of any Ethernet-based automation device,
Protection of several devices with one security module
Reduction of risks, due to net segmentation (creation of secure
communication islands)
3
Secure data transmission between the automation cells
possible
With user-specic rewall rules it is possible to assign also user 4
and not only to devices specic access rights.
Fig. 13/95 SCALANCE S
Overview
Product versions
5
SCALANCE S602
The security modules of the SCALANCE S range can be used to Stateful inspection rewall to protect network segments
protect all devices of an Ethernet network against unauthorized
access. In addition, SCALANCE S612 or SCALANCE S623 also
against unauthorized access 6
Connection via 10/100/1000-Mbit/s ports
protects the data transmission between devices or network
segments (e.g. automation cells) against data manipulation and SCALANCE S612
espionage; they can also be used for secure remote access over
the Internet.
Like S602. Additional 128 VPN tunnels simultaneously possible. 7
Control of the data trafc due to stateful inspection rewall: SCALANCE S623
Protection against operator mistakes Like S612. Additional RJ45 DMZ port (DMZ: "demilitarized
Prevention of unauthorized access zone") for secure connection of, for example, remote main-
tenance modems, laptops, or an additional network. This
8
Prevention of faults and communications overload
yellow port is protected by rewalls from the red and green
Authentication of the communication devices and encryption ports and can also terminate VPNs.
of the data transmission with VPN protects against espionage
and manipulation. 9
Rugged, industry-standard devices (e.g. extended temperature
range, redundant power supply)
Easy and clear conguration with the Security Conguration-
Tool (SCT) 10
The communication is protocol-independent protected
Remote access via the Internet possible without restrictions
and with any provider
11
12
13
14
15
Accessories / SCALANCE S
SCALANCE S
2 Company network
Local
service PC
Remote
SCALANCE Internet service PC
3 Industrial Ethernet S623

Service access
DSL modem
G_IK10_XX_10303
Plant network/
secure automation cell
6
Fig. 13/96 Connection of a local or remote service PC (via Internet access) by use of the DMZ port of the SCALANCE S623
7
More information
8 More information can be found here:
www.siemens.de/industrialsecurity
10

SCALANCE S602 6GK5 602-0BA10-2AA3
12 SOFTNET Security Client V4 (for 32/64-bit Windows 7 Professional, Ultimate) 6GK1 704-1VW04-0AA0
13 180 cable outlet, for network components and CPs/CPUs with Industrial Ethernet interface
1 pack = 1 unit A
1 pack = 10 unit B
1 pack = 50 unit B
14
15
Accessories / SCALANCE M
Router for Mobile Networks SCALANCE M874-2/SCALANCE M874-3
Control and monitoring of

Sewage treatment plants, water treatment
Oil and gas supplies 1
District heating networks
Power distribution
Pumping stations 2
Trafc systems
Buildings
Wind generators and photovoltaic plants
Linking of mobile stations, with central monitoring and control
3
Function
4
Interfaces
Fig. 13/97 SCALANCE M874-2/SCALANCE M874-3 1 digital input and 1 digital output for signaling errors or
failure
Overview
Rugged plastic housing for DIN rail mounting 5
2 Ethernet ports for Industrial Ethernet
EDGE/HSPA+ router for wireless IP communication of Industrial Diagnostics LEDs for modem status, eld strength, connection
Ethernet-based automation systems via mobile wireless
networks
checks, VPN status and DI/DO channels
Connection to the 24 V DC power supply
6
Integrated security functions with rewall
1 x SMA connector for 2G/3G antenna
Both VPN server and VPN client
Numerous tunnel protocols available: IPsec, OpenVPN Supported mobile wireless standards
7
User-specic login M874-2: 2G (GPRS, EDGE)
M874-3: 2G (GPRS, EDGE) and 3G (UMTS, HSPA+)
Benets Protocols
DNS, DynDNS, no-ip
8
Monitoring and controlling wirelessly connected telecontrol
substations with low investment and operating costs Management
Reduction in traveling costs and telephone charges due to
remote programming and diagnostics by means of mobile
Web interface for conguration and management
CLI for conguration and management
9
radio networks
SNMP and MIBs, TRAPS are supported
User-friendly diagnostics by means of terminal clients and
short download times due to the higher speed with HSPA+
High security thanks to IPSec-based VPN functionality and
Security and routing
Secure data transfer with encryption and identication
10
rewall (authentication) of the communication participants thanks
Savings in conguring time thanks to the SCALANCE S Security to the use of VPN (IPsec, OpenVPN). Multiple VPN tunnels
Module through tailored VPN conguration
Can be used worldwide thanks to GSM quad band technology
possible at the same time.
Login and rewall function for specic assignment and check-
11
and UMTS penta band technology (observe national regulations!) ing of access rights
Routing and port forwarding with NAT, NAPT and 1:1 NAT is
Application
supported 12
Diagnostics and logging
The SCALANCE M874 devices are universal. Due to their design
and electrical characteristics, the routers are particularly suit- SysLog is supported
able for use in industrial applications. Expanded event management with alarms via e-mail, SMS, DO 13
Remote programming and maintenance worldwide by means Log table
of mobile radio networks
Energy-saving concepts for plants, e.g. through status-
dependent speed control of pumps in remote stations Network Time Protocol (NTP) is supported 14
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) is supported
15
Accessories / SCALANCE M
SCALANCE M874-2/SCALANCE M874-3
6
Fig. 13/98 Transparent transport of telecontrol protocols, e.g. IEC 60870-5-104 in the Energy Automation environment
7
More information
8 Visit us at our SIMATIC NET website:
www.siemens.com/automation/simatic-net
There you will nd information on products and solutions, cur-
9 rent information on SIMATIC NET as well as events and specialist
publications.
At www.siemens.com/automation/net/catalog, you have direct
10 access to descriptions of the SIMATIC NET products.

12 SCALANCE M874-2 6GK58742AA002AA2
SCALANCE M874-3 6GK58743AA002AA2
1 pack = 1 unit A
1 pack = 10 unit B
14 1 pack = 50 unit B
15
Accessories / RUGGEDCOM
RUGGEDCOM RS900 9-Port Managed Ethernet Switch with Fiber Optical Uplinks
RS900
Managed Ethernet switch with ber uplinks
9 ports: 6 10/100BaseTX + optional 3 100BaseFX or 1
3 10/100BaseTX
RS9xxG
Managed Ethernet switch 2
8 Ports: 6 10/100/1000BaseTX + optional 2 1000BaseX
(gigabit) or 10 Ports: 8 10/100BaseTX + 2 1000BaseX (gigabit)
Function
3
Ethernet Ports
Up to 9 Ports: 6 Base 10/100BaseTX ports with option for 3
additional ber or copper ports 4
Industry-standard ber optical connectors: LC, SC, ST, MTRJ
Fig. 13/99 RUGGEDCOM RS900 Multi-mode and single-mode optical transceivers
Overview
Long haul optics allow distances up to 90 km
5
Cyber Security Features
Multi-level user passwords
The RS900 from the RUGGEDCOM product line is a 9-port
industrially hardened, fully managed Ethernet switch specically
designed to operate reliably in electrically harsh and climatically
SSH/SSL (128-bit encryption)
Enable/disable ports, MAC-based port security
6
demanding environments. The RS900 provides a high level of Port-based network access control (802.1x)
immunity to electromagnetic interference and heavy electrical
VLAN (802.1Q) to segregate and secure network trafc
surges typical of environments found in substation and distribu-
tion automation, and also on plant oors or in curb side trafc RADIUS centralized password management 7
control cabinets. An operating temperature range of -40 to +85 C SNMPv3 authentication and 56-bit encryption
(-40 to +185 F) coupled with hazardous location certication
(Class 1 Division 2) allows the RS900 to be placed in almost any RuggedRated for Reliability in Harsh Environments
location. The RS900 is packaged in a compact, galvanized steel Immunity to EMI and heavy electrical surges 8
enclosure that allows either DIN or panel mounting for efcient Meets IEEE 1613 class 1 (electric utility substations)
use of cabinet space. The RS900 provides an integrated power
supply with a wide range of voltages (88-300 V DC or 85-264 V Exceeds IEC 61850-3 (electric utility substations)
AC) for worldwide operability or dual-redundant, reversible polar-
ity, 24 V DC and 48 V DC power supply inputs for high-availability
Exceeds IEC 61800-3
Exceeds IEC 61000-6-2
9
applications requiring dual or backup power inputs. The RS900s
Hazardous Location Certication: Class 1 Division 2
superior ruggedized design coupled with the embedded Rugged
-40 C to +85 C operating temperature (no fans)
Operating System (ROS) provides improved system reliability
and advanced networking features making it ideally suited for Conformal coated printed circuit boards (optional) 10
creating Ethernet networks for mission-critical, real-time control
applications. The versatility and wide selection of ber optics Rugged Operating System (ROS) Features
allow the RS900 to be used in a variety of applications. The Simple plug and play operation automatic learning,
RS900 provides up to three 100-Mbps ber optical Ethernet ports negotiation, and crossover detection 11
for creating a ber optical backbone with high noise immunity MSTP 802.1Q-2005 (formerly 802.1s)
and long haul connectivity. All RUGGEDCOM products are backed
by a ve-year warranty and unsurpassed technical support. RSTP (802.1w) and Enhanced Rapid Spanning Tree (eRSTP)
Function overview of the RS9xx product family

network fault recovery (< 5 ms)
Quality of Service (802.1p) for real-time trafc
12
VLAN (802.1Q) with double tagging and GVRP support
The RS900 is part of a product family of small form factor, man-
Link aggregation (802.3ad)
aged Ethernet switches feature optional DIN rail mounting and
single-mode ber, allowing for long-range links. The RS9xx series IGMP Snooping for multicast ltering 13
also provides built in security features to ensure trafc segrega- Port conguration, status, statistics, mirroring, security
tion between multiple applications. These devices are the perfect Industrial automation features (e.g. Modbus)
choice for creating an Ethernet network for mission-critical,
real-time control applications where space is limited. 14
15
RUGGEDCOM RS900 9-Port Managed Ethernet Switch with Fiber Optical Uplinks
Management Tools
Web-based, Telnet, CLI management interfaces
1 SNMP v1/v2/v3 (56-bit encryption)
Energy Management: Smart Grid
Meters
Remote Monitoring (RMON)

HMI
Rich set of diagnostics with logging and alarms PLC Modem
2 Universal Power Supply Options

RTU
IED
Fully integrated power supply

Universal high-voltage range: 88-300 V DC or 85-264 V AC Multiple
Distributed Power Generation
3 Dual low-voltage DC inputs: 24 V DC (10-36 V DC) or 48 V DC

(36-72 V DC)
Gigabit Fiber
Optical Rings
Solar Controller
Terminal blocks for reliable maintenance-free connections Solar Controller
CSA/UL 60950 safety approved to +85 C

4 Internet and Telephony
Internet Access VoIP Phone
5
PLC Modem PLC Modem
6 Fig. 13/100 The architecture illustrates the Ethernet backbone

network interconnecting distribution substations
via ber optic links and the connection of multiple
innovative applications to the common multi-purpose
7 communications network.
8
Warranty
5 years applicable to design or manufacturing related product defects.
9 Information and order data

www.siemens.com/ruggedcom
http://www.siemens.com/ruggedcom-selector

RS900 6GK6090-...
IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 6GK1901-1BB10-2A 0
1 pack = 1 unit A
12 1 pack = 10 unit
1 pack = 50 unit
B
B
13
14
15
RUGGEDCOM RSG2100 19" Ethernet Switch

Multi-level user passwords
SSH/SSL (128-bit encryption) 1
Enable/disable ports, MAC-based port security
Port-based network access control (802.1X)
VLAN (802.1Q) to segregate and secure network trafc 2
RADIUS centralized password management
SNMPv3 authentication and 56-bit encryption
RuggedRated for Reliability in Harsh Environments 3

Immunity to EMI and heavy electrical surges
Meets IEEE 1613 class 1 (electric utility substations)
Exceeds IEC 61850-3 (electric utility substations)
Exceeds IEC 61800-3
4
Exceeds IEC 61000-6-2
Fig. 13/101 RUGGEDCOM RSG2100
Hazardous Location Certication: Class 1 Division 2
Overview
-40 C to +85 C operating temperature (no fans) 5
Conformal coated printed circuit boards (optional)
The RUGGEDCOM RSG2100 is an industrially hardened, fully Rugged Operating System (ROS) Features
managed, modular Ethernet switch, specically designed to oper-
ate reliably in electrically harsh and climatically demanding utility
Simple plug and play operation automatic learning, 6
negotiation, and crossover detection
substation and industrial environments. The RSG2100s superior
RuggedRated hardware design coupled with the embedded MSTP 802.1Q-2005 (formerly 802.1s)
Rugged Operating System (ROS) provides improved system
reliability and advanced cyber security and networking features
RSTP (802.1W) and Enhanced Rapid Spanning Tree (eRSTP)
network fault recovery (< 5 ms) 7
making it ideally suited for creating secure Ethernet networks for Quality of Service (802.1P) for real-time trafc
mission-critical, real-time control applications. The RSG2100s
modular exibility offers 10BaseFL/100BaseFX/1000BaseX ber
and 10/100/1000BaseTX and micro-D copper port combinations. Link aggregation (802.3ad) 8
Optional front or rear mount connectors make the RSG2100 IGMP Snooping for multicast ltering
highly versatile for any application and can support multiple ber Port Rate Limiting and Broadcast Storm Limiting
connectors (ST, MTRJ, LC, SC) without loss of port density. The
RSG2100 is packaged in a rugged galvanized steel enclosure with
industrial-grade DIN, panel, or 19" rack-mount mounting options.
Port conguration, status, statistics, mirroring, security
SNTP time synchronization (client and server)
9
Industrial automation features (e.g. Modbus)
Function overview of the RSG2x00 product family:
The RS2100 is part of a product family of 19" managed gigabit
Ethernet switches.
Management Tools
10
Up to 9 ports: 1000BaseX (Gigabit) and/or 10/100/1000BaseTX SNMP v1/v2/v3
or up to 19 ports: 3 1000BaseX (Gigabit) + 16 10/100BaseX or Remote monitoring (RMON)
Up to 32 ports: 24 10/100BaseTX and optional 4 1000BaseX
(Gigabit) or 8 100BaseX
Rich set of diagnostics with logging and alarms 11
Power over Ethernet (PoE) version available Universal Power Supply Options
Fully integrated, redundant (optional) power supplies
Function Universal high voltage range: 88-300 V DC or 85-264 V AC 12
Low voltage ranges: 24 V DC (10-36 V DC), 48 V DC
Ethernet Ports (36-72 V DC)
Up to 3-Gigabit Ethernet ports copper and/or ber
Up to 16-Fast Ethernet ports copper and/or ber
Screw or pluggable terminal blocks
CSA/UL 60950 safety approved to +85 C
13
2 port modules for tremendous exibility
Non-blocking, store and forward switching
Supports many types of ber (multi-mode, single-mode,
bi-directional single strand)
14
Long haul optics allow Gigabit distances up to 70 km
Multiple connector types (ST, MTRJ, LC, SC, RJ45, micro-D)
15
RUGGEDCOM RSG2100 19" Ethernet Switch
5
Fig. 13/102 Simplied diagram of IEC 61850 architecture for high and mid voltage substations with RUGGEDCOM switches enabling
core Ethernet network.
8
Warranty
5 years applicable to design or manufacturing related product defects.
9 Information and order data

www.siemens.com/ruggedcom
http://www.siemens.com/ruggedcom-selector

RSG2100 6GK6021-...
1 pack = 1 unit A
12 1 pack = 10 unit
1 pack = 50 unit
B
B
13
14
15
Managed 28 Gigabit Port Ethernet Rack switch, RUGGEDCOM RSG2488
Benets
Field Replaceable Media Modules 1

Easy remedy for commissioning mistakes
keeps commissioning on schedule
Reduced sparing costs
Reduced system downtime
2
Hot swappable power supplies
Minimizes system downtime for weakest link
Simplies RMA process
3
Reduced sparing costs
Fanless 4
No routine maintenance required
Fig. 13/103 RUGGEDCOM RSG2488 eliminates major point of failure
Overview
High-Density 28 Port Gigabit Design
Reduces required rack space
5
Gives network architects greater exibility
The RUGGEDCOM RSG2488 is the rst utility grade, eld upgrad-
able, non blocking 28 Gigabit port, layer 2 switch ideally suited
for applications within utility substation and distribution; the
Native IEEE 1588v2 (planned in Q3/2013)
Eliminates discrete timing solutions
6
RSG2488 is designed to reduce rack space needs, cut sparing Makes evolution to future applications
costs and minimize time-to-repair while eliminating routine (like 61850 process bus) simple and economic
maintenance, delivering increased network availability and low-
est total cost of ownership. Mature and proven ROS management system
7
The RSG2488 is the latest addition to Siemens extensive portfolio Track record in substation automation
of products for industrial communication. The RSG2488 can Reuse of existing tools, training, support, etc.
operate reliably in electrically harsh and climatically demanding
environments, e.g. in utility substation and distribution but Utility Grade:
8
also in networks for intelligent transportation solutions and IEC 61850-3
infrastructure as well as rail systems along the entire rail line.
IEEE 1613
With an operating temperature range of -40 C to +85 C, a 1U
form factor, extruded all-aluminum enclosure, fanless thermal Application
9
management and optional conformal coating, the RSG2488 can
be placed in almost any location. In meeting all specications of The RUGGEDCOM RSG2488 Industrial Ethernet switch supports
the IEC 61850-3 and IEEE 1613 standards, the RSG2488 satises
even the highest requirements in applications where switching
cost-effective conguration of Ethernet line, ring and star topolo-
gies when high availability for mission-critical applications in 10
transients and extreme EMI conditions are a possibility. harsh environments is required.
The RSG2488 provides a fully modular design with ports that can
be congured as 10/100/1000TX copper, 100FX or 1000SX ber.
Exchange and expansion of the ports can be done quickly and
11
directly on-site. With its modular, vertical loading design and dual
redundant hot swappable power supplies, the RSG2488 provides
users with the exibility and eld maintenance simplicity needed
to efciently implement, maintain and evolve a broadband local 12
area network.
The RSG2488s RuggedRated hardware design and proven
Rugged Operating System (ROS) offer improved system reliability,
advanced cyber security and advanced networking features
13
which make it ideal for creating secure Ethernet networks for
mission-critical applications in harsh environments.
14
15
7
Fig. 13/104 Use-case: high level architecture
8
Function Management Tools System Features
9 ROS 4.0 Product Features SNMP v1/v2/v3
Cyber Security Features Remote monitoring (RMON)
Multi-level user passwords Rich set of diagnostics with logging and alarms
10 SSH/SSL (128-bit encryption) ROS 4.1 Product Features (planned in Q3/2013)
VLAN (802.1Q) to segregate and secure network trafc
RADIUS centralized password management
Enable/Disable Ports
11 SNMPv3 authentication and 56-bit encryption
Mac-Based Port Security
Rugged Operating System Features 802.1x Port-Based Network Access Control
Simple plug and play operation automatic learning,
Rugged Operating System Features
negotiation, and crossover detection
12 MSTP 802.1Q-2005 (formerly 802.1s)
IGMP snooping
Link Aggregation (802.3ad)
RSTP (802.1W) and Enhanced Rapid Spanning Tree
(eRSTP) network fault recovery Static MCAST ltering
13 Quality of Service (802.1P) for real-time trafc

Port Security (802.1X)
Port rate-limiting
Port conguration, status, statistics, mirroring, security IEEE 1588 v2
SNTP time synchronization (client and server) 1-Step
14 2-Step
15

RSG2488
Ethernet switch for setting up electrical and/or optical Industrial Ethernet networks; all ports can
6GK6024-
1
optionally be equipped with optical or electrical 2-port media modules; all ports support Gigabit
Ethernet (non-blocking) eRSTP, RMON, IGMP Snooping/Querier, network management via SNMP and
web server
2 x 10/100/1000 Mbit/s slots for 2-port media modules, electrical or optical 2
6 x 10/100/1000 Mbit/s slots for 4-port media modules, electrical or optical
Order Codes
RSG2488-_ ___ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ ___ 3
M PS1 PS2 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 MOD
M: Mounting Options
DP = DIN and Panel Mount Kit 4
RD = 19" Rack, DIN, and Panel Mount Kit
00 = No Mounting Option
Slots S1 to S6 5
2424 = Empty
24CG01 = 4 x10/100/1000Tx RJ45
24FG01 = 4 x1000SX - MM, 850nm, LC, 500m
24FG02 = 4 x1000LX - SM, 1310nm, SC , 10km
6
24FG03 = 4 x1000LX - SM, 1310nm, LC , 10km
24FG50 = 4 x1000LX SFP - Blank (no optical transceiver)
24FG51 = 4 x1000SX SFP - MM, 850nm, LC, 500m
24FG52 = 4 x1000LX SFP - SM, 1310nm, LC, 10km
7
24FXA01 = 4 x100FX - MM, 1300nm, ST
24FXA02 = 4 x100FX - MM, 1300nm, SC
8
24FXA11 = 4 x100FX - MM, 1300nm, LC
24FXA04 = 4 x100FX - SM, 1310nm, ST, 20km
24FXA05 = 4 x100FX - SM, 1310nm, SC, 20km 9
24PTP1 = Precision Time Protocol (PTP) Source Card: Input
Slots S7 S8
XXXX = Empty 10
22CG01 = 2 x10/100/1000Tx RJ45
22FG50 = 2 x1000LX SFP - Blank (no optical transceiver)
22FG51 = 2 x1000SX SFP - MM, 850nm, LC, 500m
11
MOD: Manufacturing Modication

12
XX = None
C01 = Conformal Coating
IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 6GK1 901-1BB10-2A 0 13

1 pack = 1 unit
1 pack = 10 unit
A 14
B
1 pack = 50 unit B
15
Further Information: www.siemens.com/ruggedcom, http://www.siemens.com/ruggedcom-selector

10
11
12
13
14
15
Accessories / SITOP Power Supply
SITOP Power Supply
Benets
Reliable output voltage due to high-quality power supplies

with exible wide-range input and high overload capability
1
High energy efciency due to high efciency and low standby
losses
Increased availability through optional add-on modules for 2
protection against power supply failure, power failure, or fault-
related overload in the 24 V circuit
Comprehensive support in engineering by selection tool,
CAx data, or product documentation 3
4
Fig. 13/105 SITOP Power Supply
Overview
5
Different SITOP product lines offer reliable power supplies
for almost all line voltages, outputs, and requirements for
regulated 24 V DC and other output voltages 6
Redundancy modules decouple power supply units of the same
type so that a defective power supply unit cannot affect the
intact one
SITOP DC UPS modules with two different types of energy
7
storage expand the range of 24 V power supply units for
uninterruptible DC power supply:
High-capacity and durable capacitors for buffering in the
minute range, also for applications with IP65 degree of
8
protection
Maintenance-free battery modules for continued operation,
even for hours
The selectivity module distributes the 24 V supply among
9
several feeders and monitors them for fault-related overload.
The electronic add-on module detects short-circuits even in
long, high-impedance lines and reliably switches off the load
circuit.
10
11
12
13
14
15
Accessories / SITOP Power Supply
SITOP Power Supply
6
Fig. 13/106 Conguration with SITOP smart (PSU100S) and add-on modules
8 Ordering data
Product line, application Output
9 Power Supply 24 V DC
SITOP compact the slim power supply up
to 100 W for control boxes, single-phase 0.6 A, 1.3 A, 2.5 A, 4.0 A
LOGO!Power at power supply up to
100 W for distribution boards, single-phase 1.3 A, 2.5 A, 4.0 A
10 SITOP smart the high-performance stan-
dard power supply up to 1000 W for 1-phase single-phase: 2.5 A, 5 A, 10 A, 40 A
and 3-phase networks 3-phase: 10 A, 20 A, 40 A
SITOP modular technology power supply
11 up to 1000 W for demanding solutions for
1-, 2- and 3-phase
single-phase: 5 A, 10 A, 20 A, 40 A
3-phase: 20 A, 40 A
Expansion Modules for Power Supply 24 V DC

Redundancy modules
12 SITOP PSE202U
DC UPS SITOP UPS500S with capacitors
10 A, 40 A
(incl. USB interface) 7 A , 15 A, 2.5 kWs 20 kWs

DC UPS with battery modules (optionally
with serial interface or USB) 6 A, 15 A, 40 A, 1.2 Ah 12 Ah
13 Selectivity modules SITOP PSE200U
(optionally with single-channel signaling ) 4 x 0.5 3 A
4 x 3 10 A
14 Further information on the ordering data, technical data, and

power supplies with other output voltages: see Catalog KT10.1
15
Accessories/7XV5662
7XV5662-6AD10 resistance temperature detector (RTD-box) TR1200
Function overview
3-digit temperature display 1

12 inputs for temperature sensors, 1 to 12 sensors can be
connected
Pt 100 thermostats with 2- or 3-conductor technology
1 error relay (potential-free changeover contact) 2
RS485 interface (ZIEHL standard protocol and MODBUS RTU
protocol)
LED signal the measuring channel, error state, relay funtion
3
SIPV6-108.tif
and RS485 activity
Code lock prevents parameter manipulation
TR600 compatible (to replace one TR600 with 6 sensors
connected) 4
Fig. 13/107 7XV5662-6AD10 RTD-box TR1200 Universal power-supply AC/DC 24 to 240 V
Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard rail EN 60715
Description 5
The RTD-box TR1200 can capture up to 12 temperatures with
12 measuring inputs. 2- and 3-conductor Pt 100 sensors are
supported. For the 2-conductor mode, the measured conductor
resistance can be compensated for with a corresponding setting.
6
The measurement of temperatures may be simulated for commis-
sioning purposes.
The output of measured values to the protection device is
compatible with TR600 and implemented with bus cable
7
7XV5103-7AAxx via a RS485 bus.
All settings are done via 3 push buttons on the front of the
device. Entry can be blocked via a code. 8
The TR1200 has a wide-range power supply from DC 24 250V
and AC 115/230 V as well as an alarm relay. Sensor failure or
sensor short-circuit are alarmed and transmitted via protocol to
the SIPROTEC device. 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Application
SIPROTEC relays with RS485 interface e.g. SIPROTEC 4 with
1 Communication via RS485 bus

Operation with
Notebook or PC
7SK80x 7SJ602 7SJ6/7UM6 FO interface
Operation with
Notebook or PC
USB cable
The RTD-box TR1200 is connected via a DIGSI 4 DIGSI cable DIGSI 4
St-A/St-B 7XV5100-4
RS485 interface to one SIPROTEC 4 bay
2 device with thermo function (e.g. 7SJ6,
7UT6, 7UM6) or to the compact protec- Port B System Port C/D Port C/D
tion 7SK80 via a serial RS485-interface 1-6 1-6 1-6 1-6
7-12 7-12 7-12
(Port B).
RTD-Box TR1200
3 The special cable 7XV5103-7AAxx is used

for the connection. In the event of remote
(12 x PT100)
7XV5662-6AD10
FO cable 6XV8100 (62,5/125)
FO RS485-FO
alternative
measuring locations, the connections may converter
SIPV6.094en.eps
RS485 7XV5650
also be done using multi-mode ber-optic
4 conductors and the converter 7XV5650
(see Fig. 13/108).
2 single wires
1 x RS485 cable 7XV5103-7AAxx
Plug (male)
SUB-D conn., 9 pin
res. 120 Ohm
For detailed information please visit

www.siemens.com/siprotec Fig. 13/108 Connection of devices via a serial RS485 bus or FO cable
5
Technical data
6 Rated auxiliary voltage

Auxiliary voltage VS AC/DC 24 240 V, 0/45 65 Hz < 5 VA
Tolerance DC 20.4 297 V, AC 20 264 V
7 Relay output
Number 1 changeover contact (CO)
Switching voltage Max. AC 415 V
Switching current Max. 5 A
8 Switching power Max. 2000 VA (ohmic load)

Max. 120 W at DC 24 V
De-rating factor with cos = 0.7 0.5
UL electrical ratings: AC 250 V, 3 A general use
9 Rated operating current IE AC 15

D300 1 A AC 240 V
IE = 2 A VE = 250 V
DC 13 IE = 2 A VE = 24 V
IE = 0.2 A VE = 125 V
IE = 0.1 A VE = 250 V
10 Recommended fuse
Contact service life, mech.
T 3.5 A (gL)
1 x 107 switching operations
Contact service life, electr. 1 x 105 switching operations at AC 250 V / 5 A
Sensor connection
11 Number 12 Pt 100 according to EN 60751
Measuring cycle/measuring time 0.25 to 3 s (depending on the number of sensors)
Measuring cycle/circuit resistance 0.25 to 30 s (per measuring cycle of sensor)
12 Measuring range
Resolution
-199 to 850 C
1 C
Accuracy 0.5 % of measured value 1 K
Sensor current 0.8 mA
13 Temperature drift
Short circuit
< 0.04 C / K
< 15 Ohm
Interruption > 400
Sensor resistance + circuit resistance Max. 500 Ohm
14
15
RS485 interface
Device address
Baud rate
0 to 96
4800, 9600, 19200 bit/s 1
Parity N, O, E (no, odd, even)
Max. cable length 1000 m at 19200 bit/s
Serial protocol Serial RTD Protocol Ziehl / SIPROTEC
See manual for detailed protocol description 2
Test conditions
Acc. to EN 61010
Rated impulse voltage insulation
Overvoltage category
4000 V
III
3
Pollution rate 2
Rated insulation level Vi 300 V
Duty cycle
Perm. ambient temperature
100 %
- 20 C to + 65 C
4
EN 60068-2-2 dry heat
Electrical isolation Power supply measuring inputs DC 3820 V
No electrical isolation
EMC-tests
RS 485 interface measuring inputs
EN 61326-1
5
EMC test for noise emission EN 61000-4-3
Fast transient disturbances / Burst EN 61000-4-4 4 kV
High-energy surge voltages (SURGE)

Pulse 5/50 ns, f = 5 kHz, t = 15 ms, T = 300 ms
IEC 61000-4-5 1 impulse: 1.2 / 50 s (8/20 s)
6
Electrostatic discharge IEC 61000-4-2 4 contact discharge, 8 kV air discharge
Housing
Housing type V8, distribution panel mounting 7
Size (W H D) 140 x 90 x 58 mm
Depth / Width 55 mm / 8 TE
Per 1 1.5 mm2
Circuit termination single strand
Braided conductor with crimp lug Per 1 1.0 mm2 8
Tightening torque of terminal screw 0.5 Nm (3.6 lb.in)
Protection class of housing/terminals IP30 / IP20
Mounting vertical/horizontal
Afxing
Optional
Snap-on mounting onto standard rail mounting 35 mm acc. to EN 60715 or screw mounting
9
Weight (with 2 additional brackets)
Approx. 370 g
10

Resistance temperature detector (RTD-box) TR1200 7XV5662 - 6AD10
Distributed input-box for 12 RTD-connections Pt100

Rail mounting plastic
12
1 serial interface RS485 for communication with SIPROTEC devices for measurements and fault reports.
Wide-range power supply AC 24 to 240 V/
Note: The device can be operated in a 7XV5662-2AD10 or 7XV5662-5AD10 compatible mode. 13
14
15
10
11
12
13
14
15
Accessories/7XV5662
7XV5662-7AD10 universal relay/RTD-/20 mA-box TR800 Web
Function overview
8 measuring inputs:
Pt 100, Pt 1000 in 2- or 3-conductor technology
1
KTY 83 or KTY 84
Thermocouples type B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T
DC 0 to 10 V, 0/4 to DC 20 mA
Resistance 500 Ohm, resistance 30 kOhm
2
4 relay-outputs (each potential-free changeover contact)
Ethernet interface (http, https, UDP, MODBUS, Bonjour, UpNP,
SNMP) 3
SIPV6-109.eps
RS485 interface (Standard ZIEHL- and MODBUS RTU protocol)
Universal power-supply AC/DC 24 to 240 V
Integrated Web server for configuration, read-out of measured
data, user-management email-alarms, data- and alarm-logging 4
Fig. 13/109 7XV5662-7AD10 universal relay/RTD-box TR800
Time-dependent control (day/night)
Real-time clock with synchronization with time server.
Description 5
The universal relay TR800 Web has 8 measuring/sensor inputs
and is able to capture 8 temperatures via PT100- (Ni100 and
Ni120) elements. The measuring values 1 6 may be transmitted
to SIPROTEC 4 devices with thermo function via protocol.
6
Two universal relays with a total of 12 measuring inputs can be
connected.
Connection is established via a serial RS485 interface (see
Fig. 13/112). The TR800 is protocol compatible with the TR600
7
(7XV5662-3AD10, 7XV5662-5AD10) on the serial RS485
interface, and transmits the 6 temperatures in the same format.
In this mode, the TR800 can replace the TR600. 8
In the case of 7SK80 motor protection, the connection may alter-
natively be made via the Ethernet interface, if the system inter-
face is (pre-)assigned (see Fig. 13/110 + 13/111). The universal
relay is operated and configured via the Ethernet interface with a
Web browser. Three conductor thermo elements are supported.
9
For the dual conductor connection the measured line resistance
can be compensated for by a software setting. Furthermore,
temperatures can be simulated to test the thermo-function in the
SIPROTEC devices.
10
Alternatively to thermo sensors, 8 analog values DC 0/4 20 mA
and DC 0 10 V may be measured. The output can be scaled and
the designation (C, V, A, %) can be adapted in the TR800. The
transmission to the SIPROTEC device however takes place via
11
the RTD protocol in temperature format. 6 of the 8 analog sen-
sor values are available there. With 2 TR800 12 values are avail-
able. For example 5.5 mA is transferred with a temperature value
of 55 in this way and may either be displayed as temperature in 12
the SIPROTEC device or compared with a set limit via a threshold
value. This allows for the processing of analog dimensions in
SIPROTEC devices with thermo function or their transmission to a
substation control unit (e.g. SICAM PAS). In the bay control unit 13
6MD66 V4.8 (available since 05/2009) all 8 measuring inputs are
available.
The TR800 has a wide-range power supply from DC 24 V 250 V
and AC 115/230 V as well as an alarm relay. Sensor failure or 14
sensor short-circuit are alarmed and transmitted via protocol to
the SIPROTEC device.
15
Application
Application SIPROTEC with
1 Communication with one TR800 Web Operation with

Port A interface
7SK80x
via Ethernet interface Notebook or PC
USB cable
If one universal relay TR800 is sufcient DIGSI 4
St-A/St-B
2 for the measured-value capturing, it may

be connected directly to the protection
device with a CAT5 patch cable (e.g. IP 192.168.10.2
Port A
7SK80x/ Port A). The setting of the TR800 Settings:
alternative Patch cable Sensors 1- 6
Web is done prior to connection with the
3 same cable via a PC using a Web browser.
7KE6000-8G IP 192.168.10.190
A TR800 can also be interrogated by two

or more SIPROTEC devices. IP-address and IP 192.168.10.190 Universal relay TR800
the UDP-Port of the TR800 may be set
SIPV6.096en.eps
7XV5662-7AD10
4 in the SIPROTEC device. In this way, one
SIPROTEC device may use temperatures
6 / 8 x PT100
or 10 V
Sensors 1- 6 or 20 mA
1 3 and another device can use the
temperatures 3 6 for processing. Each
5 device, however, reads in all 6 tempera-
ture values (Fig. 13/110).
Fig. 13/110 Connection of one device via Ethernet
Communication with two TR800 Web SIPROTEC with

via Ethernet interface Port A interface
6 If two TR800 are applied on big motors Operation with
Notebook or PC
7SK80x
for the purpose of measured-value RUGGEDCOM

Switch e.g.
capturing, a substation hardened switch RS900
DIGSI 4
USB cable
(e.g. RUGGEDCOM RS900 or Hirschmann
7 RSR20) must be used. The switch, the
St-A/St-B
two TR800 Web relays, the protection IP 192.168.10.2 Port A:

Settings:
device and the operating PC constitute an
Sensors 1-6
autonomous subnet when they are con- IP 192.168.10.190
8 nected via patch cables (1:1). They may
also be part of a larger Ethernet network.
All patch cables 1:1
7KE6000-8G
Sensors 7-12
IP 192.168.10.191
DIGSI 4 and Web browser can run in paral- IP 192.168.10.190 IP 192.168.10.191 2 x Universal relay TR800
SIPV6.097en.eps
7XV5662-7AD10
lel on the operating PC. Accordingly, one
9 of the two TR800 Web and the protection
6/8 x PT100
or 10 V
device can be applied and read out during Sensors 1- 6 Sensors 1- 6 (7-12) or 20 mA
normal operation. (Fig. 13/111).
Fig. 13/111 Connection of two devices via Ethernet
10 Communication via RS485 bus
One or two TR800 may be connected
via a RS485 interface to a SIPROTEC 4 SIPROTEC relays with RS485 interface e.g. SIPROTEC 4 with
7SK80x 7SJ602 7SJ6/7UM6 FO interface
device with thermo function (7SJ6, 7UT6, Operation with Operation with
11 7UM6), or the compact device 7SK80. Notebook or PC
USB cable DIGSI cable
Notebook or PC
For connection purposes the special DIGSI 4

St-A/St-B
DIGSI 4
7XV5100-4
cables 7XV5103-7AAxx are used. In
the case of remote measuring points a
12 connection can also be established via a
multi-mode FO cable and the converter
Port B
1-6
System
1-6
Port C/D
1-6
Port C/D
1-6
7-12 7-12 7-12
7XV5650. 1 x RS485 cable
7XV5103-7AAxx FO cable 6XV8100 (62,5/125)
For different applications, 3 modes of
13 operation are available. All three modes 2 single wires 2 single wires
FO RS485-FO
converter
are compatible with thermo box TR600
SIPV6.098en.eps
RS485 7XV5650
with 6 measuring inputs. The mode of
Universal relay TR800 Web Universal relay TR800 Web Plug (male)
operation is set via the RS485 address of
14 the TR800 Web.
7XV5662-7AD10
(6/8 x PT100 or 20 mA)
7XV5662-7AD10
(6/8 x PT100 or 20 mA)
SUB-D conn., 9 pin
res. 120 Ohm
For detailed information please visit

www.siemens.com/siprotec Fig. 13/112 Connection via serial RS485 bus or FO cable
15
Technical data

Auxiliary voltage VS
Tolerance
AC/DC 24 to 240 V, 0/45 to 120 Hz < 4 W < 8 VA
DC 20.4 to 297 V, AC 20 to 264 V 1
Insulation AC 2000 V
Relay output
Number
Switching voltage
4 x 1 changeover contact (CO)
Max. AC 415 V
2
Switching current Max. 5 A
Switching power Max. 2000 VA (ohmic load)
De-rating factor with cos = 0.7

0.5
3
UL electrical ratings AC 250 V, 3 A general use
AC 240 V hp. 2.9 FLA
C 300
D 300 1 A AC 240 V
4
Rated operating current IE AC 15 IE = 3 A VE = 250 V
DC 13 IE = 2 A VE = 24 V
IE = 0.2 A
IE = 0.1 A
VE = 125 V
VE = 250 V 5
Recommended fuse T 3.5 A (gL)
Contact service life, mech. 1 x 107 switching operations
Contact service life, electr.
Real-time clock
1 x 105 switching operations at AC 250 V / 6 A
6
Buffered for 7 days.
Continuous synchronization via SNTP on the Ethernet interface is possible
Test conditions 7
Acc. to EN 61010-1
Rated impulse voltage insulation 4000 V
Pollution rate 2
Rated insulation level Vi 300 V 8
Duty cycle 100 %
Perm. ambient temperature 20 Cto + 65 C
EN 60068-2-1 dry heat
Seismic safety EN 60068-2-6 2 to 25 Hz 1.6mm
25 to 150 Hz 5 g
9
Electrical isolation Ethernet measuring input min. DC 500 V
No electrical isolation RS 485 interface measuring inputs
EMC tests EN 61326-1 10
EMC test for noise emission EN 61000-4-3
Fast transient disturbances / Burst EN 61000-4-4 4 kV
Pulse 5/50 ns, f = 5 kHz, t = 15 ms, T = 300 ms
High-energy surge voltages (SURGE) IEC 61000-4-5 1 impulse: 1.2 / 50 s (8 /20 s) 11
Electrostatic discharge IEC 61000-4-2 4 contact discharge, 8 kV air discharge
Ethernet connection 10 /100 MBit Auto-MDIX (no cross-over cable required)
Sensor connection
Measuring cycle/measuring time <3s
12
(for 8 measured values)
Pt100, Pt1000 according to EN 60751:
Measured range
C
Short circuit
Ohm
Interruption
Ohm
Sensor resistance + circuit resistance
Ohm
13
Sensor min. max. < > > max.
Pt 100 -199 860 15 400 500
Pt 1000 -199 860 150 4000 4100 14
When connecting Ni100 or Ni120 sensors, the conversion is done in the SIPROTEC device.
The TR800 is congured with Pt100 sensors.
15
Sensor connection (continued)
1 Accuracy
Sensor current
0.5 % of measured value 0.5 K
0.6 mA
Temperature drift < 0.04 C / K
Voltage/current input
2 Input resistance Maximum input signal Accuracy of nal value

0 10 V 12 k 27 V 0,1 %
0/4 20 mA 18 100 mA 0.5 %
3 Temperature drift
Resistance measurement
< 0.02 % / K
Accuracy 0.0 ... 500.0 0.2 % of measured value 0.5

Accuracy 0 ... 30.00 k 0.5 % of measured value 2
4 Sensor current 0.6 mA
Housing
Housing type V8, distribution panel mounting
5 Size (W H D)
Depth / Width
140 90 58 mm
55 mm / 8 TE
Circuit termination single strand Per 1 x 1.5 mm2
Braided conductor with crimp lug Per 1 x 1.0 mm2
6 Tightening torque of terminal screw

Degree of protection of housing/terminals
0.5 Nm (3.6 lb.in)
IP30 / IP20
Mounting vertical/horizontal Optional
Afxing Snap-on mounting onto standard rail mounting 35 mm acc. to EN 60715 or screw mounting
7 Weight
(with 2 additional brackets)
Approx. 370 g
9 Universal relay/RTD-box TR800
Distributed input-box for 6/8 RTD-connections (RTD-box) or 6/8 20 mA, or 0 10 V

7XV5662 - 7AD10

10 1 serial interface RS485 for communication of measurements
1 RJ45 interface for parameter setting via Web browser and communication of measurements
Wide-range power supply AC/DC 24 to 240 V
Note: The device can be operated in a 7XV5662-2AD10 or 7XV5662-5AD10 compatible mode.
11
12
13
14
15
7XV5662-8AD10 resistance temperature detector (RTD-box) TR1200 IP (Ethernet)
Function overview
3-digit digital display for the temperature of up to max.

12 measuring points
1
12 sensor inputs; 1 to 12 sensors can be connected
PT100 in 2- or 3-conductor technology, when connecting
Ni100 or Ni120, conversion to the correct temperature in 2
the evaluation unit is required, SIPROTEC devices (e.g. 7SK80)
support this function. The EN100 module in the SIPROTEC 4
units does not support the TR1200 IP
1 alarm relay (1 changeover contact) 3
SIPV6-110.tif
Electric 10 MBit/s Ethernet interface (RTD IP protocol from
ZIEHL, or MODBUS IP protocol)
Read-out display, conguration, simulation and rmware
update via Web browser 4
Fig. 13/113 7XV5662-8AD10 RTD-box TR1200 IP (Ethernet) Tested with Mozilla Firefox 3.5 and
Microsoft Internet Explorer 8.0
Description
LEDs for measurement allocation, error, relay status and
Ethernet interface
5
The RTD-box TR1200 IP has 12 sensor inputs which allow mea- Code protection against manipulation of the setpoint values
surement of up to 12 temperatures by Pt100 sensors. Wide-range power supply AC/DC 24 to 240 V
Three conductor sensors are supported. For two conductor Distributor housing for panel mounting 8 TE, front-to-back 6
operation compensation of the measured conductor resistance is size 55 mm
possible via a corresponding setting. Mounting on 35 mm DIN EN 60715 standard rail.
All settings on the TR1200 IP can be done through 3 keys on the
front of the device or in a Web browser (e.g. Internet Explorer).
7
If Ni100 or Ni120 sensors are applied, the measured values have
to be adapted in the protection device. The 7SK80 supports this
with its integrated RTD functionality. 8
The measured-value output to the protection device is done via
Ethernet network with RJ45 connectors.
Note: The SIPROTEC 4 system interface with EN100 module does
not support the temperature detection of the RTD-box TR1200 IP.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Application
7SK80x
Operation with
1 Measurerment of up to 12 measured
Notebook or PC Settings Group A:
Sensors 1-6
IP 192.168.10.190
DIGSI 4
values with a TR1200 IP USB cable
Port 5000
Sensors 7-12
IP 192.168.10.190
To get up to 12 measured values one Port 5001
2 RTD-box TR1200 IP is connected via a

double screened CAT5 patch cable (1:1
IP 192.168.10.2
Port A
IP 192.168.10.200
or crossed-over) directly to the protection alternative Patch cable 1:1

7KE6000-8G
device (e.g. 7SK80x/Port A).
3 The protection device is set using DIGSI 4

progam running on a Notebook via the
IP 192.168.10.190
Port 5000
SIPV6.095en.eps
USB-front interface. RTD box TR1200 IP
7XV5662-8AD10
The RTD-box TR1200 IP is set either 12 x PT100
4 through the front keys or by using a Sensors 1- 12
Web browser running on the Notebook via

the Ethernet interface. For this purpose Fig. 13/114 Connection of a device via Ethernet
the patch cable must be unplugged from
5 the protection device and then re-plugged
into the Notebook.
Tip: If during commissioning a common
switch is temporarily inserted using three
6 patch cables, the protection device can
be set from a PC using DIGSI 4 in parallel
with the TR1200 IP.
For detailed information please visit:
7 www.siemens.com/siprotec
Technical data
8
Control voltage VS AC/DC 24 240 V, 0/45 65 Hz < 5 VA
9 Relay output
DC 20.4 297 V, AC 20 264 V
Number 1 changeover contact (CO)

Switching voltage Max. AC 415 V
10 Switching current
Breaking capacity
Max. 5 A
Max. 2000 VA (resistive load)
Reduction factor at cos = 0.7 0.5
11 UL electrical ratings: AC 250 V, 3 A general use

C 300
D300 1 A AC 240 V
12 Rated operating current IE AC 15 IE = 1 A
IE = 2 A
VE = 400 V
VE = 250 V
DC 13 IE = 2 A VE = 24 V
IE = 0.2 A VE = 125 V
IE = 0.1 A VE = 250 V
13 Recommended series fuse T 3.5 A (gL)
Contact service life, mech. 1 x 107 switching operations
Contact service life, electr. 1 x 105 switching operations at AC 250 V / 5 A
2 x 105 switching operations at AC 250 V / 3 A
14 6 x 105 switching operations at AC 250 V / 1 A
15
Technical data
Temperature measurement
Measurement time sensor
Measurement time sensor
0.25 to 3 s (dependent on the number of sensors)
0.25 to 30 s (for measurement cycle of one sensor) 1
Measurement range 199 C to 850 C
Resolution 1 C
Sensor connection
12 x PT100 acc. to EN 60751, connection of Ni100 and Ni120 sensors possible.
2
Conversion of the measured values must be performed in the evaluation unit.
Measured range Short circuit Interruption Sensor resistance + circuit resistance

C Ohm Ohm Ohm 3
Sensor min. max. < > > max.
Pt 100 -199 860 15 400 500
Tolerance
Sensor current
0.5 % of measurement 1 K
0.8 mA 4
Temperature drift < 0.04 C/K
Ethernet interface
Transmission speed
IP adress
10 MBit/s
Standard: 192.182.1.100, adjustable
5
Subnetwork mask Standard: 255.255.255.0, adjustable
UDP port Standard: 5000 (5001), adjustable
Max. cable length 20 m when using CAT 5 patch cable 6
Max. response time RTD/MODBUS < 700 s
Test conditions
Acc. to
Rated impulse withstand voltage
EN 61010
4000 V 7
Surge category III
Pollution level 2
Rated insulation voltage Vi
Operating time
300 V
100 %
8
Permissible ambient temperature 20 Cto + 65 C
during operation EN 60068-2-2 dry heat
EMC noise immunity
EMC noise emission
EN 61000-6-2
EN 61000-6-4
9
Galvanic insulation
Control voltage measurement input DC 3820 V
Ethernet control voltage
measurement input DC 500 V 10
Housing
Housing type V8, distribution panel mounting
Dimensions (W H D)
Front-to-back size / Width 55 mm / 8 TE
140 x 90 x 58 mm
11
Wiring connection single strand Each 1 x 1.5 mm2
Finely stranded with wire end ferrule Each 1 x 1.0 mm2
Starting torque of the terminal screw
Protection class housing/terminals
0.5 Nm (3.6 lb.in)
IP30 / IP20
12
Mounting position Arbitrary
Mounting Snap-on mounting onto standard rail 35 mm acc. to EN 60715 or screw mounting (with 2 additional bars)
Weight Approx. 350 g 13
14
15
1 Resistance temperature detector (RTD-box) TR1200 IP (Ethernet)
Distributed input-box for 12 RTD-connections Pt100

7XV5662 - 8AD10

2 1 Ethernet interface for communication with SIPROTEC devices for measurement and fault reports.
Wide-range power supply AC/DC 24 to 240 V
10
11
12
13
14
15
Accessories / 7XV75
7XV75 test switch
Function overview
The following versions are available in a ush-mounting 1

housing:
For feeder protection without an open star point
For feeder protection without an open star point and with
additional contacts
2
For feeder protection without an open star point for two
CT cores or separate ground-fault CT
For feeder protection with an open star point 3
LSP2401-afp.tif
For feeder protection with an open star point and
independently switchable trip and CT circuits
For a 3-winding transformer differential protection
For feeder protection without an open star point with 4
4th CT and 4th VT input (three-stage test switch)
5
Fig. 13/115 7XV75 test switch
Description
6
The 7XV75 test switch serves for testing protection relays
including CT circuits and command contacts. With the help of
the switches located on the front side, the current and voltage
7
inputs as well as the circuits of the protection relay to be tested
are interrupted and applied to the front side. Via this plug-in
connector, currents and voltages can be fed by an injection test
set and the different commands and indications can be tested. 8
10
11
12
13
14
15
Accessories / 7XV75
7XV75 test switch
Technical data
1 Test switch
Rated operating voltage Vn AC 400 V
Rated operating current In 6A
2 Test current capacity for 1 s

for 10 s
150 A
60 A
Unit design
Metal housing 7XP20
3 Dimension of 19" wide

5 7XV75 test switch 7XV750 - CA00
Without open star point for feeder protection 0

With open star point for feeder protection 1
6 For 3-winding transformer differential protection
Without open star point for two CT cores or separate ground-fault CT
2
3
Without open star point for feeder protection with 4th CT and 4th VT input (three-stage test switch) 6
Without open star point for feeder protection and with additional contacts 7
7 With open star point and independently switchable trip and CT circuits for feeder protection 8
Front test plugconnection

With 16-pin Harting connector 0
8 With 16 banana connectors (not available for 7XV7506) 1
Connecting cable 7XV6201 for 7XV75 test switch with 2 meter cable
with 16-pin Harting connector and 17 isolated
banana connectors 4 mm with cable marks 7XV6201-5
9 with 16-pin Harting connector and 17 cable end sleeves with cable marks 7XV6201-6
10
11
12
13
14
15
Accessories / 7SC80
SNTP Master/Server 7SC80
Stainless steel housing

Fullls EMC requirements in substations
Extended temperature range -50 C - +85 C 1
Robust against heavy GOOSE load in IEC 61850 networks
Can be used as central data concentrator, e.g. recording of
GOOSE messages
Supports IEC 61850 Edition1 and Edition 2
2
Integration in IEC 61850 substation controller
(with max. 6 Clients)
Integration in DIGSI 4 IEC 61850 system congurator 3
Additional deployment for automation (CFC)
Remote Access
Optimized for use together with SIPROTEC devices and
EA-Products
4
Hardware Interfaces
12 Binary inputs 5
Fig. 13/116 SNTP Master/Server 7SC80
8 and 4 inputs with common ground
8 Binary outputs
Description
All relays freely congurable 6
1 Live contact
The hardware variant of the 7SC80 integrates an SNTP server
Changeover
and a GPS module.
Power supply/Battery voltage
7
With it the rst substation hardened SNTP server with GPS
receiver is available for precise time synchronization for all Auxiliary voltage DC 24/48 V, DC 60250 V and
SIPROTEC 4/5 protective relays and all other SNTP-capable

Catalog SIP E7 Complete

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Catalog SIP E7 Complete

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

www.siemens.

SIPROTEC 4, SIPROTEC easy,

Answers for infrastructure and cities.

Overview of Siemens protection catalogs

SIPROTEC 4, SIPROTEC Series 600, SIPROTEC easy, SIPROTEC Compact catalog:

SIPROTEC 4, 1. Product Selection

Catalog SIP Edition No. 7 4/1 to 4/12 44

Siemens SIP Edition No. 7 1

Type Description Page

DIGSI 4 Operating software for SIPROTEC devices 3/3

SIGRA 4 Evaluation software for fault records 3/9

3RV16 Voltage transformer mini circuit-breaker 13/3

6MD61 IO-box 12/3

6MD63 Bay control unit 12/11

6MD66 High-voltage bay control unit 12/13

7PA22/23 Auxiliary relay 13/11

7PA26/27/30 Auxiliary relay 13/15

7RW600 Voltage, frequency and overexcitation relay 11/71

7SA522 Distance protection relay for transmission lines 6/45

7SA6 Distance protection relay for all voltage levels 6/3

7SC80 SNTP-Master/Server with GPS module 13/159

7SD52/53 Multi-end differential and distance protection in one relay 7/43

7SD60 Pilot-wire current differential protection relay 7/3

7SD61 Differential protection relay for 2 line ends 7/17

7SJ45 easy Overcurrent protection relay powered by CT 5/3

7SJ46 easy Overcurrent protection relay 5/11

7SJ600 Overcurrent, motor and overload protection relay 5/19

7SJ602 Overcurrent, motor and overload protection relay 5/31

7SJ61 Multifunction protection relay 5/55

7SJ62 Multifunction protection relay 5/83

7SJ63 Multifunction protection relay 5/121

7SJ64 Multifunction protection relay with synchronization 5/161

7SN60 Transient earth-fault protection relay 10/31

7SS52 Distributed busbar and breaker failure protection 9/19

7SS60 Centralized busbar protection 9/3

7SV600 Numerical circuit-breaker failure protection relay 10/21

7TS16 Annunciation relay 13/21

7UM61 Multifunction generator and motor protection relay 11/3

7UM62 Multifunction generator, motor and transformer protection relay 11/33

7UW50 Tripping matrix 11/69

7VE6 Multifunction paralleling device 11/81

7VK61 Breaker management relay 10/3

7VU683 High Speed Busbar Transfer 11/103

7XR95 Isolating transformer 13/7

7XV5101 RS232 FO connector modules 13/43

2 Siemens SIP Edition No. 7

Type Description Page

7XV5103 RS485 Bus system 13/45 1

7XV5105 Bus cables for time synchronization for 7SD5 13/163

7XV5450 Mini star-coupler 13/53 2

Two-channel serial optical repeater for duplex-multi-mode FO cables

7XV5650/5651 RS485 FO converter 13/73 4

7XV5653 Two-channel binary transducer 13/81

7XV5654 GPS/DCF77 Time synchronization unit 13/165 5

Communication converter for X.21/RS422 and G.703.1

7XV5662 Two-channel serial communication converter 13/101 7

7XV5662 Universal relay, RTD-/20 mA-Box 13/149

7XV5664 GPS/DCF77 Time signal receiver 13/165 8

7XV5710 USB RS485 converter cable 13/109 10

7XV5850/51 Ethernet modems for ofce applications 13/121

7XV75 Test switch 13/157 11

SCALANCE X204RNA PRP

Softnet-IE RNA Software for PRP networks 13/129 13

RUGGEDCOM RSG2100 19" Ethernet-Switch 13/137